ort Ν ν . 


, ae 5, δι. ἐς ἣν ἵν ς΄ 4»... 
D>. i Ὁ δι Bs. ᾿ τ πος = T=. E>, Be Re, he, we Seer Jeet 
2-8. F_. 2S Hi Ai. Ἢ Me ek ΧΣ 

Oe τὰν ae 


ee, αν ἢ 
ΡΥ. ἊΝ 


te ee ΤΡ ΟἹ oP 5s es 
κ- Υ...«..αὦὉ. ὅὕτὦ σ΄ οἱ ον, -ς, ES, α΄. «᾿ 
=F Ξ « . 


y - ὅδε φιφι, ΦἹ 


ν᾿ 4. 
εἰ... 56. 


τον 


“ἀν ἡ ee ck 
κ᾿. 5 ὧπ Φ,. “ἡ .4Φ 
τ΄ τὸ “τ me κα we 


a 


a a δὰ. «ἢ 
i ee. 
“- ee 


eer 
ες σῷ 


pn a . .».. ὡς ee 


ω “Ἢ " ν ἘΞ Ὁ a Ὁ τον Ὡς σαὶ ἀν ἡ: 
᾿ Ν = we Be ee ee oe ad ᾽ “ ae a? : Υ σε ne PR ee te Th eRe: ny 2 
ΘΝ» ee ae ste, See ΜΡ. ὧν ee He Ph, δὶ BF Ne ee ne a ρας, oe ey, am, , 
POOL ahlte ina SLAB ον κοι, δι δος i oe ee ie eee one το : . Bh oak ai 
ν᾽ ἘΠ > nae " “΄ ΄ + , - . ws + \ - . ® , 48 
Η mes 5: PO ΩΝ αν ὦ Δ ἡ Eek mi Rk 2 Pal κῶς φὲ ΣΝ 
“- mr “-ς ~ = en en » ew - - ne ΄ - - +e te : 


tne, Pane ρος, ἄξια ore OTE 


Ὄ ΜΠ ha 8 Ρ γε ἐν ὠνῳφ δῶ. " 


do 


ae veciies BA SG CW NG oi 


OF THE 


UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 


GIFT OF 

| ef, Mb. Tébagg, 
Received ______.. CHMarese- 33 3- 

Accessions Nox3 © ar. $4 Shelf No. 


30 


Pe C G49 


Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2007 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/grammarofgreeklaOOcrosrich 


MOE, Gil Bl eee. 
πὸ « ae ’ ὦ 
Be Ν τ ae δ» δ Pe 


GRAMMAR 


OF THE 


GREEK LANGUAGE 


BY 


ALPHEUS CROSBY, 


PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE LY 
DARTMOUTH COLLEGE. 


FERTILE ET ᾽ν 
= - —s να ΩΝ 


an L ἢ Ἢ ΩΝ 
erring Re 


THIRTY-SIXTH EDITION. 


BOSTON: 
CROSBY AND NICHOLS, 


117 WASHINGTON STREET. 


1864. 


“The Layeuacr or THE GREEKS was truly like themselves, it Δ η5 
conformable to their transcendent and universal Genius. * * * * Tue 
Greex Toneue, from its propriety and universality, is made for all 
that is great, and all that is beautiful, in every Subject, and under every 
Form of writing.’ — Harris’s Hermes, Bk. ΠῚ. Ch. 5. 


“ Greek, — the shrine of the genius of the old world; as universat 
as our race, as individual as ourselves; of infinite flexibility, of inde- 
fatigable strength, with the complication and the distinctness of nature 
herself; to which nothing was vulgar, from which nothing was exclud- 
ed; speaking to the ear like Italian, speaking to the mind like English ; 
with words like pictures, with words like the gossamer film of the sum- 
mer; at once the variety and picturesqueness of Homer, the gloom and 
the intensity of A’schylus; not compressed to the closest by Thucydi- 
des, not fathomed to the bottom by Plato, not sounding with all its thun- 
ders, nor lit up with all its ardors even under the Promethean toouh of 
Demosthenes ! "ἢ -- Coleridge’s Study of the Greek Classic Poets, Geu. 


Introd. 5077 


Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by 
ALpHevus Crossy, 
n the Clerk’s oifice of the istrict Court of the District of New Hampsiure 


IM A 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 


Tue following pages are the result of an attempt to supply what 
was believed to be a desideratum in the list of Greek text-books ; viz. 
a grammar which should be portable and simple enough to be put into 
the hands of the beginner, and which should yet be sufficiently scien- 
tific and complete to accompany him through his whole course. The 
volume from which the elements of a language are first learned be- 
comes to the student a species of mnemonic tables, and cannot be 
changed in the course of his study without a material derangement 
of those associations upon which memory essentially depends. The 
familiar remark, ‘‘ It must be remembered that, if the grammar be the 
first book put into the learner’s hands, it should also be the last to 
leave them,” though applying most happily to grammatical study in 
general, was made by its accomplished author with particular refer- 
ence to the manual used by the student. 

In the preparation of this work, the routine of daily life has obliged 
me to keep constantly in view the wants of more advanced students; 
and, for their sake, an attempt has been made to investigate the prin- 
ciples of the language more deeply, and illustrate its use more fully, 
than has been usual in grammatical treatises, even of far greater size. 
At the same time, no pains have been spared to meet the wants of the 
beginner, by a studious simplicity of method and expression, and by 
the reduction of the most important principles to the form of concise 
rules, easy of retention and convenient for citation. Many valuable 
works in philology fail of attaining the highest point of utility, through 
ἃ cumbrousness of form, burdensome alike to the understanding and 
tie memory of the learner. They have been the armor of Saul to the 
youthful David. I have not, however, believed that I should consult. 
the advantage even of the beginner by a false representation of the 
language, or by any departure from philosophical accuracy of state- 
ment or propriety of arrangement. ‘Truth is always better than false- 
hood, and science than empiricism. 

_ To secure, so far as might be, the double object of the work, it has 
been constructed nee following plan. 


Iv PREFACE. 


First, to state the usage of the language in comprehensive rules 
and condensed tables, to be imprinted upon the memory of the student. 
For convenient examples of the care with which brevity and simplicity 
have been here studied, the reader will permit me to refer him to the 
rules of syntax, as presented to the eye at a single view in J 64, and 
te the elementary tables of inflection and formation. 

Secondly, to explain the usage of the language, and trace its his- 
torical development, as fully as the limits allowed to the work, and the 
present state of philological science, would permit. The student whe 
thinks wishes to know, not only what is true, but why it is true; and 
to the philosophical mind, a single principle addressed to the reason 
is often like the silver cord of AXolus, confining a vast number of facts, 
which otherwise, like the enfranchised winds, are scattered far and 
wide beyond the power of control. 

Thirdly, to ilustrate the use of the language by great fulness of 
remark and exemplification. In these remarks and examples, as well 
as in the more general rules and statements, I have designed to keep 
myself carefully within the limits of Attic usage, as exhibiting the 
language in its standard form, except when some intimation is given 
to the contrary ; believing that the grammarian has no more right 
than the author to use indiscriminately, and without notice, the 
vocabulary, forms, and idioms of different ages and communities, — 

“Α party-color’d dress 
Of patch’d and pye-ball’d languages.’? 

The examples of syntax, in order that the student may be assured 
in regard to their genuineness and sources, and be able to examine 
them in their connection, have been all cited from classic authors in 
the precise words in which they occur, and with references to the places 
where they may be found. In accordance with the general plan of the 
work, these examples have been mostly taken from the purest Attic 
writers, beginning with A®schylus, and ending with Atschines. It 
was also thought, that the practical value of such examples might be 
greatly enhanced to the student by selecting a single author, whose 

works, as those of a model-writer, should be most frequently resorted 

to; and especially, by selecting for constant citation a single work of 
this author, which could be in the hands of every student as a com- 
panion to his grammar, in which he might consult the passages re- 
ferred to, and which might be to him, at the same time, a text-book 
in reading, and a model in writing, Greek. In making the choice, I 
could not hesitate in selecting, among authors, Xenophon, and among 
his writings, the Anabasis. References also abound in the Etymology, 
but chiefly in respect to peculiar and dialectic forms. 


PREFACE. ν 


The subject of euphonic laws and changes has received a larger 
share of attention than is usual in works of this kind, but not larger 
than I felt compelled to bestow, in treating of a language, 

‘ Whose law was heavenly beauty, and whose breath 
Enrapturing music.” 

The student will allow me to commend to his special notice two 
principles of extensive use in the explanation of Greek forms; viz. 
the precession of vowels (i. e. the tendency of vowels, in the progress 
of language, to pass from a more open to a closer sound ; see δῇ 28, 
29, 44, 86, 93, 118, 123, 259, &c.), and the correspondence be- 
tween the consonants » and σ, and the vowels α and ε (δῇ 34, 46. 6, 
50, 56-58, 60, 63. R., 84, 100. 2, 105, 109, 132, 179, 181, 200, 201, 
213, 248. f, 300, &c.). 

In treating of Greek etymology, { have wished to avoid every thing 
tike arbitrary formation ; and, instead of deducing one form from an- 
other by empirical processes, which might often be quite as well re- 
versed, I have endeavoured, by rigid analysis, to resolve all the forms 
into their elements. The old method of forming the tenses of the 
Greek verb one from another (compared by an excellent grammarian 
to ““ The House that Jack built ’’), is liable to objection, not only on 
account of its complexity and multiplication of arbitrary rules, but yet 
more on account of the great number of imaginary forms which it re- 
quires the student to suppose, and which often occupy a place in his 
memory, to the exclusion of the real forms of the language. To cite 
but a single case, the second aorist passive, according to this method, 
is formed from the second aorist active, although it is a general rule 
of the language, that verbs which have the one tense want the other 
(§ 255. 6).- Nor is the method which makes the theme the foundation 
of all the other forms free from objection, either in declension or in 
conjugation. This method not only requires the assistance of many 
imaginary nominatives and presents, but it often inverts the order of 
nature, by deriving the simpler form from the more complicated, and 
commits a species of grammatical anachronism, by making the later 
form the origin of the earlier. See §§ 84, 100, 256. V., 265. In 
the following grammar, all the forms are immediately referred to the 
root, and the analysis of the actual, as obtained from classic usage, 
takes the place both of the metempsychosis of the obsolete, and of the 
metamorphosis of the ideal. 

Those parts of Greek Grammar of which I at first proposed to forin 
a separate volume, the Dialects, the History of Greek Inflection, the 
Formation of Words, and Versification, I have concluded, with the 


vi PREFACE. 


advice of highly esteemed friends, to incorporate in this ; so that a 
single volume should constitute a complete manual of Greek Grammar, 
To accomplish this object within moderate limits of size and expense, 
a very condensed mode of printing has been adopted, giving to the 
volume an unusual amount of matter in proportion to its size. I thank 
my printers, that, through their skill and care, they have shown this 
to be consistent with so much typographical clearness and beauty. It 
has also been found necessary to reserve for a separate treatise those 
parts of the first edition which were devoted to General Grammar, 
and which it was at first proposed to include in the present edition as 
an appendix. I submit to this necessity with the less reluctance, 
because a systematic attention to the principles of General Grammar 
ought not to be deferred till the study of the Greek, unless, in accord- 
ance with the judicious advice of some distinguished scholars, this 
should be the first language learned after our own; and because the 
wish has been expressed, that these parts might be published separ- 
ately for the use of those who were not engaged in a course of classical 
study. ἢ 

I cannot conclude this preface without the expression of my most 
sincere thanks to those personal friends and friends of learning whe 
have so kindly encouraged and aided me in my work. Among those 
to whom I am especially indebted for valuable suggestions, or for the 
loan of books, are President Woolsey, whose elevation, while I am 
writing, to a post which he will so much adorn, will not, I trust, 
withdraw him from that department of study and authorship in which 
he has won for himself so enviable a distinction ; Professors Felton 
of Cambridge, Gibbs of New Haven, Hackett of Newton, Sanborn, 
my highly esteemed associate in classical instruction, Stuart of An- 
dover, and Tyler of Amherst; and Messrs. Richards of Meriden, 
Sophocles of Hartford, and Taylor of Andover. Nor can I conclude 
without tlie acknowledgment of my deep obligations to previous la- 
borers in the same field, to the Great Livine, and to the Great 
pEAD — Reguiescant in pace! It is almost superfluous that I should 
mention, as among those to whom 1 am most greatly indebted, the 
honored names of Ahrens, Bernhardy, Bopp, Buttmann, Carmichael, 
Fischer, Hartung, Hermann, Hoogeveen, Ktihner, Lobeck, Mait- 
taire, Matthie, Passow, Rost, Thiersch, and Viger. 

A.C 
Hanover, Oct. 13, 1846 


PREFACE TO THE TABLES. 


Tue following tables have been prepared as part of a Greek Grain 
mar. They are likewise published separately, for the greater conv: 1: 
ience and economy in their use. The advantages of a-tabular τ 
rangement are too obvious to require remark ; nor is it less obvii:: 
that tables are consulted and compared with greater ease when pritite«: 
together, than when scattered throughout a volume. 

The principles upon which the Tables of Paradigms have been c+: 
structed, are the following : — 


I. To avoid needless repetition. There is a certain ellipsis in gra: 
matical tables, as well as in discourse, which relieves not only iti: 
material instruments of the mind, but the mind itself, and which «- 
sists alike the understanding and the memory.. When the student t.1: 
learned that, in the neuter gender, the nominative, accusative, aii 
vocative are always the same, why, in each neuter paradigm that i: 
studies, must his eye and mind be taxed with the examination of nim’ 
forms instead of three? why, in his daily exercises in declensiwi 
must his tongue triple its labor, and more than triple the weariness οἱ 
the teacher’s ear? With the ellipses in the following tables, the με" 
adigms of neuter nouns contain only eight forms, instead of the ¢we/r- 
which are usually, and the fifteen which are sometimes, given; anc 
the paradigms of participles and of adjectives similarly declined cont: 
only twenty-two forms, instead of the usual ¢hérty-six or forty-five 
See ¥j 4. 


Il. To give the forms just as they appear upon the Greek pase, 
that is, without abbreviation and without hyphens. A dissected ami 
abbreviated mode of printing the paradigms exposes the young stud. 1:: 
to mistake, and familiarizes the eye, and of course the mind, wit}: 
fragments, instead of complete forms. If these fragments were si): 
arated upon analytical principles, the evil would be less; but they ai 
usually cut off just where convenience in printing may direct, so th: 
they contain, sometimes a part of the affix, sometimes the whole afiis. 
and sometimes the affix with a part of the root. Hyphens are useiui 

1 


Viii PREFACE TO TIIE TABLES. 


in the analysis of forms, but a table of paradigms seétms not to be the 
most appropriate place for them. In the following tables, the affixes 
are given by themselves, and the paradigms are so arranged in col- 
umns, that the eye of the student will usually separate, at a glance, 
the root from the affix. 


III. To represent the language according to its actual use, and not 
according to the theories or fancies of the Alexandrine and Byzantine 
grammarians. Hence, for example, 

1. The first perfect active imperative, which has no existence in 
pure writers, has been discarded. 

2. For the imaginary imperative forms ἵσταϑιν τέϑετι, δίδοϑι 
deixvu91, have been substituted the actual forms ἵστη, τέϑει, δίδου, 
δείκνυ. 

3. Together with analogical but rare forms, have been given the 
usual forms, which in many grammars are noticed only as exceptions 
or dialectic peculiarities. Thus, βουλευέτωσαν and βουλευόντων, 
βουλεύσαις and βουλεύσειας, ἐβεβουλεύκεισαν and ἐβεβουλεύκεσαν 
(1 34); βουλευέσϑωσαν and βουλευέσϑων, βουλευϑείησαν and βου- 
λευϑεῖεν (Ἵ 36); ἐτίϑην and ἐτίϑουν (YJ 60) ; ἧς and ἦσϑα, ἔσε- 
ται and ἔσται (J 55). 

4. The second future active and middle, which, except as a eupho- 
nic form of the first future, is purely imaginary, has been wholly 
rejected. 


IV. To distinguish between regular and irregular usage. What 
etudent, from the common paradigms, does not receive the impression, 
sometimes never corrected, that the second perfect and pluperfect, the 
second aorist and future, and the third future belong as regularly to 
the Greek verb, as the first tenses bearing the same name; when, in 
point of fact, the Attic dialect, even including poetic usage, presents 
only about fifty verbs which have the second perfect and pluperfect, 
eighty-five, which have the second, aorist active ; fifty, which have the 
second aorist and future passive; and forty, which have the second 
aorist middle? The gleanings of all the other dialects will not double 
these numbers. Carmichael, who has given us most fully the statis- 
tics of the Greek verb, and whose labors deserve all praise, has 
gathered, from all the dialects, a list of only eighty-eight verbs which 
have the second perfect, one hundred and forty-five which have the 
second aorist active, eighty-four which have the second aorist passive, 
and fifty-eight which have the second aorist middle. And, of his 


ΕΝ 


PREFACE TO THE TABLES. 1X 


catalogue of nearly eight hundred verbs, embracing the most common 
verbs of the language, only fifty-five have the third future, and, in 
the Attic dialect, only twenty-eight. 

To some there may appear to be an impiety in attacking the vener- 
erable shade of τύπτω, but alas! it is little more than a shade, and, 
with all my early and long cherished attachment to it, I am forced, 
after examination, to exclaim, in the language of Electra, 

᾿Ανφὶ φιλτάτης 
Μορφῆς, σποδόν vs καὶ σκιὰν ἀνωφελῇ, 

and to ask why, in an age which professes such devotion to truth, a 
false representation of an irregular verb should be still set forth as 
the paradigm of regular conjugation, and made the Procrustes’ bed 
to which all other verbs must be stretched or pruned. The actual 
future of τύπτω is not τύψω, but τυπτήσω, the perfect passive is both 
τέτυμμαι and τετύπτημαι; the aorists are in part dialectic or poetic, 
the first and second perfect and pluperfect active are not found in 
classic Greek, if, indeed, found at all, and the second future active 
and middle are the mere figments of grammatical fancy. And yet 
all the regular verbs in the language must be gravely pronounced 
defective, because they do not conform to this imaginary model. 

In the following tables, the example of Ktihner has been followed, 
in selecting βουλεύω as the paradigm of regular conjugation. This 
verb is strictly regular, it glides smoothly over the tongue, is not lia- 
ble to be mispronounced, and presents, to the eye, the prefixes, root, 
and affixes, with entire distinctness throughout. ‘This is followed by 
shorter paradigms, in part merely synoptical, which exhibit the dif- 
ferent classes of verbs, -with their varieties of formation. 

From the common paradigms, what student would hesitate, in writ- 
ing Greek, to employ the form in —ueor, little suspecting that it is 
only a variety of the first person dual, so exceedingly rare, that the 
learned Elmsley (perhaps too hastily) pronounced it a mere invention 
of the Alexandrine grammarians? ‘The teacher whd meets with it in 
his recitation-room may almost call his class, as the crier called the 
Roman people upon the celebration of the secular games, ‘‘ to gaze 
upon that which they had never seen before, and would never see 
again.’ In the secondary tenses of the indicative, and in the op- 
tative, this form does not occur at all; and, in the remaining tenses, 
there have been found only five examples, two of which are quoted 
by Atheneus from a word-hunter (ὀνοματοϑήρας), whose affectation 
be is ridiculing, while the three classical examples are all poetic, oc- 


Χ PREFACE TO THE TABLES. 


turring, one in Homer (Tl. 4. 485), and the other two in Sophocles 
(Ε}. 950 and Phil. 1079). And yet, in the single paradigm of 
τύπτω; as I learned it in my boyhood, this ‘‘ needless Alewandrine,”’ 


* Which, like a wounded snake, drags its slow length along, "ἢ 


occurs no fewer than twenty-six times, that is, almost nine times as 
often as in the whole range of the Greek classics. 


With respect to the manner in which these tables should be usea 
so much depends upon the age and attainments of the student, that 
no directions could be given which might not require to be greatly 
modified in particular cases. I would, however, recommend, 

1. That the paradigms should not be learned en masse, but gradu- 
ally, in connection with the study of the principles and rules of the 
grammar, and with other exercises. 

2. That some of the paradigms should rather be used for reference, 
than formally committed to memory. It will be seen at once, that 
some of them have been inserted merely for the sake of exhibiting 
differences of accent, or individual peculiarities. 

3. That, in learning and consulting the paradigms, the student 
should constantly compare them with each other, with the tables of 
terminations, and with the rules of the grammar. - 

4. παῖ the humble volume should not be dismissed from service, 
till the paradigms are impressed upon the tablets of the memory as 
Jegibly as upon the printed page, —till they have become so familiar 
to the student, that whenever he has occasion to repeat thei, ‘* the 
words,’’ in the expressive language of Milton, ‘‘ like so many nimble 
and airy servitors, shall trip about him at command, and in well- 
ordered files, as he would wish, fall aptly into their own places.”’ 


{n the present edition, the Tables of Inflection have been enlarged 
by the addition of the Dialectic Forms, the Analysis of the Affixes, 
the Changes in the Root of the Verb, &c. ‘Tables of Ligatures, of 
Derivation, of Pronominal Correlatives, of the Rules of Syntax, and 
of Forins of Analysis and Parsing, have also been added. Some 
references have been made to sections in the Grammar, 

Α. 6. 

Hanover, Sept. 1, 1846. 


“Ἐς The volume of Tables contains pp |, ii, vil-xil, 9- 84. 


CONTENTS. 


----ς--- 


TABLES. 


]l. TABLES OF ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 


Page. 


A. ALPHABET, . e . 
B. Licaturss, . . . 


9 
10 


C. VocaL ELEMENTs, . 


Il. Tastes or Erymotoey. 


Introductory Remarks, . 


A. Tastes OF DECLENSION. 
1. Affixes of the Three Declen- 
sions, τ 
π. Analysis of the Affixes, . 
m. Nouns of Declension I. 
A. Masculine, ταμίας, ναύτης, 
᾿Αφρείδης, “Egutas, βοῤῥᾶς, 


Twlodas, ° ὁ . 
B. Feminine, σκιά, ϑύρα, 

γλῶσσα, τίμη, μνάα, ὃ 
Dialectic Forms, Ν ‘ 


rv. Nouns of Declension II. 
A. Masculine and Feminine, 
λόγος, δῆμος, ὁδός, νόος, ναός, 
B. Neuter, σῦκον, πτερόν, μό- 
φίον, ὀσσέον, ἀνώγεων, & 
Dialectic Forms, . Ὰ . 
vy. Nouns of Declension ITI. 
A. Mute, 
1. Labial, yoy, φλέψ, 
2. Palatal, κόραξ, αἴξ, φά- 
λαγξ, ϑοίξ,. . . 
85. Lingual. 
a. Masculine and Femi- 
nine, σαῖς, πούς, ἄναξ, 


χάρις, κλείς, . . 
β. Neuter, σῶμα, φῶς, 
ἧπαρ, κέρας, οὖς, ἃ 

Β. Liquid, 


λιμήν, δαίμων, piss Sie, ῥή- 


Twe, χείρ; ᾿ . . 
1 *& 


12 


16 


16 


Syncopated, πατήρ, ἀνήρ, 
μήτηρ, κύων, ἀρνός, . 

C. Liquid-Mute, 
λέων, ὁδούς, γίγας, δάμαρ, 
ΞΞενοφῶν, ᾿᾽Οποῦς, : . 

D. Pure. 

a. Masculine and Feminine, 
Sas, ἥρως, xis, οἷς, ἰχθύς, 
ἱππεύς, βοῦς, γραῦς, ναῦς, 
σῆχυς, πόλις, τριήρης) ο 
ἀχώ, αἰδώς, Σωκράτης, 
Πειραιεύς, Ἥρακλέης, 

β. Neuter, τεῖχος, ἄσφυ, yi- 
C&S, ° . 

Dialectic Portas ‘ Ἢ 

vi. Irregular and Dialectic De- 
clension, Ζεύς, Οἰδίπους, Γλοῦς, 
υἱός, ναῦς, δόρυ, σπέος, irate, 
πόλις, ᾿Οδυσσεύς, Τ᾿ άπροκλος, 

vir. Adjectives of Two Termina- 
tions. 

A. Of Declension II., Pons 
ὠγήραος, 

Β. Of Declensian Ifl., , aime, 
εὔχαρις, δίπους, σαφής, μεί- 
ων, 

ΥΙΠ. Adjectives of Three Termi- 

nations. 

A. Of Declensions II. and L, 
Pirsos, σοφός, - 
Contracted, χρύσεος, Sieabor, 

B. Of Declensions ILI. and L, 


μέλας, πᾶς, χαρίεις, ἡδύς, « 


Page 
11 


17 


17 


21 


22 
24 


23 


xii 


C. Of the Three Declensions, 
μέγας, πολύς, « . - 23 
Homeric Forms of roads, 24 


πρᾶος, Ξ . 24 

ΣΧ. Numerals, εἷς, οὐδείς, δύο, au- ~ 

φω, «τρεῖς, τέσσαρες, . ς 924 
x. Participles, βουλεύων, σιμάων, 

φανῶν, λιπών, e . e 25 
ἄρας, φανείς, εἰδώς, torws, 


δούς, dus, ° . on πα 
Χι. Substantive Pronouns. 
A. Personal, ἐγώ, σύ, οὗ, oe 
B. Reflexive, ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυ- 
τοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, ᾿- 45 
C. Reciprocal, ἀλχήλων, . 28 
D. Indefinite, δεῖνα, ὁ - 28 
xu. Adjective Pronouns. 
A. Definite. 
Article ὁ, Iterative αὐτός, 
Relative ὅς, Demonstrative 


ὅδε, Possessive, i > 29 
᾿ Demonstrative οὗτος, φοσοῦ- 

TOS, 5 . . 80 
B. Indefinite. 


Simple Indefinite +}s, Inter- 
rogative ris, Relative Indef- 


inite ὅσαις, ° ° > 30 
B. ΤΆΒΙΕ or NuMERALS, 
I, Adjectives. 
1. Cardinal, 2. Ordinal, ») SI 
8. Temporal, 4. Multiple, 


5. Proportional, . - ᾽ν 32 
fl. Adverbs, . © 5 
ΠῚ. Substantives, ὁ . . o2 


C. Tasies or ConJUGATION. 


1. The Tenses Classified, . + 83s 
m. The Modes Classified, ° 33 
ut. Formation of the Tenses, 33 
1v. Affixes of the Active Voice, 34 
v. Affixes of the Passive Voice, 36 
vi. Analysis of the Affixes, . 38 
Vil. Dialectic Forms, . . 99 
vin. Active Voice of βονλεύω 


Translated, ν᾿ . . 40 


ΠῚ. Principat Ruies or Syntrax, 


.CONTENTS. . 


Page 
tx. Active Voice of Bovrsiw, . 42 
x. Middle and Passive Voices of 
βουλεύω, 5 44 
xi. (A-) Mute Verbs. 
i. Labial, 1. γεάφω, « 47 
2. λείπω, . 48 
ii. Palatal, πράσσω, ° 
iii. Lingual, 1. πείθω, . 
2. κομίζω, . 51 
xu. (B.) Liquid Verbs. 
1, ἀγγέλλω, . . 52 


2. φαίνω, 54 
xu. (C.) Double Consansint Verbs. 
1. αὔξω or αὐξάνω, . ὁ. 55 


2. κέκαμρμιαι, ἐλήλεγμαι, 55 
xiv. (D.) Pure Verbs. 


i. Contract, 
l. φσικάω, - . . 56 
eu φιλέω, + . 5 58 
9. δηλόω, ᾿ . Φ 60 
ii. Verbs in -pu, 
1, fornus, . . . 62 
2. πρίασθαι, ° . 68 
8. σίθημι, . . . 64 
4. δίδωμι, ὁ . : 66 
. δείκνυμι, ὁ δ . 68 
6. Onul, 6 . . 69 
7. ἵημιν . . . . 70 
8. εἰμί, . : . 71 
9. sis, « . . 72 
iii. Second Aorists, 
1. ἔξην, . . . e 78 
2. ἀπέδραν, . ο 79 
8. ἔγνων, Ε . ν 78 
4. ἔδυν, . e 73 
xv. (E.) Preteritive Verbs, 
l. of da, ὃ 74 


2. δέδοικα and δίδια, - 74 
3. ἧμαι, . © . 74 
4, κάθημαι, . 5 © 75 
κεῖμαι, . 75 
xvi. Changes in the Root, . 


D. Tasies or Formation, 


1. Table of Derivation, . « 77 
nm. Pronominal Correlatives, « 78 


IV. Forms or ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 


A. Or Worps,. ; ὃ 
B. Or ΒΕΝΤΕΝΟΕΒ, ὁ . 84 


C. Or ΜΕΤΕΕΒ, . σ΄ 84 


CONTENTS. 


Page 
[NTRODJCTION. — DIALEcTs, . - ᾧ ‘ : 85 
BOOK I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 
Page 
Cu. 1. CHARACTERS, . 90 C. Apostrophe, . ὃ 104 
Pronunciation, . - . 93] — Dialectic Variations, . . 104 
History of Orthography, . 95 | Cu. 3. Consonants, . 108 
Cu. 2. VOWELS, . a OF Euphonic Changes, 
I. Precession, ° 99 A. In Formation of Words, 108 
II. Union of Syllables, - 100 B. In Connection of Words, 113 
A. Contraction, . . 100 C. Special Rules, ° 114 
B. Crasis, . . - 102 Dialectic Variations, . i eee 
BOOK Il. ETYMOLOGY. 
Cu. 1. ῬΕΙΝΟΙΡΙΕΒ or Ds- C. Mode, . Η ξ 171 
CLENSION, . . . 116 D. Number and Person, ae 6 4 
A. Gender, . . - 116 E. History of Conjugation, 172 
B. Number, . Ὁ ° 118 | Cu. 8 Prerrxes or ConJu- 
C. Case, D. Methods, - 119 GATION, . . « , 182 
E. History of Declension, 121 I. Augment, ‘ ; 182 
Cu. 2. ῬΕΟΙΕΝΒΙΟΝ or Nouns. II. Reduplication, . - 184 
I. First Declension, ὦ 126 III. Of Compound Verbs, 185 
Dialectic Forms, . oe, 327 Dialectic Use, . ‘ - 186 
11. Second Declension, . 128 | Cu. 9. ArFIxEs oF Congu- 
Dialectic Forms, . e 129 GATION. 
III. Third Declension, . 129 I. Classification and Analysis, 187 
A. Mutes, . e - 130 _ A. Tense-Signs, . - 188 
B. Liquids, ° 131 B. Connecting Vowels, 190 
C. Liquid-Mutes, D. Pose 133 C. Flexible Endings, 193 
Dialectic Forms, . - 139 II. Union of Affixes and Root, 196 
IV. Irregular Nouns, . 140 A. Regular Open Affixes, 196 
Cu. 3. DrEcLENsION oF ADJEO- B. Regular Close Affixes, 196 
TIVES AND PARTICIPLES, 146 C. Verbs in - μοι, . 200 
Cu. 4. NUMERALS, . ° 152 D. Complete Tenses, « 4208 
Cu. 5. PRONOUNS. Dialectic Forms, . 4 208 
I. Substantive, . . 155 | Cu. 10. Roor or THE VERB, 215 
II. Adjective, . . ». 1858 A. Euphonic Changes, 217 
Cu. 6. COMPARISON, ° 163 B. Emphatic Changes, 219 
I. Of Adjectives, . ΤῸ C. Anomalous Changes, 241 
A. In “TEQ0S, -TATOS, © 163 | Cu. 11. Formation or Worps, 243 
B. In «ἴων, -ἰσφος, « . 165 I. Of Simple Words, ° 244 
C. Irregular, ὁ . 166 A. Nouns, «© -. . 244 
Π. Of Adverbs, ‘ 168 B. Adjectives, . . 248 
Cu. 7. PRINCIPLES OF Goi C. Pronouns, ᾿ . 249 
JUGATION, ὁ “ - 169 D. Verbs, ° ‘ 250 
A. Voice, . . ° 169 E. Adverbs, . . αὶ 5251 
B. Tense, ‘ ‘ ὁ 170 II. Of Compound Words 252 
BOOK Ill. SYNTAX. 
Cx. 1. Tue Supstantive. II. Use of Numbers, . 259 
I. Agreement, . . 257 III. Use of Cases, . 260 


XIV 
Page 
A. Nominative, . +. 862 
B. Genitive, ᾧ 264 
1. Of Departure, δ" 264 
1. Separation, . 264 
2. Distinction, . 265 
π. Of Cause, ° 267 
i. 1. Origin, . - 267 
2. Material . 967 
3. Supply, . - 268 
4, Partitive, . 269 
ii.1. Motive, &e., . 274 
2. Price, Value, &c., 276 
8. Sensible and Men- 
tal Object, «276 
4. Time and Place, 278 
iii. Active, . oe B79 
iv. Constituent, 279 
1. Property, - 28) 
2. Relation, . 281 
C. Dative Objective, ες 285 
1. Of Approach, ὁ 286 
1. Nearness, . « 286 
2. Likeness, e 287 
u. Of Influence, - 287 
D. Dative Residual, 293 
1. Instrumental and Modal, 293 
ul. Temporal and Local, 295 
E. Accusative, . . 296 
1. Of Direct Object and 
Effect, ᾿ οι, 297 
Double Accusative, 301 
π. Of Specification, . 302 
in. Of Extent, 303 
tv. Adverbial, . 304 
F. Vocative, ξ ‘ 304 
Ca. 2. Tur ADJECTIVE. 
I. Agreement, . . 805 
II. Use of Degrees, . οὐ SIZ 
Ca. 3. THe ARTICLE, .« 315 
I, As an Article, . e , 918 
BOOK IV. 
“nH. 1.. Quantiry, . e 410 
L. Natural Quantity, . . 411 
II. Local Quantity, : 414 
Cu. 2. VERSIFICATION, « 416 
A. Dactylic Verse, . 421 
Β, Anapestic Verse, . » 423 
C. lambic Verse, . . 425 
1). Trochaic Verse, Ὁ . 427 
μ᾿. Other Metres, . Ὃ 428 
(Ἢ, 3 ΔΟΟΚΝΊ, . . . 429 


INDEXEs, : ὃ J 


| Cu. 6. 


CONTENTS. 


Il. As a Pronoun, . 
Cu. 4. Tur Pronoun. 

I. Agreement, 5 ‘ 
II. Special Observations, . 
A. Personal, &e., 3 

B. Αὐτός, “ . . 
C. Demonstrative, é 
D. Indetinite, Fs « 
E. Relative, ὴ ὃ 
F.. Complementary, é 
G. Interrogative, e 
H. "Adaos, ὁ . ο 
Cu. 5. THE VERB. 

I. Agreement, . . 
Il. Use of the Voices, ‘ 
A. Active, , ᾿ 

B. Middle, . ἃ . 
C. Passive, ‘ 
III. Use of the Tenses, ° 
A. Definite and Indefinite, 
B. Indetinite and Complete, 
C. Future, ἃ ἢ 
IV. Use of the Modes, “ 
A. Intellective, . ‘ 
_ As used in sentences, 


1. Desiderative, ° 
u. Final, . . ᾧ 
1π. Conditional, . 
tv. Relative, ° 4 


v. Complementary, 


B. Volitive, . . . 

Ο. Incorporated, . 
1. Infinitive, ᾽ ὸ 
u. Participle, . 


ΠῚ. Verbal in -riss, ὁ 
THe PARTICLE, . 
A. The Adverb, Ν ‘ 
B. The Preposition, . 

C. The Conjunction, . 
D. Concluding Remarks, 


PROSODY, 


I. General Laws, . ° 
Il. Accentual Changes, . 
Contraction, &c., 7 
Grave Accent, Anastrophe, 
Proclitics, Enclitics, : 
Ill. Determination of Accent- 
ed Gvilable . . 
In Declension, . . 
In Comparison, Conjugation, 
In Particles, 2 


360 
364 


9567 


472 


a4 Ro 
a UNIVE 


C4 
Be 


GREEK TABLES. 


I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 
14. A. Tue ALPHABET. 


[88 10-12, 17-22.) 


Forms. Roman Numeral 
Order Large. Small. Letters. Name. Power. 
I. ee a “Alga Alpha 1 

11. B β,6 b Βῆτα᾽ Beta 

Ill. Pig? g,n Touue Gamma 3 
ιν. ἀρ τ δ; d Δέλτα Delta . 4 
, aS ee ae é Ἔ ψιλόν Epsilon ὅ 
VI. Z 3458 QZ Ζῆτα Ten 7 
Vi: Ny: é ἦἾπτα Eta 8 
VIIl. Θ 9.9.9 th Θῆτα Theta 9 
Ix. ) ee ΚΑ i Torta Iota 10 
x. jae ae c Konna Kappa 20 

ΧΙ. Aik l AupBda Lambda 30° 
ΧΙ M uw m Mu Mu 40 
XIII. N ν, eco. ae Nu 50 

XIV. ΞΘ. &é x Ei Xi 600 
Xv. : ο 6 Ὃ μῖκρόν Omicron 70 
See ae ae Ρ πὶ Pi 80 
xvi. Pg : ‘PG Rho 100 
XVIII. ἀν Σ 8 Σίγμα Sigma 200 
XIX. Pty t Tav Tau 300 
XX. ae , nd *7 ψῖλόν Upsilon. 400 
XXI. ®\o op - ph. a Phi 500 
XXII Rig ater oe Xi Chi 600 
XXIII Ψῳ ps Wi Psi — 700 
XXIV 2 ow 6 2 μέγα Omega 800 
ef) BS A ees Bat — Vau 6 
a | °,¢ q Konna Koppa 90 
2 sh Saunt Sampi 900 


[2 


TABLES. 


10 


B. LicgaTuReEs. 


1 2. 


[5 10. 2.] 


μὲν 
ου 
σερι 
σϑ 
σϑαι 
σσ 


ος 


w ‘2 JA S 
ι eo. es a & 
= » "κ 5 ΩΣ 


ἀπο 
au 


ἃ Ἢ ἡ 2g ΘΝ δ τ ΡΣ od 3 & 


£ 
5 
év 


W283 pe αὶ 


ῃ 9... ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 11 


13. C. Vocat ELements. 


I. Vowe.s, SimpLe and Compounp. 


[$$ 24-26.] 
Class I. IT. ΠῚ. IV. νυ 
Α Ὁ Ε Ὁ | 
Orders. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds 
Simple Vowels. nr 1. wie He ae 
tone, = 2a ax pe ef 
F Proper, 3. ἃ Wy 
Diphthongs in “3 See eee te ee ie 
Improper,4. @ @ ἢ wt 
Diphthongs in en οὕ, Oe ἄν ae eas 
Improper, 6. ἄν wu yu 
II. Consonants. 
($$ 49 -51.] 
A. Consonants associated in Classes and Orders. 
Class 1. Class Π. Class III. 
Orders. Labials. Palatals, Linguals, 
1. Smooth Mutes, σ x" τ 
2. Middle Mutes, B γ ὃ 
3. Rough Mutes, φ x 6 
4, Nasals, μ 7 ν 
5. Double Consonants, wy ξ ζ 


B. Additional Semivowels.: 
λ 0 σ 
Consonants (ΒΈΘΟΝ ARRANGEMENT). 


Smooth, x, x, t. 
Mutes, Middle, 8, y, ὃ. 
Rough, 9, z, ϑ. 
Liquids, 2, μι v, 9, y nasal 


Single Consonants, 
Sibilant, o. 


Semivowels, { 
Double Consonants, y, &, ζ. 
ΠῚ. BreatHines. 
: [5 13.] 
Rough Breathing, or Aspirate (" ). 
Smooth or Soft Breathing ey. 


ἵν. TABLES. Ὁ Β 4: 


Il. ETYMOLOGY. — 


{ 4. Remarks. I. To avoid needless repetition, alike burdensome 
to teacher and pupil, and to accustom the student early to the application 
af rule, the tabiee οὐ paradigms have been constructed with the following 
etlipses, which will be at once supplied from general rules. 


1, In the paradigms of pecLension, the Voc. sing. is omitted whenever 
it has the same form with the Nom., and the following cases are omitted 
throughout (see § 80) ; 

«) The Voc. plur., because it is always the same with the Nom. 

6.) ‘The Dut. dual, because it is always the same with the Gen, 

y-) The dec. and Voc. duat, because they are always the same with 
the Nom. 

δ.) The Acc and Voc. neut., in all the numbers, because they are al- 
ways the same with the Nom. 


2. In the paradigms of apsectives, and of words similarly inflected, 
the Neuter is omitted in the Gen. and Dat. of all the numbers, and in the 
Nom. dual ; because in these cases it never differs from the Masculine 


(δ 130. 6). ᾿ 


3. In the paradigms of consueation, the Ist Pers. dual is omitted 
throughout, as having the same form with the Ist Pers. plur., and the 3d 
Pers. dual is omitted whenever it has the same form with the 2d Pers. 
dual, that is, in the primary tenses of the Indicative, and in the Subjunc- 
tive (ὃ 212. 2). For the form in -«e90», whose empty shade has been so 
ΜΝ ied by grammarians, and forced to stand, for idle show, in the rank 
and file of numbers and persons, see § 212. N. 


4. The compound forms of the PERFECT PASSIVE SUBJUNCTIVE and 
OPTATIVE are omitted, as belonging rather to Syntax than to inflection 


§ 234, 637). 


II. The regular formation of the tenses is exhibited in the table (7 28), 
which may be thus read; “ The tense is formed from the root by 
atlixing ——,” or, “ by prefixing and aftixing (or, in the nude 
form, ——).” In the application of this table, the forms of the root 
must be distinguished, if it has more than a single form (§ 254). 


1. In the table of translation ({] 33), the form of the verb must, of 
course, be adapted to the number and person of the pronoun; thus, Jam 
planning, thou art planning, he is planning, ὅσο. For the MIDDLE voicE, 
change the forms of * plan” into the corresponding forms of “ delib- 
erate’; and, for the passive voicg, into the corresponding forms of “ be 
planned.” 


ιν. The Dialectic Forms, for the sake of distinction, are uniformly 
printed in smaller type. In connection with these forms, the abbrevia 
tions Aol and AL. denote Aolic; Alex., Alexandrine; Att., Attic, 
Lot. and B., Beotic; Comm , Common; Dor. and D , Dorie; Ep. and 
εἰ, Epic; Hel, Hellenistic; lon. and I., lonic; Iter. and It. lterative ; 
O., Old; Poet and P., Poetic. 


V. A star (*) in the tables denotes that an affix or a form is wanting. 
Parentheses are sometimes used to inclose unusual, doubtful, peculiar, or 
supplementary forms. In ΤΠ 20, 30, the » and 9. of the tense-signs, as 
dropped in the second tenses (§ 199 TL), are separated by a hyphen from 
the rest of the affix. 


q 5, 6.] 


{| 3. 


Sing. Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


Voc. 


Plur. Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Acc. 
Voc. 


Dual Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Acc. 
Voc. 


18 


1. AFFIXES OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS. 


Masc. 


Dec. I. 
Fem, 


ἃς; ἧς 


αγ ἢ 


ου 


ἃς) ἧς 
“58 
uy, nV 
a, 7 


" Dec. II. Dec. II. 
M.F. Neut, M. F. New 
og | ov ὁ ον 
ου ος 
ω i 
bd ~~ 
ov Vy ἃ * 
e | o» * " 
οι | ἃ ες ἃ 
ων wr 
οις σἵ .} 
ovg | ἃ ἄς ὰ 
w 
οὐ 77 ες ὰ 
ω ξ 
οιν ow 
ou ou 
©) ε 
ω 8 


46. u. ANaLysis oF THE AFFIXES. 


[The figures in the last column denote the declensions.1 


Sing. Ném. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voce. 


Plur. Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Acc. 


Dual Nom. 
Gen. 


R 


| @ 


Connecting Vowels. 


Dec. II. Dec. III. 
o * 
ο * 
ο a 
ο * 
o(s)| # 
0 * 
oO * 
ο * 
ο * 
oO * 

[ο * 


Ϊ 


Flexible πεν 4a 


¢ Fem. 1, «. Neui 2>,¢, “ 
(oF) oc. Zana Mase. a, o. 
ts 
Vy the 
1 


Neut. 3, «. 


ες. Neut. ἄ. 


ων. 
(εσι). 98, οἵ. Land 2, ες. 
(vs) ἃς. New ἃ. 


1 and 2, ε 


14 TABLES. — FIRST DECLENSION. [{ 7, δ. 


{| 7. wit. Nouns oF THE First DecLENsIon. 


_ A. Mascurine. ͵ 
6, steward, ὃ, sailor. 4, son of Atreus. ὃ, Mercury. ὃ, north wind. 
S..N. rapids ναύτης Argeidns “πρμεᾶς, Louis βοῤῥᾶς 
α. ταμίου ναύτου ‘Argeldou “Ἑρμέου, “Ἑρμοῦ βοῤῥὰ 
D. ταμίᾳ ναύτῃ Argeidy “Eoued, “Ερμῇ βοῤῥᾷ 
Α. ταμὶἂν ναύτην ‘Argeidny “Ἐρμέᾶν, “Ἑρμῆν βοῤῥᾶν 
V. ταμία ναῦτὰ ‘Argsidn “Ερμέᾶ, “Ἑρμὴ βοῤῥᾶ 
P.N. ταμίαν ναῦται Argeidae “Ερμέαι, “Egquat ὃ, Gobryas. 
G. ταμιῶν ναυτῶν ᾿Δτρειδῶν “Ἐρμεῶν, Eoquav Ν. Γωθρύᾶς 
Ὦ. ταμίαις ναύταις “Ἀτρείδαις “Eouéaic, Ἑρμαῖς G. Γωθρύου 


A. ταμίᾶς ναὐτᾶς ᾿Ατρείδᾶς “Ἐρμέᾶς, “Eouas ΤΙ wboud 
D.N.tapié ναύτᾶ ‘Argelda “Eouca, “Equa ἢ sh ρα 
. ταμίαιν ναύταιν ᾿Ατρείδαιν “Ἑρμέαιν,᾿ Ερμαὶν Vv. po ota, 
. B. ἘΈΜΙΝΙΝΕ. 
7, shadow. 4, door. 7, tongue. ἧς, honor. %, mina. 
S. N. σκιά ϑύρᾶ γλῶσσα τιμή pred, μνᾶ 
G. σκιᾶς ϑύρᾶς γλώσσης τιμῆς μναάᾶς, μνᾶς 
D. σκιᾷ ϑύρᾳ γλώσσῃ τιμῇ pve, μνᾷ 
A. σκιάν ϑύρᾶν γλῶσσᾶν τιμήν μναάᾶν, μνᾶν 
P. Ν. σκιαΐ ϑύραι γλῶσσαι τιμαί ᾿ prea, μναῖ 
G. σκιῶν ϑυρὼν γλωσσῶν τιμῶν μναῶν, μνῶν 
D. σκιαῖς ϑύραις γλώσσαις τιμαῖς μνάαις, μναῖς 
Α. σκιάς ϑύρᾶᾷς γλωσσᾶς τιμᾶς μνάᾶς, μνᾶς 
D. Ν. σκιά ϑύρᾶ γλώσσα τά . ved, μνᾶ 
G. σκιαν ϑύραιν γλώσσαιν τιμαῖν μνάαιν, μναῖν 
{ 8. Drarecrio Forms, . 
S. N. ds, Ion. ns+ rains, βορῆς. Τρ. Ton. my, e& (masc.); ra- 
ns, Dor. ὥς + ναύτᾶς, ᾿Ασρείδάς. [uiny,’ Ἀρισταγόρην, «εἄ-. 
Old, ἄ- ἱπαόσᾶ, μητίετα. ” (Dor. ἄν - γαύτάᾶν, σιμᾶν. 
@, Ion. n+ σκιή, ϑύρη. V. &, Ion. + rain. 
é, Ion. n+ Ep. ἀληθείην, κνίσση- &, Poet. η- Αἰήση Ap. Rh. 
ἡ) Dor. ὦ" σιμά, ψυχά, γᾶ. n, Dor. @+ ’Argsidd, Μενάλκᾶ. 
G. ov, Old, do+ *Argsidao, Bogtdo. Old, ὦ - νύμφα, Mind. 
Ion. sw, ὠ" ᾿Αφρείδεω, Βορέω: P.G. ay, Old, dav ᾿Αφρειδάων. 
Dor. 4 " Aresibé, " Ἕρμᾶ. Ton. ἔων - ᾿Ατρειδέων, ϑυρέων. 
Ion. ns* σκιῆς, ϑύρης. Dor. ἄν" ᾿Ασρειδᾶν, ϑυρᾶν. 
Dor. ὥς" τιμᾶς,) γλώσσᾶς. D. ais, Old, casos > ναύφαισι, ϑύραισι 
Ep. n9s(v) - Αἰσύμηϑεν. Jon. σι, ns + ϑύρησι, πέπρῃς 
D. ᾳ {Ion. 5’ σαμίῃ, ϑύρῃ. A. ἄς, Ion. s&s (masc.) ; δεσαόφσεῶς 
Dor. e+ ναύσᾳ, σιμᾷ. Dor. ἄς " Μοῖρας, νύμφας. 


Ep. ngu(») + ϑύρηφι(ν). 280]. ais " ταὶς σιμαίς. 


4 9, 10.] 


SEVOND DECLENSION. 


q 9. 1v. Nouns or THE Seconp DEcLENSION 


6, word. 6, people. 


λό γος 
λόγου 
λόγῳ 
λόγον 
λόγε 


<PyaZ 


λόγοι 

λόγων 
λόγοις 
λόγους 


SAA 


λόγω 
λόγοιν 


QA p 


τὸ, fig. 
σῦκον 
σύκου 
σύκῳ 


az 


σῦκα 
σύκων 
σύκοις 


σύκω 
σύκοιν 


aZ DAZ 


A. MAscuLiInE AND FEMININE. 


Hy way. ὃ, mind. 


ὃ, temple. 


~ c , ΄ Ὁ Ὁ ΡΩΝ a & [ὦ 
δῆμος οδός νόος, νοῦς νᾶος, νεὼς 
c ~ , ~ Ἰωὺ ~ ’ 
δήμου οδοῦ γνοου, νοῦ γὰοῦ, YEO 
[ἢ c ~ , - x ταὶ 
δήμῳ ὁδῷ νόῳ, νῷ vow, νεῷ 
δῆμον odov γόον, νοῦν γᾶόν, νεων, γεὼ 
-" © ’ , ~ 
δῆμε 008 γόε, νοῦ ᾿ 
~ c ’ ~ - , 
δῆμοι οδοΐ YOOL, vot viol, vEw 
, ~ , - - “ἢ ~ 
δήμω οδῶν vowry, νῶν vier, νεῶν 
, c ~ , ~ - «~ ~ 
δήμοις ὁδοῖς γόοις, νοῖς νᾶοῖς, νεῷς 
δήμους δούς νόους, νοῦς νᾶοῦς, νεώς 
ὃ , δὃ [ὦ ΄ , .--ὡ- ἢ , 
ἤμω οϑω VOW, vO vu, νεὼ 
« ΄ ~ - ~~ od 
Onuow οδοῖν voow, voiy viol, γεῷν 
B. NEvutTer. 
. . 4 
τὸ, wing. τὸ. part. to, bone. τὸ; chamber. 
΄ ῳ > > - 3 , 
πτερὸν μορίον OOTEOY, ὀστοῦν ἀνώγεων 
- > 3 ~ > 
πτεροῦ μορίου οστέου, ὀστοῦ , ἀνώγεω 
- > > a = > , 
πτερῷ μορίῳ οστέῳ, οστῷ ἀνώγεῳ 
[2 , - > tw > - a oe 
πτερἅ μοριᾷ οστέᾶ,. ὀστᾶ ἀνώγεω 
~ > ' 3 - ? 
πτερὼν μορίων ὀστέων, ὀστῶν ἀνώγεων 
~ 7 3 ’ > ~ > ΄ 
πτεροῖς μορίοις Οστέοις, ὀστοῖς ἀνώγεῳς 
᾿ > ’ > , > 2 
πτερὼ μορίω COTE, οστώ ἀνωγεω 
~ 3 ᾽ ~ > 
πτεροῖν μορίοιν ὀστέοιν, στον ἀγώγεῳν 


1 69. Γτλιξοτιο Forms. 


SN. os, Laconic, op + παλεόρ, ὃ 70.4. 5, Ὁ 
G. ov, Ep. o10* «οῖο λόγοιο: 


Dor. w* ra λόγω. 
Clon. ew + Bérrew, Κροίσεω.) 


Ep. οϑε(») + οὐράνοϑεν. 


bg Ν, 


ὦ (contracted from aov), Ep. wo- 


Ilsrewo. 


Ὁ. ῳ, Old, οι. Ἴσϑιμοῖ, “οἵ δάμοι. 
Ep. οφι(ν) αὐτόφι, ζυγόφιν. 
Ep. 99... otgavo: Ἰλιό. D 


(G. 
D. 


ῳ, Boot. 5: aicd, rv δάμῦ. 
o, Boot. o* καλῦ, “ Ouned. 
wy, Ion. ἔων" πεσσέων, rugiwy.) 
ois, Old, sos σοῖσι λόγοισι. 


Boeot. is > rs ZAAs προξένῦς 
A. ous, Dor. QS, ὃς" τὼς λόγως, ras 
λύκος, παρϑένος. 
280]. ois + ἀνδρεΐοις πέπλοις, 
Tols νόμοις. 


. G. 


oy, Ep. οιἷν " ἵσποιῖν, ὥμοιϊν. 


16 TABLES. [q 


Q £28. v. Nouns or tue Tuirp Deciension. 


A. Mure. 
1, LABIAL. 2. PALATAL. 
6, vulture. ἡ, vein. 6, raven. 6,7, goat. 7, phalanx. %, hair 
S. Ν. γύψ φλέψ κόραξ αἴξ φᾶἄλαγξ ϑρίξ 
G. γῦπός φλεβὸς κορᾶκος αἰγός φάλαγγος τρῖχός 
. yoni φλεβί κόρακι αἰγί φάλαγγι τριχί 
. γῦπα φλέβα κόρακα αἶγα φάλαγγα τρίχα 


. yinov φλεβῶν χοράχων αἰγῶν φαλάγγων τριχῶν» 
. γυψὶ ghewi κόραξι αἰξί φάλαγξι Fost 
. γῦπας φλέβας κόρακας αἶγας φάλαγγας τρίχας 


D 
A 
P. N. γῦπες φλέβες κόρακες αἷγες φάλαγγες τρίχες 
G : 
D 


yune gheBe xogaxe uiys φαλαγγε τρἶχε 
γῦποϊν φλεβοῖν xoguxow αἰγοῖν φαλάγγοιν τριχοῖ» 


8. LINGUAL. 


a. Masculine and Feminine. 


ὃ, 7, child. 6, foot. 6, sovereign. 7, grace. ἢ, key. 


΄ UJ "ν 
&. N. παῖς πούς ἄναξ yuots κλεῖς 
, , ” oe ᾿ 
G. παιδὸς ποδός ἄνακτος yugitos κλειδὸς 
͵ »” , ’ 
D. παιδὲ ποδί ἄνακτι χάριτι κλειδέ 
A. παῖδα. πόδα ἄναχτα χάριτα, χάρϊν κλεῖδα, κλεῖν 
Υ. nat ἀνὰ 
~ , , , ~ ~ 
P. N. aaideg πόδε ἄνακτες χάριτες κλεῖδες, κλεῖς 
~ > , ~ 
G. παίδων ποδὼν ανάχτων χαρίτων κλειδῶν 
D. παιυΐ ποσί ἄναξι .-“ χάρισι κλεισί 
: , + ΝΗ , ry i 
A. παῖδας πόδας ᾿ ἄνακτας χάριτας κλεῖδας, κλεῖς 
D. N. παῖδε πόδε ἄνακτε χάριτε κλεῖδε 
~ ? ~ 
G. naidow ποδοῖν avaxtow χαρίτοιν κλειδοὶν 
β. Neuter. 
10, body. τὸ, light. 10, liver. 10, horn. τὸ, ear 
~ " Ma ‘oo 5 
S. N. coue φῶς ἡπᾶρ κέρᾶς οὐς 
re , @ ~« ‘ = ’ ’ 32 
G. σώμᾶτος φωτός ἥπᾶτος κέρατος, κέραος, κέρως ὠτός 
D. cower φωιῖξ ἥπατι κέἐρᾶτι, xégai, κέρᾳ orl 
΄ - τ᾿ = ’ - τ 
ΡΝ. σώματα φῶτα ἥπατα κέρατα, κέρχα, κέρᾶ wre 
, ~ » 
G. σωμάτων φώτων ἡπάτων κεράτων κεράων, κερῶν ὦτω» 
, ’ uo _- ? 
D. σώμασι gaol ἥπασι κέρᾶσι aol 
~ - - τ 
Ὁ. N. σώματε φῶτε amare κέραᾶτε, κέραε, κέἐρᾶ wre 
G. σωμάτοιν φώτοιν ἡπάτοιν κεράτοιν, κεράοιν, κερῷν ὦτοιν 


4 12 13.) 


τῃ 


G2 ΡΘΩΣΖ ὩΡΘΩΣΖ 


ΩΖΡΌΩΣΖ «ρΌΩΖ 


QZ POONA “ΡΘΩΖ 


THIRD DEULENSION. 


1 12. B. Liqum. 


2 * 


17 


ὃ, harbour. ὃ, deity. ἢ, nose. ὃ, beast. ὃ. orator. 7, hana 
λίμήν δαΐμων bis P70 ῥήτωρ χείρ 
λιμένος δαίΐμονος gives ϑηρός ῥήτορος χειρύς 
λιμένι δαίμονι ὁτνί ϑηρί ὁήτορι χειρί 
λιμένα δαίμονα Oia ϑῆρα ὁήτορα χεῖρα 

δαῖμον ὁΐν ὁῆτορ 
λιμένες δαίΐμονες ὁῖνες ϑῆρες ῥήτορες χεῖρες 
λιμένων δαιμόνων ὁϊνῶν ϑηρῶν ῥητόρων χειρῶν 
λιμέσι δαίμοσι divi Inoot ῥήτορσι χεροί 
λιμένας δαίμονας ὄϊΐνας ϑῆρας ῥήτορας χεῖρας 
λιμένε δαΐμονε dive Poe ῥήτορε χεῖρε 
λιμένοιν δαιμόνοιν ῥῖνοῖν ϑηροῖν ῥητόροιν χεροῖν 
Syncopated. 
6, father. ὃ, man. 1, mother. ὃ. ἡ, dog. ὃ, ἧς lamb. 
πᾶτήρ ἀνήρ μήτηρ κύων (ἀμνός) 
πατέρος, πατρός ἀνέρος, ἀνδρός μητρός κυνός ἀρνός 
πατέρι, πατρὲ ἀνέρι, ἀνδρὲέ μητρί κυνέ ἀρνί 
πατέρα ἀνέρα, ἄνδρα μητέρα κύνα ἄρνα 
πάτερ ἄνερ μῆτερ κύον 
πατέρες ἀνέρες, ἄνδρες μητέρες κύνες ἄρνες 
πατέρων ἀνέρων, ἀνδρῶν μητέρων κυνῶν ἀρνῶν 
πατράσι ἀνδράσι μητράσι xvol ἀρνάσι 
Α δι᾿ ὧν » ' , ” 
πατέρας ἀνέρας, ἀνδρας μητέρας κύνας ἄρνας 
πατέρε ἀνέρε, ἄνδρε μητέρε κύνε ἄρνε 
πατέροιν ἀνέροιν, ἀνδροῖν μητέροιν κυνοῖν ἀρτοῖν 
4 13. c. Liqutp-MorTe, 

6, lion. 0, tooth. ὃ, giant. 7%, wife. 6, Xenophon. 
λέων ὀδυύς γίγας δάμαρ Ξενοφῶν 
λέοντος δόντος γίγαντος δάμαρτος ΞΖενοφῶντος 

, 2 ’ , , on ~ 
λέοντε = ott γχγίγαντε δάμαρτι Ξενοφῶντι 
λέοντα δόντα γίγαντα δάμαρτα οξενοφώντα 
λέον yiyey 
λέοντες ὀδόντες γίγαντες δάμαρτες ἡ. Opus. 
λεόντων ὀδόντων γιγάντων δαμάρτων 8. Ν. ’Onove 
λέουσι. ὀδοῦσι γίγᾶσι δάμαροι G. ᾿Οποῦντος 
λέοντας οδόντας γίγαντας δάμαρτας D. ᾿᾽ποῦντι 

2 Pa 

λέοντε ὀδόντε γίγσντε δάμαρτε A. Ὀποῦντα 
λεόντοιν ὁδόντοιν γιγάντοιν δαμάρτοιν 


18 


Ρ' 


τι 


aA <PoaZ 


AZ PYaZ <PoaZ 


aL PY 


ZdPyOZ 


aA Poe 


TABLES. 


{ 24. D. Pours. 


a. Masculine and Feminine. 


o, jackal. o, hero. 


6, weevil. ὃ, ἡ, sheep. 


[114 


ὃ, fish. 


΄ ΠῚ Ζ 3 > é 
Ic NEWS xLC οἷς ἰχϑυς 
ϑωός ἥρωος “LOC οἷός ἰχϑῦύος 
Sot nowt (now) xii out igo vi 
Tou ἥρωα, Now xiv οἷν ἰχϑύν 

ἰχϑυ 

ϑῶες ἥρωες χἵες οἷες, οἷς ἰχϑύες, ἰχϑῦς 
ϑώων ἡρώων χκὧν οἰῶν ind vu 
ϑωσί ἥρωσι κσί οἱσὶ ind bur 

- ϑῶας ἥρωας, ἥρως κἕας οἷας, οἷς ἰχϑύας, ἰχϑὺῦς 
ϑῶε ἥρωε “Le οἷε ἰχϑύε, ἰχϑῦ 
ϑώοιν ἡρώοιν χον οἰἱοὶν iy 9 vou 
ὃ, knight. ὃ, 1), OX. ἡ, οἷά woman. 1, ship. 
ἱππεύς βοῦς γραῦς vous 
ἱππέως βοῦς γρᾶος νεώς 
ἱπτπεϊ, ἱππεὶ Bot yout γηΐ 
ἱππέα βοῦν γραῦν ναῦν 
ἱππεῦ βοῦ γραῦ 
ἱππέες, ἱππεῖς βόες γρᾶες VEG 
ἱππέων βοῶν youu γεῶν 
ἱππεῦσι βουσὶ γραυσὶ vavot 
ἱτιπέᾶς, ἱππεῖς βόας, βοῦς γρᾶας, γραῦς ναῦς 
ἱππέε βόε γρᾶε γῆε 
ἱππέοιν βοοῖν γρᾶοϊν veo 
6, cubit. ἡ, city. ἥ, trireme. 

\ πῆχῦς πόλϊς τριήρης 
πήχεως πόλεως τριήρεος, τριήρους 
πήχεϊ, πήχει πόλεϊ, πόλει τριήρεϊ, τριήρει 
πῆχυν πόλιν τριήρεα, τριήρη 
πῆχυ πόλι τριῆρες 
πήχεες, πήχεις πόλεες, πόλεις τριήρεες, τριήρεις 
πήχεων (πηχῶν) πόλεων τριηρέων, τριήρων 
πήχεσι πόλεσι τριήρεσι 
πήχεας, πήχεις πόλεις, πόλεις τριήρεας, τριήρεις 
πήχεξ πόλεε, πόλη τριήρεε, τριήρη 
πηχέοιν πολέοιν τριηρέοιν, τριηροῖν 


Ἵ 14, 15.] THIRD DECLENSION. 19 


ἡ, echo. 7, shame. ὃ, Socrates. 
S. N. ἠχώ αἰδώς Σωκρἅτης 
G. 771008, ἠχοῦς αἰδόος, αἰδοῦς Σωκράτεος, Σωκράτους 
Ὁ. got ἠχοῖ aidot, aidot Σωκράτεϊ, Σωκράτει 
Α. ἠχόα, ἠχώ αἰδόα, αἰδὼ Σωκράτεα, Σωκράτη, Σωκράτην 
Υ. ηχοῖ αἰδοῖ “Σώκρατες 
6, Pireeus. ὃ. Hercules. 
SN. πειραιεύς Ἡρακλέης, ‘Hoenig 
G. Μειραιέως, Πειραιῶς “Ἡρακλέεος, Ἡρακλέους 
D. Πειραιέϊ,. Πειραιεῖ “Πρακλέεϊ, Ἡρακλέει, Ἡρακλεῖ 
A. Μειραιέᾶ, Πειραιᾷ “Πρακλέεα, Ἡρακλέᾶ, “Ἡρακλῆ 
V. μειραιεῦ “Ἡράκλεες, Ἡράκλεις (ρακλες) 
β. Neuter. 
τὸ, wall τὸς town. τὸ, honor. 
SN. τεῖχος ἀστῦ γέρᾶς 
G. τεΐχεος, «εἰχους ἄστεος, ἄστεως γέρᾶος, γέρως 
D. τείχεϊ, τείχει ἄστεϊ, ἄστει γέραϊ, γέρᾳ 
P N. τείχεα, εεΐχη ἄστεα, ἄστη γέραα, γέρα 
G. τειχέων͵ τειχῶν ἀστέων γεράων, γερῶν 
D. τείχεσι ἄστεσι γέρασι 
ἢ. Ν. τείχεβ, τείχη ἄστεε γέραε, γέρα 
G. τειχέοιν, τειχοὶν ἀστέοιν γεράοιν, γερῷν 
{ 1. Drarecrc Forms. 
5. G. «τος, Ion. tos + κέρεος, σέρεος. P. N. sis, Old Att. ἧς ° βασιλῇς- 


sos, Ion. evs + ϑέρευς, ϑάμβευς. 
ἕως, Ep. jos + βασιλῆος. 

Ton. and Dor. éo5 - βασιλέος. 
sws, Ion. and Dor. τος + πόλιος. 
430s, lon. and Dor. sos - Κύσριος- 

Dor. ‘Tog " Θέμεσος. 
οὖς, Dor. and ol. ὥς, οἷς ἀχῶς, 


Ep. ves + βασιλῇες- 
Ton. tes + βασιλέες. 
εἰς, Ion. and Dor. seg + πόλιες. 
aa, Poet. d+ γέρω, xed. 
Ton. εα " γέρεα, τέρεα. 
G. wy, Ion. ἔων - χηνέων, ἀνδρέων. 
ἔων, Ep. joy βασιλήων. 


2. εἴ, Ep. 531: βασιλῇ!. [ἀοῖς. εων, lon. and Dor. ἴων σ'ολίων. 
Ton. εἴ" βασιλέ!. 4 Ὁ. σι(ν), Old, eai(v) - χείρεσι. 
si, Ion. T+ -£0AT, δυνάμοϊ. Poet. σσι(ν) + ἔσεσσι. 
(δι, Ion. 7+ Obéai, ἀσπόλϊ. ἐσσι(ν)" πόδεσσιν. 
A. ν, Poet. a+ εὐρέα, ἰχϑύα. ἐσι(ν), Ep. ἐσφι() " ὄχεσφιν. 
όα, Ion. οὖν - ᾿Ιοῦν, Anrody. Ton. «σι(ν) * πόλισι. 
Dor. ὧν - Ἥρων, Λασών. A. tas, Ep. fides ° βασιλῇᾶς. 
ta, Ep. ζᾶ - βασιλῇᾶ. Ion. ἐᾶς - βασιλέᾶς. 
Ion. ἐώ - βασιλέᾶ. Comm. εἴς - βασιλεῖς. 
Dor. ἢ - βασιλῇ. εἰς, Ion. and Dor. τας + σόλιας-, 
V. εν, Hol. s+ Σώκρατε. D. 6. ov, Ep. ostv+ ποδοῖν, Σειρήνο iv. 


20 


Ῥ, 


TABLES. [6 16 


4] 2G. vi. Irrecutar anp Diatectic DEcLENSION. 


6, Jupiter. ὃ, (Εαϊΐριι. ὁ, Glus 

N. Ζεύς, Ζᾶν (Dor.) Οἰδίσους TAovs 
G. Διός, Ζηνός, Zavos "Οἰδίποδος, Οἰδίπον Οἰδιπόδἄο. -ἄ, -2w, Tov 
D. Adi, Zavi, Zavi Oidixod.,  [(poet-), [D.-n, -¢,A.-nx, Γλοῦ 
A. Δία, Ζῆνα, Ζᾶνα Οἰδίποδα, Οἰδίασουν [-ἄν, V. -ἡ, -ὰ Τλοῦν 
Υ. Ζεῦ Οἰδίσου [(Ep. and Lyr.) ἔλοῦ 

Attic. ὃ, son Homeric. Doric. 1, ship. Ionic. 
N. υἱός υἱός ναῦς (ves) νηῦς (νηῦς) 
G. υἱοῦ, υἱέος υἱοῦ, υἷος, υἱέος νᾶδς νηός, νεός 
Ὁ. υἱῷ, υἱεῖ υἷι, υἱέ, υἱεῖ vat vant 
A. υἱόν vidv, υἷα, vied ναῦν (νῶν) νῆα; νέα, νηῦν 
Υ. vit 
N. υἱοί, υἱεῖς υἷες) ites, υἱεῖς νᾶες νῆες, νέες 
G. υἱῶν, υἱέων υἱῶν, υἱέων νᾶῶων νηῶν, νεῶν 
D. υἱοῖς, υἱέσι υἱοῖσι, vider, - ναυσί, νάεσσι νηῦσι, νήεσσι, νέεσσι; 
A. υἱούς, υἱεῖς υἱούς, vias, υἱέας vans νῆας, vies [ναῦφι 

Attic. +2, spear. Homeric. Homeric. +d, ‘ave. 
N. δόρυ δόρυ σπέος, σσίεῖος 
G. δόρατος, δορός (poet.) Yovguros, δουρός omsious 
D. digariy δορί, δόρει (poet.) δούρατι, δουρί orns 
N. δόρατα, δόρη (poet. ) δούρατα, δοῦρα 
G. δοράτων δούρων σπείων 
Ὁ. δόρασι δούρωσι, δούρεσσι σαέσσι, σπήισσ᾽ 

Homeric PARADIGMS. 
ὃ, knight. ἡ, city. 

N. ἱσσεύς σόλις , 
G. ἱπ'πῆος πόλιος, πόλιος, πόλεος (πσόλευς Theog.), πόληος 
D. ἱπσσῆϊ (σόλι Hdt.), wrdasi, πόλει, πόληϊ 
A. ἱπσπῆα πόλιν, ππόλιν (σόληα Hes. 
Υ. “σεῦ 
N. faeries, ἱππεῖς πόλιες (πόλις Hat.), σόληις 
G. ἱπσ-πήων σολίων 
D. ἱππεῦσι πολίεσσι (πολίεσι Pind., σόλισι Hat.) 
A. ἱπσσῇῆας πόλιας (πόλτς Hdt.), πόλεις, σπόληας 

ὃ, Ulysses. é, Patroclus. 
N. ᾿Οδυσσεύς, ᾽Οδυσεύς Πάτροκλος 
G. Οδυσσῇος, ᾿Οδυσσξος, ᾿Οδυσῇος. ᾿ΟΣυσεῦς Πατρόκλου, -o10, TlargoxA ties 
D. ‘Odueni, Ὄδυσε Πατρόκλῳ 
A. ᾿Ὄδυσσῇα, ᾽Οδυσσέα, Ὄξυσῃα, ᾿Οδυσῇῆ = largoxaoy, Πασροκλῆα 
Υ. Ὀδυσσεῦ, ᾽Οδυσεῦ Πάτροκλε, Tlargoxas 


4] 17. ] ADJECTIVES. 21 


4 €7. vu. Apsectives or Two Terminations. 
A. Or THE SEconD DECLENSION, 


ὃ, ἡ (unjust) τὸ ὃ, ἡ (unfading) τὸ 


ow ” 3 
S. Ν. adixog ἀδικον ἀγήρᾶος, ἄγήφψως ἀγήραον, ἀγήρων 
(α. αδέκου ἀγηφάου, ἀγήρω 
> 
D. ἀδέκῳ ἀγηράῳ, ἀγήφῳ 
A. ἀδικον ἀγήραον, ἀγήρων, ἀγήρω 
Νν. ἄδικε 
, 2 , 3 [ 
P. N ἄδικοι ἄδικα ἀγήφαοι, ἀγήφῳ ἀγήραα, ἀγήρω 
G. ἀδίκων ἀγηφάων, ἀγήρων 
TD. ἀδέκοις ἀγηράοις, ἀγήφῳς 
> 
ΔΛ. ἀδίκους ἀγηφάους, ἀγήρως 
D.N. ἀδέκω ἀγηφάω, ἀγήρω 
α. ἀδίέκοιν ἀγηράοιν, ἀγήρῳν 
Β. Or tHe THirp DEcLENSION. 
ὃ, ἡ (male) τὸ ὃ, ἡ (pleasing) τὸ ὃ, ἡ (ttwo-footed) to 
SN. ἀῤῥδην ἄῤῥεν εὔχαρις εὔχαρι δίπους δίπουν 
α. ἄῤῥενος εὐχάρϊ τὸς δίποδος 
D. ἄῤῥενι εὐχάριτι , δίποδι 
Α. ἀῤῥενα εὐχάριτα, εὔχαριν δίποδα, δίπουν 
Υ, ἄῤῥεν εἰχαρι ες δίπου 
PLN. ἄῤῥενες ἄῤῥενα εὐχάρετες εὐχάριτα δίποδες δίποδα 
G. ἀῤῥένων εὐχαρίτων διπόδων 
Ὁ. ἄῤῥεσι εὐχάρισι δίποσι 
Α. ἄῤῥενας εὐχάριτας δίποδας 
ἢ. Ν, ἄῤῥενε εὐχάριτε δίποδε 
(1, ἀῤῥένοιν͵ εὐχαρίτοιν ἶ διπόδοιν 
ὃ, ἡ (evident) τὸ ὃ, ἡ (greater) τὸ 
S.N. σαφής σαφές μείζων μεῖζον 
G. σαφέος, σαφοῦς μείζονος 
D. σαφεῖ, σαφεῖ μείζονι 
A. σαφέα, σαφῆ μείζονα, μείζω 
V. σαφές μεῖζον 
P.N. υαφέες, σαφεῖς σαφέα, σαφῆ μείζονες, μείζους μείξονα, μείζω 
G. ougéwr, σαφῶν μειζόνων 
D. σαφέσι μείζοσι 
Α. σαφέας, σαφεὶς μείζονας, μείζους 
D.N. cages, σαφῆ μείζονε 
G. σαφέοιν, σεφοῖν μειζονοιν 


A 


a 
>uaZw 


-- 


ad 
. 


TABLES. [] 1s 


q 28. vis. Apsectives or Turee TERMINATIONS. 


A. OF THE SECOND AND First DECLENSIONS. 


42 πρϑῷ 


OZ Puyo 


ὃ (friendly) ἡ τὸ o(wise) ἡ. τὸ 
φίλιος φιλίάδ. φίλιον σοφός σοφή σοφο» 
φιλίου φιλίας σοφοῦ σοφῆς 
. φιλέῳ φιλίᾳ σοφῷ σοφῆ 
φίλιον φιλίᾶν σοφόν σοφήν 
φίλιε σοφὲ 
- φίλιοι φίλια. φίλιᾶ σοφοί copa σοφᾶ 
. φιλίων φιλίων σοφῶὼν σοφῶν 
φιλίοις οφιλίαις σοφοῖς σοφαῖς 
φιλίους φιλίας σοφούς σοφάς 
. φιλέω φιλία σοφώ copa 
- giiov φιλίαιν σοφοῖν σοφαῖν 
Contracted. 
ὃ (golden) ἡ τὸ 
χρύσεος, χρυσοῦς χρυσέᾶ, χρυσῆ χρύσεον, χρυσοῦ» 
χρυσέου, χρυσοῦ χρυσέᾶς, χρυσῆς 
χρυσέῳ, χρυσῷ χρυσέᾳ, χρυσὴ 


χούσεον, χρυσοῦ χρυσέᾶν, χρυσὴν 


χρύσεοι, χρυσοῖ χρύσεαι, χρυσαὶ χρύσεᾶ, χρυσᾶ 
χρυσέων, χρυυνῶν χρυσέων, χρυσῶν Ξ 
χουσέοις. χρυσοῖς χρυσέαις, χρυσαΐς 
χρυσέους, χρυυοῦς χρυσέᾶς, χρυσᾶς 


’ ΄ - ~ 
χουσέω, χρυσω χρυσέᾶ, χρυσὰ 
~ ’ ~ 

χυυσέοιν, χρυσοῖν χρυσέαιν, χρυσαῖν + 


aZ PYaZ ΘΩ͂ 


ὃ (double) ἡ τὸ 

διπλόος, διπλοῦς διπλόη, διπλὴ διπλόον, διπλοῦν 
διπλόου, διπλοῦ διπλόης, διπλῆς 

διπλόῳ, διπλῷ Sinkon, διπλῇ 

διπλόον, διπλοῦν διπλόην, διπλῆν 

διπλόοι, διπλοῖ διπλόαι, διπλαῖ διπλόδ, διπλᾶ 
διπλύων, διπλῶν διπλόων, διπλῶν 


διπλόοις, διπλοῖς διπλόαις, διπλαῖς 
διπλόους, διπλοῦς διπλόᾶς, διπλᾶς 


Z »ΌΩΝΖ 


διπλόω, διπλώ διπλόᾶ, διπλᾶ 
διπιλόοιν, διπλοῖν διπλόαιν, διπλαῖν 


wa 


QZ PUNA PYaZ 


τα 
-“»ΘΩΖ 


19, 20. 


QA ΡΘΩΖ APonsm 


QZ PyaZ 


ADJECTIVES. 


4 19. B. Or rue Turn anv First DEcLENSIONS. 


ὃ (black) ἢ τὸ 
μέλᾶς μέλαινά μέλᾶν 
μέλᾶνος μελαίνης 

μέλανι μελαΐένῃ 

μέλανα μέλαινᾶν 

μέλανες μέλαιναι μέλανα 
μελάνων μελαινῶν 

μέλασι μελαίναις 
μέλανας μελαϊνᾶς 

μέλανε μελαίνᾷ 

μελάνοιν μελαΐναιν 
(agreeable) 7 τὸ 
χαρΐεις χαρίεσσά χαρίεν 
χαρίεντος χαριέσσης 
χαρίεντε χαριέσσῃ 
χαρίεντα χαρίεσσᾶν 
χαρίεν 

χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα 
χαριέντων χαριεῦύσῶν 
χαρίεσι χαριέσσαις 

_ yugtertas χαριέσσᾶς 
χαρίεντε χαριέσσᾶ 


χαριέντοιν χαριέσσαιν 


{2 9. C. Or rue Taree 


ὃ (great) ἡ 


μὲγᾶς 
με yuhov 
μεγάλῳ 
μέγαν 
μὲ γάλε 


μεγάλοι 

μεγάλων 
μεγάλοις 
μεγάλους 


μεγάλο 
μεγάλοιν 


‘ 
to 


μεγάλη μέγα 
μεγάλης 

μεγάλῃ 

μεγάλην 


μεγάλαι μεγάλᾶ 
μεγάλων 
μεγάλαις 

με γαλᾶς 

μεγαλᾶ 

μεγάλαιν 


23 
ὃ (all) ἡ τὸ 
πᾶς πᾶσᾶᾷπ πὰν 
παντός πάσης 
παντί πάσῃ 
πᾶντα πᾶσᾶν 
πᾶντες πᾶσαι πάντα 
πάντων πασῶν 
πᾶσι πάσαις 
πάντας πασᾶς 
πᾶντε πασᾶ 
πάντοιν πάᾶσαιν 
ὃ (sweet ) ” το 
ἡδῦς noma Ov 
ἥδέος ἡδείας 
ἡδέϊ, ἡδεῖ ἡδείᾳ 
ἡδύν ἡδεϊᾶν 
ἡδύ 
ἡδέες, ἡδεῖς ἡδεῖαι ἡδέο 
ἡδέων ἡδειῶν 
ἡδέσι ἡδείαις 
ἡδέας, ἡδεῖς ἡδείᾶς 
ἡδέε ἡδεία 
ἡδέοιν ἡδείαιν 
DeEcLENSIONS. 
ὃ (much) ἡ τὸ 
πολύς πολλή πολύ 
πολλοῦ πολλῆς 
πολλῷ πολλῇ 
πολύν πολλήν 

(many) 

πολλοὶ πολλαΐ πολλά 
πολλῶν πολλῶν 
πολλοῖς πολλαῖς 
πολλούς πολλᾶς 


94 


S. N. σολύς, σουλύς 
G. σολέος 
D. (πολεῖ Asch.) 


A. πολύν, πουλύν 


P. N. σολέες, πολεῖς 
G. σολέων 


TABLES. — NUMERALS. [{ 20, 21. 


Homeric Forms of σολύς. 


σολλός 
σολλῷ 
“πολλόν 


΄σολλοί 
Torro 


ἡ σὸ 

πολλή WoAV, σουλύ, πολλόν 
σολλῆς 

πολλῇ 

σολλήν, πουλύν 

σολλαί (πολία Asch.) πολλά 


πολλᾷᾶάων, πολλέων 


͵ ~ ~ ~ 
D. πολέσι, -ἔσσι, -ἑεσσι πολλοῖσι, -cis πολλῇσι 


A. πολέας, πολεῖς 


S. ὃ (mild) ἡ 

Ν. πρᾶος πραεϊᾶ 
G. πράου πρκείᾷς 
D. πράῳ πραείᾳ 
A. πρᾶον πραεὶϊᾶν 


πολλούς 


‘ 
το 


πρᾶον 


{51. 


M. (one) ΒΞ. Ν. 
5. Ν. ες pit ἕν 
G. ἑνός μιὰς 
D. bi μιᾷ 
A. ἕνα μίαν 
Ep. Dor. Ion. Ep. 
N. tus, ἧς pin, ta 


G. mins, ins 
Ὁ. ig μιῇ, ἰῇ 
2 μείην, lay 
Μ. F. N., two. 


D. N. A. δύο, δύω 


“πολλάς 


P. ot αἵ τὰ 
πρᾶοι, πραεῖς πραεῖαν πραέα 
πραέων πραειῶν 
πράοις, πραέσε πραείαις πραέσι 
πράους, πραεῖς πραείᾶς 


1x. NUMERALS. 


M. (noone) F. N. M., none. 
οὐδείς οὐδεμία οὐδὲν P. οὐδένες 
οὐδενός οὐδεμιᾶς οὐδένων 

? ' Ie: - 7or 
οὐδενί ουδὲμιᾷ οὐδέσι 

Sen se 5 Dies 
οὐδένα οὐδεμίαν οὐδένας 

Late. Ion. - Late. Ton. 
οὐϑεις οὐδερμείη οὐθέν οὐδαμοί, N. -& 
οὐθενός οὐδεμιῆς οὐδαμῶν 
ovDsvi οὐδεμιῇ οὐδαμοῖς 
οὐθένα οὐδερείην οὐδαμμούς, F. -ίας 


M. F.N,, both. 
ἄμφω 


G. D. δυοῖν, δυεῖν (Att.) P. D. δυσέ (rare) ἀμφοῖν 


Ep. 
Νι a δοιώ 
G. 


D. 

A. 
M. F. (three) N. 
P.N. resis τρία 
G. τριῶν 
ἢ). τρισί 
Α. τρεῖς 


Poet. 
D. τριοῖσι 


Ep. Ion. 
δοιοί, -αἱ, «ὦ 
δυῶν 
δοιοῖς, -οἵσι, δυοῖσι 
δοιούς, -ἄς 


Μ. F. (four) N. 
τέσσᾶρες, τέτταρες τέσσαρα, τέτταρα 
τεσσάρων, τεττάρων 
τέσσαρσι, τέτταρσι 
τέσσαρας, τέτταρας 

Ion. σέσσερες, Dor. σέσορες and rirrogts, 
Fol. and Ep. πίσυρες, &e.; Dat., Ep. and 
in late prose, riredes. 


{i 22.] PARTICIPLES. 25 


q 22. x. ParriciPes. 


1. Present Active. 


ec * « 4a 
ὃ (advising) 7 τὸ 
S. N. βουλεύων βουλεύουσᾶ βουλεῦον 
G. βουλεύοντος βουλευούσης 
[)ὴ. βουλεύοντι βουλευούση 
A. -βουλεύοντα βουλεύουσᾶν 
DP. N. βουλεύοντες βουλεύουσα, βουλεύοντα 
G. βουλευόντων βουλευουσῶν 
D. βουλεύουσι βουλευούσαις 
Α. βουλεύοντας βουλευούσᾶς 
c= 
ἢ. N. δβουλεύοντε βουλευούσᾶ 
G. βουλευόντοιν ᾿ βουλευούσαιν 
2. Present Active Contracted. 
c - « 
ὃ (honoring) ῇ τὸ 
5. N. τιμάων, τιμῶν τιμάουσᾶ, τιμῶσᾶ τιμάον, τιμῶν 
; τὸ 
G. τιμάοντος, τιμῶντος τιμαούσης, τιμώσης 
, - , , 
D. τιμάοντι, τιμῶντι τιμαούσῃ, τιμώσῃ 
A. τιμάοντα, τιμῶντα τιμάουσᾶν, τιμῶσᾶἂν 
P.N. τιμάοντες, τιμῶντες τιμάουσαι, τιμῶσαι τιμάοντα, τιμῶντα 
G. τιμαόντων, τιμώντων τιμαουσῶν, τιμωσῶν 
΄ ~ , , 
D. τιμάουσι, τιμῶσι τιμαούσαις, τιμώσαις 
, ~ , - ’ - 
A. τιμάοντας, τιμῶντας τιμαούσῶς, τιμώσᾶς 
D.N. τιμάοντε, τιμῶντε τιμαούσᾶ, τιμώσᾶ 
, 
G. τιμαόντοιν, τιμώντοιν τιμαούσαιν, τιμώσαιν 
3. Liquid Future Active. 4. Aorist 1. Active 
. ε 
o(abouttoshow) ἢ τὸ ὃ (having left) ἡ τὸ 
5. Ν. φανῶν φαγνοῦσὰ φανοῦν λιπών λιποῦσᾶ λιπόν 
G. φανοῦντος φανούσης λιπόντος λιπούσης 
~ , , 
D. φανοῦντι φανούσῃ λιπόντι λιπούσῃ 
A. φανοῦντα φανοῦσᾶν λιπόντα λιπουσᾶν 
~ ~ ~ ~ 4 
PN. φανοῦντες φανοῦσαι φανοῦντα λιπόντες λιποῦσαι λιπόντα 
G. φανούντων φανουσῶν λιπόντων λιπουσῶν 
1). φανοῦσνι φανούσαις λιποῦσι λιπούσαις 
- “ γἥ «- 
A. φανοῦντας φανούσᾶς λιπόντας λιπούσᾶς 
~ « Τ᾽ Ὡρ 
D.N. φανοῦντε φανούσᾶ λιπόντε λιπούσᾶ 


, , 
G. φανούντοιν φανούσαιν ο΄ λιπόντοιν λιπούσαιν 


-- --.α.. 


26 TABLES. [{ 2x. 


τ 


5. Aorist 1. Active. 6. Acrist Passive. 
o (having raised) ἡ τὸ o(having appeared) ἡ τὸ. 
5. Ν. ἀρᾶς ἀρᾶσάῪ ἀρᾶν φανείς φανεῖϊσάᾶ φανέν 
G. ἄραντος ἀράσης φανέντος φανεΐσης 
D. ἄραντι ἀράσῃ φανέντι φανείσῃ 
A. ἄραντα ἀἄρᾶσᾶν φανέντα φανεϊσᾶν 
ΡΝ. ἄραντες ἄρᾶσαιν ἄραντα φανέντες φανεῖσαι φανέντα 
G. ἀράντων ἀρᾶσῶν φανέντων φαγεισὼν 
D. ἀρᾶσι ἀράσαις φανεῖσι φανείσαις 
Α. ἄραντας ἀράσᾶς ο΄ φανέντας φανείσᾶς 
Ὦ. Ν. ἄραντε ἀράσᾶ φανέντε φανείσᾶ 
G. ἀράντοιν ἀράσαιν φανέντοιν φανείσαιν 
7. Perfect Active. 8. Perfect Active Contracted. 
6 (knowing) ἡ τὸ 6 (standing) 7 τὸ 
S. N. εἰδώς sidvia εἶδός ἕστώς ἑστῶσἄ ἕστώς, ἑστόρ 
G. εἰδότος εἰδυίᾶς ἑυτῶτος ἑἕστώσης 
D. εἰδότι εἰδυέᾳ ἑστῶτι Evtwon 
A. εἰδότα. εἰδυϊᾶν ἑστῶτα οτῶσᾶν 
P. N. εἰδότες εἰδυῖαν εἰδότα ἑστῶτες ἑἕστῶσαι ἑστῶτα 
6. εἰδότων εἰδυιῶν ἑστώτων ἑστωσῶν 
D. εἰδόσι εἰδυίαις ἑστῶσι ἕστωσαις 
A, εἰδότας εἰδυίᾶς ἑστῶτας ἑἕυτωυᾶς 
Ὁ. Ν. εἰδότε εἰδυίᾷ ἑυτῶτε ἕστωσᾶ 
G εἰδότοιν εἰδυΐέαιν ἑστώτοιν ἑἕστώσαιν 
9. From Verbs in -u:. 
ὃ (having given) 7 τὸ ὃ (having entered) ἡ τὸ 
S. N. δούς Soto  dov δύς Svcd Sty 
G. δόντος δούσης δύντος δύσης 
D. δόντι Sovon δύντι δύσῃ 
Α. δόντα δοῦοδν δύντα Stok 
P. N. δόντες δοῦσαι δόντα δύντες δῦσαι δύντα 
6. δόντων δουσῶν δύντων δυσῶν 
D. δοῦσι δούσαις δῦσι δύσαις 
Α. δόντας δούσᾶς δύντας δύσᾶς 
D. N. δόντε Sovak δύντε δύσᾶ 
G. δόντοιν δούσαιν δύντοιν δύσαιν 


4 23.] 


| 23. 


PRONOUNS, 


ΧΙ. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 


{To those forms which are used as enclitic, the sign Ὁ is affixed. The initials affixed to 


dialectic forms denote, EZ. .Eolic, 


P. Poetic. ] 
A. PERSONAL. 
Ist P. 1. 2d P. thou. 
S. N. ἐγώ ov 
G. ἐμοῦ, wovt cout 
D. ἐμοί, wot ooit 
A. ἐμέ, pet oét 
P. Ν. ἡμεῖς “Duets 
G. ἡμῶν Ὁμῶν 
Ὦ. ἡμῖν “ὑμὶν 
Α. ἡμᾶς ὑμᾶς 
D. Ν. νώ ogo 
G. νῷν σφῷν 


S. N. ἐγών, ἐγώ σύ, τὕνη 
G. ἐμέο, ἐμεῖο, ἐμεῦ, σέοϊ, cio, σεῦΐ, 
μεῦΐ, ἐμέϑεν σέϑεν, πεοῖο 
D. ἐμοί, polit σοί, roll, πεῖν 
A. ἐμέ, wit ct 
P.N. ἡμεῖς, ἄμμες ὑμεῖς, ὔμμες 
G. ἡμέων, ἡμείων ὑμέων, ὑμείων 
D. ἡμῖν, ἥμιν, ἡμῖν, ὑμῖν, ὕμμῖ(ν), ὕμρ᾽ 
ἄμμί(») > 
A. ἡμέᾶς, -tas, ἡμᾶς, ὑμέδς, -tas, ὕμμε 
ἄμμες 
Ὁ. Ν. var (δὲν Ὁ) σφῶϊ (σφῶϊν ?), σφώ 
G. νῶϊν σφῶϊν 
D. νῶϊν σφῶν, σφῷν 
Α. νῶϊ, νώ chai, σφώ 
Additional Forms. 
5. N. ἰών, ἰώ B. σ΄ D., rod Β. 
G. ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, ἐμοῦς Ὁ, σεῦΐ, τέος, τεῦς, reas, 
σεοῦ D. 
D. ἐμίν Ὦ. τίν Ὁ. 
Α. vt, rut Ὦ. 
P. N. nutes 1., 'ἱφμές D. ὑμέες 1., duets Ὁ. 
-G. μῶν D., ἀμρέων EE. ὑμμέων A, 
Ὁ. “ἀμίν D., ἄμμεσι(ν) AB. 
A. ‘gui Ὁ. but, tuys Ὦ. 


Homeric Forms. 


B. Beotic, Ὁ. Doric, E. Epic, L Ionic, O. Old, 


3d P. his, her. 


* 
out 
oit 
et 
σφεῖς 
σφῶν 
ogtot(v)t 
σφὰς 


σφωΐνῇ 


fot, εἶο, edt, ἔϑενῖ 
toi, off 


it, 4, viet 


σφίωνϊ, σφείων, σφῶν 


cgici(y)t, σφί (7, σφ᾽ 


σφίαςἷ, -tast, σφεῖᾶς, 


coast, σφέΐ 


σφωϊντ 
σφωεΐ, cpot or ofa 


FiSey AL., tovs D., iste Ἐν 


Fat &., ἵν or ἵν D. 
Fit Z., vt Ὁ. Py " 
Neut. cgéaf 1. 


givt, Lit D., ἄσφι A. 
Vit D., dogs A. 


28 


TABLES. 


[1 28 


B. REFLEXIVE. 


Ist P. M. (of myself) F. 

S. G. ἐμαυτοῦ ἐμαυτῆς 
D. ἐμαυτῷ ἐμαυτῇ 
A. ἐμαυτόν ἐμαυτὴν 

P. G. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ἡμῶν αὐτῶν 
Π. ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς ἡμῖν αὐταὶς 
Α. ἡμᾶς αὐτούς ἡμᾶς αὐτάς 


3d P. M., of himself. 


F., of herself. 


2d P. M. (of thyself) F. 
σεαυτοῦ, σαυτοῦ 
σεαυτῷ, σαυτῷ 

σεαυτὸν, σαντόν 


σεαυτῆς, σαυτῆς 
οεαυτῇ, σαυτῇ 
σεαυτὴν, σαυτὴ 
c ~ > ~ 
ὑμῶν αὐτῶν 
μένε > a 
ὑμῖν αὐταῖς 

« - > ἐ 
ὑμᾶς αὑτᾶς 


~ ? ~ 
ὑμῶν αὐτῶν 
Se nal ) Ἂς 
υμῖν αυτοὶς 
c ~ 3 , 
ὑμᾶς αὑτους 


N., of itself 


« τι ~ ~ c w 
S. G. ἑαυτοῦ, αὑτοῦ ἑαυτῆς, αὑτῆς 
c ~ c »ν 
D. ἑαυτῷ, αὑτῷ ἑαυτῇ, αὑτῇ 
c , , « Π ce 
A. ἑαυτόν, αὗτον ἑαυτήν, αὑτήν Eavto. αὑτό 
- c - ς 
P. 6. ἑαυτῶν, αὑτῶν ἑαυτῶν, αὑτῶν 
c ~ c ~ ~ c ~ 
D. ἑαυτοῖς, αὑτοῖς ἑαυταῖς, αὐταὶς 
, c , < c « « 
A. ἑαυτούς, αὑτούς ἑαυτάς, αὑτάς ἑαυτἅ, αὑτᾶἅ 
New Ionic. 
5. 6. ἐμεωυσοῦ ἐμκεωυτῆς σεωυφσοῦ σεωυτῆς 
Ὁ. ἐμεωυτῷ ἐμεωντῇ σεωυτῷ σεωυτῇ 
A. ἐμεωυφόν iuewurny σεωυτόν oswurny 
5. G. ἑωυσοῦ ἑωυτῆς P. ἑωυσῶν ἑωυτῶν 
D. ἑωυτῷ ἑωυτῇ ἑωυτοῖσι ἑωυταῖσι 
A. ἑωυτόν twurny twurs ἑωυφούς ἑωυτάς ἑωυτᾶ 


84 P. S. G. αὐταύσω, -ἄς, D. -w, -ᾳ, A. -ον, «ἄν, -0° 
P. G. αὐσαύτων, D. -ois, -ais, A. τως, -ᾶς, -ἃ, Dor, 


C. REcrPROCAL. 
M. (of one another) F. Ν, MUN... [ΕΚ 
P. G. ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων Ὦ. A. ἀλλήλω ἀλλήλᾶ 
D. ἀλλήλοις ἀλλήλαις G. ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν» 
Α. ἀλλήλους ἀλλήλᾶς ἀλληλᾶ 
P. 6. ἀλλάλων Dor. ἀλλάλων Dor. D. G. ἀλλήλοιϊν Ep. 
Ὁ, ἀλλᾶάλοισι, -οἷἐς ἀλλᾶάλαισι, «αἷς 
A. ἀλλᾶάλους ἀλλάλας ἄλλαλᾶ Dor. 


D. INDEFINITE. 


M. F. N., such a one. 


S. N. 0, 7, τὸ δεῖνα 
G. τοῦ, τῆς δεῖνος 
Ὦ. τῷ, τῇ δεῖνι 
A. τὸν, τὴν, τὸ δεῖνα 


M. 
P. of δεῖνες 
τῶν δείνων 
Ω 


τοὺς δεῖνας 


{ 24.] PRONOUNS. 


4 24. xu. Ansective Pronouns. 


A. DEFINITE, 


Article, Iterative, 
M. (the) F. N. M. (very, same, self) F. N. 
5. N. 6 n 10 αὐτὸς αὐτή αὐτό 
G. τοῦ τῆς αὐτοῦ αὐτῆς 
D. τῷ τῇ αὐτῷ αὐτῇ 
Α. τόν τήν αὐτὸν αὐτήν 
Ρ. Ν. οἱ αἱ τἅ αὐτοὶ avrat αὐτἅᾶ 
G. τῶν τῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν 
D. τοῖς ταὶς αὐτοῖς αὐταῖς 
A. τούς τάς αὐτούς αὐτάς 

D.N. τώ τὰ αὐτώ αὐτά 
G. τοῖν ταῖν αὐτοῖν αὐταῖν 

S. N. “ὥ Ὁ. aire D., «ἔη I. 

G. voioE., rw Ὁ. ras D. αὐτοῖο E., -ἰον 1. auras D., -éng I. 
D. τᾷ Ὁ. αὐτέῳ I. αὐτᾷ D., -tn 1. 
A. ray D. abray D., -ἔην 1. 

P. N. σοί ΕΞ Ὁ. = rai E. Ὁ. 

G. σάωνθ., τὰν ), αὐτέων 1. αὐτάἄωνο., -ἂν D., -ἔων 1. 
D. τοῖσι Ο. ταῖσι Ο., τῇσι, αὐςοῖσιΟ., -ἔοισι 1, αὐτῇσι, -ἧς, -ἔησι L 
A. és, ros Ὦ. [τῇς 1. αὐτέους 1. αὐτέᾶς 1. 
Relative. Demonstrative. Possessive. 
M.(who) F. N. M.(this)F. Ν. 7 
S.N. ὅς 7 ὃ ode ἥδε τόδε 1. 8S. ἐμός 
ξ ~ ~ 

G. ov ἧς τοῦδε τῆσδε P. ἡμέτερος 
D. ᾧ 7 τῷδε τῇδε D. vai E 
A. ὃν ἣν τόνδε τήνδε + REPEEOOS FAR 

PLN. of αἵ “ἃ οἵδε αἵδε τάδε Ὁ Ρ. S. σός 
Ἢ ra ξ - - eno 
3. ὧν ὧν τῶνδε τῶνδε P. ὑμέτερος 
dD. οἷς αἷς τοῖσδε ταῖσδε D. σφωΐτερος Ep. 
A. οὕς aS τούσδε τάσδε 

D.N. ὦ “ἃ τῶδε τάδε 3 P.S. o Poet. 

G. ow aiv τοῖνδε ταῖνδε Ρ, σφέτερος 
Dialectic and Paragogic Forms. 

5. N. 20. “2D. or nor rot 1 P. P. ‘apis, ‘tuts O., 
G. οἷο, ὅου E. ἕης E., ds D. τουδί στησδί ‘apiregos D., ἄμμος, 
Ὁ. ᾧ Ὁ. ἀμμέσερος A. 

Α. “ἂν D. 2 Ῥ 5. σεός D. E. 
PR. D jos, ἧς E. τοισίδε O., φοΐσδεσι, P. ‘dues O., tumos AE 


σοΐσδεσσι Ey 


3* 


3 P. S. tts E. Ὁ, 


P. σφός Ο. 


90 


wn 
ΖΦ ῬΘΩΖ PyaZ 


Ὁ 


Ω 


Simple Indefinite. Interrogative. 


TABLES. — PRONOUNS. [Π 24 
Demonstrative. 
Μ. (this)F. ΜΝ. ΜΚ. (so much) F. N. 
Ἣν a ~ ~ , - 
οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο τοσοῦτος τοσαύτη τοσοῦτο, τοσοῦτο» 
΄ 
τούτου ταύτης τοσούτου τοσαύτης 
, ’ 
τούτῳ ταύτῃ τοσούτῳ τοσαύτῃ 
τοῦτον ταύτην τοσοῦτον τοσαύτην 
ξ τὰ - ~ - - ~ 
OUTOL αὗται THUTH τοσοῦτοι τοσαῦταν τοσαῦτᾶ 
, 
τούτων τούτων τοσούτων τοσούτων 
’ ΄ ΄ 
τουτοις ταυταις τοσούτοις τοσαύταις 
, Τ᾽ , , - 
τούτους ταυτᾶς τοσούτους τοσαυτὰᾶς 
τούτω ταὐτὰ τοσούτω τοσαύτᾷ 
΄ ’ , 
τούτοιν THUTOLY τοσουτοιν τοσαύταιν 
Paragogic Declension. Mixed Paragogic Forms. 
οὗτοσί αὑτῆι! rovei  rocovrori, ixtivori, ὁδεδί, rovroyi, TovTOdle 
φσουτοῦ ταυτησί συννουπσοῦϊ» κεινοῦϊ, τηλικαυτησί. 
σουτῷ φαυτῆϊ συννουτῷϊ. Adv. οὑσωσί, ἐνθαδί, νυνί, δευρῖ. 
φοῦύτονι raurny φοσουτονί, σοσονδί, Tourn, ἐκεινονΐ, φηνδεδί. 
ε < « < < < < 
ovro i abratt TauTi φοιουχοῖι, romurati, TUAUTI, φαυταγιίι- 
« τ ἃ « 
φουφσων!, ὅς. φοσουτων!, ἐκεινωνί, ὅτ. 


Β. INDEFINITE. 


Relative Indefinite. 


M. F. (any, some) N. M. F. (who?) N. M. (whoever) Ε. Ν, 
S.N. τ τὶ ate τί otis ἥτις ὅτι 
6. tivds, τοῦ τίνος, τοῦ οὗτἴνος, ὅτου ἧστινος 
D. τινί, τῷ τἶνι, τῷ ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ ἥτινυ 
Α. τινά τίνα ὅντινα ἥντινα 
PLN. τινές τινά, τίνες τίνα οἵτινες αἵτινες ἅτινα, ἅττα 
6. τινῶν [ἄττα τίνων ὧντινων, ὅτων ὧντινων 
Ὦ. τισί τίσι οἵστισι, ὅτοισι αἷστισι 
A. τινάς τίνας οὕστινας ἅστινας 
Ὦ, Ν. τιγέ τίνε ative ative 
G. τινοῖν τίνοιν οἵντινοιν αἵντινοιν 
Homeric Declension of ris, vis, and tris = ὅσαις. 
8. N. els σὶ σίς σί brs ὅ «ι, Sees 
6. σέο, τεῦ who, τεῦ Sriv, ἕσσεο, ὅσχευ 
D. σέῳ, σῷ ὅτεῳ, ὅτεῳ 
Α. φινά viva ὅσινα 
ΡΝ. τινές ἄσσα τίνες ὅτινα 
G. φσίων ὅχεων 
D. ὁτέοισι 
A. σινάς Srivas ἅσσα 
DN. esi 


4 25.) 


Interrog. 
Indef. 
Rel. Ind. 
Dimin. 
Augment. 
Demonst. 
Relat. 


". 


FEN ΩΝ BR 


~ 


SOD rm ODD μαὶ 
Sp “5 


~~ 


μ"-Φ 
— 
~ 

RQ 


12 if’ 


NUMERALS. 


125. B. 


- 
a 


ib γῇ 


Lat 16 ai 


“ὁ 


ΤΆΒΙΕ or ΝΌΜΕ : 


I. ADJECTIVES. 


1. Cardinal. 


wocu; how many ? 
«οσοί, a certain number. 
ὁπόσοιν how many soever. 
ὀλίγοι, few. 

wWoAAol, Many. 

Toro, 80 Many. 

ὅσοι, as many. 


εἷς, μία, ἕν, One, 
δύο, δύω, two. 
τρεῖς, τρία, three, 
τέσσάρες, τέσσαρα, four, 
πέντε, five. 

ἕξ, Siz. 

ἑπτά, seven. 
ὀκτώ, eight. 
ἐννέα, Nine. 

δέκα, ten. 

ἕνδεκα, eleven, 
δώδεκα, twelve. 
τρισκαίδεκα, δεκατρεῖς 
τεσσαρεσκαΐδεκα 
πεντεκαΐδεκα 
ἑκκαίδεκα 
ἑπτακαίδεκα 
οχτωκαΐδεκα 
ἐννεακαίδεκα 
εἴκοσι(») 

εἴκοσιν εἷς, εἷς καὶ εἴκοσι 
τριάκοντα 
τεσσαράκοντα 
πεντήκοντα 
ἑξήκοντα 
ἑβδομήκοντα 
ὀγδοήκοντα 
ἐνενήκοντα 
ἑκατόν 
διάκόσιοι,-αι,-α 
τριᾶκόσιοι 


2. Ordinal. 


wocres; which in order? on, 
one of how many ? 

ε , . . 

δαπόστος, whichsoever in order. 

bdrsyorris, one of few. 

πολλοσσό:, one of many, οἵ, 
one following many. 


πρῶτος,- ἡν-ον, first. 
δεύτερος,-ἄ,-ον, second, 
τρίτος,-η,-ον, third. 
τέταρτος, fourth. 
πέμπτος, fifth. 
éxtoc, sixth, 
ἕβδομος, seventh. 
dySo0c, eighth. 
ἔνατος, ἔννατος, ninth, 
δέκατος, tenth. 
ἑνδέκατος, eleventh. 
δωδέκατος, twelfth. 
τρισκαιδέκατος 
τεσσαραχλαιδέκατος 
πεντεκαιδέκατος 
ἑκκαιδέκατος 
ἑπτακαιδέκατος 
ὀχτωκαιδέκατος 
ἐννεακαιδέκατος 
εἰκοστός 
εἰκοστὸς πρῶτος 

- , 
τριᾶκοστός 
τεσσαρακοστός 
πεντηχοστός 
ἑξηκοστός 
ἑβδομηκοστός 
ὀγδοηκοστός 
ἐνενηκοστός 
ἑκατοστός 
διάκοσιοστός, 
τριάκοσιοστός 


39 TABLES. —- NUMERALS. [96 


400 ν΄ τετρακόσιοι τετρακοσιοστός 
500 φ' πενταχύσιοι πενταχοσιοστὸς 
600 χ΄ ἑξακόσιοι ἑξακοσιοστός 
700 ψ' ἑπτακύσιοι ἑπτακοσιουτός 
800 w’ ὀκτακόσιοι ὀχτακοσιοστός 
900 D ἐννακόσιοι Ἂς ἐννακοσιοστός 
1,000 α κχίλιοι,-αι,-α χιλιοστὸς 
2,000 8 δισχίλιοι δισχιλιοστός 
10,000 ,» μύριοι,-αι,-α μυριουστός 
20,000 x δισμύριοι δισμυριοστός 
Ι00,0000,.ν0 δεκακισμύριοι δεκακισμυριοστός 
3. Temporal. 4. Multiple. 


Inter. werraios ; on what day? 

1. (αὐϑήμερος, on the same day.) ἁπλόος, ἁπλοῦς, simple, single. 
. δευτεραῖος, on the second day. διπλοῦς, double. 

3. τριταῖος, on the third day. τριπλοῦς, triple. 

4. τεταρταῖος, on the fourth day τετραπλοῦς, quadruple. 

5. πεμπταῖος, on the fifth day. πενταπλοῦς, quintuple. 

6. ἑκταῖος, on the sixth day. ἑξαπλοῦς, sextuple. 

7. ἑβδομαῖος, on the seventh day. ἑπταπλοῦς, septuple. 

8. ὀγδοαῖος, on the eighth day. ὀκταπλοῦς, octuple. 


5. Proportional. II. Apverss, III. Sussran- 
TIVES. 
Inter. σοσασλάσιος ; how many ποσάκις; how many ποσότης, quantity, - 
fold? times ? number. 
Dim. ὀλιγάκις, few times. ὀλιγότης, fewness, 
Augm, σπολλαπλάσιος, πιαηῃ fold. πολλάκις, many times. 
1. (ἴυος, equal. ) ἅπαξ, once, μονάς, monad, 
2. διπλάσιος, twofold. δίς, twice. δυάς, ἐμαί. 
3. τριπλάσιος, threefold. τρίς, thrice. τριάς, triad. 
4. τετραπλάσιος τετράκις, four times, τετράς, τετραχτύς 
5. πενταπλάσιος πεντάκις πεντάς 
6. ἑξαπλάσιος ἑξάκις ἑξάς 
7. ἑπταπλάσιος ἑπτάκις ἑβδομάς 
8. ὀκταπλάσιος OxTUKIC ὀγδοάς 
9. ἐγνεαπλάσιος ἐννεάκις, ἐννάκις ἐννεάς 
10. δεκαπλάσιος δεκάκις δεκάς 
40. εἰκοσαπλάσιος εἰκοσάκις εἰκάς 
100. ἑκατονταπλάσιος ἑκατοντάκις ἑχατοντάς 
1,000. χιλιοπλάσιος χιλιάκις χιλιάς 


10,000. μυριοπλάσιος μυριάκις μυριάς 


4260. 27, 28. | CONJUGATION. 83 


C. Tastes or ConsuGATION 


q 26. 1. Tue TENSES CLASSIFIED. 


I. Primary. II, SeconpaRy. 
Time. 1. Present. 2. Future. 3. Past. 
Relations. 
1 Definite. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. 
Zope, * 79up0"s 
am writing. 1 shall be writing. was writing. 
2. Indefinite. Future. AonrIsT. 
Ἔ 4 ζθαψω, ἔγραψα; 
I write. 1 shall write. I wrote. 
3. Complete. PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
éyoupa, * ἐγεγράφειν, 
ζ have written, I shall have written. if had written. 
q 27. u. Tue Moves cuassIFIED. 
I. DISTINCT. 
A. INTELLECTIVE. : 
1. Actual. 2. Contingent. 
«. Present. β. Past 
INDICATIVE. SuBsuNcTIVE. OpTaTIVE. 
, , , 
͵7θαφῶ»ς γράφω; APoims 
1 am writing. I may write. 4 nig ca δ 
B. Votitrvz. 
IMPERATIVE. 
VOaGE, 
Write. 
Il. INCORPORATED. 
A. Substantive. B. Adjective. 
INFINITIVE. ΞΕ PaRTICIPLE. 
’ , 
γράφειν, ραφων, 
To write. Titing, + 


q 28. m1. Formation oF THE TENSES. 


PREFIXES, TENSES. AFFIXES, 
Active. Middle. Passive, 
PRESENT, Oy es “μαι, pons 
Augm. ΓΜΡΕΚΕΈΟΥ, ov, ν ὄμην, ony 
FuTURE, ow womens ϑήσομοαι 
Fut. π.,) ἤσομαι 
Augm. Aorist, σα σάμην Sa» 
Augm. Aor. 11.» ov, 9 unr, pone ay 
Redpl. PrrFect, κα peas 
Redpl. PERF. Π.»; a 
Augm. Redpl. PLUPERFECT, xs pny 
Augm. Redpl. PLUPERF. 0, εἰν 
Redp]. Fut. Perr. σοῤοο 


84 

ind. Κ.. 
Ρ 
D. 

Subj. S. 
ὦ 
D. 

Upt. 5. 
P; 
D. 

Imp. ὶ 
D. 

Inf. 


WW WNW WH ὧδ δ καὶ WYK ὁ μα WME WMH Wwe COW COW ee ODA μα 


Present. 
Nude. 


μι 


vat(y), ἄσι(ν») 
μὲν 
τον 
τον 


inv 

ing 

én 

ἕημεν, ἵμεν 
ints, ἵτε 
inuay, ἴεν 
inusv, ἵμεν 
intoy, troy 
ιἤτην, την 


Ply oy 8. 
τω 


τε 
TWO, ντων 


tov 
Toy 


vob 


VIC, YTOK, ν 
YTOS, ντσῆς 


TABLES. 


I 29. 


Euphonic. 


[1 29 


Iv. AFFIXES OF THE 
Imperfect. ° 
Nude. Euphonic 

ω » ov 


ες 
ε() 
ομὲν 
&Té τε ετὲ 
σαν ov 
ομὲν 
ἔτο» 
etny 


18 
ἕτωσαν, ὄντων 


8tov 
ἕτων 


δι» 


wy, ουσᾶ, ον 
ovtos, οὔσης 


1391] 


Active Voick. 


Ind. 8. 
r. 
D. 
Subj. 8. 
Ρ. 
D. 
Opt. S. 
P. 
D. 
Imp. Κ΄, 
¥ 
D. 
Inf. 
Part. 


WwW ὠὰ δὼ WH WH WN WNHK WHOK WHKHK WHK WHKe wd μα 


Future. 


ow 
σεις 

σει 
σομὲν 
σετε 
σουσι(») 
σομεὲν 
σετον - 
σετον 


σοιμι 
σοις 
σοι 


σοιμὲεν 
σοιτε 
σοιεν 
σοιμὲν 
σοιτον 
σοΐτην 


σειν» 


σων, ὅτα. 


σοντος 


CONJUGATION. 35 
Aorist. Perfect. Fluperfect. 
σᾶ κ-ᾶ κ-ειν, HN] 

σᾶς ἐκβὰς κ-εὶς 
σε(ν) καε(») κ-εὶ 
σᾶμεν καᾶμεν κ-ειμὲν 
σᾶτε κ- OTE M-ELTE 
ody x-Gou(v) κ-εισαν, κ-εσαν 
σᾶμεν κ-ᾶμεν κα-ειμεν 
σατον κ-ᾶτον κ-ειτον 
σἅτην καᾶτον κ-είτυν 
σω (x-w) 

ons (x-n¢) 

on x-1) 

σωμεν (κ-ωμεν) 

σητε (κ-ητε) 

σωσι(ν) (κ-ωσι-») 

σωμεν (κ-ωμεν) 

σητον καητον 

σητον (κ-ητον) 

Carpe (κ-οιμι) 

σαις, σειᾶς (κ-οις) 

σαι, σειεί(ν) (κ-οι) 

σάιμεν ( κποιμεὲν ὃ 

σαιτε κτοιτε 

σαιεν, σειὰν (x-over 

σαιμεν (κ-οιμεν) 

σαιτον (χ-οιτον») 

σαΐτην (κ-οίτην) 

σον (x-2) 

σὅτω (κ- ἑτω) 

ours [των (x-ere) 

σἄτωσαν, σάν- (κ-έτωσαν, κ-ὀντωνὴ 
σᾶτον (κ-ετον») 

σᾶτων (κ- των) 

σαι κέναι 


σᾶς, σᾶσᾶ, σἂν 


σαντος, σάσης 


Γ we , 
#-OT06, κ-υἱᾶς 


6 


Ind. S. 1 
2 
3 
Pk 
2 
3 
dD. 1 
2 
ge 
Subj. 8. 1 
2 
3 
Pet 
2 
3 
D. 1 
2 
3 
Opt. 8. 1 
2 
3 
P. I 
2 
3 
D. 1 
2 
3 
3 
P.2 
3 
D. 2 
3 
Inf. 
Part. N. 
G. 


TABLES. _ 


[{ 30 


7 30. v. AFFIXES OF THE 


Pres. Imperf. 
Nude. Euph. Nude. Euph 
μαι ομᾶνῦ μὴν μην 
σαις αι £7.42 & 60,0 ov 
ται ETO το το 
pedo ὄμεϑα peta ὀμεϑα 
σϑε εὐϑε ote εσϑε 
γται ονταν ντοὸ ovto 
peda ὄμεϑα μεϑα ὀμεϑα 
σϑον εσϑον σϑον suitor 
σϑον εσὐϑον σϑην ἐσϑην 

LOL 
+] 
ται 
ὠμεϑα 
note 
ὠνται 
ὠμεϑα 
ησϑον 
σϑον 
iuny οἶμην 
10 οιο 
ito οὐτο 
ἰμεϑα οἶἰμεϑα “ἥ 
ισϑε οισϑε 
ἐντο οὐντο 
insta οἶμεϑα 
ισϑον οισϑον 
ἰσϑην ol Inv 
G0, 0 ov 
ato ἐσϑω 
σϑε tote 
σϑωσαν, σϑων ἐσϑωσαν, cod wv 
σϑον εσϑον 
σϑων ἐσϑων 
σϑαι εσϑαι 


μενος, -ἢ -ον» ὄμενος, “7 τὸν 
μένου -ης ομένου, -ης 


Perf. = Plup. 


μαι μην 
σαι σο 
ται το 
peda peda 
ots ods 
vIOL TO 
peda peta 
σϑον σϑον 
σϑον σϑην 


(μένος ὦ) 5 
(μένος ἧς) 
(μένος ) 
(μένοι @uev) 
(μένοι ἦτε) 
(μένοι ὠσι-»νῈ 
(μένω ὦμεν) 
(μένω ἦτον) 
(μένω ἡτονῚ) 


(μένος εἴην) 
(μένος εἴης 
(μένος εἴη) 
(μένοι εἴημεν) 
(μένοι εἴητε)" 
(μένοι εἴησαν) 
(μένω εἴημενῚ 
(μένω εἴητον) 

μένω εἰήτηνῚ 

σο 

σϑω 


ode 
σϑωσαν, odor 


odor 
odor 


odo 


μένος, -ἢ; -ον 
μένου, -ης 


4 30. 


MIppLE 


3 
a 
— 


Ὁ 


9 


Ξ 
ma 
8 ἐὉ CON WN WDNK WDHKH WON WNeKH WNHeKHK WHR WHE δὴ δ "αὶ wD 


τ 


5 


ps 
5 
Ῥ 
IS 


Inf. 


CONJUGATION. 


AND Passive VOoOICcEs. 


Fut. Mid Aor. Mid. 


σομαν 
σῇ σευ 
σεται 
σόμεϑα 
σεσϑε 
σονται 
σόμεϑα 
σεσϑον 
σεσϑον 


σοΐμην 
σοιο 
σοιτο 


σοίμεϑα 
σοισϑε 
σοιντο 
σοίμεϑα 
σοισϑον 
σοίσϑην 


σάμην 
σω 
σατο 
σάμεϑα 
σασϑε 
σαντο 
σάμεϑα 
σασϑον 
σάσϑην 


σωμαιν 
σῃ 
σηται 
σώμεϑα 
σησϑε 
σωνται 
σώμεϑα 
σησϑον 
σησϑον 


σαίμην 
σαιο 
σαιτο 
σαΐμεϑα 
σαισϑε 
σαιντο 
σαίμεϑα 
σαισϑον 
σαΐίσϑην 


σαν 


, σάσϑω 


σεσϑαι 


Part. N. σόμενος 


G. σομένου 


σασϑε 
΄ 
σασϑῶωσαν, 
σάσϑων 


σασϑον 
΄ 
σασϑων 


σασϑαι 


2 
σάμενος 
σαμένου 


4 


a7 

Aor. Pass. Fut. Pass. 
ony ϑ-ήσομαι 
ϑ-ης ϑ-ήσῃ, ϑ-ήσει 
ϑ-η ϑ-ήσεται 
ϑ-ημεν ϑ-ησόμεϑα 
ϑ-ητὲ ϑ-ήσεσϑε 
ϑ-ησαν ϑ-ήσονται 
ϑ-ημεν ϑ-ησόμεϑα 
ϑ-ητον ϑ-ήσεσϑον 
ϑ-ήτην ϑ-ήσεσϑον 
Fa 
ϑ-ῆς 
o-7 
ϑ-ὦῶμεν 
ϑ-ῆτε 
ϑ-ὦσι(ν») : 
ϑ-ῶμεν 
ϑ-ῆτον 
ϑ-εῆτον 
-sinv ϑ-ησοΐμην 
ϑ-είης ϑ-ήσοιο 
ϑ-εἰη ϑ-ήσοιτο 
ϑ-είημεν, ϑ-εῖμεν ϑ-ησοίμεϑα 
ϑ-είητε, ϑ-:εῖτε ϑ-ήσοισϑε 
ϑ-είησαν,ϑ-εἶῖεν 9ϑ-ήσοιντο 
ϑ-είημεν,ϑ-εἶμεν ϑ-ησοίμεϑα 
ϑ-εητον ϑ-ήσοισϑον 
ϑ-ειήτην ϑ-ησοίσϑην 
ϑ-ητι 
ϑ-ήτω 
Fonte 
ϑ-ήτωσαν, 

ϑ-ἔντων 
ϑ-ητον 
ϑ-ήτων 
ϑ-ῆναι ϑ-ήσεσϑαν 


ϑ-εἰς,9-εἰσᾶ.9. ἐν ϑοησόμενος 
S-évt0c, F-elong ϑ-εησομένου 


TABLES. 


vi. ANALYSIS OF THE AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. 


1 31. 


‘eidionseg & 
“@ALIUYU] aeoad 
° 3 S 3 3 4 
ye eee Stee 
4 9 Ὁ a ξ ‘ 
*hrepuovag | ξ 9 SS 
& Sst {S's 
~ ~ Cae 
rosa | 383 8 Sed 
ι Xe δ ξ 2% B 
r —- 
* > 
‘eidionieg * 3 oz 
‘OAT UYUT < se φῶ 
"ΘΑ ΒΙΘαΙΠ] Sa 5 = Ry 
: Se ὲ eect 
" > 
* mi 
Ε q - > ὡς 
τ *£repuoseg γῇ oo 2 
5 SO RP nnd = 
= Z ee ee ἕ 
ἄπ & 
‘Areuyig | ἢ ὃ καὶ & 
a ae eS ὡ 
L δῶν Ve a 
"s7/- UL SQIOA JO JUSSI ae 
ΒΕ ea τᾷ ΘΑΙΒΒΘΩ toontey pue 1sll0y 
BES , : 7> 
35 S 4. “IpPHA put eandy ἸΒμοΥ | a 
Pre 
523 *QATIOY 109J10g 


‘aIniny pue 10.959... © 


as 


ΠΡΡΗΛΙ ΡΒ ealtoy HOY | 3 κα 3 
Ξ ‘ginjny pue 1Uese1g | see 
ΕῚ ὌΛΙΒΘΈΩ SOY | = πὶ & 
[9] 


*rl- UL SQI9A JO OAlIIY 


in 


‘rl- UL SQIOA JO OIPPITAL | Ὁ «- «- 


a 


“HALLONOLaNG 3 εξ 


(‘el UL SGI9A JO peduy] pue said | 4» » » 
_ “eatsseg “jiedn{g pue ‘jieg “10V 


ConNECTING VOWELS. 


[ 

5 ΘΔΙΊΟΥ͂ Ἰοθμοάῃ 

Ἴ ANY Wejsledn|g 323 
Ξ ΘΑΙΟΨ 09.104 Μὰ" 
ἽἝ ‘OIPPIIN Pu candy ἸΒΗΟΥ͂ | 2g ν» Sy 


L ‘eining pue “ereduiyj juese1g | ὁ ὦ - 


ΘΑ ΒΒ 109196Π|4 ΡῸΒ 1091.1941 


“Ἰοϑμοάσῃ pue yuescig | * * * ᾿ς. 
ἕ ‘eaysseg oammng | $F EE δ δ a 
= > 
a “ὦ Σ Ὁ Σ = 
ΡΟ MY | TL aa 
eanoy rogzodnig pu rogyog | αὶ καὶ καὶ αὶ αὶ αὶ ἡ 
“0694 ening | a ἃ 4 . τὶ 
‘OIPPIW PUL ΘΑΠΟΥ͂ Ἴθμον puv ening 
nN OO -- ; 
a eet 


ς 


CONJJGATION. 


485.} ᾿ 


"emgossyo “12903340D . 1mg03% “UOT χβ9" 
Ig DUII3 « "mg0% 10 
‘Wmgonpoe .Igo0D ‘dq 
“1g0830X + 1709033 UOT “Tago” ‘1209.08% Μὰ 
“ango3%1 “amgopounn . Ago ‘Og “sug g nq 
*obaorm7ls + 0b6000 “ΟΣ 4670 dy ‘onare ‘o.nn07 
IDLROULID + 10LK000 ‘179.b4009 ‘dq “190.600 “ΚΑΘῸ 
"OLM3H! ὉΣΌΞΥΠΟΟΒ «0.03 “UOT ‘ob4A0 
WDLDUAG . 0203 “170.73 ἼΟ] 0.b0% ‘170.442 
*0.b03 ‘19.bw3% *0.b2 “1.5 ἼΟΙ Sonn “7,5 Ὰ 
smgoinions ‘mgoinody . τροϑυὴὶ “yoog ‘mpgs 
ping 

+0390 1203900 « 03 ‘103 "ἼΟ] ‘033 “5.53 
*onnn3 “1muyoig 20 “Ὁ “diy ‘00 “Ὁ 

Py ‘wayey te “lo 
*0MbD] 1% ‘023308 207 "UOT 7) 

2013.60 ‘01303 2018 “doy 

“στο δῷ ‘asyuz .as *10(] puv “uoy 
ς 035006 ‘osyog - 08 "Π0] ‘no 

manXane "170.0314 . 7.23 ‘PH 


- oO 


“rags ‘10303 «τοῖς “long ‘1m ἼἜΟΙ “ὦ 5 


aunoxonoianl ‘aunox0sy3% . aunloxo "I 
aprons ‘apni pang 497 ἼΟΩ ‘sun 
*107103°%9 ‘sanogand us tarloy "ΠΟΙ ‘rao 
1Ma30% “mrla033 . rarlaso “nmaoo ἼΟΩ ‘7/00 
"Mago «1anias *10¢y puB ΠΟ] “απο ‘rm0g | 
“avynburg 
"HAILOUWLE () 


*Sonmurixsn ‘So2m093¢ ἡ. 50,207 “Δ 550.b@ “1 
“χρωρφδρ + 2200 ‘00% ‘noe ‘dq ‘000 ‘wonon 
"κριοδεῷ ‘moXs . wo10 "jour “πο 
*20.017- “Ξε norm ‘sim ἼΟ ‘wow ‘Sm 
“400000 . Δ0207 “4070. “Any ‘aca ‘aeog 
"400303 “ογγο +4003 “UOT “4 “ὦ 
asmphuyvsis . 4853 diy 
“Baga “a18%0.95@ +4 (415. “TOUT pue ὍΟΩ ‘7703 
“4x | Ard $406,6Q «A “LO, “4139 
“αἰ, ‘audo . 4% ΟΩ 
anny; ‘ammo . κὖν dry ‘nb ‘ars 
"A133 970 “413301 + 4733 “UOT “4 
srmasnls3% ‘aav/s30 «ΤᾺ 8778 ‘asm 907 
raha ‘euoas + 4% “TOUT ΡΒ ἼΟΩ 
“1006 | “a3u00g ‘asg10ag » 43 ἼΟ( “Att 
na73g ‘raasriugXiel «rasa ἼΟ pue dy 
aang ‘asniugidx .as7 "1 pus “10g 
"ΑΣΑ, ‘augongen «4 “tom ‘me *fur 


P ἢ ‘ 
43p0shy 6ML22 «& PIC ‘avo 
“amoogye ‘anuudss . amo0 ‘am *xoTy “49 19” 
. . ‘ 
10Imd «1010 ἼΟΠ “22 
190304 '10M3401 1004 “UOT “90 
srpaasasad “12nasyrd » πιῆ ἼΟΩ 
100310 +1003 "ὍΟ] ‘1000 anos 
*ILADAIGLS «16% *1O(] 
“10000999 ‘4100006 + 10000 10009 “dy ‘1000 “‘10n0% 
. { ( 
A1D1039L0 ‘410104009 ο 1210 “lou ‘1200 


. . « 
Ἰϑλοχ 3 ‘sand +164 ΟΩ ‘1946 6 


“sososs . sas doy ‘sate “long ἢ 
“4010. ‘asviodisdp . «Ξτὴο dry ‘asnio *(qng 
*serlaxsogse ‘Ssv/odas . 9150] ἼΟ( ‘as7d 
"waned 
alse soldo «τοῦ “ἀχ “ὦ “lang 
IbID “δ 0ρ,.5 tb ἼΟΩ "92 ¢ 
“ἦγε ‘Spd . SoD ‘dy 
“Shy ‘Skrlyon ‘500 4 εὦ ‘LOT ‘2 ‘$1570 
*$3¢.010a0 ‘sshysnin . $3 “ΟΩ͂ “5 
*mgoro~ng “ρου! » mgd PIO $5 @ 
room Seiie ‘oorsr neg $ aap “6227 "0718 "4 Se 
“κι ‘riage, «tne “Ὁ ‘lang 
"uphowses “ugk -& “YW DIO 
"3b g3.b3 ‘wagtt . 3 ἼΟ] ‘ars “dug 
KON 26 ‘KOXDUNIILD . 60%20D "19}} 
mgngd3 ‘nginloxs re 03 ἼὯΟΩ ‘”o ἼΟΥ͂ 
ssasephye .403 IOC] PUL UOT ‘493 110] ‘ae “4o~ 
*203 “ale ‘M3g1by . Ὁ “UOT 
“κοκρεδεῷ ‘aoxnsXg . 40%D "10}} “A yduy 
reagan Smsyshhw . oy uoy “ὦ 
3tnlox ‘eonnK1g 93 *10(y 6.0 
‘opis ‘oop .@ “10g “5 “nT 
*enrshte “6215 734. . 6713 "(ΠῚ Seo ‘og 
seocaatonse ‘09909 . 4207 “020. "1 
reng.n10 ‘ea300 + 3 “UOT “07 ‘ap 
snuyne ‘rludg . το pC Ὁ ag ‘pur I 
“unnburg 


“MALLOMLaNg 


= 


(ρος - τῷ §§ 908) swuO OlLomIVIG ‘IIA 


‘GE |b 


40 TABLES. — [88 


7133. vi. Tue Active Voice OF THE 


Present. Imperfect. 
Ind. §. 1 J ᾽ 
2 Thou, You 
3 He, She, It 
ἘΣ 4 % am planning, was planning 
e, You > or or 
3 They plan, planned, 
D.1 We two 
2 You two > 
3 They two 
Subj. S. 1 J Ὶ 
2 Thou, You 
3 He, She, It 
P.1 We may plan, 
2 Ye, You > can plan, 
3 They , of 
D.1 We two Pe. 
2 You two 
8 They two 3} 
οδ΄ 
2 Thou, You . 
3 He, She, Ie) ΡΜ plan, 
P.1 We 3 should plan, 
a ee ᾿ would plan, 
3 They could plan, 
D.1 We two I wd d 
2 You two tat ato 
3 They two 
Imp. S. 2 Do thou 
3 Let him 
P.2 Do you be planning, 
3 Let them or plan, 
D.2 Do you two 
3 Let them two 
To be planning, 
Infinitive, or 
To plan. 


Participle, Planning. 


{ 33.] CONJUGATION. 4] 


Vers βουλεύω (1 94) TRANSLATED. 
Future. Aorist. Perfect. Pluperfect. 


planned, 
shall plan, _ have planned, 
or had planned, have planned. had planned. 
will plan, or 
plan. * 


may plan, 

may have planned, 
can plan, 

can have planned, 
plan, or have planned, 


might plan, 
might have planned, 
should plan, 

should plan, should have planned, 

or would plan, 

would plan. would have planned, 
could plan, 
could have planned, 
plan, or have planned, 


plan, or have planned. 


To be about To plan, or 


to plan. To have planned. Το hope picenet 
: Having planned, 
About to plan. ῶ P Hs s pais Having planned. 


4* 


ind. S. 


Subj. 5. 


Infia, 


Part. 


1 34. 


Present. 
1 βουλεύω 
2 βουλεύεις 
3 βουλεύει 
1 βουλεύομεν 
2 Bovidevste 
3 βουλεύουσι 


. 2 Bovievetor 


1 βουλεύω 

2 βουλεύῃς 
3 βουλεύῃ 

1 βουλεύωμεν 
2 βουλεύητε 
3 βουλεύωσι 


. 2 Bovdevytoyr 


1 βουλεύοιμι 
2 βουλεύοις 
3 βουλεύοι 

1 βουλεύοιμεν 
2 βουλεύοιτε 
3 βουλεύοιεν 


.  βουλεύοιτον 


3 βουλευοΐτην 


2 βούλευε 
3 βουλευέτω 


. 2 Bovdevere 


3 βουλευέτωσαν 
βουλευόντων 


. 2 βουλεύετον 


3 βουλευέτων 
βουλεύειν 


βουλεύων 


“TABLES. 


[1 84.. 


ix. Active VoIcE OF THE 


Imperfect. 
ἐβούλευον 
ἐβούλευες 
ἐβούλευε 
ἐβουλεύομεν 
ἐβουλεύετε 
ἐβούλευον 


ἐβουλεύετον 
ἐβουλευέτην 


e 


Future. 


. βουλεύσω 


‘ 
βουλεύσεις 
βουλεύσει 


βουλεύσομεν 
βουλεύσετε 
βουλεύσουσι 


, 
βουλεύσετον 


βουλεύσοιμι 
βουλείσοις 
βουλεύσοι ᾿ 


βουλεύσοιμεν 
βουλεύσοιτε 


΄ 
βουλεύσοιεν 


βουλεύσοιτον 
βουλευσοΐτην 


βουλεύσειν 


΄ 
βουλεύσων 


{ 34. | REGULAR CONJUGATION. 


43 


Reeutar VERB βουλεύω, to plan, to counsel. 


Aorist. Perfect. 
ἐβούλευσα βεβούλευκα 
ἐβούλευσας βεβούλευκας 
ἐβούλευσε βεβούλευκε 
ἐβουλεύσαμεν βεβουλεύκαμεν 
)0 ᾿ Ul 
ἐβουλεύσατε βεβουλεύκατε 
ἐβούλευσαν βεβουλεύκασι 
ἐβουλεύσατον βεβουλεύκατον 
ἐβουλευσάτην. 
βουλεύσω 

‘ 
βουλεύσῃς 
βουλεύσῃ 

΄ 
βουλεύσωμεν 
βουλεύσητε 
βουλεύσωσι 

, 
βουλεύσητον 

¢ 
βουλεύσαιμι 


βουλεύσαις, βουλεύσειας 
βουλεύσαι, βουλεύσειε 


βουλεύσαιμεν 
βουλεύσαιτε 

, ’ 
βουλεύσαιεν, βουλεύσειαν 


βουλεύσαιτον 
Govievoaitny 
; [2 
βούλευσον 
βουλευσάτω 


, 
βουλεύσατε 
βουλευσάτωσαν, 

βουλευσάντων 


βουλεύσατον 
βουλευσάτων 


βουλεῦσαι βεβουλευκέναι 


βουλεύσᾶς βεβουλευκὼς 


Pluperfect. 
ἐβεβουλεύκειν 
ἐβεβουλεύκεις 
ἐβεβουλεύκει 
ἐβεβουλεύκειμεν 
ἐβεβουλεύκειτε 
ἐβεβουλεύκεισαν, 

ἐβεβουλεύκεσαν 


ἐβεβουλεύκειτον 
ἐβεβουλευκείτην 


44 TABLES. . [[ 35. 


I 35. x. Mippie anp Passive Voices or 
(In the Middle Voice 


Present. Imperfect. Future Mid. 
Ind S. 1 βουλεύομαι ἐβουλευόμην βουλεύσομαι 
2 βουλεύῃ, ἐβουλεύου βουλεύσῃ, 
βουλεύει βουλεύσει 
3 βουλεύεται ἐβουλεύετο βουλεύσεται 
P. 1 βουλευόμεθα ἐβουλευόμεϑα βουλευσόμεϑα 
2 βουλεύεσϑε ἐβουλεύεσϑε βουλεύσεσϑε 
3 βουλεύονται ἐβουλεύοντο βουλεύσονται 
D. 2 βουλεύεσϑον ἐβουλεύεσϑον βουλεύσεσϑον 
3 ἐβουλευέσϑην 
Subj. 8. 1 βουλεύωμαι 
2 βουλεύῃ 
3 βουλεύηται. 
P. 1 βουλευώμεϑα 
2 βουλεύησϑε 
3 βουλεύωνται 
D. 2 βουλεύησϑον 
Opt. S. 1 βουλευοίμην βουλευσοίΐμην 
2 βουλεύοιο βουλεύσοιο 
3 βουλεύοιτο βουλεύσοιτο 
P. 1 βουλευνοίμεϑα βουλευσοίμεϑα 
2 βουλεύοισϑε βουλεύσοισϑε 
9. βουλεύοιντο βουλεύσοιντο 
Ὁ. 2 βουλεύοισϑον βουλεύσυοισϑον 
3 βουλευνοίσϑην βουλευσοίυϑην 
[πηρ. 5, 2 βουλεύου 
_ 9 βουλευέσϑω 
P. 2 βουλεύεσϑε 
3 βουλευέσϑωσαν, 
βουλευέσϑων 
D. 2 βουλεύεσθϑον 
3 βουλευέσϑων 
Infin. βουλεύεσϑοι βουλεύσεσϑαι 
Part. βουλευόμενος βουλευσόμενος 


4; 35.] REGULAR CONJUGATION. 45 


THE Reeuiar Vers βουλεύω, to plan, to counsel. 
to deliberate, to resolve.) 


Aorist Mid. Perfect. Pluperfect. 
ἐβουλευσάμην βεβούλευμαι ἐβεβουλεύμην 
ἐβουλεύσω βεβούλευσαι ἐβεβούλευσο 
ἐβουλεύσατο βεβούλευται ἐβεβούλευτο 
ἐβουλευσάμεϑα βεβουλεύμεϑα ἐβεβουλεύμεϑα 
ἐβουλεύσασϑε βεβούλευσϑε ἐβεβούλευσθϑε 
ἐβουλεύσαντο βεβούλευνται ἐβεβούλευντο 
ἐβουλεύσασϑον βεβούλευσϑον ἐβεβούλευσϑον 
ἐβουλευσάσϑην ἐβεβουλεύσϑην 
βουλεύσωμαι 
βουλεύση 
βουλεύσηται 
βουλευσώμεϑα 
βουλεύσησϑε 
βουλεύσωνται 
βουλεύσησϑον 
βουλευσαίΐίμην 
βουλεύσαιο 
βουλεύσαιτο 
βουλευσαΐμεθϑα 
βουλεύσαισϑε 
βουλεύσαιντο 
βουλεύσαισϑον 
βουλευσαΐίσϑην 
βούλευσαι βεβούλευσο 
βουλευσάσϑω βεβουλεύσϑω 
βουλεύσασϑε βεβούλευσϑε 
βουλευσάσϑωσαν, βεβουλεύσϑωσαν,. 
βουλευσάσϑων βεβουλεύσϑων 
βουλεύσασϑον βεβούλευσθον 
βουλευσάσϑων βεβουλεύσϑων 
βουλεύσασϑαι βεβουλεῦσϑαι 


βουλευσάμενος βεβουλευμένος 


46 


TABLES, 


[1 35 


TABLE X. COMPLETED. 


Aorist Pass. Future Pass. 
Ind. S. 1 ἐβουλεύϑην βουλευϑήσομαι 
2 ἐβουλεύϑης βουλευϑήσῃ, 
βουλευϑήσει 
3 ἐβουλεύϑη βουλευϑήσεται 
P. 1 ἐβουλεύϑημεν βουλευϑησόμεϑα 
2 ἐβουλεύϑητε ᾿βουλευϑήσεσϑε 
3 ἐβουλεύϑησαν βουλευϑήσονται 
D. 2 ἐβουλεύϑητον βουλευϑήσεσϑον 
3 ἐβουλευϑήτην 
Subj. 5.1 βουλευϑῶ 
2 Bovievdijs 
3 βουλευϑὴ 
P. 1 βουλευϑῦὦμεν 
2 βουλευϑῆτε 
3 βουλευϑῦσι 
D 2 βουλευϑῆτον 
Opt. S. 1 βουλευϑείην βουλευϑησοίμην 
2 βουλευϑ είης βουλευϑήσοιο 
9. βουλευϑ εἰη βουλευϑήσοιτο 
P. 1 βουλευϑεῖημεν, βουλευϑ εἴμεν βουλευϑησοίμεϑα 
2 βουλευϑείητε, βουλευϑ εἴτε βουλευϑήσοισϑε 
3 βουλευϑ είησαν, pelea βουλευϑήσοιντο 
D. 2 βουλευϑείητον βουλευϑήσοισϑον 
3 βουλευϑειήτην βουλευϑησοίσϑην 
Imp. S. 2 βουλεύϑητι 
3 βουλευϑήτω 
P. 2 βουλεύϑητε 
3 βουλευϑήτωσαν, βουλευϑέντων 
Ὁ. 2 βουλεύϑητον 
3 βουλευϑήτων 
Infin, βουλευϑῆναι βουλευϑήσεσϑαι 
Part. βουλευϑ εἰς βουλευϑησόμενος 


4 36.] 
58... x1. 


Present. 
Subj. γράφω 
Opt. γράφοιμε 
Imp. youge 
Inf. γράφειν 
Part. γράφων 

Imperfect. 
Ind. ἔγραφον 


Mipp.te AND Passive Voices. 


Present. 
Ind. γράφομαι 
Subj. γράφωμαι 
Opt. γραφοίμην 
Imp. γράφου 
Inf. γράφεσϑαν 
Part. γραφόμενος 
Imperfect, 
Ind. ἐγραφόμην 
Subj. 
Opt. 
Imp. 
Inf. 
Part. 
Perrect, Ind. 
S. 1 γέγραμμαι 
γέγραψαι 
γέγραπται 
7γεγράμμεϑα 
γέγραφϑε 
γεγραμμένοι 
εἰσί 


γέγραφϑον 


Ovo WN Ww 


MUTE VERBS. 


(A.) Mure Verss. 
1. I'edga, to write. 


AcrTive Voice. 


Future. 


γράψω 
γράψοιμι 


γράψειν 
γράψων 


Future Mid. 
γράψομαι 


γφαψοίμην 


γράψεσϑαι 
γραψόμενος 
2 Aor. Pass. 
ἐγράφην 
γφαφῶ 
youpeiny 
γράφηϑι 
γραφῆναι 
yougels 
Imp. 


γέγφαψο 
γεγράφϑω 


γέγραφϑε 


γεγράφϑωσαν, 
γεγράφϑων 


γέγραφϑον 


γεγραφϑὼν 


Aorist. 
ἔγραψα 
γράψω 
γραψαιμν 
γράψον 
γράψαι 
γράψας 


Aorist Mid. 
ἐγραψάμην 
γράψωμαι 
γθαψαίμην 
γράψαι 
γράψασϑαι 


γραψάμενος 


Inf. - 
γεγράφϑαι 

Part. 
γεγραμμένος 


47 


LABIAL. 


Perfect. 
γέγραφα 


γεγραφέναι 
γεγραφώς 
Pluperfect. 
ἐγεγράφειν 


3 Future. 
γεγράψομαι 


γεγφαψοίμη» 


γεγράψεσϑαι 
γεγραψόμενος 
2 Fut. Pass. 


γραφήσομαι 
γραφησοίμην 


γραφήσεσϑαι 
γραφησόμενος 
PLuPEeRFEct, 
ἐγεγράμμην 
ἐγέγραψο 
ἐγέγραπτο 
ἐγεγράμμεϑα 
ἐγέγραφϑε 
γεγραμμένοι 
ἤσαν 
ἐγέγραφϑον 
ἐγεγράφϑην 


[{ 37 


{8 TABLES. 


137. Lasiat. 


Active Voice. 


2. Aino, to leave. 


Present. Imperfect. Future. 2 Perfect. 2 Plupertect. 
fnd. λείπω ἔλειπον λείψω λέλοιπα ἐλελοίπειν 
Subj. λεέπω 
Opt. λεέποιμι λείψοιμι 
Imp. λεῖπε 
Inf. λείπειν λείψειν λελοιπέναι 
Part. λείπων λείψων λελοιπώς 

Aorist II. 

Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 

S. 1 ἔλιπον λίπω λίποιμι λιπεῖν 
Q ἔλιπες λίπῃς λίποις λίπε 
3 ἔλιπε λίπῃ λίποι λιπέτω Part. 

P. 1 ἐλίπομεν λίπωμεν λίποιμεν λιπών 
2 ἐλίπετιε. λίπητε λίποιτε λίπετε ᾿ λιποῦσα 
9. ἔλιπον λίπωσι λίποιεν λιπέτωσαν, λιπόντων λιπόν 

D. 2 ἐλίπετον λίπητον λίποιτον λίπειον λιπόντος 
9. ἐλιπέτην λιποίτην λιπέτων λιπούσης 

Mippuie AND Passive Voices. 

Present. Future Mid. Perfect. Aorist Pass, 
Ind. λείπομαι λείψομαι λέλειμμαν ἐλείφϑην 
Subj. λείπωμαι hepa 
Opt. λειποίμην λειψοίμην λειφϑ είην 
Imp. λεέπου λέλειψο λείφϑητι 
Inf. λεέπεσϑαι λείψεσϑαι λελεῖφϑαι λειφϑῆναι 
Part. λειπόμενος λειψόμενος λελειμμένος λειφϑ εἰς 

Imperfect. 3 Future, Pluperfect. Future Pass, 
Ind. ἐλειπόμην λελείψομαι ἐλελείμμην λειφϑήσομαι 

Aorist II, Mippte. 

Tad. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 

S. 1 ἐλιπόμην λίπωμαι λιποίμην λιπέσϑαι 
2 ἐλίπου λίπῃ λίποιο λιποῦ 
3 ἐλίπετο λίπηται λίποιτο λιπέσϑω Part. 

P. 1 ἐλιπόμεϑα λιπώμεϑα λιποίμεϑα λιπόμενος 
2 ἐλίπεσϑε λίπησϑε λίποισϑε λίπεσϑε 
3 élinovtco λίπωνται λίποινιτο λιπέσϑωσαν, λιπέσϑων 


D.  ἐλίπεσϑον λίπησϑον λίποισϑον λίπεσϑον 
3 ἐλιπέσϑην λιποίσϑην λιπέσϑων 


4 38.: ay 


MUTE VERBS. 


138. ii. Pavatat. “Πράσσω or πράττω, to do. 
Active Voice. 
Present. Future. Aorist. 1 Perfect. 2 Perfect. 
Ind. πράσσω, πράττω πράξω ἔπραξα πέπρᾶχα πέπρᾶγα 
Subj. πράσσω, πράττω πράξω 
Opt. πράσσοιμι, πράττοιμι πράξοιμι πράξαιμι 
Imp. πρᾶσσε, πρᾶττε πρᾶξον [ναι [ναι 


lof. πράσσειν, πράττειν πράξειν mouse, πεπραχέ- πεπραγέ- 
[ , ‘ , , 
Part. πράσσων, πράττων πράξων πρᾶάξὰς πεπραχὼς πεπραγῶς 
1 Pluperfect. 2 ΡΙυγ τέεοι 
ἐπεπράχειν ἐπεπράξειν 


Imperfect. 
ἔπρασσον, ἔπραττον 


ΜΙΡΡΙΕ AND Passive Voices. 


Present. Imperfect. Future Mid. 
Ind. πράσσομαι, πράττομαι ἐπραυσσόμην, ἐπραττόμην πράξομαι 
Subj. πράσσωμαι, πράττωμαι 
Opt. πραυσσοίμην, πραττοίμην 
Imp. πράσσου, πράττου 
Inf. πράσσεσϑαι, πράττεσϑαι 


πραξοίμην 


moter duc 


Part. πρασσόμενος, πραττόμενος πραξόμενυς 
Aorist Mid. Aorist Pass. § Future Pass. 8 Future. 
Ind. ἐπραξάμην ἐπράχϑην πραχϑήσομαι πεπράξομαι 
. Subj. πράξωμαι πρυχϑὼ 
Opt. πραξαίμην πραχϑείην πραχϑησοίμην πεπραξοίμην 
Imp. πρᾶξαι πράχϑητι 
Inf. πράξασϑαι πραχϑῆναι πραχϑήσεσϑαι πεπράξεσϑαι 
Part. πραξάμενος προαχϑείς πραχϑησόμενος πεπραξόμενος 
Perrect. Puorerrsct. 
Ind. Imp. Inf. 
S. 1 πέπραγμαι πεπρᾶχϑαι ἐπεπράγμην 
2 πέπραξαι πέπραξο ἐπέπραξο 
3 πέπρακται πεπράχϑω Part. ἐπέπρακτο 
P. 1 πεπράγμεϑα. πεπραγμένος ἐπεπράγμεϑα 
2 πέπραχϑε πέπραχϑε ἐπέπραχϑε 
3 πεπραγμένοι πεπράχϑωσαν, πεπραγμένοι 
[εἰσί πεπράχϑων [ησαν 
D 2 πέπραχϑον πέπραχϑον ἐπέπραχϑον 
3 πεπράχϑων ἐπεπράχϑη» 
Fe 


80 


TABLES. 


[{ 39. 


139. iii. Linguat. 1. Πείθω, to persuade. 


Present. Future. 1 Aorist. 2 Aorist. 1 Perfect. 
Ind. πείϑω πείσω ἔπεισα ἔπιϑον πεέπεικα 
Subj. πείϑω πείσω πίϑω 
Opt. πεέϑοιμι πείσοιμι πείσαιμι πέϑοιμι 
Imp. πεῖϑε πεῖσον = mide 
Inf. πείϑειν πείσειν πεῖσαι. mdsiv’ πεπειχέναι 
Part. πείϑων πείσων πείσας mdwy πεπεικώς 
Imperfect, 
ἔπειϑον 
ΜΙΡΡΙΕ ΑΝ Passive Voices. 
Present. Future Mid. 2 Aor. Mid. 
Ind. πείϑομαν πείσομαν ἐπιϑόμην 
Subj. Ἠεέϑωμαν πίϑωμαν πεισϑὼ 
Opt. πειϑοίμην πεισοίμην πιϑοίμην 
Imp. πεέϑου πιϑοῦ πείσϑητι 
Inf. πείϑεσθϑαι πείσεσϑαι πιϑέσθαι. 
Part. πειϑόμενος πεισόμενος πιϑόμενος 
Imperfect. 
ἐπειϑόμην 
Perrxcr. 
Ind. Imp. Inf. 
S. 1 πέπεισμαι πεπεῖσϑαι 
2 πέπεισαι πέπεισο 
9 πέπεισται πεπείσϑω Part. 
P. 1 πεπείσμεϑα πεπεισμένος 
2 πέπεισϑε πέπεισϑε 
3 πεπεισμένοε πεπείσϑωσαν, 
[εἰσέ πεπείσϑων 
D. 2 πέπεισϑον πέπεισϑον 
3 πεπείσϑων 


(2 Perfect, to trust ; Middle and Passive, to believe, to obey.) 


Active Voice. 


2 Perfect. 
πέποιϑα 
πεποίϑω 
πεποιϑοΐην» 
πὲέπεισϑιε 
πεποιϑέναι 
πεποιθώς 


1 Pluperfect. 2 Pluperfect 


ἐπεπείχκειν ἐπεποέϑειν 


Aorist Pass. Future Pass, 
ἐπείσϑην πεισϑήσομαι 


πεισϑ εἶην πεισϑησοίμην 


πεισϑῆναι πεισϑήσεσϑαι 
πεισϑείς πεισϑησόμενος 


PLurerrecr. 


ἐπεπείσμην 
ἐπέπεισο 
ἐπέπειστο 


ἐπεπείσμεϑο 

ἐπέπεισϑε 

πεπεισμένοι 
τ ας 


ἐπέπεισϑον 
ἐπεπείσϑην 


4.40.) MUTE VERBS. 51 
140. 2. Kouilo, ve 
(Middle, to receive.) ae 
Active Voice, 
Present. Future. Aorist. . Perfect. 
Ind. κομίζω κομίσω ἐκόμισα κεκόμικα 
Subj. κομίζω κομίσω 
Opt. κομίζοιμι κομίέσοιμι κομίσαιμε 
Imp. κόμιζε κόμισον 
Ιω κομίζειν κομίσειν κομίσαι κεχομικέναν 
Part. κομίζων κομίσων κομίσας κεκομικώς 
Imperfect. Pluperfect. 
ἐκόμιζον ἐκεχκομίκειν 
ΜΙΡΡΙΕ ΑΝῸ Passive Voices, 
Present. Future Mid. Aorist Mid. Aorist Pass, 
Ind. xoutfouce κομίσομαι ἐκομισάμην ἐκομίσϑην 
Subj. χομίζωμαν κομίσωμαι κομισϑὼ 
Opt. κομιζοίμην - κομισοίμην κομισαΐίΐμην κομισϑείην 
[π|ρ. κομίζου κόμισαι κομίσϑητι 
Inf. χομέζεσϑαι κομίσεσϑαινι κομίσασϑαν κομισϑῆναι 
Part. χομιζόμενος κομισόμενος κομισάμενος κομισϑ εἰς 
Imperfect. Perfect. Pluperfect. Future Pass, 
Ind ἐκομιζόμην κεκόμισμαι ἐκεκομίυμην κομισϑήσομαι 
Opt. κομισϑησοίμην 
Imp. κεκόμισο 
Inf. κεχομέσϑαι κομισϑήσεσϑαι 
Part. KEXOMLOMEVOS κομισϑησόμενος 
Artic Εὔτυκε. 
Αστινκ. Muppz. 
Ind. Inf. Ind. Inf. 
S. 1 χομιῶ κομιεῖν κομιοῦμαι κομιεῖσϑαι 
2 χομιεῖς κομιεῖ 
3 χομιεῖ Part. κομιεῖται Part. 
P. 1 κχκομιοῦμεν κομιῶν ,κομιούμεϑι κομιούμενος 
κομιεῖτε κομιοῦσα κομιεῖσϑε 
3 κομιοῦσι κομιοῦν κομιοῦνται 
D. 2 κομιεῖτον κομιοῦντος κομιεῖσϑον 


52 TABLES. [{ <b. 
14a. xu. (B.) Lieu Verss. 
1. “Ayyékio, to announce. 
Active Voice. 

Present. Imperfect. 2 Aorist. Perfect. Pluperfect. 
ind. ἀγχγέλλω ἤγγελλον ἤγγελον Ἰ͵γγελκαὰα ἠγγέλκειν 
Subj. ἀγχγέλλω ἀγγέλω 
Opt. ἀγγέλλοιμε ἀγγέλοιμι 
Imp. ἄγγελλε ἄγγελε 
Inf. ἀγγέλλειν ἀγγελεῖν ἠγγελκέναι 
Part. ἀγγέλλων ἀγγελών ἠγγελκώς 

Ευτυκε. 
Ind. Opt. Inf. Part. 
Ss. 1 ἀγγελῶ ἀγγελοῖμι, ἀγγελοίην ἀγγελεῖν ἀγγελῶν 
2 ἀγγελεῖς ἀγγελοῖς, ἀγγελοίης ἀγγελοῦσα 
9 ἀγγελεῖ, ἀγγελοὶ, ἀγγελοίη ᾿ἀγγελοῦν 
P. 1 ἀγγελοῦμεν ἀγγελοῖμεν, ἀγγελοίημεν ἀγγελοῦντος 
2 ἀγγελεῖτε ἀγγελοῖτε, ἀγγελοΐητε ayythovuns 
3 ἀγγελοῦσι ἀγγελοῖεν 
ἢ. 2 ἀγγελεῖτον ἀγγελοῖτον, ἀγγελοίητον 
9 : ἀγγελοίτην, ἀγγελοιήτην 
Aorist 1. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. 
8S. 1 ἤγγειλα ἀγγείλω ἀγγείλαιμι 
2 “ἤγγειλας ἀγγείλῃς ἀγγείλαις, ἀγγείλειας ἄγγειλον 
9. ἤγγειλε ἀγγείλῃ ἀγγεῖλαι, ayysiheve ἀγγειλάτω 
P. 1 nyysilopev ἀγγείλωμεν ἀγγείλαιμεν 
2 ἡἠγγείλατε ἀχγγείλητε ἀγγείλαιτε ἀγγείλατε 
8. ἤγγειλαν ἀγγείλωσι ἀγγείλαιεν, ἀγγείλειαν ἀγγειλάτωσαν, 
ἀγγειλάντων 
D. 2 ἠγγείλατον ἀγγείΐλητον ἀγγείλαιτον ἀγγείλατον 
3 ἡγγειλάτην ἀγγειλαΐτην ἀγγειλάτων 
lif. ἀγγεῖλαι. Part. ayyeiluc,-doa,-av " G.-avtog,- cons. 
Mipp_e ANp Passive Voices. 

Present. 2 Aor. Mid. 1 Aor. Pass. 2 Aor. Pasa, 
Ind. ἀγγέλλομαι ἠγγελόμην ἠγγέλϑην ἠγγέλην 
Subj. ἀγγέλλωμαι ἀγγέλωμαι ἀγγελϑῶ ἀγγελῶ 
Opt. ἀγγελλοίμην ἀγγελοίμην ἀγγελϑείην ἀγγελείην 
Imp. ἀγγέλλου ἀγγελοῦ ἀγγέλϑητι ἀγγέληϑι 
Inf. ἀγγέλλεσϑαι ἀγγελέσϑαι ἀγγελϑῆναι ἀγγελῆναι 
Part. ἀγγελλόμενος ἀγγελόμενος ἀχγγελϑεῖς ἀγγελεὶς 


q 41.] 


Ind. 
Opt. 
Inf. 
Part. 


Wm wm wwe 


Cwm wQno=— 


Cw Wm On 


62:20 


Inf. ἀγγείλασϑαι. 


Perrect, 
Ind. Imp. 
» 
nyythuce 
ἤγγελσαι ἤγγελσο 
ἤγγελται ἠγχγέλϑω 
ἠγγέλμεϑα᾽ ‘ 
ἤγγελϑε ἤγγελϑε 
ἡγγελμένοι εἰσί ἠγγέλϑωσαν, 
ἡγγέλϑων 
ἤγγελϑον . ἤγγελϑον 
ἢ yy hour 


5 * 


LIQUID VERBS. 5R 
Imperfect. 1 Future. 2 Future. 
ἡγγελλόμην ἀγγελδήσομαι ἀγγελήσομαι 
ἀγγελϑησοίμην ἀγγελησοίμ ἣν 
ἀγγελϑήσεσθαι ἀγγελήσεσϑ αν 
ἀγγελϑησόμενος ἀγγελησόμενος 
Forure Mivore. 

Ind. Opt. Inf. Part. 
ἀγγελοῦμαι ἀγγελοίμην ἀγχγελεῖσϑαι ἀγγελούμενας 
ἀγγελῇ, ἀγγελεῖ ayythoio ἀγγελουμένη 
ἀγγελεῖται ἀγγελοῖτο ἀγγελούμενον 
ἀγγελούμεϑα ἀγγελοίμεϑα ἀγγελουμένου 
ἀγγελεῖσϑε ἀγγελοῖσϑε ἀγγελουμένης 
ἀγγελοῦνται ἀγγελοῖντο 
ἀγγελεῖσϑον ἀγγελοῖσϑον 

ἀγγελοίσϑην 
Aorist I. Mippte. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. 

ἠγγειλάμην ἀγγείλωμαι ἀγγειλαίμην 

ἡγγείλω ayyethy ayytihuv ὄγγειλαι 

ἡγγείλατο ἀγγείληται αἀγχείΐλαιτο ἀγγειλάσϑω 

ἠγγειλάμεϑα ἀγγειλώμεϑα ἀγγειλαίμεϑα 

ἠγγείλασϑε ἀγγείλησϑε ἀγγείλαισϑε ἀγγείλασϑε 

ἠγγείλαντο ἀγγείλωνται ἀγχγεΐλαιντο ἀγγειλάσϑωσαν, 

ἀγγειλάσϑων 

ἠχγείλασϑον sat waian ᾿ ἀγγείλαισϑον ἀγγείλασϑον 

ἠγγειλάσϑην ἀγγειλαίσϑην ἀγγειλάσϑων 


Part. ἀγγειλάμενος. 


Inf. 
ἤγγελϑαι 


Part. 
ἡγγελμένος 


PLurerrecr. 


ἠγγίλμην 
ἤγγελσο 
ἤγγελτο 


ἠγγέλμεϑα 


ῆ ἤγγελϑε 
ἡγγελμένοι ἦσαν 


ἤγγελϑον 
ἠγγέλθην 


δ1 


Ind. 
Subj. 
Opt. 
Imp. 
Inf. 
Part. 


TABLES. [Π 42. 


1 42. Liauiv. 2. Daiva, to show. 
(2 Perf. and Middle, to appear.) 


Active VoIce. 


Present. Future, Aorist. 1 Perfect. 2 Perfect. 
aire uve ἔφηνα πέφαγκα πέφηνα 
φαΐνω φήνω 
φαίνοιμι φανοῖμι, φανοίην φήναιμι 
φαῖνε φῆνον 

᾿φαΐνειν φανεῖν φῆναι πεφηνέναι 
φαίνων φανῶν φήνας πεφηνώς 
Imperfect. 2 Pluperfect. 
ἔφαινον . ἐπεφήνειν 


Mippxve ANnp Passive Voices. 


Present. Imperfect. Future Mid. Aorist Mid. 
φαίνομαι ἐφαινόμην φανοῦμαι ἐφηνάμην 
φαίνωμαι φήνωμαι 
φαινοίμην φανοίΐμην φηναίΐίμην 
φαΐίνου : φῆναι 
φαΐίνεσϑαι φανεῖσϑαι φήνασϑαι 
φαινόμενος φανούμενος φηνάμενος 
1 Aor. Pass. 2. Aor. Pass. 1 Fut. Pass, 2 Fut. Pass. 
ἐφάνϑην ἐφάνην φανϑήσομαι φανήσομαι 
φανϑῶ gave = 


φανϑείην φανείην φανϑησοίμην garnooiuny 
φάνϑητι φάνηϑι 


φανϑῆναι φανῆναι φανϑήσεσϑαι φανήσεσϑαι 

φανϑ εἰς φανείς φανϑησόμενος φανησόμενος 
ῬΕΚΡΈΟΤ, PLUPERFECT. 

Ind. Imp. Inf. 

πέφασμαι πεφάνϑαι ἐπεφάσμην 

πέφανσαι πέφανσο ἐπέφανσο 

πέφανται πεφάνϑω Part. ,ἐπέφαντο 

πεφάσμεϑα πεφασμένος ἐπεφάσμεϑα 

πέφανϑε πέφανϑε ἐπέφανϑε 

πεφασμένοι εἰσί πεφάνϑωσαν, πεφασμένοι ἦσαν 
πεφάνϑων 

πέφανϑον πέφανϑον ἐπέφανϑον 


πεφάνϑων ἐπεφάνϑην 


DOUBLE CONSONANT VERBS. 55 


4 43. 


143. xm. (C.) Dousre Consonant Verss. 


1. “ὔξω or αὐξάνω, to increase. 


Active Voice. 


Present. Future. Aorist. Perfect. 
Ind. αὔξων αὐξάνω αὐξήσω ηὔξησα ηὔξηκα 
Subj. αὔξω, αὐξάνω αὐξήσω 
Opt. αὔξοιμι, αὐξάνοιμει αὐξήσοιμι αὐξήσαιμι 
Imp. αὐξε, αὔξανε αὔξησον 
Inf. αὔξειν, αὐξάνειν αὐξήσειν αὐξῆσαι ηὐξηκέναι 
Part. αὔξων, αὐξάνων αὐξήσων αὐξήσας ηὐξηκώς 
; Imperfect. Pluperfect 
ηὖξον, ηὔΞανον ηὐξήκειν 
Mippte ΑΝῸ Passtve Voices. 
Present. Future Mid, Aorist Mid. 
Ind. αὔξομαι, αὐξάνομαι αὐξήσομαν ηὐξησάμην 
Subj. αὔξωμαι, αὐξάνωμαι αὐξήσωμαι 
Opt. αὐξοίμην, αὐξανοίμην αὐξησοίμην αὐξησαίμην 
Imp. αὔξου, αὐξάνου αὔξησαι 
πῇ αὔξεσθαι, αὐξάνεσϑαι αὐξήσεσϑαι αὐξήσασϑαι 
Part. αὐξόμενος, αὐξανόμενος αὐξησόμενος αὐξησάμενος 
᾿ Imperfect. : ᾿ 
ηὐξόμην, ηὐξανόμην 
Perfect. Pluperfect. Aorist Pass. Future Pass. 
Ind. ηὔξημαι ηὐξήμην ηὐξήϑην αὐξηϑήσυμαι 
Subj. avin da 
Opt. αὐξηϑείην αὐξηϑησοίμην 
ΤΣ . ηὔξησο αὐξήϑητι 
Sd TY oak ὑξῆσϑαι αὐξηϑῆναι αὐξηϑήσεσϑαι 
Part. pesenrier avin Peis αὐξηϑησόμενος 


144. 2. Perfect Passive οἵ κάμπτω, to bend, 
and ἐλέγχω, to convict. 


Indicative. Imperative. 
S. 1 χέκαμμαι ἐλήλεγμαι 
2 κέχαμψαι ἐλήλεγξαι κέκαμψο ἐλήλεγξο 
3 χκέχαμπται ἐλήλεγκται κεκάμφϑω, Sic. ἐληλέγχϑω, &e. 
κ : κεχάμμεϑα ἐληλέγμεθϑα Infinitive. 
κέκαμφϑε ἐλήλεγχϑε , ‘ 
3 pitinpatees Baran meveeliny at aire 
[εἰσί [εἰσέ Participle. 
D. 2 κέκαμφϑον ἐλήλεγχϑον κεκαμμένος ἐληλεγμένος 


56 


TABLES. 


[Ἱ 45 


145. χιν. (D.) Pure Verss. i. Contract 


1. T'iuée, to honor. 


Active Voice. 


Present Inv. 


Present Susy. 


S. 1 tiuco, τιμῶ τιμάω, τιμῶ 
2 τιμάεις, τιμᾷς τιμάῃς, τιμᾷς 
9. τιμάει, τιμᾷ τιμάῃ, τιμᾷ 
P. 1 τιμάομεν, τιμῶμεν τιμάωμεν, τιμῶμεν 
2 τιμάετε, τιμᾶτε τιμάητε, τιμᾶτε 
3 σιμάουσι, τιμῶσι τιμάωσι, τιμῶσι 
D. 2 τιμάετον, τιμᾶτον τιμάητον, τιμᾶτον 
ΓἹΜΡΕΆΓΡΈΟΤΥ. Present Orr. 
S. 1 ἐτίμαον, ἐτίμων τιμάοιμι, τιμῷμι, τιμῴην 
2 ἐτίμαες, ἐτίμας τιμάοις, τιμῷς, τιμῴης 
9 ἐτέμαε, ἐτίμα τιμᾶοι, τιμῷ, τιμῴη 
P. 1 ἐτιμάομεν, ἐτιμῶμεν τιμάοιμεν, τιμῷμεν, τιμῴημεν 
2 ἐτιμάετε, ἐτιμᾶτε. τιμάοιτε, τιμῷτε, τιμῴητε 
3 ἐτίμαον, ἐτίμων τιμάοιεν, τιμῷεν 
D. 2 ἐτιμάετον, ἐτιμᾶτον τιμάοιτον, τιμῷτον, τιμῴητον 
3 ἐπιμαέτην, ἐτιμάτην τιμαοίτην, τιμῴτην, τιμῳήτην 
Present Imp. Present Inv. | 
S. 2 τίμαε, τίμα “ τιμάειν, τιμᾷν 
3 τιμαέτω, τιμάτω Parsee Bias 4437 /> Qe 
P, 2 τιμάετε, τιμᾶτε τιμάων, τιμῶν 
9. τιμαέτωσαν, τιμάτωσαν, τιμάουσα, τιμῶσα 
τιμαόντων, τιμώντων τιμάον,, τιμῶν 
Ὦ. 2 tipeeror, τιμᾶτον α. τιμάοντος, τιμῶντος 
9. τιμαέτων, τιμάτοων τιμαούσης, τιμώσης 
Future, Aorist, Perfect. Pluperfect. 
Ind. τιμήσω ἐτίμησα τετίμηκα ἐτετιμήκειν 
Subj. τιμήσω ᾿ 
Opt. τιμήσοιμι τιμήσαιμι 
Imp. τίμησον 
[π΄ τιμήσειν τιμῆσαι τετιμηχέναι 
Part τιμήσων τιμήοας τετιμηκώς 


4 45.] 


CONTRACT VERRS. 


M.pp.Le aNnp Passive Voices. 


Present Inp. 


Ss. 1 τί μάομαι, τιμῶμαι 
2 τιμάῃ, τιμᾷ 
9 τιμάεται, τιμᾶται 
P. 1 τιμαόμεϑα, τιμώμεϑα 
2 τιμάεσϑε, τιμᾶσϑε 
3 τιμάονται, τιμῶνται 
D. 2 τιμάεσϑον, τιμᾶσϑον 
ΓΜΡΕΆΡΕΟΥ. 
Ss. 1 ἐτιμαόμην, ἐτιμώμην 
2 ἐτιμάου, éti ua 
3 ἐτιμάετο, ἐτιμᾶτο 
δι} ἐτιμαόμεϑα, ἐτιμώμεϑα 
ῷ ¢ ἐτιμάεσϑε, eno de 
3 ἐτιμάοντο, ἐτιμῶντο 
D. 2 ἐτιμάεσϑον, ἐτιμᾶσϑον 
3 ἐτιμαευϑὴην, ἐτιμάσϑην 
Present Isp. 
S. 2 τιμάου, τιμῶ 
3 τιμαέσϑω, τιμάσϑω 
P.  τιμάεσϑε, τιμᾶσϑε 
3 τιμαέσϑωσαν, τιμάσϑωσαν, 
τιμαέσϑων, τιμάσϑων 
D. 2 τιμάεσϑον, τιμᾶσϑον 
3 τιμαέσϑων, τιμάσϑων 
Future Mid. Aorist Mid. 
Ind. τιμήσομαι ἐτιμησάμην 
Subj. . τιμήσωμαι 
Opt. τιμησοΐμην τιμησαίμην 
Imp. τίμησαι 
Inf. τιμήσεσϑαν τιμήσασϑαι 
Part. τιμησόμενος τιμησάμενος 
8 Future. 
Ind. τετιμήσομαι 
Opt. τετιμησοίμην 
Inf. τετιμήσεσϑαι 
Part. τετιμησόμενος 


57 


' Present Susy, 


τιμάωμαι, 
τιμάη, 
τιμάηται, 
τιμαώμεϑα, 
τιμάησϑε, 
τιμάωνται, 


τιμάησϑον, 


τιμῶμαι 
τιμᾷ 
τιμᾶταν 
τιμώμεϑα 
τιμᾶσϑε 
τιμῶνται 


τιμᾶσϑον 


Present Opt. 


τιμαοίμην, 
τι μάοιο, 
τιμάοιτο, 
τιμαοίμεϑα, 
τιμάοισϑε, 
τιμάοιντο, 
τιμάοισϑον, 
τιμαοίσϑην, 


τιμῴμην 
τιμῷο 
τιμῷτο 
τιμῴμεϑα 
τιμῳσϑε 
τιμῷντο 
τιμῷσϑον 
τιμῴσϑην 


Present Inr. 


, 
τιμάεσϑαι, 


τιμᾶσϑαν 


Present Parr. 


τιμαόμενος, 
τιμαομενὴ, 
τιμαόμενον, 
Perfect. 
τετίμημαι 


τετίμησο 
τετιμῆσϑαι 
τετιμημένος 
Pluperfect. 
ἐτετιμήμην 


τιμώμενος 
τιμωμένη 
τιμώμενον 
Aorist Pass. 
ἐτιμήϑην 
τιμηϑὼ 
τιμηϑείην 
τιμήϑητι 
τιμηϑῆναι 
τιμηϑεῖς 
Future Pass 
τιμηϑήσομα. 
τιμηϑησοίμην 
τιμηϑήσεσϑαι 
τιμηϑησόμενος 


"2 


] 
2 
3 


ὧ τῷ = 


9 
re) 


σι 


Wn one wne 


wh 


Ὁ 
e229 ow” 


D. 2 


$- 


Ind. 
Subj. 
Opt. 
Imp. 
Inf. 
Part. 


TABLES. 


[46 


1 46. Contract. 2. Φιλέω, to love. 


Active Voice. 


Present Inn. Present Suns, 
φιλέω, φιλῶ φιλέω, φιλῶ 
φιλέεις, φιλεῖς φιλέης, φιλῇς 
φιλέει, φιλεῖ φιλέῃ, φιλῇ 
φιλέομεν, φιλοῦμεν φιλέωμεν, φιλῶμεν 
φιλέετε, φιλεῖτε φιλέητε, φιλὴτε 
φιλέουσι, φιλοῦσι φιλέωσι, φιλῶσι 
φιλέετον, φιλεῖτον φιλέητον, φιλῆτον 

ImPeRFEcr. Present Ort. 

ἐφίλεον, ἐφίλουν φιλέοιμι, φιλοῖμι, φιλοΐην 
ἐφίλεες, ἐφίλεις φιλέοις, φιλοῖς, φιλοίης 
ἐφίλεε, ἐφίλει φιλέοι, φιλοὶ, gihoin 
ἐφιλέομεν, ἐφιλοῦμεν φιλέοιμεν, φιλοῖμεν, φιλοίημ 
ἐφιλέετε, ἐφιλεῖτε φιλέοιτε, φιλοῖτε, φιλοίητο 
ἐφίλεον, ἐφίλουν φιλέοιεν, φιλοῖεν 

ἐφιλέετον, ἐφιλεῖτον φιλέοιτονν φιλοῖτον, φιλοΐητον 
ἐφιλεέτην, ἐφιλείτην φιλεοίτην, φιλοίτην, φιλοιήτην 

Present Imp. Present Inv. 

pikes, φίλει φιλέειν, φιλεῖν 
φιλεέτω, φιλείτω Purses Daaw 
φιλέετε, φιλεῖτε φιλέων, φιλῶν 
φιλεέτωσαν, φιλείτωσαν, φιλέουσα, φιλοῦσα 

φιλεόντων, φιλούντων - αιλέον, φιλοῦν 
φιλέετον, φιλεῖτον G. φιλέοντος, φιλοῦντος 
᾿φιλεέτων, φιλείτων φιλεούσης, φιλούσης 
Future. Aorist. Perfect. Pluperfect. 
φιλήσω ἐφίλησα περφίληκα ἐπεφιλήκειν 

᾿ φιλήσω 
φιλήσοιμι φιλήσαιμι 
φίλησον 
φιλήσειν φιλῆσαι πεφιληκέναι 
φιλήσων φιλήσας πεφιληκώς 


{ 46.] 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


Mipp.Le AND Passive Voices 


Present Inv. 


Ι φιλέομαι, φιλοῦμαι 
2 φιλέῃ, φιλέει, φιλῇ, φιλεῖ 
3 φιλέεται, φιλεῖται 
.. 1 φιλεόμεϑα, φιλούμεϑα 
2 φιλέεσϑε, φιλεῖσϑε 
3 φιλέονται, φιλοῦνται 
. 2" φιλέεσϑον, φιλεῖσϑον 
ΓΜΡΕΆΡΕΟΥ. 
. 1 ἐφιλεόμην, ἐφιλούμην 
2 ἐφιλέου, ἐφιλοῦ 
9. ἐφιλέετο, ἐφιλεῖτο 
. 1 ἐφιλεόμεϑα, ἐφιλούμεϑα 
2 ἐφιλέεσϑε, ὀἐφιλεῖσϑε 
3 ἐφιλέοντο, ἐφιλοῦντο 
. 9 ἐφιλέεσϑον, ἐφιλεῖσϑον 
3 ἐφιλεέσϑην, ἐφιλείσϑην 
Present Imp. 
. Ὁ φιλέου, φιλοῦ 
3 φιλεέσϑω, φιλείσϑω 
. Ὡ φιλέεσϑε, φιλεῖσϑε 
9. φιλεέσϑωσαν, φιλείσϑωσαν, 
φιλεέσθων, φιλείσϑων 
. 2 φιλέεσϑον, φιλεῖσϑον 
3 φιλεέσϑων, φιλείσϑων 
Future Mid. Aorist Mid. 
Ind. φιλήσομαι ἐφιλησάμην 
Subj. τον φιλήσωμαι 
Opt. φιλησοίμην φιλησαίμην 
Imp. φέλησαι 
Inf. φιλήσεσϑαι φιλήσασϑαι 
Part. φιλησόμενος φιλησάμενος 
8 Future. 
Ind. πεφιλήσομαιν 
Opt. πεφιλησοίμην 
[πῇ πεφιλήσεσϑαι 
Part. πεφιλησόμενος 


59 
Present Susy. 
φιλέωμαι, φιλῶμαι 
φιλέῃ, φιλῇ 
φιλέηται, φιλῆταιν 
φιλεώμεϑα, φιλώμεϑα 
φιλέησϑε, φιλῆσϑε 
φιλέωνται, φιλῶνταν 
φιλέησϑον, φιλῆσϑο» 
Present Orr. 
φιλεοίμην, φιλοίΐμην 
φιλέοιο, φιλοῖο 
φιλέοιτο, φιλοῖτο 
φιλεοίμεϑα, φιλοίμεϑο 
φιλέοισϑε,  φιλοῖσϑε 
φιλέοιντο, φιλοῖντο 
φιλέοισϑον, φιλοῖσϑον 
φιλεοίσϑην, φιλοίσϑην 
Present ἵν , 
φιλέεσυϑαι, φιλεῖσϑαι 
Present Parr. 
φιλεόμενος, φιλούμενος 
φιλεομένη, φιλουμένη 
φιλεόμενον, φιλούμενον 
Perfect. Aorist Pass. 
πεφίλημαι ἐφιλήϑην 
φιληϑῶ 
φιληϑείην 
πεφίλησο φιλήϑητι 
πεφιλῆσϑαι φιληϑῆναι 
πεφιλημένος φιληϑείς 
Pluperfect. Future Pass. 
ἐπεφιλήμην φιληϑήσομαι 
φιληϑησοίΐίμην 
φιληϑήσεσϑαι 
φιληϑησόμενος 


60 TABLES. rq 47. 
147. Contract. 3. 4΄ηλόω, to manifest. 
Active Voice. | 
Present Inp. Present Susy, 
S. 1 δηλόω, δηλῶ. δηλόω, δηλῶ 
2 δηλόεις, δηλοῖς δηλόῃς, δηλοῖς 
9. δηλύει, δηλοῖ δηλόῃ» δηλοὶ 
P 1 δηλόομεν, δηλοῦμεν δηλόωμεν, δηλῶμεν 
2 δηλόετε, δηλοῦτε δηλόητε, δηλῶτε 
9. δηλόουσι, δηλοῦσι δηλόωοσι, δηλῶσι 
D 2 δηλόετον, δηλοῦτον δηλόητον, δηλῶτον 
ImPERFEct. Present Opr. 
S. 1 ἐδήλοον, ἐδήλουν δηλόοιμι, δηλοῖμι, δηλοίην 
2 ἐδήλοες, ἐδήλους δηλόοις, δηλοῖς, δηλοίης 
9. ἐδήλοε, ἐδήλου δηλόοι, δηλοὶ, δηλοίη 
P. 1 ἐδηλόομεν, ἐδηλοῦμεν δηλόοιμεν, δηλοῖμεν, δηλοίημεν 
2 ἐδηλόετε, ἐδηλοῦτε δηλόοιτε, δηλοῖτε, δηλοίητε 
9. ἐδήλοον, ἐδήλουν δηλόοιεν, δηλοῖεν 
D. 2 ἐδηλόετον, ἐδηλοῦτον δηλόοιτον, δηλοῖτον,  δηλοίητον 
9. ἐδηλοέτην, ἐδηλούτην δηλοοίτην, δηλοίτην, δηλοιήτην 
Present Imp. Present Inr, 
S. 2 δήλοε, δήλου δηλόειν, δηλοῦν 
3 δηλοέτω, δηλούτω Ῥικω δε 
P, 2 δηλόετε, δηλοῦτε δηλόων, . δηλῶν 
9. δηλοέτωσαν, δηλούτωσαν, δηλόουσα, δηλοῦσα 
δηλοόντων, δηλούντων δηλόον, δηλοῦν 
Ὁ, 2. δηλόετον, δηλοῦτον G. δηλόοντος, δηλοῦντος 
3. “δηλοέτων, δηλούτων δηλοούσης, δηλούσης 
Future. Aorist. Perfect. Pluperfect. 
Ind, Sydow ἐδίλωσα δεδήλωκα ἐδεδηλώκειν 
Subj. δηλώσω 
Opt. δηλώσοιμι δηλώσαιμι 
imp. δήλωσον 
Inf. δηλώσειν δηλῶσαι δεδηλωκέναι 
Part. δηλώσων δηλώσας δεδηλωκώς 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


Mippie anv Passive Voices. 


Present Inp. 
S. 1 δηλόομαι, δηλοῦμαι 
2 δηλόη, δηλοῖ 
3 δηλόεται, δηλοῦται 
P. 1 δηλοόμεϑα, δηλούμεϑα 
2 δηλόευϑε, δηλοῦσϑε 
9. δηλόονται, δηλοῦνται 
D. 2 δηλόευϑον, δηλοῦσϑον 
IMPERFECT. 
S. 1 ἐδηλοόμην, ἐδηλούμην 
2 ἐδηλόου, ἐδηλοῦ 
9. ἐδηλόετο, ᾿ ἐδηλοῦτο 
P. 1 ἐδηλοόμεϑα, ἐδηλούμεϑα 
2 ἐδηλόεσϑε, ἐδηλοῦσϑε 
9. ἐδηλόοντο,  ἐδηλοῦντο 
D. 2 ἐδηλόεσϑον, ἐδηλοῦσϑον 
9. ἐδηλοέσϑην, ἐδηλούσϑην 
Present Imp. 
S. 2 δηλόου, δηλοῦ 
3 δηλοέσϑω, δηλούσϑω 
Ρ, 2 δηλόεσϑε, δηλοῦσϑε 
9. δηλοέσϑωσαν, δηλούσϑωσαν, 
δηλοέσϑων, δηλούσϑων 
D. 2 δηλόεσϑον, δηλοῦσϑον 
9. δηλοέσϑων, δηλούσϑων 
Future Mid. Aorist Mid. 
Ind. δηλώσομαι ἐδηλωσάμην 
Subj δηλώσωμαι 
Opt. δηλωσοίμην δηλωσαίμην 
Imp. δήλωσαν 
Inf. δηλώσεσϑαι δηλώσασϑαι 
Part. δηλωσόμενος δηλωσάμενος 
8 Future. 
Ind. δεδηλώσομαι 
Opt. δεδηλωσοίμην 
Inf. δεδηλώσεσϑαι 
Part. δεδηλωσόμενος 


6, 
Present ὄυ.. 
δηλόωμαι, ὁηλῶμαν 
δηλόῃ, δηλοὶ 
δηλόηται, δηλῶται 
δηλοώμεϑα, δηλώμεϑα 
δηλόησϑε, δηλῶσϑε 
δηλόωνται, δηλῶνται 
δηλόησϑον, δηλῶσϑον 
Present Orr. 
δηλοοίμην, δηλοίμην 
δηλόοιο, δηλοῖο 
δηλόοιτο, δηλυῖτο 
δηλοοίμεϑα, δηλοίμεϑα 
δηλόοισϑε, δηλοῖσϑε 
δηλόοιντο, δηλοῖντο 
δηλόοισϑον, δηλοῖσϑον 
δηλοοίσϑην, δηλοίσϑην 
Present Inv. 
δηλόευϑαι, δηλοῦσϑαι 
Present Part. 
δηλοόμενος, δηλούμενος 
δηλουμένη, δηλουμένη 
δηλούμενον, δηλούμενον 
Perfect. Aorist Pass, 
δεδήλωμαν ἐδηλώϑην 
δηλωϑῶ 
δηλωϑείην 
δεδήλωσο δηλώϑητι 
δεδηλῶσϑαι δηλωϑῆναι 
δεδηλωμένος δηλωϑ εἰς 
Pluperfect, Future Pass, 
ἐδεδηλώμην δηλωϑήσομαι 
δηλωϑησοιμὴν 
δηλωϑήσεσϑαι 
δηλωϑησόμενος 


62 


TABLES. 


[1 48 


148. Pure Verss. ii. VeRBs IN -μῖ. 


1. Ἵστημι, to place, to station. 
(2 Aor., Perf., Plup., and 3 Fut., to stand.) 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


‘PRESENT, 
‘Ind. Subj. * Opt. Imp. 
S. 1 ἵστημι ἱστῶ ἱσταίην 
2 ἵστης ἱστῆς ἱσταίης ἵστη 
3 ἵστησι ἱστῇ ἱσταΐη ἱστάτω 
P. 1 ἵσταμεν ἱσυτῶμεν ἱσταίημεν, ἱοταῖμεν 
2 ἵστατε ἱστῆτε ἱσταίητε, ἱσταῖτε ἵστατε 
9. ἑστᾶσι ἱστῶσι ἱσταίησαν, ἱσταῖεν ἱστάτωσαν. 
ἱστάντων 
D. 2 ἵστατον ἱστῆτον ἱσταΐητον, ἱσταῖτον ἵστατον 
9 : ἱσταιήτην, ἱσταίτην ἱστάτων 
Inf. ἑστάναι. Part. ἱστάς,-ἄσα,-ἀν᾽ ὝΑ.-ἄντος,- σης. 
ἹΜΡΕΚΡΈΟΥ. 
S. 1 ἵστην P. ἵσταμεν D. 
2 ἵστης ἵστατε ἵστατον 
9. ἵστη ἵστασαν ἱστάτην 
Aorist IT, 
Ind. Subj Opt. Imp. Inf. 
Sol ἔστην στῶ otuiny στῆναι 
2 ern OTIS otaing στῆϑι (στα) 
9. ἔστη στῇ σταΐη στήτω Part. 
P. 1 ἔστημεν στῶμεν σταΐημεν, σταῖμεν στάς 
2 ἔστητε στῆτε σταΐητε, σταῖτε στῆτε 
3 ἔστησαν στῶσι σταίησαν, σταῖεν στήτωσαν, στάντων 
D. 2 ἔστητον στῆτον σταίητον, σταῖτον στῆτον 
9. ἐστήτην σταιήτην, σταίτην στήτων 
Future. 1 Aorist. Perfect. Pluperfect. . 8 Future. 
Ind. otjow ἔστησα ἕστηκα ἕστήκειν, εἱστήκειν ἑστήξω 
Subj. omow ἕἕστήχω 
Opt. στήσοιμιε στήσαιμι ἑστήξοιμι 
Imp. στῆσον 
Inf. στήσειν στῆσαι * ἑστήξειν 
ω ῆ ἢ 
Part. στήσων στῆσα ἑστηκώ ἑστήξων 
7 ἧσας ηχώς ή 


VERBS IN -μι. 


Perrecr Il, 


63 


Prvrerr. IT. 


Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 
5.1. ἑυτῶὼ  ἕἕσταΐην ἕσταναι % 
2 κα * botaing ἕσταϑι » 
3 # * éutain ἑἕστάτω Peart. ΕἼ 
P. 1 ἕσταμεν ἑσυτῶμεν Se. ἑστώς ἕσταμεν 
2 ἕοτατε * ἕστατε ἑστῶσα ἕστατε 
3 ἑστᾶσι ἑστῶσι &c. ἑστώς, ἑστός ἕστασαν 
Ὦ. 2 ἕστατον * ἑστῶτος ἕστατον 
9 ἑστώσης ἑστάτην 
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. 
PRESENT. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 
S. Τ ἵσταμαι ἱστῶμαι ἵἱσταίμην ἵστασϑαι 
2 ἵστασαι ἱστῇ ἵσταιο ἵστασο, ἵστω 
9. ἵσταται ἱστῆται ἵσταιτο ἱυτάσϑω Part. 
P. 1 ἱστάμεϑα ἱστώμεϑα totoiuedto ἱστάμενος 
2 ἵστασυϑε ἵἴστῆσϑε ἵἱσταισϑὲ ὕἵστασϑε 
3 ἵστανται ἱστῶνται ἵσταιντο ἱστάσϑωσαν, ἱσυτάσϑων 
D. 2 ἵστασϑον ἱστῆσϑον ἵσταισϑον ἵστασϑον 
9 ἱσταίυϑην ἱστάσϑων 
IMPERFECT 
S. 1 ἱστάμην P. υτάμεϑα D. 
2 ἵστασο, iotw ἵστασϑε ἵστασϑον 
3 ἵστατο ἵσταντο ἱσυτάσϑην 


Fut. Mid. στήσομαι. 


Pluperf. ἑστάμην. 


Fut. Pass. σταϑήσομαι. 


Aor. Mid. ἐστησάμην. 
3 Fut. Mid. ἑστήξομαι. 


Perf. ἕσταμαι- 
Aor. Pass. ἐστάϑην. 


1 49. 2. THe Seconp Aorist πρίασθαι, to buy. 


Ind. 
S. 1 ἐπριάμην 
2 ἐπρίω 
9. ἐπρίατο 
P. 1 ἐπριάμεϑα 
2 ἐπρίασϑε 
9. ἐπρίαντο 
D. 2 ἐπρίασϑον 
3 ἐπριάσϑην 


Subj. 
πρίωμαι 
πρίῃ 
πρίηταν 
πριώμεϑα 
πρίησϑε 
πρίωνται 
πρίησϑον 


Opt. 
πριαίμην 
πρίαιο 
πρίαιτο 
πριαίμεϑα 
πρίαισϑε 
πρίαιντο 
πρίαισϑον 
πριαίσϑην 


Imp. Inf. 

πρίασϑαι 

πρίωσο, πρίω 

πριάσϑω Part. 
πριάμενος 

πρίασϑε 

πριάσϑωσαν, πριάσϑων 

πρίασϑον 

πριάσϑων 


64 TABLES. [Π 50. 


150. Verss in-w. 3. Τίϑημι, to put. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


PRESENT. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. lap. 
S. 1 τέϑημι τιϑὼ τιϑείην 
2 τίϑης τιϑῇς τ:ϑείης tide 
3 τέϑησι τιϑῇ ει ϑ εἰη τιϑέτω 
P. 1 τίϑεμεν τιϑῶμεν τιϑείημεν, τιϑεῖμεν 
2 1 ets Ti HTE τιϑείητε, τι εἴτε τίθετε 
3 τιϑεᾶσι, τιϑῶὦσι τιϑείησαν, τιϑεῖεν τι ϑέτωσαν, 
τιϑεῖσι τι ϑέντων 
D. 2 τίϑετον τιϑῆτον τιϑείητον, τιϑεῖτον τίϑετον 
9 : τιϑειήτην, τιϑείτην τιϑέτων 


Inf. τιϑέναι. Part. τιϑεἰς,-εἶσα,-ἐν᾽ G.-evt0¢,-8iang. 


IMPERFECT. 

S. 1 ἐτίϑην, ἐτίϑουν P. ἐτέϑεμεν D. 

Q ἐτίϑης, ἐτίϑ εις ἐτίϑετε ἐτίϑετον 

3 ἐτίϑη, ἐτίϑει ἐτίϑεσαν ἐτιϑέτην 

Aorist I. Aorist II. 
Ind. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. 

S. 1 ἔϑηκα %* da ϑείην 

2 ἔϑηκας 7 ϑὴς Heine ϑὲς 

9. ἔϑηκε * ϑὴ ϑείη ϑέτω 
P. 1 ἐθήκαμεν ἔϑεμεν ϑῶμεν ϑείημεν, ϑεῖμεν 

2 ἐθήκατε ἔϑετε ϑὴτε ϑείητε, ϑεῖτε ϑέτε 

9. ἔϑηκαν ἔϑεσαν ϑῶσι ϑείησαν, ϑεῖν ϑεέτωσαν, 

ϑέντων 

ῃ.2 ἔϑετον ϑῆτον Θϑείητον, ϑεῖτον ϑέτον 

9 ἐϑ την ϑειήτην, ϑείτην ϑέτων 
Aor. IL, Inf. ϑεῖνακι. Part. ϑείς, ϑεῖσα, ϑέν" G. ϑέντος, ϑείσης 

Future. Perfect. Pluperfect. 

Ind. ϑήσω = * τέϑεικα ered εἰκειν 
Opt. ϑήσοιμι 
Inf. ϑήσειν τεϑεικέναι 


Part. ϑήσων τεϑεικώς 


450. 65 


VERBS IN -μι. 


MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. 


6 * 


PRESENT. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. 
S 1 τίϑεμαι τιϑῶμαι τιϑείμην, τιϑοίμην 
2 τἰϑεσαι, τίϑῃ τιϑὴ τίϑειο, τίϑοιο 
3 τέϑεται τιϑῆται τίϑειτο, τίϑοιτο 
P 1 τιϑέμεϑα τιϑώμεϑα τιϑείμεϑα, τιϑοίμεϑα 
2 τίϑεσϑε τιϑῆσϑε τέϑεισϑε, τίϑοισθε. 
3 τέϑενται τιϑῶνται τίϑειντο, τέϑοιντο 
D. 2 τίϑεσϑον τιϑῆσϑον τίϑεισϑον, τίϑοισϑον 
9 τιϑείσϑην, τιϑοίσϑην 
Imp. Inf. IMPERFECT. 
ana τέϑεσϑαι ἐτιϑέμην 
2 τίϑεσο, τίϑου étidsuo, ἐτίϑου 
9 τιϑέσθϑω Part. ἐτέϑετο 
P.1 τιϑέμενος ἐτιϑέμεϑα 
2 τἰϑεσϑε ἐτίϑεσϑε. 
3 τιϑέσθωσαν, τιϑέσϑων ἐτίϑεντο 
D. 2 τίϑεσθϑον é1i 9 20 Sov 
3 τιϑέσϑων ἐτιϑέσϑην 
Aorist IT, Mrppte. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 
5.1 ἐθέμην ϑώμαν ϑείμην (ϑοίμην) ϑέσϑαι 
2 ἔϑου ϑὴ ϑεῖο ov 
3 ἔϑετο ϑῆται θεῖτο Fado Part. 
P. 1 ἐθέμεϑα ϑώμεϑα ϑείμεθϑα ϑέμενος 
ὦ ἔϑευϑε ϑῆσϑε ϑεῖσϑε ϑέσϑε 
3 ἔϑεντο Sorta ϑεῖντο ϑέσθωσαν, ϑέσθων 
D. 2 ἔϑεσϑον ϑῆσϑον ϑεῖσϑον ϑέσϑον 
9 ἐθέσθϑην ϑείσϑην ϑέσθων 
Fut. Mid. Aor. Pass, Fut. Pass. Perfect. Pluperfect, 
Ind. ϑήσομαα ἐτέϑην τεϑήσομαα τέϑειμαν ἐτεϑείμην 
Subj. τεϑῶ 
Opt. ϑησοίμην τεϑείην τεϑησοίμην 
Imp. τέϑητι τέϑεισο 
Inf. ϑήσεσϑαι τεϑῆναν τεϑήσεσϑαι τεϑεῖσϑαι 
Part. ϑησόμενος τεϑ εἰς τεϑησόμενος τεϑειμένος 


66 ‘TABLES, iq 51 


1S1.- Verss in-uwe. 4. Δίδωμι, to give. 
ACTIVE VOICE. 


PRESENT. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. 
δ. 1 δίδωμι διδῶ διδοίην (διδῴην) 
2 δίδως διδῷς διδοίηῆς . δίδου 
3 δίδωσι διδῷ διδοίη διδότω 


P. 1 δίδομεν διδῶμεν διδοίημεν, διδοῖμεν 
2 δίδοτε διδῶτε διδοίητε, διδοῖτε δίδοτε 


3 διδόᾶδσι, διδῶσι διδοίησαν, διδοῖεν διδότωσαν, 
διδοῦσι διδόντων 
D. 2 δίδοτον διδῶτον διδοίητον, διδοῖτον δίδοτον 
3 διδοιήτην, διδοίτην διδότων 


Inf. διδόναι. Part. διδούς,-οὔσα,-όν" G.-dvtoc,-ovens. 


IMPERFECT. 
8. 1 ἐδίδων, ἐδίδον ἈΡ. ἐδίδομεν D. 
2 ἐδίδως, ἐδίδους ἐδίδοτε ἐδίδοτον 
3 ἐδίδω, ἐδίδουν ἐδίδοσαν ἐδιδότην 
Αοπιβτ]. rare Aorist IT. 
Ind. Ind. ~ Subj. Opt. Imp. 
8S. 1 ἔδωκα * δῶ δοίην (δῴην) 
2 ἔδωκας * δῷς δοίης δός 
3 ἔδωκε - dw δοίη δότω 
P. 1 ἐδώκαμεν ἔδομεν δῶμεν δοίημεν, δοῖμεν 
2 ἐδώκατε ἔδοτε δῶτε δοίητε, δοῖτε δότε 
9. ἔδωκαν ἔδοσαν δῶσι δοίησαν, δοῖεν δότωσαν, 
δόντων 
D 2 ἔδοτον δῶτον δοίητον, δοῖτον δότον 
9 ἐδότην δοιήτην, δοίτην dorew 
Aor. IT. Inf. δυῦναι. Part. δούς, δοῦσα, Sdv* G. δόντος. δούσης 
Future. Perfect. Pluperfect. 
Ind. δώσω δέδωκα ἐδεδώκειν 
Opt. δώσοιμ 
Inf. δώσειν δεδωκέναι 


Part. δώσων δεδωκώς 


q 51.] VERBS IN =. 67 
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. 
PRESENT. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. 
S. 1 δίδομαι διδῶμαι διδοίμην | 
2 δίδοσαι διδῷ δίδοιο δίδοσο, δίδου 
3 δίδοται διδῶται δίδοιτο δίδοσϑω 
P. 1 διδόμεϑα διδώμεϑα διδοίμεϑα 
2 δίδοσϑε διδῶσϑε δίδοισϑε διδόσϑε 
3 δίδονται διδώνται δίδοιντο διδόσϑωσαν 
διδόσϑων 
Ὦ. 2 δίδοσϑον διδῶσϑον δίδοισϑον δίδοσθον 
3 διδοίσϑην διδόσϑων 
Inf. δίδοσθαι. Part. διδόμενος. 
IMPERFECT, 
S. 1 ἐδιδόμην P. ἐδιδόμεϑα D. 
2 ἐδίδοσο, ἐδίδου ἐδίδουϑε ἐδίδοσϑον 
9. ἐδίδοτο ἐδίδοντο ἐδιδόσϑην 
Aorist IT. Mippte. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 
S 1 ἐδόμην δώμαν δοίμην δόσϑαι 
2 ἔδου δῷ δοῖο δοῦ 
9. ἔδοτο δῶται Sotto . δόσϑω Part. 
P. 1 ἐδόμεϑα δώμεθϑα δοίμεϑα δόμενος 
2 ἔδοσϑε δῶσϑε δοῖσϑε δόσϑε 
9. ἔδοντο δῶνται δοῖντο δόσϑωσαν, δόσϑων 
D. 2 ἔδοσϑυν δῶσϑον δοῖσϑον δόσϑον 
3 ἐδόσϑην δοίσϑην δόσϑων 
Fut. Mid. Aor. Pass. Fut. Pass. Perfect. Pluperfect. 
Ind. davoune ἐδόϑην. δοϑήσομαι δέδομαι ἐδεδόμην 
Subj. boda 
Opt. δωσοίμην δοϑείην δοϑησοίμην 
Imp δόϑητι δέδοσο 
Inf. δώσεσϑαι δοϑῆναι δοθήσεσϑαι δεδόσϑαι 
Part. δωσόμενος δοϑεὶξς δοϑθησόμενος δεδομένος 


Oe 


Fut, Mid. δείξομαι. 
Pluperf. ἐδεδείγμην. 


_ TABLES, 


[489 


152. ΨΈΕΚΒΒ in-w. 5. Δείκνῦμι, to show. 
ACTIVE VOICE. | 


Future δείξω. 


MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. 


Aorist ἔδειξα. 


PRESENT, 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. 
1 δείκνῦμι δεικγύω δεικνύοιμι 
2 δείκνῦς δεικνύῃς δεικνύοις ᾿ δείκνῦ 
3 δεέκνῦσι δεικνύῃ δεικνύοι δεικνύτω 
1΄ δείκνὕμεν δεικνύωμεν δεικνγύοιμεν 
2 dsixvute δεικνύητε δεικνύοιτε δείκνὕτε 
9. δεικνύδσι, δεικνύωσι δεικνύοιεν δεικνύτωσαν, 
δεικνῦσι δεικνύντων 
.  δείκνὕτον δεικνύητον δεικνύοιτον Seixvv tov 
3 δεικνυοίτην δεικνύτων 
Inf. δεικνύναι. Part. δεικνύς,-ὕσα,-ὐν᾽ ὟΕ.-ὕντος,-ὕσης. 
IMPERFECT. : 
1 ἐδείκνῦν, ἐδείκνῦον P. ἐδείκνύμεν D. 
2 ἐδείκνῦς, ἐδείκνῦες ἐδείκνυτε ἐδείχνὕτον 
Ὁ ἐδείκνῦ, ἐδείκνὕε ἐδείκνυσαν ἐδεικεύτην 


PRESENT. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. » 

1 δείχνῦμαι δεικνύωμαι δεικνυοίμην 

2 δείκνυσαι δεικνύῃη δεικνύοιο δείκνυσο 

3 δείκνυται δεικνύηται δεικνύοιτο δεικνύσθω 

Ι δεικνύμεϑα δεικνυώεϑα δεικνυοίμεϑα 

2 δείκνυυνϑε δεικνύησυϑε δεικνύοισϑε δείκνυσθϑε 

3 δείκνυνται δεικνύωνταιν δεικνύοιντο δεικνύυ ϑωσαν͵ 

ὦ δεικνυύσϑωο'ν 
2 δείχνυσϑον δεικνύησϑον δεικνύοισϑον δείκνυσθϑον 
9 δεικνυοίσϑην δεικνύσυϑων 
Inf. δείκνυσϑαι. Part. δεικνύμενος. 

IMPERFECT. 

1 ἐδεικνύμην P. ἐδεικνύμεϑα D. 

2 ἐδείκνυσο ἐδείκνυσϑε ἐδείκνυσϑον 

3 ἐδείκνυτο ἐδείκνυντο ἐδεικνύυϑην 


συμαΐι 


Aor. Pass. ἐδείχϑην. 


Aor. Mid. ἐδειξάμην. Perf. δέδειγμαι. 
Fut. Pass. δειχϑ ή- 


4 53.] 


VERBS ΙΝ -u. 


153. 6. Dyui, to say. 


Ind. Sub. 
S. 1 φημί, ji φῶ 
2 φής, φῇς φὴς 


3 φησί φὴ 

P. 1 φὰμέν φῶμεν 
2 φατέ φὴτε 
9. φασί φῶσι 

D. 2 φᾶτόν φῆτον 
3 

S 1 ἔφην, ἦν 
2 ἔφης ἔφησϑα 
ὃ ἔφη, ἡ 


Synopsis or ASSOCIATED 


Active Voicr. 

Present. Imperfect. 
Ind. φημί, φάσκω ἔφην, ἔφασκον 
Subj. φῶ, φάσκω 
Opt. φαέην, φάσκοιμι 
Imp. φάϑι, φάσκε 
Inf. φάναι, φάσκειν 
Part. φᾶς, φάσκων 

1 wat 201.2. Passi 
Ind. ἔφησα, εἶπα εἶπον 
Subj. φήσω, εἴπω εἴπω 
Opt. φήσαιμι, εἴπαιμι εἴποιμι 
Imp. # εἶπον εἰπέ 
Inf. φῆσαι, εἶπαι εἰπεῖν 
Part. φήσας, εἴπας εἰπών 


Pres 


ENT. 


Opt. 


φαίην 
φαίης 
guin 
φαίημεν, 
φαΐητε, 
φαΐησαν, 


φαίητον, 
φαιήτην, 


φαῖμεν 
φαῖτε 
φαῖεν 


φαῖτον 
φαΐτην 


IMPERFECT. 


P: 


ἔφαμεν 
ἔφατε 
ἔφασαν 


69 
Imp. Inf. 
paves 
φάϑι 
φάτω Part. 
pas 
gate 
φάτωσαν, φάντων 
φάτον 
φάτων 
D. 
ἔφατον 
ἐφάτην 
Forms. 
Future. 
φήσω, ἐρῶ 


4 égoiut, ἐροίην 


φήσειν, ἐρεῖν 
φήσων, ἐρῶν 
Perfect. Pluperfect, 
εἴρηκα εἰρήκειν 
εἰρηκέναι 
εἰρηκώς 


ΜΊΡΡΙΙ anv Passive Voices. 


Pres. Inf. φάσϑαι, Part. φάμενος " Perf. Imp. 8. 3 πεφάσϑω" 
Imperf. épacxduny’ Perf. εἴρημαι, Plup, εἰρήμην, 3 Fut. εἰρήσο- 
μαι, Aor. Pass. ἐῤῥήϑην, ἐῤῥέϑην, Fut. Pass. ῥηϑήσομαι. 


70 


TABLES. 


154. Verzs in-u. 7. 
ACTIVE VOICE. 
PRESENT, 
Ind. Subj. Opt 
S 1 tnw οἰῶ ἱείην 
2 ing ἵῃς ising 
3 ino in isin 
P 1 isuey ἱῶμεν ἱεέημεν, ἱεῖμεν 
2 iste inte isinte, site 
3 ἱᾶσι, ἱεῖσι ἱῶσι ἱείησαν, ἱεῖεν 
D 2 ἕετον ijtoy ἱείητον, ἱεῖτον 
9 ἱειήτην, ἱείτην 
Imperrecr. Aorist I, 
Ind. [νὰ © Subj. 
S 1 inp, tour (iar) ἧκα * ὦ 
2 ing, ἵεις κας * ἧς 
3 in, ἵει xe * 7 
Ρ 1 fewer ἥκαμεν εἶμεν ὧμεν 
2 ἵετε ἥκατε εἶτε ἧτε 
3 ἵεσαν. ἧκαν εἶσαν wor 
D 2 isto» εἶτον ἦτον 
3 ἑέτην εἵτην 


Future, ἥσω. 


Ind. 

S 1 ἵεμαι 
2 ἵεσαι, in 

9. ἵεται 


&c. 
IMPERFECT. 
S. 1 tguny 


2 ἵεσο, tov 
3 c 
ἵετο 


Perfect, εἶχα. 


[{] 54 
Ἵημι, to send. 


Imp. Inf. 
: cP? 
ἱένα: 
ἵει 
ἱέτω Part. 
. ¢ 
ἱείς 
ἵετε 
ἑέτωσαν, ἱέντων 
ἵετον 
ἱέτων 
Aorist [1. 
Opt. Imp. Inf, 
εἴην ες εἶνα 
εἴης ἔς 
εἴη, &e. ἕτω Part 
< 
εἷς 
ἕτε 
« 5 A 
ἕτωσαν, ἕντων 
εν 
ἕτον 
oe 
ἕτων 


Pluperfect, εἵκειν. 


MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. 
Present, 
Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 
ἱῶμαν ἱείμην, ἱοίμην. + ἵεσϑαι 
in ἵειο, ἵοιο tego, tov 
ijntoe isto, ἵἕοιτο ἱέσϑω Part. 
ὅσο. ὅσο. &c. &c. ἱέμενος 
Aorist [I]. Mipp.e. 
Ind. Subj. Ορε Imp. Inf. 
εἵμην ὧμαι οἵμην ἕσϑαι 
£100 7 οἷο οὗ 
εἶτο ἧται οἷἵ͵ἵο ἔἕσϑω Part. 
&c. &e. ὅσο. &e. Eusvog 


&c. 


Fut. Mid. ἥσομαι. 


1 Aor. Mid. ἡκάμην. Perf. εἶμαι. Plup 


εἵμην. Aor. Pass. εἴϑην. Fut. Pass. ἐϑήσομαι. 


4] 55.) VERBS IN -μι. 7) 
156. 8. Hiui, to be. 
PRESENT. 
ind. Subj Opt. Imp. Inf. 
S. 1 sivé ὦ εἴην. εἶναν 
2 εἷς, εἶ ἧς εἴης ἴσϑι 
9. ἐστὲ ἢ εἴη ἔστω (ἤτω; 
P. 1 ἐσμέν ὦμεν εἴημεν, εἶμεν Part. 
2 ἐστέ τε εἴητε, site ἔστε ὧν 
9. εἰσέ΄ wut εἴησαν; elev ἔστωσαν», οὖσα 
ἔστων, ὄντων ὃν 
D. 2 ἐστόν ἦτον εἴητον, εἶτον ἔστον ὄντος 
3 εἰήτην, εἴτην ἔστων οὔσης 
IMPERFECT. Furure. 
Ind. Opt. Inf. 
S. 1 ἦν, ἢ» ἤμην ἔσομαι. ἐσοίμην ἔσεσϑαι 
2 ἧς, node ἔσῃ» ἔσει ἔσοιο 
9. ἦν ἔσεται; ἔσταν ἔσοιτο Part. 
Ps 1 ἦμεν ἐσόμεθα ἐσοίμεϑα ἐσόμενος 
2 ἦτε, ἤστε ἔσεσϑε ἔσοισϑε ἐσομένη 
3 ἤσαν ἔσονται ἔσοιντο ἐσόμενον 
D. 2 ἦτον, ἦστον ἔσεσυϑον | ἔσοισϑον 
3 ἤτην, ἤστην ἐσοίσϑην 
Diacectic Forms. 
PRESENT. 
Ind. Subj. Imp. Part. 

S. 1 ἐμμί D. 8S. 1 ἕω 1. S. 2 ἔσο, ἴσσο P. M. ἰών 1. 

2 εἷς I. tiw E. Inf. F. ἰοῦσα I. 
ἰσσί P. 3 ἧσι E. ἔμεν E. ἰοῖσα Ὦ. 
8 ἐνσί Ὁ ino: E. Yussns E, sica D. 

Pp. 1 εἰμίν I P. 1 ὦμις Ὁ. ἔμμεν P. ἰᾶσα D. 
εἰμίς D. 3 ἔωσι I. ἔμμεναι E. Ae N. ἰόν 1. 
intr Ρ, Opt. ἧμιν Ὁ. Gen. 

3 wer b. S. 2 sincta P. εἶμεν Ὁ. ἐόντος I. 
ἴάσι E. ἴοις, 8 ἴοι 1. tiveves D. εὖντος Ὁ. 
IMPERFECT. 

8. 1 inv E. S. 2 ins P. 8S. 3 tm I. P. 3 ἔσαν I. Ῥ, 
ἴεν EL incéa E, ἧς Ὁ. ἔσσαν P, 
ἔσκον It. tas I. ἔσκε It. ἔσκον It. 
ἴα 1. 3 any E. P. 1 fuss Ὁ. facay I, 
ἦα 1. ἦε0) 1. 2 face L εἴα πο Ey 


72 TABLES. — VERBS IN -μι. . [9 55 56 
Diatecric Forms oF εἰμί, to be 
Future Inp. 
5. 1 ἔσσομαι E, 5. 3 ἴσετα, E. EF 1 ἰσομεσθα P. 
2 ἔσεαι I. ἔσσετα, E. ἰσσόμεθα Ἐς, 
ἔσσεαι Ἐμ ἐσεῖσα, Ὁ. 2 ἔσσεσθε E. 
ἔσσῃ P. ἰσσεῖταὶ D. 3 ἔσσονται E. 
icon Ὁ. ΐ . ἐσοῦντα, D 
3 
156. 9. Eiw, to go. 
PRESENT. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part 
S. 1 elu ἴω ἴοιμις ἰοίην ἰέναι ἰών 
2 εἷς, εἰ ἴης tow. ἔϑι (εἰ) ἐγῦσα 
9. εἶσι ἴῃ ἔοι ἴτω ἰόν 
P. 1 ἔμεν ἴωμεν ἴοιμεν 
2 ἴτε ἴητε toute Tre 
3 taor ἴωσι ἴοιεν ἴτωσαν, 
ἰόντων, tray 
Ὦ. 2 ito» ἴἤητον ἴοιτον ἴτον 
9 : ἰοίτην ἴτων 
PriurerFect II., or ἸΜΡΕΒΡΕΟΤ. 
S. 1 jer, ἦα (jia) P. ἤειμεν, ἣμεν D. : 
2 je, ἤεισϑα Fete, ἥτε HELTOY, ἤτον 
3 πει(ν) 780 GY ἡείτην, ἤτην 
MippteE (to hasten). Present, ἔεμαι. Imperfect, ἐέμην. 
Dracectic Forms. 
PRESENT. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Inf. 
S 2 εἶς I. 8S. 1 εἴω P. S. 3 εἴη E. ἦμεν E. D. 
εἶσθα E. 2 ἴησθα E. isin E. ἔμεναι E. 
3 inn E. ἔμμεναι, Ey 
-. 9 εἶσι », P; 1 Tos» E. ἤνα: r 
IMPERFECT. 
8. 1 fa 1. P. 1 ἤομεν E. D. 2 ἤστην EB. 
3 fie L 3 ἴσαν E. 
ἦν Ἐν, ἤϊσαν I. 
4s E. ἤτον F. 


Mi. Fut. εἴσομαι, Aor. εἰσάμην, Ep. (§ 252). 


{ 57.] 


137. Pure Verses. 


Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 
S. 1 ἔδην Bw βαΐην βῆναι 
2 ἔβης Bus βαίης βηϑι (36) 
8 iin βὴῇ Bay Bir Part 
P. 1 ἔβημεν βῶμεν βαίημεν, βαῖμεν βάς 
2 ἔβητε βῆτε βαίητε; Buire βῆτε 
3 ἔβησαν βῶσι βαίησαν, βαῖν βήτωσαν, βάντων 
1) 2 ἔβητον βῆτον βαίητον, βαὶτον βῆτον 
3 ἐβητην βαιήτην, Buityy βήτων 
2. Aorist II. of ἀποδιδράυκχῶ, to run away. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Inf. 
S. | ἀπεδρᾶν anodea ἀποδραίην ἀποδρᾶναι 
2 ἀπεδρᾶς ἀποδυᾷς ἀποδυαίης 
3 ἀπέδρᾶ ἀποδρᾷ anodguin Part. 
P. 1 ἀπεδρᾶμεν ἀποδρυῶμεν &c. ἀποδράς 
2 ἀπέδρᾶτε ἀποδρᾶτε 
3 ἀπεδρᾶσαν ἀποδρῶσι 
D. 2 ἀπέδρᾶτον ἀποδρᾶτον 
9. ἀπεδράτην ; 
3. Aorist IT. of γιγνώσκω, to know, 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 
S. 1 ἔγνων γνῶ γνοίην (γνῳην) γνῶναι 
2 ἔγνως γύῷς γνοίης γνῶϑι 
5} ἔγνω γνῷ yroin γνώτω Part. 
P. 1 ἔγνωμεν γνῶμεν γνοίημεν, γνοῖμεν yrovs 
2 ἔγνωτε γνῶτε γνοίητε, γγοῖτε yrwre 
9 ἔγνωσαν γνῶσι γνοίΐησαν, γνοῖεν γνώτωσαν, yvortay 
D. 2 ἔγνωτον γνῶτον γνοίΐητον, yroitoy yrator 
3 ἐγνώτην γρνοιήτην, γνοίτην γνώτων 
4. Aorist II. of δύνω, to enter, to put on. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Iinp. Inf. 
S 1 viv δύο! δύσιμι δῦναι 
2 ἔδῦς δύῆς δύδις Oude : 
3 £06 Oy δύοι δύτω Part. 
Ρ 1 wiper δύωμεν δύοιμεν , δύς 
2 Wore δύητε δυοιτε δῦτε 
3 ἔδῦσαν δύωσι δύοιεν δύτωσαν, δύντων 
Ὦ. 2 ἔδῦτον δύητον δύοιτον δῦτον 
ὦ ἐδύτην δυοίτὴην Sura 


NUDE SECOND 


AORISTS. 


73 


ili; Secunp AorisTs. 


1. Aorist IL. of βαίνω, to go. 


7 


74 TABLES. ΤΥ͂ 58, 59. 


158. xv. (E.) Prereritive Verss. 
1. Oida, to know. 


Perrect II, 


Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 

S 1 οἶδα εἰδῶ εἰδείην εἰδέναι 

2 οἶδας, οἶσϑα εἰδῆς εἰδείηῆς ἴσϑι 

3 oids εἰδῇ εἰδείη ἴστω Part. 
P 1 οἴδαμεν, ἔσμεν εἰδῶμεν &e. εἰδώς 

2 οἴδατε, ἴστε εἰδῆτε ἔστε 

3 οἰδᾶσι, ἰσᾶσι εἰδῶσι ἔστωσαν 
D. 2 οἴδατον, ἴστον εἰδῆτον ἴστον 3 ἔστων 


Puurerrect II, 


S. 1 ἤδειν, ἤδη Ρ, ἤδειμεν, ἦσμεν D. 
2 ἥδεις, ἤδης, ἤδειτε, note ἤδειτον, ἧστο» 
ἤδεισϑα, ἤδησϑα 
3 ἤδει(»), ἤδη ἤδεσαν, ἦσαν ἡδείτην, ἤστην 
Future, εἴσομαι, εἰδήσω. Aorist, εὔἴδησα. 
2. Ζέδοικα or δέδια, to be afraid. 
Perrect II. Puivurerr, 11 
Ind. Subj. Imp. Inf. 
S. 1 δέδια δεδίω δεδιέναι ἐδεδίειν 
2 δέδιας δεδίῃς δέδιϑι ἐδεδίεις 
3 δέδιε dedin ΄᾽΄ δεδίτω Part. ἐδεδίει 
P. 1 δέδιμεν δεδίωμεν : δεδιώς ἐδέδιμεν 
2 δέδιτε δεδίητε δέδιτε ἐδέδιτε 
3 δεδίασν δεδίωσι δεδίτωσαν ἐδέδισαν 
D. 2 δέδιτον δεδίητον δέδιτον ἐδέδιτον 
9 δεδίτων ἐδεδίτην 


1 Perf. δέδοικα. 1 Pluperf. ἐδεδοίκειν. Fut. δείσομαι. Aor. 
ἔδεισα. 


159. 8. *Huat, to sit. 


Perrecr. PLuPERFECT. 
Ind. Imp. Inf. Part. 
s. 1 ἦμαι ἦσϑαι ἥμενος ἥμην 
QZ ica ἦσο σο 
3 ἧσται ἤσϑω ἧστο 
PB. 1 ἥμεϑα ἥμεϑα 
2 ἦσϑε ἦσϑε ἦσϑε 
3 ἧνται ἥσθωσαν, ἥσϑων vTO 
D. 2 ἦσϑον ἦἧἦσϑον 3 ἥσϑων ἦσϑον 3 ἥσϑην 


4 59, 60.] | PRETERITIVE VERBS. 7d 


PRETERITIVE VERBS. 


4, Κάϑημαι, to sit down. 


PERFECT. 
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 
S. | χάϑημαι κάϑωμαι καϑοίμην καϑῆσϑαι 
2 κάϑησαι κάϑῃ κάϑοιο κάϑησο 
9 χάϑηται κάϑηται κάϑοιτο καϑήσϑω Part. 
P. 1 καϑήμεϑα καϑώμεϑα καϑοίμεϑα καϑήμενος 


ὦ χάϑησϑε χάϑησϑε χάϑοισϑε κχκάϑησϑε 
3 κάϑηνται χάϑωνται χάϑοιντο καϑήσϑωσαν, αϑήσϑων 


D. 2 χάϑησϑον κάϑησϑον καάϑοισϑον κάϑησϑον 


9 καϑοίσϑην καϑήσϑων 
PLUPERFECT. 
SL tad juny, καϑήμην P. 1 ἐκαϑήμεϑα, καϑήμεϑα 
2 ἐχάϑησο, καϑῆσο 2 ἐκάϑηυϑε, καϑῆσϑε 
9. ἐκάϑητο, καϑῆστο 9 ἐκάϑηντο, καϑῆντο 


D. 2 ἐκάϑησϑον, καϑῆσϑον D. 8 ἐκαϑήσϑην, καϑήσϑην 


I 60. Κεῖμαι, to lie down. 


PRESENT or PERFECT. 


Ind. - Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 
S. 1 κεῖμαι κέωμαι κεοίμην κεῖσθαι 
2 κεῖσαι κέἕη κέοιο κεῖσο 
~ Ἷ Ἶ ’ ’ 
3 χεῖται κέηται κέοιτο κείσθω Part. 
P. 1 κείμεϑα κεώμεϑα κεοίμεϑα κείμενος 
2 κεῖσϑε κέησϑε κέοισϑε κεῖσϑε 
3 κεῖνται κέωνται κέοιντο χείσϑοσαν, κείσϑων 


D. 2 κεῖσϑον κέησϑον κέοισϑον κεῖσϑον 
9 κεοίσϑην κείσθων 


IMPERFECT or PLUPERFECT. 


S. 1 ἐκείμην P. ἐκείμεθϑα D. 
2 ἔχεισο ἔκεισϑε ἔκεισϑον 
3 ἔκειτο ᾿ ἔκειντο ἐκείσϑην 


Future, χείσομαι. 


76 TABLES. — CHANGES IN THE ROOT. [4] 61 


21 Gi. xvi. CHANGES IN THE Root 


A. Evpnonic CHANGES. 


[S$ 259 - 264.) 
: Pp . a. of a tos. 4. Metathesis. 
x 10D Ub. of ε and ὁ to % 5. To avoid Double Aspiratioa. 
2. Contraction. 6. Omission or Addition of Consonant, 
%. Syncope. 7. From the Omission of the Digamn.a. 


B. Empuatic CHANGES. 


I. By Leneruentnc A SHortT VOWEL. 


[998 266 - 270. ] 
1. ἃ to mn 4. ε to es. 7. οἷο ove 
9. ἃ tO ate 5. 1 tor. 8. ὕ tod 
5. Varicas Changes of a. 6. ¥ to ε;- 9. 0 to tv. 
II. By tue Apprrion or CONSONANTS. 
[S$ 271 - 282.) 
1. Of ¢ a. To Labial Roots. { «. Prefixed to a Consonant 
F β. To Other Roots. 3. Of »J 2 Affixed to a Consonant. 
΄ Prefixed so") y. Affixed to a Vowel 
ae am 3° Prefxed.t 
β. Affixed. en = 
Uniting with a «.- Without further change. 
y- Palatal to form σσί rr). “ΠΕ B. Vowel changed by preces- 
2.0fe, δ “ obese * 4. Of cx 4 y. Vowel lengthened. [sion 
le Α eo ote δ, Metathesis. 
¢ Lingual “ &. ss Consonant dropped. 
ῃ. τα “ σσίς4). 
| Δ Labial “ foe. | 5. OF 3, y, 9, x 


Ill. By Increasine THE NuMBER OF SYLLABLEs, Ἂ 
(58 288 -- 300.) 


1. By Reduplication (§§ 288 -- 286). 


a. Proper. a. In Verbs in -ps. 
b. Attic. β. In Verbs in -cxm. 
c. Improper. y- In Other Verbs. 
2. By Syllabie Affiwes (§§ 287 - 299). 
a «and ε- a. To Pare Roots, 
a. Without further change. a. τ Ἢ = ingot ia Liquid 
b 4&4. With the Insertion of » | |S” [Roots 
(v. With ἂν prolonged. ξ iL 
6. νι, 8. Other Syllables. 
8. By Exchange of Letters (§ 300). 
σ᾽ becoming i. 


C. ANnomatous CHANGES. 
[9 301.] 


q] 62.] 


DERIVATION. 


D. Tasres or Formation. 


{ 62. 


1. ΤΆΒΙΕ or DERIVATION. 


A. Novuns. 
($$ 305-313.] 


1. From Verss, denoting 
1. The Action; in -cis, -cid, -n, τῶ, 
-ὃς (-0v), -T05, -ος (-£05), -μεός, -μή. 
Ὡς The Effect or Odject, in -μᾶὰ. 
3. The Doer, in -rns, -rng, -Twe, 
(BF. -σριᾶ, -πειρᾶ, -rels, -ris,) -εύς, 
-ος- 
4. The Place, Instrument, &c., in 
-«ἤἥρϊον, -τρον, τρᾶ-᾿ 
11. From ApbJEcTIVES, expressing 
the Abstract, in -ia (-sid, -o1i), -ens, 
-«σύνη, -ος (-£05), -ἄς. 


Ἴ1Π. From ΟΤΗΕΕ Novuns. 


1. Patrials, in -rns (F. -r¥s), -εὖς 


(F. -Ts). 
2. Patronymics, in -idns, -ἄδης, 
“Zong (Ff. ts, «ἅς, -las), “ia 


(F. Wyn, -ivn)s : 

3. Female Appellatives, in -ἴς, -«αἰνᾶ, 
«εἰὰ, -σσᾶ (-««ἄλ). 

4. Diminutives, in -ἴον (ἥδιον, -ἄριον, 
«ύλλιον, -ὕδριον, &c.), ols, -ἰδεύς, 
-ἴχνη, -ἄκνη, ουλλίς, «ὅλος, &e. 

δ. Augmentatives, in -ων, -wvit, -αξ- 


Β. ADJECTIVES. 
[$$ 314-316.] 


1. From Verss; in ἵκός, -πήρτος, 
των, active; -πὅς, -πέος, -νός, pas- 
sive ; «-Ἶμος, fitness; -ἄρός, -as, &e. 

II. From Novuns ; in -ἴος (-asos, -εἰος, 
-0105, -wos, -vi0s), belonging to; -ἴ κός, 
«κός, -ἀκός, -xinxos, relating to; -εος, 
“ives, -en, material; «-ἰνός (1), time 
or prevalence ; -ivos, -nvis, -ὥνός, 


patrial ; -ρός, -ερός, -ηρός, -XAbos, 

-ηλός, -ωλός, «εἰς, -ὥδης, fulness or 
quality. 

Ill. From ApJrectrvEs AND AD- 
VERBS. 

1. As from Nouns. 
2. Strengthened Forms; Come - 
parative, Superlative. 


C. Pronouns. 


D. 


v 


[8 317.] 


VERBS. 


($$ 318, 319.) 


I. From Nouns AND ADJECTIVES ; 
in -iw, -edw, -ἄω, to be or do; -ὄω, 
-aivw, -byw, to make; -ἴζω, -ἄζω, 
imitative, active, &e. ; -w with penult 
strengthened, active, &e. 


| Il. From Orner VERBS; in -σείω, 


iw, -ἄω, desiderative; -ζω, -σκω, 
&e., frequentative, intensive, incep= 
tive, diminutive, &e. 


E. ADVERBS. 
(88 320 - 322.) 


_— 


OniiquE Cases or Nouns AND 
ADJECTIVES. 
1. Genitives, in -θεν, place whence; 
-ov, place where; -ns, &e. 
2. Datives, in -01, -o67, -nci, -ὥσϊ, 
«  placewhere; -n, -, -a1, i, wy, 
place where, time when; &c. 
3. Accusatives, especially Neut. 
Sing. and Piur. of Adjec- 
faves. 


7 * 


II. DerIvaTIvEs SIGNIFYING 
1. Manner, in -ως, -ndov, -δον, -3ny 
< - ͵ , 
«ἄδην, -δᾶ, -i, -£i, -5- 
‘Yme when, in -σε, -ἴ κἂ- 
3. Place whither, in -σε. 
4, Number, in -ἄ κῖς. 
HI. Prepostrions WITH THEIR CASES, 


IV. DerivaTIvES FROM PREPOSI- 
TIONS. or PREPOSITIONS WITH=- 
out Cases. 


9 


~e 


73 


‘Orders, I. 
Interrog. 
Positive, ris ; 
: ΠΟΣ;, 
Ξ 
Ἀν Compar., “πότερος ; 
ae 
2° (Superl., πόστος 5 
= | Quantity, «πόσος 5 
3g 
§ ἃς Quality, T0105 καὶ 
oe 
Ἕ 81 Age, Size, πηλίκος ς 
“ 
οὐ | Country, ποδαπός αὶ 
| Day, ποσταῖος 5 
μένων «όθεν ; 
Where, ποῦς 
.§ 
E 4 wb: 5 
ms “οτέρωθι ; 
Whither, ποῖ κα 
woes 5 
he 
Ψ , 
3 ι «σοτέρωσε Η 
ΞΞ 2 Way,or σῇ: 
& Place where, 
< ποσαχῇ + 
ed worien 5 
3. Manner, was 3 
“ποτέρως ; 
«ποσαχῶς 5 
To + 
General, πότε; 
é 
Ξ ὦ Specific, πηνίκα " 
« | Various, σῆρος 5 


5. Number, ποσάκις 5 


DERIVATIVE Nouns. 


TABLES. 


{ 63. 


Il. 


[1 63 


PRONOMINAL 


[Obsolete Primitives are printed in capitals 


Negative. Relative. 
πο, πο VI. 
Indef. Objective. Subjective. Definite. Indefinite 
vhs, οὔτις, μήτις, ὅς, ὅσαις, 
ΠΟΣ, οὐδείς, μηδείς, ᾿ ὍΠΟΣ, 
οὐδαμός, μηδαμός, 
σποτερός, οὐδέτερος, μηδέτερος, ὁπότερος, 
οὐδοπότερος, μηδοπότερος, 
ὁσπόστος, 
“ποσός, ὅσος, ὁπόσος, 
: ὁσάτιος, 
ods, οὐτιδανός, οἷος, ὁποῖος, 
οὐδαροινός, μηδαμινός, 
ἡλίκος, ὅσηλίκος, 
δαοδασός, 
δὁαοσσαῖος 
«οθέν, μήποθεν, ὅθεν, sw ibsy, 
οὐδαμόθεν, μηδαμόθεν, ἔνθεν, 
οὐδεσέρωθεν, μηδεπέρωθεν, δαοτέρωθεν 
«τού, μήπου, οὗ, ἔνθα, ὅπου, 
οὐδαμοῦ, μηδαμοῦ, ὁσαχοῦ, 
wobi, οὔσοθι, ὅθι, ὅσπόθι, 
οὐδαριόθι, μηδαμόθι, ἵνα, 
: ὁποσέρωθε 
oi, μηδαμοῖ, al, ores, 
᾿ οὐδαμόσε, μηδαμόσε, ὁπόσε, 
οὐδεσέρωσε, μηδετέρωσε, δαοφέρωσε, 
σῇ, οὔσῃ, ἢ, ὅπῃ, 
ovdirn, 
αὐδαμῇ, μηδαμῇ, ἑσαχῇ, ὁσοσαχῇ, 
σοτερῇ, ovderton, μηδετέρῃ, ὁσποτέρῃ, 
THs, οὔσως, μήπως, ὡς, ὅπως, 
οὐδαμῶς, μηδαμῶς, 
οἵως, ὁποίως, 
οὐδετέρως, μηδετέρως, ὁποτέρως, 
ww, [σω, ὁσαχῶς, 
πώ, οὔσω, οὐδέ. μήσω, μηδέ- 
wort, οὔποτε, μήποτε, ὅσε, érort, 
οὐδίποσι, μηδίσοτε. 
ἡνίκα, ὁπηνίκα, 
ἧμος, tarsi, ὁπῆμος, 
ἕως, ὄφρα, ΄ 
ὁσάκις, ὅδσποσάκις, 


οὐδινάκις, 


7 ’ , bd. ΄ « ’ 
σοσότης, ποιότης, πηλιχότης, ovdamiworns, δαίοιδφης 
i ΄ « ta 7 , nd ‘ ‘ e ‘ ” ᾿ , ΑΝ 

TELOTNS, ἐτεροι 9 ΤῊ;,) O{L010TNS, ἰσότῆς, ἐτέρωσις, ὀῤβεσοίωσι:, ἰσωσις, ἀλλοίωσις, &e. 


4 63.] 


CoRRELATIVES. 


PRONOMINAL CORRELATIVES. 


Poetic and Dialectic Forms are not marked. ] 


Definite or Demonstrative. Universal. 

“VIL. VII. Ee ἘΌΝ 
Simple. Emphatic: Deictic. Distributive. Collective. 

é, οὗτος, ὅδε, «ἄς, 

ΤΟΣ, 6 αὐτός, ἄμφω, 

ἐκεῖνος. ᾿ 

ἕσερος, ἑκάτερος, ἀμφότερος. 
[τυννός, ἵχαστος. 

φσόσος, Forovres, τοσόσδε. 

TOTKTIOS, φυννοῦφσος- 

7010s, φοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, Avro, 

ἐκείνενος. 

τηλίκος, τηλικοῦτος, τηλικόσδε, 

πόδιν, wovrddsy, ixaorobsy, σάντοθεν, 

ἔνθεν, ἰνσεῦθεν, ἐνθένδε, ἑχκασταχόθεν, πανταχόθεν, 

κεῖθεν, ixareglsy, 

ivtowhey, ἑχατίρωθεν, ἀμῷφοτέρωθεν. 

ἔνθα, ἐνταῦθα, ἐνθάδε, 

ἐκεῖ ὧδε, ἑκασταχοῦ, «ἀνταχοῦ, 

«ὅθι, ἑχασφόθι, wavrobs, 

ἐκεῖθι, ἑκασταχόθι, πανταχόθι; 

ἑσέρωθι, ἑκατέρωθι, ἀμφοτέρωθι, 

ἰνθάδε, ἰνσαυϑθοῖ, ἱκασταχοῖ, πανταχοῖ, 

ἐκεῖσε, παντόσε, 

, ἱκασταχόσε, πανταχόσε, 
ἑτέρωσε, ἑκατέρωσε, ἀμφοτέρωσε. 
τῇ, φαύτῃ, «δι, πάντῃ, 
ἐκείνης 

ἱχασταχῇ, πανταχῇ, 

ἑσέρη, ixarion, “ ἀμφοτέρῃ. 
TUS, ὥς, οὕτως, ὧδε, «φάντως, 
κείνως, ὡσαύτως, 
φοίως, rowers, “΄ἀαντοίως, 
ἑτέρως, ἑκατέρως, ἀμφοτέρως. 

φοσαυταχῶς; «ανταχῶς- 
φῷ; τῷδε. 
φότε, tixderors, πάντοτσι, 
Tnvine, σπηνικαῦσα, τηνικάδε. 
τῆμος, τημοῦσος, φημόσδε. 
Tiws, τόφρα. : 
τοσάκις, τοσαυτάκις, ἑχαστάκις. 


᾿ φουτάκις, ἑκατεράκις, ἀμφοσεράκις. 


DERIVATIVE VERBS. 


XII 


79 


xm. 


Of Like- Of Identi- 
ness, and ty, Diversi 
Equality. ty, &c. 


ιν 
δμοός, 
ἴσος, 


5120108, 


ὁμῇλιξ. 
ἰσῆλιξ. 


ὁμόθεν, 


ὁμοῦ, 


ὁμῶς, 
ἴσως, 
ὁροίως, 


αὐτός. 
ἄλλος. 


ἀλλοῖον 


ἀλλοδασπός. 
αὐθήμεερος. 
averobey. 
ἄλλοθεν. 
ἀλλαχόθεν. 
[Aov. 
αὐτοῦ, ἄλ- 
ἀλλαχοῦ. 
AUTO. 
“AAO 
ἀλλαχόθι. 
αὐτόσε. 
ἀλλόσε. 
ἀλλαχόσε. 


ἄλλῃ. 
ἀλλαχῇ. 
avres. 


ἄλλως Ὃ 
ἀλλοίως. 


ἄλλοσε. 


5"» ΗΟΡἢ 
φαυτικϑίς 


ποσόω, οὐδενόω, ἱπεροιόω (from ἕσεροῖος, omitted 


above), ὁμοιδω, ἰσόω, ἀλλοιόω, οὐδενίζω, ἀμφοτερίζω, ἱκατερίω, ἀλλάσσω, &C. 


80 TABLES. , { 64: 


III. PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 


4 64. I. An ΑΡΡΟΒΙΤΙΨῈ agrees in case with its subject. ὃ 331. 
Il. The Susszcr oF a FINITE VERB is put in the Nominative. ὃ 342. 


ΠῚ. SupsTanTIvES INDEPENDENT OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTKUCTION are 
put in the Nominative. § 343. 


GENERAL RULE FOR THE GENITIVE... THE Point or DEPARTURE AND 
THE Cause ARE PUT IN THE GeENIT'VE. ὃ 345. 


TV Words of srparaTIon and DISTINCTION govern the Genitive. ὃ 346 
V. The compaRaTIVE DEGREE governs the Genitive. ὃ 351. 
V1. The oriein, sourcr, and MATERIAL are put in the Genitive. ὃ 355 
VII. The THEME OF DISCOURSE OR OF THOUGHT is put in the Genitive. 
§ 356. : 
VIII. Words of pLenty and want govern the Genitive. §357. 
IX. The WHOLE OF WHICH A PART IS TAKEN is put in the Genitive 


§ 358 


X. Words of sHarine and Toucn govern the Genitive. ὃ 367. 
ΧΙ. The motiyz, Reason, and END IN VIEW are put in the Genitive 
§ 372. : 

ΧΕ Pricer, VALUE, MERIT, and cRIME are put in the Genitive. ὃ 874. 


XII. Words of sensation and of MENTAL STATE OR ACTION govern 
the Genitive. § 375. 


XIV. The ΤΙΜῈ and piace in which are put in the Genitive. ὃ 378. 

XV. The auTHor, aGENT, and GIVER are put in the Genitive. ὃ 380. 

XVI. An ADJUNCT DEFINING A THING OR PROPERTY is put in the Gen- 
itive. § 382. 

Generat Rute ror tHe Dative Ossective. Tue Onsect or Ap- 
PROACH AND OF INFLUENCE fs PUT IN THE DatTivE; or, An InpIRECT 
Ossect 1s puT In THE Dative. ὃ 397. 

XVII. Words of nearness and LikENxss govern the Dative ὃ 398. 

XVIII. The opsect or INFLUENCE is put in the Dative. ὃ 401. 


Genera στ ror THE Datiye Resipuat. An Atrrenpant Tuva 
on CIRCUMSTANCE, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, IS PUT IN THE Dative. 


XIX. The means and mops are put in the Dative. ὃ 415. 
XX. The time and piace at which are put in the Dative. ὃ 420. 


GeveraL Rue ror tHE Accusative. An ADJUNCT EXPRESSING 
Direct Limit is put in THE AccusaTIvE. ὃ 422. 


XXI. The prrect opsect and the errect of an action are put in the 
Accusative. § 423. 


ADVERBS OF SWEARING are followed by the Accusative. § 426. 

CavusaTives govern the Accusative together with the case of the included verb. § 430. 

The same verb often governs Two accusatTives, which may be,—(J1.) The pirEct 
OBJECT and the ErrEct in apposition with each other: as with verbs of making, appoint- 
ing, choosing, esteeming, naming, &c. — (11) The pirect onsect and the EFFECT. not 
in Fos eget as with verbs of doing, saying, &c, — ([111,}) Two ΟΒΙΈΟΥΒ differently re- 
lated, but which are both regarded as Direct; as with verbs of_gsking and requiring, of 
pi A unclothing, of concealing and depriving, of persuading and leaching, δος, 


PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 81 


XXII. An adjuact applying a word or expression to a PARTICULAR 
FART, PROPERTY, THING, OF PERSON, is put in the Accusative. § 437. 


XXIIL. Extent oF TIME aND SPAcE is putin the Accusative. ὃ 439. 


XXIV. The Accusative is often used ADVERBIALLY, to express DE- 
GREE, MANNER, ORDER, το. ὃ 440. | 


XXV. The Compxtcartive of a sentence is put in the Vocative. ὃ 442. 


XXVI. An ApvJrcTive agrees with its subject in gender, number, and 
ease. ὃ 444. 


XXVII. The Arricve is prefixed to susstantives, to mark them as 
definite. § 469. 


XXVIII. A Pronoun agrees with its subject in gender, number, and 
person. ὃ 494, 


The RELATIVE commonly takes the case of the antecedent, when the ANTECEDENT is & 
Genitive or Dutive, and the RELATIVE would properly be an Accusative depending upon 
a verb. § 526. 

XXIX. A Vers agrees with its subject in number and person. ὃ 543. 

The NevTeR PiurRAL has its VERB in the singular. § 549. 

The Passtve Vorce has for its sussect an object of the Active, commonly a direct, 
but sometimes an indirect object. Any other word governed by the Active remains un- 
changed with the Passive. Tur sussEcT or THE ACTIVE is commonly expressed, with 
the Passive, by the Genitive with a preposition. § 562. 


Definite Tenses, as (a.) continued or prolonged ,; 
An action is represented by the } Arist, as ; (a.) momentary or person an 
(δ.) a habit or continued course of conduct ; (c.) doing at the time of, or untit aw 
(8.) a single act ; (c.) simply done in its own time ; 


other action ; (d.) begun, attempted, or designed; (e.) introductory. = 
(d.) accomplished; ° ’ (6) conclusive, ἐφ 570 -- 574. 


, au generic Aorist often supplies the place of the specific Perfect and Pluperfect 
) 


‘ The Inpicative expresses the actual ; the Sussunctive and Oprative, the contingent, 


PRESENT CONTINGENCY is expressed by the primary lenses ; PAST CONTINGENCY, by the 
secondary. § 589. 

The Sussuncrive. for the most part, follows the primary tenses ; and the OprativE, 
the secondary. ὃ 592. 


Supposition as fact is expressed by the appiopriate tense of the Indicative; swppost- 
tion that may become fact, by the Subjunctive; supposilion rithout regard to fact, by 
τ Optative; aud supposrtion contrury to fact, by the past tenses of the Indicative, 

593. 

The Oprative is the distinct mode appropriate to the oratio obliqua in past time. § 608, 

XXX. The Inrinirive is construed as a neuter noun. ὃ 620. 


The INFINITIVE often forms an elliptical command, request, counsel, salutation, excla 
mution, or question..§ 625, . 


XXXI. The Sussecrt or THe Inrinitive is put in the Accusative, 
ν 626. 
_ XXXII. A participle AND suBSTANTIVE are put absolute in the Gen 
‘tive ; an IMPERSONAL PARTICIPLE, in the Accusative. ὃ 638. 

The (ntErsEction is independent of grammatical construction. § 645. 

XXXII. Apverss modify sentences, Y cask and words ; particularly 
serbs, adjectives, and other adverbs. § 646. 

XXXIV. Prepositions govern substantives in the oblique cases, and 
mark their relations. § 648. 

XXXV. Consunctions connect sentences and like parts of a sentence 
ΠΡ 


82 TABLES. [1 65. 
IV. FORMS OF ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 
4] δῷ. A. Or Worps. 


Common 
Proper 1 Mase. 
P Abstract Fem. 
4 “ Collective Hous of the 2} wes Neut. 2 ὅται΄-“- “- 
Irregular Comm. 
&e. 
Nom. } ° 
‘ Gen. Sing. 
. ς [Derived from —, 7 ἩΝῈς: 
(decline); {Compounded of —, ] ee a aS ΤῊΝ race 
Voce. 
the subject of —, 
governed by —, 
the Gen. of —, Rule. Remarks. 
the Dat. of —, 
the Acc. of —, &c., 
Pos. ᾿ 
-- is an ADJECTIVE [in the Comp. » Degree, from — — τον (compar e\,* 
Sup. 
1 . : 
ΕΞ νον, [Derived from —, c= . 
of a} Terminations (decline) ; FCompounded of ἘΞ Root —, Affix -. 
om. Sing.) Mase. ᾿ τ." 
Gen rr rem. i pmamalng πῦρ ττο, ἢ, ρας οφωμαῦς 
&e. Dual) Neut. διαἱ ὦ 
Personal 
Reflexive 1 
is 4 Relative Pronoun, of the 2> Pers. δ, from — — — (de 
&e. 3 
ARTICLE 


Derived ἢ Nom.) Sing.) Mase. 
cline); Derive τὸς ; ‘J Root —, Affix —; the Gen. > Plur. > Fem. >; 
i Compounded of —,] &e. Dual ) Neut. 
the subject of —, ; 
\ gover by -, ; Rule. [It refers to — as its et » Rule; 
agreeing with —, &e., ᾿ 


and connects — to ---.7 Remaths. 


Transitive VERB, ) 
Intransitive “ 
Deponent “ og SR ὲ i erived from 
oe Barytone «| λο (conjugate) s Compounded 
Contract Ἢ 
VERB in μι, &., J 


q 65.) FORMS OF ANALYSIS. 83 


Pres.) Ind. 5 
Impf. | Subj. 


Act. 
ἊΣ ‘ci, toda [Prefix —,] Affix —}; the Pot Ont ΓΗ 
a 


2 Fut. { Imp. 
1 Aor. | Inf. | F4** 
&e. Part. J 
1 Sing. 7 
(if finite) the 2> Pers. Plur. >, agreeing with —, 
3 Dual 


a 


pe Be rg Ἵ (if Inf.) having for its subject —, and depending. on == 


snflect) ; subject of — &., 
Nom.) Sing.). Mase. agreeing with — 
(if Part.) the Gen. > Plur. > Fem. > ; Satie 
used substantivel 
ἷ : Dual) Neut. τ ys be, ἕ 
Rule. Remarks. 
Interrogative Place 


Indefinite Time Pos. 

—— is an Demonstrative }ApverB of Manner }, [in the Comp. > De- 
Complementary | ~ Order Sup. 
&e 


gree, from — (compare), } Fedapemdcr oat 4 modifying —, Rule. [It 


refers to — as its antecedent, and connects — to —.] Remarks. 


: [Derived from —, ] aoe ΟΝ : 
is a PREPOSITION, [Compounded of —,] governing —, and marking 


its relation to —, Rule. Remarks. 


Copulative 
Conditional [Derived from —, 7 
— is Complementary CoNJUNCTION, [Compounded of naga connect 


ing — to—, Rule. Remarks. 


- [Derived from —, ] i 
is an INTERJECTION, [Compounded of —,] aot independent of gram- 


matical construction ὃ 645). Remarks. 


Norges (a) When declension in full is not desired, give the Nom. and Gen. in Sub 
stantives and in Adjectives of | Term., and the different forms of the Nom. in Adjectives 
of 2or3 Term. (5) In conjugating, give the Theme, with the corresponding Fut. and 
Perf. (if in use), to which it is also well to add the 2 Aor. if used. (c) The term 
“vary’’ is used above in a specifie sense, to denote giving the different modes of a 
tense, or, as it is sometimes called, giving the synopsis of the tense; and the term “in 
Jiect,’”’ to denote giving the numbers and persons (in the Participle, declension, of 
course, takes the place of this). (d) After completing the formula above, which, to 
avoid confusion and consequent omission or delay, should always be given in the pre- 
scribed order, add such Remarks as may properly be made upon the form, signification, 
and use of the word; as, in respect to contraction, euphonic changes of consonants, 
literal or figurative sense, the force or use of the number, case, degree, voice, mode, 
tense, &c.; citing, from the Grammar, the appropriate rule. remark, or note. (6) Some 
particulars in the forms above, which do not apply to all words. are inclosed in brackets. 


84 TABLES. — ANALYSIS. [{ 66, 67 


1 6G. B. Or ΞΕΝΤΕΝΟΕΒΒ. 


I. Describe the Sentence. 


Declarative, Actual Posi 
Disti § Intellective, Interrogative, por ee Neg- 
istmct, A ee 
Iris ἡ Simple, Volitive } Fositive , 
Compound, ( ? 2 Negative; τ 
Incorporated in the sentence —— as a } Rijection 
be en connected by — to ——, as a Coérdinate Sentence. 
; y Subordinate Clause, soma the office 
following —— by cca succession. 


Adjective. 


Substantive. 
° 
Adverb. * 


Il. Analyze the Sentence into wts Logical and Grammaticaé Divisions, its Primary 
and Secondary Parts, §c. 


The Logical ao : Simple : Com- 
5 Pape is ——, containing the 7, mpound ἰ Grammatical ἊΝ 

pellative ites 

et ἰ- » Modified by the Appoiive ——. Show how these are mod- 


Dependent Clause 


tfied, and analyze Subordinate er Incorporated Clauses, until the Sentence is ee 
hausted. 


4 G67. C. Or Merres. 


1, Give a general description of the Metre in which the Poem is toritien, 

11, Describe the particular Verse. 

lambic Monometer Acatalectic 1 

It is Dactylic Dimeter Catalectic >, consisting of 2 Feet, which are 
&e. ὅτ, ἄο. : ἄο. 


Penthemim, 


~—. The Cesura is the fran] Hephthemim, ὁ after —. 
‘4 Pastoral, &c., 


im. Anglyze by | Dipodies and] Feet. 


ie eres “ie ? Syllabl by P othe Rule. 
— Isa Spondee ι yllable y Position, ; 
&., ° Birt &c., 


&c. 5 


INTRODUCTION. 


§ 2. Tue Ancient Greeks were divided into three principal 
races ; the Ionic, of which the Attic was a branch, the Doric 
and the AXolic. These races spoke the same general language 
but with many dialectic peculiarities. 


The Ancient Greek Laneuace (commonly called simply 
the Greek) has been accordingly divided by grammarians into 
four principal Diaecrts, the Arric, the Ionic, the Deric, and 
the AZoxic. Of these the Attic and Ionic were far the most | 
refined, and had far the greatest unity within themselves. The 
Dorie and Aolic were not only much ruder, but, as the dialects 
of races widely extended, and united by no common bond of 
literature, abounded in local diversities. Some of the varieties 
of the Doric or AXolic were separated from each other by dif- 
ferences scarcely less marked than those which distinguished 
them in common from the other dialects. Of the A£olic, the 
principal varieties were the Lesbian, the Bceotian, and the 
Thessalian. The Doric, according as it was more or less 
removed from the Attic and Ionic, was characterized as the 
stricter or the milder Doric; the former prevailing in the La- 
conic, Tarentine, Cretan, Cyrenian, and some other varieties ; 
the latter in the Corinthian, Syracusan, Megarian, Delphian, 
Rhodian, and some others. 


§ 2. The Greek colonies upon the coast of Asia Minor and 
the adjacent islands, from: various causes, took the lead of the 
mother country in refinement; and the first development of 
Greek literature which secured permanence for its productions, 
was among the Asiatic Ionians. This development was Epic 
Poerry, and we have, doubtless, its choicest strains remaining 
to us in the still unsurpassed Homeric poems. The language 
of these poems, often called Epic and Homeric, is the old lonic, 
with those modifications and additions which a wandering bard 

8 


86 INTRODUCTION. 


would insensibly gather up, as he sang from city to city, 
and those poetic licenses which are always allowed to early 
minstrelsy, when as yet the language is unfixed, and critics are 
unknown. Epic poetry was followed in Ionia by the Elegiac 
of which Callinus of Ephesus and Mimnermus of Colophon 
were two great masters; and this again by Ionic Prose, ir 
which the two principal names are Herodotus and Hippocrates, 
who chose this refined dialect, although themselves of Doric 
descent. In distinction from the Old Ionic of the Epic poets 
the language of the Elegiac poets may be termed the Middle 
Ionic, and that of the prose-writers, the New Ionic. 


§ B. The next dialect which attained distinction in litera 
ture was the A£olic of Lesbos, in which the lyric strains οἱ 
Alczus and Sappho were sung. But its distinction was short- 
lived, and we have scarce any thing remaining of the dialect 
except some brief fragments. ‘There arose later among the 
/£olians of Beeotia another school of Lyric Poetry, of which 
Pindar was the most fllustrious ornament: As writing, however 
for the public festivals of Greece, he rejected the peculiarities 
of his rude native tongue, and wrote in a dialect of which the 
basis consisted of words and forms common to the Dorie and 
J£olic, but which was greatly enriched from the now universal- 
ly familiar Epic. He is commonly said, but loosely, to have 
written in the Doric. : 


§ 4, Meanwhile, the Athenians, a branch of the Ionian race, 
were gradually rising to such political and commercial impor- 
tance, and to such intellectual preéminence among the states 
of Greece, that their dialect, adorned by such dramatists as 
/Eschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, and Menander, 
by such historians as Thucydides and Xenophen, by such phi- 
losophers as Plato and Aristotle, and by such orators as Lysias 
/Eschines, and Demosthenes, became at length the standard 
language of the Greeks, and, as such, was adopted by the edu- 
cated Classes in all the states. It became the general medium 
of intercourse, and, with a few exceptions, which will be here- 
afer noticed, the universal language of composition. This 
diffusion of the Attic dialect was especially promoted by the 
conquests of the Macedonians, who adopted it as their court 
language. As its use extended, it naturally lost some of its 
peculiarities, and received many additions; and thus diffused 
and modified, it ceased to be regarded as the language of a 

articular state, and received the appellation of the Common 

IALECT or LANGUAGE. 


The Attic-and Common dialects, therefore, do not differ in 


DIALECTS. 8: 


any essential feature, and may properly be regarded, the one 
as the earlier and pure, the other as the later and impure, form 
of the same dialect. In this dialect, either in its earlier or 
later form, we find written nearly the whole that remains to us 
of ancient Greek literature. It may claim therefore to be re- 
garded, notwithstanding a few splendid compositions in the 
other dialects, as the national language of Greece ; and its 
acquisition should form the commencement and the basis of 
Greek study. 


The pure Attic has been divided into three periods; the Old, 
used by Thucydides, the Tragedians, and Aristophanes; the 
Middle, used by Xenophon and Plato; and the New, used by 
the Orators and the later Comedians. The period of the Com- 
mon dialect may be regarded as commencing with the subjec- 
tion of Athens to the Macedonians. 


§ &. Of the Doric dialect, in proportion to its wide extent, 
we have very scanty remains ; and of most of its varieties our 
knowledge is derived from passages in Attic writers, from mon- 
uments, and from the works of grammarians. In Greece it- 
self, it seems scarcely to have been applied to any other branch 
of literature than Lyric Poetry. In the more refined Dorian 
colonies of Italy and Sicily, it was employed in Philosophy by 
the Pythagoreans (Archytas, Timzeus, &c.), in Mathematics by 
the great Archimedes, in Comedy by Epicharmus and his 
successors, and in Pastoral Poetry by Theocritus, Bion, and 
Moschus. 


§ G. To the universality acquired by the Attic dialect, an 
exception must be made in poetry. Here the later writers felt 
constrained to imitate the language of the great early models. 
The Epic poet never felt at liberty to depart from the dialect 
of Homer. Indeed, the old Epic language was regarded by 
subsequent poets in all departments as a sacred tongue, the 
language of the gods, from which they might enrich their sev- 
eral compositions. ‘The /Molic and Doric held such a piace in 
Lyric Poetry, that even upon the Attic stage an /olo-Doric 
hue was given to the lyric portions by the use of the long oa, 
which formed so marked a’characteristic of those dialects, and 
which, by its openness of sound, was so favorable to musical 
effect. Pastoral Poetry was confined to the Doric. The Dra- 
matic was the only department of poetry in which the Attic 
was the standard dialect. 


ᾧ '%. Grammar flourished only in the decline of the Greek 
language, and the Greek grammarians usually treated the dia- 


88. : INTRODUCTION. 


lects with little precision. Whatever they found in the old 
Ionic of Homer that seemed to them more akin to the later 
cultivated AXolic, Doric, or even Attic, than to the new Ionic 
they did not hesitate to ascribe to those dialects. Even in the 
common language, whatever appeared to them irregular or pe 
culiar, they usually referred to one of the old dialects, terming 
the regular form κοινόν, common, though perhaps this form was 
either wholly unused,sor was found only as a dialectic variety 
On the other hand, some critics used the appellation κοινός as 3 
term of reproach, designating by it that which was not pure 
Attic. In the following Grammar, an attempt will be made to 
exhibit first and distinctly, under each head, the Greek in its 
standard form, that is, the Attic and the purer Common usage ; 
and afterwards to specify the important dialectic peculiarities. 
It will not, however, be understood that every thing which is 
ascribed to one of the dialects prevails in that dialect through- 
out, or is found in no other. This applies especially to the 
Doric and AZolic, which, with great variety within themselves 
(§ 1), are closely akin to each other; so that some (as Mait- 
taire) have treated of both under the general head of Doric ; 
and in the following Grammar some forms will be simply men- 
tioned as Doric, that also occur in the ASolic. By the term 
Molic, as employed by grammarians, is commonly denoted the 
zultivated /Eolic of Lesbos ; as the term Ionic is usually con- 
fined to the language spoken (though, according to Herodotus, 
with four varieties) by the Ionians of Asia Minor and the adja- 
cent islands. 


§ 8. It remains to notice the modifications of the later 
Greek. ‘The Macedonians, who had previously spoken a rude 
and semi-barbarous dialect of the Greek, retained and diffused 
some of the peculiarities of their native tongue.. ‘These are 
termed Macedonic, or, sometimes, from Alexandria, the prin- 
cipal seat of Macedonian, and indeed of later Greek culture 
Alexandrine. 


The Greek, as the common language of the civilized world, 
was employed in the translation of the Jewish Scriptures, and 
the composition of the Christian. When so employed by na- 
tive Jews, it naturally received a strong Hebrew coloring ; and, 
as a Jew speaking Greek was called “Kidymorne (from ἑλληνίζω, 
to speak Greek), this form of the language has been termed the 
Hellenistic (or by some the Ecclesiastical) dialect. Its pecu- 
liarities naturally passed more or less into the writings of the 
fathers, and through the diffusion of Christianity exerted a great 
general influence. 


DIALECTS. 89 


Another influence modifying the Greek came from the lan- 
guage of the Roman conquerors of the world. Of necessity, 
the Greek, notwithstanding the careful compositions of such 
scholars as Arrian, Lucian, and A¢lian, and the precepts of a 
class of critics, called Atticists, was continually becoming more 
and more impure. The language of the Byzantine period was 
especially degenerate. Since the destruction of the Eastern 
Empire by the Turks, the fusion of the Byzantine and Eccle- 
siastical Greek with the popular dialects of the different dis- 
tricts and islands of Greece has produced the MoperNn GREEK, 
or, as it is often called, by a name derived from the Roman 
Empire in the East, Romaic. This language has been es- 
pecially cultivated and refined within the present century, and 
has now a large body of original and translated literature. 


§ 9. The Greek, therefore, in its various forms, has never 
ceased to be a living Janguage ; and it offers to the student a 
series of compositions, not only ineluding many of the highest 
productions of genius, but extending through a period of nearly 
three thousand years. 


Re 


BOOK If. 


ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 


Γραμράφσων os συνθέσεις 


ZEschylus, Prom. Vinzt. 


ἜἘξιῦρον αὐτοῖς. 


CHAPTER l. 


. CHARACTERS. 
[TT 1, 23 


10. Tue Greek language is written with 
twenty-four letters, two breathings, three accents, 
Jour marks of punctuation, and a few other char- 
acters. 


]. For the Letters, see Table, ff 1. 


Remarks. 1. Dovsie Forms. Sigma final is written ¢; 
nol final, a; as, στάσις. In compound words, some editors, 
without authority from manuscripts, use ¢ at the end of each 
component word; thus, προςειςφέρεις. The other double forms 
are used indifferently ; as, βοῦς or θοῦς 


2. Licatures. Two or more letters are often united, except 
in recent editions, into one character, called a ligature (liga- 


tira, tie) ; 3 as, % for καὶ, 8 for ov, oD for od, & (named ori or 
στίγμα) for or. For a list of the principal ligatures, see Table, 
q 2. 


§ 24. 3. Nomerat Power. To denote numbers under a 
thousand, the Greeks employed the letters of the alphabet, as 
exhibited i in the table, with the mark (’ ) over them; as, α΄ 1, 
U 10, 8 12, oxy 123. The first eight letters, with Vau, rep- 
resented the nine units; the next eight, with Koppa, the nine 
tens ; and the last eight, with Sampi, ‘the nine hundreds. The 
thousands were denoted by the same letters with the mark δ6- 
neath " as, ¢ 5, ε 5,000, xy 23, xy or xy 23,000, αωμα 184]. 


cH. 1.] LETTERS. — BREATHINGS. 91 


Notes. «a. Vau, in its usual small form (¢), resembles. the ligature for σα 
(8 10). Hence some editors confound them, and employ 2T, as the large form 
at Vau, to denote 6. 


β. Sometimes the Greek letters, like our own, denote ordinal numbers, ac- 


cording to their own order in the alphabet. In this way the books of Homer 
are marked; as, ᾿Ιλιώδος, A, Z, Q, The Iliad, Books I., VI., XXIV. 


y. Another method of writing numerals occurs in old inscriptions, by which 
1 denotes one, II (for Ilévrs) five, A (for Aéxa) ten, H (for Hexarov, ὃ 22. «) 
a hundred, X (for Χίλιοι) a thousand, M (for Μύριοι) ten thousand. II drawn 
around another numeral multiplies it by five. Thus, ΜΧΧΊΗΓΗ JA] AATIT 
. == 12,676. 


§ 12. 4. Roman Lerters. By the side of the Greek 
letters in the table ({ 1), are placed the Roman letters which 
take their place when Greek words are transferred into Latin 
or English ; as, Κύκλωψ, Cyclops. 

Nores. «a. The letter y becomes n, when followed by another palatal ; 
but, otherwise, g; as, ἄγγελος) Lat. angelus, Eng. angel; συγκοπή syncope ; 
λάρυγξ, larynx ; Alyiva, Aigina. 

β. The diphthong a: becomes in Latin @; οι. @; #, % or é (before a conso- 
nant almost always 7); ov, %; and wi, yi; as, Φαῖδρος, Phaedrus; Bowring 
Baotia; Νεῖλος, Nilus; Δαρεῖος, Darius ; Μήδεια, Medéa; Μοῦσα, Musa, 
Eiacibuia, Ilithyia. 

A few words ending in a and oa are excepted ; as, Maia, Maia, Τροία, 
Troia or Troja; so also Αἴας, Ajaz. 

y- The improper diphthongs ¢, 7, #, are written in Latin simply a, e, 0; 
as, Ogaxn, Thracé, “Adus, Hadés, Ogicca, Thressa, δή, odé. But in a few 
compounds of δή, ῳ becomes @; as, reuyydia, tragedia, Eng. tragedy. 

3. The rough breathing becomes, in Latin and English, h, while the smooth is 
not written ; 88, Ἕκσωρ, Hector,”"Egut, Eryx, ‘Pia, Rhea (the h being placed 
after the r by the same imaccuracy as after the w in our while, pronounced 
hoo-ile ; since in both cases the breathing introduces the word). 


§ 213. 11. The Breatuines are the Smoorn or 
Sorr (’), and the Rouen (‘), also called the As- 
PIRATE (aspiro, to breathe). ‘The first denotes a 
gentle emission of the breath, such as must precede 
every initial vowel; the second, a strong emission, 
such as in English is represented by h. One of 
these is placed over every initial vowel, and over 
every initial or doubled ο. 


Nores. 1. An initial ν has always the rough breathing to assist in its 
utterance (as in English an initial long u is always preceded by the sound of 
y; thus, 5s, ὑμεῖς, as, in English, use, pronounced yuse, union); except in the 
Holic dialect, and in the Epic forms tues, dus OF ὔμομειν, Cums. 


ι 


92 CHARACTERS. ~ [BOOK 1 


2. An initial ρ requires, for its proper vibration or rolling, a strong aapira- 
tion, and is therefore always marked with the rough breathing; as, pw. 
When ¢ is doubled, the first ¢ has the smooth breathing, and the second ‘the 
rough; as, Πύῤῥος. See ὃ 62. β. 


8. In diphthongs (except ¢, Ἂ and w), the breathing is placed over the 
second vowel ; as, αὐσός. οὗτος. See ὃ 26. 


4. In place of the rongh breathing,.the Molic seems commonly, and the 
Epic often, to have used the digamma (§ 22: 3), or the smooth breathing. In 
Homer we find the smooth for the rough particularly in words which are 
strengthened in some other way ; as, εὔκηλος, οὖλος, οὖρος) Hédsos, Uepss, for 
ἕκηλος, 32.065 ὅρος. ἥλιος, ὑμεῖς. 


§ 14, III. The Accents are the Acute (’), the 
Grave (*), and the CircumrLex (“or *). For 
their use, see Prosody. | 


δ 15. IV. The Marks or Punctuation are the 
Comma (,), the Coton (-), the Perron (.), and 
the Nore or Inrerrocation (;), which has the 
form of ours (2) inverted. 


To these, some editors have judiciously added the Nore or ExcLAMA- 
τῖον (!). 


δ 16. V. Orner CHaracters. 


1. Coronis and Apostropae, The mark (’), which at the beginning of 
a word is the smooth breathing, over the middle is the CoRONIS (xogwvis, crook- 
ed mark), or mark of crasis, and at the end, the AposrROPHE (ἢ 30); as, ras- 
wa for ra αὐτά, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ for ἀλλὰ ἐγώ. 


2. The Hypop1asTo.e (ὑποδιασπσολή, separation beneath), or ὉΤΑΒΤΟΙΕ (δι- 
ασσολή, separation), is a mark like a comma, placed, for distinction’s sake, 
after some forms of the article and relative pronoun, when followed by the en- 
clitics σέ and +}; as, dre, σό,γτε,) ὅ,τι), to distinguish them from the particles 
ὅτε, τότ᾽, ὅσι. Some editors more wisely omit it, and merely separate the en- 
clitic by a space. _ 


8. The Hypuen, Dierests, DAsn, and Marks or PARENTHESIS and 
Quvoration are used in Greek as in English. 


4. Among the other signs used by critics and editors, are Brackers [ ], to 
inclose words of doubtful authenticity ; the Opeuisk ( tf or — ), to mark 
verses or words as faulty ; the Asterisk (*), to denote that something is 
wanting in the text; and Marks or QuaAntiry, viz. (~ ), to mark a vowel 
or syllable as long; (~ ), as short; (Ὁ or ~ ), as either long or short. 


- 
un. ἰ.} PRONUNCIATION. 


PRONUNCIATION, 


§ 127. There are three methods of pronouncing 
Greek which deserve notice; the ΝΟ 55, the 
Mopern Greek, and the ERAsMIAN. 


The pronunciation of every language, from the very laws of language, is in 
a continual process of change, more or less rapid. And in respect to the Greek, 
there is full internal evidence, both that its pronunciation had materially 
changed before its orthography became fixed, and that it has materially 
changed since. Therefore, as there is no art of embalming sounds, the an 
cient pronunciation of the Greek can now only be inferred, and, in part, with 
great uncertainty. Modern scholars have commonly pronounced it according 
to the analogy of their respective languages. The English method, which has 
prevailed in the schools of England and this country, conforms, in general, to 
the analogy of our own tongué, ard to our method of pronouncing the Latin. 
The Modern Greek method (also called the Reuchlinian, from its distinguished 
advocate, the learned Reuchlin) is that which now prevails in Greece itself. 
It is given below, as exhibited in the Grammar of Sophocles. The Erasmian 
method (so named from the celebrated Erasmus) is that which is most exten- 
sively followed in the schools upon the continent of Europe, and which con- 
forms most nearly to the prevailing analogy of the continental tongues. 


Nore. To avoid confusion, the terms protracted and abrupt are employed 
below to denote what, in English orthoépy, we commonly call long and short 
sounds; and the term ictus (stroke, beat), to denote that stress of the voice 
which in English we commonly call accent. For the proper use of the terms 
long and short, and accent, in Greek grammar, see Prosody. 


_A. Ene.isp ΜΕΤΗΟΡ. 


§ 28. 1. Simete Vowets. ἡ, v, and w have always the 
protracted sounds of e in mete, win tube, and o in note; as, 
ϑηρσί, τύπτω, σφῶν. 

ε and o have the abrupt sounds of 6 in Jet, and o in dot; ex 
cept before another vowel, and at the end of a word, where 
they are protracted, like e in real, and o in go; as, λέγω, λόγος " 
ϑεός, νόος δέ, τό. | 

a ands are, in general, sounded like a and ὁ in English ; 
when protracted, like a in hate, and i in pine; when abrupt, 
like a in hat, and ὁ in pin. At the end of a word, « always 
maintains its protracted sound; but #, except in monosyllables, 
takes the indistinct sound of a in Columbia; as, ϑηρίς λέοντι" 
πρᾶγμα, φιλία " τά. 

Nore. If ἃ ors receives the ictus, whether primary or secondary, and is 
followed by a single consonant or @, it is protracted in the penult, but abrupt 
in any preceding syllable; as, ἄγω, ἐλπίξω- γράφετε, φιλέω, ᾿Αϑηναῖος. From 
this rule is excepted α in any syllable preceding the penult, when the vowel of 


the next syllable is ¢ or, before another vowel (both without the ictus), in 
which case a is protracted; as, rariw, νεανίας, γαλεομνορα χία. 


« 
94 PRONUNCIATION. [BOOK 1. 


2. DirpptHones. The diphthongs are, for the most part 
pronounced according to the prevailing sound of the same com 
binations in our own language; « like ez in height, οὐ like οἱ in 
boil, ws like ut in quiet, αὖ like au in aught, sv and qv like ew in 
Europe, neuter, ov and wy like ou in thou; a is sounded like 
the affirmative ay (ah-ee, the two sounds uttered with a single 
impulse of the voice), and vi like wht in while. ‘Thus, εἰδυῖα 
avtol, πλευσοῦμαι; ηὖξον, ϑωῦμα, vids. 


3. Consonants. ‘The consonants are pronounced like the 
corresponding letters in our own alphabet, with the following 
special remarks. 


>, %, and x are always hard in sound: y being pronounced like g in go 
(except before a palatal, where it has the sound of ng in long, 8 49); x andy 
like ὁ in cap, and ch in chaos, i. 6. like k; as, γένος» ἔγγον (pron. ang-gos), 
κήρυξ, χέω. 

3 has the sharp sound of th in thin; as, ϑεός. 

¢ has the sharp sound of 5 in say; except in the middle of a word before 
μ᾽ and at the end of a word after ἡ and w, where it sounds like z; as, σδέσαι - 
κόσμος, TIS, ὡς. 

σ᾽ and ¢ never have the sound of sh; thus ᾿Ασία is pronounced A’-si-a, not 

‘-shi-a ; Keirias, Krit'-i-as, not Krish'-inas. 

At the beginning of a word, ξ sounds like z, and Ψ like s; and, of two 
consonants which cannot both be pronounced with ease, the first is silent; as, 
Ξενοφῶν, Ψηφίζω, Ulroartuaios, βδέλλιον. So, in English, rebec, psalm, &c. 


4. Breatuines. The rough has the sound of h; the smooth 
has no sound ; as, ὅρος, ὄρος. See § 13. 


5. Icrus. The primary ictus is placed according to the fol- 
lowing | 

Rute. In dissyllables, the penult takes the ictus. In poly- 
syllables, the penult, if long, takes the ictus; but, if short, 
throws it upon the antepenult. Thus, πατήρ, pron. pa-tér, γρά- 


φητε, gra-phé'-te, γράφετε, graph'-e-te. 


Norse. If two or more syllables precede the primary ictus, one of these, 
receive}a secondary ictus, in placing which the ear and formation of the word 
will decide, 


B. Mopern Greex METHOD. 


§ 19. “« and @ are pronounced like a in father; after the sound I 
11) My fly διγ ¥, vs) it is pronounced like a in peculiarity. αἱ likes. av, sv, 
nv, wv, before a vowel, a liquid, or a middle mute (6, y, δ) are pronounced 
like av, ev, eev, ov, respectively ; in all other cases, like af, ef, eef, off. β like». 
y before the sounds E and I is pronounced nearly like y in yes, York; in all 
other cases it is guttural, like the German gin Tag. yy and yz like ng in 
strongest. vy like nz. γα like ng-h, nearly. 3 like thin that. ε like 
ein fellow, nearly. εἰ like « εὖ, Se av. ζ likez and y like. 
nv, see av. like th in thin. , like iin machine. x likek. a like l; 
before the sound I, like WZ in William. jy like m. ex like mb, as, iurgo- 


υΗ. 1.} HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGRAPHY. 95 


σϑεν pronounced émbrosthen. py (ure) like mbs. ν like n; Lefore the 
sound I, like πὶ in oWion. The words σὸν, σὴν» ἐν) σὺν, before a word beginning 
with x or %, are pronounced like edy, σὴγ ty, σὺγ before x or % (see yx, γξ): 
Θ. 8. στὸν καιρόν, ἐν ξυλόχω, pronounced φσὸγκαιρόν, ἐγξυλόχῳ; before # or Ψ 
they are pronounced rig, ri, iu, cdw; e.g. τὸν πονηρόν, σὺν ψυχῆ, pro~ 
nounced riurovnedy, σὺμ ψυχῇ. να like nd, as, ἔντιμοος pronounced éndimos. 
ξ like zorks. olikeoin porter. olikes © ovlikeooin moon. 57 6, 
like p,r. σ like s in soft; before B, y, δ) μὸν 9, it is sounded like Z; e. g. 

᾿ κόσμος, σβέσαι, Zuvevn, pronounced κόζρος, ζβέσαι, Zudvevn; so also at the 
end of a word, rods βασιλεῖς τῆς yas, pronounced φοὺζβασιλεῖς τῆζ γῆς. τ like 
tinfell. vilikes wulikes  @ like ph orf. x like German ch οἱ 
Spanish j. Ψ likeps. wandwlikeo. wu», see av. 

“The rough breathing is silent in Modern Greek. So far as quantity is com~ 
cerned, all the short vowels are equivalent to the long ones. The written ac- 
cent guides the stress of the voice. The accent of the enclitic, however, is 
disregarded in pronunciation. But when the attracting word has the accent 
on the antepenult, its last syllable takes the secondary accent; e. g. δεῖξόν peor, 
pronounced deiZovuo, but AtAsxras wos has the primary accent, on the first syl- 
lable As, and the secondary on xras.” — Soph. Gr. Gr., pp. 21, 22. 


C. Erasm1an Metuop. 


§ 20. The Erasmian method differs from the English chiefly in sonud- 
Ing « protracted like a in futher,. protracted like iin machine, ἡ like ey in 
they, av like ou in our, ov like ou in ragout, υἱ like our pronoun we, and ζ like a 
soft dz. 


HISTORY OF GREEK: ORTHOGRAPHY. 


§ 2. That the Greek alphabet was borrowed from the 
Phoenician is abundantly established both by historical and by 
internal evidence. 


- According to common tradition, letters were first brought into Greece by 

Cadmus, a Pheenician, who founded Thebes. In illustration, we give the com- 
mon Hebrew alphabet, which is substantially the same with the old Phcenician, 
placing the corresponding Greek letters by the side. It should be remarked, 
however, that the forms of the letters in both alphabets have undergone much 
change. It will be noticed that most of the Oriental names of the letters, 
when transferred to the Greek, require modification in accordance with the law 
respecting final letters (§ 63), and that this is commonly effected by adding a. 


Hebrew. Greek. Hebrew. Greek. 
Aleph A α Alpha 4 Lamed A a Lambda 
3 Beth Β. ὁ Beta Ὁ Mem Μμ Mu 
2 Gimel T y Gamma 3 Nun N » Nu 
1 Daleth A 3 Delta Ὁ Samech = ¢ Sigma 
7 «6He E ε E@Qpsilon) yp Ayin O ὁ O (micron) 
. Vau F F Vau 5 Pe II ὦ Pi 
7  Zayin Z & Zeta ¥  Tsade Ξ & Xi 
T Hheth Η ἡ Eta Ρ Koph φ Koppa 
Ὁ Teth © 9 Theta \  Resh P ¢ Rho 
» Tod I. Tota w Shin 2D San er Sampl 
> Kaph K x Kappa mn Tau T ¢« Tau 


96 HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGHAPHY. [Boox 1 


§ 2B. This borrowed alphabet received in thé course of 
time important modifications. Ξ 

a. The original Pheenician alphabet had no proper vowels. The Grecks, 
therefore, employed as such those letters which were nearest akin to vowels , 
viz, A, E, F, H, 1, and Ὁ. In the transition of these letters into vowels 
there appears to have been nothing arbitrary. A, as the soft or entirely open 
breathing, naturally passed into the most open and deepest of the vowels. 
E and H, as weaker and stronger forms of the palatal breathing, naturally 
became signs of the shorter and longer sounds of the palatal vowel e; in like 
manner, the lingual breathing I passed into the lingual vowel i, and the labial 
breathing F into the labial vowel τὸ (compare i and y, or in some languages 
js and also uw and v or w); O appears to have been originally a nasal breath- 
ing, and was hence employed to represent the vowel most akin to a nasal, ὃ. 
The aspirate use of E and F still continued for a period, and hence thesé 
letters when employed as vowels were distinguished by the addition of Ψτλόν; 
smooth ; thus "E ψτλόν, Ὗ pias. It will be observed that the last of these - 
letters; when used as a vowel, was somewhat changed in form, and was put at 
the end of the old alphabet.. Thé aspirate use of H prevailed still later; even 
to the period of the highest Greek refinement, and when at length it had 
yielded to the vowel use; the grammarian Aristophanes of Byzantium, who 
flourished at the court of Alexandria; about 200 years B. C., is said to have 
divided the old character into the two marks, ΕΠ for the rough; and - for the 
smooth breathing.. These marks were abbreviated to 4 or ' 1, and were 
afterwards rounded to their present forms,‘’. To the same Aristophanes has 
been ascribed the first use of marks of accent and punctuation. 


B. The sibilants 3, &, and 7) exchanged places in the alphabet ; so that 
& came after N, 7) after TH (hence called Sapzi, the S which stood next to Pi), 
and & after P. 


y- To the Pheenician alphabet, the Greeks added the aspirates ® and Xj. 
the double consonant Y, and the sign for long 0, ὦ. These new letters they 
placed at the end. In distinction the short o was now termed "O uixeéy, 
small O; and the long 0, ἿὯ μέγα, great O. The names of the other new 
letters were formed by simply adding a vowel to aid in sounding them; thus, 
7, Xi, as, in English, be, ce. 

3. In the softening of the language, the labial breathing F, and also 9 and 
2, which were only rougher forms of K and Σ, fell into disuse, and these 
letters were retained only as numeral characters ; F and 9 in their proper 
places imithe alphabet, but 7) at the end. Thus employed, they were termed 
Episéma (ἐπίσημον, sign, mark). See J 1, § 11. 


F was also named from its form the Digamma, i. e. the double gamma ; 
and from its being longest retained among the Aolians, the olic Digamma. 
It is still fouhd upon some inscriptions and coins. In Latin it commonly ap- 
pears as v; thus, Εἰ, δεῖν, video, to see, ΕΓ οἶνος, vinum, wine. Its restoration by 
Bentley to the poems of Homer has removed so many apparent hiatuses and 
irregularities of metre, that we cannot doubt its existence in the time of Homer, 
though apparently even then beginning to lose its power. The general law in 
respect to the disappearance of F, appears to be the following: Before a vowel 
or an initial g, it is usually dropped, or becomes one of the common breathings ; but 
otherwise, it usually passes into the cognate vowel v; thus, BoF és, βοΐ, βόξες 
(Lat. bovis, bovi, boves) become βοός, βοΐ, βόες ; but BOF s, BéFy, BOF, BoF ci be- 
come βοῦς, βοῦν, Bov, βουσί (FY 14). 


en. 2.] ; VOWELS. 97 


ᾧ 33. The alphabet in its present complete form was first adopted by 
the Ionians (cf. § 2), and hence termed Ἰωνικὰ γράμματα. In Attic in- 
scriptions it was first used in the archonship of Euclides, B. C. 403. 

The Greeks first wrote, like the Phoenicians, from right to left; and then 
alternately from left to right and right to left (as it was termed, Bovergopndév,i.e. 
as the ox turns with the plough). In this mode the laws of Solon were written. 
Herodotus, however (II. 36), speaks of the method of writing from left to 
right as the established custom of the Greeks in his time. Till a very late 
period the Greeks wrote entirely in capitals; and without marking the division 
of words. The small cursive character first appears in manuscripts in the 
eighth century, though there is evidence of its having been used earlier in the 
transactions of common life. . 

That there should be great variety in the orthography of the dialects re- 
sults of necessity from the fact, that in each dialect words were written as 
they were propounced. The Greeks had no standard of orthography until the 
nrevalence of the Common dialect (§ 4). 


CHAPTER II. 


VOWELS. 
{T 3.] 


§ 24. The Greek has five simple vowels, and 
seven diphthongs. Each of the simple vowels.may 
be either long or short, and each of the diphthongs 
may have either a long or short prepositive, or first 
vowel. 


Remarks. 1. Of three vowels, the long and short sounds 
are represented by the same letters (ἃς ἃ ; ἔτ; 0,0); but of 
the other two, by different letters (%, ἢ ; ὅν ὦ). 


Nores. a. The long sounds of these two vowels occur far more frequently 
than those of the other three, and are hence distinguished by separate char- 
acters. 

β. When speaking of letters, and not of sounds, we say that the Greek 
has seven vowels ; and call ε and ὁ the short vowels, because they always rep- 
- resent short sounds, ἡ and w the long vowels, because they always represent 
long sounds, and a, 1, and υ, the doubtful vowels, because their form leaves «. 
doubtful whether the sound is long or short. 


y- There is strong evidence, that, in general, these vowels were pronounced 
in the same manner as the corresponding vowels are now pronounced upon the 
continent of Europe; i. e, «, like a in father, wall, fan (not as in hate) ; My 8» 
like e in they, then (not as in mete) 5 ; « like ὁ in machine, pin (not as in pine): 
w, ὁ, like o in note, not; v like u in tube, bull. They will hence be thus placed 
upon the scale of precession or attenuation. 

9 


98 VOWELS. — DIPHTHONGS. | bOOK I 


Scale of attenuation by the tongue 


, Least 
δὲ 5.8 geben $B cadet er Coes Opening. 
Entire 


Scale of atten ad te Least 


? 
“ation by the lips, ” Opening. 


In general, a, s, and ὁ are termed the open, and v and, the close vowels 
but « is more open than ε and o, ands is somewhat closer than v. 


§ 25. 2. In the Greek diphthongs, the voice always passes 
from a more open to a closer sound; and the subjunctive, or 
last vowel is always: or v. Hence the combinations possible 
are only seven, or, counting separately the proper and improper 
diphthongs, fourteen. Of these, wv scarcely occurs, except in 
the Ionic dialect. : 


A short prepositive left time for the full utterance of the subjunctive vowel, 
and the diphthong was then termed proper, as really combining two sounds; 
but a long prepositive nearly or quite crowded out the sound of the subjunc- 
tive, and the diphthong was then termed improper, as though diphthongal 
enly in appearance. 


3. After « long, 7, and ὦ, the subjunctive z so lost its sound, 
that it was at last merely written beneath the prepositive, if 
this was a small letter, and was then termed iota subscript (sub- 
scriptus, written beneath). With capitals, it still remains in the 
line, but is not sounded. Thus, “Αιδὴης or ἄδης, pron. Hadés, 
“Hid or ἤδη, édé ; 257 or δή, Ode. 

Nores. a. The « subscript is often written where it does not belong, from 
false views of etymology ; as in the Epic dative ϑύρηφι, for ϑύρηφ, ( 8); 
and in the aorist of liquid verbs, which have a in the penult of the theme ; 
thus, from φαΐνω, αἴρω (roots φαν-, de-), ἔφηνα, ἦρα, dow, for ἔφηνα, ἦρα, ἄρω " 
80 Perf. 1. πέφηνα, for πέφηνα. 

β. In some cases the best critics differ: thus, in the infinitive of verbs in 
-ἄω; some write rug, as contracted from σιράειν, and others siz», as con- 
tracted from an older form cds». So in the adverbial forms πῇ) day, or wi, 
Sn, and the like. 


§ 2G. 4. In diphthongs, except the three just mentioned 
(ᾳ, 7, and »), the breathings and accents are written over the 
second vowel, and thus often mark the union of the two vowels 
as, αὐτή, herself, but airy, cry; ηὔδα, but jive’ αἵρεσις (ἃ) 
but Ἅδης (ἃ). 

If two vowels which might form a diphthong are pronounced separately 
the second is marked with a diwresis (§ 16. 3); as, airv, dics. 


* For a full exhibition of the Greek vowels, simple ana 


cH. 2.] PEECESSION OF VOWELS. 99 


compound, see the Table ({[ 3). They are there divided into 
classes, according to the simple sound which is their sole or 
leading element, as A sounds, &c.3; and into orders, according 
to the length of this sound, or its combination with other sounds, 
as short vowels, &c. The classes are arranged according to 
the openness of the vowel from which they are named. Vow- 
els belonging to the same class are termed cognate. 


§ 27. The Greek vowels are subject to a 
great number of Eupuonic Cuances, which may 
be referred, for the most part, to two great heads, 
the Precession or Vowe ts, and the Union oF 
SYLLABLES. 


These changes diminish the effort in speaking, by reducing the volume of 
sound employed, or by preventing hiatus, and lessening the number of syl- 
lables. 


I. Precession or VowgLs. 


§ 28. The great tendency in Greek to the pre- 
cession or attenuation of vowel sounds shows it- 


self, 


1.) In the change of simple vowels. 


Precession especially affects «, as the most open of the 
vowels, changing it, when short, toe and o, and, when long, 
to 7, and sometimes to o. » 


Hence these three vowels may be regarded as kindred, and are often inter- 
changed in the formation and inflection of words. Thus, in the verbs rgé- 
ww, στρέφω, we find the root in three forms, rgar-, resr-, and rgor-, στραῷ- 
στρεῷ-) and σαροῷ- ; and in ῥήγνῦμοι, we find the forms jey-, puy-, and pay-. 
This interchange is also illustrated by the connecting vowels inserted, for the 
sake of euphony, in the inflection of words. Thus, in the first declension, 
the connecting vowel is #, but in the second, o, for which in one case ¢ ap- 
pears. In the indicative active, the connecting vowel in the aorist and per- 
fect is a (passing, however, into ε in the 3d pers. sing.; compare the imper- 
ative βούλευσον), while in the present, imperfect, and future, it is ὁ before a 
liquid, but otherwise «. 


§ 29. 2.) In the lengthening of the short vow- 
els, and in the general laws of contraction. ‘Thus, 
a. The long vowel is regarded as the short vowel doubled 
that is, ἃ = ἀζ, ἡ = ee, w = 00, ὕ ΞΞ tv, and i=. When- 
ever, therefore, in the formation of words, a short vowel is 
lengthened, or two short vowels of the same class are united 


100 VOWELS. [Book 1 


in sound, the corresponding long vowel ought to result. Bu 
through precession, which especially affects the long oper 
vowels, «, unless it follows s, 1, @, ΟΥ̓ go, is usually length- 
ened, not to ἅ, but to the closer ἡ, and ee and oo commonly 
form, not ἡ and w, but the closer diphthongs εἰ and ov, which 
are hence termed the corresponding diphthongs of ε and o. 


6. Contraction more frequently exhibits some attenuation of 
vowel sound, See δῇ 31-87, ‘This naturally appears less in 
the earlier than in the later contractions, Compare βασιλῆς 
with βασιλεῖς (ὁ 37. 2). 


Nore. A similar tendency to pass from a more open to a closer sound apr 
pears in the general law for the formation of diphthongs (§ 25. 2). 


II. Union or SyLuaB.es. 


§ 30. The most important changes belonging 
to this head ave, A. Contraction, which unites 
two successive vowels in the same word; B. Cra- 
515 (κρᾶσις, mingling), which unites the final and 
wutial vowels of successive words; and C. Apos- 
TROPHE or Exision, which simply drops a final 
vowel before a word beginning with a vowel. 


In poetry, two vowels are often united in pronunciation, which are written 
separately, This union is termed synizésis (συνίζησις, placing together), or syn- 
ecphonésis (συνεκφώνησιςγ) pronouncing together). 

‘ 


A. ConTRAcTION. 


§ Bi. Contraction takes place in three ways; by simple 
union, by absorption, and by union with precession, From the 
law Of diphthongs (ᾧ 25. 2), two vowels can unite without 
change only when the latter is ὁ or v, and the former a more 
open vowel. In other cases, therefore, either one‘of the vow- 
els is absorbed, i. e. simply lost in the other, which, if before 
short, now of course becomes long; or else precession takes 
place, changing one of the vowels to + or v, which then forms 
a diphthong with the other vowel. The following are the gen- 
eral rules of contraction, with the principal cases belonging to 
each, and the prominent exceptions. 

Nore. An s, when absorbed in «, ἡ) or ὦ, is written beneath it. The 


laws of contraction take effect, without regard to δὴ, subscript, or the sub- 
junctive . of the diphthong ει; as, an ¢, au @ (8 33). 


cH. 2.] CONTRACTION. 101 


§ 32. 1, Two vowels, which can form a diph- 
thong, imte without further change. ‘Thus, 


become as become as 
αἱ 4, ἑῥάϊστος ῥᾷστορ. οἵ οι, ἠχόϊ ἦχοι. 
ε εἰ) τείχεϊ σείχει. ai W λώϊσσὸς λῶσχος. 
nb ἢ θΘρήϊνσσα Θρῇσσα. ve vi, νέκυϊ véxus (Ep.). 


Exception. 4, like ai, becomes @3 AS, γήραϊ, γήρᾳ * unless, with Thiersch, 
we prefer to write γήραι. 


δ 33. II. a, (1.) before an £ sound (1 3), 
absorbs it; but (2.) before another A sound, is it- 
self absorbed. (3.) a, or (4.) 7, with an O sound, 
forms ὦ. ‘Thus, 


become as become as 


(ὦ as a τίμαε Tid. ou w, ἠχόα ἠχώ. 
at | τιμάεις σιμᾷς. ἄωω ὧν «πάω τιμῶ. 
an ἅ, τιμάητε τιμᾶτε. we W, ἥρωας ἥρως. 
a @ Tidy τιμᾷ. Ok πσιμάοιμοι TH μοι. 

(2.) aa @ γέραα vied. αὖ wy πτιμάουσι τιμῶσι. 
ae Sy = fovea. μινᾷ- ove ὦ, οὔατος ὠτύός. 
ath και, μνάαι μναῖ. (4.) on w, δηλόησε δηλῶτε. 

(3.) ae @, Tiphousy Timmpsy. on a, διδόῃς διδῶς- 


Exceprions. ἃ. The Closer ἡ takes the place of Ζ in the contract forms 
of four every-day verbs ; viz. Fite, to hunger, dipaw, to thirst, xedouas, to 
use, and ζάω, to live; as, “εινάειν πεινῆν, χράεσϑαι χρῆσθαι. Add the verbs 
κνάω, σμάω, and ἡδέα: the Subjunctive of verbs in -gs, as, icraéy (from ἵσση- 
y+) ἱστῇ and the liquid Aorist (see § 56). 


β. In adjectives, before a and ἡ is absorbed ; as, δισλόα dire, διπλόαι 
Sarda, ἁπλόη ἁπλῇ. 


y- In das, ear, the Nominative singular becomes οὖς by an absorption of 
the ὦ, but the other forms are contracted according to the rule; as, aris, dra. 


3. For the change of oy into o, in verbs in -ow, see ὃ 37. 3. 


ᾧ B34. Remarks. 1. ας taking the place of ν before o 
(δ 50) is contracted like «; thus, in the Acc. plur. “ (λόγονς, λό- 
γοας) λόγους, (γλῶώσσανς, γλώσσαας) γλώσσᾶς, (οἷνς) οἷας οἷς, ἰχϑύ- 
ας ἰχϑῦς, πόλεας πόλεις, βόας βοῦς, μείζονας (μείζοας) μείζους " in 
themes of Dec. 111., (ἕνς, ἑας) εἷς, (pavérrc, φανεας) φανείς, (oddrts, 
ὁδοαςῚ) ὁδούς, (δίνς, gag) gic’ in feminine adjectives and par- 
ticiples, (φανέντσα, φανεασαὶ φανεῖσα, (ἄγοντσα, ayouon) & ἀγουσα" 
in the 3d pers. plur. of verbs, (βουλεύονσι, βουλευοασι) βουλεύ-- 
over, (τέϑενσι) τιϑέᾶσι τιϑεῖσι, (δίδονσι) διδόασι διδοῦσι, (dei- 
xvuvor) δειχνύᾶσι δεικνῦσι. 


Nores. a. By a similar contraction with βόας βοῦς, we find also vaas ναῦς 
and yeas γραῦς (F 14). In like manner ναῦς occurs in the Nom. plur. by 
contraction from νᾶες, but only in late writers, 


102 VOWELS. — CONTRACTION. [BOOK I 


β. For χοέᾶς χοᾶς, see § 116. € For Κλήμης, Οὐάλης, see § 109. β. 


ᾧ 30. 2 When α long is contracted with an O sound 
there is usually inserted before the ὦ an ες which, however, is 
not regarded i in the accentuation as a distinct syllable ; as, νᾶδς 
(vag) νεώς (4 9), Mevéddog Μενέλεως, ‘Atgeiddo ᾿Ατρείδεω (4 8). 

So sometimes, chiefly in the Ion. (§§ 48. 1, 242. a), when a is short. 

§ 36. III. (1.) ea becomes ἡ, and (2.) εε, εἰ. 
(3.) ¢ and o, with o, form ov; but (4.) with other 
O sounds are absorbed. (5.) In other combina- 
tions not already ae (§ 32, 33), ε is absorbed. 
Thus, 


become ; as become as 


(1.) α on, φσείχεα τείχη. ois δι, oles οἷς. 

Q 7) χουσίῳ χρυσῇ. tov» φιλέουσι φιλοῦσι. 

(2.) εε εἰ, πόλεες πόλεις. 0 ἃ), δηλόω δηλῶ. 
εἰ, φιλέειν φιλεῖν. ow ᾧῳ» νόῳ νῷ, 
εἰ εἰ, κλεῖες κλεῖς. oo8 οἱ. γόδι νοῖ. 

(3.) εο ov, ἐφίχεον ἐφίλουν. oov = ov δηλόον δηλιοῦ. 
os ov, δηλόετε δηλοῦτε. (5.) tas ety χρύσεαι χρυσαῖς 
of = Oy μελιπόεις μελιτοῦς. εἴ My φιλέησε φιλῇτε. 
00 ou, νόος ᾿ νοῦς. εῇ ἢ) φιλέηῃ φιλῇ. 

(4.) ὦ ω, φιλέω φιλῶ. ns Ny σιμήεντος φιροῆντος-. 
τ᾿ a, ὀστέῳ ὀστῷ. nis ἢ, σιμήεις σιμῆς. 
ει Oly φιλέοισε φιλοῖτε. us i, ἰχϑύες ἰχϑῦς. 


.- 

ᾧ 37. Exceptions. 1. sa preceded by ὃ, 4, 6, or go (8 29), or in 
the plural or dual of the first or second declension, becomes ὥ ; as, ὑγιέα ὑγιᾶ. 
ἀργυρίας ἀργυρᾶς, ἀργυρέᾳ ἀργυρᾷ, συκέας συκᾶς, cuxtd συκᾷ, ὀστέα ὀστᾶ. Yet 
φρέαρ, Gen, φρέατος φρητός (§ 104). 

2. In the dual of the third declension, ss becomes ἡ; as, τείχεε σείχη. In 
the older Attic writers, we find the same contraction in the Nom. plur. of 
nouns in -svs; as, βασιλέες βασιλῆς (incorrectly written -7;), instead of the 
common βασιλεῖς. 


3. In verbs in -ow, the syllables oy and oss, except in the Infinitive, become 
o (i. 6. the o and s unite, absorbing the » and &) ; as, δηλόῃ δηλοῖ, δηλόεις δη- 
λοῖ;. Bilt δηλόειν (Infin.) δηλοῦν, διδόῃς (from )ωμὼ διδῷς (8 33). 


4, In the termination of the second person singular passive, sa is con- 
tracted into ἢ or «, and mas into  ; as, Bovasvsas βουλεύῃ or βουλεύει) βουλεύηαι 
svasine 


5. For special contractions of s in the augment, see §§ 188, 189. 


Remark. Contraction is omitted in many words in which it might take 
pace according to the preceding rules; particularly in nouns of the third de- 
c.znsion, and in dissyllabic verbs in -sw, 


B. Crasis. 
§ 38. Crasis (1.), for the most part, ‘Valles the 


cH. 2. | CRASIS. 103 


laws of contraction, disregarding, however, an 2 
final, which, according to the best usage, is not 
even subscribed. But often (2.), without respect 
to these laws, a final, or (3.) an initial vowel is 
entirely absorbed. 


Crasis occurs mostiy in poetry. It is commonly indicated by the coronis 
f )(§ 16), except when this mark is excluded by the rough breathing ; as, 
φάμα, οὗμοί. When an initial vowel has been absorbed without any further 
change, the words are more frequently separated in writing ; as, οἱ "wei. The 
same is sometimes done when a final vowel has been absorbed. And, hence, 
cases are often referred to apheresis and apostrophe which properly belong to 
crasis. For the change of a smooth mute to its cognate rough, when the 
second word is aspirated, see § 65. For the accent, see Prosody. 


§ 39. The principal words in which the final vowel is sub- 
ject to crasis are the following: 


a. The article; thus, for 


(1.) ὁ ἐκ, ὁ ivi, οὗκ, οὖσ᾽. For ἡ ἀρετή, ἁρεσή. 
οἱ ἐμοΐ, οὗμοί. αἱ ἀγαϑαί, ἅγαϑαί. 
ὃ ὄρνις, οὕρνις. Tov αὐτοῦ, σαὐφοῦ- 
ες φῷ ἐμῷ, τῇ ἐμῇ, «τὠμῷ, τὐμῇ. ποῦ ἡμετέρου, ϑήμεσέρου. 
(2.) ὁ ἀνήρ, ἁνήρ, or, less (3.) ὁ οἶνος, ᾧνος. 
Attic, avie. οἱ ἐμοί, οἱ μοί. 
TH ἀνδρί, φἀνδρί Tov ὕδατος, ϑοὔδατος. 


Norrs. 1. The neuter forms σό and ra are especially subject to crasis 
thus, for 
(1.) τὸ ἐνανφίον, φοὐνωντίον. For σὰ ὅσλα, Sdrira. 
Td ὄνομα, φοὔνομα. (2.) rd zanSis, rarndis. 
7b ἱμάτιον, ϑοϊμιάσιον. (3.) τὰ αἰσχρά, τάσχρά. 


2. In crasis, ἕσερος) other, retains the old form ἅσερος + thus, for 


(2.) ὁ ἕσπερος, a repos. For σοῦ ἑτέρου, Sartoou. 
τὸ ἕτερον, ϑἄτσερον. τῷ ἑτέρῳ, ϑάτέρω. 

§ 40. β. The conjunction καὶ, and; thus, for 

(1.) καὶ dv, καὶ ἐάν, κἄν. For καὶ ὃ, καὶ oi, χώ, Ns 
καὶ tv, καὶ ix, κἀν, κἀκ. (2.) καὶ εἰ, καὶ οὐ, κεὶ, κοὐ. 
καὶ ἕτερος, χἄτερος: καὶ ὑσό, χὐσό. 
καὶ εἶτα, κᾷτα. (2. 8.) καὶ ἡ ἄγχουσα, χἤγχουσα 


y- A few other particles ; thus, for 


ἥτοι ἄρα, ἠσάρα. For μηδέπω ἐν, μηδέπω ᾽ν. 
μένοι ἄν, μεντἄν. σοῦ ἔστιν, ποῦ στιν. 
οὔτοι ἄρα, οὐτ ἄρα. σπεὸ ἔργου, «ροὔργου. 
es μη Exit, εἰ μὴ ᾽χη με. ὦ ἀγαϑέ. ὦ ᾽γαϑί. 
μὴ sew, μὴ “dew. ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὦ ᾽νϑρωσπε. 


104 VOWELS. — APOSTROPHE. | bOoR ., 


5. Some forms of the pronouns ; thus, for 


ἐγὼ οἶδα, ἐγῴδα. For ὃ ἐφέρῤει, Drees. | 
ἐγὼ οἶμαι, ἐγῴμαι. οὗ ἕνεκα) οὕνεκα. 
‘ 4 »>7 a Ψ « » 
μοὶ ἐδόκει, μοὐδόκει. ὅσου ἕνεκα, - ὁϑούνεκω, 
¢ > ‘ δὰ ἐν Αὐχὶ 
σοί ἔστιν, σοῦσσιν. ἃ ἄν, ἃ ἐμέ, ἄν, ἄμε. 


The few cases which remain are best learned from observation. 


C. AposTRopHE, oR ELIsIon. 


§ 48. Apostrophe affects only the short vowels 
d, ες, i, and o, and sometimes, in poetry, the passive 
terminations in ae (and perhaps o« in the enclitics 
oi, σοί, τοί). In monosyllables (except the Ep. ῥά, 
and a few rare or doubtful cases), ¢ only is elided. 


For the mark of apostrophe, see ὃ 16. For the accentuation, see Prosody. 


Elision is most common, 


1.) In the prepositions, and other particles of constant use ; 
as, mp ἑαυτοῦ (for ἀπὸ ἑκυτοῦ, § 65), ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνον, καί ἐμὲ, and, 
in (composition (where t the sign is omitted), a ἀγέρχομαι, διελαύνω, 
πάρειμι" ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ, aig οὖν, γ᾽ οὐδέν, μάλ ἄν, ὅ8᾽ ὁ (ὅτε δ), τάχ ἄν. 


2.) Ina few pronouns, and 1 in some phrases of frequent oc- 
currence ; as, τοῦτ᾽ ἄλλο, ταῦτ᾽ ἤδη" γένοιτ᾽ ἂν, ἔσϑ᾽ ὅπου (ἔστι 
omov), laser ἄν, 010 ὅτι, φήμ᾽ ἐγώ. 


§ 43, Remarks. «. Elision is less frequent in 4, than in the other 
short vowels above mentioned. Particularly, it is never elided by the Attics 
in περί or drs (which might then be confounded with ¢rs); and never in the 
Epic ἐσσί (2d person singular of εἰμ). [Ὁ is never in prose, and very rarely” 
in Attie poetry, elided in the Dative singular, which might then be confounded 
. with the Accusative. The forms which take » paragogic (δ 66) are not elided 
in prose, except iri. 


β. Elision is least frequent in [onic prose. In Attic prose, it is found chief- 
ly in a féw words, but these often recurring. In poetry, where hiatus is more 
carefally avoided, its use is far more extended. In respect to its use or omis- 
sion in prose, much seems to depend upon the rhythm of the sentence, the 
emphasis, the pauses, and the taste of the writer. There is, also, in this 
respect, a great difference among manuscripts. 


DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 


§ 43. The dialectic variations in the vowels may be mostly 
referred to the heads of Precession, Union or ReEsouution, 
Quantity, ana INsERTION or Omission. 


§ 44. 1. Precession prevailed most in the sofi Ionic, and 


cn. 2.} DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 105 


least in the rough Dorie and A®olic; while the Attic, which 
blended strength and refinement, held a middle place. ΕΣ. g. 


1. Long e, for the most part, is retained in the Doric and olic, but in the 
Tonic passes into »; while in the Attic it is retained after 471) bo and 667, but 
otherwise passes into ἡ (§ 29). Thus, Dor. ‘auicd, Att. ἡμέρα, lon. ἡμέρη " 
Dor. δᾶμος, raya, ὠκύτας, Att. and Ion. δῆμος, σηγή, ὠκύτης - Dor. and Att. 
σοφία, πρᾶγμα, lon. σοφίη) πρῆγμα. So, even in diphthongs, Ion. νηῦς. vents, 
for ναῦς, yeaus, and in Dat. pl. of Dec. 1., -σις -s, for -aso1, -asse 


Norse. The use of this long α produced, in great measure, the Doric feature 
called πλαςειασμός, broad pronunciation, which was imitated by the Attics in 
the lyric parts of their drama (§ 6). 


2. Short ἃ is retained by the Doric in some words, where, in the Attic, it 
passes into ε ; and in some (particularly verbs in -ew) by the Attic, where it 
becomes ¢ in the Lonic. Thus, Dor. τράφω, "Agra&mis, ὅκᾶ, φρᾶσί, Att. πρέφω, 
"Apreuus, ὅτε) φρεσί Att. ὁράω, Porraw, τέσσαρες, ἄρσην, lon. ὁρέω, Gorin, 
τέσσερες.) ἔρσην. 


3. In nouns in -ἰς -sws, the characteristic ε commonly passes, in the Ionic, 
into s throughout ; as, πόλιες, sos, « (contracted into 7 according to § 29. «), 
ἐν, 4855 lav, soit, sas (contr. is). 


4. As the long of s and », or the contraction of ¢s and oo or ot, the stricter 
Doric prefers the long vowels » and w to the closer diphthongs « and ov; 
while, on the other hand, the Ionic is particularly fond of protracting ε and ὁ 
to εἰ and a or ow Thus, Dor. χήρ, δῶλος - Gen. of Dec. Π..) ra ὠρανῶ - Infin. 
εὑρῆν, χαίρην, ὑπνῶν" for χείρ, δοῦλος, ποῦ οὐρανοῦ, εὑρεῖν, χαίρειν) ὑπνοῦν. Ion. 
ξεῖνος, μοῦνος, ποίη, for ξένος, μόνος, πόα. Att. κόρος, ὄνομα, ὄρος " Lon. κοῦρος, 
οὔνομα οὖρος - Dor. κῶρος, ὦ ὄνομα, ὦρος. Both the Doric and Ionic have ὧν for 
οὖν, therefore, contracted from ἐόν. 


5. Other examples of precession or the interchange of kindred vowels 
(Ὁ 28) are the following; in some of which, contrary to the general law of 
the dialects, the Ionic has a more open sound than the Attic, or the Attic than 
the Doric or Aiolic ; Att. asi, ders, Ion. αἰεί, aierds- Att. κἄω, κλἄω, Ion. 
and Com. καίω, κλαίω- Att. ϑᾶκος, Ton. ϑῶκος + lon. σῥάπω, ra pve, μέγαϑοξ, 
Att. σρέπω, τέμνω, μέγεϑος > Ion. ἀῤῥωδέω, Att. ὀῤῥωδέω - Ion. μεσαμβρία, Att. 
μεσημβρία Dor. and Ep. ai, Att. εἰ. Dor. ϑνάσκω, Ion. and Att. ϑνήσκω, 
Lol. ϑναίσκω- Att. σσρατός, βραχέως, πάρδαλις; Lol. σαροσός, βροχέως, πόρδα- 
rus + Att. ὄνομα, Mol. ὄνυμμα - Att. ἕρσεσόν, Mol. ὄρπεσον. 


§ 45. IL. Union or Resotution. A. The Contraction 
of vowels prevailed most in the vivacious Attic, and least in 
the luxurious Ionic. By the poets, it is often employed or 
omitted according to the demands of the metre. There are 
also dialectic differences in the mode of contraction, which, for 
the most part, may be explained by precession. E. g. 


1 In contracting « with an O sound, the Doric often prefers @ to the 
clover »; in the first declension, regularly. Thus, Dor. ᾿Ασρείδξ, σᾶν ϑυρᾶν 
( 8), Πρσειδᾶν, -ἄὥνος, πεινᾶντι, δια σεεινᾶμεες, σπρᾶστος, for ᾿Ατρείδου (uncontracted 
-a>), σῶν ϑυρῶν (- ων), ΓΠσειδῶν, -ὥνος (-«ων, -ἄονος), πεινῶντι (-ἀοντι), διασπεινῶ- 
μὲν (-ἀομεν), πρῶτος (-0x70s). A like contraction appears in proper names in 
~Ados 5 as, Dor. Mevirds, for Mevér dos. 


106 VOWELS. | BOOK 5 


2 For the contraction of εε and oo or os, see ὃ 44. 4. 


8. With the Ionics and some of the Dorics, the favorite contraction of ε' 
and sov is into εὖ, instead of ov. This use of εὖ for ον sometimes extends ta 
cases where this diphthong results from a different contraction. Thus, φιλεῦ- 
μεν, Φιλεῦ, ἐμεῦ, ϑέρευς, for φιλοῦμεν (-ἔομεεν), φιλοῦ (-tov), ἐμοῦ (-t0), ϑέρου, 
(-εος) ἐδικαίευ, ἐδικαίευν, δικαιεῦσι, in Herodotus for ἐδικαίου (-08), ἐδικαίου. 
(-c0v), δικαιοῦσι (-ὄουσι) " λωτεῦντα M. 283, for Awrotyra (-éevra). 


4. The Dorics (but not Pindar), contrary to the general law of the dialect, 
commonly contract « with an Z sound following, into 1; as, igdrn, σιγῆνγ λῇς, 
from igaras, σιγάειν, dons. Cf. § 33. a. 


5. In the contractions which follow the change of ν before σ (§ 58), the 
ZEolic often employs αι and οι, for @ and οὐ ; as, Acc. pl. rails σιμαίς, φοὶς νό- 
feos, for τὰς σιμάς, τοὺς νόμους " Nom. sing. of adj. and partic. μέλαις, τύψαις, 
τύψαισα, ἔχοισα, for μέλας, τύψας, τύψασα, ἔχουσα " 3d pers. pl. of verbs, 
φαισί, xodrracs, for Paci, xedrrover. The Doric has here great variety, both 
employing the simple long vowels, the short vowels (as though » were simply 
dropped before 7), the common diphthongs of contraction (ὃ 34), and the 
f£olic diphthongs; thus, Acc. pl. σέχνῶς and réyvds (Theoc. 21. 1) 3 rods 
λύκους and τὼς λύκος (Theoc. 4.11); sis and ἧς, one; Μοῦσα, Maca (Theoc.), 
Μοῖσα (Pind.), and Laconic Μῶα - Nom. sing. of partic. φράσαις (Pind. Ol. 
2. 108), ἰδοῖσα (Ib. 73). So, likewise, o for ov before σ in ἀκοίσω, Theoc. 
11. 78. 


6. The Ionic use of wv for av in a few words, appears, at least in some of 
them, to have arisen from a union of o and α to form w; thus, for raira, 
ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, Ton. rade, ἐμεωυτοῦ, σεωυτοῦ, ἑωυτοῦ, from rd αὐτό, 
ἐμέο aurov, σέο αὐτοῦ, ἕο αὐτοῦ. In the reciprocal pronouns, the wv passed 
into the other cases. We find also Ion. ϑωῦμα, πρωῦμα (yet better σρῶρεα), 
for Satya, τραῦμα. In all these words, wv-is written by some with a dizre- 
sis; as, ϑώῦμα. 

§ 46. B. Vowels which appear only as diphthongs in the 
Attic are often RESOLVED in the other dialects, especially the 
Ionic and Avolic, into separate sounds. In the lonic, the reso 
lution of #, with ε prolonged, into 7, is especially common ; as 
βασιληΐη; κληΐς, for βασιλεία, κλείς. 


Nores. «. On the other hand, the Tonic in a few cases employs contrac- 
tion whéfe the Attic omits it, particularly of om into w 5 as, ives, ἔβωσα, tvw- 
σα, βωϑέω, ὀγδώκοντα, for i ἱερός, ἐβόησα, ἐνόησα, βοηϑέω, ἐγδοάμοντα. 


β. The fondness of the Ionic for a concurrence of vowels leads it, in some 
cases, to change » toa (§ 50) after a vowel (which, if before 2, now becomes 
8); as, ᾿Αρισταγόρεα, ἐδυνξατο, for ᾿Αρισταγόραν, ἐδύναντο. 


C. In Crasis, the Doric and Ionic often differ from the Attic 
by uniting the o of the article with « and ai initial, to form ὦ 
and 3 as, τὸ ἀληϑές, τὠληϑὲς " ob ἄνδρες; ὦνδρες " of αἰπόλοι 
ᾧπόλοι. 


In the following crases, which are found in Herodotus, and the two first 
also in Homer, the smooth breathing has taken the place of the rough; ὁ ég:- 


cH. 2.] DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 107 


ὅσος, ὥριστος + ὗ αὐτός, wires > οἱ ἄλλοι ὥλλοι. Other dialectic crases are, 
Dor. ὁ ἔλαφος, ὥλαφος " ὁ ἐξ, ὡξ - καὶ ix, κἠκ- καὶ εἶπε, κἧπε" ' Ton. ὁ ὁ ἵσερος, 
οὕσερος. 


ᾧ 47. Ill. Quantiry. Fora short vowel in the Ais, the 
uther dialects often employ a long vowel or diphthong, and the 
converse. ‘Thus, 


Ton. διπλήσιος for δισλάσιος + Ion. ἐπιτήδεος, εὐρέη, ἀπόδεξις, μέζων, κρέσσων, 
for ᾽σισήδειος. εὐρεῖα, ἀπόδειξις, μείζων, κρείσσων - Dor. and Ep. ἕσαρος for irai- 
» + Mol. ᾿Αλκᾶἄος, doxuos, for ᾿Αλκαῖος, ἀρχαῖος. See §§ 44.4; 45. 5. 


Nore. The poets, especially the Epic, often lengthen or shorten a vowel 
according to the metre. A short vowel when lengthened in Epic verse 
usually passes into a cognate dipthong; as, εἰλήλουθας for ἐλήλυϑας, A. 202. 


§ 48. IV. Insertion or Omission. Vowels are often 
insetted in one dialect which are omitted in another; and here, 
as elsewhere, a peculiar freedom belongs to the poets, especial- 
ly the Epic. These often double a vowel, or insert the half 
of it (i. e. the short for the long), for the sake of the metre, 
particularly in contract verbs ; as, ,πρήηνον ἐέλδωρ; for πρῆνον 
ἔλδωρ, A. 41, paar der, ἡβώωσα, ὁρόω, ὁράᾳς, γελώοντες: φόως; 
γαλόως, ἐείκοσι, for φάνϑεν, ἡβῶσα, ὃ ὁρῶ, δρᾷς; γελῶντες, φῶς; γά- 
doc, εἴκοσι. 


Remarks. 1. The [onic is especially fond of the insertion of s; as, Gen. 
pl. ἀνδρέων, χηνέων, αὐτέων, for ἀνδρῶν, &c.; 2 Aor. infin. εὑρέειν, λιπέειν, for 
εὑρεῖν, Asarsiv. 


2. In the Doric and Epic, the particles ἄρα, avd, κατά, raga, ἀπό, ὑπό, 
and ποσί (Dor. for πρός), often omit the final vowel before a consonant, with 
such assimilation of the preceding consonant as euphony may require ; as, 
ἄορ ohwt, ἄμ. βωμοῖσι, “ἄγκεισις, ἀνστάς (§ 68. 3), κὰδ δύναμιν, naw φάλαρα 

(S$ 62. B), κὰκ κεφαλῆς, xay γόνυ, κακχεῦαι, κὰρ ῥόδον, κάλλιπον, καμρίξας, 

πὰρ Ζηνί, ἀπσέμψει, ὑββάλλειν, rir σόν. When three consonants. are thus 
brought together, the first is sometimes rejected ; as, xaxrave, ἀμνώσει, for 
κάκκτανε, ἀμμνάσει. So, sometimes in the Doric, even before a single conso- 
nant 5 as, χαβαίνων. 


Notes. «a. From the close connection of the preposition with the follow- 
ing word, these cases are not regarded as making any exception to the rule 
in § 63. Compare ὃ 68.8. The two words are often written together, even 
when there is no composition ; as, καδδύνωμειν, worry. 


β. In these words, the final vowel was probably a euphonic addition to the 
original form. Compare ἀπό and ὑσό with the Latin ab and sub. The old 
form sgér, in accordance with the rule (§ 63), became w¢4s and wgori, whence 
σοτσί. 


y- Some of these forms oven passed into the Attic, and into Ionic prose; 
a3, xarSaveiv (poet.), ἀμβάτης (Xen.), ἀμπαύομαι (Herod.). 


3. “Aga has also, by apheresis, the Epic form ῥώ, which is enclitic. 


108 CONSONANTS. | BOOK 1 


CHAPTER ILI. 


CONSONANTS. 
{1 3.] 


§ 49. The Greek has eighteen consonants, 
represented by seventeen letters. 


They are exhibited in the Table ( 3.) according to two methods of divis- 
ion, employed by orthoépists. Consonants of the same class, according to the 
first method, are termed cognate; of the same order, codrdinuaté.. 

Remarks. 1. The letter y performs a double office. When followed by 
another palatal, it is a nasal; otherwise a middle mute. As a nasal, it has r 
for its corresponding Roman letter ; as a middle mute, g (§ 12). For its 
pronunciation, see § 18. 3. 

2. From the representation of the Latin v by 6 (Virgilius, Bigyiass), it is 
probable that in the ancient, as in the modern Greek (§ 19), the middle 
mutes approached nearer to the aspirates than in our own language, and that, 
in forming them, the organs were not wholly closed. 


§ 30. 3. The semivowels » and o have corresponding 
vowels in α and ες that is, « may take the place of », and ¢ of 
v, when euphony forbids the use of these consonants ; a8, ἐφϑά: 
ραται for ἔφϑαρνται, σπερέω (contracted σπερῶ) for στέρσω 


See δῇ 84, 46. β, 56 -- 58, 60, 63. R., &e. 


Nore. In like manner, » is the corresponding vowel of the old consonant 


F. See § 22. δ. 


§ 34. The following laws, mostly euphonic, are 
observed in the formation and connection of words 


A. In true Formation or Worps. 


[. A labial mute before σ forms with it; and a 
palatal, —; thus, 


dDecome as become as 
ae y, λείσσω λείψω. no ξ, κόρακχς κόραξ. 
βσ vy, "AvaBs "Agar. ye é, λέγσω λέξω. 
φσ Ψ, yeaprw γράψω. χα ἢ, Seixs Dik. 


Nore. In like manner, Z is the union of a lingual with a sibilant sound, 
and in many words has taken the place of #3 ; 6. g. adverbs of place in «ζε 
as, for ᾿Αϑήνασδε, ᾿λϑήναζε, for Θήβασδε, Θήβδαζε" and many verbs in -ζω 
as, for μελίσδω, μελίζω, for φρώσδω, φράζω. In these verbs, the old forms re- 
main in the Zolic and Doric (§ 70. V.). For a lingual before «, see § 55. 


cn. 8. 109 


§ 52. Il. Before ἃ lingual mute,a (1.) labial 
or (2.) palatal mute becomes codrdinate (ὃ 49, 13), 


EUPHONIC LAWS. 


and (3.) a lingual mute, σ ; thus, 
become as ' become as 
(lj) Br xr, rirgiBras τέτριπται. χὸ γὸ, βρούχδην βρύγδην. 
Or πα, γίγραφται γέγρασται. χϑ χϑ, ἐτλέκϑην ᾿ἐσλέχϑην. 
πὸ Bd, ἕσδομὸς ἕβδομος. y> χϑ, ἐπράγθην ἐπσιάχϑην. 
᾿ᾧδ βδρθ γράφδην γρώβδην. (8.) τα σῷ, ὠνόμασ τὰ ὠνόμασται. 
σῷ OS, ἐλείσϑην ἐλείφϑην. ὃ: ot, Ψψεύδεης Ψεύστης. 
BS O39, ἐσρίβϑην "ἐτρίφϑην. Ser of, πέπειϑσαι πέπεισται, 
(2.)yr χα, λέλεγτα, λέλεκται- TT? oc, ὠνομάτϑην ὠνομιάσϑην- 
χα Ἀπ, τίέτυχτα, τέτυκται. IS σϑ, ἐφράδϑην ἐφράσθην. 
xd yd, “«πλέκδην σλένδην. 359 σϑ, ἐπείϑϑην ἐπείσθην. 
Exception. Two lingual mutes may remain together, if both are radi- 


ca); as, rparrw, ᾿Ατϑίς. 


§ 33. Ill. Before μ, a labial mute becomes xu, 
a palatal, y, and a lingual, o ; thus, 


become as become as 
Th fey, λέλειπσμα, λέλειμμαι. Xe Yb, τἰσυχμα, τέσυγμαι. 
Bu we, τρίβμα τρία μα. Te Ch, ὠνόματμαι ὠνόμκασμαι.- 
Ou bit, γεάφμα γράμμα. ὃς σμ, ἄδμα ᾧσμα. 
ee γμ, ἀξτλεχμᾶι σἰπλεγμα.. Se ou, σπέπειϑμα, πέπεισμαι- 


Except in a few such words as ἀκμή, κευϑιμεών, νεοχιμεός, πότμος " and some 
others from the dialects; as, in Homer, ὀδμή, ἴδμεν, ixtaiSuev, xexogudpives, 
ἀκα χιμένος. 

§ 54. IV. ν before ἃ (1.) labial or (2.) pala- 
tal, is changed into the cognate nasal (§ 49, 1 3); 
and (3.) before a liquid, into that liquid ; thus, 


become as becomé as 
CL.) v9 pr, συνπάσχω συμπάσχω. YY YY, συνγενής συγγενής. 
vB μβ, wedrArw ἐκβάλλω. Ye YX, συνχαίρω συγχᾶίρω. 
ὙΦ μῷ, συνφέρω συμφέρω. γέ γξ, ἐνξέω ἐγξέω. 
νὴ pepe, ἐνμένω ἐμμένω. (3.)νλ AA, ἔνλογος ἔλλογος. 
wp μψ, ἔνψῦχος ἔμψῦχος. yo ῥῥν συνράπσω συῤῥάστω. 
(3.)νκα yx, ἐνκαλίξίω ἐγκαλέω. 


ΝΌΤΕΒ. α. Enclities are here regarded as distinct words; thus, % rts, 
rovys. We find, however, final » changed in like manner upon old inscrip- 
tions ; as, ΜΕΜΦΣΥΧΑΣ, for μὲν ψυχάς (Insc. Potid.); so, APKAT, 
TOAAOTON, and even EZZAMOI (cf. §§ 57. 5, 68. 3), for ἄν καί, τὸν 
λόγον, ἐν Σάμῳ. 

ἢ. Before ~ in the Perfect passive, » sometimes becomes ¢ and is some- 
.times dropped : as, for πσέφανμαι, πέφασμαι" for κέκλινμαι, κέκλιφεαι.- 

y. Before x in the Perfect active, » was commonly dropped, or the form 
‘woided, except by later writers; as, for χέκρινχα, xixrixa. 

if 


110 CONSONANTS. [Book 1 


§ 55. V. A lingual or liquid should not pre- 
cede o. ‘This is prevented in various ways. 
1. A lingual mute is simply dropped before o; thus, σώματσι 


naids, πείϑσω become σώμασι, παῖς, πείσω. 


ᾧ 66. .2. In liquid verbs, the σ formative of the Future 
and Aorist is changed into ε (ᾧ 50), which (1.) in the Future is 
contracted with the affix, but (2.) in the Aorist is transposed 
and contracted with the vowel of the penult. 

Thus, in the Fut. and Aor. of the liquid verbs, ἀγγίλλω, to announce, 
νέμω, to distribute, κρίνω, to judge, πλύνω, to wash, and δέρω, to flay, for 


(1.) ἀγγέλσω, (ἀγγελέω) ἀγγελῶ- (2.) ἤγγελσα, (ἠγγεελα) ἤγγψειλα. 


γέμσω, (spew) γεῤοῶ * ἔνεμσα, (ἔνεεμα)  ἔνειμα. 
κρίγσω, (χρινέω) κρινῶ * ἔχρινσα, (ἔκριενα) ἔκρῖνα. 
πλύνσωνγ (rAvviw) σλυνῶ" ἔσλυνσα, (ἐπλυενα) ἔσλῦνα. 
δέρσω, (δερέω) deca ἔδερσα, (ἔδεερα.): Weipa. 


ΝΌΤΕΒ. «. Here ὡς commonly passes into ἡ, unless s or g¢ precedes; thus, 
σφάλλω, to cause to slip, Palvw, to show (roots cPaa-, φαν-), have in the Aor. 
(ἔσφαλσα, ἐσφαελα) ἔσφηλα, ἔφηνα - while riaivw, to fatten, περαίνω, to com- 
plete (roots xiay-, περῶν-), have trlave, ἐπέρᾶνα. But ἰσχναίνω, to make lean, 
κερδαίνω, to gain, κοιλαίΐνω, to hollow out, χευκαίνω, to whiten, dgyaivw, to enrage, 
πεπαίνω, to ripen, have ἃ in the penult of the Aor.; rergaivw, to bore, ἡ ; and 
σημαίνω, to give a. signal, μιιαίνω, to stain, both ἡ and ἅ. Αὔρω, to raise, and 
ἅλλοραι, to leap, have @, which in the Indicative is changed by the augment 
into ἡ; thus, ἦρα, dew, ἄραιμι. 

B. A few poetic verbs retain the old forms with σ᾽; as, κἔλλω, to land, 
κέλσω, ἔκελσα " κύρω, to meet with, to chance, κύρσω, ἔκυρσα " devips (1. ée-), 
to rouse, ὄφσω, ὦρσα - φύρω, to knead, ἔφυρσα. Add these forms, mostly from 
Homer, ἦρσα, ἔλσα, ἔρσω, ϑέρσομαι; κέρσω, ἔκερσα, διαφϑέρσω, ἤερσα. 


§ Φ 7. 3. In the Nominative, the formative o (1.) after g, 

and sometimes (2.) after », becomes ες which is then trans- 
posed, and absorbed (§ 31) by the preceding vowel ; as, for 
(1.) des, ee Yae. (2.) wrasdéys, (wrasasy) way. 
wagics, (πατεε πατήρ. λιμένς, (λιμεεν) λιμεήν. 
ῥήσοῦς,  (pnrete ῳ ῥήτωρ. δαίμονς, (δαιμισεν) δαίμων. 


Except in δάμαρ (§ 109). 
4. In the Dative plural of the third declension, » preceding 
σ without an intervening τ, is dropped ; as, for 
μέλανσι, μέλασι. For δαΐμονσι, δαίμοσι. 
λιμένσι, λιμέσι. δινσί, ῥισί, 
So also with «, in the Dat. pl. of adjectives in -εἰς ; as, for yagisyros, χα. 


φίεσι. 


5. In the feminine of adjectives in -εἰς, v before « becomes 
0; as, for χαρίεντσα, (χαρίενσα) χαρίεσσα. 


on. 8.] 


EUPHONIC LAWS. 


11] 


§ SS. 6. Otherwise, ν before o is changed into «, which is 
then contracted with the preceding vowel (δῷ 34, 50) ; as, for 


Nom. Mase. Nom. Fem. 
μέλανς, (ελααςὴὺ μέλᾶς. For πάνεσα, (πάασα) πᾶσα. 
Qavives, (φανεας) φανείς. Pavivron, (φανέασα) φανεῖσα 
dares, (δοας) δούς. δόνετσα, (δόασα) δοῦσα. 
dives, (νας) δύς. δύνεσα, (δύασα) δῦσα. 
β'»9) (ῥιας) vend Dat. Plur 
Verbs in 3d Pers. Plur. σ΄ἄνσσι, (πάασι) TLC 
ἵσπανσι, ᾿ Cerdac) ἱσσᾶσι. ; Nias Coe iy f i ig 
«ίϑενσι, «ιϑέαᾶσι, φιϑεῖσι- + a halt Sen, 
δίδονσι, διδόᾶτι, διδοῦσι. — (δύασι ini 
dsixvuver, δεικνύῶσι, δεικνῦσι. Future. 
ives, ἴᾶσι. πένϑσομαι, (πσεασομα!) πείσομρεαι. 
σαένδσω, (σπεασω) orsicw. 
Notes. a. The forms σιϑέῶσι, διδδῶσι, and δεικνύῶσι were used by the 


Attics, for the most part, without contraction ; ἤῶσι received no contraction. 


β. In nouns, if »9 precede ¢, the » is retained; as, for fapwSs, ¢rpeuvs, for 
ἕλμινϑσι, ἕλρενσι (yet others, ἕλμτσι). It is also retained in some forms in 
σαι and derivatives in -σις. from verbs in -aivw, as wigaveas from Paiva, 
πέπανσις from πσεπαίνω- and sometimes in the adverb πάλιν, and the adjective 
wav, in composition. Add the Homeric κένσαι, Y. 337. For ἐν, σύν, and 
ἀν, see ὃ 68. 3. In the rough Argive and Cretan, » seems to have been 
extensively retained before ¢; thus, tvs, σιϑένς, for εἰς, cS is 


. 


§ 59. 7. In the Dative plural of syncopated liquids, and 
of ἀστήρ, star, the combination -ego-, by metathesis and the 
change of ε to a, became -ρασ- ; as, for mutégar, πατράσι" for 
“OTEQOL, HUTOMOUL. 


8. Elsewhere the combinations do and go were permitted to 
stand, except as o radical after 9 was softened in the new Attic 
to ἡ (ὃ 70) ; as, ἄῤῥην, male, Faggoc, courage, xogdn, temple, 
cheek, for the older ἄρσην, ϑάρσος, xogon. The combination uo 
is unknown in classic Greek. 


ἃ 60. VI. Between two consonants, o forma- 
tive is dropped, and ν is changed to α (δ 50); as, 
for 
γιγράφσϑαι, yeyed@Sas+ for λέλεγσθε, λέλεχϑε for ἔφϑαρντα,, ἐφϑάραται. 


Norr. So the compound προσσχιών is written by some σπροσχιών. 


ἃ 61. VII. Before x formative, a labial or 
palatal mute unites with it in the cognate rough, 
and a lingual mute is dropped ; thus, 


112 CONSONANTS. [Boox ᾿ 


‘become as become as 
Te 0, κέκλοπκὰ κέκλοφα. χα Xy διδίδαχκα δεδίδαχα.- 
Bx 9, εἴληβκα εἴληφα. TH κὴ ὠνόμασχα ὠνόμακα. 
ox 0, γέγῥαφκα γέγραφα. ὃ κ)| ED pada πέφρακα. 
B® χΧ) δίδεικκα δέδειχα. Sx x, πέπειϑικα = irene 


YX χ») πέπραγκα πέπρᾶχα-: 

§ 62. VIII. If rough mutes begin two succes- 
sive syllables, the fist is often changed into its 
cognate smooth, especially (1.) in reduplications, or 
(2-) when both letters are radical ; but (3.) in the 
second person singular of the Aorist imperative pas- 
sive, the second rough mute is changed ; thus, for 


(1.) φεφίληκα, TePiAnnees (2.) ϑριχός. φριχός- 
χέχρημαι, κέχρημαι. ϑαχύς, «αχύς. 
ϑέϑυκα, φσέϑυκα.- Seixw, Tein. 
ϑίϑηρις σίϑημι. (3.) βουλεύϑηϑι, βουλεύξησι. 


ΝΌΤΕΘ. «. Upon the same principle, ἕγχω becomes ἔχω" and whenever ῥ 
is reduplicated, the first  becotnes smooth, and, as it then cannot stand at the 
beginning of a word (§ 13. 2), is transposed ; as, for péfiga, tjrga. Yet we 
find, by a softening of the second 2, ῥερυπωμένα ζ. 59, fecumsptve Anacr. Fr. 
105, ῥερῖφϑαι Pind. Fr. 281. ᾿ 

β. So, to avoid excessive aspiration, a rough mute is never preceded by the 
same rough mute, but, instead of it, by the cognate smooth ; as, the Epic 
κὰσ φάλαρα, for κὰφ φάλαρα (ὃ 48. 2)} 80, Σασφώ, Βάκχος, ArSis* and, 
upon the same principle, Πύῤῥος (§ 18. 2). 


§ 63. IX. The semivowels vy, g, and s, are the 
only consonants that may end a word. Any other 
consonant, therefore, falling at the end of a word, 
is either (1.) dropped, or (2.) changed into one of 
these, or (5.) assumes a vowel ; thus, for 


(1.) σῶμα, σῶμα. For κέρας, κέρας. 
μέλισ, μέλι. εἰδόσ, εἰδός. 
ἄψοντ, ἄγον. ἥπασ, ἥσαρ. 
ἰβούλευοντ, ἐβούλευον. ἐβούλευομι, ἐβούλευον. 
σαϊὸ, Wai. lorne, lorny. 
γύναικ, γύναι. ἐσίϑημο, ἐτίϑην. 
ἄνακτ, ἄνα. (8.) βουλεύοιμο, βουλεύοιμει, 
γάλακτ, γάλα. σίϑημ, σίϑημι, 

(2.) par, φῶς. "ends στῆθι. 


Remark. A word.can end with two consonants, only wher 
the last is a3 as, tc, γύψ (yung), rus (vixe), κόραξ, Hence the 
formative v of the Accusative is changed into α (ᾧ 50) after a 
consonant, except in a few cases, in which a liigual mute 
preceding » is dropped; thus, for 

γύαν, γῦσπα. ; For xAsidy, κλεῖδα and κλεῖν. 
κόρακν, κόρακα. ὄρνιϑν, bovine and ὄρνιν. 
α«αἴὸν, παῖδα. yirwry, γίλωτα and γέλων. 


cK. 8.} EUPHONIC L.\WS. 113 


§ 64. X. A consonant is sometimes inserted or 
transposed, to soften the sound. ‘Thus, 

1. When a simple vowel is brought by inflection or composi- 
tion before an initial §,a smooth @ is inserted; as, ἔῤῥωσα, 
ἄῤῥωστος, ἐπιῤῥωννῦμι, from ῥώννῦμι (é-, ἀ-γ and ἐπὲ prefixed) 
but εὔρωστος (the diphthong εὖ prefixed). 

2. When, by syncope or metathesis, a nasal is brought be 
fore 4 or g, the cognate middle mute is inserted; as, from 
ἀνέρος, (ἀνρός) ἀνδρός, from μεσημερία, μεσημβρία. 

Nore. If the nasal is initial, it is then dropped from the difficulty of 
sounding it; 6. g., the roots of Bairrw and βλώσκω are thus changed 5 μελετ- 


prur-, μβλια-, βλισ-} μολ-ν μλο-) μβλὸ-,) βλο-; 80 βροτός, mortal, derived 
from μόρος, Lat. mors. 


3. Transposition especially affects a liquid coming before 
another consonant; as, for ϑόρσκω, ϑρώσκω, for βέβαλκα, βὲ- 


βληκα: 
§ 65. Β. In tHe Connection or Worps. 


I. When a smooth mute is brought by (1.) cra- 
sis or (2.) elision before the rough breathing, it is 
changed into its cognate rough ; as, for 


(1.) καὶ ὃ, καὶ oi, χὠ, Nae For νύκτα ὅλην, νύχϑ᾽ δ)ην. 
Td ἱμάτιον, ϑοϊμάτιον. And in composition, fi eva 
Tov ἑτέρου, _ ϑάσέρου. ame and inxs, ἀφίημι, 
ὅπου ἕνεκα, ὁψοῦνεκα. δέκα and ἡμέρα, δεχήμερος. 

(2.) ἀπὸ οὗ, ἀφ᾽ οὔ. tora and ἡμέρα, ἱφϑήρερ sy. 


Nore. In some compounds, this change takes place with ai iniervening 
δὶ and in some words, it appears simply to have arisen from the tendency of 
9 to aspiration (cf. § 13. 2); as, φροῦδος (from πρό and ὁδός), φρουρός {πρό 
ὁράω), τέϑριπισον (τέτταρες, ἵππος) ; φροίμιον (πρό, οἶμος), ϑράφγω from re 
ϑάσσω. 

§ 66. II. Some words and forms end eithe 
with or without a final consonant according to cu- 
phony, emphasis, or rhythm 


In most of these cases, the consonant appears not to belong to the original 
form, but te have been assumed. In some cases, however, the reverse anpears 
to be true; and some cases are doubtful. 


1. Datives plural in 1, and verbs of the third person in a 
and 1, assume ν at the end of a sentence, or when the nest 
word begins with a vowel; as, 

Πᾶσι γὰρ εἶπε rodro- but, Εἶπεν αὐτὸ πᾶσιν. 
Thao λέγουσι τοῦτο: but, [[ῶσιν αὐτὸ λέγουσιν. 
κυ * 


114 CONSONANTS. — EUPHONIC LAWS. | BooK 1. 


Notes. a. So, likewise, adverbs of place in -σι (properly datives plural 
the adverb πέρυσι, last year, the numeral εἴκοσι (commonly), the demonstra- 
tive - preceded by ¢ (sometimes), the Epic case-ending -@, aud the Epic 
particles κέ, νύ, and νόσφι" as, ἡ Πλαταιᾶσιν ἡγεμονία" εἴκοσιν ἔπη. See § 211. N. 

β. The ν thus assumed is called ν paragogic. It is sometimes employed by 
the poets before a consonant to make a syllable long by position ; and in most 
kinds of verse, some of the best editors write it uniformly at the end of a line. 
In Ionic prose it is generally neglected, but in Attic prose it is sometimes 
found even before a consonant in the middle of a sentence. In grammars 
and lexicons, a paragogic letter is commonly marked thus: ¢/xoi(»). 


§ 67. 2. The adverb οὕτως, thus, commonly loses σ before 
a consonant ; and ὦ ἄχρι and μέχρι, until, often assume it δρῖρες 
a vowel; as, οὕτω φησί" μέχρις οὗ. 

3. Some other words have poetic or dialectic forms, in which a final ν or ¢ 
is dropped or assumed : as, local adverbs in -Sey (poet , chiefly Ep., -S), nu- 
meral adverbs in -xss (lon. -x:), ἄντικρυς, ἀτρέμας, ἀράν wana, 696), 


i9u(s). : 
§ 68. C. Speciar Russ. 


1. The preposition ἐξ, out of, becomes éx before a consonant, 
and admits no further change; as ἐκ κακῶν, éxosiw, ἐκγελάω, 
ἔκϑετος, ἐκμάσσω. 


2. The adverb ov, not, before a vowel, assumes x, which 
becomes x before the rough breathing 3 as οὔ φησι, οὐκ ἔνεστιν, 
οὐχ ὕει, οὐκέτι. 

Nores. «. The adverb μηκέσι, from μή and ἔτσι, follows the analogy of 
οὐκέτι. Ξ 


β. In these words, ἐκ and οὐκ may perhaps be regarded as the original 
forms. That in certain situations these forms are retained is owing to their 
close connection as proclitics, or in composition, with the following word, and 
therefore forms no real exception to the rule in § 63. When orthotone, they 
conform to the rule, the one by assuming s, and the other by dropping x. 


3. In composition, the preposition ἐν, in, retains its » before 
9 and.o; while σύν, with, drops its ν before o followed by an- 
other consonant, and before ¢; but before σ followed by a 
vowel, changes » to o; 3 88, ἐνράπτω, ἐνσείω (yet ἔῤῥυθμος often- 
er than ἔνρυϑμος) ; σύστημα (for otvotnua), ovgvyia’ συσσεύω 
(for συνσεύω)., συσσιτία. 

Nore. The Epic ἀν for ἀνά (§ 48. 2) here imitates ἐν - as, ἀνστάς, ἄνσχετος 


DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 
§ 69. A. The dialects often interchange consonants ; most 
frequently, 


1. Cocnare Mures (δ 49); as, Ion. αὖτις, δέκομαι, for αὖϑις, δέχομαι’ 
Hol. auxi for ἀμφί. 


cH. 3.| DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 115 


Notes. a. The soft Ionic was less inclined than the Attic to the rough 
mutes ; hence, in the Ionic, the smooth mute remains before the rough breath- 
ing (§ § 65, 68. 2) ; 3 aS, ἀπ᾽ ov, δεκήμερος, οὐκ ὕει. In some compounds, this 
passed into ‘the Attic; as, ἀπηλιώτης, from ἀπό and ἥλιος. 

β. Aspiration is sometimes transposed; as, Ion. κιϑών, ἐνθαῦσα, ἐνθεῦτεν, 
Καλχηδῶν, for χιτών, ἐνταῦϑα, ἐντεῦϑεν, Χαλκηδών. 

Il. Codrprmate Mures (§ 49); as, Ion. and Mol., x for σ' in interroga- 
five and indefinite pronouns and adverbs; thus, κοῖος, κοῦ, κοτέ, for xoi0s, rod, 
ποτέ" Dor., x for ¢ in πόκα, ὅκα, τόκα, for πότε, dre, rors, and in similar 
adverbs of time; Mol. xtuas for rivers, φήρ for Sig- Mol. and Dor. γλέφαρον 
for βλέφαρον, dz for γῆ" Dor. ὀδελός for ὀβελός, devi os for devidos. 

Iil. Liqurps ; as, Dor. ἦνϑον, βέντισσος, for ἦλϑον, βέλτισσος " lon. σλεύ- 
μων for πνεύμων. 


§ 7. IV. ¢ with other letters; 6. g. 


1. The Ionic and Old Attic cz and ge pass, for the most part, ἴῃ the later 
Attic, into rr and pf; as, τάσσω τάττω, γλῶσσα γλῶττα, ἄρσην ἄῤῥην. See 
§ 59. 8. 


2. Dor. ¢ for σι; as, Ποτειδάν, ἔπεσον, εἴκατι, for Ποσειδῶν, ἔπεσον, εἴκοσι. 
This appears especially in the 2d personal pronoun, and in the 3d pers. of 
verbs ; as, τύ, σέ, for σύ, vt (Lat. tu, te); Pari, φαντί, λέγονσι, for φησί, φασί, 
λέγουσι (Lat. legunt). 

8. Dor. ¢ for » in the verb-ending of Ist pers. pl. μὲς for μὲν (Lat. mus) ; 
AS, λέγομες for λέγομεν (Lat. legimus). 

4. The Laconic often changes $ to «, and final ς to ¢; as, πσαλεόρ Ar. Lys. 
988, σιόρ, σέλω, for παλαιός, Seis, ϑέλω- πόϊρ for παῖς (Lat. puer, compare 
Maureipor). 

V. The Dovstz Consonants with other letters ;* as, old ξύν, later and 
common σύν (in the Lat. eum the ¢ has been dropped, instead of the x) ; 
fol. Varga for Sarga- Mol. σκένος, cxipos, for ξένος, ξίφος - Dor. Ψέ, Liv, 
for σφέ, σφίν- Ion. διξός, πριξός, for δισσός, πρισσός. 

For %, we find, in the Molic and Doric, σδ, 33, and 3; as, ὄσδος, μελίσδω 
(§ 51. N. ), παίδδω, μάδδα, Δεύς, for ὄζος, μελίζω, παίξω, pati Ζεύς. ᾿ 


§ 71. B. Consonants are often doubled, inserted, omitted, 
and transposed by the poets, especially the Epic, for the sake 
of the metre; as, ἔλλαβον, φράσσομαι, νέκυσσι, ὅσσος, ὅππως; 
ἔδδεισε, for ἔλαβον, &c.; πτόλεμος, πτόλις, διχϑ, νώνυμνος, ἀπά- 
λαμνος; for πόλεμος, πόλις, δίχα, voor ὙὍμος; ἀπάλαμος " ἔρεξον, 
᾿οδυσεύς, ᾿ἁχιλεύς, φάρυγος, for ἔῤῥεζον, ᾿Οδυσσεύς, ᾿Αχιλλεύς, φά- 
ρυγγος" κραδίη, κάρτερος, βάρδιστος, for καρδία, κράτερος, βρά- 
διετος. 


BOOK II. 
ETYMOLOGY. 


“Erta “περδιντά. 
Homer 


§ 72. Etymology treats of the InrLection and 
of the Formation or Worps; the former includ- 
ing DecLension, Comparison, and ConsuGaTion, 
and the latter, Derivation and ComposiTIoN. 


For the distinction between the radical and the formative part of words, 
and the use of the terms root, prefix, affix, open and close or vowel and consonant 
aflixes, characteristic, pure and impure words, mute, liquid, liquid-mute, labial, 
palatal, and lingual words, theme, paradigm, &c., see General Grammar. 


CHAPTER I. 
PRINCIPLES OF DECLENSION. 


§ 73. The two classes of Susstantives (in- 
cluding Nouns and Substantive Pronouns) and 
ADJECTIVES fnciuding the Article, Adjectives com- 
monly so called, Adjective Pronouns, and Partici- 
ples) are declined to mark three distinctions, Gen- 
peER, Numser, and Case. 


Nore. Adjectives receive these distinctions merely for the sake cf con- 
forming to the substantives to which they belong. 


A. GENDER. 
§ 74. The Greek has three genders; the Mas- 
CULINE, the Feminine, and the Neuter. 


Nores. «a. Nouns which are both masculine and feminine, are said to be 
of the common gender. 


cH. 1.] GENDER. . a 


β. To mark the genders of Greek nouns, we employ the different forms of 
the article , in the singular, for the masculine, 6; for the feminine, ἡ ; for the 
common, é6,%; and for the neuter, σό: in the plural, for the masculine, of : 
for the feminine, a; for the common, οἱ, ai; and, for the neuter, σά : as, ὁ 
«αμίας, steward, ὁ, ἡ τροφός. nurse, πὸ σῦκον, fig. 

In like manner, the different cases and numbers, according to their gender, 
are marked by different forms of the article; as the Gen. sing. mase, by 
σοῦ, το. 

y- In the case of most animals it is seldom important to distinguish the 
gender. Hence in Greek, for the most part, the names of animals, instead 
of being common, have but a single gender, which is used indifferently for 
both sexes. Such nouns are termed epicene (ἐπίκοινος, promiscuous). Thus, 
ὃ λύκος, wolf, ἡ ἀλώπηξ, fox, whether the male or the female is spoken of. 

_ 3. Words which change their forms to denote change of gender are termed 
movable; and this change is termed motion; as, ὃ βασιλεύς, hing, ἡ βασίλεια, 
queen; ὃ σοφός, wise, ἡ σοφή, τὸ σοφόν. 

t. In words in which the feminine may either have a common form with 
the masculine or a distinct form, the Attic sometimes prefers the common 


form, where the Jonic and Common dialects prefer the distinct form ; as, 4, 4 
S:65, god, goddess, and ἡ Sez or ϑέαινα, goddess. So, likewise, in adjectives. 


§ 7. The masculine gender belongs properly to words 
denoting males ; the feminine, to words denoting females; and 
the neuter to words denoting neither males nor females. In 
Greek, however, the names of most things without life are 
masculine or feminine, either from the real or fancied posses- 
sion of masculine or feminine qualities, or from a similarity in 
their formation to other nouns of these genders. 


Thus, for the most part, the names of winds and rivers 
(from their power and violence), and also of the months, are 
masculine ; and the names of trees, plants, countries, islands, 
and cities (regarded as mothers of their products or inhabitants) 
are feminine; while nouns denoting mere products, or imply- 
ing inferiority (even though names of persons), especially 
diminutives, are neuter ; as, ὃ ἄνεμος; wind, ὃ Βοῤῥᾶς, Boreas, 
ὃ ποταμός, Tiver, ὃ Νεῖλος, the Nile, o Ὁ μήν, mona te ὃ “Βκατομβαι- 
wy, June — July, ἡ 7 συκῆ; Sig: tree, ἢ μηλέα, apple-tree, ἡ ἄπιος, 
pear-tree, ἡ ἄμπελος, vine, ἡ βύβλος, papyrus, ἢ χώρα, country, 
ἤ ἀἴγυπτος, Egypt, 4 νῆσος, island, ἡ ἡ “Σάμος, Samos, ἡ ἡ πόλις, 
aity, i «Ἱακεδαίμων, Lineal ; τὸ σῦκον, fig, τὸ μῆλον, apple, 
Π τέκνον, child, τὸ ἀνδράποδον, slave, τὸ γύναιον, dim. of γυνή, 
woman, τὸ παιδίον, little boy or girl. 


§ @G. The gender of nouns, when not determined by the 
signification, may be, for the most part, inferred from the form 
of the theme or root, according to the following rules. 


I. In the First pEecLENSION ({] 7), all words in -ag and -ης 


᾿ς ΑΝ DECLENSION. |BooK κα 


are masculine ; all in -« and -n, feminine ; as, ὃ ταμίας, ὃ ὃ ναύ- 
της ἢ οἰκία, ἢ τιμή. 

Il. In the ΞΈΘΟΝ DECLENSION ({[ 9), most words in -ος and 
-w¢ are masculine, but some are feminine or common; words 
in -ov and -wy are neuter; as, ὁ λόγος, ὃ νεώς" ἡ 000g, ἡ ἕως, 
dawn; 6, ἡ Seog, god, 0, ἡ ἄρκτος, bear; τὸ σῦκον, τὸ ἀνώγεων. 


Except when the diminutive form in -ον is given to feminine proper names ; 
aa. Λεόντιον, ἡ Τλυκέριον. 


Ill. In the rH1rp pecLtension ({Π| 11-14), 

. All words in -eve are masculine; all in -w and ταὺς, femi- 
nine; and all in τα, = by τῦν and τος, neuter ; as, ὃ ἱππεύς, ὃ au 
φορεύς, amphora ; 7 ἠχώ, ἡ ναῦς" τὸ σῶμα, τὸ μέλι; honey, τὸ 
ἄστυ, τὸ τεῖχος. : 

b. All abstracts in -tn¢ and -ἰς, and most other words in τις 
are feminine ; as, ἡ γλυκύτης, sweetness ; ἢ δύναμις, power, ἡ 
ποίησις, poesy; ἡ vis, ἡ πόλις. 

6. All labials and palatals, all liquids (except a few in 
which g is the characteristic), and all liguid-mutes are either 
masculine or feminine. 

__d. Nouns in which the root ends in, 

1.) -ωτ-- -ev-, or -vt-, are masculine ; as, ὃ γέλως, -wtos, laugh © 
ter; ὃ λιμήν, -évog " ὃ λέων, -οντος; ὃ ὁδούς, ὁ γίγας, ὃ ἱμάς, -ἄντος, 
thong. 

Except σὸ οὖς, ὠτός, ear, τὸ φῶς, φωτός, light (both contracts), ἡ φρήν, φρενός, 
mind, and a few names of cities (δ 75) ; as, ἡ Ῥαμνοῦς, -οὔντος, Rhamnus. 

2.) -ὃ-, or -9-, are feminine 3 as, 7 λαμπάς, -adoc, torch, ἡ 
ἔρις, -ἰδος, strife, ἢ χλαμύς, -vdoc, cloak ; ἡ κόρυς; -υϑος, helmet. 

Except ὁ, ἡ παῖς) παιδός, child, ὁ πούς, ποδός, foot, ὃ, ἡ ὄρνις, -ἴ3ος, bird. 

3.) -ar-, or -d-, are neuter ; as, 10 ἥπαρ; -ατος, τὸ κέρας; -ATOS, 
τὸ γέρας, -ἄος. 

B. Numper. 


δ 77. The Greek has three numbers ; the Sin- 
GULAR, denoting one; the PLurat, denoting more 
than one ; and the Dua (dualis, from duo, two), 
a variety of the plural, which may be employed 
when only two are spoken of. 


Thus, the singular ἄνθρωπος signifies man, the plural ἄνθρω σοι» men (wheta 
er two or more), and the dual ἀνθρώσω, two men, 


Remark. The dual is most used in the Attic Greek. . In the Aolic dialect 


cn. 1.} "CASE. 119 


(as in the Latin, which it approaches the most nearly of the Greek dialects) 
and in the Hellenistic Greek, the dual does not occur, except in de, two, and 
ἄμφω, both (Lat. duo, ambo). 


C. Case. 
§ 78. The Greek has five cases; 


1. The Nominative, expressing the subject of a sentence. 


ἢ, “ Genitive, ” the point of departure, or cause, 
3...“ Dative, - the indirect object, or accoms 
" paniment. 
4, ‘ Accusative, Νὰ direct limit. 
5. “ Vocative, “6 address. 


Norss. «. From the general character of the relations which they denote, 
the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative are termed the direct, and the 
Genitive and Dative, the indirect cases. 


β. The Nominative and Vocative are also termed casus recti, the right cases 
and the other three, casus obliqui, the oblique cases. 


y- For a fuller statement of the use of the cases, see Syntax. 


D. Metuops. or DeEcLENSION. 


§ 79. Words are declined, in Greek, by an- 
nexing to the root certain AFFIXES, which mark 
the distinctions of gender, number, and case. 
There are three sets of these affixes; and hence 
arise three distinct methods of declining words, 
called the FIRST, SECOND, and THIRD DECLENSIONS. 


The first of these methods applies only to words of the mas- 
‘culine and feminine genders; the second and third apply to 
words of all the genders. In some of the cases, however, the 
affixes vary, in the same declension, according to the gender ; 
so that, to know how a word is declined, it is necessary to 
ascertain three things; 1. its root, 2. the declension to which tt 
belongs, and 3. its gender. 


The mode in which the gender is marked has been already stated (§ 74, 6). 
From the theme (i. e. the Nom. sing.) and the gender, we can often determine 
at once the root and the declension. If it is necessary to mark these expli- 
citly, it is commonly done by giving, with the theme, the Genitive singular, or 
its ending. Jf the Genitive singular ends in -as or -ns, or in -ov from a theme 
in -ας or -ns, the word is of the first declension; if it ends in -ov from a theme in 
τος or -oy, the word is of the second declension; if it ends in -ος, the word is of 
the third declension. The root is obtained by throwing off the affix of the Genitive ; 
or it may be obtained by throwing off any affix beginning with a vowel. 


Thus the nouns, ὃ ταμίας, steward, ἡ οἰκία, house, 4 γλῶσσα, tongue, ὁ δῆμος. 


190 ΡΕΟΙΕΝΒΊΟΝ. -ττ ΘΈΝΕΒΑΙ, RULES. [BooK I 


peopie, and ὁ "Ἄραψ, Arab, make in the Genitive, σαρίου, οἰκίας, γλώσσης, δή 
μου, and "Αραβος. From these genitives, we ascertain that rapius, οἰκία, ane, 
γλῶσσα belong to the first declension, δῆμος to the second, and "Aga to the 
third. By throwing off the affixes -ov, -ας, -ns, and -os, we obtain the roots 
Taps, οἶκι-, yawoo-, dnu-, and ᾿Αραβ-. The words are then declined by an- 
nexing to these roots the aflixes in the table ( 5). 


§ 59. In the declension of words, the follow-. 
ing GENERAL RULES are observed. | 


I. The masculine and feminine affixes are the 
same, except in the Nominative and Genshive sin- 
gular of the first declension. ‘The neuter affixes 
are the same with the masculine and feminine, 
except in the direct cases, singular and plural. 


II. In neuters, the three direct cases have the 
same affix, and in the plural this affix is always ἄ. 


III. The dual has but two forms; one for the 
direct, and the other for the indirect cases. 


IV. In the feminine singular of the jist declen 
sion, and in the plural of all words, the Vocative is 
the same with the Nominative. 


§ SH. Remarks. 1. The use of the Voc. as a distinct form is still 
further limited. Few substantives or adjectives, except proper names and per- 
sonal appellatives and epithets, are sufficiently employed in address to require 
a separate form for this purpose. Hence the participle, pronoun, article, and 
numeral have no distinct Voc. ; and in respect to other words which are ée- 
clined, the following observations may be made. 


a. Masculines of Dec. I. are commonly names or epithets of persons, and 
therefore form the Voe. sing. 


B. In Dee. II., the distinct form of the Voc. is commonly used, except for 
euphony or rhythm ; 88, Ὧ φίλος, ὦ φίλος, my friend! my friend! Ar. Nub. 
1167. Φίλος ὦ Μενέλᾷε A. 189. ᾿Ηἰλιός σε I. 277. To avoid the double 
t, 9245, god (like deus in Latin), has, in classic writers, no distinct Voc. ; yet 
Θεέ St. Matth. 27, 46. 


y- In Dee. IIL., few words, except proper names and personal appellatives 
and epithets, have a distinct Voc.; and even in those which have, the Nom. 
is sometimes employed in its stead, especially by Attic writers; thus,"0) σἄσα 
πόλ, Ar. Ach. 971; but ἾὮΦ, σόλις Soph. Phil. 1213. Αἴαν Soph. Aj. 89 ; but 
Ὧ, gia’ Αἴας Tb. 529. In many words of this declension, the Voc. cannot 
be formed without such a mutilation of the root as scarcely to leave it intelli- 


gible (§§ 63, 101). 


cH. 1.} HISTORY. 121 


§ ΒΦ. 2. An mspection of the table ({] 5) will likewise 
show, that, in regular declension, 


a.) The Nom. sing. mase. and (except in Dee. I.) fem. always ends in ς. 
B.) The Dat. sing. always ends in 4, either written in the line or subscribed. 


y:) The Acc. sing. (except in neuters of Dec. III.) always ends in ν, or its 
corresponding vowel a (ὃ 50); and the Acc. plur. mase. and fem. is always 
formed by adding s to the Ace. sing. (δ ὃ 34, 58). 


3.) The Gen. plut. always ends in wy. 


s-) In Dec. I. and IT., the affixes are all open (i. 6. begin with a vowel), 
and ull constitute a distinct syllable. In Dee. III., three of the affixes, ¢, », 
and σι, are close (i. 6. begin with a consonant), and of these the two first, 
having no vowel, must unite with the last syllable of the root. 


ζ.) In the singular of Dec. III., the direct cases neut., and the Voc. mase. 
and fem., have no aftixes. 


Nore. It follows, from nos. ε and Z, that words of Dee. I. and II. are 
parisyllubie (par, equal), that is, have the same number of syllables ir all 
their cases; but words of Dec. III. are imparisyllubic, that is, have more 
syllables in some of their cases than in others. 


3. The Table ({] 6) exhibits the affixes as resolved into 
their two classes of ELements; I. Frexis.e Enpines, which 
are significant additions, marking distinctions of number, case, 
and gender; and II. Connecrinc Vowets, which are euphonic 
in their origin, and serve to unite the flexible endings with the 
root. For farther illustration, see the following sections upon 
the history of Greek declension. 


-E. History or Greex Dec.ension. 


§ $3. The early history of Greek declension is beyond the period not 
merely of written records, but even of tradition. It can be traced, therefore, 
only by the way-marks which have been left upon the language itself, and by 
the aid of comparative philology. The following view of the subject has 
much evidence in its support, and serves to explain the general phenomena of 
Greek declension, and of the use of the numbers and cases. 


Greek declension was progressive. At first, the simple root was used, as in 
seme languages even at the present day, without any change to denote num- 
ber or case; thus, ἰχϑύ, fish, γύσ', vulture, whether one or more were spoken 
of. Then the plural number was marked, by affixing to the root +, the sim- 
ple root, of course, now becoming singular, as each new formation limits the 
gse of prior forms. thus, 

Singular, ἐχϑύ, fish, Plural, ix: Svs, fishes. 
yur, vulture, yort, vultures. 

The next step was to make a separate form, to express the indirect, as 
distinguished from the direct relations. _This was done by annexing : to the 
root, and this form became plural by adding one of the common signs of the 
plural, » We have now the distinction of case; thus, 


di 


122 SECLENSION. [BooK ἢ 


Singular. | Plaral. 

Direct Case, ἐχϑύ indus 
ὑπ yore 

Indirect Case, ix 907 ix Suis 
yuri γυπίν 


§ S84. Each of these cases was afterwards subdivided. (A.) From 
the Direct Case were separated, in the masculine and feminine genders, twa Ὁ 
new cases, the one to express the subject, and the other the direct object, of an 
action, i. e. the Nominative, and Accusative cases. 


The Nominative was formed by adding s, as the sign of the subject, to the 
oll Direct forms ; thus, Sing. ἰχϑύς, γύας, Plur. ἰχϑύες, γῦπες. 

The Accusative was formed by adding to the root, as the sign of the direct 
object, ν, which in the plural took one of the common signs of the plural, ς ; 
thus, Sing. ἰχϑύν, yirv, Plur. ix Svs, γύσνς, or, by the ewphonic change of » 
into its corresponding vowel (ὃ ὃ 58, 63, R.), Sing. γῦπα, Pur. ἐχϑύας, 


γῦπας. 


(B.) From the Indirect Case was separated a new case to express the 
subjective, as distinguished from the objective relations, i. e. the Genitive. This 
was formed by affixing 3, or commonly, with a euphonic vowel, 99. In the 
plural, this took the plural affix »; thus, 09». But by the laws of euphony, 
which afterwards prevailed, neither $, nor Sv could end a word (§ 63). 
Therefore, $ either was changed to ¢, or was dropped, or assumed the vowel s 
(commonly written with ν paragogic εν, ὃ 67.3); and οϑν became wy by the 
absorption of the 9 (9, perhaps, first passing into σ, as in the singular, then ¢ 
being changed into its corresponding vowel ε, and this absorbed). Thus oD 
became o5, 0, Or oSsv; and oD», wy. 

The old Indirect Case remained as a Dative, without change, except that a 
new plural was formed by annexing the dative sign s (§ 83) to the Nomina- 
tive plural. 


§ $<}. The plural had now throughout a new form, but the old form 
had so attached itself to various names of incessant use, that in most of the 
dialects it was still preserved. But these household plurals, which could not 
be shaken off, would be principally such as referred to objects double by nature 
or custom, as the eyes, hands, feet, shoes, wings, &e. Hence this form came ἡ 
at length to be appropriated to a dual sense, though in the time of Homer 
this restriction of its use seems not as yet to have been fully made. The 
simple form of the root was likewise retained in the singular as a case of ad- 
dress (Vocative), in words in which there was occasion for such a form, and 
the laws of euphony allowed it. In the plural the Vocative had never any 
form distinct from the Nominative. We have now the three numbers, anc 
the five cases, which, with the euphonic changes already mentioned, appear 
thus. 


- Sing. Nom. -- ἰχϑύς γύας (γύψ) 
Gen. -ος ἰχϑύος γυσός 
Dat. - ix Si yori 5 
Acc, -ν», -ἃ ἐχϑύν γῦπα 
Voc. * ἰχϑύ 
Plur. N. Vv. -ὃς ἰχϑύες γῦπες 
Gen, -ν ἰχϑύων uray 


Y 
Dat. -ἐσι ἰχϑύεσι (ix Dies) γύπεσι (yup) 
Acc. -ἂς in Stas yiras 


cn. 1’ HISTORY. 128 


Dual Dir. -s ix Sus yore , 
Indir. -ν ἰχϑύϊν (ἰχϑύοιν) γυπίν (γυσοῖνν. 


‘For the sake of completeness, we have added in the table above two later 
modifications ; viz., the common shorter Dat. plur., formed by dropping ε 
(unless one chooses to form it from the Dat. sing. by inserting the plural sign 
σὲ; and the Indirect Case dual prolonged by inserting ὁ, after the analogy of 
the Gen. sing. and plur. 


ἃ SG. We have exhibited above the primitive nude declension, now 
called the third. But subsequently two other modes of declension sprang up, 
having connecting vowels, which united the flexible endings to the root; the 
one having o, now called the second declension; and the other, a, now called 
the first. These declensions chose rather to drop than to change the final 9 of 
the Gen. sing., apparently to avoid confusion with the Nom.; and likewise to 
retain the old Direct Case as a Nom. plur., which became afterwards distin- 
guished from the dual by a different mode of contraction, its more frequent, use 
leading to precession. In all the affixes of these declensions in which two 
vowels came together, contraction naturally took place in one or another of its 
forms ; and in the Dat. plur. a shorter form became the more common one, 
made either by dropping « from the longer form, or by adding the plural sign ς 
to the Dat. sing. Fors in the Voc., instead of ὁ, see ὃ 28, We give as an 
example of Dec. II., ὁ λόγος, word, and of Dec. L., ὁ ταμίας, steward. 


Sing. Nom. Ady-o-s, λόγος φαμί-α-ς, σαμίας 
᾿ λόγ-ο-ο, λόγου σαμί-α-ο, σαμίου 
Dat. λόγ-ο-!, λόγῳ φαμί-α-ι, φσαμίᾳ 
Ace, Aédy-o-», λόγον σαμί-ω-ν, σαμίαν 
Voc. λόγ-ο, λόγε φαμί-α, Teplice 
Plur. N. V. λόγ-ο-ε, λόγοι σαμί-α-, σαμίαι 
Gen. λογ-ό-ων, λόγων φσαμι-ἄ-ων, σαμοιῶν 
Dat. λογ-ό-εσι, λόγοισι, «οἐς σαμι-ὦ-Ἔσι, «αρμίαεσι, «ἀἰς 
_ Ace. Ady-o-as, λόγους σαμί-α-ας, φαμίας 
Dual N. A.V. Ady-o-s, λόγω φαμί-α-ε, ταμία 
᾿ G. 0.  Aby-o-s, λόγοιν σαμί-α-ἰν, φταμίαιν 


In the Nom. and Acc. sing. of these declensions, the primitive direct form, 
without ; or » appended, was sometimes retained; as, Nom. Qvicrd, ἱππότἄ 
(§ 95. 2; compare the Latin nauta, poéta), 6- Acc. ved, ἕω, Ἄϑω (§ 97). So 
the neuters +4, ἄλλο, αὐτό, ἐκεῖνο, ὅ (δ 97). 


δ Θ 7. We have thus far treated only of the masculine gender. In the 
neuter (which occurs only in the second and third declensions), since things 
without life have no voluntary action, the distinction of subject and object is 
obviously of far less consequence, and therefore in this gender the separation 
of the Nom., Acc., and Voc. was never made. The place of these three cases 
scontin 1ed to be supplied by a single Direct Case, which in the singular of 
Dec. IIT. was the simple root, and in the singular of Dec. II. ended in ον (the 
» being either euphonic, or more probably having the same foree as in the 
Acc., and marking the objective character of the gender), The plural has the 
same form in both declensions, simply appending, instead of the old ε, ὦ (which, 
as the corresponding vowel of » (§ 50), is more objective in its character), and 
without a connecting vowel. We give, as examples, rd δάκρυ (poetic), tear, 
of Dec. ΠῚ. and τὶ σῦκον, Jig, of Dec. 11. 


124 DECLENSION. [BooK II 


Sing. N. A. V. δάκρυ σῦκ-ον 
Gen. δάώκρυ-ος σύκ-ου 
Dat. δάκρυ-, σύκ-ῳ 
Plur. N. A. V. δάκρυ-α gina 
Gen. δακρύ-ων σύκτ-ων 
Dat. δάκρυ-σι σύκ-οις 
Dual N. A. V. δάκρυ-ε ; σύκ-ω 
G. D. δακρύ-οιν σύκ-οιν 


ᾧ & 8. The distinction of subject and object is less striking in the fem- 
-e thaa in the masculine ; and hence, in the first declension, where there 
A uo neuters with which a distinction must be maintained, the feminine is 
tinguished from the masculine by not appending the subjective ς in the 
Nom. sing. (§ 84 , and by retaining the form o; in the Gen. sing., as the 
reason for preferring the shorter form does not now exist (§ 86). The o of 
this ending is absorbed in the preceding «, unless one chooses to consider the 
ς as here appended without the euphonic vowel (§ 84. B). In all the other 
cases, the feminine has precisely the same form as the masculine. Thus, 4 
σκιά, wadow, 


Sing. Nom. σκι-ἄ, σκιά Plur. Nom. σκιαί, 
Gen. oxs-c-os, σκιᾶς Gen. σκιῶν 
Dat. cxi-d-i, 00 σκιᾷ Dat. σκιαῖς 
Ace. σκι-ἄ-ν, σκιών Acc. σκιάς 


For the τ teeession which has taken place so extensively in the singular of 
Dec. I., see § 93. 


§ δὲ 9. In the earlier Greek, the prevalent mode of avoiding hiatus was 
not, as afterwards, by contraction, but by the insertion of a strong breathing 
or aspirate comsenant (cf. § 117). Of these the most prominent. appears to 
have been the digamma (§ 22. δ). And, although this has disappeared from 
the language, yet it has left other consonants which have either. taken its 
place, or which were used in like manner with it. The insertion of these 
consonants, toyether with different modes of contraction, has giyen an especial 
variety of forma, ta the first and second declensions, to the Dative singular, which, 
as the primitive indirect case (§ 83), originally performed the offices of both 
the Genitive and the Dative. Thus, we find, . 


1.) The. appended with the insertion of ¢, the natural successor of the 
digamma. This form is Epic, and from its being used as both Gen. and Dat., 
and sometimes «ven supplying the place of these cases in the plural, is evi- 
dently of great antiquity. LE. g. 

Gen. Sing. Dec. 1. ἐξ εὐνῆφι O. 580, β. 25 aad νευρῆφιν Θ. 300: Dee. II. 


ἀπὸ πασσαλόφι Ὡ. 268; ix ποντόφιν w. 83; ἀπὸ rrAarios π'τυόφιν N. 588 
Ἰλιόφι κλυτὰ τείχεα ᾧ. 295 ; ἀπ᾽ αὐσόφιν A. 44. 


Dat. Sing. Dec. 1. ἦφι βίηφι πσιϑήσας Χ. 107; ἅμ᾽ ἠοῖ φαινομένηφιν 3. 407, 
I. 618; ἑσέρηφι Π. 784; ϑύρηφιν .. 238: Dec. Il. παρ᾽ αὐτόφ, Μ. 802 ; ia’ 
δεξιόφιν Ν. 808 ; ϑεόφιν H. 366. 


Gen. and Dat. Plur. Dec. II. ὄσσε δακρυόφι «λῇσϑεν P. 696, ¥. 397, 3, 
705; dx’ ὀσσεόφιν ξ. 134; ἀμφ᾽ ὀσσεόφιν «. 145 5 ἰκριόφιν μ. 414. 


Nores. «. The ᾧΦ likewise appears in the Dative plural of a few words of 
the third declension, mere it seems to have been inserted for the sak» of 


cH. 1.] | HISTORY. 125 


lengthening the preceding syllable ; as, ὄχεσφι for ὅχεσι. These forms were 
also used as both Gen. and Dat.; thus, Gen. xar’ ὄρεσφι A. 452; πρόσϑ᾽... 
ὄχεσφιν Ἐς 107; ἀπὸ στήϑεσφιν RB. 2145 διὰ δὲ στήϑεσφιν E. 41: Dat. σὺν 
ὄχεσφι IL. 811 5 ὄρεσφι A. 474 (οἴ, 479), X. 139. 


β. The following forms in -φε(ν) require special notice ; (a) ἐσχαρόφιν ε. 59, 
ard κοτυληδονόφιν ε. 433, which are formed as from nouns of Dec. II., while 
the themes in ase are ἐσχάρη of Dec. I., and κοτυληδών of Dec. IIL: : (Ὁ) 
κράτεσφι K. 156, and ᾿Ερέβεσφιν (probably the correct form for ’EgéBevrgw I. 
572, Hom. Cer. 350, Hes. Th. 669), which appear to have plural forms, 
though singular in their use ; (6) ναῦφιν, an irregular plural form for vais, N. 
700; also used as Gen. Il. 246, &c.; (d) the Epic adverb ἧφι, with might, 
A. 38, which appears to be an old Dat. sing. from 7. 


y- Compare with these forms in -ῷ,, the Latin Datives tibi, sibi, nobis, 
vobis, deabus, sermonibus, rebus, and the Latin adverbs of place in -bi; as, ibi, 
alibi, utribi, from is, alius, uter. ‘The forms in -yg@s when used as Datives are 
often written incorrectly with an + subscript (-7¢:, § 25. «), as though g had 
been added to the complete Dat. form. For the » paragogie, see ὃ 66. a. 


§ 99. 2.) The. appended with the insertion of $. This form became 
adverbial (chiefly poetic), denoting the place where; as, oixoSs, at home, ἄλ λο- 
Su, elsewhere, aired, ὅϑι, ἹΚορινϑόϑι. It was mostly confined to the second 
declension, and, in the few instances in which it was made from nouns of other 
declensions, it still imitated the forms of this. Traces of its old use as the 
Indirect Case still remain in Homer ; thus, Gen. οὐρανόϑι 400, --- πρὸ οὐράνου, 
Γ, 8, Ἰλιόϑ, πρό ©. 561, ἠῶϑι, πρό ζ. 36; Dat. κηρόϑ, I. 800, ὁ. 370. 


3.) The s appended with the insertion of x This form appears only in 
the Epic 4s (improperly written by some 4x, cf. 89. y), for the adverbial 
Dative 4, where, A. 607. 


4.) The. contracted with the preceding ὁ in the second declension into δὲ 
(§ 32). This simpler mode of contraction now scarcely appears except in 
adverbial Datives; as, οἴκοι, at home (but οἴκῳ, to a house; cf. in Latin, domi 
and domus), ἴδω, Ἰσθμοῖ, οἷ, ὅποι. Yet ἐν Ἰσθμοῖ Simeon. Fr. 209; ἐν 
Τριανσιοῖ Inscr. Cret.; τοῦ δάώμοι Inscr. Beeot. 


5.) The common form, in which the s is absorbed by the preceding vowel ; 
as, a-1 & σι w; thus, Svea, οἴκῳ, ᾿σϑιμῷ. 


δ 91. The forms of the Genitive in -οϑεν or -ϑὲν (§ 84. B) remained 
in the common language only as adverbs, denoting the pluce whence; as, 
ἴκοϑεεν, from home, ἄλλοθεν, αὐτόϑεν, ᾿Αϑήνηϑεν. As examples of their use 
aa decided Genitives, may be cited ἐξ AiciunSer ©. 304, ἐξ οὐρμνόϑεν Θ. 19, 
ar ᾿ οὐρανόϑεν a. 18; and the pronominal forms ἐμέϑεν, σέϑεν, ἔϑεν, which 
even occur in Attic poets. - 


115 


126 DECLENSION. _ [Boorn . 


CHAPTER II. 
DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 


I. Tue First Deciension. 
[For the affixes and paradigms, see IT 5-8.] 


§ 92. For the original affixes of Dec. L., which all had o 
as a connecting vowel, see δῷ 86, 88. In most of these affix. 
es, « either became part of a diphthong, or else, either through 
contraction or the force of analogy, became long. Short « 
however remained in the singular, 


1.) In the direct cases of feminines, whose chavagiadaiie 
was o, a double consonant, or 41; as, γλῶσσᾶ, γλῶσσᾶν ({ 7), 
δίψα, thirst, δόξα, opinion, gigi, rook, ἃμιλλᾶ, contest. 

Notes. a. Add a few feminines in -λα, and some in -va, particularly female 
appellatives; as, ravrd and ἀνάπαυλα, rest, ἔχιδνᾶ, viper, wteseva, care, Stores 
va, mistress, Ataswd, lioness; likewise #xavSa, thorn. 

β. Add, also, many feminines in -« pure and -ρα. These have mostly a 
diphthong in the penult, and may all be recognized by the accent, except the 
proper names Kijjz, Πύῤῥᾶ, and the numeral «iz, one. The principal classes 
are, (a) Polysyllables in -s:« and -o, except abstracts in - from verbs in 
-tuw 5 as, ἀλήϑειᾶ, truth, εὐνοιᾶ, good-will, βασίλειὰ, queen, but βασιλείῶ, reign, 
from βασιλεύω. (b) Female designations in -rgia; as, Ψψάλτριᾶ, female musi= 
cian: (6) Dissyllables and some polysyllabic names of places in «ἄμα; as, 
pais, good. mother, Ἵσσίαιἄ . (4) Words in -wa; as, μυϊᾶ, fly: (e) Most 
words in -ga, whose penult is lengthened by a diphthong (except av), by ὅ, or 
by ῥῥ; a8, μάχαιρᾶ, sword, yidiga, bridge, [1vppe. 

y- The accent commonly shows the quantity of final # in the theme. 
Thus, in all proparorytones and properispomena, it must be short by the general 
laws of, accent; while, by a special law of the declension, it is Jong in all 
otytones, and in all paroxytones in -a, Gen. -as, except the three mentioned in 
Note β. 


2.) In the Vocative of nouns in -της, and of gentiles and 
compound verbals in -ng3 as ναύτης ( 7). Σκύϑης, Scythian, 
Πέρσης, Persian, γεωμέτρης (γῆ, earth, μετρέω, to measure), 
geometer, μυροπουίλης (μύρον, perfume, nwiew, to sell), perfumer » 
Voc. ναῦτᾶ, Σχύϑα, Méego% (but Πέρσης, Perses, a man’s name, 
Voc. Πέρση), γεωμέτρᾶ, μυροπῶλᾶ. 

§ 93. In the singular, long α passed, by precession, into 


"ns unless preceded by ες ες g, or go (§ 29); as, γαύτης, ναύτῃ, 
᾿δερείδης, Ατρείδην, ᾿᾿τρεΐδη, γλωυοης, γλώσσῃ; τιμή, τιμῆς, τιμήν" 


cH. 2.] FIRST DECLENSION. )27 


but ταμίᾶς, ταμίᾳ, σκιά, σκιᾶς, Pied, ϑύρᾶν ( 7), ἰδέα, wea 
yoria, need, zooa, color. 


Nore. Long « likewise remains in the pures, réa, grass, ered, porch, γύά, 
field, σικύα, gourd, καρύᾷ, walnut-tree, irda, olive-tree, Navoixad, Nausicaa; in 
the words, ἀλαλᾶ, war-cry, ἐσίβδα, day after a feast, σκανδάλᾷ, trap-spring, 
γεννάδας, noble; and in some proper names, particularly those which are Doric 
or foreign ; as, Adeouidé, Avda, Φιλομήλα, Λεωνίδας, “λᾶς, Σύλλας" and it 
became » after g or go in the words δέρη, neck, κόρη, maiden, κόῤῥης cheek, ἀϑάρη, 
pap, por, stream; in some proper names, as Tyens+ and in compounds of μέ- 
tesw, to measure, as γεωμέτρης (ὃ 92.2). In some words, usage fluctuates 
between long or short « and ἡ :. as,’Agéorés Cyr. vi. 1. 31, ᾿Αράσπης lb. v. 1. 
4, σεῖνὰ and πείνη, πρύμνᾶ and πρύμνη. 


ᾧ 94. Conrracts. A few nouns, in which the character- 
istic 1S ἃ or ε, and feminine adjectives in -εα and -on, are con- 
tracted ; as, ured μνᾶ, “Ἑρμέᾶς “Ἑρμῆς, βορέας βοῤῥὰς (9 being 
here doubled after contraction), συχέα συκῆ, fig-tree, χρυσέα 
χρυσῆ, διπλόη διπλῆ. For the rules, see §§ 33, 36, 37; for the 
paradigms, {]{] 7, 18. : 


DIALECTIC FORMS. 


§ DB. 1. In the affixes of this declension, the Doric dialect retains 
throughout the original « ; while in the singular, the Jonic has ἡ in most of 
those words in which the Attic and Common dialects have long «, and even in 
some in which they have short a, particularly derivatives in -s% and -οἰῶ 
(ὃ 44); thus, Dor. σιμά, σιμᾶς, τιμᾷ, τιμᾶν lon. σκιή, σκιῆς, σκιῇ, σκεήν " 
Ep. ἀληϑείη, εὐσλοίη, New Ion. ἀληϑηΐη, win, for ἀλήϑεις, ἐὔαλχοιᾶ, mid. 


2. In words in -ns, the primitive Direct Case in -& is sometimes retained by 
Homer and some of the other poets as Nom. (§ 86), for the sake of the 
metre or euphony : as, ὁ αὖτε Θυέστᾶ B. 107: ἱππότᾶ Nicrwe B. 886: μη- 
vista Ζεύς A. 175; BaSuunra Χείρων Pind. N. 3.92; ivxr& Μενάλκας Theoc. 
8. 30. So in feminines in -ἡ, the poets sometimes retain the old short « in 
the Voc. : as, νύμφα φίλη T. 130; Ὦ Aix%, Sapph. 66 (44). On the other 
hand, Aijr# Ap. Rh. 3. 386, for Aijra, Voc. of Αἰήτης. 


3. The old genitive affixes, ὧο and ὥων, which often océur in the Epic writ- 
ers, were contracted as follows: 

a.) In the Jonie dialect, they were regularly contracted into w and wy, with 
the insertion of ε after a consonant (§ 35) ; as, "Argsidae C Ασρείδω) ᾿Ασρείδεω, 
Ατρειδάων (Ατρειδῶν) ᾿Ασρειδέων - Βορέαο Bogiw, ‘Egusiw O. 214, ἐδμμελίω Δ. 
165, ᾿Ασίω B. 461. 

B.) In the Doric, ὦ absorbed the following vowel, and the affixes became @ 
and ἂν (8 45.1); as, ᾿Ατρείδαο Argsida, "Arosiddwy Argeday. 

y-) In the Attic, za and dw» were contracted into ov (by precession from ὦ, 
δὲ 28, 29) and ay; as, ᾿Ατρείδαο (’Argeidw) ’Argeidov, ᾿Ατρειδάων ᾿Ατρειδῶν. 


ἢ OG. 4. In the Accusative of masculines, the Ionic often changes » 
to #, the old connecting vowel « now becoming ε (ὃ 46. Bs as, δεσαόσεἄ 
Hdt i. 11, pl. δεσπόσεας Ib. 111, for δεσπότην, δεσπότᾶς. 


5. The dative plural in Homer commonly ends in -ge1, or -n¢ before a 


128 SECOND DECLENSION. | BOOK Il. 


vowel (which may be referred to apostrophe). There are, however, a few in 

stances of -ys before a consonant (cis καί A. 179, πέτρης πρός η. 279, ἄς.) 

and two, where we even find -αἰς, which ought, perhaps, to be changed to -ns 
(ἀκταῖς M. 284, ϑεαῖς ε. 119). An old contraction into -ὥσι, instead of -aios, 
remained in the common language in adverbs of place ; as, [λαταιᾶσι, αἱ 
Pluteae, ϑύρασι. 


6. For the Epic Gen. in -Sev, see ὃ 91. For the Epic Datives in -gu, -S, 
and -χι, see §§ 89, 90. For the Doric and Molic forms of the Acc. plur., 
ace § 45. 5, 


7. Antique, Ionic, and Doric forms are sometimes found in Attic writers 
particularly, 

a.) The Dor. Gen. in -«, from some nouns in -ας, mostly proper names ; 
as, ὀρνιϑοϑήρας, fowler, Γωβρύας, Καλλίας - Gen. ὀονιϑοϑήρα, Γ ὡβρύα, Καλ- 
dia. So all contracts in -ὥς ; as, βοῤῥᾶς, G. βοῤῥᾶ (Ἷ 7). | 

B.) The Ion. Gen. in -sw, from a few proper names in -ς ; as, Θαλῆς, 
Γήρης + Gen. Θάλεω, Τήρεω. 

y-) The old Dat. plur. in -αἰσι, which is frequent in the poets. So, in Pla- 
to, riz vais Leg. 920 e, ἡμέραισι Pheedr. 276 Ὁ. 


Il. ‘Tue Seconp DeEctension. 
[For the affixes and paradigms, see §§ 86, 87; ΤῊ 5, 6, 9, 10.) 


§ 97. The flexible endings of the Nominative and Accusa 
ive singular are wanting (ᾧ 86), 


1.) In the theme of the article; thus, ὃ for ὅς. 


2.) In the neuter of the article and of the pronouns ἄλλος, 
αὐτός, ἐκεῖνος, and ὅς " thus, τό, ἀλλο, αὐτό, ἐκεῖνο, ὃ, for τόν, 


ἄλλον, Sc. 


Nore. In crasis with the article (§ 39), and in composition with the pro- 
nouns φοῖος and régos, the neuter airs more frequently becomes airev- thus, 
φσαὐτόν and ταὐτό, for ro αὐτό" ποιοῦσον and ποιοῦτο, τοσοῦτον and rocovTe. 


3.) Frequently in the Accusative of the Attic declension 
(§ 98), particularly in ἡ ἕως, dawn, ἡ ἅλως, threshing. floor, ἡ ἡ 
Κέως, Κῶς. ἡ Τέως. 6 Ἄϑως" thus, Acc. νεών and vew ({ 9), 
ἕω, "49m. So, in the adjectives ἀγήρως ({] 17), ἀνάπλεως, full, 
ἀξιόχρεως, competent. 


§ 98. Conrracrs. If the characteristic is «, εν or ος it 
may be contracted with the affix according to the rules (§§ 33 - 
37). See ἀγήραος ( 17), ὀστέον, νόος ( 9). The contract de- 
clension in -ως and -ων, from -αος and -aor, is termed by gram- 
marians the Attic Declension from its prevalence among Attic 
writers, although it is far from being peculiar to them (ᾧ 7). 


Nores. «. The number of words belonging to the Attic declension is 
enall. In some of them, the uncontracted form dves not vecur, ot occurs 


cn. 2.] THIRD DECLENSION. ™ 


only with some change. Thus, for ἀνώγαον, ε 
γάα, the original form of γῆ, earth, and from 
ἀνώγεων, εὔγεως) we find the extended forms ἀνώγαιον V- 
ysios. Some of them are variously declined. See §§ 123. % 124, y: 


β. If the characteristic is long «, s is inserted after the contraction (§ 35) 
thus, vas (vas) νεώς (Ἷ 9), ναοῦ (va) vew, ναῷ (νῷ) νεῷ, ναόν (vév) νεών - Plur. 
“«οἱ (va) νεῷ, &e. 

y- In the Attic declension, the Nom. plur. neut. is contracted, like the 
athe> cases, into w; thus, ἀγήρω (FY 17), as if from denen a form with 
the connecting vowel See § 87. 


DIALECTIC FORMS. 


Ὁ 99. 1. The affix of the Gen. sing. 0-0 (§ 86), which was com- 
monly contracted to ov, or, in the Aolic and stricter Doric, to ὠ (8 44. 4), 
was often prolonged by the poets, especially the Epic (sometimes even by the 
Tragic in lyric portions), to 010; thus, πόντου Ἰκαρίοιο B. 145 5 δόμου ὑψηλοῖο 
a. 1263 οἷο δόμοιο a 330; ϑεοῦ Pind. O. 2. 37; ϑεοῖο Ib. 6.605 μεγώλω 
Aios Ale. 1 (20) 3 ἐρχορένοιο Id. 373 ποταμοῖο... Ανάπω Theoc. 1. 68; μα- 
λακῶ χόρφοιο Id. 4.18. The Epic genitives ΠΠεσεῶο (A. 327, &e.) and I1n- 
νελεῶο (&. 489) are made by a single contraction, with the usual jusertion of 
ε (ὃ 98. 2), from the original forms [lerdoo, [1nveadoo. The Epic dual forms 
in ou», which alone are used by Homer, arise from a mere poetic doubling of 
s (δ 48). 

2. Some proper names in -os have the Gen. sing. in Herodotus, after the 
analogy of Dec. 1.; as, Κροῖσος, ἹΚροίσεω viii. 122, but Κροίσου i. 65 Βάσσεω 
iv. 160; Κλεοριβρότεω v.32. The Gen. plur. forms πεσσέων (Hat. i. 94) and 
πυρέων (Id. i ii. 36), if genuine, may be referred to the Ionic insertion of s 
(§ 48. 1). 


3. The old Dat. plur. in -oe; is common in the poets of all classes, and in 
Tonic prose. So, even in Plato, ϑεοῖσι Leg. 955 6. 


4. For the Epic Gen. in -οϑεν, see § 91. For the Epic Datives in -og: and 
od; and the old Dat. in -o, see §§ 89, 90. For the Doric and Aolic forms 
of the Acc. plur., see § 45. 5. 


5. Contracts in -ovs from -0os occur in Homer, though rarely ; as, vous 
κ- ΚΡῊΣ (elsewhere νόος). In words in -sos, -sov, he sometimes protracts the « 
εἰ (§ 47. N. , and sometimes employs synizesis (§ 30). 


Ill. Tue Tuirp Dec iension. 
(For the affixes and paradigms, see §§ 85, 87; ΤΊ 5, 6, 11- 16.] 


§ 100. In this declension, the Nominative, though regard- 
ed as the theme of the word, seldom exhibits the root in its 
simple, distinct form. This ‘form must therefore be obtained 
from the Genitive, or from some case which has an open af 


fix (§§ 79, 82. ε). 


Remarks. 1. Special attention must be given to the euphonic changes 
which occur in those cases which have either close affixes, or no affixes; that 
is in the Nominative and Vocative singular, the Dative plural, and the Ac- 


190 THIRD DECLENSION. . |BOOK Ια 


cusative singular in -» For these changes, see in general $§ 51, 55, 57 - 
59, 63. 


2. The flexible ending of the Acc. sing. in this, as in the other two de- 
clensions; seems to have been originally » But the » was so extensively 
changed into ἃ in accordance with § 63. R., that the « becaine the prevailing 
affix, and was often used even after a vowel. It will therefore be understood 
that the affix is «, if no statement is made to the contrary. When the affix 
is ν, the root receives the same changes as in the theme (§ 110). 


Words of the third declension are divide according to the 
characteristic, into Mutes, Liquips, Liqurp-MuTes, and Pures. 


A. Motes. 
{11.] 


101. Lasrats ΑΝ Paratars. These are all either 
masculine or feminine, and in none is the Voc. formed except 


χυνή (N. 7). 
_Nores. a. For the and ξ in the theme and Dat. pl., see ὃ 51. 


β. In S¢i%, the root is ϑριχ-- In those cases in which x remains, 9 be- . 
comes ¢, according to § 62. In ἡ ἀλώπηξ, -tx0s, fox, the last vowel of the 
root is lengthened in the theme. Compare ὃ 112. a. 


y- Γυνή, woman, wife, which is irregular in having its theme after the form 
of Dec. I., and also in its accentuation, is thus declined: S. Ν γυνή, G. γυ- 
ναικός, D. γυναικί, A. γυναῖκα, V. γύναι. P. N. γυναῖκες, G. γυναικῶν, D. γυ- 
vaiki, A. γυναῖκας" Ὁ. N. γυναῖκε, G. γυναικοῖν. The old grammarians have 
alsé cited from Comic writers the forms, A. γυνήν, P. N. yuval, A. γυνάς, ac- 
cording to Dec. 1. 


§ 202%. Mascutine ΑΝ Femintne Linovats. These 
lose their characteristic in the theme and Dat. pl. (ᾧ 55), in the 
Acc. sing., when formed in » (δῷ 63. R., 100. 2), and in the 
Voe. (§ 63). 


Nores. a. If a palatal is thus brought before ¢, it unites with it in 2 
(δ 51), as (ἄνακες, dvaxs) ἄναξ ( 11), ἡ (νύκτε) νύξ, night; if to the end 
of a word, it is dropped (§ 63), as (ἄνωκα, ἄνακ) ἄνα. This distinct Voc., 
however, is used only in addressing a god; otherwise, ὦ ἄναξ (or, hy frequent 
crasis, ὦναξ). 


6. For the change of » when brought before the affixes ς and », or to tle 
end of a word, see §§ 112. a, 113. 3. 


y- Barytones in - and οὖς form the Ace. sing. in both a and », the latter 
being the more common affix ; as, χάρις (J 11), ἡ ἔρις, strife, ὁ, ἡ dows, bird; 
Acc. χάριτα and χάριν (as the name of a goddess, the form in -« is always 
used, and sometimes, also, in poetry ; but, otherwise, the form in -», yet see 
H. Gr. iii. 5. 16), tow and poet. ἔριδα, ὄρνιν and poet. ὄρνϑα: So also, κλείς 
(YF 11), ὁ γέλως, laughter, and the compounds of σούς, foot; thus, Acc. κλεῖδα 
and κλεῖν, γέλωτα and γέλων, Οἰδίποδα and Οἰδίπουν ( 16), δίποδα and di. 
wouv (Ἶ 17). Add ὁ ἔρως, love, Acc. tgwra and rare poetic form gw». Se 
παῖς, When resolved by the poets into #dis, thay have Acc. wdiv, Ap. Rh, 


cH. 2:] MUTES. — LIQUIDS. 131 


4. 697. In oxytones, the accent served to prevent the lingual from falling 
away. 

§ 103. Neuter Linevars. In these, the characteristic 
1s always 1, which, in the theme, is commonly dropped after 
ux, but otherwise becomes ¢ or ἡ (§ 68) ; as, σῶμα, φῶς, κέρας, 
ἧπαρ (Ἵ 11), eiddg (1 22), from the roots owput-, pwt-, xegut-, 
ἡ πατ-- εἶδοτ-ο 

Nore. The ¢ is also dropped in μέλι, μέλισος, honey; in γάλα, γάλακτος, 
milk, which also drops x; and in γόνυ, γόνατος, knee, and δόρυ, δόρατος, spear, 
which then change « to v (compare ὃ 113). In the poetic ἦμαρ, ἤματος, 
dty, ¢ is changed into 2 after μα ; and in ὕδωρ, ares, water, and σκώρ, oxa- 
«ἧς, filth, ¢ is changed into g, and @ into ὦ. See § 123. y. 

§ 104, Conrracr Linevats. A few linguals drop the 
characteristic before some or all of the open affixes, and are 
then contracted ; thus, κλεῖδες (κλεῖες) κλεῖς, κλεῖδας (κλεῖας) 
κλεῖς " κέρᾶτος κέραος κέρως; κέρατα κέραα κέρᾶὰ (Ἵ 11); τὸ τέρας, 
prodigy, Ῥ. Ν. τέρᾶτα τέρᾶ, G. τεράτων τερῶν " ὁ χρώς, skin, 
S. D. χρωτί (χρωΐ) χρῷ (in the phrase ἐν χρῷ). So, in Homer, 
from 6 ἱδρώς, sweat, ὃ γέλως, laughter, ὃ ἔρως, love, S. D. idea, 
γέλῳ, ἔρῳ, for ἱδρῶτι, &e.; A. ἱδρῶ, yélw, for ἱδρῶτα (ἱδρῶα), 
γέλωτα. Compare δῷ 107, 119, 128. a. 


Nore. In the following words, the contraction is confined to the root 

ré ods, ores, ear (YF 11), contracted from the old odas, οὔατος (δ 33. γ). 

«ὸ δέλεαρ, bait, Gen. δελέατος, δέλητος. 

σὸ στέαρ, contr. στῆρ, tallow, Gen. στέατος, στητός. 

τὸ φρέαρ, well, Gen. φρέατος (ὦ or ἄ), φρησός (§ 87. 1). 

Remark. Those linguals in which a liquid precedes the 
lingual will be treated as a distinct class (§ 109). 


B. Liquins. 
[T 12.) 

§ 105. Mascutine anp Feminine Liquins. In these, 
except ae, salt, sea (in the singular, only Ionic and poetic), the 
characteristic is always either y or g. For the changes in the 
theme and Dat. pl., see §§ 57-59. When the characteristic 
is r, it depends upon the preceding vowel whether the » or the 
¢ is changed in the theme ; as follows. 


1.) If an E or O vowel precede, the ¢ is changed; as in 
λιμήν, -évoc, δαΐμων, -ονος (Ἵ 12); ὃ μήν, μηνός, month, ὃ χειμών, 
-ὥνος, storm, winter. 

Except ὁ χτείς, xrsv’s, comb, the numeral εἷς, ἑνός, one ( 21), and the Ionic 
ὁ μείς (as from root we»-, yet Gen. μηνός) for μήν, month (Hat. ii. 82). 


2.) If « precede, in nouns the ¢ is changed, but in adjectives 


132 THIRD DECLENSION. — LIQUIDS. [Book 11. 


the »; thus, ὃ Πάν, Πανός, Pan, ὃ παιάν, -avoc, pean; but 
μέλᾶς, -avoc-( 19), ταλᾶς, -ανος, wretched. 


3.) If « or v precede, the » is changed; as in gfe, gids 
(T 12), 6 δελφίς, -ivos, dolphin, ὃ Φόρκυς, -ivoc, Phorcys. 

Nores. a. The» remains in μόσυν, -dves, wooden tower; and most words 
in -ἰς and -v; have a second, but less classic form, in -s and -vy: as, p/s anu 
pir, δελφίς and δελφίν, Φόρκυς and Φόρκυν. 

β. In the pronoun ¢¥s, (Ἷ 24), the » of the root τιν- is simply dropped in 
the theme. Yet see § 152. β. 

REMARK. Vocative. In the Voce. of ᾿Απόλλων, -wvos, Apollo, [Ποσειδῶν, 
«ὥνος, Neptune, and 6 σωτήρ, -ἥρος, saviour, the natural tone ‘of address has 
led to the throwing back of the accent, and the shortening of the last sylla- 
ble; thus, ἸΑσπολλον, Πόσειδον, TUTE. 


§ 106. Syncorarep Liquips. I. Ina few liquids of fa: 


miliar use, a short vowel preceding the characteristic is syn- 
copated in some or most of the cases ; as follows, 


1.) In these three, the syncope takes place before al the open terminations; 

ἀνήρ, man (J 12). For the insertion of the δ, see ὃ 64. 2. . 

κύων, dog (YJ 12), which has, for its root, xvev-, by syncope, κυν-- In this 
word, the syncope extends to the Dat. plur. 

ἀρνός, lamb’s ( 12), which has, for its root, ἀρεν-» by syncope, ἀρν-- The 
Nom. sing. is not used, and its place is supplied by dvis. 

2.) These five are syncopated in the genitive and dative singular: 

πατήρ, father, and μήσηρ, mother ( 12). =. 

ἡ ϑυγάτηρ, daughter, G. Suyarteos Suyaress, Ὁ. ϑυγατέρι Suyergi. 

ἡ γαστήρ, stomach, G. γαστέρος γαστρός, D. γαστέρι γαστρί. 
᾿ ἡ Δημήσηρ, Ceres, G. Δημήτερος Δήμητρος, D. Δημήσερ, Anunre also, 
A. Δημήφερα Δήμητρα. 

ΝΌΤΕΒ. a. In these words, the poets sometimes neglect the syncope, and 
sometimes employ it in other cases than those which are specified. 


β. For the Dat. pl., see § 59. Γασσήρ has not only yaorgdéo: (Dio Cass. 
54. 22), but also in Hipp. γασπῆρσι. 


§ 107. 11. In comparatives in -wy, the » is more frequently 
syncopated before « and ες after which contraction takes place ; 
as, μείζονα (μείζοα) μείζω, μείζονες (μείζοες) μείζους, μείζονας 
(μείζοας) μείζους ({] 17). Compare 88.104, 119, 123. α. 


Nore. A similar contraction is common in the Acc. of ᾿Απόλλων, Apollo, 
and Ποσειδῶν, Neptune; thus, ᾿Ασόλλωνα, (Απόλλωα) ᾿Ασόλλω (iii. 1. 6); 
Ποσειδῶνα, Ποσειδῶ. See, for both the uncontracted and the contracted forms, 
Pl. Crat. 402 ἃ, e, 404 d, 405 d. So, likewise, ὁ κυκεών, -ὥνος, mixed drink ; 
Acc. κυκεῶνα, and, rather poetic, xuxsa (x. 316; xuxsa A. 624): καὶ γλήχων, 
-wvos, pennyroyal; Acc. γλήχωνα, γλήχω (Ar. Ach. 874); and by a like 
syncope of ρ, ὁ ἰχώρ, ichor; Ace. ἰχῶρα and (only E. 416) ἐχῶ. 


§ 108. Neuter Liquips. A few nouns, in which ¢ is 


oH. 2.] LIQUID-MUTES. — PURES. 133 


the characteristic, are neuter. They are, for the most part, 
confined to the singular, and require, in their declension, no 
euphonic changes of letters. 

Nore. In ἔαρ, spring, and the poetic κέαρ, heart, contraction takes place 
in the root; thus, N. ἔαρ, poetic ἦρ, G. ἔαρος, commonly ἦρος, D. tag, com- 
monly ἦρι" N. κέαρ, in Homer always κῆρ, D. κῆρι. 


C. Liquip-MuTEs. 
[7 13.] 

§ 109. All nouns of this class are either masculine o 
feminine. The characteristic of the class is »z, except in the 
feminines δάμᾶρ, -agtoc, wife, ἕλμινς, -1v90c, worm, πείρινς; -ἰν- 
Joc, carriage-basket, and Tigurs, -υνϑος, Tiryns. The or 9 
is affected as in simple linguals (§ 102). When, by the drop- 
ping of τῷ vis brought before ¢ in the theme, it depends upon 
the preceding yowel whether the ν or the ¢ is changed (δὲ 57, 
58), according to the following rule: If an O vowel precede, the 
ς ts changed ; otherwise, the ν. 

Thus, λέων, -ovres, Ξξενοφῶν, -ὥντος (FY 13), ὁ δράκων, -ovres, dragon; but 
γίγας, -avros (YF 13), ὁ ἱμάς, -ἄντος, thong, ὃ Σιμόεις, -evros, the Simots, δεικνύς, 
-ὕνσος, showing. 

Notes. a. Except ὀδούς, -ὄντος, tooth ( 13; yet Ion. ὀδών Hdt. vi. 107), 
᾿ and participles from verbs in -wgs; as, δούς, δόντος (Y 22), from δίδω ει, to give. 

β. Some Latin names received into the Greek have -y; in the theme, instead 
of -εἰς 3 as, Κλήμης, -svros, Clemens, Οὐώλης, -evros, Valens. 

y- If the characteristic is -v9-, the ν remains before ¢ (ὃ 58. 8). In déuxe 
(J 13), the ς is simply dropped in the theme. 

Remarks. 1. A few proper names in -ds, -avres, form the Voc. after the 
analogy of the theme ; that is, » becomes «, and is then contracted; thus, 
"Arads, -avros, V. ("“Araavr, "“Araay, "Ἄσλαα) “Arad: Lloavddéuas, V. 
Πολυδάμᾶ. . 

2. Nouns and adjectives in -εἰς, -t¥r05, preceded by o or », are usually con 
tracted; as, 6 σλακόεις πλακοῦς, cake, G. rauxisvros πλακοῦντος e σιμήεις 
τιμῶ; honored, F. σιμήεσσα τιμῆσσα, N. σιμῆεν tiny, Ge φιμήεντος τιμῆντος, ὅζο. 


D. Pures. 
[7 14.] 
ᾧ 110. The euphonic changes in the declension of pures 
may be mostiy referred, (I.) to a special law of Greek declen- 
sion, and (II.) to contraction. 


I. Speciat Law or Greek Deciension. The 
short vowels, ε and 0, can never remain in the root, 
eather before the affixes s and v (1 5), or at the end 


af aword. Hence, 
12 


134 THIRD DECLENSION. | BOOK IL 


§ 111. (A.) Before the affixes s and ν, ε be- 
comes ἢ; ἐγ v, or ev; and o becomes ὦ or ov; as 
follows. 


1.) In masculine nouns, ε becomes εὐ in simple, and ἡ in 
compound words; as, simple, ὃ ἱππεύς, -ἕως (Wl 14. root iane-), 
ὃ βασιλεύς, τἕως, king, ὁ ὃ ἱερεύς, -ἕως, priest, ὃ Θησεύς, -ἕως, The- 
seus, 0 Μεγαρεύς, -EWC, Megarian ; ; compound, ὃ Σωκράτης, -ξὸς 
({ 14; from σῶς, entire, and κράτος, strength), ὃ ᾿Δἀριστοτέλης, 
“£065 Aristotle, ὁ ΖΔημοσϑένης. -ξος. 

Except the simples ὁ “Agns, 7808s Mars, ὃ ons, σεός, moth; and the following, 
iui which ¢ becomes ὁ or 4, ὁ σῆχυς, -tws, Acc. πῆχυν (q 14), ὁ ὃ wtrAExus, -εως; 
axe, 6 πρέσβυς, -εως, elder (properly an adj.); ὁ ἔχις, -ews, viper, ὁ ὄφις, -εως͵ 
serpent, ὁ reiravs, -ews, president, and also κόρις. κύρβις, μιάρις, and ὄρχεις. 

2.) In feminine and common nouns, ὃ becomes 13; as,‘ ἡ πόλις 
«τως, Ace. πόλιν (Π 14), ἡ δύναμις, -εως, power; ὃ, ἢ partic, 
-εως, prophet, prophetess. 


§ 212. 3.) In adjectives, ε becomes v in simple, and ἡ in 
compound words ; as, simple, ἡδύς, -é0c, Acc. ἡδύν a 19), γλυ- 
κύς, -ἕος, sweet, 5 -éoc, sharp ; compound, ἀλη ϑής; -ἔος, true, 
εὐτελής, -ἔος. cheap, ugnxwdns, -80c, wasp-like, τριήρης, -80¢, hav- 
ing three banks of oars, or, as a substantive (ναῦς, vessel, being 
understood), érireme ( 14). 


Except a few simple adjectives, in which « becomes ἡ; as, σαφής, “ἕος 
(J 17), πλήρης» -ἐος, full, «ψευδής, -ἔος, false. 

4.) In monosyllables, o becomes ου: otherwise, @ 5 28; βοῦς. 
βοός, Acc. βοὺν ( 14), 6, 7 ῥοῦς, doos, sumach, ὃ χοῦς, χοῦς, 
heap of earth; but αἰδώς, -oog ({ 14). 

Nores. «a. This rule applies also to linguals in which ὁ precedes the char- 
acteristic ; thus, πούς, ποδός (Y 11), and its compounds, Οἰδέήσους, -οδος (J 16), 
δίπους, -οδος (Y 17); but εἰδώς, -ὅτος (YJ 22). 

β. In feminines of more than one syllable, in which the characteristic is ὁ, 
the affix’s is changed to ε, and is then absorbed. Thus from the root 4ys- is 
formed the theme (fos, yor) ἠχώ ( 14. 850 ἡ σειϑώ, -ὅος, persuasion, ἡ 
Λητώ, -ὅος, Latona, &. Except, as above, αἰδώς, and the Ionic ἡ ἠώς, dawn. 
These feminines in -w and -ws have no plural or dual, except by metaplasm 
(§ 122) + unless, perhaps, εἰκούς (§ 123. @) is to be regarded as simply con- 
tracted from tixoas. 


§ £13. (B.) In cases which have no affix, « 
characteristic becomes ἐν v, or ev, or else assumes a 
euphonic ¢; and o characteristic becomes ot <4 ov. 
as follows. 


1.) If the theme ends in -ς» ε becomes ἐς ; but, otherwise 


cH. 2.] PURES. . 135 


_ is changed as in the theme; thus, Nom. neut. σαφές ( 17), 
ἡδύ ({] 19); Voc. τρέηρες, «Σώκρατες, πόλι, πῆχυ, ἱππεῖ ({] 14), 
ἡδύ ({ 19). 

2.) In the theme of neuter nouns, ε assumes ¢, becoming 
itself o (ἢ 28); as, τὸ τεῖχος. -s0¢ (FJ 14), τὸ ἔϑνος, -s0¢, nation, 
τὸ ὄρος; -ξος, mountain. 

Except +d derv, -εος, town ( 14), the Epic στὸ πῶ, -εος, flock, and a few 
foreign names of natural productions in -, as τὸ πέπερι, -εως, pepper. 

3.) In the Vocative, o becomes o7, if the theme ends in -o or 
-we; but ov, if it ends in -ους ; as, ἡχοῖ, αἰδοῖ, Bou ({[ 14); and 
in like manner (cf. 112. «), Οἰδίπου ( 16). 


§ Bf4. Remarks. 1. After the analogy of ε and ο, « 
characteristic becomes av in γραῦς and vais ( 14), and as- 
sumes ¢ in the theme of neuters ; as, τὸ γέρας, -αος ({] 14), τὸ 
γῆρας, -aoc, old age. 


2. In the Accusative singular of pures, the formative ν be- 
- comes α (§ 100.2) except when the theme ends in -ug, -ἰς» 
-u¢, -αὖὑς, OF -ove; thus, Fw, ἥρως, ἱππεύς, τριήρης, αἰδώς, ἠχώ 
“4 14), σαφής (Ἷ 17) ; Acc. Ide, ἥρωα, ἱππέα, τριήρεας, αἰδόα, 
ἠχύας σαφέα ; but ὃ dag, stone, xtc, οἷς (contracted from dig), 
πόλις, ἰχϑύς, πῆχυς; γραῦς, ναῦς, βοῦς ( 14), ἡδύς (J 19); Ace 
hiv, xiv, οἷν, πόλιν, ἰχϑύν, πῆχυν, γραῦν, ναῦν, βοῦν, ἡδύν. 

Nore. Proper names in -vs, -0;, for the most part, admit both forms of 
the Acc.; as, Σωκράτης (F 14), A. Σωκράτη (Plat.), Σωκράτην (Xen.) ; 3 
*Aons, Mars, A.” Agn and "Agny. 

3. When the characteristic is changed to a diphthong before 
o in the theme, the same change is made before σι in the Da- 
tive plural ; as, ἱππεῦσι, Bovol, ygavoi, ναυσὶ (Ἵ 14). 


1. I]. Conrracrion. For the general 
laws, see §§ 31-37. . The following remarks may 
be added. 


1. Pures in -ης, -oc, - ὡς and -ς, -dog, are contracted in all the 
cases which have open terminations. See τριήρης; Swxoarye, 
“Ἡρακλέης, τεῖχος, 770, αἰδώς ( 14), σαφής (ff 17). Add a few 
neuters In -ας ; as, τὸ γέρας ({ 14), τὸ κρέας, meat. 


ΝΌΤΕΒ. «a. Of nouns in -ὦ and on, bias the uncontracted form scarcely 
occurs, even in the poets and dialects. 


β. In prover names in -κλέης, contracted -κλῆς (from κλέος, renown), the 
Dat. and sometimes the Acc. sing. are doubly contracted. See Ἢ ρακλέης 
({ 14). For the later Voc. Ἥρακλες, compafe ὃ 105.R. The Nom. pl 
Heaxdies, in the Ion. form (§ 121. 4), occurs, with Oncies, Pl Thext 
169 b. 


196 THIRD DECLENSION [Book 11 


2. In other pures, contraction is, for the most part, con 
fined to three cases; the Nom. and Acc. plur., and the Dat 
sing. 

The contractions which are usual or frequent in these words are exhibitea 


in the tables. Contraction sometimes occurs in cases in which it is not given 
in the tables, and is sometimes omitted in cases in which it 1s given. These 


deviations from common usage are chiefly found in the poets. 


? 


§ 216. 3. In the Attic and Common dialects, the endings 

soc, -s, and -suc, instead of the common contraction, receive 

in certain words a peculiar change, which lengthens the last 
vowel. ‘This change takes place, 


a.) In the Gen. sing. of nouns in -ἰς) -ve, and -eve, and 
sometimes of nouns in -: and -v; as, πόλις, Gen. πόλεος πόλεως. 
πῆχυς. -εως, ἱππεύς, -ἑως, ἄστυ, -εος and -εως (Ἵ 14), mémEQL, -εως 
(δ 118. 2). Also o Ἄρης, Mars, G. Ἄρεος and sometimes “ρεως 
(as if from a second theme “Agevs, cited by grammarians from 
Alczus). 


b.) In the Ace. sing. and plur, of nouns in -evg; as, ἱππεύς, 
Acc. sing. ἱππέα ἱππέᾶ, pl. ἱππέᾶς ἱππέᾶς. ᾿ 


ΝΌΤΕΒ. a. This change appears to be simply an early and less perfect 
mode of contraction. From the accentuation of such words as σόλεως, it is 
evident that the ε (as in ’Argeidew, Μενέλεως, § 35) has not the full force of a 
distinct syllable; while it is equally evident from the use of the poets, that it 
has not wholly lost its syllabic power. It seems, therefore, to have united as 
a species of semivowel (of the same class with our y and w) with the follow- 
ing vowel, which consequently, as in other cases of contraction, became long. 
An especial reason for regarding this method of contraction as early, consists 
in the fact that it is confined to those classes of words which have dropped F 
or A from the root (§§ 117, 118). The poets sometimes complete the con- 
traction by synizesis ; as, βασιλέως Eur. Alc. 240, "Evex Stas Id. Hipp. 1095, 
᾿Αχιλλέα Id. Iph. A. 1341. Sometimes, also, the anchanged Gen. in -εσς, 
and rarely the Acc. in -εὰ and -s#%s; occur in the Attic poets : as, Nagios Eur. 
Ion, 1082, πόλεος Id. Hec. 866, φονέά Ib. 882. The poets likewise employ 
in the Ac@ sing. the regular contraction into 4; as, ξυγγραφὴ Ar. Ach. 1150, 
᾿Οδυσσῆ ἴα, Rh. 708, and even ἱερῇ Id. Ale. 25. The regularly contracted 
Ace. pl. in -εἰς, instead of -sa@s, became in the later Greek the common form, 
and although regarded as less Attic, yet is not unfrequent in the manuscripts 
and editions of genuine Attic writers, particularly of Xenophon ; as, βασιλεῖς 
Mem. iii. 9. 10. 


β. If another vowel precedes, the s-is commonly absorbed by the ὡς, 2, and 
as; thus, Πειραιέως Πειραιῶς, Περαία Πειραιᾷ (Y 14); χοῶς, ott, χοῶς 
(§ 123). 

y- For the earlier contraction of the Nom. pl. of nouns in -sv¢ into 7s, see 
8 37.2. The uncontracted Θησέες occurs Pl. Theet. 169 Ὁ, 


3. The form of the Gen. in -εως is termed by grammarians the Attic Gent 
twe. For its accentuation, see Prosody. The Gen. pl. in -εων accented upow 


cH. 2.} : _ PURES. : 137, 


the antepenult is also termed Attic; as, σόλεων. The regularly contracted 
«φηχῶν occurs iv. 7. 16. 


- The Gen. in -εως is also found in a few adjectives in -ς (as, καλλίσπολις, 
Po n ἥμισυς, half (Gen. commonly -tws, but also -εος and -ovs), and, in 
later weiters, in other adjectives in -vs (thus, βραχέως Plut.). 


ἢ Α1 5. Remargs on THE Dectension or Pures. The various 
and peculiar changes in the declension of pures appear to have chiefly arisen 
from the successive methods which were employed to avoid the hiatus pro- 
duced by appending the open affixes to the characteristic vowel. Of these 
methods, the earlier consisted mainly in the insertion of a strong breathing or 
aspirate consonant (cf. § 89); and the later, in contraction. The inserted 
aspirate became so intimately associated with the root, that its use extended 
even to the cases which had not an open affix ; and although it fell away in 
the refining of the language (cf. § 22. δ), yet it left distinct memorials of it- 
self, either in a kindred vowel or consonant, or in a prolonged syllable. The 
aspirates chiefly inserted appear to have been the labial F, and a dental breath- 
ing, which was most akin to ¢ (in Latin it passed extensively into 7; for dis- 
tinction’s sake, we here represent it by a capital 2). From the classes of 
_ words in which these aspirates were respectively inserted, the former appears 
to have prevailed in an earlier period of the language, than the latter. In 
the modifications which subsequently took place, the following law prevailed: 
When 1.) followed by a vowel, buth the aspirates were simply dropped. When 
not followed by a vowel, the labial breathing united (2.) with a, ¢, and ὁ pre- 
ceding to form av, ev, and ov, and (3.) with t and ὕ (except in the Dat. plur.), 
to formt and i; while the dental breathing (4.) at the end of a word became s, 
and (5.) before the affix ς lengthened a preceding short vowel. Thus, 


(1.) βοξός βοός, yeaFés γρᾶός, κίξός κῖός, ἰχϑύεος ἰχϑύος, ἱππέξες ἱππέες + 
αἰδόξος αἰδόος, τείχεος τείχεος, γέραξος γέραος (YJ 14), capidos σαφέος 
(f 17). 


(2.) yeas γραῦς, νά Ἐς ναῦς (Lat. navis), vaFoi ναυσί, iaaxtFs ἱππεύς, ἱπ'πἐ 
‘ered, BiFs βοῦς, βόΕν βοῦν, BF βοῦ (Y 14). 


(3.) «ἹΕς xis, κί Εν xiv, ἰχϑύεξ; ἰχϑύς, ἰχϑύε ἰχϑύ (ἦ 14); but Dat. pl. 


< 
xici, ἰχϑῦύσι. 


(4.) Nom. neut. σαφέξ cagis ( 17), τεῖχεξΣ τεῖχος (ε passing into its 
kindred vowel, § 28), γέρα γέρας (Ἷ 14); Voc. Σώκρατε;Σ Σώκρατες, reine 
ΘῈΣ reingts (J 14). The peculiar form of the Voc. of ἠχώ and αἰδώς has 
arisen from the change of ς to its corresponding vowel (ὃ 50) and then con- 
traction with precession (§ 29); thus, 4722 ἠχόε ἠχοῖ (cf. §§ 45. 5, 86, 
112. β). 

(5.) cagtds σαφής (9 17), ΣωκράτεξΣς Σωκράτης, wid0ds αἰδώς (FY 14). 
For ἠχώ, see § 112. β, and compare ἡχοῖ above (4.). -In the Dat. p!, the 
short vowel remains unchanged; as, σαφέσι. 


Nore. In adjectives, and in a few masculine and neuter nouns, the diph- 
thong εὐ appears to have been reduced to a simple short νυ ; as, ἡδέξς ἡδύς, ἡδέξ 
ἡδύ (9 19) 3 πῆχεξς πῆχῦς, πήχεξν πῆχῦν, πῆχεξξε πῆχῦ, aorsF aod 
(¥ 14). 


§ 118. wh feminines, it was natural that the inserted breathing or 
consonant should commonly assume a softer form. In this form, it appears to 
iz* 


198 THIRD DECLENSION. “ | BOOK πὶ 


have been most nearly akin to the lingual middle mute 3 (cf. § 49. 2); and 
in a great number of feminines, it acquired a permanent place in the language 
as this letter. In its previous, and as yet unfixed state, we represent it, for 
distinction’s sake, by a capital A. Before this inserted lingual, ἃ could re- 
‘main, but there was a uniform tendency in ε to pass by precession into. It 
‘is a remarkable illustration of this, that in the whole declension, there is not 
a single instance of ¢ before a characteristic lingual mute. In the progress 
of the language, feminines in -s-, or with the insetted lingual -:A-, assumed 
three forms : 


1.) The A fell away, leaving the vowel of precession s in the Nom., Acc., 
and Voce. sing., but the original ¢ in the other cases; thus, πόλις, πόλεως, πό- 
λει, πόλιν, πόλι" πόλεις, πόλεων, πόλεσι, πόλεις (FY 14). This became the 
usual form of feminine pures in -ss; in the Attic and Common dialects. 


2.) The A fell away, and precession took place throughout. This became 
the regular form of feminine pures in -s in the Ionic dialect (§ 44. 3); thus, 
Ion. N. -is, G. -ἴος, Ὁ. -i1, always contracted into -7, A. -fv, V.-i; Pl. N. «χες, 
sometimes contr. into -rs, G. -ἴων, D. To, A. -tas, commonly contr. into -Ts; 
aS, WANS, πόλιος, πόλι, πόλιν" πόλιες, -iwy, πόλισι, πόλιας, Ts. The s was also 
the prevalent vowel in the Doric; thus, Dor. πόλις, πόλιος, πόλι and πόλει, 
στόλιν" πόλιες, πολίων, πολίεσσι and πόλεσι, πόλιας. 


3.) The A became fixed in the root, and the word passed into the class of 
linguals. Thus, the root Μεγαρε-, Megarian, had two forms, MeyagsF - masc., 
and with precession Mryee:A- fem. ; from the former we have Μεγαρεύς, -bws, 
Megarian man, and from the latter, Μεγαρίς, -ides, Megarian woman. 
became the prevalent mode of declining feminines in -is, if we except the 
large class of abstract nouns in -cis. Especially many feminine adjectives, or 
words which are properly such, are thus declined. 


Nore. We find, also, the same forms in a few masculine or common 
nouns and adjectives (§§ 111, 119. 2), and even, in a few words, a corre- 
sponding neuter formation in - (δ 113, 2). 


δ 119. As might have been expected, these three forms are far from 
being kept entirely separate. Thus, 

1.) Some words exhibit both the lingual and the pure inflection; the latter 
especially in the Ionic and Doric dialects, which were less averse than the 
Attic to hiatus (§§ 45, 46) ; as, ἡ μῆνιρ, wrath, (ἃ. μήνιδος and μήνιος > ἡ σρό- 
wis, heel, G. πρόπιδος, πρόπιος, and σρόπεως " particularly proper names, as, 
Κύσρι,α. εἰδος, and -ἰος + Ἶσις, G. «δὸς and -ἰος + Θέφις, G. Θέςιδος O. 370, 
D.. Θέστ Σ. 407. For similar cases of the use and omission of a lingual 
characteristic, see ὃ 104; of a liquid characteristic, §§ 107, 123. a. 


2.) In some pures in -i, the Attic adopts, in whole or in part (particularly 
in the Gen. sing. ), the Ionic forms ; as, ἡ σύρσις, tower, G. σύρσιος vii. 8. 12 
but PL N. σύρσεις iv. 4. 2, τύρσεων H. Gr. iv. 7. 6, σύρσεσι Cyr. vii. 5. 10 
ὁ πόσις, spouse, G. -10s, D. «εἰ. ἡ μάγαδις, -10s, a hind of harp, D. — 
vii. 3. 82 ; ὁ, ἡ τίγρις, tiger, G. φίγριος, and in later writers σίγριδος, Pl. Ν 
elyosus, G. σίψγρεων" some proper names, as, ὁ Συέννεσις, Gs «τος, i. 2. 12, 
ὁ Ἶρις, G. -sog vi. 2. 1 ς and the adjectives ἴδρις, intelligent, νῆσσις, abstemious 
In like manner, ὁ, ἡ ἔγχελυς (δ 117. N.), eel, G. ἐγχέλυος, Pl. N. ἐγχέλεις 
σ. ἐγχέλεων «ὸ πέσπερι (§ 118. N.), pepper, G. -ews and -s05. 


on. 2.) DIALECTIC FORMS. — 139 


DIALECTIC FORMS. 
§ 220. (A.) Dialectic changes affecting the arrrx. 


1. In the poets, especially the Epic, the Acc. sing. sometimes ends in -a, in 
words in which it has commonly -ν; as, εὐρέα Z. 291, νῆα or via, πόληκ, for 
εὐρύν, ναῦν, πόλιν» ἰχϑύα Theoe. 21. 45. On the other hand, the New Ionic 
often forms the Acc. of nouns in -# or -ὥς, -d0s, in -opv; as, ᾿Ιώ, Jo, Anra, 
Latona, ἠώς, dawn, Acc. ᾿Ιοῦν Hdt. i. 1, Anrody, ἠοῦν. The Holic and stricter 
Doric have here -w» for -οὖν (8 44.4); as, Ἥρων Sapph. 75 (91), Aacay 
Inser. Cret. 


2. In the Gen. plur., the Ionic sometimes inserts ¢ (ef. δὲ 48. 1, 99. 2), 
as, χηνέων Hat. ii. 45, μυριαδέων, ἀνδρέων, for χηνῶν, μυριάδων, ἀνδρῶν. 


3. In the Dat. plur., for the common affix -σι(ν), the poets often employ 
the old or prolonged forms -ἐσι(ν), -ἐσσι(ν), and -σσι(ν). See δὲ 71, 84, 85. 
Homer uses the four forms, though -εσι(ν) rarely. The forms τεσσι(ν) and 
-sci(v) are also common in Dorie and Molic prose: and ea) i is used in Ionic 
prose after the characteristic » Thus, χέρσιν A. 14, χείρεσσι Γ. 271, χείρεσι 
Υ. 468; ποσί E. 745, worst Β. 44, πόδεσσιν 1. 407 ; ἔπεσιν Β. 73, ἔπεσσι ὃ. 
597; hist B. 753 δαιπυμόνεσι Hat. vi. 57. So, F not passing into νυ be- 
fore a vowel (ὃ 117), βόεσσ, B. 481, vaeoos Pind. P. 4. 98, ἀριστήεσσι A. 
227. 


4. In the Dual, the Epic prolongs -ov (as in Dee. II., ὃ 99. 1) to -ov; 
thus, rodoiv ΞΖ. 228, Σειρήνοιϊν μ. 52. 


§ 22. (B.) Dialectic changes affecting the root, either 
simply or in connection with the affix. 


1, Many changes result from dialectic : preferences of vowels ; ; as, Ion. ϑώρηξ, 
νηῦς, ven, for ϑώραξ, &e.; Dor. ποιμιᾶν, ὠκύτας, τιμάεις, contr. riwas, for 
«ποιμήν, &e.; χήρ for χείρ, be for οὖς, Bas, βῶν, for βοῦς, βοῦν (the Ace. Bay in 
the sense of a shield covered with ox-hide occurs also H. 738), ἀχῶς for ἠχοῦς, 
&e. See δὲ 44, 45. 


2. The dialects and poets vary greatly in the extent to which they employ 
contraction, and in the mode of contraction. The Epic has here especial li- 
cense. In the poets, contractions are often made by synizesis (§ 30), which 
are not written. In respect to the usage of Homer, we remark as follows: 
(a) In the Gen. sing., contraction is commonly omitted, except in nouns in 
«ὦ and -#s, G. -tos. In afew words, the contraction of -εσς into «evs occurs 
(§ 45. 3), and there are a few instances of synizesis (which we mark thus, 
ta); 68. δ. ᾿Ἐρέβευς Θ. 368, ϑάμβευς w. 394, ϑέρευς ἡ. 118; Πηλέος A. 489, 
Μηκισσέος Β. 566, πόλιος B. 811. (6) In the Dat. sing., both the contracted 
and uncontracted forms are used in most words with equal freedom; as, γήραϊ 
andl γήρᾳ, ϑέρε! and Sigs, τείχεϊ and σείχει, Πηλεῖ and [Πηλεῖ, πόληϊ, rroasi, 
and σόλει, ἥρωϊ and ἥρῳ H.453. The endings - τ, -ὐι, and -o (except in χροΐ) 
are always contracted (§§ 118. 2, 115. @); as, κνήσσί A. 640, véixw 11, 526 
(this contraction of -vi into -w is Epic), 47 I. 618. (6) The endings -εὰ, 
των, and -ezs are commonly uncontracted, except by _Synizesis ; ; as, ϑεοειδέα 
ἘΞ. ὑψερεφία ὃ. 757, ἄλγεα Ω. 7, βίλεα 0. 444, νέα .. 283; σφηϑίων Κ. 
95; πολέας A. 559, πελέκεας Ὑ. 114. So πόλιας 9. 560. (d) The ending 
τε; is used both with and without contraction ; as, σρωτοπαγεῖς νεοτευχέες 
E. 194. (e) The neat. plur. ending -2« is always contracted, or drops ono 


140 IRREGULAR NOUNS. [BooK 1. 
. 


« (cf. 4. below) ; as, κέρα, δέσια, γέρὰ Β. 257. ‘The form with the single short 
a sometimes occurs in the Attic poets; as, κρέὔ Ar. Pax. 192. (f.) Of οἷς, 
sheep, οὖς, ear, and γραῦς, old woman, the following forms occur in Homer; N. 
δίς, G. δος, οἷός, A. div: Ρ. Ν. ὄϊες, G. ὀΐων, οἰῶν, 1). ὀΐεσσι, οἴεσι; δεσσ, (cf 
8. 119. 2), A. ὄϊς. Ν. οὖς, G. οὔατος " P.N. οὔατα, D. οὔασι, ὠσί (8 88. γὴ)- 
N. γρηῦς, yenis, Ὁ. γρηΐ, V. γρηῦ, yend> the Gen. and Acc. are “δος by 
γραίης and γραῖαν of Dec. I. 


3. In common nouns in -εὖς, the characteristic sF before a vowel regularly 
becomes ἡ, in the Epic; as, ἱπ'πῆος, irani, ixaxnd, ἱπαῆες (once in Hom. iz- 
πεῖς A. 151, also βασιλεῖς Hes. Op. 246), iranav (J 16), ἀριστήεσσι A. 227 
(so, by imitation, βασιλῆας Eur. Phoen. 829). This change also extends to 
proper names in -εὖς (in which the Epic has great freedom in using the long 
or short vowel according to the metre), to "Agns, Mars (§ 116. a), and to 
σόλις. See Homeric Paradigms, § 16. In common nouns in -εὕς, this 
change occurs also in Herodotus, although questioned by critics; as, βασιλῆος, 
βασιλῆα, Vii. 137, βασιλῆϊ iii. 137, βασιλήων vi. 58. The regular inflection 
of nouns in -svs, in Ionic prose, and also in the Doric, is in -εος, &c. The 
Ace. in -na or -εα is sometimes contracted by the poets into - ; as, ᾿Οδυσῇ σ΄. 
136, Tvd% A. 384, βασιλῇ Hat. vii. 220 (Oracle). We find βασιλῆες with 
synizesis Hes. Op. 261. ; 


4. In words whose root ends in εε-, the Epic often unites ες into » (as regu- 
larly in proper names in -xAéns), or into εἰ; but sometimes in the Epie and 
other poets, and in dialectic prose, one ε is dropped. Still further variety of 
form is sometimes given by the Epic protraction of « to εἰ or ἡ, or by the 
Ionic or poetic neglect of contraction. Thus, Ἡρακλέης Hes. Th. 318, Hat. 
ii. 43, Pind. O. 6.115; G.‘Heaxaros Ξ. 266, ‘Hgaxaéos Hat. ii. 43, Pind, 
Ο. 3.20; Ὁ. Ἡρακλῆ 9. 224, Pind. I. 5. 47, “Hgaxaés Hat. ii. 145, Ἥρα- 
κλεῖ Pind. P. 9. 151; A. Ἡρακλῆα Ξ. 324, Ἡρακλέά Hat, ii. 43, Pind. O. 
10. 20, “Heaxdény Theoe. 13. 73 (for the Attic forms of λαλῶν; see 4 14 
and Mem. ii. 1. 21-26); ἀγακλῇος Il. 738: ἐὔκλεῖας (Ace. pl. of εὐ»λεής) 
K. 281, εὐκλέάς Pind. O. 2. 1633 tipperos (Gen. of εὐρεή:) Z. 5085 wari 
(pl. of κλέος) Hes. Th. 100: duexaée B. 115, dregdiz P. 330: ἀκληεῖς (Nom. 
pl. of ἀκλεής) M. 318. For the Homeric forms of cxéos, and for those of 
Tlérgoxaos, which, like some other compounds of κλέος, has forms both of 
Dec. II. and of Dec. III., see 4 16. 


5. For the Ionic and Doric declension of words in -ς, -sws, and for the 
omission of δ in words in -ἰς, -s30s, see §§ 118, 119. The Ionic likewise omits 
the σ' in κέρας and riga;+ and then in these, as in other neuters in -ας, -as, 
the latem Ionic often changes a into ε (§ 44. 2.), except in the theme; as, 
κέρεος, κέρεϊ, κέρεα, κερίων, rigsos, γέρεα, Hat. 


6. In ναῦς, the Doric retains throughout the original «, and is here some-. 
times imitated by the Attic poets. In the Ionic, the a passes throughout by 
precession either into ἡ, or with short quantity, especially in the later Ionip, 
into ε. The Attic retains the « in the diphthong av, but has otherwise » or « 
(the latter having, perhaps, been inserted in the Gen. sing. and pl. after the 
contraction of do and aw, according to ὃ 35, and the Gen. dual having fol- 
lowed the analogy of the other numbers), For the Ionic and Doric forms, 
see 4 16; for the Attic, 4 14. 


IV. Irrecutar Nouns. 
§ 122. Irregularities in the declension of nouns which 


vH “} ΜΕΤΑΡΓΑΒΤΒ. 141 


nave not been already noticed, may be chiefly referred to two 
heads ; variety of declension, and defect of declension. 


A. Variety oF DECLENSION. 


A noun may vary, (1.) in its root; (2.) in its method of 
declension ; and (3.) in its gender (ὃ 79). In the first case, it 
is termed a metaplast (usruniustdc, transformed); in the sec- 
ond, a heteroclite (ἑτερόκλιτος, of different declensions) ; in the 
third, heterogeneous (éteyoysvyc, of different genders). 

Words which have distinct double forms, either throughout or in part, are 


termed redundant. Those, on the other hand, that want some of the usual 
forms, are termed defective. 


The lists which follow are designed both to exemplify the different kinds of 
anomaly, and likewise to present, in a classified arrangement, the principa 
anomalous nouns. It will be observed, that some of the words might have 
been arranged with equal propriety under other heads, from their exhibiting 
more than one species of anomaly. 


ᾧ 123. 1. Merartasrs. 


Metaplasm has mostly arisen from a change of the root, in the progress of 
the language, for the sake of euphony or emphasis, chiefly by the precession 
of an open vowel, or the addition of a consonant to prevent hiatus; while, at 
the same time, forms have remained from the old root, especially in the poets 
and in the dialects. 


a. With a Double Root, in ὁν- and in o-. 
ἡ ἀηδών, nightingale, G. ἀηδόνος, &e.; from the root aude-, G. éndovs Soph. 
Aj. 628, Ὁ. ἀηδοῖ Ar. Av. 679. 
a Γοργώ, «οὖς, and Lsgyay, -ὄνος. Gorgon. 
ἡ εἰκών, wage, G. εἰκόνος, &e.; from τ. sixo-, G. sixovs Eur. Hel. 77, A 


εἰκώ Hat. vii. 69; from r. six-, by the second declension, Pl. A. εἰκούς Eur. 
Tro. 1178, Ar. Nub. 559. Yet see ὃ 112. β. 

ἡ χελΙδών, swallow, G. χελτδόνος, &c.; from r. χελιδο-, V. χελτδοῖ Ar. Av. 
1411 from Simon. : 
Compare §§ 104, 107, 119. 


β. With a Double Root, in a- and in ε-. 
7d Petras, wooden image, poetic, G. βρέτεος, D. βρέσει. Pl. N. Beien, G. 
βρετέίων. 
+o κνέφας, darkness, G. Epic κνέφαος, Attic xvigovg Ar. Eccl. 291, later 
κνέφατος Polyb., D. xvidai κνέφᾳ Cyr. iv. 2. 15. 
To κῶας, fleece, poetic, r. 47; Pl. N. κώεα ν. 3, Ὁ). χκώεσε y. 38. 
7) ovdus, floor, poetic, G. οὔδεος, D. οὔδει οὔδει (all in Hom.). 


y- Miscellaneous Examples. 


᾿ φὸ γόνυ, knee, and πὸ δόρυ, spear, G. yovares, δόρατος, &e. (§ 103. N.). For 
the various forms of δόρυ (of which in the theme there is even the latg form 
δοῦρως Antiphil. 9), see 4 16. Those which occur of γόνυ correspond ; 
thus, Jon. and poet. γούνατος, γούνατα, γούνασι and γούνασσι (I. 488, P. 451, 


142 IRREGULAR NOUNS. [BOOK ir 


for which some write γούνεσσι); als. poet. γουνός, youvi, γοῦνα, γούνων, and 
γόνων Sapph. 14 (25), γούνεσσι. 

ἡ ἕως, dawn (τ. ‘#-, Attic Dec. II.), 6. ἕω, D. ἕῳ, A. ἕω and ἕων (ὃ 97. 8) 
Dor. das (1. ᾽ἄο-), G. ἀόος aovs> lon. ἠώς, G. ἠοῦς, D. ἠοῖ, A. ἠῶ and Hod 
(§ 120. 1). 

ἡ Θέμις, Themis, as a common noun, right, law, G. Θέμιδος, Epic Otusrrag 
B: 68, Ionic Θέμιος Hat. ii. 50, Doric Oipiros Pind. O. 13. 11, also PL Rep. 
$80 a. In the Attic, θέρος occurs mostly in certain forms of expression, 
where it is used without declension, as an adjective or neuter noun; thus, 
ϑέμις ivi, it is lawful; φασὶ ... ϑέμοις εἶναι, they say that it is lawful, Pl. Gorg. 
505 45 σὸ μὴ ϑέμις, that which is not lawful, isch. Sup. 335. 

ὁ ϑεράπων, attendant, ἃ. θεράποντος, &e.; poet. A. ϑέραπα, Pl. N. ϑέρασες 
Eur. Ion, 94. ᾿ : 

6 κάλως, cable (τ. καλα-, Att. Dec. 11.), G. κάλω, ὅτο. ; Ion. κάλος, -ου, ὅτε.» 
s. 260 and Hadt.; in the later Epic, Pl. κάλωες, &c., Ap. Rh. 2. 725. 

ὃ λαγώς, hare (τ. Amya-, Att. Dec. II.), G. raya, A. λαγών, Aaya, ἕο. 5 
Ton. λαγός, +00, &e., Hadt., also ΡΙ. N. λαγοί Soph. Fr. 113, A. Dor. (§ 45. 5) 
λαγός Hes. Sc. 302 5 Epic λαγωός, -ov, Hom. 

ὃ, ἡ doris (in late writers pderig), witness, G. μάραῦρος, D. μάραυρι, A. 
μάρτυρα, rarer μάρτῦν- D. pl. μάραῦσι- Epic ὁ μιάρευρος, -ov, α΄. 423. 

ὃ, ἡ dgvis, bird, G. ὄρντϑος (Dor. ὄρντχος, ὃ 69. 11.), Ὁ. tend, A. ὄρντϑα and 
gy * PL. devi Des, &c.; from r. éevs-, Sing. N. dgvis, A. δρνῖν, Pl. N. ὄρνεις, Ge 
ὄρνεων, A. ὄρνεις and δρονῖς (ὃ 119). Another form is στὸ ὄρνεον, -ou 

6 ὀρφώς and ὀρφός, a sea-fish, G. ὀρφῶ and depos. Compare κάλως, λαγώς. 

ἡ σνύξ, pnyx, G. πυκνός, D. συκνί, A. σύκνα . later G. πνυκός, D. σνυκί, A. 
avixa. The proper root is σνκν- (compare the adj. rvxvés); but from the 
difficulty of appending ¢ in the theme, transposition took place (8 64. 3), 
which afterwards extended, through the influence of analogy, to the oblique 
cases. 1 


ὁ ons, moth, G. σεός, and in later writers σησός. 

ἡ σμῶδιξ, weal, B. 267, G. σμώδιγγος, &e.; N. pl. σμώδιγγες ¥. 716. 

ὁ sa contr. φϑοῖς, cake, G. φϑοιός - N. pl. φϑοῖς and φϑδεις - also ἡ Φϑ οἷς 
-ἴος " N. pl. φϑοῖδες. See ὃ 119. 

ἡ χείρ, hand, G. χειρός and χερός, &c. For the common forms, see 4 12. 
The other forms are also found in the poets and in Ionic prose, 

vs, the name of a measure, G. χοός, &e., like βοῦς (4 14); from τ. 

AL better Attic G. χοέως, yows, A. χοίῶ χοᾶ, Pl. A. xotds χοᾶς 
(§ 116. 6); also Dat. Ion, xoéi Hipp. 

σὸ xetos (Ep. ΚΎΩΝ 8 47), debt, G. xetous + Pi. N. χρίᾶ (§ 37. 1); from 
“3 χεάε-, N. (χράος, χρῶς) χρίως, G. (χοᾶἄεος, χεΐονρ, χρῶς) χρίως (S§ 33,35). 

ὁ χρώς, skin, surface, G. χρωτός, Ὁ. χρωφί (χρῷ, ὃ 104) A. χρῶφα Ton. 
and poet. G. χροός, D. χροΐ, A. χρόα. 

For Ζεύς, Οἰδίπους, Πάφροκλος, and υἱός, see J 16. 


Nore. Add the poetic Nom. ἡ δώς Hes. Op. $54, == δόσις, gift; Acc. λίβα 
Asch. Fr. 49, 65, = λιβάδα from ἡ λιβάς, libation ; Nom. ὁ ais O. 275, Ace. 
λῖν A. 480, = λέων I. 23, λέοντα Σ. 161, lion (in the later Epic, Pl. Aiss, 
λίισαρ); Dat. μάσει ¥. 500, Acc. wader ὁ. 182, = wdoriy: Εἰ, 748, wdoriya 
E. 226, from ἡ μάστιξ, scourge; ὁ Σαρπηδών, G. Σαρπηδόνος and Σαραήδονσος, 
V Σαρσῆδον - Nom. pl. ordyss Ap. Rh. 4. 696, Ξααι σταγόνες from ἡ σταγών, 


cH. 2.{ HETEROCLITES. 143 


drop; Dat. i Hes. Op. 61, Theog. 955, = Dar: from τὸ Swe, water (80 
Nom. #305 Call. Fr. 466). 


ὃ E24. 2. Herervcures. 
a. Of the First and Third Declensions. 


o“Aidns, poetic ᾿Αἴδης, Hades, G. ov, &c.; Dec. ΠΙ. Epic G.”Aidos, Ὁ. "ΔΑ δὲ 
Another poetic form is ᾿Α δωνεύς, ἃ. -tws, Ion. -Fos. 

ὁ Oars, Thales, G. Θάλεω (< 96. 7) and Odanros. 

6 A&as, contracted Ags, stone, G. Ads, and Adev Soph. Gd. C. 196, D rai, 
A λᾶαν, λᾶν, and Aga Call. Ir. 104, Pl. N. ages, &e. 

6 μύκης, mushroom, G. μούκου and μύκητος. 

ἡ παυχή, -ἧς, and mostly Ep. rrvz, G. rruyis, fold. 

ἡ φρίκη, -ns, poetic φρίξ, G. Oeixds, shudder, ripple. 


Norrs. a. Add some proper names in -ἥς, of which a part admit a double 
formation throughout, as Χάρης - but others only in particular cases; thus 
Sree icons, -ov, has (Ar. Nub. 1206) Voc. Σερεψίαδες. Some refer to this 
head the double Acc. in ὃ 114. N. For γυνή, see - \Ole γε, 


b. Add, also, the Epic Dat. ἀλκέ (always in the phrase ἀλκὶ πεποιϑώς ΕἸ. 
299), = ἀλκῇ (w. 509) from ἀλκή, might; Nom. ἡ ἅρπαξ Hes. Op. 354, = 
ἁρπαγή, robbery; Acc. iaxa A. 60], == ἰωκήν from ἰωκή (E. 740), battle-din 
Acc. κρόκα Hes. Op. 536, = κρόκην from κρόκη, woof (also Pl. N. κρόκες Antip. 
Th. 10. 5); Dat. pl. ῥοδέεσσιν Ap. Rh. 3. 1020, = ῥόδοις from ῥόδον, rose ; 
Dat. icuin B. 863, Θ. 56, = ὑσμίνῃ (Υ. 245) from ὑσμίνη, battle; Acc. φύγα 
(only in φύγαδε, to flight, O. 157, &.), = φυγήν from φυγή, flight; and the 
Dorie Gen. fem. αἰγᾶν Theoc. 5. 148, 8. 49, for αἰγῶν from αἴξ, goat (so Gen 
νησάων Call. Del. 66, 275, for νήσων from ἡ νῆσος of Dec, II.). 


B. Of the Second and Third Declensions. 


τὸ δάκρυον and poet. δάκρυ, tear, G. duxgiov, D. daxgiw: Pl. N. δάκρυα, G. 
δακρύων, D. δακρύοις and δάκρυσι Th. vii. 75. 

σὸ δένδρον and Ion. δένδρεον, tree, (ἃ. δένδρου, &e.; Dec. III. D. δένδρει, A, 
δένδοος Hdt. vi. 79, Pl. N. dévden, D. δένδρεσι (the more common form of the 
Dat. pl. even in Attic prose; e. g. Th. ii. 75). 

ὁ ἴκαῖνος, hawk, G. ἰκεΐνου, &c.; Dee. III. rarer A. ἔκεῖνα Ar. Fr. 525, Pl. 
N. ixrives Pausan. 5. 14, © 

6 κλάδος, twig, G. κλάδου, &c.; Dec. III. poet. Ὁ. κλαδί, A. 2rdda, Pl. Ὁ. 
κλάδεσι Ar. Av. 239, κλαδέεσσι, A. κλάδας. 

ὃ κοινωνός, sharer, G. κοινωνοῦ, &e.; Dec. 1Π. Pl. N. κοινῶνες Cyr. viii. 1. $5, 
A. κοινῶνας Ib. 16. 

7d κρίνον, lily, (ἃ. κρίνου, &e.; Dec. III. Pl. N. κρίνεα Hat. ii. 92, Ὁ. κρί- 
νεσι Ar. Nub. 911. 

πὸ ὄνειρον and 6 ὄνειρος, dream, G. ὀνείρου and ὀνείρατος - Pl. ὄνειρα, and more 
frequently ὀνείρατα. Derived from ὄναρ (δ 127). 

ἡ πρόχοος, contr. πρόχους, ewer, G. πρόχου, &c.; Dec. IH. Pl. Ὁ. πράχουσι 
Ar. Nub. 272. ~ 

wd πῦρ, fire, G. «ὕρός, D. πῦρί Dec. II. Pl. N. σῦρά, wateh-fires, D. 
wb ors. 


144 IRREGULAR NOUNS. | Book πὶ 


ὁ orixos, row, G. σείχου, &c.; Dec. III. poet. fem. G. σσιχός IT. 173, Pl 
N. στίχὲς Pind. P. 4. 373, A. σείχας Ar. Eq. 163. 

Note. Add the poet. Dat. pl. ἀνδραπόδεσσι H. 475, = avdeurddos from 
ἀνδρώποδον, slave; Nom. ἔρος &. 315, Ace. ἔρον 1. 92, = ὁ tows TI. 442, love, 
A. ἔρωτα Hom. Merc. 449; Gen. pl. μηλάτων Lyc. 106, = μήλων from μῆλον, 
sheep; Acc. cixa (only in οἴκαδε, homeward, often in Hom. and even used in 
Attic prose, vii. 7..57), = οἴκον from οἶκος, house; Pl. N. προσώπατα o. 192, 


D. προσώπασι H. 212, - πρόσωπα, προσώποις, trom «πρόσωσον, face. For 
Οἰδίπους, Πάσροκλος, and υἱός, see 4 16. 


y- Of the Attic Second and Third Declensions. 
ἡ ἅλως, threshing-floor, G. ἅλω, ἅλωνος, and poet. ἅλωος.- 
ὁ μήπρως, maternal uncle, ἃ. μήπρω and μήπρωος . Pl. μήφρωες. 
ὁ Μίνως, Minos, G. Μίνω and Μίνωος. 
ὁ πάτρως, puternal uncle, G. πάτρω and rdrewos+ Pl. πάτρωες- ’ 
ὃ ταῶς and rawy, peacock, G. raw and φἀῶνος " Pl. N. rag, raoi, and faites 
ὁ ridw:, whirlwind, G. τυφώ and «υφῶνος. 


ᾧ 125. 3. Πετεκοοεκεοῦβ Nouns. 
a. Of the Second Declension. 
6 δεσμός, band, Pl. τὰ δεσμά and οἱ δεσμοοί. 
τὸ ζυγόν and ὁ ζυγός, yoke, Pl. τὰ ξυγά. 
ὃ ϑεσμός (Dor. σεϑιμός), institute, Pl. of ϑεσμοί and ςὰ ϑεσμά. 
6 λύχνο;, lamp, Pl. τὰ λύχνα and οἱ λύχνοι. 
σὸ νῶτον and ὁ νῶφσος, back, Pl. τὰ vara. 
ὁ σῖτος, corn, Pl. τὰ σῖτα. ͵ 
6 σταϑιμός, station, balance, Pl. of craSoi and τὰ craSpd, stations, rx στα- 
Sud, balances, 

ὁ Τάρσαρος (ἡ Pind. P. 1. 29), Tartarus, Pl. τὰ Τάρταρα. 


. β. Of the Third Declension. 


σὸ xaea and (Soph. Ph. 1457) κρᾶτα, head, poetic, G. χρᾶτός (τῆς, Eur. 
El. 140), D. κρῶσί and κάρᾳ Soph. Ant. 1272, A. τὸ xed, τὸν and τὸ κρᾶτα 
Eur. EL’ 148 (ef. 150), Fr. Arch. 16, Soph. Gd. T. 263; Pl. A. σοὺς κρᾶτας 
Fur. Plioen. 1149. The following forms are found ih Homer: 


5. Ν. κἄρη 
G. κάρητος καρήάτος κρᾶτόξς xpakros κρῆϑεν λ.588 κἂρήνου 
D. κάρητι καρήᾶσι κρᾶτί κράτει 
Α. κάρη, κάρ TI. 392 κρᾶτα 3.92 

P.N. κάρα Cer. 12 καρήάτα κρᾶἄζτα κάρηνα 
G. noaroy καρήνων 
D. κρᾶσί, κράτεσφι, K. 152, 156 


Other poets (not Attic) have also forms of κάρη as a fem. of Dec. I.; thus, 
G. κάρης Call. Fr. 125, Mosch. 4. 74, κάρῃ Theog. 1018. 


y: Of Different Declensions. 
Dec. I. and II. ἡ πλευρά and στὸ πλευρόν, rib; ὁ φϑογγός and ἡ φϑογγή,. 


"5. 2.} . DEFECTIVE. 145 


voice; ἡ χώρα and ὁ χῶρος, space: Dec. I. and III. ἡ δίψα, -ms, and +d dios 
-so3, thirst; ἡ νάπη and ro νάπος, dell; ἡ βλάβη and ré βλάβος, injury; ἡ γνώ- 
vz and Ion. and poet. rd γνῶμια, -aros, opinion; τὸ πάϑος and ἡ πάϑη, suffer- 
wy: Dec. II. and III. ὁ dyes (Dor. oxxos), -ov, and σὸ ὄχος, -sos, and also ro 
ὄχ yu, -eros, carriage; ὃ and τὸ σκότος (and also ἡ cxoria), darkness; 6 and 
σὺ .xudos, cup; &e. 


B. Derect or DEcLENSION: 


§ £26. 1. Some words receive no declension, as the 
rimes of the letters, some foreign proper names, and a few 
omer foreign words. Thus, τὸ, τοῦ, τῷ alu’ ὃ, τοῦ, τῷ; τὸν 
᾿Αϑραάμ᾽ τὸ, τοῦ, τῷ πάσχα, Passover. 

Nore. A word of this kind is termed indeclinable, or an aptote (éarrwres, 
without cases). 


2. A few diminutives and foreign proper names, whose root 
ends with a vowel, receive ¢ in the Nom., » in the Acc., and, 
if the vowel admits it, an iota subscript in the Dat., but have 
no further declension ; as 

ὁ Διονῦς (dim. from «Διόνσος, Bacchus), G. Διονῦ, D. Διονῦ, A. Διονῦν, V. 
Asoo. 

ὁ Μηνᾶς (dim. from Μηνόδωρος), G. Μηνξ, Ὁ. Μηνξ, A. Μηνᾶν, V. Μηνᾶ. 

6 Macxa:, α. Μασκᾷ, D. Μασκᾷ, A. Μασκᾶν, V. Μασκᾷ. 

ὁ ᾿Ιαννῆς, G. ᾿Ιαννῇ, D. ᾿Ιαννῇ, A. ᾿Ιαννῆν, Υ. ᾿Ιαννῇ. 

ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, Jesus, G. ᾽Ἴησοῦ, D. ᾿Ιησοῦ, A. "Ineodv, Υ. ᾿Ιησοῦ. 

ὃ Ῥλοῦ:. See 4 16. 

3. Many nouns are defective in number. Thus, 

«. Many nouns, from their signification, want the plural ; as, 4, ἡ ἀήρ, the 
Gir, ὁ χαλκός, copper, +d ἔλαιον, oil, ἡ τα χυτής, swiftness. Proper and abstract 
nouns are seldom found in the plural, except when employed as common nouns. 


6. The names of festivals, some names of cities, and a few other words, 
. want the singular; as, σὰ Διονύσια, the feast of Bacchus, αἱ ᾿Αϑῆναι, Athens, 
οἱ ἐτησίαι, the trade-winds. 


§ 127. 4. Some nouns are employed only in particular 
cases, and these, it may be, occurring only in certain forms of 
expression. Of this kind are, 


δέμας, body, form, Nom. and Acc. neut. 

ἐπίκλην, surname, Acc.fem. (= ἐσίκλησιν), commonly used adverbially. 

λίπα, with oul, Dat. neut., perhaps shortened from aiwai. Some regard it 
as Acc. ; 

μάλης, arm-pit, Gen. fem., only in the phrase ὑπὸ μάλης, under the arm, 
secretly ; also, in late writers, ὑπὸ μάλην. Otherwise the longer form, 4 wa 
σχάλη; is employed. 

μέλε, Voc. mase. and fem., used only in familiar address; ὦ μέλε, my good 
Sriend. 

13 


146 DECLENSION, | BOOK It 


ὄναρ, sleep, dream, and ὕπαρ, waking, reality, N.and A. neut. See ὄνειρον 
, (8 124, β). a ; 

ὄσσε, eyes, Du. N. and A. neut.; Pl. G. ὄσσων, D. ὄσσοις. 

ὄφελος, advantage, and ἦδος (Ep.), pleasure, N. neut. 

σἄν or τᾶν, only Attic and in the phrase ὦ σάν, good sir, sirrah. 


Norrs. «. Add the poet. Nom. and Acc, neut. δῶ (root dwu-, ὃ 63) A 
426, = δῶμα, house, κρῖ (τ. xeid-) O. 564, = ἡ κριϑή, barley, ἄλφι (τ. ἀλφι--) 
Hom. Cer. 208, = ἄλφιτον, barley-meal, γλάφυ, hollow, Hes. Op. 531, ἔρι Phi- 
let. ap. Strab. 364, = ἔριον, wool (compare, with these neuters, βρῖ and fe, 
§ 136. 8); Dat. fem. dat (7), battle, N. 286 (akin to this, Acc. 34i Call. Fr. 
243); Dat. ami 3. 352, Acc. sing. mase. or pl. neut. aire a. 130, = Dat. 
and Acc. of σὸ λίνον, linen; Acc. fem. vipa, snow, Hes. Op. 53% (from which 
ἡ νιφάς, -ἄδες, snow-flake); Voc. mrt O. 128, = Hast β. 243, from ἠλεός, crazed. 


β. A word which is only employed in a single case, is termed a monoptote 
(μόνος, single, πτῶσις, case); in two cases, a diptote; in three, a triptote; in 
Jour, a tetraptote. 


CHAPTER III. 


DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 
[TT 17-20, 22.) 


§ 128. Adjectives are declined like substan 
tives, except so far as they vary their form to de- 
note variation of gender (ὃ 74. δ). In this respect, 
they are divided into three classes, adjectives of 
one, of two, and of three terminations. 


Nore. In adjectives of more than one termination, the masculine is re- 
garded as the primary gender, and the root, theme, and declension of the 
masculifie, as the general root, theme, and declension of the word. The mode 
of declining an adjective is commonly marked by subjoining to the theme the 
other forms of the Nom. sing., or their endings; and, if necessary, the form 
of the Gen. sing. Thus, ἄδικος, -ov- σαφής, -ἔς - Φίλιος, -ἄ, -ov ὃ, ἡ δίπους, 
«οδος, τὸ δίπουν. 


§ 129, I. Ansectives or One Termination are- de: 
clined precisely like nouns, and therefore require no separate 
rules or paradigms. They are confined, in the language of 
prose, to the masculine and feminine genders, and some of 
them are employed in a single gender only. ἘΣ. g. 


1. Masculine. Dec. I. ὁ γεννάδας, -ov, noble, ὃ μονίας, -ov, solitary, ὁ ἔϑελον. 


τής, -οὔ, voluntary; Dec. IIL. ὁ γέρων, -ovros, οἷά, ὁ «νης, -ntos, poor (yet 
Hesych. gives ἡ πένησσα). 


on. 3.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. | 147 


2. Feminine. Dec. ΠῚ. ἡ μάινάε; -ἄδος, frantic, ἡ πατρίς, εἶδος, native, ἡ 
Tease, -éd0s, Trojan, ἡ Aweis, -id0s, Dorian. 


8. Masculine and Feminine. Dec. III. 6, ἡ ἀγνώς, -wres, unknown, ὃ, ἢ 
ἄσαις, -aidos, childless, ὁ, ἡ ἡλιξ, -ἰκος, of the same age, ὃ, ἡ nuidvis, -nros, half- 
dead, ὃ, ἡ φυγάς, ἄδος, fugitive. 

Nore. The indirect cases of adjectives of one termination and of Dec. IIL, 
are sometimes employed by the poets as neuter ; a8, yrapeny τε μεγάλην ἐν πένητι 
σώματι Eur. El. 372, μανιώσιν λυσσήμασιν Id. Or, 270, δρομιάσι δινεύων βλε- 
φάροις Ib. 837. - 


§ £30. Il. ΑΡΙΕΟΤΙΝΕΒ or Two Terminations have the 
same form for the feminine as for the masculine, but have a 
distinct form for the neuter in the direct cases suger and 
plural. 


REMARKS. a. Adjectives which form the neuter must be either of Dec. 
Il. or ΠῚ. (δ 79), and, if of Dee. III., cannot have either a labial or a pala- 
tal characteristic (ὃ 101). To adjectives which cannot form the neuter, this 
gender is sometimes supplied from a kindred or derived root 5 as, 6, ἡ dora, 
-αγος, TAPACiOUS, τὸ ἁρπαπκτικόν. 

β. The neuter must have two distinct forms, and can have only two, one 
for the direct cases singular, and the other for the direct cases plural (§ 80). 
Hence, every complete adjective must have two terminations. A neuter plural 
is sometimes given, though rarely, to adjectives which do not form the neuter 
singular; 88, rinse mange ἀπάτορα Eur. Here. 114, ἔϑνεα ... ἐπήλυδα Hat, 
viii. 73. 


y- In δίπους (4 17), and in similar compounds of πούς, foot, the Neuter 
sing-, on account of the difficulty of forming it from the root, is formed from 
the theme, after the analogy of contracts of Dec. II. (4 18); thus, ὁ, ἡ δί- 
ποὺς, τὸ δίπουν" ὃ, ἡ τρίπους, -cdos, three-footed, +i τρίπουν. Cf. § 136, 2. 


§ 151. 1Π. Avsectives or Tures Terminations differ 
from those of two in having a distinct form for the feminine. 


It is only in the first declension that the feminine has a 
distinct form from the masculine. These adjectives, therefore, 
must be of two declensions, uniting the feminine forms of the 
first with the masculine and neuter of the second or third, 
The feminine is formed according to the following rules. 


Rute 1. If the theme belongs to the second 
declension, the feminine affixes of the first are an- 
nexed to the sample root. 

If the root ends in ε, ty 05 OF Q0, the feminine is declined like 
om’ otherwise, like τιμή ({ 7, § 98). 


Thus, φιλία, φιλίας" σοφή, σοφῆς" χρυσξξ, διαλόη (4 18); μακρός, -ἅ, -ὄν, 
‘ong, ἀϑρόος, -&, -ov, dense; καλός, -4, -dv, beautiful, μέσος, -n, -ov, middle, γεγραμι- 
μένος, -ἡ, -0v, written. 


148 ADJECTIVES. [Book ul 


δ 132. Rute. If the theme belongs to the 
third declension, the feminine affixes of the first 
are annexed to the root increased by o (i. 6. to the 
theme before euphonic changes)... 


Thus, from the roots ravr-, yagivr- (F 19), Bovasvove-, dearr-, Paver 
(4 22), are formed the feminines (πάντσα, πάνσα) ruck, (χαρίενεσα, χα- 
ρίενσα) χαρίεσσᾶ, (βουλεύονεσα) βουλεύουσᾶ, (ἄραντσα) ἄρασᾶ, (φανέντσα) φα 
νεῖσᾶ (§§ 55, 57, 58). 

The following sPEcIAL RULES are observed in the formation 
of the feminine, when the theme belongs to Dec. III. | 


1. After ε or o, the g which is added to the root becomes e 
(ὃ 50), which is then contracted, with « into εἰς and with ὁ 
mto w. Thus, from the voots ἢδε- (Π 19), and εἶδοτ- (ff 22), 
are formed the feminines (ἡδέσα, ἡδέεα) ἡδεϊᾶ, (εἰδότσα, εἰδόσα, 
εἰδόεα) εἰδυϊᾶ. 

Notes. «. The diphthong ov never stands before the affixes of Dec. I. 
The concurrence of open vowels which would be thus produced seems to have 


displeased the Greek ear. Hence the contraction, in this case, of os into the 
closer diphthong uw. 


f. In the contracted perfect participles, which have a long vowel in the last 
syllable of the root, the ¢ remains. Thus, from r. ἔσσωφ- (contr. from ieraor-, 
from the verb icrnu:, to stand) is formed the feminine (ἑσσῶςσα) ἱστῶσᾶ 
(4 22). 

y- The fem. termination -εἴά is commonly shortened in Ionic prose, and 
sometimes in Epic and other poetry, to i (sometimes Ion. ém, especially in 
Hipp.) ; as, βαϑέα, siete Hat. i. 178, BaSiny Ib. 75, BaSins E. 147 (but 
βαϑείης B. 92), ὠκέα B. 786, ἁδέα Theoc. 3. 20, ταχεῶν Theog. 715. So, 
even in Attic prose, Buttmann edits from the best Mss. ἡμισέας Pl. Meno, 
88 c. On the other hand, the poets, in a few instances, prolong -i« of the 
Neut. pl. to -si« for the sake of the metre (δ 47. N.); as, ὀξεῖα Hes. Sc. 348, 
ἁδεῖα Soph. Tr. 122 (so oxséew for σκιόεν, Ap. Rh. 2. 404, δαζρυδειν Id. 4. 
1291). 


2. After a liquid, the « which is added becomes ε, which is 
then transposed, and contracted with the preceding vowel into 
a diphthong. Thus, from the roots wedar- (4 19), τερεν-- (τ. of 
τέρην, tender), neg-, are formed the feminines (μέλανσα, pe- 
Aosve) μέλαινᾶ, (τέρενσα, tegeeva) τέρεινᾶ, πίειρά (δ 184. δὴ 
Compare ὁῷ 56, 57. 


3. If the root, after the addition of o, and the consequent 
changes, ends in ὁ or g, the feminine is declined like σκιά " but 
if it ends ing or », like γλῶσσα (Ἷ 7, δῷ 92, 93); as, ἡδεϊᾶ, 
ἡδείᾶς " πᾶσᾶ, πάσης ᾿" μέλαινᾶ, μελαίνης (Ἵ 19); πίειρᾶ, muisigas. 
Observe that the a in the direct cases is always short. See 


cH. 3.] OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 149 


133. Of those words which belong to the general class 
of aDsEcTIVES (ᾧ 73), the following have three terminations :—~ 


1. All participles; as, βουλεύων, ἄρας, εἰδώς ({] 22). 


Note. In participles, which partake of the verb and the adjective, a dis- 
tinction must be made between the root, affix, connecting vowel, and flexible 
ending of conjugation, and those of declension ; thus, in the genitive Bovasiovros, 
the root of conjugation is Bovasv-, and the affix -ovres+ while the root of de- 
clension is BovAsvoyr-, and the affix -os. 


2. All comparatives and superlatives ἴῃ -0¢ ; AS, σοφώτερος, 
-ἂς -ov, wiser ; σοφώτατος, -y, -ov, wisest. 


3. All numerals, except cardinals from 2 to 100 inclusive ; 
as, διακόσιοι; -u1, -a, two hundred, τρίτος, -n, -ov, third. 


4, The article and adjective pronouns, except τίς (tic). See 
q] 24. | 

5. Simple adjectives IN τος; -εἰς; and -ve, with a few other 
adjectives ; as, φίλιος, σοφός, χρύσεος (I 18) ; χαρίεις, ἡδύς" πᾶς, 
μέλας (Ἷ 19); ἑκών, -οὖσα, -ov, G. -ovtog, willing ; τάλας; -αινα, 
-av, ἃ. -avos, wretched ; 3 Téony, -εινα, -ev, G. -evoc, tender. 


Nores. «a. For the number of terminations in adjectives in -s, only gen- 
eral rules can be given. For the most part, simples have three terminations, 
and compounds, but two. Yet some compounds have three, and many sim- 
ples, particularly derivatives in -ss0s, -s0s, and -szos, have but two. Deriva- 
tives from compound verbs, as being themselves uncompounded, especially 
those in -xos, -ros, and -σέος, have more commonly three terminations. [π΄ 
many words, usage is variable. See y. 


B. Adjectives in -ws, of the Attic Dec. II., have but two terminations; as, 
ἀγήρως (4 17), 6, ἡ εὔγεως, vd εὔγεων, fertile. For “λέως, see ὃ 135. 


y:- In (a.) words in which the Fem. has commonly a distinct form, the 
form of the Mase. is sometimes employed in its stead. And (b.), on the other 
hand, a distinct form is sometimes given to the Fem. in words in which it is 
commonly the same with the Masc. Thus, we find as feminine, 


(a.) Adjectives in -ος (particularly in Attic writers, § 74. s), δῆλος Eur. Med. 
1197, φαῦλος Id. Hipp. 435, Th. vi. 21, ἀναγκαίου Th. i. 2, κλυτός B. 742° 
Adjectives in -vs (particularly in Epic and Doric poetry), ἡδύς μ. 369, ἁδέα 
Theoc. 20. 8, ϑηλύς T. 97, πουλύν K. 27; Comparatives, Superlatives, Parti- 
ciples, and Pronouns (all rarely, except in the dual, see 3. ), ἀπορώτερος Th. γ΄. 
110, δυσεμιβολώτατος Id. 111. 101, ὀλοώσασος 3.4423 σιϑέντες Aisch. Ag. 560; 
τηλικοῦτος Soph. El. 619, Cid. C. 751. 


Xb.) ἀϑανάτη K. 404, ϑηροφόνη Theog. 11, πολυξένῶν Pind. N. 3. 3, σολυσι-. 
μήτη Ar. Pax, 978, for the common 4% iSdsave. &c. This use is especially 
epic and lyric. 


3. This use of the .masc. form for the fem. is particularly frequent in the 
dual, in which, from its limited use, the distinction of gender is least impor- 
pee as, + ὦ χεῖφξε vi. 1. 8 (the fem. form ra scarcely belongs to classic 

reek); τούτω τὼ ἡμέρα Cyr. i. 9.1}; σούτοιν δὴ τοῖν κινησίοιν Pl, Leg. 
iv * 


150 ADJECTIVES. [BOOK ἡ 


898 a; δύο σινί tovov Dia ἄρ χοντε καὶ ἄγονσε, οἷν ἱπόμεϑα"... φούφα 
Pl, Phedr. 237 d.; ἰδόντες καὶ παϑοῦσα Soph. Gd. CO. 1676; wanyives 
Θ. 455. 


§ 134. To some adjectives, feminine forms are supplied 
from a kindred or derived root. These forms may be either 
required to complete the adjective, or they may be only specia 
feminines, used (particularly in poetry and the dialects) by tle 
side of forms of the common gender (cf. § 74. ¢). The fem- 
inines thus supplied most frequently end in -ἰς G. -1d0¢, but 
also in -ac, G. -αδος, in -ειας -ειρα, &c. (for the use of δ asa 
feminine formative, see § 118). Thus, 


a. Masculines in -ης of Dec. I., and in -εὖς of Dec. IIL, have often corm 
responding feminines in -ἰς, «δος. These words are chiefly patrials and gen- 
tiles, or other personal designations, and are commonly used as substantives. 
Thus, ὁ παλίφης, -ov, belonging to a city (ϑεοὶ πολῖται Asch. Th. 253), citizen, 
ἡ πολῖσις, -ἰδὸς " ὃ ἱκέτης, ἡ ἱκέτις, suppliant; ὃ Σκύϑης, ἡ Σκύϑις, Scythian; 
6 Μεγαρεύ;, «ἕως, ἡ Μεγαρίς, Megarian. 


. β. The compounds of ἔσος, year (in -ns, -ες of Dec, 111., but sometimes in 
ns, G. -ov of Dec. I.), have often a special fem. in -ss, “δος 3 88, ὃ, ἡ terirns, 
«ὸ ἱπείτες, seven years old, and ἡ ἑπεέτις, -id0s* σὸν tien καὶ τὴν ἑξέσιν Pl. 
Leg. 794 ¢.3 τὰς φτριακονφτούφεις σπονδάς Th. i. 23, but φριακοντουτίδων σπονδῶν 
Ib. 87. 

y- Some compounds in -ns, -s; have a poetic (particularly Epic) fem. in 
ie; 88, ἠριγενής, -ts, ἡ ἠριγένειά Α. 477. So μουνογένειᾶ, ἡδνέπειώ, ϑεσσιέ- 
πειᾶ Soph. Cid. T. 468. 


3. Add ὁ, ἡ σίων, and 4 πίειρᾶ, τὸ xiov, fat; ὃ πρέσβυς, old, venerable, Fem., 
chiefly poet., πρέσβᾶ, πρέσβη, πρίσβειρᾶ, τρσδοις, πρίσβις " ὃ, ἡ μάκαρ, and 
ἡ μάκαιρἄ, blessed, poetic; ὃ, ἡ πρόφρων, and Ep. ἡ πρόφρασσᾶ K. 290, hind. 


§ 235. Irzecutar Apjsecrives. Among the adjectives 
which deserve special notice are the following. 


μέγας, great, and πολύς, much ( 20). In these adjectives, the Nom, and 
Acc. sing, masc, and neut. are formed from the roots wsya- and weAs-, accord- 
ing to Dec. III. The other cases are formed from the roots μεγαλ- and σολλ-ν 
according to Dec. I. and II. The Voc. μεγάλε occurs only Asch. Th, 822. 
From its signification, πολύς has no dual. For the Homeric inflection of #o- 
aus, see 4 20. In Herodotus, the forms from σολλός prevail throughout, yet 
not to the entire exclusion of the other forms. The Epic forms sometimes 
occur in the Attic poets. 


6 «λέως, ἡ wAid, σὸ «λέων, full. The Masc, and Neut. are formed from r. 
wra-, according to the Attic Dec. II. (§ 98); the Fem. is formed from r, 
was-. lon. «λέος, Ep. σπλεῖος, -n, τον. So, likewise, in Att. writers, the plural 
compounds ἔμπλεοι, ἔκσλεα Cyr. vi. 2. 7, περίπσλεα Th. 33. In like manner 
‘ata Pl. Pheedo, 95 a, N. pl. from ἵλεως, -w», contr. from ἵλαος, -ov. 


ὁ πρᾶος (by some written πρᾷος), ἡ πραεῖα, σὸ πρᾶον (σφᾷον), mild. In this 
adj., forms from r. xea-, of Dec. Il., and from r. wgas-, of Dec. IIL, are 
blended (see 4 20). Ion. renis. 


i, ἡ σῶς, τὸ σῶν, safe. In this adj., contract forms from r. σα- are blended 


cH, 8.1 IRREGULARs 151 


with forms from r. σω- (contr. from eao-), belonging partly to Dee. II. and 
partly to Dec. III. Thus, 


ὃ, ἡ co - 
8. N. (dos) σῶς σῶος iii. 1. 32 (σάον) σῶν 
A. (σάον) σῶν 
P.N. σῶοι, (owes) σῶς (σάα) σᾶ, σῶα 
A. σώους) (owas) σῶς 


There is also an Epic form σόος. With the above may be compared the 
Homeric Zé; E. 87, Acc. ζών II. 445, contr. from fats, ζαόν, = the common 
ζωός, ξωόν, living. 


§ 136. Remarks. 1. Some compounds of γέλως; laughter, and κέρας» 
horn, may receive either the Attic second, or the third declension ; as, φιλόγε- 
Aws, -ων, G. -w and -wros, laughter-loving, χρυσόκερως, -ων, G. -w and -wros, 
golden-horned. Shorter forms also occur, according to the common Dee. II.; 


as, δίκερον, νήκεροι, ἄκερω- 


2. Some compounds of πούς, foot, have secondary forms according to Dec. 
II. ; as, πολύπους (poet. σουλύσοφυς), many-footed, G. πολύσποδος and πολύσου " 
τρίπους, -οδος, and Ep. egies, -ov, X. 164, three-footed; Ἶρις ἀελλόπος O. 
109; ἵπποισιν ἀελλοπόδεσσιν Hom. Ven. 218. See Οἰδίπου (4 16), and 
compare ὃ 130. y. 


8. Among other examples of varied formation, we notice the Homeric ὃ ids 
B. 819, and ##s Π. 464, good, brave, «ὸ ἐδ T. 235, εὖ E. 650 (both adverbial), 
and ἠδ P. 456, Gen. ites A. 393 (cf. ὃ 121. 3), Ace. ἐόν ©, 303, and ἠδν E. 
628; Gen. pl. neut. idwy 1. 528; ὁ ἐρίηρος A. 266, trusty, Pl. ἐρίηρες, igingns, 
Γ. 47, 378; ὁ πολύῤῥηνος A. 257, rich in sheep, Pl. πολύῤῥηνες I. 154 (see also 
woavaeu below, 4.3); αἰπὺς ὄλεθρος N. 773, Ἴλιον aid O. 71, Ἴλιος αἰπεινή 
N. 773, πόλιν αἰπήν N. 625, αἰπὰ ῥέεϑρα Θ. 369, Πήδασον αἰπήεσσαν D. 87; 
ἀργῆσι Τ΄. 419, ἀργῆτα ©. 138, deyte: A. 818, ἀργέτα ᾧ. 127; ἀργύφεον Σ᾿." 
50, ἄργυφον 1.62153 πόλιν ... εὐτείχεον A. 129, πόλιν εὐτείχεα 11. 51 ; Τροίην 
ἰριβώλακα TV. 74, Τροίην ἐρίβωλον 1. 529 ; πολύτλας ε. 171, πολυφλήμων o 319, 
πολύτλητοι 2. 38; ἄς. Examples of adjectives of double formation, or of 
synonymous adjectives with different forms, might be greatly multiplied. 

4. Among defective adjectives, we notice, 

a.) The following, chiefly poetic: ὁ, ἡ Zaxeus, rd ἄδακρυ, tearless, Acc. ἄδα- 
xevy (the other cases supplied by ἀδάκρῦτος, -ov); πολύδακρυς, tearful (supplied 
in like manner by roavdexeires); ὁ πρέσβυς (for fem. see ὃ 134. δ), old, as 
subst. elder, ambassador (in the last sense G. wegéeBews Ar. Ach. 93), A. πρέσ- 
βυν, V. πρίσβυ- Pl. πρέσβεις, πρεσβῆες Hes. Sc. 245, elders, ambassadors, G. 
«πρέσβεων, D. πρίσβεσι, πρεσβεῦσιν Lyc. 1056, A. πρέσβεις, Du. πρέσβη Ar. Fr. 
495 (the plur. in the sense of ambassadors was in common use; otherwise, the 
word was almost exclusively poetic, and its place supplied by ὁ πρεσβύτης, old 
man, and ὁ σπρεσβεύφξης, ambassador); φροῦδος, -n, -ov, gone, which, with the 
Nom throughout, has only the Gen. φρούδου Soph. Aj. 264. 


B.) Poetic feminines and neuters, which have no corresponding masc.; as, 
ἡ πότνι (and sometimes πόσνα), revered, στὴν rirwiy, αἱ woruas ἡ ϑάλεια, 
τὰ ϑάλεα, blooming, rich (Hom.), ἡ Ais and λισσή (always with writen), μ.. 64, 
79, γι 293, & 412, --- λεία, fem. of λεῖος, smooth; σὸ Bei (τ. βριϑ-) Hes. ap. 
Strab. 364, = neut. of βριϑύς, heavy; «ὸ pa (τ. p¢d-) Soph. Fr. 932, = neut, 
of ῥάδιος, easy (compare with βρῖ and f¢, the neuters δῶ, κρῖ &e., ὃ 127. a); 
+ ἦρα and ἐπίηρα, pleasing (Hom.). 


152 NUMERALS. | BOOK 11 


..γ.) Poetic plurals which have no corresponding sing. ; as of ϑαμέες K. 264, 
and σαρφέες A. 387 (yet ταρφύς Asch. Th. 535), thick, frequent, ai ϑαμειαί 
A. 52, and ταρφειαΐ T. 357 (accented as if from Sapesms and σαρῷφειός), τὰ 
φσαρφέα A. 69, ἐρυσάρματες.. ἵπσσοι Il. 370; of rates A. 395, τοὺς πλέας 
B. 129 = satoves, πλέονας, more. 


δ.) Poetic oblique cases which have no corresponding Nom. ; as, τοῦ δυσδα 
paoros, unhappily wedded, Asch. Ag. 1319 5 καλλιγύναικος, having beautifur 
women, Sapph. (135), καλλιγύναικι Pind. P. 9. 181, Ἑλλάδα καλλιγύναϊκα 
B. 683; πολύαρν, Θυέστῃ B. 106; rorvrdraya ϑυμέλαν Pratin. ap. Ath. 
617 cs ὑψικέρᾶτα πέτραν Ar. Nub. 5975 χέρηος, χέρηϊ, χέρηα," also Pl. χέ: 
ents, xtena (of which χέρεια σ. 229, v. 310, is a doubtful variation), A. 80. 
Δ. 400, &c. = χείρονος, &e., worse. P 


CHAPTER IV. 


NUMERALS. 
[TT 21, 25.) 


§ 137. I. Nomerat Avsectives. Of numeral adjectives, 
the principal are, (1.) the CarpinaL, answering the question 
πόσοι; how many ὃ (2.) the OrpINAL, answering the question 
πόστος ; which in order ? or, one of how many? (3.) the Tem- 
PORAL, answering the question, moutuiog ; on what day ? or, in 
how many days? (4.) the MuttirLe (multiplex, having many 
folds), showing to what extent any thing is complicated ; and 
the ProportionaL, showing the proportion which one_ thing 
bears to another. Ae 


1. Carpinau. For the declension of the first four cardinals, 
see 121. The cardinals from 5 to 100, inclusive, are inde- 
clinable ; as, of, ai, τὰ, τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς, τοὺς, τὰς, πέντε, five. 


Those above 100 are declined like the plural of φέλιος (Ἵ 18). 


Nores. «a. Εἷς, from its signification, is used only in the singular; δύω, 
only in the dual and plural ; and the other cardinals only in the plural (except 
with coilective nouns, in such expressions as deals μυρία καὶ σετρακοσία, 
10,400 infantry, i. 7.10, ἵσσον éxraxoxsainy, 8,000 horse, Hdt. vii. 85). 
For the lialectic as well as common declens. of the first four cardinals, see { 21. 
We add references to authurs for some of the less frequent forms: ἕεις Hes, 
'Ph. 145, ἧς Theoc. 11. 33 (in some Mss.), Inscr. Heracl., ἰῷ Z. 422, οὐδαμί- 
ws (by some written οὐδαμάς) Hdt. iv. 114, δοιώ 1, 236, δυῶν Hat. i. 94, 
δυοῖσι Ib. 32, πριοῖσι Hippon. Fr. 8, σέτορες Hat. vii. 228 (Inscr. Lac.), réroge 
Hes. Op. 696, σετόρων Theoc. 14. 16, σίσυρες ε. 70, σίσυρας O. 680, σέφρασι 
Hes. Fr. 47. 5, Pind. 0. 10. 83. Dialectic forms of some of the higher 
nuuibers are, 5 σέρσε Mol., 12 δυώδεκα and δυοκαίδεκα lon. and Poety 
20 isixocs ἔρ., εἴκατι Dor., 30 σριήκοντα lon. (we even find Gen. reinxdvres 


cH. 4.] NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 158 


Hes. Op. 694, Dat σριηκόντεσσιν Anthol.), 40 σεσσερἄκοντα and σεσσερήκοντα 
Ion., σεσρώκοντα Dor., 80 ὀγδώκοντα, (δ 46. a) Ion., 90 ἐννήκοντα «. 174, 
200 διηκόσιο, Lon., 9,000 ἐννεώχτλοι B. 148, 10,000 δεκάχτλοι Ib. 


β. Εἷς has two roots, ἕν- and ys-. Its compounds οὐδείς and pndels (which, 
for the sake of emphasis, are also written separately, οὐδὲ εἷς, μηδὲ sis) have 
the masc, plur. 


y- The common form of the second cardinal is δύο, shortened from the 
regular δύω, which is by some excluded entirely from the Attic and from He- 
rodotus. The second form of the Gen. δυεῖν is only Attic, and is even ex- 
cluded from some of the best editions of good Att. writers. The Dat. pl. 
δυσί occurs Th. viii. 101. Both δύο (δύω) and ἄμφω, both (which is placed in 
{ 21,as partaking of the nature of a numeral, with that of an emphatic pro- 
noun), are sometimes indeclinable (in Hom. never otherwise) ; as, δύο μηνῶν 
Vii. 6. 1, δύο μοιράων K. 253, δύω κανόνεσσι N. 407, χερσὶν dy’ ἄμφω Hom. 
Cer. 15. 


3. For the double forms of σέσσαρες, see § 70.1. In the compounds Jexa- 
τρεῖς, τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα, and its equivalent δεκατέσσαρες, the components τρεῖς 
and φέσσαρες are declined; thus, δεκατρεῖς, dexargin, dexargiav: τοῖς τεσσαρσι- 
xaidexa. Yet we sometimes find σεσσαρεσκαίδεκα (Ion. σεσσερεσκαίδεκα), and 
even σεσσαρωκαίδεκα used as indeclinable. See Hdt. i. 86, Mem. ii. 7. 2, and 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 409. The compounds from 13 to 19 are also written sep- 
arately: τέσσαρες καὶ δέκα. So τρεῖς ys καὶ δέκα Pind. O. 1. 127, rein καὶ 
δέκα Hat. i. 119. 


ε The cardinals become collective or distributive by composition with σύν 
as, σύνδυο, two together, or two at a time, vi. 3. 2, civeges 1 429, συνδώδεκα 
Eur. Tro. 1076. The distributive sense is also expressed by means of the 
prepositions ἀνά, κατά, and, in some connections, sis and ἐπί" as, ἕξ λόχους 
ἀνὰ ἑκατὸν ἄνδρας, six companies, each a hundred men, iii. 4, 21; κατὰ TET LG 
κισχιλίους, 4,000 at a time, iii. 5. 8 5 εἰς ἑκασόν, 100 deep, Cyr. vi. 3. 28 : 
ἐπὶ τεσσάρων, four deep, i. 2. 15. 

ζ. The numeral μύριοι, 10,000, is distinguished from μυρίοι, plur. of pugias, 
vast, countless, with which it was originally one, by the accent. 


§ 238. 2. Orvrnat. The ordinal numbers are all de-’ 
rived from the cardinal, except πρῶτος, and are all declined 
with three terminations. They all end in -zo¢, except δεύτερος; 
£6douoc, and ὄγδοος. Those from 20, upwards, all end in -ootd¢. 


Notes. α- Dialectic forms are, 1 xgéros Dor., 3 τρίτατος Ep., 4 τέπρατος 
Fp., 7 ἑβδόματος Ep., 8 ὀγδόατος Ep., 9 sivaros Ep., 12 dvwdtxuros Ion. 
14 σεσσερεσκαιδέκατος Ion., 30 reinxor res Ton., &e. 


β. Instead of the compound numbers from 13 to 19 in the table ( 25), 
we also find the combinations τρίσος καὶ δέκατος, Th. v. 56; σέσαρτος καὶ 
δέκατος, Ib. 81; σέμσσος καὶ δέκατος, Ib. 83; &e. ~ Also, εἷς καὶ εἰκοστός, Th. 
viii. 109. See § 140. 1. 


3. Temporat. ‘The temporal numbers are formed from the 
ordinals, by changing the final -o¢ into -aios, -@, -ov; thus, 
δεύτερος, δευτεραῖος, -ἅ, -ov. From πρῶτος; no temporal number 
is formed. Its place is supplied by αὐϑήμερος, -ον. 


154 NUMERALS. | BooK u 
4. MuntipLe, The multiple numbers end in - πλόος, con’ 
tracted -πλοῦς, and are declined like διπλόος, διπλοῦς (T 18). 


᾿ Other forms are those in -φάσιος, chiefly Ion., as, διφάσιος, φτριφάσιος  alsq 
δισσός, recess, Lon. dukes, wets (δ 70. V.), ke. 


5. Proportional ‘The proportional numbers have double 
forms, in -πλᾶσιος, -&, -ov, and, more rarely, -πλασέων, -ον 
G. -ovog. Thus the ratio of 2 to 1 is expressed by διπλάσιος 
-a, τον, OF διπλασίων, -ov, G. -ovog* and that of 10 to 1, by δε- 
καπλάσιος ΟΥ̓ δεκαπλασίων. The ratio of 1 to 1, or of equality 
is expressed by ἴσος (Ep. ἴσος). -7, -ον. 


§ 139. Il. Nomerat Apverzs. 1. The numeral ad- 
verbs which reply to the interrogative ποσάκις ; how many 
times ? all end in -axig, except the three first; thus, δεκάκις 


ten times, ἐννεακαιεικοσικαιεπτακοσιοπλασιάκις, 129 times, Pl. Rep. 
587 e. 


These adverbs are employed in the formation of the higher 
cardinal and ordiral numbers; thus, δισχίλιοι, two thousand, 
πεντακισχιλιοφτός, five thousandth. 


2. Other numeral adverbs relate to division, order, place. 
manner, Se. 3; as, δίχα, in two divisions, τρίχα, in three divis- 
tons ; δεύτερον, secondly, τρίτον, thirdly ; τριχοῦ, in three places, 
πεντυαχοῦς. iN five places ; πενταχῶς, in five ways, ἑξαχῶς, in siz 
ways. 


ΠῚ. Numerat Svusstantives. The numeral substantives, — 
for the most part, end in -ἀς, -ἀδος, and are employed both as 
abstract and as eollective nouns. Thus, 4 μυριάς may signify, 
either the number 10,000, considered abstractly, or a collection 
of 10,000, These numerals often take the place of the eardi- 
nals, particularly in the expression of the higher numbers; as, 
ib μυριάδες, ten myriads = 100,000 ; ἑκατὸν μυριάδες, a mil- 
ion. 


§ 240. Remarks. 1. When numerals are combined, the 
less commonly precedes with καί " but often the greater without 
xai, and sometimes also with it. 


Thus, rivrs καὶ εἴκοσιν, five and twenty, i, 4.2; σεσσαράκοντα gives, forty- 
Jive, ν. 5.55; πριάκοντα καὶ πένσε, thirty and five, i. 4. 25 σταθμοὶ resis 
καὶ ivevixovra, παρασάγγαι πέντε καὶ τριάκοντα καὶ πεντακόσιοι, σσάδιοι πεντή- 
κοντα καὶ ἱξακισχίλιοι καὶ μύριοι, ii. 2.63 craSpod διακόσιοι δεκαπέντε, πα- 
ρασάγγαι χίλιοι txardy πεντήκονσᾳ gives, στάδια σρισμύρια σετρακισχίλια 
ἑξακόσια πεντήκοντα, Vil. 8. 26. See ν, 5. 4, and § 138. B. 


Nores. «.- From the division of the Greek month into decades, the days 
were often designated as follows; μηνὸς βοηδρομιῶνος ἕκπη ἰσὶ δέκα, upon the 


cH. 5.] PRONOJNS. 155 


[6th after 10] 16th of the month Boédromion, Dem. 261. 12; ἀνϑεσαηριῶνος 
ἔχσῃ tal δεκάτῃ, Id. 279. 17 ; βοηδρομιῶνος ἕκτῃ wt’ εἰκάδα, ‘ the 26th,’ Id 
265. ὅ. In like manner, reiros ys γένναν πρὸς δέκ᾽ ἄλλαισιν γοναῖς, Asch 
Prom. 773. 


β. Instead of adding eight or nine, subtraction is often employed ; as, νήες 
«οὐ μιᾶς δέουσαι πεσσαράκοντα, forty ships wanting one [40 —1 = 897, Th. 
Vili. 73 ναυσὶ δυοῖν δεούσαις πεντήκοντα [50 —2 = 48], Ib. 25 ; δυοῖν δεού- 
cas εἴκοσι ναυσί, H. Gri. 1.55 πεντήκοντα δυοῖν δέοντα ἔτη, Th. ii. 2; ἑνὸς 
δέον εἰκοσσὸν ἔπος, Id. viii. 6 (cf. ὄγδοον καὶ déxaror tros, Id. vii. 18); ἑνὸς 
δέοντος τριακοστῷ ἔσει, in the thirtieth year, one wanting, Id. iv. 102. In like 
manner, τριακοσίων ἀποδέοντα μύρια, Id. ii. 18. It will be observed, that the 
participle may either agree with the greater number, or, by a rarer construc- 
tion, be put absolute with the less. See Syntax. 

y- The combinations of fractions with whole numbers are variously ex- 
pressed ; thus, (a) τρία ἡμιδαρεικά, three half-darics, i. 6. 14 darics, i. 8. 21 
(b) Particularly in Herodotus, reiroy ἡμισάλαντον, the third talent a half one 
i. 6. 2} talents, Hdt. i. 503 ἕβδομεον ἡμιτάλαντον + τέταρτον ἡμιτάλανσον = 
φάλαντα δέκα, 64 +33 = 10, Ib. (compare in Lat. sestertius, shortened from 
semistertius): (c) Less classic, δύο καὶ ἡρίσειων μνᾶν, δύω καὶ ἥμισυ δραχμαί, 
Poll. ix. 56, 62: (d) iviegirov, a third in addition, i. 6. 14, Vect. 8. 9} ἐσί- 
πίμασον, 13, Ib.: (6) tysdrsov, half as much again, i. e. 14, i. 3. 21. 


2. The Table ({] 25) exhibits the most common numerals 
with some of the interrogatives, indefinites, diminutives, &c. 
which correspond with them. 


CHAPTER V. 


PRONOUNS. 


I. SuBSTANTIVE. 
{7 23.} ᾿ 


§ 141. Prrsonat, ἐγώ, σύ, ov. The declension of these 
pronouns is peculiar. 


The numbers are distinguished not less by difference of root, than of affix. 
Thus, the Ist Person has the roots, Sing. «-, or, as a more emphatic form, iw-, 
Pl iy-, Du. y-; the 2d Pers., Sing. ¢-, Pl. ὁμ-, Du. σφ- ; the 3d Pers., Sing. 
the rough breathing, Pl. and Du. cg. Most of the forms have a connecting 
vowel, which in the Sing. and PI. is -s- (in the Dat. sing. passing into the 
kindred -o-, § 28), but in the Du., -w-. The flexible endings are Sing. Gen. 
-ο, Dat. -i, Acc. none (the primitive Direct Case remained as Acc., while the 
Nom., in the Ist and 2d Persons, had the peculiar forms ἐγώ and σύ, and in 
the 3d, from its reflexive use, early disappeared ; compare the Lat. me, te, se ; 
ego, tu, Nom. of 3d Pers. wanting); Pl. Nom. -ss, Gen. -ων, Dat. -Iv (the 
flexible ending of the old Indirect Case, § 83), Acc. -és; Du. Nom. -ε (in the 
prolonged forms vai, σφῶϊ, the -, appears to have come from an imitation of 


156 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. [Βοοκ n 


the Gen.), Gen. ty. In all the forms in common use, the connecting vowe 
and flexible ending are contracted ; thus, iy-é-0 ἐμοῦ, o-t-0 σοῦ, ‘-8-0 οὗ - (ἔμω-ξἜ - 
ἐμ-ὅ-ι) ἐμοί, (σ-ἐ-4) σοί, (*-£-1) οἵ. ἡμ-έ-ες ἡμεῖς, ὑμ-έ-ες ὑμεῖς, (σῷ-ἐ-ε:) σφεῖς " 
ἡμ-έ-ων ἡμῶν, ὑμ-έ-ων ὑμῶν, σφ-ἔ-ων σφῶν - (ἡ -Ἔ-ἴν) ἡροῖν, (ὑμ-ἐ-ἶν) ὑμῖν (σφίσ 
exhibits a different formation without a connecting vowel) ; ἡμ-ἐ-ἂς ἡμᾶς 
bje-i-d? ὑμᾶς, oQ-t-zs σφᾶς - ν-ῶ-ε νώ, σφ-ὥ-ε σφώ (vo and σφώ are sometimes 
written incorrectly νῷ and σφῴ, as if contracted from vai, σφῶϊ, § 25. α)} 
v-i-iv νῷν, σφ-ὦ-ἵν σφῷν (σφωΐν, from its limited use, remained uncontracted) 


§ 242. Remarxs. 1. The Table ({ 23) exhibits, 1st, the common 
forms of the personal pronouns; 2d, the forms which eccur in Homer, whether 
common or dialectic; 3d, the principal other forms which occur. The forms 
to which the sign f is affixed are enclitic when used without emphasis (see 
Prosody). When the oblique cases Sing. of ἐγώ are not enclitic, the longer 
forms ἐμοῦ, tuoi, iwé are employed. 


2. The pronoun οὗ is used, both as a simple personal pronoun, and as a ‘e- 
flexive. In the Attic and Common dialects, however, it is not greatly u ed 
in either sense, its place being commonly supplied by other. pronouns. The 
plur. forms. σφεῖς and σφέα first occur in Hdt. (vii. 168, i. 46). For the lim- 
itations and peculiarities in the use of this pronoun, see Syntax. 


3. Besides the forms which are common in prose, the Attic poets also em- 
ploy, (a) the Epic Genitives ἐμέϑεν, σέϑεν, ἔϑεν « (δ) the Accusatives v/v and 
σφέ, without distinction of number or gender; (6) the Dat. pl. σφίν, which 
even occurs, though rarely, both in Attic and in other poetry, as sing, ; 
(d) the Dat. pl. of ἐγώ and σύ with the ultima short (especially Sophocles) ; 
thus, fui», duty, or ἡμῖν, duiv. See 5. below. 


4, The pIALEcriIc Forms arise chiefly, a) from want of contraction, as, 
ἐμέο, &e.; (δ) from protraction, as, ἐμεῖο, σεῖο, tho, ἡμείων, ὑμείων, σφείων 
(8 47. N.); (6) from peculiar contraction, as, ἐμεῦ, σεῦ, εὖ ὋΣ 45. 8); 
(d) from the use of different affixes, as Gen. Ep. -Sev (ἐμέϑεν, σέϑεν, ἔϑεν, 
§ 84), Dor. -ος (ἐμέος, contr. ios, tusds, πέος, contr. σεῦς, with s doubled 
rsovs, and, similarly formed, tov;) ; Dat. sing. Dor. -ν (igeiv, σεῖν, civ, ἵν}; 
(6) from the retention of primitive forms without the flexible ending, as ‘zué, 
ἄμμε, ὑμέ, ὄμμε, oft (compare the sing. ἐμέ, σέ, ἕ, and see SS 83, 86); 
(f from variation of root ; as, Dor. r- for σ- (σύ, τεῦ, roi, σέ, Lat. tu, tui, 
tibi, te, § 70..2); Bol. F- for the rough breathing (FiSey, Foi, Fi- Lat. s-: 
sui, sibi, se); Dor. ‘éu-, ABol. and Ep. auu-, for nu- (μές, ἄμροες, &e.) ; 
ol, and Ep. ὑμμ- for ‘tu- (ὄμμες, &c.) 5 Dor. y- and g-, Mol. ἀσῷ-, for σῷφ- 
(Viv, Ψέ,φίν, ἄσφι, dogs}. See Table, and 5. below. 


5. We add a few references to authors for the dialectic and poetic forms: 
ἐγών A. 76 (used by Hom. only before vowels), Ar. Ach, 748 ;Meg. , Ar 
Lys. 983 (Lac. , Theoe. 1. 14, Asch. Pers. 931, ἰώνγα (= tywyt Cor. 12, 
ἰώγα: Ar. Ach. 898; ἐμέο K. 124, Hdt. i. 126, ἐμεῖο A. 174, ἐμεῦ A. 88, 
Hdt. vii. 158, μεν A. 37, Hat. vii. 209, ἐμέθεν A. 525, Eur. Or. 986, ἔμεϑεν 
Sapph. 89; ἐμήν Theoc. 2. 144, Ar. Av. 930; ἡμέες Hat. ii. 6, ‘dats Ar. 
Lys. 168, ἄμμες Φ, 432, Theoc. 5. 67: ἡμέων I. 101, ἡμείων E. 258, 
‘a@uav Theoc. 2. 158, ἀμμέων Ale. 77; ἥμιν A. 147, Auiy or ἡμῖν, a. 344, 
Soph. Cid. T. 39, 42, 103, Ar. Av. 386, ‘zuiv Theoc. 5. 106, dupes A. 384, 
Theoc. 1. 102, ἄμμιν N. 379, Ale. 86 (15), ἄμμεσιν Alc. 91 (78); ἡμέας 
©. 211, Hat. i. 30, Fuas “. 372, ‘aut Ar. Lys. 95, ἄμμε A. 59, Sapph. 
93 (13), Theoe. 8. 25; sas Cor. 16, vai cd. 418, 11. 99 (νῶν 2), ὦ E219, 


cH. 5.] ; PERSONAL. 157 


νῶϊν X. 88: τό Ar. Lys. 1188, Sapph.°1. 13, σύνη E. 485, τού Cor. 2; oss « 
A. 396, ddt. i. 8, σεῖο T. 137, σεῦ I. 206, Hat. i. 9, σέϑεν A. 180, Eur 
Ale. 51, rtoio ©. 37, 468, reds Theoc. 2. 126, σεοῦς Theoc. 11. 255 vor A. 
28, Hdt. i. 9, vst 3. 619 (not in Π.), Hdt. v. 60 (Inser.), Ar. Av. 930, τίν 
Theoc. 2. 11, Pind. O. 10. 113 ; σέ Theoc. 1. 5, συ Theoc. 1. 56, Ar. Eq. 
1225 ; ὑμέες Hat. vi. 11, ὁμές Ar. Ach. 760, dumes A. 274, Sapph. 95 (17), 
Theoe. 5. 1115 ὑμέων H. 159, Hat. iii. 50, ὑμείων A. 348, ὑμκμέων Ale. 77 ; 
ὑμῖν or ὅμῖν, Soph. Ant. 308, gupw Δ. 249, Theoc. 1. 116, gums Z. 77, ὄμμ᾽ 
K. 551; ὑμέας β. 75, Hdt. i. 53, dé, Ar. Lys. 87, ὅμμε Ib. 1076, deus VY. 
412, Pind. O. 8. 19, Theoe. 5. 145, Soph. Ant. 846; cai A. 336, σφώ A. 
574; σφῶϊν A. 257, Ψ. 52 (here considered Nom. by some), σφῷν 3. 62: ἕο 
B. 239, sio A. 400, tei Ap. Rh. 1. 1032, εὖ Y. 464, εὖ Hat. iii. 135, ὅϑεν 
A. 114, Asch. Sup. 66, Εέϑεν Alc. 6 (71) 3 ἑοῦ N. 495, ἵν (or iv) Hes Fr. 66, 
For Sapph. 2. 1; Fs Ale. 56 (84), ἕξ Y. 171, ww A. 29, Hdt. i. 9, νιν Pind. 
O. 1. 40, Theoe. 1. 150, Aisch. Prom. 55; σῴῷεα Hat. i. 46; σῴφεων Σ. 311, Hat. 
i. 31, σφείων A. 5353; σφιν A. 73, Asch. Prom. 252, as sing. Hom. H. 19. 19, 
fEsch. Pers. 759, σῷ, B. 614, Hat. i. 1, σφ᾽ Γ. 300, Yu» Sophr. 83 (87), ou 
Cali. Di. 125, ἄσφι Sapph. 98 (40); σῴφεας B. 96, σφέας Hdt. i. 4, σφεῖας ν. 
213, σφᾶς Ki. 567, σῷε A. 111, Theoc. 15. 80, Soph. Ant. 44, Ws Thence. 4. 3, 
ἄσφε Aic. 92 (80); cOwe A. 8, cow or cow P. 531; sQwiv A. 338% ἐμέο, 
ἐμοῦς, ἐμεῦς, μεϑέν, πέος, τέο, tos, &e., cited by Apollonius in his treatise on 
the Greek Pronoun. 


ᾧ 1 Δ 38. 6. Hisrory. «. The distinction of person, like those of case and 
number (ξ 83), appears to have been at first only twofold, merely separating the ~ 
person speaking from all other persons, whether spoken to or spoken of. We 
find traces of this early use not only in the roots common to the 2d and 3d 
persons, but also in the common forms of these persons in the dual of verbs. 
The most natural way of designating one’s self by gesture is to bring home 
the hand; of designating another, to stretch it out towards him. The voice 
here follows the analogy of the hand. To denote ourselves, we naturally 
keep the voice at home as much as is consistent with enunciation ; while we 
denote another by a forcible emission of it, a pointing, as it were, of the 
voice towards the person. The former of these is accomplished by closing the 
lips and murmuring within, that is, by uttering m, which hence became the 
great root of the 1st personal pronouns. The latter is accomplished by sending 
the voice out forcibly through a narrow aperture. This, according to the place 
of the aperture, and the mode of emission, may produce either a sibilant, a . 
lingual, or a strong breathing. Hence we find all these as_ roots of the 2d 
and 3d personal pronouns. In the ‘progress of language, these two persons 
were separated, and their forms became, for the most part, distinct, although 
founded, in general, upon common roots. 


β. The μ- of the 1st Pers. passed in the old Plur. (which afterwards be- 
came the Dual, § 85) into the kindred »- (compare Lat. nos); and in the 
Sing., when pronounced with emphasis, assumed an initial 2 (compare the Aol. 
ἄσφι, ape), which passed by precession into s. In the new Plur., the idea of 
plurality was conveyed by doubling the w (aéwu-, in the Ep. and Mol. ἄμμε:, 
ὠμμέων, ἄμμιν, autor, aes); Or more commonly by doubling the ὦ to ἡ 
(§ 29), pronounced with the rough breathing (ἡμ-, in ἡμεῖς, &e.), or, in the 
Dor., to @ (‘du-, in ‘aus, ‘kav, ‘duiv, aut). From this the new Plur. of 
the 2d Pers. appears to have been formed, by changing, for propriety of ex- 
pression, a, the deepest of the vowels, into v, the most protrusive (jzu-, in the 
Ep. and ol. ὄμμες, ὑμμέων, ὕμμιν, ὄμμε " and ‘dyw-, in ὑμεῖς, ἄς.) With the 

i4 


158 PRONOUNS. — SUBSTANTIVE. [Book 11. 


excepf.on of this imitative plural, the Plur. and Du. of the 2d and 3d per- 
sons have the same root, in which plurality is expressed by joining two of the 
signs of these persons (σῷ- =¢-+F). In the separation of the two persons, 
the sign σ- became appropriated to the 2d Pers. (but in the Dor., r-, as in the 
Lat., and also in the verb-endings -rs, -rov, -tis); and the rough breathing te 
the 3d Pers. (in an early state of the language, this was F-; in Lat. it be- 
came s-; while in the article we find both the rough breathing and ¢-, and in 
verb-endings of the 3d Pers. both ¢, and more frequently ¢). 


y- In the Nom. sing., the subjective force appears to have been expressed 
by peculiar modes of strengthening; in the Ist Pers. by a double prefix to 
the ~, thus, é-y-s- (the y being inserted simply to prevent hiatus), or, as μὲ 
cannot end a word, ἐγόν, which passed, by a change of ν to its corresponding 
vowel (§ 50) and contraction, into (vow) ἐγώ (compare the Sanscrit aham, 
the Zend azem, the Beotic ἰώ, the Latin ego, and the verb-ending of the 
150 Pers. w in Greek, and o in Lat.); in the 2d Pers. by affixing F, which 
with the preceding « passed into ὅ in the common Greek (ef. § 117. N.), but 
in the Boot. into ov (compare the Lat. tu, § 12. 6); in the 3d Pers. by 
affixing A (perhaps chosen rather than F, on account of the initial F), before 
which precession took place (§ 118), so that the form became FiA, and from 
this, 7A or 7A, and, by dropping the A, 7 or 7 (this obsolete form is cited by 
Apollonius; compare the Lat. is, ea, id). With this Nom. there appears to 
have been associated an Acc. ἵν or ἤν, of which wiv and viv are strengthened 
forms. 


§ 144. B. REFLEXIveE, ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ. These 
pronouns, from their nature, want the Nom., and the two first 
also the neuter. They are formed by uniting the personal pro- 
nouns with αὐτός. 


In the Plur. of the 1st and 2d Persons, and sometimes of the 3d, the two 
elements remain distinct ; ἡμῶν αὐφσῶν, ὑμῶν αὐτῶν, σφῶν αὐτῶν = ἑαυτῶν. In 
Homer, they are distinct in both Sing. and Plur.; thus, ἔμ᾽ αὐφόν A. 271, 
ἰμέϑεν «εριδώσομαι αὐτῆς Ψ. 78, αὐσόν μιν δ. 244. In the common compound 
forms, the personal pronouns omit the flexible ending, in uniting with αὐφός, 
and in the Ist Pers., and often in the other two, contraction takes place ; 
imt-aurod iuaurod, σε-αὐυτοῦ σαυφοῦ, ἱ-αυσοῦ αὑτοῦ. In the New Ionic, on 
the other hand, the flexible ending of the Gen. is retained, and is contracted 
with ἂν into wy (§ 45. 6): ἐμεο-αὐφοῦ ἐμεωυσοῦ. The other cases imitate the 
form of the Gen. : ἐμεωυσῷ, -ὄν. The Doric forms αὐταύτω, αὔταυτον, αὐ- 
σαύτων, αὔταυτα, &c., which occur chiefly in Pythagorean fragments, are 
formed by‘@oubling αὐτός. Apollonius cites the comic Nom. iwavrss from 


the Metceci of the comedian Plato. * 


245. C. Reciprocat, ἀλλήλων. This pronoun is formed 
by doubling ἄλλος, other. From its nature, it wants the Nora. 
and the Sing., and is not common in the Dual. 


Nore. For ἀλλάλων (Theoe. 14. 46), see § 44.1. For ἀλλήλοιν (K. 65), 
see § 99. 1. 


§ 246. D. Inverinire, 6 δεῖνα. This pronoun may be 
termed, with almost equal propriety, definite and indefinite. It 
is used to designate a particular person or thing, which the 


CH. 5. ADJECTIVE. — 15y 


speaker either cannot, or does not care to name; or, in the 
language of Matthie, it ** indefinitely expresses a definite person 
or thing”; as, Tor δεῖνα γιγνώσκεις; Do you know Mr. So and 
So? Ar. Thesm. 620. ‘O δεῖνα τοῦ δεῖνος τὸν δεῖνα εἰσαγγέλλει; 
A. B., the son of C. D., impeaches E. F., Dem. 167. 24. In 
the Sing. this pronoun is of the three genders ; in the Plur. it 
is masc. only, and wants the Dat. It is sometimes indeclina- 
ble ; as, τοῦ δεῖνα Ar. Thesm. 622. 


Nore. The article is an essential part of this pronoun ; and it were better 
written as a single word, δδεῖνα. It appears to be simply an extension of the 
demonstrative ὅδε, by adding -ἐν- or -svz, which gives to it an indefinite force 
(cf. § 152. 1), making it a demonstrative indefinite. When -1- was appended, 
it received a double declension ; when -ἰνα, it had only the declension of the 
article. It belongs properly to the colloquial Attic, and first appears in Aris- 
tophanes. 


Il. ApsEcTIVE. 
[7 24.} 


§ 1477. All the pronouns which are declined in T 24 may 
be traced back to a common foundation in an old DEFINITIVE, 
which had two roots, the rough breathing and τ- (cf. § 143. 
a, 8), and which performed the offices both of an article and 
of a demonstrative, personal, and relative pronoun. 


Remarks. «a. To this definitive the Greeks gave the name ἄρϑρον, joint, 
from its giving connection to discourse, by marking the person or thing spoken 
of as one which had been spoken of before, or which was about to be spoken 
of further, or which was familiar to the mind. The Greek name ἄρθρον be- 
came, in Latin, artieulus (small joint, from artus, joint, a word of the same 
origin with Sov), from which has come the English name, article. This 
detinitive, when used as a demonstrative, or simply as the definite article, 
naturally precedes the name of the person or thing spoken of; but when 
used as a relative, usually follows it ; as, οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἀνὴρ ὃν εἶδες, this is 
THE man WHOM you saw; +d ῥόδον ὃ aySei, THE Tose wuIcH blooms. Hence, in 
the former use, it was termed the prepositive, and, in the latter, the postpositive 
article. When prepositive, it was so closely connected with the following 
word that its aspirated forms became proclitic. , 


β. In the progress of the language, the forms of this old DEFINITIVE be- 
came specially appropriated, and other pronouns arose from it by derivation 
and composition (see the following sections). The forms σός and rq of the 
Nom. sing. became obsolete. 


A. DEFINITE. 


§ 248. 1. Arricie, 6, 4,10. The prepositive article, or. 
as it is commonly termed, simply the article, unites the pro- 
clitic aspirated forms of the old definitive, ὁ. ἡ. ot, at, with the 
t- forms of the neuter, the oblique cases, and the dual, 


Nore. The forms σοί and rai are also used, for the sake of metre, euphony, 


160 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. [Book 1 


or empaasis, in the Ionic (chiefly the Epic), and in the Doric; 6. g. roi A 
447, Hat. viii. 68. 1 (where it is strongly demonstrative), Theoc. 1. 80; σα! 
I. 5, Theoc. 1.9. So, even in the Attic poets, voi δέ Asch. Pers. 423, Soph. 
Aj. 1404; σαί Ar. Eq. 1329, For the other dialectic forms, see §§ 95, 96 
99. For the forms ὁ and ¢é, see ὃ 97. 


2. RewaTive, os, 7,0. The postpositive, article, or as it is 
now commonly termed, the relative pronoun, has the orthotone 
aspirated forms of the old definitive. 


Nore. For the old Mase. ¢ dL. 835, 6. 262), as well as for the Neut. 3, 
see ὃ 97. For the reduplicated δου (B. 325) and gms (II. 208), see § 48. 


§ 249. 3. IrerativE, αὐτός, -7, -0 (§ 97). This pronoun 
appears to be compounded of the particle αὖ, again, back, and 
the old definitive τὸς (δ 147. 6). It is hence a PRONOUN OF 
RETURN (or, as it may be termed, an ¢terative pronoun), mark- 
ing the return of the mind to the same person or thing. 


Notes. a. The New Ionic often inserts ε in αὐσός and its compounds, 
before a long vowel in the affix (see § 48. 1, J 24). This belongs especially 
to Hippocrates and his imitator Areteus; in Hadt., it is chiefly confined to 
the forms in -ῳ and -wy of αὐτός and odros+ 6. 5. αὐτέῳ, a’riwy and airay, 
Hat. i. 133, αὐτίων πουτίων Ib. ii. 3. For the other dialectic forms of αὐτός, 
see §§ 95, 96, 99. 

B. The article and αὐτός are often united by crasis (§ 39) ;*as, αὑτός, 
φσαὐτόν (8 97. N.) or ταὐτό (Ion. τωὐφςό Hdt. i. 53, § 45. 6), ταὐφοῦ, ταὐτά, 
for ὁ αὐτός, τὸ αὐτό, τοῦ αὐτοῦ, TX αὐτά. 

§ 150. 4. Demonsrrative. The primary demonstratives 
are οὗτος, this, compounded of the article and avré¢* ὅδε, this, 
compounded of the article and δὲ (an inseparable particle mark- 
ing direction towards), and declined precisely like the article, 
with this addition ; and ἐκεῖνος, that, derived from ἐκεῖ, there. 


Nore. Of ἐκεῖνος (which, with ἄλλος, other, is declined like αὐσός, ὃ 97) 
there are also the forms, Ion. κεῖνος, which is also common in the Att. poets, 
Ziol. κῆνος Sapph. 2. 1, Dor. σῆνος Theoc. 1.4. In the Epic forms of ὅδε, 
φοΐσδεσι 0. 93, σοΐσδεσσι K. 462, roicdscow β. 47, there is a species of double 
declension. 


Remarks. α. The definitives τοῖος, such, τόσος, so great, 
τηλίκος, so old, and τύννος, so little, are strengthened, in the 
same manner as the article, by composition with αὐτός and δὲ" 
thus, τοιοῦτος and τοιόσδε, just such, τοσοῦτος and τοσόσδε, just 
so much, τηλικοῦτος and τηλικόσδε, τυννοῦτος. ‘These compound 
pronouns are commonly employed, instead of the simple, even 
when there is no special emphasis. 


8. In declining the compounds of αὐτός with the article and 
adjective pronouns, the following rule is observed : — If the ter- 
mination of the article or adjective pronoun has an O vowel, tt 


en. ὅ.] DEFINITE. -- INDEFINITE. 162 


unites with the first syllable of αὐτός, to form ov; but is other- 
wise absorbed, 


. Thus, (ὁ αὐπός) οὗτος, (ἡ αὐτή) αὕτη, (τὸ abrd) τοῦτο. G. (rod αὐτοῦ) «οὐ 
του, (τῆς αὐτῆς) ταύτης « Pl. (οἱ αὐτοί) οὗτοι, (αἱ αὐταί) αὗται, (τὰ αὐτά) 
cara: G. (τῶν αὐσῶν) τούτων (YJ 24)" (τόσος αὐτός) τοσοῦτος, (τόση αὐτή) 
φοσαύτη, (πόσον airs) ποσοῦσο and σοσοῦσον (§ 97. N.) 


γ. To demonstratives, for the sake of stronger expressi n, 
an ¢ is affixed, which is always long and acute, and before 
which a short vowel is dropped, and a Jong vowel or diphthong 
regarded as short ; thus, οὑτοσί, αὑτῆϊΐ, τουτί, this here; Pl. ov- 
toll, avtoil, ταυτί " ἐκεινοσί, that there; 601, tovovtovi. 


Nore. This s paragogic is Attic, and belongs especially to the style of con- 
versation and popular discourse. It was also affixed to adverbs ; as, οὑτωσί, 
wi, νυνί, ἐνταυϑί, ἐντευϑενί. So, in comic language, even with an inserted 
particle, νυνμέενί Ar. Av. 448, ἐνγεταυϑί Id. Thesm. 646, ἐνμεντευθενί Ath. 
2 


§ L&I. 5. Possessive. The possessive pronouns are de-| 
rived from the personal, and are regularly declined as adjec 
tives of three terminations. 


We add references for the less common possessives: νωΐσερος, O. 39; cQwi- 
σερος, A. 216, in Ap. Rh. = σφέτερος, 1. 643, 2. 544; ὅς, Γ΄. 333, Hat. ic 
205, Soph. Aj. 442; ἁμός or ἀμός, Ζ. 414, Pind. O. 10. 10, Theoe. 5. 108, 
isch. Cho. 428 (used particularly in the Att. poets as sing.) ; d&uéregos, 
Theoc. 2. 31; gupos, Alc. 103; ἀμμέτερος, Alc. 104 ; σέος, γι 122, Aisch. 
Prom. 162 5 duds, a. 375, Pind. P. 7. 153; ἕός, a 409, Theoc. 17.50; σφός, 
A. 534; Fos (= ὅς), demos, cited by Apollonius. For the use of the posses- 
sives, particularly ὅς, its, σφέτερος, σφό:, and σφωΐτερος, see Syntax. 


B. INDEFINITE. 


§ £232. 1. The simpre mnDEFINITE is tic, which has two 
roots, τιν- and te-, both appearing to be formed from r-, the 
root of the article, by adding -.»- and -s- to give an indefinite 
force (cf. § 146. N.). 


Remarks. «a. The later root σιν- is declined throughout after Dec. III., but 
the earlier rs- only in the Gen. and Dat., after Dec. II. (except in the Gen. 
Sing., which imitates the personal pronouns) with contraction ; thus, cis, σ΄, 
tives, tici, ὅσο. (δ 105. 8); G. τέο τοῦ, Ὁ. τέῳ τῷ, and, in the compound, 
Pl. G. drewy ὅσων, D. srtcios ὅτοισι (also Ion. σέων, τέοισι, § 153. y). For the 
aceentuation, and the forms érra, ἄσσα, see 2. below, and ὃ 153. a. 


B..The short « of sis, r7ci, and the omission of » in σῇ, suggest an inter- 
mediate root r-, formed from ¢s- by precession, and afterwards increased by 
ν fef. 8. 119, and gous, § 123. 7). To this intermediate root may be referred, 


according to Dec. II., the Mol. viv; Sapph. 55 (34), «ίοισιν Id. 109 (113). 


2. The inrerrocattves in Greek are simply the indefinites 
with a change of accent (see Syntax). 
4% 


162 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS | Book It 


Thus, the forms of the indefinite <i; (except ths peculiar érra, which is 
rarely used except in connection with an adjective, and which is never used 
interrogatively) are enclitic; while those of the interrogative ris are orthotone, 
and never take the grave accent. In lexicons and grammars, for the sake of 
distinction, the forms of the indefinite, σὴς and «ἡ, are written with the grave 
accent, or without an accent. 


§ 153. 3. The composition of ὃς with ric forms the RELATIVE 
INDEFINITE ὅστις, whoever, of which both parts are declined in 
those forms whigh have the root rv-, but the latter only i in those 
which have the root re-; thus, οὗτινος, but ὅτεο ὅτου ͵ The 
longer forms of the Gen. and Dat. are very rare ih the Attic 
poets. 


Norrs. a. The forms deca, Att. ὥττα (§ 70. 1), appear to be shorter 
forms of drive, and are said by Eustathius to be compounded of ἅ and the 
Dorie σά = rive. In certain connections, they passed into simple indefinites, 
‘and then, by a softer pronunciation, became ἄσσα, ἄττα. 


β. The forms which occur in Homer of ¢is, ris, and ὅτις, which is the same 
with ὅσαις, except that it has no double declension, are exhibited in J 24. 
Homer has also the regular forms of ὅσσις. The doubling of ¢ in some of 
the forms is simply poetic, for the sake of the metre. 


y- References are added for many of the forms of τὴς, τίς, and ὅσαις : ὅτις 
I. 279 (ὅσαις 167), ὅ ers Θ. 4085 σου Cyr. viii. 5. 7, rod ; Soph. Cd T. 
1435, grou i. 9. 21, reo x. 305, Hat. i. 58, τέο; B. 225, ὅσσεο α. 124, σευ 
(8 45. 3) B. 388, Hat. i. 19, red Σ. 192, Hdt. v. 106, ὅτευ e- 422, Hdt. i. 
119, drrev ρ. 1215; ey A. 299, i. 9. 7, σῷ, Soph. El. 679, ὅσῳ ii. 6. 23, 
σεῳ Hat. ii. 48, σέῳ; Hdt. i. 117, Seem B. 114, Hat. i. 95, ὅτεῳ M. 428; 
ὅσινα 9. 204 (ὅντινα B. 188); οἰκσρὰ ἄττα Cyr. ii. 2. 13, ὁσσοῖ᾽ ἄσσα vr, 
218, drra Rep. Ath. 2. 17, deca A. 554, Hdt. i. 138, drive Χ, 450 (ἅτινα 


A. 289); σεων Hdt. v. 57, τέων; 0. 387, rim; ν. 200, ésriwy x. 39, Hat. 


viii. 65, ὅσων vii. 6. 24 : σέοισ, Hat. ix. 27, ἑφίοισιν O. 491, értoos Hat. ii. 
82, ὅτοισι Soph. Ant. 1335 5 srivas O. 492 (otorwas Δ. 240). 


§ £34, Remarks, 1, Adjective Pronouns which have not been 
specially mentioned are regularly declined as adjectives of three terminations 
(8.138. 4). For the Correlative Pronouns, and for the Particles which are 
affixed te pronouns, see 4 63, §§ 317, 328. 


2. Special care is required in distinguishing the forms of ὁ, ὅς, οὗ, ris, and 
vis. Forms which have the same letters may be often distinguished by the 
accentuation; as, οἱ, of, of. Special eare is also required in distinguishing the 
ferms of οὗτος, those of airts. the combined forms of ὁ αὐσός, the same, and 
the contracted forms of ἑαυτοῦ. 


cH. 6.] COMPARISON. 163 


CHAPTER VI. 
COMPARISON. 


155. Apvsectives and Apverss have, in 
Greek, three degrees of comparison, the Positive, 
the CompaRaATIVE, and the SUPERLATIVE. 


I. CompaRIsoN oF ADJECTIVES. 


In adjectives, the comparative is usually formed 
in -τερος, -&, -ov, and the superlative in -tatos, -n, 
τον ; but sometimes the comparative*is formed in 
-iav, -tov, Gen. -iovos, and the superlative, in -totos, 
τῇ; τον. 

A. CoMPARISON IN -τερος, -τατος. 

ἢ 156. In receiving the affixes -τερος and 
-tatos, the endings of the theme are changed as 
follows ; 


1.) -os, preceded by a long syllable, becomes 
-o-; by a short syllable, -a-; as, 


κοῦφος, light, κουφότερος; κουφότατος. 
σοφός, Wise, F σοφώτερος; σοφώτατος. 
REMARKS. a. This change to -w- takes place to avoid the succession of 
too many short syllables. Three successive short syllables are inadmissible in 
hexameter verse. We also find, for the sake of the metre, κακοξεινώσερος 
υ. 376, λᾶρῴτατος B. 350, ὀϊζυρώτερον P. 446, ὀϊζυρώτατον ς. 105. In respect 
to κενός, empty, and σαενός, narrow, authorities vary. 


β. A mute and liquid preceding -o¢ have commonly the same effect asa 
long syllable ; as, σφοδρός, vehement, σφοδρόσερος, σφοδρότατος. Yet here, also, 
the Attic poets sometimes employ -w- for the sake of the metre; as, δυσσο- 
τμώσερα Eur, Ph. 1348, βαρυποτμωτάτας Ib. 1345, εὐτεκνώτατσε Id. Hec. 620. 


y. In a few words, -o¢ is dropped; and, in a few, it becomes 
-a-, -80-, OF -10- 3 as, 


παλαιός. ancient, παλαΐτερος, παλαΐτατος. 
φίλος. dear, φίλτερος, φίλτατος. 
friendly, pihaitegoc, φιλαίτατος. 
ἔσυχος, quiet, ἡσυχαΐτερος. ἡσυχαΐτατος. 
ἐῤῥωμένος, strong, ἐῤῥωμενέστεροςς ἐῤῥωμενέστατος. 


λάλος, talkative, ὡ λαλέστερος, λαλίστατος. 


164 COMPARISON. [Book fi. 


Nores. (a.) Yet also rarasoregos, Pind. N. 6. 91, φιλώπερος, Mem. iii. 11 
18, φιλίων (§ 159) w. 268, φίλισεος, Soph. Aj. 842, ἡσυχώτερος, Id. Ant. 1089 


(b.) The change of -ος into -εσ- belongs particularly to contracts in -oos 
These contracts, and those in -ses, are likewise contracted in the Comp. and 
Sup. ; as, : 


ἁπλόος, simple, ἁσπλοέίσσερος, ἁπλοίστατος, 
ἁσ λοῦς, ; ἁσλούστερος, ἁπλούστατος 
πορφύρεος, purple, MoePueewreoos, πορφυρεώτατος, 
πορφυροῦς, πορφυρώφερος, πορφυρώτατος- 


But ἀπλοώτερος, less fit for sea, Th. vii. 60, εὐχροώσερος, Cc. 10. 11, εὖ 
πνοώτερος, Eq. 1. 10, &. 


(c.) Other examples of -ος dropped in comparison are γεφαιός, old, σχο- 
λαῖος, ut leisure; οἵ -ος changed to -αἰ-, εὔδιος, clear, ἴδιος, private, ἴσος, equal 
μέσος, middle (see δ. below), ὄρϑριος, at dawn, ὄψιος, late, πρώϊος, early; of -os 
changed to -ec-, aidoies, august, dxedros, unmixed, ἄσμενος, glad, ἄφϑονος͵ 
bountiful, ἐπίσεδος, lgvel, εὔζωρος, pure, ndvuos, sweet (poet.); of -os changed to 
-ἰσ-γ μονοφάγος, eating alone, ὀψοφάγος, dainty, πτωχός, poor. 

3. Mécos and νέος have old superlatives of limited and chiefly poetic use in 
τατος ; thus, μέσατος, midmost, Ar. Vesp. 1502, Ep. wiccaros, O. 223, viaras, 
last, lowest, A. 712, Soph. Ant. 627, Ep. veiaros, B. 824. Compare ἔσλχ eros, 
(σφόαςος) πρῶφος, and ὕπατος (8 161. 2). 


ἢ 157. 2.) -εἰς and -ης become -eo-; as, 


χαρΐεις, agreeable, χαριέστερος; χαριέστατος. 
σαφής. evident, σαφέστερος᾽ σαφέστατος. 
πένηςγ) poor, πενέστερος; πενέστατος. 


Remark. In adjectives of the first declension, and in ψευδής, -ns becomes 
-ig-5 85, πλεονέκτης, -ov, covetous, rAtovexticraros* ψευδής, -ἔος, fulse, ev 
δίσσατος. Except, for the sake of euphony, ὑβριστής, -οὔ, insolent, ὑβριστόφε 
eos V. 8. 3, ὑβριστότατος, Ib. 22 (referred by some to ὕβρισαος). 


3.) -us becomes -v-; as, 


πρέσβυς, old, πρεσβύτερος, πρεσβύτατος. 
For {π| 5 of the metre, ἰϑύντατα Σ. 508. 


§ 158. 4.) In adjectives of other endings, 
-tegos and -tatos are either added to the simple 
root, or to the root increased by -éo-, -to-, or τῶω- 
as, 


τάλας, -avoc, wretched, ταλάντερος, ταλάντατος. 
oupeests -0V06, discreet, σωφρονέστερος, σωφρονέστατος. 
ἅρπαξ, -αγος, rapacious, ἁρπαγίστατος. 


ἐπίχαρις, -ἰτος» pleasing, ἐπιχαριτώτερος, ἐπιχαριτώτατος. 


Norrs. a. Other examples are μάκαρ, blessed, μακάρτατος A. 483; μέλαι 
- 


cn. 6.] , ADJECTIVES. 165 


-avos, black, μελάνσερο:, A. 277, and μελανώσερος, Strab.; ἀφῆλιξ, -ἰκος, elder- 
ly, ἀφηλικέστερος " βλάξ, -ἄκός, stupid, βλακώπερος, -wraros, Mem. iii. 13. 4, 
iv. 2. 40, for which some read βλακότερος, and βλακότατος or βλακίστατος 
From ἄχαρις, disagreeable, we find the shorter form éyaglorsgos, v. 392. 


B. The insertion of -s¢- is particularly made in adjectives in -w». Yet some 
of these employ shorter forms ; as, πέπων, ripe, πεπαίτερος (isch. Fr. 244 ; 
πίων, fat, wioregos, Hom. Ap. 48, πιότατος, I. 577 (as from the rare ries, 
Orph. Arg. 508) ; rate Sorgetful, ἐσιλησμόφατος, Ar. Nub. 790 (ἐσιλη- 
σμονέσσερος, Apol. 6). 


B. CoMPaRISON IN -fwy, -ἰστος. 


"δ 159. A few adjectives are compared by 
changing -vs, -as, -os, and even “905, final, into -ἔων 
and -cotos. In some of these, -ίων with the pre- 
ceding consonant passes into -oowy {-ττων, ὃ 70. 1) 
or -fav. ‘Thus, 


ἡδύς, pleasant, ἡδίων, ἥδιστος. 
ταχύς, 5:01} ϑάσσων, ϑάττων, τάχιστος. 
πολύς, much, πλείων, πλέων, πλεῖστος. 
μέγας, great, μείζων, : μέγιστος. 
καλός, beautiful, καλλίων, : καλλιστος. 
αἰσχρός, base, αἰσχίων, αἴσχιστος. 
ἐχϑρός, hostile, ἐχϑίων, ἔχϑιστος. 


Remarks. a. For the declension of comparatives in ων, see 17 and 
§ 107. The, in the affix -iwy is long in the Attic poets, but short in the 
Epic, and variable in the later. 


6. The forms in -σσων and -ζων observe this distinction: -σσων can arise 
only when the consonant preceding -iwy is x, y, τ) 3, or $3 -ζων, only when 
this consonant is y. The vowel preceding becomes long by nature, perhaps 
from a transposition, and absorption or contraction, of the « Thus, σἄχύς 
(originally Saxds, ὃ 62), ϑαχίων ϑάσσων, Neut. ϑᾶσσον (the regular rayviwy is 
also common in late prose) ; ἐλᾶχύς (Epic; ἐλάχεια Hom. Ap. 197), small, 
ἐλάσσων" πᾶχύς, thick, rayiwy (Arat.) πάσσων, ζ. 230; from τ. 4x-, Comp. 
ἥσσων, inferior (Ion. ἕσσων, Hdt. v. 86); γλῦκύς, sweet, γλυκίων (2. 109) 
γλύσσων, Xenophan.; μακρός, long, μᾶσσων poet., 9. 203, AEsch. Ag. 598; 
κρᾶτύός (Epic, II. 181), strong, κρείσσων (Ion. κρέσσων, Hat. i. 66) ; βρᾶδύς, 
slow, βραδίων (Hes. Op. 526) βράσσων K. 226; βᾶϑύς, deep, βαϑίων (Tyrt. 
3.6) βάσσων, Epicharm. ; μέγας (the only adj. in -ας compared in -iwy, -scrs ), 
μεγίων μείζων (lon. μέζων Hat. i. 202) : ὀλίγος, ὀλίζων, Call. Jov. 72 (ὑπο- 
λίζονες Σ. 519). It will be observed that many of these comparatives are 
merely poetic. Compare the formation of verbs in -σσω and «ζω. 


y- The root of πολύς is roat-, by syncope ras-. From this short root are 
formed ‘the comparative and superlative. λέων is a yet shorter form for 
πλείων. The longer form is more common in the contracted cases and plural, 
but the neut. σλέον is more used than πλεῖον, especially as an adverb. Tha 
neut. πλεῖον sometimes becomes πλεῖν, but only in such phrases as σλεῖν ἢ μύ- 
eet, more than ten thousand. The Ionic contracts -so- into -sv- (§ 45. 3) ; as, 


166 COMPARISON. [BOoK Ir 


φλεῦν, WAsdves, πλεῦνες, ὥς. Hdt. ii. 19, i. 97, 199, ἄς. The Ep. «λές, 
A. 395, and πλέας B. 129, are comparative in sense, though positive in form 


3. In the Comp. and Sup. of καλός, a is doubled, as in the noun σὰ κάλλος 
-tos, beauty. In the adjectives in -gos which are compared in -iwy and -σσος, 
the Comp. and Sup. appear to have come either from a simpler form of the 
positive, or from a corresponding noun. See § 161. R. 


s- Most adjectives which are compared as above have also forms in -regos 
and -raros; thus, βραδύς, slow, βραδύτερος, βραδίων, and βράσσων, βραδύτατος, 
βράδισαος, and by poetic metath.(§ 71), βάρδισεος, ¥. 310; μακρός, long, μα- 
κρόσερος and μάσσων, μακρότατος and (ὦ becoming by precession ἡ, as in the 
noun +d μῆκος, -c0s, length) μήκισσος, Cyr. iv. 5. 28, Dor. waxes, Soph 
(Ed. T. 1301. Other examples of double formation are αἰσχρός, ix Seis, ἐν- 
beds (poet.), renowned, οἰκαρός, pitiable, βαϑύς, βραχύς, short, γλυκύς, παχύς, 
πρισβύς, ταχύς, ands, swift, κακός (§ 160), φίλος (§ 156. a), &e. 


C. Irrecutar Comparison. 


ᾧ 160. Some adjectives in the comparative and superla- 
tive degrees are formed from positives which are not in use, 
from words which are themselves comparatives or superlatives. 
or from other parts of speech. Some of these are usually re 
ferred to positives in ‘use, which have a similar signification 
and some of which are also regularly compared ; thus, 


ἀγαϑός, good, ἀμείνων, ἄριστος. 
βελτίων, βέλτιστος. 
κρείσσων, κρείττων, κράτιατος. 
λῴων, λῷστος. 


Poet. ἀμεινόσερος Mimn. 11. 9; ἀρείων Misch. Ag. 81, ἀρειόσερος, Theog. 
548; βέλτερος, Asch. Th. 837, βέλσασος, Id. Eum. 487; φέρσερος, Id. Pr 
768, φέρτατος H. 289, φέρισσος, Soph. Cid. T. 1159, and even Pl. Phedr 
238 ἃ, φέρσισσος, Pind. Fr. 92; λωΐων, B. 169, λωΐσερος, a 376 (the pos, 
form Awia occurs Theoc. 26. 32); xéerioros, A. 266 (8 71; so always in 
Hom.). Dor. Bivewros, Theoc. 5. 76, κάῤῥων, Tim, ap.. Pl. 102 ἃ ; Ion 
κρέσσων (§ 159. 8), Late ἀγαϑώτατος, Diod. 16, 85, 


ἀλγεινός, painful, ἀλγέων, ἄλχιστος. 
ἀλγεινότερος, ἀλγεινότατος. 
κακὸς, bad, κακΐων, κάκιστος. 
χείρων, χείριστος. 
a 


ἥσσων, ἥττων. 

Poet. χακώσερος, ο. 343; χειρόσερος, O. 518, χερείων A. 114, χερειόσερον 
1 248 (for the Epic χέρηος, &e., which, though positive in form, are come 
p --- tive in sense, see ὃ 136. δ); dxsoros or ἤκισεος Y. 531 (ἥκιστα as an ad- 
verbwas common in Attic prose; Ailian uses ἥκισσος as an adj.), Ion. ἕσσων 
(§ 159. β). | 

P J μικρότερος μικρότατος. 
Th 96+ hit rae ἐλάσσων, ἐλάττων, ἐλάχιστος. 
te Si Pe ete μείων, ολέίγιστος. 


va. 6.} ADJECTIVES. 167 


Poet. ἐλαχύς, ὀλίξων (§ 159. B) 5; μειόσερος Ap. Rh. 2. 368, oi Bion, 
5. 10 (yet common reading μεἤονα)» 


ὅάδιος, easy, ὅψων, ; Gatos. 

Poet. fnidios, A. 146, ῥήδιος, Theog. 574, ῥηΐσερος, Σ. 258, ῥῴτερος Pind. O. 
8. 78, ῥήϊστος, ὃ. 565, ῥάϊσεος, Theoc. 11. 7, putrares, “. 577. The common 
foundation of the forms of this word appears- to-have been jai A- (see §§ 118, 
119). 


§ 261. 1. Examples of double comparison. 

ἔσχατος, last, extreme, boxararsgos (Odes γὰρ τοῦ ἐσχάτου ἰσχατώτιρεν εἴη 
ἂν vi. Aristl. Metaph, 10. 4), ἐσχατώτατος, H. Gr. ii, 3. 49. 

πρότερος, before, comic προτεραίσερος Ar. Eq. 11645 

KA. “Opis ; ἐγώ σοι πρότερος ἰκφέρω δίφρον. 
ΑΔ. ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐ τράπεζαν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγὼ προτεραίσερος, 

«πρῶτος, first, πρώτισσος, first of all, B. 228. 

. ἐλάχισφος, least, ἐλαχιστόσερος, less than the least, Ep. Ephes. 3. 8. 

Nore. See also examples of a poetic double formation of the Comp. 
(ἀμεινόσερος, ἀρειότερος, &c.) in ὃ 160. For xaaamregov Th. iv. 118, is now 
read κχκάλλτζον. 

2. Examples of adjectives in the comparative and superla- 
tive degrees, formed from other parts of speech. 

βασιλεύς, king, Bacirsirseos, more kingly, a greater king, 1. 160, βασιλεύτα- 
eos, the greatest king, 1. 69. 

iraipos, friend, traisraros, best friend, Pl. Gorg. 487 ἃ. 

κλίστης, thief, xrtaricraros, most adroit thief, Ar. Plut. 27. 

κύων, dog, κύντερος, more dog-like, more impudent, ©. 483, xdvrares, K. 503. 

alebes, +805, gain, κερδίων, more gainful, I’, 41, xigdieros, Aisch, Pr. 385. 

_ αὐτός, himself, αὐτότερος Epich. 2 (1), abrérares (ipsissumus Plaut. Trinum, 
ty. 2), Ais very self, Ar. Plut. 83. 

ἄγχι OF ἄγχου, near, ἀγχότερος, nearer, Hat. vii. 175, dyxsraros, Eur. 
Pel. p>) oftener BY KITTS Soph. (Ed. Tt 919, 

ἄνω, Up, ἀνώτερος, upper, ἀνώτατος, uppermost, Hat. ii. 125. 

ἠρέμα, quietly, ἠρεμέσπερος, more quiet, Cyr. vii. 5. 63. 

wAnciov, near (“«λησίος poet. and Ion.), ranciwirsgos i. 10. 5, ““λησιαίσασος, 
vii. 3. 29, also rancitorsgos, -icraros. 

πεοὔργου, of importance, προὐργιαίσερος, more important, Pl. Gorg. 458 ¢ 
«ροὐργιαίτατος. 

ἐξ, out of, ἔσχατος, extreme. 

700, bbe πρότερος, former, πρῶτος (§ 156. δ), first (Dor. πρῶσος Theoe. 
8. 5, § 45. 1). . 

ὑπέρ, μ᾿; ὑσέρπερος, superior, ὑπέρσατος and iravos, supreme (iaspararssy 
Pind. ἢ N. 8. 73). 

ὑπό (Ὁ), ὕσσερος, later, ὕστατος, last. 

Remarks. We find an explanation of these formations in the use of prep- 
ositions as adverbs, and of adverbs as adjectives ; in the fact that many nouns 


168 COMPARISON. | BOOK 11. 


are originally adjectives; and in the still more important fact, that in the 
earliest period of language there is as yet no grammatical distinction of the 
different parts of speech. For other examples of comparatives and superla- 
tives which appear to be formed from nouns, see, in ὃ 160, ἀλγίων, -ἰσσος 
(from ἄλγος, -ἐος, pain), and ἄριστος (like ἀρεσή, from “Agns or a common 
root, and signifying originally best in war), and also ὃ 159.3, +. Add the 
poetic κήδιστος, 1. 642, ῥιγίων, -ἰσπσος, A. 325, E. 873, fixers, Ap. Rh. 1. 
170, puyoiraros Φ. 146, ὁσλόσερος, -rares, B. 707, Hes. Th. 137, &c.; and, 
from adverbs, ὀσίσσερος, -raros, O. 342, rapoiregos, -τατος, ¥. 459, Ap. Rh. 
2. 29, ὑψίπερος, Theoc. 8. 46, ὑψίων, Pind. Fr. 232, dyioros, Alsch. Pr. 
720, &e. 


II. Comparison or ADVERBS. 


§ 162. I. Adverbs derived from adjectives are 
commonly compared by taking the neuter singular 
comparative, and the neuter plural superlative of 
these adjectives ; as, 


σοφῶς (from σοφός, § 156), σοφώτερον, σοφώτατα;, 
wisely, more wisely, most wisel. - 
σαφῶς (from σαφής, ὃ 157), σαφέστερον, σαφέστατα, 
clearly, ᾿ more clearly, most clearly. 
ταχέως (from ταχύς, § 159), ϑᾶσσον, ϑᾶττον, τάχιστα. 
αἰσχρῶς (from αἰσχρός, ᾧ 159), αἴσχτον, αἴσχιστα. 


Nore. The adverbial termination -ως is sometimes given to the Comp. 
88, χαλεπωτίρως, more severely, ἐχιϑιόνως, in a more hostile manner. So Sup. 
ξυντομωφσάτως, most concisely, Soph. Cid. C. 1579. 


§ 163. II. Adverbs not derived from adjec- 
tives are, for the most part, compared in -tég@ and 
«τάτω ; aS, 

ἄνως Up, ἀνωτέρω, ἀνωτάτω. 
ἑχάς, afar, ἑκαστέρω; ἑκαστάτω. 


ἘΕΜΆΈΚΒ, «a. The following are compared after the analogy of adverbs 
derived from adjectives : : 
ἄγχι OT ἀγχοῦ, near, ὥσσον, ἄγχιστα. 
μάλα, very, μᾶλλον, μάλισσα. 
So πρωΐ, early, and ὀψέ, late, employ forms of the adjectives σιρώϊος, ὄψιος 
§ 156. c), derived from them. In ἀσσοτέρω ρ. 572, we have a poetic double 
form (§ 161. N.). 


β. Some adverbs vary in their comparison ; as, 


ἰγγύς, near, ἐγγυτέρω, ἰγγυτάτω. 
ἰγγύφερον, ἐγγύτατα. 
(Not Att.) ἔγγιον, ἔγγιστα. 


cH. 7.| CONJUGATION. 169 


CHAPTER VII. 
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION. 


§ 164. Verbs are conjugated, in Greek, to 
mark five distinctions, Voice, ‘Tense, Mopr, Num- 
BER, and Person. Of these distinctions, the first 
shows how the action of a verb is related to its 
subject ; the second, how it is related to time; and 
the third, how it is related to the mind of the 
speaker, or to some other action. ‘The two remain- 
ing distinctions merely show the number and person 
of the subject. 


Greek verbs are conjugated both by Prertxres and by Arrrxes. For the 
prefixes, see Ch. VIII.; for the affixes, see YJ 28 -- 81, and Ch. IX.; for 
the modifications which the root itself receives, see Ch. X. 


A. Voice. 


§ 165. The Greek has three voices, the Ac 
TIVE, the MippLe, and the Passive. 


The Active represents the subject of the verb as the doer 
of the action, or its agent; as, dovw τινά, I wash some one. 


The Passive represents the subject of the verb as the re- 
ceiver of the action, or its object ; as, λοῦμαι ὑπό τινος, I am 
washed by some one. 


The Mippte is intermediate in sense between the Active and 
the Passive, and commonly represents the subject of the verb 
as, either more or less directly, both the.agent and the ob- 
ject of the action; as, ἐλουσάμην, I washed myself, I bathed. 


§ 2166. Remarks. 1. The middle and passive voices 
have acommon form, except in the Future and Aorist. In 
Etymology, this form is usually spoken of as passive. And 
even in the Future and Aorist, the distinction in sense betweer. 
the two voices is not always preserved. 


2. The reflexive sense of the middle voice often becomes so 
indistinct, that this voice does not differ from the active in its 
use. Hence, in many verbs, either wholly or in part, the 
middle voice takes the place of the active. This is particu- 

15 


170 CONJUGATION. — TENSE. | BOOK 11. 


larly frequent in the Future. When it occurs in the theme 
(§.170. «), the verb is termed deponent (deponens, laying aside 
sc. the peculiar signification of the middle form). Εἰ. g. 

(a.) Verbs, i in which the theme has the active, and the Future has the mid- 
dle form: ἀκούω, to hear, ἀκούσομαι" Baivw, to go, βήσομιαι " γιγνώσκω, to 
know, γνώσομαι" sini, to be, ἔσομοαι " μανθάνω, to learn, μιαθήσορεαι. 

(β.) Deponent Verbs: αἰσθάνομοαι, to perceive, γίγνομαι, to become, dtxouas, 
te receive, δύναμαι, to be able, ἥδοροαι, to rejoice. 


Nore. A Deponent Verb is termed deponent middle, or deponent passive, 
according as its Aorist has the middle or the passive form. 


B. TEnNseE. 


§ 167. The Greek has six tenses; the Pres- 
eNT, the Imperrect, the Future, the Aorist, the 
Perrect, and the PLurERFEct. 


1. The Present represents an action as doing at the present 
time ; as, γράφω, I am writing, I write. 


2. The Imperrect represents an action as doing at some 
past time ; as, ἔγραφον, I was writing. 


3. The Furvre represents an action as one that will be done 
at some future. time ; as, γράψω, I shall write. 


4. The Aorist (ἀόριστος, indefinite) represents an action 
simply as done; as, tygapa, I wrote, I have written, I had 
written. 


5. The Perrect represents an action as complete at the pres- 
ent time ; as, γέγραφα, I have written. 


6. The PLuperect represents an action as complete at some 
past time ; as, ἐγεγράφειν, I had written. 


§ 168. Tenses may be classified in two ways; I. with 
respect to the time which is spoken of; II. with respect to the 
recation which the action bears to this time. 


I. The time which is spoken of is either, 1. present, 2. fu- 
ture, or 3. past. 

The reference to time is most distinct in the Indicative. In this mode, 
those tenses which refer to present or future time are termed primary or chief’ 
tenses, and those which refer to past time secondary or historical tenses. 


II. The action is related to the time, either, 1. as doing at 
the time, 2. as done in the time, or 3. as complete at the time. 


The tenses which denote the first of these relations may be termed definite ; 
the second, indefinite ; and the third, complete. For a classified table of ths 
Greek tenses, see 26. ~ 


on. 7.] : MODE. 171 


Norrs. a. Some verbs have a complete future tense, called the Future 
Perfect, or the Third Future (§ 239); but, otherwise, the three tenses which 
‘are wanting in the table ( 26), viz. the indefinite present, the definite future, 
and the complete future, are supplied by forms belonging to other tenses, or 
by participles combined with auxiliary verbs. 


&. For the general formation of the Greek tenses, see J 28. 


C. Moone. 


§169. The Greek has six modes; the In- 
DICATIVE, the SussuncTIvE, the Ortative, the Im- 
PERATIVE, the Inrinitive, and the ParTiciPLe. 


1. The Inpicative expresses direct assertion or inquiry ; as 
γράφω; lam writing ; γράφω ; am I writing ? 


2. The SunsuncrivE expresses present contingence ; as, οὐκ 
Ss Ὁ , - 
οἶδα, ὅποι τράπωμαις I know not, whither I can turn. 


3. The Oprative (opto, to wish, because often used in the 
expression of a wish) expresses past contingence ; as, οὐκ ἤδειν, 
ὅποι τραποΐμην, I knew not, whither I could turn. 


4. The lwrerativE expresses direct command, or entreaty , 
as, γράφε, write ; τυπτέσϑω, let him be beaten; dog μοι, give me. 


5. The Inrinitive partakes of the nature of an abstract 
noun ; as, γράφειν, to write. 


6. The Parricrpie partakes of the nature of an adjectiwe, 
as, γράφων, writing. 


Nores. «a. For a table of the Greek modes classified according to the 
character of the sentences which they form, see 4 27. 


β. In the regular inflection of the Greek verb, the Present and Aorist have 
all the modes; but the Future wants the Subjunctive and Imperative; and 
the Perfect, for the most part, wants the Subjunctive and Optative, and like- 
wise, in the active voice, the Imperative. The Imperfect has the same form 
with the Present, and the Pluperfect the same form with the Perfect, except 
in the Indicative. 


y- The tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative are related to each other as 
present and past, or as primary and secondary, tenses (§ 168. I.) ; and some 
have therefore chosen to consider them as only different tenses of a general 
conjunctive or contingent mode. With this change, the number and offices 
of the Greek modes are the same with those of the Latin, and the correspond- 
ence between the Greek conjunctive and the English potential modes becomes 
more obvious, 


D. Noumper anv Person. 


§170. The numbers and persons of verbs 
correspond to those of nouns and pronouns (§ 164). 


172 CONJUGATION. 3 [Book τ 


Nore. The Imperative, from its signification, wants the first person; the 
Infinitive, from its abstract nature, wants the distinctions of number and per- 
son altogether ; and the Participle, as partaking of the nature of an Adjective, 
has the distinctions of gender and case, instead of person. 


REMARKS. «@. The first person singular of the Present indicative active, ot 
in deponent verbs (ὃ 166. 2), middle, is regarded as the THEME of the verb 
The roor is obtained by throwing off the affix of the theme, or it may be 
obtained from any form of the verb, by throwing off the prefix and affix, and 
allowing for euphonic changes. A verb is conjugated by adding to the root 
the prefixes and affixes in J 28 -- 30. 


β. Verbs are divided, according to the characteristic, into Murr, [τοῦτ 
DovusLE Consonant, and Pure Verss; and according to the affir in the 
theme, into VERBS IN -w, and VERBS IN -w (δ 208. 2). For a paradigm of 
regular conjugation without euphonie changes, see  Ἷ 34, 35 ; for shorter para- 
digms of the several classes of verbs, see JJ 36 — 60. 

y- For a fuller view of the use of the Greek verb in its several forms, see 
Syntax. 


E. History or GREEK CoNnsUGATION. 


ᾧ 27H. The early history of Greek conjugation can be traced only in 
the same way with that of declension (§ 83). The following view is offered 
as one which has much in its support, and which serves to explain the general 
phenomena of the Greek verb. 

Greek conjugation, like declension (§§ 83, 148), was progressive. At first, 
the root was used, as in nouns, without inflection. The first distinction ap- 
pears to have been that of person, which was, at first, only twofold, aflixing 2 
to express the first person, and a lingual or sibilant to express the other two. 
Of this second pronominal affix, the simplest and most demonstrative form ap- 
pears to have been -¢ (cf. §§ 148, 148). By uniting these affixes with the 
ruot φα-, to say, we have the forms, 


φάμ,, I or we say, ger, you, he, or they say. 


§ 2°72. A plural was then formed by affixing the plural sign » (δ 83), 
with the insertion of s to assist in the utterance. Thus, 


1 Person. 2 and 8 Persons. 
a Sing. φάμο φάτ 
Plur. φάμεν φάτεν 


Upon the separation of the 2d and 3d Persons (§ 143. 6), the 2d, as being 
1585 demonstrative, took in the Sing. the softer form ¢ (in some cases, cv 
or δ, in both which forms the 6 would, by the subsequent laws of euphony, 
pass into s, unless dropped or sustained by an assumed vowel, § 63); while 
in the Plur. there was a new formation (cf. §§ 84, 85), in which plurality 
was marked, in the 2d Pers. by affixing ε (cf. § 83), and in the 3d Pers. by 
inserting » (cf. -c-s, § 85). The old Plur. now became, as in nouns (ὃ 85), a 
Dual, and the system of numbers and persons was complete. Thus, 


1 Pers. 2 Pers. 3 Pers. 
Sing. φάμ gas Gar 
Plur. φάμεν gars Qavr 


Dual φάμεν φάτιν φάτιν 


cH. 7. HISTORY. 


§ Ε 5 48. The distinction of tense, like th ached, case, and. pers 
son (§§ 83, 143), was at first only twofold, simply ishi “pust ac- 
tion from a present or future one. This was naturally done by prefixing ¢- (in 
Sanscrit, d-), to express, as it were, the throwing back of the action into past 
time (ὃ 187). This expression, it will be observed, is aided by the throwing 
vack of the accent. With the prefix of ε-, a distinction was also made be 
tween the 2d and 3d Persons dual (perhaps because, the more remote the 
action, the more important becomes the specific designation of the subject). 
In the 3d Pers. the inserted ε (§ 172) was lengthened to ἡ, while in the 2d 
Pers., as in both the 2d and 3d Persons of the unaugmented tense, it passed 
into the kindred ὁ (8 28). We have now two tenses, the unaugmented Pr- 
mary Tense, which supplied the place of both the Present and the Future, and 
the augmented Secondary Tense, which expressed past action both definitely 
and indefinitely, and supplied the place of all the past tenses (8 168). Thus, 


Prmary TENSE. SECONDARY TENSE. 
1P. 2 P. 3 P. Ὁ», - ἈΝ τὰ 8 P. 
5. φάμ φάς φάφ ἔφαμ ἔφας ἔφατ 
Ῥ, φάμεν φάτε ᾿ ave ἔφαμεν ἔφατε οἔφαντ 
Ὦ. φάμεν φάτον φάτον ἔφαμεν ἔφα τον ἐφάτην 


ᾧ Ε 5 484. Αἱ first, there was no distinction of voice. The affix merely 
showed the connection of the person with the action, but did not distinguish 
his relation to it as agent or object. This distinction seems to have arisen as 
foliows. A transitive action passes immediately from the agent, but its effect 
often continues long upon the object. This continuance would naturally be 
denoted by prolonging the affix. Thus, if I may be pardoned such an illus- 
tration, while the striker simply says with vivacity réarou, I strike,»the one 
struck rubs his head and cries rirroues, tiiptom-ah-ee, J am struck. Hence 
the objective form was distinguished from the subjective (§ 195), simply by the 
prolongation of the affix. This took place in various ways, but all affecting 
the personal and not the numeral element of the affix. If the affix ended with 
the sign of person, it was prolonged by annexing, in the Primary Tense, a ; 
but in the Secondary Tense (on account of the augment, which had a natural 
tendency to shorten the affix), the shorter o, except in the Ist Pers., where a 
species of reduplication seems to have taken place (-uxw, passing of course 
into -uxy, ὃ 63). Thus -~ became -was and -yzny; -s, -σῶι and -σο: -7, -ras 
and -ro ; -vr, -νσῶι and -νσο. If the-aflix ended with the sign of number, the 
preceding sign of person took a longer form. In the 2d and 3d Persons, this 
was σθ (which might be considered as arising from the ¢ by the addition of 4, 
since r# must pass into 4, ὃ 52). The Ist Pers., in imitation of the others, 
inserted 6 (or, if a long syllable was wanted by the poets, 24), after which 
either ὁ was inserted, to aid in the utterance, or, what became the common 
form, the final » passed into its corresponding vowel # (ὃ 50). Thus -τε, -rov, 
-rnv became -σθε, -σθον, -σθηῦ ; and -wev became -μεθον (-uerdov), or commonly 
-μεθα (-μεσθα). In respect to the form -μεθον, see ὃ 212.1. We place the 
subjective and objective inflections side by side for comparison. 


SUBJECTIVE. OBJECTIVE. 
iP. VA 3 P. ἘΣ 2'P. 8 P. 
Prim. 5. ga-z φά-ς φά-πΦἴ φά-μαι φά-σαι φά-ται 
P. φά-μεν φά-τε φά-νπς φά-μεθα φά-σθϑε φά-ντα 
D. φάμεν ᾧφά-σον φά-τον φά-μεθα ᾧφά-σθον φά-σθο 


105 


174 CONJUGATION. | POOK It. 


SUBJECTIVE. OBJECTIVE. 


rP. 2 P. oF. IY. 2P. 3 Ps 
- Sec. 8S. ἔφα-μ ἔφα-ς ἔφα-“’ ἐφά- μην ἔφα-σο ἔφα- το 
ῬΡ. ἔφα-μεν ἔφα-τε ἔφα-ντ' ἐφά-μεθα ἔφα-σθε ἔφα-ντο 
Ὁ. ἔφα-μεν ἔφα-τον ἐφά-την ἐφά-μεθα ἔφα-σθον ἐφά-σθη 


§ 17S. Τὺ will be observed, that all the affixes above begin with a 
consonant. While, therefore, they could be readily attached to roots end- 
ing with a vowel, euphony required that, in their attachment to the far 
greater number of roots ending with a consonant, a connecting vowel should be 
inserted. This vowel, which was purely euphonic in its origin, was, doubt.ess 
also from euphonic preference, -o- before a liquid, but otherwise -s- (the forma- 
tion of the Opt. and the analogy of Dec. II. lead us rather to consider the -s- 
as a euphonic substitute for the -o- than the reverse, δὲ 28, 86,177). As 
an example of euphonic inflection (in distinction from which the inflection 
without connecting vowels is termed nude), we select the root γραῷ-, to write 


( 36). 


SUBJECTIVE. OBJECTIVE. 
1P. SFii+28-P. 1 P. 2 P. 3 P. 
Prim. 8. γράφ-ορμε -ες -ἐς γράφ-ομαι τεσ τἔφσαι 
P. γράφ-ομεν τετε coe γραφ-όμεεθα τ-εσθε πονσαι 
D. γράφ-ομεν τὸν = row γραφ-όμεθα -scboy -ἐσθον 
Sec. 5. ἔγραφ-ομο “ες -ἐσ ἐγραφ-όμην -εσὸ -εσο 
P. ἐγράφ-ομεν -ἔσε or ἐγραφ-όμεθα -εσθε -ovre 
Ὁ. ἐγράφ-ομεν -trov -ἔτην ἐγραφ-όμεθα -εσθον -ἔσθην 


§ 2476. The distinction of mode in the inflection of verbs commences 
with that of person. For the very attachment of personal affixes makes a 
distinction between a personal mode (i. 6. the verb used as finite) and a non- 

mode (i. e. the verb used as an infinitive or participle). The latter 
had doubtless, at first, no affix. But the Infinitive is in its use a substantive, 
commonly sustaining the office, either of a direct, or yet more frequently indi- 
rect object of another word. Hence it naturally took the objective endings of 
nouns. Of these the simplest and the earliest in its objective force appears to 
have been » (§§ 84, 87), which was, accordingly, affixed to the Inf., to ex- 
press in general the objective character of this mode. To pure roots this affix 
was attached directly; but to impure roots with the insertion of + to assist the 
utterance, Thus the Inf. of ga- was φάν ; and of yeag-, γράφεν. Subse- 
quently, to mark more specifically the prevalent relation of the Inf., that of 
indirect object, the dative affix of Dec. I. (§ 86) was added to these forms ; 
thus, φάναι, γράφεναι. Voice appears to have been distinguished by the in- 
sertion, in these forms, of σύ (before which the » fell away, cf. §§ 55, 57), after 
the analogy of ὃ 174; thus, Act. (or Subject.) Form, φάναι, γράφεναι - Mid. 
and Pass. (or Obj.) Form, (φάν-σθ- αι) φάσθαι, (yeuQev-cb-c) γράφεσθαι. But 
the verb is also used as an adjective, and, as such, receives declension. The 
root of this declension, in the Act. (or Subject.) Form, may be derived from 
the original form of the non-personal mode in -», by adding +, which is used 
so extensively in the formation of verbal substantives and adjectives; thus, 
Pav φαντ-, or, with the affix of declension (“ 5), Gdve-s, γράφεν yeahove-s 
(the kindred ὁ was here preferred as a connecting vowel to ε, cf. ὃ 175). The 
Mid. and Pass. (or Obj.) form of the Participle may be derived from the 
same, by a reduplication analogous to that in § 174 (since the Ace. affix, § 84, 


cn. 7.4 HISTORY. 175 


is strictly a nasal, which could be either « or », according to euphonic pref- 
erence ; as, βορέαν, but Lat. boream) ; thus, dav φάμεν-ος, γράφεν γραφόμεν-ος 
We have now the single non-personal mode developed into a system of Infini- 
tives and Participles ; thus, 


SUBJECTIVE, _ OBJECTIVE. 
Inf. φάναι, γράφεναι φάσθαι, γράφεσθαι, 
Part. Pavers, γράφοντες φάμενος, γραφόμενος 


§ 177%. Im the personal mode, a threefold distinction arose. Dount 
Jeads to hesitation in closing a word or sentence ; and hence the idea of con- 
tingence was naturally expressed by dwelling upon the connecting vowel (or 
upon the final vowel of the root), as if it were a matter of question whether 
the verb ought to be united with its subject. The strongest expression of 
contingence, that of past contingence, protracted the connecting vowel, or final 
vowel of the root, to the cognate diphthong ins (4 3), and thus formed what 
is termed the Optative mode, which, as denoting past time, takes the secondary 
affixes ; thus, ifau Qaiu, ἐφάμην φαίμην, tyeahou γράφοιμο, ἐγραφόμην yea- 
φοίμην. The weaker expression of contingence, that of present contingence, 
as less needed, seems to have arisen later, after the conjugation with the con- 
necting vowels -o- and -s- had become established as the prevailing analogy 
of the language ; and to have consisted simply in prolonging these vowels to 
-w- and -n-, attaching the same affixes to all verbs. This weaker form, termed 
the Subjunctive mode (yet see ὃ 169. y), as denoting present time, takes the 
primary affixes. Thus, γράφομ γράφωμ, γράφομαι γράφωμαι, Dap Parity 
φάμαι φάωμαι. The original mode now became an Indicative, expressing the 
actual, in distinction from the contingent. 

A third mode arose for the expression of command. This obviously required 
no Ist Pers.; and in the 2d, it required no essential change, as the, tone uf 
voice would sufficiently indicate the intent of the speaker. There would, 
however, be a preference of short forms, as the language of direct command 
is laconic ; hence, we find in the objective inflection -co rather than -σαι, and 
in the subjective, a tendency to drop the affix of the 2d Pers. sing. ‘The 
3d Pers., on the other hand, has throughout a peculiar form, in which the affix 
is emphatically prolonged. This is done in the Sing. subjective by adding w; 
thus, -rw. In the objective inflection, -rw, of course, becomes -σθω (ὃ 174). 
The old Plur., afterwards the Du., was formed by adding the plural sign » 
(§ 172) ; thus, -rwy, -σθων. The new Plur. was still further strengthened by 
prefixing » (which in the obj. form would make no change, cf. § 176), or by 
adding the later plur. ending cay (δ 181. y) instead of »; thus, -yrwy or 
-τωσαν, (-νσθων) -σθων or -cbwcay. Inthe 2d Pers., it is convenient to regard -é 
as the proper flexible ending (§ 172). The system of personal modes is now 
complete ; thus, : 


SuBJECTIVE INFLECTION. 


INDICATIVE. ἢ ConJUNCTIVEs 
VP. SP. ΟΝ τὸ ' LP. 2 P. 3P 
Prim. 5. yedo-on τες τεσ γράφ-ωμ τ-ἧς της 
P. γράφ-ομεν -τἔτε save γοάφ-ωμεν τ-τῆσε πωνφ' 
D. γράφ-ομεν = tov τετον γράφτωμεν roy -ἥτον 
See. 8. ἔγραφ-ομ -ες τεσ γράφ-οιμ τοῖς τοῖσ' 
P. ἐγρώάφ-ομεν -τετε τοντ' γράφτοιμεν “δισε τοῖν 


D. iyed@-ousr -τεσὸν -ἔσην γράφ-οιμεν τοιτον -οίτην 


176 CONJUGATION. | | Boox uf 


IMPERATIVE. 
2P. 3 P. 2°P; 3 P. 
S. φά-9 φώ- τω γροάφ-εθ -έσω 
P. Qa-rs φά-νσων, φά-τωσαν γράφ-ετε -όντων, -ἔτωσαν 
D φώ-τον φά-των γράφ-εσον τἕτων 


OBJECTIVE INFLECTION. 


INDICATIVE. CoNnJUNCTIVE. 
1 PB. 2P.. ΙΒ}, LP 2P. 3 P. 
Pam. S. γράφ-ομαι “sous -ἐται γρώφτωμω -nrar -τἥταὶ 
P. γραφ-όμεθα -εσθε -ovras γραφ-ώμεθα -τησθε -τωνταῦι 
D. γραφ-όμεθα -ἐσθον -εσθον γραφ-ώμεθωα -ησθον -ησθον 
Sec Κ5, ἐγραφ-όμην -s00 τετοὸ γραφ-οίμην aco τοισὸ 
P. ἐγραφ-όμεθα -εσθε -ovro γραφ-οίμεθα -οισθε -οιντὸ 
Ὁ. ἐγραφ-όμεθα -ἐσθον -ἔσθην γραφ-οίμεθα -οισθον -οἰσθην 
IMPERATIVE. 
2 P; 3 P; : 2 ῬΣ 3 Ῥ, 
S. φά-σο φώ-σθω γράφ-εσο τέσθω 
P. φώ-σθε φά-σθων, φά-σθωσαν γράφ-εσθε -έσθων, -ἐσθωσαν 
D. φά-σθον φώ-σθων γράφ-εσθον -ἔσθων 


ᾧ 178. We have, as yet, but two tenses, the Primary, denoting 

and future time, and the Secondary, denoting past time, both definitely 

and indefinitely. In a few verbs, mostly poetic, the formation appears never 

to have proceeded farther. In other verbs, more specific tenses were developed 
from these, as follows. 


1. In most verbs, the Future was distinguished from the Present, and the ~ 
Aorist (the indefinite past) from the Imperfect (the definite past) by new forms, 
in which the greater energy of the Fut. and Aor. was expressed by a σ added 
to the root (cf. » 84) ; and consequently, if the old Primary and Secondary 
‘Tenses remained, they remained as Present and Imperfect. The Fut. followed 
throughout the inflection of the Pres., except that it wanted the Subjunctive 
and Imperative, which were not needed in this tense. The Aor. had all 
the modes, following in general the inflection of the Pres. and Impf., except 
that it preferred -~- as a connecting vowel, and simply appended the later affix 
-«s in the Inf. act. (δ 176); thus, 

“tt 


SuBJECTIVE INFLECTION. 


INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
S. ἔγραφ-σαμ -σας -σασ' γράφ-σω “σης -σηφ' 
P. ἐγράφ-σαμεν -σατε -σαντ γράφ-σωμεν -σητε -σωνφ' 
D. ἐγρώφ-σαμεν -σατὸον -σάώτην γράφ-σωμεν -σητον -σητον 
OPTATIVE. IMPERATIVE. , 
S. yeu p-cam ms “our γράφ-σαθ -σώτω 
P. γράφ-σαιμεν -σαιτε = =o mT γράφ-σασε -σάώντων,-σάσωσαν 
D. γράφ-σαιμεν -σα,τὸν -σαίΐτην yeap-curoy -σώτων 


INFINITIVE, γράφ-σωι PARTICIVLE, γράφεσανφος 


sH. 7.] HiSTORY. a 177 


OBJECTIVE INFLECTION. 


INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
S. ἐγραφ-σάμην -σασο cure γράφ-σωμαι -σησαε -σηται 
P. ἐγραφ-σάμεθα -σασθε -σανσὸ γραφ-σώμεθα -σησθε -σωνσῶξ 
Ὦ. ἐγοαφ-σώμεθα -σασθον -σώσθην γραφισώμεθα -σησθον -σησθον 
OPTAaTIVE. IMPERATIVE. 
S. yeaQ-caiuny -σαισο -σαισο γράφ-σασο -σάσθω 
P. γραφ-σαίμεθα -σαισθε -σαιντο γρώφ-σασθε -σάώσθων,-σάσθωσων 
Ὁ. γραφ-σαίμεθα -σαισθον -σαίσθην γράφ-σασθον -σάσθων 

INFINITIVE, γράφ-σασθαι PARTICIPLE, γραῷ-σάροεν-ος 


2. In many verbs, by a change of root, a new Pres. and Impf. were formed, 
which expressed more specifically the action as doing; and in some of these 
verbs, the old Secondary Tense remained as an Aorist (called, for distinction’s 
sake, the Second Aorist, ὃ 199. α) ; and in a few, the old Primary, as a Fu- 
ture (§ 200. b). 


§ 179. The complete tenses were, probably, still later in their forma- 
tion. These tenses, in their precise import, represent the state consequent upon 
the completion of an action (τὴν ἐπιστολὴν γέγραφα, I have the letter written), 
or in other words they represent the action as done, but its effect remaining. 
This idea was naturally expressed by an initial reduplication (§ 190). These 
tenses admit a threefold distinction of time, and may express either present, 
past, or future completeness. The present complete tense (the Perfect) nat- 
urally took the primary endings; the past complete tense (the Pluperfect), 
the augment and the secondary endings; and the future complete tense (the 
Future Perfect, or Third Future), the common future affixes. In the Perf. 
and Plup., the objective endings were affixed without a connecting vowel; and, 
of course, with many euphonic changes. See the inflection of (yiyeap-uas) 
γέγραμμα, (Ἷ 36), σέπραγ-μα, (J 38), (σέπειθ- μα.) πέπεισμαι, ( 39), &e. 
The subjective endings appear to have been at first appended in the same way 3 
thus, Perf. Ind. γέγραφ-μ, Inf. γεγράφ-ναι, Part. γεγράφ-νας. But all these 
forms were forbidden by euphony. Hence in the Ind. -z became -« (which, 
since μὲ final passes into ν, may be considered the corresponding vowel of μὲ as 
well as of », § 50); thus, yiyeudu γέγραφα " and after this change the in- 
flection proceeded according to the analogy of the Aor., except so far as the 
primary form differs from the secondary. The @ in this way became simply a 
connecting vowel; thus, γέγραφα (or, if the analogy of the Aor. be followed 
here also, yiyeu-a-u), γέγραφ-α-ς, -a-T, -ἀτμεν, -a-Te, -u-vr, -a-rov. In the 
Part., » also became a, which by precession passed into » (S 28). Indeed, in 
Dec. III. no masculine or feminine has a root ending in -ατ- (δ 76. ἃ. 3). 
Thus, yeyead-ors. The ν in the Inf., instead of a similar change (as it was 
followed by «), took -s- before it ; thus, γεγραφ-έναι. In the Plup. act., there 
was a kind of double augment, prefixing ε, both to the reduplication, and also 
to the connecting vowel of the Perf., making the connective of the Plup. -sa-3 
thus, ἐ-γεγράφ-εα-μ. This ea remained in the Ionic, but in the old Attic was 
contracted into , which afterwards passed by precession into «s. 


§ 180. The middle and passive voices were at first undistinguished. 
The form simply showed that the subject was affected by the action, but did 
not determine whether the action were his own or that of another. In the 


178 "CONJUGATION. | BOOK 11, 


definite and complete tenses, the action is so represented, that this would be 
commonly understood without special designation. But in the indefinite tenses, 
there would be greater need of marking the distinction. . Hence, a special Aor 
and Fut. passive were formed by employing the verb sii, to be, as an auxilia~y 
and compounding its past and future tenses with the root of the verb (the 
augment being prefixed in the Aor., as in other past tenses, and the ε being 
lengthened in some of the forms from the influence of analogy or for euphony) , 
thus, Aor. ἐ-γράφ-ην, Fut. γραφ-ήσομαι. The old Aor. and Fut. now became mid- 
die, and the two voices were so far distinct. They had still, however, so much 
in common, that it is not wonderful that this distinction was not always ob- 
served (§ 166. 1). The Aor. and Fut. pass, were afterwards strengthened by 
the insertion of 6, which came, perhaps, from employing in the composition 
the passive verbal in -ros, instead of the simple root of the verb; thus, 
πρωκα-ός ἦν ἐπράχϑθην. From the prevalence of the 6, the tenses formed with 
it were denominated first, and those formed without it, second tenses (δ 199. IT.). 


§ IS. the system of Greek conjugation was now complete, having 
three persons, three numbers, three voices, six modes, if the Subj. and Opt. are 
separated, and no fewer than eleven tenses, if the jirst and second are counted 
separately. Some remarks remain to be added, chiefly upon euphonic changes. 


I. By a law which became so established in the language as to allow no ex- 
ception (δ 63), final ~, +, and 4. could not remain. They were, therefore, 


either dropped, changed, prolonged, or both changed and prolonged ; as follows. 


1. Final με, after -a- connective, was dropped ; after -o- or -w- connective,* was 
changed to -~ and then contracted with the preceding vowel ; after -o- and 
~as- connective, and in the primary nude form (§ 173), was prolonged to -ms 5 
and, in all other cases, became -». Thus, ?yea Wap, γέγφραφαμ, ἐγεγράφεαμ 
became ἔγραψα, γέγραφα, ἐγεγράφεα - γράφορμε and yeapuy became (γφάφοα, 

γράφωα) γράφω, and γεάψομ and γράψωμ became γράψω " γράφοιμ, γράψοιμ, 
γράψαιμ, Paw became vee Pores γρώψοιμι, γφρώψαιμι, φώρι - ἔγραφομι, ἐγεγρά- 
Pt, ἔφαμε became ἔγραφον, ἐγεγράφειν, ἔφαν. 

2. Final +, in the secondary forms throughout, and in the Perf. sing., was 
dropped; but, in other cases, was changed into -ς, which after -s- or -- con- 
nective passed into -s-and was then contracted, but otherwise was prolonged 
to -σ. When, by the dropping of -+, -α- connective became final, it passed 
into -ε (8 28). Thus, ἔφασ ἔφα, ἔγραφες ἔγραφε, ἔγραφον ἔγραφον, ἔγραψας 
ἔγραψε, ἔγραψανσ ἔγραψαν, yedpour γράφοι, γράψαι γράψαι, γίγραφατ γί- 
γέαφε" γράφ-ε-σ (γράφες, γράφε:) γράφει, γράψ-ε-π- γράψει, γράφ-η-π γράφῃ 
(writ with the « subse. in imitation of the Ind. ); γράψ-η-- γράψῃ" dar 
φάσι, φαντ (φάνσι, § 58) φᾶσι, γράφοντ' (γεάφονσι) γράφουσι, γρώψονα γρώψουσι, 
γέγραφαντ (γεγράφανσι) γεγράφᾶσι, γράφωνα (γφράφωνσι) γράφωσι. 

ΝΌΤΕΒ. «a. In the prolonged forms of the endings -r and -να, the Dorie 
retained the + (§ 70. 2); as, φατί Theoc. 1. 51, ridnrs 3. 48, φαντί 2. 45, 
Pirtoves 16. 101, ὠῳδήκανσι 1. 43, λέγοντι Pind. O. 2. 51, ἐσισρέψοντι 6. 36. 

_ B. Epic forms of the Subjunctive, with -~ and -¢ prolonged to -ws and -σι» 

are not unfrequent ; as, ἐθέλωμι A. 549, σύχωμι E. 279, ἵκωμι 1. 414, ἴδωμι 
X. 450, ἐθέλῃσιν (§ 66) A. 408, παύσῃσι ὃ. 191, Séinow Σ. 6015 so Dor. 
tances (N. 2) Theoc. 16.28. A similar form of the Opt., though not free 
from doubt, occurs in σαραφθαίησι Κα. 346. 

y- A new form of the 3 Pers. pl. secondary was formed by changing -r of 
the Sing. into -σαν (i. 6. by affixing v instead of prefixing it, with a change 
of ¢ into σ, a3 above, and the necessary insertion of a union-vowel, which 

*in primary forms (§ 209), 


oH. 7.] HISTORY. 179 


here, as after σ in the Aor., was -a-, ὃ 185). This form, m the Attic, is noi 
used in those tenses which have as a connecting vowel -o- or -a-, and scarcely 
in those which have -o- or -as- ; but in most other tenses is either the com- 
mon form, or may be freely used ; thus, for ἔφαντ, ἐγεγράφειντ, imax eve, 
ἔφασαν, ἐγεγράφεισαν, ἐπρώχϑησαν (ὃ 183). 


3. Final 6 was dropped after -s- connective ; after a short vowel in the root, 
τὲ became in the 2 Aor. -s, and in the Pres. (except φημί and εἰμί) -s, which 
was then contracted with the preceding vowel (as becoming ») ; in other cases 
(except the irregular substitution of -ov for -aé in the Aor.) it was prolonged 
to -4. Thus, γράφεθ γράφε, 304 δός, δίδοθ (ides) δίδου, φάθ φάθι, γράφηδθ 
γράφηθι. 


ᾧ 182. ra stronger form of the 2 Pers. sing. subjective was in 
-σθ (compare the Eng. and German -st), which, according to § 63, must either 
drop 6 and thus become the same with the common form, or assume a vowel. 
In the latter case, it assumed 2, becoming -céa (compare the affix -sti of the 
Lat. Perf.). This remained the common form in ἔφησθα ( 53), ἦσθα (J 55), 
ἤεισθα ( 56), oicba, ἤδεισθα, and ἤδησθα ( 58). Other examples are fur- 
nished by the poets (particularly i in the Subjunctive, by Homer); as, riéneba 
404, δίδοισθα T. 270, ἐθέλῃσθα A. 554, βουλεύησθα 1.99, εἴπησθα TY. 250, 
βάλοισθα O. 571, κλαίοισθα ἢ). 619, ἔχεισθα, φίλεισθα Sapph. 89, ἐδέλησθα 
Theoc. 29. 4, χρῆσθα Ar. Ach. 778. This form, like many others belonging 
to the old language, is termed by grammarians olic. 


III. The objective endings of the 2 Pers. sing., -cw: and -co, commonly 
psi σ in those tenses in which a vowel uniformly preceded (cf. §§ 117, 
200. 2, 201. 2), and were then contracted with this vowel except in the Opt.; 
thus, γράφεσαι γεάφεαι γράφῃ ΟΥ̓ γράφει (§ 37. 4), γεάψεσαι γράψῃ OF -εἰ, 
γράφησαι γράφῃ, ἐγεάφεσο ἐγράφεο ἐγράφου, γράφεσο᾽ γράφου, ἐγρώψασο ἐγρά- 
Yao ἐγρώψω, γῥάψασο venue γράψαι, (the contraction is here irregular), 
γράφοισο γράφοιο, γρώψαισο γράψαιο. 


ᾧ 183. Iv. In the Greek verb, there is a great tendency to lengthen 
a short vowel before an affix beginning with a consonant. This will be ob- 
served in pure verbs before the tense-signs (§ 218); in the tense-signs of the 
Aor. and Fut. pass. (§ 180); in the -s- often inserted in the Opt. (§ 184); 
in verbs in -us before the subjective endings, especially in the Ind. sing. (§ 224); 
in the euphonie affixes -es and -sy of the Pres. and Fut, act. (§§ 203. a, 
206. 8); &c. This tendency does not appear before endings. beginning with 
yr, since here the syllable is already long by position. Of other endings, it 
appears chiefly before the shorter; hence, before the subjective far more than 
the objective, and in the Sing. more than the Plur.or Dual. We give here ex- 
amples of the two last only of the cases that have been mentioned above: Zu 
φνυμί (we now change the regular accentuation of the word to that which is 
usually given to it as an enclitic), φώς οφής, φώσ, φησί, but Pl. depiv- ἔφἄᾶν 
ἔφην, ἔφας ἔφης, ἔφα ἔφη, but Pl. ἔφαμεν (FY 53); 2 Pers. γράφες γράφεις 
(so some form γράφω and γρώφει by lengthening the connecting vowel and 
dropping the flexible ending), γράψες γρώψεις " yeadsy (the old form of the 
Inf., § 176) γράφειν (this became the common form of the Pres. and Fut. 
inf. act.), yearwev γράψειν. 


Nore. The old short forms of the 2d Pers. and Inf. in -ες and -εν remain 
in some varieties of the Doric; as, sits Theoc, 1. 8, ἀμέλγες 4. 8, συρίσδεν 
1. 14, βόσκεν 4. 2, γαρύεν Pind. O. 1. 5, σράφεν Ar. Ach. 788. 


180 CONJUGATION. [BooK 14 


ᾧ 184. ν. The Opt. subjective was often rendered still more ex 
pressive, by adding to its connective ε, which was lengthened to ἡ except 
before ντ (§ 183). This addition was most common before the endings which 
have no vowel, -u, -s, -r, -νσ. In the 3d Pers. pl. this addition was always 
made ; but, except here, it was never made to -as- connective, and rarely to 

οι- connective except in contract forms. Thus, (yeap-o-vr) γρώφοιεν, (yedy- 

αἰ-ν 4) γρώψαιεν, (φα-ἴ-μ) φαίην, (φα-ἴ-4) φαίης, (Qau-i-r) φαίη, φαῖμεν φαίημεν, 
φαῖτε φαίητε, (Pau-i-vr) φαῖεν and φαίησαν, ἀγγελοίην ( 41), σιμῴην (Ἶ 45), 
φιλοίην (Ἷ 46). 

ΝΌΤΕΒ. a. In the Aor. opt. act., a special prolonged form arose, in which 
the connective was that of the Ind. with « prefixed. This form occurs only 
in the 2d and 3d Persons sing. and the 3d Pers. pl.; but in these persons was 
far more common than the other form. Thus, yeawW-e-a-s, (year-ti-a-r, 
~§ 181.2) year es, γράψειαν. This form, like many other remains of old 
usage, was termed by grammarians olic. It was especially employed by 
the Attics ; yet was not confined to them, nor employed by them to the ex- 
clusion of the other forms ; thus, σίσειαν A. 42, μείνειας I’. 52, Ψαύσειε Pind. 
P. 9. 213, ἀγγείλειεν Theoc. 12. 19, διαῤῥήξειας Hat. iti. 12; ἀλγύναις. Soph. 
Cid. T. 446, δικάσαις Ar. Vesp. 726, φήσαις Pl. Gorg. 477 Ὁ, ἁρπαλίσαι Asch. 
Eum. 983, φθάσαιεν Th. 1]. 49. | 


β. In analyzing Opt. forms of the 3d Pers. pl., it is often convenient to 
‘oin the inserted s with the flexible ending, although in strict propriety it is 
an extension of the connecting vowel. See J 31. 


§ 183. VI. One important analogy we ought not to pass unnoticed, 
The oldest inflection both of verbs and of nouns, that of the nude Pres. and 
impf., and of Dec. III., had no connecting vowels. The next inflection in or- 
der of time, that of the euphonic Pres. and Impf., of the Fut., and of Dec. IL., 
took the connecting vowels -o- and -s- ; while the latest inflection, that of the 
Aor., of the Perf. Act., and of Dec. I., took the connecting vowel -e- (cf. 
§ 176). But the analogy does not stop here. As some nouns fluctuated 
between the different declensions (§§ 124, 125), so some forms of verbs fluc- 
tuated between the different methods of inflection. Thus we find, 


a.) Verbs in both -ws and -w, particularly the large class in -dys and -dw, 
as, δείκνῦμι and δεικνύω, to show. 


B.) That verbs in -«s whose roots end in s, o, or v, have, in the Impf. act. 
sing., a second and more common form in -ὸν ; as, ἐξίθην and (iribs-ov) iribour 
(F 50) ἐδίδων and ἐδίδουν ( 51), ἐδείκνῦν and Weixviov (J 52). 


y-) That verbs in τω have the 2 Aor. nude, if the root ends in a vowel, 
except 4; as, ( 7) ἔβην (τ. βα-), ἔγνων (τ. yvo-), ἔδῦν (1. du-); but ἔσων 
(r. wi-), 2 Aor. of xivw, to drink. 


δ.) Poetic (chiefly Epic) 2 Aorists middle which want the connecting vowel 
even after a consonant; as, ὦλσο A. 5325 ἄρμενον (Part.) 2. 600; γέντο 
(= slasro) Θ. 433 γέντο (= ἐγένεσο) Hes. Th. 199, ἔγενσ» Theec. 1. 88 ; 
ἰδέγμην .. 513, δέκτο O. 88 (so even Pres. 3 Pers. pl., δέχατσα, M. 147, for 
déxveas, § 60), Imp. δέξο T. 10, dévés Ap. Rh. 4. 1554, Inf. δέχθαι A. 23, 
Part. δέγμενος B. 794; ἐλέλικεο A. 39; ἵκεο Hes. Th. 481 ; ἐλέγμην .. 335, 
λέκτο 3. 451, λέξο Ὡ. 650; μιάνθην (3 Pers. du. for iuscdvobny, ὃ 60)*; ἔμικτο 
«. 433, μίκτο A. 354; dere E. 590, Aisch. Ag. 987, ὅρσο Δ. 204, ὄρθαι 
©. 474, ὅρμενος, A. 572, Soph. Ged. T. 177; σάλτο O. 645; wigtos (for 
wicbabas, §§ 55, 60) x 708. * A. 146. 


en. 7.] HISTORY. 18] 


« Nore. These Aorists, being nude, agree in their formation with the Perf. 
and Plup. (§ 179), except that they want the reduplication. 


s-) Poetic (chiefly Epic) Aorists which have the tense-sign -σ- with the 
connectives -o- and -s-, and thus unite the forms of the Ist and 2d Aorists; 
as, ἀείσεο Hom. H. 16. 15 ἐδήσετο ν. 75, βήσεο K. 109, 221; δύσετο H. 465, 
δύσεο {1.129 ; ov E. 7733 λέξεο 1. 6173 ὄρσεο '᾿. 250, contr. ὄρσεν ὃ 45. 3) 
A. 3θ4. οὖἷσε xy. 481, Call. Cer. 136, Ar. Ran. 482, οἰσέτω T. 178, οἴσετε 
υ. 154. The use of this form in the 2 Pers. Imp. will be specially noticed. 
Perhaps the common 2 Aor. ἔπεσον, fell, and the rare, if not doubtful, ¢yscev, 
belong here. 


Z.) Aorists without the tense-sign -c-, but with the connecting vowel -z-. 
See ὃ 201. 2. Compare the omission of -c- both here and ὃ 200. 2 with 
§§ 117, 182. ΠΙ. 


n.) Reduplicated tenses, having the connectives -o- and -s-, and thus unit- 
mg the forms of the Perf. or Plup., and of the 2 Aor. See ὃ 194. 3. 


Nore. ‘These tenses of mixed formation are usually classed as Ist or 2d Ao- 
mst according to the connective; a classification which is rather convenieut 
than philosuphical. 


ς = =G. VII. The formation of the complete tenses requires further 
remark. The affixes of the Perf. and Plup. seem to have been originally 
nude throughout, and they continued such in the objective inflection, inasmuch 
as here each flexible ending has a vowel of its own. That this was the reason 
appears from the fact, that in the subjective inflection also we find remaius 
of the nude formation, but only in cases where the flexible ending has a vowel 
of its own. These remains abound most in the old Epic, but are also found 
in the Attic ($$ 237, 238). The inflection with the connecting vowel, how- 
ever, became the established analogy of the language; so much so, that even 
pure verbs, no less than impure, adopted it (cf. § 100.2). Here arose the 
need of another euphonic device. The attachment of the open affixes to pure 
roots produced hiatus, and to prevent this, x was inserted. This insertion 
appears to have been just commencing in the Homeric period. It afterwards 
became the prevalent law of the language, extending, through the force of 
analogy, to impure, as well as to pure roots. Other euphonic changes were 
now required, for which see δὲ 61, 64.3. The history of the Perf. and Plup. 
active, therefore, is a history of euphonic devices, to meet the successive de- 
mands of pure and impure roots. The latter first demanded a connecting 
vowel: then the former, the insertion of -x- ; and then the latter, that this 
-x- after a labial or palatal mute should be softened to an aspiration uniting 
with the mute. We have thus four successive formations: 1. the primitive 
nude formation ; 2, the formation in -a, -εἰν ; 3. the formation in -xa, -xe» 
after a vowel; 4. the formation in -xa, -xsy after a consonant (after a labial 
or palatal mute, softened to -a, -siv, 461). The last formation nowhere ap- 
pears in Hom., and the third only in a few words. The forms with the in- 
serted x are distinguished as the First Perf. and Plup.; and those without it, 
although older, as the Second (ὃ 199. 11.). : 


16 


182 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. | BOOK τι 


CHAPTER VIII. 


PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. 


187. The Greek verb has two prefixes 
Ι. ‘The Auement, and I]. the Repup.ication. 


I. AUGMENT. 


The Augment (augmentum, increase) prefixes ε- 
in the seconDARY TENSES of the Indicative, to de-_ 
note past time (§§ 168. I., 173). 


A. If the verb begins with a consonant, the ε- 
constitutes a distinct syllable, and the augment is 
termed syLuaBic. E. g. 


Theme. Impf. Aor. 
βουλεύω, to counsel, ἰξούλευον, ἐξούλευσα. 
γνωρίζω, to recognize, ἐγνώριζον, ἐγνώρισα. 
ῥίσσω, to throw, ἔῤῥιπεον, ἔῤῥιψα (ὃ 64. 1). 


B. If the verb begins with a vowel, the ε- unites 
with it, and the augment is termed TEMPORAL. | 
Nore. The syllabic augment is so named, because it increases the number 
of syllables; the temporal (temporalis, from tempus, time), because it increases 
the time, or quantity, of an initial short vowel. For the syllabic augment 
before a vowel, see ὃ 189. 3, The breathing of an initial vowel remains the 

same after the augment. 


§ 288. Spreciran Rores or tae ΤΈΜΡΟΒΑΙ, AvGMENT. | 
1. The prefix «- unites with « to form ἡ, and with the other 
vowels, jf short, to form the corresponding long vowels ; as, 


᾽Δδικέω, to injure, (ἐαδίκεον) ἠδίκουν, (ἰαδίκησα) ἠδίκησα. 
᾿Ζϑλέω, to contend, ἤῤλουν, HbrAnca. 
ἐλπίζω, to hope, ἤλσιζον, ἤλαισα. 
“Ἱκετεύω, to supplicate, Ἱκέσευον, Ἱκίσευσα. 
ὀρθόω, to erect, ὥρθουν, ὠρθωσα. 
ὕξρίζω, to insult, “De eZor, “Tegra. 


2. In like manner, the e- unites with the prepositive of the 
diphthong a, and of the diphthongs av and o followed by a 
consonant, as, 


airtw, to ask, jrovy (§ 25. 8), ἤτησα. 
αὐξάνω, to increase, ηὔξανον, ηὔξησα. 
οἰκείξω, to pity, ᾧκειζον, ᾧκεισα. 


So also, οἴομαι, to think, φόμην, φήθην. 


cn. 8.] AUGMENT. 183 


3. In other cases, the ε- is absorbed by the initial vowel or 
diphthong, without producing any change ; as, 


ἡγέοριαι, to lead, ἡγούμην, ἡγησάμην. 
ὠφελέω, to profit, ὠφέλουν, ὀφέλησα. 
tixw, to yield, εἶκον, εἶξα. 
οἰωνίζορεαι, to augur, olwvilopony, οἰωνισαΐμεην- 
οὐτάζω, to wound, ovraloy, οὔσασα. 


Nore. In verbs beginning with εὐ, and in εἰκάζω, to conjecture, and αὐ. 
aivw, to dry, usage is variable; as, 

εὔχομαι, to pray, εὐχόμην, ηὐχόμην, εὐξάμην, ηὐξάμην. 

εἰκάζω, εἴκαζον, ἤκαζον (Att), εἴκασα, ἤκασα- 


See, also, the Plup. ἤδειν ( 58), and fe» ({ 56). 


§ 289. Remarks. 1. The verbs βούλομαι, to will, dv- 
γαμαις to be able, and μέλλω, to purpose, sometimes add the tem- 
poral to the syllabic augment, particularly in the later Attic ; 
thus, lmpf. ἐθουλόμην and ἡδουλόμην, Aor. P. ἐθουλήϑην and 1,6ov-- 
λήϑην. 

2. In a few verbs beginning with a vowel, the e- constitutes 
a distinct syllable, with, sometimes, a double augment ; as, 


ayvipu, to break, ἕαξα. 
ἀνοίγω, to open, ἀνέῳωγον (δ 188. 2), ἀνέῳξα. 
ὠθέω, to push, tabovy, ἔἕωσα. 


Add ἁλίσκομαι, to be captured, ἁνδάνω (Ion. and Poet.), to please, ὁράω, te 
see, οὐρέω, aviowai, to buy, and some Epic forms. Cf. ὃ 191.38. The sylla- 
bic augment in these words is to be referred, in part, at least, to an original 
_ digamma (ἃ 22. δ); as, ἔξαξαν taka» y. 298, iv. 2.20; iFavdave ἑάνδανε Hat. 
ix. 5, ἑήνδανε y. 148, {Fads ἕαδε Hdt. i. 151, ἔΕΈ αδεν εὔαδεν (cf. §§ 71, 117. 2) 
Ξ. 340. 


3. In a few verbs beginning with «, the usual contraction of 
te into εἰ (§ 36) takes place; as, 1 YE ee 
tzw, to permit, εἴων, εἴξσα. 


Add i#ifw, to accustom, ἑλίσσω, to roll, ἕλκω, to draw, ἕπω, to be occupied 
vith, ἐργάζομαι, to work, ἕρπω, to creep, teridw, to entertain, ἔχω, to have; the 
Aorists εἷλον, took, sica (Ion. and poet.), set, εἶμεν and εἵμην (Y 54) ; and the 
Plup. εἱστήκειν (ἢ 48), stood. 


4. An initial 2, followed by a vowel, remains in the augmented tenses of a 
very few verbs, chiefly poetic ; as, ἀΐω, to hear, ἄϊον (yet trios Hat. 9. 93). 
See, also, ἀναλίσκω (ὃ 280). An initial o sometimes remains even when 
followed by a consonant ; as, οἰστρέω, to sting, dierenca Eur. Bac. 32 (cf. οἶδα, 
§ 191. 8). So ἑλληνίσθην (that the word “Ελλην may not be disguised), Th. 
ii. 68, and in poetry ἑζόμην, καθεζόμην, Asch. Eum. 3, Prom. 229. In these 
words « is long by position. 


5. An initial s followed by ὁ unites with this vowel, instead of uniting with 
the augment ; thus, tografw, to celebrute a feust, (isdgraZov) ἑώρταζον. So, 
in the Plup., igxew, and the poet. ἐώλπειν, ἐώργειν, from Perf. ἔοικα, ἔολπα, 
ἴοργα. 


184 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK «. 


Il. RepupiicaTion. 


$190. The Reduplication (reduplico, to re 
double) doubles the initial letter of the ComMPLETE 
TENSES, in all the modes (δὲ 168. II., 179). 


Rute. If the verb begins with a single consonant, or with a 
mute and liquid (except yy, and, commonly, βλ and yi), the 
initial consonant is repeated, with the insertion of «; but, other 
wise, the reduplication has the same form with the augment. 
In the PLupeRFect, the augment is prefixed to the reduplication, 


except when this has the same form with the augment. Thus 
Theme. Perf. Plup. 
βηυλεύω, to counsel, βεξούλευκα, ἐδεξουλεύκειν. 
γράφω, to write, γέγραφα, ἐγεγράφειν. 
φιλέω, to love, πεφίληκα (§ 62), ἐσεφιλήκειν. 
χράοριαι, to Use, κέχρημαι, ἐκεχρήμην. 
ϑνήσκω, to die, φέθνηκα, ἐσεθνήκειν. 
ῥα ψῳδέω, to prate, ἐῤῥα ψῴδηκα (ὃ 62. «Ἱ, ἐῤῥαψῳδήκειν. 
γνωρίζω, to recognize (§ 187), by vergence, ἐγνωρίκειν.- 
βλαστάνω, to bud, ἐδλάστηκα, ἐδλαστήκειν. 
βλάστω, to hurt, βίθλαφα, ἐξεξλάφειν 
γλύφω, to sculpture, ἔγλυμρμιαι, γέγλυμμαι, ἐγλύμμην. 
ζηλόω, to emulate, ἐζήλωκα, ᾿ ἐζηλώκειν. 
ψεύδομαι, to lie, ἔψευσμαι, ἐψεύσμην. 
στεφανόω, to crown, ἐστεφάνωκα, ἐστεφανώκειν. 
ἀδικίω (§ 188. 1), (ἀαδίκηκα) ἠδίκηκα, ἠδικήκειν. 
αὐξάνω, to increase (§ 188. 2), ηὔξημαι, ηὐξήμην. 
hytouas, to lead § 188, 3), ἥγημαι, ἡγήμῆν. 
beam, to see (§ 189. 2), ἑώορώκα, ἕωράκειν. 
aviowas, to buy (§ 189. 2°, ἐώνημεαι, ἐωνήμην. 
ἐργάζομαι, to work (§ 189. 8), εὔἴργασμαι, εἰργάσμην. 


§ 298. Remarks. 1. In five verbs beginning with a 
liquid, εἰ- commonly takes the place of the regular reduplica- 
tion, for the sake of euphony : 

Laine, to obtain by lot, 

λαμβάνω, to take, 

λέγω, to collect, 

μείρορμεαι, to share, 

r. ps-, to suy, 


εἴληχα and λέλογχα, εἴληγμιαι.- 
εἴληφα, εἴχημιμμαι and λέλημρμιαι.- 
εἴλοχα, εἴλεγμαι and λέλεγριαι. 
εἵμαρίκαι. siudopny. 
εἴρηκα, εἴρημα, ( 53). 

2. Some verbs beginning with &, ε, or o, followed by a single 
consonant, prefix to the usual reduplication the two first let 
ters of the root; thus, 


ἀλείφω, to anoint, ἀλήλιφα, ἀλήλιωμα,- 
ἰλαύνω, to drive, ἰλήλακα, ἐλήλαμαι. 
ὀρύσσω, to dig, ὀρώρυχα, ὀρώρυγμαι. 


This prefix is termed by grammarians, though not very appropriately (§ 7), 


cx 8.] COMPOUND VERBS. 185 


the Attic Reduplication, It seldom receives an augme:.t in the Plup., except 
in the verb ἀχούω, to hear; thus, ἀλήλιφα, ἀληλίφειν but, from ἀκούω, ἀκή- 
xoa, ἠκηκόειν. ‘This reduplication prefers a short vowel in the penult; as, 
ἀλήλιφα, though ἤλειφα (§ 269); ἐλήλυθα (ὃ 301). 


3. The verb μιμνήσκω, to remember, has, in the Perf., wipvnuas> καάομαι, 
to acquire, has commonly κέκτημαι (i. 7. 3), but also ἔκσηρα, (properly Ion., 
as Hadt. ii. 42, yet also Asch. Pr. 795, Pl. Prot. 340 d,e). There are, also, 
apparent exceptions to the rule, arising from syncope; as, πέσσωκα, πέπτα 
μαι. For ἔοικα, to seem, and the poet. ἔολπα, ἔοργα, ef. ὃ 189.2. For sido 
(7 58), cf. § 189. 4. The poet. ἄνωγα, to command, receives no reduplication, 


4. When the augment and the reduplication have a common form, this fori 
is not to be explained in both upon the same principle. Thus, in the Aor. 
ἐγνώρισα (δ 187), ε- is prefixed to denote past time, but in the Perf. tyvaigiza 
(8 190), it is a euphonic substitute for the full redupl. γε-. In like manner, 
analogy would lead us to regard the Aor. ἠδίκησα (ὃ 188. 1) as contracted 
from tad/xnca, but the Perf. ἠδίκηκα (ὃ 190), as contracted from ἀαδίκηκα, 
the initial vowel being doubled to denote completeness of action. In the Per- 
fects ciuaeuas (R. 1), and ἕστηκα (Ἷ 48), the rough breathing seems to supply, 
in part, the place of the initial consonant. Some irregularities in the redu- 
plication appear to have arisen from an imitation of the augment ; aS, ἑώρῶκαν 
ἐώνημα, (δ 190). 


Il]. Prerixes or Comrpounp VERBs. 


§ 192. 1. Verbs compounded with a preposition, receive 
the augment and reduplication after the preposition ; thus, 

“ροσγράφω, to ascribe, προσέγραφον, προσγέγραφα. 

ἰξελαύνω, to drive out, ἐξήλαυνον, ἐξελήλακα. 


REMARKS. 1. Prepositions ending in a vowel, except περί and πρό, suffer 
elision (ὃ 41) before the prefix s-. The final vowel of πρό often unites with 
the s- by crasis (ὃ 88). Thus, ἀποξάλλω, to throw away, ἀπέξαλλον" σπερι- 
βάλλω, to throw around, περιέβαλλον reoCarrw, to throw before, προέξαλιλον 
and προὔξαλλον. 


2. Prepositions ending in a consonant which is changed in the theme, re- 
sume that consonant before the prefix s-; as, iu€aarw, to throw ὁ in (§ 54), 
ἐνέξαλλον - ἐκξάλλω, to throw out (§ 68), ἐξέδξαλλον. 


3. Afew verbs receive the augment and reduplication before the preposi- 
tion ; a few receive them ~both before and after ; and a few are variable; as, 
imicrapos, to understand, *ricrauny: ἐνοχιλέω, to trouble, wyvarrouv, ἠνώχληῃκα " 
καθεύδω, to sleep, ἐκάθευδον, καθηῦδον, and καθεῦδον (§ 188. N.). 


4. Some derivative verbs, resembling compounds in their form, follow the 
game analogy ; as, διαισάω, to regulate (from Biase, mode of life), διήσησα 
and ἐδιήσησα, δεδιήσηκα, ἐδεδιητήμην " ἐκκλησιάζω, to hold an assembly (ἐκκλη- 
sia), ἐξεκλησίαζον and ἐκκλησίαζον, ἐξεκλησίασα " παροινέω, to act the drunkara 
(σπάροινος), ἐπαρῴνησα V. 8. 4 ; ἐγγυάω, to pledge, for the various forms of 
which see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 155. 


§ i 93. II. Verbs compounded with the particles δυσ-, ill, 
and sv, well, and beginning with a vowel which is changed by 


the augment (ᾧ 188), commonly receive their prefixes after 
16" 


186 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. | BOOK 1. 


these particles ; as, δυσαρεστέω; to be displeased, δυσηρέστουν 
εὐεργετέω, Lo benefit, εὐηργέτουν and εὐεργέτουν. 


lil. Other compounds receive the augment and reduplica 
tion at the beginning ; as, λογοποιέω, to fable, éhoyonotovy 
δυστυχέω, to be unfortunate, ἐδυστύχησα; δεδυστύχηκα " εὐτυχέω 
to be fortunate, εὐτύχουν. or ηὐτύχουν (ὃ 188. Ν.}) ; δυσωπέω, te 
shame, ἐδυσώπουν. Yet ἱπποτετρόφηκα, Lycurg. 167. 31. 


DIALECTIC USE. 


ᾧ 194. 1. 1t was long before the use of the augment as the sign 
of past time (§ 173) became fully established in the Greek. In the old poets 
it appears as a kind of optional sign, which might be used or omitted at 
pleasure; thus, ἔθηκεν A. 2, ϑῆκε 555 ὥς ἔφατο A. 33, 457, 568, ds φάσο 
188, 245, 345, 357, 511, 595; ἔξαλε A. 459, 473, βάλε 480, 499, 519, 
527; ὀρώρει Σ. 493, ὠρώρει 498. This license continued in Ionic prose in 
respect to the temporal augment, and the augment of the Pluperfect, and was 
even extended to the reduplication when it had the same form with the tem-~- 
poral augment ; thus, ἄγον Hdt. i. 70, ἦγον iii. 475 ἀπήλλαξε Idi. 16, ἀπαλ.- 
λάσσετο 17; ἀπελαύνοντο Id. vii. 210, ἀπήλαυνον 211 ; δεδούλωντο Id. i. 94; 
ἄφθη, ἅψατο Id. i. 19, ἁμμένης 86; teydlovre Ib. 66, κασέργαστο, κατειργασμέ- 
vou 123: ἀπεργμένος ii. 99 (so Ep. ἔρχαται Π. 481, ἔρχατο P. 354, cf. § 189. 
4). So, more rarely, in respect to the syllabic augment, and the reduplication 
having the same form ; as, νόεε or ἐνόεε Hat. i. 1555; παρεσκενάδατο vii. 218, 
rupurxevaduro 219; and even, for euphony’s sake, ἐσαλιλλόγησο i. 118. In 
respect to the augment of the Pluperfect, and of the impersonal ἐχρῆν, this 
freedom remained even in Attic prose; thus, ἤδη cereAcuraxss vi. 4. 11, ἀπο- 
δεδοάκει Ib. 13, διαξεβήκει vii. 3. 20 (this omission of the augment occurs 
chiefly after a vowel) ; ; ἐχρῆν Cyr. viii. 1. 1, oftener χρῆν Rep. Ath. 8. 6. 
Of the poets, the lyrie approached the nearest to the freedom of the old 
Epic, while the dramatic, in the iambic trimeter, were confined the most closely 
to the usage of Attic prose. Yet even here rare cases occur of the omission 
of the syllabic augment (though not undisputed by critics), chiefly in the 
narratives of messengers and at the beginning of a verse ; as, χεύσησε Soph. 
Cid. C. 1606, piynoay 1607, ϑώσξεν 1624, κάλει 1626. 


2. For such forms as ἔρεζον Ψ. 56, ἔρεξεν B. 274, ἔριψεν Hom. Mere. 79, 
and for such as ἔδδεισεν A. 33, ἔλλαξε Θ. 371, ἔμρμαθεν ρ. 226, ἔννεον D. 11, 
ἔσσευα WH. 208, see ὃ 71. For the Dor. dyov for ἦγον (Theoc. 13. 70), &e., 
see § 44.1. For ῥερυπτωμένα, &e., see ὃ 62. «. On the other hand, we find, 
after the analogy of verbs beginning with ῥ, ἔμμορε A. 278, ἔσσυμα, N. 79. 
For deidexro 1. 224, δείδοικα A. 555, δείδιε Σ. 34, εἰοικυῖαι Σ. 418, see § 47. N. 
Compare xsxafiora: Ap, Rh. 4. 618, and ixasiora: Ib. 990, with words be- 
ginning with βλ- and γλ- (§ 190). 


3. In the Epic language, the 2 Aor. act. and mid. often receives the redu- 
plication (ὃ 185. »), which remains through all the modes, while the Ind. ad- 
mits the augment in addition (especially in case of the Att. redupl.) ; as, 
δέδαε 9.448, κεκαδών A. 334, κεκάδοντο Δ. 497, κεκάμω A. 168, κεκύδωσ 
ζ. 303, λελάχωσ, H. 80, Asrabicdas 3. 388, ἐκλέλαθον B. 600, asadéoves 
A. 127, λελάκοντο Hom. Mere. 145, μεμάσοιειν Hes. Se. 252, μέμαρσεν Ib 
245, ἀμπεπαλών TV. 355, σεπαρεῖν or σεσορεῖν Pind. P. 2. 105, σεπίδοιμεν 
A. 100, σεσίθοισο K. 204, σεταγών A. 591, σεταρσόμενος a. 310, rérogov in 


en. 9.] AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. 187 


Hesych., σεσύκονσο A. 467, τετυπόντες Call. Di. 61, πεφιδοίμοην .. 277, κεχά- 
ρονφο II. 600; with the augment sometimes added, κέκλετο A. 508, ἐκέκλετο 
Z. 66, πέσληγον 3. 264, πεσλήγετο M. 162, ἐπέπληγον E. 504, πέφραὸδς 
AH. 500, ἐπέφραδον K. 127, σέτμεν Z. 374, ἔτετμεν 515, σέσμοιμοεν Theoc. 25. 
61, rigve N. 363, ἔσεφνε A. 397; Att. Redupl. ἤγαγεν A. 179, aydyero X. 
116, ἤκαχε 11, 822, ἀκάχοντο x. 342, ἄλαλκε Y. 185, ἄραρον M. 105, ἤραρε 
Δ. 110, ἀραροίατο Ap. Rh. 1. 369, παρήπαφεν ἘΞ. 360, ἐξασπάφοιτο 1. 376, 

\ ἐνένγσσεν (also edited ivévarrsy and ἐνένισπεν) O. 546, 552, ¥.473, dooce B. 146. 
Two Second Aorists are reduplicated at the end of the root: ssixixr-ov from 
r. iuer-, Β. 245, and ἠρύκἄκ-ον from τ. ievx-, E. 321. 


Nore. Some of these reduplicated forms occur in Att. poetry; thus, ἄρὰ- 
ety Soph. El. 147, κεκλόμενος Id. id. T. 159, ἔπεφνε Ib. 1497, ἐξαπαφών Eur. 
fon, 704. ᾿Ἤγαγον remamed even in Att. prose; as, i. 3..17. 


CHAPTER IX. 


AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. 
[1 28 -31.] 


J. CLASSIFICATION AND ANALYSIS. 


§ 195. The Arrixes of the Greek verb may 
be divided into two great CLASSES ; 


_]. The Sussecrive, belonging to all the tenses 
of the acTIvE voice, and to the Aorist passive. 


II. The Oxsrctive, belonging to all the tenses 
of the MIDDLE voice, and to the Future passive. 


Nore. The affixes of the Aor. pass. appear to have been derived from the 
Impf. of the verb sizi, to be ; and those of the Fut. pass., from the Fut. of this 
verb (§ 180). Hence the former are subjective, and the latter, objective. 
Of the affixes which are not thus derived, the subjective represent the subject 
of the verb as the doer of the action, and the objective, as, more or less directly, 
its object. See § 165. 


§ 196. The affixes of the verb may likewise 
be divided into the following orDERs ; 
1. The Primary, belonging to the primary tenses of the 


Indicative mode, and to all the tenses of the Subjunctive 
(§§ 168, 169. 7). 


2. ‘The Seconpary, belonging to the secondary tenses of the 
Indicative, and to ali the tenses of the Optative. 


188 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [ΒΟΟΚ ἢ. 


3. Tne Imperative, belonging to the Imperative mode 
4, The Inrinitive, belonging to the Infinitive mode. 


5. The Parricipia, belonging to the Participle. 


δ 197. These affixes may be resolved into the 
following ELEMENTS; A. Tense-Siens, B. Cone 
NEcTING Vowe Ls, and C. FLexiste Enpines 

Nore. When there is no danger of mistake, these elements may be de- 


nominated simply signs, connectives, and endings. For a synopsis of these 
eiements, see J 31. 


A. TENsE-SIGNS. 


198. The tense-signs are letters or syllables 
which are added to the root in particular tenses, 
and to which the flexible endings are appended, 
either immediately or with connecting vowels, 


In the Future and Aorist, active and middle, and 
in the Future Perfect (§ 168. a), the tense-sign is 
-o-; in the Perfect and Pluperfect active, it is -x-; 
in the Aorist passive, it is -Oe- ; in the Future pas- 
sive, it is -Ono-; in the other tenses, it is wanting 
See 1 31. 


Thus, βουλεύ-σ-ω, ἐθούλευ-σ- ας βουλεύ-στ-ομαι, ἐθουλευ-σ- μην 
(14 34, 35); πεφιλή-σ-ομαι ( 46); βεθούλευ-κ-α, ἐθεθουλεύ-κ-- 
εἰν " βουλευ- ϑε-ίην " βουλευ-ϑήστομαι * βουλεύ-ω, βουλεύ-ομαι, 
ἐθούλευ-ον, ἐβουλευ-όμην, βεθούλευ-μαι, ἐθεθουλεύ- μην. 


199. Remarks. I. The sign --ϑὲε-, except when followed 
by a Vowel or by »r, becomes -ϑη- (ὃ 1883). When followed 
by a vowel it is contracted with it. Thus, é6ovdev-9n-r, Boviev- 
ϑη-τι, βουλευ-ϑῆ-ναι" (Bovdev-Ie-w, § 36) βουλευϑῶ, (βουλευ- 
ϑε-ίην, § 32) βουλευϑείην " βουλευ--ϑέ-ντων, (βουλευ-ϑέ-νις 
ᾧ 58) βουλευϑ εἰς. ; 


Il. The letters x and &, of the tense-signs, are sometimes 
omitted. 'Tenses formed with this omission are denominated 
second, and, in distinction from them, tenses which have these 
letters are denominated first ; thus, 1 Perf. πέπεικα, 2 Perf. πέ- 
moda’ 1 Plup. ἐπεπείκειν, 2 Plup. ἐπεποίϑειν (Ἵ 39); 1 Aor 
pass. ἠγγέλϑην, 2 Aor. pass. ἠγγέλην" 1 Fut. pass. ἀγγελϑήσο- 
μαι, 2 Fut. pass. ἀγγελήσομαι ( 41). See δὲ 180, 186. 


cu. 9.] TENSE-SIGNS. 18y 


Norrs. a. The tense in the active and middle voices, which is termed the 
Second Aorist, is simply an old form of the Imperfect (§ 178. 2). 


β. The regular or first tenses will be usually spoken of simply as the Ao- 
rist, the Perfect, &c. 


§ 2060. Ill. In the rurure active and mippiz, changes 


affecting the tense-sign often bring together two vowels, which 
are then contracted. 


1. Th. tense-sign -σ- becomes -s- (§ 50), 
a.) In the Future of liquid verbs. See § 56. 


β.) In Futures in -{cw, from verbs in ζω; thus, κορείσω (αομιξω) nope, 
κομείσειν κορῥιεῖν, πκομείσων κομιῶν - Mid. κοροίσορεαι (xomstouas) κοροιοῦμεαι, κοροί- 
σεσθαι κομιεῖσθαι, κοροισόμενος κομιούμενος (Ἷ 40 ). 


y-) In the Future of καθέζομαι, to sit (root ἐδ-} ; thus, (καϑέδσορεαι, καθε- 
δέομαι.) καθεδοῦμα.. Add the poetic (rtxeecbas) τεκεῖσθα, Hom. Ven. 127, and 
(μάφσομιαι; -ἔομιαι, § 45.3) μαϑθεῦμα, Theoc. 11.60. See also Ὁ. below. 


2. Some Futures in - ἄσω and -éow drop -o-. 


Thus, ἐλαύνω, to drive, F. ἐλάσω (ἐλάω) taw, ἐλάσεις ἐλᾷς, ἐλάσε, ἐλᾷ" 
ἰλάσειν ἐλᾷξν- ἐλάσων ἐλῶν - τελέω, to finish, Ἐς σελέσω (τελέω) σελῶ, πελέσεις 
φελεῖς " τελίσειν σελεῖν " φσελίσων τελῶν- Mid. rertcomas (πελέομαι) τελοῦμαι, 
φελέσεσθαι τελεῖσθαι, πτελεσόμενος τελούμενος - χέω, to pour, F. (χέσω) χέω, 
(χέσεις, χέεις) χεῖς- Mid. (χέσομμαι) χέομα.. Add καλέω, to call, μάχοροαι, 
to fight, ἀριφιέννῦμι, to clothe; all verbs in -éyvdus; sometimes verbs in -ἄζω, 
particularly βιξάζω, &e. 


Nore. The contracted form of Futures in -%cw, -cw, and cw, is termed 
the Aittie Future, from the common use of this form by Attic writers. It is 
not, however, confined to them; nor do they employ it without exception ; 
thus, ἐλάσοντας vii. 7. 55, τελέσουσιν Cyr. viii. 6. 3. It is not found in the 
Optative. A similar contraction appears, in a few instances, to have taken 
place in other Futures; thus, ἐρηροῦσε ; will you lay waste? for ἐφημώσετε, 
Th. iii. 58. 


3. A few verbs, in the Future middle with an active sense, 
sometimes add ¢ to -o-, after the Doric form (ὃ 245. 2). 


Thus, σλέω, to sail, F. rrcioomas, oftener (rAsv-c8-ouas) α'λευσοῦμιαι" φεύγω, 
to flee, φεύξομιαι and (φευξέομα,) φευξοῦμεαι. This form of the Future is termed 
tk: Dorie Future. Other examples in Attic Greek are κλαίω, to weep, viw, to 
swim, παίζω, to sport, rirrw, to full, xviw, to blow, πυνθάνομεαι, to inquire, 
χέζω. 

ΒΕΜ ΑΒΕ. a.) The Liquid, Attic, and Doric Futures, from their formation, 
are inflected like the Present of contract verbs ( Ἷ 45,46). It will be ob- 
served, that in a few verbs the Pres. and the Att. Fut. have the same form. 


b.) In a very few instances, the Fut. is in form an old Pres. (§ 178. 2); 
as, ἐσθίω, to eat, F. ἔδομαι, A. 237, Ar. Nub. 121 (in later comedy ἐδοῦρεαι, 
cf. y. above) ; xivw, to drink, F. πίομαι, x. 160, Cyr. i. 3. 9 (later στοὔμαμ) 5 
εἶμαι, to go, commonly used as Fut. of ἔρχομαι. Add a very few poetic forme, 
which will be noticed under the verbs to which they belong. 


190 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. | BOOK κα 


§ 201. IV. The sign of the aortst, 
1.) Becomes -s- in liquid verbs. See § 56. 


2.) Is omitted in εἶπα (J 53), ἤνεγκα (τ. tveyx-, to bear), ἔχεα (Ep. ἔχευα) 
from χέω, to pour, and the poetic ἔκεα (Ep. ἔκηα and xem), from καίω, to burn 
Add the Epic jaséuny and ἠλευάμην, N. 436, 184, ἔσσενα E. 208, δατέασθα 
Hes. Op. 765. See § 185. Z. 


3.) Is the same with that of the Perf. in ἔδηκα, ἔδωκα, and ἦκα. These 
Aorists are used only in the Indicative, and rarely except in the Sing. and 
in the 3d Pers. plur. In the middle voice, the Att. writers use only the Ind. 
ἡκάμην Eur. El. 622, with the very rare Part. ἡκχκάρμενος, Aschin. 72. 9 
The other dialects add ἐθηκάμην, K. 31, ϑηκάμενος Pind. P. 4. 52. 


Nore. ‘These Aorists in -xa are only euphonic extensions of the 2 Aor., 
after the analogy of the Perf. First the final -» (originally -~) passed into 
-«, which became a connecting vowel; and then -x- was inserted to pre- 
vent the hiatus (§§ 179, 186); thus, 24n-» ἔθη-α ἔθη-κ-α, ἔθηκας, ἔθηκε, ἔθηκαν " 
ἔδων ἔδωκω, ἣν ἧκα. This form became common only where the flexible end- 
ing had no vowel (cf. 186), i.e. in the Sing. and in the 3d Pers. pl.; and 
was properly confined to the Ind. act., although a few middle forms are found 
after the same analogy. ‘The nude form disappeared in the Ind. act. sing. 
(cf. § 186), but was elsewhere either the sole or the common form. See 
41 50, 51, 54. 


B. ConnectTinc VowELs. 


§ 202. The connecting vowels serve to unite 
the flexible endings with the root or tense-sign, 
and assist in marking the distinctions of mode and 
tense. | 


Norrs. a. In each tense, that which precedes the connecting vowel (or, 
if this is wanting, the flexible ending) may be termed the base of the tense 
(βάσις, foundation); as, in the Pres. οἵ: βουλεύω, Bovasu-; in the Fut., βου- 
λευσ-; in the Perf. act., BsCovacux-. 


β. The regular additions, which are made to the base in the Present and 
Future, are throughout the same; as, βουληύ-ω, βουλεύσ-ω, βουλεύ-εις, βουλεύσ 
εἰς + βευλεύ-οιρμοι, βουλεύσ-οιμι " βουλεύ-ομαι, βουλεύσ-ομαι, βουλευθήσ-ομαι. 


§ 203. I. In the inpicarive, the connecting vowel is -«- 
in the Aorist and Perfect, and -«- in the Pluperfect; in the 
other tenses, it is -o- before a liquid, but otherwise -s-. 


Thus, A. tovrsio-o-usy, ἐδουλευσ-ἄ - μὴν " Pf. BeCovrsix-a-usy’ Plup. i€sCov- 
rsiu-tiey* Pres. βουλεύ-ο-μεν, Bovasv-s-rs, (βουλεύ-ο-νσι, ἃ 58) βουλεύουσι" Bev- 
λεύ-σεμαι, (βουλεύ-ε-αι, § 37. 4) βουλεύῃ, βουλεύ-ε-ται" Impf. ἐδούλεν-6-ν, ἐξού- 
λευ-ε-ς + ἐδουλευ-δ- μην, ἐδουλεύ-ε-σὸ" F. βουλεύσ-ο-μεν, βουλεύσ-ε-τὸν" βουλευσι 
ό6-μεθα, βουλεύσ-ε-σθον " βουλευθήσ-ο-μαι. 


Remarks. «. In the Sing. of the Pres. and Fut. act. the connectives -o- 
and ~:-, either by union. with the ending, or by simple protraction, become -w- 
and -si~; 88, (Povasv-o-w, -ο-α) βουλεύω, (Bovrsu-t-s) βουλεύεις, (βούχευ-:-Φ, 

s-£) βουλεύει - βουλεύσω, βουλεύσεις, Bovrsdrsr. See $§ 181.1, 2; 188. 


cu. 9.} CONNECTING VOWELS. 191 


B. In the 3d Pers. sing. of the Aor. and Perf. act., -e- takes the place of 
a- ἢ as, (ἐξούλευσ-α- “) iCodrsuct, BeCovAcuxs. See § 181. 2. 


y- In the 3d Pers. pl. of the Plup., -s- commonly takes the place of -s:- 


Norse. The original connective of the Plup. was -sa-, which remained in 
the Ion. (δ 179);.as, ἤδεα &. 71, Hdt. ii. 150, ἐσεθήπεα ζ. 166, ἐφσεθήπεας 
w. 90, ἤδεε B. 832, ἤδεεν Σ. 404, ἐγεγόνεε Hdt. i. 11, συνῃδέατε Id. ix. 58, 
The earlier contraction into -η- is especially old Attic, ‘but also occurs in the 
Ep. and Dor. ; as, I Pers. ἤδη Soph. Ant. 18, ἐπεσόνθη Ar. Eccl. 650, κεχήνη 
Id. Ach. 10; 2 Pers. ἤδης ‘Soph. Ant. 447, ᾿ζδησδω «. 93, ἐλελήθης Ar. Eq. 
822 : 3 Pers. ἤδη A. 70, Soph. CEd. T. 1525, ἐλελήϑη Theoc. 10. 38. By 
precession (§ 29), -n- passed into - εἰς, which became the common connective, 
and in the 3 Pers, sing. is already found in Hom. (arising from -¢¢); as, ἔσσή- 
κει &. 5575 sO λελοίσε, Theoc. 1. 139. In the 3 Pers. pl., -ea2- became -s-, 
by the omission of the α, which was only euphonic in its origin ($179). So, 
in, the 2 Pers. pl., ἤδετε for 73ers, Eur. Bac. 1345. 


§ 204. Il. The SUBJUNCTIVE takes the connecting vowels 
of the Pres. ind., lengthening -s- to -7- and -o- to -w- (ὃ 177). 


Thus, Ind. βουλεύ-ω, Subj. βουλεύ-ω, Bovasic-w- βουλεύ-ει-ς; βουλεύ-ῃ-ς, 
βουλεύσ-η-ς" βουλεύ-ει, Bovrsd-n, βουλεύσ-η . βουλεύ-ο-μεν, βουλεύ-ω-μεν " βου- 
λεύ.-ε-“ε, βουλεύ-η-τε" (βουλεύ-ο.νσι, βουλεύ-ω-νσι, ὃ 58) βουλεύουσι, βουλεύωσι " 
βουλεύ-ο-μαι, βουλεύ-ω- μαι, βουλεύσ-ω-μιαι - βουλεύ-ε-“αι, βουλεύ-η-φαι, βουλεύσ 
ἡ-ται. 


§ 205. Ill. The oprarive has, for its connective, 1, either 
alone or with other vowels (δ 177, 184). 


Rute. If the Ind. has no-connecting vowel, and the base 
ends in a, ε, or o, then the 1 is followed by ἡ in the subjective 
forms, but receives no addition in the objective. In other 
cases, the s takes before it u in the Aor., and o in the other 
tenses. The connective : always forms a diphthong with the 
preceding vowel. 


Thus, izra-in-v, icra-i-uny ( 48), vibs-in-v, σιθε-ί-μην (4 50), Reinet 
in-v ( 35), διδο-ΐη-ν, did0-i-unv (4 51) 5 βουλεύσ-αι-μι, Bovrsve-ci-pnv> βου- 
λεύ-οι-μοιι, Bovrsv-ol-wny, βουλεύσ-οι-μει, Bovrsve-ol-unv, Bovrsudne-oi-uny > ἴ-οι- μα 
(4 56), desxvd-o1-pes, Derxvv-oi-unv (Y 52). 


Remarks. 1. In Optatives in -in», the is often omitted in the Plur., 
especially in the 3d Pers., and also in the Dual ; as, ἱσσαῖμεν, irraire, irraiey 
ἱσταῖτον (Y 48), βουλευθεῖεν (4 35). In the 3d Pers. pl. of the Aor. pass. 
the longer form is rare in classic Greek (ixasuQéeincay Th. i. 38). 


2. In contract subjective forms, whether Pres. or Fut., the connective o often 
assumes ἡ; as, Qirb-o1- p24, contr. - Φιλοῖ- μοι. OF Φιλοίη-ν (ἴ 46); ἀγγελοίη.ν 
(4 41, § 56). 


Notes. a@. The form of the Opt. in -o/ny, for τϑῖμε; is called the Aétic Op- 
tative, though not confined to Attic writers; as, ἐνωρῳὴ Hat. i. 89, οἰκοίησε 
Theoe. 12. 28. This form is most employed in the Sing., where it is the com- . 
mon fosm in contracts in -ἔω and -ὅω, and almost the exclusive form in con-.. 
tracts in -éw. In the 3d Pers. pl., it scarcely occurs δοκοίησαν Mschin. 41. 


192 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [500K 11. 


29). It is likewise found in the Perf., as σεσοιθοίη (4 39) Ar. Ach. 940 
ἐκσεφευγοίην Soph. Cid. T. 840, προεληλυθοίης Cyr. ii. 4. 17; and in the 
2 Aor. of ἔχω, to have, which has, for its Opt., σχοίην in the simple verk 
(Cyr. vii. 1. 36), but xe in compounds (κατάσχοις Mem. iii, 11. 11). ᾿ 
So ἰοίην (Ἵ 56) Symp. 4. 16. 


β. See, in respect to the insertion of ἡ (ε) in the Opt., § 184. 


3. The Aor. opt. act. has a second form, termed olic, in which the con 
nective is that of the Ind. with « prefixed; as, βουλεύσ-εια-ς-. See ὃ 18h. a 


§ 206. IV. In the imperative and inrinirTive, the con- 
necting vowel is -a- in the Aorist, and -s- in the other tenses. 


Thus, Bovatio-a-rs, βουλεύσ-α-σθε, βουλεῦσ-α-ι, βουλεύσ-α-σθαι - βλ «ὦ 
δουλεύ-ε-σθε, βουλεύ-ε-σθαι, BeCovrAcux-t-vas, βουλεύσ-ε-σθαι, βουλευθήσ-ε- σθαι. 

ReMARKS. a. Before ν in the Imperative, -o- takes the place of -s-, and, 
in the 2d Pers. sing., of -a- ; as, Bovatu-d-vrwy, βούλευσ-ο-ν (§ 210. 2). 


β. In the Infinitive of the Pres. and Fut. act., -s- is lengthened to -s 
(§ 183) 5 as, βουλεύ-ει-ν, βουλεύσ-ει-ν. 


§ 207. V. In the parricipLe, the connecting vowel is 
-α- in the Aorist, and -o- in the other tenses. 


Thus, (Bovacie-a-vrs, ὃ 109) βουλεύσας, βουλευσ-ἄ-μενος " (βουλεῦ-σ-νας, 
§ 109) βουλεύων, (Bwaci-o-veca, ὃ 182) βουλεύουσα, (βουλεῦ-ο-να, § 68) βου- 
λεῦον - βουλεύσων - (BeCouasun-d-rs, §§ 112. w, 179) βεξουλευκώς, (βεξουλευκ- 
ό-πσω, ὃ 182. 1) βεξουλευκυῖα, (PeCovrsux-o-7, § 103) βεδουλευκός > βουλευ-ὅ- 
(νος, βουλευσ-ό-μενος, βουλευθησ-ό- μενος. 


§2@8. The ΙΝΡΙΟΑΤΙΨῈ, IMPERATIVE, INFINITIVE, and 
PARTICIPLE are nude (nudus, naked), i. e. have no connecting 
vowel (ὃ 175), 


1) In the Aor., Perf., and Plup., passive, of all verbs. 


Is the Aor. pass., the flexible endings are affixed, in these modes, to the 
tense-sign (ὃ 198); in the Perf. and Plup. pass., they are affixed to the root ; 
as, ἐθουλεύ.θη-ν (§ 199) ; BsCovAsu-poes, ἐξεξουλεύ- μην. 


ΘΙ the Pres. and Impf. of some verbs in which the char 
acteristic is a short vowel. ‘These verbs are termed, from the 
ending of the theme, VerBs IN -w, and, in distinction from 
tiem, other verbs are termed VERBs IN -w (ᾧ 209). 

The flexible endings are here affixed to the root; thus, ἵσσα-μεν, icra-cay* 
,ἴσσα-μαι, ἱστά-μην (4 48). In the Inf. and Part., the connecting vowels -«- 
“and -o- are inserted afters; thus, ἐ-ἔνναι, ΠΕΣ ἰών (4 56). So, in the 
Imperative, ἰόντων. Cf. §§ 185. y, 205. 


3.) In a few Second Perf. and Plup. forms (ᾧ 186). 

The flexible endings are here affixed to the root; thus, fera-usy, ἕσσα-θη, 
ἑστά-ναι ( 48). In the Part., the connecting vowel is inserted; as, δεδιώς 
(J 58). So, in the Inf, δεδιέναι, with which compare iévas, above. 


cH. 9.1 FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 193 


C. FiLexiste ENpines. 


§ 209. The flexible endings (flexibilis, change 


ε 


able) are the chief instruments of conjugation, 
marking by their changes the distinctions of voice, 
number, person, and, in part, of tense and mode. 
They are exhibited in 1 31, according to the classi- 
fication (§§ 195, 196). 


ΞΡΕΟΙΑΙ, RuLes AND REMARKS. 


First Pers. Sine. The ending -u, after -α- connective, 
and, in primary forms (§ 196. 1), after -o- and -w- connec- 
tive, is dropped or absorbed; after -o:- and -or-, and in the 
nude Present (ὃ 208. 2), it becomes -ui; in other cases, it be- 
comes -»; as, (Ind. Suviev-o-u, Subj. Bovdev-w-u) βυυλεύ-ω, 
βεθούλευκ- ας, ἐθούλευστα (so after -sa-, contr. -7-, § 203. N.); 
Povdsva-ou-ui, βουλεύ-οι- μι. βουλεύσ-οι- μι, ἵστη-μι (FY 48) 3 ἐθού-- 
dev-o-v, ἐβεθουλεύκ--ει-ν, ἐθουλεύϑη-ν". βουλευϑ εἰη-ν ". φιλοίη-ν, 
ἀγγελοίη-ν (ἢ 205. 2) ; ἵστη-», ἱσταίη-ν ( 48). See ᾧ 181. 1. 

Nore. Τρέφοιν, for τρέφοιμει, occurs for the sake of the metre Eur. Fr. Ine. 
152. 


§ 21@. Seconp Pers. Sine. 1. For the form -σϑα, see 
§ 182. 


2. The ending -ϑ is dropped after -ε- connective ; after -a- 
connective, it becomes -v, with a change of -α- to -ο- (δ 206. «) ; 
after a short vowel in the root, it becomes in the 2d Aor. o, and 
in the Pres. «, which is then contracted with the preceding 
vowel («= becoming 7); in other cases, it becomes -ϑὲ (see 

181. 3). Thus, βούλευ-ε * Bovdevo-o-v + ϑέ-ς, δό-ς, ἕςς 
({[§] 50, 51, 54) 5 (Gord) ἵστη, (τέϑε-ε) τέϑει, (δί-δο-ε) δίδου, 
(deizvi-s) δείκνυ ([{] 48-52); φάνηϑι ( 42), βουλεύϑητι 
(ἢ 62), fora ({ 48), ἴσϑι, δέδίϑι ( 58), and, in like manner, 
gud, ἴϑι (ΤΠ 53, 56, ὃ 181. 3), and the poet. ἱλᾶϑι Theoc. 
15. 148, ἐπόμνῦϑι Theog. 1195. 


Nore. In composition, cr74:, βῆθι, and i (44 48, 56, 57) are often 
shortened to s7@, Ba, and εἰ - as, παράστα for παράστηθι, κατάξξ for κατά 
Cnbi, πρόσει for πρόσιθι. 


3. The endings -oo. and -co drop the o, except in the Perf. 
and Plup. pass., and sometimes in the nude Pres. and Impf. 
(Ὁ 208. 2); as, (βουλεύ-ε-αἱς § 37. 4) βουλεύῃ or βουλεύει, (Bor- 
dsv-s-0) βουλεύου, (ovler-s-0) ἐθουλεύου, (ἐβουλεύσ-α-ο) ἐβουλεύ- 
ow" βουλεύ-οι-ο, βουιλεύσ-αι-ο" βεθβούλευ-σαι, βεθούλευ-σο, ἐθεθού- 
λευ-σο" ἵστα-σαι, ἴοτα-σο and (ista-o) ἵστω ( 48) ; τίϑε-σαι 

Δ 


194 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [Buok Ii , 


and (ri9e-a) τίϑῃ, (ἔϑε-ο) ἔϑου ({] 50); δίδυ-σο and Sone ο 
δίδου, (δόο) δοῦ ({ 51). See § 182. IIL. 


Remarks. (a) The Aor. imperat. is irregularly contracted; thus, (βου- 
λεύσ-«-9) βούλευσαι. (Ὁ) The contraction of -cas into -« (§ 87, 4) is a 
special Attic form, which was extensively used by pure writers; and which, 
after yielding in other words to the common contraction into -7, remained in 
βούλει, οἴει, and ὄψει. (c) In verbs in -ws, -cas remained more frequently 
than -σο, and was the common form if ὦ or ὁ preecded. Yet pvet. ἐτίσσᾳ 
Asch. Eum. 86, δύνᾳ or δύνῃ (< 29) Soph. Ph. 798. Further particulars 
respecting the use or omission of the -c- in verbs in -us ave best learned from 
the tables and from observation. 


§ 28. Tuirp Pers. Since. The ending -1 becomes -σι 
in the nude Pres., but in other cases is dropped, or lost ina 
diphthong ; as, (ἴσ τη- 1) ἵστησι, ἴση ({ 48) 3 ἐθούλενε, βεθυύλευκε, 
(βούλευ--ε-τ., βουλεύ-ε-ε) βουλεύει. See ὃ 181.2 


Nore. The paragogic ν (§ 66), which is regularly affixed only to + and 
simple ,, is, in a few instances, found after -ε in the Plup., and follows ἢ in 
the Impf. of εἰμί, even before a consonant; thus, 3 Pers. ἤδειν ὡς (Ἷ 58) 
Ar. Vesp. 635, fev οὐδέπω (Ἷ 56) Id. Plut. 696, ἐπεποίθειν οὐκ Id. Nub. 
1347, ἑσσήκειν αὐτοῦ ¥. 691, BeCadxew αἰχμή E. 661, ἦν dei. 2.3. In all 
these cases, the » appears to have been retained from an uncontracted form in 
-t(v). See § 203. N., 230. y. So Impf. ἤσκειν εἴρια I. 388. 


§ Φ 12, First anv Seconp Persons Pt., wirn THE Duat. 
1, The Ist Pers. is the same in the Plur. and Du., having, for 
its subjective ending, -μὲν, and for its objective, -us9u, or some- 
times in the poets, -μεσϑα ᾿ thus, βουλεύο-μεν, βουλευό-μεϑα, 
and poet. βουλευό-μεσϑα. 

Nore. Of the form in -μεθον (δ 174), there have been found only three 
classical examples, all in the dual primary, and all occurring in poetry before 
a vowel: περιδώμεθον VY. 485, Asasizmsboy Soph. El. 950, ὁρμιώμιεεθον Id. Ph. 
1079. Two examples more are quoted by Athenzus (98 a) from a word- 
hunter (ὀνομαςφοθήρας), whose affectation he is ridiculing. 


2. The 2d Pers. pl. always ends in-«. The 2d Pers. du. 1s 
ee, νὰ by changing this vowel into -ov; and the 3d Pers. du., 
by changing it into -ον in the primary inflection, into -y» in the 
secondary, and into -wy in the imperative. Thus, Pl. 2, βουλεύ- 
ete, ἐθουλεύετε " Du. 2, βουλεύετον, ἐθουλεύετον " Du. 3, βουλεΐετον, 
ἐθουλευέτην, βουλευέτων. 


Remark. In the secondary dual, the 3d Pers. seems originally to have 
had the same form with the 2d; and we find in Hom. such cases as 3d Pers. 
διώκετον Κ. 364, rersdixeroy N. 346, λαφύσσετον Σ. 583, ϑωρήσσεσθον N. 301. 
On the other hand, the lengthening to -ην (with which compare the lengthen- 
ing of the Plup. affix, § 179) was sometimes extended by the Attics even to 
the 2d Pers. ; as, 2d Pers. εἰχέσην Soph. Cid. Τὶ 1511, ἠλλαξάτην Eur. Ale. 
661, εὑρέτην, ixtdnusirny Pl. Euthyd. 273 e. 


§ 213. Tuirv Pers. Pr. 1. The en ling -vz, in the pri 


cH. 9.] FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 195 


mary tenses, becomes -vat. In the secondary, after -o- or -α- 
connective, it becomes -»; after a diphthong in the Opt., -a; 
but, otherwise, -cay. Thus, (βουλεύονσι, § 58) βουλεύουσι, 
βουλεύσουσι, βεθουλεύκᾶσι, βουλεύωσι " ἱστᾶσι, ἑστᾶσι ({] 48) ; 
ἐθούλευ-ο-ν, ἐθούλευσ-α-ν " βουλεύο:-εν, βουλεύσαι-εν, βουλευϑ εἴ-εν" 
ἐθεθουλεύκε-σαν, ἐθουλεύϑη-σαν, βουλευϑείη- σαν " ἵστα-σαν, ἔστη- 


σαν, ἱσταίη-σαν (Ἵ 48). See §§ 181, 184. 8. 


2. In the Perf. and Plup. pass. of impure verbs, the 3d Pers. 
pl. is either formed in -era, and -ato (ὃ 60), or, more com 
monly, supplied by the Part. with εἰσέ and ἤσαν ({ 55); as, 
ἐφϑάρ-αται Th. ill. 18, from φϑείρω (τ. φϑαρ-), to waste, ys- 
γθαμμένοι εἰσί, γεγῥαμμένοι joav ( 36). 

Remark. The forms in -ατᾶν and -ασὸ are termed Jonic. Before these 
endings, a labial or palatal mute must be rough (9, x), and a lingual, middle (2) ; 
as, from σρέπω (Tr. reaer-), to turn, (πέτρασ-νται) τεσράφαται Pl. Rep. 533 Ὁ; 


from σ-άσσω (1. cuy-)sto arrange, (τέταγ-νται) τετάχαται iv. 8. 5, ἐσετέχατο 
Th. vii. 4. . , : 


3. In the Imperative, the shorter forms in -ντων and -o dev 
(Ὁ 177), which are termed Attic (§ 7), are the more common, 
In Homer, they are the sole forms. 


Nore. In ἔστων and ἴσων (YJ 55, 56), she old plur. form has remained 
without change. 


§ 244. 1. Inrmirive. The sudjective ending, after -«- 
connective (§ 206. 8), has the form -»; after -α- connective, -ὸ 
forming a diphthong with -α- ; but, in other cases, -γαὶ; as, 
βουλεύ-ει-»ν, Bovdevo-er-v * βουλεῦσ-α-ἰ " βεβουλευκ- ἐ-ναι, βουλευϑῆς 


vou" ἵστά-ναι, στῆ-ναι, ἑστά-ναι ( 48). See δῇ 176, 189, 


_ 2. ΡΑΒΤΙΟΙΡΙΕ. For the change of ν to a connecting vowel 
in the Perf. act., see § 179. For the declension of the Part., 
see Ch. ΠΙ., and the paradigms (1 22), 


§ 215. Remarxs. 1. For the REGULAR AFFIXES of the verb, 
whica are those of the ewphonic Pres. and Impf., and of the regularly formed 
Fut., Aor., Perf., and Plup., see 41 29,30. These affixes are open in the 
Pres. and Impf., and close in the other tenses. For the arrrxes of the Pres. 
and Impf. of VERBs IN -u: (ὃ 208. 2), see JY 29, 30. The arrrxes of the 
2d Aor. act. and mid. are the same with those of the Impf. (δ 199. «), or, 
except in the Ind., the same with those of the Pres. (§ 169. 6). The Arrrx- 
Es of the other tenses denominated second (except the nude 2d Perf. and Plup., 
§ 186) differ from the regular affixes only in the tense-sign (§ 199. II.). The 
Fut. Perf. or 3d Fut. has the same affixes with the common Fut. act. and 
mid. (§ 179). 

2. Special care is required in distinguishing forms which have the same 
letters. In βουλεύω (44 34, 35), we remark (besides the forms which are the 
same in the Plur. and Du., § 212) the following: Ind. and Subj. Bovarctw- 
Fut. Ind. and Aor. Subj. βουλεύσω - Ind. and Imp. βουλεύεσε, βουλεύεσθε - Ind. 


196 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. —CUNTRACTION. |BOOK 1]: 


Pl. 3, and Part. Pl. Dat. βουλεύουσι, βουλεύσουσι > Imp. Pl. 3, and Part. Pl 
Gen. βουλευόντων, βουλευσάντων, βουλευθέντων Act. S. 3, and Mid. S. 2, Bow 
λεύει, βουλεύσει - Subj. Act. S. 3, and Ind. and Subj. Mid. S. 2, βουλεύῃ - Fut 
Ind. Mid. S. 2, and Aor. Subj. Act. 5. 3, and Mid. S. 2, βουλεύσῃ - Aor. 
Imp. βούλευσον, Fut. Part. βουλεῦσον - Opt. Act. S. 8, βουλεύσαι, Inf. Act. 
βουλεῦσαι, Imp. Mid. 5. 2, βούλευσαι- 


3. With respect to the changes which take place in the root, or in the unioy, 
of the affixes with the root, the tenses are thus associated: 1. the Pres. and 
Impf. act. and pass. ; 2. the Fut. act. and Mid.; 3. the Aor. act. and mid. 
4. the Perf. and Plup. act.; 5. the Perf. and Plup. pass.; 6. the Aor. and 
Fut. pass. It will be understood, that whatever change of the kind mentioned 
above takes place in one of the tenses, belongs likewise to the associated tenses, 
if nothing appears to the contrary. For the Fut. Perf., see § 239. 


Il. Union or THE AFFIXES WITH THE Root 


A Recutar Oren AFFIXES. 


§ 216. When the regular "ΤΑ τὰ (§ 215. 1) 
are annexed to roots ending in a, €, Or 0, CONTRAC- 


TION takes place, according to the rules (δὰ 31 -- 37). 
See the paradigms (11 45-47). 


Nores. a. Verbs in which this contraction takes place are termed Con 
TRACT VERBS, or, from the accent of the theme, Perispomena. In distinction 
from them, other verbs are termed Barytone Verbs. See Prosody. 


β. The verbs xaw, to burn, and xadzw, to weep, which have likewise the 
forms χαίω and κλαίω, are not contracted. Dissyllabic Verbs in -éw# admit 
only the contractions into «; thus, πλέω, to sail, πλέεις rAsis, πλέει πλεῖ, 
πλέομεν, α“λέεσε «λεῖτε, πλέουσι. Except δέω, to bind; as, τὸ δοῦν, τῷ dodvr 
Pl. Crat. 419 a, b. 


y. The contract Ind. and Subj. of verbs in -aw are throughout the same.° 
See 4 45. The contract Inf. in τῶν is likewise written without thes subse. ; 
thus, σιμεῶν, as contr. from the old σιμάεν (§§ 25. β, 176, 183). So φιλεῖν, 
δηλοῦν may be formed from the old φιλέεν, δηλδεν.- 


B. Recutar Crose AFFIXES. 


§ 217. I. When the close affixes are annexed 
to a consonant, changes are often required by the 
general laws of orthography and euphony ; as, 


γράφω (36, root γραφ-) ; γράψω, ἔγραψα, γέγραψα, (δ 51); γέγραφα, 
ἰγεγοάφειν (§ 61); γέγραμμαι, γεγραμμένος (ὃ 53); γέγρασσα (ὃ 52) 
γίγεραφθε, γεγράφθω (§ 60). ᾿ 

λείπω ( 37, τ. λιπ-) λεισ-) 5 ἐλείφδην, λειφθήσομαι (§ 52). 

πράσσω (YF 38, τ. σράγ-)}; πράξω, πράξομαι, ἐπραξάμην, «ἔπραξο (8 51) 
αἰσρῶχα (δ 61): πέπσρακεσα ἰσράχϑην, ἐπέπραχϑε, πετρᾶχϑα, (§§ 52, 60). 


cu. 9.7 OTHER EUPHONIC CHANGES. 197 


* wsibw ( 39, τ. σιό-, πειθ-}; σείοω, ἐπέπεισο, ἐπέπεισθε, πεπεῖσθαι (ὃ 55) 
φίπεικα (§ 61) ; πέπεισμαι, ἐπεπείσμην (ὃ 53); πέπεισται, ἐπείσθην (ἢ 53). 
ἀγγέλλω (FY 41, τ. ἀγγελ-); ἀγγελῶ, ἀγγελοῦμαι, ἤγγειλα, ἠγγειλάμην 
5 56); ἤγγελθε (δ 60). 


Remarks. a. In the liquid verbs κλίνω, to bend, κρίνω, to judge, καείνω, 
to slay, rsivw, to stretch, and πλύνω, to wash, ν is dropped before the affixes 
which remain close (§ 56), except sometimes in the Aor. pass. (chiefly in po- 
etry for the sake of the metre); as, κέκλιμαι, ἐκλίθην and ἐκλίνθην, Γ᾿, 360, 
H. Gr. iv. 1. 305; κέκρικα, κέκριμαι, ἐκρίθην and Ep. ἐκρίνθην, N. 129. 


6. In other verbs, » characteristic, before ~, more frequently becomes 2, but 
sometimes becomes μὲ or is dropped (§ 54) ; as, πέφασμαι, πεφασμένος (Ἷ 42) 5 
πωροξῦνω, to exasperute, Pf. P. Part. παρωξυμμένος or παρωξυμεένος. 


y. Before μὲ in the affix, neither ~ nor y can be doubled; hence, xizeppas, 
ἰλήλεγμα, (Y 44), for xixawumos, ἐλήλεγγμαι. 


§ 218. Il. Before the regular close affixes, a 
short vowel is commonly lengthened ; and here ἄ 
becomes ἢ, unless preceded by ¢, 4, @, oF go 


(§ 29); as, Ἷ 


σιμάω ( 45), «τιμήσω, ἐτίμησα, τεσίμηκα, τετίμημαι, ἐπιμήθην. 

φιλέω (Y 46), φιλήσω, φιλήσομιαι, πεφίλημαι, πεφιλήσομεαι. 

δηλόω ( 47), δηλώσω, ἐδηλωσάμην, ἐδεδηλώμην, δηλωθήσομιαι. 

“ἴω, to honor, poet., F. σΐσω, A. ἔσισα, Pf. P. réictwan 

φύω, to.produce, F. φύσω, A. ἔφῦσα, Pf. πσέφῦκα. 

iw, to permit, F. ἐάσω, A. εἴασα (S 189. 3), Pf. siaxa. 

Sngtw, to hunt, F. ϑηράσω, A. ἐθήρῶσα, Pf. τεθήρακα (8 69). 

Notes. a. Χράω, to utter an oracle, xedouas, to use, and rergaivw (rT. τρα-), 


to bore, lengthen @ to 1; as, F. χρήσω, χρήσομαι, τρήσω. ᾿Αλοάω, to thresh, 
with the common F. ἀλσήσω, has also the Old-Att. ἀλοάσω. 


β. In the Perf. of verbs in - μοι, ε is lengthened to «, instead of ἡ (ὃ 29); 
as, τέθεικα, τέθειμα, (Y 50); εἶκα, εἷμα, (Y 54). 

§219. Remarks. 1. Some verbs retain the short vowel, 
and others are variable ; as, 

cru, to draw, F. σπἄσω, A. ἔσπάσα, Pf. ἔσπάᾶκα, Pf. P. ἔσπασμαι (§ 221), 
A. P. ἐσπάσθην. 

σελέω, to finish, Ἐ, rertow, σελῶ (8 200.2), A. ἐσέλεσα, Pf. φεσέλεκα, 
Pf. P. σεσέλεσμαι, A. P. ἐσελέσθην. 

ἀρόω, to plough, F. ἀρόσω, A. ἤροσα, A. P. ἠρόθην (Ion. Pf. P. Part. ἀρηρο- 
μένος, 3. 548, Hat. iv. 97, § 191. 2). 

δέω, to bind, F. δήσω, A. ἔδησα, 3 BF. δεδήσομαι- Pf. δέδεκα, Pf. P. δέδεμαι 
(δέδεσμιαι, Hipp.), A. P. ἐδέδην. 

Siw (“ὅ), to sacrifice, F. Siew, A. ἔδῦσα, A. M. ἐδσσάμην- Pf. ribixa, 
Pf. P. σέθῦμα,, A. P. ἐςύθην ( 62). 

Norges. «. Verbs in -avvdys and -evvdus, and those in which the root ends 


Py ied 


198 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK Ii. 


in λἄ-, for the most part retain the short vowel ; as, γελάω, to laugh, F. ve- 
λἄσομαι, A. ἐγέλᾶσα, A. P. ἐγελάσθην. ᾿ 
β. The short vowel remains most frequently before 6, and least frequently 


before σι In the PERFECT and PLUPERFECT, it remains more frequently in 
the passive, than in the active voice. 


§ 220. 2. In seven familiar dissyllables, mostly imply- 
ing motion, F appears to have been once attached to the roe 
(see §§ 22. ὃ, 117): 

Siw, to run (x. 9F-), F. (StF copes) ϑεύσομαι (ϑεύσω only Lye. 1119). See 
§ 166. a. 

viv, to swim, F. vedcouas, -οὔραι (δ 200. 3), iv. 3. 12, A. ἔνευσα, Pf. νένευκα. 

σ΄λέω, to sail, F. πλεύσω, commonly πλεύσομαι; v. 6. 12, or «λευσυῦβαί, Ve 
1: 10, A. ἔσλευσα, Pf. πέπσλευκα, Pf. P. πέσλευσμαι (ὃ 221). 

aviw, to breathe, ¥. πνεύσω, Dem. 284. 17, commonly πνεύσομαι Eur. Andr 
555, or πνευσοῦμαι, Ar. Ran. 1221, A. ἔσνευσα, Pf. riarvevxa. 

Add ῥέω, to flow, καίω, to burn, and κλαίω, to weep. 


22h. [1]. After a short vowel or a diphtheng, 
o is usually inserted before the regular affixes of the 
Passe beginning with 6, pu, or τ; as, 


craw, to draw (§ 219), Pass. Pf. ἔσπα-σ-μαι, ἔσπασαι, ἔσπα-σ-σαι, ἔσσό-σ- 
μεθα - tomu-c-wtvoss A. ἐσσά-σ-θην" Ἐς, σπα-σ- θήσομαι. 

τελέω, ἴο Sinish (§ 219), Pass. Pf. σετέλεσμαι, rersrsoptvos « — ἐσετελέ- 
cuny, ἐτετέλεσο, ἐπετέλεστο " A. ἐτελέσθην - F. σελεσθήσομιαι. 

κελεύω, to command, Pass. Pf. κεκέλευσμιαι, κεκέλευσται, κεκελευσμοένος * 
Plup. ἐκεκελεύσμην" A. ἐκελεύσθην- Εἰ, κελευσθήσομιαι. 


Remarks. «a. In some verbs, σ is omitted after a short vowel or diphthong 
in some it is inserted after a simple long vowel; and some are variable ;. thus, 
ἠρόθην, δέδεμαι, ἐδέθην, τἐθῦύμαι, ἐσύθην (§ 219); βεδούλευμαι, ἐξουλεύθην (F 85)" 
χόω, to heap up, κέχωσμαι, ἐχώσθην- χράομαι, to use, κέχρημαι, ἐχρήσθην 
μέμνημαι, to remember, ἐμνήσθην " σαύω, to stop, πέπαυμαι, ἐπαύσθην and ἐπαύ- 
θην - javvous (1. ῥο-), to strengthen, ἔῤῥωριαι, ἐῤῥώσθην - δράω, to do, δέδρᾶμαι 
and δέδρασριαι, ἐδράσθην " ϑεαύω, to dash, τέθραυσμαι and φτέθραυμαι, ἐθραύσθην. 
Tt will U8 observed that the σ is attracted most strongly by the affixes begin- 
ning with 9. 

β. When σ is inserted in the Perf. and Plup., the 3d Pers. pl. wants the 
simpl. frm ; as, Pl. 3, toracpwivos εἰσί, κεκελευσμένοι ἦσαν. See § 213. 2 


§ 222. IV. The regular close affixes are an: 
ane with the asertion of ἡ, 
1.) To double consonant roots, except those which end in a 


labial or palatal mute not preceded by «, and those which end 
in a lingual mute preceded by v; as, 


αὔξ-ω (τ. αὐξ-, 4 43), αὐξ-ή-σω, ηὔξ-ητσα, ηὔξ-ητκα, αὔξ-ησμαι, ηὐξ-ή-θην 
«ὐξ- η- θήσομαι. 


on. 9.] EUPHONIC CHANGES. . 199 


tw, to boil, F. ἐψήσω, A. ἥψησα. ὄξω, to smell, F. show, A. ὥξησα. 

μέλλω, to δὲ about to, to purpose, to delay, F. μελλήσω, A. ἐμέλλησα and 
ἠμέλλησα (ὃ 189. 1). 

ἔῤῥω, to go away, Be. ippnow, A. ἤῤῥησα, PE. ἤῤῥηκα. 

βόσκω, to pasture, to feed, F. βοσκήσω. 

But aduarw, to shine, F. λάμ ψω, A. traaurpa, 2 Pf. λέλαμπα" deyw, to 
lead, to rule, F. ἄρξω, A. hota, Pf. P. ἤφργμαι, A. P. ἤρχθην " σπένδω, to make 
a libation, F. (σαένδ-σω, §§ 55, 58) σπείσω, A. ἔσπεισα, Pf. P. (ἔσπενδ-μαι, 
ἔσπενσμαι, ὃ 53) ἔσπεισμαι, A. P. ioosicdny, late Pf. A. ἔσπεικα- 


2.) To liquid roots in which the characteristic is preceded 
Ly a diphthong, and to a few in which it is preceded by ¢ ; as, 

βούλομαι, to will, F. βουλήσομαι, Pf. βεξούχημαι (Ep. 2 Pf. βέξουλα A. 113), 
A. ἐξουλήθην and ἠξουλήθην (ὃ 189. 1). 

ἐδέλω, and shortened ϑέλω, to wish, F. ἐθελήσω and ϑελήσω, A. ἠθέλησα and 
bianca, Pf. ἠθέληκα, and late «εθέληκα. 

μέλω, to concern, Ἐς μελήσω, A. ἐμέλησα, Pf. μεμέληκα (Ep. 2 Pf. as Pres. 
μΐμηλα, B. 25), A. P. ἐμελήθην. This verb is commonly used impersonally : 
μέλει, it concerns, μελήσει, &e. 

μένω, to remain, F. μενῶ, A. ἔμεινα, 1 Pf. μεμένηκα (cf. 54. y), 2 PE. μέ- 
f4eva. 

νέμω, to distribute, F. νεμοῶ, and later νεμήσω, A. ἔνειμα, Pf. vevienxa, Pf. P. 
veveenwot, A. P. iveunény and ἐνερέθην (R. a). 


3.) To a few other roots; as, 


δέω, to need, F. δεήσω, A. ἐδέησα (δῆσεν Σ. 100), Pf. δεδέηκα- Mid. δέομαι, 
to need, to beg, F. δεήσομαι, Pf. dedinuas, A. P. ἐδεήθην. The Act. is most com- 
mon as impersonal: δεῖ, there is need, δεήσει, ἐδέησε, &e. See R. y. 

εὕδω, to sleep, Impf. εὗδον and εὗδον (ὃ 188. N.), F. εὑδήσω. ; 

οἵοροαι, to think, F. οἰήσομμαι, A. P. φήθην. When used parenthetically, the 
Ist Pers. sing. of the Pres. and Impf. has the nude forms ojzeu, μην. In 
Hom. we find the forms stow, ὀΐω, οἴω (Dor. οἰῶ Ar. Lys. 156), wicduny, 
wicény, with . commonly long. See R. y. 
᾿ς οἴχομαι, to depart, to be gone (the Pres. having commonly the force of the 
Perf.), FE, οἰχήσομαι, Pf. ἤχημαι, and poet. οἴχωκα or ᾧχωκα (R. β) Soph. 
Aj. 896 (ῴχηκεν K. 252). 

παίω, to strike, F. raicw, in Att. poetry παιήσω, Ar. Nub. 1125, A. ἔπαισα, 
Pf. σέπαικα, A. P. ἐπαίσθην. 


Remarks. a. In a few verbs, ε is inserted instead of » (cf. 219); as, 


ἄχθομαι, to be vexed, F. ἀχϑέσομαι, A. P. ἠχϑέσθην. 


μάχομαι, to fight, F. μα χέσομαι, μα χοῦμαι (§ 200. 2), A. ἐμαχεσάμην, PE, 
μεμάχημαι (lon. μαχέομαι, Hat. vii. 104, F. μα χήσομαι A. 298). 


β. In a very few verbs, we find the insertion of oor w. See ofxopas 
(3. above), devi ps, ἐσθίω, ἄγω, εἴωθα (in the two last the inserted vowel even 
precedes the characteristic). 


y- In most of these cases, the vowel is obviously inserted for the sake of 
euphony. That the vowel should be commonly ἡ, rather than ¢, results from 


200 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK ΤΙ 


§ 218.. In δέω, to need, and οἴομαι, to think, there appears to have been once 
a digamma, of which we find traces in the Homeric (dF owas) devopas, deunre 
μαι, ἐδεύησα, and in the long : of ὀΐομαι. 


223. V. Ina few liquid roots, METATHESIS 
takes place before the terminations that remaon 
close (δ 56), to avoid the concurrence of conso- 
nants (§ 64. 3); as, 

βάλλω (τ. βαλ-, transp. BAa-), to throw, F. βαλῶ, and in Att. τῳ 3. λ 


λήσω (§ 229), Ar. Vesp. 222, 2 A. ἔδαλον, Pf. βέδληκα (§ 218), Pf. P. Be 
Sanwa, 3 BF. βεδλήσομαι, A. P. tandny. 


κάμνω (τ. xau-, transp. xua-), to labor, to be weary, F. καρμοῦμαι, 2 A. ἔκα 
μον, Pf. κέκμηκα. 
C. VERBS IN -μι. 
(For the paradigms, see ΤΠ 48 - 57.) 


ἃ 224. I. Before the nude affixes, the cHar- 
ACTERISTIC SHORT VOWEL (§§ 183, 208. 2) is 


lengthened (ἃ becoming ἡ; unless preceded by ρ, 
§ 29; and 2, εἰ); 


1.) In the Indicative singular of, the PRESENT 
and IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 


Thus, ἵστημι (J 48; r. ord-), torny* τίϑημι ( 50; τ, 9e-), 
éridny* δίδωμι (FJ 51; 2 Ὑ. 6o-), ἐδίδων " δείκνῦμι ({ 52; r. δεικ-) 
δεικνῦ-), ἐδείκνῦν" εἶμι (Π ὅ6 ; τ. Ἶ-), εἶ, εἶσι. 


2.. In the seconD ΑΟΒΙΒΤ ΑΟΤΙΨΕ throughout, 
except before vt (§ 183). 


Thus, ἔστην, ἔστημεν, στῆϑι,) στήτωσαν, στῆναι " στάντων, 
(στά-ντο) στάς " ἀπέδρᾶν ({ 57; τ. δρᾶ-), ἀποδρᾶναι" ἔγνων 
({ 57%. τ. 7ν0-)» ἔγνωμεν, ἔγνωτον, γνῶϑι, γνῶναι " yvortar, 
ἐρνδῥὲρ) γνούς. 

Exception. The short vowel remains, in the 2 Aor. of σίϑημι, δίδωμι, and 
ins, except in the Inf., where it is changed into its corresponding diphthong 
(§ 29) 3 thus, ἔθεμεν, Sis, Ssivas, (Si-ves) ϑείς - ἔδορμεεν, δός, δοῦναι, (d0-ues) 
δούς > εἶμεν (4 54; τ΄ t-; for the augment, see § 189.3), ἕς, εἶνα,, (ἕ-νας) 
εἴς (for the Sing. of these Aorists, see ὃ 201. 3). Except, also, the poet. 
ixréy and odriy. 


3.) In a few mippDLe forms, mostly poetic. 


Thus, δίζημαι (Τ. διξε- ), to seek; ὀνίνημις to profit, 2A.M 
ὠνή ἤμην, and later ὠνάμην * πέμπλημι;, lo fill, 2 A. M. poet 
ἐπλήμην. 


en. 9.] VERBS IN -μι- 201 


§ @2s. Il. If the characteristic is «, 0, or v, the singular 
of the IMPERFECT ACTIVE is commonly formed with the con- 
necting vowel (§ 185. 8); thus, ἐτέϑεον, contr. ἐτέϑουνγ etideeg 
ἐτίϑεις. ἐτέϑεε ἐτίϑει " ἐδίδοον ἐδίδουν ἐδείκνυον (4 {] 50-52). 


Remark. In like manner, the regular affixes soinetimes take the place of 
the nude, in other forms, particularly in verbs in -vg:, which may be regarded 
as having a second but less Attic theme in -iw (δ 185. 4); thus, δείκνῦμι and 
δεικνύω, δείκνῦσι and δεικνύει, ἐδείκνυσαν and ἐδείκνυον, δεικνύς and δεικνύων. 


§ 226. ΠΙ. Sussuncrive anv Oprartive. 1. In the 
Subj., verbs in -uw differ from other verbs only in the mode of 
contracting -ay and -οῃ (δ 33, 37. 3); thus, ἱστά-ω iota, 
ἱστά-της totns* ἱστά-ωμαι ἔδησαν, ἱστάτη tot’ τιϑέ-τω τιϑῶς 
τιϑέτης τιϑῆς " τιϑέτωμαι τιϑῶμαι, τιϑέ-η τιϑῇ διδότω διδῶ, 
διδό-ης διδῷς " διδό-ωμαι διδῶμαι, διδό-η διδῷ " δεικνύ-ω, δεικνύ- 
ou’ ἴτω (q 56). If, however, @ precede -on, the contraction 
is into α ; as, ἀποδρᾷς ( 57). 


2. VERBS IN -wus have a second form of the Opt. act. in 
-«@nv, which is most frequent in late writers, but is not confined 
to them , as, ἁλῴη ἕξ. 183 (ἁλοίην X. 253), βιῴην Ar. Ran. 177 
(the other form is not used in this word, perhaps to avoid con- 
fusion with the Att. Pres. opt., § 205. 2), βιῴη Pl. Gorg. 512 ὁ. 


3. In the Opt. mid., εἰς if not in the initial syllable, is often 
changed before the flexible ending into ox, in imitation of verbs 
in -w3 thus, τιϑοίμην, ἱοίμην (Tl 50, 54), and the compound 
forms, ἐπιϑοίμην, συνϑοίμην, i. 9.'7, ngooiunr, lb. 10. So even 

κρέμοισϑε for κρέμαισϑε, Ar. Vesp. 298; μαρνοίμεϑα for μαρ- 
γαΐμεϑας 1. 513; and ἀφίοιτε for ἀφίειτε, Pl. Apol. 29 d. 


4. In a few instances, verbs in -vz, instead of inserting a connecting vowel 
in the Subj. and Opt., simply lengthen the ν (cf. ἃ 177) ; as, διωσκεδάννῦσι, 
διασκεδάννῦται for διωσκεδαννύῃ, διασκεδαννύηται, Pl. Pheedo, 77 b, ἃ; rayvire 
for πηγνύοιτο, Ib. 118 a. Add the poet. ἐκδῦμεν II. 99, pon Theoe. 15. 94, 
δαίνῦτο O.. 665, δαινύατο (for -dvro) σ. 248 ; and the similarly formed géfuny 
x. 51, Qbiro 2. 330. 


§ 227. IV. Seconp Aorist. The 2 Aor. from a pure 
root retains the primitive nude form, whatever may be. the 
ries of the theme (ὃ 185. 7); as, ἔθην, ἀπέδρᾶν, ἔγνων, ἔδῦν 

Te 


Notes. «. Except ἔσιον (cf. §§ 205, 208. 2, 3), which yet has the Imp. 
wibs. ; 


β. A few roots are transposed, in order to admit the nude form; thus, 
“κέλλομαι, to dry wp, 2 A. (. cxar-, σκλα-) ἔσκλην, Opt. σκλαίην, Inf. σκλῆ- 
yes Ar. Vesp. 160. 


y- We add a list of nude 2 Aorists, which may not be hereafter mentioned ; 
κλάω, to break, 2 A. Part. xads Anacr. Fr. 16; κλύω, to hear, poet. 2 A. 


202 AFFIXES OF © »NJUGATION. [Book 1 


Imp. xaoé, A. 37, Eur. Hipp. 872, «aides B. 56, Aisch. Cho. 399, redupL 
κέκλῦθι K. 284, κέκλυσε Τ᾿. 863; λύω, to loose, 2 A. M. λύμην Φ. 80, Ades 
114, advro H. 16; φύω, to produce, 2 A. ἔφῦν, Cyr. ii, 1. 15, Subj. φύω, Opt. 
@iny (§ 226. 4), Inf. φῦναι, Part. pus. 


REMARKS UPON PARTICULAR VERBS. 


Dut, to say. 
[T 53.) 


§ 228. (a) In certain connections, φημί, ἔφην, and ἔφη are editions 
for the sake of vivacity, to mui, ἦν, and ἦ - thus, ἦν δ᾽ ἐγώ, said I, Ar. Eq. 634; 
ἢ δ᾽ os, said he, Pl. Rep. 327 Ὁ, 6; ἦ, he spake, A. 219; wai, ἠμί, παῖ, τας 
boy! I say, boy! boy! Ar. Nub. 1145. (6) The 2 Pers. sing. of the Pres. 
ind. is commonly written φής, as if contracted from φαείς. For ἔφησθα, τῇ 
the Imp., see ὃ 182, (6) To the forms in the table, may be added the Ep. 
Pres. M. Pl. 2 Qdots x. 562, Imp. φάο x. 168, φάσθω v. 100, φάσθε I. 422 
(Inf. φάσθα, A. 187, Msch. Pers. 700); Pf. P. 5. 3 σίφαται Ap. Rh. 1. 
988, Part. πεφωασμένος, Ἐξ. 127. 


Ἵημι, to send, 
[7 54.) 


$ 229. (a) Many of the forms of this verb occur only in composi- 
tion. (Ὁ) Of the contract forms fae: and ἱεῖσι (for ὕετνσι, ἵέῶσι, § 58), the 
former is preferred in the Attic, and the latter in the Tonic. (6) The Impf. 
form ὕειν, which occurs only in composition {προΐειν « 88, ἠφίειν Pl. Euthyd. 
293 a), seems either to have come from ἕην (which is of doubtful occurrence) 
by precession, or to have been formed after the analogy of ‘sis, ἵει, or of th» 
Plup. (d) For the Opt. forms ἱοίμοην and ofuny, the latter of which can be 
employed only in composition, see § 226. 3. (e) In the dialects, we find 
forms from the simpler themes ἕω and %#- thus, Impf. Zdwey A. 273, Imp. 
ξύνιε Theog. 1240, Pf. P. Part. μεμεςιρένος Hdt. v. 108 (δῷ 69. a, 192.3 
cf. μεμέθεικα, Anacr. Fr. 78); Pr. dviovras Hdt. ii. 165. In the 5. S. we 
find ἥφιε Mk. 1, 34, ἀφεῖς Rev. 2. 20, Pf, P. ἀφέωντα, Mt. 9. 2, δ. 


Εἰμὶ, to be. 
[T 55.] 
§ 230. In the Present and Imperfect of this verb, the 
radicak syllable é-, 
1.) Before a vowel, unites with it ; thus, (é-vo1, ἐ-ἄσι, § 58) 
εἰσί *, (&-w) ὦ, (ἔ-ης) ἧς ° (ἐ-ίην) εἴην. 
2.) Before vty becomes o (cf. δῷ 203, 206); thus, (ἔ-ντς, 


ὃ-ντς, § 109) ὦν, Imp. (ἔ- ντω»ν) ὄντων (less used than the other 
forms, Pl. Leg. 879 b). 


3.) In other cases, is lengthened, as follows. 


a.) It becomes εἰ in the forms tigi, εἷς, εἶ, εἶναι (ef. §§ 218.8, 224, E), 
The form εἶ, both here and in 4 56, is either shortened from εἷς (which is not 
used by the Attics), or is a middle form employed in its stead. 


β.) In the remaining forms of the Pres., it assumes s (compare ὃ 221); 


cx. 9.] COMPLETE TENSES. ἡ 203 


thus, ἐ- σ- μέν, ἐ-σ-σέ, t-o-rdv, ἔ-σ-σω, ἔ-σ-σωσαν, ἔ-σ-των (δ 213. N.). After 
the ¢, the σ΄ in the 84 Pers. sing. is retained ; thus, ἐ-σ- τί, Before the σ, ε in 
the 2d Pers. sing. of the Imperative becomes i by precession (cf. § 118); 
thus, 7-¢-é. 


y-) In the Impf. it becomes », and may likewise assume ¢ before +; thus, 
ἦν, ἦτε or rather y-c-re. The Old-Att. form of the Ist Pers. 4 (Ar. Av. 1363), 
and the 3d Pers. ἦν, appear to have been contracted from ja and ἦεν (cf. § 179, 
201. N., 211. N.). For ἦσθα, see ὃ 182. The middle form ἤμην is little 
used by the more classic writers (Cyr. vi. 1.9). The Imp. »rw, which follows 
the analogy of the Impf., occurs but once in the clasxic writers (Pl. Rep. 
361 c.), and is there doubtful. 


REMARKS. a. In the Fut., instead of icera:, the Attics always use the 
nude form ἔσται. 


Ὁ. Some regard the root of this verb as being ic-, and adduce in support of 
this view, the Lat. (eswm) sum, es, est, (e)sumus, estis, (e)sunt, and the San- 
scrit asmi, asi, asti, &c. 

Ei, to go. . 
[Ἵ 56.] 


§ 231. (a) The Pres. of εἶμω; has commonly in the Ind., and some- 
times in the other modes, the sense of the Fut. (ὃ 200. b); thus, εἶμι, (I am 
going) I will go. (Ὁ) For qzy, in the Plup., the common Attic form was fa, 
which appears to be a remnant of the old formation noticed in § 203.N. A 
Perf. εἶα, corresponding to this Plup., nowhere appears, and some regard ἤειν 
(omitting the s subse.) as an Impf. doubly augmented (} 189). For the use 
of this tense, see ὃ 233. (c) For fous and ἰοίην, see § 205 ; for ἔσων, ὃ 213. 
N.; for ἰέναι, ἰών, and ἰόντων, ὃ 208. 2; for ἤεισθα, ὃ 182; for ἤειν in the 
3d Pers., ὃ 211. N.; for ἦμεν, gre, &e., ὃ 237, (4) The middle forms tewas, 
iteny are regarded by some of the best critics as incorrectly written for fewas, 
ituny, from fnus (4 54). 


Κεῖμαι, to lie down. 
[1 60.] 


§ 442. (a) This verb appears to be contracted from xfsua:, a de- 
ponent inflected like ritewas (4 50); thus, κέεροα, κεῖμαι, κέενται κεῖνται, κέεσο 
κεῖσο, xtsobas κεῖσθαι, xstwsvos κείμενος " txsiuny ixtiuny> κείσομαι κείσομεαι. 
In the Subj. and Opt. the contraction is commonly omitted; thus, xtwuws, 
Cie. 8. 19, κεοίμοην, iv. |. 16, like ridauas (also accented ribwuas) and ridoi- 
μὴν" yet xyras (also written κεῖσαι), for κέησαι, T. 32, B. 102. (Ὁ) The 
Subj. sometimes retains the form of the Ind. (ὃ 177); as, Subj. διάκειμα, Pl. 
Phado, 84 6. (c) We find the following forms in the dialects, some of which 
have the shorter root xs-: Pres. 5. 2 xsia, Hom. Merc. 254, S. 3 χέεσα, Hdt. 
vi. 139, Pl. 3 χέοντα, X. 510, xsiaras 11. 527, κέαται A. 659, Hdt. i. 14; 
Impf. Pl. 3 ἐκείατο Ap. Rh. 4. 1295, xsiaro 9. 418, txtaro Hdt. i. 167, κέατο 
N. 763 ; Fut. κεισεῦμαι Theoc, 3. 53 (δ 200. 3); old Pres. as Fut. (§ 200. Ὁ) 
xiw, η. 342, xsiw r- 340. (d) Some of the best grammarians regard xsias 
as a Perf. having the sense of the Pres. (§ 233). 


D. CompLete TENSES. 


§ 233. I. In some verbs, the sense of the complete 


204 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [Book 11 


tenses, by a natural transition (see Syntax), passes into that or 
other tenses; and the Perrecr becomes, in signification, a 
Present ; the PLuperrect, an Imperfect, or Aorist ; and the 
Future Perrect, a common Fulure. Thus, ἵστημι ({ 48), to 
station, Pf. ἕστηκα, (I have stationed myself ) I stand, Plup. ἑστή 
xeiv, I stood, F. Pf. ἑστήξω, I shall stand ; μιμνήσκω, to remind, 
Pf. P. μέμνημαι, (I have been reminded) I remember, Plup. ἐμε- 
μνήμην, I remembered, F. Pf. μεμνήσομαι, I shall remember ; 
Plup. jer ({] 56), J went. 


Remark. In a few of these verbs, the Pres. is not used, and the Pear. is 
regarded as the theme. Such verbs, as having a preterite tense for the theme, 
are termed PRETERITIVE. See 4 58, 59. 


§ 234. Il. Moves. 1. The Perrecr Supsunective and 
OpTaTIVE are commonly supplied by the Participle with the 
auxiliary verb εἰμὶ (Ἵ 55, § 169. 8); thus, Pf. Act. Subj. βε- 
βουλευκώς ὦ, Opt. βεθουλευκώς sinv’ Pf. P. Subj. βεθουλευμένος ὦ, 
Opt. βεθουλευμένος εἴην. 


REMARKS. a. Sometimes, however, the Perf. forms these modes according 
to the general rules (§§ 204, 205, &c.), chiefly when it is employed as a 
Pres.; as, ἑστήκω, vi. 5, 10, ἑστῶ, Pl. Gorg. 468 Ὁ, torainy, ¥. 101 (4 48), 
πεποιθοίην (ὃ 205. a), δεδίω (4 58), Rep. Ath. 1. 115 εἰλήφωσιν Pl. Pol. 
269 c, πεσσώκοι V. 7. 26, βεξλήκοιεν Th. ii. 48, πεσοιήκοι Id. viii. 108. 


B. In the Perf. pass., these modes are formed in only a few pure verbs, 
and in these without a fixed analogy ; thus, 


καλέω, to call; Pf. P. κέκλημαι, I have been called, I am named, Opt. 
(xexAn-i-uny) κεκλήμην, xixano Soph. Ph. 119, κέκλῃσο, &e. 

καάομαι, to acquire; Pf. κέκτημαι, I have acquired, I possess, Subj. (κεκτά- 
w-pos) κεκσῶμαι, κεκτῇ, κεκτῆται Symp. |. 8 : Opt. (xsxen-i-uny) κεκτήμην, 
xineno, κέκτητο Pl, Leg. 731 0, or (κεκτατοίμην) κεκτῴμην, κεκτῷο, κεκτῶτο 
Ages. 9. 7. 

μέμνημαι (§ 233), Subj. μεμνῶμαι, Pl. Phil. 51 a,-Opt. μεμνήμην 2. 745, 
μεμνῆτο Ar. Plut. 991, or μεμνῳμην, μεμνῷο (Or μέμινοιο) i. 7. 5, μεμνῷτο 
Cyr. i. @& 3. 

For κάθημαι, see J 59. Add Subj. βεθλῇσθε Andoc. 22, 41, reruioder Pl. 
Rep. 564 ¢; Opt. λελῦτο σ. 238 (cf. § 226. 4). 


§ 235. 2. The Perfect, in its proper sense, may have the 
IMPERATIVE in the 3d Pers. pass.; but, otherwise, this mode 
belongs only to those Perfects which have the sense of the 
Pres. ; and, even in these, the Imperative active is scarcely 
found except in the nude form of the 2d Perf. (§§ 237, 238); 
yet ἄνωγε, xexoayere (ἢ 238. 8), γέγωνε Eur. Or. 1220, βεθη- 
xétw Lic. de Hist. Scrib. 45, ἐοικέτω Ib. 49. . 


§ 236. Ill. Vowen Cuances. ‘The affixes in τας - εἰν of 


cH. 9.] COMPLETE TENSES. 205 


the Seconp Perrect and PiurerFect are annexed with the 
following changes in the preceding syllable. 


1.) « becomes 0, and εὐ becomes οἱ 3 as, μένω, to remain, 
2 Pf. μέμονα " δέρκομαι, to see, poet., δέδορκα " Asin, λέλοιπα 
({ 37); πεέϑω, πέποιϑα (Ἷ 39). 


Nores. (a) The same changes take place in the Ist Perf. and Plup, 
of a few verbs ; as, xAirrw, to steal, κέκλοφα " τρίπω, to turn, rirgopa> πέμ- 
ww, to send, πέπομφα" δέδοικα ( 58). (ὁ) Analogous to the change of « 
into ὁ, is that of » into w in ῥήγνθμι, to break, 2 PF. ἔῤῥωγα. (6) In the fol- 
lowing Perfects, there appears to be an insertion of 6 or # (ὃ 222. 8): ἄγω, 
to lead, ἀ γήοχα (ἢ 191. 2), Dem. 239. 1, ἐσθίω, to eat, ἐδήδοκα, iv. 8. 20 (Ep, 
Pf. P. ἐδήδομεαι, x. 56), εἴωθα (τ. i6-), to be wont, preteritive, οὔχωκα (ὃ 222 3), 
(d) In the following dialectic forms, the change or insertion of vowels has 
extended to the passive: ἀφέωνται (ἢ 229. 6) ; ἄωρτο y. 272, Theoe. 24. 43, 
for fiero or ἦρτο, Plup. 5, 3 of ἀείρω or αἴρω, to raise; ἐπώχατο M. 340, Plup. 
Pl. 3 of ἐπέχω - ἐδήδομα, (N. c). 

2.) Short a, +, or v, before a single consonant, is lengthened 
{a, not preceded by ε or g, ὃ 29, becoming 7); as, pubw, ne- 
τ pave (Ἷ 423 τ. φᾶν-}) ; ϑάλλω, to bloom, τεϑηλα " ἀγνῖμι (τ. ay-), 
to break, ἔᾶγα " κράζω, κέκρᾶγα (ὃ 238. 8); κέκριγα (τ. κρῖγ ), 
to creak, pret.; μῦκαάομαι (τ. μῦχ-. to bellow, μεὲμῦκα. 


Exceptions. After the Attic reduplication, the short vowel remains ; as, 
ἐλήλυθα (κ᾿ 191.2). In λάσκω (τ. Adx-), to sound, α is not changed into ἡ 
in the Att.; thus, 2 Pf. λέλῶκα, Ar. Ach. 410 (λέληκα, X. 141). : 


§ 237. IV. Nuve Forms. In the Szeconp Perrect and 
PLUPERFECT, the connecting vowel is sometimes omitted in the 
Indicative plural and dual (§ 186). When this omission takes 
place, (a) the Ind. sing. is commonly supplied by forms from 
a longer base (cf. § 201. N.); which forms likewise occur in 
the plural and dual, but less frequently ; (6) the Subj., Opt., 
Imp., and Inf. are formed after the analogy of verbs in -μι; 
(c) the Part. is contracted, if the characteristic is ἃ or o, 
Thus, 


Pf. Ind. Sing. ἕστηκα (4 48; τ. cra-, base tera-, prolonged to ternx-, 
§ 186), ἕστηκας, ἕστηκε, Pl. ἵστά-μεν Pl. Gorg. 468 Ὁ, and rarely ἑστήκαρεν, 
ἵστα-σε, (ἕστα-νσι, ἱστά-ασι, ὃ 58) ἱστᾶσι (ἐστήκαᾶσι A. 434); Subj. (iord-w) 
ἑστῶ, ἃ! ἑστήκω" Opt. ἑσταίην (poet.) ; Imp. ἕστᾶα-θ, (poet.) Ar. Av. 906 ; 
Inf. ἑστἄναι iv. 7.93; Part. Ep. ἑστᾶ-ώς, -ὅτος T. 79 (also ἑστηώς Hes. Th. 
519), commonly contr. icrws (4 22. 8) 1. 3. 2, (ἑστα-ὁ-«“σα) ἱστῶσα, (iora- 
é-s) ἱστώς and sometimes, by syncope, icrés Pl. Parm. 146 a, Ion. ἑστεώς 
(8 48. 1), -ὥσος Hat. ii. 38 ; also ἑστηκώς Pl. Meno, 93 ἃ. Plup. Sing. ἑστή- 
wei OF εἱστήκειν, -εἰς) -εἰ, Pl. ἕστἄ-μεν, toré-re, toré-cavi. 5.13 (ἑστήκεσαν 


Cyr. viii. 3. 9). 
ϑνήσκω, to die (r. bav-, θνα-γ § 64), Pf. Ind. Sing. τέθνηκα (base rebva-, 
σεθνηκ-), -ας, -ε, Pl. ribvausy Pl. Gorg. 492 6, τέῤνατε, τεθνᾶσι iv. 2. 17, Du. 
rifvarey iv. 1. 193; Subj. τεῤνήκω, Th. viii. 74 ; Opt. τεῤναίην, Cyr. iv. 2.3 ; 
is 


205 AVFIXES OF CONJUGATION. _ [Boox 1 


Imp. σέῤναδ, X. 365, τεῤνάτω Pl. Leg. 933 6, &e.; Inf. τεύνάνα, Mem. i. 2 

16, τεθνηκέναι Soph. Aj 474, and Poet. (rséva-t-vas) τεθνᾶνα, Alsch. Ag. 539 

Part. σεθνηκώς (fem. 3. 734), τεῤνᾶ-ὦς, Pind. Nem. 10. 139, commonly contr., 
with ¢ inserted (cf. §§ 35, 48. 1), reéveds, -ὥσα, -ὥς ΟΥ̓ -05, Vii. 4. 19, +. 351, 
Ep. σεθνηώς or rebvesis, -or0s ΟΥ̓ -wres, ὦ. 289, P. 435. Plup. Sing. iredyn- 
πεῖν, «εἰς, -64, Pl. tvibvausy, -τε, -cav H. Gr. vie 4. 16. 


Pf. Ind. Sing. δέδοικα Cyr. i. 4. 12, and δέδια Soph. Cid. C. 1469 (4 58, 
base δεδ,-, δεδοικ-), δέδοικας and δέδιας, δέδοικε and δέδιε - Pl. δέδιμεεν Th. iii. 53, 
δέδιε, (δέδινσι, § 58) δεδίῶσ, Pl. Apol. 29 a; Subj. δεδίω- Imp, 323.4 Ar. 
Vesp. 373 ; Inf. δεδιένα, (ὃ 208. 3) Rep. Ath. 1. 11, and δεδοικέναι Eur. Sup. 
548; Part. δεδιώς Pl. Prot. 320 a (contr. or syne. dsduiav Ap. Rh. 3. 753), 
and δεδοικώς Eur. Ion, 624. Plup. Sing. ἐδεδοίκειν Pl. Charm. 175 a, and 
ἐδεδίειν, τεῖς, -e6* Pl. ἐδέδιμεν, ἐδέδιτε, ἰδέδισαν Pl. Leg. 685 c (ἐδεδοίκεσαν iii. 
5. 18). 

Pf. Ind. Sing. οἷδα (4 58 : base ἰδ-, οἰδ-), οἶσθα (for of3-cba, ὃ 182 ; cay 
scarce occurs in the Att., yet Eur, Ale. 780; the Att. poets, by a mingling 
of forms, sometimes use οἷσθας Eur. Ion, 999), οἶδε - Pl. (ἴδ- μεν, § 53) topes 
ii. 4. 6, (ἴδ-πσε, ὃ 52) ἴστε, (ἴδ-νσι, the 3 becoming σ᾽ in imitation of the other 
persons) ἴσῶσι, and rarely οἴδαμεν Pl. Ale. 141 6, οἴδατε, οἴδασι - Imp. (73-6) 
ios ti, 1. 13. Plup. Sing. ἤδειν, Pl. ἤδειμεν, &c., and poet. (δ-μεν) Fouev Eur. 
Hec. 1112, (42-18) ἦστε, (δ-σαν) ἧσαν Asch. Prom. 451. 


Plup. Sing. few (4 56), Hess, ἤει, Pl. ἤειμεν, τε, commonly μεν Pl. Rep. 
328 b, fire vii. 7. 6, ἤεσαν Cyr. iv. 5. 55, sometimes Ion. ἧσαν «. 445, Hat. 
ii. 163. ‘ 


§ 238. In the following examples, the nude forms are 
chiefly poetic, and, in part, Epic only. 


a, PURE. dgicréw, to dine; Pf. Pl. 1 ἠρίστῶμεν Ar. Fr. 428, Inf. fewrtves 
Ath. 423 a. In imitation of these comic forms, we find also, from δεισσνέω, to 
sup, δεδείσνάμεν and dedesrvaves Ath. 422 e, Ar. Fr. 243. 

βαίνω, to go; Pf. βέδηκα (τ. Ba-), 2 Pf Pl. poet. βέξαμεν, BiCars, Blader 
B. 134, βεξᾶσιν Soph. El. 1386; Subj. Pl. 3 βεξῶτι Pl. Phedr. 252 e; Inf. 
βεξάνα, Eur. Heracl. 610, Hdt. iii. 146, Part. Ep. βεδαώς, -via, -wros, Ἐν 
199, . 81, Att. contr. βεξώς, -ὥσα, -ὥτος, Soph. Ant. 67, 996, Gd. C. 314, 
H. Gr. vii. ἡ. 3, Pl. Phedr. 254 Ὁ. 2 Plup. Pl. i€i€ausy, -ars, -acay B, 720. 

βιξρώσκω, to eat; 1 Pf. βέθρωκα (τ. Beo-), 2 Pf. Part. (BsCeo-ws) Belews, 
τῶτος, Soph. Ant. 1022. 

γίγνομαι (τ. ya-, ysv-, yryy-), to become; 2 Pf. γέγονα, poet. Pl. 2 ysydars 
(Ep. for yiyérs) Hom. Batr. 143, 3 γεγἄᾶσιν Δ. 41; Inf. γεγάμεν (Ep. 
for γεγάναι) E. 248; Part. Ep. γεγαώς, -via, -wros, T. 199,1. 456, Att 
contr. γεγώς, τῶσα, -ὥτος, Eur. Ale. 532,677. Plup. Du. 3 γεγάτην x. 138 

μέμονα (τ. μα-, mey-, § 236. 1), to be eager, pret., E. 489, μέμονας Zesch. 
Sept. 686, μέμονε Soph. Tr. 982, Pl. μέμαμεν 1. 641, μέμαφε H. 160, με- 
paar K. 208, Du. μέμαπον Θ. 4135; Imp. 5. 3 μεμάσω Δ. 304; Part. με- 
μἄώς, ~via, -wres, Δ. 40, 440, ©. 118, and μεωάώς, -όσος, 11. 754, B 
818. Plup. #l. 9 μέμασαν B. 863. ¢ 

πίπσω, to fall; 1 Pf. rixrwxa (Τ. wes-, rro-); 2 Pf. Part. Ep. σεσσεώς 
«ὥσος, ὦ. 503, and σπεπσηώς, -via, τόπος and -ὥφσος, ν. 98, Ap. Rh. 2. 832 
Att. contr. πεσσώς, -wros, Soph. Ant. 697, 1018, 

σίσληκα (τ. rra-), to bear, pret., Pl. στέσλαμεν v. 311 5 Imp. σέτλαδθι A. 


cu...9.] COMPLETE TENSES. 207 


586; Inf. rsradusy (Ep. for σεσλάνα!) y. 209; Part. σεσληώς, -vin, τόσος, 
v. 23, E. 873. 


β. Impure. In the nude forms of the first four verbs mentioned below, 
¢ passes into 9, after the analogy either of the 2d Pers. sing., or of the 
objective inflection. 

ἄνωγα, to command, poet. preteritive, Pl. ἄνωγμεν Hom. Ap. 528; Imp. 
ἄνωγε Eur. Or. 119, and ἄνωχϑι Id. Ale. 1044, ἀνωγέτω β. 195, and (ἀνώγτω) 
ἀνώχϑθω A. 189, Pl. ἀνώγεσε Ψ. 132, ἄνωχϑε Eur. Here. 241. 

κράζω, commonly 2 Pf κέκρᾶγα, to ery; Imp. κέκραχθι Ar. Vesp. 198, 
Pl. κεκράγετε Ib. 415, and xéxgayés Ar. Ach. 335. 

- ἐγείρω, to rouse; 2 Pf. ἐγρήγορα " Imp. Pl. 2 ivonyoods 2. 299 ; Inf. ἐγρη- 
γόρθα, (as if from ἐγρήγορμαι) Κι. 67. 

πάσχω, to suffer; 2 Pf. πέπονθα, Pl. 2 (πέπονθτε, rtxovers, ὃ 52, πέποστε, 
ἢ 55) wiwocbs I. 99, x. 465. 

ἔοικα, to be like, pret. (base six-, tax-, §§ 191. 3, 236. 1), Pl. trag. torypss 
Soph. Aj. 1239, Du. Ep. tixroy 3. 27, Plup. tixeny A. 104. 

ἔρχοριαι, to come; 2 Pf. ἐλήλυθα, Ep. Pl. 1 εἰλήλουθμεν (δ 47. N.) y. 81. 


πέποιθα, to trust (4. 39; base σπεσιθ-, σεπειθ., σεσοιθ-, § 236. 1); Imp 
trag. πέσεισθ, Asch. Eum. 599; Plup. Ep. Pl. 1 ἐπέπιθμεν B. 341. 


§ 239. . Forure Perrect, or ΤῊΙΕΡ Furure. The 
Fut. Perf. unites the base of the Perf. with the affizes of the 
rut. act. and mid. ; as, (ἑστήκ-σω. Ἵ 48) ἑστήξω, (γεγράφ-σομαι, 
ν, 36) γεγράψομαι. 

Remarks. 1. The Fut. Perf. is scarcely found in liquid verbs, or in verbs 
eginning with a vowel (πεφύρσεσθαι Pind. Nem. 1. 104, εἰρήσομαι, J 53, Cyr. 
vii. 1. 9), and is frequent in those verbs only in which it has the sense of the 
common future (ἢ 233). 


2. (a) Of the Fut. Perf. act., the only examples in Attic prose are ἑσσήξω 
and σεῤνήξω, both formed from Perfects having the sense of the Pres., ἕστηκα 
and σέῤνηκα (§§ 233, 237), and both giving rise to middle forms of the same 
signification (§ 166. 2), ἑστήξομαι, and σεθνήξομαι. (Ὁ) Other examples of a 
reduplicated Fut. in the active voice are σεσορήσω Ar. Pax, 381, and the Ep. 
ἀκαχήσω, Hom. Merc. 286, κεκαδήσω, 0. 153, πεπιθήσω X. 223, κεχαρήσω, 
Ο. 98 (also xsxaetoouas, Ψ. 266), all from verbs which have reduplicated 
2 Aorists (δ 194. 3). (6) Other examples of the Fut. Perf. mid. with the 
Perf. act., are κέκλαγγα, κεκλάγξομαι Ar. Vesp. 930, κέκρᾶγα, κεκράξομαι 
Ar. Ran. 265, κέκηδα, κεκαδήσομαι, ©. 353. (d) An example of a redupli- 
cated Fut. mid. with a reduplicated 2 Aor. is σεφιδήσομαι, Ὁ. 215. 


§ 240. VI. The student will observe, in respect to the 
complete tenses, the following particulars, which are far more 
striking in the Act. than in the Pass. voice (ὃ 256); 1. their 
defective formation ; 2. the entire want of these tenses in many 
verbs; 3. the comparative infrequency of their use ; and 4, their 
more frequent occurrence in the J/ater than in the earlier 
writers. 


208 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. | BooxK 1, 


DIALECTIC FORMS. 
A. CONTRACTION. 


§ 4 Α ἢ. Forms which are contracted in the Att. (and which are also 
commonly contracted in the Dor., but often with a different vowel of contrac- 
tion) mure frequently remain uncontracted in Ion. prose, while the Ep. has 
great freedom in the employment of either uncontracted, contracted, or variously 
protracted forms. Here belong, Contract Verbs in -ἄω, -iw, and-aw (ὃ 216), 
the Liquid, Att., and Dor. Fut. (§ 200), the Aor. Pass. Subj. (§ 199), the 
Subj. of Verbs in -: (§ 226), and the 2d Pers. Sing. in -a and -o (§ 210 
3). In these forms, the first vowel is either (I.) «, (II.) ε or η, or (IIL) ὦ 
Of these, ε or is far the most frequently uncontracted. 


§ SAR. LI. The first vowel «. (a.) In the Ion., the « is commonly 
contracted or changed into ε (ὃ 44. 2); and when « with an O vowel is con- 
tracted into w, ε is often inserted (§ 48. 1, cf. ὃ 35). Thus we find, as va- 
rious readings, ὁρῶντες, δρέοντες, and ὁρέωντες, Hdt. i. 89, 99. So ἑωρῶμεν 
i. 120, ὡρέομεν ii. 131, χρᾶσθαι vii. 141, χρῆσθαι (: 33. a) i. 47, χρέεσθαι 
157, ἐχρίωντο 53, χρίω (for χράου) 155, tunyaviare (for ἐκηχανάοντο, one s 
dropped ; see ὃδ 243. 2, 248, f) v. 63. Subj. of Verbs in -ws, δυνεώμεθα 
iv. 97, 2 Aor. xrtouey OF κτέωμεν x. 216, for κτάωμοεν, contr. xramey (see also 
b. below). 

Nore. In the 2 Pers., the termination -«e commonly remains ; as, ἐχρή- 
cao dt. i. 117, txicrao vii. 209. 


(b.) In the Ep., protracted forms are made by doubling the vowel of con- 
traction, either in whole, or in part (i. e. by inserting one of its elements, or 
its corresponding short vowel, commonly ὁ with w, and & with ὦ, § 48); and 
sometimes by prolonging a short vowel, particularly « used for ἃ to εἰ; as, 
ὁράω, contr. ὁρῶ I’. 234, protracted ὁρόω Ei. 244, ὁράεις ὁρᾷς A. 202, ὁράᾳς 
Η. 448, ὁράων ὁρῶν E. 872, ὁρόων A. 350, ὁρόωσαι A. 9, ὁρᾶσθαι, A. 156, 
ὁράαυθαι «. LOT, ὁρόῳτε Δ. 547, ἀντιόωσαν A. 851], ἀσχαλάᾳ B. 2983, ἀσχαλά- 
αν 297, ἐμνώοντο G86, γελόωντες σ. 40, γελώοντες 111, ἀλόω (Imp. for ἀλάου, 
-w) ε. 3773; μνάἄασθαι a. 39, μενοινώω N. 79 (μενοίνεον M. 59), δρώωσι ὁ. 324; 
δρώοιμοι B17, ἡθώοιμι He 157 (ἡδῷμι 13:5), (μνάεο, μνάλυ, μνῶ) μνώεο Ap. Rh. 
1. 896, ναμεταώσῃ ἵ΄. 3875 μενοινήησι O. 82, for μενοινάῃ, κέραιε ἵ. 203, for 
κέραε: Att. Fut. ἐλόωσι N. 315, η. 319, ἐλάᾳν ἐ- 290 (see § YOO. 2); κρεμόω 
H. 83: 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -μι, στήῃς P. 30, σσήῃ E. 598, στείομεν Ὁ, 
297 (σεέδμν A. 348), στήωσι P. 95, στήετον σ. 18; βείω Ζ. 113, for Ba 
(4 57), Bin 1. 501, βείομεν K. 97 (βέωμεν Hat. vii. 50. ΣΝ 


Nores. 1, α is not prefixed, when the flexible ending begins with +; as 
in ὁρᾶ-πε, ὁρᾷ-ται. Yet "ἀᾶται Hes. Se. 101, for ὦτα, (ὦ being resolved into 
aa, ὃ 29). 

2. We also find in Ion. prose, in imitation of the Ep., κομόωσι Hat. iv. 191, 
ἠγορόωντο Vi. 11. So Dor. xogowvrs Theoc. 4. 57. 


(c.) The Dor. sometimes contracts 2 with an O sound following into ὦ 
and commonly @# with an 1“ sound following into ἡ (ὃ 45.1, 4) 3 as, σεινᾶνφι 
Theoc. 15, 148, διαπεινᾶμες Ar. Ach. 751; 1 Aor. Sing. 2 ἐπάξα Theoe. 4 
28, for ἐπήξαο, -w, ἤρα Ar. Ach. 9135; roams Theoe. 5. 35, λῇς 64, ὁρῆσε 110 
σιγὴν Ar. Ach. 778, ἐρώτη 800. The latter contraction appears in some [on 
prose-writers (as Hipp.; so ϑυμιῆται Hdt. iv. 75); and in the Ep. ὁρῆαι ἔ 


cu. 9.] DIALECTIC FORMS. 209 


$43 (written by some Sena, as if from genus’, and in the Du. forms, wrgocap 
δήτην A. 136, συλήσην N. 202, συναντήσην x. 333, φοιτήτην M. 266. 


§ 2 Δ 48. τι. The first vowel s or ἡ. (a.) In Ion. prose, contraction 
15 commonly omitted, except as so and sov often become ev; as, ποΐέω Hat. i. 
88, ποιέεις 39, ἐσοίεςε 22, ποιεύμενος 73, ποιεύμενος 68, ποιεῦσι sy σοιεῦμω. 
ἀξδβουδς 3 ix. 11; Fut. σημανέω Ib. i. 75, κερδανέεις 35, ἐρέων 5 Aor: Subj 
ἀπαιρεθέω Ib. iii. 65, φανέωσι i. 41, ϑέωσι iv. 71 (see ὃ 226. 1); 2 Pers. βού- 
Asas, τεύξεαι Ib. i. 90, ἐγένεο 35, Loew vii. 209. : 


Norses. 1. In like manner, ¢o, used for wo (ὃ 242. a), may become ὁ: as, 
εἰρώτευν Hat. iii. 140, εἰρωσεῦντας G2 (εἰρωτέωντος v. 13). So in the Dor, 
ἠρώτευν Ἴ 200. i. 81, yeasdves 90, for γελάουσι, &e. 


2. If es is followed by another distinct vowel, one ε is often dropped; as, 
PoCéias, PoCéo Hat. vii. 52 (φοξεῦ i. 9), for Poltsas, φοξέεο. So Ep. ἐκλέο © 
202, σωλέο or πωλέαι δ. 811. A similar omission of ὁ appears in ὠνακοινέ9 
Theog. 73. 


8. After the analogy of the contract Pres., the Ion. extends the 2 Aor. Inf. 
in -siv, as if formed by contraction, to -ξεν ; as, ἰδέειν, παθέειν Hdt. i. 32, φυ- 
ψέειν 1, B. 393 (φυγεῖν 401), ride A. 363. 


4. The Ion. often renders impure verbs pure, by the insertion of its favorite 
8 (ξ 48. 1); as, συμξαλλεόμενος (cf. συνεξάλλετο) Hdt. i. 68, ἐνείχεε 118, ἀγεό- 
μένον iii. 14, ἐνδυνέουσι 98. 


(b.) The Ep. commonly omits contraction if the last vowel is w, ῳ, σι, or ov 
(except in the Aor. pass. subj., and in the Perf. subj. εἰδῶ). ; but otherwise 
employs or omits it according to the metre (so, when contracted, becoming εὐ; 
yet ἐπόρθουν A. 308, aveppiarovy ν. 78). Synizesis is frequent whens pre- 
cedes a long O vowel, and sometimes occurs in ¢ov, and even in <a. The Ep., 
also, often protracts ε to «, and sometimes doubles the vowel of contraction ». 
Thus, φιλέοι ὁ. 305 (yet φιλοίη 3. 692, and Qogoin s 320), φιλέωμεν 6. 42, οἰκέοι- 
wo A. 18, πειρηθῶμεν X. 381, εἰδῶ A. 515, εἰδέω w. 2363; φιλεῖ B. 197, φι- 
λές, 1. 342, ἔῤῥει P. 86, ἔῤῥεε N. 539, ἔσῃ «. 254, ἔσεαι, A. 563, ἔσσεαι Σ. 95, 
ἔσσεαι ζ. 33, γνώσεαι B. 367, γνώσῃ 365; μυθεῖαι 6. 180 (μυθέαι or μυθέῃ 
β. 202, § 243. ἃ. 2), νεῖαι A. 114, for μυθέεαι, νέεαι " ἔπλεο X. 28], ἔπλευ 
Y. 69, φράζεο E. 440, φράζευ δ. 395, κάλεον Δ. 477, κάλεον 6. 550, καλεῦντο 
B. 684; νεικείω Δ. 359, ἐτελείεσο A. δ, ἐρείομεεν 62, ἔρειο A. 611, σπεῖο Καὶ, 
285, Aor. Pass. Subj. dausiw σ. 54, δαμείης Γ΄, 436, δαμήῃ X. 246, δαμείεσε 
Η. 72; 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -ws, ϑείω Il. 83 (ϑέω Hdt. i 108), Seins 
x. 341, Sin 301, ἀνήῃ Β. 84, ϑέωμεν ω. 485, ϑείομεν A. 143, Selous Σ. 402% 


(c.) For the Dor. contraction of ¢o and ¢ov into εὖ, and, in the stricter Dor. 
of es into 4, see §§ 45. 3, 44. 4; 6. g. ἐλέγευ Theoc. 1. 86, μάχεν 113, 
ὡμάρτευν 2.73, εὖσα 76; ποίη Ar, Lys. 1318. So, in Hom., ὁμαρτήτην 
N. 584, ἀπειλήτην A. 313. 


Remarks. a. Some varieties of the Dor. change ¢o into so or sw; and sw 
into iw; as, woyioues Ar. Lys, 1002, ὀμοιώρεθα 183, ἐπαινίω 198, for poyétopsy, 
-οὔμεν, ὀμούμεθα, ἐπαινῶ. 

β. The later Dor., from the influence of analogy (§§ 44. 1, 248. d), has 


sometimes 2 for ἡ, in verbs in -ἔω ; as, φιλᾶσῶ Theoc. 3. 1% δάσαι 5, 118 
So. Aor. Pass. ἐσύσαν Id. 4. 53. 


1s * 


910 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. | BOOK ie 


§ BHAA, MM. The first vowel 0: (a.) Here tlie Ion. and Dor. usually 
employ contraction, following the common rules, except that. the Ion. some 
times uses εὖ for ov, and the Dor. w and w» for ov and w (δὲ 44.4, 45. 3)3 as, 
δικαιεῦσι Hat. i. 133, ἐδικαίευν vi. 15, οἰκειεῦνται i. 4, στεφανεῦνπα, viii. 593 
ὑπνῶν Ar. Lys. 143, μασεῖγῶν Epich. 19 (1). The Dor. w is likewise used 
by other dialects in prysm, to be cold, and in the Ion. ἵδρόω, to sweat ; as, ῥιγῶν 
Ar. Vesp. 446 (ῥιγοῦν Cyr. ν. 1. 11), ῥιψῷ Pl. Gorg. 517d; ἱδρῶσαι A. 598, 


(b.) The Ep. sometimes protracts the ὁ to w, and sometimes employs the 
combination ow after the analogy of verbs in -éw 3 as, Dewevre Σ. 372, Bew- 
ουσα A. 119, ὑπνώοντας ε- 48 ; ἀρόωσιν » 108, δηΐόωντο N.675, δηΐόῳεν ὃ. 226; 
2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -μι, ψνώω % 118, ἁλώω Δ. 405, δώῃ μ. 216, δώῳσιν 
A. 824 (δῷσι 129), δώομεν H. 299 (δῶμεν WY. 537), δώωσιν A. 187. 


B. Tinse-Siens. 


8 VAS. 1. In verbs in -ζω, the Dor. commonly employs 2 for ¢, in 
the Fut. and Aor.; as, καθίξας Theoc. 1. 12, for καθίσας from καθίζω, χαρίξῃ 
5. 71, ἐκόμιξαν Pind. N. 2. 31. This change appears also in a few other 
verbs in which short « precedes; as, γελάξας Theoc. 7. 42, ἔφϑαξα 2. 115, 
from γελάω (§ 219. α), φθάνω (§ 278). Similar forms sometimes occur in 
other poets besides the Dor., for the sake of the metre; as, σφετεριξάμενον 
#isch. Sup. 39, ἡλιάξε, Ar. Lys. 380, ἐκφλύξα, (φλύω) Ap. Rh. 1. 275. 


2. In the Fut. act. and mid., the Dor. commonly adds to the tense-sign ὁ, 
which is then contracted with the connecting vowel; as, (¢ctw) ἀσῶ Theoc. 
1. 145, (detouas,.§ 45.3) ἀσεῦμαι 3. 38, ποησεῖς 3. 9, ἀξῇ 1. 11, σεμιψεῖ 6. 
81, δεξεῖσαι, Call. Lav. 116, γρυλλιξεῖτε Ar. Ach. 746, πειρασεῖσθε 743, for 
gow, aroun, &e. See § 200. 3. 


3. The Ep. employs the Att. Fut. (§ 200. 2), both uncontracted, contracted, 
and protracted; and has also other examples of the Fut. with ¢ dropped (or 
of the Pres. used as Fut.) ; as, ἀνύω A. 365, ἐρύουσι 454, χεύω B. 222. So 
ixytydovras (from Pf. base yeya-, see §§ 238. a, 289. 6) Hom. Ven. 198. 


4. The formation of the 1 Aor. without σ is extended, (a) in the Ion. and 
poet. language, to a very few liquids, in which the characteristic is preceded 
by a diphthong (cf. ὃ 222. 2), or by another consonant; thus, ἀσούρας A. 
$56, ἀπηύρω sch. Prom. 28, ἐπσαυράμην Hipp., εὕρωτο Ap. Rh. 4. 1133, 
ὄσφραντο Hipp. i. 80: (6) in the Alex. and Hellenist. dialects, to a number of 
verbs which in the classic Greek employ the 2 Aor.; as, #Aéars Mt. 25. 36, 
ἀνείλα τ Acts 7. 21. 


5. For the doubling of ¢ by the poets, especially the Ep., to make a short 
vowel long by position (καλέσσετο A. 54, ὄμοσσον 76, ἰλάσσεαι 147), See § 71. 
For Ep. examples of ¢ retained in liquid verbs, see ὃ 56.8. In ὀφέλλειν IL 
651, β. 334, the a. is doubled to compensate for the loss εἴ the ¢. 


C. CoNNECTING VOWELS. 


9 ZAG. 1. For -ε:- connective, the Dor. and ol. sometimes employ 
n- (§ 44. 4); as, ἐδέλησθα Theoc. 29. 4, for ἐθέλεις, εὑρῆν 11. 4, for εὑρεῖν, 
ἄγην Sapph. 1.19. For the Dor. forms in -ss and -ἔν, see § 183. N, 


2. The Dor. and Mol. sometimes give to the Perf. the connecting vowel of 
the Pres. (δ 185), especially in the Inf.; as, δεδοίκω Theoc. 15. 58, for δέδοι- 
xa, πεσόνθης 10. 1 (see 1. above), ὀσώπτη 5. 7, πεσοίθει 5. 28; Inf. δεδύκειν 


cH. 9.] © / DIALECTIC FORM». 211 


1. 102, γεγᾶκειν Pind. Ὁ. 6. 83, σεθνάκην Sapph. 2. 15; Part. κεχιλᾶἄδονσας 
Pind. P. 4. 818, πεφρίκοντας 325. Instances likewise occur in the Ep. of the 
Perf. passing over into the form of the Pres., and of the Plup. into that of 
the Impf. ; as, κεκλήγοντας M. 125, ioe yours Hes. Sc. 2928 ; ἐμέμηκον s. 439, 
ixtpoxoy Hes. Th. 152. 

Nore. In this way new verbs arose, not confined to the Ep.; as, from 
ἄνωγα, ἀνώγω, to order, O. 43, A. 287, Hdt. vii. 104, Impf. ἤνωγον 1. 578 
(ἠνώγεον H. 394), F. ἀνώξω. x. 404, A. ἤνωξα, Hes. Sc. 479 5 from ὥλεκα, 
ὀλέκω, to destroy, 3.172, A. 10, Soph. Ant. 1286 ; from γέγωνα, γεγωνίω 
and γεγωνίσκω, to ery aloud, 


8. In the Subjunctive, the Ep. often retains the old short connective 
(§ 177), for the sake of the metre; as, ἀγείρομεεν A. 142, ἴομεν, ἐγείρομεν 
B. 440, φϑιόμεεσθα A. 87, φθίεται TY. 173, εἴδομεν A. 363, εἴδεσε Θ. 18. 


4. In the following poet. chiefly Ep. forms, the connecting vowel is omitted : 


- a) Of Pure Verbs. ἀνόω, to accomplish; Impf. ἤνῦτο ε. 243, “aviro 
Theoc. 2. 92, "ἄνύμες 7. 10. 

ἐρύω, Ion. and Poet. εἰρύω, to druw, Mid. to draw to one’s self, to protect ; Act. 
Ταῦ, εἰρόμενα, Hes. Op. 816; Mid. ἔρῦται Ap. Rh. 1208, εἰρύαται A. 239, 
ἔρῦσο X. 507, ἔρῦτο A. 138, sigdro Il. 542, ἔρυντο Theoc. 25. 76, εἴρυντο M. 
454, ἔρυσθαι ε. 484, εἴρυσθαι Ψ. 825 Pass. ἔρῦτο Hes. Th. 301; from the 
shorter piouas, ἔῤῥῦτο Soph, (Βα. T. 1352, ῥύατο Σ. 515, ῥῦσθαι Ο. 141; Iter. 
ῥύσκευ LL. 180. ᾿ 

σεύω, to shake, csdras Soph. Tr. 645. 

σαεῦται, he takes his stand, purposes, I’. 83, crtdvras Aisch. Pers. 49, orsuee 
B. 597, a. 583. 

rvaviw, to stretch; révira: P, 393. 


.β.) Of Impure Verbs. ἔδω, comm. icéiw, to eat; Inf. ἔδμεναι, Δ. 345. 
λείσω, to leave; Impf. ἔλεσισο Ap. Rh. 1. 45. 
πέρθω, to lay waste, Inf. Pass. (πέρθ-σθαι, ὃ 60) wigdas II. 708. 
φέρω, to bear; Imp. φέρτε 1. 171. 
φυλάσσω, to watch (τ. Quaax-) ; Imp. προ-φύλαχθε (cf. § 238. 8) Hom. 
Ap. 538. 
7. FuEexiste Enprives. 


§ 24 7. a. 2d Pers. Sing. (a) For the form -σόα, see ὃ 182. II. 
(Ὁ) For uncontracted, variously contracted, and protracted objective forms, 
see § 243. (6) The Ep. sometimes drops ¢ in the Perf. and Plup. pass. ; as, 
μέμνηαι ὦ. 442, contr. μέμνῃ O, 18, Theoc. 21. 41, βέδληαι E. 284, ἔσσυο 
II. 585. (d) On the other hand, in the 8. S., we find ¢ retained in some 
contract forms, and in the Presents having the sense of the Fut. πίομαι, φάγο- 
foi thus, (καυχάεσαι) καυχᾶσαι Rom. 2. 17, ὀδυνᾶσα, Lk. 16. 25, πίεσαι, 
φάγεσαι Id. 17. 8. 


Ὁ. 1st Pers. Pl. and Du. The Dor. uses «μὲς for -μὲν (§ 70. 3) 5; as, δε- 
δοίκαμες Theoc. 1.16, εἴδομεες 2.25. For the endings -μεσθα and -pséo», 
see ) 212. 


§ 248. c. 3d Pers. Pl. (a) For the Dor. -νσι, see ὃ 18]. a 
<b) The Mol. uses -cos for -οὐσι, and -aios for -ὥσι (ὃ 45. 5) 5 88, κρύπεοισι 


212 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. BOOK I. 


Ale. 7 (1), στάξοισι Pind. P. 9.110, φαισί Sapph. 35 (88). (ce) In the Alex- 
andrine Greek we find -e» for -ὥσι of the Perf., and -ocay for -ov of the Imipf. | 
as, πέφρίκαν Lye. 252, ἔγνωκαν St. Jn. 17. 7 (80 ἔοργαν Hom. Batr. 179) 
tox aloray Lye. 21, ἤλθοσαν LXX. Ps. 79. 1, ἐδηλιοῦσαν Rom. 3. 13. So, in 
the Opt., εὔποισαν Ps. 35. 25, ποιήσαισαν Deut. 1. 44, for. εἴποιεν, ποιήσαιεν 
(4) Rare instances occur in the poets of -ὥσι in the Perf. with a short penult 
(ef. § 45. 5); thus the old reading λελόγχἄσιν A. 304, vevedx%ow Antim 


(e) In the nude Impf. and 2 Aor., and in the Aor. pass., the Ep. and Dor. 
often retain the older ending -ν (§ 181. ψ); as, ἔσταν A. 535, Pind. P. 4. 
240 (ἔστησαν N. 488), tev M. 33, Pind. I. 1. 34, 2/éey Id. P. 3. 114, ἔδιδον 
Hom. Cer. 437, ἔγνον Pind. P. 4. 214, and ἔγνων Ib. 9. 137, ἔφῦν ε. 481, 
Pind. P. 1. $2, ἤγερθεν A. 57, «ράφεν 251, φάανθεν 200, Mosch, 2. 33, ἐφίλα- 
θεν Theoc. 7. 60, φάνεν Pind. O. 10. 101. So, in imitation of the Ep., ἐκό- 
ρεσθεν At. Pax, 1283, ἔκρυφθεν Eur. Hipp. 1247. We even find, as 3 Pers, 
pl., ἠείδειν Ap. Rh. 4. 1700, ἤδειν 2. 65. 


(f) In the Ion., the endings -ἄσαι and -ἄσο, for -vra: and -yre (δ 213. %), 
are the common forms in the Perf. and Plup., are very frequent in the Opt., 
and are also employed in the Impf., 2 Aor., and nude Pres. ind. Before these 
endings, a short vowel in the root is not lengthened (ὃ 218), except in the 
voets for the sake of the metre, the connective -e- is used instead of -o- 
(ὃ 203), « and sometimes εἰ become ¢, and consonants are changed according 
to ὃ 213. R. Thus, οἰκέατα, Hdt. 1. 142, for ὥκηνται, fara: Τ᾿ 134, Hat. ii. 
86, lara: (ὃ 47. N.) B. 137, taro H. 414, claro Γ΄, 149, for dvras, ἦντο, re: 
φοξήατο D. 206; tlovataro Hat. i. 4, for ἐξούλοντο, ἀπικέατο 152; δυνέαται 
Id. ii, 142, ἐδύνεασο iv. 114, avarsrrtaras ix. 9, for δύνανται, &e. ; κέαται 
A..659, Hadt. i. 14, xsiaras Ὡ. 527, ixtaro Hdt. i. 167, κείατο ᾧ. 4) 8, 
aroxexrtaro Hat. ix. 50, for κεῖνται, &c. (80, with an intervening consonant, 
ἐρηρίδαται Y. 284, tengidare ἡ. 95, from ἐρείδωλ ; ; ad ppt (r. «ρι6-) Id. 
ii. 93, δεδέχαται (τ. δεικ-, Ion. δεκ-) 65 (yet axixaras vii. 209, ef. ὃ 69. 4), 
siuedbbiedes i. 140, ἐσκευάδατο vii. 67 (so, as if from verbs in -ζω, ἐληλάδατπο 
η. 86, aunytdara: P. 637, ἐῤῥάδαται v. 354, -ro M. 431, ἰσταλάδατο Hat. 
vii. 89) ; βουλοίατο Hat. i. 3, πειρῴατο iv. 139, γευσαίατο ii. 47. The Opt 
forms in -ασὸ are likewise used by the Att. poets ; as, δεξαίατο Soph. Cid. C 
44, πεμι paiaro 602, ruboiaro 921. 


(g) In the Imperative, a third form is found in Dor. inscriptions, made by 
prefixing » to the flex. ending of the Sing. (cf. ὃ 172); as, ποιούντω (com 
pare Lat. faciunto), (διδόνσθω, cf. § 177) 313604 Inscr. Corcyr. 


ἃ. For the Subj. forms in -ws and -σι, see ὃ 181. 8. For the Dor. Sing. 3 
in «αι, see ὃ 181. a. For the Dor. Sing. 1 in -ᾶν, and Du. 3 in -réy, -σθᾶν 
(tor -g.nv, -rnv, -σθην), οἵ, δὲ 44. 1, 243. © β. 


§ 2AM. ec. Iterative Form. The Ion., especially the Ep., to expres 
with more emphasis the idea of repeated or continued action, often prolongs 
the flex. endings of the Impf. and Aor., in the sing. and the 3d Pers. pl., te 
-σκον, -σκες, -σκε(ν), -σκον in the subjective inflection, and to -cxduny, -cxee 
(-εν, -ov), -σκέσο, -cxovro in the objective. This form, which is called the itera- 
tive (itero, to repeat) is likewise used by the Dor. poets, and sometimes in 
lyric portions by the tragic. It sometimes appears to be used for metrical 
effect, rather than for special emphasis. It commonly wants the augment, 
Thus, Impf. ἔχεσκον, I was in the habit of carrying, N. 257, ἔχεσκες E. 472, 
ἔχεσκε 126, Hdt. vi. 12, Pl 3 ἔχεσκον 3. 627, for εἶχον, -s5, -ε, -ον, ὑφαίνεσκεν, 
she kept weaving, B. 104, ἀλλύεσκεν 105, πέμσεσκε, ἐπίμπεσκον EHdt. i. 100, 


cH. 9.} DIALECTIC FORMS. “13 


φέρεσκε Theoc. 25. 138, παύεσκε Soph. Ant. 963, μαχέσκετο H. 140, σελέσκεο 
X. 433, ἐμισγέσκοντο ve 7, ζωννύσκετο E. 857; 2 Aor. ἔδεσκε 1᾿. 917. λάξεσκε 
Hat. iv. 78, ἐλάξεσκον 130, δύσκεν ©. 271, γενέσκετο A. 908, ὀλέσκετο "80 

1 Aor. (only poet.), σσρέψασκον Σ. 546, ὥσασκε 2. 599, μνησάσκετο A. 566 


Nores. (a) That the connecting vowel before -cx- is ¢ rather than ὁ, 
follows from ὃ 203. (δ) Before -cx-, a short vowel remains, and ε takes the 
place of εἰ; as, στάσκεν I. 217, for torn (1. ora-), δόσκον 1. 331, ἀνίεσκε 
Hes. Th. 157, for avin, φάνεσκεν A. 64, for ἐφάνη ($ 199), ἔσκον H. 153, for 
ἦν, κάλεσκε Ap. Rh. 4. 1514, for ἐκάλε, (καλέεσκε ξ. 402, for ἐκάλεε), καλέ- 
σκετο O. 338, for ἐκαλεῖτο, κέσκετο ᾧ. 41, for ἔκειτο. (ec) Verbs in -ἄω have 
commonly the iterative lnpf. in -ecxov, sometimes doubling the a for the sake 
of the metre (cf, 242. Ὁ); as, ἕασκες T. 295, for εἴας, ναιετάασκον B. 539 ; 
so Pl. 1 νικάσκομεν A. 512, for ἐνικῶμεν. (d) There appears to be a blending 
of Impf. and Aor. forms (or formation as if from a theme in -éw), in κρύα- 
racns ©. 272, pirracxoy O. 23, ῥοίζασκε Hes. Th. 835, ἀνασσείασκε Hom. 
Ap. 403, from κρύπτω, pirrw, ῥοιζέω, and ὠνασείω. 


§ 250. ε Infinitive. In the Inf., instead of -να,, the Dor. and ol. 
commonly retain the old ending -ν (ὃ 176), or, with the Ep., reduplicate this 
ending to -wey (cf. S§ 174, 176), which may be still farther prolonged (chiefly 
by the poets) to -~evas. (a) Thus the Mol. forms the Aor. pass. inf. in τῆν, 
the Dor. in τῆμεν, and the Ep. (which also employs the common form) in 
-ἤμεναι as, μεθύσθην Ale. 28(29), ὀμνάσθην (for ἀναμνησθῆναι) Theoc. 29. 26 ; 
διακριθῆμεν Th. v. 79; ὁμοιωθήμεναι, A. 187. (ὁ) In other tenses, the nude 
Inf. has commonly in the Dor. the form - μεν, in the 220]. -» and -μεναι, and 
in the Ep. -vas, -mev, and - μεναι ; as, ϑέμοεν Theoc. 5. 21, Pind. P. 4. 492, 
a. 315, ϑέμεναι Inscr. Cum., B. 285, Pind. O. 14. 15, Ssivas A. 26 (cf. 57), 
φάμεν Pind. O. 1. 55, δόμεν Th. v. 77, A. 379, δόμεναι A. 98, 116, a 317, 
δοῦναι 816, γνώμεναι α. 4113 vindv (ὃ 251. 2) Alc. 86(15), ἄντλην 11(3) ; 
σεθνώμεν O. 497, rebvaepevas 2. 225, ἴδμεεν A. 719, ἔδμεναι, N. 273. So tord- 
μεναι Hdt. i. 17. Before -wev and -wevas, a short vowel in the 2 Aor. does 
not pass into a diphthong (ὃ 224. E.). (6) In like manner the non-Attic 
poets employ, for τοῖν (originally -εν, § 176), the prolonged -ἔμεν and -éevas ; 
as, ἰἀκοῦ-τεν) ἀκουέμεν A. 547, Pind. O. 3. 44, Theoc. 8. 83, ἀκονέμεναι A. 380, 
ἀξέμεν VY. 111, ἀξέμεναι 50, χολωσέμοεν A. 78, ἐλθέμεναι 151. (d) So, in the 
Perf., πεπληγέμεν 1. 728. For the Perf. inf. in -ssv or τὴν, see ὃ 246, 2. 
The common form in -éyas first oceurs in Hdt. (6) Verbs in -ἄω and -éw have 
a contract form in -ἤμεναι ; as, (γοά-εν) γοήμεναι ΞΖ. 502, σπεινήμεναι v. 137, 
καλήμεναι K, 125, πενθήμεναι σ. 174, from γοάω, πεινάω, καλέω, πενθέω. Yet 
(ἀέμεναι) "ἄμενα, D. 70. In ἀγινέμεναι ν. 218, from ἀγινέω, and ἀρόμμενα: 
Hes. Op. 22, from ἀρόω, the connecting vowel is omitted. 


g. Participle. For the ol. contraction into a and o in the Part., see 
ὃ 45. 5; thus, κίρναις Ale. 27, ῥίψψαις Pind. P. 1. 86, ϑρέψαισα 8. 37, ξεύξαι- 
σα Sapph. 1. 9, ἔχοισα 77(76), Pind. P. 8. 4, Theoc. 1. 96. For the Fem. 
-ovew, the Laconic uses -wa ; as, ἐκλιπῶα, κλεῶα, ϑυρσαδδωᾶν (§ ΤΟ. V.), for 
ἐκλιποῦσα, xAtovon, ϑυρσαζουσῶν, Ar. Lys. 1297, 1299, 1313. So Maa 
1293 (ὃ 45. 5). 


E, VERBS IN -μ» 


§ SH. 1. The Ion. and Dor. employ more freely than the Att. the 
forms with a connecting vowel (§ 225), especially in the Pres. sing. of verbs 
whose characteristic is s or 0; as, rifsis Pind. P. 8. 14, φιθεῖ a. 192, Hat. i. 


-- 


214 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. | BOOK πὶ 


158, διδοῖς I. 164, διδοῖ 519, Hdt. i. 107 ; ἱστᾷ ΤΌ. iv. 103, Imp. καθίστα Τ 
202 ; «ροθέουσι (unredupl., for προτιθέασι!) A. 291; 2 Aor. Opt. προσθέοιπο 
Hat. i. 53; Inf. συνιεῖν Theog. 565, διδῶν (ὃ 244. a) Theoc. 29. 9. 


2. On the other hand, the Mol., Dor.. and Ep. retain the form in - μι in 
some verbs, which in the Att. and in Ion. prose have only the form in -w; as, 
κάλημι Sapph. 1. 16, donus 2. 11, φίλημι 79(23), αἴνημι Hes. Op. 681, νίκη- 
ps Theoe. 7. 40, for καλέω, ὁράω, &e.; ἀνέχησι, φέρησι, βείθησι x. 111, 112, 
for ἀνέχει, &e. (unless rather Subj. ἀνέχῃσι, &e.) ; φορῆναι B. 107. 


3. The Ion. changes ἃ characteristic before another « to ε (cf. 942. a), and — 
sometimes inserts ¢ before a (ὃ 48. 1) ; as, (ierados, ὃ 58) ἱστέῶσι Ht. ve - 
Tl, δυνέατα, (§ 248. 6), ἱστίαισο Hdt. iv. 166. So, in the nude Perf., ierides 
Ildt. i. 200, torture v. 49. 


4. The Ep. sometimes differs from the common language in the length of 
the characteristic vowel (ὃ. 224); as, Inf. τιϑήμενα, ¥. 247, διδοῦνα, Ὡ. 425, 
ξευγνῦμεν 11. 145, for τιθέναι, &e.; Part. σιθήρενον K. 84 ; Imp. fants, δίδωθι 
y- 380 (so nude Perf. ἕσσησε A. 243, 246, for fcrars): 2 Aor. Bacay M. 
469, βάτην A. 327, for téncav, &e. 


5. For the Impf. iviény and ἦν, the Ion. has triése Hat. iii. 155, and ἦα 
β. 313, unaugmented ἔα A. 321, Hdt. ii. 19. So tas Hdt. i. 187, ἦεν A. 381, 
tare Hdt. iv. 119, ἔασαν ix. 31. Cf. §§ 179, 201. N, 252. Ὁ. 


§ SHV. 6. Dialectic forms of εἰμί, to be (Y 55). (a) Those which 
arise from different modes of lengthening the radical syllable (§ 230. 3) ; 
ἐμμί Theoc. 20. 32, Sapph. 2. 15, ἐσσί (4 assumed after the analogy of the 
cther persons) A. 176, Theoc. 5. 75, 8. 3 ἐνσί (ν inserted instead of σὴ Id. 1. 
17, εἰμέν E. 873, Hdt. i. 97 ; Inf. ἦμοεν (for which some give the form ἦμες, 
ef. § 70. 3) Theoc. 2.41. (6) Uncontracted forms, and forms like those of 
verbs in -w: ἔασιν B. 125, ἔω A. 119, Hadt. iv. 98, to: B. 366, two, I. 140, 
Hdt. i. 155, toss I. 284, gos 142, Hdt. vii. 6, ἐών B. 27, Hdt. i. 86, ἐοῦσα Ty 
159, ἐἰοῖσα Pind. P. 4. 471, Theoc. 2. 64, εὖσα 76, (ἔ-νεσα, ὃ 58) ἔάσα or 
tacca ‘Tim. Locr. 96 a, fo» A. 762, sivra Theoc. 2. 3. (6) Variously pro- 
tracted forms: ἔην (1 P.) A. 762, (3 P.) B. 642, Hat. vii. 143, ins Theoe. 
19. 8, ἔησθα X. 435, anv A. 808, sim Ψ, 47; Impf. iter. (§ 249. δ), ἔσκον 
(1 P.) H. 153, (3 P.) Hat. 1. 196, ἔσκε Ib, E. 586, Atsch. Pers. 656. 
(d) Middle forms: ἔσο, commonly ico «. 302, Sapph. 1. 28, εἴασο ν. 106 
(for ἦνσο, cf. S. 1 ἤμην" others read εἴασο, Ep. for ἦντο from ἥμα,). (e) Old 
short and unaugmented forms: ἐμέν Call. Fr. 294, ἔσαν A. 267, Pind. P. 4. 
371, tcray Id. O. 9.79. (f) For εἷς Π. 515, Hat. vii. 9, see ὃ 230. a; 
for P. 3 ἐνσί Pind. O. 9. 158, Th. v. 77, Theoc. 5. 109, § 181. a} for ἔα, Fa, 
tas, ἦε(ν), tars, ἔασαν, ὃ 251. 5;-for gor T. 202, and ἔῃσι, § 181. β; for 
εἴησθα Theog. 715, ἔησθα, ὃ 182; for siuss, ὦμες Theoc. 15. 9, huss 14, 29, 
ὃ 247, Ὁ ; for Impf. 8S. 3 (fer) ἧς Theoc. 2. 90, ὃ 250. y 5 for Inf. ἔμεν A, 
299, ἔκενα, I. 40, ἔμμεν Pind. O. 5. 38, Theoc, 7. 28, Soph, Ant. 623, tu- 
wives A. 117, Sapph. 2. 2, ἦμεν Theoc. 2. 41, εἶμεν (for which some write 
tiuss, cf. a above) Th. v. 79, Tim. Locr. 93 a, sieves or Husvas Ar. Ach. 775, 
§ 250. ὃ; for ἔσσομα, A. 267, ἔσσεται A. 164, isch. Pers. 121. (ἔσεται A. 
211), ὃ 71; for ἔσεα, A. 563, ἔσσεαι Σ. 95, ὃ 243; for ἰσσῇ Theoc. 10. 5, 
ἐσεῖται, Eur. Iph. A. 782, ἐσσεῖται B. 393, Theoc. 7. 67, ἐσοῦνται Th. v. 77, 
§ 245. 2. 


7. Dialectic Forms of εἶμι, to go (4 56). (a) The protraction of y to ὦ 
(§ 224) likewise appears in P. 3 εἶσι (or Ἶσι, or perhaps εἰσί from tipi, to be) 


cH. 10.] ROOT OF THE VERB. 215 


Hes. Se. 113, Theog. 116, #% only Sophr. 2 (23), εἴη (by some ascribed to 
εἰμί, to be) ξ. 496, Ὡ. 159, εἴσομαι B. 8, εἴσατο A. 138, ἐείσατο O. 415, ἐε,- 
cacény 544. (Ὁ) In the Impf., we find both nude forms and forms with a 
connecting vowel, from the root i-, both unaugmented, doubly augmented 
(δ 189), and doubly augmented with contraction ; thus, (fi, ch 251. 5) dia 
(from which may be formed by contr. the Att. ja, καὶ 231. 6) 3. 427, Hat. s. 
4:, ἤϊε A. 47, Hdt. i. 65, ἦε M. 371, % B. 872, fomev x. 251, ἴσων A. 494, 
ἤϊσαν K. 197, Hat. i. 62, ἤτον Ψ. 370, ἴσην A. 847. (9) The Opt. isin (only 
T. 209) is formed, as if from the root és- (ef. ὃ 231. d). (4) The Inf. “Yves 
Ath. 580 ¢, is the regular nude form. (6) For εἷς see ὃ 230. a; for εἶσθα 
K. 450, ἴμσϑα Κι. 67, ὃ 182; for ings I. 701, § 181. B; for tousy B. 440, 
ὃ 246. 3; for ἔμεν A. 170, Pind. O. 6. 108, ἔμενα, TY. 32, ἔμμεναι, 365, 
§ 250. ὁ. 


F. Prerrecr ParticipPye. 


§ 253. 1. In Perf. Participles ending in -ῴς pure, the Ep. more 
frequently lengthens the preceding vowel; and the Part. is then declined in 
-ores or -wros, according to the metre. If the preceding vowel remains short, 
the form in -@reos is commonly required by the metre. Thus, BeCagnorss’ y. 
139, xexunoras A. 801, xexunwra x. 31. See, also, δὺ 237, 238. 


2. In some fem. forms, the antepenult is shortened on account of the verse, 
as, λελᾶκυῖα μ. 85 (λεληκώς X. 141), μεμᾶκυϊα, Δ, 435 (μεμηκώς K. S62) 
ἐρᾶρυίας Τ᾿. 331, σεθάλυϊαν 1. 208, 


CHAPTER X. 
ROOT OF THE VERB. 


§ 254. The root of the Greek verb, although 
not properly varied by inflection, yet received many 
changes in the progress of the language. ‘These 
changes affected the different tenses unequally, so 
that there are but few primitive verbs in which the 
root appears in only a single form. 

Note. The earlier, intermediate, and later forms of the root. 
may be termed, for the sake of brevity, old, middle, and neu 
roots. ‘The final syllable of the earliest form of the root is 


commonly short; and the oldest roots of the language are mon- 
osyllabic. 


§ 235. The tenses may be arranged, with respect to the 
degree in which they exhibit the departure of the root from its 
original form, in the following order. 

I. Tue Seconp Aorist anp Seconp Forure. . 

REMARKS. α The 2d Aor. act. and mid. is simply the Impf. of an old root 


- 


216° ROOT OF THE VERB. [| BOOK In. 


(δ 178.2) ; thus ἔλισον and ἐλεσόμην (4 $7) are formed from the old root ar. 
in precisely the same way as ἔλεισον and ἐλεισόμην from the new root Asis-« 


B. The 2d Aor. and Fut. pass. are chiefly found in impure verbs which want 
the 2d Aor. act. and mid. They affix -ν and -ncouou (§ 180) to the sims 
plest form of the root. 


y- These tenses (except the nude 2 Aor. act., ὃ 224. 2) have commonly a 
short syllable before the affix (§ 254. N.). 


3. In a few verbs, the original root appears to have received some change 
even in the 2 Aor.; chiefly, in accordance with the prevailing analogy of the 
tense, to render the root monosyllabic, or its last syllable short (§ 254. N.), or 
to enable it to receive the nude form (δ 227. β). 


§ 256. Il. Tue Perrecr anp Puuperrect Passive. 
These tenses have not only a more complete, uniform, and 
simple formation than the Perf. and Plup. act. (δὴ 179, 186 
235), but are likewise more common, and are formed in some 
verbs (see τρέφω, § 263, φϑείρω, § 268, &c.) from an earlier 
root. 


Ill. Tue Perrect anp Piurerrect Active. For the vari. 
ous formations of these tenses, see ὧδ 179, 186, 234-238 


IV. Tue First Aorist anp Furure. 


V. Tue Present anv Imperrect. These tenses, with 
very few exceptions, exhibit the root in its latest and most pro- 
tracted form. 


§ 25 7. Remarks. 1. The 2 Aor, and 2 Fut. are widely distin- 
guished from the other tenses by their attachment to the original form of the 
root ; while the Pres. and Impf. are distinguished no less widely by their in- 
clination to depart from this form. The other tenses differ comparatively but 
little from each other in the form of the root. If the verb has three roots, 
they are commonly formed from the middle root. See, for example, Aauldvw 
(§ 290). 


2. Many verbs are DEFECTIVE, either from the want of a complete forma- 
tion, or from the disuse of some of their forms. In both cases, the defect is 
often supplied by other verbs having the same signification (§ 301). In the 
poets, especially the older, we find many fragments of verbs belonging to the 
earlier language. These occur often in but a single tense, and sometimes in 
only a single form of that tense; as, 2 A. 8. 3 ἔδραχε, rang, A. 420, dédro 
(r. δεα-), appeared, ζ. 242, 1 A. ἐκάσυσσεν, breathed, X. 467, λχίγξε, twanged, 
A. 125, Pf. Pt. κεκαφηότα, gasping, E. 698. 


3. On the other hand, many verbs are REDUNDANT, either through a double 
formation from the same root, or the use of forms from different roots. It 
should be observed, however, that two or more forms of the same tense, with 
few exceptions, either, 


(α.) Belong to different periods, dialects, or styles of composition; thus, 
καείνω, and later χαίννῦμι (§ 295); τάσσω (ὃ 274. y), A. P. ἐσάχϑην, and 
later ἐσάγην" καίω ὃ, 267. 3), A. P. ixadény, and Ion. ixdny+ συνθάνοριαι 
and poet. σεύθομαι (§ 290); wrsibw ( 39), A. ἔπεισα, and poet. ἔσιθον. 


cH. 10.} EUPHONIC CHAN 


Or, (8.) Differ in their use; thus, 1 Pf. σέσεικις, tr persuad- 
ed, 2 Pf. πέποιθα, intransitive, I trust ( 39); 1 A. ἔστησα, trans. I placed, 
2 A. ἔστην, intrans. 7 stood ( 48). The second tenses are more inclined than 
the first to an intransitive use. From the prevalence of this use in the 2d 
Perf. and Plup., these tenses were formerly called the Perf. and Plup. middle. 


Or, (y.) Are supplementary to each other. See $§ 201. N., 237. a. 


Notre. From the various changes which take place in the root, many 
verbs, together with their common themes, have others, either derived or col- 
lateral. In regard to some forms, it seems doubtful whether they should be 
rather viewed as redundant forms of the same verb, or as the forms of distinct 
but kindred verbs. 


ἢ 258. The changes in the root of the Greek 
verb are of three kinds; EUPHONIC, EMPHATIC, and 
ANOMALOUS. 


Nore. The lists which follow are designed both to exemplify the various 
changes of the root, and likewise to present, in a classified arrangement, all 
those verbs upon whose inflection farther remark seemed to be required. It 
will be observed, that some of the words might have been arranged with equal 
propriety under other heads, from their exhibiting more than one species of 
change in the root. 


A. Ευρηῆονιο CHANGEs.. 


§ 259. 1. Radical vowels are sometimes changed by’ 
PRECESSION (δ 28), « becoming +, and ε and o becoming « 


a. Change of « ἴο ε- 


Nore. If the α is preceded or followed by a “quid, it is sometimes retained 
in the Perfect, particularly the Perfect passive. 


δέρκομαι (τ. daex-, degx-), and 2 Pf. δέδορκω, to see, poet., Γ΄. 342, Soph. Cd, 
T. 389, 2 A. ἔδρακον (ἢ 262) Eur. Or. 1456, 1 A. P. ἐδέρχϑην, Aisch. Pr. 
53, 2 A. P. ἐδράκην, Pind. N. 7. 4. 

δέρω (τ. δαρ-), to flay, F. δερῶ, A. ἔδειρα, Pf. P. δέδαρμαι, 2 A. P. ἰδάρην, 
ili. 5. 9. Poet. and Ion. δαΐίρω, Ar. Nub. 442, δείρω, Hat. ii. 39. 

δρέπω, to pluck, poet. δρέπιτω (ὃ 272), Mosch. 2. 69, F. δρέψω, A. ἔδρεψα. 
2 A. ἔδραπον, Pind. P. 4. 25]. 

trixw, to wreath, F. «λέξω, A. ἔσλεξα, Pf. P. πέσλεγμαι, 1 A. P. twrty- 
θην, 2A. P. ἐσλάκην, A. M. ἐσλεξάμην. In Hipp., Pf. ἐμ-πέσλεχα, δια 
“πίπλοχα. 

στρέφω, to twist, F. σαρέψω, A. ἔστρεψα, Pf. P. ἔσσραμρμαι, 1. A. P. ἐσερέφ. 
θην, 2 A. P. ἐσσράφην. Pf. av-torgopa, Ath. 104 6, 1 A. P. Jom. and Dor 
icrgaQény, Hdt. i. 130, Theoc. 7.132. Extended forms, chiefly poet., στρω- 
φάω, ᾧ. 53, σπσρωφάομαι, Eur. Alc. 1052, Hat. ii. 85, ΕΒ, σερωφήσομαι Theog. 
_ 837 5 σαροφέω, Ar. Pax, 175. 

retaw (lon. reéaw Hat. ii. 92), to turn, F. σρέψω, A. ἔσρεψα, Pf. σέσροφα 
(§ 236. a) and σέσραφα, Pf. P. σέσραμμαι, 1 A. P. ἐσρέφδην, 2 A. Ps ἐσράσην, 
1 A. M. commonly trans. ἐσρειψάμην, 2 A. M. intrans. ἐσρασόμην. 2A. Ep 
ἴἔσρωπον, E. 187, F. Pf. τεσράψομαι Hesych. ‘ 

10 


218 ROOT OF THE VERB. [Book ἢ 


b. Change of ε and oto. 


The change of + and o to. is almost wholly confined to syllables which be- 
come long in the Pres. and Impf., by the addition of one or more consonants 
as, rixew (ὃ 272. B), xiovnus (§ 278. δ), auCaicxw (8 280). 


§ 260. 2. Some roots are CONTRACTED ; as, 


ἄδω, to sing, F. doops, A. joa, Pf. P. ἦσμαι, A. P. ἥσθην" contr. from 
ἀείδω, A. 1, ἀείσομαι, x. 352 (asiow Theoc. 22. 26, Eur. Here. 681), &e. 
For ἀείσεο, see ὃ 185. +. : 

ἄσσω or grew (ὃ 70. 1), to rush, F. ἄξω, A. ἧξα - contr. from ἀδεεω, Θ. 
88, ἄς. A. P. ἠΐχθην, T. 368. 

λούω, to wash, F. λούσω, A. ἔλουσα, Pf. P. λέλουμαι, A. P. ἐλούθην. contr. 
from Ep. λοέω, 3. 252, F. λοέσω, &c. From the old r. Ao-qwe have the Ep. 
Impf. or 2 A. Ads x. 361, Ato» Hom. Ap. 120, Mid. Inf. λόεδθαι, or λοΐσθαι 
Hes. Op. 747; and from the same root, or from Asv- with the omission of 
the connecting vowels, are the common shorter forms of the Impf. act. and 
Pres. and Impf. mid. ; as, (for ἐλόομοεεν or tAovowev) ἐλοῦμεν Ar. Pl. 657, Acdwas, 
λοῦσα, Cyr. i. 3. 11, λοῦσθα, J. 216. 


§ 261. 3. Some roots are syncopaTeD in the theme, 
chiefly in cases of reduplication ; as, (1. γιγεν--, yuyr-) γίγνομαι, 
πίπτω, μίμνω (ὃ 286): others in the 2d Aor. (ὃ 255. δ); as, 
(τ. éyeg-, ἐγρ-) ἡγρόμην (§ 268), ηλϑον (ὃ 301. 3), Ep. defect. 
(τ. teu-) éretuoy (ὃ 194. 3), found: others in other tenses ; as, 

καλέω, to call, F. καλέσω, καλῶ (8 200.2), A. ἐκάλεσα, Pf. (1. καλε-» 
κλε-) κέκληκα, Pf. P. κέκλημαι, F. Pf. κεκλήσομαι,, Ar. Av. 184, A. P. ixan- 
ἐν a Hipp.). Poet., κικλήσκω Asch. Sup. 217, προ-καλίζομαι, 

μέλω, to concern (§ 222. 2); Ep. Pf. P. μέμδλεσαι, -ἐσθε, T. 343, Plup. 
μέμδλεσο D. 516. See δ 64.2, 2220. . 


Nors. In regard to some forms, it seems doubtful whether they are best 
referred to syncope, or to metathesis with, in some cases, contraction ; thus, 
(. καλε-, wras-, xAn-) κέκληκα. 


8 262. 4. In some roots, meratuesis takes place, chiefly 
by changing the place of a liquid. This occurs, (a) in the 
theme ; as, βλώσκω, ϑνήσκω, ϑρώσκω (ὃ 281): (δ) in the 2d 
Aor. (§ 255. δ) ; as, ἔσκλην (ὃ 227. 8), ἔτλην (§ 301. 2) ἔδρα- 
κον (§ 259. a), ἔπραϑον (§ 288): (6) in other tenses; ts, βέ- 
θληκα, ἐθλήϑην, κέκμηκα (ὃ 228). 


§ 263. 5. A few roots are changed to avoid a 10UBLE 
ASPIRATION (ὃ 62); as, 


σρίφω (τ. Seap-, Sesp- § 259, σραῷ-, resP-), to nourish (Old «ράφω, Pind. 
P. 4.205), F. ϑρέψω, A. tesa, Pf. rirgopa, Pf. P. φίδθραμμα,, 1 A. P 
ἱδρίφϑην, commonly 2 A. P. ἐσράφην. Ep. 2 Aor. intrans. or pass. ἔσραφον 
E. 555, Pf. συν-ἔσροφε Hipp. 


Nore. See, also, ἔχω (§ 300), Séarw, ϑρύσσω (§ 272), Siw (§ 219), 


cH. 10.] EUPHONIC AND EMPHA1IC CHANGES. ἡ 219 


τρέχω (§ 301), σύφω (ὃ 270). A few other roots have both aspirated ana 
unaspirated forms; as, συχ- and rux- (§§ 270. 9, 285, 290), χαδ- and καδ- 
(§ 275. ζ), Ψψύχω, to cool, F. Ψύξω, &e., 2 A. P. ἐψύγην, Ar. Nub. 151, and 
ἐψύχην, Asch. Fr. 95. 


6. In a few cases, a consonant is DROPPED or ADDED for the 
sake of euphony or the metre ; as, λείθω, to pour out, Ep. εἴθω, 
1.113 δουπέω, to sound, A. ἐδούπησα, i. 8. 18, 4. 504, and 
ἐγδούπησα, A. 45; λείχω, to lick, Pf. P. λελειχμώς Hes. Th. 826. 
So, in reduplicated forms, an πίμπρημι (8. 284), and in 
the Att. Redupl. 25 ἐγφήγορα (§ 268), ἡμύω, to bow down, ἐμνήμῦ-- 
κε X. 491 (for ἐμήμῦκε, gu- being prefixed according to analogy, 
§ 191. 2, although the ἡ is radical). With χολόομαι, -ὥσομαι; 
to be angry, we have also the Ep. (χοόομαι, ὃ 29. «) χώομαι, χώ-- 
dou, A. 80 (see 1. 413, 414). 


- § 264. 7. In some verbs, the omission of the picamma 
(ὃ 22. 5) has given rise to different forms of the root ; as, 


ἀλεύω (τ. ἀλεξ-, &As-, &Asv-), to avert, poet. Aisch. Prom. 568, F. ἀλεύσω 
Soph. Fr. 825, A. ἤλευσα, Alsch. Sept. 87; Mid. arAtouas and ἐλεύομαι, to 
avoid, Σ. 586, w. 29, A. ἠλεάμην and nAsvaduny (§ 201.2). Deriv., ἀλεείνω, 
A. 794, ἀλύσκω (8 273. «). 

ἀνα-σνέω, Ep. ἀω-“«νύω (δ 48.23 τ. πνεξ-, avs-, πνεῦ-» rvv-, xvvv- § 277), 
to recover breath, X. 222, A. P. ἀμσνύνθην, Ἐς 697, nude 2A. M. ἄμανῦσο 
A. 359. From the root σνυ- are formed the extended σπινύσκω and mivicow, 
to make wise, Asch. Pers. 830, &. 249, and the Pf. P. πέσνῦριαι, to be wise, 
2. 377, referred by some to rviw, by others to σινύσκω., 

piw (r. peF-, ἐν-), to flow, F. ῥεύσομα, (ὃ 220), A. “τρανὴ and better Att. 
F. M. (or 2 F. P.) ῥυήσομαι, 2 A. P. (or 2 A. Act. r. pus-) ippiny, Pt. ἐῤῥύηκα. 
Ion. Pres. Pt. ῥεούμενοι Ht. vii. 140. Late F. ῥεύσω. 

σεύομεαι and σόομεαι (1. osF-, osv-, cv-, os-, whence σό- § 28), to rush, poet. 
Soph. Tr. 645 (§ 246. «), Aisch. Pers. 25, A. σενάμεην (§ 201. 2) H. 208, 
Pf., as Pres., ἔσσὕμαι, Z. 361, A. P. ἐσύδην or ἐσσύθην, Eur. Hel. 1909, Soph. 
Aj. 294, 2 A. M. ἐσύμην or ἐνόν, Eur. Hel. 1162, Ξ.. 519. Ep. ς Act. 
ἔσσευα E. 208. Lacon. 2 A. P. ἀπ-εσσούα H. Gr. i. 1.23, for ἀπεσσύη. Ob- 
Serve the augm. and redupl. 

χέω (τ. xeF-, χυ-), to pour, F. χέω (δ 200. 2), A. ἔχεα (δ 201. 2), rare 
and doubtful ἔχῦσα, Pf. P. χέχύμαι, A. P. ixtdnv Ep. F. χεύσω, veto 
B. 222, A. ἔχευσα, ἔχενα, A. 269, 2 A. M. ἐχύμην, A. 526, οι. Cho. 
401. Late Pf. κέχὔκα, Anth. Late form, χύνω. 


Nore. See, also, Siw, viw, πλέω (§ 220), dain, καίω, κλαίω (ὃ 267. 3). 
An Ep. and Ion. form of rAtw is “λώω, -ὥσω, &e., «. 240, Hdt. vi. 97, 2 A. 
ἔπλων, y. 153 extended, rawifw, Th. i. 13. 


B. Empnuatic CHancgs. 


§ 265. Most impure roots and many pure 
roots are PROTRACTED in the Present and Imper- 


220 ; ROOT OF THE VERB. | BOOK Ls 


Sect, to express with more emphasis the idea of 
continued action. ‘This protraction takes place, 


§ 266. I. By LencTHENING a SHORT VOWEL 
as follows. ᾽ 


In mute verbs, & becomes ἡ ; 1n liguid. verbs, and in some 
mute verbs, i and ὕ are simply lengthened ; in other cases, the 
short vowel is usually changed to a diphthong. 


In mute verbs, the change commonly extends to all the reg- 
ular tenses (§ 215. 1). 


1, Change of & to . 


onrw (1. can-, onx-), to rot, trans., F. σήψω, 2 Pf. intrans. (§ 257. 6) σί- 
σηπα, iv. 5.12, 2 A. P. ἐσάπην. 

cin, to melt (Dor. raxw Theoc. 2. 28), F. «ήξω, A. ἔσηξα, 2 Pf. intrans. 
σίτηκα, iv. 5.15, 1 Ae P. ἐσήχϑην, commonly 2 A. P. ἐσάκην. Pf. P. ch 
enywo Anth. 


§ Φ 7. 2. Change of « to as 


δαίομαι (τ. δα-, Bas-), to divide, chiefly poet. ὁ. 140, F. découa:, A. ἐδᾶσά- 
μην, Cc. 7. 24, δίδασμαι, A. 125, δέδαιμαι, a 23. Kindred, daifw, -iZw, to 
rend, Esch. Ag. 207, dartopas, to divide, 3. 264, Hdt. i. 216, A. δασέασθαι 
€§ 201. 2) 

καθαίρω (τ. καθαρ-), to purify, F. καθαρῶ, A. ἔκάθηρα (sometimes written 
ἐχάθαρα, cf. ὃ 56. α), Pf. P. κεκάθαρμαι, A. P. ἐκαθάρθην. 

καίνω, to kill, chiefly poet., F. χανῶ, 2 A. ἔκανον. 

ναίω (τ. va-), to dwell, poet., Soph. Tr. 40, F. νάσσομα, (ὃ 71) Ap. Rh. 2. 
747, A. tvacca, built, 3.174, Pf. P. νένασμαι, Herod. Att., A. P.. ἐνάσθην Eur. 
Med. 166. Ep. deriv. vasrdéw, Δ. 45. 


ὑφαίνω, to weave, F. ὑφανῶ, A. ὕφηνα, Pf. P. ὕφασμαι (§ 217. B), A. Pe 
ὑφάνθην. From the pure root ὑφα-, Ep. ὑφόωσι (ὃ 242. Ὁ) η. 105. 

φαίνω ( 42), to show, F. φανῶ, ὅς, The Pf. πέφαγκα is late, first. occur- 
mng in Dinarch., who employs it in composition with ἀπό. Kindred poet. 
verbs, Pagivw, to shine, μι. 383; from r. φα-γ Impf. φάε % 502, F. πεφήσεσαι 
P. 155; from r. gasd-, Pt. φαίθων A. 735, Soph. El. 824. 

χαίρω (τ. χαρ-» χαιρ-), to rejoice, F. χαιρήσω (§ 222, 2), Pf. κεχάρηκα, 
PE P. κεχάρημαι and κέχαρμαι, 2 A. P. ἐχάρην. Ep., redupl. F. κεχαρήσω, 
esxaghoowas (ὃ 239. δ), 2 A. M. κεχαρόμην (ὃ 194. 3), 1 A. Μ. ixneduns, 
&. 270, 2 Pf. Pt. κεχαρηῶς (ὃ 253.1), H. £12. Late, 1 Aor. ἐχαίρησα, 
2F. P. χαρήσομιαι. 


5. Various Changes of a. 


δαίω (τ. 3aF-, δα-») 3as-), to burn, poet. Asch. Ag. 496, 2 Pf. as Pres. in- 
trans., δέδηα, TY. 18, 2 A. M. Baten», T. 316, Pf. P. δέδαυμαι, Call. Ep. 52. 

καίω and xaw (τ. xXF-, xav-, κε- § 259, xas-, xa-), to burn, F. καύσω and 
καύσομαι, A. ixavea and poet. ἔκεα (§ 201. 2), Asch. Ag. 849 (Ep. txma A. 
40, ixsia, @ 176), Pf. κέκαυκα, Pf. P. xtxavuas, A. P.ixadény. Ion. 2A, P 
ixény, Hat. ii. 180. 


= * 
en. 10.) EMPHATIC CHANGES. 22] 


κλαίω and κλάἄω, to weep, F. κλαύσομαι or κλαυσοῦμα, (§ 200. 3), and 
κλαιήσω OL κλάήσω (§ 222), A. ἔκλαυσα, Pf. P. κέκλαυμαι, 3 F. κεκλαύσομαι, 
Ar, Nub. 1436. F. χλαύσω, Theoc. 23. 34. Late, A. P. ἐκλαύσθην, Pf. P 
κίκλαύυσμαι, Anth. 


Nore. Kéw# and χλἄω are Att. forms, and are not contracted (§ 216. 8). 
For καύσω, κλαύσομαι, didavuas, from κάξσω, κλάξσομαι, didaF was, &., see 
§ 220. 

σρώγω (1. reuy-, τρωγ- ὃ 28. 1), to eat, F. πρώξομαι, 2 A. ἔσραγον, Pf P 
σίζρωγμαι. lon. 1 A. ἔσρωξα Hom. Batr. 126. 


ᾧ 268. 4. Change of ε to ἕν 


ἀγείρω (τ. ἀγερ-» «ἀγειρ-), to collect, F. dyson, A. ἤγειρα, A. P. ἠγέρθη». 
Ep., Pf. P. ἀγήγερμαι, A. 211, 2 A. Μ. ἠγερόμην, B. 94, Pt. syne. ἀγφόμενος, 
H. 134. Ep. forms, ἠγερέθομαι,, T. 231, ἠγερέομαι, K. 127; later Ep. ἀγέ- 
vous Ap. Rh. 8. 895. 

ἀείρω (τ. ἀερ-,) ἀειρ-), to raise, poet. and Ion., F. ἀερῶ, contr. "wea, Asch. 
Pers. 795, A. ἤειρα, Pf. P. Heguas (for dwero, see § 236. d), A. P. ἠέρθην » 
commonly aivw (r. ᾿ἄρ-, syne. from ἀερ- ὃ 261, αἰρ- § 267), F. “dew, A. ἦρα, 
Subj. "dew (ὃ 56. a), Pf. ἦρκα, Pf. P. ἤρμαι, A. P. ἤρθην, 1 A. M. ἠράμην, 
᾿άφωμαι, 'zoaiunry, Eur. Or. 3,2 A. M. poet. ἠρόμην, "ἄρωμαι, "&eoieny Soph. 
El. 34. ol. ἀέῤῥω, Sapph. 44(73). Poet. deriv., ἠερέθομιαι, T. 108, ἀερτά- 
gw, Ap. ΒΒ. 1. 738, devas Soph. Ant. 903, aiviuas (8 293. 3), ἕξ. 144. 

ἐγείρω (τ. ἐγερ-» tye- ὃ 261, ἐγειρ-), to rouse, F. ἐγερῶ, 2 Pf., as Pres. in- 
trans., (the syne. root prefixed, by a peculiar Att. redupl., § 263. 6) ἐγρήγορα, 
Pf. P. ἐγήγερμαι, A. P. ἠγέρθην, 2 A. M. ἠγρόμην. For ἐγρήγορθε, ἐγρηγόρθαι; 
see ὃ 238. 8. 2 Pf. Pl. 3 ἐγρηγόρθασι (as from r. ἐγερθ-) K.419. Hipp. has 
ἐξ-ήγερτο and ἐγείρατο. Deriv., Ep. ἐγρηψγοράω, ν. 6, ἐγρήσσω ν. 33; late 
γφρηγορίω. 

εἴλω (τ. ἀλ-, ix- § 259), to roll up, press hard, Ep. E. 203, A. ἔλσα 
(δ 56.8) A. 409, Pf. P. ἔελμαι,, Ὡ, 662, 2A. P. ἐάλην, N. 408. Att. 
forms, εἴλλω or εἵλλω, Ar. Nub. 761, Th. ii. 76, and ἔλλω Soph. Ant. 340. 
Deriv. εἰλέω or εἱλέω, -ἥσω, εἰλύω, -bow (Ep., A. P. ἐλύσθην, ¥. 393; Deriv. 
εἰλύφάω, A. 156, εἰλσφάζω, YT. 492), ἑλίσσω, -ἴξω (poet. and Ion. εἱλίσσω or 
εἰλίσσω, Asch. Pr. 1085, Hat. ii. 38), ἐλελίζω, -iZw, Ep. A. 530. 

Stivw, to smite, poet., F. Seva, 2 A. ἔδενον, Ar. Av. 54, 1 A. ἔδεινα, Y. 481. 

κείρω (T. καρ-, κερ- ὃ 259), to shear, F. κερῶ, A. ἔκειρα, Pf. P. xtxaguat 
F. κέρσω, Mosch. 2. 32, A. ἔκερσα, x. 456, ἐκερσάμην, Aisch. Pers. 952 (ὃ 56. 
B), 1 A. P. ἐκέρθην, Pind. P. 4. 146, 2 A. P. ἐκάρην, Anth. 

Mtivowas (Τ. μαρ-), to obtain, chiefly poet., 1. 616, 2 Pf Zupogu, A. 278, 
Pf. P. εἵμαρται (3 191.1), it has been fated, Pl. Rep. 566 a, Pt. εἱμωαρμένος, 
later Ep. μεμόρηται Ap. Rh. 1. 646, Dor. μεμόρακτα; Tim. Locr. 95 a. 

ὀφείλω, to owe, ought (Ep. ὀφέλλω 9. 462), F. ὀφειλήσω (§ 222. 2), 1 A. 
ὠφείλησα, 2. A., used only in the expression of a wish, ὥφελον, Pf. ὠφείληκα. 
Kindred verbs, ὀφέλλω, to assist, poet. (for ὀφέλλειε, see ὃ 245.5), ὀφλισκάνω, 
to incur (ὃ 289), ὠφελέω, to assist. 

πείρω (1. παρ-), to. pierce, F. regu, Pf. P. πέπαρμαι. A. trea, A. 465, 

A. p. ἐπάρην, Hdt. 4. 94, Ath. 349 c. 

orsign, to sow, F. σαερῶ, A, ἔσπειρα, Pf. P. ἔσπαρμαι, 2 A. P. ἐσπάρην. 

φτείνω (τ. ray-), to stretch, F. reva, A. trea, Pf. τέτᾶκα (ὃ 217. α), Pf. P 
vivépas, A. P. ἐστάθην. Kindred Ep. forms, ciraivw, B. 390, A. Pt. rittvas 

ce? 


- Ἁ : 
222 ROOT Of THE VERB. [BooK II. 


N. 584; σανύω P. 390, F. τανύσω, &e.; Imp. τῇ (contr. from és, r. τας) 
&. 219; 2 Aor. Pt. σεσαγών (ὃ 194. 3; r. σαγ-) A. 591. 

φθείρω, to destroy, F. φϑερῶ, A. ἔφϑειρα, 1 PE. ἔφθαρκα, 2 Pf. ἔφϑορα, Pf. P 
ἔφδαρμαι, 2A. P. ἐφθάρην. F. φθέρσω, N. 625, F. M. φϑθαρέομαι Hat. vii: 
108, φϑερέομαι ix. 42, 2 A. M. ἐφθαρέατο (§ 248. f ) Id. viii. 90. 


§ 269. 5. Change of ¢ tor. 


κλίνω, to send, F. xatva, A. ἔκλινα (ὃ 56), Pf. P. κέκλίμαι (§ 217. a) 
1 A. P. ἐκλίδην and éxaivény, 2 A. P. ἐκλίνην. 

φρίβω, to rub, to wear, F. φρίψω, A. tropa, Pf. cirerga, Pf. P. φέτειριμιαι, 
1 A. P. ἐσρίφϑην, commonly 2 A. P. bret Cnv. 


6. Change of ¢ into ss. 


ἀλείφω (τ. ἀλιφ-, gee to anoint, F. ἀκεδνω, A. “arena, Pf. ἀλήλϊφα 
(δ᾽ 191.2) and ἥλεφα, Pf. P. ἀλήλιμμαι and ἤλεμιῥαι, 1 A. P. ἠλείφθην, 
2 A. P. ἠλίφην. 

ἐρείκω, to break, F. ἐρείξω, 1 A. ἤρειξα, Ar. Vesp. 649, and ἥριξα, Hipp., 
2 A. ἤρικον, P. 295, Pf. P. ἐρήριγμαι, Hipp. Collat., Ep. boty dw, t 88. 

ἐρείπω, to cast down, F. ἐρείψω, A. ἤρευψα, A. P. ἠρείφϑην. 2 A., comm. 
intrans., ἤρεπον, E. 47, Plup. P. ἐρέριπσο ἘΞ. 15, late Pf. P. ἐρήρειμιμιαι. 


See, also, Asiaw (YJ 37) and wsitw (Y 39). 
| 7. Change of o into ov. 


ἀκούω (τ. &xo-, axov-), to hear, F. ἀκούσομαι, A. ἤκουσα, 2 Pf. ἀκήκοα, 
2 Plup. ἠκηκόειν (ὃ 191. 2), A. P. ἠκούσθην. Late, F. ἀκούσω, Pf. P. ἤκου- 
cues Ep. &xovagw, Hom. Merc. 423. 


§ 270. 8. Change of ὅ into ὅ. 


ἀλγύνω, to afflict, F. ἀλγῦύνῶ, A. ἤλγῦνα, A. P. ἠλγύνθην. 

ὀδύρομαι aNd δύρομιαι, to lament, F. sdigovuas, A. wdugcunv. 

witva, to wash, F. rrvva, A. ἔσλσνα, Pf. P. α«ἐπσλῦμα, (ὃ 217. a), A. P 
ἰσλύδην. 


σύφω (. ϑύφ-, τυφ- ὃ 263), to fumigate, to burn, F. Siw, Pf. P. ridupepos, 
SA. δ᾽ ἐσὕφην. 


9. Change of ὕ into sv. 


κεύθω (τ. xvb-, xtvd-), to hide, poet. ZEsch. Pr. 571, F. κεύσω, 1 A. ἔκευσα, 
o. 263, 2 A. ἔκυθον, y 16 {κέκυθον, § 194.3), 2 Pf. xtxevda, Soph. El. 1120. 
Ep. κευθάνω, T. 453. 

σεύχω, to prepare, poet., F. σεύξω, A. trevéa, Pf. P. σέσυγμαι, A. P. ἐσύχϑην. 
Pf. Pt. intrans. σεσευχώς μ. 423, Pf. P. σεσεύχαται (ὃ 248. f) β. 63, Plup. 
ireredyaro A. 808, Pf. P. Inf. σεσευχῆσθαι x. 104, F. PE. φεσεύξομοαι, M. 
545, A. P. ἐσεύχθην, Hipp. Kindred verbs, συγχάνω (ὃ 290), cirdoxopas 
(§ 285). 

φεύγω, and sometimes φυγγάνω (ὃ 290), to flee, F. φεύξομα; and φευξοῦμα. 
(§ 200. 3), 1 A. ἔφευξα, commonly 2 A. ἔφυγον, 2 Pf. σίφευγα. Ep. Pf. Pt. 
σιφυζότις (cf. 274. δ) D. 6, σεφυγμένος a 18. 


cx. 10. | EMPHATIC CHANGES. 2234 


10. Change of ε, in the diphthong εἰ, to ἡ. 


κλείω and κλήω, to shut, F. κλείσω and κλήσω, A. ἔκλεισα and ἔκλῃσα, 
Pf. P. κέκλεισμαι, κέκλειμκαι, and κέκλῃμαι, F. Pf. κεκλείσομαι, Ar. Lys. 
1072, A. Ρ. ἐκλείσθην. Ion. xaniw, -icw, Hdt. iii. 117; Dor. F. χλαξῶ or 
κλᾳξῶ Theoc. 6. 32, A. txraaka, &e., as from κλάξω or κλάζω (§ 245. 1). 


§ 271. II. By the appiTion oF consonants, 
usually either τ, o, v, ox, or ζ. 


Of these consonants, τ is chiefly added to labial roots; σ᾿ to 
palatal and lingual roots; » (without further addition, § 289. 2), 
to liquid and pure roots; ox, ¢, &c., to pure roots. Ina few 
instances, the close terminations are affixed to the protracted 
root. 


§ STZ. 1. Avprrion oF ¢ (see § 52). 


a. To Labial Roots. 


drrw (τ. ἀφ-. &ar-), to fasten to, to set on fire, F. dw, A. ἥψα, Pf. P. 
Huma, A. P. ἥφθην (ἄφθην, Hdt. i. 19, ἑάφθην, ν. 543). Kindred, ἀφάω, to 
handle, Ion. ἀφάσσω, A. ἤφασα, Hat. iii. 69, ἀπαφίσκω (§ 296). 

βάσσω (τ. βαῷ-, Barr-), to dip, F. Baw, A. ἔξαψα, Pf. P. BiCappas, 
1 A. P. ἐξάφθϑην, commonly 2 A. P. ἐξάφην. 

βλάπεω (τ. βλαξ-), to hurt, F. βλάψω, A. tra pea, Pf. βέδλαφα, Pf. P. 
BibrAaupas, 1 A. P. ἐδλάφθην, 2 A. P. ἐδλάξην. F. Pf. BsCadouas, Hipp. 
Ep. βλάξομαι, T. 82. 

δρύπσω (τ. δρυῷ-), to tear the flesh, poet. Eur. El. 150, F. δρύψω, 1 A. 
ἔδρυψα, II. 524, 2 A. Opt. ἀσοδρύφοι ¥. 187, A. P. ἐδούφϑθην, ε. 435. 

ϑάσσω (τ. Sag-), to bury, F. ϑάψω, A. ἔδαψα, Pf. P. τέθαμμαι, 3 Ἐς σε- 
θάψομαι, Soph. Aj. 577, 2 A. P. ἐσάφην (§ 263). 1 A. P. ἐθάφϑθην, Hat. ii. 
81, From the r. ϑαφ- in another sense, come the Ep. and Ion. v Pf., as Pres., 
σέθησα, to be amazed, A. 243, Hat. ii. 156, 2 A. ἔταφον, I. 193 ; and the 
late 1 Pf. trans. riéaga, Ath. 258 ¢. - 

Setrrw (τ. Seug-), to break in pieces, F. ϑρύψω, Pf. P. τέδθρυρμεαι- 
A. ἔῤρυψα, Hipp., 1 A. P. ἐθρύφϑην, Anth., 2 A. P. ἐσρύφην (§ 263), I. 363. 

κάμαπω (τ. xawr-), to bend, F. κάμψω, A. ἔκαμ a, PE. P. κέκαμμαι 
(δ 217. y), A. P. ἐκάμφθην. Kindred, γνάμσπω. 

κλέπτω (τ. κλασ-, xrew- ὃ 259), to steal, F. κλέψω, A. ἔκλεψα, Pf. κί- 
κλοφα (§ 236. a), Pf. P. χέκλεμμαι, 1 A. P. ἐκλέφθην, commonly 2A. P. 
ixadany. Late 2 A. ἔχλα πον. 

κόπτω (1. xox-), to cut, to strike, F. κόψω, A. ἔκοψα, Pf. χέκοφα, Pf. P. xé- 
xompor, 3 Ἐ, κεκόψομαι, AT. Ran. 1223, 2 A. P. ἐκόσην. 2 Pf. Pt. κεκοπώς 
N. 60. 

κρύπσω (τ. xeue-), to hide, F. κρύψω, A. ἔκρυψα, Pf. P. es τὼν 1A. P 
ἐκρύφδθην, sometimes 2 A. P. ἐκρύξην. In Hipp., Pf. κέκρυφα, F. Pf. κεκρύψο- 
μαι. For χρύπσασκε, see ὃ 249. d. 

ῥάπσσω. (τ. pag-), to stitch, F. ῥάψω, A. ἔῤῥαψα, Pf. P. ἔῤῥαμμαι, 2 A. P 


νε 


ἐερράφην. 
μάραπω (Τ. μαρα’-), to seize, poet., F. μάρψω, Ο. 137, 1 A. ἔμαρψα, Ar. Eq 


224 ROOT OF THE VERB. | BOOK ἢ 


197, Ep 2 A. μέμαρπον, shortened μέμαπον (§§ 194. 3, 255. 3, 263. 6, 
and eae Hes. Sc. 231, 2 Pf. μέμαρπα, Id. Op. 202. 


σύσσω (τ. cur-, rvrr-), F. curriow (§ 222. 1), 2 A. ἔτυασον, Pf. P. ceed 
wrnees and σέσυμραι, 2 A. Ρ. ἐσύπην. Ion. 1 A. tropa, A. 531, ἐσυψάμην 
Hdt. ii. 40. For σεσυσόντες, see ὃ 194. 3. 


B. To Other Roots. 


ἀνύω, ἀνύτω (τ. ἀνυ-, zvur-), to accomplish, F. ἀνύσω, A. ἤνῦσα, Pf. rine 
Pf. P. ἤνυσμαι. <A. P. ἠνύσθην, Hes. Sc. 3i1. The simpler form ᾽ἄνω like- 
wise occurs in the Pres. and Impf. For #viro, &e., see ὃ 246. a 


rinew (Τ. réx-, τικα- § 259), to beget, to bring forth, F. rife, .mmunly 
σέξομα,, 1 A. tre¥a, commonly 2 A. ἔσεκον, 2 PE. σέσοκα, A. P. ἐσέχϑην. 
Late Pf. P. σέσεγμαι. For σεκεῖσθαι, see ὃ 200. y. 


§ 273. 2. ADDITION OF σ- 


This letter is sometimes simply prefixed or affixed to the 
characteristic, but commonly unites with it, if a palatal, to form 
ao (zt, ᾧ 70. 1), or less frequently ¢, and, if a lingual, to form 
ξ (8 51. N.), or less frequently oo (rz). 


Norrs. (1.) Palatals in -%# are mostly onomatopes. (2.) Linguals in 
-¢w are mostly derivatives, wanting the second tenses, and, by reason of eu- 
phonic changes, nowhere exhibiting the root in its simple form. The charac- 
teristic may, however, be often determined from another word. It is most 
frequently 3, and may be assumed to be this letter, if not known to be another. 
(3.) In a few instances, σ unites with yy to form %, and even with a labial to 
form % or ee. 


a. Prefixed. 


ἀλύσκω (τ. ἀλυκ-, ἀλυσκ-), to avoid, poet., F. ἀλύξω, A. ἤλυξα. Extended 
Ep. forms, ἐλυσκάξω Z. 443, ἀλύσκἄνε x. 330, 

ticxw (1. tix-, εἶκ- § 260, tivx-), to liken, Ep. Γ. 19% (also ἤσκω 3. 279), 
Pf. P., as Pres., ἤΐγρμαι, to be like, Eur. Ale. 1063, Plup P. ἠΐγμην, 3. 790. 
The common trans. form is εἰκάζω, -ἄσω, &e., and the ~mmen intrans., the 
pret. ἔοικα (ἢ 238. 8), for which are also used the simpler sixa (having in the 
3d Pers. pl. the irregular form «Zao; Ar. Av. 96; cf. tom. 5 237. oda), and 
Ton. οἴκα, Hdt. i. 155; Plup., as Impf., ἐῴκειν (§ 189. 5,, F εἴξω, Ar. Nub. 
1001. Ὧρ. Impf. intrans. (or Pf.) εἶκε Σ. 520. 


ivi and ἐννέπω (τ. tvsr-, ἐνισ- ὃ 259, inea-), to speak, tl, poet. A. 643, 
B. 761, Soph. Gd. T. 350, F. tvintw, H. 447, and ἐν,σα ἐσν (ὺ 222) ε. 98 
2 A. inerov, Eur. Sup. 435. Kindred, ἐν and ἐνίσσω () 276. 8), to re- 
proach, Ep. I’. 488, O. 198, 2 A. ἠνί πἄπον and ἐνέντσον (ἢ 19. 3). Related 
to εἶπον (ὃ 301. 7). 

λάσκω (τ. Awx-), to sound, to utter, poet., F. λακήσομαι (ὁ 222), A. ἐλάκη- 
ea, commonly 2 A. ἔλᾶχον, 2 Pf. λέλξκα (9 236. E.). 2 A. M. λελάκοντο 
(ἡ 194. 3). For λελἄκυϊα, see § 253.2. Deriv. forms, Mp. anxiw, 6. 379 
Dor. Adxiw, Theoc. 2. 24, Att. λακάξω, Asch. Sup. 872. 


β. Affixed. 


ὠλίξω (τ. ἀλεκ-ν ὠλεξ-), to wurd off, poet. in the Act., F. ἰλεξήσω, Z. 109, 
L A. ἠλίξησα, y. 846, and ἤλεξα, Asch. Sup. LO5z, 2 A. aA Anov ($9 194. 3, 


vH 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 225 


261), ἤλκαθον (ᾧ 999) isch. Fr. 417; Mid. to repel, F. ὠλεξήσοροαι, vii. 7. 8 
A. ἠλεξάμην, i. 3. 6. ~ 

ὀδάξομιαι, to bite, Ion. and Poet., F. ὀδαξήσομιαι, Hipp., A. ὠδαξάμην, Anth., 
PE. P. ὥδαγμαι. Act. ὀδάξω, to smart from a bite, Symp. 4. 27. 


ᾧ 274. y- Uniting with a Palatal to form σσ (rr). 


«λλάσσω OY ἀλλάττω (τ. dAAwy-), to change, F. ὠλλάξω, A. ἥἤλλαξα, Ph 
ἄλλαχα, Pf. P. ἤλλαγμαι, 1 A. P. ἠλλάχϑην, 2 A. P. ἠλλάγην. 

πλήσσω (τ. rrny-), to strike, in composition with ἐκ or xara, to strike with 
terror, Ἐς «λήξω, A. ἔσληξα, 2 Pf. πέσληγα, Pf. P. σέσληγμαι, 3 Ἐς σεπλή- 
ξημαι, Ar. Eq. 272, 1 A. P. ἐσλήχϑην, commonly 2 A. P. ἐπλήγην, but ἐξε- 
whkyny, κατεασλάἄγην (-ἥγην, 1.31, 3.225). For σέπληγον, &e., see ἢ 194. 8. 
The form σπλήγνύμαι (§ 293) occurs Th. iv. 125. In the simple sense to 
strike, the Att. writers associate the Act. of πατάσσω with the Pass. of σλήσ- 

στήσσω (τ. wrrax-, renx- ὃ 266), to crouch from fear, F. σφπήξω, 1 A. 
trenza, poet. 2 A. ἔσσακον, Asch. Eum. 25%, Pf. ἔσσηχα. Ep., fromr. rra-, 
2 A. ἢ. 3 «τήτην H.-136, Pf. Pt. πεπσσηώς (ὃ 253.1), B. 312 (cf. ὃ 238. a). 
Kindred, rraecw, A. 371, rewoxdlw, A. 372. 

ταράσσω (τ. ragay-), to disturb, F. ταράξω, A. ἐσάραξα, Pf. P. τετάραγ- 
“αἰ, A. P. ἐσαράχθην. From φσαράσσω is formed, by metathesis, contraction, 
and the aspiration of ¢ before ¢(§ 65. Ν.), ϑράσσω (raguse-, reuacr-, ϑρᾶσσ-), 
FB. ϑράξω, A. ἔθραξα, A. P. ἐδράχιϑην. Ep. Pf., as Pr. intrans., τέτρηχα (ἢ 62), 
H. 346. 

τάσσω (τ. ray-), to arrange, F. τάξω, A. trata, Pf. τέταχα, Pf. P. rf 
ταγμαι, F. Pf. σετάξομαι, Th. v. 71, 1 A. P. ἐσάχιϑην, rare 2 A. P. ἐσάγην.- 

φρίσσω (τ. Pesx-), to shudder, F. φρίξω, A. ἔφριξα, 2 Pf. rigerxa. For σπε- 
Peixovras, 866 § 246. 2. 

3. Uniting with a Palatal to form Z. 

κράζω “and 2 Pf. κέκραγα (ὃ 238. β), to cry, F. Pf. κεκράξομαι (ὃ 239. δ), 
2 A. ἐκρᾶγον. Kindred, κλάζω (ἢ 277. a), κρώζω, -ωξω, κλώζω. 

οἰμώζω (τ. οἰμκωγ-), to bewail, F. οἰμώξομαι, A. guwta, Pf. P. oluwymas 
(: 189.4). A. P. Pt. οἰμκμωχϑείς Theog. 1204, late F. οἰμώξω, Anth. 

ὀλολύζω (τ. GAoAvy-), to shout, to shriek, F. ὀλολύξομαι, A. ὠλόλυξα. 

ortvalw, and poet. rrsvaxw, to groan, F. στενάξω, Α. ἐστέναξα. Poet. forms, 
erovaxiw, Soph. El. 133, cravaxifw or στεναχίζω, B. 781, A. ἐσσονάχησαγ 
3. 124. 

σφάζω and σφάτεω (τ. σφαγ-), to slay, Ἐ, σφάξω, A. ἔσφαξα, 1 A. P. ἐσφάχ- 
δην, commonly 2 A. P. ἐσφάγην. Pf. P. ἔσφαγμαι, x. 582. The shorter 
root φα- appears in the Ep. Pf. P. σέφζμα;ι, E. 531, F. Pf. σεφήσομαι, N. 829. 
Hence (r. ga-, φεν- δὲ 259, 277), the poet. 2 A. ἔσεφνον (δ } 194. 3, 261), 


s. Uniting with yy to form Z. 


απλάζω (τ. “λαγγ-), to cause to wander, poet. (= rravaw), B. 132, 
A. ἔσλαγξα, w. 307 ; Mid. πλάζοριαι, to wander, Soph. Aj. 886, F. “λάγξο- 
paso 312, A. P. ἐπλάγχθην Eur. Hipp. 240. 

σαλπίζω (τ. σαλαιγγ-), to sound a trumpet, F. σαλσίγξω, A. ἰσάλᾳαιγῇ» 
Late F. σαλπίσω, &e. 


See, also, κλάζω (§ 277. a). 


224 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK Π' 


§ 27S. z Uniting with a Lingual to form ¢. 


καθίζω (τ. -, ξδ- ὃ 282, i2-, ἱζ- § 259), to seat, to place, F. καθίσω, καθιῶ 
(§ 200. B), A. ἐκάθισα and καθῆσα (ὃ 192. 3), Ar. Ran. 911. Mid. xadiZo 
was, and rarely καθέζομαι, Pl. Ax. 371 ¢, to sit, F. καθιξήσορμεα, (ὃ 222), PL 
Pheedr. 229 a, and x2ésdoveas (δ 200. y), Pl. Thext. 146 a, 1 A. commonly 
trans. ἐκαθιτώμην, Dem. 897. 3, and καδθεσάμην (\\ 189. 3), Eur. Hipp. 31 
2 A. intrans. éxabsZouny, i. 5.9. Late, A. P. txadéicdny, Anth., F. M. xads 
δήσομοαι, Diog. Laert. ii. 72. The simple forms are chiefly poet. and dialectic 
‘Zw, to seat, sit, B. 53, isch. Eum. 18 (extended iZavw, Th. ii. 76), A. εἶσα, 
B. 549, Pt. tous, x. 361 (Lon. ba-sicws Hat. iii. 1.6); Mid. ἵζομαι, I. 162, 
and rarely owas, Soph. id. T. 32, F. ἐφ-ἔσσεσθαι 1. 455, later εἴσομαι, Ap. Rh. 
2. 807, | A. sicduny, Theog. 12, ἑσσάμην, Pind. P. 4. 363, ἐεσσάμην, ξ. 295, 
2 A. ἑζόμην, Aisch. Eum. 3; Pf. P. ἥμαι, to sit (4 59), A. 134, Eur. Ale. 
604, of which the comp. κάθημαι is also common in Att. prose. Deriv, 
ἱδρύω, -bow, &e., A. P. Doidny and Deivdny (§ 278. γ). 

ὀνομάζω (τ. dvoar-), to name, F. ὀνομάσω, A. ὠνόμασα, Pf. ὠνόνμακα, Pf. P. 
ὠνόμασμαι, A. P. ὠνομάσθην. Ton. οὐνομάζω (8 44. 4), Hdt. iv. 6, Mol. ὀνυ- 
μάζω (ὃ 44. 5), Pind. P. 2. 82, chiefly Ep. ὀνορεαίνω, Β. 488. 

φράξω (r. φραδ-), to-tell, F. φράσω, A. ἔφρασα, Pf. πίφρακα, Pf. P. rigga- 
σμαι, A. P. ἐφράσθην. Pf. P. Pt. προ-πεφραδμένος, Hes. Op. 653. For σέ- 
φραδον, &e., see ὃ 194. 3. Extended, 1 A. φράδασσε Pind. Nem. 3. 45. 

χάζω (τ. vad-, xad- ὃ 263. N.), to drive back, retire (ἀνω- χάξω iv. 1. 16), 
more frequently, but chiefly Ep., Mid. χάζομαι, to retire, F. χάσομαι, 1 A. 
ἰχασσάμην, Δ. 535. Ep. 2 A. Pt. κεκαδών, 2A. M. κεκάδοντο (ὃ 194. 85), 
BL κεκαδήσω (ὃ 239. 6). : 


n. Uniting with a Lingual to form σσ (rr). - 
ἀηθέσσω, to be unused, Ep. K. 493, A. ἀήδεσα, Ap. Rh. 1. 1171. 
ἁρμόζω, and Att. ἁρμόφσσω (τ. ἁρμοδ-), F. ἁρμόσω, ἥρμοσμαι, Dor. A. P. 
ὥρμόχθην, Diog. Laert. viii. 85. 
βλίσσω or βλίτσω (I. μελισ-, wrasr- § 261, Brair- ὃ 64. .N.), to take honey 
from the hive, Ἐς βλίσω, A. ἔδλισα. 
κορύσσω (τ. xogud-), to arm, poet., Pf. P. Pt. κεκορυθμένος (ὃ 53), T. 18 
Eur. Andr. 279. A. M. Pt. κορυσσάμενος (ὃ 71) T. 397, Dor. A. ἐκόρυξα 
(3 245, 1), Theoc. 3. 5. 
xécco to sprinkle, F. πάσω, A. traca, A. P. ἰἐπάσθην. 
πλάσσω, to fashion, F. rrdow, A. trraca, Pf. P. σέπλασμαι, A. P. ἐπσλά- 
σθην. : 
9, Uniting vith a Labial to form Z or ez. 
vigw (τ, uQ-), to wash, F. νίψω, A. ἔνεψα, Pf. P. véviyewas, A. P. ivipdny, 
Hipp. Late vierw, Plut., but dxo-virrsodas σ. 178. 
wicow or xirrw (r. rea), to cook, F, ria, A. trea, Pf. P. σέπεμμαι 
A. P. ἐσίφθην. Late σέπτω. 


See, also, ἐνίσσω (§ 273. a), λάζομαι (§ 290). 


ᾧ 276. Remark. As verbs in -Z# and -σσω are formed from both 
palatal and lingual roots, and as pure verbs often pass into verbs in -ζω, it is 
not strange that in some verbs there should be an intermingling of forms. 
Thus, : 


cx. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 227 


ἁρπάζω, to snatch, F. ἁρπάσω, A. ἥρπασα, Pf. ἥραακα, Pf. P. ἥρπασμαι, 
A. P. terdobny. Non-Att. F. ἁρπάξω; X. 310, A. P. ἡραάχϑην, Hat. ii. 90, 
&e. Late 2 A. M. Pt. (1. ἄρπα-, ὃ 227) ἁρπάμενος, Anth. 

ἐναρίζω, to slay, strip, poet., F. ἐναρίξω, A. 191, A. ἐνάριξα P. 187, and 
ἠνάρισα, Anacr., Pf. P. ἠνάρισμαι, Soph. Aj. 26, ἠναρίσθην, Aisch. Cho. 347, 
Primitive, ivaigw ©. 296, 2 A. ἥναρον, Soph. Ant. 871, 1 A. M. ἐνηράμην, 
E. 43. “ 

ἔρδω (or ἕρδω) and ῥέζω (r. toy-, pey- ὃ 262, ἐρδ-), to do, poet. and Ion 
isch. Sept. 231, D. 214, F. ἔρξω ε. 360, and ῥέξω, Eur. Alc. 262, A. ἔρξα 
Aisch. Sept. 924, and ἔῤῥεξα or ἔρεξα, I. 536, Soph. Cid. C. 539 (observe the 
augment), 2 Pf. ἔοργα, B. 272, 2 Plup. ἐώργειν (§ 189. 5), 3. 693, ἐόργεα, 
Hdt. i. 127, A. P. Pt. pexdeis, 1. 250. 

ὠερμηρίζω, to ponder, poet., F. μερμηρίξω x. 261, A. ἐμερμήριξα, A. 189, 
and ἐμερρήρισα, Ar. Vesp. 5. 

wxailw, to play, F. «αἰξομαι, σπ΄αἰξοῦμα, (δ 200.3), A. ἔπαισα, Pf. σέπαικα, 
Pf. P. σεπαίσμαι. Later, παίξω, trata, σίπαιχα, πέπαιγμαι, iwaixdny 


Nore. See ὃ 245.1. The Dorics sometimes extend the palatal forms to 
other tenses, besides the Fut. and Aor. act. and mid.; as, ἐλυγίχθης (for -/cdns) 
Theoc. 1. 98, σέδλαγμαι, (ϑλάω) Id. 22. 45, ἁρμόχθην (ὃ 275. η). 


§ 277. 3. ADDITION OF ». 


In impure roots, ν is commonly prefixed to the characteristic , 
but in pure roots, affixed. 


Nore. In a few poetic forms, » is prefixed to « characteristic. For the 
changes of » before a consonant, see ὃ 54. A short vowel is sometimes 
lengthened before ». 


a. Prefixed to a Consonant. 


ἅλλομαι (τ. ᾿ἄλ-, ἀνλ-, &AA-), to leap, F. ἁλοῦμαι, A. ἡλάμην, Subj. 'άλω 
μαι (§ 56. a), &e., 2 Α. ἡλόμην, Subj. “ἄλωμαι, &e. Ep. nude 2 A. δ. 2 
arco x. 754, 3 ὦλτο 755, Pt. ἄλμενος A. 421 (δ 13. 4, 185. δ). 

βάλλω (τ. Bar-, Baa- ὃ 262, Bors- §§ 28, 288), F. βαλῶ, &e., see ὃ 223, 
Ep., F. βλήσομαι, YT. 335, 2 A. tanv (ὃ 227.8), g. 15, ἐδλήμην, B. 39, 
commonly pass. A. 675, Opt. S. 2 Bago or (τ. βλε- ὃ 259, cf. χρείη, rAsiens, 
§ 284) Basio N. 288, Inf. βλῆσθαι A. 115, &e.; Pf. P. βεξόλημαι, 1. 9. 

κλάζω (τ. κλαγ-, xrAayy-, κλαζ- ὃ 274. £), to clang, to scream, F. χλάγξω, 
1 A. ἔκλαγξα, 2 A. ἔκλαγον, Pf., as Pres., κέκλαγγα or κέκλαγχα, Ar. Vesp. 
929 (xixanya, B. 222, see ὃ 246. 2), F. Pf. κεκλάγξομα, (§ 239. c). Ex- 
teded forms, xAayytw, Theoc. Ep. 6. 5, xraayyaivw, Asch. Eum. 131, 
κι αγγάνω Soph. Fr. 782. 

σφάλλω (τ. σφαλ-), to deceive, F. σφαλῶ, A. ἔσφηλα, Pf. P. ἔσφαλμαι, 
2A. P. ἐσφάλην. 

σσέλλω (τ. σταλ-, στελ- ὃ 259), to send, F. ortrw, A. ἔστειλα, Pf. ἔσταλκα, © 
Pf. P. ἔσταλμαι, 2 A. P. ἐσσάλην, rarely 1 A. Ρ. ἐστάλθην. For ἐσταλάδασο, 
see § 248, f. 


β. Affixed to a Consonant. : 


δάκνω (τ. δακ-, δηκ- ὃ 266), to bite, F. δήξομαι:, 2 A. ἔδακον, Pf. P. δίδη 
γμαι, A. Ῥ. ἐδήχϑην. Poet. Mid. δακνάζορμιαι, Asch. Pers. 571. 


228 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK 11 


σέμνω (τ. rap-, σεμ- ὃ 259), to cut, F. τεμῶ, 2 A. ἔταμον and ἔτεμον, Pf 
τίτμηκα (ὃ 261), Pf. P. τέσμημαι,, 3 F. σεσμήσοριαι, A. P. ἐτμήθαν. ‘lom 
τάμνω, 1. 105. For φεσρμῆσθον, see » 234, 6. Kindred Ep. ruznyw, 1. 390 
(τ μήσσω, Mosch. 2. 81), F. τρήξω, 1 A. ἔτμηξα, 2 A. ἔτμαγον, 2 A. P. ἐσμά 
γῆν, later ἐσμήγην. Some read σέρει, as Pres., N. 707. 


See, also, κάμνω (ὃ 223). 


§ 278. yy. Affixed to a Vowel. 


βαίνω, and poet. βάσκω (ὃ 2793; τ, Ba-), to go, F. βήσομωι, 2 A. ἔβη 
(J 57; see ὃ 227, 242. Ὁ, 251. 4), Pf. Béenxa (see καὶ 238.2). Poet. ang 
Ton., F. βήσω, I will cause to go, Eur. Iph. T. 742, 1 A. ἔξησα, Hat. i. 46 
In composition, Pf. P. βέξαμαι and βέξασμαι (§ 221. «), A. P. ἐξάϑην. For 
βήσεο, &e., see § 185. «. Kindred forms, βάω in Dor. ἐκξῶντας Th. v. 77 
Ep. βιδάω, TD. 22, βίξημι, H. 213, βιξάσθω. N. 809; Ion. βιξάσκω, Hipp. ; 
the common causative βιξάζω ; and apparently the Ep. Pres. used as Fut. 
(ᾧ 200. b) Béopas, I shall walk, live, Ὁ. 194, X. 431, Pl. βέόμεσθα (or βιό 
μεσθα) Hom. Ap. 528. 

δύνω (τ. δύ-), to enter, F. dicouas 2 A. ἔδῦν (Ἶ 57 ; see δὲ 227, 226. 4), 
Pf. δέδσκα. For δυνέουσι, see ὃ 243. 4. The primitive δύω is commonly 
causative, to make to enter (yet = δύνω, s. 272), F. δύσω, A. ἔδῦσα, Pf. ἀπο- 
δέδῦκα ν. 8. 23, Pf. P. dédduas, A. P. ἐδύδην. Chiefly Ep. and Jon., Pres. M. 
δύομα,, E. 140, A. M. ἐδυσάμην, B. 578, 2 A. P. ἐδύην, Hipp. For δύσετο, &e., 
see) 185. ε. Later Ep. form, δύσιτω, Ap. Rh. 1. 1008, A. Pt. dias 1326. 

ἐλάω, commonly ἐλαύνω, to drive, F. iazow, :aw (δ 200. 2), A. ἤλασα, Pf. 
ἐλήλακα (§ 191), PF. P. ἐλήλαμαι, A. P. ἠλάθην. Ton, Pf. P. ἐλήλασμαι 
Hipp., A. P. ἡλάσθην, Hat. iii. 54. For ἐληλάδατο, see § 248. f. Ton. and 
Poet. ἐλαστρίω, Σ. 543, 


μάομαι and μαίομαι (Tr. μαώ-, wo- ᾧ 267, μεν- ὃ 259), to seek after, poet: 
Soph. Cid. C. 836, ». 367, Ep. F. μάσσομαι (ᾧ 71) A. 190, A. ἐμασσάμην, 
ν. 429, 2 Pf. μέμονα (ᾧ 958, «). Pres. Imp. μώεο (§ 242. b) Mem. ii. 1. “Ὁ 
(Epich.), Inf. (as from στ. wao-) μῶσθαι Theog. 769. Extended, uaimdw, 
-how, Soph. Aj. 50. 

πίνω (τ. πο-, πι- § 259), to drink, F. aiowas (δ 200. Ὁ), later σιοῦμαι 
“δ᾽ 200. 3), 2 A. ἔσχον (ὃ 227. a), Imp. xk, commonly wits, Pf. σέπωκα, 
Pf. P. χσέσομαι, A. P. ἐσόδϑην. 


thw (τ. ri-), to pay, to expiate, F. «ἴσω, A. trtca, Pf. σέσικα, Pf, P. reels 
rum, AP. ἐτίσθην. Mid. σίνομαι, and τἰνῦμαι or τἰννύμαι (§ 293), to avenge, 
to punish, chiefly poet. T'. 279, 366, Eur. Or. $28, 1172, Hdt. v. 77. Poet. 
riw, to pay honor to, F. «ἴσω 1. 142, tetea, Soph. Ant. 22, Pf. P. Pt. σετιμένος, 
YT. 426. 

φθάνω (τ. φθα-), to anticipate, F. φθάσω, commonly φϑήσομαι (§ 219), 1 A, 
ipbxcu, 2 A. tpény (§ 227), Pf. ἔφδᾶκα. Ep. 2 A. M. Pt. φϑάμενος E. 119. 

Qtivw (τ. Q6:-), to perish, to destroy, F. trans. φϑίσω, φθιῶ, Soph. Aj. 1027, 
intrans. φϑίσομαι, A. trans. ἔφθισα, Pf. P. ipéruas, Plup. P. and 2 A. M. 
(δδ 227, 226. 4) ἰφδίμην. Ep., φϑίω, 2. 446, B. 368, A. P. ἐφδίδην, Ψ. 331, 
2A. Act. ἔφδιίθον (cf. § 299) E. 110, Bxtended poet. form, ᾧϑινύδω, A. 
491, a. 250, 


3. Prefixed to a. 


See δάμναμιαι, (ὃ 298), xiovnus, κρήμναμ εἰ, πίτνημι, σκίδνημω (§ 293), σέρνη- 
ui (§ 285), πιλνάω, πίλναμαι (ὃ 282). 


oh. 102] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 229 


The addition of these letters is commonly attended with the 
precession or protraction of the preceding vowel, with metathe- 
sis, or with the loss of a consonant. 


a. Without further Change. 


ἀρίσκω (τ. ἀρε-), to please, Ἐ, ἀρίσω, A. ἤρεσα, A. P. ἠρέσθην. See ἀραρί- 

σκω (ὃ 285). 
- γηφάω and ψγηράσκω, to grow old, F. γηράσω and γηράσομαι, 1 A. ἐγήραᾶσα, 

ἃ A. ἐγήραν (ὃ 227), Ph. γεγήρακα. 

ἱλάσκοριαι (τ. ἱλα-), to propitiate, F. ἱλἄσομαι, A. ἱλάσάμην,-Α. P. ἱλάσθην. 
Kindred Att. forms, ἱλέομεα, Aisch. Sup. 117, iaAsdouas, Pl. Leg. 804 Ὁ. Ἐρ., 
ἱλάομαι, B. 550, Pf. Subj. ἱλήκω, 0. 365, Opt. ἱλήκοιμι, Hom. Ap. 165; 
forms as from “anus, Imp. faz Ap. Rh. 4. 1014, tants (ὃ 251. 4), Mid. 
ἵλδμαι Hom. Hym. 20, 5 ; later Ep., F. ἱλάξομα, Ap. Rh. 2. 808, A. ἱλαξά- 
pny, 1. 1093. 

μεθύσκω (τ. μεθυ-), to intoxicate, F. μεθύσω, A. ἐμέθῦσα, A. P. iusticény. 
Phe intrans. weédw, to be drunk, occurs in the Pres. and Impf. 


ᾧ Φ 8:99... ρ. Vowel changed by Precession. 


ἀμξλόω, commonly auCrirxw (τ. ἀμξλο-, ἀμδλισν»- § 259), to miscarry, 
FB. ἀμξχώσω, A. ἥμξλωσα, PE. ἥμξλωκα, PE. P. ἤμξλωμα.. 2 A. ἤμδλων in 
Suid. Ton. ἐξ-αμέλέετα, Hipp. 

ἀνάλόω, commonly ἀνάλίσκω (1. ὧλο-, ἁλισκ-), to expend, F. ἀνξλώσω, 
A. ἀνήλωσα, PE. ἀνήλωκα, Pf. P. ἀνήλωμαι, A. P. ἀνηλώθην. This verb often 
retains ἃ in the augment (ὃ 189. 4), especially in the older Att.; and some- 
times, in double composition, augments the second preposition (§ 192. 3); 
thus, A. ἀνάλωσα, Soph. Aj. 1049, χκατηνάλωσα, Isoc. 201 Ὁ. 


y- Vowel Lengthened. 


βιώσκοραι (τ. βιο-, Biwex-), chiefly in the comp. dva-Cidexopas, to revive, 
both trans, and intrans., F. βιώσομαι, | A. trans. ἐξιωσάμεην, 2 A. intrans. 
i€iwy (ὃ 227), Bia, βιῴην (ἢ 226. 2), Biwhs, βιῶναι, Biods. Primitive, βιόω, to 
live, Fut. βιώσω, commonly βιώσομαι, 1 A. ἐξίωσα, commonly 2 A. ἐξίων, 
Pf. BsCiwxa, Pf. P. BeCiwuas Shorter Ep. forms, βιόμεσθα (βεόμεσθα Wolf., 
δ 278) Hom. Ap. 528, F. βώσεσθε Ap. Rh. 1.685. For βιόω, we commonly 
find, in the Pres. and Impf., ζάω, which again in the other tenses (F. ζήσω or 
ζήτοεμαι, A. ἔζησα, &c.) is rare or late. For the contraction of ζάω, see 
§ 33. «. From the contr. forms of the Impf. (ἔζαες) ἔζης, ἔζη, appears +3 
have arisen a Ist Pers. ἔζην Eur, Alc. 295, and a late Imp. ζηδ, Anth. The 
prolonged Jaw and Zw (ὃ 242. b) have given rise to A. iw-iZwos Hat. i. 120, 
Inf. ζόειν Simon. Fr. 231. 17. 


ἢ ΒΓ. Σ᾽ Metathesis, 


βλώσκω (τ. wor-, wro-, βλο- ὃ 64. N.), to go, to come (in the Pres., Ep. 
and found only in composition, τσ. 466), F. porctwar, 2 A. ἔμολον, Pf. 
μέμέλωκα (ὃ 223) 
ϑνήσκω (τ. ϑαν-, ϑνα-), to die, F. ϑανοῦμαι, 2 A. ἔθανον, Pf. σέῤνηκα (§ 237), 
F. Pt. τεθνήξω and τεῤνήξομα, (§ 239. a). See xrsivw (§ 295). 
20 


230 ROOT OF THE VERB. [Book if 


sehen = See- Seo0-), to lap, F. ϑοροῦμαι, 2 A. togov. Collat. ϑέξοίιαυ 
Hat. iii, 


s. Consonant Dropped. 


χάσκω (τ. xav-, ὃ 55), to gape, F. χανοῦμαι, 2 A. ἔχανον, 2 PE. κέχηνα. 
Late yaivw. Extended “χασκάζω, Ar. Vesp. 695. 

πάσχω (τ. rab-, revb- §§ 259, 277, παθσκ-, racx-, the aspiration of the 9, 
which is dropped before ¢, being transferred to the x, which thus becomes x), 
to suffer, F. πείσομαι, (ὃ 58), 2 A. ἔπαθον, 2 Pf. πέπονθα. Poet. 1 A. Pt. πή- 
σας (but rraicas Dind.) Hsch. Ag. 1624, Ep. Pf. Pt. σεπᾶθυίῃ (§ 253. 2) 
e- 555, Dor. Pf. σέποσχα, Epich. 7(2). For πέποσθε, see ὃ 238. B. 


§ 2@S2. 5. Apprrion or δ, ζ, 3, AND x. 


ἀμείρω and ἀμέρδω (τ. &use-), to deprive, poet. Pind. P. 6. 27, «. 18, 
F. ἀμέρσω, A. ἤμερσα, 3. 64, A. P. ἠμέρθην, X. 58. 

δίω and δείδω (r. δι-, δειδ- § 269. 6) both Ep. I. 433, A. 470, commonly 
δέδια or δέδοικα ( 58, ὃ 237), to fear, F. Ep. δείσομαι, O. 299, A. ἔδεισα, 
Cyr. i. 4. 22; Mid. diouas, to frighten, poet. E. 763, Asch. Eum. 357. Deriv. 
δεδίσκοραι OF δεδίσφοραι, to frighten, διώκω (§ 299), and Ep. dinus, to chase. 

vides (r. ve-, vnd- ὃ 266), to spin, F. νήσω, A. P. ἐνήδην. Ep. νέω, Hes. Op. 
775, A. ἔνησα, YT. 128, ἐνησάμην, η. 198. Late Pf. P. vévnopas 

οὐτάξω (τ. obra-), to, wound, F. οὐσάσω, ὥς. Ep. οὐτάω, x. 356, F. οὐτήσω, 
1 A. οὔτησα, 2 A. 8, 3 οὖτά (ὃ 224. E.), Inf. οὐτάμεν, -ἄμεναι, E. 132, 
2A. M. Pt., as Pass., οὐφσάμενος, A. 659. 

σελάζω, and poet. rsazéw, Eur. Rh. 555, or “λάθω, Soph. El. 220 (x. wera, 
σελαζ-, πελᾶδ-, rrsid-, waadd-, §§ 260, 262), to upproach, F. πελάσω, πελῶ 
(§ 200. 2), A. ἐπέλᾶσα, A. P. ἐπελάσθην and poet. iraaény (§ 261. N.), 
isch. Pr. 896. Ep., σελάω, Hom, Bac, 44, Pf. P. σέσλημαι μ. 108, 2 fe Μ.. 
ἐπλήμην, A. 4493; σιλνάω, to bring near, Hes. Op. 508, πίλναμιαι, to approach, 
T: 93. 

πρίω and πρίζω, to saw, F. xeiow, A. ἔπρισα, Pf. P. «έσρισμαι, A. Ῥ, 
ἐσρίσθην. 

σώζω (τ. σαο-,) σω- ὃ 261), to save, F. σώσω, A. ἔσωσα, Pf. σίσωκα, ῬΩ͂᾽, 
σέσωμαι and σέσωσμαι, A. P. ἐσώθην. Ep., σαόω, Call. Del. 22, σαώσω, A. 88, 
&c.; Pres. Imp. (σάοε, σάου, ow, ὃ 242. Ὁ) σάω v. 230, Impf. 5. 9 (ἐσάοι) 
ἘΝ or σάω 11. 363, ᾧ. 238; contr. caw, Ap. Rh. 4.197; cow, in the Subj. 
cons 1. 681, σόῃ 424. 

σρύω, to afflict, F. σρύσω, Pf. P. σέσρῦμαι- and τρύχω (Τ. rev-, τρυχ-ν 
φρυχο- ὃ 298), F. σρύξω, Pf. P. σεσρύχωμαι, Th. iv. 60. So viw (ὃ 220), to 
swim, poet. νήχω, s 375; dw and Ψήχω, to rub. 


§ 283. III. By increasina THE NUMBER OF 
SYLLABLES, either, 1. by reduplication, or 2. by 
oes affixes, or 3. by exchange of letters. 


1, REDUPLICATION. 


Reduplication in the root is most frequent in 
verbs in -μι and -ὅχω. It is of three kinds: 


δ. “ EMPHATIC CHANGES. 231 


a. Proper, which belongs to roots beginning with a single 
consonant, with a mute and liquid, or with ur, and which pre- 
fixes the initial consonant with 1, or rarely with e. See di- 
dour, κίχρημι (ἢ 284); βιθρώσκω, μιμνήσκω (ὃ 285). 

b. Attic, which belongs to roots beginning with a short vowel 


followed by a single consonant, and which prefixes the two 
Jirst letters. See agayioxw (ὃ 285). 


Inst2ad of repeating the initial vowel, s is sometimes inserted, in imitation 
of the proper reduplication. See dvivnus (ὃ 284). 


c. Improper, which belongs to roots not included above, and 
which simply prefixes . with the rough breathing. 


Compare §§ 190, 191. 2. 4. 


§ ZVSA4. a. Verbs in -μι. 


Btw, to bind, rarely Bins (x. ds-, διδε-), ν. 8. 24 (Impf. δίδη A. 105), 
F. δήσω. See §§ 219, 216. B. 

δίδωμι (τ. 30-, διδο-), to give, F. δώσω, Ep. διδώσω, ν. 358. See 4 51. 

inus (Ὁ. $-, is-), to send, F. ἥσω. See J 54, ὃ 229. 

ἴσσημι (I. ora-, ἱστα-), to place, F. στήσω. See 4 48. Poet. 1 A. toriea, 
M. 56. Late Pf. trans. ἕσσᾶκα Anth., Dor. 1 A. P. ἐστάθην Call. Lav. 83. 


Kindred forms, ἱσσάνω in composition only, Dem. 807. 63; rare ἑστήκω 
(§ 246. N.) Ath. 412 e; late στήκω, Rom. 14. 43 στεῦμα: (δ 246. a). 


κίχρημι (τ. χρῶ-, xixeu- ὃ 62), to lend, F. χρήσω, A. ἔχρησα, Pf. P. xé- 
xenuas. Mid. xixeduas, to borrow. The primitive sense of the root yea- 
appears to be to supply need. Hence we have, 


1. κίχρημι, to supply the need of another, by lending him what he requires. 
Mid. κέχραμαι, to supply one’s own need by borrowing. 


2. χράω (ὃ 218. a), to supply the need of one who consults an oracle, by 
answering his inquiries, F. χρήσω, A. ἔχρησα, Pf. P. κέχρημαι and xixencuar 
A. P. ἐχρήσθην. Mid. χράομαι, to consult an oracle. Poet. χρήζω or χρήζω, 
Eur. Hel. 516. 


3. χράομαι, to supply one’s own need by making use of a thing, F. χρήσομαι, 
Pf. κέχρημαι, A. P. ἐχρήσθην, A. M. ἐχρησάμην. In the Att. contract forms 
of χράω and χράομαι, ἡ takes the place of # (§%3.«), which, on the other 
hand, is commonly retained by the Ion. ; as χρᾷ Hat. i. 55. 


4. χρή (3 Pers. sing., for χράει or χρῆσι), it supplies need, i. 6. it is useful 
or necessary, it must or ought to be, impers.; Subj. χρῇ, Opt. | xea-, χρε- 
§ 259) χρείη, Inf. χρῆναι, and poet. (χοάειν) χρῆν, Part. Neut. (χράον, ¢ in- 
serted after contraction, ὃ 35) χρεών - Impf. ἐχρῆν (with » paragogic, for ἔχραε, 
or i en, cf. § 211. N.) or unaugm. (δ 194. 1) χρῆν - Fut. χρήσει. The par- 
ticiple χρεών is sometimes used as an indeclinable noun; thus, rod χρεών. 
Personally, S. 2 χρῆσθα (ὃ 182), you must, Ar. Ach. 778 (Meg.) Pf. P., as 
Pres., κέχρημαι, to need, want, Eur. Iph. A. 382%, α. 13, F. Pf. κεχρήσομοαι, 
Theoc. 16. 73. Kindred, χρήζω, to want, desire, Ion. χρηΐζω Hat. i. 41, 
Dor. χρήσδω Theoc. 8. 12, and χρήδδω, Ar. Ach. 734-(§ 70. V.); lon. depon. 
χρηΐσκομαι, Hat. iii. 117. 


232 ROOT OF THE VERB: * 1βοόκπ' 


5. ἀπό: χρη, it fully supplies need, i. 6. it suffices, it is enough; Inf. ἀπὸ 
χρῆν - Impf. ἀπέχρη, F. ἀποχεήσει, A. ἀπέχρησε. Ion. ἀποχρᾷ, -χεᾶν, ἄς, 
(see 3 above), Hdt. ix. 79. So ἀπεχρέετο (: 242. a) Id. vill. 14, κασα- χρᾷ 
i. 164, ἐκ- χρήσει iii, 137. These verbs are also used personally. 

dvivnus, (Τ. dva-, dvive-), to benefit, F. ὀνήσω, A. ὥνησα, A. P. ὠνήθην, 2 A.M 
ὠνήμην and ὠνάμην (ὃ 224. 3), Opt. ὀναίμην, Inf. ὄνασθαι, Ep. and Ion. Jip 
ὄνησο +. 68, Inf. ὀνῆσθαι Hipp., Pt. ὀνήμενος B. 33. Doubtful 2 A. Act Inf 
ὀνῆναι Pl. Rep. 600 d; late 1 A. M. ὠνᾶσάμην, Anth. : 

σίμπλημι (. σλα-, ri-u-rra- § 263. 6), to Jill, F. “«λήσω, A. trance, 
Pf. σέπληκα, Pf. P. σέπλησμα, (Plup. ἐν-επέσληντο Lys. 180, 4), 
BaP, Sag 2 A. M. ἐσλήμην (§ 224. 3), Opt. (wAn-i-unv) σλήμην ΟΥ̓ 
(σλα-, πλε- ὃ 259) «λείμην (cf. χρείη, 4 above, βλεῖο, § 277. a), Imp. xr%- 
oc, Part. πλήμενος. Imp. ἐμ-πίπληθι (δ 251. 4) Φ. 311, Pt. (τ. .«λε-) ten 
aw σλείς, Hipp. Collat. Ion. forms, σιμσλάω, -ἕω, Hes. Th. 880, σίπλω, Hes. 
Sc. 291 Gaisf., σιμπλάνομαι 1. 679. Kindred, πληρόω, and the intrans. 
“«λήθω (2 Pf. πέπληθα, Theoc. 22. 38), whence ranéiw and wAnéive. 

Tiumonus (τ. πρα-) Tinaen-), to burn, F. πφήσω, A. ἔπρησα, Pf. Ρ. πέπρη- 
fous OF πέπρησμαι, A. P. ἐπρήσθην. Pf. ὑπο-πέπρηκα, Hipp., F. Pf. πεπρήσο- 
μαι, Hat. vi. 9, A. ἔπρεσε Hes. Th. 856, Ep. δι). (as from ximrew) riuren- 
σι (§ 181. 8) Ar. Lys. 248. Rare Ep. form, πρήδω, I. 589. 


Nore. The epenthetic Of πίμτλημι and πίμπρημι is commonly omitted, 
when these verbs, in somes. are preceded by w; thus, tuwiaanus, but 
ἱνεπίμπλην. 


φίϑημι (τ. 8ε-» vibs-, § 62), to put, F. ϑήσω. See Y 50. 


REMARK. Φημί ( 53) is the only verb in -ws having a monosyllabic 
root, and beginning with a consonant, which is not reduplicated. 


§ VSD. B. Verbs in -cxw. 


deugionw (I. ne » ἀρε-γ ἀραρισκ- ὃ 296), to fit, Ep. % 23, 1 A. ἧρσα, 
ΖΞ. 167, a. 280, 2 A. ἤραρον A. 110, Soph. El. 147 "5 194. 3), 2 Pf. in- 
trans., as Pres., ἄρηρα, N. 800, also Att. ἄρῶρα, Aisch. Prom. 60, H. Gr. iv. 
7. 6, A. Ῥ, ἥρθην II. 211. Pf. P. ἀρφήρεμαι, Hes. Op. 4.9, Ap. Rh. 1. 787. 
For ἀρᾶρυϊα, see ἡ 253.2. Deriv., ἀρέσκω (ὃ 279), ἀρτύω and agrivw, &e. 

Pibowoxw (τ. Beo-, βιθρωσκ-, ὃ 280. vy), to eat (the Pres. rare), Pf. βέξρωκα 
(see ὃ 258. a), Pf. P. Biempeat. Ep., 2 A. ἕξρων, Hom. Ap. 127, 2 Pf. Opt. 
(x. Rowhh ; or from new Pres. βεδρώθω) βεξρώθοις A. 8.5, Ἐν PE. βεξρώσομριαι, 
β. 203; Ion. A. P. ἐδρώδθην Hat. iii. 165 late Ep. 1 A. ἔξρωξα, Ap. Rh. 
2. 271; late F. βεώξομαι. The deficiencies of this verb are supplied by ἐσθίω 
(§ 298) and σρώγω (9 Y67. 3). 

γιγνώσκω (Τ. yve-), toknow, F. γνώσομαι, 2 A. ἔγνων (Ἶ 57), PE ἔγνωκα, 
Ff. P. ἔγνωσμιαι, A. P. ἐγνώσθην. 2 A. Μ. Opt. συγ-γνοῖφο Aisch. Sup. 216, 
Ton. 1 A. ἀν-έγνωσα, persuaded, Hat. i. 68. 


Nore. The Ion. (not Hom.) and the later Greek softened  γνώσκω and 
γίγνομαι (δ 286) to γινώσκω and γίνομαι. 


διδάσκω (τ. δα-, διδαχ- διδασκ-), to teach, F. διδάξω, A. ἐδίδαξα. Pf. δεδίδα χα, 
Pf. Ρ. δεδίδαψαα,, Δ. P. ἐδιδάχϑην. Ep. 1 A. ἐδιδάσκησα, Hom. Cer. 144, 
2 A. ἔδαον, Ap. Rh. 3. 529, δέδαον (δ 194. 3). From the r. δα- are alse 
formed, with the sense to learn, the poet. F. δαήσομκα, ( 222), y. 187, Pf 
διδάηκα, β. 61, δεδάημαι, Theoc. 8. 4, δέδαα, ρ. 519 (hence δεδάασθαι x. 516 


σα, 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 233, 


ἃ 246. 2), 2 A. P. ἐδάην, Soph. El. 169. Hence, likewise, the Ep. F. contr. 
(δαέσω, δαέω, ὃ 200. 2) δήω, 1. 418. 

διδράσκω (τ. δρα-), to run, used only in composition with dé, διά, or ἐξ, 
F. δράσομαι, 1A. ἔδρῶσα, 2 A. ἔδραν (ἢ 57), Pf. δέδρξκα. Kindred, δρασκάξω, 
Lys. 117. 35, δρηστεύω, Hat. iv. 79. 

μιμνήσκω (1. μνα-), to remind, F. μνήσω, A. ἔμνησα, Pf. P. μέμνημαι (see 
§ 234. β), 3 Εν μεμνήσομιαι, Cyr. iii, 1. 27, A. P. ἐμνήσθην. As from μέμνο- 
was and μέμναμαι, Imp. μέμνεο Hdt. v. 105, Pt. μεμνόμενος Archil. Fr. 1, 
Opt. Pl. 8 μεμναίατο Pind. Fr. 277. Prim. Mid. μνάομεαι, to remember (Ep. 
3. 106), to woo, vii. 3. 18. Collat. forms, μνήσκω, Orph. Hy. 77. 6, μνή 
sxouai, Anacr. Fr. 69. 

πιπράσκω, and poet. πέρνημι (1. weou-, πρᾶ- ὃ 261, σερνα- ὃ 278. δ), to sell, 
Pf. σέπράκα, Pf. P. σέπράμαι, 3 BF. πεπρᾶσομιαι, vii. 1. 36, commonly used 
for the rare πραθήσομαι (Ath. 160 f), A. P. ἐπράθην. Ep., Fut. Inf. (περά- 
σεὶν) περάφν (ὃ 245.3) D. 454, A. ἐπέρᾶσα O. 428, Pf. P. Pt. πεπερημένος 
®. 58. The Fut. and Aor. of this verb are supplied by ἀποδώσομοα, and ἀπε- 
dcuny, mid. tenses of ἀ ποδίδωμει. 

σιπρώσκω (I. re0-), to wound, FP. πρώσω, A. ἔφσρωσα, Pf. P. σέτρωμαι, A. P. 
ἐσρώθην. Kindred, σρώω, Ep. 9. 293, rogéw, to pierce, Ep. Hom. Merc. 283, 
F. σορήσω, Ib. 178, 1 A. ἐσόρησα, E. 337, 2 A. ἔσορον, A. 236 (for réragoy 
and τετορήσω, See §§ 194. 3, 239. b), πτορεύω, Ar. Thesm. 986, σετραίνω 
(3 286). 

τιτύσκομαι (Y. rux-, δὲ 263. N., 273. 4), to prepare, Ep. ᾧ. 342, 2 A. «:- 
ruxsiv (δ 194.3) ὁ. 77, τετυκόμην, A. 467. 


ᾧ 286. y- Other Verbs. 


ἀκαχίξω (τ. ἀχ-, ἀκαχ- ἀκαχιζ- § 297), to afflict, Ep. x. 432, F. ἀκα χή- 
ow. 1 A. ἀκάχησα, commonly 2 A. ἤκαχον, Pf. P. ἀκάχημαι and ἀκήχεμαι 
(P. 3 ἀκηχέδαται § 248. 7). Collat., ἄχομα, vr. 129, and ἄχνύμαι, Soph. 
Ant. 627, to sorrow; Pres. Pt. ἀχέων B. 694, ἀχεύων E. 869. 

γίγνομαι (I. yo-, γεν- §§ 259, 277, γιγεν-, γιγν- ὃ 261), to become, F. γε. 
νήσομιαι (ἢ 222), 2 A. ἐγενόμην, PE. γεγένημαι, 2 Pf. γέγονα (see ὃ 228. 4), 
Ἐς P. γενηθήσομιαι, 1 A. trans. ἐγεινάμην, 1 begat or bore. Ion. and late 
A. P. ἐγενήθην, Hipp. For γέντο, see ὃ 185. δ; for 1 Pf. Dor. γεγάκειν, 
@ 246. 25 for ἐκγεγάονται, ὃ 245.3; for γίνομαι, § 285. Ν, Kindred, γεί- 
vo4xt, Ep. X. 477, γεννάω, -ἥσω, to beget. 

λιλαΐομια, (τ. λα-, AsAw-, ὃ 267), to desire earnestly, Ep. N. 253, Pf. P. 
{one a dropped, § 263. 6) λελίημαι, A. 465. . The prim. λάω is used by the 
Dories ; Theoc. 1. 12. 

μένω, and poet. winvw, Asch. Ag. 74, F. μενῶ. See § 222.2. Ep. deriv. 
μιμνάζω, B. 392. 

sinew (Τ σετ-, πεσ- ὃ 273. B, wixr-), to fall, Ἐ. πεσοῦμαι (3 200. 3), 
1 A. ἔπεσα, commonly 2 A. ἔπεσον, Pf. (asr-, στε- ᾧ 262, wro- ὃ 236. a) 
πέπτωκα (see ὃ 238. a). Dor.°2 A. ἔπεσον, Pind. O. 7. 126; late Pf. σέ- 
wrnxa, Anth. Poet. forms, σίσνω, Soph. Cid. C. 1754, and perhaps πισνέα 
(Eur. Ph. 293) and σισνάω (Pind. I. 2. 39), with which some connect ἔσισ 
γον aS 2 Aor. 

τετραίνω (1. reu-, rergaiv- ὃ 277), to bore, F. rencw, A. ἔσρησα, Pf. P. ré- 
rene, A. P. ἐπσρήθην, A. Μ, ἐσετρηνάμην. F. rereaviw, Hut. iii. 12, A. ἐτέ- 
τξηνα fe 247, A. P. ἐτεσράνθην, Anth. Late or doubtful, τισράω, σιτραίνω, 
τετρήνω»- 


20) * 


234 ROOT OF THE VERB. | BOOK It 


2. Sytiapic AFFIXES. 


§ 287. The syllables which are most frequent 
ly affixed to protract the root are a, €, dy, γε, vv, 
tox, and cf. 


a. ADDITION OF @ AND ¢. 


Remarks. (1.) When ἃ is affixed, ε in the preceding syllable usually 
becomes w; but, when ε is affixed, « See στρωφάω and σαροφέω (§ 259. a). 
(2.) The vowel which is added is more frequently retained before the close 
terminations. 


a. Addition of a. 


βευχάομαι (r. βρυχ-), to roar, F. βρυχήσομιαι, Α. ἐξρυχησάμην, A. P. ἐξρυ- 
χήθην, 2 Pf., as Pres. Bé€edy~e. Kindred, βρύκω, later Bed aw (Hipp.), to 
gnash the teeth. Similar onomatopes are βληχάομαι and μηκάομαι, to bleat, 
and μυκάομαι, to low, F. -ἥσομιαι, Ep. 2 Pf. μέμηκα, K. 362, μέμῦκα, Σ. 580, 
2 A. tuaxoy, IL. 469, tudxov, E. 749. 

γοάω (I. yo-), to bewail, Ep. 01. 664, F. γοήσομαι, 2 Α. ἔγοον, Z. 500. Mid. 
γοάοραι also Att., Soph. Cid. T. 1249. 

νωμάω, F. νωμήσω, poet. for vizw (ἢ 222. 2), to distribute. Also Ep. Impf. 
γεμέθοντο A. 635. 

πέτομαι, poet. πέτἄμαι, Pind. P. 8. 128, and ποτάομαι, B. 462, Asch. Sept. 
84, later irrzuai, Eur. Iph. A. 1608 (r. rer-, TET He, TOT Hy TTR ὃ 261, irra. 
§ 283. ὁ), to fly, F. πετήσομαι; commonly σ΄ σήσομαι, 2 A. ἔπσην, 2 A. Μ. 
ἐπτάμην, commonly ἐσσόρην (ὃ 261), Pf. P. πεπότημαι, A. P. ἐσποσήθην. 
F. ποτήσομαι, Mosch. 2. 141. Other collat. forms, πσοτέομαι, T. 357, πσωτάο- 
μαι, M. 287, πετάομαι, Hat. iii. 111. 


§ ZSS. β. Addition of ». 


aldtoues, and Peet. αἴδομαι, Ausch. Eum. 549 (τ. aid-, wids-), to respect, 
Ε. αἰδέσομαι, A. M. ἠδεσάμην, Pf. ἤδεσμαι (P. 3 σρο-ῃδέατο, ὃ 248. f, Hdt. i. 
61), A. P. ἠδέσθην. 

ἄω, ε. 478, and ἄημι, I. 5 (r. ἀ-, ἀε-), to breathe, blow, Ep.; Imp. ἀήτω, 
Inf. ἀῆναι, Pt. ἀείς " Pass. ἄημαι, ζ. 131. Deriv., ἀΐω, Ο. 252, and ἀΐσθω, 
Il. 468, to breathe out, expire. Kindred, A. ἄεσα, to breathe in sleep, to sleep, 
y- 151, @ontr. doa, x. 367. 

γαμίω (τ. you~), to marry, said of the man, F. γαμῶ, A. tynua, Pf. γεγά- 
pana, Pf. P. γεγάμημαι. Mid. γαμέίομαι, to marry; said of the woman, 
F. γαμοῦμαι, A. iynuduny. Late F. γαμήσω, A. ἐγάμησα, A. P. ἐγαμήθην 
(παρῆν Theoc. 8. 91). Ep. F. Μ. yaptocoua:, will provide a wife Sor, 

. 394. 

δίζω, to doubt, consider, poet. and Ion. TI. 713, Mid. δίζομαι, commonly 
δίζημα, (δ 224. 8 ; τ. διζ-, διζε-), to seek, Theoc. 25. 37, a. 100, Hat. i. 95, 
F. διξήσομαι, A i co 

δοκέω (τ. dox-), to seem, to think, F. δόξω, A. ἔδοξα, Pf. P. δέδογμαι, A. P. 
ἰδόχιϑην. Poet. and Ion., F. δοκήσω, A. Sai ΒΡ cet Pf. P. δεδόκημαι 
A. P. ἐδοκήθην. Impers. δοκεῖ, it seems, Ἐς δόξει, &e 

ἐσιμέλομαι and ἐσιμελέομα, (τ. μελ-, μελε-), to take care of, F. ἰσιμελήσο 
μαι, Pf. P. ἰσιμεμέλημαι, A. P. ἐπεμελήθην. 


cu. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 235 


καυπέω, to sound, to crash, poet., F. χευπήσω, 1 A. ἐκσύπησα, 2 A. ἔκτυ 
“ον. 

κυλίνδω and κχυλινδέω, to roll, F. (xvaird-cw, § 58) κυλίσω, A. ἐκύλῖσα 
Pf. P. κεκύλισμαι, A. P. ἐκυλίσθην. Late F. κυλινδήσω. 5 Rare Pres. κυλίω, 
Ar. Vesp. 202. Kindred, xaasmdéoueas, to be busied in, Cyr. i. 4. 5, ἀλινδέω ΟΥ̓ 
ἀλίνδω, A. ἤλισα, Ar. Nub. 32, Pf. ἤλικα, Ib. 33. 
_ κύρω and κῦὕρέω, to meet with, to chance, chiefly poet. and Ion. Eur. Hipp. 
746, Med. 23, F. κύρσω (ὃ 56. 6), Soph. Gd. C. 225, and κυρήσω, Eur. Heracl. 
252, A. ἔκυρσα, I. 23, and ἐκύρησα, Hdt. i. 31, Pf. κεκύρηκα, Pf. P. κεκύρη- 
βίαι. 

σπαφέοροαι (Τ. rar-), to taste, lon. and Poet. Hdt. ii. 37, F. πἄσομαι, A, ἐπά- 
σάμην, A. 464, Soph. Ant. 20%, Plup. πεπάσμην 2. 642. 

πορθέω (1. ragd-, περθ- ὃ 259, πορθε-), to lay waste, F. πορθήσω, Pf. πεπόρ- 
θηκα, &e. Poet. πέρθω, F. πέρσω, Soph. Ph. 114, 1 A. ἔπερσα, a. 2, Ep. 2 A. 
ἔσραθον (ὃ 262), A. 367. For πέρθαι, see ὃ 246. β. 

ῥίπσω and pirrtw (τ. ῥιῷ-γ ῥιπα- ὃ 272), to throw, F. ῥίψω, A. ἔῤῥιψα, Pf. 
ἔῤῥιφα, Pf. P. ἔῤῥιμεμαι, 1 A. P. ἐῤῥίφθην, 2 A. P. ἐῤῥίφην. For ῥία'σασκον, see 
ὃ 249. ἃ. Deriv. ῥιπστάζω. 

σκέπσομεαι, commonly σκοπέω or σκοπέομαι (1. σκεπ-), F. σκέψομαι, A. ἐσκε- 
ψάμην, Pf. ἔσκεμμιαι, F. Pf. ἐσκέψομαι, Pl. Rep. 392 6. 

ὠθέω (τ. ὠθ-), to push, F. ὥσω, and poet. ὠδήσω, A. ἔωσα (δ 189. 2), Pf. P. 
twopas, A. P. ἐώσθην. Late Pf. axa, Plut.; Ep. and Ion., A. dca, A. 220 
(σρώσας, for προ-ώσας, Anth.), Pf. P. ὥσμαι, Hdt. v. 69; ἀπ-εώθην Hipp. 
Deriv. ὠσφτίζομαι, to justle, Ar. Ach. 42. 


§ 289. b. ADDITION OF &». 


Remarks. (1.) Roots which receive ἄν without further 
change are mostly double consonant. (2.) Mute roots receiv- 
ing ἂν commonly insert ν before the characteristic. (3.) Roots 
which do not insert » sometimes prolong ἄν to aw or ἄν. 


a. Without further Change. 


αἰσθάνομιαι, and rarely aicboua (r. αἰσθ-, wicbav-\, to perceive, F. αἰσθήσοραι. 
«ὃ 222. 1), 2 A. φσθόμην, Pf. P. ἤσθημαι. 

ἀλφάνω (τ. ἀλφ-), to find, poet. Eur. Med. 298, 2 A. ἦλφον Φ. 79. 

ἁμαρτάνω (Τ. ἅμαρτ-), to err, to miss, F. ἁμαρτήσομαι, 2 A. ἥμαρτον, Pf, 
ἡμάρτηκα, Pf. P. ἡμάρτημαι, A. P. ἡμαρτήθην. F. ἁμαρτήσω, Hipp., 1 A. 
nudernre, Orph. Arg. 646, Ep. 2 A, (ἅμαρα-, duour- § 262, auboor-, ὃ δ 13.4, 
28, 64. 2) ἤμξροτον, E. 287 (ὥμαρθ᾽ A. 491). Hence (w dropped, cf. ἀσλα- 
κών, ὃ 296) ἀξροτάζω, only in A. Subj. ἀξροτάξομεν K. 65. 

ἀπεχϑάνομιαι, and sometimes ἀπέχθομαι (τ. ἐχ6-), to be hated, F. ἀπεχϑήσο- 
μαι, 2A. ἀπηχθόμην, Ph. ἀπήχῥημαι. e 

αὔξω and αὐξάνω, poet. and Ion. ἀέξω (τ. ἀξ ey-, αὐγ-, dey-, § 22. 3, αὐξ-, 
ἀεξ-, ὃ 273), Z. 261, to increase, F. αὐξήσω, ἕο. See FY 43, and cf. Lat. 
augeo. ; , 

βλαστάνω, and poet. βλαστέω (τ. Bracr-), to sprout, to bud, F. βλαστήσω, 
2 A. ἔβλαστον, Pf. βλάστηκα (§ 190; Plup. i€sCaaergxss Th. iii. 26). 1 A, 
ἐξλάστησα, Ap. Rh. τὰ ΤΥΞῚ. 


236: ROOT OF THE VERB. [Book 11 


δαρθάνω (τ. δαρθ-), to sleep, usually in composition with xardé, 2 A. ἔδαρθον 
Pf. δεδάρθηκα, 2 A. P. poet. ἐδάρθην. Ep. 2 A. ἔδραθον 3. 296, 2 A. P. ἐδρά. 
buy, ε. 471 (§ 262). 

ὀφλισκάνω (τ. ὀφΆ-, ὀφλισκ- ὃ 296), to incur, F. ὀφλήσω, 1 A. ὠφλησα 
commonly 2 A. ὦφλον, Pf. φληκα. Ion. Impf. or 2 A. ὥφλεε (§ 248. 4) 
Hadt. viii. 26. See ὀφείλω (ὃ 268). 


§ 29O. 4. With the Insertion of ν (see § 54). 


ἁνδάνω (τ. &d , &-v-dav-), to please, poet. and Ion. B. 114, Soph. Ant. 504 
F. ἁδήσω, Hdt. v. 39, 2 A. ἕζδον, Id. i. 151, Subj. ddw, &e., 2 Pf. ἕαδα, I. 173 
(a3«, Theoc. 27. 22.; 1 Pf. ἅδηκα, Hippon.). For the augm., see ὃ 189. 2. 
Kindred, ἥδω, to please, commonly 4deua1, to be pleased, F. ἡσθήσομα,, A. ἥσθην 
(A. Μ. ἥσατο ,. 353). 

ἐρυγγάνω (τ. tevy-), to disgorge, 2 A. ἤρυγον. Ton. ἐρεύγομαι, Ὁ. 621, 
FB. ἐρεύξομαι, Pf. ἔρευγμαι, Hipp. 

Siyydvw (τ. Suy-), to touch, F. ϑίξομαι, 2 A. tiyov. Lat. tango. 


κιχἄάνω OY xiyxuvw (τ. xix-), to find, poet. Eur. Ale. 477, F. κυ χήσομεαι, 
Soph. (Ed. C. 1487, 2 A. ἔχκγχον, Eur. Alc. 22. Ep. κίχάνω, P. 672, and 
κιχέω w. 284 (Mid. Pt. κιχήμενος, Ἐ. 187), F. κιχήσω, Ap. Rh. 4. 1482, 
2 A. (from r. κεχε-, or Pass. with sense of Act.) ixt any, x. 379, Subj. (xia) 
κιχείω (3 248, Ὁ), A. 26, &. 1 A. M. ἐκιχησάμην, Δ. 385. 

λαγχάνω (τ: χαχ-» ληχ- ὃ 266, λεγχ- §§ 259, 277, Aayyay-), to obtain 
by lot, F. χήξομαι, 2 A. ἔλαχον, Pf. εἴληχα (§ 191.1) and λέλογχα, Pf. P. 
εἴληγμαι, A. P. ἐλήχϑην. Ion. Ἐν λάξομαι, Hdt. vii. 144. For 2 Aor. Subj. 
λελάχω, causative, see ὃ 194. 3. 

λαμξάνω (τ. Aab-, Ane-, λαμᾷ-), to take, F. λήψομαι, 2 A. ἔλαβον, 
Pf. εἴληφα (ὃ 191.1), Pf. P. cfanuuas, and poet. λέληροιμκαι, Eur. Iph. A. 363, 
A. P. tangény. Ton. F. λάμεψομαι, Hat. i. 199, Pf. P. λέλαμμαι, iii. 117, 
A. P. ἐλάμφθην, ii. 89, Pf. A. λελάξηκα (δ 222), iv. 79. For λελαξέσθαι, seo 
§ 194.3. Poet. forms, λάζομα, and λάζὕμαι, A. 357, Ar. Lys. 209. 


λανθάνω, and sometimes λήθω (1. Aad-, And-), to lie hid, to escape notice, 
F. anew, 1 A. ἔλησα, commonly 2 A. ἔλαθον, 2 Pf. λέληθα. Mid. Aaavddvouas 
and λήθομαι, to forget, F. λήσομαι, 2 A, ἐλαθόμην, Pf. λέλησμαι, F. Pf λελή- 
_ cones, Eur. Alc. 198. Ep. Pf. P. λέλασμαι, E. 834, late 1 A. M. ἐλησάρεην, 
Quint. 3.99, Dor. A. P. ἐλάσθην, Theoc. 2. 46. For λέλαθον, &e., see ὃ 194.3 
Collate ἐκ-ληθάνω, η. 221. 

λείπω (τ. Asa-, λεισ'-), to leave, and sometimes in composition λιμπιάνω, Th 
viii. 17, Ἐν λείψω, ἄς. (ἴ 37). Late 1 A. ἔλειψα. 

μανθάνω (τ. wab-), to learn, Ἐκ μαθήσομαι, (ὃ 222), 2 A. ἔμαθον, Pf. μεμάθη- 
az. For wadevpas, see § 200. y. 

συνθάνομια,, and poet. πεύθομαι Asch. Ag. 988 (r. rvd-, rsvé- § 270), to 
inquire, F. πεύσομαι (πευσεῖσθαι sch. Pr. 988, ὃ 200. 3), 2 A. ἐπυθόμην, 
Pf. σίᾳγσμα.. Ep. 2 A. Opt. «επύθοιτο (§ 194. 3), Ζ. 50. 

συγχάνω (τ. τυχ-, τευχ-), to happen, to obtain, to hit, F. σεύξομαι, 2 A. ἔτυ- 
χον, PE. σεσύχηκα (ὃ 222), rarely φέσευχα, Ath. 581 6, Ep. 1 A. ἐτύχησα, 
A. 106. See σεύχω (ὃ 270). . 

χανδάνω (τ. χαδ-, χανδ-, χενδ- ὃ 259), to contain, poet. Ar. Ran. 260, 
F. (χίένδσομαι, δι 58) ysivouas, c 17, 2 A. ἔχαδον, A. 24, 2 PE κίχανδα, 
Y¥. 268. 


cx. 10.] EMPAATIC CHANGES. 237 


ὃ § 291. Ἢ With ἂν prolonged. 


ἀλδαίνω (τ. ἀλδ-), to nourish, poet. Asch. Pr. 540, 2 A. ἤλδανον, σ. 70. Also 
ἀλδήσκω, to nourish, to grow, ¥. 599, late A. iter. ἀλδήσασκεν Orph. Lith. 364. 

ἀλιπαίνω OF ἀλιτραίνω (τ. &AT-), to sin, poet., Hes. Op. 239, 328, 1 As 
Liricnca, Orph. Arg. 647, 2 A. ἤλισον, 1. 375, Pf. P. Pt. ἀλιπήμενοε ὃ. 807. 

οἰδέω and οἰδαίνω (τ. οἰδ-, οἶδε- § 288), to swell, F. οἰδήσω, A. gdnoa, Pf. ὥδη. 
xa. Also oidévw, trans., [. 554. 

ὀλισθάνω and ὀλιαθαίνω (τ. ὀλισθ-., to slide, to slip, F. ὁλισθήσω, 2 A. dascbore 
1] A. ὠλίσθησα and Pf. ὠλίσθηκα, Hipp. Also ὀλισθάζω, Ath. 236 ἃ. 

ὀσφραίνορειαι, rarely scPedouas, Ath. 299 6 (1. ὀσῷρ-ν ὀσῷρα- § 287), to smell, 
FP. ὀσφρήσομαι, 2 A. ὠσφρόριην, A. P. ὠσφράνθην. Ion. 2 A. ὠσφράμην, Hat. 
i. 80, late 1 A. ὠσφρησάμην. 

See, also, ἱκάνω (§ 292), κιχάνω. (§ 990). 


ᾧ 293. co. ΑΡΡΙΤΙΟΝ oF νε- 


βῦύνέω (or Botw), to stop up (x. βυ-), F. βύσω, A. ἔξῦσα, Pf. P. βέθδυσμιαι. 
Also Pass. βύνομια,, Hat. ii. 96. 

ἱκνέομεα,, and poet. “κάνω (Ὁ. ix-, ἱκᾶν- § 291), to come, F. Lowes 2 ‘A. ‘txé- 
pny, PE. typos. Ep. “txw, K. 142. For ixro and io, see § 185. 3, ε- 

κυνέω (1%. xv-), to hiss, F. κυνήσομαι, A. ἔκῦσα. The comp. σπροσκυνέω, to 
worship, is regular: F. προσκυνήσω, A. προσεκύνησα, and poet. προσέκὕσω, Ar 
Eq: 156. 

ὑσισχνέομαι (I. ox-, iox-), to promise, F. ὑποσχήσομαι (§ 222), 2 A. ὑπε- 
σχόμην, Pf. ὑπέσχημαι, rare A. P. ὑπεσχέθην, Pl. Phadr. 235d. Poet. and 
Yon. ὑσίσχομαι Asch. Eum. 804, Hdt. vii. 104. See ἔχω (ᾧ 300). ; 


§ 293. d. ADDITION OF νυ. 


(1.) If ἃς «, or o precede, the » is doubled, o becoming ὦ» 
(2.) If ἃ precede, the » becomes Δ. (3.) A lingual or liquid 
preceded by a diphthong is dropped before νυ. 


a. To Pure Roots. 


tovous (τ. Fe-, §- § 20. δ), to clothe, poet., chiefly Ep., F. ἕσσω (§ 71), o 587, 
A. ἕσσα, E. 905, Pf. P. sivas and ἕσμαι, r. 72, Hdt. i. 47. Prose form, éu- 
φιέννῦμι, F. ἀμφιέσω, ἀμφιῶ (§ 200. 2), ἠμφίεσα (δ 192. 3), Pf. P. ἠμφίεσμαι. 
lon., xara-tivvey ¥.°135, ἐπ-εΐνυσθα, Hat. iv. 64. 

Cavwvops (τ. So-), to gird, F. ζώσω, A. ἔζωσα, Pf. P. ἔξωσμαι. Late Pf, 
ἔζωκα, Anth. . 

κεράννῦμι (T. κερα-» κρα- ὃ 261, κιρνα- §§ 259, 278. δ), to mix, F. κερἄσω, 
κερῶ, A. ἐκέρᾶσα (κρῆσαι η. 164), Pf. P. κεκέρασμαι, Ath. 576 a, commonly 
κέκράμαι, A. P. ἐκερώσθην and ἐκράθην. Ep. κεράω, Ὁ). 363 (κέραιε, ὃ 242. Ὁ), 
Subj. κέρωντα, A. 260, as from xigapas Poet. and Ion., κίρνημι, Ar. Eccl. 
841, and κιρνάω, Hdt. iv. 52. 

πορέννῦμε (τ. κορε-), to satiate, F. xogicw, A. ἐκόρεσα, Pf. P. κεκόρεσμαι, 
A. P. ἐκορέσθην. Ep., F. xogiw (ἢ 245. 3), ©. 379, 2 Pf. intrans. κέχορήως 
ᾧ 258. 1), σ- 872 ; Ion. Pf. P. κεκόρημαι Σ. 287. The verb κορέω, to sweep, 


5ειμάννῦμα (ἃ. πρερια-), to suspend, F. κρεμάσω, κρεμῶ (§ 200. 2), A. ἐκρέ- 


238 ἘΣ ROOT OF THE VERB. [Boox 11 


μᾶσα, A. P. ἐκρεμιάσθην, Mid. κρέμάμα, (Act. Pt. mentee Ath. 25 d), ana 
poet. κρήμνάμω, (ὃ 278, δ), Ar. Nub. 377, to hang, F. πρεμήσομεαι. Also xen- 
μνάομαι, Hom. Bac. 39, Pt. xenuvés, Pind. P. 4. 43, late κρεμάω. 


πετάννῦμι (τ. σεσα-), to spread, to expand, F. πετἄσω, πετῶ, A. ἐσέτᾶσα 
ΒΕ P. πίπτἄμαι (§ 261), A. Ρ. ἐπεσάσθην. Ion. Pf. P. πεσέτασμαι, Hdte 
i. 62. Ep., rirvnus, A. 392, rirvw, Hes. Sc. 291 Gottl. ; late σετάω. 

ῥώννσμι (τ. po-), to strengthen, F. ῥώσω, A. ἔῤῥωσα, Pf. P. ἔῤῥωμαι, A. P. ἐῤῥώ- 
σθην (§ 221. a). 

σξέννῦμι (r. és-), to extinguish, Ἐ, σξέσω, 1 A. ἔσξεσα, A. Pr ἐσξέσθην- 
Mid. σξέννδμοαι, to be extinguished, to go out, F. σξήσομιωι, 2 A. Act. ἔσξην 
(§ 227), Pf. Act. ἔσξηκα. 

σκεδάννῦμι (Υ. oxsda-), to scatter, F. σκεδάσω, σκεδῶ, A. ἐσκέδᾶσα, Pf. P. 
isaacwa, A. P. ἐσκεδάσθην. Collat. forms, chiefly poet., κεδάω, Ap. Rh. 
4. 500, xsdaiouas, Id. 2. 626, κεδώννσμι, Anth., A. ἐκέδασσα, E. 88 ; oxidynues 
(§§ 259, 278. 3), Hes. Th. 875, Th. vi. 98, κίδνημι, Hdt. vii. 140, Eur. 
Hec. 916. 


ᾧ ΦΘ4,.. μ. To Palatal Roots. 


> 

ἄγνῦμει (τ. Fary-), to break, F. ἄξω, A. taka (ᾧ 189. 2), 2 Pf. intrans. ἔζγα, 
to be broken, 2 A. P. iayny (Att. ὦ, Ep. comm. @). Ion., A. ἦξα, WY. 392, 
2 Pf. inya, Hdt. vii. 224, ἦγα, Hipp.; Ep. A. Opt. (xara-Fatais, κα 
Εάξαις, §§ 22. δ, 48. 2) καυάξαις Hes. Op. 664. In the comp. cardéyrips 
the s of the augm. is sometimes found out of the Ind.; as, A. Part. κατεάξας 
Lys. 100. 5. 

ἀνοίγω and ἀνοίγνῦμι (τ, oiy-), to open, Impf. ἀνέῳγον (δ 189. 2), Π. 221, 
v. 5. 20, and later ἤνοιγον, H. Gr. i. 1. 2 (Ion. ἀνῷγον, B. 168), F. ἀνοίξω, 
A. ἀνέῳξα, and later ἤνοιξα, Pf. ἀνέψχα, Pf. P. ἀνέῳγμαι, A. P. ἀνεώχϑην, and 
later fvoixénv, Acts, 12. 10, 2 Pf. ἀνέῳγα, to stund open, Hipp. The simple 
οἴγω and οἴγνῦμι are poet., Aisch. Pr. 611, F. οἴξω, A. ᾧξα . 457, dike, 
2. 446. 

δείκνῦρε (τ, δεικ-), to show, F. δείξω. See Y 52. Ton. (rv. dex-) δέξω, ἔδεξα, 
&e., Hat. iii, 122, Mid. δείκνύμα,, Ep. to greet, I. 196, Pf. dsideypecee 
(§ 47. N.), ». 72. The primary sense of δείκνῦμι is to stretch out the hand, 
and kindred verbs are δέχομαι, (Ion. δέκομαι, Hdt. vii. 177, ὃ 69. I.), to receive 
F. δίξομαι, A. ἰδεξάμην, Pf. δέδεγμαι, F. Pf. dediZouaqm(for ἐδέγροην, &e., see 
§ 186. 3), and the poet. δεδίσκομαι, δειδίσκομαι, δεικανάω, δέχνῦμαι. 

εἴργνδμι (Ὁ. toy-, sley- ὃ 268), to shut in, to confine, F. sigkw and ἕρξω, 
A. sigka, Part. εἴρξας and tetas, Pf. P. εἴργμαι, A. P. εἴρχϑην. This verb ap- 
pears to have been originally the same with sey, to shut out, and the dis- 
tinction which afterwards arose, and which was marked by the difference of 
breathing, appears not to have been always observed. lIon., in both senses, 
toys, -ξω, Hat. iii. 48, Θ. 325 (Ep. tigyw, B. 617), and ἔργνσμι or εἴργνῦμι;, 
Hat. .i. 86, iv. 69. 

ζεύγνῦμι (τ. ζυγ-, ξευγ- § 270), to yoke, F. ζεύξω, A. ἔζευξα, Pf. P. ἔξευγ- 
μαι, 1 A. P. ἰζεύχϑθην, 2 A. P. ἰζύγην. 

μἰγνῦμι (τ. μεγ-}, to mingle, to mix, F. μίξω, A. tua, Pf. P. μέμιγμαι, 
3 FB. μεμίξομαι,, Misch. Pers. 1052, 1 A. P. iwixdny, 2 A. P. ἐμίγην. The 
older form μίσγω (ὃ 273) is ror used in the Pres. and Impf. by Hom. and 
Hdt. For timo, &c., see ὃ 185. 3. 


φήγνῦμι (τ, way-, eny- § 266), to fasten, to fix, F. πήξω, A. ἔπηξα, 2.Pf. 


cH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 235 


intrans., as Pres., σέσηγα, 1 A. P. ἐσήχϑην, commonly 2 A. P. ἐσάγην. Ep 
2 A. M. 8. 3 tanxro (δ 185. 3) A. 378. For πήγνδσο, see’ ὃ 226.4. Late 
ἥσσω, Pf. P. σέπηγμαι. 

pryrvius (τ. fay-, pny-), to break, F. ῥήξω, A. ἔῤῥηξα, 2 Pf. intrans. ἔῤῥωγα 
(§ 236. 6), 2 A. P. ἐῤῥάγην. Ep., ῥήσσω, Σ. 571, Pf. P. ἔῤῥηγμαι, 3. 137; 
Ton. 1 A. P. ἐῤῥήχϑην, Hipp. Kindred, ῥάσσω and ἀράσσω, -Zw, to smite. 

φράσσω, and rarely φράώγνῦμι, Th. vii. 74 (1. φραγ-, φρασσ- ὃ 274), to fence, 
F. φρνάξω, A. ἔφραξα, Pf. P. riggaypar, A. P. ἐφράχθην. Late 2 A. P. 
ἰφράγην. 


§ 295. .γχ To Lingual and Liquid Roots. 


daivdus (τ. dasr-, δαινυ-), to entertain, to feast, poet. Y. 29, F. δαίσω, Asch, 
Eum. 305, A. tau, A. P. ἐδαίσθην. For Opt. duiviro, see § 296. 4. 

xalvipas (1. xad-, καιδ- § 267), to excel, poet. y: 282, Pf. κέκασμαι, Eur. 
El. 616, Pt. κεκασμένος A. 339, and κεκαδμένος, Pind. O. 1. 42. 

καείνω, and later xrivous Or καείνῦμι (r. κτα-; κααν- αὶ 278, καεν- § 259, 
καειν- ὃ 268, καιννυ- ὃ 259. Ὁ, καεινῦ-), to slay, usually in composition with ἀπό 
or κατά, F. xreva, 1 A. ἔκτεινα, poet. 2 A. ἔκτωνον Soph. Ant. 1340 (also in 
Xen., who was partial to poet. forms, iv. 8, 25), and poet. ἔκταν (§ 224. E.), 
Soph. Tr. 38, 2 Pf. ἔκσονα, 1 Pf., less classic, ἔκτακα or ἔκταγκα) and ixrs- 
γηκα, 2A. M. poet. ἐκτάμην, Asch. Pers. 923. Ep., F. χτανέω, Z. 409, 
1 A. P. ixeaény, δ. 537; late ἐκτάνθην, Anth. For the passive of xrsivw, 
the Attic writers employ ϑνήσκω (ὃ 281). , 

dAATus (τ. bA-, GA-vv-), to destroy, F. ὀλέσω (ὃ 222. 4“), commonly jaa, 
A. ὄλεσα, 1 Pf. ὀλώλεκα, 2 Pf. intrans. ὄλωλα, 2 A. M. ὠλόμην. Poet. ὀλέ- 
κω, A. 10, Soph. Ant. 1286; Impf. iter. ὀλέκεσκεν (or ὀλέεσκεν, as from ὀλέω) 
T. 135. 


dvips (Ὁ. ὁμ-), to swear, F. ὀμοῦμαι, A. ὥμοσα (ὃ 222. 8), Ph ὁμώμοκα 
(8 191. 2), Pf P. ἐμώμοσμα, and ὀμώμομαι (ὃ 221. a), A. Ps ὠμόσθην and 
ὠμόθην. Pres. Pt. ὀμοῦντες Hat. i. 153; late F. ὀμόσω, Anth. 

auieyvipes (ὀμοργ-), to wipe off, poet. E. 416, F. ὀμόρξω, A. amogta, Eur. 
Or. 219, A. P. ὠμόρχϑην, Ar. Vesp. 560, A. M. ὠμορξάμην, 2.124. Collat. 
ὀμοργάζω, Hom. Mere. 361, late μόργνῦμει. 

ὀρέγω, to stretch out, and Ep. ὀρέγνῦμι, A. 351, F. ὀρέξω, A. ὥρεξα, A. P. 
ὠρέχϑην, Pf. P. desypas, Hipp., ὀρώρεγμαι, 11. 834, 

δονῦμι (Ὑ. de-), to rouse, F. ὄρσω (§ 56. B), A. ὥρσα, 2 Pf. intrans., ag, Pres., 
ὄρωρα. Ep., F. M. dots, Y. 140, 2 A. ὦρορον (ἢ 194.3), 2 A. M. ὠρόμην, 
M. 279 (see § 185. δ, «) ; from r. ὁρε-γ Impf. ὀρεόμην, B. 398, Pf. P. ὁρώρε- 
μαι (ὃ 191. 2), +. 377, Subj. ὀρώρηται M. 271. Kindred, chiefly poet.,~ ὅρο- 
eal, ὀρίνω, ὀροθύνω, ὁρούω- Lat. orior. 

arievipas (τ. “΄ταρ-), to sneeze,2 A. ἔπσαρον. 2 A. P. Pt. rragsis, Hipp. 

σαόρνῦμι, oropivius, and σαρώννῦρμοι (1. orog-, σσορε- ὃ 288, στρο- ὃ 262}, 
to strew, F. eroga and σαερώσω, A. ἰστόρεσα and ἔσσρωσα, Pf. P. ἔσσρωμαρ 
A. P. ἐστρώθην (ἰσσορέσθην, Hipp.). 


§ 29G. c. Apprmon oF wx. 


ἀμπλακίσκω (τ. ἀμαλακ-), to err, poet. 2 A. ἤμπλακον Soph. Ant. 91C 
Pt. ἀμπλακών and, to shorten the initial « (ὃ 263.6), ἀπσλακών Eur. Ale 
241. : pa 


240° ROOT OF THE VERB. |BooK W 


ἀπαφίσκω (τ. ἀφ-, ἀσαῷφ-), to deceive, Ep. 2. 217, F. ἀπαφήσω, A. ὠπάφη 
ea, Hom. Ap. 376, commonly 2 A. ἤπαφον, ἕξ. 379. 

γεγωνέω and γεγωνίσκω (I. γων-, yeyov- ὃ 283, yeyove- ὃ 288, γεγωνισκ-) 
to call aloud, F. γεγωνήσω, A. ἐγεγώνησα, 2 Pf., as Pres., γέγωνα, Subj. γεγώ- 
wo, Imp. γέγωνε (ὃ 235), ἄς. Ep. Imp. or 2 A. ἐγέγωνεν (or PE. γέγωνεν) 
%. 469. See § 246. N. 

iraveicxouas (τ. αὐρ-» to get)," to get at, to reach, to enjoy, poet. and Ton 
N. 733, F. ἐπαυρήσομαι, 2 A. ἐπηῦρον, A. 572, 2 A. M. tornugouny Eur, Hel. 
460, 1 A. M. ἐπαυράμην, Hipp. -Also ἐπαυρίσκω, Theog. 111, and ἐσαυρέω, 
Hes. Op. 417. From the same root, dravéw (ὃ 287. a), to get from, to 
take away, poet. A. 430, 1 A. M. ἐπηυράμην, Asch. Pr. 28; and from the 
kindred abg- (§ 28), Ep. Aor. Pt. ὠπούρας A. 356, ὠπουράμενος, Hes. Sc. 173. 

εὑρίσκω (τ. εὗρ-), to find, F. εὑρήσω (ὃ 222. 2), 2 A. εὗρον or ndgor 
(§ 188. N.‘, Pf. εὕρηκα, Pf. P. εὕρημαι, A. P. εὑρέθην (§ 219), 2 A. M. 
εὑρόμην, and less Att. | A. M. εὑρώμην. 

ortgtw and στερίσκω (r. orte-), to deprive, F. στερήσω, A. ἐστέρησα, Pf. iort- 
gana, PE. P. ἐστέρημαι, | A. P. ἐσφερήθην, poet. 2 A. P. Pt. orsgeis Eur. Hel. 
95. Mid. erteouns, to want, F., often as Pass., σσερήσοικαι (doro-crsgsiobs 
Andoc. 19. 25). Ep. i A. ἐσφέρεσα, ν. 262. ; 


§ 29%. £ Apvrrion or 2. 


ἐδίζω (r. ἐ6-), to accustom, F. ibiow, -««ὦ (8 200. B), Pf. εἴδικα (δ 189. 3) 
&e.; 2 Pf., as Pres. intrans., εἴωθα (ὃ 236. c). Ep. Pres. Pt. intrans. as 
I. 540. 


ἐλαίζω (τ. Feaa-), to hope, F.tariow, -w, &e.; Ep. ἔλπω, to give hope, B. 91, 
ἔλπομαι OF ἐέλσομαι, and 2 Pf. ἔορλσα (δ 191. 3), to hope, H. 199, K. 105, 
YT. 186, 2 Plup. ἐώλσειν (§ 189. 5), T. 8:8. 


κοναξίζω (τ. xovae-), to ring, Ep. B. 466, A. ἐκονάξησα, Β. 334. 

σπορίζω (τ. xog-), to furnish, F. πορίσω, -ιὥ, Pf. πεπόρικα, ὥς. Poet., 2 A. 
txogav, Soph. Cd. T. 921 (see § 194. 3), Pf. P. σέπρωται (§ 223), it is fated, 
2. 329, Pt. πεπρωμένος, Soph. Ant. 1337, Mem. ii. 1. 33. 


§ 298. ¢. ΑΡΡΙΤΙΟΝ or Orner SytuaBres. 


ἄω (τ. &-, ἀδε-), to be sated, to satiate, Ep., F. "ἄσω, A. 818, A. doa, 
Ε, 289, 4πᾶ ἄδησα (Opt. ἐδδήτσειεν ΟΥ̓Ὰἀδήσειεν a. 134), Pf. Pt. ὠδδηκώς, K. 98, 
F. Μ. "ἄσομιαι, 21.717, A. M. "ὥἄσασθα, T. 307. The F. ἄσω and commonly 
the A* dca are trans., the other forms intrans. For Pres. Subj. (ἄωρεν, ὥμενν 
ἔωμεν (also written tauey, as if from ἑάώω) T. 402, see ὃ 242. a; for Inf. 
tusves, see ὃ 250. e; for Pres. Mid. ἄαται, see ὃ 242.1. Deriv. ᾿ὥσάομαι, 
_Theoe. 25. 240, A. P. ἡσήθην Hit. iii. 41. 

δαμάζω (τ. dap-), to subdue, F. δαμάσω, A. ἰδάμασα, 1 A. P. ἐδαριάσδην, 
and poet. ἐδροεήδην (§ 223), A. 99, Eur. Alc. 127, 2 A. P. poet. ἐδάμην, Eur. 
Med. 647. Ep. Pres. and perhaps Fut. (§ 200. a) depdw, A. 61, Z. 568, 
Pf. P. δέδαημα,, E. 878, F. Pf. δεδμήσομα, Hom. Ap. 543. Collat. poet, 
forms, δαμνάω, A. 221, δάμνημε E. 893, Asch. Pr. 164, δαμαλίζω, Pind. P. 
δ. 163. Lat. domo. 

ἕλκω (τ. tax-, taxv-), to draw, F. ἵλξω (ἑλκύσω, Hipp.), A. εἵλκῦσα 
(8 189. 3; siage, Orph. Arg. 260), Pf. siaxixa, Pf. P. εἴλκυσμαι, A. P. 
εἷλκύσθην. Ep. taxtiw, P. 395, ἑλκήσω, ἥλκησα, A. 580. 


ἰρωτάω (τ. ig-), to ask, F. ἰρωσήσω and ἐρήσομαι (§ 222), A. ἠρώτησαν 


ca 10.] EMPHATIC AND ANOMALOUS CHANGES. 24) 


Pf. ἠρωφηκα, PF P. ἠρώτημαι, A. P. ἠρωτήθην, 2 A. Μ. ἠρόμην. Ep. and 
Ton., sZeoquas A. 553, Hat. iii. 64 (sigsduevos Ib., § 243. 4), F. εἰρήσομαι ὃ. 61 1, 
εἰρωτάω, -ἕω, ὃ. 347, Hdt. iv. 145 5 ἐρέω, H. 128 ; ἐρεείνω Ζ. 145. 

ἐσθίω, and poet. ἔσδϑω, 1. 415, Aisch. Ag. 1597, or ἔδω, ε. 541, Eur. Cycl. 
245 (rr. ἐδ-, ivd- δὲ 282, 52, ἐσθι-), to eat, F. owas (ὃ 200. Ὁ), Pf. ἐδήδοκα 
(ὃ 236. 6), Pf. P. ἐδήδεσμα, (§ 222. 4), Pl. Phedo, 110 6, A, P, ἠδέσδθην " 
2 A. ἔφαγον (τ. Puy-, ὃ 301). Late F. φάγομαι (ὃ 247.d). Ep. 2 Pf. ἔδηδα; 
P. 542, PE. P. ἰδήδομαι (§ 236. c). | 

ἔχθω, Soph. Aj. 459, ἐχθαίρω Eur. Alc. 179, and ἐχθραίνω, Ages. 11. 5 
(τ. ix-), to hate, chiefly poet., F. ἐχϑαρῶ, A. ἤχθηρα. 

dvouns (év-, ὄνο-), to scorn, Ion. and poet., ὄνοσαι, ὥς. (see J 51), ρ. 378 
FE. ὀνόσομαι, A. ὠνοσάμην P. 173, and ὠνάμην, P. 25, A. P. ὠνόσθην, Hdt. ii 
136. Deriv., ὀνειδίζω, and poet. ὀνοτάζω, Asch. Sup. 11. ; 

πεκτέω, Ep. πείκω (r. asx-), to comb, shear, poet., Ar. Av. 714, ¢ 316, 
F. σεξῶ (ἢ 245. 2) Theoe. 5. 98, A. ἔπεξα, ἐπεξάμην, Ξ. 176, A, P. ivigcdny, 
Ar. Nub. 1356. ; 

φλέγω, and poet. φλεγίδω, Soph. Tr. 99, to burn, F. φλέξω, A. ἔφλεξα, 
A. P. ἐφλέχθην. Late 2 A. P. ἐφλέγην, Anth. 


§ 299. Remark. A few verbs obtain ἃ 2 Aor. with a short penult 
(§ 255. 3), through an extension of the root ; as, διώκω, to pursue, ἐδιώκαθον, 
Ar. Vesp. 1203, Pl. Gorg. 483 a; εἴκω, to yield, εἴκ θον, Soph. Gd. T. 651 ; 
tloyw, to exclude, cigyébov, Soph. Cid. C. 862 (ἔργᾶθον, A. 437, ἐέργἄθον, 
E. 147), εἰργάϑθόμην, Aisch.. Eum. 566; ἀμένω, to ward off, ἠμῦνἄθον, Ar.’ 
Nub. 1323, ἠμῦναδόμην, Asch. Eum. 4383; xiw, to go, μετ-εκίαθον A. 523 
Haniboy (§ 273. B), ἔσχεθον (§ 300). Cf. ἔφδιθον (ὃ 278). These extended 
Aorists, which are chiefly poet., are regarded’ by some as Imperfects, and are 
commonly so accented. 


§ 300. 3. Excuance or LetrTers. 


In the two following verbs, « passes into « aspirated (ᾧ 50). 


ἕπω (τ. ox-, tx-), to be occupied with, Impf. εἶπον (§ 189. 3), F. ἕψω, 2 A, 
ἔσπον, Subj. σπῶ, &e. Mid. ἕπομαι, to follow, Impf. sircuny, F. ἕψομαι, 2 A. 
ἐσσόμην, Subj. σπῶριωι, &e. Poet. ἕσπομαι, 3. 826, Impf. (considered by some 
2 A.) icwouny, Γ΄. 239. A. P. περι-έφθην, Hdt. vi. 15. The act. iaw scarcely 
occurs except in composition. . 

ἔχω and ἴσχω (τ. σχ-) tx-, ἐχ- § 263, ἰσχ- §§ 283. ο, 263), to have, to 
hold (in the sense to have, the forms ἔχω and ἕξω are preferred ; in the sense 
to hold, ἴσχω and σχήσω), Impf. εἶχον and ἴσχον, F. ἕξω and σχήσω (§ 222); 
2 A. ἔσχον, Subj. σχῶ (comp. διάσχω Or διωασχῶ, Yr. σχ- ΟΥ̓ σχε-), Opt. σχοίην 
(§ 205. a), Imp. σχές (σχε- § 288 ; compare ϑές, ἕς, § 210. 2), and rarely, 
in composition, ext, Inf. σχεῖν, Pt. σχών- 2 A. poet. ἔσχεθον (§ 299), Aisch. 
Pr. 16; Pf. ἔσχηκα, Pf. P. toynuas, A. Ἐ. ἐσχέθην, 2A. M. ἐσχόμην. Ep. 
Pf. Pt. συν-οχωκότε (§§ 236. 1, 191. 2, 62) B. 218: For ἐσ-ὥχατο; see 
§ 236. d; for iv-sizee, see § 243. 4. Ep. deriv. forms, ἰσχάνω, Bs 387; 
ἰσχανάω, E. 89. For the compound ὑπισχνέοραι, see § 292, for ἀνέχοριαι, 
§ 301.2. For the x in ἀμπέχω (ἀμφί, ἔχω), see § 62 5 and for the various 
forms of the augm. (Impf. ἠμα-εἰχόμην, 2A. ἠμαι-σχόμην, ἠμα-εσχόμην, Ge), 
§ 192. 8. 


C. Anomatovus CHANGES, 


§ 301. Forms are sometimes associated, which must be 
21 


~-- 


242 ROOT OF THE VEhs- [ΒΟΟΚ Ix 


referred to roots originally distinct, or widely removed from 
each other (ᾧ 257. 2); as, 


1, αἱρέω (r. aigs-), to take, F. aignow, Pf. ἥρηκα, Pf. P. ἥρημαι, A. P. ἡρέθην 
(§ 219); 2 A. εἷλον (τ. ta-, § 189, 3), 2 A. M. εἱλόμην. Poet. 1 A. M. ἐξ- 
ηρήσασο Ar. Thesm. 761. Doubtful or late F. ἑλῶ, ἑλοῦμαι- Ion. Pf. ἀραΐ- 
enxa, Hdt. v. 102, dowionwas, iv. 66; Ep. 2 A.M. S. 3 γέντο for Féare 
(88 69. III., 185. 3) ©. 43. In the sense to capture, the Pass. is commonly 
supplied by ἁλίσκομαι (τ. &A-, whence ἐλ- ὃ 259, ὧλο-, ἅλισκ- § 280), Imph 
ἡλισκόμην, F. ἁλώσομαι, 2A. ἑάλων (§ 189.2) and ἥλων, Subj. ‘cad, &e., 
PE. ἑάλωκα and ἥλωκα. 

2. ἀνέχομαι, to endure, a compound of ἔχω (δ 300), F. ἀνέξομια, and ἀνα- 
σχήσομαι, 2 A. ἠνεσχόμην (§ 192.3); F. «λήσομαι, (τ. rara-, rra- ὃ 261), 
2 A. ἔτλην (ὃ 227), Pf. riranxa (see § 238. a). Ep. 1A. ἐσάλασσα, P. 166. 
Later Ep., ὀσλέω, Ap. Rh. 3. 769, ὀςλεύω, 2. 1008. 

. 8, ἔρχομαι (1. tex-), to go, to come, Imp. ἠρχόμην F. ἐλεύσομαι (τ. ἐλυϑ-, 
ἐἔλευθ- § 270), 2 A. ἤλῦθον, commonly ἦλθον (§ 261), 2 Pf. tavavda (§ 191. 9). 
Ep. 2 Pf. 7avda, Hes. Th. 660, εἰλήλουθα (§ 47. N.), Dor. 2 A. ἦνθον ( 69. 
111.), Theoc. 1. 77, Lacon. ἦλσον (§ 70. 4), Ar. Lys. 105. The Pres. (ex- 
cept in the Ind.), the Impf., and the Fut. are commonly supplied in the Att. 
by the verb «iu: (§ 251). 

- 4. δράω (τ. ὁρα-), to see, Impf. ἑώρων (δ 189.2), Pf. ἑώρακα (ἕόράκα Ar, 
Pl. 98), Pf. P. ἑώρῶμαι- Ἐς ὄψομαι .τ. ὁπς-), Pf. P. ὥμμαι, A. P. ὥφϑθην (ὁρα- 
θῆναι Pl. Def. 411 a), 2 Pf. poet. and Ion. ἔσωσα Soph. Ant. 6, Hat. iii. 68 ; 
2A. εἶδον (τ. ἰδ-, the augm. uniting with the, to form «), Subj. Dw, &e., 
2 A. Μ. εἰδόμην, Subj. ἰδωρμαι, &e.; 2 PE. οἶδα, (I have seen) I know (ὃ 233); 
Mid., poet., εἴδομιαι (1. sid- § 268), to seem, to resemble, Esch. Cho. 178, 1 A. 
εἰσάμην, B. 791. 


Nore. In the preteritive oda (4 58, § 237), the root has four forms, 
(1.) 3-3 ἴσμεν (Ion. ἴδμεν A. 124), tors, ἴσθι, ἴστω (Boot. ἔσσω Ar. Ach. 
911), &.; and Ep., Inf. ἴδμεν A. 719, ἔδμενα, N. 273, Pt. ἰδυῖα, A. 608, 
Plup. Pl. 3 (73-cav) ἴσαν 3.405: (2.) εἰδ-; εἰδέναι, εἰδώς, ἤδειν, εἴσομαι - and 
the Ep. Subj. εἴδομεν, εἴδετε (ὃ 246.2): (3.) οἷδ- (8. 296.1) 5 oda, οἶσθα, 
&e.: (4.) εἶδε- (ὃ 288) ; (εἰδέω) εἰδῶ, εἰδείην, εἰδήσω (rare, A. 546, Isoc. 5 b), 
εἴδησα (late). The Plup. is sometimes doubly augmented (§ 189); thus, Ep. 
ἠείδεις OF ἠείδης X. 280, Asides or Hsidn s 206, Ion. Aside Hdt. i. 45 (for asides, 
one s dropped, cf. § 243.2). Inthe Dor., we find the verb ἔσἄρμι, perhaps 
suggested by Ἴσᾶσι (δ 237, οἶδα), Pind. P. 4. 441, ἴσης Theoc. 13. 34, tears 
15. 146, ἴσαμεν Pind. N. 7. 21, Pt. ἴσας, Pind. P. 3.52. The deficiencies 
of cid are supplied by γιγνώσκω (δ 285). 


δ. σρέχω (τ. Sotx-, reex- ὃ 263), to run, F. ϑρέξομαι, commonly dIeapov- 
ums (τ. δραμ-), 1 A. ἔδθρεξα, commonly 2 A. ἔδραμον, Pf. δεδράμηκα (8 222), 
REP. συ Ep. 2 Pf. δέδρομα, s 412. Late and rare F. δραμῶ Ath, 
416 f, δράμομαι (§ 200. b), Anth. Deriv., σροχάζω, vii. 3. 46, Ep. τροχάω, 
a 451, τρωχάω, X. 163, δρομάω, Hes. Fr. 2. 2. 

6. φέρω (τ. φερ-), to bear, F. οἴσω (r. of-), Ἐ. M. ofcopeas, F. P. οἰσθήσορι κι - 
LA. ἤνεγκα (τ. ivsx-, ἔνεγκ- ὃ 277), 2 A. ἤνεγκον, A. M. ἠνεγκάμην, Pf. 
ἐνήνοχα (§§ 191. 2, 236. a), Pf. P. ἐνήνεγμαι, A. P. ἠνέχϑην, F. P. ivex en 
copes. Ion, (τ. ivesx~ § 2683 συν-ενείκεσαι Hes. Sc. 440) 1 A. ἤνεικα, E. 885 
Hat. iii. 30, 2 A. Opt. ἐνείκοι 3. 147, Inf. ἐνεικέμεν T. 194, Pf. P. ἐνήνειγμαη 
Hdt. ii. 12, A. P. ἠνείχθην, i. 66 1 A. Inf. (ἀνα-οἴσαι) ἀνῷσαι Ib. 157 
Late Pf. P. προ-οἴσται Luc. Paras. 2. For oles, &c., see § 185. 65 for φέρτε 


on. 11.} FORMATION OF WORDS. 243 


§ 246. 63; for φέρησι, § 251. 2. Deriv., Pogiw, to carry, -ἥσω, &e. (φορῆνα 
§ 251. 2), δια-, εἰσ-, ἐκ-φρέω (φρείω, Ar. Vesp. 125), to let pass, -φρήσω, 
τέφρησα, -εφρήσθην. Lat. fero.—The Aorists ἤνεγκα and ἤνεγκον are both 
common in the Ist Pers. sing. of the Jnd., and in the Opt.; but in the 
2d Pers. sing. of the Jmp., in the Jnf., and in the Part., the forms of ἤνεγκον 
are preferred ; and, elsewhere, those of ἤνεγκα. 

7. «φημί and φάσκω (4 53, ὃ 228 ; Τ. φα-, φασκ- 3 219). to say, to affirm, 
Ε, ἐρῶ (r. ἐρ-» τὰ § 262), Pf. εἴρηκα (δ 19]. 1), Pf. P. εἴρημαι, F. Pf. εἰρήσο- 
wai, Cyt. vii. 1, 9, A. Ρ. ἐῤῥήθην or ἐῤῥέθην Con. εἰρέθην or sionbnv, Hdt. iv. 
77)3 1 A. εἶπα (τ. te, six- § 268), 2 A. εἶπον. Non-Att., Pres. εἴρω B. 162, 
sights Hes. Th. 38; Ion. 1 A. M. da-sirduny, refused, Hat. i. 205; Poet. 
1 Aor. (2F era) ἔειπα Pind. N. 9. 78, 2 A. ἔειπον K. 445; Ep. 2 A. (τ. ἐπ 
tow- ὃ 273, cf. ἐνέπω) ἔσσον, B. 484. Redupl. forms, σιφαύσκω Asch. Eum. 
620, ridacxw, Hes. Th. 655. — The forms of φάσκω, with the F. φήσω, the A. 
ἔφησα, and the Mid. voice, have commonly the strengthened sense, to affirm 
The Ist Aor. inf. εἶπα, and part. εἴπας are not used by the Attics. 

8. avéowas (r. ὠνε-), to buy, Impf. ἐωνούμην (§ 189.2), F. ὠνήσομαι, Pf. 
ἰώνημοαι, A. P. ἐωνήθην- 2 A.M. ἐπριάμην (4 49; τ. σριω-). Ion. and late 
1 A. M. ἐωνησάμην, Hipp. 


CHAPTER XI. 


FORMATION OF WORDS. 


§ 302. The Greek, like all other original languages, is 
the development, according to certain natural laws, of a small 
number of germs, or primary roots. These primary roots 
(which may be termed radicals, to distinguish them from the 
mere roots of inflection) have a significance which is not ar- 
bitrary, but founded upon instinctive principles of the human 
constitution. 


Nore. The much agitated question, whether the radicals of language are’ 
nouns or verbs, has no propriety, inasmuch as the origin of these radicals was 
_prior to grammatical distinctions, and the same radical was used as noun, 
adjective, verb, &c., as the case might require. 


§ 303. Those words in which the radicals appear in 
their simplest forms are termed primitive ; and all others are 
termed derivative ; while, at the same <ime, a distinction must 
be made between simple derivatives, and those words which 
are formed by the union of other words, and which are termed 
compound. 

Notes. a. Of those words which are commonly distinguished as primi- 


tire and derivative, some are directly related to each other as parent and child, 
‘while others are merely formations from the same radical, which, however, 


244 DERIVATION. [BOOK τὰ 


commonly appears in a simpler form in the one than in the other. It is im- 
portant to observe this distinction, though the same language is commonly 
for the sake of convenience, employed in both cases. 


6. In tracing derivations, it is sometimes convenient to assume a theme, 
either as a primitive, or as a link of connection. We must, however, be 
cautious in pronouncing that to have been essential in the actual formation 
of the language, which we find convenient in explaining that formation. 


I. Formation or. SimpLce Worps. 


§ 304. Simple Words are divided in respect to their 
formation into three classes. ᾿ 


(1.) Those which consist of the mere radical, without 
change, except for euphony or emphasis. 


_ (IL) Those which have, in addition, merely the affixes of 
inflection. - 

(11.) Those which receive farther modthiessiinae 

The Rules and Remarks which follow have respect chiefly to. the third class, 


A. Novwns. 


§ 305. I. From Verss. Nouns formed from verbs (or 
from common. radicals, § 303. a) denote, 


1.) The action of the verb. These are formed by adding 
to the root of the verb, 

a. «σις (Gen. «σεως, fem.), or -σίς (G. -clas, f.)3 a8, pospet-opocs, to imitate, 
welun-cis, imitution; πράσσω (1. xeady-), to act, (πρᾶγ-σις) πρᾶξις, action; Sia, 
to sacrifice, Sucla, sacrifice ; δοκιμάζω, to try, δοκιμικσία, trial. 

Ὁ, -n, -α (G -ns, τἄς, f.) ; as, φεύγω (r. Qvy-), to ee, φυγ-ἤ, ight; 
φρίφω, to sinsebal, τροφή, nourishment ; χαίρω (Υ. χαρ-), to rejoice, χαρ-ἅ, ον; 
φϑείρω, to corrupt, φθορά, corruption. Some verbs in -εὔω have abstracts in 
siz (ὃ 92. β. a); as, παιδεύω, to instruct, «παιδεία, instruction. 

c. -ος (G. -ov, m.) ; > as, Aiy-w, to speak, λόγ-ος, speech ; σαείρω, to sow, 
σσόρος, sowing. 

ἃ. -ros (G. -rov, m.); a8, xwxd-w, to wail, xwxd-rés, wailing. 

6. -ος (6. -s0s, 0.) ; a8, κήδ-ομαι, to care, κῇδ-ος, care. 

f. -μός (G. -μοῦ, m.), or -μη (G. -uns, f.); a8, ὀδύρ-οροαι, to lament, ὄδυρ-μές, 
lamentation ; μέ-μνη-μαι, to remember, μονή-ῥεη, remembrance. 


Remark. From the tendency of abstracts to pass into concretes, verbals 
of Class 1 often express not so much the action itself, as the effect or object 
of the action, and thus blend with Class 2 ; as, γραμμή, line. 


§ 306. 2.) The errect, or onsect of the action. These 
are formed by adding to the root of the verb, 


«μα (G. «ματος, τ.) ; 88, σοιί-ω, to make, compose, woin-uwa, thing made, 


cm 11.] NOUNS. ὁ 245 


poem; σαείρω, to sow, cxrtgua, thing sown, seed; γράφω, to write, (γράφ- μα) 
γράμμα, letter. See also ὃ 305. R. 

3.) The pozr. These are formed by adding to the root of 
the verb, | 


a. -rns (G. -rov, m.); a8, Sedé-ouas, to behold, ϑεᾶ-πής, beholder; roitw, to 
compose, «οιητής, poet; xrigw, to found, xricrns, founder. 


Ὁ. -ree (G. -rngos, m.), or -rwe (G. -roges, M.) ; as, δίδωμι (Tr. 30-), to give, 
δο-πήρ, giver; σώξω, to save, σωτήρ, saviour; Υ. ῥε-γ to speak, ῥή-πωρ, speaker 
wrator. 

Nore. The feminines corresponding to the above (a. and b.) end in -σριὰ 
or -resx (proparoxytone, G. -ds), or in -rgis or -cis (G. -sd0s) ; a8, ποιήπρια, 
poetess, cursiga, female deliverer ; αὐλητής and -r7e, flute-player, abanreis and 
-reia, flute-girl; προφήτης, prophet, προφῆτις, pr 88. 

c. -εὖς (G. -tws, m.); as, γράφ-ω, to paint, γραφ-εύς, painter; φθείρω, to 
corrupt, φθορεύς, corrupter; κείρω, to shave, κουρεύς, barber. 

“ἃ. -ος (G. -ov, m. f.); σρέφ-ω, to nourish, reoQ-ts, nurse; ἀείδω, to sing, 
ἀοιδός, minstrel. 


ReMARK. Some verbals of Class 3 are applied to things; as, ῥαίω, to 
heat, ῥαισπήρ, beater, hammer, Cwerne, girdle, anrns, wind (blower), iuCoasis, 
stopper. 


§307. 4.) The piace, InstRUMENT, or other means of 
the action. These are formed by adding to the root of the 
verb, 

a. -σήριον (G. -ov, n.), more frequently expressing place; as, dxpod-opat, to 
hear, axgou-rigiov, place of hearing, auditory ; δικαστήριον (δικάζω), court of 
justice; ποτήριον (πίνω), drinking-eup. Cf. §§ 314. Ὁ, 315. a. 

Ὁ. -rgov (G. -ov, n.), or -σρᾶ (G. -ἄς, f.), more frequently expressing 
means; as, ξύω, to curry, ξύσαρον and ξύστρα, currycomb, λύτρον (Avw), ran- 
som (means of releasing), ὀρχήστρα (sextouas), orchestra. 

Remark. Terminations of verbals are affixed, in general, with the same 
euphonic changes as the similar affixes of inflection; i. e. those beginning 
with σ follow the analogy of -cw of the Fut. or -cas of the Perf. pass. ; those 
beginning with » and ¢, of -was and -ra: of the Perf. pass.; and those be- 
ginning with a vowel, of the 2d Perf. It is convenient to remember, that 


verbal nouns following the Ist Pers. of the Perf. pass. more frequently denote 
the thing done; the 2d, the doing; and the 3d, the doer. Thus, 


mS ποίη Leh, σε-ποίη-σαι, “«-- ποίη- ται, 
σοίητμεα, poem, σοἴητσις, poesy, σποιη- τής, poet. 


§ 308. II. From Anyzcrives. Nouns formed from 
adjectives (or from common radicals, § 303. a) usually ex- 
press the apsrracrt of the adjective, and are formed in, 

a. -i@ (6, -ids, f.), or, if the root ends in ¢ oro, -. forming, with the 
final vowel of the root, -«% or -οἰᾶ ; a8, σοῷ-ὅς, wise, coQ-id, wisdom; εὐδαίμων, 
-ov-0s, happy, sidusmov-id, happiness; ἀληθής, τέτος, true, ἀλήθειᾶ, truth ; εὔνοτ-ος, 
contr. εὔνους, kind, stveiz, kindness. See §§ 92. B, y, 515. ἃ. 

2i* 


, 246° DERIVATION. | BOOK Tt 


b. -ens (G. -rnros, f.), from adjectives in -os and -vs ; as, ἴσος, equul, ἰσότης 
equality; ταχύς, swift, τα χυτής, swiftness. 


c. -σύνη (G. της, f.), from adjectives in -ος and τῶν ; as, δίκαιος, just, δικαιο 
civn, justice; σώφρων, discreet, σωφροσύνη, discretion. 


ἃ. -os G. τεὸς, .}, chiefly from adjectives in -vs ; as, βαθύς, deep, Babes, 
depth ; ties, broad, εὖρος, breadth. 


e. τάς (G. -ἄδος, f.), from pumetals.s as, δύ», two, δυάς, ἀμαά. Sea 
4 25. ΠΙ. 


§ 309. ΠΙ. From Orner Nouns. Nouns derived from 
other nouns are, 


1.) Parriats (patria, native Jand), and similar words de- 
noting persons related to some object. ‘These end in, 


a. -rns (6. -rov) masc., and -ris (4 134. a; 6. -7idos) fem. (with the 
preceding vowel long in patrialé : thus, -iens, τ-ήτης, τἄτης, -άτης, -ἰώτης F 
and also in other nouns in -srns) 3 as, Σύξαρις, Sybaris, Συξαρΐ σῆς, α man of 
Sybaris, a Sybarite, Συδαρῖτις, a woman of Sybaris ; Αἰγινήτης, Πισάἄάτης, 
Σσαρτιάτης, Σικελιώτης, a man of “ΖἜΈστηα, &e.; πόλις, city, πολίτης, citizen, 
woritis, female citizen; «τόξον, bow, τοξότης, archer, rogoris, archeress. 


Ὁ. -εὖς (6. -éws) mase., and -is (G. -s0s) fem. (§ 118. 3); as, Μέγαρα, 
Megara, Μεγαρεύς, Megarian man, Μεγαρίς, M. woman; φάρμακον, drug, 
φαρμακεύς, deuler in drugs, sorcerer, Pagwaxis, sorceress; ἵππος, horse, ἱππεύς, 
horseman, knight. 


§ 310. 2.) Parronymics (so called from containing the 
father’s or ancestor’s name, πατρὸς ὄνομα). These end in, 


a. -fdns (6. -ov) mase. (uniting with ¢ or o.preceding), and -f; (6. -fdes) 
dese ; -Zdns (G. -ov) masc., and -ἃς (6. -ἄδος) fem., from names of Dee. I. ; 
and -:23ns (G. -ov) masc., and -ἄς (G. -s%305) fem., from names in -v0s, and 
(especially in hexameter verse for the sake of the measure) from many which 
have the last syllable of the root long; as, Πρίαμος, Priam, Ulgauldns, son 
of P., Ulgsawis, daughter of P.; Κέκροψ, Κεκροσίδης, Κεκροσίς + 1]ηλεύς, 
τέως, Πηλείδης + Ἡ ρακλῇς, τέους, Ἡρακλείδης - Λησώ, -ὅος, Anroidns+ Bogtas, 
Boreas, Ἰβορεάδης, son of B., Βορεᾶς, -δος, daughter of B.; Θέσσιος, Θεσσιάδης, 
Seen Φέρης, -nr-0s, Φερηςιάδης Πηλεύς, Ep. G. -ἥος, Ep. Πηλητάδην, 

l. 


be «ἴων (G. -lwvos, rarely -lovos) mase., and -ἰὥνη or -/yy (G. της) fem., only 
poetic ; as, Kgives, Saturn, Κρονίων, -fwvog OF -ἴονος, son of 8., A. 397; Πη- 
λεύς, ΠΠηλείων, A. 188; ᾿Ακρίσιος, "Axgiclavn, daughter of A., Ἐξ. 319; “Aden- 
eros, ᾿Αδρησαΐνη E. 412. 


Remark. Patronymics appear to have been, in their origin, diminutives 
thus, Πριαμίδης, little Priam. See ᾧ 312. Akin to the above are a few 
words in -ἰδέος, contr. -ἰδοῦς, — son, «ἰδέᾳ, contr. -δῇ, — daughter ; as, Suya- 
«ριδοῦς, -ἰδῇ, daughter's son, — daughter, ἀδελφιδοῦς, -ἰδῇ, nephew, niece. 


§ 380. 3.) Femace Appetratives. These end in, 


-ἰς (6. -i30), chiefly from masculines of Dee. I., and from those in -εὖς 
as, haeShter master, δεσπότις, mistress (also δέσαοινα, cf. Ὁ). See ὃ 184, a 


cH. 1.1. NOUNS. . 247 


Ὁ. -aiv% (G. -ns), chiefly from masculines in τῶν; as, λέων, τὸν vs, lion, 
λέαινα, oness; τέκτων, -oves, artisan, τέκταινα " Λάκων, -wvos, Spartan, Ad- 
xeuve. Also from some in -0¢ ; as, Seos, god, Stas, goddess (ὃ 74. &), λύκος 
wolf, λύκαινα. : 

9. -εἰᾶ (G. -sids), from βασιλεύς, Ring, and ἱερεύς, priest; thus, βασίλεια, 
queen, ἱέρεια, priestess. . 

ἃ. -σσὰ (-«τἄ, § 70. 1; 6. -ns), from several endings of Dec. III. ; as, 
Κίλιξ, -weos, Cilician, Kiauoa (cf. ὃ 273), ἄναξ, -καος, sovereign, ἄνασσα, Ins, 
-σός, hireling, ϑῆσσα, Ai€us, -vos, Lybian, Δίξυσσα. 

Nore. See, also, §§ 306. N., 309, 310, 


§ BL. 4.) Diminvrives (sometimes expressing affec- 
tion, often contempt). ‘These end in, 


a. -sov (G. -sov, n.), with a syllable often prefixed (-(:ov, -ἄριον, -ὕλλιον, 
ύδριον, -ὕφιον, &e.). —b. -ἴσκος (G. του, m.), -ἴσκη (6. -ns, f.). Thus, παῖς, 
child, Diminutives, raidiov, little child, raidirxos, young boy, παιδίσκη, young 
girl, παιδάριον, παιδαρίδιον, παιδαρύλλιον, παιδαρίσκος, παιδισκάριον" μεῖραξ, 
youth, μειράκιον, μειρακίδιον, μειρακύλλιον, μειρακυλλίδιον, μειρακίσκος, μειρωκί- 
σκη" κόρη, girl, κόριον, κορίσκη, κορίσκιον, κορίδιον, κοράσιον (for -ἄριον, OD 80- 
count of the preceding 9), κορασίδιον " νῆσος, island, νησύδριον - ζῶον, animal, 
(ζωΐδιον) ζώδιον, ζωδάριον, ξωὔφιον. "QL Σώκρατες, ὦ Σωκρατίδιον, O Socrates ! 
dear Socky! Ar. Nub. 92... 


c. -is (G. -δὸς and -ἶδος, f.) 3 as, κρήνη, fountain, κρηνίς, -ἶδος " πίναξ, 
table, πινακίς, -ἴδος, tablet. 5 


ἃ. -ἰδεύς (G. τέως, m., only of the young of animals); as, ἀετός, eagle, 
ἀετιδεύς, eaglet; λαγώς, hare, λαγιδεύς. 


6. -ἤχνη, τ-άκνη, -υλλίς, -ύλος (Dor.), ὥσ. ; as, πόλις, city, πολίχνη" wlbos, 
wine-jar, σπιθάκνη " ἀκανθίς, finch, ἀκανθυλλίς - ἔρως, -wros, love, ἐρωφύλος, 
darling, Theoc. 3. 7. 


Notre. Some diminutives (especially in - ον) have lost their peculiar force " 
thus, $72, commonly in prose ϑηρίον, wild beast. Some proper names have dix 
minutive forms, sometimes made by abbreviation ; as, Μέγιλλος κμεγᾶξι 
great), "Auaguaris (ἀμάρα, channel), Διονῦς, Μηνᾶς (§ 126. 2). 


§ BB. 5.) Avemenratives, words implying increase. 
either of number, size, or degree. ‘They end in, 


a. τῶν (G. -ωνος, m.). This ending may express either a place, an animal, 
“or a person, in which any thing exists in numbers, or in large size or degree; 
aS, ἄμπελος, vine, ἀμσελών, vineyard, ἱπιπών (ixxes), horse-stable, ἀνδρών, yu- 
ναικών (ἀνήρ, γυνή), apartments for men, women, οἰνών (οἶνος), wine-cellar ; χεῖ- 
Aos, lip, χειλών, a fish with a long snout; γνάθος, jaw, γνάθων, glutton; πλά- 
ros, breadth, Πλάτων. As a designation of place, -wvia is also used ; as, po- 
δωνία (ῥόδον), rose-bed. 


b. -αξ (6. -ὥκος, m.), applied, like the preceding, to persons and animals, 
but harsher in its expression ; as, σιλοῦτος, wealth, rracirak, a rich churl, 80 
λάξρος, greedy, λάξραξ, sea-wolf. 

Remark. Many derivative nouns are properly adjectives 
used substantively. 


248 DERIVATION. [Book ι΄ 


B. ADJECTIVES. 
Me $314. 1. From Verzs. These end in, 


ἃ. -ἰκός, -%, -όν, active; as, exw, to rule, ἀρχικός, able to rule; γράφω, te 
describe, γραφ,κός, descriptive, graphic. This ending is more frequently pre- 
ceded by + (cf. ) 806. a, b); as, ποιησικός (ποιξω), poetic. But see ὃ 315. ὃ; 


Ὁ, -σήριος, -d, τον, uctive; as, σώξω, to save, σωτήριος, saving (ef. § 306. b). 


6. τῆμος, τον (and -os, τη, -ov), implying jitness, both active and passive, ana 
annexed after the analogy of different verbal nouns; as, στρέφω, reson 
(§ 305. b), σρόφιμωος, fitted to impart or to receive nourishment, nutritious, vig- 
orous, χρήσιμος (χράομεαι, χρῆσις), fit for use. 


d. -μων, -uov (G. -ovos), active; as, ἐλεέω, to pity, sialinies, compassionate, 
μνήμων (μέμνημαι), mindful. 


᾿ς 6, -φός, -ἥ, τόν, passive, signifying that which is done, either as a matter of 
fact (like the Lat. Part. pass. in -tus), or more commonly as a matter of habit 
or possibility ; thus, ὁράω, to see, sears, seen, visible. 


f. -σίος, -d, τον, passive, expressing necessity or obligation (like the Lat. 
Part. in -ndus) ; as, ποιέω, to make, roimrtos, that which is to be made. 


\ Nore. Verbals in -αός and -réos commonly follow, in respect to the form 
ef the root, the analogy of the 1 Aor. pass. ; as, aigiw, to take, Pf. P. ἥρημαι, 
A. P. ἡρέθην, aigsris, αἱρετέος + παύω, to stop, Pf. P. πέπαυμαι, A. P. ἐπαύσθην, 
Waveris, παυστίος. . 


δ. τνός, -ἥ, τόν, passive (compare the Part. in -yevos); as, σέδω, to revere, 
(σεδ-νός) oeuvres, revered, ποθεινός (ποθέω), longed for. 


h. -ἄρός (-ἅ, -ὄν), -ἅς (6. -ἄδος), &e.; as, χαλάω, to slacken, χα ages, 
black; φέρω, to beur, φοράς, fruitful; Atyw, to choose, λογάς, chosen; λοιπός 
(asiew), remaining. 


315. Π. From Nouns. These have the following 
endings, with, in general, the significations that are annexed : 


a. τος, belonging to; if a vowel precedes, commonly uniting with it in a 
diphth (-asos, ~s105, -0105, -wos, -vios), and often, without respect to this, 
e form -εἰος (Ion. -ἤϊος, ὃ 46. B.), especially from names of persons 
and animals. Many putriuls (properly adjectives, but often used substantively) 
belong to this class. Thus, οὐρανός, heaven, οὐράνιος, belonging to heaven, heaven- 
ly, φόνιος (φόνος), of murder, murderous; ἀγοραῖος (ἀγορά), pertaining to the 
forum, ᾿Αθηναῖος (Abjivas), Athenian, ϑεῖος (ϑε-6ς), divine, ᾿Αργεῖος ( “Agyss 
~t-0s), Argive, isos (ἕως), Ion. ἠοῖος (ἠώς, -b-05), of the morning, πήχυιος 
{πῇῆχυ!), of a cubit’s length ; ἀνθρώπειος ( ἄνθρωπος), human, Ὃ μήρειος (Ὅμηρος), 
Homeric, ϑήρειος (ϑήρ), of wild beasts. 


Nores. a. From the neuter of. these ἀνὰ has come a class of sub- 
stantives denoting an appropriated building or other place, instrument, &e. ; as, 
᾿Αϑήναιον ( Αδηνᾶ), Θησεῖον, Μουσεῖον, temple of Minerva, of Theseus, of the 
Muses, κουρεῖον (κουρεύς), barder’s shop, γραμμασεῖον (γραμματεύς), writing- 
tablet, cf. § 307. 


%. Before -ος and -τὦ (§ 308. a), ¢ often. passes into 7; as, ἐνιαυσός, yeur, 
ἐνίαυσιος, of a year, Μιλήσιος (Μίλητος), Milesian, ἀθανάσία (ἀθάνατος), ime 


en. 11.] ADJECTIVES. — PRONOUNS. 249 


Ὁ. -ἰκός, -%, τόν (if ν precede, -xé5; if simple « or εἰ, -¥x4¢ 3 while -csos 
commonly makes -αἰκός), reluting to. These adjectives in κός are often formed 
from words that are themselves derivative. They apply to things rather than 
to persons. When used of the latter, they commonly signify related to in 
quality, or sit for, and are mostly derived from personal appellations. Thus, 
τέχνη, art, τεχνικός, relating to art, artistic; δοῦλος, slave, δουλικός, servile; 
Actus, Libyan, Διξυκός, pertaining to the Libyans or Libya; Κορίνθιος, Corin- 
thiun, Kogivbiaxds + σαίονδεῖος, spondee, σαιονδειακός, spondaic ; ᾿Αχαιός, Achean, 
᾿Αχιαἴκός, and less Att. ’Ayasixts+ ποιητής, poet, ποιητικός, poetic, ῥηπορικός, 
(ῥήτωρ), rhetorical, orgarnyixis (crgurnyos), fit for a general. See) 814. ἃ. 

Ὁ. τεὸς, ~&, -ov, and ~Ivos, τὴ, -ον (proparoxytone), denoting material, -en; as, 
χεῦσός, yold, χρύσεος ( 18), golden, ξύλινος (ξύλον), wooden. 

d. -ἰνόξ, seldom -ἴνός, expressing time or prevalence ; as, ἡμερινός (ἡμέρα), 
by day, πεδινός (πέδον), level, ὀρεινός (ὄρος, -&-05), mountainous, 

6. τῆνος, -ηνός, -ἄνός, patrials, from names of cities and countries out of 
Greece ; as, Tagavrivos (Τάρας, -avros), Tarentine, Κυζικηνός (Κύζικος), Cyzi- 
cene, Σαρδιᾶῶνός (Σάρδεις), Sardian. 

f. -ρός, -ερός, -ngds, -αλέος, -ηλός, -ωλός, -εἰς (-εσσᾶ, -εν, G. -syros), τώδης (- ες» 
G. τεῦς ; contr. from -ο-εἰδής, from εἶδος, form), expressing fulness or quality ; 
as, αἰσχρός (αἶσχος), shameful, φοξερός (φόξος), fearful, πονηρός. πόνος), painful, 
ϑαρσαλέος (ϑάρσος)), courageous, ἐπατηλός (ἀπάτη), deceitful, φειδωλός rnb 
parsimonious, ὑλήεις (ὕλη), woody, πυρόεις (πῦρ, -υρός), fiery, χαρίεις (χάρις 
graceful, σφηκώδης (σφήξ), wasp-like, ψαμμώδης (ψάμμος), sandy. 

§ 316. ΠΙ. From ΑΡΙΕΟΤΙΝῈΒ anp Apverss. 1. From 
some adjectives and adverbs, derivatives are formed in the 
same manner as from nouns; thus, καϑαρός, clean, καϑάριος, 
cleanly, ἐλευϑέριος (ἐλεύϑερος), liberal, ϑηλυκός (ϑῆλυς), femi- 
nine, χϑεσινός (χϑές), of yesterday. 

2. The adjective has in Greek, as in other languages, two 
strengthened forms, of which the one may be termed dual, 
denoting choice between two objects, and the other plural, de- 
noting choice among a number of objects. 


The most obvious examples of these strengthened forms are the comparative 
and superlative degrees, commonly so called. Other examples of the compara- 
tive or dual strengthened form are, (a) the correlatives πότερος ; whether of the 
two? ποτερός, ἕτερος (formed from the 3d Pers. pron. as the positive, 4 23, 
§ 141, or, as some think, from the numeral εἷς), one of the two, οὐδέτερος, ὁπό- 
τιρος, ἑκάτερος, auPoregos (see §] 63, and compare the Lat. wter, neuter, alter, 
and the Eng. whether, either, neither, other); (6) the following implying a con- 
sideration of two objects or properties ; δεξισερός (poet-), Lat. dexter, right 
(rather than left), ἀριστερός, sinister, left, δεύσερος, second, ἡμέτερος, noster, our 
(rather than yours, or any one’s else), ὑμέσερος, vester, your, σφέτερος, their, &e. 

Ἵ 24). Other examples of the superlative or plural strengthened form are, 
6) the correlatives πόστος ; which in order? or, one of how many? swtoros, 
ἕκαστος (Y 63); (d) all ordinals except δεύτερος (see 25). 


C. Pronouns. 
§ 317%. For the formation of the most commen pronouns, 


250 DERIVATION. [BooxK 11° 


566 §§ 141-154. The Greek abounds in correlative pronouns 
and adverbs (see Ἵ 63), in respect to many of which it will be 
observed that, when they begin with 1-, they are indefinite, or 
interrogative (with a change of accent); with τ. definite ot 
demonstrative ; with the rough breathing, relative definite, and 
with om-, relative indefinite. Thus, πόσος ; how much? ποσός, 
of a certain quantity, τόσος, τοσοῦτος and τοσόσδε (4 150. α), 
so much, ὅσος, as much, ὁπόσος, how much soever ; πότε ; when? 
ποτέ, at some time, tore, then, ore, when, ondte, whensoever. 


D. VeERBs. 


§ 318. I. From Nouns anv Ansectives. Of these 
the chief endings and the prevailing significations are as fol- 
lows. 


a. -iw, -evw, and (mostly from nouns of Dec. I.) -déw, to be or do that 
which is pointed out by the primitive ; as, φίλος, friend, φιλέω, to be a friend, 
to love, εὐδαιμονέω (εὐδαίμων, -oves), to be prosperous, ἀτυχίω (ἀτυχής), to be 
unfortunate, rortutw (πόλεμος), to wage war; δουλεύω (δοῦλος), to be a slave, 
to serve, βασιλεύω (βασιλεύς), to reign, χορεύω (χορός), to dance; τολμάω 
(σόλμα), to be bold, to dare, tipméw (τιμή), to honor. 


Ὁ. -éw (mostly from words of Dec. II.), -aivw and -ύνω (mostly from ad- 
jectives), to make that which is pointed out by the primitive ; as, δῆλος, evi- 
dent, δηλόω, to make evident, δουλόω (δοῦλος), to make one a slave, to enslave, 
χουσόω (χρυσός), to make golden, to gild, “«“περόω (πτερόν), to make winged, to 

ish with wings, στεφανόω (oriPavos), to crown; Asuxaivw (λευκός), to 
whiten, σημαίνω (σῆμα), to signify, ἡδύνω (ἡδύς), to sweeten. 


6, -ifw, and (chiefly when formed from words which have « or ἡ in the 
last syllable, or when preceded by 4, ef. §§ 310, a, $15. b) -é%w; from names 
of persons or animals, imitative (denoting the adoption of the manners, language, 
opinions, party, &c.) ; from other words, used in various senses, but mostly 
active ; as, Μηδίζω (Μῆδος), to imitate or favor the Medes, “Ελληνίζω, to speak 
Greek, Δωρίζω and Δωριάξω, to live, talk, sing, or dress like the Dorians, Didur- 
xigw, to be of Philip's party, ἀλωπεκίζω (ἀλώπηξ), to play the for; πλουτίξω 
(xrcbrns), to make rich, εὐδαιμονίζω, to esteem happy, ϑερίζω (Sigos), to harvest, 
ἰρίξω (ei), to contend, ἑορτάζω (ἑἱορπή), to make a feast, δικάζω (δίκη), to 
Judge, ϑαυμάξω (ϑαῦμα), to wonder, 


ἃ, -w with simply a strengthening of the penult, more frequently active ; 
as, xabzeos, pure, καθαίρω, to purify, ποικίλλω (ποικίλος), to variegate, μαλάσ- 
vw (μαλᾶκός), to soften. 


. § 8319. IL From Oruer Vers. These are 


1.) Desideratives, formed in -ctiw, from the Fut.; as, γελάω, to laugh, 
γελασείω, to wish to laugh, Pl. Phedo, 64 b, σολεμησείω (wortuiw), to wish 
for war, Th. i. 33. Desideratives are also formed in -séw (rarely -éw), chiefly 
from verbal nouns ; as, μανθάνω, to learn, μαθητής, disciple, wabnriaw, to wish 
to become a disciple, Ar. Nub. 183, ergarnyséw (ergarnyos), to desire military 
command, vii. 1. 33, ϑανατάω (Sdévaros), to desire death, Pl. Phedo, 64 b. 


2.) Various prolonged forms in -ζω, -cxw, ὥς, (see §§ 265-300), some- 


cx. 11.} VERBS. — ADVERBS. 235, 


times frequentative or wntensive, as, pirew, to throw, prrréZw, to throw to and fro, 
σεένω, to sigh, σπσενάζω, to sigh deeply ; sometimes inceptive, as, iCéw, to be at 
the age of puberty, ἡξάσκω, to come to the age of puberty ; sometimes causative, 
as, μεθύω, to be intoxicated, usbicxw, to intoxicate; sometimes diminutive, as, 
ἰξαπατάω, to cheat, ἐξαπατύλλω (cf. ὃ 312), to cheat a little, to humbug, Ar. 
Eq. 1144; but often scarce differing in force from the primitive form 
(§§ 254-258, 265). 


E. ApbveErss. 
§ 320. Most adverbs belong to the following classes. 


I. Ostique Cases oF Nouns anp ApjecTives, employed 
as circumstantial adjuncts (see Syntax). With an adjective 
thus employed, a noun is strictly to be supplied. Many of 
these oblique cases have antique forms, and many belong to 
themes that are not in use. Examples, 


1, GENITIVES, (a) in -θεν, denoting the place whence (ὃ 91): (6) τῇ -ov 
denoting the place where; as, οὗ [sc. τόπου or χωρίου], in which place, where, 
αὐτοῦ, there, juov, in the same place, οὐδαμοῦ, nowhere: (6) in -ns 5 aS, αἴφνης, 
of a sudden, ἑξῆς, inorder: (d) weoinos (προίξ), of a gift, gratis, &e. 


2. Dattves, (a) in -o, -οθ, of Dec. II. sing., and in -ησι(ν), -aor(v) of 
Dec. I. pl., denoting the place where (in adverbs in -a derived from pronouns, 
this commonly passes into the idea of whither, see § 63, and compare the fa- 
miliar use of where, there, &c., in English) ; as, ᾿Αδήνησι, at Athens; see 
§§ 90, 96. 5: (6) in τ-ῃ (-n), -a (-a), -as of Dec. I., and in - of Dec. IIL, 
denoting way, place where, or time when; as, rairy, [sc. ὁδῷ] in this way, thus, 
[sc. χώρᾳ} in this place, here, πανταχῆ, every way, everywhere, πεζῇ, on foot, 
ἰδίᾳ, privately, xapai, on the ground, πάλαι, in olden time, ἕκησι, by the will of, 
ἶφι (ὃ 89. β. d), ἄγχι, near, ἦρι, early, I. 360. 


Nore. Adverbial Datives of Dec. I. are written by most editors with an 
s subse., except when they have no Nom. in use, and by some even then. 
See ὃ 25. β. 


8. ACCUSATIVES ; a8, ἀκμήν, at the moment, χάριν, on account of, δίκην, like, 
and the Neut. sing. and pl. of adjectives. 5 


§ 32. IU. Derivatives sieniryine, (1.) Manner, in, 


a. -ws, from adjectives. The adverb may be formed by changing » of the 
Gen. pl. into ¢; as, σοφός, G. pl. σοφῶν, wise, σοφῶς, wisely, ταχύς, ταχέων, 
swift, ταχέως, swiftly, σαφῶς (σαφής, -ἔων, -wv), Ion. σαφέως, evidently. 


Ὁ. -ndov or -δὸν (perhaps kindred with εἶδος, form), chiefly from nouns ; -δην 
or -ἄδην, chiefly from verbs (those in -ἄδην commonly conforming to other 
verbals) ; and -δα ; as, σλινδηδόν (σλίνθος), in the form of bricks, Hat. ii. 96, 
βοτρῦδόν (βότρυς), in clusters, B. 89, ἀναφανδόν, or -δά (ἀναφαίνω), openly, 
xovedny, OF -da (κρύπεω), secretly, σσοράδην (σπείρω, σαοράς), scatteringly 
These appear to be Acc. forms (cf. § 320. 3); thus, Sing. fem. -δην, neut. 
-dev, Pl. neut. -da. 


c. τί or -εἴ, especially from imitative verbs (ὃ 318. 6, -i# becoming -.9/), 
and in compounds of ἐ- privative, αὐτός, and ras + as, Mnd-eri, like the Medes, 
ἝἙλληνισφί, in the Greek language, ὠμιεσθί (μισθός), without pay, ὠμαχεί. and 


252 COMPOSITION. | BOOK Mm. 


ἢ, or =i, without battle, αὐτοχειρί (tie), with one’s own hand, ravdnuss 
(δῆμος), with the whole people. These appear to be Dat. forms (cf. ὃ 320. 2) 
_ ἃ, -5 added to a palatal; as, dva-piyvius (r. wry-, ὃ 294), to mix up, 
ἐναμίξ, confusedly, pellmell, παραλλάξ (παρ-αλλάσσω, ᾧ 274. y), alternately. 
᾿ς (2.) Time waen, in -τε (Dor. -x«), or, for more specific ex- 
pression, in -ἐκᾶ ; as, ἀλλότε (ἄλλος), at another time, αὐτίκα 
(αὐτός), at the very moment. See {] 63. 


(3.) Pack WHITHER, in -oe (which appears to be a softened 
form of -de, § 322. Ill.,.or at least kindred with it); as, ov- 
ρανόσε, to heaven, ἐκεῖσε, thither, ἑτέρωσε, to the other side. 
See 7] 63. τὸ 

(4.) Numper, in -ἀκις. See {] 25. Il. 


§ 322. Ill. Prerosirions wirh THEIR Cases; as, (προ 
ἔργου) προὔργου, before the work, to the purpose, παραχρῆμα, 
upon the affair, immediately, (δι᾽ 0) διό, on account “ἢ which, 
wherefore, (ἐν ποδῶν ὁδῷ) ἐμποδών, in the way of the feet, 
"Adnvate (from ᾿ϑήνας, and -δε, an inseparable preposition de- 
noting direction towards, δῷ 51. N., 150. 4), to Athens. 


IV. Derivatives FRoM Prepositions, or PREPosITIONS 
USED WITHOUT. CASES ; as, ἔξω (ἐξ), without, εἴσω (ec), within 
πρός, besides. 


I]. Formation or Compounp Worps. 


§ 323. In composition, the word which modifies or limits 
the other, usually precedes; as, νομο-ϑέτης (νόμος, τἐϑημι) 
law-maker. 


The exceptions consist mainly of a verb or preposition followed by a noun, 
and are for the most part poetic. Among the verbs which are most frequently 
so placed in prose are @iAéw, to love, and pivtw, to hute; thus, Φιλ-ἄνθρωστος, 
man-loving, μισο- πέρτης, Persian-hater. 


§ 324. A. The rirsr worn has commonly its radical form 
with simply euphonic changes. These changes, besides those 
which the general rules of orthoépy require, consist chiefly, 


1.) In the insertion of a union-vowel, which, after a substuntive or adjective, 
is commonly -o-, but sometimes --, -«-, or -s-; and, after a verh, -s-, -1-, -0-, 
-01-, ΟΥ̓́-αἰ- ; AS, σαιδ-δ-σρίθης (παῖς, -δός, πρὶ ΘωῚ, instructer, δικ-ο- λόγος (δίκη, 
λέγω), advocate, δημιουργός (Lon. Inpes-o-seryos, from δήμιος and ἔργον), artisan, 
(ya-o-mergia, from yaa, contr. γῇ, and usreiw, §§ 35, 98. a) γεωμεσρία, ge- 
ometry, (vd-0-xbgos + νᾶδς, νεώς, aNd xogiw) νεωκόρος, keeper of a temple, Savar- 
o-Pogos and -η-φΦόρος (ϑάνατος, φίρω), death-bringing, Misch. Ag. 1176, Cho. 
369, ξιφ-η-φόρος and -ο- φόρος (ξίφος, -sos, φέρω), sword-bearing, ἀγορ-ἄ-νόρμος 
(ἀγορά, νέμεω), clerk of the market, ὑτοὺὃ.-ἄ-νιπ τήρ (πούς, νίζω), foot-bath, Hdt. 
i. 172, αυρ-ι- γενής (wie, γίγνομαι, fire-born, δδιοι-πόρο; (δός, oben), way- 
ΤΟΥ, μεσ-αι- πόλιος (μέσος, πολιός), half-gray, N. 361 5 ἀρχ-έ-χορος (ἄρχω, 


cn. 11. FIRST WORD.—LAST WORD. 253 


Χορός), chorus-leading, rega-t-xtguvvos (rigaw, κεραυνός), delighting in thunder, 
A. 419, Asr-o-rakia (λείπω, σάξις), leaving one’s post. 


2.) In the insertion of ¢, commonly connected by a union-vowel either to 
the succeeding or preceding word, and sometimes even to both ; as, (ῥίσ'-σ- 
aor) ῥίψασαις (ῥίππω, aowis), coward, τελε-σ-φόρος (τέλος, -t-05, φέρω), 
fulfilling, κερασφόρος, horned, φωσφόρος, light-bringing ; λῦ-σι-τελής (λύω, τέλος), 
income-paying, profitable, vav-ci-wogos (ναῦς, «τόρος) navigable, (wiy-co-6.) μιξο- 
οάρδαρος (μίγνῦμι, βάρβαρος), mived with barbarians; ϑε-οσ-εχϑρία (ϑεός, ix- 
$63), impiety, φερ-ἔσ-Θιος (φέρω, Bios), life-giving ; παμ-εσί- χρὼς {τέμινω, χρώς), 
wounding, Δ. 511. In some of these cases, the σ' appears to have been bor- 
rowed from the theme or the Dat. pl. of nouns, and in others, perhaps, from 
the Aor. of verbs, or a verbal. 


3.) In adopting a shorter form from the theme, or an early root; as, ziu- 
o-Cadis (αἷμα, -ατος, Baxrw), blood-bathed, φιλ-ό-απονος (φιλέτω from φίλος, 
πόνος), labor-loving. : 


Nores. a. The mode in which the constituent words are united often 
oe especially in verse, upon the quantity of the syllables which compose 
em. 


B. In some compounds, chiefly poetic, the first word has a form like that 
of the Dat. sing. or pl. without change; as, νυκσι-σόλος, roaming by night, 
Ear. Ion, 718, σειχεσι-σλήτης, wall-approacher, E. 31. 


§ 32S. Rewares. 1. If the first word is a particle, it is commonly 
unchanged except by the general laws of euphony. For elision in preposi- 
tions, see $§ 41, 4:, 192. 1. ᾿Αμφί, like σερί, often retains its vowel. In 
the other prepositions, the elision is rarely omitted, except in the Ion., par- 
ticularly in the Ep. before some words which begin with the digamma. For 
elision before a consonant, see ὃ 48.2. [Πρό sometimes unites with a vowel 
pore by crasis; as, σρότοστος προῦπσος, προ-έχω προὔχω, x. 905 see 

192. 1. 

2. Some particles occur only in composition, and are hence called insepara- 
hle. Of these, the most important are, 

a.) ἀ-, commonly denoting privation or negation, and then called ἀ- priva 
tive, as, ἄ- παις, without children, ἄς σοφος, unwise; but sometimes denoting 
union, collection, or intensity, as, ἀ-δελφός (δελφύς), brother, ἀ-πενής (τείνων, 
strained. ᾿Α- privative (commonly ἀν- before a vowel) is akin to ἄνευ, without, 
to the Lat. in-, and to the Eng. and Germ. un-; ἀ- copulative appears to be 
akin to dua, together, Akin to & priv. is νη- (Lat. ne) ; thus, νηλεής (tases), 

b.) δυσ-, ill, mis-, un-; as, δύστφημος, ill-omened, dve-rvyia, mis-fortuns, 
duc-dainwy, un-happy. 

9.) The intensive ὠρι- (kindred with *Agns, § 161. R.), ἐρι-» Ja-, and da-; 
as, dei-duxeus, very tearful, ζά- πλουσος, very rich. 


§ 326. B. The form of the tast worp depends upon 
the part of speech to which the compound belongs. 


1. If the compound is a NouN or. ADJECTIVE, it commonly 
takes the most obvious form which is appropriate to the class 
22 


254 COMPOSITION. | BOOK I. 


of words to which it belongs. Often, the last word, if itself a 
noun or adjective, undergoes no change; as, ὅμό: δουλος, fel- 
low-slave, ἄ-παις, childless. If the last element is a verb, 
the compound adjective or masculine substantive ends com 
monly in, 


a. -os. This ending (which is far the most common) has both an actwe 
and a passive sense, distinguished, for the most part, by the accent, which, if. 
the penult i is short, the active compound commonly takes upon the penult, but 
the passive upon the antepenult ; as, Aso-Coros (aldos, βάλλω), throwing atone, 
Asb0-Coros, thrown at with stones. 


Ὁ. τῆς (-85, G. -e05) ; as, sb-aeeans, becoming, αὐτάρκης, self-sufficing. 


6. τῆς or τας (G. -ov), and γπρ or τωρ, denoting the agent (§ 306. a, b); 
vowo-birns, legislator, wugo-rwrns (δ 92. 2), ὀρνιθο-θήρας, bird-catcher, £83 
Corne, shepherd, Σ. 529, rasd-ortrwe, child-murderer. 


Remark. In compounds of this class, if the last word begins with 4, ¢, or 
e, followed by a single consonant, this vowel is commonly lengthened to » or 
ω; as, σσρατηγός (στράτος, ἄ ἄγω, general, δυσήλατος (δυσ-, cate). hard to 
ditt over, ἀνώνυμος (ἐς, ὄνομα, ὃ 44. 5), nameless. 


§ 327. 2. If the compound is a vers, it is important to 
observe that verbs are compounded directly and without change 
with prepositions only ; and that, in other cases, compound 
verbs are derivatives from compound nouns or adjectives ex- 
isting or assumed. 


Thus, AauCdé»w, to take, unites directly with the prep. ἀνά, up, to form 
αναλαμᾷξάνω, to take wp; but it cannot so unite with the noun ἔργον, work, and 
hence the idea to take work, to contract, is expressed by igyo-AaCiw, derived 
from the compound verbal ἐργο-λάξορ, contractor. So the verb compounded 
of tases, horse, and στρέφω, to feed, is ἱπ'ποτροφέω from ixxorgsgus, horse-heeper. 
Sometimes the form of the verb happens not to be changed in passing through 
the compound verbal ; thus, from σῖτος and σοιέω, is formed σιτοτ-σοιός, bread- 
maker, and from this again ciro-woiiw, to make bread. 


Remarks. 1. The union of the preposition with the verb, as not affecting 
the form of the verb, and admitting of separation by tmesis (§ 328. N.), is 
termed loos® or improper composition, in distinction from that close or preper 
composition which forms one inseparable word. 


ᾧ 32S. 2. In pronouns and particixs there is a still looser form 
οἱ composition, consisting in the aggregation of words, sometimes really and 
sometimes only apparently combined in sense. In these aggregates, the or- 
thography varies, the words being sometimes written together, chiefly when 
the last is an enclitic, and sometimes separately. Among the chief words 
that are thus affixed to others are, 


a. The INDEFINITE PRONOUN σὴς " as, ὅσαις, whoever, οὔτις, no one, εἴσις, 
if any one. 
b. The PARTICLEs, 


ἄν (Ep. κέ or κέν, Dor. x#), contingent or indefinite; as, és ἄν, whoever, ὅσα 
or ὅτ᾽ ἄν, w 


cu. 11.] PRONOUNS AND PARTICLES. 255 


γέ (Dor. yz), at least, emphatir as, ἔγωψε, I at least, σύγε, you surely, 
rourd γε, this certainly, tarsi γε, since at least. 

δή, now (shorter form of ἤδη) ; 88, ὅσφις δή, whoever now, viv δή, just now. 

δήποτε (δή ποτε), ever now; as, ὁσσισδήποτε, whosoever now, ri δήποτε 5 what 
in the world ? 

οὖν (contr. from ἐόν, it being so, J 55), then, therefore, yet, often added to an 
indefinite pronoun or adverb to strengthen the expression of indefiniteness ; as, 
éoricovy, whoever then, ὁπωσδησοσοῦν, howsoever now then. 

wie (shorter form of περί), very, particularly, just ; as, ὅσσερ, who in par- 
ticular, ὥσπερ, just as. 

wort, at any time, ever, often added to interrogatives to strengthen the ex- 
pression; as, σί ποτέ ἔστι τοῦτο; [what at any time is this¥?] what in the 
world is this? or, what can this be ? 

σέ, the simplest sign of connection, and hence often joined to other connec- 
tive words, before their use was established, to mark them as such. In the 
Ep. and Ion. this is found to a great extent ; but in the Att. scarce occurs, 
except in drs, and dort, as, οἷός τε, able, possible, and ἐφ᾽ ors, on condition that. 


Nore. In cases of loose composition, other words, especially particles, are 
sometimes interposed. When a preposition is thus separated from a verb, the 
figure is called Tmesis (ryijois, cutting) ; as, ix δὲ πηδήσας, and leaping forth, 
Eur. Hee. 1172. 


ΒΟΟΚ ΠῚ. 
SYNTAX. 


᾿Μόδονρ ὄφαίνενο 


Homer. 


§ 329. Sywrax, as the DOCTRINE OF SENTEN 
CES, treats either of the offices and relations of 
words as arranged in sentences, or of the offices 
and relations of these sentences themselves. 


Nore. For a general view of the orrIcEs oF worps, as subject, predi- 
cate, copula, attribute, compellative (person addressed), appositive (substantive 
in apposition), adjunct (modifying or limiting substantive not in apposition), 
whether complement or circumstance (i. e. regarded as completing the idea of 
the modified word, especially as a direct or indirect object, or as denoting some 
circumstance respecting it, as time, place, means, &c.), whether exponentiai or 
nude (i. e. attached with or without a preposition), exponent (sign of office or 
relation, as preposition, conjunction, &c.), &c.: of their RELATIONS, as agree- - 
ment or concord, government or regimen, &c.: of the DISTINCTIONS OF SENTEN- 
CES, as simple or compound, distinct (in which the predicate has a distinct form 
as a finite verb) or incorporated (in which the predicate is incorporated in 
another sentence as an infinitive or participle), intellective or volitive (expressing 
an act of the understanding, or of the will), declarative or interrogative, actual 
or contingent (having respect to fact, or founded upon supposition), positive or 
negative, leading or dependent, substantive, adjective, or adverbial (performing 
the office of a substantive, adjective, or adverb in another sentence), protasis 
(introduction, condition) or apodosis (conclusion), &c.: of their MODES oF 
CONNECTION, incorporation, subordination, codrdination, and simple succession : 
of their EXPONENTS, as connective or characteristic (denoting the connection 
of sentencés, or simply distinguishing their character) ; conjunctions, copula- 
tive, final (denoting purpose), conditional, complementary (introducing a sen- 
tence used substantively), &c. ; connective pronouns and adverbs, whether rela- 
tive or complementary (referring to an antecedent, or introducing a sentence 
used substantively) ; characteristic particles, pronouns, and adverbs ; &c.: of the 
_ ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS AND SENTENCES, as logical, rhetorical, rhythmical, pe- 
riodic, &c.: and of the Figures or ΞΎΝΤΑΧ, as, ELLIPSIS (omission ), syllepsis and 
zeugma (varieties of compound construction, according as the word referring to 
a compound subject has the form required by all the substantives in the subject 
taken together, or that which is required by one of them taken singly); PLEO- 
NAsM (redundance), periphrasis or circumlocution ; ENALLAGE (use of one word 
or form for another), metaphor, metonymy, synecdoche, synesis (when the con- 
struction follows the sense, in disregard of grammatical form), attraction 
(when a word is drawn from its appropriate form by the influence of another 
word), anacolithon (a want of agreement between two parts of a sentence, 


ΟΕ. 1.] GENERAL REMARKS. — sUBSTANTIVE. 201 


arising from a change of construction), vision, change of number; HyPERBA 
TON (disregard of the common laws of arrangement),-anastrophe (inversion) 
parenthesis, &c., see General Grammar. 


§ 330. Among the especial causes of vaRIETY in the © 
syntax of the Greek are, 


1.) Its freedom in the use of either generic or specific forms of expression 
In the development of a language, new forms arise to express more specifically 
. what has been generically expressed by some older form. This older furm 
thus becomes narrowed in its appropriate sphere, and itself more specific in its 
expression. But habit, which is mighty everywhere, is peculiarly the arbiter 
of language ; — ᾿ 

* Usus, 
Quem penes arbitrium est et jus et norma loquendi” ; — 


and, wherever the new distinction is unimportant, there is a tendency to em 
ploy the old and familiar form in its original extent of meaning. The result 
is, that an idea may be often expressed by two or more forms, which differ 
from each other in being more or less specific ; and the same form may have 
different uses, according as it is employed more generically, or more specifically. 
These remarks apply both to the words of a language, to the forms of those 
words, and to the methods of construction. They apply with peculiar force 
to the Greek, from the freedom and originality of its development, the copi- 
ousness of its vocabulary, the fulness of its forms, and the variety of its 
constructions. Σ 


2.) The prevalence of different dialects in states intimately connected with 
each other by commerce, by alliances, and by national festivals ; and also in 
different departments of literature, without respect to local distinctions (ὃ 6). 
It cannot be thought strange, that forms of expression appropriate to the 
different dialects should have been sometimes interchanged or commingled ; 
or that the laws of syntax should have acquired less rigidity in the Greek, 
than in languages which have but a single cultivated dialect. 


3.) The vividness of conception and emotion, the spirit of freedom, the versu 
tility, the love of variety, and the passion for beauty, which so preéminently 
characterized the Greek mind, and left their impress upon all its productions. 
The Greek language was the development in speech of these characteristics, 
the vivacious, free, versatile, varied, and beautiful expression of Greek genius 
and taste. 


CHAPTER Il. 
"SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 


I. AGREEMENT OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 


§ 331. Rute 1. An appositive agrees in 
case with its subject ; as, 
22% 


258 _ SYNTAX OF fHE SUBSTANTIVE. » [BOOK U1, 


Παρύσατις .. ἡ μήτηρ, Parysatis, the mother, i. 1.4. Ὃ Μαίανδρό 
ποταμός, the river Meander, i. 2.7. Τὰ δὲ ἄδλα ἦσαν σελεγγίδες Ib. 10. 
Ὃ worapis λέγεται Μαρσύας Ib. 8. "Ὄνομα αὐτῷ εἶναι ᾿Αγάθωνα Pl. Prot. 

.8156. Ἧ; αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε '. 1.2. Λαδὼν Τωσσαφέρνην ὡς pi 


λον Ib. 


ᾧ 332. Remarks. 1. Appositives, more frequently, agree with 
their subjects in gender and number, as well as in case; as, ᾿Επύαξα, ἡ Συεννέ 
cis γυνὴ, «τοῦ Κιλίκων βασιλέως, Epyaxa, the wife of Syennesis, the hing 
of the Cilicians, i. 2.12. Σοφαίνετον δὲ τὸν Σσυμφάλιον, καὶ Σωκράτην τὸν 
᾿Αχαιὸν, ξένους ὄντας καὶ τούτους '. 1.11. © 


2. Ετχαρβιθ. The appositive or the subject may be omitted, when it can 
be supplied from the connection ; as, Λύκιος ὁ Lloaveredrou [se. vids], Lycius, 
the son of Polystratus, iii. 3.20. Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥκω παρὰ ot [se. ἐγώ], 1, 
Themistocles, have come to thee, Th. i. 137. ἣν 


8, The sign of special application (ὡς, as) is often omitted ; as, Δι φϑέρας, ds 
εἶχον σκεπάσματα, the skins which they had as coverings, i. 5.10. Κλέαρχον 
δὲ καὶ εἴσω παρεκάλεσε cipCovaoy i. 6. 5. ᾿ 


4. Synests. An appositive sometimes agrees with a subject which is im 
plied in another word; as, ᾿Αθηναῖος ὧν πόλεως cas μεγίστης, being an 
Athenian, a city the greatest, Pl. Apol. 29 ἃ (here πόλεως agrees with ᾿Αθηνῶν, 
of Athens, implied in ’Aénvaios). ᾿Αφίκοντο εἰς Kortwea, πόχιν Ἑλληνίδα, 
Σινωπέων ἀποίκους, οἰκοῦντας V. 5. 3 (here ἀποίκους refers to wroAiras, im- 
plied in wow) ; cf. iv. 8. 22, v. 3.2. Σὸν rod πρέσξεως Ar. Ach. 93. 


§ BBB. 5. Arrraction. A substantive intimately related to anoth- 
er is sometimes put in apposition with it by attraction. In this construction, 
the appositive usually denotes a part, or a circumstance, and is often joined 
with a participle, taking the place of the Genitive absolute. Thus, Εὐφλεκσα 
δὲ τὰ πρόθυρα αὐτῶν, φοίνικος μὲν ai ϑύρα, πεποιημέναι, their portuls are 
easily set on fire, the doors being made of the palm-tree, Cyr. vii. 5. 22, "Ἄλλο 


φρίσον ὥρμα ἐξήγετο, φοινικίσι καταπεσσα μένοι οἱ tage: Ib. viii. 3. 12. 


6. Some relations may be expressed either by an appositive or an adjunct ; 
and one of these constructions is sometimes used where the other would seem 
‘more appropriate. Thus, Todrov σὸ εὖρος δύο πλέθρα, of this the breadth 
is two a,i. 2.55 but, Tod δὲ Μαρσύου rd εὖρός ἔστιν εἴκοσι καὶ wives 
ποδῶν, and the breadth of the Marsyas is twenty-five feet, Ib. 8. Tlorads 
. εὖρος δύο πλέθρων Ib. 23 5 but, Τάφρος .., rd μὲν εὖρος ὀργυιαὶ wives 
i. 7.14, Δέκα μναῖ εἰσφορά - but, Δυοῖν μιναῖν πρόσοδον, Vect. iii. 9, 10. 
"Eon: δὲ ἡ χώρα .. ws εἴκοσι στάδιοι ν. 8.11. Πασῶν ᾿Α δῇνα, τιμιωτάτη 
worus Soph. Gd. C. 108 ; but, "Ἔστ᾽ de’ ᾿Αθηνῶν toe’ ἀπόρθητος πόλις Asch. 
Pers. 348. 


7 AnacoLuTHon. An appositive sometimes differs in case from its sub 
ject, through a change of construction : as, Margi ¢’, ᾿Ερίξοιαν λέγω, and to 
my mother, Eribea I mean (for Muri τ᾿ ‘EgiGoig, and to my mother Eribea), 
Soph. Aj. 569. See also § 344. 

§ BSB4a: sa word, in apposition with a sentence not used substantively, 
is commonly in the Accusative, as expressing the effect of the action’; but is 
sometimes in the Nominative, as if an inscription marking the character of 
the sentence. Thus, Ἑλένην κτάνωμεν, Μενέλεῳ λύπην σπικράν, let us slay 


cH ΚΒ] Ὁ USE OF THE NUMBERS. 2A4 


Helen, [which would be] a bitter grief to Menelaus, Eur. Or. 1105. rion 
μιαίνεται πόλει τ᾽ ὄνειδος καὶ ϑεῶν &rimia, our garlands are profuned, a 
dishonor to the city, and an insult to the gods, Eur. Heracl. 72. Τὸ δὲ révrwy 
μέγισφον..) τὴν μὲν σὴν χώραν αὐξανομένην ὁρᾷς, but the greatest thing of ail, 
you see your own territory increasing, Cyr. ν. 5.94. Τὸ λοίσθιον δὲ, Θριγκὸς 
ἀθλίων κακῶν, δούλη γυνὴ γραῦς Ἑλλάδ᾽ εἰσαφίξομαι Eur. Tro. 489. Ἡμῶν δὲ 
γεννωμένων, τὸ τοῦ κωμῳδοποιοῦ, οὐδ οἱ γείσονες σφόδρα «ι αἰσθάνονται, ‘aS 


the comic poet says,’ Pl. Ale. 121 d. 


Nore. This use of the Nom. and Acc. may be often explained by attraction 
(δ. 333) to the subject or object of the verb. 


9. The whole and its parts, or a part, are often found in the same case, 
either by regular apposition (as when the whole is simply divided into its parts, 
or the parts united to form the whole), or by attraction (§ 333), or from their 
sustaining similar relations to the same word. This construction has received 
the general name of σχῆμα καθ᾽ ὅλον καὶ μέρος, construction by the whole and 
the part. 


II]. Use or tHe, Numpers. 


§ 335. I. The Srnevtar is sometimes used for the Plural 
in the Greek, as in other languages, to give to the expression 
ter individuality or unity ; as, Tov Ἕλληνα, the Greek 
(—the Greeks), Hdt. i. 69. Ἕρπει δάκρυον ὀμμάτων ἄπος the 
tear trickles from my eyes, Soph. El. 1231. dTiundnu’ εὐϑὺς 
ὄμμα δακρύων Ib. 906. 


Remark. A chorus, from its strict unity, commonly speaks of itself as an 
individual, and is often so addressed or spoken of by others. Not unfrequent- 
ly, the two numbers are mingled; as, ΧΟΡ, Ἐγὼ μὲν, ὦ val, καὶ τὸ σὸν 
σπεύδουσ᾽ ἅμα, καὶ τοὐμὸν αὐτῆς, ἦλθον εἰ δὲ μὴ καλῶς λέγω, σὺ 
νίκα " σοὶ γὰρ ἑψόμεσθ᾽ ἅμα Soph. ΕἸ. 251. ἾΩ ξεῖνοι, μὴ δῆτ᾽ ἀδικηθῶ σοὶ 
πισχεύσας Id. Gd. Ο. 174. ‘Huiv μὲν ἤδη πᾶν τετόξευται Birdos: μένω δί 
isch. Eum. 676. ᾿ὈὈργὰς ξυνοίσω σοι. . Ὕ μεῖς δὲ Ib. 848. 


§ 336. II. The use of the Prurat for the Singular 15 
particularly frequent in Greek, especially in abstract nouns, 
in adjectives used substantively, in the names of things com- 
posed of distinct parts, and in vague expressions for persons 
or things ; as, 


Kai ψύχη καὶ ϑάλπη καὶ πόνους φέρειν, to endure both heat, and cold, 
and labor, iii. 1. 23.° Τὰ δεξιὰ τοῦ xéodros, the right of the wing, i. 8. 4. 
Πάτροκλος, ὅς σοι πατρὸς ἦν τὰ φίλταπα, Patroclus, who was thy father’s 
best-beloved, Soph. Ph. 434. Ta Συεννέσιος βασίλεια, the palace of Syenne- 
sis, i. 2. 23; ef. iii. 4. 24, iv. 4.2, 7. Biv ποῖσδε τόξοις, with this bow, 
Soph. Ph. 1335; cf. Τόξον τόδε 288. Τῶν Διός τ᾽ ἐχθρῶν ὕπερ στένεις, ‘for 
the foes’ (Prometheus), Aisch. Pr. 67. Χάλα τοκεῦσιν εἰκότως ϑυμουμένοις, 
* parents’ (a mother), Eur. Hec. 403. 


Remarks. a. An individual often speaks of himself in the Plur., as if 
others were associated with him ; and a woman so speaking of herself, uses 
the masculine, as the generic gender (§ 330. 1); thus, Αἰδούμεεθα γὰρ τὰ At- 
Asvutva μοι, for I am ashamed of what I have said, Eur. Hipp. 244. Zod 


260° SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. [Boor nn. 


γὰρ φθιμένης οὐκέτ᾽ ἄν εἴην ἐν σοὶ δ᾽ ἐσμὲν καὶ ζῇν καὶ μή Td. Ale. 277 
"AAK, ᾿Αρκοῦμεν ἡμεῖς οἱ προθνήσκοντες σέθεν Ib. 383. MHA. Ἡμεῖς κτενοῦ- 
ῥέεν, οἵπερ ἐξεφύσαμεν Id. Med. 1241. "HA. [Πεσούμεθ᾽, εἰ χρὴ, wared σιμω» 
φούμενοι Soph. El. 399, So ἃ οβογιιβ of women (§ 385, R.) uses the masc 
sing. (if the text is correct), Ksiéwy Asimouas, . . λεύσσων Eur. Hipp. 1105. 

β. The Plur. may be used with a singular compellative, when the person ad- 
dressed is associated with others; as, "Ir’, ἔφη, ὑμεῖς, ὦ Ἥριπαίδα, καὶ διδάσκε- 
τε αὐτὸν βουληθῆναι ὥπερ ἡμεῖς. Οἱ μὲν δὴ ἀναστάντες ἐδίδασκον H. Gr. iv. 1. 
11, Ὦ τέκνον, 4 πάρεστον ; Soph. Gd. C. 1102. [Ιροσέλθετ᾽, ὦ παῖ, πατρὶ 
ΤΌ. 1104. ' ' 


§ 337. Ill. In speaking of two, both the PLurat and the 
Dua are used, the one as the more generic, and the other as 
the more specific form (ὃ 330. 1) ; thus, Παῖδες δύο, two children ; 
but, Τὼ παῖδε, the two children, i. 1.1. Compare Τῶν ἀνδρῶν 
vi. 6. 29, τὼ ἄνδρε 30, τοὺς ἄνδρας " .. tovtwr,.. τὼ ἄνδρε 31, 
τούτων 32, τώ te ἄνδρε 34. 

Σ φῷν δ᾽ εὐοδοίη Ζεὺς, τάδ᾽ εἰ versie’ μοι 
Θανόντ᾽, ἐπεὶ οὔ μοι ζῶντί γ᾽ αὖθις ἕξεςον. 
Μέδεσθε δ᾽ ἤδη, χαίρετόν «᾿" οὐ γάρ μ᾽ ἔσι 
Βλέποντ᾽ ἐσόψεσθ᾽ αὖθις. Soph. Gd, C. 1485. 

ReMARKS. κα. Hence, the union of the Plur. and Du. is not regarded as a 
violation of the laws of agreement ; 6. g. [Ipoctrgsxa» δύο νεανίσκω, there ran 
up two young men, iv. 3.10. Δυνάμεις δὲ ἀμφότεραι ἐστὸν, δόξα σε καὶ ἐσιστή- 
un Pl. Rep.478b. ᾿Εγελασάτην οὖν ἄμφω βλέψαντες εἰς ἀλλήλω Pl. Euthyd. 
273 ἃ. , 

B. In the old poetic language, a few examples occur in which the Dual is 
used of more than two (δὲ 85, 172); as, Ξξζάνθε τε καὶ σύ, ἸΤόδαργε, καὶ 
Albay Aduors σε δῖε, νῦν wos σὴν κομιδὴν aaoriverov..* ἀλλ᾽ ἐφομαρτεῖ- 
σον καὶ σπαεύδετον Θ. 185. Πείδεσθε.. + κάθετον, λύσανφε βοείας 
Hom. Ap. 486. Some think that the Dual is never thus used, except when 
two pairs or sets are spoken of. 


Ill. Use or tue Caszs. 


§ 338. Cases serve to distinguish the relations 
of substantives. These relations are regarded, in 
Greek, I. as either piREcT or INDIRECT, and, II. as 
either subjective, objective, or residual. 


I. Of these distinctions, the first is chiefly founded upon the 
directness with which the substantive is related to the verb of 
the sentence. The principal Direct RELATIONS are those of 
the subject and direct object of the verb, and that of direct ad- 
dress. Other relations are, for the most part, regarded as 
INDIRECT. 


II. The second distinction is founded upon the kind or char- 
acter of the relation. The relation is, 


\ 


cH. 1.] USE OF THE CASES. 261 


1. Supsectrve, when the substantive denotes the souRcE, or 
SUBJECT, Of motion, action, or influence; or, in other words 
THAT FROM wuicH ANY THING COMES. 


2. OssecTIvE, when the substantive denotes the END, or oB- 
TECT, of motion, action, or influence ; or, in other words, THAT 
TO wHICH ANY THING GOES. 


3. Resiwuat (residuus, remaining), when it is not referred 
to either of the two preceding classes. 


. $889. The latter of the two distinctions appears to have 
had its origin in the relations of place, which relations are both 
‘the earliest understood, and, through life, the most familiar te 
the mind. ‘These relations are of two kinds; those of Motion, 
and those of rest. Motion may be considered with respect either 
to its SOURCE or its END; and both of thesé may be regarded 
either as direct or indirect. We may regard as the DIRECT 
source of motion, that which produces the motion, or, in other 
words, that which moves; as the INDIRECT souRcE, that from 
which the motion proceeds; as the DIRECT END, that which re- 
cewes the motion, or that to or upon which the motion immedi- 
ately goes ; and as the INDIRECT END, that towards which the 
motion tends. By a natural analogy, the relations of action 
and influence in general, whether subjective or objective, may 
be referred to the relations of motion; while the relations 
which remain without being thus referred may be classed to 
gether as relations of rest. These residual relations, or rela- 
tions of rest, may likewise be divided, according to their office 
in the sentence (§ 338), into the direct and the indirect. We 
have, thus, six kinds of relation, which may be characterized 
in general as follows, and each of which, with a single excep- 
tion, is represented in Greek by an appropriate case. 


A. Dreecr RELATIONS. 


1. Subjective. That which acts. THE NOMINATIVE 

2. Objective. That which is acted upon. THE ACCUSATIVE. 

5. Residual. That which is addressed. THe VOCATIVE. 
B. Invrrect RELATIONS. 

1 Subjective. That from which any thing proceeds. THe GENITIVE. 

2. Objective. That towards which any thing tends. THe DATIVE. 


5. Residual. That with which any thing is associated. ΤῊΝ Dative. 


§ B40. Remarks. «. For the historical development of the Greek 
cases, see §§ 83-88. From the primitive indirect case (which remained as 
the Dat.), a special form was separated to express the subjective relations, but 
none to express the objective. The primitive form, therefore, continued to ex- 
press the objective relations, as well as all those relations which, from any 


262 SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. [Book πὶ 


cause, were not referred to either of these two classes; and hence the Dat. 1. 
both an objective and a residual case. 


β. In the Latin case-system, which has a close correspondence with the 
Greek, there is a partial separation of the indirect objective and residual, or, as 
they are termed in Lat., Datrve and ABLATIVE cases. This separation, 
however, does not appear at all in the Plural, or in Dec. II., and, wherever it 
occurs, may be explained by the mere precession or contraction of final vowels. 
A more important difference between the two languages appears in the exten- 
sive use of the Lat. ABLATIVE. The Romans were more controlled than the 
Greeks by the power of habit, while they were less observant of the minuter 
shades of thought, and niceties of relation. Hence, even after the full de- 
velopment of the Lat. case-system, the primitive indirect case continued to re- 
tain, as it were by the mere force of possession, many of the subjective rela- 
tions, It is interesting to observe how the old Ablative, the once undisputed 
lord of the whole domain of indirect relations, appears to have contested every 
inch of ground with the new claimant that presented himself in the younger 
Genitive. But we must leave the particulars of the contest to the Latin 
grammarian, and content ourselves with merely referring to two or three fa- 
miliar illustrations. Thus, in Lat., the Gen. (as well as the Dat.) was ex- 
cluded from all exponential adjuncts (ὃ 329), because in these the relation was 
sufficiently defined by the preposition. The Gen. of place obtained admission 
into the Sing. of Dec. I. and II., but not into Dee. III. (the primitive declen- 
sion, cf. § 86) or into the Plur. The Gen. of price secured four words (tanti, 
quanti, pluris, and minoris), but was obliged to leave all others to the Abi. 
After words of plenty and want, the use of the two cases was more nearly 
equal. In the construction of one substantive as the complement of unother, the 
Gen. prevailed, yet even here the Abl. not unfrequently maintained its ground, 
if an adjective was joined with it as an ally. In some constructions, the use 
of the Gen. was only a poetic license, in imitation of the Greek. 


γ. The Nominative, from its high office as denoting the subject of dis- 
course, became the leading case, and was regarded as the representative of the 
word in all its forms (its theme). Hence it was employed when the word was 
spoken of as a word, or was used without grammatical construction .§ 343). 


§ 44 ἢ. There are no dividing lines either between prrecr and INDI- 
Riicr, or between subjective, objective, and residual relations. Some relations 
seem to fall with equal propriety under two, or even three heads, according to 
the view which the mind takes of them. Hence the use of the cases not only 
varies in different languages, and in different dialects of the same language, 
but even in the same dialect, and in the compositions of the same author. 


A. Tue Nominative. 


§ 342. Rute Il. The Supsecr or a FINITE 
VERB is put in the Nominative ; as, 


"Exedy δὲ ἐσελεύσησε Δαρεῖος, καὶ κατέστη εἰς σὴν βασιλείαν 'Aorakio. 
Ens, Τισσαφέρνης διαδάλλει τὸν Κῦρον, and when now Darius was dead, and 


Artaxerxes was established in the royal authority, Tissuphernes accuses Cyrus, 
i. 1. 8, 


§ 243. Rote III. Sussrantives 1nDEPEND- 


cH. 1. _ NOMINATIVE. 7 263 


ENT OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION are put in 
the Nominative. 


Nore. The Nominative thus employed is termed the Nominative independ- 
ent or absolute (absoliitus, released, free, sc. from grammatical fetters). See 
§ 340. γ- 

To this rule may be referred the use of the Nom., 


1.) In the inscription of names, titles, and divisions ; as, 
Κύρου ᾿ἀνάθασις,. The Expepirion of Cyrus; Βιθλίον Ππρῶ-- 
tov, Book First. 


2) In exclamations; as, ‘2 δυστάλαιν᾽ ἐγώ, O wretched me! 
Eur. Iph. A. 1315. Θάλαττα, Θάλαττα, the Sea! the Sea! 
iv. 7. 24. 


3.) In address. 


The appropriate case of address is the Voc. (§ 85). But there is often no 
distinct form for this case, and even when there is, the Nom. is sometimes 
employed in its stead (ὃ 81). (a) The Nom. is particularly used, when the 
address is exclamatory or descriptive, or when the compellative is the same with 
the subject of the sentence; as, "2 φίλος, ὦ φίλος, my beloved! my beloved! 
Ar. Nub. 1167. Ἵσπίας ὁ καλός τε καὶ σοφὸς, O Hippias, the noble and the 
wise! Pl. Hipp. Maj. 281 a. (6) Το the head of deseriptive address belong 
those authoritutive, contemptuous, and familiar forms, in which the person who 
is addressed is described or designated as if he were a third person; as, Οἱ δὲ 
οἰκέται, .. ἐπίθεσθε, but the servants,..do you put, Pl. Conv. 218 Ὁ. ‘O Da- 
ληρεὺς « « οὗτος ᾿Απολλόδωρος, οὐ περιμενεῖς, The Phileriun there, Apollodorus, 
stop! wont you? Ib. 172 a. (6) In forms of address which are both direct, 
and likewise exclamatory or descriptive, the Voc. and Nom. may be associated ; 
as, "Q) φίλος ὦ φίλε Βάκχιε Eur. Cycl. 73. ὮΩ οὔσος, Alay Soph. Aj. 89. 
Οὗτος ὦ, ποῖ σὸν πόδ᾽ αἴρεις, δέσποτα Eur. Hel. 1627. "Agiait, καὶ of ἄλλοι 


ii. 5. 39. 


§ 344. AwnacotutHon, &c. From the office of the 
Nom. in denoting the subject of discourse, and from its inde- 
pendent use, it is sometimes employed where the construction 
would demand a different case : — 


1.) In the introduction of a sentence; as, Ὑμεῖς δὲ, . . νῦν δὴ καιρὸς ὑμῖν 
δοκεῖ sivas; You then, . . does it now seem to you to be just the time? vii. 6, 37. 
‘Evibiuay 6 Kigos .., ἔδοξεν αὐτῷ, Cyrus desiring . ., it seemed best to him, 
Cyr. vii. 5.37. Καὶ ἐνταῦθα μᾳχόμενοι καὶ βασιλεὺς καὶ Κῦρος, καὶ 
ai ἀμφ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὑπὲρ ἑκατέρων, ἑπόσοι μὲν τῶν ἀμφὶ βασιλέα ἀπέῤνησκον i. 8. 27. 
"Ὄσισθεν δὲ ἡ φάλα γξ ἰφεπομένη, .. οἱ προσσυγχάνοντες τῶν ἀρχόντων ἐπεμέ- 
Aero Cyr. vi. 3. 2. 

2.) In specification, description, or repetition; as, "Ἄλλους δ᾽ ὃ whys. 
Νεῖλος ἔπεμ ψεν- Ξουσισκἄνης, Πηγαστᾶγών, x. σ- 2., and others the 
vast Nile hath sent; Susiskanes, P., &c., isch. Pers. 33. Τὰ xe) Πύλον ix’ 
ἀμφοςτέρων κατὰ κράτος ἐπολεμεῖσο" ᾿Αθηναῖοι wiv. . περισλέοντες . «, Π ε- 
λοποννήσιο, δὲ .. σαραποπεδευόμενοι Th. iv. 23. Λόγοι δ᾽ ἐν ἀλλήλοισιν 
ἐῤῥόθουν κακοὶ, φύλαξ ἐλέγχων φύλακα Soph. Ant. 259. Θυγάτηρ μεγαλή. 
πορος Ἤεσίωνος, Ἢ τίων, ὃς ἔναιεν Ζ. 395. 


964 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. [ΒΟΟΚ 111. 


8.) In speaking of names or words as such; thus, ΤΠροσείληφε σὴν σῶν grown: 
ρῶν κοινὴν ἐπωνυμίαν συκοφάντης, he has obtained the common appellation of 
the vile, sycopuanT, Aischin. 41.15. Tlageyytu 6 Kigos σύνθημα, Ζεὺς Siw 
axes καὶ ἡγεμών, Cyrus gave out as the pass-word, Jove OUR ALLY ANB 
LEADER, Cyr. iii. 8, 58. ; 


B. Tue GeniIrTIve. 


§ 345. Tar From WHICH ANY THING PRO 
cEEDS (§ 339) may be resolved into, 1. That from 
which any thing proceeds, as its POINT OF DEPART 
uRE; and, nm. That from which any thing  pro- 
ceeds, as its causE. Hence the Greek Genitive is 
either, (1.) the Genitive of DEPARTURE, OF, (U.) 
the GENITIVE oF Cause; and we have the follow- 
ing general rule for subjective adjuncts (§§ 329, 
338): The Point or DepaRTURE AND THE CausE 
ARE PUT IN THE GENITIVE. | 


Nore, The Gen. of departure is commonly expressed in English by the 
preposition from, and the Gen. of cause, by the preposition of. 


(1.) GeEnitIvVE oF DEPARTURE. ἢ 


§ 346. Departure may be either in place or in character. 
Hence, 


Rute IV. Words of SEPARATION and DISTINC- 
TION govern the Genitive. 


Nore. There is no line of division between the two classes of words 
which are mentioned in this rule. Many words which are commonly used to 
denote distinction of character referred originally to separation of place (cf. 
§ 389). . And, on the other hand, words which usually denote separation of 
place, are often employed, by a metaphorical or transitive use, to express de- 
parture or difference in other respects. 


1. Genitive of Separation. 


§ 347. Words of seraratiqn include those of removal 
and distance, of exclusion and restraint, of cessation and fail- 
ure, of abstinence and release, of deliverance and escape, of 
protection and freedom, &c. ; as, 


Χωρίξεσθα, ἀλλήλων, to be separated from each other, Pl. Conv. 192 ¢ 
Χωρὶς σῶν ἄλλων, apart from the rest, i. 4. 13. Σώρματες δίχα Cyr. viii 
7.20. Ὑ ποχωρῇ τοῦ πεδίου Ib. ii. 4.24. Διέσχον ἀλλήλων, were dise 
tant from euch other, i. 10.4. Πόῤῥω. . αὐτοῦ, far from him, i. 3. 12. 
Κωλύσεις σοῦ καίειν, he would prevent them from burning, i. 6.2. Hi Sa- 
λάσσης εἴργοινφο H. Gr. vii. 1. 8, Τοῦ πρὸς ἐμὲ πολέμου παύσασθαι, to 


cH,; 1.) OF SEPARATION: — OF DISTINCTION. 265. 


cease from the war against me, i.6.6. Totrous.. οὐ παύσω «ἧς ἀρχῆς Cyr. 
viii. 6.3. Biov «ἐλευτήσω Ib. 7. 17. Οὗτος μὲν αὐτοῦ ἥμαρσεν, this 
man missed him, i. 5.12. Ἢ Ψεύσθη τῆς ἰλαίδος IL. Gr. vii. 56. 24. Τὺ 
ναικὸς ἐσθλῆς yuwdraxes Eur. Ale. 418. ᾿Επέσχομεν «ποῦ δακρύειν, we re- 
frained from weeping, Pl. Phexdo, 1176. Kaxay..Avr%esov Soph, El. 1489. 
Σῶσαι κακοῦ Id, Ph. 919. Νόσου rsQsvyivar, Ib. 1044. ᾿Αλύξεσον 
μόρου Id. Ant. 488. Δύο ἄνδρας ἕξε, τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι, will keep two men 
from sinking, iii, 5. 11. "EAs vbeoos πόνων, ἐλεύθεροι «+ Εῤρυσθέως Eur. 
Heracl. 873. Ανεν αἰσχύνης καὶ βλάξης ii. 6.6. Γάμων τε ἃ γνοὶ ξῶσιν 
Pl. Leg. 840 d. Καδϑαρὸς ἀδικίας, Pl. Rep. 496 ἃ: Ἕως ἄν καθήρῃ σω- 
φῥοσύνης Ib. 573 Ὁ. Νοσφιεῖς με rovds δευτέρου νεκροῦ ; Eur. Ale. 43. 


8 348. Remarks. α. Words of SPARING imply refraining from, 
and those of CONCEDING, RESIGNING, REMITTING, and SURRENDERING, imply 
parting with, or retiring from. Hence, σῶν μὲν ὑμετέρων ἡδύ μοὶ Peiderbas, 
it is my pleasure to spare your property, Cyr. iii. 2.28. Kaxsivos ὑπεχώρη- 
δεν αὐτῷ τοῦ ϑρόνου, and he [Sophocles] conceded to him [Aischylus] the throne, 
Ar. Ran. 790. ᾿Αλλὰ τῆς ὀργῆς ἀνέντες, but resigning your anger, Ib. 
700. Tas σῶν ᾿λλήνων ἐλευθερίας .. ragaxwencas Φιλίσσπῳ, to surrender 
to Philip the freedom of the Greeks, Dem. Cor. 247. 24. Τοῖς aeerCurigas 


.. καὶ ὁδῶν καὶ ϑάκων καὶ λόγων ὑπείκειν Cyr. viii. 7. 10. 


β. The Gen. denoting that from which motion proceeds is, in prose, common- 
ly joined to words not in themselves expressing separation by a preposition ; but 
-in poetry, often without a preposition (cf. ᾧ 429. α) ; as, Aduov. . φέρουσαν, 
bringing from the house, Soph. El. 994, Τούσδε παῖδας γῆς tray», to drive 
these children from the land, Eur. Med. 70. ᾿Ανακουφίσαι, κάρα βυθῶν. 
Soph. Ged. T. 23. Ὕκμεῖς μὲν βάθρων ἵστασθε Ib. 142. Τό τ᾽ οὐρανοῦ wi- 
onwa Eur. Iph. T. 1384. For adverbs in -θεν, properly genitives, see δὲ 91, 
320, 


γ. In a few rare phrases, the Gen.-denotes the time from which, without a 
preposition ; as, Mer’ ὀλίγον δὲ τούτων, and [after a little from these things] 
a little after these things, H. Gr.i. 1. 2. Τρίσῳ .. ἔσει! φσουτέων, in the third 
year [from] before these things, Hdt. vi. 40. Asuregy δὲ ἔτει rovriwy, ‘ [from] 
after,’ Ib. 46. 


2. Genitive of Distinction. 


§ 349. Words of pistincrion include those of difference 
and exception, of superiority and inferiority, &c. ; as, 


Διώρισπσαι rixvns, is distinct from the art, Pl. Polit. 260 ¢. ᾿Ηλέκαρου 
οὐδὲν διέφερεν, differed in nothing from amber, ii. 3.15. Πᾶσα, “χὴν Μι- 
λήτου, all except Milétus,i. 1.6. Διάφορον τῶν ἄλλων πόλεων, superior to 
the other stutes, Mem. iv. 4.15. ἸΤΙλήθει .. ἡμῶν λειφθέντες, inferior to 
us in number, vii. 7.31. Τὰ δίκαια. ., ἢ ἄλλα τῶν δικαίων, Mem. iv. 4. 
25. Ἕτερον δὲ τὸ ἡδὺ rod ἀγαθοῦ Pl. Gorg. 500 d. Πότερόν ἐστιν ἐστ σσήροη 
ἡ ἀρετὴ, ἢ ἀλλοῖον ἐπιστήμης Pl. Meno, 87 c. Οὐδὲν ἀλλόσριον ποιῶν 
οὔτε τῆς ἑαυτοῦ πατρίδος οὔτε ποῦ πρόσπου (ef. § 405) Dem. Cor. 289. 14. 
Οὕτω πλούτου ἀρετὴ διέστηκεν Pl. Rep. 550 6. Τῶν ἀρκούντων rseirra 
Cyr. viii. 2. 21. 


REMARK. The verb λείσομαι governs the Gen. in a variety of senses, 
which are naturally connected with each other, but which might be referred, 
ῷ syntax, to different heads. Thus, Στρατὸν .. τὸν λελειμιμένον δορός, ‘left 

“3 r 


266 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. [Boox 1:7 


from [or by] the spear,’ i. 6. ‘ the relics of war’ (§§ 947, 381), Aisch. Ag 
517. Kiexos σεχειῶ. od μακρὰν λελειμμένοι, ‘not left far behind,’ i. e 
* closely pursuing,’ Id. Pr. 857. Γνώμῃ δ᾽ ἀδελφοῦ Μελεάγρου λελειμ- 
μένος, ‘left behind by,’ z. 6. ‘inferior to,’ Eur. Suppl. 904. Καὶ τίς βίος μοι 
σοῦ λελειμμένη φίλος ; ‘bereft of’ (§ 357), Soph. Ant. 548. Tvapas λει. 
woutve, devoid of understanding, Soph. El. 474. Λέλειμμαι «τῶν ἐν Ἕλλησιν 
γόμων, ‘am ignorant of,’ Eur. Hel. 1246. 


§ 330. Words of superiority include, — 


a.) Words of authority, power, precedence, and preéminence. 
Thus, 


Τισσαφέρνην ἄρχειν αὐτῶν, that Tissuphernes should govern them, I. 1. 8 
‘Eyxeartis.. πάντων, sovereign over all, vy. 4.15. “Hysiro τοῦ orem 
φεύματος, led the army,iv. 1.6. IlescCstcsv τῶν πολλῶν πόλεων, to take 
rank of most cities, Pl. Leg. 7526. “Exedencay «τῶν “Ἑλλήνων iil. 4. 26. 
Ὃς xeaives σαρατοῦ Soph. Aj. 1050. “Os αἰσυμνᾷ χθονός Eur. Med. 19. 
Βασιλεύων αὐτῶν Ve 6.37. Δεσα΄ζειν δόμων Eur. Ion, 1036. See 
also § 389. 


Οὐκ αὐτὸς ἐξέπλευσεν, ὡς αὑτοῦ xearay; 
Ποῦ σὺ orgarnystis τοῦδε: ποῦ δὲ σοὶ λεῶν 
ἜἜξεστ᾽ ἀνάσσειν ὧν ὅδ᾽ ἡ γεῖσ᾽ οἴκοθεν ; 
Σπάρτης ἀνάσσων ἦλθες, οὐχ ἡμῶν κρατῶν. Soph. Aj. Ι090 


Remark. ‘The primitive sense of the verb ἄρχω appears to have been to 
take the lead. But, in early warfare, the same individual led the march, ruled 
the host, and began the onset. Hence this verb came to signify to rule, and 
to begin; and, in both these senses, it retained the Gen. which belonged to it 
as a verb of precedence. Thus,’Avégdawy ἄρχειν, to rule men, Cyr. i. 1. 3. 
Φυγῆς ἄρχειν, to begin flight, iii. 2.17. Tod χόγου δὲ ἤρχετο ὧδε iii. 2.7 

you λόγον κατῆρχεν Symp. 8. 1. . 


§ 351. 8.) Adjectives and adverbs in the comparative 
degree, and words derived from them. 


All comparatives may be ranked with words of superiority, as denoting the 
possession of a property in a higher degree. 


τ, 
Rute V. The comMPpaRaTIVE DEGREE governs 
the Genitive ; as, 


Kesirrovs tavrod, more powerful than himself, i. 2.26. Τῶν ἵσπων tres. 
χον S&eroy, they ran faster than the horses, i. 5.2. Τούτου δεύφσερον Pl. 
Leg. 894 ἃ. ᾿Ανωσέρω σῶν μασθῶν ἱ. 4.17. Ὕ μᾶς ob πολὺ ἐμοῦ ὕσσπερον 
i, 5. 16. ᾿Αδροκόμιας δὲ ὑστέρησε τῆς μάχης, but Abrocomas came after the 
battle, i.7.12. Τῇ ὑσσεραίᾳ τῆς μάχης Pl. Menex. 240¢. ‘Arrdyuséa 
αὐτοῦ Cyr. v. 3.33. Τιμαῖς σούσων ἐσ“ λεονεκπτεῖσε iii. 1. 37. 


§ 332. +.) Multiple and proportional words (ὃ 138) 
hus, 


Πολλασλασίους ὑμῶν αὐτῶν, many times your own number, iii. 2. 14, 
“Ἤρχετο δὲ διαιρεῖν ὧδε " μίαν ἀφεῖλε τοπρῶτον ἀπὸ παντὸς μοῖραν" μετὰ A 


on. 1., OF CAUSE. 267 


ταύτην, ἀφήρει δια κασίαν ταύτης * σὴν δ᾽ αὖ τρίτην, ἡμιολίαν μὲν τῆς 
δευτέρας, Tes Traciay δὲ τῆς πρώτης " τετάρτην δὲ, τῆς δευτέρας δ, TARY 
wrivarny δὲ, τριπλῆν τῆς Teirns " τὴν δ᾽ teeny, τῆς πρώτης ὀκταπλασίαν" 
ἱδδόρμοην δὲ, ta τακαιεικοσαασ λασίαν τῆς πρώτης (α. ὃ τ--ῖΞ ῶ α. c= ιὐ ὃ τ 
Sa. ἀτ- ὃ δι e=3e. f=8a. g= 27a) Pl. Tim. 35, b,c. Als view 
tui xrsivas ἀδελφῆς ξῶσαν Eur. El. 1092. 


(11.) GENITIVE oF CausE. 


§-353. To the head of cause may be reter- 
red, 1. That from which any thing is DERIVED, 
FORMED, SUPPLIED, or TAKEN; II. That which 
exerts an influence, as an EXCITEMENT, OCCASION, 
or conpiTion; III. That which produces any 
thing, as its ACTIVE or EFFICIENT CAUSE ; and 
IV. That which constiruTes any thing wHatT 
IT IS. 

In the first of these divisions, the prevailing idea is that of 
source; in the second, that of influence; in the third, that of 
action; and in the fourth, tnat of property. Or we may say, 
in general, that the first division presents the material cause ; 
the second, the motive cause; the third, the efficient cause; and 
the fourth, ‘the constituent cause. Τὶ scarcely needs to be re- 


marked, that the four divisions are continually blending with 
each other in their branches and analogies. 


ἢ 354. [. That from which any thing is θῈ- 
RIVED, FORMED, SUPPLIED, or TAKEN. ‘To this 
division belong, 1. the Genitive of Origin, 2. the 
Genitive of Material, 3. the Genitive of Supply, 
and 4. the Genitive of the Whole, or the Genitive 
Partitive. 


1 and 2. Genitive of Origin and of Material. 


§ 355. Rute VI. The oricin, source, and 
MATERIAL are put in the Genitive ; as, 


Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο, of Darius and Pary- 
satis are born tw children, i. 1.1. Φοίντκος μὲν αἱ ϑύραι πεποιημέναι, the 
doors being made of the palm-tree, Cyr. vii. 5.22. Μιᾶς μητρὸς . . φύντες 
Pl. Menex. 239 a. ‘Oy δ᾽ ἔῤδλαστεν Soph. Tr. 401. Οὔτε ris νεοζύγου 
νύμφης τεκνώσε; παῖδα Eur. Med. 804. Ti ἀπολαύσαις ἄν τῆς ἀρχῆς! 
What advantage should you derive from your authority? Cyr. vii. 5. 56. u- 
Ψήσας τῶν ἡδίστων ποσῶν ἀπολαύσεται Ib. 81. Χρημάπσπων ὀνήσομωι Eur. 
Hel. 935. Εὐωχοῦ τοῦ λόγου Pl. Rep. 359 b Τῆς κεφωλῆς ὄζω" Ar. 


268 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. [BOOK Ik 


Eccl. 524. Οἵνος φοινίκων πολύς ii. 3. 14 (cf. Οἵνον σε x. φ. A i. 5. 10) 
Περισσεφῇ . . ἀνθέων Soph. El. 895. Λίμνην .. ζέουσαν ὕδασος καὶ rn 
aov, ‘boiling with water,’ Pl. Phedo, 113 a. Μεθυσθεὶς τοῦ νέκταρος Pl 
Conv. 203 Ὁ. Τῶν λόγων ὑμᾶς Λυσίας sicria; Pl. Phedr. 227 Ὁ. 


“Nore. The Gen. of source or material occurs, especially in the Epic poets, 
for other forms of construction, particularly the instrumental Dat. ; as, [leica. 
"δὲ πυρὸς δηΐοιο ϑύρεσρα, and burn the gates with raging fire [from fire, as the 
source |, B. 415. Πρὸς μειλισσέμεν Η. 410. Χεῖρας νιψάμενος πολιῆς ἁλός, 
having washed his hands [with water from] in the foaming sea, β. 261. Δεύ 
sodas tippsios ποταμοῖο Z. 508. » ἃ 


§ 336. That of which one discourses or thinks may be 
regarded as the material of his discourse or thoughts; thus we 
speak of the matier of discourse, a matter of complaint, the 
subject-matter of a composition, &c. _ Hence, not unfrequently 
both in. immediate dependence upon another word, and even in 
the introduction of a sentence, 


Route VII. The rHeme or DISCOURSE OR OF 
THOUGHT is put in the Genitive. Thus, 


Tod rokorou ob καλῶς ἔχει λέγειν, Ort, x σ-. A., it is not well to say of the 
bowman, that, &c., Pl. Rep. 439 Ὁ. Διαθεώμενος αὐπῶν, ὅσην μὲν χώραν καὶ 
οἵαν ἔχοιεν, observing in respect to them, how great and what a country they have, 
iii, 1.19. Τῆς δὲ γυναι κὸὃς, ti... κακοσοιεῖ, but in respect to the wife, if she 
manages ill, ic. 3.11. Tot κασιγνήςου ci φής ; Soph. EL. 317. Kadoo- 
σα παιδός, having hewrd respecting lier son, 1d. Ant. 1182. Mavetia, .. ἃ «τοῦδ᾽ 
ἐχρήσθη σώμα πος Id. Ed C. 354. Karapadsiv 38 τοῦ Καὶ ύρου δοκοῦμεν, ὡς 
+ + ἐνόμειζε Cyr. viii. 1.40. Τοῦ δὲ οἴκαδε ““λοῦ μᾶλλον διεσκόσουν, ὅπη xo 
μισθήσονται Thi. 52. Οἶσθα γάρ που τῶν γενναίων κυνῶν ,ὅτι τοῦτο φύσει αὐ- 
σῶν +o ἦδος Pl. Rep. 575 6. Τὸ Μεγαρέων Ψήφισμα καθαιρεῖν Id. i. 140 (cf. 
Τὸ σερὶ Μεγαρέων Ψήφισμα καθελοῦσι 159). Ti δὲ σῶν πολλῶν καλῶν, 
οἷον ἀνθρώπων, ἢ ἵππων, ἢ ἱματίων, .. ὦρα κατὰ Te αὐτὰ ἔχει, But 
what of, &c.? Pl. Phedo, 78 ἃ. Τῆς δὲ σῆς φρενὸς, ἕν cov δέδοικα Eur 
Andr.361. Cf. ᾧ 438. y. 


Nore, For the Gen. of the theme may be often substituted another case, 
more frequently the Nom., in the succeeding clause; thus, Ei δὲ ἡ ψυνὴ κα- 
xorosi, but if the wife manages ill, 


3. Genitive of Supply. 


ἢ B3S7. Supply may be either abundant or defective. 
Flence, 


Rute VIII. Words of pLenty and want gov- 
ern the Genitive ; as, 


a. OF PLENTY. ᾿Αγρίων Sneiwy «“λήρης, full of wild beasts, i. 2. 7. 
Διφθέρας .. ἰἐπίμπλασαν χόρσου, they filled the skins with hay, i. 5. 10, 
Τούτων ἅλις, enough of these things, v. 7,12. Kamas πολλῶν καὶ ἀγαθῶν 
γεμούσας ἵν. 6, 212. Msernh γὰρ πολλῆς ἀσορίας torivii. 5.9. Τῶν δὲ 


ἰἱασίων ὁ λόφος ἰνεσ“ λήσθη i. 10. 12. Παραδείσον.. δασίος wavroiwy δίν- 


cn. 1.} OF SUPFLY. — PA 


δρων ii. 4.14. Κορέσα, σαόμα .. ἐμᾶς cag 1] 
uwv δ᾽ ἔς με wAovcios κακῶν Eur. Or. 394. + φίλων Vii. 7, 
42. Temens..ctcaymivn ἀνθρώπων He. 8. 8. —— 


6B. Or Want. Τῶν iairndsiay crayvisi, he will want provisions, ii. 2. 12. 
Σφενδονησῶν . . δεῖ, there is need of slingers, iii. 3.16. Οἵων ἄν ἐλσίδων 
ἐμαυτὸν στερήσαιμι, of what hopes I should deprive myself, ii. 5.10. *Av- 
θρώπων ἀπορῶν i.7.3. Ἣ ψυχὴ γυμνὴ rod σώματος Pl. Crat. 403 b. 
Γυμνωφέος δὴ «ἄντων Pl. Rep. 361 Ὁ. ᾿ὈΟλίγου δεήσανσος καταλευσθῆ 
veri. 5. 14, Πολλῶν ἐνέδε, αὐτῷ, dors vill. 41. Ὑμῶν δ᾽ ἐρημωθε΄ 
i. 3. 6. “Aguara..xtv& ἡνιόχων 1. 8.20. Οἴμοι, ci δράσω δῆτα σοῦ wo 
νούμενος ; Kur. Ale. 380. ᾿Ορφανὴν φίλου πατρός Eur. El. 914. Χρη. 
μάτων δὲ δὴ πένητες Ib. 37. "EWsrodro δ᾽ ὁ λόφος τῶν ἱπ“ σέων i. 10, 18, 

Nore. The Gen. which belongs to δέομαι and γρήζω as verbs of want may 
be retained by them in the derived senses, to desire, to request, to entreate 
Thus, Ἄλλου οὕσινος ἄν δέησθε, whatever else you may desire, i. 4. 15. 
Ἐμοὶ χάρισαι ὧν ἄν σοῦ δεηθῶ, grant me what I would entreat of you (ὃ 380), 
Cyr. v. 5. 35. Αἰσχρὸν γὰρ ἄνδρα τοῦ μακροῦ χρήζειν βίον Soph. Aj. 473. 


4. Genitive Partitive. 


ἢ 358. Rue ΙΧ. The wHoLe or wHicu a 
PART IS TAKEN is put in the Genitive; as, 


“Huscv τοῦ ὅλου στρατεύματος, hulf of the whole army, vi. 2. 10. 


Nore. This Gen. has received the names of the Gen. of the whole, and the 
Gen. partitive ; the former from its denoting the whole, and the latter from its 
denoting this whole in a state of division (partio or partior, to divide, from 
pars, part). 


$399. Remarks. 1. The partitive construction may 
be employed, — 


a.) To express quantity, degree, condition, place, time, &c. 
considered as a limitation of a general idea, or as a part of an 
extended whole. Thus, 


Μικρὸν δ᾽ ὕπνου λαχών, obtaining a little sleep [a small portion of sleep], 
iii. 1. 11. Ἔν σοιούτῳ .. rod κινδύνου προσιόντος, in such imminent danger [in 
such a degree of ], i. 7. 5. ‘O δ᾽ sis cov’ ὕφρεως ἐλήλυθεν, ‘to such a pitch 
of insolence,’ Dem. 51.1. Ka) of μὲν ἐν σούτῳ παρασκευῆς ἦσαν, ‘in this state 
of preparation,’ Th. ii. 17. Ζξυνέπεσον ts τοῦτο ἀνάγκης Th.i. 49. “Eat μέγα 
ἐχώρησαν δυνάμεως Ib. 118. "Eueaasiv που τῆς ἐκείνων χώρας, to make an in- 
eursion somewhere upon their territory, or upon some part of, &c., Cyr. vi. 1.42. 
"Hy μέσον ἡμέρας, it was mid-day, i. 8.8. Tis ἡμέρας ὀψὲ ἦν, it was late in 
the day [at a late hour of the day], H. Gr. ii. 1.23. Eis 703° ἡμέρας, to this 
day, Eur. Alc. 9, Phoen. 425. 


8.) To express the whole as the sum of all the parts. Thus, 


Ἔν σοῖς ἀγαθοῖσι δὲ rave’ ἔνεστιν σοφίας, and in the good dwell all the quali- 
ties of wisdom, Eur. Alc. 601. Οἱ μὲν ᾿Αδηναῖοι ἐν π“ανεὶ δὴ ἀθυμίας ἦσαν Th. 
vii. 55. Ἔν παντὶ κακοῦ εἴη Pl. Rep. 579 Ὁ. 


§ 360. 2. The whole is sometimes put in the case which 
93 * ‘ 


270 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. [ΒΟΟΚ ut 


belongs to the part, the part agreeing with the whole insteaa 
of governing it (δῷ 333. 5, 334. 9); as, 


"Axovouty ὑμᾶς .. ἐνίους σκηνοῦν ἐν σαῖς οἰκίαις, we hear that you, some of 
you, quarter in the houses; for ὑμῶν ἐνίους, x. 7. A.V. 5. 11. [Πελοσοννήσιο, 
καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι τὰ δύο μέρη .. ἰσέδαλον, for ΤΠελοποννησίων καὶ σῶν ξυμμά 
χων, x vA. ΤΕ. 11. 47, Δίδυκμα τέκεα πότερος ἄρα πότερον αἱμάξει Eur 
Ph. 1289. 


Nore. This form of construction chiefly occurs when several parts are 
successively mentioned ; as, Oixias, αἱ wiv πολλαὶ ἐπεστώκεσαν, ὀλίγαι δὲ πε- 
ριίῶσαν, the houses, the greater part had been demolished, and but few remained, 
Th. i. 89. Οὐ γὰρ τάφου νῷν σὼ κασιγνήτω ἸΚρέων, σὸν μὲν προτίσας, roy δ᾽ 
ἀτιμάσας ἔχει, Soph. Ant. 21. In the following example, the second part 
has three subdivisions ; Καὶ of ξένοι, of μὲν. . ἀποχωροῦσιν" οἱ δὲ, .. of μὲν .. 
ἀπέρχονται, οἱ δὲ .., εἰσὶ δ᾽ of Th. vii. 13. 


5. It is often at the option of the writer whether he will employ the Gen, 
partitive or a simpler form of construction. The two forms are sometimes 
combined ; as, Er’ οὖν Seds, εἴσε βροτῶν ἦν ὁ ταῦτα πράσσων, ‘a god, or 
one of mortals,’ Soph. El. 199, [Ποῦ rig ϑεῶν ἢ δαίμων ἐσπαρωγύς , Eur. 
Hee. 164. Ofds .. φαίνουσι σινὲς δαίμονες, ἢ ϑεῶν σῶν οὐρανίων Id. ἘΠ. 
1233. 


ὃ 361. According to Rule IX., any word referring to a 
part, whether substantive, adjective, adverb, or verb, may take 
with it a Gen. denoting the whole. Thus, 


A. SUBSTANTIVES. 


Τὸ σρίσον μέρος τοῦ... iaasxod, the third part of the cavalry, Cyr. ii, 1. 
6. Τῶν πελταστῶν cis ἀνήρ, a certain man of the tapgeteers, iv. 8.4. Tay 
Ἑλλήνων δὲ ἔχων ὁπλίτας ἀνέθη πριακοσίους i. 1.2. Τριάκοντα μυριά- 
δας orgaciasi. 4. 5. Ele’ ἀνὴρ τῶν ῥητόρων Ar. Ἐπ. 425. 


ReMARKS. a. When place is designated by mentioning both the country and 
the town, the former, as the whole, may be put in the Gen., and may precede 
the latter; as, Of δὲ ᾿Αδηναῖοι .. ὡρμίσαντο τῆς Χεῤῥονήσου ἐν ᾿Ελεοῦνσι, ana 
the Athenians touched upon the Cherronese αὐ Eleiis [at Eleiis, a town of the 
Cherronese], H. Gr. it 1. 20. Of Πελοσοννήσιοι τῆς ᾿Ασ σικῆς ts ᾿Ελευσῖνα 
καὶ Ovlabs toCarésyess, the Peloponnesians invading Attica as far as Eleusis 
and Thria, ΤῊ. 1.114. ‘O δὲ σσρατὸς τῶν [Ιελοσοννησίων προϊὼν ἀφίκετο 
τῆς ᾿Αττικῆς ἐς Οἰνόην σρῶσον, ‘came upon Attica first at Gnoé,’ 1}. ii. 18. 


β. The Gen., in all cases in which it is strictly partitive, may be regarded 
as properly depending upon a substantive denoting the part; and therefore 
the use of this Gen. in connection with adjectives, verbs, and adverbs may 
be referred to ellipsis. Thus, Tay ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων τινίς [sc. ἄνδρες]. Ἔξεκύ- 
μαινξ σι [Sc. μέρος] τῆς φάλαγγος (ὃ 362.8). Εἰσὶ δ᾽ αὐτῶν 80. πότάμοι 
wives], ods οὐδ᾽ ἂν παντάπασι διαθαίησε. ἹἸ]ολέμου, καὶ μάχης ob μετῆν [Sc 
μέρος} αὐτῇ (ὃ 864). Vis γε οὐδαμοῦ, i.e. ἐν οὐδενὶ μέρει τῆς γῆς (ὃ 568). 


y- If the substantive denoting the part is expressed, and that denoting the 
whole is a form of the same word, the latter is commonly omitted; as, Τρεῖς 
ἄνδρες τῶν yeeuirtowy [80. ἀνδρῶν], three men of the more aged, vy. 7.17. Ade 
σῶν πρισθυτάτων oroarnyol, iii, ὦ, 37. Εἰσιφέρετο τῇ ὀρχηστρίδι προχὸς τῶν 
κεραμεικῶν Symp. 7. 2. : 


ὑπ. 1.} ‘PARTITIVE. 274 


§ 362. B. ADJECTIVES. 


Nore. The ad-ectives which are most frequently used to denote a part 
are termed partitives. 


a THe ArticLe. Τοὺς μὲν aicay ἀπέκτεινε, robs δ᾽ ἐξέθαλεν, slew 
some of them, and banished others, i. 1. 7. 


β. ApsEcTIVE Pronouns. Tay ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων φινές, some of the 
other Greeks, i. 7.8. Ὅστις . - σῶν παρὰ βασιλέως 1. 1.5. ΟἿ ὕσσερον 
ἐλήφθησαν τῶν ForAsuinvi.7. 13. Τῶν δὲ βαρθάρων.. ἄλλοις i. 2. 18, 
Τοῖς rosodross σῶν ἔργων Mem. ii. 8.3, Εἰ δέ σι καὶ ἄλλο ἐνῆν Dans 
ἢ καλάμου ἷ. 5.1. ἜἘξεκύμαινέ ri ris φάλαγγος i. 8. 18. Ἔν σῷ 
ξυμφορᾶς διεφθάρης ; Soph. Ant. 1229. See § 359. a. 


γ. NuMERALS. Ἐς σῶν στρατηγῶν, one of the generals, vii. 2, 29, 
Τοὺς σρεῖς .. τῶν δακεύλων Ar. Vesp.95. Eis ἕν μοίρας Eur. Andr, 
1172. Οσ-όσοι μὲν ray ἀμφὶ βασιλέα ἀπέθνησκον 1. 8.27. ἸΙολλὰ σῶν 
ὑαοζυγίων 1. 5.5. ᾽Ολήγοι μὲν αὐσῶν iii. 1. 8. 


3. SUPERLATIVES, and words derived from them (by virtue of the included 
adjective, cf. ὃ 351). Ἔν σοῖς ἀρίστοις Ilegowy, among the best of the 
Persians, i.6. 1. Tod wscrorarov τῶν Κύρον σκηπτούχων Ib. 11. 
Ἔσὶ πλεῖστον ἀνθρώπων Theil. Τῆς γῆς ἡ ἀρίστη Ib.2. Τῶν καθ᾽ 
ἱαυτοὺς ἀνθρώπων ἀριστεύσαντες [= ἄριστοι γενόμενοι], being the best of the 
men of their age, Mem. iii. 5.10. Ade’, ἃ καλλιστεύεται τῶν νῦν ἔν 
ἀνθρώποισιν Eur: Med. 947. Οὐ δευσέρων πρωτεύουσιν Ages. i. 8. 


t. PARTICIPLES. dv φοῖς παροῦσι τῶν πιστῶν, with those present of 
his faithful attendants, i. 5.15. Kal σῶν ἄλλων τὸν βουλόμενον, and 
of the rest any one that wished,i. 3.9. Ἥκει δέ σις ἢ τῶν “Ἰφοθάτων λελυ- 
κωμένα φέρων, ἢ τῶν βοῶν κατακεκρημνισμένα Cyr. Vii. 3. 41. 


ς. ΟΤΗΕΕ ADJECTIVES. Ἔχων τῶν ὀπισθοφυλάκων τοὺς ἡμίσεις, 
having half of the rear guard, ἵν. 2. 9. Ὦ τάλαινα παρθένων, O ill- 
fated of virgins, Eur. Heracl. 567.- Τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς τῶν ἀνθρώπων, the 
good among men, Ar. Plut. 495. Δειλαία δειλαίων κυρεῖς, wretched of 
the wretched art thou! Soph. El. 849. Τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς ἡμέρας iii. 4, 6. 
“Ereuoy τῆς γῆς τὴν πολλήν Th.ii. 56. Ὦ φίλα γυναικῶν Eur. 
460. Avs Πελασγῶν Esch. Suppl. 967. ᾿Ανοία μεγάλη λείπειν ἐχϑροὺς 
-tyéeay Eur. Andr. 521. Τῶν ἄλλων σκενῶν τὰ περιττά iii. 2. 28. 


§ 38GB. ©. Apverss. 


a. Of Puace and Time (8 359. a). Οὐδ᾽ trou γῆς ἐσμὲν οἶδα, I know 
not where on earth [upon what part of the earth] we are, Ar. Av. 9. Γῆς γε 
οὐδαμοῦ Pl. Rep. 592 b. Πανταχοῦ «τῆς γῆ: Pl. Phedo, llla. Ποῦ 
wor’ εἶ φρενῶν; Soph. El. 390. Τηλοῦ γὰρ οἰκῶ τῶν ἀγρῶν», ‘in a remote part 
of the country,’ i. e. ‘far from town,’ Ar. Nub. 138. ‘Evradéa σοῦ οὐρανοῦ 
ἀνασαρέφεσθα, Mem. iv.3. 8. Ἐνταῦθα ἤδη εἶ τῆς ἡλικίας, you are now at that 
point of life, Pl. Rep. 328 c. Δεῦρο rod λόγου Pl. Conv. 217 6. Οὐκ δρᾷς 
ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ: Soph. Aj. 386. OF προελήλυθεν ἀσελγείας ἄνθρωπος Dem. 42. 
24. 110] τις φροντίδος ἔλθῃ , Soph. Cid. C. 170. ᾿Εφύλαττον ἄλλος ἄλλ ο- 
θεν τοῦ ᾽Ονεΐου H. Gr. vii. 1.15. Μὴ πρόσω δὲ σοῦ ποταμοῦ προδαίνειν, but 
not to advance far into the river, iv. 3.28. ᾿Ἑκάθευδον μέχρι πόῤῥω τῆς ἡμέ- 
ρας H. Gr. vii.2.19. Ὁ πηνίκα... τῆς ὥρας, at whatever point of time, iii. 5. 18. 
II nvix’ ἐσαὶν ἄρα τῆς ἡμέρας Ar. Αν..1498. Ilewialrara + φῆς HAs 
κίας. at the earliest age, Pl. Prot. 326 ¢ 


272 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. [poox 11° 


β. Of STATE or ConpiTion (ὃ 359. «; especially with the verbs ἔχω ana 
ἥκω). Τῆς τύχης γὰρ ὧδ᾽ ἔχω, for I am thus in [have myself i in this state 
of ] + sista Eur. Hel. 857. "Avapyioaus, ὡς εἶχε φιλία πρός τε τὴν .. TO 
λιν, ‘in what a state of friendship he was,’ ὁ. 6. ‘what friendship he bore, 
HB. Gr ii 1.14. Διώξανφες, ὡς τάχους ἕκασσος εἶχεν, having pursued, az 
each one had himself in _Tespect to speed, i. 6. every man according to his speed, 
Ib. iv. 5.15. ‘Os ὀργῆς ἔχω Soph. Cid. T. 345. Πῶς ἀγῶνος ἥκομεν 
how do we come on in the strife? Eur. El. 751. Οὕσω τρόπου . - ἔχεις Cyr. 
vii. 5.56. Τένους μὲν ἥκεις ὧδε roids, thus are you related to these, Eur 
Heracl. 213. "ἔχοντας εὖ φρενῶν, of good judgment, Eur. Hipp. 462. ᾿᾽Αν- 
δράσι μέλλουσιν εὖ σώματος ἕξειν Pl. Rep. 404d. “Orav..dyssivas σις i; ‘3 
αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ Ib. 571 ἃ. 

y- Of the SuPERLATIVE DEGREE. ᾿Αφειδέστατα πάντων, most unsparingly 


of all,i. 9.13. ΙΙροτιμηθῆναι μάλιστα τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἰ. 6. 56. Οἱ μὲν ἐγγύ- 
Tara Tay πολεμίων ii. 2. 17. 


§ B64. τ. Verne. 


The Genitive partitive, in connection with a verb, may per- 
form the office either of a subject, an appositive, or a comple- 
ment ; taking the place of any case which the verb would re 
quire, if referring to the whole. See § 361. 8 


a. The Genitive Partitive as a Subject. 


(1.) Of a Finite Verb. Eici δ᾽ αὐτῶν, οὗς οὐδ᾽ ἄν παντάπᾶσι διαξαίητε, 
and there are some of them, which you could not pass ut all, ii. δ. 18. "Hy δὲ 
rolrwy στῶν σταθμῶν, ods πάνυ μακροὺς ἤλαυνεν, '. 5.7. Τῶν δὲ Σαμίων. 
..- ξυνθέμενοι .«. διίδησαν ΤῊ. 1. 115. ΙΠολέμου, καὶ μάχης οὐ μετῆν 
αὐτῇ, of war and battle, there fell to her no share, Cyr. vii. ἣν 28, Οὐδ᾽ ds 
ἡμῖν νῦν αροσήχκει οὔτε “ λησμονῆς ww οὔτε μέθης Cyr. iv. 2. 20. 


(2.) of an _ Anfinitive. Καὶ ἐσπιμιγνύναι σφῶν τε πρὸς ἐκείνους, καὶ ἔκει 
yay πρὸς αὐτούς, that there even mingled some of themselves with those, and some 
of those with them, iii. 5.16. Οὐκ wero προσήκειν οὐδενὶ ἀρχῆς, he thought 
that no authority belonged to any one, Cyr. viii. 1.37. Δοκεῖ δίκαιον εἶναι. 
«ἄσι σῶν ἀρχῶν μετεῖναι Rep. Ath. 1. 2. 


§ 365. β. The Genitive Partitive as an Appositive. 


The Gen. partitive in the place of an appositive is most common with sub- 
stantive verbs, but is likewise found with other verbs, particularly those of 
reckoning, esteeming, and making. Thus, Οὐκ ἰγὼ φούτων εἰμί, Tam not one 
o these, Cyr. viii. 3. 45. Τῶν φιλτάτων ἔμοιγ᾽ ἀριθμήσει τ“ ἔκνων, thou shalt 

be numbered as one of my dearest children, Eur. Bacch. 1318. ᾿Ετύγχανε γὰρ 
καὶ βουλῇς dy Th.iii. 70, Καὶ ἐμὲ ποίνυν .. Sis τῶν «“τ«πεισμίνων Pl. 
Rep. 424 c. Tois δούλους . . τῶν περὶ tuvrdv δορυφόρων ποιήσασθαι Ib, 
567 6. Τῶν φευγόντων ὀνομάζεσθαι Isocr. 380 d. 


§ 366. y- The Genitive Partitive as a Complement. 
The Genitive partitive is used as a complement, 


1.) Generally, with any verb, when its action affects not the 
whole object, but a part only; as, 


on. 1. ΠΡΑΒΤΙΤΙΨΕ. 273 


Λαξόντας τοῦ βαρξαρικοῦ ergarod, taking a part of the barbarian army, 
i. 5.7. Tay κηρίων .. ἔφαγον, ate of the honeycombs, iv. 8.20. ᾿Αφιεὶς δὲ 
σῶν αἰχμαλώτων, and sending some of the captives, vii. 4.5. Συγκαλέ- 
σαντες Aoxayods καὶ πελταστὰς καὶ τῶν ὁπσπλισῶν iv. 1.26, Χειρίσοφος 
πέμπεὶ φῶν ἐκ τῆς κώμης σκεψομένους ἵν. 5. 22, Kai τῆς τε γῆς ἕτεμον Th. 
ii. 56. Μανσικῆς ἔχον τέχνης Soph. (ἃ T. 709. ΖΞυνελέγοντο τῶν λίθων 
. Ar. Ach. 184. Τῶν κρεῶν ἔκλεσσον Ar. Eq. 420. []αροίξας τῆς ϑύραςιν 
just opening the door, Ar. Pax, 30. 


$367. 11.) Particularly, with verbs which, in their or 
dinary use, imply divided or partial action. 


Nore. The Gen. partitive may be connected with other parts of speech 
upon the same principle. Hence the rule is expressed in a general form. 


Rute X. Words of sHarine and ToucH gov- 
ern the Genitive. 


1. Words of sHarine include those of partaking (part- 
taking), imparting, obtaining by distribution, &c. Thus, 


Τῶν κινδύνων μετέχειν, to share in the dangers, ii. 4.9. Τῆσδε κοινωνὼ 
σύχης, I partake of this fortune, Eur. Med. 303. Τῶν εὐφροσυνῶν mer ads- 
δόντες, imparting our joys, (Ec. 9.12. Κοινωνοὺς ἁπάντων, vii. 2. 88. 
"Avdoss of ξυναράμενοι τοῦδε τοῦ κινδύνου Th. iv. 10. ἘΞυλλήψομαι δὲ 
φοῦδε σοι κἀγὼ πόνου Eur. Med. 946. Μειονεκτεῖ τῶν εὐφροσυνῶν ὁ σύραννος, 
‘has less of,’ Hier. 1. 29. Τοῦ ἡλίου rarsovexrodvera, ‘bearing more of, 
Cyr. i. 6. 25. [l&ow ἀφθόνως ἐπήρκε, τῶν ἑαυτοῦ Mem. i. 2. 60. - Τοῦ 
λόγου προσδούς Eur. Suppl. 350. Ξυμξδάλλεται.. τοῦδε δείματος Eur. 
Med. 284, ᾿Αγαδὴ δὲ συλλήσπρια τῶν ἐν εἰρήνῃ πόνων, βεβαία δὲ τῶν ἐν πο- 
λέμῳ σύμμαχος ἔργων, ἀρίστη δὲ φιλίας κοινωνός Mem. ii. 1. 82. 


90 85. 2. Toucn may be regarded as a species of par- 
tial action, affecting only the point of contact. To this head 
belong, either by direct connection or by obvious analogy, 
verbs of laying hold of, hitting, meeting with, &c.. Thus, 


“Agcicbas cis κάρφης, to touch the hay,i.5.10. "Ersrapldveras αὐτοῦ 
σῆς ἴσυος, lays hold of his shield-rim, iv. 7.12. Φεραύλα τυγχάνει, hits 
Pheraulas, Cyr. viii. 3.28. "E&sxvsiodas τῶν «σφενδονητῶν, to reach the 
slingers, iii. 3.7. ᾿Ανδρῶν ἀγαθῶν παιδὸς ὑπαντήσας, having met with the 
son of brave heroes, Soph. Ph. 719. Ὅνταν δὲ σούτων τινὸς Sivas Cyr.i. 3.5. 
Τούς σε τῆς τραγικῆς ποιήσεως ἅπσομένους Pl. Rep. 602 ἢ. Δυσχερὲς Padsiy 
γσοῦνσος ἀνδρός Eur. Or. 793. Airis δὲ λα όμενος τῆς δεξιᾶς τοῦ Κυαξάρους 
Cyr.v. 5.7. ᾿Ανφσιλήψονται, τῶν πραγμάτων Cyr. ii. 3.6. Ἑξόμεθα 
αὐτοῦ, we shall keep hoid of him, vii. 6. 41. ἹΚοινῇ τῆς σωτηρίας ἔχεσθαι, to 
strive in common for our safety, vi. 3.17. "Exousvor δὲ φ«ούτων, and following 
these, i. 8.9. Τῆς ἐλαίδος γὰρ ἔρχομαι dedeayutvos Soph. Ant. 235. Aé- 
γεται τῆς σελευτῆς τυχεῖν, ‘to have come to his end,’ ii. 6.29. ‘Osoiwy 
τινῶν ἡμῶν ἔφυ χον, what kind of men they found us, v. 5.15. 


§ $69. Remarks. «a. Hence, the part taken hold of is 
put in the Gen., in connection with other forms of construe: 
tinn ; as, 


274 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. [Book Ii. 


Ἔλαζον τῆς ξώνης τὸν ᾿Ορόνσην, they took Orontes by the girdle,i. 6. 10. Ta 
παιδάρι᾽ εὐθὺς ἀνέλκει .. τῆς χειρός Ar. Vesp. 568. Tas δὲ κεχειρωμένα 
ἄγεσθαι... “λοκάρμων Asch. Theb. 326. Niv.. ψαύειν χερός Eur. Here 
968. Thy μὲν κρεμαστὴν αὐ χένος Soph. Ant. 1221.. 

B. To the analogy of verbs of touch may be referred expressions like the 
following: Tis κεφαλῆς xartays, he broke [was fractured in] his head, Ar. 
Ach. 1180. Bovergi€n cits κεφαλῆς Ar. Pax, 71. Ἤ,τιῶντο τὸν Ἰζρατῖνον 
συντρῖψαι τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῆς, they charged Cratinus with having broken her head. 
Isocr. 381 a. Eira κατάξειέ τις αὐτοῦ μεθύων τῆς κεφαλῆς Ar. Ach. 1166 
Cf. § 437. 


§ 370. 3. Several words of obtaining, attaining, and 
receiving, govern the Genitive, from their referring primarily 
either to distribution or to touch. Thus, 

Ἵνα τῆς προσηκούσης μοίρας Rayx avn, that it may receive its proper portion, 
PL Leg. 9038 e. Kangovowstiv οὐδενός, to inherit nothing, Dem. 1065. 95. 
Τῶν δικαίων τυγχάνειν, to obtain your rights, vii. 1. 30. ἜΠΕΙΔΗ 
ONHTOY MEN ΣΏΜΑΤΟΣ ’ETYXES, "AQGANATOY AE ΨΥΧΗΣ, 
IIEIPO ΤῊΣ ΨΥΧΗΣ 'AOANATON THN MNHMHN ΚΑΤΑΛΙΠΕΙ͂Ν 
Isocr. 22 Ὁ. Κέκευθεν, ors του τάφου avridous, οὔτε γόων παρ᾽ ἡμῶν Soph. 
ΕἸ. 868. Olas ἀμοιξῆς ἐξ ᾿Ιάσονος κυρεῖ Eur. Med. 23. 


Nore. The student can hardly fail to have remarked the great variety of 
metaphorical and transitive meanings in which words of sharing and of 
touch are employed, not only in Greek, but likewise in our own and in other 
languages. 


§ 371. II. That which exerts an influence as" 
an EXCIIEMENT, OCCASION, or CONDITION. ‘To 
this division belong the following rules, respecting, 
1. the motive, reason, and end in view; 2. price, 
value, merit, and crime; 3. the sensible and men- 
tal object ; and 4. time and place. 


1, Genitive of Motive, δ. 


§ 372. Rue ΧΙ. The motive, reason, and 
END IN VIEW are put in the Genitive. 


To this rule may be reférred the use of the Gen., both in 
regular construction and in exclamation, to express the person 
or thing, on account of which, in consequence of which, for the 
sake of which, in honor of which, or to affect which, any thing 
is felt, said, or done. Thus, 


a. Wirn Verss. Totrou σε. . ζηλῶ, on this account I envy you, Oyr. 
Vill. 4. 23. Μ,σϑθοῦ ὑπηρετοῦντες, serving for hire, Ib. vi. 2.37. Maddy 
αὐτῶν xarabsis, peying nothing for them, Ib. iii, 1.37. Tot μὲν wddous 
exrsiew αὐτόν Ib. v. 4. 32. -Znrw os τοῦ νοῦ, τῆς δὲ δειλίας στυγῶ Soph. 
El. 1027, Ἢ φίλον διίνας .. ἢ χαὺτςοῦ Id. Ed. Τ. 254. Ταύτης ἱκνοῦ- 


11 OF MOTIVE, REASON, AND END IN VIEW. 275 


μαί os, I beseech you for ter sake, Eur. Or. 671. ‘Ixsredw σε τῶνδε γουνάτων 
καὶ σοῦ γενείου δεξιῶς τ᾽ εὐδαίμονος, ‘by these knees,’ &., Eur. Hec. 752 
Lersicoy ἀγαθοῦ δαίμονος, ‘in honor of, Ar. Eq. 106. Τοῦ δώδεκα μνᾶς [lacias 
For what do I [owe] Pasias twelve mine? Ar. Nub. 22. ΤΠροπέποται τῆς va 
οαυτίκα ἡδονῆς καὶ χάριτος τὰ τῆς πόλεως πράγματα, ‘for the sake of 
present pleasure and favor,’ Dem. 34. 23. Καφαῤῥοφοῦσι, rod. . μὴ λυσιτε 
λεῖν αὐτοῖς, ‘so that it may not profit,’ Cyr. i. 3. 9. 


β. Wira Apsectives. Εὐδαίμων .. rod “ρόσπου Pl. Phado, 586. Ὦ 
“ακάρις τῆς τέχνης, Blessed in thy trade! Ar. Av. 1423. Ὦ, ςάλαιν᾽ ἐγὼ 
σέθεν Soph. El. 1209. *°Q) δυστάλαινα cis ἐμῆς αὐθαδίας Eur. Med. 1028. 


y- Wira ADVERBs. Ταύτης ἕνεκα τῆς ““΄αρόδου, on account of this pass, 
i. 4.5. Τοῦ μὴ φεύγειν ἕνεκα, lest they should escape, iii. 4.35. Πέμαε 
μ᾿ ixsivn rodds τοῦ φόδου χάριν Soph. El. 427. Tlevbinws δὲ ἔχουσαν τοῦ 
ἀδελφοῦ σεθνηκότος Cyr. ν. 2. 7. Χαλεσῶς φέρειν αὐτῶν Th. ii. 62. 


δι Wrrn Nouns. ᾿Ἐμοὶ πικρὰς ὠδῖνας αὐτοῦ προσδαλών, “ pangs on hie 
account,’ Soph. Tr. 41. Πολλὰς γενείου rovd” ἂν ἐκτεῖναι, λιτάς, ‘by this 
beard,’ Eur. Or. 290. Οἰἴαξ, σὸ Τροίας μῖσος ἀναφέρων πατρί Ib. 432. 


:. ὙΤΊΤΗ Intersections. Φεῦ σοῦ ἀνδρός, Alas for the noble man! Cyr. 
iii, 1.39. Αἰαῖ κακῶν Eur. Here. 899. Olwa δάμαρτος καὶ τέκνων; 
οἴμοι δ᾽ ἐμοῦ Ib. 1374. "Od Περσικοῦ στρατεύμαςος τοῦδε Asch, Pers 
116, ᾿Ιατεταςαιὰξ τῶν κακῶν Ar. Eq. 1. 


ζ. In Sorete Excuamation. Τῆς σύχης, My ill-luck! Cyr. ii. 2. 8, Taig 
μωρίας, What folly! Ar. Nub. 818. °Q Zed βασιλεῦ, τῆς λεσ σόσηφοι 
σῶν φρενῶν Ib. 153. ᾿Ασολλον ἀποτρόπαιε, rod χασμήμαπος Ar. Av. 61, 


§ 373. Remarks. 1. The Genitive of the END IN VIEW 
is put with some words of direction, claim, and dispute. 
Words of direction include those of aiming at, throwing at, 
going towards, and reaching after. Thus, 


᾿Ανδρώπων σσοχάζεσθαι, to take aim at men, Ογτ. ἴ. 6.29. Adrod χερ 
μάδας .. ἔῤῥισ τον, they threw stones at him, Eur. Bateh. 1096. Eiéd Πελ- 
λήνης πέτεσθαι, to ἣν straight to Pellene, Ar. Av. 1421. Tis γὰρ αὐτῷ ἔστιν 
ὅστις THs ἀρχῆς ἀντιποιεῖται; For who is there that disputes with him the 
sovereignty [makes for the sovereignty in opposition to him]? ii. 1.11. “Oees 
wekira: σκοποῦ, τοξεύετ᾽ ἀνδρὸς τοῦδε Soph. Ant. 1033. ᾿Ωἡ, pillow 
πέτρον τάχα cov bur. Cycl. 51. ἸἸένα, rod πρόσω; to go towards that which 
is farther on, i. e. to go farther, to proceed, i. 3. 1. Λήγει δ᾽ ἕξις δραμοῦσα 
«οὔ προσωτάτω Soph. Aj. 731. Οὗτοι avrerosotvero ἀφετῆς, these 
were rivals in valor, iv. 7.12. Βασιλικῇς μεσα ποιουμένους TEINS» 
laying claim to the kingly art, Pl. Pol. 289 6. Τοῦ δὲ φρονεῖν εὖ .. ἀμφι- 
σξητῶ Isocr. 98 c. 


2. The student cannot fail to remark the ease with which verbs of motion 
pass into those of simple effort and desire. Thus, teas, and, more commonly, 
ἐφίεμεαι, to send one’s self to, to rush to, to strive for, to seek, to desire ; ὀρέγο- 
pas, to reach after, to strive for, to seek, to court, to desire; as, “Tivos λεχέων 
Soph. Tr. 514. Τοῖς δόξης ἐφιεμένοις Cyr. iii.3.10. Ὀρέξασθα, τῆς ὁμιλίας αὖ 
τοῦ Mem. i. 2.15. Σωκράτους ὠρεχϑήπτην Ib. 16. Τι μῆς ὀρέγεσθαι: Hier. 7.3. 


276 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE OF PRICE, &c. [ΒΚ In" 


2. Genitive of Price, &c. 


374. Rute XII. Price, vatue, ΜΕΒΙΊ; 
and CRIME are put in the Genitive. 


a. PRICE. Ἵππον, dv... ἀπέδοτο πεντήκοντα δαρεικῶν, the horse, which he 
had sold for fifty darics, vii. 8. 6. "Qyetodas.. μικρὰ μέτρα πολλοῦ ae γυ- 
giov ili. 2. 1. Πολλοῦ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐπώλουν Mem. i. 2.60. Tay δ᾽ ἐμῶν 
παίδων φυγὰς Ψυχῆς ἄν ἀλλαξαίμεθ᾽, οὐ χρυσοῦ μόνον Eur. Med. 967 
Δόξα δὲ χρημάπων οὐκ ὠνητή Isocr. 21] Ὁ. ᾿Αμφίλοχον .. ἀπελύτεωσε τα- 
λάνσων ἐννέα Dem. 159. 18. 


β. VALUE AND Merit. Toad ἄξιος τῇ στρατίᾳ, worth much to the army, 
iv. 1. 28. "Avdoss ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας i. 7. 8. Τῶν καλλίστων ἑαυτὸν 
ἀξιώσαντα iii. 2. 7. Τὸ μνῆμα πολλοὶ χώσουσιν ἀξίως ὑμῶν Cyr. vii. 3. 11. 
Παῖδα .. ἀνάξιον μὲν σοῦ, κατάξιον δ᾽ ἐμ οὔ Soph. Phe 1008. “Exacrov ϑένσος 
σῆς ἴσης ἀξίας Pl. Pol. 257 Ὁ. MelZovos αὐτὰ σιμκῶντα, οἱ λαμβάνοντες 
Oyr. ii. 1.13. Ei οὖν δεῖ με κατὰ «ὸ δίκαιον τῆς ἀξίας τιμᾶσθαι, τούτου 
τιμῶμα;, τῆς ἐν Πρυτανείῳ csr ἥσεως Pl. ΑΡο]. 5866. Πρέσπον yi ray ἦν δαίμο- 
vos τοὐμοῦ τάδε Soph. Aj. 534. [Ιρεπόντως τῶν πραξάντων Pl. Menex. 239 ¢ 
(for the common construction of πρέπω, see ὃ 403). 


yy. Crime. ᾿Ασεξείας φεύγοντα, accused of impiety, Pl. Apol. 35d. As 

κάζουσι δὲ καὶ iyxAnparos,..axagscriags Cyr.i. 2.7. Διώξομαί os 
δειλίας Ar. Eq. 368. Καλοῦμα, Πεισθέταιρον ὕξρεως Ar. Av. 1046. Te 
πατρὶ φόνου tastiexouas Pl. Euthyph. 4d. ᾿Επαισιασάμενός με φόνου Dem. 
552.1. Οὐδεὶς ἔνοχός ἔστι Atuworakiou οὐδὲ δειλίας Lys. 140.1. Τῆς 
αὐτῆς ἀγνοίας ὑσπεύθῦνος εἶ σοῖς ἄλλοις Dem. 293. 28. 


Nore. The Gen. is sometimes used to express the punishment; as, Θανά- 
wou δὲ οὗτοι κρίνουσι, and these pronounce sentence of death, Cyr.i.2.14. Συλ- 
λαμβάνοντες ὑπῆγον Savérou H. Gr. ii. 3.12. ᾿Ανθρώπων κατα ψηφισθέντων 
Savdrov ἢ φυγῆς Pl. Rep.558 ἃ. “Ὥσε᾽ ἔνοχοι δεσμοῦ γεγόνᾶσι Dem. 
1229. 11.—In this construction (which is rare except with ϑανάσου), the 
punishment appears to be regarded either as the desert of the crime, or as the 
end in view (§ 372) in judicial procedings. 


8. Genitive of Sensible and Mental Olyect. 


$2378. The object of sensation, thought, or emotion may 
be regarded as its exciting cause, and, in this view, may be put 
in the Genitive. Hence, 


Rove XIII. Words of sensation, and of men- 
TAL STATE OF ACTION govern the Genitive ; as, 


a. Or SENSATION. iro iysicavero, tasted of food, iii. 1.2. Τεῦσα 
τῆς ϑύρας, ‘have a smack of,’ i. 6. ‘ try,’ or ‘knock at,’ Ar. Ran, 462. Tot 
waidas..ytvorior aivaros, ‘give a taste of, Pl. Rep, 537 a. Oliv... 
ὀσφραίνεσθαι, to catch the scent of wine, ν. 8.3. Θορύξου ἤκουσε διὰ «ὧν 
wakswy ἰόνφος, ‘heard,’ i. 8. 16. Tod δὲ πάντων ἡδίσσον ἀκούσματος, ἐσαίνου 
σιαυτῆς, ἀνήκοος εἶ Mem. ii. 1.31. Οὐκ ἀκροώμενοι δὲ σοῦ ἄδοντος Cyr. i. 
9. 10. Κλύων σάλσιγγος Soph. Aj. 290, Οὐδεὶς δὲ πώποτε Σὰ vedrous 
οὐδὲν ἀσεβὲς οὐδὲ ἀνόσιον οὔτε πράττοντος εἶδεν, οὔτε λέγοντος ἤκουσε Mem, 


Bt. Tt. 


cu. 1.] OF SENSIBLE AND MENTAL OBJECT. 277 


β. Or Perception, KNowLepGr, Reriecrion, ExPertence, and Hasrr 
Tis .. ἐπιδουλῆς οὐκ ἠσθάνεσο, he did not perceive the plot, i. 1. 8. Ὅσοι 
ἀλλήλων Zvviscay Thi. 3. "Evédwod δὲ τῶν cidcrwy Mem. iii. 6. 17 
Ἔπσπιστήμων εἶναι τῶν ἀμφὶ τάξεις ii, 1.7. Θέλω δ᾽ ἀΐδρις μᾶλλον ἢ 
σοφὸς κακῶν εἶναι Asch. Sup. 453. Ἰδιώσης . « τούτου τοῦ ἔργου, ‘un 
skilled in,’ (Ee. 3. 9. Τῆς ἀρετῆς. . οὐδένα δεῖ ἰδιωπεύειν Pl. Prot. 326 e. 
Κύρου .. ἐν πείρᾳ γενέσθαι, to Ἀδὰ been well acquainted with Cyrus {in the 
knowledge of Cyrus by proof], i. 9.1. Πειρώμενοι ταύτης τῆς τάξεως, 
“making trial of,’ iii. 2. 38. Τῶν φειχῶν ἡμῶν resogy, ‘attempt,’ Th. vii. 
12. "Eprssoos γὰρ ἦσαν τῆς Παφλαγονίας γ. 6. 1. "Ασπείροι ὄντες αὐτῶν 
iii. 9,16. Τῶν ἐμπείρως αὐτοῦ ἐχόντων ἰϊ. 6.1. Rivas ἔχω ris ἐνθάδε 
λέξεως Pl. Apol. 17 ἃ. Οὐ veiw ὧν ἱππικῆς Ar. Vesp. 1429. Ἢ άς εἰμί 
was τῶν τῆσδε μύθων Soph. ΕἸ. 372. ᾿Αήδεις rod κατακούειν Dem. 15. 27. 


§ 3 7G. y- OF Memory. Todrwy οὐδεὶς μέμνησαι, these things no 
one remembers, v. 8. 25. ~ Οὐδενὸς ἔπι roUrwy tuéwvneo, ‘made mention of,’ 
vil. 5. 8. Τῆς ἀρχῆς wrynwovedousy Isocr.12c. Todrov δὲ αὐτοὺς bao 
μιμνήσκετε Cyr. ili. 3.37. Μή μ᾽ ἀναμνήσης κακῶν Eur. Alc. 1045. 
Biou δὲ τοῦ παρόντος οὗ μνεί αν ives; Soph. El. 392. Τῶν πάροιθε μὲν λόγων 
λαϑώμ εθ᾽ ἄμφω, ‘forget,’ Eur. Hipp. 288. Ὕ νον σε, λήθην τῶν καθ᾽ 
ἡμέραν κακῶν Eur. Bacch. 282. 


3. Or Care. Κήδεσδθαι Σεύδου, to care ~ Seuthes, vii. 5. 5. Τούτου 
σοι δεῖ μέλειν, of this there must be to you a care, i, 6. you must take care of 
this, Cyr. i. 6. 16. Τῶν παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ δὲ βαρδάρων ἐπεμελεῖτο i. 1. 5. 
᾿Αμελεῖν ἡμῶν αὐτῶν, ‘to be careless of, ‘to neglect, 1. 8.11. Ἐ σπιμελὴς 
ἀγαθῶν, ἀμελὴς κακῶν Pl. Conv. 197 ἃ. ‘H τῆς ὑγιείας ἐπιμέλεια Cyr. 
i. 6. 16. Μὴ μεσαμέλειεν σοι τῆς ἐμῆς δωρεᾶς, ‘repent of,’ Cyr. viii. 3. 32, 
ΕΠ νομοίζοιμει ϑεοὺς ἀνθρώπων τι φροντίζειν, οὐκ ἄν ἀμελοίην αὐτῶν Mem. 
i. 4. 11. Φυλασσομίνους φῶν νεῶν Th.iv. 1]. Ὅσως αὐσῶν ἀνα κῶς 
ἕξουσιν Id. viii. 102. 


. Or DESIRE. ‘Eeayees rovrov, desiring this, iii. 1.29. El? eis δὲ χρη- 
μάτων ἐπσιθῦμεῖ, ‘desires’ [sets his mind upon; cf. ὃ 373. 2], iii. 2. 39. 
Γλιχόμενος «οῦ ζῆν, eager for life, or clinging to life (ἢ 370. N.), Pl. Phado, 
117 a. Πεινήσας χρημάτων, having hungered for wealth, Cyr. viii. 3. 39, 
Πόλις ἐλευθερίας δι ψήσασα Pl. Rep. 562 c. Κις τῶνφσες τῆς εἰρήνης Ar. 
Pax, 497. 


g. Or Various Emotion. "“Ayapmas λήματος, I admire the spirit, Eur. 
Rhes. 244. Ods οὐκ ἄν ἀνασχέσθαΐ αὐτοῦ βασιλεύοντος, who would not en- 
dure him as their king, ii. 2.1. ὯΩν ἐγώ σοι ob φθονήσω, which I shall not 
grudge to you, Cyr. viii. 4.16. Αἰσχρὸν στέγης ys φθονῆσαι, it is mean to 
grudge him our roof, i. e. to refuse him admission, Symp. 1.12. Μηδέ ua 
Ploviens εὐγμάσων, ‘deny, or ‘ reject,’ Aisch. Pr. 583. ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐ μεγαίρω 
τοῦδέ σοι δωρήμιατος Ib. 696. 


ᾧ 377. Remarks. 1. The idea of hearing passes, by. an easy tran- 
sition, into that of obedience (obédio, to give ear to, to listen to, to obey, from ob 
and audio, to hear). Hence, words of obedience govern the Gen. (cf. ὃ 405. 1) ; 
as, Τούτους... βασιλέως οὐκ ἀκούειν, that these did not obey [or were not subject 
to] the king, iii. 5. 16. Of δὲ Καρδοῦχιοι οὔτε καλούντων ὑπήκουον, * regarded 
their invitations [listened to them calling],’ iv. 1. 9. Ὕήκοοι σῶν Μοσσυνοί- 
κων, subject to the Mossynaci. ἹἙΚατήκοοί σε ἦσαν τῶν νόμων Pl. Criti. 120 6. 
᾿Ανηκουστεῖν δὲ τῶν πατρὸς λόγων οἷόν τε eas; Asch. Prom. 40. Σφῶν wei- 
éscéas Th. vii. 73. Πῶς Xen καλοῦντος ἀπειθεῖν Cyr. iv. 5. 19. 

“4 


278 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. | BOOK Hl 


2. Verbs of sight commonly govern the Acc.; and many.verbs which are 
followed by the Gen. according to this rule sometimes or often take the Aca 
(especially of a neuter adjective) ; as, Eidoyev rods πολεμίους Vi. δ. 10, Ai 
σθάνονται ἕκαστα Mem. i. 4.5. See §§ 424. 2, 432. 2. 


4. Genitive of Time and Place. 


§3'78. The time and place in which any thing is done 
may be regarded as essential conditions of the action, or as 
rodperating to produce it. Hence, 


Rute XIV. The time and PLAcE ww wHicH 
are put in the Genitive (cf. §§ 420, 439) ; as, 


1. Tre. "Quyero τῆς νυκτός, he went in the night, vii. 2.17. Ταῦτα 
uly τῆς ἡμέρας ἐγένετο, ‘in the day,’ vii. 4.14. Τῆς δείλης δὲ ἥκειν, ‘in 
the evening,’ vii. 2.16. “Ὥστε τῆς ἡμέρας ὅλης διῆλθον .., ἀλλὰ δείλης 
ἀφίκοντο iii. 5.11. Elet νυκαὸς δέοι σι, εἴσε καὶ ἡμέρας, ‘whether by 
night or by day,’ iii. 1.40. Βασιλεὺς οὐ μαχεῖται δέκα ἡμερῶν, ‘within 
ten days,’ i. 7. 18. “Ors οὔπω δὴ πολλοῦ χρόνϑυ .. ἐπιτύχοι, ‘now for a 
long time,’ i. 9. 25. ᾿Εξιόντες δ᾽ ἑκάστης ἡμέρας, ‘every day,’ vi. 6. 1. 
Πολλάκις τῆς ἡμέρας, many times a day, Ar. Eq. 250. Ποιεῖ δὲ σοῦσο ποὸλ- 
λάκις σοῦ μηνός Cyr. i. 2.9. Τρία ἡμιδαρεικὰ rod μηνός, three half-darics 
a month, i. 3.21. Τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ ϑέρους Th. ii. 28,79, 80. Tod δ᾽ ἐπίγιγνο- 
μένου χειμῶνος Ib. v. 13, 86, 51, 56, 116. “EZ ἐφςῶν daovros Ar. Lys. 
280. Οὔτε σις ξένος ἀφῖκται χρόνου συχνοῦ Pl. Phedo, 57a. Mirssow.. 
ob μακροῦ χρόνου Soph. El. 477. Odxies σοῦ λοι οὔ [80. χρόνου] πάσχοιμεν 
ἄν κακῶς Dem. 44. 12. 


ᾧ 4 299. 9. Ῥιλσε. Αὐσοῦ [sc. σόσου] μείναντες, remaining in that 
place, i. 10.17. Tévd’ εἰσεδέξω σειχέων, ‘within the walls,’ Eur. Ph. 451. 
‘Egxiwy.. ἐγκεκλημένους Soph. Aj. 1274. Κατσέκλεισαν.. Μακεδονίας 
"Abnvaios Περδίκκαν Th. v. 83. Τῆς δὲ Ἰωνίας καὶ ἄλλοθ, πολλαχοῦ αἰσχρὸν 
νενόμισται Pl, Conv. 182 Ὁ. Mir’ ἐμδατεύειν πατρίδος Soph. Gd. T. 825. 
Tis δὲ μὴ "wbaivys ὅρων Id. Ed. C. 400. [lidiwv ἐσπινίσσετα, Ib. 689. 
Ἔσχάτης δ᾽ ἑρῶ πυρᾷ ς νεωρῇ Borrevyov Soph. El. 900. ‘Eerrias μεσομφά- 
λου ἕστηκεν ἤδη μῆλα ΒΟ. Ag. 1056. Λαιᾶς δὲ χειρὸς οἱ σιδηροτέκτονες 
οἰκοῦσι Χάλυξε; Id. Pr. 714. KYKA. Ποσέρα; τῆς χερός, ΧΟΡ, Ἔν δεξιᾷ 
gov Eur. Cycl. 681. . 


Remarks. a. This use of the Gen., to denote the place where, occurs very 
rarely in prose, except in those adverbs of place which are properly genitives 
(Ὁ 320. 1) ; as, οὗ [sc. πόσου], in which place, where, abrod, there, ὁμοῦ, in the 
same place, οὐδαμοῦ, nowhere, ἄς. Cf. ἃ 421. β. 


β. In Epic poetry, this Gen. is sometimes employed to denote the place upon 
or over which any thing moves; as, "Ἔρχονται πεδίοιο, they advance upon the 
plain, B. 801. "Ἑκαμον πολέος πεδίοιο ϑέουσαι A. 244. Ἑλκέμεναι νειοῖο Ba- 
δείης πηκτὸν ἄροτρον K. 353. ; 


γ. The ideas of place and time are combined in expressions like those which 
follow, relating to journeying (Fr. journée, a day’s-march, from - Lat. diurnus, 
from dies, day); ‘Exrraxaidexa γὰρ σταθμῶν τῶν tyyurdrw οὐδὲν εἴχομεν Aap 
Cévew, ‘during the last seventeen day’s-marches,’ ii. 2.11. ‘Hysgsvovras . 
μακρᾶς κελεύθου Asch. Cho. 710. 


UH. 4.1 GENITIVE ACTIVE. : ἘΝ 
3. In the phrase μιᾶς χειρός, in the following passage, the idea of time is 


combined with that of action; ᾿Εξὸν ustis wor χειρὸς εὖ ϑέσθαι τάδε, ‘at a single 
stroke,’ ‘ once for all,’ Eur. Here. 938. 


§ 380. ΠῚ. That which produces any thing, 
as 115 ACTIVE ΟΥ̓ EFFICIENT CAUSE}; or, in other 
words, that by which, as its author, agent, or giver, 
any thing is made, written, said, done, bestowed, 
&c., or from which .any thing is obtained, heard 
learned, inquired, requested, demanded, &c. 


To this division, which must obviously refer chiefly to per 
sons, belongs the following rule, which will of course be un- 
derstood as applying only to adjuncts. 


Genitive Active. 


Rute XV. The auruor, acEnt, and GIVER 
are put in the Genitive ; as, 


a. With Verbs of Obtaining, Hearing, Learning, Inquiring, Requesting, &e 
Ταῦτα δέ cov συχόντες, and obtaining this of you, vi. 6.32. ὯΩν δέ cov 
φυχεῖν ἐφίεμιαι, ἄκουσον (§ 370) Soph. Phil. 1315. ᾿Ακχούων Κύρου ἔξω ὄντα 
.- βασιλέα '. 8.15. Τῶν κατωαλελειμμένων ἐπ υνθάνονσο, ori οἱ pay 
Θρᾷκες . . axovre, ‘learned by inquiry from,’ vi. 5. 25. Καὶ ἐπυνθάνοντο οἱ 
᾿Αρκάδες σῶν περὶ Ἐξενοφῶντα, τί τὰ πυρὰ κατασθέσειαν, ‘inquired of,’ Ib. 95. 
Maés δέ μου, ὦ παῖ, καὶ τάδε Ογτ. i. 6. 44. Atovras δέ cov καὶ τοῦτο Vie 
6. 33, Ἐμοὶ χάρισαι ὧν ἂν σοῦ δεηθῶ (ὃ 357. N.) Cyr. ν. δ. 85. Σοῦ γὰρ 
.. βραχύν «τιν᾽ αἰτεῖ μῦθον Soph. Gd. Ο. 1161. 


§$ SSH. β. With Passive Verbs and Verbals. Πληγεὶς Suyargds 
τῆς ἐμῆς, smitten by my daughter, Eur. Or. 497. Φωσὸς ἠπατημένη Soph. 
Aj. 807. Τῶν φίλων νικώμενος Ib. 1352. loins μερίμνης τοῦθ᾽ ὑποσαρα 
φεὶς λέγεις ; Soph. id. T. 728. Tod κακοῦ πόφσμου φυτευθείς Id, Cid. C. 
1393. "Aéixros ἡγητῆρος Ib. 1521. Views ἄλῦπα Ib. 1519. Κακῶν 
γὰρ δυσάλωτος οὐδείς Ib. 1722. Φίλων ἄκλαυτος Soph. Ant. 847. Κείνης 
διδακεαά Id. El. 548. ---- This use of the Gen. is poetic, and is most frequent 
with the Participle. 


y- With Substantives. Ξενοφῶντος Κύρου ᾿Ανάδασις, Xenophon’s Ex- 
pedition of Cyrus. Oi μὲν "νέοι σοῖς τῶν πρεσξυσέρων ἐπαίνοις χαίρουσιν, οἱ δὲ 
γεραίτεροι ταῖς τῶν νέων rimais ἀγάλλονται, the young rejoice in the praises of 
their elders, and the old delight in the honors paid them by the young, Mem. ii. 
1. 33. Ἥρας ἀλατείαις, wanderings caused by Juno, Msch. Pr. 900. Νότου 
ἢ Bogia . . κύματα Soph. Tr. 113. é 


ἃ 382. IV. That which constitutes any thing 
wuHat iT 15. ‘To this head may be referred what- 
ever serves to complete the idea of a thing or prop- 


280 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. [Boox II? 


erty, by adding some distinction or characteristic 
ence, | 
Genitive Constituent. 


Rute XVI. An abdJUNCT DEFINING A THING 
UR PROPERTY is put in the Genitive ; as, 


Τὸ Mivwvos orgérevua, the army of Meno, i. 2. 21. 


§ 383. Remarks. a. The THING OR PROPERTY DEFINED 
may be either distinctly expressed by its appropriate word, or 
may be involved in another word ; as, βασιλεύς in βασιλεύω, σα- 
τράπης in σατραπεύω (ὃ 389). Cf. δὲ 351, 362. ὃ, 391. 5, 394 
395. ὃ. 


Norse. In particular, adjectives in which a substantive is compounded with 
ἀ- privative (§ 325), have often a Gen. defining the substantive. See ὃ 395. 


§ 384. 38. A genitive defining a substantive is sometimes 
connected with it by an intervening word, which is usually a 
substantive verb. See, for examples, §§ 387, 390; cf. § 365. — 
This form of construction may be referred to ellipsis ; thus, 
Ἦν [ἄνϑρωπος} ἐτῶν ὡς τριάκοντα, he was [a man] of about 
thirty years (§ 387). 


§ 38o. y- A substantive governing the Gen. is often understood, 
particularly υἱός, son, οἶκος, house, and other words denoting domestic relation 
or abode. Thus, Γλοῦς ὁ Ταμώ, Glus, the son of Tamos, ii. 1.3. OQ Διὸς 
[se. ϑύγατερ) “Agrewss Eur. Iph. A. 1570. Βυρσίνης τῆς Ἵπαίον (sc. γυναι 
nos] Ar. Eq. 449. Θύραζέ μ᾽ ἐξενέγκατε’ is σοῦ Πιταάλου [sc. οἶκον), ‘to 
Pittalus’s [house],’ Ar. Ach. 1222. Eis οὐδενὸς διδασκάλου πώποτε φοιτήσαντα 
Cyr. ii. 8.9. Τῶν ἐν ᾿Αδμήφου κακῶν Eur. Ale. 761] (cf. "Ev ᾿Αδμήσου δόμοις 
68). Ἔν “Αἰδον Soph. Ant. 654 (cf. Eiv “Αἰδον δόμοις 1241). Ἔν ᾿Ασκλῃ 
σοῦ [sc. ἱερῷ} Mem. iii. 13. 3. Eis Τροφωνίου [sc. ἄντρον] Ar. Nub. 508. 

δ, The Gen. is often used in periphrasis, particularly with xine, thing, and, 
by the poets, with δέμας, form, body, κάρα, head, ὄνομα, name, and similar 
words. Thus, Aiuas ᾿Αγαμέμινονος ='Ayaputuvove Eur. Hec. 723. 70 φίλ- 
rary γυναικὸς ᾿Ιοκάστης κάρα Soph. Gd. T. 950. "QL wobsivdv ὄνομ᾽ ὁμιλίας 
ivas Eur. Or. 1082. See § 395. a. 


s. A substantive governing the Gen. is sometimes used by the poets instead 
of an adjective; as, Xgucdv. . ἐπῶν, the gold of words, for “Ean χρυσᾷ, golden 
words, Ar. Plut. 268. "QL μησρὸς ἐμῆς σέξας Asch. Pr. 1091. Πολυνείκους 
βίαν Eur. Ph. 56. 


§ 386. An adjunct defining a rune either expresses a 
property of that thing, or points out another thing related, tc 
it. An adjunct defining a Property points out a thing related 
to that property. Hence the consTITUENT GENITIVE is either, 
1. the Genitive of Property, or 2. the Genitive of Relation. ' 


on. 1. OF PROPERTY. — OF RELATION. 281 


1. Genitive of Property. 


§ 387. ‘The Genitive of property expresses quality, di- 
mension, age, &c. ‘Thus, 


"Hy ἐτῶν ὡς πριάκοντα, he was about thirty years old [of about thirty years], 
ii. 6. 20. Tlorapdv ὄντα τὸ εὖρος ““λέθρου i. 4. 9, a river being [of | a ple- 
thrum in breadth (cf. ἸΠοταμὸν πὸ εὖρος π“λεθριαῖον i. 5. 4, and see 9 333. 6). 
[Vsixos] εὖρος εἴκοσι ποδῶν, ὕψος δὲ ἑκαπτόν- μῆκος δ᾽ ἐλέγετο εἶναι sixo- 
σι “Ἰαρασαγγῶν ii. 4.12. ὋὉ δὲ τᾶς ἡσυχίας βίοτος, but a life of quiet 
[== βίοτος ἥσυχος, a quiet life], Eur. Bac. 388. Σσολίδα.. re υφᾶς [= ‘rev. 
φεράν] Eur. Ph. 1491. Τοσόνδ᾽ ἔχεις τόλμης πρόσωπον [= οὕτω πολμηρόν] : 
Soph. (ἃ. T. 533. Τὸ δὲ συμανεῦσαι «. χρόνου πολλοῦ [ἐσσι], καὶ σαγχά- 
λεσον Pl. Leg. 708 ἃ, Ἔστιν ὁ πόλεμος ody ὅπλων τοσπλέον, ἀλλὰ δαπάνης 
Th.i. 83. Ὅσοι τῆς αὐτῆς γνώμης ἦσαν 10. 118. Todd’ sed πολλοῦ πόνου 
Eur. Ph. 719. 


_ Nore. It is obvious from the examples above, that the Gen. of property 
performs the office of an adjective. Its use to express quality, in the strict 
sense of the term, is chiefly poetic. 


2. Genitive of Relation. 


§ 388. The Genitive of relation, in its full extent, in- 
cludes much which has been already adduced, under other and 
more specific heads. The relations which remain to be con- 
sidered are, (a.) those of domestic, social, and civil life, 
(b.) those of possession and ownership ; (c.) that of the object 
of an action to the action or agent; (d.) those of time and 
place ; (e.) those of simple reference, of explanation, &c. 


The Genitives expressing these relations may be termed, (a.) the Gen. of 
social relation, (b.) the Gen. possessive, (c.) thé Gen. objective, (d.) the Gen. 
of local and temporal relation, (e.) the Gen. of reference, of explanation, Sc. 


ᾧ 389. 2 Genitive or ΒΟΟΙΑΙ, ΒΈΤΑΤΙΟΝ. 


‘O τῆς βασιλέως γυναικὸς ἀδελφός, the brother of the hing’s wife, ii. 3. 
17. Tay "Odeuceady βασιλέα vii. 3. 16. ΦΔούλους «ούτων i. 9. 15. "Hy 
αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε '. 1.2. Βασιλεύων [= Βασιλεὺς ὧν ᾧ 383. a] αὐτῶν 
v. 6.37. Τῷ σατραπεύοντι [= σασράπῃ ὄντι) τῆς χώρας iii. 4.31. (See 
also ὃ 350.) Γείσων.. τῆς Ἑλλάδος (cf. ὃ 399) iti. 2.4. Τῆς πόλεως 
ἐχθροῖς Ven. 13.12. Τοὺς ἐκείνου ἐχθίστους, « . σοὺς Κὶ ύρου φίλους iii. 2. 5. 
Διὰ «ῆς ἑαυτῶν πολεμίας χώρας, through the country of their enemies, iv. 
7. 19. 


Remark. To this analogy may be referred the use of the Gen. for he 
Dat., with some adjectives implying intimate connection ; as, Ὃ δὲ φήσας wort 
συγγενὴς τοῦ Κύρου εἶναι, and he who once said that he was reluted to Cyrus, 
or a relative of Cyrus, Cyr. v. 1.24. Οὐδ᾽ ἡ ξύνοικος τῶν κάτω Seav Δίκη 
Soph. Ant. 451. Λακεδαίμονος δὲ γαῖά wis ξυνώνυμος ; Eur. Hel. 495. 
Βάκχον εὔιον, Μαινάδων ὁμόστολον Soph. Ed. T. 212. Τὸν Σωκράτους μὲν 
ὁμώνυμον Pl.Soph.218b. Γῆς ἰσόμοιρ᾽ ἀήρ Soph. ΕἸ]. 87, ᾿Ακόλουθα 
φαῦτα τάντα ἀλλήλων Ee. 11. 192. "OQ φέγγος ὕσνου διάδοχον Soph. Ph. 
867. ‘O κυξερνήτης τὸ τῆς νεὼς καὶ ναυτῶν ἀεὶ ξυμφέρ ον παραφυλάττων 


<i * 


282 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE POSSESSIVE. | BOOK Ils 


Pl. Pol. 296 6. Τὰ πρόσφορα τῆς viv παρούσης συμφορᾶς Eur. Hel. 508 
Cf. 88 399, 400, 403. — It will be observed, that, in some of these examples 
the adjective may be regarded as used substantively, and that this construc 
tion is not confined to the names of persons. 


b. GernrriIvE POossESSIVE. 


§ 390. The Genitive possessive denotes that to which 
any thing belongs as a possession, power, right, duty, quality 
&ec. Thus, : 


Tz Συεννέσιος βασίλεια, the palace of Syennesis, i. 2.23. Ἦσαν αἱ Ia- 
νικαὶ πόλεις Τισσαφέρνους, the Ionian cities belonged to Tissaphernes, i. 1. 6. 
Τῶν μὲν γὰρ νικώντων σὸ κατακαίνειν, τῶν δὲ ἡστωμένων τὸ ἀποθνήσκειν 
ἐσσί, for it is the part of victors to hill, but of the vanquished to die, iii. 2. 39. 
Koivn ἡ Midou xarovutvni. 2.13. Adrod γὰρ εἶναί φησιν, ἐπείπερ Καὶ ύρου 
ἴσων ii. δ. 38. Totrov rd εὖρος δύο «“λέθρα i. 2.5. Τῶν γὰρ νικώντων 
ἰστὶ καὶ τὰ ἑαυτῶν σώξειν, καὶ τὰ τῶν ἡττωμένων λαμθάνειν iii. 2. 89, 
"Hy ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἐθελήσητε γενέσθαι, ‘your own men,’ i. 6. ‘ independent,’ 
Dem. 42. 10. Tis πόλεως ὄντας, true to the state, Isocr. 185 Ὁ. “Ὥσε᾽ οὐ 
Κρέοντος προστάτου γεγράψομαι Soph. Gd. T. 411. ᾿Αλλ’ ἐσσὶ σοῦ λέ- 
ψόνφος, ἤν φόξους λέγῃ, ‘at the mercy of the speaker,’ Ib 917. Μηδ᾽ ἃ μὴ 
“Suyts ποιοῦ σεαυτῆς, ‘make yours,’ Id. Ant. 546. 


§ 49 1. Remarxs. «. The idea of possession is sometimes modified 
or strengthened by an adjective or adverb; as, Ἱερὸς ὁ χῶρος τῆς “Agréusdos 
the spot is sacred to Diana [consecrated to be Diana’s], v. 3.13. Ἰδίων ἕαν- 
τοῦ κτημάτων, of his own acquisitions, Pl. Menex. 247 Ὁ. Οἱ δὲ xivdove σῶν 
ἰφισσηκόσων ἴδιο, Dem. 26. 11. Τὸ οἰκεῖον ἑκατέρου σημεῖον Pl. Themt 
1935.. Τὸν ἔρωτα τοῦτον πότερα κοινὸν οἴει εἶναι σ 'ἄντων ἀνθρώπων ς Pl. Conv. ᾿ 
205 a. Τῆς ἡμετέρας Μούσης ἐπιχώριον Ib. 189 Ὁ. 


8. A neuter adjective used substantively takes the Gen. possessive, in connec- 
taoa with verbs of praise, blame, and wonder; as, Τοῦτο ἐπαινῶ ᾿Αγησιλάου, 1 
commend this in Agesilaus (this characteristic of Agesilaus], Ages. 8.4. ‘O 
μέριφονται μάλιστα ἡμῶν Th. i. 84. "Αλλα σέ σου πολλὰ ἄγαμαι Symp. 8. 
12, ᾿Εδαύμασα αὐτοῦ πρῶτον μὲν rodro Pl. Phedo, 89 a. Τοῦσο. . ἐν σοῖς 
κυσὶ κατόψει, ὃ καὶ ἄξιον ϑαυμάσαι «οὔ ϑηρίου Pl. Rep. 376 a. 


γ. Evixesis. The possessor is sometimes put in the case belonging to the 
thing possessed, with an ellipsis of the latter, particularly in comparison ; as, 
fe. gp + ὅμοια ἐκείνῳ [= σοῖς ἐκείνου ἅρμασι], chariots similar to his [char- 
wts |, Cyr. vi. 1. 50 (cf. [“Aguara] ὅμοια «οἷς Κύρου 2.7). Ὁ μοίαν ταῖς δού- 
λαις εἶχε σὴν ἰσθήτα Cyr. v. 1.4. ᾿Ὡσλισμένοι .. τοῖς αὐτοῖς Κύρῳ trans 
Cyr. vii. 1. 2. Ἔχομεν σώματα ἱκανώσερα «ούπων, we have bodies better able 
than theirs, iii. 1. 23. Μήδ᾽ ἰξισώσῃς. rdods [- σὰ τῶνδε κακὰ] τοῖς ἐμοῖς 
κακοῖς Soph. Cid. T. 1507. “Agyovrss μέσον ἔχονσες σὸ αὑτῶν i. 8, 22 (cf. 
Βασιλεὺς δὴ rors μέσον ἔχων τῆς αὑτοῦ crearias 23). 


3. The verbs ὄζω, to smell, πνέίω, to breathe, and σπροσξάλλω, to emit, may 
take a Gen. defining a noun implied in these verbs ὃ 383. «) or understood 
with them; thus, "Οζουσ, πίσσης, they smell of pitch [emit the smell of 
pitch], Ar. Ach. 190. Τῆς κεφαλῆς ὄξδω μύρον (ἢ 355) Ar. Eccl. 524, To 
ἱματίων ὀζήσει δεξιόσηπος, ‘ there will be a smell of, Ar. Vesp. 1058. “Ὡς 
ἡδύ μοι προσίπνευσε χοιρείων κρεῶν Ar, Ran. 338, [Πόθεν Beorod με «ροσί- 
€aas; Ar. Pax, 180, 


cH. 1.] OBJECTIVS. 283 


s. It will be observed, that the Genitive possessive is the exact converse of 
the Genitive of property (§ 387), the one denoting that which possesses, and 
the other, that which is possessed. 


c. GENITIVE OBJECTIVE. 


§ 392. The object of an action, regarded as such, is put 
in the Accusative or Dative (δ 339). But if the action, instead 
of being predicated by a verb, is merely represented as a thing 
or property (or as implied in a thing or property), by a noun, 
adjective, or adverb, then its object is usually regarded simply 
as something defining that thing or property, and is conse- 
quently put in the Genitive. Thus, 


_ 1. Genitive Or THe Drrecr Ossecr. ‘O φρούραρχος τὰς φυλακὰς 
ἰξεςάζει, the commander of a garrison reviews his troops, Gic. 9. 15; but, 
Κῦρος ἐξέτασιν ποιεῖται τῶν “EXAnvwy, Cyrus makes a review of the Creeks, 
i. 7.15 Τῶν φοιούτων ἔργων ἐξεταστικόν, fitted to review such matters, Mem. 
1.1.7. Tov ὄλεθρον τῶν συσπσραπτιωπτῶν i. 2. 26. ᾿Ιὼ γάμοι . . ὀλέθριοι 
φίλων Asch. Ag. 1156 (cf. Σπόψγος ὥλεσεν γραφήν 1329). TH ὑπερξολῇ 
Tov ὄρους iv. 4.18 (ef. Ὕπερέξαλλον τὰ den 20). Καρδίας δηκτήρια Eur. 
Hee. 235 (cf. Δάκνει φρένα Id. Heracl. 483). Διδασκαλικὸν « « σοφία ς Pl. 
Euthyph. 3c, Μαϑθητσὰς ἰατρικῆς Pl. Rep. 599 6. "Αλλους φ«οιούτων 
φσινῶν μαθητικούς Ib. 475 6. ᾿Αρτιμαθὴς κακῶν Eur. Hec. 686. Οψιμαθῇ 
.«. σῶν FAsovezsoy ΟΥτ. 1. 6.35. Τοξικῆς τε καὶ ἀκοντίσεως φιλομα- 
θίστατον Ἰ. Ὁ. 5 (οἴ. Σωφροσύνην καταμάθοι 38). Λάθρα δὲ σῶν στρα στὡ- 
φῶν, but without the knowledge of the soldiers, i. 3. 8 (cf. Aabciv αὐτὸν ἀπελ- 
θών 17). Ketgu «τῶν ᾿Αδηναίων ΤῊ. 1. 101. ᾿Απαδῆῇ κακῶν vii. 7. 33, 
᾿Απαιδεύτους μουσικῆς Cyt. iii. 8, 55. 


2. GENITIVE OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT. Εἰὔχεσθαι «οῖς .«. ϑεοῖς, to 
pray to the gods, iv. 3.133; but, Θεῶν εὐχάς, prayers to the gods, Pl 
-Phedr.244e. Ta τῆς ϑεοῦ ϑύματα Eur. Iph. T..329 (cf. Θύειν 9 εῷ 1035), 
Τὴν σῶν κρεισσόνων δουλείαν Th. i. 8 (cf. Ταῖς ἡδοναῖς δουλεύων Mem. i. 5. 
5). ᾿Ἐσιξουλευτοῦ orgurod, of a plotter against the host, Soph. Aj. 726 
(cf. ᾿Εσιδουλεύοι αὐφῷ '. 1.3). Συγγνώμων τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων ἁμα ρτἡμάτων 
Cyr. vi. 1. 37 (cf. Ἔγώ cos συνεγίγνωσκον Ib, vii. 5. 50). 


§ 2393. Remarks. «. In like manner, the Gen. is employed with 
nouns, to denote relations, which, with the corresponding adjectives, are denoted 
by the Dat. ; as, Τῆς στῶν Ἑλλήνων εὐνοίας, from good-will to the Greeks, 
iv. 7. 20 (cf. Evyoug δέ vos ὧν vii. 3. 20). Tis δῆφ᾽ ἄν ἀνδρὸς εὐμένειαν ἐκ- 
βάλοι «οιοῦδε Soph. Cid. Ὁ. 631 (cf. Τὸν εὐμενῆ woes Id. Ant. 212). 


β. The Gen. is-sometimes employed; in like manner, for a preposition with 
its case; as, Ἔν ἀσποβάσε, τῆς γῆς, im a descent upon the land, Th. i. 108 
(cf. ᾿Ασέξη is σὴν γῆν H. Gri. 1. 18). 


y. To the Gen. of the direct object may be referred the Gen. with αὔτιος and 
its derivatives; as, Τὸ αἴτιον τῆς σπουδῆς, the cause of the haste [that which 
was causative of, &c.], iv. 1. 17. Τούτων οὐ σὺ αἰτία, you are not re ible 
Jor [the cause of] these things, Ec. 8.2. Οἱ rod πολέμον αἰτιώσατοι, the prine 
cipal authors of the war, H. Gr. iv. 4.2. Totrov Σωκράτην ὁ κατήγορος αἰσιᾶ- 
ras, for this the accuser blames Socrates [makes S. the author of this], Mem. 


i. 2. 26. See § 374. é 


284 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. | BOOK πὶ 


3. The Gen. in its more active uses (when employed to denote agent, posses- 
sor, ὅτ.) has received the special designation of the Gen. subjective, in distine- 
tion from the Gen. objective. The following passages contain examples of both 
kinds: Tay Πέλοσος μὲν ἁπάσης Πελοποννήσου κατάληψιν, Pelops’s seiz- 
ure of all Peloponnesus, Isocr. 249 a. Τὰς στῶν οἰκείων προπηλακίσεις rod 
γήρως Pl. Rep. 329 "Ὁ. Τὴν ἐκείνων μέλλησιν τῶν ἐς ἡμᾶς δεινῶν Th. iii. 
12. Adjectives taking the place of the Gen. are, in like manner, used both 
subjectively and objectively. See § 503. : 


d. GENITIVE or LocAL AND φαμρου RELATION. 
§ 394. The Genitive is extensively employed in defining 
local and temporal relation, particularly with adverbs of place 
and time, and with words derived from them. Thus, 


"Aryxs γῆς, near the land, Soph. Eid. C. 399. ‘Aveiov τῆς Λαμψάκου 
H, Gr. ii. 1.21. Τούτου ἐναντίον vii 6.23. ᾿Αντεπέρας τῶν «λαγίων 
Cyr. vii. 1.7. "Ανω τῶν ἱππέων iv. 3.3. "Axes rod μὴ πεινῆν Symp. 4 
57. "Eyyis παραδείσου ii. 4.14. "Eyyis μυρίων, nearly ten thousand, v. 
- 7.9. Elcow τῶν ὀρέων i. 2. 21. "Exeds σοῦ τείχους Mag. Eq. 7. 4. ᾽Ελ- 
φὸς ὀλίγων, except a few (ἢ 549), H. Gr. 1. 6.35. Σκηνῆς ἔνδον Soph. Aj. 
218. "Evseés γῆς Aisch. Pers. 229. Ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν σφῶν iv. 3. 28. 
Tlorapay ἐντός iin 1.11. Tod Πλούτωνος ἑξῆς Ar. Ran. 765. Ἔξω τῶν 
πυλῶν ἷ. 4. δ. Ketbes κάπω δὴ γῆς Soph. Ed. T. 968. Κύκλῳ rod σερα- 
φοπέδου Cyr. iv. 5. δ. Τὸ μέσον τῶν τειχῶν, the distance between the walls, 
i. 4.4. Ἔν μέσῳ ἡμῶν καὶ βασιλέως ii. 2.3. Μεσοῦσι .. «ἧς πορείας Pl. 
Pol. 965 Ὁ. Μεσαξὺ σοῦ ποταμοῦ καὶ τῆς τάφρου i. 7.15. Μέχρι τοῦ 
Μηδίας τείχους Ib. Ὄπ σθεν ἑαυτῶν i. 7. 9. Δούλης ποδῶν ragoibey 
Eur. Hee, 48. Βωμοῦ πέλας Asch. Ag. 210. Πλησίον εἶναι τοῦ τείχου" 
Vil. 1.39. Ἔ σπλησιάζον.. τῶν ἄκρων Cyr. iii. 9, 8. Πέραν cot ποτα- 
μοῦ ii. 4. 28. ΤΠρόσθεν σῶν ὅπλων iii. 1.33. “Yorseds βωμοῦ Aisch. Ag. 
232, — It will be observed, that, in some of these examples, the word gov- 
erning the Gen. is used in a secondary sense. For the Dat. after some of these 
words, see §§ 399, 405. 


e. GENITIVE oF REFERENCE, EXPLANATION, Empuasis, &c. 


§ 395. The constitvenr ΘΕΝΙΤΙΝῈ has likewise other 
uses, of which the principal are those of simple reference, of 
explanation, and of emphatic repetition. 


Nore. In some of these uses, the Gen. rather denotes a relation between 
two expressions for the same thing, than between two different things. In such 
cases, an appositive might be substituted for it (§ 333. 6); and, indeed, in 
some of the examples which follow (particularly with the compounds of ἀ- 
privative, § 383. N.), we might regard the Gen. as in apposition with a sub- 
stantive implied. 

a. With Sussrantives. Πρόφασις . . rot ἀθροίζειν, pretext for assembling, 
i. 1.7. Τριῶν μηνῶν μισθόν, three months’ pay, i. 1.10. OQavaérou «ἕλος, the 
end [sc. of life], which is found in death, or simply, death, Ausch. Sept. 906. 
Θανάτου τελευτάν Eur. Med. 152 (cf. Βίου τελευτή Soph. id. C. 1473). Τέρμα 
τῆς σωτηρίας Soph. Gd. C. 725. Ei πέρας μηδὲν ἔσται σφίσι τοῦ ἀπαλλαγῆναι 
rod κινδύνου Th. vii. 42. Μέγα .. χρῆμα... τῆς ἐμπίδος, a monster of a gnat 
(§ 385. 3), Ar, Lys. 1031. Συὸς μέγιστον χρῆμα Soph. Fr. 357 (cf. Kara- 
ἐάλλει τὴν ἔλαφον, καλόν es χρῆμα καὶ μέρα Cyt.i. 4.8). Td χρῆμα cov 


08. 1.}] OF REFERENCE, &C.— DATIVE OBJECTIVE. 285 


γυχσῶν Ar. Νὰ. 2 Σφενδονησῶν. wdworord σι χρῆμα Cyr. ii. 1. 5. Διὰ σὴν 
τῆς ἀδελφῆς ἀτιμίαν τῆς κανηφορίας, on account of his sister’s being denied the 
honor of bearing the sacred basket, Pl. Hipparch. 229 c. See also ὃ 333. 6. 


6. With Ansectives. “"Agais δέ εἰμι ἀῤῥένων παίδων, and I am childless as 
to male children, Cyr. iv. 6. 2. Ὦ, cixsae πατρὸς ἀπάτορα Eur. Here. 114. 
ἤΆφιλος φίλων Id. Hel. 524, "Ασεσλος φαρέων λευκῶν Id. Ph. $24, Tanya 
ἀθῶον Ar. Nub. 1413. Xonudéruy ee ἀδωρόταςος Th. ii. 65. “Acxsvov.. 
ἀσαίδων Soph. El. 36. ᾿Ανάριθρμεος ὧδε ϑρήνων Ib. 232. ᾿Αφωνοι τῆσδε τῆς 
ἀρᾶς Id. Ed. Ο. 865. Ἔν ἀσφαλεῖ εἰσι ποῦ μηδὲν παθεῖν Cyr. ᾿ϊ. 5.81. Θρα- 
σὺς εἶ σολλοῦ [sc. ϑράσους, you are very audacious [bold with much boldness], — 
Ar. Nub. 915. Quydeng.. γάμου ἤδη ὡραία Cyr. iv. 6.9. ἘΤέλειον εἶναι 
wis .. ἀρετῆς Pl. Leg. 6438 ἃ. Τυφλὸς δὲ σῶν ἄλλων ἁπάντων Symp. 4. 12. 

γ- With Apverss. Ἔξέσσαι, ἡμῖν, ἐκείνου ἕνεκα, it will be permitted us, as 
far as respects him, Cyr. iii. 2. 30. Ὅμοιοι τοῖς τυφλοῖς ἄν ἦμεν, ἕνεκά γε τῶν 
ἡμετέρων ὀφθαλμῶν, ‘for all the good our eyes would do us,’ Mem. iv. 3. 3. 
Καλῶς παράπλου κεῖται, it is well situated in regard to the voyage, Th. i. 36. 
Tod πρὸς "Abnvaious πολέμου καλῶς αὐτοῖς ἐδόκει ἡ πόλις καθίστασθαι Id. iii. 92. 
Τῆς τε ἐπὶ Θράκης παρόδον χρησίμως ἕξειν Ib. (See also ὃ 363. β.). Ὑμᾶς 
οἴονται ἐμποδὼν γενέσθαι rod ἄρξαι αὐτοὺς τῶν “Ἑλλήνων H. Gr. vi. 5. 38. 

3. With Vers. Τῆς ἐπσωξελίας . . κινδυνεύοντα [= ἐν κινδύνῳ ὄντα], being 
in danger of the fine for false accusation, Dem. 835.14. Τάφου.. «σὸν μὲν 
«ροτίσας, τὸν δ᾽ ἀτιμάσας, having bestowed upon the one, and denied to the other, ᾿ 
the honor of sepulture (τάφου defining στρήν implied in προτίσας and ἀσιμάσας, 
§ 383. «), Soph. Ant. 21. 


§ 396. Genera, Remark. Great care is requisite in 
distinguishing the various uses of the Genitive, inasmuch as, 


1.) The Gen. may have different uses in connection with the same word ; 
as, with ἀκούω and κλύω (δὲ 356, 375, 380), with δέοροα, (δὲ 357. N., 380), 
with σπλεονεκσέω ($$ 351, 367), with megirris (δὲ 349, 362. ζ), with πόῤῥω 
and πρόσω (δὲ 347, 363).— The use of the Gen. with substantives is es- 
pecial'y various. 


2.) A word may have two or more adjuncts in the Gen. expressing differ- 
ent relations ; as, "AvéCacis (§ 381. y), ὄζω (§ 391. δ), συγχάνω and diauas 
(§ 380. a). See § 393.3 | > 


C. Tue Darive OpBisective. 


397. ‘THAT TOWARDS WHICH ANY THING 
ceNDS (ὃ 339) may be resolved into, 1. That 
cowards which any thing tends, as an OBJECT OF 
APPROACH ; and u. That towards which any thing 
1ends, as an OBJECT OF INFLUENCE. Hence the 
Dative objective is either, (1.) the Dative or Ap- 
PNOACH, or (11.}) the Dative or INFLUENCE; and 
we have the following general rule: THe Oxssecr 
oF APPROACH AND OF INFLUENCE IS PUT IN THE 


286 SYNTAX. — DATIVE. [BOOK It. 


Dative; Or, in other words, since neither ap- 
proach nor influence are regarded as direct action, 
An Inpirect OssecT 1s PUT IN THE Dative. 


Nores. a. The Dat. of approach is commonly expressed in Eng. by 
the preposition to, and the Dat. of influence, by the prepositions to and for. 


8. The DatrvE oBJEcTIVE is the converse of the GEntTIvE; the Dat. 
of approach contrasting with the Gen. of departure, and the Dat. of influenes 
with the Gen. of cause. See δὲ 338, 339, 345. 


(1.) Datrve or Approacz. 


δ 398. Approach, like its opposite, departure (§ 346), 
may be either in place or in character. Hence, 


Rute XVII. Words of NEARNESS and LIKE- 
NEss govern the Dative. 


Nores. «a. Words of likeness are related to those of nearness, in the same 
manner as words of distinction are related to those of separation (§ 346, N.). 


β. For the Genitive after some words of nearness and likeness, see §§ 389, 
$94. . 


1. Dative of Nearness. 


§ 399. Words of nearness may imply either being near, 
coming near, or bringing near; and to this class may be re- 
ferred words of union and mixture, of companionship and in- 
tercourse, of meeting and following, of sending to and bring- 
ing to, &c. Thus, 


Πελάσαι -. «τῇ εἰσόδῳ, to approach the entrance, iv. 2.3. Olw κεράσας 
abrhy, having mixed it with wine, i. 2.13. “EWovras ὑμῖν, they will follow 
you, iii. 1. 36. TlLipzawy αὐτῷ ἄγγελον, sending a messenger to him, i. 3. 8. 
Ἔν τῷ πλησιαισάσῳ δίφρῳ Σεύθῃ καθήμενος vii. 3.29. Σοὶ σέλας Sesvous 
ἔχειν Aisch. Sup. 208. Ἐγγὺς ἡμῖν γενέσθαι Cyr. iii. 2.8. Σκόσε, δὴ, 
ἔφη, τὰ ἱξῆς ἐκείνοις Pl. Phedo, 100c. (Cf. ὃ 394.) Usirwy οἰκῶ τῇ 
Ἑλλάδ, ii. 8..18 (cf. § 389). ᾿Εσορεύεσο.. ἅμα Τισσαφέρνει ii. 4.9. “Aum 
φῇ ἱσιούση ἡμέρᾳ ἥκοντες, “αὖ daybreak,’ i. 7. 2. Ὅκμοῦϑ.. φοῖς Ἕλλησ' 
σπρατοσπεδευσάμενοι H. Gr. iii. 2, δ. ᾿Αναμεμιγ μένοι φοῖς “Ἕλλησι iv. 8. 8, 
Ei ὁμιλησαίφην ἐκείνῳ Mem. i. 2. 15. Σωκράτει ὁμιληπὰ γενομένω Ib 
12 (cf. Ib. 48, and ὃ 389). ‘Agmin.. οἰκειότατος ii. 6, 38, Kosvwyo* 
ἡμῖν σοῦ πολιχνίου (δ 367) Pl. Rep. 370d. Κοινωνεῖν ἀλλήλοις Pl. Leg. 
8440. "Ἔχε κοινωνίαν ἀλλήλοις ἡ σῶν γενῶν φύσις Pl. Soph. 257 a. 
᾿Ασαντᾷ τῷ Ξενοφῶντι Εὐκλείδης vii. 8.1. Odes rors Κύρῳ livas ἤθελε 
i. 2.26. Αὐσῷ ἀφίκονσο Ib. 4. ᾿Αμενοκλῆς Σαμίοις ἦλθε Th. i. 18. 
“Hes ἡμῖν ἀνὴρ ἄριστος Cyr. vi. 3. 15. Ἧκέ μοι γένει, it belonged [came] to 
me by birth, Soph. Cid. C. 738. Τὰ ἐμοὶ προσήκοντα Cyt. v. 1.15 (see ὃ 364). 
Iliwroveos πέδῳ Soph. El. 747. Τὰ rodeos ἀκόλουθα πάσχοντος Pl 
Tim. 88 ἃ (cf. § 389. R.), ᾿Αχολουθῶν cH φύσει Pl. Leg. 8860. Τῷ 
ἡμερινῷ ἀγγίλῳ τὸν νυκτερινὸν διαδίχεσθα, Cyr. vill. 6.18. Διάδοχος 


a. 1.] OF APPROACH. — OF INFLUENCE. 287 


Κλιάνδρῳ vii. 2. 5 (cf. § 889. R.). Ἡ διαδοχὴ τῇ πρόσθεν φυλακῇ Cyr. 
14.17. Δῶρα ἄγοντες αὐτῷ vii. 5.16. Αὐτῷ rd κέρας ὀρίξα, Ib. 29. 


Remarks. α, Traffic is a species of intercourse; hence, Πόσον regi wpas 
σοι τὰ χοιρίδια, How can I trade with you for your pigs? Ar. Ach. 812 
(ὃ 374). 'Qyicowal con { will buy of you, Ib. 815. Ἐγὼ weinpas τῷδε» 
Ar. Ran. 1229. 


8. A substantive is sometimes repeated in the Dat., with an ellipsis, to ex- 
press succession; as, ᾿Αλλὰ φόνῳ φόνος Οἰδιπόδ δόμον ὥλεσεν, but slaughter 
upon sluughter [slaughter following slaughter] has destroyed the house of (Ε αἷο 
pus, Eur. Ph. 1496. Μὴ τίκτειν σ᾽ ἄταν &rass Soph. El. 235. 


2. Dative of Likeness. 


§ 400. Words of likeness include those of resemblance, 
assimilation, comparison, identity, equality, &c. ‘Thus, 


“"“Oposos τοῖς ἄλλοις, like the rest, vi. 6. 16. Ἐμὲ δὲ ϑεῷ μὲν οὐκ εἴκασεν, 

but me he did not liken to a god, Apol. 15. Τὸ ἀληθὲς ἐνόμιζε τὸ αὐτὸ ry 
ἠλιδθίῳ εἶναι, he thought sincerity to be the same with folly; ii. 6. 22. Ἴσους 
ο΄. φούτοις ἀριθροόν, equal to these in number, Mag. Kq. ii. 3. Ὃ μοέως roig 
ἄλλοις Mem. iv. 7. 8. Ὃ μοιοῦν ἑαυτὸν ἄλλῳ Pl. Rep. 393 c. ‘Opoiwoss 
Sea Pl. Thezt. 176 Ὁ. Τὸ τῷ καλῷ ἀνόμοιον Mem. iii. 8.4. “Opoyrwuo- 
yu σοι καὶ τοῦτο Mem. iv. 3.10. Ὁ μόδροροος ἡλίῳ Pl. Epin. 987 Ὁ. Σά- 
καὶ γε μὴν ὅμοροι ἡμῖν Cyr. ν. 2. 25. ᾿Αλλήλοις ὁμοσκηνοῦντες Ib. ii. 
1.25. Κλεάρχῳ καὶ suoredas os γενόμενος iii. 2.4. Ὁ μώνυμος ἐμοί 
Pl. Rep. 330 b (cf. ὃ 389. Β.). Παραδείγματα δμοιοπαθῇ «οῖς xrovngois 
Ib. 409 b. Προσῳδὸς ἡ σύχη τὠμῷ «πάθει Eur. Ion, 359. Σφηξὶν ἐμῷ ε- 
ρεστάσους Ar. Vesp. 1102. Τὰ δὲ κρέα .. ἦν παραπλήσια τοῖς ἐλαφεί- 
os ie δ. 2. ᾿Αλλὰ φιλοσόφῳ μὲν ἔοικας ii. 1.13. Ποταμοῦ fon ἀπεικάζων 
φὰ ὄντα Pl. Crat. 402 a. [Προσίεσθα, εἰς «αὐςπὸ [= σὸ αὐτὸ, § 39] ἡμῖν αὐὖ- 
φοῖς ἴϊ.1. 30. Ἔν σῷ αὐτῷ κινδύνῳ τοῖς φαυλοτάτοις αἰωροῦμαι Th. vii. 77. 
"Os ἐμοὶ wsds ἐγένετ᾽ ἐκ ματρὸς Eur. Ph. 15]. Οὐ καὶ σὺ τύπσει σὰς ἴσας 
«“ληγὰς ἐμοί, Ar. Ran. 636. Τοῖς ἐκ rod ἴσου ἡμοῖν οὖσι, ‘on an equétity with 
us,’ Hier. 8.5. Ὁ σίδηρος ἀνισοῖ «ποὺς ἀσθενεῖς τοῖς ἰσχῦροῖς Cyt. vii. 5. 
65. Διεῖλε ψυχὰς ἰσαρίθμους «τοῖς ἄστροις Pl. Tim. 41 ἃ. ᾿1-ἡλικοε 
woig ἀειγενέσι Θεοῖς Symp. 8. 1. : 


(π.) Dative oF INFLUENCE. 


§ 401. The Dative of influence expresses a 
person or thing which is affected by an action, 
property, &c., without being directly acted upon. 


Influence has every variety and degree. On the one hand, 
it may be so immediate, that it can scarcely be distinguished 
from direct action, and the Dat. expressing it is used inter- 
shangeably with the Acc. ; and, on the other hand, it may be 
so remote, that it can scarcely be appreciated, and the Dat. 
expressing it might have been omitted without impairing the 
sense. 


283: SYNTAX, -— DATIVE. . | BOOK 1:3. 


-Ruzre XVIII. The opsect oF INFLUENCE is 
put in the Dative. | 


§ 402. The Dative is governed, according to this rule 
by, 

α. Words of apprEss, including those of call and command, 
of conversation and reply, of declaration and confession, of ex- 


hortation and message, of oath and promise, of reproach and 
threatening, &c. ‘Thus, . 


Οὗσος Κύρῳ εἴσ'εν, this man said to Cyrus, i. 6.2. Τῷ Κλεάρχῳ iCoa, 
called out to Clearchus,i. 8.12. Διαλεχθέντες ἀλλήλοις, having conversea 
with each other, ii. 5.42. Τοῖς rt ναυκλήροις adasios μὴ διάγειν Vii. 2. 12, 
Aiyss τὴν μαντείαν τῷ Σωκράτει iii. 1.7. To ᾿Ενναλίῳ tasrzifovesi. 8. 
18. Τοῖς νεανίσκοις ἐγχεῖν txtasusiv. 3.13. Ἢ παρακέλευσις τῷ ἐρῶντι 
wage πάντων ϑαυμαστή Pl. Conv. 182d. ᾿Αλλήλοις διεκελεύοντο iv. ὃ. 8. 
᾿Αφήγησα, φούτῳ, «τί σοι ἀπεκρινάμην Vil. 2.26. ᾿Αγγέλλουσι «τοῖς. 
στρατιώταις i, 3.21, ἸΠαρήγγειλε τοῖς φρουράρχοις i. 1.6. Ὕ σ“σχινοῦ- 
wai σοι δέκα τάλαντα ἷ. 7.18. Οὐ μέμφομαι, ἔφη, τούτοις Mem. iii. 5. 20. 
Ei δέ σις αὐτῷ .. ὄνειδίξοι Ib. ii. 9.8. Ἡ σπείλουν αὐτῷ ν. 6. 84. Ἔκ ή- 
eves τοῖς Ἕλλησι συσκευάσασθαι iii. 4.36. 'Οσαόταν πλάτανος «τελέᾳ en 
δυρίζῃ Ar. Nub. Ι008. ᾿Ανεῖλεν αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ασόλλων iii. 1. 6. “Ὅσαερ aire 
μαντευτὸς ἦν Vie 1.22. Ὁ Θρῃξὶ waveis, the prophet to the Thracians, 
i. 6. the Thracian prophet, Eur. Hec. 1267. ᾿Αλλ’ ἤνεσ᾽ ἀνδρὶ πάντα Eur. Med. 
1157. 


§ 403. 8. Words of apvanTacE and DISADVANTAGE, in- 
eluding those of benefit and injury, of assistance and service, 
of favor and fidelity, of necessity and sufficiency, of fitness and 
unfitness, of convenience and trouble, of ease and difficulty, of 
safety and danger, &c. Thus, 


Παρύσατις «. ὑπῆρχε τῷ Κύρῳ, Parysatis favored Cyrus,i.1.4. Χρή- 
σιμα-- σοῖς Κρησί, useful to the Cretans, ἰϊϊ. 4. 17. “Ὅσῃ ἄν τῇ στρατιᾷ 
συμφέρῃ iii. 2.27. Πρόσφορά ϑ9᾽ ὑμῖν Soph. Gd. C. 1774 (cf. ὃ 389. R.). 
Αγαϑθὰ. ἀμφοτέροις Cyr. viii. 5.22. Kesirrw ἑαυτῷ iii. 1.4. Χεῖρόν 
ἔστιν αὐτῷ Vii. 6.4. Λυμαινόμενον τοῖς μειρακίοις Ar. Νὰ. 928, Οὕτως 
ἐδοήθουν ἀλλήλοις iv. 2. 26. Τούσοις ἱπεκουρεῖσε Vv. 8. 2]. OF σοι. 
ὑπηρετοῖμεν ii. 5. 14. Τοῖς ϑανοῦσι wrovros οὐδὲν ὠφελεῖ Alsch. Pers. 
842. ᾿Ανδρώσοισιν ὠφελήμασςα Id. Pr. 501. Τοῖς φίλοις ἀρήγειν Cyr. i. 
5.13. “Ὁ, ἠδέλησε “ιμωρεῖν πατρί Eur. Or. 924. “Edy αὐτῷ ταῦτα χα- 
eiowsras ii. 1. 10. ΠΕσφοὶ ὄντες Κύρῳ ii. 4.16. Δεῖ ἐσισάξαι τὸν 
ἵασσον Πέρσῃ ἀνδρί iii. 4. 85. ἸΠολλῶν μέν σοι δεήσει (ὃ 357) Cyr. i. 6. 9. 

μὲν ἀρκεῖ περὶ rovrwy σὰ εἰρημένα ν. 7. 11. Χωρίον ἱκανὸν μυρίοις 
ἀνθρώσοις οἰκῆσαι νὶ. 4.8. ᾿Ἔνοχλοῦνσα ἀεὶ τῇ ὑμετέρᾳ εὐδαιμονίᾳ ii. δ. 13. 
Ἔγώ τινι ἐμποδών εἶμι, Ve 7.10. Ἔ μπόδιος γάρ σοι ὁ Ζεύς vii. 8. 4. 
Τῇ ἡλικίᾳ ἔπρεπε... 9.6. ED ἁρμόσσοντα αὐτῷ Ογτ. '. 4. 18. "Aarg 
γὰρ ἢ "wo χρή γε τῆσδ᾽ ἄρχειν χϑονός , Soph. Ant. 736. “Eroimous εἶναι 
αὐτῷ rods ἱπσπίας i.6.3. ὋὉδὸς .. ἀμήχανος εἰσελθεῖν στρατεύμασι i. 2. 21. 
Ἡ τραχεῖα τοῖς «οσὶν ἀμαχεὶ, ἰοῦσιν -εὐμενίσπσερα iv. 6, 12. ᾽ἸΑσφα 
λίσσερόν γί σοι οἶδα ὃν Vii. 7.51. Ἔπικίνδῦνον μοί iorw Ib. 54. 


Ἢ 17 OF INFLUENCE. 289 


8 494. γ. Words of appearance, including those of 
seeming, showing, clearness, obscurity, &c. Thus, 


Πᾶσι δῇλον ἐγένεσο, it was evident to all, H. Gr. vi. 4.20. Σοὶ ad On 
λώσω bev ἐγὼ περὶ cod ἀκούω ii. 5.26. "Αδηλον μὲν παντὶ ἀνθρώπῳ ὅπη 
σὸ μέλλον ἕξει Vi. 1. 21. Αἰσχύνεσθαί μοι δοκῶ ἴ. 7.4 Μὴ ἀποδόξηῃ ἡμῖν 
41.5.9. Τοῖς δὲ σαισὶν ἐδείκνυσαν iv. 5.33. Πᾶσι, σαφές Vect. 4. 2. 
Αὐτοῖς πάλιν φαίνεται 6 Μιθριδάτης iii. 4.2. Λαμᾷάνειν τοὺς rorspions . 
φανερούς σοι ὄντας, ἀφανὴς ὧν αὐτὸς ἐκείνοις Cyr. 1. 6. 85. 


5. Words of Givine, including those of offering, paying 
distributing, supplying, &c. ‘Thus, 


Δίδωσι δὲ αὐτῷ Κῦρος μυρίους δαρεικούς, and Cyrus gives him ten thousand 
darics, ii. 6.4. Τῇ δ᾽ οὖν στρατιᾷ rire ἀπέδωκε ἹΚῦρος μισθόν '. 2. 12. Τὰ 
δὲ ἄλλα διανεῖμαι τοῖς στρατηγοῖς Vii. 5.2. Tois στρατηγοῖς δωροῦ Ib. 8. 
Τοῖς λοχᾶγοῖς κατεμερίσθη ἴὉ.4. Ἐἥπερ ἐμοὶ triacs vs Σεύθης, οὐχ, οὕτως 
ἐσέλει δήπου, ὡς ὧν re ἐμοὶ δοίη στεροῖσο, καὶ ἄλλα ὑμῖν ἀσοφτίσειεν Vil. 6. 
16. Θώρᾶκες αὐτοῖς ἐπορίσθησαν iii. 3. 20. Τὴν σοῦ ϑεοῦ δόσεν ὑμῖν Pl 
Apol. 80 ἃ. Σῶν ἫἩἭ ρακλεῖ δωρημάπων Soph. Tr. 668. Βασιλεῖ δασμός 
iv. 5.34. Odes ἐκεῖνος ἔτι ἡμῖν μισϑοδότης '. 8.9. - 


ε. Words of OBLIGATION and vaLuE. Thus, 


Tots στρατιώταις ὠφείλετο μισθός, pay was due to the soldiers, i. 2.11. Bas 
σιλεὶ dy πολλοῦ ἄξιοι γένοιντο (ὃ 374), ‘worth much to the king,’ ii. 1. 14. 
"Άξιος .. ϑανάτου «ῇ πόλει, meriting death from [to] the city, Mem.i. 1. 1. 
Ὡς οὐκ ἄξιον εἴη βασιλεῖ ἀφεῖναι, ‘unworthy of the king,’ or ‘ disgraceful to 
the king,’ ii. 3. 25. ‘Yyiv εἴσεται χάριν. 4. 15. 


§ 405. ¢. Words of oprosirion, including those of con- 
tention, dispute, enmity, resistance, rivalry, warfare, &c. 
Thus, 


Λιμὸν ὑμῖν ἀντιτάξαι, to oppose to you famine, ii. 5.19. "Egifovra 
οἱ περὶ σοφίας, contending with him in skill, i. 2.8. “Hee Παλλάδ, τ᾽ ἔριν Eur. 
Iph. A. 185. "Aveios itvas φοῖς πολεμίοις i. 8. 17. Στασιάζοντα αὐτῷ 
ii, δ. 28. Τύραννος ἅπας ἐχθρὸς ἐλευθερίᾳ καὶ νόμοις ἐναντίος Dem. 72. 2. 
‘Huiv tvavrimosras Vii. 6.5. ᾿Αντίσορον λόφον τῷ μαστῷ iv. 2. 18, 
Οὔτε βασιλεῖ ἀντιποιούμεθα «ἧς ἀρχῆς (§ 373) ii. 3.23. ᾿Αλλοσρίω- 
τάτας ταύσῃ Dem. 72. 1 (cf. § 349). Ὕ ποστῆνα;, αὐτοῖς ᾿Αθηναῖοι ror- 
μήσαντες iii, 2.11. Τῷ ἐμῷ ἀδελφῷ πολέμιος i. 6.8. Τισσαφέρνει - . ro- 
λεωοῦντα ἷ. 1. 8. Οὐδεὶς αὐτῷ ἐμά χεκτοϊὶ. 8. 23. Φαμὲν γὰρ Μαραθῶν! 
Tt ὄνοι πιροκινδυνεῦσα, τῷ βαρβάρῳ ΤῊ. i. 75. "Qharsodvras.. ἀλλή. 
aoe. Ar. Ach. 24. ‘Qs ἐσ Θουλεύο, αὐτῷ 1.1.8. "ExsCovuran ἐμοί v.6 
29. Δικαζόμενος τῷ πατρί Pl. Euthyph. 4 6. 


ῃ. Words of YIELDING, SUBJECTION, and woRsHIP, including 
those of homage, obedience (cf. § 377. 1), prayer, sacrifice, 
&c. Thus, 


Πάντα τοῖς Sects ὕποχα, all things are subject to the gods, ii. 5.7. Ἐμοὶ 
οὐ ϑέλετε πείθεσθαι, you are not willing to obey me, i. 3.6. "Edy μοι oss 
σθῇῆσε, if you will listen to me,i. 4.14. Ἐχεσθαι rois . « ϑεοῖς, to pray to 
the gods, iv. 3.13. Ἢ σαρατιά σοι ὑφεῖσο νῖ. 6.31. “Proxywencas ros 
ποταμὸν Κύρῳ i. 4.18. Ei ὑποχείριος ἔσται Λακεδαιμονίοις vils 6. 43. 

“Ὁ ; 


290 SYNTAX. — DATIVE. ὁ [ΒΟΟΚ In. 


Οἱ νῦν σοι ὑπήκοοι Vii. 7.29 (cf. § 377.1). Κύρῳ χαλῶς πειθαρχεῖ 
1.9.17. ᾿Ασπισφεῖν ἐκείνῳ ii. 6. 195. “Edus σῷ Ad vii. 6. 44. Θυσίαν 
ἐποίει τῇ ϑεῷ ν. 8.9. Σφαγιάσασθαι τῷ ἀνέμῳ ἵν. 5.4. Ορχησάμ ε:- 
vos Ssoiow Ar. Lys. 1277. 


§ 406. 9. Words expressing a MENTAL ACT or FEELING 
which is regarded as going out towards an object ; as those 
of friendship and hatred, pleasure and displeasure, joy anc 
sorrow, contentment and envy, belief and unbelief, trust and 
distrust, &c. Thus, 


Κύρῳ φιλαίσερον, more friendly to Cyrus,i.9.29. ᾿Ἐχαλέπαινον 
τοῖς σσρασηγοῖς, were angry with the generals, i. 4.12. ᾿Εσίστευον γὰρ αὐτῷ, 
for they trusted him,i. 2.2. Ἐῤνοϊκῶς ἔχοιεν αὐτῷ ἴ. 1.5. Κακόνους 
wos Ἕλλησιν ti. 5.27. Τούτοις ἥσθη Κῦρος i. 9.26. Μένων ἠγάλλετα 
σῷ ἰξαπατᾷν ii. 6. 26. Οὐδενὶ οὕτω χαίρεις ὡς φίλοις ἀγαθοῖς Mem. ii. 6. 
95. ἘΠ σινα εὕροιτε καὶ ὑμῖν καὶ ἐμοὶ ἀ χϑόμενον vi. 1. 29. ᾿Ωργίζοντο 
ἰσχῦρῶς τῷ Κλεάρχῳ 1. 5.11. Χαλεπῶς φέρω τοῖς παροῦσι πράγμασιν 
ἷ,8.8. Σσέργειν τοῖς παροῦσιν, ‘to be content with,’ Isocr. 159 6. ᾽Α γα- 
σπήσας τοῖς πεπραγμένοις Dem. 13.11. Φϑονῶν τοῖς φανερῶς πλουτοῦσιν 
19.19. ὯΩν ἐγώ σοι οὐ φθονήσω (ᾧ 376. ζ) Cyr. viii. 4.16. Ἡμῖν dase 
orsiv ii. 5.15. Τῇ σύχῃ ἐλπίσας ΤῊ. 1.97. Ἕσσασαν ἀποροῦντες τῷ 
πράγμασι ἷ. 5.13, ᾿Αδυῦμῶν «οἷῖς γεγενημένοις vi. 2.14. Θαυμάξω δὲ 
τῇ τε ἀποκλείσει μου τῶν συλῶν Th.iv. 85. Ὑ πέσ τησσον οἱ ἥλικες αὐτῷ 
Cyr. i. 5. 1. τον Some of these constructions may perhaps be referred to the 
instrumental Dat. (§ 416). 


ὃ 407. ι. Words expressing the POWER OF EXCITING- 
EMOTION ; as, pleasure, displeasure, care, fear, &c. Thus, 


᾿Ασεχϑάνεσθαι τοῖς στρατιώταις, to displease the soldiers, ii.6.19. *Exo’ 
μελήσει; it shall be my care, i. 4.16. “Ors αὐτῷ μέλοι, [that it should be 
a care to him] that he would tuke care,i. 8.13. Διὰ σὸ μέλειν ἅπᾶσιν, through 
the interest which all felt, vi. 4.20. Ζηνὶ τῶν σῶν, οἵδ᾽ ἐγὼ, μέλει πόνων 
(§ 376. 3) Eur. Heracl. 717. "OQ φίλτατον μέλημα δώμασιν πατρός Asch. 
Cho. 235. Μεσαμέλει μοι, it is a regret to me, I repent, Cyr. v. 3. 6. Me- 
σαμέλειν σί σοι ἔφησθα i. 6.7. (See § 376.3.) Τοῖς μὲν πολλοῖς .. ἤρεσκον 
fi. 4.2. Ἡδὺ συμμαθόντι od πόμα ἦν ἵν. 5.27. ‘Yuiv Μυσοὺς λυπηροὺς 
ὄντας ii. Ὁ, 18, Φυοξερώσασον τοῖς πολεμίοις iii. 4. 5. 


x. VerBAL ApsectIves aND ApbverBs, having ἃ passive 
signification. ‘The property expressed by these verbals nas 
relation to an agent; which, as if affected by the property, is 

ut in the Dat. Adjectives of this kind usually end in -τός or 
-téog (ὃ 314). Thus, 

Θαυμαστὸν vies, wonderful to all [to be wondered at by all], iv. 2. 15. 
Ἡμῖν .. οἵμαι πάντα ποιητία, I think that every thing should be done by us, iii. 
1.35. Τὸν μὲν οἴκαδε βουλόμενον doritvas, τοῖς οἴκοι CnAwroy ποιήσω ἀπελθεῖν, 
‘an object of envy to his countrymen,’ i. 7. 4. Ἵνα mo εὐσρακτότερον 

ii. 3.20. Oj worauol.. προϊοῦσι weds τὰς πηγὰς BiaCaro) γίγνονται, ‘can 

passed by those who ascend [become passable to those who ascend],’ iii. 2. 


22. Ἐῤιεσίθεσον ty ivraida τοῖς πολεμίοις iii. 4.20. Llorauds .. ἡμῖν ioe. 
3:aCaries, ‘for us to pass [to be passed by us],’ ii, 4. 6 


cx. 1.] OF INFLUENCE. 291 


-§ 408. 1. Susstantive Verss, when employed to de- 
note possession. ‘These verbs and their compounds are used 
with the Dat., in a varity of expressions, which are variously 
translated into English, ‘Thus, 


Ἐνταῦθα Κύρῳ βασίλεια ἦν, here Cyrus had a palace [there was a palace to 
Cyrus], i. 2.7. Tots δὲ ὑποψία μὲν ἦν, they had a suspicion, or they suspected, 
i. 3.21. Δρόμος ἐγένετο τοῖς στρασιώταις; [to the soldiers there came to 
be a running] the soldiers began to run, i. 2.17. “Ogre πᾶσιν αἰσχύνην εἶναι, 
so that all were ashamed, ii. 3. 11. πάρχει γὰρ νῦν ἡμῖν οὐδέν ii. 2.11. 
“Ὡς νόμος αὐτοῖς εἰς μάχην [sce tori] 1.2.15. ᾿Ανάγκη δή wos [80. tori], I am 
now compelled, i. 8. 5. “Hy αὐτῷ πόλεμος, he made war,i. 9.14. Τ]όλις .- 
ἢ ὄνομα Σιστάκη, a city named Sittace, ii.4.13. Ἔ γένετο καὶ “Ἕλλην, καὶ 
βαρξάρῳ.. . πορεύεσθαι, both Greek and barbarian could go,i. 9.185. Οὐ γὰρ 
ἣν ἀθρόοις περιστῆναι ἵν. 7. 2. Nov σοι ἔξεστιν .- ὠνδρὶ γενέσθα, vii. 1. 21, 
Οὐδενὸς ἡμῖν wersin ili. 1.20 (see § 364). Ti γάρ ἐστ’ ᾿Ἔρεχϑεῖ καὶ κολοιοῖς 5 
. for what has Erechtheus to do with jackdaws [what is there to Erechtheus, and 
also to jackdaws]? Ar. Eq. 1022. Μηδὲν εἶνα, σοὶ καὶ Φιλίσσῳ πρᾶγμα, 
that you had no connection with Philip, Dem. 320.7. Ti σῷ νόμῳ καὶ τῇ βα- 
cavy; Id. 855. 5. ᾿Ἐκείνῳ βουλομένῳ ταῦτ᾽ tori, these things are [to him 
willing] according to his will, or agreeable to him, H. Gr. iv. 1.11. Ei aire 
γε σοὶ βουλομένῳ ἐστὶν ἀποκρίνεσθαι Pl. Gorg. 448 ἃ. El cos ἡδομένῳ ἐστίν, if 
it is your pleasure, Pl. Phedo, 78 Ὁ. Θέλονσι κὠμοὶ τοῦτ᾽ ἄν ἦν Soph. (ΒΕ. T. 
1356. "Hy δὲ οὐ τῷ ᾿Αγησιλάῳ ὠχθομένῳ σαῦτα, ‘displeasing to Agesilaus,’ 
H. Gr. ν. 8.13. Νικίᾳ προσδεχομένῳ ἦν τὰ περὶ σῶν ᾿Εγεσταίων, ‘were as 
Nicias had expected,’ Th. vi. 46. 


§ 409. μ. And, in general, words expressing any action, 
property, &c., which is represented as being to or for some 
person or thing. Thus, 


Προσίνω σοι, I drink to you, vii. 3. 26. Κενοσάφιον αὐτοῖς ἐποίησαν, they 
nade for them a cenotaph, vi. 4,9. Méiysorrov κόσμον ὠνδρί, the greatest orna- 
nent to a man, i. 9.23. “Ὥρα ἦν ὠσιένα, τοῖς πολεμίοις, it was time for the 
enemy to withdraw, iii. 4. 34. Σεράτευμα αὐτῷ cuveriyeroi. 1.9. “Os Xes- 
εἰσόφῳ ὑπεστρατήγει V. 6.36. Βασίλειον. εἶχε τῷ σατράσῃ ἵν. 4.2. "Ἔχω 
γὰρ καὶ αὐτὸ; αὐτῷ μαρτυρῆσαι Vii. 6.89. ‘Huiv σὸν μισθὸν ἀναπρᾶξα, Ib. 40. 
Ἔγὼ σιωπῶ rods; Ar. Ran. 11.34. Eloyey σεκούσῃ μησρὶ πολέμιον δόρυ 
Zxh. Sept. 416. Ἐμοὶ δὲ μίμνει σχισμὸς ὠμφήκει δορί, ‘ awaits me [is wait- 
ing for me],’ Id. Ag. 1149. Νόμροιμον ἄρα ὑμῖν ἔστιν ἵν. 6. 15. aor κοινὸν 
εἶναι καὶ ἀναγκαῖον ἀνθρώποις iii. 1. 48, Δοισόν μοι εἰπεῖν ϊ. 2. 29. ᾿Αγα- 
θοῦ... αἴτιος τῇ στρατιᾷ Vi. ἢ. 20. Ἢ .. πατρῴα ὑμῖν οἰκία Pl. Charm. 157 θ. 
Ξένος ὧν ἰσύγχανεν αὐτῷ i. 1.10. Ὕμᾶξᾶς ἐμοὶ εἶναι καὶ πατρίδα καὶ φίλους 
1.3.6. ‘Ides τῇ γυναικί vii. 8. 27. Τριήρει -. «λοῦς vii 4.2. Αἱ δὲ 
εἴσοδοι τοῖς μὲν ὑποζυγίοις ὀρυκταί iv. 5.25. Ἣ δὲ [sc. ὁδός vim] διαθδάντι σὸν 
ποταμόν iii. 5.15. Κακὰς ἐγὼ γυναῖκας υἱέσι στυγῶ Soph. Ant. 571. Δύπηῃ 
Tt φρενῶν χερσίν τε πόνος Eur. Hipp. 189. 


§ 410. Remarks. 1. The remoter relations expressed 
by the Dat. (§ 401) are various in their character, havi 
respect to place, time, sensation, thought, feeling, expression, 
action, &c. ‘They are expressed in two ways; (a.) by the 


+ 


292 SYNTAX. — DATIVE. [BOOK in 


Dat. simply, and (b.) by an elliptical form of construction, in 
which the Dat. is preceded by ὡς. Thus, 


Ἢ Ogdun αὕτη ἐσεὶν .. ἐπὶ δεξιὰ sis σὸν ἸΠόντον siowatoves 86. ravi or 
σοί], this Thrace is upon the right to one sailing into the Pontus, or as you saw 
into the Pontus, vi. 4. 1 (cf. Th. i. 24). Ἦν δ᾽ ἦμαρ ἤδη δεύτερον wrtovei 
wot, and it was now the second day of my voyage [to me sailing}, Soph. Ph. 
554. Θυομένῳ οἱ... ὃ ἥλιος ἀμαυρώθη, while he was sacrificing the sun was 
eclipsed, Hdt. ix. 10 (this mode of defining time by a Dat. with a participle 
is especially Ion.). Καὶ cis χρόνος τ οἱσδ᾽ ἐστὶν οὐξεληλυθώς ; ‘since this 
event,’ Soph. Gd. T. 735. To μὲν ἔξωθεν daromivy σῶμα οὐκ ἄγαν 8ερ- 
μὸν ἦν, ‘to the external touch,’ Th.ii.49. E? γενναῖος, ὡς ἰδόντι [se. φαίνει, 
‘as you appear to one beholding,’ ‘in appearance,’ Soph. Cid. C. 75. Ἔ μοὶ 
γὰρ, boris ἄδικος ὧν σοφὸς λέγειν πέφῦκε, πλείστην ζημίαν ὀφλισκάνει, ‘accord- 
ing tomy judgment,’ Eur. Med. 580. Kaira σ᾽ ἐγὼ ᾿σίμησα τοῖς φρονοῦ 
σιν εὖ Soph. Ant. 904. Κρέων γὰρ ἦν ζηλωτὸς, ὡς ἐμοὶ 580. Boxe], ποτέ, 
‘as it seemed to me,’ ‘in my opinion,’ Ib. 1161. Οὐ μὰ σὸν Ai’, ἔφη, οὔ 
κουν, ὥς γ᾽ ἐμοὶ ὠκροτῇ. ᾿Αλλ᾽ ws ἐμοὶ, ἦν δ᾽ ἐγὼ, ῥήτορι, Pl. Rep. 
586 c. Tod μὲν οὖν νόσημα, πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα παραλιπόνφι «. .) ποιοῦσον HY 
ΤῊ. ii. 51. Θεὸς γὰρ ἐκσώζει με, τῷδε δ᾽ οἴχομαι, ‘so far as lay in him,’ Soph. 
Aj. 1128. Μακρὰν γὰρ, ὡς γέροντι, προὐστάλης ὁδόν, ‘for an old man [as 
journeys are to an old man],’ Id. GidC. 20. Τόδε δὲ μάλιστα πάντων μέ- 
μινησό wor, μηδέποτε ὠναμένειν, but this most of all remember [for me], I pray 
you, never to defer, Cyr.i. 6.10. "Es ci μοι βλέψαᾶσα Sarre Soph. El. 887. 
Οἴμαί cos ἐκείνους τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς τὰ πεζικὰ ῥᾳδίως νικήσειν Cyr. i. 3.15. Οὕ- 
«ως ἐγώ σοι... τάγε δίκαια παντάπᾶσιν ἤδη ὠκριδῶ Ib. 17. 


Nore. The use of the Dat. to express remote relation is particularly fre- 
quent in the pronouns of the first and second person. In the Greek, as in our 
own and in other languages, the Dat. of these pronouns is often inserted, simply 
to render the discourse more emphatic or subjective. Observe the examples 


just above. 


41. 2. Words governing the Gen. sometimes take 
a Dat. in its stead, to express the exertion of an influence; as, 


‘Hytire δ᾽ abrois ὃ κωμάρχης, and the bailiff led the way for them, i. 6. 
guided them, iv. 6.2. Οἱ γὰρ βλέποντες τοῖς συφλοῖς ἡγούμεθα Ar. Plut. 15, 
Ἡμῖν rae ἐξηγούμενος Soph. Cid. C, 1589. ᾿Ανάσσε, βαρβάροισι βάρ- 
Cages Θόας Eur. Iph. T. 31. ἾὮΩ Θήξαισιν εὐΐπ'ποις ἄναξ Id. ΡΗ. 17. Δαρὸν 
γὰρ οὐκ ἄρξει, ϑεοῖς Aisch. Prom.940, Μάχας δέ σοι καὶ πολέμους ἀφαιρῶ 
Cyr. vii. 9. 26. “H βέξηκεν ἡμῖν ὃ ξένος ν Soph. Ged. Ο. 81. Πέφευγεν 
λαὴὶς σῶνδέ μοι σωτηρίας Eur. Heracl.452. Τὰ ἄκρα ἡμῖν... “ροκαταλαμ- 
Cdvesvi. 8.16. Τυράννοις ἱκποδὼν μεθίσσασο Lut. Ph. 40, Cf. §§ 347, 350, 
424. 2, : 


§ 412. 3. A Dat. depending upon a verb is often used 
instead of a Gen. depending upon a substantive ; as, 


Oi... tern αὐφοῖς δίδενται, the horses are tied for them, = οἱ ἵσ'σοι αὐτῶν 
δέδενσαι, their horses are tied, iii. 4.35. “H.. rod παντὸς ἀρχὴ Χειρισόφῳ 
aida κατελύθη vi. 2. 12 (cf. Ἥ σε Χειρισόφου ἀρχὴ τοῦ πανσὸς κατελύ- 
νἱ. 53.1)..» Διὰ φὸ διεσσάρθαι αὐτῷ rd στράτευμα ii. 4.8. Tots βαρθά- 
ξοις τῶν σι πεζῶν ἀπίθανον πολλοὶ, καὶ τῶν ἱππέων .. ἐλήφθησαν iii. 4. 5. 
Οὐους tui γνώσεσθε σοὺς iv τῇ χώρᾳ ὄντας ἀνθρώπους [= ἰν τῇ ἡμῶν χώρᾳ] 


Γ 


cH, 1.7 RESIDUAL. —INSTRUMENTAL AND MODAL. 293 


i. 7. 4. Adnvaiav. . ὑσππειδὴ abrors of BdgCugn ix ris χώρας ἐσῆλθον Th. i 
99, Οὐκχέφσι σοι τέκνα λεύσσει φάος Eur. Ph. 1547. 


Nore. The Dat. (chiefly of the personal pronoun) is sometimes placed as 
a simple adjunct of the substantive; @nd in some instances, when so placed, 
appears to depend strictly upon a participle understood. Thus, "AwoCasws.. 
πρὸς τὴν νέαν ἡμῖν wid, look upon our new state (i. 6. the new state estab- 
lished for, us in the dialogue), Pl. Rep. 431 Ὁ. Οἱ δέ σῷ, βόες. . od παρε" 
γίνοντο Hat. i. 31. 


§ 413. 4. Sometimes two datives following the same 
word, especially in Epic poetry, appear to be most naturally, 
though not unavoidably, referred to the Σχῆμα xed ὅλον καὶ 
μέρος (ὃ 384. 9); as, Σ,ϑένος ἔμθαλ᾽ ἑκάστῳ καρδίῃ, imparted 
strength [to each one, to the heart] to the heart of each one, 
A. 11. ᾿ἀγαμέμνονι ἥνδανε ϑυμῷ A. 24. Cf. § 438. β. 


D. Tue Dative Resipvat. 


§ 414. The Dative residual is used in ex- 
pressing adjuncts, which are not viewed as either 
subjective or objective (δὲ 338, 340. a). It simply 
denotes indirect relation, without specifying the 
character of that relation; or, in other words, it 
denotes mere association or connection. Hence we 
have the general rule: AN Arrenpant ‘THING oR 
CIRCUMSTANCE, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, IS PUT 
IN THE’ Dative. 


᾿ ΝΌΤΕΒ. «a. In accordance with this rule, the Dat. is sometimes used in 
expressing an adjunct, which, upon a more exact discrimination of its char- 
acter, would be expressed by either the Gen. or Ace. See §§ 340. a, 341. 


β. The Dative RESMUAL is expressed in Eng. most frequently by the 
preposition with, but likewise by the prepositions by, in, at,&c. Cf. δὲ 345. N., 
397. a. 

§ 415. The Dative residual may be resolved 
into, (1.) the InsrrumenraL and Mopar Dative, 
and (1.) the Temporat and Locat Dative. 


(1.) InstruMENTAL AND Mopar Dative. 


Rote XIX. The means and move are put in 
the Dative. 


§ 416. Insrrumentatity and move may be either ez- 
ternal or internal, and MODE may apply either to action or con- 
dition. Hence, to these heads may be referred, 

25 * 


° 


« 


294 SYNTAX. — DATIVE. [BooK πὶ 


1.) The instrument, force, or other means, with which any 


thing is done, or through which any thing comes to pass 
Thus, 


ΕΣ ; 

Αὐσὸν ἀκοντίξει cis σ'΄αλ τῷ, one shoots him with a dart, i. 8. 27. ἜἜΦεϊσον 
“ο. «ἱππικῷ, pursued with cavalry, vii. 6.29. Oavérw ζημιοῦν, to puns 
ish with death, Cyr. vi. 3.27. Zyediass διαβαίνοντες i. 5.10. Ἵησι τῇ 
ἀξίνῃ Ib. 12. Aiboss σφενδονᾷν iii. 3.17. Δώροις trivai. 9.14. Ad 
γοις truccii. 6. 4. Τεκμαίρεσθαι δ᾽ ἦν τῷ Podw iv. 2.4. Γέφῦρα δὲ ἐπῆν 
ἰζευγμένη wrolors ἑπτά 1. 2.5. “Ὡσλισμένοι Θώραξ, i. 8. 6. ᾿Ωἰκοδομη- 
μένον π'λίνθοις ti. 4.12. Κῦρος ἀνέδη ξενικῷ ii. 5.22. Τοῖς δὲ Atsroute 
νοις ἐς [Πλάταιαν ἐλθόντες, τὴν γῆν ἐδήουν ΤῊ. 11. 12. Εἶχον δεινῶς τῇ ἐνδείᾳ 
vi. 4.23. ᾿Αποθνήσκει νόσῳ vii. 2.32. Φι,λίᾳ μὲν καὶ εὐνοίᾳ ἑπομένους 
ii. 6.18. ΟΥ δὲ μὴ παρεῖεν, rodrovs ἡγεῖτο ἢ ἀκρατείᾳ ci ἢ ἀδικίᾳ ἢ 
ἀμελείᾳ ἀπεῖναι Cyr. viii. 1,16. [ΠΠρονοεῖν μέν γε ἕξω πάντα τῇ ἀνθρωπίνη 
γνώμῃ, ταῖς δὲ χερσὶν ὁπλοφορήσω, διώξομα, δὲ τῷ ἵσπῳ, σὸν δ᾽ ἐναντίον 
ἐνατρέψω τῇ «τοῦ leroy ῥώμῃ Cyr. ἵν. 3.18. Πάσας κινήσεις τῷ σώματι 
Pl. Leg. 631 5. ‘H τοῖς βέλεσιν ἔφεσις Ib. 717 ἃ. Τὰ γὰρ δόλῳ τῷ μὴ 
δικαίῳ κτήματ᾽ οὐχὶ σώζεται, Soph. Cid. C. 1026.— The Dat. of the missile 
with verbs of throwing will be specially observed. , 


§ 417. Remark. Dative or toe Acent. The Dat. 
sometimes expresses that through whose agency any thing takes 
place ; as, . 


Πάνδ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται, all things have been done by us, i. e. our work is done, 
1.8.12. Eid σι καλὸν... ἐπέπρακτο ὑμῖν Vii. 6.32. Td πυρὰ κεκαυμένα 
εἴη σῷ Σεύθῃ vii. 9. 18, Τοῖς δὲ Κερκυραίοις . « οὐχ ἑωρῶντο Thi. 51. 
Τοῖς Ἕλλησι μισοῖντο Id. iii. 64. ἸΤροσσπόλοις φυλάσσεται Soph. Aj. 
589. “Ὡς σοι δύσφορ᾽ εἴργασται κακά Kur. Hec. 1085. Τήν, γάρ wor ἄν 
++ πρόσφορον ἀκούσαιμ᾽ ἔσος, ‘through whom,’ i. e. ‘from whom,’ Soph. EL. 
226. Aikars of σκῆσσρον, received from him the sceptre, B. 186 (the Dat. 
followings δέχομαι, instead of the Gen. with παρά, is especially Epic, and 
might perhaps be referred to ὃ 409, thus, took for him the sceptre). Θέμιστι 
.. Σίκτο δέσας O. 87. 


Nore. This use of the Dat, is most frequent with verbs in the Perf. and 
Plup. This DATIVE OF THE AGENT with passive verbs, and that with passive 
verbals (ξ΄ 407. x), might perhaps have been referred to the same analogy. 


§ 418. 2.) The way or manner, in which any thing is 
done or affected, together with attendant circumstances. Thus, 


Οὐ γὰρ κραυγῇ, ἀλλὰ σιγῇ .. προσήεσαν, for “they advanced not with 
clamor, but in silence,i. 8.11. Ἰ]αρελθεῖν οὐκ ἦν Bigi. 4.4. “Ὥσσερ ὀργῇ 
ἐκέλευσεϊ. 5. 8. ᾿Ελαύνων ἀνὰ κράτος ἱδροῦντι σῷ ἵσπσῳ ἷ. 8.1. Veo 
λαῖς ταῖς κεφαλαῖς by τῷ πολέμῳ διακινδυνεύειν Ib. 6.ἁ Δρόμῳ ϑεῖν Ib. 
18, Τούτῳ τῷ σρόπῳ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς rirrapas iii. 4. 28, Πορευόμε- 
γο! ee TH ὁδῷ Ib. 80. Tas βίᾳ πράξεις Pl. Pol. 280 d. 


ReMARK. The pronoun αὐσός is sometimes joined to the Dat. of an asso- 
ciated object to give emphasis; as, Μὴ ἡμᾶς αὐταῖς σαῖς τριήρεσι καταδύσῃ, 
west he should sink us, triremes and all [with the triremes themselves], i. 8. 17, 
Πολλοὺς γὰρ ἤδη αὐτοῖς «σοῖς ἵσ'στοις κατακρημνισθῆναι Oyr. i. 4. 7. Τριήρειφ 
αὐτοῖς πληρώμασι διιφϑάρησαν Isocr. 176 b. —The preposition σύν, which is 


ΝΗ. 1.7 OF MEANS AND MODE.—OF TIME AND PLACE. 295 


common in such adjuncts if the «irs; be omitted, is sometimes expressed even 
with it; as, Ὅσως .. ξὺν αὐτοῖσι τοῖς κηρίοις ἐκτετμῆσθον Pl. Rep. 564 ¢. 
Cf. &. 498 and Y. 482. 


3.) The respect in which any thing is taken or apples (cf 
§ 4957). Thus, 


Tlavéss ys ἡμῶν λειφθέντες, inferior to us in number [in respect to number], 
vii. 7. 31 (8 349). Πόλις... Θάψακος ὀνόμασι ἴ,4.11. Τῇ ἐσιμελείᾳ 
περιεῖναι τῶν Φίλων i. 9. 24. Τῇ φωνῇ meats ii. 6. 9. Χρήμασι καὶ 
τιμαῖς σούτων ἐσλεονεκτεῖτε (8 $51) iii. 1.37. Ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἐῤῥωμενί- 
στεροι Ib. 42. ‘Evi δὲ μόνῳ σπροέχουσιν οἱ τς ἡμᾶς iii. 2.19. Τῷ βελ- 
φίσπσῳ τοῦ ὁπλιτικοῦ βλαφθῆναι Th. iv. 73. Ῥίζῃ μὲν μέλαν ἔσκε x. 804. 


§ 419. 4.) The measure of difference, especially *with 
the Comparative. Thus, 


Χρόνῳ δὲ συχνῷ doregov, and sometime after [later by a considerable time], 
i. 8.8. Πολλῷ δὲ ὕσσερον ii. 5.32. Νομίζων, ὅσῳ μὲν Sarroy ἔλθοι, τ ο- 
σούτῳ ἀπαρασκευαστοτέρῳ βασιλεῖ μάχεσθαι, ὅσῳ δὲ σχολαιότερον, «οσούσῳ 
TAtov συναγείρεσθα, βασιλεῖ στράτευμα, thinking that [by how much] the more 
rapidly he should advance, [by so much] the more unprepared he should find the 
king for battle, §c.,i. 5.9. "Eviaurg πρεσξύτερος, a year older, Ar. Ran. 
18. [ΙΠρούλαξε πολλῷ Th. vii. 80. Χρόνῳ μετέπειτα πολλῷ Hat. ii. 110, 


5.) The Dative with χράομαι, to use [to supply one’s need 
with, § 284. 3]. Thus, 


Μαντικῇ χρώμενος, using divination, Mem.i. 1.2. "Exenro σοῖς ξένοις, ‘em-= 
ployed,’ i. 3.18. Τοῖς ἵσσοις ἄριστα χρῆσθαι, ‘manage, i. 9.5. Xsmave 
Xencéuevoy, ‘having met with,” Dem. 293. 3. Τοὺς χρωμένους ἑαυτῷ, ‘ asso- 
ciating with,’ Mem. iv. 8.11. “Hy Κῦρος πολεμίᾳ ἐχρῆτο, which was hostile to 
Cyrus, ii. 5.11. Σφόδρα «πειθομένοις ἐχρῆτο ii. 6. 13. 


Nore. Νοροίζω has sometimes the Dat. after the analogy of χράοραι"» 
as, Θυσίαις διετησίοις νορείζοντες, ‘ observing,’ Th. ii. 38. Εὐῤσεξείᾳ μὲν οὐδέ-: 
σεροι ἐνόμιζον Id. iii. 82. 


(u.) Temporat anp Locat Darive. 


§ 420. Rure XX. The time and piace ar 
WHICH are put in the Dative (cf. δὲ 378, 439) ; as, 


1. Tre. Τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ (se. ἡμέρᾳ} ἧκεν ἄγγελος, but the next day 
there came a messenger, i. 2.21. "Qusero γὸς ταύτῃ τῇ ae tee μαχεῖσθαι βα- 
σιλέα i. 1.14. TH ὑστεραίᾳ οὖκ ἐφάνησαν οἱ πολέμιοι, οὐδὲ τῇ eine . 
φῇ δὲ reraern, νυκτὸς προσελθόντες, καταλαμβάνουσι χωρίον ὑπερδέξιον, ‘ but 
on the fourth, having passed them in the night (ᾧ 378), iii. 4.37. Λύσαν- 
Beos δὲ τῇ ὌΆΞΡΜΙ νυκαὶ, ἐπεὶ ὄρθρος ἦν, ἐσήμηνεν Ἡ. Gr. ii. 1.22. ἸΤρίτῳ 
μηνὶ ἀνήχθη ἐπ’ "Ανδρον Ib. i. 4. 2]. Τῷ δ᾽ ἐσιόντι ἔσει, ᾧ ἦν Ὀλυμπιὰς, 
ἣ τὸ στάδιον ἐνίκα ἹΚροκίνας Ib. ii. 3.1. Τῷ δ᾽ αὐτῷ i χεόνῳ, and at the same 
time, Ib. i. 9. 18. Ὁ δὲ ᾿Αγησίλᾶος χρόνῳ work εἶπεν, “αὖ length,’ Ib. iv. 
1.34. ‘Os δεκασπόρῳ χρόνῳ ἀλόχους τε καὶ τέκν᾽ εἰσίδωσιν Eur. Tro. 20, 
Cf. ὃὲ 378, 439. 


2. PLACE. bc” aaa cars Μαραθῶν, καὶ Σαλαμῖν, καὶ Πλατα. 


290 SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE. [Book Ia 


ais, the victories at Marathon and Salamis and Platea, Pl. Menex. 245 a 
Τῶν σε Μαραθῶν, μαχεσαμένων καὶ cov ἐν Σαλαμῖνι ναυμαχησάντων Ib 
241 Ὁ. Τὴν παλαιὰν φηγὸν αὐδῆσαί ποτε Swdavs Soph. Tr. 171. Θόραισ 
κειμένου Id. Ged. C. 401. Lois ὅταν crwow ragois Ib. 411. ‘Odors κυ- 
κλῶν ἐμαυτόν Id. Ant. 226. Κείμενον πέδῳ Αἴγισθον Eur. El. 763. 


§ 42 3. Remasrus. «. To the rocat patrve may be referred the 
use of the Dat. to denote persons among whom, or in whom any thing occurs ; 
as, Δύναρμειιν ὠνθρώποις ἔχειν, ‘among men,’ Eur. Bac. 310. Ἑῤδοκιροήσειε 
σοῖς τότε ἀνθρώποις Pl. Prot.343c. Οὐκ ἄν ἐξεύροις ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτίας ὄνειδος 
οὐδέν, ‘in me,’ Soph. Ged. Ο. 966. Οἷα xal Ὁμήρῳ Ausojendns λέγει, ‘in 
Homer,’ Pl. Rep. 389 e. ὈὈδυσσεὺς γὰρ αὐτῷ [Ὁμήρῳ] λοιδορεῖ τὸν ᾿Αγα- 
μέμνονω Pl. Leg. 706 ἃ. ᾿Αριπρεπέα Τρώεσσιν Ζ. 477. “Oov κράτος tori μέ- 
γι πᾶσιν υκλώπεσσι a 71, 


β. The use of the LocaL DATIVE in prose is chiefly confined to those ad- 
verbs of place which are properly datives ; as, σαύσῃ [sc. χώρᾳ], in this region, 
here (iv. 5. 36), +708, here (vii. 2. 13), 7 and fixe, where (ii. 2.21), ἄλλῃ, 
elsewhere (ii. 6. 4), κύκλῳ, in a circuit, around (i. 5. 4; iii. 5, 14), οἴκοι 
(= οἴκῳ), at home (i. 1. 10), ᾿Αθήνησι (= ᾿Αϑήναις), at Athens (vii. 7. 57). 
See §§ 320. 2, 379. a 


E. Tue Accusarive. 


§ 422. The office of the Accusative is to ex- 
press DIRECT TERMINATION or LIMIT (§ 339); and 
the general rule for its use is the following: AN 
Apsunct rEexpressinc Direct Limit 1s ΡΤ IN 
THE ACCUSATIVE. 

Remark. In a general sense, all the OBLIQUE CASES may be said to ex- 
press limit; but the Gen. and Dat. express it less simply and less directly 
than the Acc. In some connections, however, these indirect cases are used 
interchangeably with the Acc. See §§ 341, 401, 414. a, 424, 2. 

The Accusative, as the case οὗ direct limit, is 
employed, — 


(1.) To limit an action, by expressing its direct 
object or its effect. —Acc. or Direct Opsect anp 
Errtctr. ! 


(11.) ‘To limit a word or expression, by applying 
‘t to a particular part, property, thing, or person. — 
Acc. oF SPECIFICATION. 


(111.) To express limits of time, space, and quan- 


tity. — Acc. or Extent, 
- 


cu. 1.! OF DIRECT OBJECT AND EFFECT. 297 


(1v.) ‘To limit a word or expression, by denoting 
degree, manner, &c. — ADVERBIAL Acc. 


Nores. (a.) These uses are not only intimately allied, but sometimes blend 
with each other. (0.) For the use of the Acc. to denote the subject of the In- 
Jinitive, see the syntax of that mode. ᾿ 


(1.) Accusative oF THE Direct Opsect anp ΕἸΕΡΈΟΤ. 


§ 423. στε XXI. The pirecr opsecr and 
the EFFEcT of an action are put in the Accusative. 


Λαξὼν Τ,σσαφέρνην, taking Tissaphernes, i.1.2. ‘Erouttro σὴν vrs 
λογήν, he made the levy, i. 1.6. ‘Yowrrsus rerasuryjvi. 1.1. Διαξάλ- 
ass σὸν Kigoy Ib. 85. Φιλοῦσα αὐτόν Ib 4. ὋὉ δὲ Κῦρος ὑπολαξδὼν «οὺς 
φεύγοντας, συλλέξας σσράτπευμα ἐπολιόρκει Μ  λησπον Ib. 7. 


Nore. The distinction between the direct object and the effect of an action 
is not always obvious, and it sometimes appears doubtful to which head an 
adjunct is best referred. 


§ 424. Remargs. 1. The term action is employed in this rule to 
denote whatever is signified by a verb; and the rule properly applies only to 
the adjuncts of verbs (§ 392). Adjectives and nouns, however, sometimes 
take the Acc. after the analogy of kindred verbs; thus, Si.. φύξεμος, able 
to escape you, Soph. Ant. 788 (cf. Ἦ μὴ φύγω σε, Id. El. 1503). "Exu 
στήμονες δὲ ἦσαν τὰ προσήκοντα Cyt. iii. 3.9. Ἔ ξάρνῳ εἶναι τὰ ἐρωτώμενα 
Pl. Charm. 158 c. Τά vs μετέωρα φροντι:στής Pl. Apol. 18 Ὁ (ef. Τῶν 
μεπεώρων φροντιστής Symp. 6. 6). Χοὰς προπομπός Asch. Cho. 23. Τῆς 
ϑυμοθόρον φρένα λύπης Id. Ag. 103. Συνίσσορα . « κακά Ib. 1090. See 
αἶβο ὁ 431. 1. 


2. Many verbs, which according to the preceding rules govern the Gen. or 
the Dat., are likewise construed with the Accusative (see §§ 341, 401, 
422. R.); as, ᾽᾿᾽Ωφελεῖν μὲν φοὺς φΦίλους,.. BrAdarssy δὲ σοὺς ἐχθρούς Pl. 
Rep. 884 Ὃ (cf. § 405). Προέχουσιν οἱ ἱπσεῖς ἡμᾶς iii. 2. 19 (cf. ὃ 850). 
"Aung κατῆρχε λόγον Pl. Euthyd. 283 b (cf. ὃ 350. R.). Advapas οὔτε σε 
αἰσθέσθα, ii. 5. 4 (ef. ὃ 375.8). Meradoisy αὐτοῖς πυρούς iv. 5. 5 (cf. 
Th. 6, and ὃ 367). Λέγειν re ἐκέλευεν αὐτούς Vii. 5. 9 (cf. ὃ 402). 


§ 4°30. 5. Arrracrioy. A word which is properly construed other- 
wise sometimes becomes the direct object of a verb by attruction (§ 329.N.), 
especially in the poets. This-sometimes results in hypallage, or an interchange 
of construction (ὑπαλλαγή, exchange). Thus, Ei δὲ μ᾽ ὧδ᾽ ἀεὶ λόγοις ἐξῆρχες 
[== μοι λόγους or λόγων], if you had always begun your addresses to me thus, 
Soph. El. 556. Δεσπόταν γόοις .. κατάρξω, I will begin lamentations for my 
master, Eur. Andr. 1199. Cf. §§ 427. 9, 431, 433. 


@4. A verb, of which the proper object or effect is a distinct sentence, often 

takes the subject (or some other prominent word) of that sentence in the Acc., 
by attraction ; as, "Hide: airayv, ὅσι μέσον ἔχοι, he knew [him] that he occu- 
pied the centre, i. 8.21. Τὴν γὰρ bare@eorny σῶν ὀρέων ἐδεδοίκεσαν, un σπῖρο- 
καταληφθείη iii, 5.18. Ἤλεγχον τὴν κύκλῳ πἄσαν χώραν, τίς ἱκάστη εἴη 
10. 14. Ovoy ἔφρασεν, ἔνθα ἦν καπορωρυγμοένος iv. 5. 29. ‘Os ὁρᾷ «ὸν 
Καλλίμαχον, ἃ ἰποίει iv. 7. 11. 


298 SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE. [BOOK IT 


5. Perrpurasis. The place of a verb is often supplied by an Ace. of the 
kindred noun joined with such verbs as wow (or more frequently raéouas), 
ἄγω, ἔχω, τίθημι, &e.; thus, Κῦρος ἐξέτασιν καὶ ἀριθμὸν τῶν “Ελλήνων ἐποίησεν 
[= ἐξήτασε καὶ ἠρίθμησε ποὺς Ἕλληνας}, Cyrus made a review and numbering 
of [= reviewed and numbered] the Greeks, i. 2.9. ᾿Εξέτασιν ποιεῖται Ib. 14. 
Τὴν πορείαν ἐποιεῖτο i. 7. 20. 


8. Such periphrases sometimes take an Acc. by virtue of the implied verb, 
as, Sxsin μὲν καὶ ἀνδράποδα ἁρπαγὴν ποιησάμενος [= ἁρπάσας], Th. 
Vili. 62. Τὴν χώραν καταδρομαῖς λείαν ἐποιεῖτο [= ἐλεηλάτει] Ib. 41. “A 
χοῖῆν σε μετρίως .. σπουδὴν ἔχειν [= σπεύδειν] Eur. Herc. 709. Τὰ δ᾽ ἐν ute 
oy ἢ λῆστιν ἴσχεις Soph. Cid. C. 583. Ti’ ἀεὶ τάκεις ὧδ᾽ ἀκόρεστον οἰμωγὰν 
. «᾿Αγαμέμνονα [ΞΞ τί ὧδ᾽ ἀκορέστως οἰμώξεις ᾿Αγαμέμνονα] Id. El. 122. 
In like manner, Τοῦτο κἄμ᾽ ἔχει πόθος [= τοῦτο καὶ ἐγὼ ποθῶ} Eur. Ion, 
672. Yet see §§ 333. 5, 434. 


§ 4 2G. 7. Exists. The verb which governs the Acc. is sometimes 
omitted ; particularly, 


a.) In EMPHATIC ADDRESS; as, Οὗτος, ὦ σέ Ἔοι [sc. λέγω or καλῶ], You 
there, ho! you I mean, Ar. Av. 274 (ὃ 343.6). Σὲ δὴ, σὲ σὴν νεύουσαν ἐς 
πέδον κάρα, φὴς, ἢ καταρνεῖ μὴ δεδρακέναι, τάδε ; Soph. Ant. 441. 


B.) In ENTREATY; as, Μὴ, πρός σε Seay [sc. ἱκετεύω), σλῇς με σροδοῦναι, 
I beseech you by the gods, do not forsake me, Eur. Ale. 275. (Observe the 
arrangement, which is frequent in earnest entreaty ; and compare, in Lat., 
Per omnes te deos oro Hor. Ode i. 8.1. Per te ego deos oro Ter. Andr. 
iii. 3. 6.) 


γ.) In Promrprrion; as, Μὴ σριξὰς ἔτι [sc. ποιεῖτε], No more delays! — 
Soph. Ant. 577. Μή μοι μυρίους, μηδὲ δισμυρίους ξένους [sc. λέγε], Don't 
talk to me of your ten thousand or twenty thousand mercenaries, Dem. 45. 11. 
Μή μοι πρόφασιν Ar. Ach. 345. 


3.) In SWEARING; as, Οὐ, σόνδ᾽ "Ολυμσίον [sc. tuvdus Cf. ὃ 428], No, 
by this Olympus! Soph. Ant. 758. Οὐ cay Διὸς ἀστραπάν Id. El. 1063, — 
By this ellipsis may be explained the use of the Acc. with the particles νή, 
vai, and μά (of which the two first are affirmative, and the last, unless pre- 
ceded by ναΐ, commonly negative), according to the following 


Srecia®, Rute. ADVERBS OF SWEARING are followed by the Accusative ; 
as, Νὴ Δία, Yes, by Jupiter! i. 7.9. Ναὶ rd Σιώ vi. 6. 34. ᾿Αλλὰ, μὰ 
φοὺς ϑεοὺς, οὐκ ἔγωγε αὐτοὺς διώξω, but, by the gods, I will not pursue them, 
i. 4.8. Nai we Δία, Yes, indeed! v. 8. 6. 


§ 427. 8. The Ace. required by a transitive verb is sometimes omit- 
ted; as, πότε ἢ πρὸς ὕδωρ βούλοιτο διατελέσαι [sc. σὴν ὁδόν] i. 5. 7. Cf. iv. 
5.11. Λύκιος ἤλασε 80. σὸν ἵσπον) i. 10.15, Compare IlagsAadvovros 
Cyr. viii. 3. 28, with ᾿Ελαύνοντος σὸν ἵσσον Ib. 29; and []αρελαύνων e 
ἵσσον, with [IpocsAatvwy avrois Cyr. v. 3. 55. . 


9. An elliptical or unusual construction of a verb and Acc. is sometimes 
employed, especially by the poets,#for energy of expression; as, "Exsies 
[= κείρων ἐποίει] πολύκερων φόνον Soph. Aj.55. Aly’ Deuce [r= αἷκα τὴν γῆν 
δεῦον ἔχεα, OF αἵματι τὴν γῆν ἔδευσα] Ib. 376. Τέγγει δακρύων ἄχναν Id. Tr 
849, Τρώσῃς φόνον Eur. Sup. 1205. Cf. §§ 425, 431, 433. 


cn. 1. OF DIRECT OBJECT. 299 


1. Accusative of the Direct Object. 


y 428. I. This Acc. is often translated into English with 
a preposition ; thus, 


"Ouvips ϑεοὺς καὶ ϑεάς, I swear by gods and goddesses, vi. 6.17. Odros 
μὲν γὰρ αὐτοὺς ἐπιωρκήκᾶσιν, for these have been guilty of perjury against them, 
iii. 1. 22. ‘Huds .. εὖ ποιῶν, doing well to us, i. 6. treating us well, ii. 3. 23. 
Ὁ δὲ σίγλος δύναται tare ὀξολούς, the siglus ws equivalent to seven oboli, i. 5. 6. 
Οὐδὲν ἄλλο δυναμένη ii. 2.13. Mayas ϑαῤῥεῖσε, you have no fear of battles, 
iii, 2.20. Φυλαττόμενον . . ἡμᾶς, guarding against us, ii. 5.3. ‘Amodedon 
κότες πατέρας, having run away from their fathers, vi. 4.8. ‘O κολοιός μ᾽ 
eixeras, the jackdaw has departed from me, i. 6. has left me, Ar. Av. 86. "Hi- 
σχύνθημεν καὶ ϑεοὺς καὶ ἀνθρώπους προδοῦναι αὐτόν, we were ashamed before both 
gods and men to desert him, ii. 8. 22, Αἰσχύνεται vd πρᾶγμα, he is ashamed 
of the act, Eur. Ion, 367. Τοὺς γὰρ εὐσεξεῖς Θεοὶ ϑνήσκοντας οὐ χαίρουσι, for 
the gods do not rejoice in the death of the pious, Id. Hipp. 1340. Αἴ as. 
χορεύουσι, τὸν ταμίαν Ἴακχον, ‘dance in honor of, Soph. Ant. 1153. ‘Eaic- 
ost’ .. "Αρτεμιν Eur. Iph. A. 1480. 


§ 429. Il. To this head may be referred the use of the 
Acc. with VERBS OF MOTION, to denote the place or person to 
which (δῷ 339, 422) ; as, 


"AQizeras πόπον ὑλώδη, will come to a woody spot, Ven. 10.6. “Acrv Kad- 
μεῖον μολών Soph. Cid. T. 35. "Hatoyv πατρὸς ἀρχαῖον τάφον Id. El. 893. 
Πύργους γῆς ἔσλευσ᾽ ᾿Ιωλκίας Eur. Med. 7. ᾿Αφίκεσο χθόνα Ib. 12. Τήνδε 
ναυσφολεῖς χθόνα Ib. 682, “Héns τέλος μολόντας Ib. 920. Χρεία τίς σε Θεσ- 
σαλῶν χθόνα πέμσει, Id. Ale. 479, Κνίσση δ᾽ οὐρανὸν ἷκεν A. 317. “ECay 
νέας y. 162. 


Nores. a. This use of the Acc. is chiefly poetic, and especially Epic, 
instead of the common construction with a preposition. 


B. The poets sometimes even join an Acc. of the place with verbs of stand 
ing, sitting, or lying (as implying occupation) ; thus, 2770’ αἱ μὲν ὑμῶν «όνδ᾽ 
ἁμαξήρη reicov, ai δ᾽ ἐνθάδ᾽ ἄλλον οἶμον Eur. Or. 1251. Θάσσοντ᾽ ἄκραν Ib. 
871. Τρίποδα καθίζων Φοῖξος 10. 956. Τόσον .. ὅντινα κεῖται Soph. Ph. 144. 


§ 430. Ill. Causatives govern the Acc., together with 
the case of the included verb ; as, 


Μὴ μ᾽ &vauyions κακῶν, do not remind me of [cause me to remember] 
my woes, Eur. Alc. 1045 (ὃ 376.4). ᾿Αναμνήσω γὰρ ὑμᾶς καὶ τοὺς . - 
κινδύνους ili. 2. 11 (ὃ 424. 2). Βούλει, σε γεύσω πρῶτον ἄκρατον μέθυ, Eur. 
Cycl. 149. Τοὺς παῖδας .. yevortoy αἵματος Pl. Rep. 537 ἃ (ὃ 375. a). 
Πολλὰ καὶ ἡδέα καὶ παντοδαπὰ εὐώχουν ὑμᾶς Pl. Gorg. 522 a. See also 
§ 357. 


ReMARK. The verbs δεῖ and χρή are sometimes construed by the poets as 
causatives ; thus, Σὲ δεῖ Προμηθέως, you have need of [it needs you of] a Pro- 
metheus, Aisch. Prom. 86 (§ 357). Πόνου πολλοῦ με δεῖ Eur. Hipp. 23. Τί 
γάρ μ᾽ ἔδει παΐδων., Eur. Suppl. 789 (cf. Zoi σε γὰρ παίδων ri δεῖ Id. Med. 
565, and ὃ 403). Ti χρὴ φίλων Id. Or. 667 (but Porson reads Ti δεῖ φέ- 
λων, denying that this use of χρή is Attic). Σὲ χρὴ . . αἰδοῦς y. 14. 


900 SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE. [Book In 


2. Accusative of the Effect. 


§ 434. The eErrecr of a verb includes whatever the 
agent does or makes. Hence any verb may take an Acc. 
expressing or defining its action. ‘The Acc. thus employed is 
either, a. a noun kindred, in its origin or signification, to the 
verb, or 8. a neuter adjective used substantively, or y. a noun 
simply defining or characterizing the action. 


a. KinpRED Νοῦν. 


Οἱ δὲ Θρξκες ἐπεὶ εὐσύχησαν τοῦτο cd εὐσύχημα, and when the Thracians 
had gained this success, vi. 3.6. “Ὡς ἀκίνδῦνον βίον ζῶμεν, how secure a life we 
live, Eur. Med. 248. 9 rgarnyncovra ἐμὲ ταύτην τὴν στρατηγίαν i. 3. 15. 
Tapsiv γάμον rovds Eur. Med. 587. Ti προσγελᾶτε τὸν πανύστατον γέλων ς 
Ib. 1041, ᾿Εσιμελοῦντα, racuy ἐπιμέλειαν Pl. Prot. 325¢. Βασιλείαν π'ασῶν 
δικαιοτάτην βασιλευόμενοι Pl. Leg. 6806. Φευγέτω ἀειφυγίαν Ib. 877 ὁ. 
Τὸν ἱερὸν καλούμενον πόλεμον ἐστράτευσαν ΤῊ. i. 112, *Hikay δρόμεημα δεινόν 
Eur. Ph. 1979. Πήδηρμια κοῦφον ἐκ νεὼς ἀφήλατο Aisch. Pers, 305. Λεύσσων 
φονίου δέργμα δράκοντος Ib. 79. Τήνδ᾽ ὁ προσθκῶν ἕδραν Soph. Cid. C. 1166. 
᾿Ωρχιοῦνφο τὴν καρπαίαν Vi. 1. 7, ἹΠορευτέον δ᾽ ἡμῖν τοὺς πρώτους σταθμούς 
ii. 2. 12, "Ελδοι τὴν δδόν iii, 1, 6, "Ἔφη ἡγήσεσθαι .. ὅδόν ἵν. 1. 24. Tete 
σεται τριφασίας ὁδούς Hdt. vi. 1109. 


Remarks. 1. In like manner, an adjective sometimes takes an Acc. of the 
kindred noun (8 424. 1); as, Mars σι σοφὸς ὧν τὴν ἐκείνων σοφίαν, wire ἀμα- 
Ong σὴν ἀμαθίαν, being neither wise with their wisdom, nor foolish with their fol- 
ly, Pl. Apol. 22 6. Kaxods πᾶσαν κακίαν Pl. Rep. 490 ἃ. Δοῦλος τὰς με- 
γίστας ϑωπείας καὶ δουλείας Ib. 579 d. 


2. It will be observed, that usually an adjective is joined with the Acc. 
vf the kindred noun, and the whole phrase is an emphatic substitution for an 
adverb. Thus, “Ὡς ἀκίνδῦνον βίον ζῶμεν =‘'Os ἀκινδύνως ζῶμεν. This ad- 
jective not unfrequently occurs with an ellipsis of the noun; as, Τὸ Περσικὸν 
ὠρχεῖσο (Sc. texnua) vi. 1.10. Hence appears to have arisen the construc- 
tion in § 432. 


§ 432. β. NEUTER ADJECTIVE. 


Τοιαῦσα μὲν weroinxs, τοιαῦτα δὲ λέγει, [he has done such things, and 
says such things] such has been his conduct, and such is his language, i. 6. 9. 
Λέγεις οὐκ ἀχάριστα ἴϊ. 1.15, Tatra χαρίσωνσαι 10,10. Te Δύκαια 
ἔδσσε i. 2.10. Μηδὲν ψεύδεσθαι '. 9.7. Μέγα φρονήσας iii. 1. 27. ᾿Ανέ- 
κραγέ σε πολεμικόν Vii. 5, 38, Χρήσασθαί rs τῇ στρασιξ, to make some 
use of the army, Cyr. viii. 1. 14. Ti αὐσῷ χρήσῃ, what would you do with 
him? Ib. i, 4.15, Tl σεμνὸν καὶ πεφροντικὸς βλέσεις ; why do you 
look grave and thoughtful? Eur. Ale. 7738. Καλὸν βλίπω Id. Cyel. 553. 
Κλέσσον βλίσε, Ar. Vesp. 900. 


Remarks. 1. This construction (upon which see § 431. 2) is closely al- 
lied with the adverbial use of the neuter adjective § 440), and is, perhaps, 
its origin. 

2. The Ace. of the neuter adjective is very extensive in its use, and often 
occurs where a substantive would have been constructed differently ; thus, 
Taos μέντοι πλεονεκτῶν οὐκ ἠἡσχύνιτο, iv μὲν τῷ Sige τοῦ ἡλίον, iv δὶ τῷ 


vn. 1.] OF EFFECT. — DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. _ 301 


χειμῶνι «οὐ Pixous Ages. 5.3. XP. ᾿Οσφραίνε, rs; AIK, Τοῦ ψύχους 
Ar. Plut. 896, 


8. The Acc. of the neuter pronoun is sometimes used to denote that on ac- 
count of which any thing is done (viewed originally as the effect or result of 
the action); as, “A δ᾽ ἦλθον, but what I came for, Soph. Cd. C. 1291, 
Ταῦτ᾽ tye ἔσσευδον, therefore [on account of these things] J made haste, iv. 1. 
21. Ti σὰ rupee κατασξίσειαν, ‘why, vi. 3.25. Τοῦτ᾽ ἀφικόμην Id. Gd, 
T. 1005. ‘Aaa’ αὐτὰ ταῦτα καὶ νῦν ἥκω Pl. Prot. 310 6. Nedraros δ᾽ 
ἦν ΤΙριωροιδῶν - ὃ καί με γῆς ὑπεξέπεμι ψεν Eur. Hee. 19. "Exsivo δὲ aboua, 
ὅτι μοι δοκεῖ Mem. iv. 8. 15. 


Nore. So with χρῆμα, thing, expressed, Ti χρῆμα κεῖσαι α why do you 
he there? Eur. Heracl. 633. See Ib. 646, 709 3 Id. Alc. 512; &e. 


§ 433. y- DerritivE Noun. 


Φόξον βλέπων, looking terror, Asch. Sept. 498. Ἢ βουλὴ .. ἔξλεψε 
νᾶσυ, the senate looked mustard, Ar. Eq. 629. “Agen dedogxérwv Asch. Sept. 
53. ᾿Αλφειὸν πνέων Ar. Av. 1121. "Adwy τὸν Σ,τάλκαν vi. 1. 6. 
Ἐλσίδας Atywvi. 2.11. Ὀλύμπια νενικηκόσι, having conquered in the 
Olympic games, Th. i. 126. Νενικήκασε ναυμαχίας Id. vii. 66. Νενικηκό- 
τὰ αὐτὸν tayxedrsov Symp. i. 2. Ἤγωνίζοντο δὲ παῖδες μὲν στάδιον, .. 
«άλην δὲ καὶ πυγμὴν καὶ παγκράτιον ἵἕσεροι iv. 8. 27. [Πολλὰς 
μάχας ἥττηνται Isocr. 7] 6. Χορηγοῦντα παισὶ Διονύσια Dem. 535. 18. 


3. Double Accusative. 


ἢ 434. ‘The same verb often governs Two ac- 
CUSATIVES, which may be, 


1.) The prrect ossect and the EFFECT, in apposition with 
each other (§ 331); as with verbs of making, appointing, 
choosing, esteeming, naming, &c. ‘Thus, 


Βασιλέα σε ἐποίησαν, they made you hing, vii. 7.22. Σαρατηγὸν δὲ αὐτὸν 
ἀπέδειξε, and he had appointed him general,i. 1.2. Tlariga ἐμὲ ixadrsire, 
you called me father, vii. 6. 38. Ὅστις δ᾽ ἄν ἑαυτὸν 2Anras στρατηγόν. 7. 
28. Ods of Σύροι ϑεοὺς ἐνόμιζον 1. 4.9. “Ov ὠνόμαζε Διομήδην πατήρ 
Eur. Sup. 1218. "Ὄνομα «τί ot καλεῖν ἡμᾶς χρεών: Id. Ion, 259. Θεμιε- 
στοκλῆς Kassdovroy civ υἱὸν ἱππέα μὲν ἐδ,δάξας-ο ἀγαθόν Pl. Meno, 93 d. 
Obs ἡγεμόνας πόλεων ἐπαιδεύσασθε Pl Rep.546 b. Κῦρος ro στράτευμα 
κασένειμοε δώδεκα μέρη, Cyrus divided the army into twelve parts, Cyr. vii. 
5. 13. 


Norr. The infinitive εἶνα, is often used with these verbs; as, Νομίζω γὰρ 


ὑμᾶς ἐμοὶ sivas καὶ πατρίδα καὶ φίλους i. 3.6. Zohiorhy δή «οι ὀνομάζουσι. » 
σὸν ἄνδρα tivas Pl. Prot. 511 6. 


§ 435. II.) The pirrecr ΟΒΙΈΟΤ and the EFFECT, not in 
apposition ; as with verbs of doing, saying, ὥς. ‘Thus, 


ΕΠ vis σι ἀγαθὸν ἢ κακὸν ποιήσειεν abrov, if any one had done him any 
good or evil,i. 9.11. Τὰ μέγιστα κακὰ ἐργαζόμενοι, τὰς πόλεις Pl. Rep. 
495 b. “Hdixicapsy τοῦτον οὐδέν vii. 6.22. Ἡλίκα ταῦτ᾽ ὠφέλησεν 
ὥσαντας Dem. 255. 7. ᾿Ασποτίσασθαι δίκην ixéoovs Eur. Heracl. 852 

20 


802 : SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE. [Boox πὶ 


Ταῦτα καὶ xabdCerc’ αὐτόν Id. Bac. 616. Ὅνταν ἐν ταῖς τραγῳδίαις ἀλλή 
λους τὰ ἔσχατα λέγωσιν, ‘say the worst things to each other, Mem. ii. 2. 
9. Πολλὰ πρὸς πολλούς με δὴ ἐξεῖσ'ας Soph. El. 520. Ta σέμν᾽ tan κό- 
ral’ ἐκείνους Id. Aj. 1107. "Ean κλύων, ἃ νῦν σὺ τήνδ᾽ ἀτιμάζεις πόλιν 
Id. Gd. T. 339. "Eevcduny οὐδέν σε Id. (4. Ο. 1145. Τί... γρά- 
Yessy ἄν σε μουσοποιὸς ἐν τάφῳ; Eur. Tro. 1188. Τοσοῦτον ἔχθος ἐχθαίρω 
σ᾽ ἐγώ Soph. El. 1054. “Ὥρκωσαν πάντας rods στρατιώτας τοὺς μεγίσπους 
ὅρκους Th. νἱϊ. 75. Μέλιτός με ἐγράψατο «τὴν γραφὴν ταύτην Pl. 
Apo. 198. Γαρεῖ μὲ δυσσυχέσσερον γάμον Eur. Tro. 357. Καύπησε 
κρᾶτα μέλεον “λαγάν Id. Or. 1467. ᾿Αλλ’ ἁγνὸν ὅρκον σὸν κάρω καπώ- 
μοσα Id. Hel. 835. ᾿Αναδῆσα, βούλομαι εὐαγγέλιά σε Ar. Plut. 764. 
Μιλειάδης ὁ σὴν ἐν Μαραθῶνι μάχην τοὺς βαρβάρους νικήσας Aschin. 
79. 86. 


§ 436. IIL) Two ossecrs differently related, but which 
are both regarded as pirEcT; as with verbs of asking and re- 
quiring, of clothing and unclothing, of concealing and depriv- 
ing, of persuading and teaching, &c. Thus, 


Κῦρον awirsiv σλοῖα, to ask vessels of Cyrus, or to ask Cyrus for vessels 
i. 3.14. Miro με κρύψῃς rove, do not hide this from me, Asch. Pr. 625. 
Ἡμᾶς δὲ ἀποσπερεῖ τὸν μισθόν, but us he robs of our pay, vii. 6 9. Σὲ 
δ,δάσκειν chy orgurnylay, to teach you the military art, Mem. iii. 1.5. Teds 
vl με ταῦτα ἐρωτᾷς; Mem. iii. 7.2. ᾿Ανήρεϑθ᾽ ἡμᾶς «τούς τ᾽ ἐν ᾿Ιλίῳ σπό- 
νους, .« «ἀνηρώτα τ᾿ ἐμὲ γυναῖκα, παῖδάς τε Kur. Iph. T. 661. Τοσαῦτά σ᾽ 
ὦ Ζεῦ, reocretaw Soph. Aj.831. Ὕκᾶς δὲ ὁ βασιλεὺς τὰ ὅπλα ἀπαιτε 
ii. 5.38. ᾿Ἐὰν πράτ τητε αὐτὸν τὰ χρήματα, ‘demand,’ ‘exact,’ vii. 6. 17 
Oi Λοκροὶ. . cian rods κατασλέοντας ἐξέλεγον Aischin. 69. 29. Tatra 
προὐκαλεῖσο τοὺς συνόντας Cyr. i. 4.4. Τοῦτο μὲν δὴ μὴ ἀνάγκαζέ pw 
Pl. Rep. 473 ἃ. Τὸν μὲν ἑαυτοῦ [se. χιτῶνα} ἐκεῖνον ἠμφίεσε Οὐτ. ἱ. 3. 17. 
Τὸν δῆμον ὑμῶν χλαῖναν ἤμ πισχον Ar. Lys. 1156. Ἔ κδύων ἐμὲ χρηοτη- 
ρίαν ἐσθῆτα Misch. Ag. 1969, ᾿Αφαιρεῖσθα, rods ἐνοικοῦντας “EAAnvas σὴν 
γῆν ἷ..3.. 4 (cf. § 411). Ὅς με... Ψιλὸν tum’ ἀποσπάσας Soph. Hd. “. 
866... Τὴν μὲν γὰρ ϑεὸν σοὺς στεφάνους σεσυλήκαᾶσι Vem. 616. 19. Σὲ 
φσαῦτα μὴ πείθων Soph. Ad. Ο. 797. Σύ σε γάρ με εὐθὺς τοῦτο .. ἐπα ΐ- 
δενες Ογτ. 1. 6. 20. Οὐκ ἐάσει φοῦσό γ᾽ ἡ δίκη σε Soph. Ant. 538. Ὅς 
σε κωλύσε, τὸ δρᾷν Τὰ. ῬΏΠ. 1241. Τυναῖκ᾽ ἀρίστων λίμναν ᾿Αχεροντίαν wo- 
φεύσας Eur. Ale. 442. [lot μ᾽ ὑπεξάγεις πόδα, Eur. Hee. 812 (cf. Ὁ 
κολοιός μὲ οἴχεται, ὃ 428). Χρόα vilere.. ἅλμην ζ. 224. Διασρίξῃσιν 
᾿Αχαιοὺς ὃν “γάμον B. 204. See also ᾧ 430. 


(11.) AccusaTIVE OF SPECIFICATION. 


§ 437. Rvure XXII. An adjunct applying a 
word or expression to a PARTICULAR PART, PROP- 
ERTY, THING, OF PERSON, is put in the Accusative ; 
as, 


Ta χεῖρε δεδεμένον, [bound as to the hands] with his hands bound, vi. 1. 8. 
Tlorapds, Κύδνος ὄνομα, εὖρος δύο πλέθρων, a river, Cydnus by name, two 
plethra in breadth, i. 2.23. ἸΙάνσα κράτιστος, best in every thing, i. 9.2 
(εἴ. 8.959. β). "Aworunbivess τὰ; κεφαλάς, beheaded, ii.6.1,29. Τὰ dra 
φιτρυπημένον iii. 1.31. Θαυμάσιαι ed κάλλος καὶ σὸ μέγεθος ii. 3. 18. 


. 


cH. 1.] OF SPECIFICATION. — OF EXTENT. 303 


Πλῆϑ os ὡς δισχίλιοι i iv. 2.2. Ter δας + «οὗ πολλοῦ δέοντας ἴσους πὸ μῆπος 
καὶ τὸ “λάτος εἶναι, ποικίλους δὲ τὰ νῶτα, καὶ τὰ ἔμαροσθεν “ἄντα 
ἐστιγμένους ἀνθέμιον ν. 4.32. Δεινός εἰμι ταύτην τὴν τέχνην Cyr. viii. 4. 18. 
Πόλιν τὴν οὐδὲν αἰτίαν vii. 1.25 (cf. δ 393. 7). Ὅσα δέ μοι χρήσιμοι 
ἴστε ii. 5. 23. Cf. §§ 369, 418. 8. 


§ 438. Remarks. «. This use of the Acc. is often termed synec- 
doche, from its analogy to the rhetorical figure bearing that name. 


β. Where a verb is in this way followed by two accusatives, the construc- 
tion (which is most frequent in Epic poetry) may be often referred to the 
Σχῆμα καθ᾿ ὅλον καὶ μέρος (\ 334. 9); as, Ποῖόν σε ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος ὄδόν- 
των, What language has escaped [you, the hedge of the teeth] the hedge of your 
teeth! a. 64. Tovys..aix ὀστέα ϑυμός Υ. 406. Cf. § 415. 


. An Ace. of specification sometimes introduces a sentence; as, Τοὺς 
pirea Ἕλληνας, σοὺς ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ οἰκοῦντας, οὐδέν τω σαφὶς λέγεται, εἶ 
ἕπονται, ‘but as to the Greeks? yr. ii, 1.5. To μὲν οὖν σύνταγμα τῆς 
Tort πολιτείας καὶ σὸν χρόνον, ὅσον αὐτῇ χρώμενοι, διετελέσαμεν, ἐξαρκούντως 
δεδήλωται Isocr. 264 c. Τὸν δὲ πόνον τὸν κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον, μὴ γένηταί σε 
πολύς Th. ii. 62. Τοὺς ἀγρονόμους rovrous.. ὀνείδη φερέσθωσαν Pl. Leg. 
761 e.— This construction may usually be referred to anacoluthon or ellipsis. 


3. The Acc. is sometimes used in exclamations, to specify the object of 
emotion (cf. §§ 343. 2, 372. s, J); as, ᾿Ιὼ, ἰὼ λιγείας μιόρον ἀηδόνος, oh, oh 
for the fate of the melodious nightingale, Asch. Ag. 1146. Δεινόν γε σὸν x ἤἥ- 
οὔκα τὸν παρὰ rors βροτοὺς οἰχόμενον, εἰ μηδέποτε νοστήσει πάλιν Ar. Ave 
1269. — This construction, which is unfrequent, should perhaps be referred to 
ellipsis. 

(u1.) AccusaTIVE oF EXTENT. 


§ 439. Rove XXIII. Exrenr or time anp 
SPACE is put in the Accusative (cf. §§ 378, 420) ; 
as, | ; 


a. TIME. "Eyewev ἡμέρας tard, he remained seven days, i. 2.6. ᾿Εδάκρῦςε 
«πολὺν xeovevi. 3.2. Ζῶν αἰκισθεὶς ἐνιαυτόν ii. 6. 29. "Ἑσλεον ἡμέραν καὶ 
νύκτα vi. 1. 14. Πρενόμενοι To λοιπὸν τῆς ἡμέρας iii. 4. 6. Τοὺς μὲν γὰρ 
κύνα; τοὺς χαλεποὺς τὰς μὲν ἡμέρας διδέάσι, τὰς δὲ νύκτας ἀφιῶσι- φοῦτον δὲ, 
ἢν σωφρονῆτε, τὴν νύκτα μὲν δήσετε, σὴν δὲ ἡμέραν ἀφήσετε. 8. 24. Ol σριά- 
κοντα ἔτη γεγονότες, ‘thirty years old,’ 11.3.12, Τὴν ϑυγατέρα τοῦ κωμάρχου 
ἐνάτην ἡμέραν γεγαμημένην ἵν. 5.94. Teirny ἡμέραν αὐτοῦ ἥκοντος Th. viii. 23. 
Δέκατον αἰχμάζεις ἔπος Eur. Rhes. 444. “Os σέῤνηκε ταῦτα rela ἔτη, ‘ these 
three years,’ Lys. 109. 12. 


β. Space. ᾿Ἐξελαύνε, διὰ Φρυγίας σταθμὸν ἕνα, παρασάγγας ὀκτώ, he ad- 
vances through Phrygia one day’s-march, eight parasangs, i. 2.6. ᾿Ασέχουσα 
φοῦ ποταμοῦ σταδίους πεντεκαίδεκα ii. 4.13, Μουρίας ἐμέ γε κατὰ γῆς ὀργυιὰς — 
ψενέσθα, Vii. 1. 80. Τὸ βέλος αὐτῶν καὶ διπλάσιον (sc. διάστημα) φέρεσθαι σῶν 
ΠΙρσικῶν σφενδονῶν iii. 3. 16. Ὁσπόσον δὲ “προδιώξειαν οἱ “EAAnves, σποσοῦτον 
πάλιν ἐπανα χωρεῖν μαχομένους ἔδει, iii. 3. 10. 


Nore. In the simple designation of time and place, the GENITIVE common- 
ly expresses the time and place in which (ὃ 378) ; the Dative, at which (§ 420); 
and the ACCUSATIVE, through which. To a certain extent, however, the offices 
of the several cases blend with each other. 


804 SYNTAX. — VOCATIVE. - [Boox m 


(1v.) ApverBiaL AccuUSATIVE. 


§ 440. Rute XXIV. The Accusative is often 
used ADVERBIALLY, to express degree, manner, or- 
der, &c.3 as, 


Τόνδε τὸν τρόπον, in this way, or thus,i.1,9. Τὸν αὐτὸν τ ρόπ'ον vi. 5.6 
(cf. Τῷ αὐτῷ «ρόπῳ iv. 2.13, and ὃ 418). Τέλος δὲ εἶπε, and finally [at 
the end] he said, ii. 3.26. "Aexyay μὴ σ«λουτῆσαι, ‘in the first place,’ ‘at 
all,” vii. 7.28. Ὁ ὄχλος ἀκμὴν διέδαινε iv. 3.26. Τούτου χάριεν, on ac- 
count of this, Mem. i. 2. 54. Κυνὸς δίκην, like a dog, Msch. Ag. 3. Κα, 
φὸν δ᾽ ἐφήκεις, ‘opportunely,’ Soph. Aj. 34. ᾿Αωρίαν ἥκοντες Ar. Ach, 23. 
Τὴν ὥρην ἐπαγινέειν Hdt. ii. ὦ, Συντάσσεσθαι σὴν τα χίσπην 86. ddov] 1. 8. 
14 (cf. i, 2.20). Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, καὶ περὶ πολέμιον συμβουλεύειν τήν γε towrny 
ἐσισχήσομοεν, ‘for the present,’ Mem. iii. 6, το. See § 390. 8. 


ᾧ M44. Remarks. «. This rule applies especially to the Acc. neut. 
of adjectives, both sing. and plur.; as, Td ἀρχαῖον, formerly, i. 1.6. Τὰ 
piv. τὰ δὲ, partly .., partly, iv. 1. 14, v. 6. 24. Μικρὸν ἐξέφυγε od μὴ 
κατασετρωθήνωι i. 3.2. Tuer, perhaps, vi. 1.20. Τὸ λοισόν, henceforth, 
ii. 2.5. El cwos μέγα ἦν τὸ σῶμα φύσει ἢ τροφῇ ἢ ἀμφότερα Pl. Gorg. 
524 Ὁ. Τοσοῦτον γὰρ πλήθει περιῆν βασιλεύς i. 8.185. Θυμοειδέσφεροι δὲ 
πολύ iv. 5. 86 (cf. § 419). See especially § 162. 


8. A strict analysis would refer the adverbial Acc. in part to the Ace. of 
effect (§ 432), in part to that of specification (§ 437), and in part to that of 
extent (ὃ 422. m1.). 


Ἂ F. Tue Vocative. 


§ 442. Rote XXV. The Compectative 
of a sentence is put in the Vocative (δὲ 329. N., 
340. a); as, 


Κλέαρχε καὶ Πρόξενε, . « οὐκ ἴστε ὅ σι αοιεῖτε, Clearchus and Proxenus, 
you know not what you do, i. δ. 16. "1 ϑαυμασιώτατε ἄνθρωσε, O most 


wonderful man, iii, 1. 27. 


ᾧ 443. πεμαπκβ. α. The sign of address, in Greek, as in other 
languages, is commonly J. 

β. The term of respectful address to a company of men is ἄνδρες, with 
which may be likewise connected a more specific appellation ; thus, 


Ὁρᾶτε μὲν, ὦ ἄνδρες, you see, gentlemen, iii. 2.4. "Ανδρες στρασιῶται, μὴ 
ϑαυμάζεφε, fellow-soldiers, do not wonder, i. 3.3. Ω ἄνδρες “Ἕλληνες ii. 3.18 
Ὧ ἄνδρες στρατηγοὶ καὶ λοχᾶγοί iii, 1. 84. 


ca, 2.] ADJECTIVE. — AGREEMENT. 305 


CHAPTER It. - 
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 


. 1 AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE. 


§ 444. Rute XXVI. An ApsecrivE agrees 
with its subject in gender, number, and case. 


The word adjective is here used in its largest sense (ὃ 73). Thus, Ilagd- 
δεισος μέγας ἀγρίων ϑηρίων πλήρης, a large park full of wild beasts, i. 2. 
7, Τὼ παῖδε &uQoriew, both the children, i. 1-1. Ai ᾿Ἰων, καὶ worsis 
. «δεδομένα, Ib. 6. Τόνδε τὸν σρόπον Ib. 9. Ἔχων ὁπλίτας χιλίους 
καὶ πελταστὰς Θρξκας ὀκτακοσίους . 2.9. Θεοὺς πάντας καὶ ra- 
gas vie 1. 31. 


Nores. a. An adjective either assists in describing the thing which is 
spoken of, or forms a part of that which is said of it. In the former case, 
the adjective is said to be used as an epithet (txiderov, from ἐσεσίθημοι, to add) ; 
in the latter, as an attribute (attribittus, ascribed). In the sentence, “A good 
man is merciful,” “ good” is an epithet, and “ merciful” an attribute. The 
agreement of the attribute with its subject is far less strict than that of the 
epithet ; while the agreement of the pronoun (§ 495) is still less strict than 
that of the attribute. 


β. An exception to this rule, which is merely apparent, consists in the use 
of the masculine form for the feminine in adjectives of three terminations 
(§ 1998. v4) δ). 


§ 445. Remarks. 1. Infinitives, clauses used substan- 
tively, and words or phrases spoken of as such, are regarded 
as neuter; thus, 


Ednéss sin ἡγεμόνα αἰτεῖν, it would be foolish to ask a guide,i.3.16. Δῇ 
λον ἦν ὅτι ἐγγύς που βασιλεὺς ἣν Ui. 3.6. Οὐ τὸ ζῇν περὶ σλείσσου ποι ἢ- 
wiov, ἀλλὰ τὸ εὖ ζῆν Pl. Crito, 48 Ὁ. ‘Yusis, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι xd δ᾽ 
ὝΜΕΙΣ ὅταν εἴπω, τὴν πόλιν λέγω, You, men of Athens; and when I say rou, 
_ I mean the state, Dem. 255.4. Τὸ MH καὶ “δ OT προτιθέμενα, the nor 

pnd the no prefixed, Pl. Soph: 257 b. Χρῆσθαι.. τῷ καθ᾽ ais, to use the 
phrase καθ᾽ αὑτό Ib. 252 ο. 


Nore. Grammarians often speak of a word, with an ellipsis of the part of 
speech to which it belongs ; as, "Evri ὁ [sc. σύνδεσμος) ἀλλά ἀντὶ τοῦ δέ, 
the [conjunction] ἀλλά is instead of δέ Soph. Cid. C. 237, Schol. Asi/ares ἡ 
[se. πσρόδεσις] διά, [the preposition] διά is wanting, Ib. 1291, Schol. 


§ 446. 2. In compounp construction, both syllepsis 
and zeugma are frequent (ὃ 329. N.). (a.) In syllepsis, when 
persons of both sexes are spoken of, the adjective is masculine ; 
when things are spoken of, it is commonly neuter ; as, 

26 * 


306 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK IIL 


Ὡς δὲ εἶδε πατέρα σε καὶ unriga καὶ ἀδελφοὺς καὶ τὴν tavrod γυναῖκα ale 
χμαλώτους γεγενημένους Cyr. iii, 1. 6. Adbes σε καὶ πλίνθοι καὶ ξύλα καὶ 
κέραμος ἀτάκτως μὲν ἐῤῥιμμένα οὐδὲν χρήσιμά ἐστιν Mem, ili. 2. 7. 


(8.) In zeugma, the adjective sometimes agrees with the most 
prominent substantive, sometimes with the nearest ; as, 


Ἑπτὰ ὀξολοὺς καὶ ἡμιοξόλιον "Arcixods, seven Attic oboli and a half, i. 5. 6. 
Πυθόμενος .. τὸν Σαρομξιχίδην καὶ τὰς ναῦς ἀπεληλυθότα Th. viii. 63. . “ἢ 
δας ἢ γυναῖκας συναρμοξζούσας Cyr. vii. 5.60. Μησρός σε καὶ τοῦ σοῦ παῷξόρ 
Soph. Gid. T. 417. δ: 


§ 447. 8. Extrsis. The subject of the adjective is 
often omitted, especially if it is a familiar word. The words 
most frequently omitted are, 


a. MASCULINE, ἀνήρ or avbywxros, man, χρόνος, teme; as, Συντάξαι δὲ ἕκα- 
orev τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ (sc. ἄνδρας}, and that each one should arrange his own [men], 
i. 2.15. Tay παρὰ βασιλέως i. 1.5. Τοὺς φεύγοντας, the exiles, Ib. 7. Τοὺς 
κακούργους καὶ ἀδίκους (Sc. ἀνθρώπους] 1.9.13. ᾿Ενταῦθα ἔμειναν ἡμέρας resis 
ἐν ᾧ [sc. χρόνῳ] Κῦρος ἀπέκτεινεν i. 2. 2. Ἂν φούτῳ καὶ "βασιλεὺς δῆλος ἣν ie 
10. 6 (οἴ, ᾿Εν σούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ iv. 2. 17). 


β. FEMININE, γυνή, woman, γῆ or χώρα, land, ὅδός, way, ἡμέρα, day, χείρ, 
hand, γνώμη, opinion, μοῖρα, portion, ὥρα, season; as, Ἢ Κίλισσα [sc. γυνή 
i. 2.12. Tlogevecbas ὡς διὰ φιλίας ti. 3. 27 (ef. Ὅσσις διὰ φιλίας ris χώραν 
ἀσάξε, i. 5. 14). Εἰς σὴν φιλίαν ἐλθεῖν vi. 6. 38 (cf. Eis φιλίαν γῆν ἀφίκοιντο 
v. 1.1. See also$ 421. β). Τὴν λοιπὴν [sc. ὁδὸν) σορευσόμεθα iii. 4. 46. 
Καὶ αὐτοὶ μὲν ἂν ἐπορεύθησαν ἣ οἱ ἄλλοι, τὰ δὲ ὑποζύγια οὐκ Hy ἄλλῃ ἢ ταύτῃ 
ἐκξῆνα, ἵν. 2.10. ‘livres μακράν iii, 4.17. Τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ [se. ἡμέρᾳ οὐκ — 
ἰφάνησαν οἱ πολέρειοι, οὐδὲ τῇ πρίση, TH δὲ σετάρτη ili. 4. 57 (δ 420). Ἔν δὲ 
τῇ δεξιᾷ [30. χειρῇ ν. 4.12. "Ev δεξιῷ, on the right,i. 5.1. "Ev ἀριστερᾷ Vie 
1.14. "Ex τῆς νικώσης (sc. γνώμης) trearroy waévra, ‘according’to the vote 
of the majority,’ vi. 1. 18. "Awd τῆς ἴσης [sc. μοίρας], on equal terms, Th. i. 
15. ᾿Εσὶ σῇ ἴσῃ καὶ ὁμοίᾳ Id. i. 27. Ἢ πεπρωμένη, destiny, Eur. Hee. 43. 
᾿Απὸ πρώτης [sc. ὥρας}, from the first, ΤῊ. i. 77. 


y- NEUTER, πρᾶγμα or χρῆμα, affair, thing, μέρος, part, wajbos, collection, 
body, στράτευμα, military force, κέρας, wing of an army, χωρίον, place, ground; 
as, Τὰ μὲν δὴ Κύρου [sc. πράγματα) - ., τὰ ἡμέτερα i. 3. 9 (cf. Τὰ ᾿Οδρυσῶν 
«ράγματα Vii. 2.32). Eis σὲ ἴδιον [86. χρῆμα] ἷ. 3. 58. Τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, the 
necessaries of life,i. 5.10. Τῷ ὄντι, really, ν. 4.90, Ξενοφῶντος Ἔλλη- 
νικά, Xenophon’s Affairs of Greece, or Greek History. ᾿Ἐξεκύμαινέ τι [56. 
μέρος] τῆς φάλαγγος i. 8.18. Τὰ δεξιὰ σοῦ xigaros Ib. 4. Tod. . ξενικοῦ 
)sc. πλήθους or στρατεύματος, the mercenary force [= σῶν ξίνων, the merce- 
waries|,i. 2.1. Τοῦ Ἑλληνικοῦ [== τῶν Ἑλλήνων] i. 4. 18 (cf i. 2.1). Te 
ξυνεσσηκός (cf. Τοῖς ξυνεστῶσι) Th. viii. 66. Τὸ ϑῆλυ γάρ was μᾶλλον οἰκαρὸν 
ἐρσένων Eur. Herc. 536. To κοινὸν σὸ ἡμέσερον ν. 7.17. Tod δὲ εὐώνυμον i. 2, 
15 (cf. Τὸ εὐώνυμον κέρας i, 8. 4). "Ev σῷ ἡμαλῷ [se. χωρίῳ] ἵν. 2.16. “Awd 
τοῦ ὑψηλοῦ εἰς σὸ πρανὲς ἔξαλλον iii. 4. 25. See also § 379. a. 


Norges. (a.) In cases of familiar ellipsis, the adjective is commonly said 
to be used substantively. The substantive use becomes especially prominent in 
such expressions as, Τοῖς wiv ὑμετέροις δυσμενίσι, ‘your foes,’ H. Gr. v. 2. $3; 
Ὅ τ᾽ ἐκείνου τεκών, ‘his father,’ Eur. El. 325. (b.) The substantive omitted 
is sometimes contained or implied in another word ; as, ᾿Αμυγδάλινον ix φῶν 


mM 2. "SE OF NEUTER. | 307 


πικρῶν [sc. ἀμυγδάλων) iv. 4.13. Tewoysiv σὸν μὲν σολλήν [sc. γῆν] Ar. 
Feel. 592. Keaarodes δ᾽ "loxdorny με" τοῦτο [se. ὄνομα] γὰρ πατὴρ ἔθετο Eur. 
Pn. 12. (c.) In the phrase ἐν jusrtgov, in our palace, at our court (Hat. i. 35, 
vii. 8. 4), there is either a double ellipsis for the sake of dignity (ἐν ἡμετέρου 
οἴκου δώμασιν) ; or a blending of the two forms of expression, ἐν ἡμῶν οἴκῳ, 
and ἐν ἡμετέρῳ οἴκῳ. 


§ 448. 4. Many words which are commonly employed 
as substantives are properly adjectives, or may be used as 
such. Thus, 


"Ovsvens δὲ Πέρσης ἀνήρ, and Orontes, a Persian man, i. 6.1. ἾΩ, dvdees 
στραςσιῶσαι; « . ἀνδρῶν στρατηγῶν iii, 2.2. "Ανδρα νεανίαν Cyr. ii. 
2. 6. Neaviags λόγους Eur. Ale. 679. “EaAny σις ἀνήρ Cyr. vi. 8. 
11. Ἕλλην ἐς οἶκον Eur. Med. 1331. Zroagy γ᾽ “Ἕλληνα Id. Heracl. 130. 
Ἑλλάδος yas Soph. Phil. 256. Στρατιᾶς “Ἑλλάδος Eur. Rhes. 233. 
Τυναῖκα Τρῳάδα Id. Andr. 867. Τρῳάδος xboves Id. El. 1001. Σκύθην ἐς 
οἵμον Ausch. Prom. 3, Τύχη δὲ cwrne Id. Ag. 664, — These words, as sub- 
stantives, are commonly appellations of(persons or countries, ἀνήρ, γυνή, γῆ» 
&c., being understeod. 


§ 449. 5. Use or tue Neuter. The substantive use 
of the neuter adjective (ὃ 447. a) exhibits itself in a variety of 
forms. Thus, 


a.) A neuter adjective with the article often supplies the place of an ab- 
stract noun; as, Τὸ δ᾽ ἁσλοῦν καὶ τὸ ἀληθὲς ἐνόμιζε τὸ αὐτὸ τῷ ἠλιθίῳ εἶναι, 
but sincerity and truth he-thought to be the same with folly, ii. 6. 22, Σὺν τῷ 
δικαίῳ (cf. Μετὰ ἀδικίας) Ib. 18. Τὸ χαλεπὸν [= ἡ χαλεπόσης) rod πνεύμα- 
wos iv. 5.4. Οὐ γὰρ ἀριθμός ἔστιν ὁ ὁρίζων τὸ πολὺ καὶ τὸ ὀλίγον, ‘the much 
and the little,’ vii. 7.36. Τὸ πιστόν [= ἡ πίσεις) ΤῊ. i. 68. Διὰ 6 ἀναί- 
cbnrov ὑμῶν Ib. 69. ‘Yad γὰρ ποῦ περιχαροῦς τῆς νίκης Id. vii. 73. To γ᾽ 
ἐμὸν πρόθυμον Eur. Med. 178. Τῷ διαλλάσσοντι rns γνώμης, the (differing) 
difference of opinion, Th. iii. 10 (Thuc. is especially fond of this use of the 
Partic.). Ts μὲν δεδιὸς αὐτοῦ. ., cd δὲ ϑαρσοῦν, his [being afraid] fear. ., 
but his confidence, Id. i. 36. _ σῷ μὴ μελετῶντι Ib. 142. 


β.) Neuter adjectives (both with and without the article) are used with 
prepositions to form many adverbial phrases; as, "Axi τοῦ αὐπομάτου, of their 
own accord, i. 2.17. Ἔν γε σῷ φανερῷ, openly,i.3.21. Διὰ φσαχέων, rapid- 
ly, i. 5.9. Ἔξ ἴσου iii. 4.47."Ex σῶν δυνατῶν iv. 2.25. “Ard τοῦ πρώτου 
iv. 3.9. Κατὰ ταὐτά, in the same way, v. 4.22. Ἐπὶ δεξιά vi. 4.1. Διὰ 
σαντός, throughout, vii. 8. 11. 


§ 4990. 4.) Neuter adjectives are used in connection with words of 
different gender and number (commonly as appositives, ὃ 331); as, Φοβερώ- 
raroy δ᾽ ἐρημία, and solitude is the most terrible thing of all, ii. 5. 9 (cf. Boy. 
ξουλὴ ἱερὸν χρῆμα Pl. Theag. 122 b). Ti οὖν vratra ioriv; ii. 1.22. Τοὺς 
δὲ ποταμοὺς ἄστρον νομίζετε sivas iii. 2.22. Μυκῆναι μικρὸν ἦν, Mycene was a 
small affair, ΤῊ. 1.10. Ἐύδοια γὰρ αὐτοῖς .. πάντα ἦν, for Eubea was every 
thing to them, Ib. viii. 95. ᾿Ασϑθενέστερον γυνὴ ἀνδρός Pl. Rep. 455 6. "Ανδρες 
οἱ ἡμέτεροι «“λούσιοι εἰσὶν οὐδέν Ib. 556 ἃ. “Exrogu «τὸ μηδὲν sivas Eur. Rhes. 
818. gis τὸν οὐδὲν [sc. ὄντα] Ib. Ph. 598. Τὴν μηδὲν εἰς σὸ μηδέν Soph. 
El. 1166. Tatra δὲ ἀδύνατον ἐφάνη, ‘an impossibility,’ Pl. Parm. 160 a 


3 : 
308 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [Book πὶ 


Λύρα καλὴ ob καλόν; Id. Hipp. Maj. 288 ς.. "“Exoys φίλτατον πόλις Eur 
Med. 529. Οἴμα, γὰρ ὑμᾶς τῆσδε γῆς Κορινθίας τὰ πρῶτ᾽ ἔσεσθαι Ib. 916. 
Κρίνῶσα δ᾽ ἀστῶν τῶν ἐμῶν τὰ βέλτατα Asch. Eum. 487, — In these cases, 
an adjective agreeing in gender and number with the substantive would either 
express a different idea, or would express the same idea with less emphasis. 


3.) The neuters πλεῖον or πλέον, μεῖον OF ZAarrov, ὅσον, μηδέν, and «σὲ are ὁ 
sometimes used as indeclinable adjectives or substantives ; thus, Μυριάδας 
«λεῖον 7 δώδεκα, myriads more than twelve in number, v. 6. 9 (cf. Κρῆτες ra εἰ- 
ovs ἢ ἱξήκοντα iv. 8.27). Muicbds rrtov ἢ πριῶν μηνῶν i. 2.11. Οὔσης αὐ- 
wis ἐτῶν “«“λέον ἢ τετταράκοντα H. Gr. iii. 1. 14. “Αλυν, οὐ μεῖον δυοῖν στα- 
Siow, the Halys, not less than two stadia_in breadth, ν. 6.9. Doivks ϑεμελιώ- 
σας οὐ μεῖον 7 π'λεθριαίοις Cyr. vii. 5. 11. ᾿Αποκπείνουσι τῶν ἀνδρῶν οὐ μεῖον 
πεντακοσίους Vi. 4. 24. Doovgods παρ αὐτῷ οὐκ traarroy τετρακισχιλίων 
H. Gr. iv. 2. 5 (cf. Σφενδονῆσαι.. . οὐκ ἐλάστους τετρακοσίων Ib. 16). Ilea- 
τασταὶ ὅσον [== σοσοῦτοι ὅσοι) διωκόσιοι, targeteers as many as two hundred, 
vii. 2. 20 (cf. Ἡμεῖς ποσοῦσοι ὄντες ὅσους σὺ ὁρᾷς ii. 1.16). Albay. . ὅσον 
μνααίων Eq. 4. 4. Aibous .. ὅσον μνααίους καὶ «λεῖον καὶ μεῖον Mag. Eq. 1. 16 
(cf. “Ολοισρόχους ἁμαξιαίους καὶ μείζους καὶ ἐλάσπους iv. 2.3). “Οτ᾽ οὐδὲν ὧν 
φοῦ μηδὲν avrtorns ὑπέρ Soph. Aj. 1231. Γέρονφος . - ro μηδὲν ὄντος Eur. 
Heracl. 166. Κρείσσω τῶν rd μηδέν Id. Ττο. 4129. Δοκούντων εἶναι ri, appear- 
ing to be something, i. e. of some consequence, Pl. Gorg. 472 ἃ. (If μηδέν and 
7) did not here remain without change, they would be confounded with the 
masc., and the expressions would lose their peculiar force.) 


Nores. (a) So, with thegplur. form instead of the sing., Παραμένει ἡμέ- 
ρας πλείω ἢ τρεῖς Pl. Menex.335b. (6) In some of these cases, the neut. 
adjective appears to be used like an adverb. See ὃ 529. β. 


ᾧ 4 1. s.) A neuter adjective used substantively, or as an attribute 
of an infinitive or clause of a sentence, is often plur, instead of sing. (§ 336); 
as, Εἰ rodro σὸ ὀφειλόμενον ἀποδοθείη, ἢ εἰ TaUTa Tt ὀφείλοιντο, if this which 
is due should be paid, or if both this should be due, vii. 7. 34. Οὐ «τοῦτο 
λέξων ἔρχομαι... εἰ γὰρ raira λέγοιμι Ages. 2.7. “Orav μέν es ἀγαθὸν 
ἔχωσι, παρακαλοῦσί με ἐπὶ ταῦτα Symp. 4. 50. Σὲ μὲν rocaira χρὴ 
ποιεῖν, κλαίων ἐλεινῶς Ar. Thesm. 1062. *Ag’ οὖχ ὕξρις τάδε; Soph. Gd. © 
883. ᾿Ασόλλων τάδ᾽ fv. ὁ κακὰ κακὰ σελῶν, ‘it was Apollo,’ Id. Ed. T 
1329. Οὐκ Ἴωνες σάδε εἰσίν, there are here no“onians, Th. vi. 77. ᾿Αδύνα. 
ea ἦν ἐπιχειρεῖν 1d, i. 125. Asdoymiv’, ὡς ἔοικε, τήνδε κατθανεῖν Soph. 
Ant. 576. “Ος ob wagadortia τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐστίν Th. i. 86. 


Nore. This use of the Plur. for the Sing. appears to have arisen from 
the want of a noun, or definite object of sense, to give strict unity to the con- 
ception. It is very frequent in demonstrative pronouns, and in verbals in - σός 
and -rio;. 


§ 432. 6. An adjective often takes a substantive in the 
Genitive partitive, instead of agreeing with it. In this con- 
struction, the adjective is either in the same gender with the 


substantive, or in the neuter (commonly the neut. sing.). 
Thus, 


Madi σὰ σπουδαῖα τῶν πραγμάτων [for redyuara], μηδὲ rods εὖ φρονοῦντας 
viv ἀνθρῴπων [for ἀνθρώσους], neither virtuous actions [the virtuous of actions], 
wor wise men [the wise of men] Isocr. 24d. Aapagirnrig τι [for λαμσρό.. 


cH. 3.] SYNESIS. 


ens vis], some distinction [something of distinction] ΠΣ 55. Ὁ ᾿ 
σ΄ εἶδος [for ἀξδρὰν παρηΐδα, soft cheek [softnesses Of eheck], Eur. Ph. 1486, 
"Ασημα .. Bons Soph. Ant. 1209. χω 


Nore. In this way, greater prominence and distinctness of expression, 
and sometimes a species of independence or abstractness (ὃ 449. #), are given 
to the adjective. Upon the whole subject, see §§ 358 -- 362. 


ὁ 453. 7. Synesis. The adjective often agrees in gen- 
der and number with the idea of the speaker, instead of thé 
subject expressed ; particularly with, 


a. Cottecttve Nouns, and words used collectively; as, Ἢ δὲ Bovan.., 
six ἀγνοοῦντες, and the senate, not ignorant, H. Gr. ii. 3.55. Keauyn ἦν τοῦ 
Ἑλληνικοῦ crearsiuares [= στρατιωτῶν] διακελενοβιένων iii. 4.45. Τὴν πόλιν 
[πολίτας] .. ὄντας ΤῊ. iii. 79. Δέσθος .. ἀπίστη ἀπ᾿ ᾿Αθηναίων, θουλη- 
θέντες ἴὉ.2. Nady ἐκ σῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν ἥκουσαν ἐπί τε ᾿Αλκιξιάδην, ὡς κελεύσον- 
ras Id. vi. 53. Οὐδ᾽ ὄρνις εὐσήμους ἀποῤῥοιθδδεῖ Bods, ἀνδροφθόρου βεξρῶςες 
αἵματος λίπος Soph. Ant. 1021. 


B. Words in the plural used for the singular (chiefly ἡμεῖς for ἐγώ) ; as, 
Ἱκετσεύομεν . . προσπίτνων, we [=I] beseech you, falling down, Eur. Here. 
1206. Ἥλιον μαρτυρόμεσθα δρῶσ᾽ ἃ δρᾷν οὐ βούλομαι Ib. 858. Διωκόμεσθα 
« - κρατηθεῖσα Id. lon, 1250. 


y. Nouns of which the gender does not follow the sex (ὃ 75); as, Ὦ 
φίλτατ᾽, ὦ περισσὰ «ιμηθεὶς τέκνον, O dearest, O most fondly cherished son, 
Eur. Tro. 735. 0d’ ἔρνος. xarbavavere Id. Bac. 1307. Τέκεα Sapiv’ ἐσα- 
ναξοῶντες Ar. Plut. 29%. Κολλικοφάγε Bowridiov Ar. Ach. 872. Τὰ rian 
καταξάντας Th. iv. 15. 


3. Words for which others might have been used; as, Ἢ νόσος [= νόση- 
μα] πρῶτον ἤρξατο γενέσθαι τοῖς "Abnvalas, λεγόμενον Th. ii. 47 (cf. To μὲν 
οὖν νόσημα Ib. 51; yet 568 ὃ 450. γ) Πᾶσα δὲ γέννα [-ΞΞ λαός} Φρυγῶν 
.«-δώσων Eur. Tro. 531. 


s. Words governing a Genitive, to which, as the more important word, the 
adjective conforms in gender and number ; as, Diarar’ Αἰγίσθου Bia, dearest 
majesty of Aegisthus, Asch. Cho. 893. Τροίαν ἑλόντες δήποτ᾽ ᾿Αργείων στόλος 
Id. Ag. 577 (cf. a). Τὸ δὲ τῶν πρεσθυτέρων .. ϑεωροῦντες Pl. Leg. 657 ἅ. 
Τὰ τῶν διακόνων .. ποιούμενοι Soph. Phil. 497. ᾿Ακούω φθόγγον ὀρνίθων, κακῷ 
κλάζοντα; οἴστρῳ Id. Ant. 1001.—JIn these expressions, the Gen. and the 
word which governs it usually form simply a periphrasis, and are treated ac- 
cordingly. 


§ 454. 8. An adjective sometimes agrees with a Geni- . 
tive implied in another adjective (commonly a possessive) ; as, 


Τὸ σὸν [= cov] μόνης δώρημα, the gift of you alone, Soph. Tr. 775. Τοῖς 
ἡμεσέροις [= ἡμῶν] αὐτῶν φίλοις, our own friends (§ 505. 3), vii. 1. 29. 
Ta ὑμέσερ᾽ αὐτῶν ἀνηλίσκετε Dem. 25.5. Opivov.. ἐμὸν τὸν αὐτῆς 
Asch, ἂρ. 1899, Τὸν ἐμὸν μὲν αὐτοῦ τοῦ ταλαιπώρου. . βίον Ar. Plut. 
895. Τάἀάμὰ δυστήνου κακά Soph. Ed. C. 344. Σὴν ἀνδρίαν καὶ μεγαλο- 
φροσύνην ἀναξαίνονσος Pl. Conv. 194 ἃ. Cf. §§ 332. 4, 3588. a. — In like 
manner, as the Dat. may be used for the Gen. (ὃ 412), ᾿Εμοῖσιν [= ἐμοὶ] 
ἔσσοις ὁμίχλα weorgts . . εἰσιδούσᾳ Asch. Pr. 144, : 


810 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. _ [Book m1 


§ 455. 9. Arrracrion. An adjective is sometimes at- 
tracted by a substantive either, («.) governing, or (f.) in ap- 
position with, its real subject ; as, 


a. Τοὐμὸν wiua.. πατρός, the blood of my father, Soph. Gd. T. 1400 
Οὑμὸς .. παῖς παιδός Eur. Andr. 584. Ξένων «ρὸς ἄλλην ἑστίαν πορεύσομαι 
Id. Ale. 538. Μέλανα στολμὸν πέπλων Ib. 215. Νεῖκος ἀνδρῶν ξύναιμο 
Soph. Ant. 7935. ΙΠολιᾷς πόντου ϑινός Id. Ph. 1123. Ἢ τέκνων δῆτ᾽ ὄψις 
“. βλαστοῦσα Id. Ed. T. 1375.— In most of these cases, the Gen. with the 
word which governs it may be regarded as forming a complex idea, which the 
adjective modifies. This construction is chiefly poetic. 


B. Οἱ γὰρ ὀφθαλμοὶ, κάλλισσον ὃν [for “ovres], for the eyes, being the most 
beautiful of objects (ὃ 450), Pl. Rep. 420 ¢. Τοὺς γὰρ μέγιστα ἐξημαρτηκό- 
Tas, ἀνιάτους δὲ. ὄντας, μεγίστην δὲ οὖσαν [for ὄντας) βλάξην πόλεως, ἀπαλ- 
λάττειν εἴωθεν Pl. Leg. 7356. Πάντα ἃ δὴ ὡς ἰδέας αὐτὰς οὔσας [ἴον αὐτὰ 
ὄντα Ϊ ὑπολαμβάνομεν Pl. Parm. 158 ἃ. “Hass .. πάντων λαμαρότατος, the sun, 
the most splendid [86. thing] of all things, Mem. iv. 7. 8 (this is the common 
construction when the superlative is followed by a Gen. partitive of different 
gender from the subject of the sentence). 


Nore. An adjective is sometimes, in the poets, attracted bya Voc. ; as, 
"Orbis κῶρε γένοιο {for ὄλξιος, κῶρε, γ.}, may you be happy, boy, Theoe. 17. 66. 
"Ld δύστηνε σὺ, δύσπσηνε [for -o5] . « φανείς Soph. Ph. 759. Cf. Sie venias ho- 
dierne Tibull. i. 7. 58. 


§ 456. 10. An adjective sometimes agrees with a sub- 
stantive instead of governing it in the Gen. partitive (δὴ 358 -- 
360) ; as, 


Πρρὶ μέσας νύκτας, about midnight [the middle of the night], i. 7. 1 (cf. 
"Ey μέσῳ νυκτῶν Cyr. v. 3. 52). Διὰ μέσης δὲ τῆς πόλεως, and through the 
midst of the city, i. 2.23. Τὸ ἄλλο σαράτευμω, the rest of the army, Ib. 25, © 
Ἔν δ᾽ ἄκροισι βὰς ποσί, and going on [the extremities of the feet] tiptoe, Eur. 
Ion, 1166. 


§ 457. 11. Adjectives are often used for adverbs and 
adjuncts, and, by the poets, even for appositives, and dependent 
clauses i,t0 express, 


α. Tome; as, ᾿Αφικνοῦνσαι .««φριφαῖοι [= τῇ πρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ], they arrive on 
the third day, v. 3. 2 (cf. iii. 4. 37, and § 420). Σκοταῖο, wxeocivees ii. 2, 
17. Προσέρα Κύρου... ἀφίκετο i. 2.25. Tsasuray ἐχαλέπαινεν, at last 
he became angry, iv. 5. 16. 


B. PLACE; as, Σκηνοῦμοεεν daaideros, we encamp in the open air, v. 5. 21 
(cf. ‘Yas τῇς αἰδρίας iv. 4.14). Δεξιὸν φθεγγόμενον vi. 1. 23. ‘EZsusod” 
ἐφίσσιοι Soph. Gid. T. 32. Θαλάσσιον ἰκρίψατι Ib. 1411. Φοιτᾷς 3° 
ὑπερπόντιος Id. Ant. 785. Θυραῖον οἰχνεῖν Id. El. 313. Μετακύμιος 
ἄτας, amid the waves of woe, Eur. Ale. 91 (§ 383. a). Πολλὰ δ᾽ ὁρῶ ταῦτα 
[= ταύτῃ or τῇδε, § 421. β] σπρόθατα, and I see here many sheep, iii. 5. 9, 
Ἤρδμην ὅσου αὐτὸς εἴη. Οὗσος, ἔφη, ὄπισθεν προσέρχεται, ‘here he comes,’ 
Pl. Rep. 827 Ὁ. ‘Os ἀνὴρ ὅδε, as the man is here, Soph. Cid. C. 32. Πο- 
erdovras γὰρ οἵδε δή cies Ib. 111, ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἥδ᾽ ὁπάδῶν ἐκ δόμων σις ἔρχεται 
Eur. Ale. 137. ὍΣδ᾽ siz’ ᾿Ορέσσηρ Id. Or, 380. Ἶρος ἐκεῖνος . . hooray 
‘sits there,’ σ. 239. 


cH. 2.] ATTRACTION. — ANACOLUTHON. 311 


y- MANNER; as, Συνεδάλλοντο... ai λλησαονσιακαὶ πόλεις ἑκοῦσαι, the 
Hellespontic cities contributed willingly, i. 1.9. Ὁ μὲν ἑκὼν σεινῶν (cf. Ὁ μὲν 
ἑκουσίως ταλαιπωρῶν) Mem. ii. 1.18. Of δὲ σερατιῶται ἐδέξαντο ἡδέως καὶ 
εὐθὺς εἵποντο ἄσμενοι Vii. 2,9. ΚΚατήνεσεν τάδ᾽ ὅρκιος δράσειν Soph. Cid. 
C. 1637. ᾿Ανύσας retxs, run with all speed, Ar. Plut. 229, Τοὺς νεκροὺς 
ὑποσπόνδους ἀπεδίδοσαν H. Gr. ii. 4. 19. ; 


3. Erreer; as, Εἰὔφημον [= dere εὔφημοον tlvai:]. . κοίμησον στόμα, hush 
your mouth to silence {so that it should be silent], Asch. Ag. 1247. Tay σῶν 
ἀδίρκτων ὀμμάτων τητώμενος, [deprived of your sightless eyes] rendered 
sightless by the loss of your eyes, Soph. CEd. C. 1200, Σὺ καὶ δικαίων ἀδί- 
nous φρένας ragaoras Id. Ant. 791. Μείζον᾽ ἐκτενῶ λόγον Id. Tr. 679. 
Xiga «οξήρη .. δαλίσας Eur. Alc. 35. 


ες, Vartous RELATIONS AND CIRCUMSTANCES; as, Ἄλλοι δὲ ἦσαν ἕξα- 
κισχίλιοι ἱππεῖς, ‘besides, 1. 7.11. Οὐ γὰρ ἦν χόρτος οὐδὲ ἄλλο οὐδὲν δέν- 
δρον '. 5. δ. Ἐύλιναι πεποιημέναι, made of wood, v. 2.5. ᾿Ανδροφϑθόρου 
= ἀνδρὸς φθαρέντος] . . αἵμωτος, homicidal blood, Soph. Ant. 1029, Margo. 
κτόνον αἷμα, the blood of a mother slain, Eur. Or. 833. Πόλύδακρυν 
[= πολλῶν δακρύων] ἁδονάν Id. El. 126. Μελαμπέπλους crormovs Id. 
Ale. 819. "Agsorixese . - ἀγών Soph. Aj. 935. ὈὈξύχειρι [= ὀξεῖ 
χειρῶν] σὺν κτύπῳ Asch. Cho. 23. Παρ μῆτόρ [= πάντων μῆτερ) τε γῆ 
Id. Pr. 9θ0ὺ» Todds “αμμήπωρ [τ “ἄντως Or κατὰ πάντα μήτηρ] νεκροῦ 
᾿ς Soph. Ant.1282. Ἕλενος ἀριστόμαντις (= ἄριστος μάντις] Id. Ph. 1338. 


§ 48. Nores. 1. In cases like the above, the adjective form ap- 
pears to be assumed through the attraction of the substantive, or in other words, 
for the sake of binding together more closely the different parts of the sen- 
tence, and giving greater unity to the expression. It will be observed that, 
in some of the examples, the adjective simply forms an emphatic pleonasm. 


2. In some instances, a Genitive with its adjective appear to have been chang- 
ed into two adjectives agreeing with the governing substantive; as, Llévriy π᾿ 
Αἰγαίων [for πόντου ¢ Αἰγαίου) ἐπ᾿ ἀκτὰν ἀλίμενον, and upon the harbourless 
coast of the Afgéan Sea, Eur. Ale. 595. TUloramia νερτέρᾳ τε [for rorapod 
veortoov] κώπᾳ, with the oar of the nether stream, Ib. 459. 


3. Derivative and compound adjectives are formed in Greek with great free- 
dom, and the latter, especially among the poets, often appear to have taken 
the place of a simple adjective or noun, by a species of emphatic or graphic 
pleonasm.; as, Μονάμπυκας [= μόνου:)] πώλους, singly-bridled [= single] 
horses, Eur. Alc. 428% ᾿Αγέλαις βουνόμοις [== βοῶν) Soph. Cid. T. 26. — 
The poets often repeat a noun in composition with ἀ- privative or a similar 
word, to express emphatically the idea of negation or of evil; as, Μήτηρ ἀμή- 
σωρ, our [unmotherly mother] mother, yet no mother, Soph. El. 1154. Γάμον 
ἄγαμον Eur. Hel. 690 (cf. Innuptis . . nuptiis Cic. de Or. iii. 58). "OQ σάτερ 
αἰνόπατερ Ausch. Cho. 315. 


§ 459. 12. Anacoturnon. An adjective sometimes 
differs in case from its subject, through a change of construc- 
tion (cf. ὃ 333. 7) ; as, 


ΞΞενίᾳ .. ἥκειν παραγγέλλει λαξόνσαι ποὺς ἄνδρας, he commands Xenias to 
-come, taking his men (εἴ. Παραγγέλλει πῷ τε Κλεάρχῳ λαξόναι ἥκειν), i. 2. 1. 
Διαξαινόντων μέντο; 6 Τλοῦς αὐτοῖς ἐσεφάνη ii. 4.24. ᾿Αποξλέψας .. ἔδο 
μοι, Pl. Leg. 686 6. See the syntax of *he Infinitive and Participle. 


312 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. | Book 1. 


Nore. The use of other cases with the Genitive partitive (as in $§ 364 
$66) may be referred to simple ellipsis. 


Il. Use or tHe DEGREES. 
[ The following observations apply both to ADJECTIVES and ADVERBS.] 


§ 460. I. Words are compared not only by inflection 
(δῷ 155 - 163), but also by the use of adverbs denoting more 
and most ; as, 


Μᾶλλον φίλον, more agreeable, Soph. Ph. 886. ‘Teds μάλιστα φίλους, the 
most friendly, vii. 8.11. "QL «λεῖστα μῶροι Soph. ἘΠ. 1326. 


Norrs. (a) The two methods are sometimes united for emphasis or 
perspicuity (cf. §§ 161. 1, 462) ; as, Θανὼν δ᾽ dv sin piirrov εὐτυχέστερος ἢ 
ζῶν, and dying he would be happier, far happier than living, Eur. Hec. 377. 
Tis ἄλλος μᾶλλον ἐνδικώσερος ; sch. Sept. 673. Πολὺ οὖν κρεῖσσον .. μᾶλ- 
λον ἤ iv. 6. 11 (ef. Ib. 12). Μάλιστα δεινότατος Th. vii. 42. Τὴν σλεῖστον 
ἡδίστην ϑεῶν Κύσριν Eur. Ale. 790. "QL μέγισεον ἐχϑίστη γύναι, Id. Med. 1323. 
(6) So the Comp. and Sup. are united, Ὦ πασᾶν κείνα πλέον auton ἐλθοῦσ᾽ 
ixdiora δή μοι Soph. El. 201. 

§ 461. Il. The comparative is commonly construed 
with the particle 7, than, or with the Genitive of distinction ; 
and the SUPERLATIVE with the Genitive partitive. Thus, 


Φιλοῦσα αὐτὸν μᾶλλον ἢ . «᾿Αρταξέρξην, loving him more than Artaxerxes, 
1.1.4, See §§ 351, 362.3, 868. y. 


Remarks. 1. The Comp. is sometimes construed with other particles, 
which commonly strengthen the expression (cf. 460. «) ; as, Κάλλτον . . wed 
Tov φεύγειν, more honorable [in preference to fleeing] than to flee, Pl. Phedo, 
99a. ᾿Αντὶ cod “πλέον, more [instead of you] than you, Soph. Tr. 577. 
Iluxvirtoa: παρὰ τὰ . . μνημονενόμενα, more frequent [beyond] than the 
recollections, Th. i. 23. Πρὸς ἅπαντας .. πλείω, more [in comparison with 
all] than all, Id. vii. 58. [Liga rod δέοντος σοφώτεροι Pl. Gorg. 487 ἃ, 
"Ἔστιν ὁ πόλεμος οὐχ ὅσλων τὸ σ““λέον, ἀλλὰ δαπάνης, [war is not of arms the 
more, but_of expenditure] war does not require arms more than money, Id. i. 83 
(§ 387). “Taide’ ἐσσὶ κρείσσω πλὴν ba ᾿Αργείοις πεσεῖν, ‘better [but not to 
fall] than to fall,’ Eur. Heracl. 231. ᾿Ασοθνήσκουσι πρότερον π'ρὶν δῆλοι 
γίγνεσθαι, οἷοι ἦσαν Cyr. v. 2. 9 (cf. Πρόσερον ἢ οἱ φίλο, π'αρῆσαν Ib. vii. 5. 41). 
Οὐ πρότερον ἐπαύσαντο, ἕως .. κατίστησαν Lys. 174.6. "Ext γαστέρι κύντε- 
gov ἡ. 216. --- In the most of these examples, two forms of construction ap- 
pear to have been united. 


2. The construction of the Gen. with the Comp. is often elliptical; as, 
"Exrs) πλείων χρόνος, ὃν δεῖ μ᾽ ἀρίσκειν τοῖς κάτω, τῶν ἐνθάδε, since the time is 
greater, which I must pleuse those below, than those here [than that during which 
I must please those here], Soph. Ant. 74. See ὃ 391. y. 


8. By a mixture of the two methods of construction which belong to the 
Comp.,— (a) When a numeral, or other word of quantity, follows rAsioy, 
πλείω, trAurroy, or μεῖον, 4 is sometimes omitted, though the Gen. is not em- 
ployed; 88, ᾿Ασποκτείνουσι τῶν ἀνδρῶν οὐ μεῖον πεντακοσίους, ‘not less than 500, 
vi. 4.24, See ὃ 450. 3, and cf. Non amplius erant quingenti, Ces. viii. 10.— 


oH. 2. | USE OF THE DEGREES. 313 


(8) Vo the Gen. governed by the Comp., a specification is sometimes annexed 
with #7; as, Ti σοῦδ᾽ ἄν εὕρημ᾽ εὗρον εὐτυχέστερον, ἢ παῖδα γῆμαι βασιλέως 5 
Eur. Med. 553. Τὸν νοῦν τ᾽ ἀμείνω τῶν φρενῶν, ἢ νῦν φέρει Soph. Ant. 1090. 
OS vi ἄν μᾶλλον σαουδάσειξ cis. .,), ἢ τοῦτο; Pl. Gorg. 500 c. See also 
§ 464. N. —(c) The Gen. sometimes’ follows #, instead of the appropriate 
case ; as, Οὐ προΐει, «λέον τῆς ἡμέρας, ἢ δέκα ἢ δώδεκα σταδίων Η. Gr. iv. 6. 5 
(see ὃ 439). 


§ 462. III. The positive is sometimes added to the su- 
perlative for the sake of emphasis ; as, 


Ὦ κακῶν κάκιστε, O vilest of the vile, i a Cid. T. 884. ᾿Αγαϑῶν ἱππέων 
τράτισσος ὧν ἱππεύς Cyr. i. 8. 15. 


‘EPM. Ὦ βδελυρὲ. καὶ σολμηρὰ κἀναίσχυντε σὺ, 
Καὶ μιαρὲ, καὶ dead od od ίωρε; καὶ μιαρώτατε, 
Πῶς δεῦρ᾽ ἀνῆλθες, ὦ μιαρῶν μιαρώτατες 
Ti σοί ποτ᾿ toe’ ὄνομ᾽ ; οὐκ ἐρεῖς TP. Μιαρώτασος. Ar: Pax, 182. 


Notes. «a. By doubling the Pos. or the Sup., we obtain similar forms of 
expression, the one less and the other even more emphatic than the above; as, 
"Αῤῥητ᾽ appirwy, horrible of the horrible, i. e. most horrible, Soph. Cid. T. 465. 
Δειλαία δειλαίων Id. El. 849 (ἢ 362. ζ). "Eoxar’ ἐσχάτων κακά, the ae 
violent of the most violent reproaches, Id. Ph. 65 (cf. §§ 161. 1, 460. a). 
δὴ δοκεῖ ἐν σοῖς μεγίστοις μέγισαον εἶναι Pl. Crat. 427 e. 


6. From the doubling of the Sup., as in the last example, appears to have 
arisen the phrase ἐν σοῖς, which is used with the Sup. to increase its force, and, 
as an adverbial expression, without change of gender ; thus, "Ey rois (sc. σρώ- 
ros] πρῶτοι, first [among the first] of all, Th. i. 6. "Ev σοῖς πρώφη Id. iii 
81. Ἔν τοῖς wasioras δὴ νῆες Ib. 17. Ἔν σοῖς χαλεαώτατα διῆγον Id. vie 
71. ‘Ey τοῖς μάλιστα, most of all, Pl. Crito, 52 ἃ. 


y- The numeral εἷς is sometimes used with the Sup., to render the idea of 
individuality prominent ; as, Δῶρα δὲ π“λεῖσσα .., εἷς ye ὧν ἀνὴρ, ἐλάμξανε, he 
received the most presents, [at least being one man] for a single individual, i. ¢. 
more than any one man beside,i. 9.22. Llarcioru sis ἀνὴρ .. δυνάμενος ὠφε- 
asiv Th. viii. 68. 


3. The Greeks are fond of expressing the Sup. negatively; as, Οὐχ ἥκισσα 
[= udawra], not the least, especially, Mem. i. 2. 23. ᾿Ανδρῶν οὐ τῶν ἀδυνα- 
φσωτάτων Th. i. 5. Μέγισσον δὲ καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα Id. vii. 44. 


§ 46 8. IV. Certain special forms of comparison deserve 
Notice ; e. g. 


1.) The Comp., with a Gen. expressing hope, duty, power of description, &e. ; 
as, MsiZov ἐλπίδος, greater than could have been hoped, above hope, Aisch. Ag. 
266. Μᾶλλον φτοῦ δέοντος, more than is proper, too much, Mem. iv. 3.8. Kesie 
gov λόγου, beyond description, Th. ii. 50. 


2.) The Comp. followed by 4 κατά, or sometimes 4 πρός 88, Μείζω, ἢ 
κατὰ δάκρνα. [se. ἐσφιν], [greater than is in accordance with tears] too great for 
tears, Th. vii. 75. Βελτίονος ἢ κατ᾿ ἄνθρωπον Mem. iv. 4.24. Meifw.. ἤ 
κατ᾽ ἐμὲ καὶ σὲ ἐξευρεῖν, too great for me and you to discover, Pl. Crat. 392 b. 
᾿Ενδεεστέρως ++ % πρὸς τὴν ἐξουσίαν Th. iv. 39. Cf. Prelium atrocius, quam 
pro numero pele Liv. 21..29. 

27 


814 τς, ΒΥΝΤΑΧ OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK 111 


8.) The Comp. followed by ἢ ὥσσε (or ὡς) and the Infinitive; as, Beaydrs- 
ex ἠκόντιζον ἢ ὡς ἐξικνεῖσθαι, they shot [a shorter distance than they must in 
order to reach] too short a distance to reach, iii. 3.7. Μεῖζον ἢ ὥστε φέρειν 
δύνασθαι κακόν Mem. iii. δ. 17. — We likewise find the Infin. without ders or 
ὡς, and also the Pos. for the Comp. ; as, Τὸ γὰρ νόσημα μεῖζον ἢ φέρειν, for the 
malady is too great to bear, Soph. id. T. 1293. Τασεινὴ ὑμῶν ἡ διάνοια ἐγκαρ- 
φερεῖν, your mind is too weak to persevere, Th. ii. 61. ψυχρὸν, ἔφη, dors λού- 
cacbas icriy Mem. iii. 13, 3. 


§ 464. 4.) The Comp. and Sup. (for the most part joined with airés) 
followed by a reflexive pronoun, to denote the comparison of an object with 
itself; the Comp. representing it as above that which it has been or would be 
in other circumstances, and the Sup. representing it as at its highest point. 
Thus, ᾿Ανδρειόσερος γίγνεται αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ, he becomes more manly than he was 
before, Pl. Rep. 411 ce. Ὅσῳ δυνασώτεροι αὐτοὶ αὑτῶν ἐγίγνοντο Th. iii. 11. 
“Ors δεινότατος σαυτοῦ ταῦτα ἦσθα, when you were the most skilled in these mat- 
ters that you ever were, i. e. when your skill in these matters was at its highest 
point, Mem. i. 2.46. Ἵν᾽ αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ συγχάνει βέλπιστο: ὧν Pl. Gorg. 484 e. 


Nore. To the Comp.-thus construed, a specification is sometimes annexed 
with 7 (ὃ 461. δ); as, Adro} ἑαυτῶν [ϑαῤῥαλεώτεροί εἰσιν], ἐπειδὰν μάθωσιν, ἤ 
πρὶν μαθεῖν, they have themselves more confidence when they have learned, than 
they had before learning, Pl. Prot. 350 a. Τό γ᾽ ὑπόλοιπον αὐτῶν «τῆς δόξης 
ἀσθενέστερον αὐτὸ ἑαυτοῦ ἐστιν, ἢ εἰ μηδ᾽ φήθησαν Th. vii. 56. 


5.) Two comparatives connected by %, to denote that the one property exists 
in a higher degree than the other ; as, 2rgarnyol πλείονες 7 βελτίονες, generals 
more numerous than good, Ar. Ach. 1078. ‘Os λογογράφοι ξυνίθεσαν ἐπὶ v8 
προσαγωγόσερον τῇ ἀκροάσει, ἢ ἀληθέσφερον Th. i. 21. [Πρόϑῦμος μᾶλλον ¥ 
. Φφοφωτίρα Kur. Med. 485. 


ὁ 465. V. The comparative and superlative are often 
used without an express object of comparison. In this case, 
the SUPERLATIVE increases the force of the positive, while the 
COMPARATIVE may either increase or diminish it, according to 
the object of comparison which is implied. Thus, 


"D ϑαυμασιώτασε ἄνθρωπε, O most wonderful man, iii. 1.27. "2 Sav- 
μασαόφαϊθοι vii. 7.10. Τὴν raxiorny, immediately, iii. 3.16. Πλείω [sc. σοῦ 
δέοντος} λέλεκπαι, [more than is proper] too much has been said, Eur. Ale. 706 
(cf. Μᾶλλον rot δέοντος, § 463. 1). Νεώσερος ὧν ἐς τὸ ἄρχειν, being too young 
for the command, Th. vi. 12. Μακρόσερον .. διηγήσασθαι, it is rather long 
[than otherwise] to relate, Pl. Conv. 203 a (cf. § 464. 5). ὋὉ δὲ αὐδθαδέστερόν 
τέ σι ἀπεκρίνατο, but he answered them [somewhat more insolently than he 
might have done] with a degree of insolence, Th. viii. 84. Médos εὔτονον, 
ἀγροικότερον, an energetic strain, somewhat rough, Ar. Ach. 673. ‘Toiv δὲ ἑσέ- 
ev καὶ ἀλογώτερα, ‘quite confounding,’ Th. vi. 46. Tis τῶν ἀσειροτέρων, one 
of the more inexperienced, Vv. i. 8. 

Nore. The Comp. and Sup., when used without direct comparison, are 
said to be used absolutely. When thus employed, the Comp. is often trans- 
lated into Eng. by the simple Pos., or by the Pos. with too or rather; and the 
Sup. by the Pos. with very. In addition to the examples above, see § 466. 


§ 466. VI. The degrees are mare freely interchangea 


cH. 3.] SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE.— EPIC USE. 315 


and mized, than in English. It may be however remarked in 
general, that the use of a higher degree for a lower renders 
the discourse more emphatic, and the converse, less so. Thus, 


Ταύτην μάλιστα [for πολὺ μᾶλλον] τῆς κόρης ἀσπάζεται, this she chooses far 
rather than the virgin, Eur. Iph. Α. 1594. Zsio. . μακάρασατος, more completely 
happy than you, 2. 482. ᾿Αξιολογώτατον τῶν προγεγενημένων, [the most re~ | 
markable of those which had preceded it] more remarkable than any which had 
preceded it, ΤῊ. 1.1. °Q) βέλσισσε τῶν σαυτοῦ φίλων Ar. Plut. 631. To κάλ- 
Aucrov.. τῶν προτέρων φάος Soph. Ant..100. Ἡμῶν ὃ γεραίπερος [for ys 
gairaros|, the oldest of us (though none of them were old), Cyr. v. 1. 6. 
"Evol πικρὸς φέθνηκεν [sc. waxAAov, ὃ 460], ἢ κείνοις γλυκύς, his death has been 
more bitter to me than sweet to them, Soph. Aj. 965 (cf. ὃ 464. 5). ᾿Ανέκρα- 
yor πάντες ὡς ὀλίγας 80. rAnyas] παΐσειεν, they all cried out that he had given 
him too few blows, v. 8. 12 (cf. ὃ 465). ὮΩ φίλα γυναικῶν, O [beloved of} 
dearest of women, Eur. Alc. 460 (ὃ 362. ζ). Οἱ wordci, the greater number, 
or the*most, Mem. i. 1. 19 (ef. Οἱ πλεῖσσοι Ib. 11 ; Τοῖς πλείοσι H. Gr. ii. 3, 
34). "Orsyous.., τὸ δὲ worAdi. 7.20. Οἱ δὲ γεραίπεροι, but the [older] old 
men, Cyr. i. 2.4. Οἱ μέν νέοι τοῖς τῶν πρεσξυτέρων ἐπαίνοις χαίρουσιν Mem. ii. 
1.33. Ἵσσον.. παλαίτερον iv. 5.35. Τί νεώτερον, ὦ Σώκρατες, γέγονεν, 
what new thing has happened, Socrates, Pl. Euthyphr. 2a. Νεωτέρων σινὲς 
ἐσιθυμοῦντες πραγμάτων, ‘a revolution, H. Gr. v. 2.9. Οὐδὲν καινότερον, 
nothing [more recent] new, Pl. Phedo, 115 Ὁ. Οὐ γὰρ χεῖρον πολλάκις 
ἀκούειν Ib. 105 a. Πολλὰ ὧν ob βέλετον αὐτοῖς στέρεσθαι, ‘not well for them,’ 
Cyr. ν. 1.12. Ti wor ζῆν diva xddtov; what then does it profit me to live? 
Eur. Ale. 961 (ef. Ti dx ἐμοὶ Sv κέρδος Zisch. Pr. 747). Φαιήκων ἀνδρῶν 
προγενέστερος, ‘ oldest,’ n. 156. 


CHAPTER III. 


SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 


§ 467. The article (6, ἥν τό) appears, in the Epic lan- 
guage, aS ἃ GENERAL DEFINITIVE, performing the office not only 
of an article as usually understood, but still more frequently 
of a demonstrative, personal, or relative pronoun (see §§ 147, 
148) ; as, “ὦ 


Ὃ γέρων, the old man, A. 38, Τά τ᾽ ἐόντα, τά τ᾽ ἰσσόμενα A. 70. Τά τ᾽ 
ἄποινα δέχεσθαι, and accept this ransom, A. 20. ὋὉ γάρ, for he, ἃ. 9. Ἕως 
ὃ ταῦθ᾽ ὥρμαινε A. 193. Τόν, whom, A. 36. Τὰ μὲν πολίων ἐξ ἐπράθομεν, τὰ 
δέδασται, ‘those things which,’ A. 125. 


ReMARKs. 1. These uses are intimately allied, inasmuch as, —(a) The 
art., as usually understood, is simply a less emphatic form of the demonstr. 
pron. Compare, in Eng., “ That man whom you see,” and “The man whom 
you 866." --- (6) The personal pron. of the “ἃ Pers. is a substantive demonstr. pron. 
Compare, in Eng., * Those that love me,” and “‘ Them that love me”; “ Those 
that seek me,” and “ They that hate me,” Prov. viii. 17, 21, 36. (The per- 


316 |‘ SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [Book 111 


sonal pron., like the art., is commonly less emphatic than the demonstrative 
asually so named.) — (6) The demonstr. pron. used connectively becomes a 
relative; as, in Eng., ‘* Blessed are they that mourn.” — Observe the resem- - 
blance in form between the English article the, and the pronouns that, this, he, 
they, &c.; the derivation of the definite art. in the French, Italian, &c., from 
the Lat. demonstr. il/e; and the extensive use of the German article der 
die, das. 


ὁ 468. 2. In Epic poetry, — (a) The article, in its proper use as 
such, is commonly not expressed. The same omission prevails to a great ex- 
tent in other kinds of elevated poetry. —(6) When used as a personal pro- 
noun, it is most frequently connected with the same particles as in Attic Greek 
(88. 490, 491) ; and is not unfrequently followed in the same sentence by the 
substantive to which it refers ; as, Ἢ δ᾽ ἔσασετο Παλλὰς ᾿Αδήνη, and- she, 
Pulias Minerva, followed, #125. Ai δ᾽ ἐσέμυξαν ᾿Αθδηναίη ve καὶ “Hen Δ. 
20. Cf. ὃ 499.—(c) As a demonstrative, it sometimes follows its substan- 
tive before a relative ; as, ᾿Ασοσέρπειν ἄνδρα τὸν, ὅς κε ϑεοῖσιν ἀπέχθηῆται x. 
73. Συνδεσιάων τἄων, ds ἐπέτελλε E. 319.— (d) The article when used as a 
personal or demonstrative pronoun has sometimes, from its position (see 
§ 491. R.), or for the sake of the metre, the same form in the Nom. with the 
common relative; as, “Os γὰρ deiraros ἦλθεν, for he returned last, a. 286. 
Μηδ᾽ ὃς φύγοι Z. 59. Ὃ γὰρ γέρας tori ϑανόντων, ‘ for this,’ Y. 9. 


8. In the later Ion. and in the Dor. writers, this extended use of the article 
was, in great measure, retained. E. g. in Hdt., the relative has in the Nom. 
sing. and pl. the forms ὅς, %, +4, οἵ, ai, τά - and has elsewhere the ¢- forms 
of the article, except after prepositions which suffer elision, and in the phrases, 
ἰξ οὗ, ἐν ὦ, ἐς ὅ, μέχρι οὗ. 


4. Traces of the earlier and freer use of the article likewise remained τῇ 
the Attic and common Greek; so that we shall treat of the Att. use of the 
article under two heads, (1.) its use as an article, and, (11.) its use as a pro- 
noun, combining with the latter the use of the relative forms (δ 148. 2) as 
demonstrative or personal. We ought, perhaps, te premise, what might be 
inferred from ᾧ 467. 1, that no precise line of division can be drawn betwee~ 
the use of the article as such, and its use as a pronoun. 


d. Tue ArticLte as AN ARTICLE, 
ᾧ 469. Rure XXVII. The Arricte is pre- 


fixed to suBSTANTIVES, to mark them as definite. 


Nores® 1 The Greek article is commonly translated into English by the 
definite article THE ; but often when used substantively, and sometimes when 
used adjectively, by a demonstrative pronoun ({§ 476, 479, 486. 1). With a 
participle following, it is most frequently trans'ated by a relative and verb, 
preceded, if no antecedent is expressed, by a persunal or demonstrative pro- 
noug (ὃ 476). ΤῈ is often omitted in translation, especially with proper names, 
abstract nouns, nouns used generically, and pronouns (§§ 470, 471, 473); and 
must be often supplied in translation when not expressed (§§ 485, 486). 


2. A substantive used indefinitely wants the article ; as, Καλὸς yae 8η- 
σαυρὸς, Tag’ ἀνδρὶ σπουδαίῳ χάρις ὀφειλομένη, a favor due from a good man is 
an excellent treasure, Isocr. 8 Ὁ. See § 518. a. 


cH. 3.] WITH GENERIC, ABSTRACT NOUNS, &c. 317 


§ 470. A substantive used DEFINITELY is 
either employed in‘ tts full extent, to denote that 
which 1s known, or, if not employed in its full ex- 
tent, denotes a definite part. 


A.) A substantive employed in tts full extent, to 
denote that which 1s known, may be, 


1.) A substantive used generically, i. 6, denoting a whole class; as, ὁ ἄνθρω 
wos, man (referring to the whole race), ἡ γυνή, woman, οἱ ἄνθρωσοι, men, of 
᾿Αδηναῖοι, the Athenians (the whole nation). Thus, ‘O ἄνθρωσος “ ἄνθρωπος ἢ 
ὠνομάσθη, man was named ἄνθρωπος, Pl. Crat. 399 ec. ὋὉ γὰρ σύμβουλος καὶ ὃ 
συκοφάντης - « ἐν σούτῳ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφέρουσιν Dem. 29]. 15. Καὶ σῶν 
“Ἑλλήνων δὲ ἔχων ὁπλίτας . - τριακοσίους, ‘of Grecks, i, 1.2. Of. ὃ 485, β. 


Nore. To this head may be referred substantives used distributively, which 
consequently take the article; as, Κῦρος ὑσισχνεῖται.. . «ρία ἡριδαρεικὰ ποῦ 
μηνὸς τῷ στρατιώτῃ, Cyrus promises three half-darics [the month to the sol- 
dier] a month to each soldier, i. 3. 21. — Even with txaccos+* as, “Exacroy σὸ 
#4vos, each nation, i. 8.9. Κατὰ «ὸν ὁπλίτην ἕκαστον δύο μναῖ Th. v. 49 (cf. 
Ἕκαστον ἀσκόν iii. 5. 10. For the position of gxarros, see ὃ 472. a 


2.) A substantive expressing an abstract idea ; as, Ἢ ἀρετή, virtue, ἡ κακία, 
vice, ἡ σοφία, wisdom, τὸ καλόν, the beautiful (§ 449. a). Ἢ σωφροσύνη, καὶ § 
ἐγκράτεια, καὶ ἡ ἀλκή Cyr. vii. 5.75. Cf. § 485. β. 


3.) An infinitive or clause used substantively, or a word spoken of as such; 
us, Τὸ ζῇν, to live, life (δ 445). Διὰ φὸ φοβεῖσθαι, through fear, ν. 1.18. Els 
wd μὴ διὰ σὸ ἐγγὺς εἶναι φοβεῖσθαι Vil. 8.20. Τὸ ὄνομα ὃ ἄνθρωπος, the name 
ἄνθρωπος Pl. Crat. 399 c. Ted ὄνομα ἡ μηχανή Ib. 415 ἃ. Τοὔνομα τὴν 
ἀρετήν ΤΌ. 6. (In the three last examples, the article conforms by attraction 
to the noun following, instead of being neuter (§ 445), inasmuch as the word 
ὄνομα expressed sufficiently shows that ἄνθρωπος, &c., are spoken of merely as 
words. ) 


8 471. 4.) The name of a monadic object; i. 6. of an object which 
exists singly in nature, or which is so regarded (μοναδικός, single); as, ὁ ἥλιος, 
the sun, ἡ σελήνη, the moon, ἡ γῆ, the earth, ὃ οὐρανός, the heavens. Thus, "Eye 
προφὴν ἡ γῆ ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, the earth receives nutriment from the heavens, (Ee. 
17. 10. Cf ὃ 485. a. 


oe ° 
5.) The name of an art or science; as, Ἢ ἰατρικὴ καὶ ἡ χαλκευσικὴ καὶ 
A τεκτονική, medicine and brasiery and carpentry, Cic.i. 1. Cf. § 485. β. 


6.) A proper name, which has been before mentioned or implied, or which 18 
well known; as, ἹΚῦρον δὲ μεταπέμπεται. « ᾿Αναξαίνει οὖν ὁ ἹΚῦρος, But he sends 
for Cyrus. Cyrus therefore goes up,i. 1.2. Διὰ Φρυγίας ... Τῆς Φρυγίας 
worwi. 2.6, 7. Kugos chy Κίλισσαν εἰς τὴν Κιλικίαν ἀποπέμσει, Cyrus sends 
the Cilician qeeen to Cilicia, i. 2.20. ‘Yaig τῆς Ελλάδος, in behalf of Greece 
(their native land), i. 3.4. Cf. § 485. a. εἰ 


Nores. (a) Proper names appear to take the article, from their being, in 
their origin, either adjectives used substantively (§ 448), or nouns used 
distinctively (§ 479). Thus, Ἢ Ἑλλάς [sc. γῆ], [the Gea land] Greece 
(comp. England, the land of the Angles, in French L’Angleterre, Scotland, 

27 


918 SYNTAX OF THF ARTICLE. | BOOK IIE. 


Ireland) ; Ὃ Ἑ λλήσσοναος, [the sea of Helle] the Hellespont ; Ὃ Ueginais 
[se. ἀνήρ], [the Illustrious: Man] Pericles; Ὃ φίλισιπος, [the Horse-lover, 
Philip ; ᾿Ανὴρ Μυσὸς πὸ γένος καὶ rovvoua τοῦτο ἔχων v. 2. 29. (δ) The ad- 
jective construction is especially retained in names of rivers; as, Ὃ Μαίανδρον 
woraposi. 2.7. Tod Μαρσύου ποταμοῦ Ib. 8. So, in Eng., the Connecticut 
river. δι 


§ 472. B.) A substantive not employed in its 
full extent may be rendered definite, 


1.) By a limiting word or phrase. 


This word or phrase is usually placed, either between the article and its sub- 
stantive, or after the substantive ; and in the latter case, the article is often re- 
peated, either for perspicuity or emphasis. Thus, Μέχρι rod Μηδίας τείχους, as 
far as the wall of Media, i. 7.15. Τὸ περὶ σὸν ΤΠειραιᾷ «εἴχος H. Gr. iv. 8.9. 
Ta μακρὰ τείχη σῶν Κορινθίων Ib. 4.18. Τὸ τεῖχος πὸ Περινθίων vii. 2. 11 
(cf. Καὶ Ταναγραίων τὸ τεῖχος περιεῖλον Th. i. 108). Td μὲν ἔσωθεν [τεῖχος] 
πρὸ τῆς Κιλικίας. .. σὸ δὲ ἔξω τὸ πρὸ cis Συρίας i 4.4. ‘O τῆς βασιλέως 
γυναικὸς ἀδελφός ii. 8. 98, Τὸ «ἧς «ποῦ ξαίνοντος τέχνης ἔργον Pl. Pol. 281 a 
Ey σαῖς κώμαις ταῖς ὑπὲρ rod πεδίου τοῦ παρὰ τὸν Κεντρίτην ποταμόν iv. 8. le 


ΝΌΤΕΒ. «. On the other hand, words and phrases not belonging to the 
definition or description of the substantive, but to that which is said about it 
in the sentence, either precede the article, or follow the substantive without the 
article; as, “Ori κενὸς ὃ φόξος sin, καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες σῶοι, that the fear was ground= 
less, and the generals safe, ii. 2.21. Ῥιλὴν ἔχων τὴν κεφαλήν, having the head 
bare, i. 8.6. ᾿Ελαύνων ἀνὰ κράτος ἱδροῦντι τῷ ἵππῳ Ib. 1. Kartornesy avete 
ay τὴν φάλαγγα i. 10. 10. ἝἭπεσθε ἡγεμόν, τῷ Ἡρακλεῖ, follow Hercu- 
les as leader, vi. 5. 24 (ef. Τῷ Ἡ γεμόν, Ἣρακλεϊ vi. 2. 15). Διὰ μέσου δὲ 
«οῦ παραδείσου, through the midst of the park, i. Ὡ. 1 (8 456). "Ev τῇ ἀγορᾷ 
μέσῃ Dem. 848. 13 (but, Τὸ μέσον σαῖφος, the centre division, i. 8.13). Tloa- 
λῶν τῶν ἐσιτηδείων μεστάς, full of the necessaries of life in great abundance, iv. 
4.7. Τὰ δὲ ἐσισήδεια πολλὰ ἦν AawCaveviv. 1.8. Σὺν ὀλίγοις τοῖς weg 
αὐτόν, with those about him few, i. 6. with few attendants, i. 5.12 (but, Σὺν 
“οἷς ὀλίγοις περὶ αὐτόν, with the few about him). ‘Exixweica: ὕλην τὴν φά 
λαάγγα, i 2. 17. Τῆς ἡμέρας ὅλης iii. 392 11. Πᾶσι. - τοῖς κριταῖς καὶ «οῖς 
Starais wean, to all the judges and all the spectators, Ar. Av. 445. “Yuan ἦν 
dxaca ἡ χώῤα, the country was all bare, i. 5.5. “Exacroy «πὸ ἔθνος i. 8. 9 
(ἃ 470. N.). Td κέρας ἑκάτερον vii. 1.23. ᾿Αμφότερα τὰ ὦτα, both his ears 
iii. 1.31. Αὐσὼ σὼ Λάκωνε, the*Spartans themselves, vii. 7.19 (but, Τὼ αὐτὼ 
Adxwvt, the same Spartans). Τούς σε ἄνδρας αὐτούς ii. δ. 39. 


β. When the substantive is preceded or followed by successive modifications, 
the article is sometimes repeated with each; as, Τὸ ἐν ᾿Αρκαδίᾳ rd rod Διὸς 
Λυκαίου ἱερόν, the temple of Lycwan Jove in Arcadia, Pl. Rep. 565d. Ἔν τ 
σοῦ Διὸς τῇ μεγίστῃ ἱορτῇ ΤῊ, 1, 126, Τά os σεΐχη τὰ ἑαυτῶν τὰ pare 
ἀσετίλεσαν Ib. 108, . 


8 473. Remarks. 1. It is common to employ the arti- 
cle even when the substantive is rendered definite by a posses- 
sive or demonstrative pronoun ; as, ὃ 


@ Possesstve. Ὃ ἐμὸς πατήρ, my father, i. 6. 6. "Ομμια σοὐμόν [τὰ σὺ 


CH. 3.| © WITH A LIMITING WORD OR PHRASE. | 319 


Busy, ὃ 39] Cyr. viii. 7.26. Τὴν ἡμετέραν χώραν ἵν. 8.6. Τῷ νόμῳ τῷ ὑμε- 
view vii. 3. 39. 

β. DemonstRATIvE. The pronouns οὗτος and ὅδε, as themselves beginning 
with the article (§ 150), do not take it before them, and ἐκεῖνος follows their 
analogy. The arrangement, therefore, with these pronouns is the same as in 
§ 472. a Thus, Tatras σὰς πόλεις, these cities, i. 1.8. Tov ἄνδρα rotroy 
i. 6. 9. Τόνδε σὸν redrov, i. 1. 9. ‘O μὲν ἀνὴρ ὅδε Apol. 29. "Exsivns τῆς 
ἡμέρας 137. 48 


Nore. In prose, when the article is omitted with a demonstrative pronoun 
and a common noun, the pronoun is usually employed as a subject, and the 
noun as an attribute; thus, "Err: μὲν γὰρ πενία αὕτη σαφής, for this is mani- 
fest poverty, Cac. 8. 2 (cf. Aden ἡ ἔνδεια Ib.). Κίνησις γὰρ αὕση μεγίστη ss 
ἐγένετο Th. i. 1. Adorn αὖ ἄλλη πρόφασις fyi. 1. 7. 


§ 4 54. 2. Upon the same principle, the article is pre- 
fixed to words and phrases, which are joined with a proper 
name or a personal pronoun to give definiteness or emphatic 
distinction ; as, 

Τὸν βασιλεύοντα ᾿Αρσαξέρξην, [the reigning Artaxerxes] Artaxerxes the king, 
i. 1.4. Μένων ὁ Θετταλός, Meno the Thessalian, i. 2.6. ᾿Εσύαξα, ἡ Svevte 
wis γυνὴ, τοῦ Κιλίκων βασιλέως Ib. 12. ᾿Αρισπχόδηροον «ὃν μικρὸν ἐπικαλού- 
μένον Mem. i. 4. 9. Ἐγὼ .. ὁ ἐξηπατηκὼς .., ὑμεῖς δὲ of ἐξηπατημένοι Ve 7. 9. 
H τάλαιν᾽ ἐγώ, I, the wretched one (by eminence), i. 6. most miserable, Soph, 
El. 1138. ‘Ogay σε τὸν δύστηνον Id. Ged. C. 745. Ὁ σαντλήμων ἐγώ, 17, the 
all-wretched, Id. Ed. T. 1379. Τὸν πατροφόντην, τὸν ἀσεδὴ με Ib. 1441. So, 
when the pronoun is implied in a verb, ᾿Ωλεκόμαν ὁ “άλας Soph. Tr. 1015. 
Ὁ σλήμων .. ἥκω Eur. Andr. 1070. 


Nore. If, on the other hand, no distinction is designed, the article is omitted; 
as, Aveda» ᾿Αθηναῖος, Xenophon, an Athemian, i. 8. 15. Ἰ]ασαγύας ἀνὴρ 
Πέρσης Ib. 1. Ἐγὼ πάλας, 1, unhappy man, Soph. (4. C. 747. ᾿Αφέλκος- 
peas δύστηνος Ib. 844. 


§ 475. 3. An adverb preceded by an article has often 
the force of an adjective. This construction may be explained 
by supposing the ellipsis of a participle, commonly ὧν or γενό-- 
μενος. ‘Thus, 

Tov νῦν χρόνον, the [now time] present time, vi. 6. 13 (cf. Τὸν ὄντα νῦν χρό- 
νον Eur. Ion, 1349). "Ev σῷ πρόσθεν [sc. γενομένῳ) radywii. 1.1. ὋὉ νῦν 
βασιλεὺς οὗτος, καλέσαντος σοῦ «ότε βασιλέως, πατρὸς δὲ τοῦ νῦν Cyr. iv. 6. 8. 
Τὴν σήμερον ἡμέραν ἵν. 6. 9. Τῆς οἴκαδε ὅδοῦ 111. 1. 2. Τοῖς πάνυ τῶν σερα- 
σιωχῶν, the best soldiers, Th. viii. 1. Κάδμου rod «ἅλαι Soph. Cid. T. 1. 

Nores. (a) This adjective may again, like any other adjective, be used 
either substantively or adverbially (δὲ 476 -- 478). (ὁ) A preposition with its 
case may be used in the same way; as, Tod iv Δελφοῖς χρηστηρίου, the Delphic 
oracle, Cyr. vii. 3.15. ᾿Αρμενία ..% πρὸς ἑσπέραν, Western Armenia, iv. 4. 4. 


§ 476. 4. The substantive which is modified is often 
“omitted ; in which case the article may commonly be regarded 


as used substantively with the word or phrase following (see 
§§ 447, 469.1). Thus, 


320 ᾿ SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [BobK 11. 


Τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως [sc. ἀνδρῶν], of those from the king,i.1.5. Τῶν σερὶ 
σὴν Seay, those engaged in the hunt, or the hunters, Pl. Soph. 220d. Οἱ rad 
δήμου Th. viii. 66. Of τ᾽ ἔνδον... καὶ of ἔξω, both those within, and those with- 
out, ii. 5.32. Τὸ πέραν τοῦ ποταμοῦ, the opposite side of the river, iii. 5. 2 
Tod πρόσω, i. 3.1. Eis σοὔμπαλιν [τὸ ἔμπαλιν], back, i. 4.15. Oj tx vos 
ἐπέκεινα, those of the country beyond, v.4.3. Τοῖς παροῦσι τῶν πιστῶν i. 5. 18. 
Ti +d κωλῦον εἴη εἰσελθεῖν, what it was which prevented their entering, iv. 7. 4. 
Ὃ μηδὲν ὦν, he that is nothing, Soph. Aj. 767. Τοῦ μηδὲν [ovres] Ib. 1231. 
See § 450. 


Nore. The phrases of ἀμφί and οἱ regi, followed by the name of a person, 
commonly include the person himself, with his attendants or associates; and 
sometimes, by a species of vague periphrasis, denote little more than the person 
merely. Thus, Of ἀμφὶ ᾿Αριαῖον, [those about Ariwus] Arieus and those with 
him, iii. 2.2. Οἱ περὶ Ξενοφῶντα, Xenophon with his men, vii. 4. 16. Οἱ δὲ 
ἀμφὶ Τισσαφέρνην iii. 5. 1 (cf. Τ᾽ σσαφέρνης καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ Ib. 3). Τοὺς ἀμφὶ 
Θράσυλλον καὶ ᾿Ερασινίδην, Thrasyllus and Erasinides with their colleagues, 
Mem, i. 1.18. Οἱ μὲν περὶ rods Kogivbious ἐν τῇ Νεμέᾳ ἦσαν, of δὲ Λακεδαιμό- 
γιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἐν τῷ Σικυῶνι, ‘the Corinthians with their allies,’ H. Gr. iv. 
2.14. Llirraxod σε xa} Βίαντος, καὶ τῶν ἀμφὶ τὸν Μιλήσιον Θαλῇν Pl. Hipp. 
Maj. 281 ο. 


477. 5. When the neuter article is used substantively 
with a word or phrase following, (a.) the precise idea (as, in 
English, of ‘thing’ or ‘ things’) must be determined from the 
connection, and (f.) not unfrequently the whole expression 


may be regarded as a periphrasis for an included substantive. 
Thus, 


a. Τὰ τοῦ γήρως, the evils of old age, Apol. 6. Τὰ ἀμφὶ τὸν πόλεμον, mili- 
tary exercises, Cyr. ii. 1.21. Tx σερὶ Ugo¥évev, the fate of Proxenus, ii. 5. 
$7. Ἔν σοῖς trdvw, [in the above] in the preceding narrative, vi. 3.1. Tx 
μὲν δὴ Κύρου δῆλον ὅτι οὕτως ἔχει πρὸς ἡμᾶς, Sorte τὰ ἡμέτερα πρὸς ἐκεῖνον, ‘the 
relation of Cyrus to us is the same as ours to him,’ i. 5,9, Τὰ wap’ ἐμοὶ 
ἱλέσθαι avr) σῶν οἴκοι, to prefer remaining with me to returning home, i. 7. 4. 
"Edd δὲ τὰ τῶν ϑεῶν καλῶς εἶχεν, and when the gods had been duly honored, iii. 
2.9. Τὰ περὶ τῆς δίκης, the circumstances of the trial, Pl. Phedo, 57 Ὁ. 
Χειρίσοφος May ἤδη τετελευτήκει, . . τὰ δ᾽ ἐκείνου Νέων ᾿Ασιναῖος wagtraats, ‘his 
place or office,’ vi..4. 11. ᾿Εσισσήμων sivas τῶν ἀμφὶ raksis, to be skilled in 
tactics, ii. 1.7. Tots σὰ ᾿Αδηναίων φρονοῦντας, those that favor the cause of the 
Athenians, Th. viii. 31. Dgovsiv τὰ πρὸς ct vii. 7.30. Τὸ ray ἁλιέων, the 
habit of fishermen, CEc. 16.7. “Ὡς δὲ σὸ σοῦ ποταμοῦ οὕσως ἐπορσύνετο, ‘the 
diversion of the river,’ Cyr. vii. 5.17. Τὸ τοῦ ᾿Ιβυκείου ἵσ'που πεπονθέναι, to be 
in the condition of the horse of Tbycus, Pl. Parm. 136 6. Δεδιένα, τὸ τῶν παίδων, 
to have the boyish fear, Id. Phedo, 77 ἃ (ὃ 432). Τὸ rod Σοφοκλέους, what is 
said by Sophocles, Id. Rep. 329 c. Ts σῶν παρόντων, the convenience of those 
who are present, Id. Gorg. 458 Ὁ. See ὃ 447. γ. 


B. Τὸ τῆς τύχης, the course of fortune, = ἡ σύχη, fortune, Eur. Ale. 785 
Τὸ σῶν σνευμάτων, the state of the winds, = σὰ πνεύματα, the winds, Dem, 49 
7. Τὸ δὲ σῶν χρημάτων, but the matter of the money, = τὰ χρήματα, Id. 47 * 
24. Τὰ τῆς ὀργῆς = ἡ ὀργή, Th. ii. 60. Ἔσήνει σὰ βασιλέως, extolled the king, 
H. Gr. vii. 1.38. Τὰ ϑεῶν οὕτω βουλόμεν᾽ ἔστα, Eur, Iph. A. 33. Τὰ βαρ 
Chewy γὰρ δοῦλα πάντα «λὴν ἑνός Id. Hel. 276. ‘Qs δὴ σὺ σώφρων, «τἀμὰ [τὰ 


cH 3.| PREVIOUS MENTION, Wc. 321 


ἐμὰ = ἐγὼ] δ᾽ οὐχὶ σώφρονα Id. Andr. 235. Εἰ σὸ τῶνδ᾽ εὔνουν xdea Soph. 
El. 1908. See δὲ 447. y, 453. ε- 


§ 478. 6. The nevTER accusative of the article is 
often used in forming adverbial phrases (§§ 440, 441), in con- 
nection witn, 


a. ApverBs (ὃ 475. a); as, Td σάλαι [sc. dv], as to that which was of old, 
i. e. formerly, anciently, Pl. Phedr. 251 Ὁ. Tod πρόσθεν, before, i. 10.10. Τὸ 
xeiv Eur. Alc. 977. Τούμπαλιν [τὸ ἔμπαλιν, back, vi. 6.38. To γε παραυ- 
vixa Ar. Vesp. 833. Τὸ παράπαν Ag. 7.7. Τὸ σάμσαν Pl. Tim. 41 Ὁ. 


> 
β. ApsEcTIVEs ; as, Τὸ πρῶσον, at first,i.10.10. Ta πρῶτα, first, Soph. 
Tr. 757. Τὸ σπρόσερον, before, iv. 4. 14. Τὸ τρίτον]. 6. 8. Τὸ παλαιόν iii. 
4.7. Τοὐλάχιστον [πὸ ἐλάχισεον), at least, v. 7.8. See ὃ 441. 


y- Prepositions followed by their cases; as, Τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦδε, as to that after 
this, i. 6. henceforth, Cyr. v. 1.6. Τὸ ἐκ σοῦδε Ib. 5. 43. Τὸ πρὸς ἑσπέραν, to 
the west, vi. 4.4. See § 475. ὃ. 


§ 479. II.) By previous mention, mutual un- 
derstanding, general notoriety, or emphatic distinc- 
tion ; as, ; 


Θορύϑου ἤκουσε διὰ τῶν τάξεων ἰόντος, καὶ ἤρετο τίς ὃ ϑόρυξος sin, he 
heard a noise passing through the ranks, and inquired what the noise was, i. 8. 
16. OF δ᾽ ἐπεδίωκον μέχρι no ens φινός - ἐνταῦθα δ᾽ ἔσσησαν οἱ “Ἕλληνες " 
ὑπὲρ γὰρ σῆς κώμης γήλοφος ἦν, +. σῶν δὲ ἱππέων ὃ λόφος ἐνεπλήσθη 
i. 10.11. Τὰ σ“λοῖα αἰτεῖν i. 3. 16 (ef. Αἰσεῖν ““λοῖα Ib. 14). Δουλεύο 
μὲν Θεοῖς, ὅ σι ποτ᾿ εἰσὶν οἱ Deoi Eur. Or. 418, Ὅτε Ξέρξης ὃ ὕσσερον ἀγεί- 
ρας τὴν ἀναρίθμητον σσξασιὰν ἦλθεν, ‘that innumerable army,’ iii. 2. 
13. Tivos ποινῆς Tae «“΄ολλὰ σ«νεύματ᾽ toy’ ἐν Αὐλίδι, Soph. El. 563. 
Τὸν ἄνδρα teu, I see roe man [i. 6. Artaxerxes], i. 8.26. ᾿Ανακαλοῦντες 
cov reoderny, exclaiming, ‘the traitor!’ vi. 6. 7. ᾿Ανακαλοῦντες τὸν εὖ- 
ἐργέτην, τὸν ἄνδρα τὸν ἀγαθόν Cyr. iii. 8. 4. 


§ 480. Remarks. 1. From ἃ reference to something 
which precedes, or is mutually understood, the article may be 
even joined, 


a.) With an InTERROGATIVE Pronoun; as, “AAAa σοίνυν, ἔφη 6 ᾿Ισχόμα- 
χος, ϑέλω cor. . διηγήσασθαι... Τὰ roia; ἔφην ἐγώ, I will then, said Ischom- 
achus, relate to you other things. [The what?) What are they? said I, (ec, 
10.1. KP. “A δ᾽ ἐμποδὼν μάλιστα, ταῦθ᾽ ἥκω φράσων. “ET. Τὰ rota 
cadre; Eur. Ph. 706. TP. Πάσχει δὲ ϑαυμασεόν. “EP. Τὸ vi; Ar, 
Pax, 696. ‘EP. Of¢ μ᾽ ἐκέλευσεν ἀνασπυθέσθαι cov. ΤΡ, Τὰ vi; Ib. 693 
(Τὰ plur. with reference to ofa, and ¢i sing. for plur. ; ; cf. Ti οὖν ταῦτα iorivs 
§ 450. γ). hig δ σι παθεῖν δεῖ" τί μὲ 7d δεινὸν ἐργάσει, Eur. Bac. 492, 
Ilortow οὖν ὁμοιότερον Tw 67d. Pl. Phiedo, 79 Ὁ. See ὃ 528. 1. 


β. With a PmrsonaL Pronoun; as, Δεῦρο δὴ, 4 δ᾽ ὅς, εὐθὺς ἡμῶν on 
«αραξάλλε;ς ; .. Ποῖ, ἔφην ἐγὼ, λέγεις, καὶ παρὰ «ίνας «τοὺς ὑμᾶς, Will 
you not, suid he, come hither directly tous? Whither, said I, do you say, and 
to whom [as the you?] do I go, in going to you? Pl. Lys. 203 Ὁ. Τὸν ἐμέ, 
the me, i. e. me, of whom you speak, Id. Phil. 20 a. 


322° SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. _ [Book Il. 


y:) With a Pronoun or QuaLity oR QuaANTITY; 88, Τὸ σοιοῦσον ὄνωρ, 
such a dream as I have described, or, such a dream as this, iii. 1. 3. "Aryogua 
στὴν cov τοιοῦτον Mem. i. 5. ὦ. Τὴν σηλικαύτην ἀρχήν Pl. Leg. 755 Ὁ. 

2, A numeral preceded by ἀμφί, about, has commonly the article, the round 
number being apparently regarded as an object familiar to the mind, or as a 
definite standard to which an approach is made ; thus, “Aguera.. ἀμφὶ τὰ 
εἴκοσι, chariots about the [number of } twenty, i. 6. about twenty in number, i. 7 
10. Πελεασςαὶ δὲ ἀμφὶ τοὺς δισχιλίους i. 2.9. ᾿Αμφὶ σὰ πεντήκοντα ten ii. 
6.15. So, Eis τὰ ἑκατὸν ἄρματα Cyr. vi. 1. 50. : 


ἢ 481. III.) By the connection in which it 18 
employed ; as, 


Ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐξελεύτησε Δαρεῖος, καὶ κατέστη εἰς “ὴν βασιλείαν ᾿Αρταξέρξης, 
‘had succeeded to the throne [sc. of Persia],’ i. 1. 8. ᾿Ιόνσες ἐπὶ σὰς ϑύρα» 
2.11. Αἱ λόγχαι καὶ αἱ τάξεις καταφανεῖς ἐγίγνοντο i. 8.8. Οἱ δ᾽ 
ἐσεὶ ἦλθον πρὸς «“οὺς προφύλακας, ἐζήτουν rods ἄρχοντας ii. 8. 2. 


§ 482, Remark. With substantives which are rendered 
definite by the connection, the article has~often the force of a 
possessive (see § 503) ; as, 

᾿Εξούλεσο τὼ wards ἀμφοτέρω παρεῖναι, he wished [the] his children to be 
both present, i. 1.1. Τισσαφέρνης διαξάλλει τὸν Κῦρον πρὸς cov ἀδελφόν Ib. 
85. Κῦρός ot καταπηδήσας ἀπὸ rot ἅρματος «ὃν ϑώρᾶκα ἐνίδυ, καὶ 
ἀναξὰς ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον τὰ «“αλτὰ εἰς τὰς χεῖρας ἔλαβε ἱ. 8. 8. 


§ 483. IV.) By contrast. 


This may give a degree of definiteness to expressions which 
are otherwise quite indefinite; and may even lead to the em- 
ployment of the article with the indefinite pronoun tig. Thus, 

Ἔν ἑκάστῳ resis ἄνδρας, ὧν οἱ μὲν δύο ἐκθάντες sis τάξιν ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα, ὁ δὴ 
εἷς ἔμενε, “ΟΥ̓ whom two.., but the third,’ v. 4.11. Τῶν δὲ πολεμίων οἱ μέν 
wives αἰσθόμενοι πάλιν ἔδραμον. ..) οἱ δὲ πολλοὶ « « φανεροὶ ἦσαν φεύγοντες, 
‘some. .» but the most,’ iv. 3. 33. “Iwmous.., reds μὲν τινὰς wag’ ἐμοὶ, 
ois δὲ τῷ Κλεάρχῳ καταλελειμμένους iii. 3.19. Cf. § 490. R. 


§ 484. Generat Remarks. 1. The article is some- 
times found without a substantive, through anacoluthon (§ 329. 
N.) or aposiopésis (ἀποσιώπησις, the becoming silent, i. 6. the 
leaving a sentence unfinished, from design, strong emotion, or 
any other cause) ; as, 


Ἢ σῶν ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων , εἶχε χρὴ κακίαν, εἴφ᾽ ἄγνοιαν, εἴτε καὶ 
ἀμφότερα ταῦτ᾽ εἰπεῖν, the , whether I should say cowardice, or folly 
of the rest of the Greeks, or both these together, Dem. 231. 21. Tas γὰρ 
twits, εἰ δή ris tors σοφία καὶ οἵα, μάρτυρα ὑμῖν παρέξομαι Pl. Apol. 20 6. 
Μὰ τὸν , οὖ σύ γε. Not you, by (the name of the god omitted, as 
the old grammarians say, through reverence), Ib. Gorg. 466 e. . 


§ 485. 2. Omission or tHe Articte With substan- 


cx. 8.] OMISSION. 323 


tives which will be at once recognized as definite without the 
article, it is often omitted ; particularly with, 


a. Proper names, and other names resembling these from their being specially 
appropriated or familiar appellations of persons (§ 471); thus, Διαξάλλει ray 
Κῦρον. . . Συλλαμᾷβάνει Κῦρον i. 1. 3. II gos Κῦρον Ib. 6, 7. Πρὸς σὸν Κῦρον» 
Tb. 10. Ὁ δὲ Κῦρος Ib. 7, 10. Κῦρος δὲ ἱ. 2.5. Seei. δ, 11, 12. Eis σὴν 
Κιλικίαν i. 2. 20, 21, Eis Κιλικίαν 10. 21. “Apa ἡλίῳ δύνοντι ii. 2. 13. 
Ἅμα τῷ ἡλίῳ δυομένῳ Ib. 16. Τοῖς ἄρχουσι cis ϑαλάδτης, .. σοῖς τῆς γῆς 
Rep. Ath. 2. 4. Τοῖς μὲν κατὰ ϑάλατεαν ἄρχουσιν, .. τοῖς δὲ κατὰ γῆν Ib. δ. 
Πρὸς ἑσσέραν, .. πρὸς ἕω ν. 7. 6. “Ors βορέας . « φέρει, νότος δέ Ib, 7. Τὸ 
ἐκείνων πλοῖον. .«. Ἔχω γε αὐτῶν καὶ τέκνα καὶ γυναῖκας i. 4.8. Aabsiv ἄν 
καὶ αὐτὸν καὶ γυναῖκα καὶ παῖδας καὶ τὰ χοήματα vii. 8. 9. Σὺν φοῖς ϑεοῖς 
iii. 1.23. ΤΠΙρὸς τῶν ϑεῶν Ib. 24. Σὺν ϑεοῖς vii. 7. 7. Teds Seay v. 7. δ. 
Δίκαιόν ἔστι καὶ πρὸς ϑεῶν καὶ πρὸς ἀνθρώπων '. 6. 6.ἁ Τὰ πρὸς τοὺς Θεοὺς, « ὁ 
σὰ πρὸς σοὺς ἀνθρώσους Lac. 13. 11.— Hence βασιλεύς, in its familiar appli- 
cation to the King of Persia, commonly wants the article ; as, [logeveras 
ὡς βασιλέα, goes to the king, i. 2.4. Cf. Τὸν βασιλέα ii. 4. 4. 


B. Abstract nouns, names of arts and sciences, and generic terms (ὃ 470); 
thus, Εὖρος εἴκοσι ποδῶν, ὕψος δὲ ἑκατόν ii. 4.12. To εὖρος πεντήκοντα “ποδῶν, 
καὶ τὸ ὕψος πεντήκοντα ili. 4.10. ‘Yad κάλλους καὶ μεγέθους ἀδιήγητον Cyr. 
viii. 7. 22. Θαυμάσιαι τὸ κάλλος καὶ τὸ μέγεθος ii. 8.15. Καὶ ἀνδρεία, καὶ 
σωφροσύνη, καὶ δικαιοσύνη Pl. Phado, 69 Ὁ. Γεωργίαν re καὶ σὴν πολεμικὴν 
φίχνην Cac. 4.4. “Ooi ἐσὶ ϑάνατον ἄγοιτο '. 6.10. ΘΘεοσεξέστατον . « ζώων 
ἄνθρωσος Pl. Leg. 902 Ὁ. 


§ 4 (56. ,γγ Substantives followed by the article with a defining word 
or phrase ; thus, Κύρου ἀποτέμνεται ἡ κεφαλὴ καὶ χεὶρ ἡ δεξιά i. 10. 1. Ἔκ“) 
σκηνὴν ἰόντες τὴν Ἐξενοφῶντος Vi. 4. 19. 


Notes. 1. Proper names, followed by the article, are rarely preceded by 
it, except with special demonstrative force. Thus, Παρύσατις . . ἡ μήτηρ 
i. 1.4. Sowiveros δέ ὁ Σευμφάλιος . ., Σωκράτης δὲ ὁ ᾿Αχαιός 1.2.3. Ἔν 
Χεῤῥονήσῳ τῇ καταντιπέρας "ACddov i. 1. 9 (cf. ᾿Εκ τῆς Χεῤῥονήσου i. 8. 4) 
But, Ὁ δὲ Σιλανὸς 6 ᾿Αμξρακιώτης, but that Silanus the Ambraciot (who had 
been the chief soothsayer of the army), vi. 4. 13. 


2. In this construction, the substantive is sometimes first introduced as in= 
definite, and then defined; and this subsequent definition sometimes respects 
simply the kind or class. Thus, Κρήνη ἡ Μίδου καλουμένη, a fountain [that 
called Midas’s] which was called the fountain of Midas, i. 2.13. Tloaaa δὲ 
orpovbel οἱ μεγάλοι, and many struthi, the large ones, i. e. ostriches, i. 5. 2 
Κάρνυα .. πολλὰ τὰ «λατέα, ‘of the broad kind,’ v. 4. 29. 


3. Two or more nouns coupled together ; as, [legi δὲ σῶν φοιῶνδε vi σε xwrdes 
διελθεῖν, οἷον Ἡλίου rs καὶ σελήνης καὶ dorewy καὶ γῆς καὶ αἰθέρος καὶ ἀέρος καὶ 
πυρὸς καὶ ὕδατος καὶ ὡρῶν καὶ ἐνιαυτοῦ 5 Pl. Crat. 408 ἃ (cf. Τὸν ἥλιον, Ἢ ose 
λήνη, Τὰ ἄσερα Ib. 408, 409). See other examples in ὃ 485. 


s. Ordinals and Superlatives ; as, Καὶ τρίτον ἔτος τῷ ἀολέμῳ ἰσελεύτα The 
fi. 103. Els Ἰσσοὺς, τῆς Κιλικίας ἐσχάτην weds 1. 4. 1. 


$ 487. 3. The parts of A SENTENCE may be ranked as follows, 
with respect to the frequency of their taking the article: (a) An appositive, 
appended for distinction. See y§ 472,474. (ὦ) The subject of the sentence, 


324 SYNTAX ‘OF THE ARTICLE. [BuOK Τῇ 


(ce) An adjunct not governed by a preposition. (4) An adjunct governed by a 
preposition. (e) An attribute. This commonly wants the article, as simply 
denoting that the subject is one of a class. ‘To this head belongs the second 
Acc. after verbs of making, naming, &c. (δ 434). 


4. Hence the article is often used in marking the subject of a sentence, and 
sometimes appears to be used chiefly for this purpose. Thus, Μὴ φυγὴ εἴη 4 
ἄφοδος, lest the departure should be a flight, vii. 8.16. "Epaiguv δ᾽ ἦν σὸ χω- 
giv 1. 4. 6. ἮΗσαν δὲ ζειαὶ αἱ «λεῖσσαι, and the greater part was spelt, v. 4.27 
(ὃ 455). Καλοῦσί γε ἀκολασίαν σὸ ὑπὸ τῶν ἡδονῶν ἄρχεσθαι Pl. Phedo, 68 9, 
"Ag οὖν παραπλησίως εἰσὶν ἀγαθοὶ καὶ κακοὶ οἱ a&yabol τε καὶ οἱ κακοί, Id. 
Gorg. 498 c. Τὰ dis πέντε δέκα ἐσαίν, twice five is ten, Mem. iv. 4. 7. Ou © 
μύριοι ἱππεῖς οὐδὲν ἄλλο H μύριοί εἰσιν ἄνθρωσοι, ten thousand horsemen are noth- 
ing else than ten thousand men, iii. 2.18. Καὶ ΘΕῸΣ ἦν Ὁ ΔΟΙῸΣ St. 
Jn. 1. 1. 

Tis δ᾽ ofdev, si σὸ ζῆν μέν tors κα θανεῖν, . 
Τὸ κατθανεῖν δὲ ζῇν κάσω νομίζεται... Eur. Pol. Fr. 7. 


§ 488. 5. There are some words, with which it is especially impor- 
tant to observe the insertion or omission of the article; as, "Ἄλλο δὲ σεράτεν 
μα, and another army, i. 1.9. Ts ἄλλο σεράτευμα, the rest of the army, i. 2. 
25. ᾿Αμφικράτης καὶ ἄλλοι, ‘and others,’ iv.2.17. ᾿Εσορεύδησαν, ἣ οἱ ἄλλοι, 
“the others,’ ‘the rest,’ Ib. 10, Πολὺ σοῦ σσραπτεύματος, ‘much of,’ iv. 1. 11. 
Τὸ μὲν δὴ πολὺ σοῦ “EAAnuxov, ‘the greater part,’ i. 4.13. Πολλοί, many, 
iv. 6. 26. Τοὺς πολλούς, the most, Ib. 24 (ὃ 466). "Oriyos ἀπέθνησκον, few 
died, iv. 2.7. latiw σούτων ἀπολαύει, 6 ὄχλος ἢ of ὀλίγοι, ‘the few,’ ‘the 
aristocracy,’ Rep, Ath. 2. 10. See ὃ 472. a. 


6. When two words or phrases are connected by a conjunction, if they re- 
fer to different objects, the article is more frequently repeated ; but otherwise, 
not; as, To σε Baglaeixdy καὶ rd Ἑλληνικὸν ἐνταῦθα σαράτευμα ἴ. 2.1. Τῶν 
Ἑλλήνων καὶ τῶν βαρξάρων Ib. 14. Τοὺς πιστοὺς καὶ εὔνους καὶ βεβαίους i. 9. 
30. Tis πρόσθεν φιλίας ὑπομνήματα καὶ πίστεως i. 6. 8. ‘OD’ αὖ διὰ τέλους 
wiv ἅπαντα χρόνον γεγονώς σε καὶ ὧν καὶ ἐσόμενός ἔστι μόνος Pl. Tim, 
38 ὁ. 

7. When two nouns are related to each other in a clause, and have the sama 
extent of meaning, the article is commonly joined with both, or with neither; 
as, Laide μὲν χώρας καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἰσχιῦρὰτοὖσα, τοῖς δὲ μήκεσι σῶν ὁδῶν καὶ τῷ 
δισσάσθαι πὰς δυνάμεις ἀσθενής i. 5.9. Οὐδέσιοτ᾽ ἄρα . . λυσισελέσπερον ἀδικία 
δικαιοσύνης Pl. Rep. 354 Δ. Λυσιτελέσσερον ἡ ἀδικία τῆς δικαιοσύνης Ib. Ὁ, 
Ἢ σώμασι φάρμακα [ἀποδιδοῦσα τέχνη). .. Ἢ τοῖς ὄψοις τὰ ἡδύσματα Ib, 
332 ο. 


ᾧ 489. 5. The insertion or omission of the article often depends, both 
in poetry and prose, upon ewphony and rhythm, and upon those nice distinctions 
in the expression of our ideas, which, though they may be readily felt, are often 
transferred with difficulty from one language to another. In general, the inser- 
tion of the article promotes the perspicuity, and its omission, the vivacity of dis- 
course. It is, conséquently, more employed in philosophical than in rhetorica 
composition, and far more in. prose than in poetry. It should be remarked, 
however, that, even in prose, there is none of the minutie of language in 
which manuscripts differ more, than in respect to its insertion ‘or omission, 
specially with’ proper names. 


9. The article is sometimes so closely united with the word following, thet 


ex, 8.7. USE AS A PRONOUN. 323 


a second article is prefixed, as if to a single word ; thus, Λόγος δὲ ὁ κατὰ 
φ«αὐφσὸν [=e αὐτὸ, § 97. ἘΝῚ ἀληθὴς γιγνόμενος, περί τι ϑάτερον [ΞΞ τὸ 
ἕσερον, § 39] ὦν, καὶ περὶ rd ταὐτὸν. » καὶ 6 τοῦ ϑατέρου κύκλος Pl. 
Tim. 57 Ὁ. Τό τε ϑάτερον καὶ τὸ ταὐτόν Ib. 44 Ὁ (see δὲ 479, 480). Τῶν 
φὸ μηδέν [sc. ὄντων], those who are that which is nothing, Eur. Tro. 412 (see 
§§ 450. 3, 476). 


Il. Tue Articre as a Pronoun. 


8 490. A. The arricue, if we include both its aspirat- 
ed and its t- forms, is used as a PRoNoUN, by Attic writers, 
only in connection with certain particles. 


Nore. By the use of the article as a pronoun, is meant its substantive use 

rdent of a modifying word ér phrase (ὃ 476). This use is explained, 

as in the case of other adjectives (§ 447), by the ellipsis of a noun. As a 

pronoun, the article in Attic writers is either demonstrative or personal, the 
cases in § 493 excepted. 


1. With 2B and δὲ; as, Ὁ δὲ [se. ἀδελφὸς} πείθεται, and he [the brother] 
és persuaded, i. 1. 3. Of, μὲν ῴχοντο, Κλέαρχος δὲ σπεριέμενε, they (Chirisophus 

and Meno) went, but Clearchus stayed, ii. 1.6. lias σε Καδμείων λεὼς καλεῖ 
δικαίως, tx δὲ τῶν μάλισε᾽ ἐγώ Soph. Gd. C. 741. 


Remark. The article with μέν and δὲ is commonly used for contradistinc- 
tion (cf. § 483), and we may translate ὁ wiv.., 6 δέ, this.., that, the one. ., 
the other, one . ., another, &c., and oi wiv. ., οἱ δέ, these . ., those, some . ., others, 
ἄς. Thus, Ὁ μὲν μαίνεται, ὃ ὁ δὲ σωφρονεῖ, the one is mad, the other is rational, 
Pl. Phedr. 244 a. Οἱ μὲν ἐπορεύοντο, οἱ δ᾽ εἵποντο, the one party (the Greeks) 
marched on, and the other (the Persians) Sollowed, iii. 4. 16. Βασιλεύς σε καὶ 
οἱ Ἕλληνες “+ οἱ μὲν διώκοντες . ὦ) οἱ δ᾽ as Sofa dh ‘these . . those,’ i. 10. 4. 
Τοὺς μὲν αὐτῶν ἀπέκτεινε, φοὺς δ᾽ ἐξέξαλεν, " some . . others,’ i. 1. 7 (§ 362. a). 
"Ey μὲν ἄρα Trois συμφωνοῦμεν, ἐν δὲ τοῖς οὔ PI. Pheedr. 263 Ὁ. ᾿"ἔσεισα φωνὴν 
αἄσαν ἀκούοντες, ἐξελέξαντο τοῦτο μὲν ἐκ τῆς, τοῦτο δὲ ἐκ τῆ: Rep. Ath. 2.8. Τὰ 
μὲν ἔπαθεν, .. τέλος δὲ κατέκτανε, he received some wounds, but finally- slew, 
i. 9. 6. Ὃ μὲν ἦρχεν, of δὲ ἐπείθοντο, he (Clearchus) commanded, and the rest 
obeyed, ii. 2.5. TH μὲν γὰρ ἄνοδον, τῇ δὲ εὔοδον, εὑρήσομεν +d ὅρος, for we shall 
Jind the mountain, here easy, and there difficult, of ascent, iv. 8.10 (§ 421. 8). 
. Τὰ μέν σι μαχόμενοι, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι, ‘fas to some things.. as te 
others] partly . + partly,’ ‘now .. now,’ iv. 1. 14 (ὃ 441). 


§ 491. 3.) In poetry, with γάρ ; as, Παρ ἀνδρὸς Davoriws ἥκων . 
ὁ γὰς μέγιστος aires τυγχάνει. δορυξένων, ‘for he,’ Soph. El. 45. Τῆς yas 
wigoxa μητρός Soph. id. T. 1082. Τὸ γὰρ. . σπάνιον μέρος, for this is a rare 
lot, Eur. Alc. 473. 


8.) As the subject of a verb, after xa}, and; as, Ka} σὸν κελεῦσα; δοῦναι, 
and that he bade him give it, Cyr. i. 3.9. Καὶ σὸν ἀποκρίνασθαι λέγεται Ib. iv. 
9. 13. 


Remark. The proclitics in the nominative (6, 4, of, ai, § 148) require, from 
the very laws of accent, that the particle, in connection with which they 
are used, should follow them. If, therefore, it precedes, they become orthotone, 
or, in other words, take the forms which commonly belong to the relative pro- 
noun (ὃ 148. 2). This change takes place with καί uniformly, and with δέ 

28 


326 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. _ [BOOK Itt 


when it follows 4 for ἔφη (ὃ 228); thus, Καὶ ὅς ἐθαύμασε, and he wondered, i, 
8.16. Καὶ a, “Οὐκ εὐφημήσεις ;” ἔφη Pl..Conv. 201 6. Καὶ of εἶπον vii 
6.4. *H δ᾽ ὅς, said he, Pl. Rep. 327 c. Ἦ δ᾽ ὅς, ὁ Γλαύκων, said he, i. 6. 
Glauco, Ib. Ὁ. Ἦ δ᾽ 4, said she, Id. Conv. 205 c. 


§ 492. B. The article in its το forms likewise occurs, 
I.) As ἃ DEMONSTRATIVE Or PERSONAL PRONOUN, 


1.) Before the relatives ὅς, ὅσος, and οἷος ; as, Τοῦ δ teri, of that which is, 
Pl. Phedo, 92 ἃ, Περὶ σὸ ig? @ χυσεῖται Id. Phil. 37 6. Καὶ σὸν ds ἔφη, 
δεσαότης τούτου εἶνα, Lys. 167.15. sel τεχνῶν σῶν ὅσαι περὶ ταῦτά εἰσι 
Pl. Soph. 241 6. 1Προσήκει καὶ μισεῖν rods οἵόσσερ οὗτος Dem. 613. 9. — The 
sentence introduced by the relative may be regarded as a defining clause, to 
which the article is prefixed (see § 472). 


2.) In particular forms of expression ; viz. 


a. Πρὸ rod (also written προτοῦ), before this; thus, To γε πρὸ vod σαῖς 
ἧσθα Pl. Alc. 109 6. OF δ᾽ οἰκέσαι ῥέγκουσιν- ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἄν πρὸ τοῦ Ar. Nub. 
5. Oi πρὸ σοῦ φίλοι, ‘former friends,’ Eur. Med. 696. See § 75. ὁ. 


β. Τῷ, [through this as a cause, ὃ 416] for this reason, therefore; thus, Τῷ 
“ὁ... μᾶλλον oxsaxrioy Pl. Thext. 179 ἃ. 


γ. Τό γε, followed by ὅσι; as, Τό γε εὖ oldu, ὅτι .., this I well know, that 
«+, Pl. Euthyd. 291 a. Τό γε δὴ κατανοητέον . ., ὅτι Id. Pol. 305 6. 


3. The article doubled with καί or 4; as, Ei rd καὶ σὸ ἐποίησεν ἄνθρωσος 
οὑτοσὶ, οὐκ ἄν ἀπέθανεν, if this man had done this and that, he would not have 
died, Dem. 308. 3. Τὰ καὶ σὰ πεπονθώς 1d. 560.17. ᾿Αφικνοῦμοα, ὡς. σὸν 
καὶ πόν, I go to this one and that, Lys. 94.3. With the article again re- 
peated 5 "Ede: γὰρ τὸ καὶ τὸ ποιῆσαι, καὶ τὸ μὴ ποιῆσαι, for this and that we 
ought to have done, and this not to have done, Dem. 128.16. “Os ἔφη δεῖν οὕτω 
προκιρεῖσθαι κινδυνεύειν σὸν στρατηγὸν, ὅπως μὴ τὰ ἢ τὰ γενήσεται, ἀλλ᾽ ὅπως 
va, “πού these or those, but ΤΗΕΒΕ,᾿ Id. 1457. 16. The nominative ὅς καὶ ὅς 
(§ 491. R.) occurs, Hdt. iv. 68. 


8.) Through poetic license, in imitation of the earlier Greek; as, Τὸν. « 
φϑίσον, him destroy, Soph. Gd. T. 200. Taiv wo μέλεσθαι, take care of these for 
me, Ib. 1466. Mia γὰρ Ψυχή" τῆς ὑπεραλγεῖν μέτριον ἄχθος Eur. Alc, 883, 
"Arrioaus, es φθίνωσιν, ἀντολάς rs σῶν Asch. Ag. 7. ἢ 


§ 493. II.) Asa ΚΕΠΑΤΙΨΕ ΡΒΟΝΟΥΝ. 


This substitution of the r- for the aspirated forms (ὃ 147) occurs in no 
Attic writers except the tragedians, and scarcely in these, except to avoid hia- 
tus, or lengthen a short syllable. Thus, Καείνῶσα rods οὐ χρῆν κτανεῖν, having 
slain those whom she ought not to slay, Kur. Andr. 810. Τὸν ϑεὸν, σὸν νῦν Ψέ- 
ytss, the god, whom you now blame, Ib. Bac. 712. Νοεῖς ἐκεῖνον, ὅντιν᾽ ἀρτίως 
μολεῖν ἐφιέμεσθα, σὸν δ᾽ οὗτος λέγει, Soph. Gid. T. 1054. ᾿Αγάλμαθ᾽ ἱερὰ, 
σῶν .. ἀπεστέρησ᾽ ἐμαυτόν [0.1379. Αγος .. δεικνύναι, σὸ μήτε γῆ . . προσ. 
δέξεσαι Ib. 1426. 


Remark. On the other hand, the aspirated forms are sometimes found 
with μέν and δέ for the «- forms (§ 490. 1) ; thus, Πόλεις Ἑλληνίδας, de 
μὲν ἀναιρῶν, εἰς ἃς δὲ σοὺς φυγάδας κατάγων, ‘some destroying, and to others, 


cA. 4. | PRONOUN. — AGREEMENT. 327 


Dem. 248. 18. “As μὲν κατείληφε πόλεις τῶν ἀσσυγειτόνων, τινὰς δὲ πορθεῖ 
Id. 282. 11. ΤΓνώμα 3° οἷς μὲν ἄκαιρος ὄλξου, «οῖς δ᾽ εἰς μέσον ἥκει Eur. Iph. 
T. 419. So, ‘Ovi μὲν “ 9) ors δέ, sometimes « .) at other times, Th. vii. 27 
‘Ori δέ Ven. 5. 8. 


CHAPTER IV. 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 
J]. AGREEMENT OF THE PRONOUN. 


§ 494. Rute XXVIII. A Pronoun agrees 
with its subyect in gender, number, and person. 


By the subject of a pronoun is meant the substantive which it represents. 
The rule, therefore, has respect either to substantive pronouns, or to adjective 
pronouns used substantively. The construction of adjective pronouns regarded 
as such belongs to Rute XXVL., and even their substantive use is explained 
by ellipsis (ὃ 447. a). Thus, 


Βασιλεὺς τῆς μὲν πρὸς ἑαυσὸν [i.e. βασιλέα) ἐπιδουλῆς οὖκ ἠσθάνετο, the 
king did not perceive the plot against himself,i. 1.8. ᾿Α΄πὸ σῆς ἀρχῆς. ἧς 
[se. ἀρχῆς} αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε, from the government, of which [govern- 
ment] he had made him satrap,i.1.2, Πάντων doos. « ἀθροίξονται Ib. 
Πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφὸν, ὡς ἐσιξουλεύοι αὐτῷ. Ὁ δὲ wsibsras (§ 490) Ib.3. 
"Tuas. ὅσοι ἐστέ ἵν. 6.14. Θαυμαστὸν woisis, ὃς - . δίδως Mem. ii. 7.13. 


§ 49 , The remarks upon the agreement of the ApJEC- 
TIVE (δὴ 444 -- 459) likewise apply, so far as gender and num- 
ber are concerned, to that of the PrRoNouN, and some of them 
to even a greater extent (ὃ 444. a). Thus, 


a. Mascuningt Form ror FEemMINIne. 


“Ὥσσερ si τὼ χεῖρε, ds ὁ Sede ἐσὶ τὸ συλλαμβάνειν ἀλλήλοιν ἱποίησε, 
ἀφιμένω τούτου «ράποιντο πρὸς τὸ διακωλύειν ἀλλήλω Mem. ii. 3. 18. 


See § 444. β. 


Nore. In speaking of persons vaguely, or generally, or simply as persons, 
the masculine gender often takes the place of the feminine, both in pronouns 
and in other substantive words which admit it; thus, Biv οἷς τ᾽ ob χρῆν 
[ΞΞ τῇ μηφρὶ] μ᾽ ὁμιλῶν Soph. Gd. T. 1184.. Οὐδὲ γὰρ κακῶς πάσχοντι 
μῖσος ὧν τέκῃ προσγίγνεται Id. El. 770. Ἢ στεῖρος οὖσα μόσχος οὐκ ἀνίξεται 
φ«ίκσοντας ἄλλους [= τίκτουσαν ἄλλην) Eur. Andr. 711. Συνεληλύθῶσιν 
ὡς ἐμὲ καταλελειμμένα, ἀδελφαί σε καὶ ἀδελφιδαῖ καὶ ἀνεψιαὶ σοσαῦται, ace 
εἶναι ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ σεσσαρασκαίδεκα rods ἐλευθέρους. . . Χαλεπὸν μὲν οὖν 
busi, ὦ Σώκρατες, τοὺς οἰκείους περιορᾷν ὠπολλυμένους, ἀδύνατον DI 


«οσούτους τρέφειν Mem. ii. 7. 2 (cf. Ib. 8). See § 336. a 


28 | SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. | Book 111. 


§ ΑΘ. υ. Use or tue Never. 


Ti γὰρ τούσου μακαριώτερον, τοῦ γῇ μιχθῆναι, Cyr. viii. 7. 25 (§ 445). 
Ἑνεδρεύσαμεν, ὅπερ ἡμᾶς καὶ ἀνασνεῦσα, ἐποίησε ἵν. 1.22, Τίς οὐκ ἂν ὅμο. 
λογήσειεν αὐτὸν βούλεσθα, μήτ᾽ ἠλίθιον μήτ᾽ ἀλαζόνα φαίνεσθαι «οῖς συνοῦσιν καὶ 
δόκει, δ᾽ ἄν ἀμφότερα ταῦτα, εἰ. « Mem.i. 1. 5 (§ 450). --- The neuter 
referring to words of other genders, and the neuter plural for the singular 
(§§ 450, 451), are particularly frequent in pronouns. 


c. ComMPpouND CONSTRUCTION. 


᾿Αρτάοζος καὶ Mibodarns, of ἦσαν ἰϊ. 5. 35. Tloraods δὲ ἄνδρας καὶ yo ; 
ναῖκας καλὰς κτήσῃ, obs ob ληΐζεσθα, δεήσει, ἀλλ᾽ αὐποὶ . . παρέσονται Vii. 3 
51. ᾿Ασφάλειαν καὶ εὔκλειαν, ἃ οὔτε κατασήπεται Cyr. Vili. ὦ, 92, Πολλὰ 
δ᾽ ὁρῶ πρόθατα καὶ αἶγας καὶ βοῦς καὶ ὄνους, ἃ ἀσοδαρέντα iii. 5.9. ᾿Ασαλ- 
λαγέντες πολέμων καὶ κινδύνων καὶ ταραχῆς, εἰς ἣν . + καθέσσαμεν Isocr. 168 b. 
See § 446. --- Zeugma is far less frequent in the construction of the pronoun 
than in that of the adjective. 


§497. ἃ. Syrxess. 


Τὸ ᾿Αρκαδικὸν ἡπλισικὸν, ὧν ἦρχε Κλεάνωρ iv. 8.18. Τὰ δόξαντα ἄν “«λή- 
Oct, οἵπερ δικάσουσιν Pl. Phedr. 260 ἃ. Βασιλεύς . «" οἱ δ᾽ ἀρπάζοντες in 
10, 4 (οἴ, Ib, 2 and 5). Οἰκτρὰ γὰρ πεπόνθαμεν, A. . κενὴν κατέσχον ἐλπίδα 
Eur. Iph. A. 985. Ὦ, μελέα ψυχὰ, ὃς. . ἥσθη Soph. Phil. 714. ὮὙΌ ἀγαθὴ 
καὶ πιστὴ ψυχὴ, οἴχῃ δὴ ἀπολιπὼν ἡμᾶς, Cyr. vii. 8. 8. Τέκνων, .. οὕς 
Eur. Suppl. 12. See ὃ 453. 


Nores. 1. In the construction of the pronoun, the number 1s often changed 
for the sake of individualizing or generalizing the expression; as, “Oris δ᾽ 
ἀφικνεῖτο.) πάντας .. ἀπεπέμπετο, and whoever came, he sent them all — 
bach,i. 1.5. ᾿Ασσάζεται πάντας, ᾧ ἂν περισυγχάνῃ Pl. Rep. 566 ἃ. “Os ἀν 
κάμνῃ τῶν οἰκετῶν, τούσων σοι ἐπιμελητέον “΄ἄντων, ὅπως ϑεραπεύηται 
Ce. 7.37. Τούσους .., ᾧ ἄν... πολλοὶ ἕσοντα, Ib. 21.8. "Λλλους δ᾽ 
ἐκέλευε λέγειν, διὰ ri ἕκαστος ἰπλήγη, and he bade the rest say, on what ac- 
count each one had been struck, v. 8.12. ἸΠροσιὼν ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ, οὕσσινας 
ᾧετο ἔχειν σι Vii. 3.16. ἸΠεῖραν λαβεῖν .. οἷος ἕκαστός tori, καὶ τὴν ἀξίαν» 
ixdoross διανεῖμαι Vi. 6. 33. "Hy ἀφδονία τὧὥν ϑελόντων κινδυνεύειν, ὅπου 
σις οἴοιτο Κῦρον αἰσθήσεσθαι i. 9. 15 (see Ib. 16). “Hv δέ τις τούτων τι πα- 
ραβαίνει, ζημίαν αὐφςοῖς ἐπέθεσαν Ογτ. i. 2.2. ἘΠ δέ os ξάκεῖ «λέον toe’ 
ἀγαθοῖς, Ῥούσων μετέχουσα Eur. Ale. 744. ᾿Αληδϑὴς ἦν φίλος" -. ὧν 
ἀριθμὸς οὐ πολύς, he was a true friend; of whom the number is not great, Id. 
Suppl. 867. Αὐσουργός, οἵσ'ερ καὶ μόνοι σώξουσι γῆν Id. Or. 720. On- 
σαυροποιὸς ἀνὴρ" obs δὴ καὶ ἐπαινεῖ τὸ «λῆθος Pl. Rep. 554 a. 


2. A pronoun often refers to a subject which is implied in another word (ef. 
§ 454); as, Φεύγει... ἐς Κέρκῦραν, ὧν αὐτῶν [i. 6. τῶν Κερκυραίων) 
εὐεργέτης, he flies to Corcyra, being a benefactor of theirs, Th. i, 136. ᾿Ασὸ 
Πελοποννήσου .., of φῶνδε κρείσσους εἰσί Id. vi. 80. Τῆς ἐμῆς ἐπεισόδου, 
ὃν [1. 6. ἐμὲ] μήσ᾽ ὀκνεῖτε Soph, Ged. Ο. 780. Πασρῴα 9 ἱστία κατεσκά- 
Qn, αὐτὸς δὲ .. wirves Eur. Hec. 22. ᾿Ανυμέναιος, ὧν []. 6. ὑμεναίων} μ᾽ 
ἰχρῆν συχεῖν Ib, 416, 


ὃ 498. e ΑΥΤΚΑΟΤΙΟΝ. 


A pronoun is sometimes attracted by a word in its own clause, or a word in 
apposition with its real subject (cf. § 455); as, Bicdvény οἴκησιν δώσω, ὅσερ 


cn. 4] PERSONAL, POSSESSIVE, AND REFLEXIVE. 329 


[for Horse] ἐμοὶ κάλλισαον χωρίον tort, I will give you, as a residence, Bisanthe, 
which is my finest town, vii. 2. 38. Ἕστίας, ov οὔτε ὁσιώσερον χωρίον Cyr. vii. 
5. 56. Οὐδὲν ἄδικον ey aiken ποιῶν" ἥνπερ [for ὅπερ, ὃ 445] νομίζω μελέ- 
φὴν εἶναι καλλίστην ἀπολογίας Apol. 3. Oaveiv> .. αὕτη γὰρ ἣν ay σπημά- 
trav ἀπαλλαγή Asch. Pr. 754. Ἔπσὶ σύλας τῆς Κιλικίας καὶ τῆς Συρίας. 
Ἦσαν δὲ ταῦτα [for αὗται) δύο φείχη i. 4. 4. Kal δίκη ἐν ἀνθρώποις πῶς οὐ 
καλὸν, ὃ πάντα ἡμέρωκε τὰ ἀνθρώσινα, Pl. Leg. 937 d.— This construction 
may be commonly explained by ellipsis; thus, ‘Evrias, οὗ [χωρίου] οὔτε ὁσιώ- 
σερὸν χωρίον, the hearth, than which [spot] there is no holier spot. 


§ 499. Avprmonan Remarks. 1. A pronoun, for the sake of 
perspicuity or emphasis, is often used in anticipation or repetition of its subject, 
or is itself repeated; as, Ti γὰρ rodrou μακαριώτερον, τοῦ γῇ μιχθῆναι, For 
what is happier than this, to mingle with the earth? Cyr. viii. 7.25. Τούσεου 
σιμῶμαι, τῆς ἐν [Πρυτανείῳ σιτήσεως Pl. Apol. 37 ἃ. Keivo κάλλτον, τέκνον, 
ἰσότητα τιμᾷν Eur. Ph. 535. ᾿Αγίας δὲ 6 ᾿Αρκὰς καὶ Σωκράτης ὁ ᾿Αχαιὸς, 
καὶ τούτω ἀπεθανέτην, ‘ these also died,’ ii. 6.30. Βασιλέα. ., obx οἶδα ὃ τὶ 
δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι ii. 4. 7. ᾿Αλκιβιάδης - ..). οὕσχω κἀκεῖνος ἠμίλησεν αὑτοῦ 
Mem. i. 2. 24, Σκέψαι δὲ, οἵῳ ὄντι μοι περὶ σὲ, οἷος ὧν περὶ ἐμὲ, ἔπειτά wos 
μέμφῃ Cyr. iv. 5.29. Οἶμαι δὲ σοι .. ἔχειν ἂν ἐπιδεῖξαί σοι Cie. 3. 16. 
Ἔστι γάρ «ες οὐ πρόσω Σπάρτης πόλις vis Eur. Andr. 733. 

Nore. Homer often uses the personal pron. οὗ, with its noun following; 


as, “Hy ἄρα οἱ ϑεράπων ἔχε ΚΌΡΗΣ λαῶν N. 600. Ἥ μιν ἔγειρεν Ναυσικάαν 
pee ζ. 48. Cf. § 468. ὃ. 


ᾧ BOO. 2. A change of person sometimes takes place ; — (a) From 
the"union of direct and indirect modes of speaking, especially in quotation ; as, 
"Αγοισ’ ἄν μάταιον ἄνδρ᾽ ἐκποδὼν, ὃς .. κάκτανον, take oy of the way a@ sense- 
less man, me, who have slain, Soph. Ant. 1339. Kal οὗτος ἔφη “ἐθέλειν roged- 
εσθαι, πφοσλαξὼν ἐδελαντὰς ἐκ παντὸς σοῦ στρασεύματος. Ἐγὼ γὰρ," ἔφη, 
“ida” iv. 1. 27. Seei. 3. 20; iii. 5. 12; iv. 1.193 v. 6. 25, 26.— 
(6) From a speaker’s addressing a company, now as one with them, and now 


as distinct from. them ; as, Δανθάνειν ὑμᾶς εἰς ὅσην ταραχὴν ἡ πόλις ἡμῶν 
καθέστηκεν" foixnars yup. οἵσινες “εθύκαρμεν Isocr. 141 ἃ. 


Il. ΞΡΈΟΙΑΙ, OBSERVATIONS ON THE PRONOUNS. 


§ S01. Of the observations which follow, many apply 
equally to PRONOUNS and ADVERBS of the same classes. 


A. PrrsonaL, PossEessivE, AND REFLEXIVE. 


§ 602. In the use of the pronouns, especially those of 
the classes named above, it is important to distinguish between 
the stronger and the weaker forms of expression ; that is, be- 
tween those forms which are more distinctive, emphatic, or 
prominent, and those which are less so. 


I. In the weaker form, the FIRST and SECOND PERSONAL PRO- 
NOUNS are omitted in the Nom., and are enclitic in the oblique 
cases sing.; but in the stronger form, they are expressed in the 
Nom., and are orthotone throughout. In the weaker form, the 
THIRD PERSONAL PRONOUN is omitted in the Nom., and is com- 

28 * 


330 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. | [Book mt 


monly supplied by αὐτός in the oblique cases; in the stronger 
form, it is supplied by ὃ and ὅς, which are simply distinctive 
and are limited in their use (δῷ 490-492), and by οὗτος, ὅδε, 
and ἐκεῖνος, which are both distinctive and demonstrative. ‘Thus, 


“ἍἌσαντα σῶα ἀπέδωκά σοι, ἐπεὶ καὶ σὺ ἐμοὶ ὠπέδειξας τὸν ἄνδρα, I gave you 
back every thing safe, when you also had shown to me the man, ν. 8. 7. Ἐγὼ 
μὲν, ὦ ἄνδρες, ἤδη ὑμᾶς ἐπαινῶ" ὅπως δὲ καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐμὲ ἐπαινέσετε, ἐμοὶ μελήσει, 
ἢ μηκέτι με Κῦρον νομίζετε '. 4.16. Οὔτε γὰρ ἡμεῖς ἐκείνου tri στρατιῶται, 
ἐσεί γε οὐ συνεπόμεθα αὐτῷ, οὔτε ἐκεῖνος ἔτι ἡμῖν μισθοδότης i. 3.9. Odre σὺ 
ἐκείνας φιλεῖς, οὔτε ἐκεῖναι σέ Mem. ii. 7. 9. ince δὲ rd μὲν δεξιὸν Μένων καὶ οἱ 
σὺν αὐτῷ, τὸ δὲ εὐώνυμον Κλέαρχος, καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου i. 2.15. Κῦρος δὲ καὶ ἱππεῖς 
φούτου i. 8. 6. Τούφῳ συγγενόμενος 6 Κῦρος, ἠγάσθη rt αὐτὸν, καὶ δίδωσιν αὐτῷ 
i. 1. 9. ἭΣ᾽ οὖν ϑανεῖτα, Soph. Ant. 751. Κεῖνος τὰ κείνου στεργέτω, κἀγὼ 
wads Id. Aj. 1039. See §§ 490 -- 492. 


§ 303. Il. In the stronger form, the Gen. subjective 
(8 393. δ) with a substantive is commonly supplied in the First 
and SECOND PERSONS, and sometimes in the THIRD, by the pos- 
sessive adjective (cf. §§ 457, 458) ; in the weaker form, it is 
often omitted, especially with the article (ὃ 482). The Gen. 
objective (§ 392) sometimes follows the same analogy. Thus, 


“Ole: γάρ σοι μαχεῖσθαι, ὦ Kies, τὸν ἀδελφόν." “Νὴ ΔΙ᾽," ἔφη ὃ Κῦρος, 
“ εἴπερ γε Δαρείου καὶ Ἰ]Παρυσάτιδός ἔστι παῖς, ἐμὸς δὲ ὠδελφός" 1.7.9. Τῶν 
σωμάτων στερηθῆναι... .. leet τῶν ὑμετέρων ἀγαθῶν -ἰϊ. 1. 19, ἹΚείνου rt xa} 
σὴν ἐξ ἴσου κοινὴν χάρῳ Soph. Tr. 485. To σὸν λέχος, the marriage you talk of, 
Soph. Ant. 573. Τὸ σὸν γὰρ "Ἄργος ob δέδοικ᾽ ἐγώ Eur. Heracl. 284, Σὰν — 
ἔριν, ὦ Ἑλένη, ‘the dispute for you,’ Eur. Hel. i160. Ebvoig καὶ φιλίᾳ vif 
ἐμῇ, good-will and affection to me, Cyr. iii. 1. 28. Φιλίᾳ σῇ σῇ, love to you, 
vii. 7.29. Μὴ μεταμέλειν σοι τῆς ἐμῆς δωρεᾶς, that you may not regret your 
present to me, Cyr. viii. 3.32. Θρῆνος οὑμός Asch. Pr. 388. See δὲ 454, 
482. 

Nores. (a) The PossEsstvE PRONOUN is modified like the personal pronoun 
of which it supplies the place ; as, Τόν ys σὸν [ὀφθαλ μεὸν], rod resoCiws, at least 
yours [your eye], the ambassador, Ar. Ach. 93 (ἢ 332. 4). See § 454. So, 
since πότρδος may be followed by the Dat., as well as the Gen. (§§ 403, 411), 
Apsrigou [= ἡμῖν) πότμου, κλεινοῖς Λαδδακίδαισιν Soph. Ant. 860. (Ὁ) The 
only PossEssIvE of the 3d Pers., which has a place in Attic prose, is σφέσερος, 
their; and even this is used reflexively, and with no great frequency. Thus, 
Ως ἑώρων πονοῦντας ποὺς σφετέρους, when they saw their own men in distress, 
Cyr. i. 4.21. (e) The Dat. for the Gen. belongs particularly to the weaker 
form of expression. See § 412. 


§ 304, Ill. In rertex rererence, the weaker form is 
the same with that of the common personal pronoun; the 
stronger form is the so-called reflerive (ὃ 144). The weaker 
form belongs chiefly to those cases in which the reflex refer- 
ence is indirect and unemphatic; the stronger, to those in 
which this reference is either direct, or, if indirect, is specially — 
emphatic or distinctive. Thus, 


. 
ou. 4.] PERSONAL, POSSESSIVE, AND REFLEXIVE. 331 


 Tiedrrers ὁποῖον ἄν «σι ὑμῖν οἴησθε μάλιστα συμῷέρειν, do whatever you think 
will be most advantageous to yourselves, ii. 2. 2. ἹΚελεύουσι διασώσαντα αὐτοῖς 
Te «ρόξασα, τὰ μὲν αὐτὸν λαθεῖν, Te δὲ σφίσιν awodovvas Vi. 6.5. Καὶ οὗτος 
δὴ, ὃν dere πισασόν οἱ εἶναι, ταχὺ αὐτὸν sigs Κύρῳ φιλαίσερον, ἢ ἑαυτῷ i. 9. 29. 
"Os εἶδον ὁρμῶντας καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς, σαφῶς νομίζοντες ἐπὶ σφᾶς ἵεσθαι ν. 7. 25. Abe 
yi τε ἐκέλευεν αὐτοὺς, drs οὐδὲν ἂν ἧστον σφεῖς ὠγάγοιεν σὴν στρατιὰν, ἢ Ξξενο- 
φῶν vii. 5.9. Εἰς σὴν ἑαυτοῦ σκηνὴν .. τῶν περὶ αὐτόν ".. περὶ τὴν αὐτοῦ 
σκηνήν i. 6. 4. ᾿Εχέλευε rods φίλους τοῖς τὰ ἑαυτῶν σώματα ἄγουσιν ἵπποις 
ἐμξάλλειν rovroy τὸν χιλὸν, ὡς μὴ πεινῶντες τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ φίλους ἄγωσιν i. 9. 27. 
Ποίαν δ᾽ ἡλικίαν ἐμαυτῷ ἐλθεῖν ἀναμένω: « « ᾿Εὰν σήμερον προδῶ ἐμαυτόν iii. 1. 
14. ᾿Εμαυτῷ γε δοκῶ συνειδέναι viie 6. 11. Πολλοῦ μοι δοκῶ δεῖν Ib, 18. 
Σὺ μὲν ἡγούμενος αὐτὰς ἐσιζημρίους εἶναι σεαυτῷ, ἐκεῖναι δὲ σὲ ὁρῶσαι, ἀχθόμενον 
ἐφ᾽ ἑαυταῖς Mem. ii. 7. 9, ᾿Αμελεῖν ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ἱ. 8.11. [Πολλασλασίους 
ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἐνικᾶτε iii. 2. 14 (ᾧ 352). 


ᾧ 600. Remarks. 1. As pronouns are used mainly for distinction, 
the choice or rejection of a pronoun in a particular instance depends greatly 
upon the use of other pronouns in the connection. The use of the pronouns 
is likewise much influenced in poetry by the metre, and even in prose, to some 
extent, by euphony and rhythm. 


2. With respect to Position, the weaker form of the Genitive, from its want 
of distinctive emphasis, commonly follows ὃ 472. a, but the stronger form, and 
the possessive adjective, ὃ 472.1. Thus, ᾿Εσιλαμξάνεται, αὐτοῦ rns trvos ive 
7.12. "Hy δέ σις αὐτῶν rein σὰς γνώμας iii, 1.41. Τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ . vy 
vo μὲν ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα i. 9.23. ἫἪ ἐκείνων ὕξρις καὶ ἡ ἡμέτερα ὑποψία ili. 1. 21. 
Ta ὑποζύγια τὰ ἐκείνου '. 8,1. ᾿Απέπερμο ψέ μον σὸν δεσπότην Ar. Plut. 12. 
Τὸν βίον τὸν ἐμαυτοῦ Pl. Gorg. 488 a. 


8. The place of the Gen. possessive of the reflexive pron. is commonly sup- 
plied in the plur. by the possessive pron. with αὐσῶν. In the sing. this form 
of expression is poetic. See § 454. 


§ 206. 4. The third person being expressed demonstratively in other 
ways, the pronoun οὗ became simply a retrospective pronoun, i. e. a pronoun 
referring to a person or thing previously mentioned. As such, it performed 
the office both of an wnemphatic reflexive (§ 504), and of a simple personal 
pronoun, and was sometimes used as a general reflexive, without respect to per- 
son. In this last use, it was sometimes imitated by its derivatives (even in 
the Attic, by ἑαυτοῦ and σφέτερος). Thus, Βουλεύοισε μετὰ σφίσιν [= ὑμῖν], 
‘among yourselves,’ K. 398. δώμασιν οἷσιν [= σοῖς} ὠνάσσοις a 402, Φ ρε- 
oly ἧσιν [= ἐμαῖς} ἔχων δεδαϊγμένον ἦτιρ ἠλώμην ν: 320. Asi ἡμᾶς ὠνερέσθαι 
ἑαυςούς [ΞΞ ἡμᾶς αὐτούς, we ought to ask ourselves, Pl. Pheedo, 78 b. Ἐῤλα- 
δούμενοι, ὅπως μὴ ἐγὼ ὑπὸ προθυμίας ἅμα ἕαυτόν [- ἐμαυτόν] cs καὶ ὑμᾶς 
ἐξαπατήσας Ib. 91c. Κλαίω... αὐτὴ πρὸς αὑτήν Soph. El. 283. Αἰσχύνεις 
πόλιν τὴν αὐτὸς avrod, you yourself disgrace your own city, Id. Cid. C. 999. 
Οὐδὲ γὰρ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ [= σεαυτοῦ) σύ γε Ψυχὴν ὁρᾷς Mem. i. 4. 9. Μόρον τὸν 
αὑτῆς οἷσθα JEsch. Ag. 1397. Εὔσερ ὑπὲρ σωτηρίας αὑτῶν [= ὑμῶν αὐτῶν] 
φροντίζετε Dem. 9. 1358, Σφετέρη [== ὑμεσέρη}] ἀπὸ μητέρι σίνετ’ ἀμοιβήν 
Ap. Rh. 4. 1327. , 


ᾧ 207. 5. Some of the forms of oJ are used with great latitude of 
number and gender; thus, (a) wiv and »/y commonly sing., but also plur. 
(especially viv) ; as, viv, him, Aisch. Pr. $33, her, Eur. Hec. 515, it, Soph. Tr. 
145, them, masc. Soph. Cid. T. 868, fem. Id. id. C. 43, neut. Asch. Pr 


332 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK II 


551 wiv, them, Ap. Rh. 2. 8: (Ὁ) σφέ properly plur., but also (especially in 
the tragic poets) sing. 5 as, 792, them, masc. A. 111, fem. Soph. (Ἐξ. T. 1505, 
him, Zisch. Pr. 9, her, Eur. Ale. 834: (6) σφίν rarely sing. 5 as, Hom. H. 19 
19, Aisch. Pers. 759: (d) commonly sing. masc. and fem., but sing. neut 
A. 236, plur. Hom. Ven. 268. (e) So the derived possessives; as, tds, their 
Hes. Op. 583; σφέτερος, his, Id. Sc. 90, Pind. O. 13. 86, my, Theoe. 25. 163 
( 506), thy, Id. 22. 67; cQwiregos, his, Ap. Rh. 1. 643. 


6. The place of of as a reflexive is commonly. supplied in Att. prose by 
iwvrov, and as a simple personal pron., by αὐτός. The plural occurs far 
oftener than the singular, which, except the Dat., is in Att. prose very rare. 
The disuse of the Nom. sing. of this pron. (§ 143. 4) is explained by its re- 
flexive character (cf. § 144). 

7. A common reflexive is sometimes used for the reciprocal pronoun; as, OT 
γε, ἐντὶ μὲν σοῦ συνεργεῖν taurois τὰ συμφέροντα, ἐπηρεάζουσιν ἀλλήλοις, καὶ 
φθονοῦσιν ἱ ἑαυτοῖς μᾶλλον ἢ ἤ τοῖς ὠλλοῖς ere Mem. iii. 5. 16. "Avel ὑφορω 


μένων ἑαυτὰς, ἡδέως ὠλλήλας ἑώρων Ib. ii. 7.12. Συννενικήκατε wer ἀλλήλων " 
way δὲ πολεμίων οἱ πολλοὶ μὲν συνήττηνται μεθ᾽ ‘haba Cyr. vi. 3. 14. 
B. AYTO3. 


§ 608. -The pronoun αὐτός marks a return of the mind 
to the same person or thing (§ 149). This return takes place, 


I.) In speaking of REFLEX ACTION or RELATION. Hence 


αὐτός is used with the personal pronouns in fonming the RE- 
FLEXIVES. See §§ 144, 504. 


II.) In designating a person or thing as THE SAME which 
has been previously mentioned or observed. When thus em- 
ployed, αὐτός (like the corresponding same in English), being 
used for distinction, is preceded by the article (§ 472). Thus, 


Τῇ δὲ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ, and upon the same day, i. 5.12. Eis σὸ αὐτὸ σχῆμα 
1.10. 10, Οὗτος δὲ ὁ αὐτός, and this same person, vii. 3.3. 'Extive σὰ αὐτά 
Mem. iv. 4.6. Ταὐτὰ ἔπασχον iii. 4. 28 (ὃ 39) See ὃ 400. 


§ 309. Ill.) For the sake of EMPHASIS, one of the most 
familiar_modes of expressing which is repetition. When δῦτός 


is thus employed i in connection with the article, its position con- 
forms to § 472. a. Thus, 


Airis Μένων ἐξούλεσο, Meno himself wished it, ii. 1. 5. Ὅσσις « . abrag 
μόσας ἡμῖν, αὐτὸς δεξιὰς δοὺς, αὐτὸς ἐξαπατήσας συνέλαξε rods στρατηγούς 
iii. 2, 4, Κῦρος παρελαύνων αὐτὸς σὺν Πίγρησι i. 8. 12. Αὐτὰ σὰ ἀπὲ 
σῶν οἰκιῶν ξύλα, the very wood from the houses, ii. 2.16. Καὶ SsorsCiera- 
σον ars ἐσσι πάντων ζώων ἄνθρωσος, ‘the very most religious,’ Pl. Leg. 902 b. 
Οὗτοι δ᾽ αὖ eo αὐτοῦ βασιλέως σεταγμένοι ἦσαν, ‘before the person of the 
king,’ i, 7. 11. [ρὸν αὐτῷ τῷ στρασεύμασι, [by the axMy itself} close to the 
army, i. 8. 14. ‘Taig αὐσοῦ «τοῦ ἑαυτῶν στεαπεύμνι το, ‘ directly above,’ iii. 
4.41. El abrod of στρατιῶται .. οἴχοιντο, ‘of their own accord,’ vii. 7. 33. 
Ei αὐτοῖς ποῖς ὠνδράσι σηένδοιτο ἰοῦσι, * with simply the men,’ ii. 3.7. "Edy 
Tis ἄνευ τοῦ σίτου τὸ ὄψον aro ἐσθίᾳ, ‘ by itself,’ or ‘alone,’ Mem. iii. 14. 3 
Αὐσοὺς σοὺς στρατηγοὺς ἀποκαλέσας, having called the generals apart, vii. 3. 88. 
See §§ 418. R., 472. a. 


cu. 4.j Ὁ Αὐτός. 333 


ᾧ 9. Remarks. 1. The emphatic αὐτός is joined with pronouns 
in both their stronger and their weaker forms. Hence it is often used in the 
Nominative with a pronoun which is understood (δ 502). Thus, Οἱ δὲ στρατιῶ- 
wal, οἱ rt αὐτοῦ ἐκείνου καὶ of ἄλλοι, ‘both his own,’ i. 85. 7. Αὐσοῦ φούτου 
ἕνεκεν, on this very account, ἵν. 1.22. Αὐτῷ ἐμοὶ .. δόξει Pl. Phaedo, 91 a, 
Αὐτῷ μι ἔοικεν Ib. 60 6. SOs αὐτὸς σὺ ὁμολογεῖς i. 6. 7. Ὡς ἔφη αὐτός Ib. 
6. Αὐτὸς σὺ ἐπαίδευσας Cc. 7. 4. Αὐτὸς ἐπαίδευσας Ib. 7. Αὐφός εἶμι, 
ὃν ξηφτεῖς ii. 4.16. Αὐτοὶ καίουσιν, they themselves burn, ili. 5. 5. "laobus abe 
σὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησι, ‘ that he himself healed,’ i. 8. 26. Χωρεῖ αὐτός, he goes 
alone, ἵν. 7.11. Αὐσοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν, for we are by ourselves, Pl. Leg. 836 Ὁ. 
ΣΤΡ. Tis γὰρ οὗτος οὐπὶ τῆς κρεμάθρας ἀνήρ: ΜΑΘ. Αὐτός. ΣΤΡ. Tis 
wists; MAO. Σωκράτης. " [Himself] The great man. What great man?’ 
Ar. Nub. 218. 

2. In like manner, αὐτός is used without another pronoun expressed, in the 
oblique cases of the third person; as, Δῶρα ἄγοντες αὐτῷ τε καὶ τῇ γυναικί, 
bringing presents both for himself and for his wife, vii. 3.16. "περ ψεν . . 
στρατιώτας ols Μένων εἶχε, καὶ avrdvi. 2.20. ΙΠ]ολλοὺς μὲν τῶν ἁρπαζόντων 
ἐπέκτειναν, οἱ δὲ καὶ αὐτῶν ἀπέθανον i. 10. 8. 


Nores. «a. From the gradual extension of this use to cases in which there 
was no special emphasis, appears to have arisen the familiar employment of 
abras in the oblique cases, as the common pronoun of the third person. See 
§ 502. In this unemphatic use, αὐτός must not begin a clause. 


_ f£. Sometimes (chiefly in the Epic), αὐσός occurs in the oblique cases, with 
the ellipsis of a pron. of the Ist or 2d Pers. ; as, Αὐτῶν γὰρ ὠπωλόμεθ᾽ ἀφρα- 
δίῃσιν [sc. ἡμῶν] x. 27, Αὐτήν [sc. σέ] ζ. 27. 


§ oii. 5. The emphatic airés often precedes a reflexive, agreeing 
with the subject of the latter. Hyperbaton (§ 329. N.) is sometimes employed 
to bring the two pronouns into immediate connection. Thus, ’Awoxrsivas Aé- 
yiras αὐτὸς τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χειρὶ ᾿Αρταγέρσην, and he is said [himself | with his own 
hand to have slain Artagerses,i. 8.24. Οἱ δὲ “Ἕλληνες . . αὐτοὶ ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν 
ἐχώρουν, ‘by themselves,’ ii. 4,10, Τὸ δὲ ὄψον αὐτὸ καθ᾽ αὑτὸ ἐσθίοντα Mem. 
iii. 14. 2 (cf. Ib. 3, and ὃ 509). Tots τ᾽ αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ πήμασιν βαρύνεται Asch, 
Ag. 886. Totoy παλαιστὴν νῦν παρασκευάζεται ἐπ᾿ αὐτὸς αὑτῷ Id. Pr. 920, 
See δὲ 464, 506. ; 


_ 4. The emphasis of αὐσός sometimes lies in mere contradistinction ; 88, ᾿Αλλ᾽ 
αὐτὰ σιγῶ" -. τῶν βροτοῖς δὲ πήματα ἀκούσατε, ‘those things I omit; but 
hear,’ A'sch. Pr. 442. “Ors καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἡδέα, ἐφ᾽ ἅπερ μόνα δοκεῖ ἡ ὠκρασία 
«οὺ: ὠνθρώπους ἄγειν, αὐτὴ μὲν οὐ δύναται, ἄγειν, ἡ δ᾽ ἐγκράτεια Mem. iv. 5. 9. 
Ὅς, ὦ rai, σέ σ᾽ οὐκ ἑκὼν κάκτανον, σέ τ᾽ αὐτάν, who involuntarily have slain 


$cth you, my son, and you, too, my wife, Soph. Ant. 1340. 


5. The use of αὐτός with ordinals deserves remark ; thus, Περικλῆς . . orga 
enyis ὧν ᾿Αθηναίων δέκατος αὐτός, Pericles being general of the Athenians [him- 
self the tenth] with nine colleagues, Th. ii. 13 (cf. ᾿Αρχεσσράτου .. muse’ ἄλ- 
λὼν δέκα στρατηγοῦντος Id. i. 57). ᾿Ἐξέπεμιψαν Λυσικλέα wiparroy αὐτὸν 
σαραφτηγόν Id. iii. 19. ἫἩ!ρέδη πρεσξευτὴς δέκαπος αὐτός H. Gr. ii. 2. 17. 
But, with the omission of αὐτός, Διαρεῖος᾽.. λαξὼν αὐτὴν [i. 6. σὴν ὠρχὴν] 
ἵδδομιος, ‘ with six confederates,’ Pl. Leg. 695 ὁ. 


C. DEMONSTRATIVE. 
ὁ 322. I. Of the primary pEemonsrrRaTives, the more 


394 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [Boox 11 


distant and emphatic is ἐκεῖνος “ the nearer and more familiar 
15 οὗτος or ude (§ 150). Thus, 


"Edy ἐκείνοις δοκῇ, καὶ rodrovs κακῶς ποιήσουσι, if those should wish it, 
they will even injure these, Pl. Phedr.23lc¢. Ἐκεῖνος μὲν σκληφρὸς, οὗ τος 
δὲ προφερής Id. Euthyd. 271 Ὁ. 


Notes. «. The two may be combined to mark the connection of the MorE 
REMOTE with the NEARER; as of the past with the present, of a saying with 
its ilustration, of that which has been mentioned with that which is present be- 
fore us, &e. Thus, Τοῦτ᾽ [sc. tori] ἐκεῖν᾽ οὑγὼ ἔλεγον, this is that which I said, 
Ar. Ach. 41. Tots’ ἐκεῖνο" “Krizod’ ἑταίρους, μὴ rd συγγενὲς μόνον Eur. 
Hee. 804. 2d’ ἐκεῖνο, this is what I spoke of, Id. Med. 98. ἭΣδ᾽ toe’ ἐκείνη 
τοὔργον ἡ ᾿ξειργασμένη Soph. Ant. 384. ᾿ 


β. Οὗσος sometimes marks the ordinary, and ἐκεῖνος the extraordinary; as, 
Ἔχοντες τούτους τε σοὺς πολυτελεῖς χιτῶνας, having on the rich tunics which 
they are in the habit of wearing, i. 5. 8 (sée Cyr. i. 3. 2). Γεψόνῶσι prrogss 
ἔνδοξοι καὶ μεγάλοι πρὸ ἐμοῦ, Καλλίστρατος ἐκεῖνος, x. τ. A. ‘ that wonderful 
Callistratus, Dem. 301.17. Τὸν ᾿Αρισφείδην ἐκεῖνον Id. 34. 20. 


§ G83. Il. The pronouns οὗτος and ὅδε have in general 
the same force, and the choice between them often depends 
upon euphony or rhythm ; as, τούτω φιλεῖν yor, τῶδε χρὴ πάντας 
σέθειν Soph. Ant. 981. Yet they are not without distinction. 
Οὗτος, as formed by composition with αὐτός, is properly a pro- 
noun of identification or emphatic designation (it may be re- 
garded as a weaker form of ὃ αὐτός, the same, § 502); while 
ods, arising from composition with de, is strictly a deictic pro- 
noun (dsixtixdc, from δείκνῦμι, to point out), pointing to an 
object as before us (see § 150). Hence, 


1.) If reference is made to that which precedes, or which 
is contained in a subordinate clause, οὗτος is commonly used ; 
but if reference is made to that which follows and is not con- 
tained in a subordinate clause, ode. Thus, 


Τεκβρήριον δὲ σούτου καὶ rods, and of this (which has been stated), this (which 
follows) is also a proof, i. 9.29. ‘Eat σούτοις Ἐξενοφῶν τάδε stars, to this Xen- 
ophon replied as follows, ii. 5.41. Totro, 3 σι ἄν δοκῇ «τοῖς Seois, πάσχειν iii. 
2, 6. Τοῦτό γε ἐπίστασθε, ὅτι βορέας .. φέρει Ve 7.7. Τοῦτο πρῶτον ἠρώτα, 
πότερον λῷον εἴη iii. 1, 7. 


Nore. Τὸ the retrospective character of οὗπος may be referred, —(a) Its 
use, preceded by καί, in making an addition to a sentence, the pronoun either 
serving as a repetition of a substantive in the sentence, or, in the neuter Ace. 
or Nom. (commonly plur.), of the sentence itself (cf. §§ 334, 451). The con- 
struction may be explained by ellipsis. Thus, Bévous προσήκει vos σολλοὺς δέ- 
χεσθαι, καὶ τούτους [80. δέχεσθαι.) μεγαλοασρεπῶς, it becomes you to entertain 
many guests, and these magnificently, CEc. 9. 5. Συμμάχων δεήσεται, καὶ rove 
σῶν πλειόνων Mem. ii.6.27. ᾿Εξοήδησαν τῇ Λακεδαίμονι, καὶ ταῦτα (sc. ἐστοίη- 
σαν] sidsres, they assisted Lacedemon, und [they did] that knowing, Ag. 1. 38. 
Μίνωνα δὲ οὖκ ἰζήσει, καὶ ταῦτα wag’ "Agiaiov av, but Meno he did not ask for, 
and that although he was from Ariqus, ii. 4.15. Διεφύλαξε τὴν πόλιν, καὶ 


cH. 4.] DEMUNSTRATIVE. 335 


ταῦτα ἀτείχιστον οὖσαν Ag. 2. 34. ---- (Ὁ) The use of τοῦτο and ταῦτα in as- 
sent; as, “ Ag οὐ πλουσίοις ἀνδράσι μαχιοὔνται αὐποὶ ὄντες πολέμου abranrai ;” 

“Nal roves γε [sc. σαι) ἔφη, ‘Certainly it is so,’ Pl. Rep. 422 Ὁ, II. Οὐ- 
κοὺν ἵτερόν γί τιν ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος μέτε, ἀνύσας σι; 5 K. Ταῦτ᾽, ὦ δίσποτα Ar. 
Pax, 274. BA. ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰσίωμεν. Φ. ΝΟ νυν, εἴπερ δοκεῖ Id. Vesp. 1008. 


§$d14. 2.) Ὅδε surpasses in demonstrative vivacity ; but 
οὗτος in emphatic force and in the extent of its Ba caaace. ops use. 
Thus, 


OIA. Ἦ τόνδε φράζεις; "ATT. Τοῦσον, ὅνπερ εἰσορᾷς, (ΕΔ. Is ruzs the man 
you speak of 2 Mess. The very man, whom you behold, Soph. Gd. T. 1190, 
@EP. Ποῖον ἄνδρα καὶ λέγεις; OIA. Tord’, ὃς πάρεσσιν Ib. 1126. Σὺν 
φοῖσδε τοῖς παροῦσι vovii. 85. 19. Κασαλιπόντες τόνδε σὸν ἄνδρα" «. ἐπεὶ οὗτος 
αὐτὸς ὁμολογεῖ Vi. 6. 26. ‘Huts «τούσδε λαξόντες, taking us who are here, ΤῊ. 
£83; : 

Nore. To the deictic power of ὅδε (§ 513), may be referred the very fre- 
quent use of this pronoun by the Epic and Dramatic poets for an adverb of 
place (ὃ 457.°8); and perhaps, in no small degree, the general fact, that it is 
far more extensively employed in poetry than in prose. 


§ 1. 3.) In the emphatic designation of the first and 
second persons by a demonstrative, ods commonly denotes the 
: first person, as the nearer object; and οὗτος, the second. In 
denoting the first person, the demonstrative may be regarded 
as simply deictic (§ 513); in denoting the second, as expres- 
sive of impatience, authority, contempt, ‘familiarity, &c. For 
the use of οὗτος in address, which is employed both with and 
without ov, see § 348. 3. Thus, 


Μὴ ϑνῆσχ᾽ ὑπὲρ τοῦδ᾽ ἀνδρὸς [== ἐμοῦ), οὐδ᾽ ἐγὼ πρὸ σοῦ, do not you die for 
this man [for me], nor yet I for you, Eur. Ale. 690. oveds dy τοῦδε τἀνδρὸς 
[= ἐμοῦ] ἐμφανῶς Soph. Ged. T. 534 (but, "Avie ὅδ᾽ [= σὺ], ὡς ἔοικεν, sis 
φριδὰς tag Ib. 1160). Τῇῆσδέ γε ζώσης ἔ ἔτι, at least, while I am yet alive, Id. 
Tr. 305. Τάδε [= ἡμεῖς, § 450] . + πιστὰ καλεῖται, καὶ φύλακες Esch. Pers. 
1, Οὐὑσοσὶ ἀνὴρ [= σὺ] οὐ παύσεται, φλυᾶρῶν. Hist μοι, ὦ Σώκρατες, οὐκ 
αἰσχύνῃ Pl. Gorg. 489 Ὁ. Οὗτος σὺ, B πρίσδυ, [This you, or You there, 
§ 457. B), Ho there! old man, Soph. Cid. T. 1121. Οὗτος σὺ, πῶς δεῦρ᾽ 
ἦλθες ; Ho villain! how camest thou hither? Ib. 532. Aden σὺ, voi σαρίφει 3 
Ar. Thesm. 610. Οὗτος, ri σεμνὸν .. βλέπεις ; Fellow! why that solemn look? 
Eur. Ale. 773 (§ 432). See ὃ 343. 3.— This use of ὅδε is very frequent in 
the tragedians. 


§ 516. ΠΙ. Other compounds of αὐτός and δὲ (ὃ 150. «) 
are distinguished in like manner with οὗτος and ὅδε" thus, 


Ὁ Κῦρος ἀκούσας τοῦ Γωξρύον σοιαῦτα, «οιάδε σρὸς αὐτὸν ἔλεξε Cyr. ν. 
2. 31 (§ 513.1). Ὃ μὲν οὕτως εἶπεν ii, 3.23. Κλέαρχος μὲν οὖν ro- 
σαῦσα εἶπε" Τισσαφέρνης δὲ ὧδε ἀπημείφθη li. 5.15. Οὕσως ἐσεὶ δεινὸς 
λέγειν, dere σε πεῖσαι 10." Ἐγένετο οὕτως, ὥσπερ σὺ ἔλεγες vii. 2. 27, 
Tocovroy εἶπεν, ὅτι ob σῶν νικώντων εἴη 11.1.9. Ἢ μεῖς rocodros ὄντες, 
ὅσους σὺ ὁρᾷς Ib. 16. Ἡμεῖς φοσοΐδε ὄντες ἐνικῶμεν τὸν βασιλέα ii. 4. 4 
(8 514). "OP. °Yarorres οὖσα γιγνώσκει πόλει. ΠΡ, Τοιαῦτα" μισεῖται 
γὰρ ἀνόσιος γυνή, ‘Even so,” Eur. ΕἸ. 644 (§ 513. δ). 


996 PRONOUN. - INDEFINITE. [BOOK iit. 


D. hyoerrnirte, 


§ S17. Of the indefinite pronouns, the most extensive 
in its use is tic, which is the simplest expression of indefi- 
niteness or general reference. As such, it is not only joined 
directly with substantives, or used by itself substantively or 
adverbially, but it is also joined with other pronouns, with nu- 
merals and other adjectives, and with adverbs. lt more fre- 
quently follows the word with which it is thus joined, and is 
never placed at the beginning of a sentence, unless perhaps 
when it is emphatic. It is variously translated into English, 
and is sometimes best omitted in translation. Thus, 


"Ανθρωπός ris ἠρώτησε, a certain man asked, ii. 4.15. Παρὰ “Χάρωνί τινι, 
with a certain Charon, H. Gr. v. 4.3. Ὑρόπῳ τινί, in some way, ii. 2. 17 
Ei cw ὑπόσχοισό ri, if he made any promise to any one, i. 9. 7. Aesrveiy ὃ + 
ais ἔχει, to make a supper of what one has, or each one has, ii. 2.4. ἘΠ᾿ μέν 
σις δόρυ ϑηξάσθω, ‘each one, B. 382. Μισεῖ vis ἐκεῖνον, there are those who 
hate him, or many a one hates him, Dem. 42.17. Ἤ τινα ἢ οὐδένα οἶδα, 1 know 
[either some one or none] scurcely an individual, Cyr. vii. 5. 45. Ἢ μὲν γὰρ 
γραφὴ κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ roads τις ἦν, for the accusation against him was something 
like this, or to this effect, Mem. i. 1. 1. “Οποίων civav ἡμῶν ἔσυχον, what sort 
of persons they -found us, v. 5.15. loon τις εἴη χώρα, how extensive a coun- 
try it was, ii. 4. 21. [les δέ τις. ἕν γέ σι, ὧν εἰχήφει, ἐδωρεῖτο, and every 
one presented at least some one thing of what he had taken, Cyr. v. 5.39. Λέγει 
vis tis, @ certain one speaks, Soph. Ant. 269. “Hytous μὲν ἑξδομήκοντά τινας, 
some [i. 6. about] seventy days, Th. vii. 87, Τέσσαρ᾽ ἄττα ῥεύματα Pl. Phedo, 
119. 6. Τὴν ἔλαφον, καλήν τί χοῆμα Cyr.i. 4.8. Οὐ πολλῷ τινι bxodsioregoy, 
not inferior in any great degree, Th. vi. 1. Πολλοὺς δέ σινας ἑλιγμοὺς ἄνω καὶ 
κάτω, “quite a number of turnings,’ Cyr. i. 3.4. Μικρόν σι μέρος, quite a 
small part, Ib. vi. 14. Μικροῦ σινος ἄξια, worth but little, Mem. ii. 1. 19. 
᾿Ολέψοι σινὲς ὄντες, being [some few] but few, iv. 1.10. ‘Ors δεινήν rive λέγεις 
δύναμιν τοῦ φιλήματος εἶναι, ‘ what a fearful one,’ or ‘how fearful,’ Mem. i. 3, 
12. ᾿Εγὼ φυγχάνω ἐπιλήσμων σις ὧν ἄνθρωπος Pl. Prot. 234 ς. Ἑ μέ σις 
γελοῖος idre’s Ib. 8540 ἃ. Μᾶλλόν os ἀνιάσεσαι, will suffer somewhat more, iv. 
8.26. Ἧ ττόν σι ἀπέθανεν, Did he die at all the less? v. 8.11. Σχεδόν ws 
πάση ἡ σπρατιά Vi. 4. 20. Οὐ πάνυ rs νομίζω ἀσφαλὲς εἶναι τοῦτο vi. 1. 36. 
Πὼώς «ι ὑπακούειν Ke. 9. 1. Διαωφερόντως τι Th. i. 198. 


§ OLS. Remarks. α. Tis may be regarded as the Greek indefinite 
article; but it is not commonly expressed with a substantive, unless some 
prominence is given to the idea of indefiniteness. See iv. 3.11, and § 469.2, | 


β. Tis is sometimes emphatic and consequently orthotone (yet editors differ) ; 
as, Σεμνύνεσθαι os vi ὄντε, to pride themselves as if they were something, Pl. 
Phedr, 242 9. Evsamis sins sivas τὶ τοῖς τετελευτηκόσι, 1 am confident that 
there is something for the dead, 1d. Pheedo, 63 ὁ. "Edsks σὶ εἰπεῖν, he seemed to 
[say something] have reason or to be in the right, Id. Amat. 133 ὁ, 

y- An indefinite form of expression is sometimes employed for a definite ; 
thus, Ei οὖν τις σούποις ὑφίξει ἑαυτόν, if thereforegone gives himself up to these 
[= if I give myself up], Cyr. vii. 5.44. Βουλεύεσθαι, πῶς ris τοὺς ἄνδρας 
ἀσπεχᾷ, to counsel, how one [== we] shall drive off the men, iii. 4, 406, Κακὸν 
ἥκει τινί [=o] Ar. Ran. 552. Εἰ μέν σις ἰᾷ ἡμᾶς ἀπιέναι, if one permite 
(= you permit] us to depart, iii. 3. 3. 


cu. 4.] RELATIVE. 337 


E. REeEtLative. 


δ 319. I. Relatives refer to an antecedent either as defi- 
nite or as indefinite ; and are, hence, divided into the DEFINITE 
and the INDEFINITE RELATIVES. 


ReMARKS. 1. In the logical order of discourse, the antecedent, according 
to its name, precedes the relative, but this order may be inverted, whenever 
the perspicuity, energy, or beauty: of the sentence is promoted by the change. 


2. INDEFINITE RELATIVES are formed, either from the definite relatives by 
adding cis or a particle (commonly ἄν), or from the simple indefinites by pre- 
fixing ὅς (in the shortened form’s-); thus, ὅσσις or és ἄν, whoever, ὁποῖος, of 
what kind soever, ὁπόσος, how much soever, sxors, whensoever. See δῷ 153, 
817, 328, 


§ 320. Il. The ΡῬΕΡΙΝΙΤῈ RELATIVE is often used for 
tie indefinite, as a simpler and shorter form ; and the INDEFI- 
NITE sometimes takes the place of the definite, giving, however, 
a somewhat different turn to the expression. ‘Thus, 


Οὖς ἑώρα ἐθέλοντας κινδυνεύειν, τούτους καὶ ἄρχοντας ἐστοίει, whomsoever he 
saw willing to incur danger, these he both made rulers, i. 9. 14. "ἔκαιον πάντα 
ὅσα καύσιμα ξώρων Vi. 3.19 (cf. Καίειν ἅπαντα ὅσῳ ἐντυγχάνοιεν καυσίμῳ 
Ib. 153 and, "Ἔδαπσον πάντας ὁπόσους ἐπελάμβανε τὸ κέρας vi. 5. δ). 
‘Ooure δὲ τὴν Τισσαφέρνους ἀπιστίαν, ὅστις λέγων. ., and see the perfidy 
of Tissaphernes, [066] a man who saying .., iii. 2.4. Οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθε οὔσε 
Θεοὺς οὔτ᾽ ἀνθρώπους, οἵτινές ὀμόσαντες .. ἀπολωλέκασε ii. 5.39. Τάσδε 
τύχας λεύσσων βασιλέως, ὅστις .. βιοτεύσει, ‘one who will live,’ Eur. 
Ale. 239 (see Ib. 659). Nosis ἐκεῖνον, ὅντιν᾽ derins μολεῖν ἐφιέμεσθα ; 
Soph. Cid. T.1054. Χαλεπὰ μὲν τὰ παρόντα, ὁπότε ἀνδρῶν στρατηγῶν τποιού- 
cay στερόμοεθα iii. 2, 2 (ὃ 521, β). See ὃ 525. β. “" 

Nores. (ὦ) After the plural πάντες, all, ὅστις and ὃς ἄν are used in the 
singular, but ὅσοι and ὁπόσοι in the plural. See above and §§ 497. 1, 521. 
(ὁ) The use of an indefinite relative referring to a definite antecedent belongs 
particularly to those cases in which the relative clause is added, not to distin- 
guish, but to characterize, thus representing the antecedent. as one of a class. 


§ $2. Ill. The relative should correspond with its an- 
tecedent in specific meaning, as well as in grammatical form. 
‘Phus, the definite relative with οὗτος should be ὅς “ with zo- 
οὔτος, οἷος * with τοσοῦτος, ὅσος" &c. ‘The exceptions to this 
rule arise mostly from the use of a simpler, more familiar, 
or more emphatic pronoun, in the place of that which is 
strictly appropriate. Some apparent exceptions arise from 
ellipsis. Thus, 


Mx?’ ἐπιδσρεεῖν φσοιαύτης δόξης ἧς = dias | πολλοὶ « royxdvoves, ἀλλὰ Tis 
συλικαύτης τὸ μέγεθος ἣν [ΞΞ ἡλίκην] μόνος ἄν σὺ τῶν νῦν ὄντων κτήσασθαι δυ- 
νηθείης " μηδ᾽ ἀγαπᾷν λίαν τὰς φοιαύτας ἀρετὰς: ὧν an οἵων) καὶ «οῖς φαύλοις 
μἕτεστιν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκείνας ὧν οὐδεὶς ἂν πονηρὸς κοινωνήσειε, ‘such glory as many ob- 

. tain, &.,’ Isoer. 40% ἃ. Lldvrwy, ὅσοι [for of, OF SC. φσοσούτων] εἰς Κασσωλοῦ 
πιδίον ὀῤῥϊεινοώ, ‘of all who muster,’ or ‘of all, as many as muster,’ i. 1.2 


ἐν 


398 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BooK π|.- 


(cf. Tl&es, οἷς ἐσύγχανεν, oui. 8.1). Πᾶν, ὅσον ἐγὼ ἐδυνάμην vii. 6. 86. 
“Taide,” ἔφη, “xen ποιεῖν, ὅσα 6 ϑεὸς ἐκέλευσεν iii. 1.7. Ἑ “σὰ γὰρ ἡμί- 
ῥας, ὕσασσερ ἐπορεύθησαν διὰ τῶν Καρδούχων iv. 3. 2. 


Remarks. α. “Os is also used for οἷος with an ellipsis of the antecedent, 
as, “Eworte dv ἧς ὃς [= ποιοῦσος οἷος} εἶ, as long as you are what [=such as} 
you are, Pl. Phedr. 243 6. "Ὧν γε ὅς εἶμι Id. Thext. 197 a. 


B. The place of a relative pronoun is often supplied by a RELATIVE ADVERB, 
chiefly in designations of place, time, and manner; as, Eis χωρίον, ὅθεν ὄψον- 
σαι Sérarray, to a place [whence], from which they would behold the sea, iv. 
7.20. Ἔν τῷ ὄρει, ἔνθα περ ἰσκήνουν iv. 8.25. Τὸ αὐτὸ σχῆμα .. ὥσπερ 
©) πρῶσον μαχούμενος συνήει, the same order [88] with that in which he first ad- 
vanced to the battle, i. 10.10. ‘“Opoia γάρ μοι δοκοῦσι πάσχειν, ὥσπερ εἴ 
Tis πολλὰ ἰσθίων μηδέποτε ἐμπίπλαιτο Symp. iv. 37. Kad cot ϑεοὶ πόροιεν, ὡς 
ἐγὼ ϑέλω Soph. Cid. C. 1124. 


§ 322. IV. The relative pronouns belong to the class 
of adjectives (§ 73), and, as such, agree with a substantive 
expressed or understood. ‘This substantive, or one correspond- 
ing to it, is also the antecedent of the relative. It is commonly 
expressed in but one of the two clauses, more frequently the 

ormer, but often the latter ; and may be omitted in both, if it 
is a word which will be readily supplied (§ 447). Thus, 


Συνέπεμ ψεν αὐτῇ στρατιώτας, ods [sc. στρατιώτας) Μένων εἶχε, he sent with - 
her the soldiers, which [soldiers] Meno had, i. 2.20. ᾿Αποπέροιψαι, πρὸς ἕαυ- 
φὸν [Sc. σὸ σσράσευμα,) ὃ εἶχεν στράτευμα, to send back to him the force which 
he had [what force he had], Ib. 1. Κῦρος δὲ ἔχων ods εἴρηκα, and Cyrus hav- 
ing the men whom I have mentioned, lb. 5. Eis δὲ ἦν ἀφίκοντο κώμην, [SC 
αὕφη ἡ κώμη) μεγάλη σε ἦν ἵν. 4.2. Karaoxsudlovrd os ἧς ἄρχοι χώρας 
1.9.19. Λαβόντες [80. σοσούτους βοῦς,} ὅσοι ἦσαν βόες vii. 8.16. “Ersgos 
γάρ εἶσιν, οἷσιν εὔχομαι ϑεοῖς Ar. Ran. 889. Οἵδ᾽, ἣν ἔθρεψεν ᾿Ἑὰρμειόνην μήτηρ 
iva Eur. Or. 1184. 


Remarks. 1, Other words, belonging alike to both clauses, are subject to 
a similar ellipsis; thus, Τισσαφέρνης ἐπεφάνη [sc. ἔχων), οὕς τε αὐτὸς ἱππέας 
ἦλθεν ἔχων, Tissaphernes appeared, having both the cavalry which he had him- 
self browght [had come having], iii. 4.13. ΟἿ; σοσούτων πέρι σκέψις, ὅσων 
wiv, πρόκειται [= Οἷς πρόκειται σκέψις περὶ τοσούτων, περὶ ὅσων ἡμῖν σκέψις 


πρόκειται] Pl. Rep. 533 e. 


2. It will be observed, that when the antecedent is expressed in the same 
clause with the relative, it is commonly put at the end, as though the rest of 
the clause were regarded as modifying it like an adjective. See § 526. 


§ 2B. 5. The erzrrsis of a demonstrative pronoun before the rela- 
tive is very frequent; as, indeed, of the whole antecedent, when it can be sup- 
plied from the relative. When this ellipsis of the antecedent takes place, ter 
often unites with the relative to form a species of compound pronoun or advert 
remaining itself unchanged, whatever may be the appropriate number, tense, 
or inode. Thus, ΠΙροὐξάλλοντο σπρίσξεις πρῶτον μὲν Χειρίσοφον, ὅτι ἄρχων 
ἥρητο" tors δ᾽ of [= ἦσαν δ᾽ ἐκεῖνοι, of] καὶ Ἐξενοφῶντα, they proposed us am- 
bassadors, first Chirisophus, because he had been chosen commander ; and some 
also [thera were also those who proposed] Xenophon, vi. 2.6. [lady ᾿Ιώνων, καὶ 


cH. 4.} RELATIVE. — ATTRACTION. 339 


᾿Αχαιῶν, καὶ ἔστιν ὧν ἄλλων ἐθνῶν Th. iii. 92. Καὶ ἔστι μὲν ods αὐτῶν κατε- 
ξαλον H. Gr. ii. 4. 6. "Ἔστιν οὕστινας ἀνθρώπων σεθαύμακας ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ ; Mem. 

4. 9. (Cf. Εἰσὶ δ᾽ αὐτῶν obs οὐδ᾽ ἄν παντάπασι, διαξαίητε ii. 5.18; Ἦσαν 
δὲ of καὶ πῦρ προσέφερον v. 9. 145 and, with the singular for the plural i in the 
Imperfect also, Ἦν δὲ τούτων σῶν σταθμῶν obs πάνυ μακροὺς ἤλαυνεν ἱ. 5. To 
See § 364.) ‘Os καὶ αὐτῷ μεταμέλειν ἔσθ᾽ ὅσε, so that [there were times 
when] sometimes he even regretted it, ii. 6.9. “Eos δὲ ἔνθα, and there are places 
where, or in some places, Cyr. viii. 2. 5. "Eorww ὅπως σις ἄν ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσαι: 
Is there any way in which one could deceive you? or, Is it possible that one should 
deceive you? v. 7.6. Οὐ γὰρ ἔσθ᾽ ὅπου μ᾽ basis Soph. Cid. T. 448. 


Nores. (a) From a similar union of ἔν, [== ἔνεσσι] with the relative, have 
arisen the compounds Zvi, some, and ἐνίοτε, sometimes. (Ὁ) The ellipsis some- 
times extends even to the substantive verb itself; thus, Ὅσεου [for "Errw 
ἕπου], in some places, Lac. 10. 4. 


§ 324. V. The intimate relation of clauses connected 
by a relative pronoun, or a kindred particle, often produces 
an ATTRACTION, sometimes simply affecting the position or 
form of particular words, and sometimes even uniting the 
two clauses in one. Not unfrequently a combination results, 
which may be regarded as a species of compound or complex 
pronoun. ‘Thus, ! 


§ 625. A.) A word or phrase is often made a part of 
the relative, instead of the antecedent, clause; and sometimes 
the two clauses are blended in their arrangement. ‘Thus, 


Λόγους ἄκουσον, οὕς σοι δυσσυχεῖς ἥκω φέρων, hear the sad tidings which I 
bring you, Eur. Or. 853. Eis ᾿Αρμενίαν ἥξειν, ἧς ᾿Ορόντας ἦρχε πολλῆς καὶ 
εὐδαίμονος {for πολλὴν καὶ εὐδαίμονα) i iii. 5.17. ἙΠπὶ παῖδ᾽, ὃν ἐξ ἐμῆς 
χερὸς Πολύδωρον tx τε πατρὸς ἐν δόμοις ἔχεις, εἰ ζῇ, ‘tell me respecting my 
son Polydorus, whom you have,’ Eur. Hec. 986. Ταύτην γ᾽ ἰδὼν ϑάσουσαν, 
ὃν σὺ τὸν νεκρὸν ἀπεῖπας Soph. Ant. 404. “Ereoa τοιαῦτα, ἃ δή τινες TH 
φαντάσμαςσα ὑσὸ ἀπειρίας ἀληθῆ καλοῦσιν Pl. Theet. 167 Ὁ. Οὗσοι, ἐσεὶ 
εὐθέως ἤσθοντο τὸ πρᾶγμα, ἀπεχώρησαν [for ἐπεὶ ἤσθοντο rd πρᾶγμα, εὐθέως 
ἀπεχώρησαν»), these, when they understood the matter, aime oa withdrew, H. 
Gr. iii. 2. 4.. See ὃ 522. 


Remark. We observe this construction particularly, 
a.) In expressions of time and possibility with the superlative; as, Ileea- 


rousha παρεῖναι, ὅταν τάχιστα διαπραξώμεθα [for “παρεῖναι τάχισσα, ὅταν 
διαπραξώμεθα), we shall endeavour to be present [most quickly, when] as 8005 
as we have accomplished, Cyr. iv. 5. 33. ‘Qs φάχιστα ἕως ὑπέφαινεν, tbvovre 
iv. 3.9. "Ἐπεὶ ἦλθε τάχιστα, . . ἀπέδοτο, as soon as he had come, he sold, vii, 
-2.6. "Hyayov.. ὁπόσους. ἐγὼ wasiorous ἐδυνάμην, I have brought [the most 
waich] as many as I could, Cyr. iv. 5.29. "Ἔχων ἱπαίας ὡς ἂν δύνηται πλεί- 
στους, bringing as many horse as he should be able, i. 6. 3 (ὃ 521.8). “Ὡς μά- 
dura ἐδύνατο ἐπικρυπτόμενος i. 1.6. ᾿Απήγοντο... ὅποι ἐδύναντο προσωτάτω 
vi. 6.1. λαύνων ὦ ὡς δυνατὸν ἦν τάχιστα, riding as fast as was possible, Cyr. 
bt 4.3. [Πείσομαι ἢ δυνατὸν 56. ἔσται} μάλιστα i. 3.15. Διέβξαινον . . ὡς 
οἷόν τε [se. ἦν] μάλιστα πορύλον μἱνεὶρ ii. 4. 24. Ἕως ἄν ταῦτα ὡς ἔνι 
[= ἔνεστι] ἥδιστα γίνητα, Mem. iv. 5. 9. 


340 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [RooK Hm. 


Nore. The word denoting possibility is often understood ; thus, ‘Os «ά- 
χιστα (sc. δυνατὸν ἦν] πορεύεσθαι, to march as quickly as possible, i. 3. 14 
Πῶς ἄν πορευοίμεθά τε ὡ; ἀσφαλέστατα, xal.. ὡς κράτιστα paxoipsbe iii 
2.27. Ἵνα ὡς «πλεῖστοι μὲν ἡμῶν ἐν τοῖς ὅπλοις ὦσιν, ὡς ἐλάχιστοι δὲ, σκευδῷο 
ρῶσι Ib. 38. Διαξιξάξειν εἰς τὴν ᾿Ασίαν ὅτ, τάχιστα (Sc. ἄν δύνηται] vil. 1. 8 
(ὅτι in this construction with the superlative is the neuter of ὅστις, used ad- 
verbially). “Ὅπως ὅτι awapacnivacriraroy λάξοι βασιλέα, that he might take 
the king as unprepared as possible, i. 1.6. “Ori «λείσφους καὶ βελτίστους Ib 
“Orws δ᾽ ἄριστα Asch. Ag. 600. Ὅσον τάχιστα Soph. El. 1433. 


6.) In the use of the indefinites, which, even in composition with ὅς (ὃ 519. 
2), often seem to belong in force to the antecedent claise; thus, Ἢ γεμόνα 
airsiv Κῦρον, ὅστις. . ἀπάξει [= ἡγεμόνα τινὰ, ὅς}, to ask Cyrus for some guide, 
who would conduct them, i. 3.14. "“Eoow ὅ σε [= σὶ, δ] σε ἠδίκησα; Is there 
aught in which I have wronged you? i. 6.7. Καὶ ἄλλον ὅντινα ἄν δυνώμεθα 
v. 5.12. Οὐ διαφρίξων, ὅπου μὴ ἐπισιτισμοῦ ἕνεκα .. ἐκαθέζετο, ‘[anywhere, 
where he did not) except where,’ i. 5. 9. See §§ 520, 523. 


§ 326. B.) The retative takes the case of the ante- 
cedent.. This.is the common construction, when the ANTECE- 
DENT is a Genitive or Dative, and the RELATIVE would prop- 
erly be an Accusative depending upon a verb. ‘Thus, 


"Ex ray πόλεων, ὧν Τισσαφέρνης ἰσύγχανεν ἔχων, from the cities, which Tis- 
saphernes happened to have,i. 1.8. To ἀνδρὶ, ᾧ ἄν ἕλησθε, πείσομαι, I will 
obey the man, whom you may choose, i.3.15. "Αξιοι «ἧς ἐλευθερίας, ἧς κέκτησθε 
i. 7.3. (Cf. Ἔν σαῖς σπονδαῖς, ὥς .. ἐποίησαν ἵν. 1. 1. ois κτήνεσιν, ἃ ἐκ 
σῶν Ταόχων ἔλαθον iv. 7.17.) Τούτων, ὧν σὺ δεσσοινῶ. [τξΞ ἃ σὺ δεσαοίνας,, 
§ 434] χαλεῖς Uc. 11.1. "Αρχοντας toroiss ἧς κασεστρέφενο χώρας i. 9. 14 
(9 522. 2). Biv ᾧπερ εἶχον οἰκετῶν πιστῷ μόνῳ Soph Gd. C. 334. Mera- 
δίδως οὗπερ αὐτὸς ἔχεις σίτου Mem. ii. 7.13. Χειμῶνός γε ὄντος οἵου λέγεις 
v. ὃ. 3. 


Remarks. «a. If the ANTECEDENT is a demonstrative, it is commonly omit- 
ted ; as, Σὺν [sc. ἐκείνοις] οἷς ἔχω, with those whom I have, vii. 3. 48, ‘Aug 
ὧν εἶχον iv. 5.17. ᾿Ανδ᾽ ὧν εὖ tradi. 8. 4. Ἡμιόλιον πᾶσι δώσειν οὗ πρό- 
regov ἔφερον Ib. 21. ᾿Εδήλωσε δὲ votre οἷς τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ txgarcs ii. 2. 18. 


β. Sometimes, though rarely, the Dat. and even the Nom. are attracted in 
like manner ; as, ὯΩν [= ἐκείνων, οἷς} ἠσίσσει, πολλούς, many of those whom 
he distrusted, Cyr.v.4.39. "EZ ὧν [= ἐκείνων, δ] μεθ᾽ ἑκατέρων γέγονεν, from 
what he has been with either party, Isocr. 69 ¢() 450). Βλάσσεσθα, ἀφ᾽ ὧν 

= ἐκείνων, 2) ἡμῖν παρεσκεύασται, to be injured by those things which have beer. 
prepared by ws [in respect to which preparation has been made by us], Th. vii. 
67. Οὐδέν κω εἰδότες τῶν ἦν περὶ Σάρδις Hat. i. 78. — When the subject of a 
verb is attracted, the verb, if retained, becomes impersonal. Cf. § 529. 


y. The relative followed by βούλει may, as if a compound pronoun (ὃ 524), 
agree with the antecedent in any case; thus, Περὶ [Πολυγνώτου, ἢ ἄλλου ὅτου 
[== ὅνφινα] βούλει, respecting Polygnotus, or any other one whom you please, Pl. 
Io, 533 a, Τὰ δέκα, ἢ doris βούλει ἄλλος ἀριθμὸς Id. Crat. 432 ἃ. Οἷα cod- 
Tuy ὃς βούλει εἴργασται Id. Gorg. 517 Ὁ. Compare, in Lat., quivis. 


3. RELATIVE ADVERBS are likewise affected by attraction; thus, Avexoul. 
ζοντο εὐθὺς obey [== ἐκεῖθεν Saou] ὑσεξέθεντο waidas, they immediately brought 
over their children [whence] from the places where they had put them for safety, 


cu. 4.] RELATIVE. — ATTRACTION 341 


Th. i. 89. "Ex δὲ γῆς, ὅθεν [== οὖ] προὔκεισο Soph. Tr. 701. Χωριῖν χρεὼν 
ὅποι [- ἐκεῖσε ὅπου) χϑονὸς κρύψαντε λήσομεν δέμας Eur. Iph. T. 118. Cf, 
§§ 527. R, 681. β. 


§ 627. C.) The anrecepenr takes the case of the rela- 
tive. ‘This is termed INVERTED aTTRacTION. Thus, 


Ανεῖλεν αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ασόλλων ϑεοῖς [= Sods] οἷς ἔδει ϑύειν, Apollo made known 
to him the gods to whom he must sacrifice, iii. 1.6 (cf. Θυσάμενος οἷς ἀνεῖλεν 
ὁ ϑεός Ib. 8). “Ors Λακεδαιμόνιοι «΄ὅντων [= πάντα], ὧν δέονται, πεπιραγότες 
εἶεν H. Gri 1. 4. 9, ᾿Ανδάνουσα μὲν φυγῇ πολιτῶν [= πολίταις] ὧν ἀφίκετο 
χϑόνα Id. Med. 11. Τάσδε [= Αἵδε] δ᾽ ὥσπερ εἰσορᾷς, ἐξ ὀλξίων ἄζηλον εὑροῦ- 
σαι βίον, χ{ροῦσι πρὸς σέ Soph. Tr. 283. Λόγος δ᾽ ὃς ἐμπέπτωκεν ἀρτίως ἐμοὶ. 
στείχοντι δεῦρο, συμξαλοῦ γνώμην Id. Cid. Ο. 1150. Tov ἄνδρα φοῦτον, ὃν πά- 
λα, ζητεῖς, . « οὗτός ἔστιν ἐνθάδε Id. Cid. T. 449 (ὃ 499). Κυοσνωρίτας δὲ, ods 
ὑμετέρους φατὲ εἶναι, εἴ τι αὐτῶν εἰλήφαμεν, αὐτοὶ αἴτιοί εἰσιν V. 5. 19. 


Remark. Inverted attraction appears also in ADVERBS; thus, Βῆνα, κεῖθεν 
[== κεῖσε], ὅθεν περ ἥκει, to return thither, whence he came, Soph. Cid. C. 1227. 
Καὶ ἄλλοσε [= ἀλλαχοῦ], ὅποι ἄν ἀφίκῃ, ἀγασήσουσί os Pl. Crito, 45 Ὁ. Ch 
§§ 526. 3, 531. β. 


§ 628. D.) The two clauses are brought into one by 
the ellipsis of a substantive verb (cf. § 538). This is termed 
CONDENSED CONSTRUCTION, ΟΥ̓ CONDENSATION. The yerb is 
omitted either (a.) with the antecedent, or (b.) with the rela- 
tie. . 


a.) With THE ANTECEDENT. We here distinguish the fol- 
lowing cases : — ἀν ον, 


1.) After a demonstrative pronoun or article, the RELATIVE is also omitted, 
and the ANTECEDENT takes its place in the construction. This form of con- 
densation is particularly frequent in questions and exclamations, especially with 
the poets. Thus, Ti +03’ αὐδᾷς [= Ti ἐσσι «τόδε, ὃ aides]; What is this, 
which you say? Eur. Ale. 106. iv’ ἄνδρα révd’ [== els ἀνήρ ἔστι ὅδε, ὃν] ἐσὶ 
σκηναῖς ὁρῶ, What man is this, whom I see by the tents? Id. Hec. 733. Ti 
wour ἀρχαῖον ἐννέπεις κακόν , Soph. Ed. T. 1033. Otay ἔχιδναν τήνδ᾽ ἔφῦσας 
What a viper is this, which thou hast produced! Eur. Ion, 1262. Τοῦτο μὲν 
οὐδὲν ϑαυμαστὸν λέγεις Pl. Prot. 318 b. Tis 6 σόθος [= Tis ἐστι ὃ πόθος, ὃς} 
αὐτοὺς ixero; Soph. Ph. 601 (see ᾧ 480. α). Καλόν γέ wos τοὔνειδος ἐξωνεῖδι- 
gas, the reproach which you have cast upon me is an honor, Eur. Iph. A. 305. 
In the following sentence, there appears to be a union between an exclamation 
without a verb, and a relative clause; Τοὺς fuss ἴδε rarne ϑανάτους αἰκεῖς 
[= "2 ϑάνατοι αἰκεῖς, οὃς ἴδε πατὴρ ἐμό:}} The cruel death my futher saw! 
Soph. El. 205. — Expressions like the following are still more elliptical ; Ἔνθα 
ἡ Tesrveyia [= ἰστὶ χωρίον, ὃ Γριπυργία) καλεῖται, where there is a place, 
which is called Tripyrgia, H. Gr. v. 1. 10. Ἔν ᾧ καλοῦμεν τὸ ζῇν, in which 
is that which we call rire, Pl. Phedo, 107 ec. 


2.) Οὐδείς with ὅσσις οὐ (or sometimes ὅς οὐ) forms a species of compound 
pronoun (ὃ 524); as, Οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐκ ἀφέξεται, there is no one, who will not 
not refrain, Ven. 12. 14 (cf. Οὐδεὶς ἦν, ὅστις οὐκ wero H. Gr. vii. 5.26). Kae 
φσαγελῷ ἂν ἡμῶν οὐδεὶς ὕστις οὐ, every body would laugh at us, Pl. Hipp. Maj. 
299 a. Οὐδεὶς Gs οὐχὶ τῶνδ᾽ ὀνειδιεῖ Soph. CEd. T. 373. Οὐδενὸς * - οὐδείς 

29 * 


912. SYNTAX OF TH. PRONOUN. | BOOK 1 


ters, | ὅτου οὗ πάντων ἄν ὑμῶν καθ᾽ ἡλικίαν πατὴρ εἴην Pl. Prot. $17 6. Οὐ- 
δενὶ ὅτῳ οὐκ ἀποκρινόμενος Id. Meno, ΤῸ c. [Περὶ ὧν οὐδίνα κίνδῦνον [== ovdes- 
κίνδυνος ἦν, ὅντιν᾽ οὐχ ὑπέμειναν οἱ πρόγονοι Dem. 295. 7. ---- So, with an in- 
terrogative for οὐδείς, Τίνα οἴεσθε ὅντινα οὐ βραχείᾳ προφάσει ἀποστήσεσθαι 

Th. iii. 39. 


§ $29. Ὁ.) Wirs tne Rezative. This occurs with 
the relatives of comparison, oioc, ὅσος, ἡλίκος, which then unite 
with the substantive or adjective following, to form a species of 
compound adjective. To this, as to other adjectives, the article 
may be prefixed (§ 472). Thus, 


“Χαριζόμεενον οἵῳ σοὶ ἀνδρὶ [= ἀνδρὶ ποιούτῳ, οἷος σὺ ei], obliging a man such 
as you are [ἃ sucH AS you man], Mem. ii. 9.3. Of δὲ οἷοί περ ὑμεῖς ἄνδρες, 
but [the sucH AS you men] men of your rank, or men like you, Cyr. vi. ἡ, 2. 
II gis ἄνδρας τολμηροὺς οἵους καὶ ᾿Αθηναίους Th. vii. 21. "Ovros τοῦ xdyou οἵου 
δεινοτάτου [= ποιούφου, οἷός tors δεινότατος), the cold being [such as is mort 
dreadful] of the most intense kind Pl. Conv. 220 Ὁ (see iv. 8. 2; vii. 1. 24). 
Μαχιαιρίον ὅσον ξνήλην Λακωνικήν [== σοσοῦσον, ὅση ἐσσὶ ξυήλη Λακωνική), a 
hnife about the size of the Spartan small-sword, iv. 7. 16. ἙΕἰκὸς ἄνδρα κυφὸν͵ 
ἡλίκον Θουκυδίδην [== τηλικοῦτον, ἡλίκος Θουκυδίδης ἐσσι], ἐξολέσθα, Ar. Ach. 
105. Δεινὸν σοῖσιν ἡλίκοισι νῷν Id. Eccl. 465.— In like manner, Tod περισσοῦ 
ὄναος οὐχ, οὗπερ τῆς τριάδος Pl. Phedo, 104 a. 


Remarks. «a. A substantive of a different number following the relative 
remains in the Nominative ; as, Newvias δ᾽ οἵους [== rosodrous, οἷος σύ, but young 
men such as you. ‘Tay οἵωνπερ αὐτὸς ὄντων, of men like him, H. Gr. i. 4. 16. 


β. In this construction, ὅσος is commonly used in the neuter form ὅσον, as - 
indeclinable, and may be often regarded as a mere adverb (ὃ 450. 3, δ) ; thus, 
Oi ἱππεῖς τούτου ὅσον ἑξακόσιοι, ‘as many as 600, or, ‘about 600,’ i. 8. 6. 
Aabaw . . ὅσον τριχιοίνικον ἄρτον Vii. 3.23. ᾿Ασέχει ὅσον π“αρασάγγην, ‘ about 
a parasang,’ iv. 5.10. Kal resCara ὅσον ϑύματα, and sheep [as many as the 
sacrifices would be] enough for sacrifice, vii. 8.19. So, doubled, “Ὅσον ὅσον 
oriany Ar. Vesp. 212. See καὶ 450. δ. 


y- In the Epic, the demonstrative is sometimes expressed instead of the 
relative; as, TiyCov . . ἐσιεικέα roiov [= σοῖον, οἷός ἐστι ἐπιεικής) ¥. 246, 


§ 530. EK.) A RELATIVE PRONOUN takes the place of a _ 
demonstrative pronoun and a connective particle. 


The term demonstrative pronoun, as here used, includes the personal vronoun 
and the article. See ὃ 467.1. Of this form of attraction there are two 
kinds, according as the demonstrative belongs to the jirst or the secord of the 
two clauses which are united. 


a.) When the demonstrative belongs to the jirst clause. In this kind of 
attraction the pronoun is commonly either governed by a preposition or adverb, 
or is itself used adverbially. Thus, "Eg’ φ' [=iai σούτῳ, dort] μὴ καίειν τὰς 
κώμας, upon this condition, that they should not burn the villages, iv. 2. 19 (cf. 
Ἐπὶ τοῖσδε, ὥστε Th. iii. 114). ἜΦ᾽ ᾧ σε [Ξ ἐπὶ σούτῳ, ὥστε) πλοῖα συλ- 
λέγειν, for the purpose of collecting |for this purpose, that we might collect] 
vessels, vi. 6. 22. Μέχρι οὗ [= σοῦ χρόνου, ὅσε] εἶδον, until [the time when } 
they saw, v. 4. 16 (ef. Μέχρι τοσούτου, ἵως Th. i. 90). Μέχρι οὗ [= rod χω- 
φίου, ἔνθα] διὰ καῦμα οὐ δύνανται οἰκεῖν ἄνθρωποι, ‘to the region where,’ i. 7. 6 


UH. 4. | RELATIVE. — ATTRACTION. 343 


Διώξας ἄχρι οὗ [= τοῦ τόπου, of) ἀσφαλὲς wero εἶναι, ‘as far as,’ Cyr. v. 4. 
16. Ἐπεὶ weoriu year τοὺς ᾿Αμυκλαιεῖς μέχρι ὁπόσου αὐτοὶ κελεύοιεν H. Gr 
iv. 5.12. ᾿᾽Ἐξ ὅσου ἀπεδήμησε, since he had been abroad, vii. 8. 4. Ἔν ᾧ δὲ 
ὡσ'λίζοντο, and whilst they were arming, ii. 2.15. Odros δέ μοι φίλος μέγι- 
eros, οὕνεκ᾽ [od ἕνεκα = σούτου ἕνεκα, ὅτι} ᾿Ατρείδας σευγεῖ, ‘ because,’ Soph. 
Ph. 585. ᾿Ανδ᾽ ὧν [= "Ave rodrou, ὅπι1, because, Id. Ant. 1068. Οὐ δοκεῖ 
Core » διαφέρειν σὰ ixovoim τῶν ἀκουσίων, ἢ [τ- ταύτῃ, ὅτι) ὁ μὲν ἑκὼν σεινῶν 
φάγει ay, ὁπότε βούλοιτο Mem. ii. 1. 18. 


Nore. Hdt. sometimes uses μέχρι οὗ or ὅσου as ἃ compound adverb gov- 
erning the Gen. G $94); as, Μέχρι οὖ ὀκσὼ wigywvi. 181. Μέχρι ὅφτον 
“«ληθώρης ἀγορῆς ii. 173. ; 


ᾧ osi. b.) When the demonstrative belongs to the second clause; as, 
Tis οὕτω μαίνεται, ὅστις [dors ἐκεῖνος) ob βούλεταί σοι φίλος sivas; Who is 
so mad, that he does not wish [or as not to wish] to be your friend? ii. 5.12 
(see Ib. 6. 6 ; vii. 1. 28). ᾿Ασπόρων ici. ., οἵτινες ἐθέλουσι, it is the part of 
those without resource, that they should wish, or to wish, ii. 5.21. Οὐκ ἔσειν 
οὕσω μῶρος, ὃς Saveiv ἐρᾷ Soph. Ant. 220. Τοσοῦτον ἄλγος, οὗ [= dors αὐ- 
Tov} ποτ᾿ οὐ λελήσεται, such grief, that he will never forget it, Eur. Alc. 198. 
Karaxrsiguy τήν τε γυναῖκα, οἵου ἀνδρὸς [== ὅτι τοιούτου ἀνδρὸς} origure, καὶ 
«ὸν ἄνδρα, οἵαν [== ὅτι τοιαύτην) γυναῖκα καταλιπὼν οὐκέτ᾽ ὄψοιτο, commiserat- 
ing, both the wife, that she had lost such a husbund, und the husband, that, leaving 
such a wife, he would never behold her more, Cyr. vii. 3.13. Οἱ δὲ δεσπότιν 
στένωσιν, οἵαν ix δόμων ἀπώλεσαν Eur. Alc. 948 (ὃ 425. 4). 


Notes. a. Akin to this construction is the extensive use of the relative 
in explanation, or the assignment of reason or purpose; as, Θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, 
ὃ: .«. δίδως, you conduct strangely, (who give} that you give, or in giving, Mem. 
ii. 7.13. Ὅσλα κτῶνται, οἷς ἀμυνοῦνται ποὺς ἀδικοῦντας, they prepare ayms, 
that with these they may repel assailants, Ib. 1.14. Kai πόλει πέρι ψον ri’, 
ὅστις σημανεῖ, and send sume one to the city, to give notice, Eur. Iph. T. 1208. 


8. RELATIVE ADVERBs likewise exhibit this form of attraction (cf. §§ 526. 
3, 527. R.); as, Εὐδαίμων γάρ μοι ὁ ἀνὴρ ἐφαίνετο, . . ὡς [== ὅτι οὕτως} ἀδεῶς 
καὶ γενναίως ἐτελεύτα, for the man appeared to me happy, that he died so fear- 
lessly and nobly, Pl. Phedo, 58 86. Σοφήν σ᾽ ἔθρεψεν ᾿Ελλὰς, ὡς ἤσθον καλῶς 
Eur. Iph. T. 1180. 


§ 332. Remark. -ForMs OF COMPARISON are especially 
liable to attraction and ellipsis (cf. ὃ 391. 7, 461); thus, 


Μόνοι ve ὄντες ὅμοια ἔσραταον, ὥπερ [== ἐκείνοις, dose) ἄν wer ἄλλων ὄντες, 
[like things, which } things like to those which, v. 4. 34. ’Eéy μὲν ἡ πεᾶξις 
i παραπλησία, οἵᾳ πες καὶ πρόσθεν ἐχρῆτο τοῖς ξένοις i. 3.18. Οὔτε γὰς αυρὸς 
wr ἄστρων ὑπέρπερον βέλος, οἷον [= πτοιούτον, οἷον) τὸ τᾶς ᾿Αφροδίτας Ἱ inow ἐκ 
γιρῶν Ἔρως Eur. Hipp. 580. Τοσοῦσον δὲ διαφέρειν ἡ ἡμᾶς δεῖ τῶν δούλων, ὅσον 
i μὲν δοῦλοι ἄκοντες τοῖς δεσπόταις ὑπηρετοῦσιν, ἡμᾶς δὲ .. ἑκόντας δεῖ “ποιεῖν, 
‘insomuch as this, that slaves,’ Cyr. viii. 1. 4. Τοσοῦσον μόνον σε ἐγίγνωσκον, 
σον [= ὅσον τοῦτο, ors] ἤκουον ᾿Αθηναῖον εἶναι, ‘so far as this, that I heard,’ 
Hii. 1.45. Τὸν μὲν ἄνδρα τοσοῦτον ἐγίγνωσκον, oat inns ὅσον “οῦτο, ὅτι] εἷς ἡμῶν 
εἴην. 8. 8. Δεινότερος γεγονέναι σὴν τέχνην τοσούτῳ, ὅσῳ ὁ μὲν τὰ αὑτοῦ μόνον 
ἐσοίς, Pl. Euthyphr. 11 d. “Exel νιν τῶνδε πλεῖστον ᾧκτισα βλέσουσ᾽, ὅσῳπερ 
καὶ φρονεῖν οἶδεν μόνη, ‘inasmuch as,’ Soph. Tr. 5123, Προελθόντες ὅσον ἄν 
δοκῇ καιρὸς εἶναι εἰς τὸ δειανοσοιεῖσθαι, ‘until,’ vi. 8. 14, 


344 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. | BOOK tL. 


Norse. Ὅσον od, [just so much as not to be] only not, all but, is used as 8 
simple adverb (also written ὁσονού) ; thus, Τὸν μέλλοντα καὶ ὅσον οὐ πάροντα 
πόλεμον Th. i. 86. Ὅσον οὐ παρείη ἤδη Vii. 2. 5. ; 


ᾧ 333. VI. A retarive sometimes introduces a clause 
which («.) has another connective or a participle absolute, or 
which (.) is properly codrdinate ; and, on the other hand, a 
COORDINATE CLAUSE sometimes (y.) takes the place of a rela- 
tive clause, or (0.) is used in continuation of it. ‘Thus, 


a. Πολλὰ ἄν εἰπεῖν ἔχοιεν ᾿Ολύνθιοι νῦν, ἃ Tor εἰ προείδονφο, οὐκ ἂν ἀπά. 
* χόνσο, the Olynthians could now mention many things, which, had they then fore- 
seen, they would not have perished, Dem. 128.17. “Os ae καφέμαϑθεν . ω) 
ixsivos «. ἠνάγκασε, [when who perceived . ., he compelled] who, when he 
perceived . ., compelled, Lac. 10. 4. Οἷς ἐξὸν [= of, ἐξὸν abrois] «ἄντα ἔχειν 
τὰ χῶν πολϊΙτῶν, ovo ν ἔχοιεν Pl. Rep. 466 a. Cf. , 539. 2. 


β. Τοιαῦτα φῆμαι μαντικαὶ διώρισαν" ὧν ἐντρέπου σὺ μηδέν, such things were 
decreed by prophetic responses; to which do you pay no regard, Soph. C&d. T. 
723. “OP. Vidor ἀμφ᾽ ἡμῶν σολίσας ἐπὶ φόνῳ ϑέσθωι χρεών. ΠΥΛ. Ἣ 
κρινεῖ σί χρῆμα, ‘[ Which will decide what?] And what will this decide? 
Eur. Or. 756. 


γ. Ἔξετάσα;. . ᾽Οδυσσέα, ἢ Σίσυφον, ἢ ἄλλους μυρίους ἄν «σις εἴποι, to examine 
Ulysses, or Sisyphus, or [one might mention ten thousand others] ten thousand 
others whom one might mention, Pl. Apol. 41 b. 


§ OBA. δ. Κῦρον δὲ μεταπέμπεται ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς, ἧς αὐτὸν σατράπην 
ἰσοίησε, καὶ στρατηγὸν δὲ αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε i. 1. 2. This construction is adopt- . 
ed chiefly to avoid the repetition of the relative, in accordance with the fol- 
lowing 

Remark. The repetition of the relative is commonly avoid- 
ed, either by ellipsis, or by the substitution of a demonstrative 
or of a personal pronoun, as, 


"Aguaios δὲ, ὃν ἡμεῖς ἠδίλομεν. βασιλέα καθιστάναι, καὶ (sc. 4] ἐδώκαμεν καὶ 
[sc. παρ᾿ οὗ} tAdCousy πιστὰ μὴ προδώσειν ἀλλήλους, and Arieus whom we 
wished to 1 hing, and to whom we gave and from whom we received pledges 
that we not betray each other, iii. 2.5. ᾿Εὐκεῖνοι, οἷς ci μέλει τῆς αὑτῶν 
Ψυχῆς, ἀλλὰ μὴ σώματα “«λάτεοντες ζῶσι Pl. Phedo, 82d. ‘Huss δὲ, οἷς 
κηδεμὼν μὲν οὐδεὶς πάρεστιν, ἰστρατεύσαμεν δὲ ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν iii. 1. 17. ἸΠοῦ δὴ 
ἐκεῖνός ἐσσιν ὁ ἀνὴρ, ὃς συνεθήρα ἡμῖν, καὶ σύ μοι μάλα ἐδόκεις ϑαυμάζειν αὐτόν, 
Where now is that man, who hunted with us, and whom you seemed to me greatly 
to admire? Cyr. iii. 1. 88, "Exsivn: τοίνυν, οἷς οὐκ ἰχαρίζονθ᾽ οἱ λέγοντες, οὐδ᾽ 
ἰφίλουν αὐτοὺς Dem. 35.3. Καὶ viv τί χρὴ δρᾷν, ὅστις ἐμφανῶς ϑεοῖς ἐχϑαίρο- 
μαι, μισεῖ δί ye’ Ἑλλήνων σσρατός Soph. Aj. 457. --- So, when the pronoun is 
repeated in the same sentence (ὃ 499); as, Γυναῖκα BdgCapov, ἣν χρῆν o 
ἰλαύνειν τήνδ᾽ ὑπὶρ Νείλου ῥοάς, ‘whom you ought to drive [her],’ Eur 
Andr, 649, 


F. CompLeMENTARY. 


O30. From the connective, and, at the same time, in- 
definite character of the complementary pronouns and adverbs 


cu, 4.] COM.PLEMENTARY. 345 


(§ 329. N.), their proper forms are those of the indefinite rel- 
atives (ἃ 519. 2). But, when there will be no danger of mis- 
take, there is often employed, for the greater brevity and vi- 
vacity, in place of the full compound form, one or the other 
elemeut, either the relative or the indefinite. Of these, the 
latter is far the more frequently used, but with this distinction 
from the indefinite in its proper sense, that the accentuation of 
the compound form is retained, as far as possible. Thus, 


Πρὶν δῆλον εἶναι, 0 Ts οἱ ἄλλοι “Ἕλληνες ἀποκρινοῦνται, before it is evident, 
what the other Greeks will answer, i. 4. 14. Ilviv δῆλον εἶναι, i σοιήσουσιν κἱ 
ἄλλοι “Ἕλληνες Ib. 13. “Ὡς δηλοίη, obs tigi. 9. 28. “Hosro, ris ὃ Soe 
eveos εἴη. .. Καὶ ἥρεσο, ὅ σι tin τὸ σύνθημα 'ἴ. 8.16. Διάγνωσιν φρενῶν, 
doris τ᾽ ἀληθής ἔσειν, ὅς τε μὴ φίλος Eur. Hipp. 924. Ὃ σοίοες μὲν λό- 
γοις ἔπεισε Ἱκῦρον, ἄλλῃ γέγρασται ii. 6.4. ὩὉρῶν, ἐν οἵοις ἐσμέν ili. 1. 15, 
Οὐκ οἶδα, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ ποίου ἄν τάχους οὔτε ὅ wos ἄν τις φεύγων ἀσοφεύγοι, οὔτ᾽ 
εἰς ποῖον ἄν σκότος ἀποδραίη, οὔθ᾽ ὅπως ἄν εἰς ἐχυρὸν χωρίον ἀποσφσαίη il. 
ὅ. 7. Ts τῆς σύχης γὰρ ἀφανὶς, οἵ προξήσεται Kur. Alc. 785. ZuveCourcverd 
τι πῶς ἄν τὴν μάχην wooiroi. 7.2. Οἱ δ᾽ ἠρώτων αὐσὸν vd στράτευμα, 
ὁπόσον rt εἴη καὶ ἐπὶ «τίν, συνειλεγμένον ἵν. 4.17. ἪἬρώτα αὐτὸν, πόσον 
χουσίον ἔχει Vii. 8. 2. 


$336. Remarxs. 1. The indefinites thus employed 
and accented are termed in Etymology, from the most promi- 
nent of their offices, INTERROGATIVES (ὃν 152. 2, 317). As 
complementary words, they were employed in indirect ques- 
tion; and hence appears to have arisen their use as direct 
interrogatives, through an ellipsis. Thus, from the indirect 
question, Εἰπὲ, τίνα γνώμην ἔχεις περὶ τῆς πορείας, say, what 
opinion you have respecting the march (ii. 2. 10), by the omis- 
sion of εἰπὲ; comes the direct question, Τίνα γνώμην ἔχεις περὶ 
τῆς πορείας; What. opinion have you respecting the march ? 
So, from “έξατε οὖν πρός με, τί ἐν νῷ ἔχετε, tell me, therefore, 
what you have in mind (iii. 3. 2), comes, Ti ἐν νῷ ἔχετε; What 
have you in mind ? 

Nores. «a. In other languages, as the Lat., with those derived from it, 
and the Eng., the complementary use of the simple relatives has prevailed; 


and hence, in these languages, the general identity of the relatives and the in- 
terrogatives. Thus, who, which, when, &c., are both relative and interrogative. 


β. In direct question, the Greek employs only one of the two shorter forms 
above mentioned, but in exclamation it employs both; thus, Οὔἴωοι, πάτερ, ra 
εἶπας οἷά μ᾽ sigyacas! Οὐ my father, what have you said! how you treat 
me! Soph. Tr. 1203. ΟἿ᾽ ἔργ᾽ ἀκούσεσθ᾽, οἷα δ᾽ εἰσόψεσθ᾽, ὅσον δ᾽ ἀρεῖσθε 
wivdos! Id. Gd. Τ. 1223. 


§ 337. 2. A coMPLEMENTARY PRONOUN or ADVERB, used 
as an echo to an interrogative, has, for distinction’s sake, its 
full form ; thus, 

AAM. Τίς γὰρ εἶ, AIK. (Se. Ἔρωτῷς:) Ὅσσις, Πολίτης χρησφόρο 


Ψῳ 
346 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK 111. 


Lam. For who are you? Dic. [Do you ask] Wuo? A good citizen, Ar. Ach. — 
594. XAP. Οὗτος, vi ποιεῖς, AION. Ὅ cs ποιῶ, Id. Ran. 198. EYO. 
Τίνα γραφήν os γίγραπται;, TOKP. “Hyeiva; Οὐκ ἀγεννῆ, ἔμοιγε donee 
ΡΙ. Euthyphr. 2b. KA. Πῶς dy ταῦτά γ᾽ ἔτι ξυγχωροῖμεν, “AO. Ὅπωςι 
Ki ϑεὸς ἡμῖν . . δοίη τις συμφωνίαν Id. Leg. 662 a. 


3. A complementary clause often expresses merely a con: 
dition or a circumstance; and the complementary construction 
is sometimes used where the relative might have been. ‘Thus, 


Δόδ᾽, ἥτις tori, give it, whoever she may be, Soph. El. 1123. Τὸν ἄνδρ 
ἀπαυδῶ σποῦτον, ὅστις tori, γῆς Id. Cd. T. 236. Δουλεύομεεν ϑεοῖς, ὅ δ σι roe” 
εἰσὶν οἱ ϑεοί Eur. Or. 418, Καὶ ἱκανοὺς κρίνειε συνεργοὺς εἶναι; δ᾽ σι συγχάνοι 
βουλόμενος κατιργάζισθαι i. 9. 20 (cf. Συνεργὸς . « εἶναι τούτου, ὅσου Ib. 21). 
"Hower ἂν ἀκούσαιμι «τὸ ὄνομα, τίς οὕτως tori δεινὸς λέγειν [== ὄνομα Touran, ὅσ- 
vis], most gladly should I hear the name, who there is of such power in speaking 
[== the name of him who is], ii. 5. 15. ἾΑδλα ὁπότεροι dy ἡμῶν ἄνδρες ἀμεί- 
vovss ὦσιν iii. 1, 21, 


§ S38. 4. Conpensation. The antecedent and com- 
plementary clauses are sometimes brought into one by the el- 
lipsis of a substantive verb (cf. § 528). The verb is omitted 
either (a.) in the antecedent, or (8.) in the complementary 
clause. 


a. Inthe ANTECEDENT CLAUSE. This occurs with adjectives of admiration, 
which unite with the complementary word (commonly ὅσος or ὡς) to form 8 
complex adjective or adverb (cf. §§ 528. 2, 529); thus, Θαυμαστὴν ὅσην 
[= Qavuarriy ἔστιν, ὅσην) περὶ σὲ προθυμίαν ἔχει, it is wonderful how much re- | 
gard he has for you, Pl. Ale. 151 a. Μετὰ ἱδρῶτος Savuacrod ὅσον Id. Rep. 
350d. Θαυμαστόν τινὰ χρόνον ὅσον Id. Epin.982¢c. Θαυμασσῶς ὡς [= Θαυ- 
μασαόν ἰστιν, ὡς) ἐπείσθην Id. Phedo, 92 ἃ. Θαυμαστῶς μοι εἶπες ὡς παρὰ 
δόξαν 10. 95 a. ᾿Αμήχανον ὅσον χρόνον, an inconceivably long time, Ib. 80 ο. 
᾿Ανέβλεψέ ci μοι τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ὠμήχιανόν τι οἷον Id. Charm. 155 6. Ὕσερ- 
φυῶς ὡς χαίρω Id. Οοην. 178 c. "Hy περὶ αὐτὸν ὄχλος ὑπερφυὴς ὅσος Ar. Plut. 
750, "Αφδονοι ὅσοι Hat. iv. 194, 


β. In the COMPLEMENTARY CLAUSE. Τὸ this ellipsis may be referred the 
employmapt of a complementary word (commonly with ody or δή), as a mere in- 
definite; thus, Μηδ᾽ ὁντιναοῦν μισθὸν [== μισθόν τινα, ὅστις οὖν εἴη) προσαιτή- 
gus, not demanding any pay whatever [it might be!, vii. 6.27. "“H ἄλλ᾽ ὁτι- 
οὖν, or any thing else whatever, Cyr.i. 6.22. Οὐδ᾽ ὁσιοῦν περὶ τούτου ἐσεμινήσθη, 
he made not the least mention of this, Ib. 12. ‘Omweotv, in any way whatever, 
Ib. ii. 1.27. “Orov δὴ παρηγγυήσαντος, some one whosoever it might have been] 
having suggested it, iv. 7.25. "Ἔστι γὰρ ὁτιοῦν πρᾶγμα ὅτῳ δὴ ὁπωσοῦν 
ἔχοντι ἄμεινον ἀγνοεῖν ἢ γιγνώσκειν; Pl. Ale. 1438 ¢. Μήτε διακονίαν μηδ᾽ ve 
wie κεκτημένος Pl. Leg. 919 d. El σις ἀδικοίη ὁπδαίρους Cyr. iii. 2. 28, 


Nore. For an additional remark upon complementary words, see ὃ 539, 2. 


G. INTERROGATIVE. 
§ 639. The interrogatives are, in Greek, simply the ine 
definites with a change of accent. For their origin, their com- 
plementary use, and their use in exclamation, see ὃν 535, 536 


cH. 4.] INTEEROGATIVE. —"Adhog. «B47 


For the use of the article with interrogatives, see § 480. For examples 
of condensed interrogative sentences, see ὃ 528. 1. 


REMARKS. 1. The neuter σί unites with several particles to form elliptical 
expressions ; which, with various specific offices, serve in general to promote 
the vigor and vivacity of the discourse ; as, Ti γάρ [86. iors, or λέγεσε) 5 
ἄρχοντας αἱρουμένων ὑμῶν, ἐγώ tim ἐμποδών sive; ‘ What then?’ v.7.10. Ti 
adv; Ve 8.11. Ti dé; Mem. ii. 1. 3. Ti dara; Vect. 4. 28. 


2. The Greek idiom (a) admits a greater freedom than the English, in the 
construction and position of both INTERROGATIVE and COMPLEMENTARY 
worps ; and even (4) allows the use of more than one in the same clause. 
Thus, —(a) Τί... ἰδὼν ποιοῦντα, ταῦτα κατέγνωκας αὐτοῦ, [Having seen him 
doing what] What have you seen him do, that you thus judge of him? Mem. i. 
3.10. Ὅταν τί ποιήσωσι, νομεῖς αὐτοὺς σοῦ φροντίζειν ; Ib. 4.14. ᾿Εγὼ οὖν 
σὸν ix ποίας πόλεως orearnyoy προσδοκῶ ταῦτα πράξειν, iii, 1.14. ἘΪ σις 
ἔροιτο ἡμᾶς, τῶν τί σοφῶν εἰσιν οἱ ζωγράφοι ἐπιστήμονες Pl. Ῥτοί. 812 c. “Ἵνα vi 
[se. yivnras] radra λέγεις, [That what may be) With what intent, or Why, 
do you say this? Id. Apol. 26d. ΠΥΛ. ‘Os ci δὴ τόδε; "OP. “Ὡς νιν ἷκε- 
φσεύσω με σῶσαι Eur. Or. 796. “Ors δὴ vi γε (sc. toriv]; [Because there is 
what?] Why so? Pl. Charm. 161. Εἶτ᾽ ἐλαυνομεένων, καὶ ὑξριζομένων, καὶ 
vi κακὸν οὐχὶ πασχόντων, πᾶσα ἡ οἰκουμένη μεστὴ γέγονε προδοτῶν, ‘what evil 
not suffering?’ i. 6. ‘suffering every evil,’ Dem. 241. 28. Cf. ὃ 538. -- 
(6) Tis τίνος αἴτιός ἔστι, γενήσεται φανερόν, it will become evident who is 
guilty {and] of what, Dem. 249. 8. Τίνας οὖν, ἔφη, ὑπὸ τίνων εὕροιμεν, ἄν 
μείζονα εὐεργετημένους, ἢ παῖδας ὑπὸ γονέων, Mem. ii. 2. 3. Πόσερος ἄρα 
wortooy αἱμάξει, Eur. Phen. 1288. Tis ἄν πᾶ πόρος κακῶν γένοιτο ; Id. 
Ale. 218. Λεύσσεσε, .. οἷα «πρὸς οἵων ἀνδρῶν πάσχω Soph. Ant. 940. Οὐδ᾽ 
ἔχω, arm πρὸς πότερον ἴδω Id. 1842. 


Η. "ἌΛΛΟΣ. 


§ 549. The pronoun ἄλλος is not only used retrospect- 
ively, but also prospectively and distributively ; that is, it may 
denote, not only a different person or thing from one which 
has been mentioned, but also, from one which is to be men- 
tioned; or it may, in general, denote a difference among the 
several individuals or parties which compose the whole num- 
ber spoken of. 

When ἄλλος is prospective, and is followed by another ἄλλος or an equiva- 
lent pronoun used retrospectively, it is commonly translated by one. When it 
is distributive, it is combined with another ἄλλος, or with one of its derivatives, 
and is commonly translated by two pronouns, as one. . another, this . . that, 
&c., the sentence being resolved into two. Examples are subjoined of ἄλλος 
and its derivatives, as used, 

a.) RETROSPECTIVELY. “Osrov δὲ ἱκανὸν ἔργον ἑνὶ ἕψειν κρέα, ἄλλῳ barra», 
ἄλλω δὲ ἰχθὺν ἕψειν, ἄλλῳ barra, ἄλλῳ ἄρτους ποιεῖν, ‘for one man to boil 
meat, for another to roast it, &c.,’ Cyr. viii. 2. 6, Μείνανσες δὲ ταύφσην τὴν 
ἡμέραν, τῇ ἄλλῃ ἐπορεύοντο, ‘on the next,’ iii. 4.1. See ὃ 457.4. 


§ 48. 2B.) ProspecriveLy. Τά σε ἄλλα ἐτίμησε, καὶ μυρίους ἔδωκε 
δαρεικούς, both honored me in every other respect, and ϑαδδ sme ten thousand da- 
rics, i. 3. 3 (§§ 432, 488. 5). Οὐδὲν ἄλλο πράξαντες ἢ δῃώσαντες, having done 
nothing else thun ravage, H. Gr. vii. 4. 17. 


᾿848 SYNTAX OF THE ΨΕΠΒ.. [Book 11 


Norss. (a.) The neuter ἄλλο is often used with ri, ri, οὐδέν, and wndin 
with the ellipsis of a verb, commonly ποιῶ, πράσσω, πάσχω, εἰμεί, OF γέγνοριαι 
thus, Ti ἄλλο οὗτοι (sc. ἐστοίησαν) ἢ ἐπεξούλευσαν, What else have they done ba 
plot against us? Th. iii. 39. "Arro Ti avy. . ἀγωνιζοίμεθα ; ii. 5.10. "Exsivos 
οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ τοὺς πεπτωκότας περιελαύνων ?dearo, ‘did nothing but,’ Cyr. i. 4. 34. 
ἘΠ... μηδὲν ἄλλο ἢ μετενέγκοις Ib. 6. 39. — (b.) Hence arises the use of ἄλλ 
ci #4, or, the 4 omitted, ἄλλο σι (also written ἄλλοσι), as an interrogative 
phrase; thus,"AdrdAo rs ἢ περὶ wasiorov ποιῇ, Do you {do any thing else than 
regard] not regard it of the highest consequence? Pl. Apol. 24 ec. Αλλο os a 
οὐδὲν κωλύει , Does any thing whatever forbid? iv. 7.5. "Αλλο ci οὖν of yt 
Φιλοκερδεῖς Qiroves xd κέρδος ; Do not then the covetous love guin? Pl. Hipparch. 
2209. — 


§ 542, y-) PRosPECTIVELY and RETROSPECTIVELY. “AAAos ἄλλ» 
εἶλκε, one drew up another, v. 2.15. "Adrdos ἄλλον .. ἔθραυε, they were dush- 
ing, one against another, Soph. El. 728 (cf. § 145). Τότ᾽ ἄλλος, ἄλλοδ᾽ ἅτε- 
eos, now one, and then the other, Ib. 739. "Αλλοσε καὶ ἄλλοτε, [at one time 
and at another] now and then, ii. 4. 26. So, when two are spoken of, Ὁ irs- 
eos σὸν ἕτερον παίει, the one strikes the other, vi. 1. 5. 


3.) DisrRmBuTIvELy. Odro μὲν, ὦ Κλεάώρχε, ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει, these men, 
Clearchus, say, one one thing, and another another, ii. 1. 15 (88. 451, 497. 1). 
Οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι . . ἄλλος ἄλλῃ ἰπράπετο iv. 8.19. Οὐ μὴν ἔσι ἀθρόοι, ἀλλ᾽ 
ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν, no longer in a body, but some in this direction, and others in that, 
i, 10.13. Εἴκαζον δὲ ἄλλοι ἄλλως i. 6. 11. ἔΑλλοσε ἄλλῃ arobaivey H. 
Gr. i. 5. 20. 


CHAPTER V. 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 


I. AGREEMENT OF THE VERB. 


§ 648. Rove XXIX. A Vers agrees ἡ th 
its subject in number and person; as, 


"Eye λήψομαι, I shall take, i. 7.9. Σὺ ὁρᾷς ii. 1.12. ᾿Ησθένει Δαρεῖος 
Ll. 1. Ὑμεῖς δόξεσε i. 4.15. Διειχέτην τὼ φάλαγγε i. 8. 17. 


Nore. AGREEMENT, whether in the appositive, the adjective, the pronoun, 
or the verb, has the same general foundation, and, to a great extent, the same 
varieties and exceptions. The four rules of agreement may be thus presented 
in a tabular form: — ~ 


An ApposrrivE : CASE, 
An Apsecrive ( agrees with { Genprr, Numper, and Case. 
A Pronoun its subject in ( Genper, ΝΌΜΒΕΕ, and PErson, 


A Vers . NuMBER, and Prrson 


cn. 5.] AGREEMENT. — ELLIPsiI». 349 


§ 644. Remarks. 1. In comrounp construction, both 
syllepsis and zeugma are common (ὃ 329. N.); thus, 


᾿Ασολελοίπασιν ἡμᾶς Ξενίας καὶ Πασίων i. 4. 8. Κύρου ἀποτέμνεται ἡ κι- 
φαλὴ καὶ χεὶρ ἡ δεξιά. Βασιλεὺς δὲ καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ διώκων siomace i. 10, 1 
Βασιλεὺς δὲ καὶ of σὺν αὐτῷ τά τε ἄλλα πολλὰ διαρπάζουσι Ib. 2. Κῦρός os 
καὶ ἡ στρατιὰ «΄αρῆλϑε, καὶ ἐγένοντο i. 7. 16. Ἐγὼ καὶ σφὼ βαρείᾳ συμφορᾷ 
πεπλήγμεθα Eur. Ale. 404. Σὺ δ᾽ ἡ μακαρία μακάριός 9° ὃ σὸς πόσις ἥκετον 
Eur. Or. 86. Δοκεῖς σύ σε καὶ Σιμμίας Pl. Phedo, 77 ἃ. Cf. §§ 446, 497 


ΝΌΤΕΒ. «#. When the subject is divided or distributed, the verb sometimes 
agrees with the whole, and sometimes with one of the parts; thus, “Own ἐδό- 
savto txaoros, where they each could, iv. 2.12. ᾿Ανεπαύοντο δὲ, ὅσου ἐσύγχα- 
νεν ἕχαστος iti, 1.3. Πάντες δὲ οὗτοι κατὰ ἔθνη, ἐν πλαισίῳ «λήρε, ἀνθρώπων 
ἕχασσον τὸ ἔθνος ἐπορεύετο i. 8.9. Αλλος πρὸς ἄλλον διέξαλλον H.Gr. ii. 8. 28. 
Οὗτοι... ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει ii. 1.15. See §§ 360, 497. 1, 542. δ. 


β. In syllepsis, the poets sometimes adopt the following arrangement (termed 
by grammarians Σχῆμα ᾿Αλκμανικόν); Πυριφλεγέθων σε ῥέουσιν Kaxtros os 
x. 513. Εἰ δέ κ᾿ "Άρης ἄρχωσι μάχης ἢ Φϑοῖξος YT. 188. 


§ 345. 2. Exrirsis. When the subject is sufficiently 
indicated by the form of the verb or the context, and no stress 
is laid upon it, it is commonly omitted. ‘This remark applies, 


a.) To the first and second personal pronouns, and likewise 
to the third, when its reference is sufficiently determined by 
the connection; thus, “Eaei δὲ ἡσϑένει Δαρεῖος... ἐβούλετο, 
and when Darius was sick, he wished,i. 1.1. See ὃ 502. 


Note. The personal pronouns are implied in the very affixes of the verb. 
See §§ 171, 172. 


§ 546. 5.) To the third personal pronoun, when refer- 
ring to a subject which is indefinite, or general, or implied in 
the verb itself ; thus, 


Ἔσεὶ συνεσκότασε, when it grew dark, Cyr. iv. 5. 5. “Eves, there was an 
earthquake, Th. iv. 52. Kariwwe χιόν, τὴν Θρῴκην ὅλην, καὶ rove ποταμοὺς 
ἔπηξε Ar. Ach. 138. ᾿ΟΨὸ ἦν, it was late, ii. 2.16. Ἦν ἀμφὶ ἀγορὰν «λή- 
θουσαν i. 8.1. “Ὡς ἔοικεν, as it seems, vi.1. 30. Οὕτω δὲ ἔχει, [and it has 
itself thus] and thus the matter stands, v. 6.12. Ἔν rotrw ἴσχετο vi. 3. 9. 
Καλῶς tora: vii. 8.43. ᾿Ἐδήλωσε δέ Mem. i. 2.32. Ὥς δὲ αὐτῷ οὐ προὺ- 
χώρει, but when [it did not succeed to him] he met with no success, Th. i. 109, 
Κάτω διεχώρει αὐτοῖς iv. 8.20. Μάχης δεῖ, there is need of a battle, or there 
must be fighting, ii. 3. 5 (see §§ 357, 430. R.). "Ewod μελήσει περὶ τροφῆς 
αὐτῶν, [there shall be to me a care) I will take care of their support, Cyr. iv. 
5. 17 (see § 376.3.). Tots μὲν πειθομένοις αὐτῷ συνέφερε, τοῖς δὲ μὴ πειθομένοις 
μετέμελε Mem.i. 1.4. Λέγουσιν, ὅτι ἐπὶ rodro ἔρχονααι, ‘ they say,’ Cyr. i. 
2.6. Kai οὐδὲν μέντοι οὐδὲ τοῦτον παθεῖν ἔφασαν (cf. Τοξευθῆναί ris ἐλέγετο) 
i. 8.20. Ὅσερ πάσχουσιν ἐν τοῖς μεγάλοις ἀγῶσι Th. vii. 69. Οὔτε ἄρα ἀν- 
ταδικεῖν δεῖ, .. ὁσιοῦν πάσχῃ, it is not right then to return an injury, whatever 
one may suffer, Pl. Crito, 49 c. ‘H σοῦ οἴεσθαι, εἰδέναι |auabial, ἃ οὖκ οἶδεν, 
the folly of one’s supposing that he knows what he does not know, Pl. Apol. 29 Ὁ. 
Ess) ἰσάλαεγξε (sc. ὁ σαλπιγκτής), when (he blew the trumpet) the trumpeter 

30 


800 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [Book m1 


blew, or at the sound of the trumpet, i. 2.17. ᾿Ἐσήμηνε τοῖς “Ἕλλησι τῇ σάλ 
ayy iii. 4. 4 (cf. Ἔν σούτῳ σημαίνει ὁ σαλπιγκτής iv. 3.32). "Exigvge τοῖς 
“Ἕλλησι [sc. 6 κήρυξ], proclamation was made to the Greeks, iii. 4.36. Tov νό- 
μον ὑμῖν αὐτὸν ἀναγνώσεται, Dem. 465.14. Οἰνοχσεύει [sc. ὁ οἰνοχόος) g. 142. 

Norres. a. When the pronoun is wholly indefinite in its reference, or, in 
other words, when the verb simply expresses an action or state without predi- 
cating it of any person or thing, the verb is termed impersonal (in, not, persOna, 
person). A verb thus employed is a compendious form of expression for the 
kindred noun with a substantive (or other appropriate) verb; thus, It rains 
== There is rain, or Rain falls. An impersonal verb, from its very nature. is 
in the 3d pers. sing.; and an adjective joined with it is in the neut. sing., or τὰ 
the newt. plur. for the sing. (§ 451). 

&. A-verb is often introduced as impersonal, of which the subject is after- 
wards expressed in an Inf. or distinct clause; as, ᾿Εστεὶ δ᾽ ἐδόκει αὐτῷ ἤδη πο- 
φεύεσθαι, and when now it seemed best to him to march, i. 2.1. Οἷς καθήκει εἰς 
Kacrwaov πεδίον ἀθροίζεσθαι i. 9. 7. Δῆλον ἦν, ὅτι ἐγγύς πον βασιλεὺς ἦν ii. 
8. 6. Οὐκ ἦν aa€siv, [it was not, to take them, i. 6. there was no such thing 
as taking them] it was not possible to take them, i. 5. 2. "Eos λαμβάνειν Ib. 3. 
ἜἜξεσφιν ὑμῖν πιστὰ λαξεῖν, it is permitted you to take pledges, ii. 3. 26. Ἕξε- 
σφιν ὁρᾷν, you can see, iii. 4. 39. "Evivero. . πορεύεσθαι i. 9.13. See ὃ 523. 

y. Personal and impersonal constructions are so blended and interchanged, 
that it is often difficult to determine, whether a verb is to be regarded in a par- 
ticular instance as personal or impersonal, and whether a neuter pronoun or 
adjective connected with it is to be regarded as Nom. or Acc.; as, Ti δεῖ αὐτὸν 
αἰτεῖν, [What needs him, or, What does it need him, § 482] What need is 
there that he should ask? ii. 1.10. For the change of impersonal to personal 
constructions by attraction, see § 551. 


3. For the construction of verbs with the GEN. PARTITIVE, see §§ 361. β, 
364. 


§ 647. 3. The supsrantive vERB is very often omitted, 
especially if it is merely a copula. [158 omission is particularly 
frequent with verbals in -τέος, in general remarks and relative 
clauses, and with such words as ἀνάγκης χρεών, εἰκός, ϑέμις» 
καιρός, ὥρα, δῆλος, ἕτοιμος, φροῦδος, δυνατός, οἷός τε, ῥάδιος, χα- 
λεπύός. Thus, 


Τοῦνο δ χοιηφίον [se. ἐσσί], this must not be done, i. 3.15, "Ev σῷ ἄντρῳ 
ὅθεν ai πηγαί, in the cave, whence the springs, i. 2.8: Tloraudy, οὗ «ὃ εὖρος 
στάδιον (ef. Οὗ ἦν τὸ εὖρος) i, 4.1, Δυσχρήσεους sivas ἀνάγκη ὠτάκεους dvs ας 
(cf. ᾿Ανάγκη γάρ tori) iii. 4.19. ‘Os σὸ εἰκός iii, 1. 21. “Ὥρα λέγει. i. 8. 
12. Δῆλον γάρ ii. 4. 19. Cf. §§ 528, 588. 


§ 348. 4. ΞΎΝΕΒΙΒ affects the number of the verb in 
two ways:— 


I.) A plural verb may be joined with a singular Nom., if 
more than one are referred to; as, 

Τὸ σλῆδος ἐψηφίσαντο, the majority voted, Th. i. 125. Ὃ ἄλλος στρατὸς 
ἀἐπίξαινον Id. iv. 32. Δημοσθένης μετὰ τῶν ξυσσρατηγῶν ᾿Ακαρνάνων oorivdore 


was Id. iii. 109. Τὸ δὲ τῶν πρισθυτέρων ἡμῶν . . ἡγούμεθα Pl. Leg. 657 ἃ, 
See §§ 453, 497, 544. a. 


cH. 5.] SYNESIS. — ATTRACTION. 351 


§ S49. II.) A singular verb may be joined with a plu- 
ral Nom. regarded as but a single object of thought. This 
occurs chiefly in two cases: — (a) When the nominative is 
neuter, according to the following 


SpeciaAL Rute. The Neuter Puurav has its 
VERB in the singular. 


‘That the want of agreement has in this case become the rule, seems to have 
arisen from the fact, that the. neuter plural commonly denotes a mass of lifeless 
things, and likewise to be connected with the usage in §§ 336, 451. Excep- 
tions are, however, frequent ; chiefly, when things that have life are denoted, 
or when the idea of plurality is prominent, or in the non-Attic poets for the 
sake of the metre. Thus, Τὰ ἐσιτήδεια ἐπέλιπε, provisions failed, iv. 7. 1. 
ΠΙλοῖα δ᾽ ὑμῖν πάρεσεσιν Vv. 6.20. Ταῦτα ἐδόκει ὠφέλιμα εἶναι, these things [or 
this] seemed to be useful, i. 6. 2 (cf. ὃ 451). Ἐνταῦθα Κύρῳ βασίλεια ἦν i 
2.7 (cf. Ib. 8). "Evraida ἦσαν τὰ Συεννέσιος βασίλεια Ib. 23 (§ 336), Ta 
τέλη σῶν Λακεδαιμονίων ὀμόσαντα αὐτὸν ἐξέπεμψαν, ‘the rulers, Th. iv. 88 
(ef. § 458. γ). Ὑποζύγια νέμοιντο ii. 2.15 (cf. iv. 5. 25). Τὰ ὑποζύγια 
ἐλαύνεσο iv. 7. 394 (εἴ, i. 5.5). Ἦσαν δὲ ταῦτα δύο τείχη i. 4. 4. Φανερὰ 
, ἦσαν καὶ ἵππων καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἴχνη πολλά i. 7. 17. Τὰ δ᾽ ἅρματα ἐφέροντο i. 
8.20. ἴΑσσρα ἐν ri νυκτὶ ὠνέφηναν, ἃ ἡμῖν τὰς ὥρας τῆς νυκτὸς ἐμφανίζει 
Mem. iv. 8. 4. Ἔργα γένοντο A. 810. For such examples as "Oost daisras 
g- 131,"see § 337. 


Nore. In the following example, apparently upon the same principle, a 
series of feminine plurals denoting natural phenomena is followed after an in- 
terval by a substantiye verb in the singular; Kai γὰρ πάχναι καὶ χάλαζαι 
καὶ ἐρυσίξαι ἐκ perp, 7 καὶ ὠκοσμίας «ερὶ ἄλληλα τῶν ποιούτων γίγνεται ἰρω- 


φσικῶν Pl. Conv. 188 b. Cf. ὁ. 


(b) When the verb precedes, and is hence introduced as 
though its subject were, as yet, undetermined (cf. § 546. 8). 
This construction is almost confined in prose to gow and ἦν 
(compare, in French, the use of ἐ est, and al y a). ‘Thus, 

Ἔστι γὰρ ἔμοιγε καὶ βωμοὶ καὶ ἱερὰ, for [there is to me] I have both altars 
and sacred rites, Pl. Euthyd. 302 c. “Hy δ᾽ ἀμφίσλεκτοι κλίμακες Soph. Tr. 


520. Ἔστι σούτω διττὼ σὼ Biw Pl Gorg. 500 ἃ. Viyynras. . ἀρχαί σε καὶ 
γάμοι Id. Rep. 363 a. See καὶ 523. 


Remark. A few other examples of the Nom. pl. masc. or fem. with a 
verb in the sing. occur in the poets; as, Κόρα, κατενήνοθεν Hom. Cer. 280. 
ὝΚμνοι .. τέλλετα, Pind. Ol. 11. 4. This construction was termed by the 
old grammarians Σχῆμα Π|νδαρικόν or Βοιώτιον. 


ὁ 650. 5. Arrraction. The verb is sometimes attract- 
ed by a word in apposition with the subject ; usually an attri- 
bute coming between the subject and the verb; as, 

Τὸ χωρίον τοῦτο, ὅπερ πρότερον "Evvta Ὁ δοὶ ἐκαλοῦντο, this place, which 
was before called The Nine Ways, Th. iv. 102. ἔσφον δὲ δύο λόφω ἣ 


Ἰδομένη ὑψηλώ Id. iti. 112. “Away δὲ τὸ μέσον τῶν σειχῶν ἦσαν στάδιοι 
esis i. 4. 4. 


352 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK 11. 


oo. 6. A verb, of which the proper subject is an 
Inf. or distinct clause (or which is impersonal with an Inf. ot 
clause dependent), ofien takes for a Nom. the subject of tha 
Inf. or clause. In this case, the Inf. sometimes becomes a 
Part. Thus, 


Atysras ᾿Ασόλλων ἐκδεῖραι Μαρσύαν, Apollo is said to have flayed Marsyas, 
<= Λέγεται, ᾿Απόλλωνα ἐκδεῖραι Μαρσύαν, it is said, that Apollo flayed Mar- 
syas, i. 2. 8 (cf. Λέγεται δὲ καὶ rods ἄλλους ἸΠέρσας . . διακινδυνεύειν i. 8. 7). 
"EAtyorrs τινες, ὡς γιγνώσκουσι Vect.i. 1. ‘O ᾿Ασσύριος εἰς τὴν χώραν αὐτοῦ 
ἐμξαλεῖν ἀγγέλλεται Ογτ. ν-. 3.30, ‘Os ἀγγέλλοιτο ὁ μὲν [Πείσανδρος τετελευ- 
τηκώς, that [Pisander was announced as having died] it was announced, that 
Pisander was dead, H. Gr. iv. 3.13. ‘Omoroysiras πρὸς πάντων κράτιστος 
δὴ γενέσθα, i. 9. 20 (cf. “Ομολογεῖται . ., τοὺς ζῶντας ἐκ τῶν σπεθνεώτων γεγο- 
vives Pl. Pheedo, 72 a). ὯὋὉ μὲν οὖν πρεσξύτερος παρὼν ἐτύγχανε [-- Τὸν σρεσ- 
ξύτερον παρεῖναι ἐτύγχανε), the elder, therefore, happened to be present, i. 68. it 
happened, that the elder was present, i. 1.2. “Ors πονηρότατοί γέ εἰσιν, οὐδὲ σὲ 
λανθάνουσιν [Ξ-Ξ λανθάνει) Cac. 1. 19. ᾿Αρκέσω ϑνήσκουσ᾽ ἐγώ [ -᾿᾿Αρκέσει teed 
ϑνήσκειν), it will be enough that I should die, Soph. Ant. 547. “Αλις [86. sit] 
νοσοῦσ᾽ ἐγώ Id. Ed. T. 1061. Τοσοῦτον ἀρκῶ σοι σαφηνίσαι μόνον, ‘it is enough 
that I communicate,’ Aisch. Pr. 621. Οὐ προσήκομεν κολάζειν τοῖσδε, it doe 
not belong to these to punish us, Eur. Or. 771. Κρείσσων γὰρ “Ardy κεύθων, 
for [he were better lying] it were better he were lying in the grave, Soph. Aj, 
635. Δῆλός σε ἦν πᾶσιν, ὅσι ὑπερεφοξεῖτο, it was manifest to all, thatphe was 
exceedingly alarmed, Cyr. i. 4. 2 (cf. “Ὅσι μὲν σφόδρα ἠνιάθησαν, πᾶσι δῆλον 
ἐγένετο H. Gr. vi. 4. 20). Δῆλος ἦν ἀνιώμενος, it was evident that he was sad, 
or, he was evidently sad, i. 2.11. Zrigywv δὲ φανερὸς μὲν ἦν οὐδένα, ὅτῳ δὲ 
φαίη φίλος εἶναι, robry ἔνδηλος ἐγίγνετο ἐσιδουλεύων il. 6.23. Σὺ οὖν ἡμῖν di- 
καιος εἶ ἀντιχαρίζεσθαι, it is therefore just that you should requite us, Cyr. iv. 1. 
20. Τοὺς σοφοὺς . . πολλοῦ δέω [== πολλοῦ δεῖ ἐμὲ] βατράχους λέγειν, 
{much is wanting in order that I should call] Jam far from calling the wise 
frogs, Pl. Theat. 167 Ὁ, O7 σοσούσου δέουσι μειμεῖσθαι τὴν πρᾳότητα Thy bus. 
τέραν Isocr. 300 a. In like manner, Αὐτοῦ ὀλίγου δεήσαντος καταλευσθῆναι, 
when he had (wanted little of ] narrowly escaped being stoned to death, i. 5. 14. 
See § 546. y. 


Norse. Sometimes the two modes of construction are united ; as, Σοὶ γὰρ 
δὴ λέγετα, πάνυ γε τεθεραπεῦσθαι ὁ ᾿Απόλλων, καί σε πάντα ἐκείνῳ πειθόμενον 
πράττειν ᾿ς Ἢ vii. 2.15. Ἤγγελται .. ἥ τε μώχη πάνυ ἰσχῦρὰ γεγονέναι, 
καὶ ἐν αὐτῇ πολλοὺς . . τεθνάνα, Pl. Charm. 153 Ὁ. "Εδοξεν αὐτῷ, βροντῆς 
γενομένης, σκηπτὸς πεσεῖν εἰς τὴν πατρῴαν οἰκίαν, καὶ ἐκ rodrov λάμπεσθαι 
wacay iii, 1. 11. 


ᾧ δ Φ, 7. The verb ἔφη is often separated from its subject by some 
of the words quoted ; and is often thrown in pleonastically ; as, “ Ed λέγεις," 
ἔφη, “ὦ Σιμμία," ὁ Kiens, “ You speak well, Simmias,” said Cebes, Pl. Phedo, 
77¢. ὋὉ Ἡρακλῇς ἀκούσας ταῦτα, “ ἾΏ, γύναι," ἔφη, “ὄνομα δέ σοι ri torn,” 
Mem. ii. 1. 26. ᾿Αποκρίνεται ὃ Χειρίσοφος + “ Βλέψον," ἔφη, “weds τὰ ὄρη ἢ 
iv. 1. 20. Seev. 1.2; vi. 1. 81. 


II. Use or tue Voices. 


ὁ 333. For a general statement of the use of the voices, 
see §§ 165, 166. JIrregularity and variely in their use arise 


cx. 5.] USE OF VOICES. 352 


chiefly from the following sources: —(a) From the use of 
the same verb as transitive and intransitive, or as causativs 
and immediate. See § 555.—(b) From the formation of 9 
new theme, with a strengthened meaning. See §§ 265, 319. 2 
—(c) From the variety and extent of the reflexive uses of the 
verb, and their intimate connection, on the one hand, with ths 
intransitive, and on the other, with the passive use. Ser 
§§ 165, 166, 557-561. — (d) From a transition of meanint 
ν the verb,, See δῷ 556, 561. 2. --- (ὁ) From ellipsis. Se: 
555. 


§ 654. As in most of the tenses the same form is bot? 
mid. and pass., it is but natural that the distinction should be 
sometimes neglected in the Fut. and Aor. (ἃ 166). This oc 
curs chiefly, 


a.) In the use of the Fut. mid. for the Fut. pass., as a shorter and mor 
euphonic form; thus, Ἔξ ἐμοῦ τιμήσεται, he shall be honored by me, Soph. Ant 
210. WYagos καθ᾽ ἡμῶν οἴσεται 7d’ ἡμέρᾳ Eur. Or. 440. Μασειγώσετα 
σετρεθλώσεται, δεδήσεται, ἐκκαυθήσεται τὠφθαλμώ Pl. Rep. 361 e. 


B-) In the use of the Aor. pass. for the Aor. mid. This occurs chiefly ἢ 
deponents (§ 166. 2), and in other verbs in which the proper passive is want 
ing or rare. Thus, Ἤ γάσθη σε αὐτόν, admired him, i. 1.9. Διαλεχθέντε, 
ἀλλήλοις, having conversed with each other, ii. 5.42. Zuvararaayéiveri. 2. 1 
Δεηδῆνα, Ib. 14. “Hebn Ib. 18. ᾿Εδυνήθησων iii. 1. 35. "Exisanbelnre Ib 
88. Dolndivres ἀλλήλους ii. 5. 5. 


Nores. (1.) Whether verbs of the classes just mentioned employ the 
mid. or the pass. form of the .dor. must be determined by observation 
(2.) Sometimes, though rarely, the Fut. pass. occurs as mid., and the Aor 
mid. as pass.; thus, ᾿Εσιμεληθησόμενα, Mem. ii. 7. 8. Karioyero ἔρωτι δεινῷ 
Eur. Hipp. 27. 


A. Active. 


§ 635. I. In many verbs in which the active voice is 
commonly or often transitive, it is likewise used intransitively 
or reflexively (δ 553). ‘This use may be often explained by 
the ellipsis of a noun or reflexive pronoun (ὃ 427). Thus, 


‘O δὲ βασιλεὺς ταύτῃ μὲν οὐκ ἦγεν 80. σὸ στράτευμα᾽, but the hing did not 
[lead on his army] advance in this direction, i. 10.6. "Ays 34, come now, ii. 
Ὡς Τῆς Φέρε δὴ ποίνυν Rep. Ath. 3. 5. Βάλλ᾽ [se. σεαυτόν) ἐς κόρακας ! 
{Throw yourself to the crows] Go, feed the crows! Go to the dogs! Ar. Put. 
782. ἩἩδονῇ δούς [sc. ἑαυτόν), giving [himself | up to pleasure, Eur. Ph. 21. 
᾿Ανακάλυπα᾽, ὦ κασίγνητον κάρα Id, Or. 294. "Evrsddev ἐξελαύνει i. 2.7 (cf. 
§ 427). Οὕτω δὲ ἔχει, and thus ‘it has itself) the matter stands, v. 6. 12. 
Elx ov δεινῶς, they were in a sad condition, vi. 4. 23 (see 363. 6). Προ- 
σέχειν [sc. φὸν νοῦν], to give attention, Mem. iv. 5.6. ‘Yarodsixvicsy 86. 
ἰαυσό) v. 7.12. Teds rod λόγου Ar. Ran. 580 (ef. i. 6. 6, and see ὃ 560. 1). 


Notes. (a) "Ἔχω used reflexively with an adverb is commonly equivalent 
to εἰμί with an adjective; thus, Ebvoixas ἔχοιεν = Ebvosnol εἴησαν i. 1. 5, 
bl * 


354 SYNTAX. — USE OF VOICES. [ΒΟΟΚ 11. 


᾿Αδύμως ἔχοντες ται "Αϑῦμοι ὄντες iii. 1. 3. The poets even join ἔχω with an 
adjective ; as, "Ex’ ἥσυχος, [hold still] be quiet, Eur. Med. 550. (6) For the 
catransitive use of the second tenses, see ὃ 257. β. j 


§ 656. II. The active voice, through a transition of 
meaning, sometimes supplies the place of the passive; as, 


Εὖ ἀκούω, to hear agreeably, and hence, from the bewitching sweetness of 
praise, to be commended or spoken well of ; as, Μέγα δὲ εὖ ἀκούειν ὑπὸ ἕξακισ- 
χιλίων ἀνθρώπων Vii. 7. 23. Ἵνα μὴ αὐτοὶ ἀκούωσι κακῶς, that they 
themselves may not be spoken ill of, Rep. Ath. 2.18. Kadesy ἄναλκις, to be 
called a coward, isch. Pr. 868. (Cf., in Lat., bene audire, male audire.) 
"Amidavey ὑπὸ Νικάνδρου, he [died] was killed by Nicander, v. 1. 15 (see 
§ 295, xrsivw). ᾿Εδύνατο .. ἑλεῖν. .. Otrws ἑάλω. He wus able to tuke 
it. .. It was thus taken, iii. 4. 12 (see § 301. 1). Οἱ ἐκσεαπτωκότες ‘Poe 
δίων ὑπὸ «τοῦ δήμου, those of the Rhodiuns who had [fallen out of the city] been 
banished by the people, H. Gr. iv. 8. 20. “Ors φεύγοιεν οἴκοθεν ὑπὸ τοῦ δή- 
pou, that they were [fleeing] banished from home by the people, H. Gr. i. 1. 27. 
Ἀσεξείας φεύγοντα ὑπὸ Msairov, accused of impiety by Melitus, Pl. Apol. 35 d 
(§ 374). Karucrds ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν, appointed by you, Dem. 49.11. Cf. § 561.2. 
— For the Inf. act. instead of pass., see ὃ 621. β. : 


B. Muppie. 


§ 37. The reflexive sense of the middle voice is far 
from being uniform either in kind or force. It not only varies 
in different verbs, but often in the same verb when used in 
different connections. It is, 


a.) Direct; so that the middle is equivalent to the active with the Ace, 
of the reflexive pronoun; as, Aovras [== Actes: taurév], he is washing himself, 
or bathing, Cyr. i. 3.11. Tldvres μὲν ἠλείφοντο, they all anointed themselves, 
H. Gr. iv. 5.4. Σεεφανοῦσθα, πάντας Ag. 2.15. Ὅνταν δ᾽ ἐγὼ ἐγκαλύψω- 
μα, Oyr. viii. 7.26. ᾿Εσιφερομένην, bearing herself on, i. 6. rushing on, i. 9. 
6. Τῶν ἀδίκων ἀπεχόμενος, refraining (holding himself] from injustice, Mem. 
iv. 8.4. Ὁ δ᾽ ἄλλος στρατὸς .. ἐξωσλίξετο πολλοῖς μὲν καὶ καλοῖς χιτῶσι" 
.«.ὥασλιζον δὲ καὶ ἵππους προμετωσιδίοις Cyr vi. 4.1. Φυγῇ ἄλλος ἄλλῃ 
ἰσράπετο ἵν. 8. 19 (cf. Eis φυγὴν ἔσρεψε τοὺς ἑξακισχιλίους i. 8. 24). 


§ 558. b.) Inprrecr; so that the middle is equivalent to the 
active with the Dat. or Gen. of the reflexive pronoun ; as, Zrearn- 
γοὺς μὲν ἱλίσθα, [= ἑλεῖν tavrois] ἄλλους, τὰ δ᾽ ἐσιτήδεια ἀγοράξεσθαι 
[= ὠγοράζειν ἑαυτοῖς, to [take for themselves] choose other generals, and 
to supply themselves with necessaries, i. 3.14. Ulaida.. σὲ ποιοῦμαι, 1 make 
you a son to myself, or I make you my son, Cyr. iv. 6.2. ᾿Ασὸ γεωργίας τὸν 
βίον ποιεῖσθαι Cc. 6.11. Ὅτι περὶ wasiorov rowiro, that he (made it to him- 
self] esteemed it of the utmost consequence,i.9.7. Κασασσρεψάμενος μὲν πάντας 
Σύρους, ‘having subjected to himself,’ Cyr. i. 5. 2. Κῦρον δὲ wsrariursran, 
but he sends for Cyrus (to come to himself), i. 1.2. Τοῦτον φυλάττεσθαι, 
to watch him for your own safety, to be on your guard against him, i. 6.9. Φε- 
govras δὲ οἴκοθεν... κώθωνα, ὡς ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ agicartas Cyt. i. 2.8. Lara 
σάμενον τὸν ὠκινάκην, drawing his scymitar, i. 8. 29. Θέσδα, τὰ ὅαλα i. θ. 4 
Κρία ϑέμενος ἐπὶ σὰ γόνατα, ‘upon his own knees,’ vii. 3.23. ᾿Ασόφηναι 
ννώμην, express your opinion, i. 6.9. Παιδά μ᾽ ὠνομάζετο, he called me his 
an, Soph. (ΕΔ. T. 1021. —’Awodidouas, to give up for one’s own profit, hence 


cn. 5.] MIDDLE. 


to sell; as, Ταῦτα ἀποδόμενος, οὔτε Σεύθη ὠπέδωκ Tee hav- ~ 
ing sold these things, he has neither paid over the p tos Seuthes nor to us” 
vii. 6.41. Avoues, to loose for one’s self, to deliver, to rdnsom;to-redeem ; as, 
EZ φινας ix τῶν πολεμίων ἐλυσάμην Dem. 316. 3. Tidnus or γράφω νόμον, to 
make alaw for another, vibewas or γράφορεαι vouov, to make a law for one’s self ; 
as, Θεοὺς οἴμαι rods νόμεους τούτους τοῖς ὠνθρώποις Sivas, I think that the gods 
have instituted these laws for men. Oi ἄνθρωποι αὐτοὺς tsvro, men have insti- 
tuted them for themselves, Mem. iv.4.19. Νόμον οὗτοι ἔγραψαν, these men (the 
Thirty) enacted a law, H. Gr. ii. 3. 52. “Hy νόμους καλοὺς γράψωνται, if they 
(the citizens) should enact good laws, Gic. 9.14. Βουλεύω, to give counsel to 
another, βουλεύοριαι, to give counsel to one’s self, to deliberate, to resolve (4 35). 
Τι κωρέω, to take vengeance for another, to avenge, ripwetowas, to take vengeance 
Sor one’s self, to punish. 


ᾧ δ} 6} 99. ..) ΒΕΟΙΡΕΟΟΑΙ, ; so that the middle is equivalent to the ac- 
tive with the reciprocal pronoun ; as, Μία χόμενοι καὶ βασιλεὺς καὶ Κῦρος καὶ of 
ἀμφ᾽ αὐτούς, ‘fighting with each other,’ i.8.27. ᾿Αμφὶ ὧν εἶχον διαφερόμενοι, 
“ quarrelling,’ iv. ὅ. 17. Διηλλάξαντο [robs ἵσσους), ‘exchanged,’ Cyr. viii. 
8. 32. — Hence the middle is extensively used in expressing actions which im- 
ply MUTUAL RELATION ; as those of agreement and contention, of greeting and 
companionship, of intercourse and traffic, of question and answer, &c. Thus, 
Συντίθεμαι, to agree, δια λύοριαι, to become reconciled, σπένδομαι, [to pour out li- 
bations together] to make a treaty, dywvigouai, to contend, ὡμιλλάομιωι, to vie, 
μάχομαι, to fight, ἀσπάζομαι, to embrace, to salute, txouc, to attend upon, to 
follow, διαλέγομαι, to converse, dviowas, to buy, πυνθάνομαι, to inquire, ὠσποκρίνο- 
pai, to answer, &e. 


d.) CausaTIvE; so that the middle denotes what a person procures to be 
done for himself; as, Odgaxa ἐποιήσατο, she had a corselet made, Cyr. vi. 1.51. 
“A ὁ πάσσος .. ἐπεποίητο Ib. i. 4.18. ᾿Απόλλωνος ὠνάθημα “ποιησάμενος V. 
3.5. ᾿Εγὼ γάρ σε ταῦτα ἐπίτηδες ἐδιδαξάμην, for I had you taught these things 
on purpose, Cyr.i. 6.2. TedasZdv τε Περσικὴν παρετίθετο Th. 1. 150. ’Exé- 
λευον ἀπογράφεσθαι πάντας, they commanded all to [have their names registered ] 
give in their names, H. Gr. ii. 4. 8. — Γράφομιαί τινα, to have the name of any one 
taken down as a criminal, hence to accuse ; as, Οἱ γραψάμενοι Σωκράτην Mem 
i. 1.1. Πρεσξεύω, to go as an ambassador, πρεσξεύομιαι, to send an ambassa: 
dor; as, “Ὅσπερ ἐπρίσξευεν αὐτῷ πάντοσε Vii. 2.23; Of πολέμιοι ἐπρεσξεύοντν 
Ag. 3.21, Μι σόδω, to let upon hire, μεισθόδομοαι, [to procure to be let to one’s 
self upon hire] to hire; as, [laciov μισθωσάμενος vi. 4. 13. 


ᾧ 260. «.) SuBJEcTIVE; so that the middle represents the action as 
more nearly concerning the subject, than the active (see §174). Thus, (1.) if 
the active is a causative verb, the middle may form the corresponding immedi- 
ate, (2.) if the active expresses an external or physical action, the middle may 
express the analogous internal or mental action; (3.) if the active represents 
a person as having a particular office, condition, or character, the middle may 
represent him as making it more his own by acting in accordance with it. Thus, 
—(1.) Γεύω, to make another taste, yetoua:, to taste for one’s self (see ὃ ὃ 375, 
430). Tlatw, to make to cease, παύομαι, to ceuse; as,”"Exauce μὲν πούτων πολ- 
λούς Mem. i. 2.2; Ταῦτα εἰπὼν ἐπαύσατο i.3.12. Doli, to cause to fear, 
to terrify, QoStowa:, to fear; as, Τοὺς ἑπομένους πολεμίους φοξῆσαι iv. 5.173 
᾿Εφοξοῦντο airivi.9.9. Αἰσγύνω, to put to shame, αἰσχύνομαι, to be ashamed. 
“lernus, to muke to stand, to station, ἵσταμαι, to stand ( 48). ἸΚοιμράω, to put 
to sleep, xoiudéowas, to sleep. ᾿Ορέγω, to stretch out, ὀρέγομαι, to reach after, 


356 SYNTAX. — USF OF VOICES. [ΒΟΟΚ ΠῚ 


hence to desire. lsiéw, to persuade, πείδομεαι, to believe, to obey. Tlegastw, to 
carry across, περαιόομαι, to go across. Σεέλλω, to fit out, to send, crirrAcwas, 
to set out, to go. Daivw, to show, φαίνομαι, to appear. -—(2.) “OgiZw, to bound, 
δρίζοριαι, to determine; as, Llorapdv, . . ὃς ὁρίζει τὴν Ἀρμενίαν iv. 3. 15 Οἱ σλεῖ- 
oro ὁρίζονται «ποὺς εὐεργέτας ἑαυτῶν ἄνδρας ἀγαθοὺς sivas H. Gr vii. 3. 12. 
Σκοσπέω, to view, to observe, cxortowas, to consider; as, Οἱ λοχᾶγοὶ ἐσκόπουν, εἰ 
οἷόν «ε εἴη τὴν ἄκραν λαθεῖν" . . cxomoumtvos δὲ αὐτοῖς ἔδοξε παντάπασιν ἀνάλω- 
Tov εἶναι τὸ χωρίον ν. ἢ. 30. ᾿Αγάλλω, to adorn, ὠγάλλομαι, to pride one’s self. 
Φράζω, to tell, φράζομαι, to tell one’s self, to reflect. — (3.) [loaded (from vo- 
Airns, citizen), to be a citizen, rorrrevouas, to conduct one’s self as a citizen, to 
engage in politics, to manage state affairs; as, Φυγάδα ἐξ "Adnyav, .. πολιτεύ- 
ora wag αὐτοῖς [i. 6. τοῖς Θυριεῦσι] H.Gr.i. 5.193 Οἱ μὲν worsrevopevos ἐν 
ταῖς πατρίσι καὶ νόμους τίθενται Mem. ii. 1. 14. 


§ ®G ἢ. Remarss. 1. If the reflexive action is direct or prominent, 
the reflexive pronoun is commonly employed ; more frequently with the active 
voice (if in use), but often with the middle; as, ’Exsivos ἀπέσφαξεν ἑαυτόν, he 
slew himself, Dem. 127.3. Oi μέν φασι βασιλέα κελεῦσαί τινα ἐπισφάξαι αὐτὸν 
Κύρῳ, οἱ δὲ ἑαυτὸν ἐπισφάξασθαι i. 8.29. ᾿Εσισφαλεστέραν αὐτὴν. . κατε- 
σκεύακεν ἑαυτῷ Dem. 22. 13. ἝἙαυτῷ ὄνομα καὶ δύναμειν περιποιήσασθαι ν. θ. 
17, Διελέγοντό et ἑαυτοῖς, they talked with themselves, v. 4. 34 (cf. ὃ 559). 
Μεσεπέμπετο τὸν Συέννεσιν πρὸς ἑαυτόν i. 2.26 (cf. ὃ 558). Luveyévorvro ἀλ- 
λήλοις Ib. 27. See ᾧ 504. 


- 2. The middle voice, by a transition of meaning, (a) often becomes in its 
force the active of a new verb; and (6) sometimes, like the active, supplies the 
place of the passive (ὃ 556). Thus,— (a) Kérrw, to smite, xdrroucai, to 
smite one’s self through grief, hence to bewail; as, Kérrecé’ "Ἄδωνιν Ar. Lys. 
396. See δὲ 558-560.—(b) ᾿Απώλονσο ὑπό σε τῶν πολεμίων καὶ χιόνος, 
‘were destroyed by,’ v. 3.3. ᾿Ακούσομαι κακός, I shall be called a villain, 
Soph. Cid. C. 988 (cf. ὃ 556). Οὐδὲ rodrwy σπερήσονται, they shall not [want] 
be deprived of these, i. 4. 8. ty 


3. In many cases, the reflex reference is so obvious, or so indistinct, that it 
may be either expressed or omitted without affecting the sense; that is, the 
active or the middle may be employed at pleasure; thus, Αἰσεῖ αὐτόν i. 1. 10. 
"Hiroduny βασιλέα ii. 3.19. Tload φέροιεν. . . Μικρὸν φερομένων Mem. iii. 14. 1 
Tloady γε μισθὸν. . φέροιτο (Ες. 1. 4. Μισθὸν σούτου φίροι Ib. 6. ΠΠαφλαγό 
vas ξυμμάξχους ποιήσεσθε" .. φίλον ποιήσομεν τὸν ᾿ἰἰαφλαγόνα v. 5. 22 (cf. Ib 
12, ἃ 558), Οἱ στρατιῶται ἠγόραζον τὰ ἐπιτήδεια i. 5. 10 (cf. 1. 8.14, ὁ 558). 
Εἶπεν tos ϑῦσαί σι βούλοιτο. Καὶ ἀπελθὼν ἐθύετο νἱϊ. 3. 14. ᾿Εσσράσευσαν ἐπ’ 
βασιλέα ii. 6.29. Ἐπὶ σὸν ἀδελφὸν ᾿Αρταξέρξην ἰστρατεύεσο ii. 1. 1.— Iu 
some verbs, the use of the mid. form is poetic, especially Epic. 

4. It follows naturally from the distinction between the two voices, that ths 
middle is more inclined to take its object in an indirect case than the active, 
thus, Of δὲ φύλακες προσελάσαντες ἐλοιδόρουν αὐτόν Cyr. i, 4. 8. ὋὉ ϑεῖος ads 
τῷ ἰλοιδορεῖσο Ib, 9, 


C. Passive. 


§ 362. The passive voice has for its ΒΌΒΙΈΟΤ an object 
of the active, commonly (α.) a direct, but sometimes (f.) an 
indirect object. Any other word governed by the active re- 
mains unchanged with the passive. The suBJECT OF THE AC- 


cH. 5 | PASSIVE. 857 


TIVE is expressed, with the passive, by the Gen. with a preposi- 
tion (commonly v0, but sometimes ano, ἐξ, παρά, ΟΥ̓ πρός), OF, 
less frequently, by the simple Gen. or Dat. (ὯΝ 381, 417), or, 
yet more rarely (chiefly in poetry, especially Ep.), by the Dat. 
with ino. ‘Thus, 


a. ΤΠεριεῤῥεῖτο δ᾽ αὐτὴ ὑπὸ rod Μάσκα, and it was surrounded by the Mascas 
[= Περιέῤῥει δ᾽ αὐτὴν ὁ Μάσκας, and the Mascas surrounded it], i. 5.4. Οὐ- 
δένα κρίνω ὑπὸ πλειόνων πεφιλῆσθαι, I judge that no one has been loved by more 
[== Κρίνω πλείους πεφιληκέναι οὐδένα, I judge that more have loved no one}, i. 9. 
28. Ei ϑαλάττης εἴργοιντο, if they should be excluded from the sea, H. Gr. vii 
1.8 (§ 347). Τῶν δ᾽ ἱππέων 6 λόφος ἐνεπλήσθη i. 10. 12 (ὃ 357). "H&iov.. 
δοθῆνα, οἱ ταύτας τὰς wores i. 1. 8 (ᾧ 404. δ). Μουσικὴν μὲν ὑπὸ Λάμαρον 
σαἰδευθείς, having been taught music by Lamprus Pl. Menex. 236 ἃ (§ 436). 
᾿Εγὼ ἐπείσθην τε ταῦτα ὑπὸ σοῦ Cyr. v. 5.16. Συληθεὶς γὰρ Ἡρακλῆς σὰς 
βοῦς .. ὑπὸ Νηλέως, for Hercules having been robbed of his kine by Neleus, 
Isocr. 119 ἃ. Ti dara... οὐ καὶ σὺ roars τὰς ἴσας “ληγὰς tuoi, why then are 
not you beaten the same number of blows with me, Ar. Ran. 635 (5435). Tow 
elroy τρῆμα τέμνεται τὸ τετμημένον, οἷον Td Tipvov réuves, the thing cut is cut 
such ἃ cut as the cutter cuts, Pl. Gorg. 476d. Ta μεγάλα (se. wurrigia) με- 
μύησαι, πρὶν σὰ σμικρά, you have been initiated into the greater mysteries be- 
fore the less, 1b. 497 ¢c. Αλλαι, τε γνῶμαι ἀφ᾽ ἑκάστων ἐλέγοντο Th. iii. 36. 
"Ex βασιλέως δεδομέναι i. 1.6. Παρὰ πάντων ὁμολογεῖται i. 9. 1. “Omodro- 
γεῖται πρὸς σάντων Ib. 20. ‘Yad σόλεως rerarypiver, ἢ vad τοῦ δεῖσθαι ἢ ἄλλῃ 
τινὶ ἀνάγκῃ κατεχόμενοι ii. 6.13. Υἱὸς ὑπὸ τῷ πατρὶ τεθραμμένος, ‘ brought 
up [under] by his father,’ Pl. Rep. 558 d. 


B. KareQoovndny ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῖν, I was despised by them as: Κατεφρονησάπην μου, 
they ‘despised me], Pl. Euthyd, 278 ς (8 375). Τὸ κρατεῖν ἡδονῶν. «. Keacoive’ 
ἄν ὑπὸ τοῦ "Ἔρωτος Id. Conv. 196 ο (§ 850). ᾿Ασπισσοῦντα, δ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἁπάντων 
Πελοποννησίων, and they are distrusted by all the Peloponnesians [= Οἱ δὲ Πε- 
λοποννήσιοι ἅπαντες ἀπιστοῦσιν αὐτοῖς], Isocr. 92 a (δ 406). Οἱ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων 
ἐσιπεσραμμένοι τὴν φυλακήν, those of the Athenians who had been intrusted with 
the guard [= οἷς ἡ φυλακὴ ἐπετέτραπτο, to whom the guard had been intrusted), 
Th. i. 126. Of Κορίνθιοι ταῦτα ἱπεστωλμένοι, the Corinthians having received 
these directions, Id. v. 37. 


ᾧ 263. Remarks. 1. When the active has more than one object, it 
is commonly determined which shall be the subject of the passive by one or 
the other of the following preferences ;— (a) The passive prefers, as its sub- 
ject, a direct to an indirect object of the active.—(b) The passive prefers, as 
its subject, the name of a person to that of a thing. — If these preferences con 
flict, sometimes the one prevails, and sometimes the other. The latter prefer- 
ence often leads to construction by synecdoche (δ 438); thus, ᾿Ασοτρηθέντες 
was κεφαλάς, cut off as to their heads [=’Amorunbeicay τῶν κεφαλῶν, their 
heads being cut off |, ii. 6.1 (cf. Κύρου ἀποσέμνεται ἡ κεφαλή i. 10. 1).. Au- 
φϑαρμένοι .. τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς [= "Exovres rods ὀφθαλμοὺς διεφθαρμένους] iv. 5. 
12. Ta ὦτα σετρυπημένον, having his ears bored, iii. 1. 31. 


§ 264. 2. The passive is sometimes the converse of the middle rather 
than of the active; and hence deponents may have a passive. Thus, Micéw- 
θῆναι δὲ οὐκ ἐπὶ σούτῳ ἔφασαν, ‘that they had not been hired,’ i. 3. 1 (ὃ 559. d). 
Odpedxas εὖ εἰργασμένας, corselets well made, Mem. iii. 10. 9 (cf. ᾿Ανδριάνσας 
«αλῶς μϑσσβρι ας ‘having made,’ Ib. ii. 6.6). ᾿Εργασθήσεται, it shall be 


858 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [ΒΟΟΚ 11 


performed, Soph. Tr. 1218. ᾿Εωνήθη δὲ ἔρια, and wool was bought, Mem. ii. 7 
12 (§ 301. 8). Τὸ ϑεαδέν Th. iii. 88. ‘Os βιάζομαι rade Soph. Ant. 66. — 
This passive occurs chiefly in the Perf., Plup., and Aor. 


3. If an active or middle which has no object is changed to a passive, it 
becomes, of course, IMPERSONAL (ὃ 546. @); and it may become so, with an 
indirect object. Thus, Ὕ πῆρκτο, a beginning had been made [= Ὕ πῆρξαν, they 
had begun), Th. i. 93. ᾿Επειδὴ αὐτοῖς wragsoxsvarro, when preparation haa 
been made by them [= Ἐπειδὴ ““αρεσκευασμένοι ἦσαν, when they had made prepa- . 
ration}, 1b.46. Καλῶς ἄν σοι ἀπεκέκριτο [= ἄν ἀπεκέκρισο] ; Would [it have 
been answered well by you] your answer have been a good one? Pl. Gorg. 
453 ἃ, 


III. Use or tue Tenses. 


§ 365. <A general view of the distinctive offices of the 
Greek tenses, particularly as employed in the Indicative, has 
already been presented (δῷ 167,168). In explanation and 
completion of that view, it is essential to observe, 


I. That, out of the Ind., the tenses, except the Fut., have 
no direct reference to a distinction of time, but simply to the 
RELATION or STATE of the action as indefinite, definite, or 
complete, ΟΥ̓, ἴῃ other words, as doing, done, or having been 
done (§ 168). 


Hence, if we omit the Fut., each of the three states or relations has but a 
single tense-form out of the Ind. This form, as it marks the distinction of 
time only occasionally and indirectly, may be termed achronic (a-, not, yeov- 
xs, relating to time) ; while the forms of the Jnd., as they properly and directly 
mark this distinction (though sometimes used achronically), may be termed 
chronic. The time of an action expressed by an achronic tense must be in- 
ferred from the connection. Thus (the star denoting that a form is wanting), 


Inp. Susy. Opt. Imp. InF. Part. 


ἘΝῚ Achronic, Achronic, Achronic, Achronic, Achronle, 


Definite 


a } Achronic, chronic, Achronic, chronic, Achronic, 
as 


Future, ‘x Future, * Future, Future, 
ὁ 566. II. The use of generic forms for specific (§ 330) 


has a peculiar prominence in the doctrine of the Greek tenses. 


Future « 
(see § 581). 
3 (Present # 
a (see § ΩΣ Achronic, chronic, Achronic, Achronic, Achronio 
rg | Past, 
4 | Future, © Future, - Future, Future. 
g Present, 
Ἔν 
Ξ 
5 


cx. 5.1 USE OF TENSES, 359 


Remarks. a. The Pres., in its widest generic sense, includes all the other 
tenses (see 8); as a definite tense used achronically (§ 565), it includes the 
Impf. The Imer., in its widest generic sense, includes all the pust tenses 
(§ 173); and the Aor., all the indefinite and complete tenses. The PERF., as a 
generic tense, includes the Plup. 


β. The distinction of generic and specific belongs not merely to grammaticat 
forms, but also to the ideas which these forms represent. Thus the idea of 
PRESENT TIME, which applies specifically only to the passing moment, extends 
in its generic application to any period including this moment ; and we speak 
of the present month, the present century, &c. Yn its widest extent, therefore, 
it includes all time. Hence generul truths, existing states and habits, and oft- 
recurring facts, belong appropriately to the present time. : 


§ 667. Ill. The relations of time have nothing sensible 
to fix the conceptions of the mind. It ranges therefore with 
freedom through all time, the past, the present, and the future ; 
and, without difficulty, conceives of the past or future as 
present, and even of the present or future as already past. 
That the Greek language should have a peculiar freedom in 
the interchange of tenses, is but the natural consequence of 
the wonderful sit a A of the Greek mind. See §§ 330. 3, 
576, 584, 585. 


REMAR"S. «a. The Pres. tense, when employed by the figure of vision, in 
speaking of past events, is termed the HISTORIC PRESENT. See § 576. 


β. Common facts, imagined scenes, and general assertions, not being con- 
fined to any particular time, may often be expressed in the present, past, or 
future, according to the view which the speaker chooses to take. LE. g. we 
may say, “ The wisest often err,” or “‘ The wisest have often erred,” or “ The 
wisest will often err.” Thus, ‘H μὲν γὰρ εὐταξία σώζειν δοκεῖ, ἡ δὲ ἀταξία 
πολλοὺς ἤδη ἀπολώλεκεν, for good order seems to preserve, but disorder 
has already destroyed many, iii. 1. 88, Οὐδέν ἐσσι κερδαλεώτερον rod νικᾷν " 
ὃ γὰρ κρατῶν ἅμα πάντα συνήρπακε Cyr. iv. 2. 26. Ἣ δὲ Ψυχὴ, . . 
ἀπαλλατεομένη τοῦ σώματος, εὐθὺς διαπεφύσηται καὶ ἀπόλωλεν Pl. Phedo, 
80c. Κρατεῖ δὲ μηχαναῖς ἀγραύλον ϑηρὸς ὀρεσσιξάτα, λασιαύχενά 5 ἵππον 
ὑπάξετα, Soph. Ant. 348. "Asrogos ia’ οὐδὲν ἔρχεται, τὸ μέλλον" “Aida μό- 
γον φεῦξιν οὖκ ἐπάξετα, Ib. 360. ᾿Εν σολλοῖς μὲν, ὦ Δημόντκε, πολὺ διεσσώ- 
σᾶς εὑρήσομεν τάς τε τῶν σπουδαίων γνώμας καὶ τὰς τῶν φαύλων διανοίας " πολὺ 
δὲ μεγίστην διαφορὰν εἰλήφασιν ἐν σαῖς πρὸς ἀλλήλους συνηθείαις. Oj μὲν γὰρ 
φίλους παρόντας (μόνον τιμῶσιν, of δὲ καὶ μακρὰν ἀπόντας ἀγαπῶσι - καὶ τὰς μὲν 
“τῶν φαύλων συνηθείας ὀλίγος χρόνος. διέλῦσε, τὰς δὲ τῶν σπουδαίων φιλίας οὐδ᾽ 
ἄν ὁ wus αἰὼν ἐξαλείψειεν Isocr. 2 ἃ. See §§ 575-578. 


Nore. The use of the Aor. by Homer in comparisons is particularly fre 
Pastis as, "Here δ᾽, ὡς ὅτε τις δρῦς ἤρισεν ΠῚ. 482, cf. Τ΄ 33, &e. See alse 

5 

y- A past tense may be used, in speaking of that whr.h is present, with ref= 
erence to some past opinion, feeling, remark, action, or obligation; thus, Kiaxgig 
οὐκ ae’ ἦν Sets, Venus was not then merely a goddess (as we supposed her to 
be), Eur. Hipp. 359. “Ag οὐ τόδε ἦν τὸ δένδρον, ἐφ᾽ ὅπερ ἦγες ἡμᾶς Pl. Phedr. 
280 ἃ. Φιαφθεροῦμεν ἐκεῖνο καὶ λωξησόμεθα, ὃ τῷ μὲν δικαίῳ βέλστον ἐγίγνετο, 
σῷ δὲ ἀδίκῳ ἀπώλλυσο, we shall corrupt and injure that, which (as we said) “is 


860 SYNTAX.— USE OF TENSES. [Book ΠΙ 


improved by Justice, and ruined by injustice, ΕἸ. Crito, 47 ἃ. ᾿Ἰέναι σ᾽ ἐκέλευον 
οἱ στρατηγοὶ τήμερον Ar. Ach. 1073. "Ὥφελε μὲν Κῦρος ζῇν, [Cyrus onght to 
be living] Would that Cyrus were living! ii. 1.4. Οὐκ ἐχρῆν μέντοι σκοπεῖν», 
But ought you not to be considering? Apol. 3. Cf., in English, the familiar 
use of ought, the Impf. of owe, as a Pres. 


§ 568. IV. The tense may vary according as an action 
is viewed in its relation to the present time, or to the time of 
another action, either past or future. The tense of an Inf. 
or Part. is commonly determined by its connection with anoth- 
er verb, without regard to the present time. In the Ind., the 
tense is properly determined by the relation of the action to 
the present time ; but in Greek, if the Ind. is dependent upon 
another verb, its tense is often determined by the time of that 
verb, particularly in indirect quotation. In the Subj. and Opt. 
modes, from their very nature, there is commonly a union of 
the two considerations. Thus, 

Ὕπίσχεσο ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ δώσειν, he promised to give each man (the giving 
future at the time of the promise’, i. 4.13. "Ἕχων δαλίτας ἀνέξη σριακο- 
σίους, he went up, having (at the time of his going up) three hundred hoplites, 
1.1.2, "Avioravro . . AtZovres ἃ ἐγίγνωσκον, they rose to say (future at the 
time of the rising) what they thought (past at the time of the narration), i. 8. 
13. Πισσευθεὶς ἀληθεύσειν, ἃ ἔλεγες, ἐπῆρας Vii. 7.25. ἘΕἶσε..., στρατηγοὺς 
uty ἑἱλέσθα, ἄλλους ws τάχιστα, εἰ μὴ βούλεται Κλέαρχος ἀπάγειν". . ἡγεμόνα 
αἰτεῖν Κῦρον, ὅστις .. ὠπάξει, recommended, that they should immediately choose 
other generals, if Clearchus [18] was unwilling to lead them; that they should 
ask Cyrus for a guide, who [will would conduct them back, i. 3.14. Τοῖς δὲ 
ὑποψία μὲν ἦν, ὅτ, ἄγει πρὸς βασιλέα, and they had indeed a suspicion, that he 
was leading them against the king, i. 3.21. ᾿Εδαύμασε, ris παραγγέλλει i. 8. 
16. "Eosusasivo, ὅ σι ποιήσει βασιλεύς Ib. 21. 

Remark. An Ineryitrve, denoting an action which must be future, from 
the very nature of the governing word, often employs the Fut., but far more 
frequently the appropriate achronic tense; thus, Συμαράξειν ὑπισχνεῖτο" ἐδεῖτο 
δὲ ras κώμας μὴ καίειν Vii. 7. 19. Ὑσισχνῶνται σροθυμόφερον αὐτοῖς συστρα 
τεύεσθα, Ib. 31. Μεμνῆσθα, ὑσισχνεῖσθε vii. θ. 88. Ὕσέσχετό μοι βουλεύ 
σασθαι, ἐρέσθαι δέ με ὑμᾶς ἐκέλευσεν ii. 8, 20. See § 583. 


A. ΠΕΕΙΝΙΤΕῈ AND INDEFINITE. 


§ 3669. The inverinite and the DEFINITE tenses are 
thus distinguished. The former represent an action simply as 
performed ; the latter represent it definitely as performing. 
The former merely express that an action has been, is, or will 
06 performed; the latter present a picture of the action in the 
course of its performance. The former take a single glance 
at it, as one complete act conceived of as momentary; the 
latter observe its progress, as begun and going forward by con- 
tinued or repeated effort, but not yet complete. 


If action is conceived of as motion in a straight line, the definite tenses may 


cH. 5.] DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 361 


be said to present a side view of this line, so that it ig seen in its full length; 
but the indefinite tenses to present only an end view of it, so that it appears as 
a mere point. Thus, 


Definite View. Indefinite View. 
( ) RES. 


ὁ 70. Hence an action is represented, 


a.) By the definite tenses, as continued or p slonged ; but 
by the Aor., as momentary or transient. Thus, 


Teds μὲν οὖν πελταστὰς ἐδέξαντο of βάρβαροι καὶ ἐμάχοντο ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐγγὺν 
ἧσαν οἱ ὁπλῖται, ἐτράώποντφ. Kai οἱ μὲν πελτασταὶ εὐθὺς εἵσπονσο διώκοντες. The 
barbarians then received the targeteers (momentary) and fought with them (eon- 
tinued); but when now the hoplites were near, they turned to flight (momentary). 
And the targeteers immediately followed pursuing them (continued). v. 4. 24. 
“Iva ἢ . . ἡσυχίαν ἔχῃ, ἢ. . ἀφύλακτος ληφόῃ Dem. 45. 2. Διαλέγου, καὶ 
μάθε πρῶσον τίνες εἰσίν, converse with them, and learn first who they are, iv. 
8. 5. Ἐπειδὰν ἅπαντα ἀκούσητε, κρίνατε, καὶ μὴ πρότερον προλαμθάνετε 
Dem. 44.2, Δοθῆναί οἱ ταύτας τὰς πόλεις μᾶλλον, ἢ Τισσαφέρνην ἄρχειν ade 
τῶν i. 1. 8. Λαξών, having taken(momentaty). ἼΕ χων, having (continued), 
1, 


ΝΌΤΕΒ. 1. Any dwelling of the mind upon the agent, mode, or circum 
stances of an action, and any attempt at gruphic description, commonly lead to 
the use of the definite tenses; thus,’Awexgivavro (Κλέαρχος δ᾽ ἔλεγεν), they an- 
swered (and Clearchus was the speaker), ii. 3.21 (ef. ii. 5. 39 ; iii. 3.3). "Ἔλεξε 
ἘΞενοφῶν, nounveve δὲ Τιμησίθεος v. 4.4. See § 576. 


2. In the Imperative, the momentary character of the Aor. is peculiarly 
favorable to vivacity, energy, and earnestness of expression; thus, Σὺ οὖν weds 
Sav συμβούλευσον ἡμῖν ii. 1. 17. ᾿Ακούσατε οὖν μου πρὸς ϑεῶν v. 7. 5 
“Βλέψον," ἔφη, “ πρὸς τὰ δρή, καὶ ἴδε ὡς ἄξατα πάντα ἐστί" iv. 1. 20. 


§ ὦ 5 ἃ. b.) By the definite tenses, as a habit or continued 
course of conduct ; but by the Aor., as a single act. Thus, 


Ἔσεὶ δὲ εἶδον αὐτὸν, οἵπερ σρόσθεν προσεκύνουν, καὶ τότε προσεκύνησαν, ane 
when those saw him who were before in the habit of prostrating themselves before 
him, they prostrated themselves even then, i. 6.10. Διέφθειρον γὰρ προσιόντες 
φοὺς στρατιώτας, καὶ ἕνα γε λοχᾶγὸν διέφθειραν iii. 3.5. “Ooris δ᾽ ἀφικνεῖτο 
.«. eds αὐτὸν, πάντας οὕτω διατιθεὶς ἀπεπέμπετο ἰ.1.8. Πολλάκις ἰόντες tat 
σὰς θύρας ἀπήπτουν. ‘O δὲ ἐλσίδας λέγων διῆγε i. 2. 11. Σασρουθὸν δὲ οὐδεὶς 
ἔλαβεν" οἱ δὲ διώξαντες τῶν ἱππέων σαχὺ ἐσαύοντο i. 5. 3.— Hence the great 
use of the definite tenses in the description of character. See Anab. i. ch. 9 ; 
ii. ch. 6. 


§ 672. c.) By the definite tenses, as doing at the time 
of, or until another action ; but by the Aor., simply as done in 
ats own time. ‘Thus, 


Τούτῳ ce σπρόπῳ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς τέτταρας. Ἡνίκα δὲ στὸν riparer 
ἰσορεύοντο, εἶδον βασίλειόν σι. In this way, they made four day’s-marches. And 
while they were making the fifth, they saw a puluce. “Wi. 4.23. ᾿Ασέκτειναν ov- 

ol 


862 SYNTAX. — USE OF TENSES. [Boox 13%. 


χνοὺς, « « καὶ ἐδίωκον μέχρι οὗ εἶδον, they slew many, and continued the pursuit un 
til they saw, v. 4.16. Todrov ἐκέλευσε διαφυλάξαι αὐτῷ chy τε γυναῖκα 
καὶ chy σκηνήν Cyr. v. 1.2. Ταύτην οὖν ἐκέλευσεν ὁ Κῦρος διαφνυλάταει» 
σὸν ᾿Αράσσην; ἕως ἄν αὐτὸς aden Ib. 3. 


§ 573. d.) By the definite tenses, as begun, attempted, or 
designed (doing, not done); but by the Aor., as accomplished 
(done). Thus, . 


Κλέαρχος robs αὑτοῦ στρατιώτας ἐθδιάζεσο ἰέναι!" οἱ δὲ αὐτόν τε ἔβαλλον. » « 
Lers μὲν μικρὸν ἐξέφυγε τὸ μὴ καταπετρωθῆναι, ὕστερον δ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἔγνω, ὅτι οὐ dus 
γήσετα, βιάσασθαι. Clearchus attempted to force his soldiers to proceed; but they 
began to stone him. He then narrowly escaped being stoned to death (the com- 
pletion of the act of stoning) ; and afterwards, when he became convinced thut 
he should not be able to prevail by Sorce (to accomplish his attempt). i. 3. 1. 
“Orws age. ἐγένεθ᾽ vids οὑτοσὶ, . «σε τοὐνόμασος, δὴ ᾿᾽ντεῦθεν ἐλοιδορούμεθα. Ἢ 
μὲν γὰρ ἵππον προσεσίθει πρὸς σοὔνομοα, +. ἐγὼ δὲ τοῦ πάσστου ᾽τιθέμμην Φ εἰ- 
δωνίδην. «. Τῷ χρόνῳ κοινῇ ξυνέξημεν, κἀθέμεθα Φ εἰδιππίδην. When this 
son was dons to us, thereupon we began to quarrel about the nume. For she 
insisted on tacking ixaos to his name, and I was for giving him his grand- 
father’s name, Phidonides. At last we made a compromise, and named him Phi- 
dippides. Ar. Νὰ. 60. “τ᾽ ἐξέδαλλον rods Sods, when I was for expelling the 
gods, 10. 1477. ᾿Ἑκαινόμην ξίφει. ἀλλ᾽ ἐξέκλεψεν. ."Άρσεμις Eur. Iph. T. 26. 
᾿Ωνεομένοισι ἔδωκε δωτίνην Hat. i. 69. ; 


ΝΌΟΤΕΒ. «a. Hence the definite tenses are often used with a negative todeny 
the attempt as well as the accomplishment of an action; thus, Κλέαρχος οὐκ 
, ἀνεθίξαζεν ial σὸν λόφον, Clearchus did not undertake to march upon the hill, i. 
10.14. Ξενοφῶν τοὺς μὲν πελταστὰς οὐκ ἦγεν iii. 4.39. ᾿Επεὶ δὲ οὐδεὶς ἂν 
σίλεγεν, εἶπεν iii. 2. 88, ᾿Επεὶ δὲ οὐδὲν ὠφέλιμον ἔλεγεν, ὁρῶντος σοῦ ἱπέρου κα- 
πτεσφάγη. ὋὉ δὲ λοισὸς ἔλεξεν. And when he would say nothing useful, he was 
put to death in the sight of the other. But the second said. iv. 1. 23. 


β. A person is often spoken of as having done what he has attempted to do; 
thus, MEN. Δίκαια γὰρ τόνδ᾽ εὐσυχεῖν καείναντά με, TEYK. Κσείναντα; 
Δεινόν γ' ᾿ εἶπας, si καὶ ζῆς ϑανών. MEN. Θεὸς γὰρ ἐκσώζει με, σῷδε δ᾽ οἴχομαι. 
Men,. For is it right that he should prosper, having slain me? Teuc. Having 
slain you? You tell a wonder, indeed, if, being dead, you are yet alive. Men. 
For heaven preserves me, but, so far as lay in him, I am no more. Soph. Aj. 
1126 (§ 410). Σὰν ψυχὰν ἀσπέξαλον, τέκνον" ἔκτεινά σ᾽ ἄκουσα Kur. lon, 
1498. 


§ 374. ec.) By the definite tenses, as introductory; but 
by the Aor., as conclusive. Thus, 


ΟἹ ἠρώφων Κῦρον" .. ὃ δ᾽ ἀπεκρίνασο, who ashed Cyrus; and he answered, 
i. 3. 20 (cf. ᾿Αξιοῦν" .. ἀναγγεῖλαι Ib. 19). ᾿Αχούσανσες ταῦτα ἐσείδοντο καὶ 
διέξησαν i.4.16. Οἱ Ἕλληνες ἐδουλεύονσο" καὶ ἀπεκρίναντο ii. 3. 21. 


Nore. Verbs of asking, inquiring, commanding, forbidding, deliberating, at- 
tempting, endeavouring, besieging, wounding, and some others, are introductory 
in their very nature, and hence incline to the use of the definite tenses; thus, 
Ti δεῖ αὐτὸν αἰτεῖν, καὶ οὐ λαθεῖν ἐλθόντα, Why must he ask for them (which 
of itself accomplishes nothing), and not come and take them (which is final)? 
ii, 1,10, Συλλέξας σεράϊδξευμα, ἐπολιόρκει Mianrov καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ 


Τ᾿ 


cH. 8.1 DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 363 


ϑάλατταν, καὶ ἐπειρᾶτο κατάγειν «οὺς ἐκπεπτωκότας 1.1.7. Kad πολλοὺς 
κατετίσρωσκον, καὶ ἐκράτησαν τῶν ᾿ Ελλήνων iii. 4. 26. 


ᾧ ©) '@ >). Remarks. 1. As the Aor. is an achronic tense, except in 
the Ind. (§ 565), it is in this mode only that the Pres. indefinite is wanting 
(§ 168. #). It is commonly supplied by the Pres. definite, but sometimes by 
the Aor. or Perf. See Rem. 2, and §§ 233, 577, 578. 


2. The Aor. in the Jnd. is properly a past tense; but, from the want of the 
Pres. indefinite, it often supplies the place of this tense, or is used achronically. 
In these uses, it differs from the Pres. definite, in representing the action either 
more simply or singly, or with a certain expression of instantaneousness, energy, 
decisiveness, or completeness. ᾿Ανὴρ δ᾽ ὅσαν σοῖς ἔνδον dyna: ξυνὼν, ἔξω μολὼν 
ἔπαυσε καρδίαν ἄσης, and when a man becomes weary of the society of those at home, 
going abroad he relieves his heart at once of its disgust, Eur. Med. 244. Καὶ 
ναῦς γὰρ ἐνταθεῖσα πρὸς βίαν ποδὶ ἔθαψεν, ἔστη δ᾽ αὖθις, ἦν χαλᾷ woda Id. Or. 
706. Ὅταν δ᾽ ἐκ “πλεονεξίας καὶ πονηρίας τις, ὥσπερ οὗτος, ἰσχύσῃ, ἡ πρώτη 
πρόφασις καὶ μικρὸν πταῖσμα ἅπαντα ἀνεχαίτισε καὶ διέλῦσεν, ‘instantly tosses 
off and dissipates,’ Dem. 20.25. Ταχὺ εἶπεν Pl. Rep. 406 ἀἃ. ᾿Εσήνεσ᾽ ἔργον, 
1 fully approve the act, Soph. Aj. 536. Σοὶ ταῦτα .. παρήνεσα Id. Phil. 1433 
Di... εἶπον τῆσδε γῆς ἔξω περᾷν, “1 bid you peremptorily,’ Eur. Med. 271. 
"Ouuewka δ᾽ οἷον toyov toc’ ἐργαστέον Ib. 791. ᾿Απέπσσυσα τοιάνδε συγγένειαν 
ἀλλήλων πικράν Id. Iph. A. ὅ09. Ἥνσδην ἀπειλαῖς, ἐγέλασα ψολοκομπίαις, 
ἀπεπυδάρισα μόθωνω, περιεκόκκυσα, I enjoy your threats, I laugh at your boast- 
ings of smoke, &c., Ar. Eq. 696. ᾿Εδεξάρην σὸ ῥηθέν, I welcome the omen, Soph. 
El. 668. ει 


ᾧ δ 4 (Ὁ. 53. The Greek has the power of giving to narration a wonder- 
ful variety, life, and energy, from the freedom with which it can employ and 
interchange the Aor., Impf., and Historical Pres. Without cireumlocution, it 
can represent an action as continued or momentary; as attempted or accom- 
plished ; as introductory or conclusive. It can at pleasure retard or quicken 
the progress of the narrative. It can give to it dramatic life and reality by 
exhibiting an action as doing, or epic vivacity and energy by dismissing it as 
done. Itcan bring a scene forward into the strong light of the present, and 
instantly send it back again into the shade of the past. The variety, vivaci- 
ty, and dramatic life of Greek narrative can be preserved but very imperfectly 
in translation, from the fact that the English has no. definite tenses, except by 
c:rcumlocution, and has far less freedom than the Greek in uniting the past 
and present tenses. Thus, "Eas) δὲ καὶ ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἐχώρουν of “Ἕλληνες, λείπουσι 
3% καὶ τὸν λόφον of ἱα' πεῖς > οὐ μὴν brs ἀθρόοι, ἀλλ᾽ ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν - ἐψιλοῦτο δ᾽ 
ὁ λόφος τῶν ἱππέων σπέλος δὲ καὶ πάντες ἀπεχώρησαν. ὋὉ οὖν Κλέαρχος οὖκ 
ἀνεξίξαξεν ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ αὐτὸν στήσας σὸ στράτευμα, πέμπει Δύκιον 
σὸν Συρακόσιον καὶ ἄλλον ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον, καὶ κελεύει, κατιδόντας τὰ ὑπὲρ τοῦ λό- 
φου, τί ἔστιν, ἀπαγγεῖλαι. Καὶ ὁ Λύκιος ἥλασέ σε, καὶ ἰδὼν ἀπαγγέλλει, ὅτι 
φεύγουσιν ἀνὰ κράτος. Σχεδὸν δ᾽ ὅτε ταῦτα ἦν, καὶ ἥλιος ἰδύετο. Ἐνταῦθα δ᾽ 
ἔστησαν οἱ “Ἕλληνες, καὶ ϑέμενοι τὰ ὅπλα ἀνεπαύοντο" καὶ ἅμα μὲν ἐθαύμαζον, 
ὅτι οὐδαμοῦ Κῦρος φαίνοιτο, οὐδ᾽ ἄλλος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ οὐδεὶς σπ“΄αρεΐίη i. 10. 18 -- 16, 
See iii. 4. 25 -- 27, 38, 39 ; 1. 8.38 -- 57; iv. 7.10--14; v. 4. 16, 1; νἱ. 1. 
5-13. 

4. There is no precise line of division between the offices of the definite and 
indefinite tenses. In some cases it seems to be indifférent which are employed. 
And the definite tenses, as the generic forms (ὃ 566. «), often occur, where the 
indefinite would seem to be more strictly appropriate. The use of the Impf. 


for the Aor. occurs especially in Hom. and Hdt. 


864 SYNTAX. — USE OF TENSES. [ΒΟΟΚ ΠῚ 


5. In verbs in which the Aor. was not formed, or was formed with a αἰ δι» 
ent signification, the Impf. remained as both the definite and indefinite past 
tense ; as ἦν and ἔφην (44 53, 55, § 301. 7), which are more frequently used 
as. Aor. 


B. INDEFINITE AND COMPLETE. 


§ 377. I. The indefinite and the complete tenses are 
thus distinguished. The former represent an action as per 
formed in the time contemplated ; the latter represent it as, a 
the time contemplated, having already been performed. In the 
former, the view is directed to the action simply; in the latter, 
it is specially directed to the completion of the action, and to 
the state consequent upon its performance. Hence arise two 
special uses of the complete tenses ; the one to mark emphat- 
ically the entire completion or the termination of an action; 
and the other, to express the continuance of the effects of an 
action. ‘Thus, 


Τοιαῦτα μὲν πεποίηκε, such things has he done (and is now upon trial for), 
1.6.9. Ἔσειτ’ ἀναγκάζο; πάλιν ἰξεμεῖν dre’ ἄν κεκλόφωσί μου, “ whatever 
they may have stolen from me (and may have in their possession),’ Ar. Eq. 
1147. "Hadov of ᾿Ινδοὶ ἐκ τῶν πολεμίων, obs ἐπεπόμφε, Κῦρος ἐπὶ κατασκοπῇ, 
καὶ ἔλεγον, ὅτ, Κροῖσος μὲν ἡγεμὼν . . ἡρημένος εἴη πῶν «πολεμίων - δεδογμένον 
δ᾽ εἴη πᾶσι σοῖς συμμάχοις .. παρεῖναι " « - πεπομφέναι δὲ Κροῖσον καὶ εἰς Λα. 
κεδαίμονα περὶ ξυμμαχίας Ογτ. vi. 2.9. Περὶ μὲν οὖν σῶν ἰδίων ταῦτά μοι προ- 
εἰρήσθω- περὶ δὲ τῶν κοινῶν. ., ‘let these things have been premised,’ Isocr. 
48 ἃ. “Ὡρίσθω ὑμῶν ἡ βραδύτης " viv δὲ .. βοηθήσατε, let your sluggishness have 
reached its full limits ; and do you now assist, ΤῊ. 1.71. Ταῦτα μὲν οὖν, ὦ Εῤ- 
θύδημέ τε καὶ Διονυσόδωρε, πεπαίσθω τε ὑμῖν, καὶ ἴσως ἱκανῶς ἔχει" τὸ δὲ δὴ με- 
φσὰ ταῦτα ἐπιδείξατον Pl. Euthyd.278 ἃ. ᾿Ασπειργάσθω δὴ ἡμῖν καὶ αὕτη .. it 
πολιτεία Id. Rep. ὅ52 6. Πεπειράσθω, [let it have been tried] let a trial be 
made, Ar. Vesp. 1129. ᾿Ἐξιόνσες δὲ εἶπον σὴν ϑύραν κεκλεῖσθαι, and going out 
they commanded the door [to be closed and to remain so] to be kept closed, H. 
Gr. ν. 4. 7. 


S57 S. Remarxs. «. The consequences of an action are usually 
more obvious and niore permanent in that which is acted upon, than in that 
which acts. The receiver feels the blow more deeply and longer than the giv- 
er. We find here a reason why the complete tenses are used so much more in 
the passive than in the active, and why, in the active, so many verbs want 
them altogether (δ 256, 580). 


β. As the object of the complete tenses is to ascribe the consequences of an 
action, rather than to narrate the action, they naturally occur more frequently 
in the Part. than in the other modes. Some modern languages, as the Eng- 
lish, the French, the German, have no pass. form by inflection, except the 
Perf. Part. 


y- For the same reason, the transition in ὃ 233 is natural and easy. We 
subjoin an example, which marks strikingly the distinction between the Perf. 
used as a Pres. and the Aor.; Τεόνᾷσιν of Savivees, those who have died (refers 
ring to the past event) are dead (referring to the present state consequent upom _ 
the event), Eur. Alc. 541 (but, Θνήσκω, I am dying, Lb. 284). 


cn. 5.] INDEFIN’TE AND %OMPLETE. — FUTURE. 365 


3. In the Epic, the use of the Plup. as Impf. or Aor. is more extended than 
in the Attic, and has perhaps some connection with the usage in § 194. 3. 
Thus, Βεξήκει, went, A. 221. Βεδλήκει E. 66. 


§ 379. s. The Perf. is sometimes called a past, and sometimes a 
present tense; and neither without reason, since it marks the relation of a past 
action to the present time. The action which it denotes is past; but the state 
consequent, to which it also refers, is present. The tense is therefore in its 
time, as in many languages in its form, COMPOUND, having both a past and a 
present element. The comparative prominence of these elements varies in dif- 
ferent languages, in different words in the same language, and in different uses 
of the same word. We remark, in general, that the present element has a far 
greater prominence in the Greek than in the English Perf. 


Z. An action is sometimes so regarded as continued in its effect, that the 
Pres. supplies the place of the Perf. This is the common use of the Pres. in 
ἥκω, to come, and oixoucs, to go (cf., in Eng., J am come, and I am gone); and 
is not unfrequent in ἀκούω and κλύω, to hear, μανθάνω, to learn, νικάω, to con- 
quer, and some other verbs. In these verbs, the Jmpf. may supply the place 
τ of the Plup. Thus, Eis καλὸν ἥκεσε, you [come] have come opportunely, iv. 7. 
8. Κῦρος δὲ οὔπω ἧκεν, and Cyrus had not yet come, i.5.12. Odrs ἀποδεδρά- 
κᾶσιν, οἶδα γὰρ ὅπη οἴχονται, ‘ whither they have gone, i. 4. 8. ‘Os ἡμεῖς 
ἀκούομεν, as we [hear] have heard, v. 5.8. "Agri μανθάνω Eur. Bac. 1297. 
Νικῶμέν τε βασιλέα ii. 1. 4. 


§ 380. Il. Unless the attention is specially directed to 
the effect of an action, the generic Aor. more frequently sup- 
plies the place of the specific Perf. and Plup. (δ 566. a), as a 
more familiar, more vivacious, and often a shorter or more 
euphonic form. This use prevails especially in the active 
voice (§ 578. αὐ, The Aor. often occurs in immediate con- 
nection with the Perf. or Plup. ‘Thus, 

"EQ’ ἢ [κρήνῃ] λέγεται Μίδας τὸν Σάτυρον ϑηρεῦσαι, οἴνῳ κεράσας αὐσήν, at 
which [ fountain] Midas is said to have caught the Satyr, having mixed it with 
wine i.2.13. Ταύτην τὴν πόλιν ἐξέλιπον οἱ ἐνοικοῦντες, this city its inhubitunts 
had left, Ib. 24. Novi δὲ Θετταλοῖς . . ἐβοήθησε, and now it has aided the Thes- 
salians, Dem. 22.7. Τοιαῦτα παθὼν καὶ πάσχων, having suffered and suffering 
such things, 1d.576.18. ᾿Ασποδεδρακότες πατέρας καὶ unrious, οἱ δὲ καὶ τέκνα 
καταλιπόνσες Υἱ. 4.8. ΙΠενεσσέρους πεποίηκε, καὶ πολλοὺς κινδύνους ὑπομένειν 
ἠνάγκασε, καὶ πρὸς τοὺς “Ἕλληνας διαξέξληκε Isocr.163 ἃ. Ody ὁ ἐσκεριμεένος 
003" ὁ μεριμινήσας τὰ δίκαια λέγειν Dem. ὅ76. 22, ΣΤΡ, Ἵνα με διδάξης, ὥνπερ 
οὕνεκ᾽ ἐλήλυθα. BOL. "Hates δὲ κατὰ ci; Ar. Nub. 238. 


Nore. The use of the Aor. for the Perf. is especially common in the Purt, 


C. Fourvre. 


ὁ ΘΙ. I. The dim, shadowy future has little occasion 
for precise forms to mark the state of the action. It is com- 
monly enough to mark the action simply as future. Hence 
the inflection of most verbs has but a single Fut., the inde 
nite ; leaving the definite and complete Futures, if they require 

31* 


366 SYNTAX. — USE OF TENSES. [Boor πὶ 


to be distinguished from this, to be expressed by a Participl. 
and substantive verb ; as, 


Σκῦρος ἐξαρκοῦσά μοι ἔσται rd λοιπόν, Scyros shall hereafter content me (contin 
ued, § 570) Soph. Ph.459 = Voted" ἔσται μέλον Id. Ed. C. 653. "Ανδρα κα 
σακανόντες ἔσεσθε, you will have stam ὦ man, vii. 6. 36. Τὰ δέοντα ἐσόμεθα 
ἐγνωκότες, καὶ λόγων ματαίων ἀπηλλαγμένοι Dem. 54. 22. 


§ 382. Il. The Future Perfect expresses the sense of 
the Perf. with a change of the time; that is, it represents the 
state consequent upon the completion of an action as future 
As it carries the mind at once over the act itself to its com- 
pletion and results, it is sometimes used to express a future 
action as immediate, rapid, or decisive, and hence received its 
old name of paulo-post-future (paulo post futurus, about to be 
a little after). In verbs in which the Perf. becomes a new 
Pres., the Fut. Perf. becomes a new Fut. (§§ 233, 239). 
Thus, 


"Hy δὲ κὴ γένηται, μάτην ἐμοὶ κεκλαύσεται, but if there should not be, I shull 
have wept in vain, Ar. Nub. 1435 (ὃ 564.3). Οὐδεὶς . . μεσεγγραφήσεται, 
ἀλλ᾽, ὥσπερ ἦν τὸ πρῶτον, ἐγγεγράψεται, no one shall be enrolled (the simple 
act) elsewhere, but shall remain enrolled (the state consequent upon the act of 
enrolment) as he was at first, Id. Eq. 1370. Dodge καὶ πεπράξεται, speak 
and it [shall be done at once] is done, Id. Plut. 1027. “Oray δὴ μὴ σθένω, 
πεπαύσομαι, “1 shali desist at once,’ Soph. Ant. 91. Nowiere ἐν cide τῇ 
ἡμέρᾳ ἐμέ τε κατακεκόψεσθαι, καὶ ὑμᾶς ob πολὺ ἐμοῦ ὕσσερον, ‘shall be imme- 
diately cut down,’ i. ὅ. 16. ᾿Εὰν γὰρ ἄρα ἐμοὶ δόξῃ τινὰ .. αὐτίκα μάλα 
δεῖν σεθνάναι, τεθνήξει οὗτος, ‘he shall be dead,’ i. 6. ‘he Shall die instantly, 
Pl. Gorg. 469 ἃ (cf. Karsdyas ἔσται, Διεσχισμένον ἔσται 10.). Μεμνησόμεθα, 
we shall remember, Cyr. iii. 1. 27 (ὃ 233). Εὐδὺς ᾿Αριαῖος ἀφεστήξει - ὥστε 
φίλος ἡμῖν οὐδεὶς λελείψεται, Arieus will immediately withdraw; so that no 
friend will remain to us, ii. 4. 5. 


§ a8 3. IIL A future action may be represented more expressly as 
on the point of accomplishment, or as connected with destiny, necessity, will, pur- 
pose, &e., by the verbs μέλλω, ἐδέλω or Straw, βούλομαι, δεῖ, xeon, &c., with the 
Inf. This Inf, may be Pres., Aor., or Fut., according to the view taken of 
the action in respect to definiteness and nearness (ᾧ 568. R.). Thus, ᾿Ιδὼν 
παῖδα... μέλλοντα ἀποθνήσκειν, seeing a boy about to die, vii. 4.7. ‘O σταθμὸς 
ἔνθα ἔμελλε καταλύειν '. 8.1. Μελλήσαντά os παθεῖν Cyr. vi. 1.40. Ei μὲν 
πλοῖα ἔσεσθαι μέλλει ἱκανά, if there are to be vessels enough, v. 6.12. Oda 
ἐδέλω ἐλθεῖν, I am not willing to go, or I will not go, i. 8.10, ᾿Εγὼ Stiaw, ὦ 
ἄνδρες, διαξ,βάσα, ὑμᾶς iii. 5. 8. Bovrsdsobas, ὅ σι χρὴ wosivi. 3. 11. 


Remarks. (a) The ideas of destiny, purpose, &c., are often expressed ly 
the simple Fut. Especially is the Fut. Part., both with and without ὡς, 
used continually to express purpose (§ 635). Thus, Οἱ sis τὴν βασιλικὴν 
σέχνην παιδευόμενοι .. +i διαφέρουσι, τῶν ἐξ ἀνάγκης κακοπαθούντων, εἴ γε πει- 
νήσουσ, καὶ διψήσουσι καὶ ῥιγώσουσι καὶ ἀγρυπνήσουσι, ‘if they must hunger 
and thirst,’ Mem. ii. 1. 17. Τὸν ὀρθῶς βιωσόμενον, he that would live well, Pl. 
Gorg.49le. Συλλαμβξάνε; Κῦρον ws ἀποκτενῶν, he apprehends Cyrus [as about 
to put him to death] with the design of putting him to death, i. 1.3. "Ἐπεμψέ 


on. 5.]} USE OF MODES. — INTELLECTIVE. 901 


φινα ἰροῦντα, he sent one to say, ii. 5.2. ἹΠεμφϑεὶς rage βασιλέως κελεύσων ii. 
1.17. Μαχούμενος συνήει i. 10.10. See κ 531. a.— (ὁ) Instead of the 
Fut. Part., the Pres. is sometimes employed to denote purpose, according to 
§ 573, especially with verbs of motion; thus, Taiz’ ἐκδικάξων ἦλθον, I went 
ta avenge this wrong, Eur. Suppl. 154. 


§ oS4. Iv. A fature action, in view of its nearness, its certainty, its 
rapidity, or its connection with another action, may be conceived of as now 
doing, or even as already done (§ 567); and may hence be expressed by the 
Pres., Aor., or Perf. Thus, Κακὸν ἥκει ivi, evil is coming upon some one, Ar. 
Ran. 552 (cf. Δώσει τις δίκην Ib. 554). ᾿Ασπωλόμεσθ᾽ ἄρ᾽, εἰ κακὸν σπροσοίσο- 
μεν νέον παλαιῷ, πρὶν τόδ᾽ ἐξηνεληκέναι Eur. Med. 78. ἘΠῚ με τόξων ἐγκρατὴς 
αἰσθήσεται, ὄλωλα, καὶ σὲ προσδιαφϑερῶ, if, while possessed of the bow, he shalt 
discover me, I am undone, and I shall destroy you besides, Soph. Ph. 75. Ἐ δὲ 
δὴ κατακτενεῖτέ με, ὃ νόμος ἀνεῖται Eur. Or. 940. Οὐκ εἶ ξυνέρξων, ἡνίκ᾽ ἢ 
σεσώσμεθα κείνου βίον σώταντος, ἢ οἰχόμεσθ᾽ dua; Soph. Tr. 88. ᾿Ασέσταλκά 
σοι τόνδε τὸν λόγον δῶρον Isocr. 2 Ὁ. ---- For presents which are commonly used 
as futures, see § 200. b. 


§ 82>. V. The Furure sometimes occurs for a present or past tense, 
as a less direct and positive form of expression, or as though the action were 
not yet finished; thus, Toddy δ᾽ ἐγὼ . . cxtou’ ἰδεῖν βουλήσομαι, “1 shall wish,’ 
i. e. ‘am resolved,’ Soph. Cid. T. 1076. ΧΟΡ. Παῖδες τεθνᾷσι χειρὶ μησρῴᾳ 
σέθεν. “IAS. Οἴμοι, vi λίξεις, “Ὡς μ᾽ ἀπώλεσας, γύναι Eur. Med. 1309. 
Πῶς φής ; ci λέξεις, “Ὥς μ᾽ ἀπώλεσας, γύνα, Id. Hel. 780. This exclama- 
tory use of i λέξεις for ri λέγεις or σί ἔλεξας, as though the communication 
were not yet finished, belongs particularly to Euripides. 


IV. Use or toe Mopes. 


§ 886. For a classification and designation of the modes 
according to the character of the sentences which they form 
(§ 329. N.), see {] 27. 


A. INTELLECTIVE. 


§ 387. Intellective sentences express the actual or the 
contingent (ὃ 829. Ν.). The idea of contingency is expressed 
in two ways; by the form of the verb, and by a particle, com- 
monly ἄν (Ep. κέ or κέν, Dor. χά). ‘The two ways are often 
united for the stronger expression ; and they may be both neg- 
lected, if thé idea is either not prominent, or is too obvious to 
require expression. ‘The forms of the verb which in them- 
selves express contingency are the Subjunctive and Optative 
modes (ὃ 169). Intellective sentences not employing these 
modes (either because they are actual, or because their con- 
tingency is simply expressed by a particle or is not expressed 
at all) employ the Indicative, which is the generic mode 
(85 177, 330. 1). 


Remarks. 1. It may be said in general, that the Ind. expresses the actual ; 
the Subj. and Opt., the contingent. But it must be understood that this, like 


. 368 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [Book 111. 


all similar statements in grammar, has primary reference to the conceptions of 
the mind, rather than to the reality of things ; that is, to employ the techni- 
cal language of philosophy, it must be taken subjectively, rather than objectively 
The contingent is often, from strong assurance or vivid fancy, spoken of as 
actual ; while, on the other hand, the actual, from diffidence or courtesy a 
some other cause, is not unfrequently spoken of as contingent. This state- 
ment is also limited by the generic use of the Ind., as mentioned above. 


2. An action which is now future has, from the very nature of things, some 
degree of contingency ; and therefore, in the Fut. tense, no distinction is made 
between the Ind. and the Subj., but any rule requiring in other tenses the 
Subj. in this requires the Ind. And even the use of the Fut. opt. appears te 
be limited to the oratio obliqua, in which it takes the place of the Fut. ind. in 
the orutio recta (§§ 607, 608). 


§ oS88. 3. The particle of contingence, ἄν, may commonly be dis- 
tinguished from the conjunction ἄν for ἐάν (ὃ 603) by its position, as it never 
stands first in its clause, which is the usual place of the conjunction. It chief- 
ly occurs with the past tenses of the Ind. and with the Opt., to mark them 
as depending upon some condition expressed or implied; with the Subj. after 
various connectives ; and with the Inf. and Part., when the distinct modes 
to which they are equivalent would have this particle. It is extensively used 
with the Subj., in cases where it would have been omitted with the Opt., for 
the reason, as it would seem, that the separation, in form, of the Subj. from 
the Ind. was later and less strongly marked than that of the Opt. (δ 177). 
The insertion or omission of ἄν for the most part follows general rules, but in 
some cases appears to depend upon nice distinctions of sense, which it is diffi- 
cult to convey in translation, or upon mere euphony or rhythm. Upon its | 
use in not a few cases, manuscripts differ, and critics contend. Verbs with 
which ἄν is connected are commonly translated into Eng. by the potential 
mode. 


§ 689. Contingency is viewed as either present or past; 
that is, a contingent event is regarded either as one of which 
there is some chance at the present time, or merely as one of 
which there was some chance at some past time. PRESENT 
CONTINGENCY is expressed either by the Sudj., or by the pri- 
mary téWses of the Ind.; and rast contiNGENcy, either by 
the Opt., or by the secondary tenses of the Ind. 


The tenses of the Subj. and Opt. are therefore related to each other as 
present and past tenses, or, in sense as well as in form (δ 168, 196),as primary 
and secondary tenses; and the rule above may be thus given in a more con- 
densed form :— 


PRESENT CONTINGENCY IS EXPRESSED BY THE PRIMARY TENSES 5; PAST 
CONTINGENCY, BY THE SECONDARY. 


Nore. Future contingency is contained in present ; for that which will be 
contingent, is of course contingent now. 


§ 290. Remarks. 1. It cannot be kept too carefully in mind, that 
the distinction above has no reference to the time of the eccurrence of an event, 
but only to the time of its contingency. Thus, in the two sentences, “I can 
go if I wish,” and “I could go, if I wished,” the time of the going itself is in 


cn. 5.] INTELLECTIVE. 369 


both the same, i.e. future. But in the former sentence, the contingency is 
present, because it is left undecided what the person’s wish is, and therefore 
there is still some chance of his going ; while in the latter, the contingency ‘is 
past, because it is implied that the person does not wish to go, and therefore, 
although there was some chance of his going before his decision, there is now 
no chance. Hence, in the former sentence, present tenses are employed ; and 
in the latter, past. ‘ 


2. The limits of past are far wider than those of present contingency ; for 
there is nothing which it is proper for us to suppose at all, of which we may 
not conceive that there was some chance at some distant period in past eternity, 
The dividing line between present and past contingency may perhaps be thus 
drawn; whatever is supposed with some degree of present expectation, or in 
present view of a decision yet to be had, belongs to the head of present contin- 
gency; but whatever is supposed without this present expectation or view of a 
decision, to the head of past contingency. Past contingency, therefore, includes, 
(1.) all past supposition, whether with or without expectation at that time; 
(2.) all supposition, whether present or past, which does not imply expectation, 
or contemplate a decision, that is, all mere supposition; (3.) all supposition, 
whether present or past, in despite of a prior decision. Thus: 


-Ae PRESENT CONTINGENCY. 


I will go, if I can have leave (and I intend to ask for it). 
I think, that I may go, if I can have leave. 
1 wish, that you may go. 


B. PAST CONTINGENCY. 


(1.) Past supposition. 
I thought, that I might go, if I could have leave. 
I wished, that you might go. 
(2.) Present supposition not implying expectation or contemplating a de 
cision. ; 
I would go, if I should have leave (but I have no thought of asking 
for it). 
I could go with perfect ease. 
I should like to go. 
(3.) Present suppusition in despite of a prior decision. 
a. In regard to the present. 
I would go, if I had leave (but I have none, and therefore I shall 
not go). 
B. In regard to the past. 
I would have gone, if I had had leave (but I had none, and there- 
fore did not go). 


§ OO. 3. As the differe ice between the Subj. and Opt. is one of 
time, rather than of essential office, some have chosen to consider them ag 
only different tenses of a general conjunctive or contingent mode. With this 
change, the number and offices of the Greek modes are the same with those 
of the Latin, and the correspondence between the Greek conjunctive and the 
English potential modes becomes somewhat more obvious (see ἵ 33). Ac- 
cording to this classification, which deserves the attention of the student, 


370 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [BOOK ΠῚ 


although it is questionable whether it is best to discard the old phraseolo 
gy, the ὄ 
Present Subjunctive becomes the Definite Present (or the Present) Conjunctive 


* Present Optative τ' “ Definite Past (or the Imperfect) Conjunctive. 


Aorist Subjunctive “ “ Aorist Present (or Primary) Conjunctive. 
Aorist Optative <4 “ Aorist Past (or Secondary) Conjunctive. 
Perfect Subjunctive “ ““ Perfect Present (or the Perfect) Conjunctive. 
Perfect Optative $3 “ Perfect Past (or the Pluperfect) Conjunetive. 


4. Contingent sentences, like actual (§§ 566 -- 568, 576, 584, 585), are 
liable to an interchange and blending of tenses. Past contingency is often 
conceived of as present ; and present, as past. Hence, primary tenses take 
the place of secondary, and secondary of primary. This interchange may be 
observed particularly between the Subj. and Opt. modes. 


§ 592. The Subj. and Opt. occur, for the most part, in 
dependent clauses; and indeed some grammarians have re- 
fused to regard them as being ever strictly independent. It 
results from the principles already laid down, that, in their use 
as dependent modes, the Subj., for the most part, follows the 
primary tenses; and the Opt., the secondary. ‘To this gen- 
eral rule, however, there are many exceptions. 


Norse. In the application of this rule, the tenses of the Jmperat., as from 
its very nature referring to present or future time, are to be regarded as pri- 
mary tenses; those of the Jnf. and Part., as primary or secondary, according 
to the finite verbs, whose places they occupy, or, in general, according to those 
upon which they themselves depend. 


§ 693. In the expression of contingency, the Ind. is 
properly distinguished from the Subj. and Opt. by the greater 
positiveness with which it implies or excludes present anticipa- 
tion. ‘Thus supposition with present anticipation is expressed 
by the primary tenses; but there is here this general distinc- 
tion, that the Fut. Ind. anticipates without expressing doubt, 
while the Subj. expresses doubt. On the other hand, supposi- 
tion _ present anticipation is expressed by the secondary 
tenses ; but with this general distinction, that the Opt. supposes, 
either with some past anticipation, or without regard to any de- 
cision, while the secondary tenses of the Ind. suppose in despite 
of a prior decision. 


Remarks. «a. {n the expression of contingency, the Jmpf. ind. has com- 
monly the same dif'erence from the Aor. and Plup., as, in English, the Impf. 
ind. and potential from the Plup. In respect to the time of the ac%ion, 
therefore, the contingent Impf. ind. commonly refers to present time, and the 
Aor. and Plup. to past. See §§ 599, 601. 3, 603. 3. 


β. We may, say in general, that supposition as fact is expressed by the ap- 
propriate tense of the Ind. (3) 587, 603. a); supposition that may become 
fact, by the Subj. ; supposition without regard to fact, by the Opt.; and sup- 
vosition contrary to fact, by the past tenses of the Ind.; while in these tenses 


cH. 5.] INTELLECTIVE. 371 


there is this distinction, that the Impf. expresses supposition contrary to present 
fact, but the Aor. and Plup. contrary to past fact. 


y- The Epic sometimes joins κέ with the Fut. ind., when it depends upon a 
condition expressed or understood ; as, Ei δ᾽ ᾿Οδυσεύς ἔλθοι. ., αἶψά κε... 
ἐποτίσεται ρ. 539. A similar use of ἄν in the Att is rare and doubtful. 


§ 459 44. 3. Indefiniteness constitutes a species of contingency. Hence 
(1.) the construction with the relative indefinite (§ 606); and (2.) the use 
of ἄν with the past tenses of the Ind. to denote an action, not as occurring at 
a definite time, but from time to time, asthe occasion might occur, or, in 
other words, to denote a habitual action; thus, Πολλάκις γὰρ ἔφη μὲν ἄν τινὸς 
ἐρᾶν, for he would often say, that he was in love with some one, Mem. iv. 1. 2. 
Ei δέ σινα ὁρῴη δεινὸν ὄντα οἰκονόμον .., οὐδένα ἄν πώποτε ἀφείλετο, GAA’ ἀεὶ 
«λείω προσεδίδου i. 9.19. Ei τις αὐτῷ δοκοίη. . βλακεύειν, «. ἔπαισεν ἄν, καὶ 
. ὥμα αὐτὸς «φροσελάμξανεν ii. 8.11. 


§ 690. The contingent modes are often used where the 
Ind. might have been employed. The Opt. with ἄν for the 
(a.) Pres. or (β.) Fut. ind. is particularly frequent ; and often 
serves, by suggesting instead of asserting, to give to the dis- 
course that tone of moderation and refined courtesy, which 
was so much studied by the Greeks, especially the Athenians. 
(See $§ 604. b, 605. 5.) The use of the Subj. for the Ind. is 
more limited, and occurs chiefly (for the Fut.) in (y.) earnest 
inquiry respecting one’s self, and in (d.) strong denial. Thus, 


a. Aird ἄν .. σὸ δέον εἴη - Sarrov γὰρ ὠναλώσουσι, this [would be] is the 
very thing we want; for they will sooner expend, iv. 7.7. Kai ϑηρῶντες μὲν 
οὐκ ἄν ἀριστήσαιεν, ἢν δέ αι δεήσῃ ἀν ϑηρφῶσι μέχρι δείπνου Cyr. i. 2. 11 (cf. 
§ 594). ΣΩΚ, Δημηγορία ὦ ἄρα ris ἐστιν ἡ ποιητική. KAA. Φημί. SOK. 
Οὐκοῦν ῥητορικὴ δημηγορία ἄν εἴη Pl. Gorg. 502 d. This use of the Opt. is 
particularly frequent in argumentative conclusions. 


B. Φημὶ, καὶ οὐκ dy ἀρνηθείην, I confess, and [would not] will not ‘deny it, 
Dem.576.17. ‘Aaa’ οὐκέτ᾽ ἄν κρύψαιμι Ar. Plut. 284. MEN. Οὐκ dy μεθεί- 
μην. ΠΡ, Οὐδ’ ἔγωγ᾽ ἀφήσομια, Kur. Iph. A. 510. -- This use of the Opt. is 
particularly frequent in the first person. 


y Ilo Ba; πᾷ στῶ, ri λέγω; Whither [can] shall I go? where stop ? 
what say? Eur. Alc. 864. Εἴπωμεν, ἢ σιγῶμεν, ἢ vl δράσομεν, Id. Ion, 758. 
Εὐσεῖν τι δώσεις, ἢ στραφεὶς οὕτως tw; Soph. Ant. 815. Κἀμσλάκω «τοῦ σοῦ 
μέρου ; Ib. 554. See § 611. 8: : 


Nore. In the Epic language, the use of the Subj. for the Fut. ind. is more 
extended. 


δ. Οὐ γάρ σε wn. . γνῶσ᾽ οὐδ᾽ bxorreicoves, for they [cannot] will not know 
nor suspect you, Soph. El. 42. Αἰἱρήσεις, καὶ ἀποχωρῶν ov μὴ deions vii. 3. 26. 
Ὃ σλησίον βοηθήσει " ἤν τε « ., οὐδεὶς μηκέτι μείνῃ iv. 8. 18. 

ΝΟΤΕΒ. (1.) This use is most frequent in those forms of the Subj. which 
have no forms of the Ind. closely resembling them, viz., the Aor. pass. and the 
2d Aor. It is, on the other hand, less frequent in the Pres., resembling the 
Pres. ind:, and in the Ist Aor. act. and mid., resembling the Fut. ind. (ef. 601. 
N.). In ‘this emphatic negation, the Subj. is regularly preceded by a double 


372 - SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [BOOK II 


. 
negative, od μή. The construction may be explained by supplying a word or 
phrase expressing fear (cf. καὶ 602. 3); thus, Οὐ δέδοικω μὴ γνῶσι, 1 have no 
fear that they would know. Compare such passages as, Οὐ φόθος, μή σε ἀγά- 
yw Mem. ii. 1.25; Οὐχὶ δέος, μή σε φιλήσῃ Ar. Eccl. 650. (2.) The similar 
use of οὐ μή with the Fut, ind. is to be explained in the same manner; as, 
Οὔ σοι μὴ μεθέψομαί ποτε, never will I follow you, Soph. ΕἸ. 1052. 


§ 596. We proceed to the application of the general 
principles which govern the use of the distinct modes, to par- . 
ticular kinds of sentences, which may be termed, from their 
offices or connectives, desiderative (expressing wish, from de- 
sidero, to desire), final, conditional, relative, and complemen- 
tary (ὃ 329. N.). | 


" 


(1.) Desiderative. 


ἢ 697. A wish is expressed either with or without a 
definite looking forward to its realization. In the former case, 
it is expressed by the primary tenses; in the latter case, by 
the secondary. In the former case, («.) if the wish is expressed 
with an assurance that it will be realized, the Ind. Fut. is used " 
but, (8.) otherwise, the Sudj. mode. In this use, both the Ind. 
Fut. and the Subj. may be regarded as less direct modes of 
expression instead of the Imperat. In the latter case, (y.) if 
the time for realizing the wish is already past, the secondary 
tenses of the Ind. are used with εἰ γάρ and εἴϑε" but, (δ.) other- 
wise, the Opt. mode. (See §§ 590, 593.) Hence the Opt. 
becomes the simplest and most general form of expressing a 
wish; and from the frequency of this use, it has derived its 
name (§ 169. 3). Thus, 


(a.) “Ὡς οὖν ποιήσετε, καὶ weibecbs wor, thus then [you will do] do, and listen 
to me, Pl. Prot.338 a. Μηδὲν ravd’ ἐρεῖς Adsch. Sept. 250. 


Nores. (1.) A wish is often expressed in the form of a question. Hence 
in Greek, as in other languages, the interrogative Fut. often supplies the place 
of the Imperat.; as, Οὐκ 22:0’ ὡς τάχιστα; καὶ. . ἄφετε μόνην, [Will you 
not carry] Garry her away instantly, and leave her ulone, Soph. Ant. 885. "Ass 
τις ἐλθὼν δεῦρο τὸν βοτῆρά μοι; Ταύτην δ᾽ ἐᾶτε Id. Odd. T. 1069. Οὐ μὴ λαλή- 
σεις, ἀλλ᾽ ἀκολουθήσεις ἐμοί, [Won't you not talk] Don’t talk, but follow me, 
Ar. Nub. 505. (2.) For the Put. with ὅσως in the place of the Imperat., see 
§ 602. 3. (3.) The Aor. and Pres. are also used with ¢i οὖν οὐ, or ri ov, in 
the earnest expression of a wish; as, Ti od», ἔφη 6 Κῦρος, ob .. ἐλεξώς μοι, 
Why then, said Cyrus, have you not told me? i.e tell me, Cyr. ii, 1.4. Vi οὖν, A 
δ᾽ ὅς, οὐκ igwras; Pl. Lys. 211 d. 


§ o9s., (β.) Μὴ ἀναμένωμεν, let us not wait, iii. 1.24. Ma μέλλω- 
μεν, ὦ ἄνδρες, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπελθόντες ἤδη αἱρεῖσθε Ib.46. Ado σῶν πρεσθδυτάτων στρα- 
τηγοὶ ἐπιμελείσθων" ὀσπισθοφυλακῶμεν δ᾽ ἡμεῖς iii. 3.87. ᾿Αλλά μ᾽ ἔκ γε joes 
γῆς πόρθμευσον ὡς; τάχιστα, μηδ᾽ αὐτοῦ ϑάνω Soph. Tr. 801. Dig’, ἐκσύθωμαι 
Eur. Here. 529. Μὴ σοιήσγς ταῦτα, do not do this, vii. 1.8. Madty ἀδυμήσητε 
ἵνεκα τῶν γεγενημένων" ἴστε γάρ ν. 4. 19. 


en. 5.] IN DESIDERATIVE SENTENCES. 373 


Norges. (1.) The use of the Subj. as Imperat. occurs chiefly in the Ist 
Pers. (where the Imperat. is wanting, ὃ 170. N.), and in the Aor with μή. 
In the 2d Pers., the distinction is rarely neglected, that in prohibitions with μή 
and its compounds, the Pres. is put in the Imperat., but the Aor. in the Subj. ; 
as, Μὴ ἐκδῶφέ με. .. μήτε πολεμεῖτε Vi. 6.18. Μήτ᾽ ὀκνεῖσε, μήτ᾽ ἀφῆτ᾽ ἔπος 
Soph. (ΕΔ. Ο. 781. Μηδ᾽ ἐσίκευθε “. 168. Μηδ᾽ ἐπικεύσῃς ο. 263. In the 
3d Pers., the distinction is less observed. The foundation of the distinction 
seems to have been this; that the Pres. forbids an action more definitely than 
the Aor. (< 569), and hence naturally adopts a more direct form of expression. 
Thus, prohibition in the Pres. is often designed to arrest an action now doing, 
while prohibition in the Aor. merely forbids, in general, that it should be done; 
as, Μὴ ϑαυμάζεσε, be not wondering, i. 3. 3 (see Oj δὲ ὁρῶντες ἐθαύμαζον Ib. 2); 
but Μηδὲ... δόξητε, nor should you think, iii 2.17. (2.) The use of the Subj. 
as Imperat. may be explained by ellipsis thus, ‘Ogars un ἀναρεένωμεν, see that 
we do not wait. Σκόπει μὴ ποιήσῃς ταῦτα. See §§ 592, 601, 602.3; and 
compare §§ 595. y, 3, 611. 3. 


ᾧ SDD. (y.) Ete σοι «. rors συνεγενόμην, Would that I had then been 
with you! Mem.i. 2.46. Eis” εἶχες . . Pervious φρένας, Would that youhad a 
better spirit, Eur. El. 1061. Ei γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον Id. Ale. 1072. — 
In these expressions : of wish there is properly an ellipsis ; thus, E7d’ εἶχες Bea- 
tious φρένας, καλῶς ἂν εἶχε, OF ἡδόμην ἄν, if you had a better spirit, it would be 
well, or I should be glad. See ὃ ὃ 600. 2, 603.3. 

Nore. A wish in opposition to fact may be also expressed by the Aor. 
ὥφελον (§ 268), ought. With this verb, the particles of wishing are some- 
times combined for the sake of greater strength of expression. Thus, "(2Q¢s- 
As μὲν Κῦρος ζῆν, |C. ought to be living] Would that Cyrus were living! 
11.1.4. ᾿Ολέσθα, δ᾽ ὄφελον, Would that I had perished ! Soph. C&d. T. 1157. 

10’ Boer ᾿Αργοῦς wh διαπτάσθαι σκάφος Eur. Med. {. Ei γὰρ ὥφελον PI. Cri- 
to, 44d. So the Impf. ὠφειλον, Eur. Iph. A. 1291. In later writers, ὠφελον 
and aes are sometimes used as particles. 


§ GOO. (3) OF 9εοὶ ἀποτίσαιντο, May the gods requite! iii. 2. 6. 
Πολλά μοι κἀγαθὰ γένοιτο v.6.4. Μήτε rorcusirs Λακεδαιμονίοις, σώζοισθε σε 
vi. 6.18. Πράξας δ᾽ ὃ μὴ τύχοιμι, νοστήσαιμι γάρ Eur. Alc. 1023. 


Nores. 1. The Opt. of wish is sometimes used, especially in the 3d Pers., 
as a less direct form for the Imperat. Sometimes the two forms are united, 
and these again with the Subj. (ὃ 598) ; as, "Αγεθ᾽, ἡμεῖς πέρ μιν ἀποτρωπῶ- 
μεν oo, ἤ τις . « ᾿Αχιλῇϊ παρσταίη, δοίη δὲ κράτος μέγα, μηδέ τι ϑυμῷ δευέσθω 
Y. 119. See Soph. Ant. 151. 

2. The Opt. of wish may be introduced by the particles si, εἶδε, εἰ γάρ (Ep. 
and Dor. aie, αἰ γάρ), ὡς, and ininterrogation by πῶς ἄν. ἘΠ μοι γένοιτο φϑόγ- 
yes, O, thut 1 had a voice! Eur. Hee. 886. Επἠόε μήποτε γνοίης Soph. Cid. T. 
1068. Ei γὰρ γένοισο Cyr. vi. 1.88, “ὥς ὄλοιφσο παγκάκως Eur. Hipp. 407. 
Πῶς ἂν ὀλοίμκην; [How might I die?] Would that I might die! Id. Ale. 855 
— These expressions, except the last, are elliptical; thus, ΕΠ wo γένοισο φϑόγ 
γος, ἡδοίμην ἄ ἄν, If there were a voice to me, I should be glad; Bovrciuny ἄν ὡς 
ὄλοιτο παγκάκως. See §§ 599, 603. y.— Very rarely, εἴθε is joined with the 
Subj. in the expression of wish ; as, E7é’ . . ἕλωσι Soph. Ph. 1092. 

3. Except in interrogation, ἄν is not used with the Opt. of wish, which is 
thus often distinguished from the Opt. in its other uses. Thus, ὮἸ rai, yé- 
νοι πατρὸς εὐτυχέστερος, τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλ᾽ ὅμοιος καὶ γένοι᾽ ἄν οὗ κακός, My son, 


a2 


374 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [BooK m 


may you be more fortunate than your father, but in other respects like him; ana 
then you would not be bud, Soph. Aj. 550. 


(u.) Final. 


§ 60 1. After final conjunctions (ἵνα, ὅπως, ὡς, μή" ὄφρα 
poet.), a present purpose is expressed by (a.) the ϑιιδῆ., or 
(3.) in the Fut., by the Ind.; but a past purpose by (y.) the 
Opt., or sometimes (d.), when the realization is now impossi- 
ble, by the past tenses of the Ind. (See §§ 589, 593). In 
final sentences, introduced by a relative (ᾧ 531. a the modes 
are used in the same manner. ‘Thus, 


(a.) Ἵνα εἰδῆσε, so that you may know, 1.3.15. "Epot δὸς αὐτὰ, ὅπως ee 
διαδῶὼ Cyr. i. 4.10. Συμξουλεύω ἐγὼ, σὸν ἄνδρα φοῦσον ἐκποδὼν σοιεῖσθαι ὡς τά- 
χιστα " ὡς μηκέτι dén i i. 6.9. — After ὅπως and ὡς, ἄν is sometimes inserted 5 
as, "AZeis ἡμᾶς, ὅαως ᾿ἄν εἰδῶμεν Cyt. 11.2.2]. Θυμῷ Bar’, ὡς ἄν τέρματ᾽ ἐκ- 
μάθῃς ZEsch. Pr. 706. 


(β.) ᾿Αλλ’ ὅπως ror μὴ ia’ ἐκείνῳ γενησόμεθα, πάντα ποιήτεον, but surely we 
must do every thing, that we may never come into his power, iii. 1. 18. 

Nore. After ὅπως, the 1st Aor. subj. is rarely used in the active and mid- 
dle voices, but instead of it the Fut. ind. Cf. § 595. 3. 


(y-) Κῦρος τὰς ναῦς μετεπέμψατο, ὅπως ὁπλίτας ἀποξιξάσειεν, Cyrus sent for 
the ships, in order that he might land hoplites, 1.4.5. Βαρξάρων ἐπεμελεῖσο, ὡς 
πολεμεῖν τε ἱκανοὶ εἴησαν 1.1.5. ᾿Εδόκει αὐτοῖς aaitvar.., μή τις ἐπίθεσις γί- 
γοισο 'γ. 4.22. Ἑϊἠσάγει (Hist. Pres., ὃ 567. «) δόμους, ἵν᾿ ἄλλος μή σις εἰδείη 
Eur. Hec. 1148. 


(3.) Τί μ᾽ ob .. ἔκτεινας εὐθὺς, ws ἔδειξα μήποσε ἐμαυτόν, Why did you not. 
tnstantly slay me, so that I might never have shown myself ? Soph. Cid. T. 1391. 
Ἵν 4 συφλός 10. 1389. Οὐκοῦν ἔχρην σε UInydoou ζεῦξαι πτερὸν, ὅπως ἐφαίνου 
Ar. Pax, 13ὅ, Ἵνα μηδεὶς αὐτοὺς διέφθειρεν, ὠλλ᾽ ἐπειδὴ ἀφίκοιντο εἰς σὴν ἦλι- 
κίαν, χρήσιμοι γίγνοιντο Pl. Meno, 89 Ὁ. “Ede τὰ ἐνέχυρα τότε λαξεῖν, ὡς μηδ᾽, 
si ἐβούλετο, ἐδύνατο ἄν ταῦτα ἐξαπατᾷν Vii. 6. 28. 


ᾧ GO. Remarcs. 1. A past purpose, still continued or conceived 
of as present (§ 591. 4), may be expressed by the Subj.; and on the other 
hand, a present purpose, viewed as doubtful or as connected with something 
past, * aictbnt, or contingent (§ 590), may be expressed by the Opt. The 
Subj. for the Opt. may be*remarked particularly after the Aor. used for the 
Perf. (» 580), and in indirect quotation (ὃ 610). The two modes are some- 
times both used in the same connection. Thus, ’Ewirndds σε οὐκ ἔγειρον, ἵνα 
ὡς ἥδιστα διάγῃς Pl. Crito,43b. ᾿ἜἘξῆλθον δόμων, μή μοί cs μέμψησθε Eur. 
Med. 214. "Ὥ,χετο πρίσξεις ἄγουσα, οἵπερ τὰ σφέτερα φράσωσιν Th. vii. 25, 
Προσελδεῖν ἐκέλευον, εἴ τις tin. ., ἵνα ἀπαγγείλωσι ii. 5.36. Compare Ἐσιθοῖν- 
vo and ἐσ θῶνται iii. 4.1,34. “lows δέ που ἢ ἀποσκάσεει, τι ἢ ἀποτειχίζει, ὡς 
ἄσορος εἴη ἡ ὁδός ti. 4.4, Στῆσόν με κἀξίδρῦσον, ὡς πυθοίμεεθα Soph. Gd. ΟΣ 11. 
Αἰσεῖν σλοῖα, ὡς ὠσοσλέοιεν" «+ σίμψαι δὲ καὶ προκαταληψομένους τὰ ἄκρα, 
ὅπως μὴ Pbaowori. 8.14, “Ὡς ὕξριν δείξωμεν Αἰγίσθου Θεοῖς, γόους τ᾽ ἄφείην 
Eur. El. 58. 


2. After words of fear, the final conjunction μή, lest, is commonly used, but 
sometimes alse the fuller ὅπως μή, or some other connective; thus, ᾿Εφοθοῦνφ 


cH. 5.7 {N FINAL AND CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 375 


μὴ ἐσιθοῖντο αὐτοῖς .. of στολέμειοι, they feared [lest the enemy should attack] 
that the enemy would attack them, iii.4.1. Δεδιὼς, μὴ λαθών με δίκην ἐπιθῇ i. 
3.10. Φοξοῦμαι δὲ, μή σινας ἡδονὰς ἡδοναῖς εὑρήσομεν ἐναντίας Pl. Phil. 18 ἃ. 
ἜἘφοξεῖσο . . μὴ οὐ δύναιτο iti. 1.12, Κιίνδῦνος μὴ λάξωσι vii. 7. 81. Aidory’ 
ὅπως μὴ τεύξομαι, I am afraid [as to this, viz. how I shall not find] that I shall 
find, Ar. Eq. 112. Ὅσως λάθω, δέδοικα, I fear [as to this, viz. how I may es- 
cape] that I cannot escape, Eur. Iph. T. 995. Μὴ τρέσῃς, ὅπως σέ tis. + ἐπο- 
σπάσει, fear not that any one will tear you, Id. Heracl. 248. Μὴ dsions vob’, ὡς 
~ « ὄψεται Soph. El. 1309. ᾿Εφοξεῖσο, ὅτι ὀφθήσεσθαι ἔμελλε Cyr. iii. 1.1. Po- 
Covpesvor δὲ, πῶς χρὴ ἀπειλοῦντι ὑπακοῦσαι Ib.iv.5.19. "Arde φόξος, εἰ πείσω 
δέσσοιναν Eur. Med. 184. 


3. A verb of attention, care, or fear, is sometimes to be supplied before 
ὅπως or μή" as, Ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες (SC. ὁρᾶτε, cxomsire, ΟΥἩἐπιμελεῖσθε]), see 
then that you be men, '. ἡ. 8. Δεῖ[80. σκοπεῖν) σ᾽, ὅπως πατρὸς δείξεις ἐν Ex bonis, 
οἷος ἐξ οἵου ᾽σράφης Soph. Α)]. ὅὅ6. "AAA ὅπως μὴ οὐχ, οἷός τ᾽ ἔσομαι 86. δέδοι- 
κα] Pl.Meno,77 a. My. . διαφϑείρη Eur. Alc. 315. Cf. §§ 595. δ, 598. 2. 


(111.) Conditional. 


§ 603. In sentences connected by conditional conjunc- 
tions, there is a great variety of conception, and consequently 
of expression. ‘The conpiT10N may be assumed, either (a.) as 
a fact, or (β.) as that which may become a fact, or (y.) asa 
mere supposition without regard to fact, or (6.) as contrary 
to fact. In the first case («.), it is expressed by the appro- 
priate tense of the Ind.; in the second (f.), by the Sudj. ; in 
the third (y.), by the Opt. ; and in the fourth (d.), by a past 
tense of the Ind. (see §§ 590, 593). Of these modes, the 
Ind. and Opt. are usually connected by «i, and the Subj. by 
ἐάν (= εἰ and ἄν the contingent particle) or its shortened forms, 
ἣν and ἄν" exceptions (.), however, occur, though rare in the 
Att. writers, and some of them doubtful. — The form of the 
CONCLUSION is, for the most part, determined by that of the 
condition. In the first case («.), the conclusion is regularly . 
made by the appropriate tense of the Ind. ; in the second (£.), 
by the Fut. ind. ; in the third (y.), by the Opt. with ἄν " and 
in the fourth (6.), by a past tense of the Ind. with ἄν. ‘The 
form of the conclusion (f.), however, often depends upon other 
causes, besides its relation to the condition, and cases of ana- 
coluthon are very frequent. There is (7.) sometimes even a 
union of different forms in the same construction. If (%.) the 
conclusion is itself a dependent clause, its form is commonly 
determined by this dependence, and the condition usually con- 
forms. Thus, 

(a.) Ei μὲν ὑμεῖς ἐδέλετε Loguay tal ταῦτα, ἕπεσθαι ὑμῖν βεύλομαι»" εἰ δ᾽ 
ὁμεῖς rarest με ἡγεῖσθαι, οὐδὲν προφασίζομαι iii. 1. 35. Εἥσερ ἐμοὶ ἐτέλει τι 
Σεύθης, οὐκ οὕτως ἐσέλει Vii. 6. 16. 

Remark. Supposition is sometimes made in the Greek, as in other lan- 


376 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [BooK 1% 


guages, by the Ind. without a conjunction ; as, Kal δὴ παρεῖκεν" εἶτα «ὥς. + 
σωθησόμεσθα Eur. Hel. 1059. 


(β.) “Hy γὰρ τοῦτο λάξωμεν, οὐ δυνήσονται μένειν, for if we take this, they will . 
not be able to remuin, iii. 4.41. “Hv δὲ φεύγῃ, ἡμεῖς ἐκεῖ πρὸς ταῦτα βουλευσό- 
μεθα i. 3.20. "Env μοι πεισθῆτε, . . προτιμήσεσθε i. 4. 14. See Ib. 15.— 
(a. and β.) Οὐκ ἄρα tri μαχεῖται, εἰ ἐν ταύταις ob μαχεῖται ταῖς ἡμέραις - ἐὰν 
δ᾽ ἀληθεύσῃς, ὑπισχνοῦμαι [== δώσω] i. 7. 18. 

Nore. The place of the Fut. in the conclusion may be supplied by the 
same forms of expression as are elsewhere substitutes for this tense; thus, 
"Edy οὖν κατὰ μέρος Qurdrrwusy καὶ σκοπῶμεν, ἧστον ἄν δύναιντο ἡμᾶς ϑηρᾷν 
οἱ πολέμιοι v. 1.9 (ὃ 595.8). “Hy γὰρ εὑρεθῇ λέγων σοί ταὔτ᾽, ἔγωγ᾽ ἄν ἐκ- 
πεφευγοίην σάθος Soph. (Βα. T. 839. “Hy δ᾽ ἡμεῖς νικήσωμεν, ἡμᾶς dei.» woin- 
cas i. 43 7 (§ 583). Κἂν τοῦτ᾽, ἔφη, νικῶμεν, πάνθ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται i. 8.12 
(ὃ 584 


(γ.) Οὐκ ἄν οὖν ϑαυμάζοιμι, εἰ οἱ πολέμιοι. . ἑπακολουθοῖεν, I should not, 
then, wonder if the enemy should pursue, iii. 2. 35. ἘΠ οὖν ὁρῴην ὑμᾶς σωτήριόν 
σι βουλευομένους, ἔλθοιμι ἄν πρὸς ὑμᾶς iii. 8. 2. 


(3.) ἘΠ μὲν ἑώρων ἀποροῦντας ὑμᾶς, τοῦτ᾽ ἂν ἐσκόπουν . .. ᾿Ἐσεὶ δὲ ὁρῶ, x. τ- 
a., If I saw you in want, I should be considering this... But since I see, &e., 
v. 6.30. Οὐκ ἄν ἐποίησεν ᾿Αγασίας ταῦτα, ti μὴ ἐγὼ αὐτὸν ἐκέλευσα, Agasias 
would not have done this if I had not commanded him, vi. 6.15. Ei δὲ votre 
πάντες ἐποιοῦμεν, ἅπαντες ἄν ἀπωλόμεθα ν. 8. 13. Ei μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευό- 
μεθα ἄν ii. 1. 4. ---- (y. and 3.) Ei μὲν πρόσθεν ἠπιστάμην, οὐδ᾽ ἄν συνηκολούθησά 
σοι" καὶ νῦν ἄπειμι. Οὐδὲ γὰρ ἄν Μήδοκός με 6 βασιλεὺς ἐπαινοίη, εἰ ἐξελαύνοιμι 
φοὺς εὐεργέτας. Had I known this before, I had never accompanied you; and 
now I shall depart. For King Medocus would by no means commend me, should 
I drive out our benefactors. vii. 7. 11. 


(s.) ἘΠ cov orsenda Soph. Cd. C. 1443. — The use of εἰ with the Subj. is 
almost entirely confined to the Ion. and Dor. ; 


(ζ.) Ei μὲν ἐπαινῶ αὐτὸν, δικαίως ἄν με καὶ αἰσιῷσθε καὶ μισοῖτε vii. 6. 15. 
ἘΠ δὲ καὶ δυνηδεῖσε τά σε ὅρη κλέψαι. ..) ἥξετε bal ποὺς ποταμούς (cf. ‘Eg’ ὃν ἔλ- 
bors ἄν, εἰ τὸν Αλυν διαξαΐητε) v. 6.9. Ei icons, ὡς τάχιστα! ὅσλα ἐσοιού 
pny Cyr. ii. 1.9. Οὐκ ἀν προξαίην. σὸν σόδα σὸν ἕσερον, εἰ μὴ ταῦτ᾽ ἐκφιξωθή- 
σεται, Ar. Eccl. 161. Ei γὰρ γυναῖκες ἐς πόδ᾽ ἥξουσιν ϑράσους, . . wag’ οὐδὲν 
᾿αὐταῖς ἦν ἄν ὀλλύνα, πόσεις Eur. Or. 566. 


(n.) Εἰ οὖν εἰδεῖεν σοῦσο.., isyro ay isi ποὺς πόνους εν πὶ κασεργά- 
ξοινφσο ay ὐτήν Ven. 12.22. Δεινὸν ἄν εἴη, εἰ νῦν μὲν. . συγγνώμην - - 
ἴχοιπε, ἐν δὲ τῷ τέως χρόνῳ ++ Savery ἰκολάζισι Lys. 179. 32. Ei μὲν 
σ΄λοῖα ἴσισθαι μέλλει ἱκανὰ « +, ἡμεῖς ἂν “«λέοιμκεν" εἰ δὲ μέλλοιμεν ν. 6. 
12. Οὐκ ἄν... ὠγόρευες, οὐδέ xs .. ἀνιείης β. 184. 


(9). ᾿Επορευόμην, ἵνα, él ot δέοισο, ὠφελοίην αὐτόν i. 8. 4 (ξ 601). ᾿Ἐστθουλεύ- 
over, ὡς, ἢν δύνωνται, ὠσολίσωσιν ᾿ϊ.1. 35. Εὖσεν, si αὐτῷ δοίη ἱππέας χιλίους, 
ὅσι .. κατακάνοι ἄν i. 6, 2. 


604. Remarks. 1. The condition is often (α.}) under- 
stood; or (β.) instead of being expressed in a distinct clause, 
ts incorporated in the conclusion; or (y.) is expressed by a 
relative clause, or by an independent instead of a dependent 
sentence. In all these cases, the form of the conclusion is 


vs. 5.] IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 377 


properly the same as if the condition had been formally ex- 
pressed. Thus, 


(α.) "Eqs οὖν ἄν γένοιο τῷ ἐμῷ ἀδελφῷ πολέμιος, ἐμοὶ δὲ φίλος , Would you 
then [if I should now forgive you] be in future an enemy to my brother, und a 
friend to me? i, 6. 8. 


Nores. a. Among the conditions most naturally supplied, and therefore 
most frequently omitted, are those of inclination with possibility and of possi- 
bility with inclination ; since these are the two great conditions of human con- 
duct. Hence the frequent use of the Opt. and past tenses of the Ind. with ἄν 
to denote one of these ideas, the other being implied as a condition; “hus, 
Οὐκ ἂν dévairo, he would not be able (if he should wish), i.e. he could not, i. 9. 
23. Οὐδὲ «οὔτ᾽ ἄν τις εἴποι, nor could any one say this, i.9.13. <Adroi μὲν 
ἄν ἐπορεύθησαν, they could themselves have marched [might if they had chosen], 
iv. 2.10. “Huds δ᾽ ἄν ἔφην ἔγωγε χρῆναι, and I might have suid that we ought, 
iii. 2.24 Οὐδ᾽ αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖνα, ἂν ἐθέλοιμοεν, nor should we wish to slay him ¢if 
we could), ii. 3.23. ἭΣ,στ᾽ ἄν dxovouims, I should most glidly hear (if I 
might hear), ii. 5.15. Tay ἐλευθερίαν taviuav ἄν i. 7.3. ᾿Οκνοίην μὲν ἄν is 
8.17. ἜἘξουλόμην γ᾽ ἄν, I should have wished, Pl. Pheedr. 228 a. 

Ὁ. To the use of the Opt. with ἄν just noticed, may be referred its em- 
ployment to express permission, or command in the softened or indifferent lun- 
guage of permission; as, Σὺ μὲν xouilos dv σεαυσόν, you may now betuke your- 
self [might if you wished], Soph. Ant. 444. "Ayo ἄν μάταιον ἄνδρ᾽ ἐκποό- 
dev 10. 1339. Χωροῖς ἄν εἴσω σὺν τάχει, Id. El. 1491. — Its use for the Pres. 
and Fut. ind. (§ 595) may be referred in like manner to ellipsis. 


6. From the different idiom of the two languages, the Opt. is often best 
translated, as in the examples just given, by our Pres. potential; thus, ᾿Αλλ᾽ 
εἴποιτε ἄν, but you may say [might if you were disposed], vii. 6.16. Caines 
ἄν Ib. 23. See also § 600. 


(B.) Bovrsieny δ᾽ ἄν, ἄκοντος ἀσιὼν [= εἰ ὠσίοιμι] Κύρου, λαθεῖν αὐτόν i. 
8.17. Odre γὰρ, βοὸς ἄν ἔχων σῶμα [= εἰ βοὸς εἶχε σῶμα, ἀνθρώσου δὲ γνώ- 
μην, ἠδύνατ᾽ ἄν πράτεειν ἃ ἐξούλετο Mem. ἱ. 4. 14. Ανεν σοῦ τὰ τοιαῦτα 
ἔχειν [== εἰ μὴ τὰ φοιαῦτα εἴχεν), « « οὐκ ἄν οἷός τ᾽ ἦν Pl. Phedo, 99 ἃ. Ni- 
κῶντσες μὲν οὐδένα ἄν κατακάνοιεν, ἡττηθέντων δὲ αὐπσῶν οὐδεὶς ἄν λειφθείη iii. 1. 2. 
"Ὥσσερ dy δράμοι τις περὶ νίκης i. 5. 8. “Asso ἄν ἄνθρωποι ἐν ἐρημίᾳ ποιήσειαν, 
ἄλλως δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολμῷεν ν. 4. 84. 


(γ.) Ὅσεις δὲ ΦὌύτων σύνοιδεν [= εἴ σις συνειδείη] αὑτῷ παρημεληκὼς, τοῦτον 
ἐγὼ οὔποτ᾽ ay εὐδαιμονίσαιμοι ' δι ᾽ς 


§ GOS. 2. The place of the Opt. in the conclusion is sometimes 
supplied by the Ind. expressing such ideas as possibility, propriety, necessity, 
habit, or unfinished action, commonly without ἄν: as, Οὐκ ἦν λαξεῖν. εἰ wh. 
Snegev 1.5.2. Οὐδὲ γὰρ, εἰ πάνυ προθυμοῖσο, ῥῴδιον ἦν iii. 4.15. Εὖ τις αὐὖ- 
TH φανερὸς γένοισο ἐπιδείκνυσθαι βουλόμενος, περὶ πάντος ἐποιεῖτο i. 9.16. See 
Tb. 18, 19, 28; ii. 3. 11; iv. 1.14; and ~ 594. “Quxrsipov, εἰ ἁλώσοιντο ie 
4.7. Αἰσχρὸν γὰρ ἦν τὰ μὲν ἐμὰ διαπεσρᾶχθαι, ‘for it would have been 
base,’ vii. 7. 40 (§ 604. β). 


3. The conclusion has sometimes a second condition, to which its verb con- 
forms ; as, "Edy δ᾽ ἐμὲ ἕλησθε, οὐκ ἄν ϑαυμάσαιμι, si τινα εὕροιτε vi. 1. 29. 
Ἤκουον .. dri, εἰ διέλθοιεν. ., ἣν μὲν βούλωνται, διαξήσονται iv. 1. 3. 


4 The particle ἄν is sometimes omitted where it would regularly be insert- 
an “6 


378 SYNTAX.— USE OF MODES. λΤῪ [ΒΟΟΚΠῚ 


ed; as, Ἤ;:σχυνόμοην μέντοι; the. ἐξηπατήθη, "1 certainly should be ashamed, id 
ZI had been deceived, vii. 6. 21. Ei δ᾽ ὠμείνον᾽ οἱ Deol γνώμην ἔχουσιν, εὐτυχὴς 
εἴην ἐγώ Eur. Ph. 1200. Ei δὲ μὴ .. ἦσμεν ..) φόθον παρέσχεν Id. Hee. 1111]. 
Δόύνασιν τίς ὠνδρῶν ὑπερθασίᾳ κατάσχοι; Soph. Ant. 604. Οὔτε δρῶσ᾽ irdy 
éavev, nor could she have done it unobserved, Id. El. 914. 


5. Attic courtesy (ὃ 595) often gives the conditional form to complementa- 
ry clauses after words of emotion; as, Tode ἐθαύμασα, εἰ [= ὅτι] .. cidns, 
this I wonder at, that you place, Pl. Rep. 348 e. 


(iv.) Relative. 


§ 606. A sentence, which is introduced by a relative 
(or by a similar particle of time or place) referring to that 
which is indefinite or general or not yet determined, has a 

écies of contingency (ὃ 594), and may hence employ the 
Subj. or Opt.; the Subj., when a future determination is now 
contemplated, but otherwise, the Opt. (ὃ 590. 2). Which 
mode should be employed will commonly depend upon the 
preceding verb (ὃ 592). After these connectives ἂν is regular- 
ly used with the Subj. (sometimes compounded with the con- 
nective); but not with the Opt. ., unless for some additional rea- 
son. Thus, 


Einées εἴη, ἡγεμόνα αἰτεῖν παρὰ rotvrov, ᾧ (definite, viz. Cyrus] λυμεαινόμεθα 
σὴν πρᾶξιν. ἘΠ δὲ καὶ σῷ ἡγεμόνι, πιστεύσομεν, ᾧ [indefinite] ἄν Κῦρος διδῷ, 
‘the guide whom Cyrus may give us,’ i. 8.16. ᾿Εγὼ γὰρ ὀκνοίην μὲν ἂν εἰς 
σὰ “«λοῖα ἐμβαίνειν, ἃ ἡμῖν doin, .. PoCoiuny δ᾽ ἂν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, ᾧ doin, ἕπεσθαι, 
* the vessels which he might give us,’ Ib. 17. Ὅ «, ἄν δέῃ, πείσομαι Ib. ὅ. 
"Ὅτῳ δὲ φαίη φίλος εἶναι, rovrw ἔνδηλος ἐγίγνετο ἐπιβουλεύων ii. 6. 23. Σὺν 
ὑμῖν μὲν ἄν οἵμαι εἶνα, τίμιος, ὅπου ἄν ὦ i.3.6. ἝὍσου μὲν στρατηγὸς σῶος tin, 
σὸν στρατηγὸν παρεκάλουν ὁπόθεν δὲ οἴχοιτο, τὸν ὑποσσρατηγόν iii, 1. 32. 
Tlogeurioy δ᾽ ἡμῖν σοὺς πρώχους σταθμοὺς ὡς ἄν δυνώμεθα μακροτάτους ii. 2.12. 
Σ,τοῦνσαι. » ὅταν [= ὅτε dv] οἱ ἄρχοντες σημήνωσι Cyr. i. 2.8. “Ors δ᾽ ἔξω 
σοῦ δεινοῦ γένοιντο, .. ἀἐσίλειπον ii. 6. 12. ᾿Εγὼ δὰ, ὁπόταν [== ἑπσόςε ἄν] και- 
ees 7 i, ἥξω vii. 8. 86. ᾿Εδήρενεν ἐπὸ ἵσσου, ὁπόσε γυμνάσαι βούλοισο i. 2. 7. 
Ti οὖν͵ ἔφη, ποιοῦσιν, ἐπὴν [= ἐπεὶ ἄν] αἴσθωνται, Cyr. iii. σὰν [- ἐσεὶ 
ἄν) δὲ rah ἁλισθῇ ii. 4. 8, ᾿Ἐπεί σις διώκοι, πρδραμόντιν toracay i. 5. 2 
Ἕως μὲν dv παρῇ τις, χρῶμαι" ἐπειδὰν [= ἐπειδὴ dv) δὲ ἐσιέναι, βούληται, - 
κακῶς ποιῶ i. 4. 8. “Ἕως Κύρῳ συμμίξειαν ii. 1. 2. ᾿᾿σειδὴ δέ σι: ἐμφάγοιεν, 
Gvieravro ἵν. ὅ. 8. Δεῖται αὐτοῦ, μὴ πρόσθεν καταλῦσαι... πρὶν ἂν αὐτῷ συμ- 
ξουλεύσηται i. 1.10. Πρὶν αὐτοὺς καταγάγοι i. 2,2. Μέχρι ἄν κατασενσῃ 
i. 4, 18. 


Norss. (a) The omission of ἄν with the Subj., in sentences like the pre- 
ceding, is most frequent in the Ep. poets, and rarest in Att. prose. (6) In 
Epic similes, as presenting imagined scenes, the Subj. sometimes occurs in rel- 
ative clauses; as, “Ὥσσε Ais ἠϊγένειος, ὅν pa κύνες. « δίωνται P. 109. “Ὡς ὃ 
ὅτι πορφύρῃη πέλαγος ΞΞ. 16. 


(v.) Complementary. 


§ G6O7. As the complementary sentences which it is most important 


cH. 5.:} IN COMPLEMENTARY SENTENCES. 379 


here to notice occur in what is termed the oratio obliqua, it will be necessary 
to remark upon the character of this form of discourse, and upon its distinc- 
tion from the oratio recta. 


There are two ways of quoting the words of a person. In 
the first, we simply repeat his words, without change or in- 
corporation into our own discourse ; as, He said, “ I will go.” 
This is termed piREcT QuoTaTION, or in Lat., ORATIO RECTA. 
In the second, we make such changes and insert such connec- 
tives as will render the quotation an integral part of our own 
discourse ; thus, He said, that he would go. ‘This is termed 
INDIRECT QUOTATION, or in Lat., oRATIO OBLIQUA. ‘This dis- 
tinction likewise applies to the thoughts and feelings of persons, 
and even to general truths and appearances. 


Nore. Of these two methods of quotation, the former is dramatic in its 
character, presenting before us the speaker in the utterance of his own words ; 
but the latter is narrative, simply relating what the speaker has said. This 
relation is made in Greek, by the use either of the distinct modes with their 
connectives or of the incorporated modes. We have occasion at present to 
treat only of the use of the distinct modes. For the use of the incorporated 
modes, see § 619. 


8 608. In the oratio obliqua, a thing is presented not as 
actual, but as dependent upon the statement, thoughts, or feel- 
ings of some person, and consequently as having some degree 
of contingency. Hence it is properly expressed by a contin- 
gent mode. ‘This use, however, is confined to the Opt., which 
limitation may. be explained as follows. The oratio obliqua, 
from the very nature of quotation, commonly respects the past, 
and the cases in which it respects the actual present are too 
few and unimportant to require special provision; while in 
those cases, so constantly recurring, in which the past is spoken 
of as present, the very vivacity and dramatic character of this 
form of narrative forbids the use of a contingent mode. Hence 
the Subj. is used in the oratio obliqua only in such cases as 
would admit it in the oratio recta, while, on the other hand, of 
the distinct modes, 

The optative is the mode appropriate to the oratio obliqua in 
past time. 

With this Opt. ἄν is not joined, unless for some additional 
reason. Thus, 


Ἧ κεν ἄγγελος λέγων, ὅτι λελοιπὼς εἴη Συίννεσις τὰ ἄκρα, a messenger came 
saying, that Syennesis had left the heights,i. 2.21. Αὗται ἠρώτων αὐτοὺς, 
wives εἶεν. Ὁ δὲ ἑρμηνεὺς εἶπε Περσισαὶ, ὅτι παρὰ βασιλέως πορεύοιντο πρὸς τὸν 
σατράπην. Αἱ δὲ ὠπεπκρίναντο, ort οὐκ ἐνταῦθα εἴη, arr’ ὠπέχοι ὅσον παρασάγ- 
γὴν iv. 5.10. Ὡς εἶπεν ὁ Σάτυρος ὅτι οἰμμώξοισο, εἰ μὴ σιωσπήσειεν, ἐπήρετο" 
“"Αν δὲ σιωπῶ, οὐκ do’, ἔφη, “ οἰμώξομα, ;” H. τ. 11. 8. 56. Ὅ τι δὲ ποιήσοι͵ 
οὐ διεσήμηνε ii, 1. ῶ8, "Ηισθοντο οἱ μὲν “Ελληνες, Ors βασιλεὺς . . ἐν τοῖς σκευὸ 


380 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [Book ΠῚ 


φόροις εἴη, βασιλεὺς δ᾽ αὖ ἤκουσε Τισσαφέρνους, ὅτι of “EAAnves νικῷεν 1.10. 5 
᾿Εγιγνώσκετο, ὅτι ὑπόσεμιστος εἴη iii. 8. 4. Σαφὲς πᾶσιν ἤδη ἐδόκει εἶναι, ὅτι ἡ 
σαόλος εἴη tii, 1.10, Ἤγνδει, ὅδ σι τὸ πάθος εἴη ἵν. 5.7. ᾿Ερωπώμενος δὲ, x0 
δασὸς εἴη iv. 4. 17. ἜἘπσυνθάνετο περὶ τοῦ" Σεύδου, πότερα πολέμιος εἴη ἢ φίλον» 
vii. 1.14. ἜἜχάλει. .,) μνήμην παλαιῶν σπερμάτων ἔχουσ᾽, ὑφ᾽ ὧν Savor μὲν 
αὐτός Soph. Cid. T. 1245. Σκοσῶν, εἰ διαξαίνοιεν 11. 4. 34. Ὃ δ᾽ ἐγαλέσαι. 
γεν, ὅτι .. Teas λέγοι i. ὅ. 14. ᾿Εδαύμαζον, ὅτι οὐδαμοῦ Κῦρος φαίνοιτο i. 10, 
16. Τισσαφέρνης διαδάλλει (Hist. Pres., § 567. a) σὸν Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφὸν, 
ὡς ἐσιξουλεύοι αὐτῷ i. 1. 8. Seei. 6. 8. 


8 699. Remarks. 1. The Greek, from its peculiar spirit 
of freedom, vivacity, variety, and dramatic life (§§ 330, 576), 
often interchanges and blends the forms of indirect and direct 
quotation, commonly passing from the former to the latter, but 
sometimes the reverse. Thus, 


A.) A sudden change is often made from indirect to direct quotation. 
This change may be made either (a.) after the introductory particle; or 
(β.) in the body of the quotation, commonly after a relative, a parenthetic 
clause, or one of the larger pauses, and in the last case with the frequent 
insertion of ἔφη. Thus, — (a.) ΠΙροξένος εἶπεν, ὅσι “ Αὐφσός εἶμι, ὃν ζητεῖς, 
Proxenus said, “ I am the very person you inquire for,” ii. 4.16. Of δὲ εἶπον, 
ὅτ, “ἱκανοί ἐσμεν" ve 4.10. "lows ἄν εἴποιεν, ὅτι “ὦ Σώκρατες, μὴ ϑαύμαζε 
σὰ λεγόμενα " Pl. Crito, 50 c.—(G.) ᾿Ἐσιδεικνὺς δὲ, “as εὔηθες εἴη, ἡγεμόνα 
αἰτεῖν παρὰ τούτου, ᾧ λυμαινόμεθα τὴν πρᾶξιν" i. 3.16. “Λόγον ἔφασαν 
“ χρῆναι διδόναι, μεμνημένους ὅσας τε ναυμαχίας αὐτοὶ καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς νενικήκατε 
καὶ ναῦς εἰλήφατε" Hs Gr. 1.1. 28, "Ελεγεν, drs “ὀρθῶς ἠσιῶντο . ..« ᾿Αλλ’ 
ἐγὼ," ἔφη, “ ἠναγκάσθην." ᾿Ασπεκρίνατο, ὅτι “ οὐδὲν ἄν σούτων εἴποι εἰς τὴν σαρα- 
φιάν- ὑμεῖς δὲ ξυλλέξαντες," ἔφη, “si βούλεσθε, λέγετε ν. 6. 87. 


8 6190. B.) Indirect quotation, without losing entirely its character, 
often adopts, in whole or in part, the modes and tenses of direct quotation, as 
the Pres., Fut., and Perf. ind. for the Opt., the Subj. for the Opt., ἄς. Thus, 
"Exel εἶπον, ὅτι ἐπὶ σὸ στράτευμα ἥκουσιν, ἔλεγεν, ὅτι τὸ στράτευμα ἀσοδίδωσι, 
When they said, that they ,are| were come for the army, he replied, that he ἴτϑ- 
signs] resigned the army (here the regular forms of indirect quotation would be 
ἥκοιεν and ἀσοδιδοίη, while those of direct quotation would be ἥκομεν and ἀσοδί. 
31, 80 that the person of the one form is united with the mode of the other), 
vii. 6. 3. "Εΐνω, ὅτι οὐ δυνήσεται i. 3. 2. ‘Yoo ia μὲν ἦν, ὅτι ἄγει (ef. “Orr 
δὲ ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἄγοι) Ib. 21. Οὗτοι ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, ᾿Αριαῖος δὲ 
πεφευγὼς ἐν σῷ σταθμῷ sinii. 1.8. Ἧκον λέγοντες .. brs oby ἱππεῖς εἶσιν, 
ἀλλὰ ὑποζύγια viwowro ii. 2.15. See 111, 5.13; vi. 8, 11; vii. 1.34. Ἐδό- 
“εἰ δῆλον εἶναι, ὅσι αἱρήσονται abriv, εἴ cis ἐπιιψηφίξοι vi. 1. 25. "Ἔλεγον, ὅσι 
xe) σπονδῶν ἥκοιεν, ἄνδρες, οἵτινες ἱκανοὶ ἔσονται ti. 8. 4, See Ib. 6. 


§ Gil. 2. The use of the Opt. in the oratio obliqua may extend not 
merely to the leading verbs in the quotation, but also to verbs joined with 
these by relatives and other connectives (cf. § 619.) ; as, Ἔλεγον, dri. . εἴη 
+ +, δ΄ ἧσσερ ἥκοιεν, ‘through which they had come,’ iii. 5. 15. "Ἔλεγον. .») 
ὅτι wavris ἄξια λίγοι Σεύδης - χειμὼν γὰρ sin, ‘for it was winter,’ vii. 3. 13. 
Even though an infinitive precedes; as, "E@sa, ἄγειν rd σσράτευμα κατὰ μέσον 
σὸ τῶν πολεμίων, ὅτι ἐκεῖ βασιλεὺς εἴη, ‘ because there was the king,’ i. 8, 12. 


3. In complementary sentences, where Goubt is expressed, and a primary 


cH. 5.] VOL:TIVE. — INCORPORATED. 381 


tense precedes, the Subj. is sometimes used, especially in the lst Pers. The 
connective is sometimes omitted, and even the leading verb itself. Thus, Οὐκ 
οἵδ᾽, εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ τούτῳ da Cyr. viii. 4.16. Bovass ise. ὡς] λάξωμα,, Wilt 
thou I take? Soph. Ph. 761. Θέλεις μείνωμεν: Id. El. 80. Eire os βούλει 
προσθῆς ἢ ἀφέλῃς Pl. Phedo, 95d. ΔΙ. Llagawa σοι σιωπᾷν... AIZX. 
[Sc. Παραινεῖς ὡς] ᾿Εγὼ σιωπῶ, Bacch. I advise you to be silent. Aisch. I 
be silent? Ar. Ran. 1132 (cf. ὃ 537).— The use of the Subj. in ὃ 595. γ 
may in like manner be explained by ellipsis. 


Ἢ Β. ΜΟΙΠΙΤΙΨΕ. 


§ 612. The most direct expression of an act of the will 
(§ 329. N.) is by the Imperative mode (§ 169.4). For other 
less direct methods, see §§ 5971 -- 600, 602. 3, 604. b. 


ReMARKS. 1. From the fondness of the Greeks for passing from indirect 
to direct forms of expression (cf. §§ 576, 609, 670), the Imperat. is some- 
times found in dependent sentences; thus, Θνητὸς δ᾽ Ορέστης + dors μὴ λίαν 
στένε, and Orestes was mortal; so that [do not grieve] you should not grieve to 
excess, Soph. El. 1172. Τράψω δὲ, ὥστε, ἄν βούλησθε, χειροτονήσατε, and I 
will propose it in writing, so thut if you will, [vote it} you may vote it, Dem. 
129. 1. Δεῖξαι, dri, ὧν μὲν ἐφίενται, .. xracbwoay, to show them, that, what 
they desire {let them gain they must gain, Th. iv. 92. "Exravegwra réaw, 
σῶν ἐκμαγείων ταῖς duis ti πρῶτον ἕν τοῦδ᾽ ἡμῖν ἀρέσκον κείσθω Pl. Leg. 800 e. 
Olc# οὖν ὃ δρᾶσον 1200 you know then, what [do] you should do? Eur. Hee. 
225 (ef. Οἶσδθ᾽ οὖν ὃ δράσεις ; Id. Cycl. 131). Οἷσδ᾽ ὡς ποίησον ; ἀντὶ τῶν εἰρη- 
μένων ἴσ᾽ ἀντάκουσον, xara κρῖν᾽ αὐτὸς μαθών Soph. Gd. T. ὅ48. ᾿Αλλ᾽ οἶσθ᾽ 
0 μοι σύμπραξον, Eur. Heracl. 451. Ofsdd νυν ὥ μοι γενέσθω; Do you know 
then, what (let be done} must be done for me? Id. Iph. T. 1203. Φυλάκους, 
of λεγόντων Hat. i. 89. 


ὃ GES. 2. In general but earnest address, the 2d Pers. of the Im- 
perat. is sometimes used with πᾶς, or ris, or both, instead of the 3d Pers. ; as, 
Χώρει δεῦρο πᾶς ὑπηρέτης > τόξευς, παῖε" σφενδόνην ris μοι δότω, Come hither- 
every man alias, bird} of you! Shoot, smite. Let some one give me a sling, 
Ar. Av. 1186. Φύλαστσε πᾶς τις 10. 1191. Ἴσω cis, εἰσάγγελλε Eur. Bac. 
173. See § 500. a. 


3. Such familiar imperatives as ἄγε, εἰσέ, ἰδέ, and φέρε, may be used in the 
singular, as interjections, though more than one are addressed ; thus, "Aye δὴ, 
ἀκούσατε Apol. 14. Εἰπέ μοι, τί πάσχετ᾽, ὦνδρες ; Ar. Pax, 383. 


4. An act of the will may respect either the real or the ideal. Hence in 
Greek, as in other languages, the Imperat. may be used to express supposition 
or condition; thus, “Ὅμως δὲ εἰρήσθω wor, but yet (let it have been said by me] 
suppose me to have said, Mem. iv. 2.19. [1Ἰλούτε, τε γὰρ...) καὶ [% Soph. 
Ant. 1168. 


C. IncorPoraTED. 


~§614. I. The Greek has great freedom in respect to 
the employment of distinct or incorporated sentences, and in 
“respect to the mode of their incorporation. Thus («.) a de- 
pendent clause may be preserved entirely distinct ; or (β.) its 
suiject or most prominent substantive may be incorporated in 


382 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [BOOK IIb 


the leading clause, leaving it. otherwise distinct; or (y.) its 
verb may be also incorporated as an Infinitive; or (6.) its verd 
may be incorporated yet more closely as a Participle. ‘The 
union often becomes still closer by an attraction, which renders 
the subject of the Inf. or Part. the same with the subject or an 
adjunct of the principal verb. ‘This attraction has three forms 5 
in the first (s.), the principal verb adopts the subject of the de- 
pendent clause ; in the second (¢.), the Inf. or Part., referring 
to the same person or thing with the principal verb, adopts the 
same grammatical subject; in the third (7.), the Inf. or Part. 
adopts for its grammatical subject, an adjunct of the principal 
verb. E. g. 


α. "Hicbero, ὅσι τὸ Μένωνος στράτευμα ἤδη ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ἦν, he perceived, that 
the army of Meno was now in Cilicia, i. 2.21. Λέγουσιν, ὅτι ἐπὶ rodro texor- 
eas Cyr. i. 2.6. Παρεσκεύαξοντο, ὅπως κατὰ κορυφὴν ἰσξαλοῦσιν Th. ii. 99. 


‘Pp. "Hicbero τό τε Μένωνος στράτευμα, ὅτι ἤδη ἐν Κιλικίᾳ 4 ΩΝ rs perceived the 
army of Meno, that it was now in Cilicia, i. 2. 21 v. 1. ovrd τινες, ὡς 
γιγνώσκουσι Vect. i. 1. See §§ 425.4, 551.—a and ἕῳ or examples, 
see ὃ 551. N. 


γ. Αἰσθανόμενος abrods μέγα rage βασιλεῖ Δαρείῳ δύνασθαι, perceiving them 
to have great influence with King Darius, Th. vi. ὅ9. TlagecxevdéZero βοηθεῖν 
Th. iii. 110. Πισσοὺς πέμπει ἐπισκοπεῖν Ke. 4. 6. "Hadev. . βοηθεῖν τῇ πα- 
reids Ages. i. 36. 


δ, Οὐ divamons.. σὲ αἰσθέσθαι πειρώμενον, I cannot perceive you attempting, 
ii. 5. 4. Παρεσκευάζετο γὰρ πορευσόμενος H. Gr. iv. 2. 41 (ὃ 583. a). 
"Ἔσεμψε τινα ἐροῦντα ii. ὅ. 2. ᾿Ερχόμεθα .. βοηθήσοντες σούφοις vii. 7. 17. 
—vyand δ. "Ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς wagirnria ἐς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους εἶναι, σῶν μὲν 
ἐγχλημάφτων rigs μηδὲν ἀπολογησομένους, . . δηλῶσαι δέ Th. i, 72. 


s. For examples, see ὃ 551. 


Z. ᾿Ενομείξομεν ἄξιοι sivas (= ἡμᾶς ἀξίους sivas], we thought that we were wor- 
thy, Cyr. vii. 5.72 (cf. Νομίζοιμοει γὰρ ἐμαυτὸν ἐοικέναι 10. v. 1.21). Νόμεξε 
-. ἄνδρα ἀγαθὸν ὠἀποκτείνων [== σεαυτὸν ἀποκτείνοντα ', consider yourself. putting 
to death a good man, vi. 6. 24. Olas sivas τίμιος i. 8. 6 (cf. Οἴκα, μὲν, ἦν δ᾽ 
ἐγὼ, A λῆἥξεῖν με Pl. Charm, 178 a). Ὁρῶ μὲν ἐξαμαρτάνων Eur. Med. 350 (cf. 
"Oga δέ μ ᾿ ἔφγον δεινὸν ἐξειργασμένην Soph. Tr. 706). Οὐκ ἃ κρείσσων noes ὦ ὦν, 
καῦτα apobeaasten σοὺς συνόντας, ἀλλ᾽ ὥπερ εὖ ἤδει ἑαυτὸν ἥττονα ὄντα,͵ σαῦτα 
ἐξῆρχε Cyr. i. 4. 4. Δηλοῖ σιμῶν σὸν πλοῦτον Ar. Plut. 587 (cf. ᾿Αποφήνω 
μόνην ὠγαθῶν ἁπάντων οὖσαν αἰτίαν ἐμέ Ib. 468). Σαφῇ σημεῖα φαίνεις ἐσθλὸς 
εἰς ἡμᾶς γεγώς Soph. El. 23. See §§ 627, 639. --- ᾧ and δ. ᾿Ἑώρων οὐ κα- 
χορθοῦντες, καὶ τοὺς στρατιώτας ἀχθομένους, they saw that they were unsuccessfus 
and the soldiers displeased, Th. vii. 47. 


η. "Edokey οὖν αὐτοῖς συσκενασαμένοις ἃ εἶχον καὶ ὁσλισαμένοις προϊέναι, τέ 
therefore seemed best to them, that having pucked up what they had, and equipped 
themselves in full” armor, they should advance, ii. 1. 2 (ὃ 627. «). Εὖ γὰρ 
φρονοῦντος ὄμμα σοῦ κατηγορεῖ, for your eye proves that you feel kindly, Asch, 
Ag. 271 (§ 633). 


§ 615. Remarks. 1. An especial variety of construction is ob 


CH. 5.| INCORPORATED, ' 383 


served with such words as σύνοιδα, συγγινώσκω, ἔοικα, twos εἶμι. "Eyo σοι 
σύνοιδα [sc. σε] .. πρωὶ ἀνιστάμενον (v. L ἀνσταμένῳ), 1 [know with you 
your rising] remember your rising early, CEc. 3.7. Zvviraos γὰρ rois wiv. » 
γεγενημένοις (Ὁ. L. τοὺς +» γεγενημένους), rods δὲ .. εἰληφότας Isocr. 319 6. 
Ξύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ σοφὸς dv Pl. Apol. 21 Ὁ. Ἐμαυτῷ γὰρ ξυνήδειν οὐδὲν ἐπισταμέ- 
yw Ib. 22d. ᾿Εμαυσῷ ξύνοιδα, ὅσι . ᾿ λέγω Ib. Ion, ὅ98 ς. "Eoxus βασιλεὺς 
εἶναι, you seem to be hing, Cyr. i. 4.9. ᾿Εοίκατε τυραννίσι μάλλδν ἢ πολιτείαις 
ἡδόμενοι, ‘you seem more pleased,’ H. Gr. vi. 3. 8. | "Eomas dandy εἰρηκότι, 
you seem like one who has spoken the truth, i. e. you seem to have spoken the truth, 
Pl. Ale. 124 Ὁ. “Ene γὰρ ὥσπερ αἴνιγμα ξυντιθέντι Pl. Apol. 26 6. “Ooi 
ives.» ox ὀρθῶς ὡμολογηκόσι Id. Meno, 97 a. “Opoims ἦσαν ϑαυμάζειν (5. ἐ. 
ϑαυμάξοντες), they seemed to be wondering, iii. 5. 13. 


2. The contingent particle ἄν may be joined with the Inf. and Part., wher- 
ever it would be joined with the distinct modes of which they supply the place. 
The Inf. and Part. are then commonly translated into Eng. by the potential 
mode (§ 588). Thus, Ei δέ cis ἐξαπατηθῆναι ἂν οἴεται, if any one thinks that 
he could be deceived, v. 7. 11 (ὃ 604. ἃ). “Qoees καὶ ἰδιώτην dv γνῶναι vi. 1. 
81. Ti dy οἰόμεθα παθεῖν (cf. vi οἰόμεθα πείσεσθαι) ; iii. 1.17. See vi. 1. 20, 
and ὃ 595.8. ‘Os οὕτω περιγενόμενος ἄν τῶν ὠντιστασιωτῶν, us though he 
would thus prevail over his opponents, i. 1.10. “Ὡς ἁλόντος ἄν τοῦ χωρίου Ve 
2. 8. 


§ G16. 58. From the intimate union prevailing between the Inf. or 
Part., and the principal verb of the sentence, a word properly modifying the 
one is sometimes placed in immediate connection with the other. We remark, 
in particular, — (a) Such adverbs as dua, αὐτίκα, εὐθύς, ἐξαίφνης, and μεταξύ, 
joined with the Part. instead of the principal verb; as, “Awa rads’ εἰστὼν avé- 
orn {saying this, he at the same time rose up], us soon as he had said this, he 
rose up, iii. 1.47. “Ὅσως μὴ, dua ἀσποθνήσκοντος τοῦ ὠνθρώσου, διωασκεδάννῦται 
ἡ ψυχή Pl. Phedo, 77 Ὁ. Εὐδὺς οὖν με ἰδὼν 6 Κέφαλος ἠσπάζετο, immediate- 
ly, therefore, upon seeing me, Cephalus suluted me, Pl. Rep. 328 ¢. Ἦν αὐτοῖς 
ἐπιχώριον, τὸ μεταξὺ πορευομένους μήφε ἐσθίξιν μήτε πίνειν, it was their custom, 
while marching [in the mean time], neither to eat nor drink, Cyr. viii. 8. 11.— 
(6) A particle joined with the principal verb instead of the Inf. or Part., par- 
ticularly ἄν, and οὐκ with φημί": as, Σὺν ὑμῖν μὲν ἄν οἴμαι εἶναι ripsos, with 
you, I think that I should be honored, i. 8. 6. Χρήσιμοι ἄν ἐδόκουν sivas Vv. 6. 1. 
Οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι, they said they would not go, i. 3.1. "Eanesro αὐτὸν, εἰ ὁπ λι- 
σεύοι. Οὐκ ἔφη (sc. ὁσ’λιτεύειν], ‘He said Wo,’ v. 8. 5. 


4. In the use of the incorporated modes with adjuncts, there is often a union 
of two constructions; as, “Ayysaas δ᾽ ὅρκῳ προστιθείς (uniting ἄγγελλε δ᾽ 
ὅρκῳ and ἄγγελλε δ᾽, ὅρκον προστιθείς), and announce | with an oath, adding it], 
adding an oath, Soph. El. 47. “Ὅς, βάλλειν δεήσοι ὠναιρουμένους ταῖς βώλοις 
Cyr. ii. 8. 17. Ti ἡμῶν δεήσεσθε χρήσασθαι, [uniting ri ἡμῶν δεήσεσθε and vi 
δεήσεσθε ἡμῖν χρήσασθαι] » [What shall you want of us to do with us?] In 
what shall you wish to employ us? vY. 4.9. ἜἘσιδυμίᾳ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τῶν ἐκ τῆς 
νήσου κομίσασθα, Th. v. 15. 


8 G17. 5. The Inf. and Part. may be used impersonally, as well as 
the finite modes (§ 546); thus, “Ὥστε καὶ αὐτῷ μεταμέλειν ii. 6.9. Mera 
μέλον αὐτοῖς Pl. Phado, 113 e. 


6. From the familiar association of the Acc. with the Inf. (δ 626), and the 
Gen. with the Part. (§ 638), words commonly governing other cases are often 
followed by these in connection with an Inf. or Part. Thus, ‘Yuas προσήκει 


384 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [Book 11 


καὶ ἀμείνονας καὶ προθυμοτέρους εἶναι iii. 2. 5 (cf. ᾿Αγαδοῖς σε ὑμῖν προσήκει 
tives iii. 2.11). ἸΠαραγγείλας τὴν πρώτην χιλιοστὺν ἕπεσθαι Cyr. ii. 4. 3 (see 
88 402, 424.2). Οὐδὲν ἤχθετο αὐτῶν πολεμούντων, he was not at all displeasea 
with their being at war, i. 1. 8 (cf. Σεύθης δὲ ἤχθετο αὐτῷ vii. 5.7. See 
δὲ 372. α, 406). ‘Os terovros εἰσορᾷς ἐμοῦ Soph. Tr. 394 (§§ 375, 377. 2) 
Sometimes the Acc. occurs for another case with the Part., if its 86 is analo« 
gous to that of the Inf.; as, Σὲ μὲν εὖ πράσσοντ᾽ ἐπιχαίρω Soph. Aj. 136. 
“Hebny . . sbaoyotvea os Id. Phil. 1314. Cf. § 406. 


§618. II. The relations of dependent sentences are ex 
pressed with greater explicitness by the distinct modes with 
their connectives; but with greater brevity, and often greater 
energy and vivacity, by the incorporated modes. ‘There are 
few of these relations which cannot be expressed by the latter. 
Hence, in the wide range of their use, these modes may ex- 
press the subject, the direct or indirect object, the time, cause, 
purpose, manner, means, condition, restriction, preliminaries, 
result, &c., of the verbs with which they are connected. 


Remarks. 1. The use of both the incorporated modes is far more exten- 
sive in Greek than in English. Hence we often translate the Greek Inf. and 
Part. by finite verbs with connectives (that, when, while, as, and, if, although, 
because, since, in order that, &c.). Sometimes, also, from a difference of idiom, 
the Inf. and Part. are interchanged in translation; as, Τὰ δὲ τῶν φίλων μόνος 
ᾧετο εἰδέναι ῥᾷστον ὃν ἀφύλακτα λαμβάνειν, but he thought that he alone knew it 
to be most easy to seize the unguarded property of friends, ii. 6. 24. Tlewrsdesw 
παρ᾿ οἷς ἰδούλετο ἑαυτὸν φιλεῖσθαι, to hold the first place with those by whom he 
wished himself beloved, Cyr. viii. 2. 26. 

> 

§ GID. 2. The use of the ‘incorporated modes, particularly the Inf., 
is very great in the oratio obliqua (§ 607), sometimes (a.) extending even to 
subsidiary clauses (cf. ᾧ 611. 2); and being iaterchanged and blended not 
only (8.) with other forms of the oratio obliqua, but also (y.) with those of 
the oratio recta. Thus, 


a. Πολλοὺς gain ᾿Αριαῖος εἶνα: Πέρσας ἑαυσοῦ βελτίονας, οὕς οὐκ ὠνασχέσθαι 
11. 2,1. "Ἔφη δὲ, ἐπειδὴ οὗ ἐκβῆναι σὴν ψυχὴν, πορεύεσθαι .. εἰς τόπον «. . ἦν 
ὦ... δ᾽ a χάσμαφε Pl. Rep. 614 b. 


B. ᾿Αγγέλλει Δερκυλλίδας, ὅτι vixgty σε αὖ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, καὶ αὐτῶν μὲν 
σεθνάναι ὀκτώ H. Gr. iv. 8.1. “Ὡς μὲν στρατηγήσοντα ἐμὲ .. μηδεὶς ὑμῶν λε- 
γέτω.." ὡς δὲ πείσομαι ἱ. 8. 15 (8 640). ᾿Απήγγελλον τῷ Κύρῳ, ὅσι σοσαῦτα 
εἴη ἔνδον ἀγαθὰ, ὅσα .. μὴ ἂν ἐπιλείπειν Cyr. ν. 2.4. See ὃ 628. 

Nore. “Ov: and ὡς are sometimes even followed, after an intervening sen- 
tence, by an Inf. or Part., instead of a finite verb; as, Εἶσε δὲ, ὅτι, “ ἐπειδὰν 
σάχιστα ἡ στρατεία λήξῃ, εὐθὺς ἀ ποπέμψειῖν αὐτόν iii. 1.9. ᾿Ἰύνόμισεν dos, 
εἴ τι οὗτος πάθοι, αὐτὸς ἂν λαθεῖν Cyr. ν. 4.1. ᾿Εγὼ γὰρ, εὖ ἴσθ᾽ brs, ὡς 
ἐμαυτὸν πείθω, . . ἐμὲ εἶνα, πούσων ἕνα Pl. Gorg. 453 Ὁ. Αἰσθάνομαι οὖν σου 
oy ὅσι, ὁσόσ᾽ ἄν PR. οὐ δυναμένον Ib. 48] ἃ. Ἰνοὺ; δὲ ὁ Κλέων καὶ ὃ 
Δημοσθένης, ὅτι, εἰ καὶ ὁποσονοῦν μᾶλλον ἐνδώσουσι, διαφϑαρησομένους avrovs Th, 
iv. 37. 

ye Ἔφη “ἰδέλειν σορεύεσθαι . « ᾿Εγὼ γὰρ," ἔφη, “ οἵδα" iv. 1. 97. Kate 
ανδρος, “ Μάλα μόλις," ἔφη. “ διαπραξάμενος ἥκω" λέγειν γὰρ ᾿Αναξίξζιον ὅσι οὐκ 
ἰσισήδειον εἴη. .. Ὅμως δὲ εἰσιέναι,᾽ ἔφη, “ ἰκίλευεν ἢ vii. 1. 39, 


on. 5.] INFINITIVE. 385 


B and γ. ᾿Απεκρίνατο, ὅφι “ ἀκούοι Afeerines,, ἐχθρὸν ἄνδρα, tari τῷ Εὐφρά 
wore iy εἶναι..." κἂν μὲν ἢ κεῖ, σὴν δίκην ἔφη " “ χρήζειν ἐπιθεῖναι αὐτῷ " by 
φεύγῃ, ἡμεῖς ἐκεῖ weds ταῦτα βουλευσόμεθα" i. 3. 20. 


(..) The Infimtive. 


§ 620. I. The general rule for the construction of the 
Infinitive is the following : — 


Rute XXX. The Inrinitive is ‘construed as 
a neuter noun (ἢ 445). Hence, 


(a) The Inf. may be the supsect of any word which would 
agree with a noun; whether appositive, adjective, article, pro- 
noun, or verb. (b) The Inf. may DEPEND upon any word 
which would govern a noun; whether substantive, adjective, 
verb, adverb, or preposition. (c) The Inf. may be used, like 
a noun, to express a CIRCUMSTANCE ; particularly such as are 
denoted by the instrumental and modal Dat. (§ 415), and by 
the Ace. of specification (ἢ 437). Thus, 


Φεύγειν αὐτοῖς ἀσφαλέστερόν ἔστιν ἢ nuiv, to fly is safer for them than for us, 
Vii. 2. 19. ‘Os οὐκ ἀκόλουθα εἴη τό σε ἐπιθήσεσθαι, καὶ λύσειν THY γέφυραν li. 4. 
19. Asie’ ἐνίκησεν μολεῖν coi Soph. Ant. 238. Οὐδὲν οἷόν toe’ [= φοιοῦσόν 
tori, οἷον] ἀκοῦσαι, there is nothing [such as] like hearing, or, it is best to hear, 
Ar. Av. 966. Οὐδὲν οἷον σὸ αὐτὸν ἐρωτᾷν Pl. Gorg. 447 6. "Ev γὰρ τῷ κρα- 
wiv ἔστι καὶ τὸ λαμβάνειν ν. 6.32. [ΙΠ]ρόφασις . . τοῦ ἀθροίζειν στράτευμα, 
pretext for assembling an army, i. 1. 7. Ἰ]ρόφασιν σαρατεύειν ἐπὶ σοὺς Θη- 
Caious H. Gr. iii. 5.5. ᾿Ανσιπάσχειν δὲ οὐδεὶς κίνδυνος ii. ὅ. 17. "Αρξαντες τοῦ 
διαβαίνειν i. 4. 15. Τύχη τοιάδ᾽ ἐπέστη, ϑαυμάσαι μὲν ἀξία, σπουδῆς γε μέντοι 
wns ἐμῆς οὐκ ἀξία Soph. Gd. Τ. 776. Κωλύσειε σοῦ καίειν ἐπιόντας i. 6. 2 
(§ 847). Οὐκ ἐκώλυε βασιλεὺς τὸ Κύρου στράτευμα διαβαίνειν i. 7. 19, 
᾿Απεγνωκέναι rou μάχεσθαι Th. Διὰ rod ἐπιορκεῖν ii. 6.22. ᾿Ηγάλλετο σῷ 
ἐξαπατᾷν δύνασθαι, τῷ “λάσασθα, ψευδὴ Ib. 26. Μανθάνειν γὰρ ἥκομεν Soph. 
(Ed. Ο. 12. Φοξδούμενοι οὐχ ἡμᾶς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ καταπεσεῖν iil. 2, 19. 
Διὰ τὸ πολλοὺς ἔχειν ὑπηρέτας καὶ διὰ τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν i. 9. 27. “Ὡς πολεμεῖν 
σε ἱκανοὶ εἴησαν i. 1. ὅ. ᾿Αμήχανος εἰσελθεῖν στρατεύματι i. 2. 21. Φαγεῖν 
δεινός, a terrible fellow to eat, vii. 3.23. Δεινὸς λέγειν ii. ὅ. 1ὅ. ὋὉρᾷν orv- 
γνὸς ἦν, καὶ τῇ φωνῇ «τραχύς ti. 6.9. Πρέπει γὰρ ὡς rigauvves εἰσορᾷν Soph. 
El. 664. ᾿Ἐσὶ γὰρ ταῖς ναυσὶ parroi εἶσιν ἀμύνεσθαι Th. iv. 10. “Ρᾷστσαι δὲ 
ἐς τὸ βλάπτεσθαι Id. vii. 67. Lledoes δὲ χάρμα μεῖζον ἐλαίδος κλύειν Asch. 
Ag. 266. λέω λέγειν Ib. 868. Mobos κυριώπερος λέγειν Eur. Iph. A. 318. 
*Q, TARY γυναικὸς οὕνεκα στρατηλατεῖν, φῶλλ᾽ οὐδὲν, ὦ κάκιστε φιμωρεῖν φίλοις 
Eur. Or. 718. Ub” ὅμοιον οὐδὲν οὔτ᾽ ἴσον βροτοῖς, πλὴν ὀνομάσαι, ‘in nothing 
except name,’ Eur. Ph. 501. 


ᾧ GZi. Norms. «. In some cases it seems indifferent whether the 
Inf. is regarded as the subject of a verb, or as depending upon the verb used 
impersonually.. See ὃ 546. β, γ 

β. In Greek, as in Eng., the Inf. Act. is often used, where the Inf. Pass. 
might kave been used with reference to a nearer, more explicit, or more natu- 
ral subject; as, Tiarey παρέχοντα, giving himself up for beating] to be beaten, 

33 


386 SYNTAX — USE OF MODES. [Book ΤῈ 


Pl. Gorg. 480 ἃ (ef. Παράσχῃ . » ϑεραπευθῆνα, Id. Charm. 15) Ὁ) Πᾶρε- 
Novres ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς εὖ ποιεῖν ii. 8, 22, Δίδωσ, βουκόλοισιν ἐκθεῖναι βείφος Eur 
Ph. 25. Τοῖς ἡ ῥᾷστοις ἐντυγχάνειν, the easiest things to meet with, Mem. i. Ὁ. 9, 
᾿Αχοῦσαι μὲν ἴσως τισὶν ἀηδῆ, ῥηθῆναι δ᾽ οὐκ actpogey Isocr. 265 c. 


§ 622. Remarks. 1. The article is often prefixed to 
the Inf. to give prominence to its substantive character, or to 
define the relation which it sustains as a substantive, by mark- 
ing the case. If the Inf. is governed by a preposition, the in 
sertion of the article is required. The article is often prefixed, 
especially in the tragedians, where it would not have been ex- 
pected, and is often in the Acc. (of direct object, effect, or 
ἡπεουδοαιέρπ), where another case might have been expected. 

hus, 

Td δρᾷν οὖκ ἠθέλησαν, [willed not the doing 10} were not willing to do it, 
Soph. Cid. C. 442. Πεὶ ἴδομαι 7d δρᾷν Id. Ph. 1252. Ὅς σε κωλύσει τὸ δρᾷν 
Ib. 1241. ᾿Ἔλασίδος .. cd μὴ παθεῖν Soph. Ant. 235. Τεύξετα, τὸ μὴ ϑανεῖν 
Ib. 778 (cf. § 370). Kagiiah δ᾽ ἐξίσταμαι, τὸ δρᾷν Ib. F105. ᾿Εγὼ αἴτιος .. 
76 σὲ ἀποκρίνασθαι, Pl. Lach. 190 6. To σε μὴ βλέπειν ἑπσοίμα, and ready to 
leave the light, Soph. El. 1079. Te μὲν περοσταλαμεωρεῖν .. πρόθυμος Th. ii. 
58. Τὸ σιγᾷν ob σθένω Eur. Iph. A. 655. ᾿Εγὼ γὰρ ἐκθαλεῖν μὲν αἰδοῦμαι 
δάκρυ, τὸ μὴ δακρῦσαι δ᾽ αὖθις αἰδοῦμαι, τάλας Ib. 451. For other examples, 
see §§ 620, 623. 


Nore. The Inf. with rod as the Gen. of motive (§ 372) is particularly 
frequent with a negative ; as, Tod μή vias ζητῆσαι, in order that none may in- 
quire, Th. i. 23. 


§ 623. 2. The Inf., both with and without the article, is 
used in a great variety of expressions which may be referred 
to the Acc. of specification, and the adverbial Acc. When 
thus employed, it may be termed the INFINITIVE OF SPECIFICA- 
TION, and the ADVERBIAL INFINITIVE. In these uses it is vari- 
ously translated, and in some of them it is often said, though 
not in the strict sense of the term (ὃ 343. N.), to be absolute. 
Thus, 


"Ex δείμασός του νυκτέρου, δοκεῖν tuoi, from some night vision, [according to 
the seeming] as it seems to me, or methinks, Soph. El. 410. ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰκάσαι μὲν, 
ἡδύς, but to guess, joyous, Id. (Εᾶ. T. 82. "Ev ᾧ γὰρ ἦν μοι πάντα, “γιγνώσκειν 
καλῶς Eur. Med. 228. ‘Es στὸ ἀκριξὲς [= ἀκριξῶς, § 449. βῚ εἰπεῖν, to speak 
correctly, Th. vi. 82. "OAriyou δεῖν πλείους ἀπεκτόναᾶσιν, have slain, [to want 
little] almost a greater number, H. Gr, ii. 4. 21. Μικροῦ δεῖν Isocr. 70 6. 
λίγον [se. δεῖν] πᾶσαι, almost all, Pl. Phedr. 258,e. Καὶ μικροῦ, se. δεῖν] 
κἀκεῖνον ἐξετρα χήλισεν ὩΣ i. 4. 8. "Es δέον πάρεσθ᾽ ὅδε ἹΚρέων, 7d πράσσειν 
καὶ τὸ βουλεύειν Soph. Ged. T. 1416. For other examples, see §§ 620, 622. 


Nore. The use of sivas as the Inf. of specification, or the adverbial Inf., 
will be particularly remarked, («.) with ἑκών, chiefly in negative sentences ; 
(β.) with some adverbs and prepositions, followed by their cases, chiefly preceded 
by σό. Thus, Οὔσε συνθήκας ἄν ψευδοίμην ἑκὼν εἶναι, nor world I prove fulsa 
fe my engagements, [as to the being willing] so far as depends upon my own will 


cH. 5} INFINITIVE. 387 


Cyr. ¥.2.10. Οὐδὲ ξένοις ἑκὼν εἶναι γέλωτα πἀρέχεις, ‘ willingly,’ Ib. ii. 2. 15. 
Τὸ νῦν εἶναι, as to the [now being] present state of affairs, for the present, iii. 2. 
37. Τὸ μὲν τήμερον εἶναι, for to-day, Pl. Crat. 396d. Τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι, 
as to the situation of affairs with respect to him, i.e. so far as regards him, i. 6. 
9. Τὸ ἐσὶ τούτοις εἶναι, 80 far as lepends upon these, Lys. 180.41. Τὸ ivi 
σφᾶς: tives Th. iv. 28. 


§ 624. 3. Preonasm anv Extirsis. The Inf. («.) is 
sometimes redundant, and (8.) is sometimes omitted. It (y.) 
not unfrequently depends spon a word omitted, or implied in 
another verb, especially in indirect quotation. ‘Thus, 


(a) Χάριν ἀνειδίδωσιν ἔχειν, in return gives [to have] pleasure, Soph. CEd. 
C. 232. Αἰσήσομαι δὲ σ᾽ οὐ μακρὸν ψέρας λαχεῖν Id. Aj. 825. The Inf. added 
for the sake of expressing an idea more fully or precisely is termed the Inf 
epexegetic (ἐπεξηγητικός). ---- (β.) Eis σὸ βαλανεῖον βούλομαι 86. ἰέναι] Ar. Ran. 
1279. ᾿Ἐκέλευσε.. . σοὺς ἕνδεκα ἐπὶ σὸν Θηραμένην H. Gr. ii. 3.54. "Ἔφη ὁ 
᾿Ορόντης [sc. οὕτω ποιῆσαι], Orontes (said that he had so done] assented, i. 6. 
7.— (γ.) Οἱ δὲ σφάττειν ἐκέλευον - ob γὰρ ἄν δύνασθαι πορευθῆναι (SC. ἔφασαν], 
but they bade him kill them; 707 ΤΌΠΟΥ said that] they were unable to proceed, iv. 
5.16. See vii. 7. 19. 


§ 625. 4. The Inf. often forms an elliptical command, 
request, counsel, salutation, exclamation, or question ; as, 


Σύ μοι φράζειν (sc. ἔθελε], do you [please to] tell me, Pl. Soph. 262 96. Μὴ 
ἐμὲ αἰτιᾶσθαι rovrwr, do not blame me for these, Ib. 218 a. Οἷς μὴ πελάζειν 
Zisch. Pr. 712. Θεοὶ πολῖσαι, μή με δουλείας τυχεῖν [sc. dare]! Ye gods of 
the city, O [grant] that I may not fall into slavery! Id, Sept. 253 (cf. °Q Ζεῦ, 
δός με τίσασθαι μόρον raress Id. Cho.18). Nixn, ξυγγενοῦ, . . ϑέσθαι τροπαῖ- 
ον ἡμᾶς, O Victory, befriend, grant that we may erect a trophy, Ar. Lys. 317. 
Καὶ παραστῆναι, παντί [sc. tars, rugaiva, or δεῖ}, and let it be impressed u 
every one, Th. vi. 34 (cf. ΠΠαραστήτω δέ σιν! καὶ ride Ib. 68). KHP. ᾿Ακού- 
ἐσε, λεῴ" σοὺς ὁπλίσας .. ἀσιέναι [80. κελεύεται, δεῖ, OF χρή], Herald. Hear, ye 

; it is ordered that the hoplites depart, or the hoplites must depart, Ar. Av. 
448. Tov δὲ ἔχοντα .. καταθύειν v. 3.13. Τὸν Ἴωνα χαίρειν 86. κελεύω], 1 
bid Ion hail, Pl. lon, 530 ἃ. ᾿Εμὲ παθεῖν τάδε [sc. δεινόν ἐσσι], φεῦ 1 That I 
should suffer such things [is horrible], alas! Asch. Eum. 837. *Q βασιλεῦ, 
κότερον λέγειν «2 ἢ σιγᾷν 80, χρή, OF κελεύεις], Hdt. i. 88. "A δειλοί, πόσ᾽ 
ἥμεν , x. 451, 


Nores. a. In exclamation, the article is usually prefixed; as, Φεῦ, rd καὶ 
λαξεῖν πρόσφθεγμα «οιοῦδ᾽ ἀνδρός 1 Ah, the hearing the voice of such a man! 
Soph. Ph. 234. Τῆς σύχης! To tut νῦν κληθέντα δεῦρο συχεῖν! My ill-luck! 
That I should happen now to have been summoned hither ! Cyr. ii. 2. 3 (ᾧ 372. 
ζ). ΠΕΙ͂ΣΘ. Τὸ δ᾽ ἐμὲ κορώνῃ πειθόμενον, σὸν ἄθλιον 1 ὅδοῦ «περιελθεῖν στάδια 
πλεῖν ἢ χίλια! EY. Τὸ δ᾽ ἐμὲ κολοιῷ πειδόμενον, τὸν dicpopov! ἀποσαοδῆσαι 
φοὺς νύχας τῶν δακτύλων  Ατ. Av. 5. 


B. In ἃ few poetic passages, the Inf. follows αἱ γάρ or εἴθε, to express wish 


§ 626. Il. The subject of the Inf. is very often, either 
“properly or by attraction (δῷ 425. 4, 614), the direct object of 


388 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. | BooxK im 


a preceding verb, and consequently in the Acc. Hence has 
arisen an association between this case and the Inf., which has 
led to the following rule. 


Nore. The Inf., on the other hand, extensively, constitutes an indirect ob 
ject of the verb or other word on which it depends. From the prevalence of 
this use appears to have arisen the resemblance in form of the Greek anc 
Lat. Inf. to the Dat., and the use of the prepositions to and zu before the Inf. 
in Eng. and German. Thus, Πέπεικε σὸν μάντιν λέγειν, had persuaded the 
prophet [to the saying] to say, vi. 4.14. Τοὺς φυγάδας ἐκέλευσε σὺν αὐτῷ 
στρατεύεσθα,, he invited the exiles [to the serving] to serve with him, i. 2. 2. 


Rure XXXI. The Sussecr or tHe InrFini 
TIVE is put in the Accusative ; as, 


Ἢξιίου .. δοθῆναί of ταύτας τὰς πόλεις μᾶλλον, ἢ Τισσαφέρνην ἄρχειν αὐτῶν, 
he requested that these cities should be given to him, rather than that Tissaphernes 
should rule them, i.1. 8. Κινδυνεύειν οὐκ ἐξούλοντο, ὑπὸ λιμοῦ vi παθεῖν αὐτούς, 
did not wish to incur the risk [that they should suffer any thing] of their suffer- 
ing from hunger, ΤῊ. ἵν. 15. Νεῶν ποίησιν ἐπέμενον σελεσθῆνα, Id. iii. 2. Dae 
σὶ δ᾽ οἱ σοφοὶ, . . ϑεοὺς καὶ ἀνθρώπους τὴν κοινωνίαν συνέχειν Pl. Gorg. 507 e. 


ᾧ 627. Remarxcs. 1. This rule applies to the subject of the Inf. 
considered simply as such. If, on the other hand, (#.) the subject of an Inf. 
has a prior grammatical relation, it may be in any case which this prior rela- 
tion requires. If it is the same with the subject of the principal verb, it is 
seldom repeated, except for special emphasis or distinction (§ 614. Z); and is 

. then commonly repeated (as in other emphatic repetitions) in the same case 
(cf. § 499). Not unfrequently (8.) there is a mixture of constructions which 
may be referred to ellipsis or anacoluthon. Thus, 


a. Ἦλθον ivi rive τῶν δοκούντων σοφῶν sivas, I came to one of those who were 
thought to be wise, Pl. Apol. 21 Ὁ. Τοὺς οὐδενὶ ἐπισρέψοντας κακῷ εἶναι, wh 
will permit no one to be bad, iii. 2.31. Nov σοὶ ἔξεστιν, ὦ Ξενοφῶν, ἀνδρὶ ys 
vicbas vii. 1. 21. ‘Oporoysis οὖν περὶ ἐμὲ ἄδικος [= ἄδικόν σε] γεγενῆσθαι ς 
Do you confess then [to have been unjust] that you have been unjust to me? i, 
6. 8. Τοῦτο δ᾽ ἐποίει ἐκ σοῦ χαλεσὸς εἶναι, and this he effected by being severe, 
ii. 6.9. ἸἸᾶσθαι αὐτὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησι, he says that he himself healed the 
wound,«i, 8. 26. ‘O δὲ εἶπεν, ὅτι σπείσασθα, βούλοιτο, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ μήτε αὐφτὸς τοὺς 
Ἕλληνας ἀδικεῖν, μήτε ἐκείνους καίειν τὰς οἰκίας iv. 4.6. Νομίζεις ἡμᾶς 
μὲν ἀνίξεσθαί σου, αὐςὸς δὲ τυππήσειν; καὶ ἡμᾶς μὲν ἀσοψηφιεῖσθαί σου, σὺ 


δὲ οὐδς οὕτω παύσεσθαι, Dem. 580.9. See § 614. ζ. 


β. Δέομαι, ὑμῶν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταὶ, τὰ δίκαια [56. ὑμᾶς} ψηφίσασθαι, ἐν- 
δυμουμένους, I entreat you, Judges, [that you would vote] to vote what is 
right, reflecting, Lys. 118.2. Κακούργου μὲν γάρ tori, xeibive’ ἀσοθανεῖν " 
σαρατηγοῦ dt, μαχόμενον τοῖς πολεμίοις Dem. 54.1. Οὐ γὰρ ἦν weds rod Καὶ ύ- 
ρου «ρόπου, ἔχοντα μὴ διδόνα, i. 3.11, Συμξουλεύει σῷ Asvodarves, ἐλδόν- 
σα sis Δελφοὺς [86. ἐκεῖνον] ἀνακοινῶσαι τῷ ϑεῷ, he advises Xenophon [that going 
to D. he should consult] to go to Delphi and consult the god, iii. 1. 5. "Ἔδοξεν 
abrots, προφύλακας καταστήσαντας συγκαλεῖν ili. 2.1, Τοῖς rtrara- 
orais πᾶσι παρήγγελλε διηγκυλωμένους ἰέναι, «. καὶ rods rolorag ἐπι- 
CeCarobas ν. 2.12. Οἷἵς ἐξ coxa: ὑπῆρξεν, ἢ βασιλέων υἱέσιν εἶναι, ἢ wdrods 
σῇ φύσει ἱκανούς Pl. Gorg. 492 Ὁ. “Hs πάρεστι μὲν στένειν σ“λούτου πασρῴου 


cH. 5.] INFINITIVE. 389 


κτῆσιν ἰστερημένῃ, πάρεσσι δ᾽ ἀλγεῖν ts σοσόνδε σοῦ χρόνου ἄλεκτρα γηράσ 
xovcay Soph. El.959. ἜἘννέπω σὲ [for which σοὶ might have been used, if 
allowed by the metre] σῷ xnedyuari, ᾧπερ προεῖπας, ἐμμένειν, . . ὡς. ὄντι γῆς 
τῆσδ᾽ ἀνοσίῳ μιάστορι Id. Gd. T. 350. See ΐ 459. 


2. Cases of special attraction and anacoluthon likewise occur in connection 
with the Inf. ; as, ᾿Ελσίζων .. οὐδ᾽ ὧν αὐτὸς, οὐδὲ of [for τοὺς} ἐξ αὐτοῦ, παύ- 
σεσθα, Hat. i. 56. Τοὺς δὲ ἀποκρίνασθαι, .. αὐτοὶ δώσειν Ib. 2. 


3. The subject of the Inf. is very often indefinite, and is then commonly 
omitted. It follows from the rule, that words agreeing with this omitted sub- 
ject are in the Ace. Thus, ZOK. Οὐδαμῶς ἄρα δεῖ ἀδικεῖν. KP. Οὐ δῆτα. 
SK. Οὐδὲ ἀδικούμενον ἄρα ἀνταδικεῖν. Soc. One ought then by no means to 
injure. Cr. Surely not. Soc. Not then, when injured, to injure in turn. Pl. 
Crito, 49 b. 


§ 628. Ill. By a mixture of constructions, the Inf. is 
often used after a connective (commonly ὡς, ὥστε, οἷος, or 
ὅσος). instead of a finite verb, or of the Inf. without a con- 
nective ; as, 


Καὶ xartCavoy ὡς to) roy ἕσερον ὠναξαίνειν, and were descending, so as tu as- 
cend the second [== ὡς ἀναξαῖεν, that they might ascend, which is the reading of 
Dindorf and Κα ρον], iii. 4. 25. Ὕσελάσας ὡς συναντῆσαι, riding up to meet 
him, i. 8.15. Ulorapds πσοσοῦτος τὸ βάθος, ὡς μηδὲ τὰ δόρατα ὑπερέχειν iii. 5. 7. 
Ὡς μὲν συνελόντι [86. λόγῳ] εἰπεῖν, [So as to speak with a discourse bringing 
all together] to speak comprehensively, to say all in a word, iii. 1. 38. ‘Os δ᾽ 
ἐν βραχεῖ εἰπεῖν, but to speak in brief, Ag. 7.1. ‘Qs ἔπος εἰπεῖν, so to speak, 
Pl. Gorg. 450 ἃ. “Ὡς γε οὑτωσὶ δόξα, Id. Rep. 432 Ὁ. ‘Os μικρὸν μεγάλῳ 
εἰκάσαι Th. iv. 86. “Ὡς γ᾽ ἐμοὶ χρῆσθαι κριτῇ Eur. Alc. 801. ᾿Ἰόλην ἔλεξας, 
ὥς γ᾽ ἐπεικάζειν ἐμέ, you speak of Tole, [at least for me to conjecture] methinks, 
Soph. Tr. 1220. ‘Os παλαιὰ sivas, considering [that they are ancient] their 
antiquity, Th. 1,21. Bovarsras πονεῖν, ὥστε πολεῤεῖν, chooses toil, so as to be [or 
that he may be) at war, ii. 6.6. "Ἔχω γὰρ τριήρεις, ὥστε ἑλεῖν πὸ ἐκείνων «“λοῖ- 
ov, “80 as to take,’ ὁ. 6. ‘so that I can take, i.4.8. ᾿Εποίησα, dore δόξαι, αὐὖ- 
σῷ i. 6. 6. Κραυγὴν πολλὴν ἐποίουν καλοῦντες ὠλλήλους, ὥστε καὶ TOUS TOAE- 
μείους ἀκούειν: ὥστε οἱ μὲν ἐγγύτατα τῶν πολεμίων καὶ ἔφυγον ii. 2.17. "EG 
ᾧ μὴ καίειν iv. 2.19 (see) 530). "EP ᾧ σε “΄“λοῖα συλλέγειν Vi. 6.22. “Orws 
Thy ἀρχὴν μὴ τοιοῦποι ἔσονται οἱ πολῖσαι, οἷοι πονηροῦ Tivos ἢ αἰσχροῦ ἔργου ἐφί- 
εσθαι, ‘such as to desire’ [== σοιοῦσοι οἷοι ἄν ἐφίοιντο, such as would desire], 
Cyr. i. 2.3. Tosodrovs ἀνθρώπους, οἵους μεθυσθέντας ὀρχεῖσθαι Dem. 23. 16. 
Ὅσον μόνον γεύσασθαι ἑαυτῷ καταλιπών [= σοσοῦσον μόνον ὅσον ἄν γεύσαιτο], 
leaving for himself so much only as [he could taste} to taste, i.e. merely enough 
for a taste, vii. 3. 22. Νιεμόμενοί σε τὰ αὑτῶν ἕκαστοι ὅσον ἀποζῇν, ‘merely 
enough for subsistence,’ Th. i. 2. Ἐλείπετο τῆς νυκτὸς ὅσον σκοταίους διελθεῖν 
φὸ πεδίον iv. 1. 5. Ὅσα μέντοι ἤδη δοκεῖν αὐτῷ, but so far as {seemed to him, 
he could judge at present, Th. vi. 25. “Ὅσον γέ μ᾽ εἰδένα, Ar. Νὰ. 1252. Ὅ 
σι κἄμ᾽ εἰδέναι Id. Eccl. 350. 


ᾧ 629. Remarks. 1. It will be observed, that, in some of the ex- 
amples above, there is an ellipsis before the connective, and that in some the 
connective itself suffers attraction. From the frequent use of οἷος as above, 
with an ellipsis of its corresponding demonstrative (: 523, it seems to have 
been at length regarded, especially in connection with rs, as a simple adjective 
of quality, and to have been construed accordingly; thus, “OToi +s ἔσεσθ 


od * 


390 © SYNTAX —-USB OF MODES. [BOOK 411, 


ἡμῖν συμπρᾶξαι περὶ τῆς διόδου .᾿ Οἱ δὲ εἶπον, ὅτι “ἱκανοί tousy tis τὴν χώ 
ραν εἰσξάλλειν." “ Shall you be [such as to] able to codperate with us respecting 
the passage?” And they replied, “7 We are able to make an irruption into the coun 
try. ἢν. 4.9. Ὁ γὰρ οἷός τε ὧν γιγνώσκειν τε rods ὠφελίμου: αὑτοῖς, καὶ 
τούτους δυνάμενος ποιεῖν ἐπιθυμεῖν ἀλλήλων Symp. 4. 64 (S 507.7). Οὐχ 
οἷόν τε ἦν .. διώκειν, [there was not such a state of things that one could pur- 
sue] it was not possible to pursue, iii. 3.9. Οὐχ οἷόν «τέ σοι λανθάνειν, it is not 
possible for you to conceal it, vii. 7. 22 (S403). Οὐ γὰρ ἦν ὥρα οἵα rd «πεδίον 
ἄρδειν, for it was not a time [such as to irrigate) suitable for irrigating the plain, 
ii.3. 13. Τὸ πράγμα μέγα εἶναι, καὶ μὴ οἷον νεωτέρῳ βουλεύσασθαι, ‘not suita- 
ble for a young man to direct,’ ΤῊ. vi. 12. Ξξυγγράφεσθαι λόγους οἵους εἰς 
τὰ δικαστήρια, to compose discourses adapted to courts of justice, Pl. Euthyd. 
272 a. 


2. By a similar mixture of constructions, πρὶν 4, πρότερον 4, ὕσσερον 7, are 


sometimes followed by the Inf. instead of another mode; as, Ὕσσερον .. ἢ 
αὐτοὺς οἰκίσαι [ἴον ὕστερον ἢ ᾧκισαν οΥ ὕστερον rod oixicas, Th. vi. 4. 


(u.) The αγίοϊρίε. 


§ 6360. I. The Participle, in its common uses, is either 
preliminary, circumstantial, complementary, prospective, or 
definitive ; that is, it either (1.) denotes something preceding 
the main action of the sentence; or (2.) it expresses some 
circumstance of“ that action ; or (3. ) it serves as a complement 
of the action (ᾧ 329) ; or (4. it denotes a purpose or conse- 
quence of the action; or (5.) it defines some person or thing 
connected with the action. See § 618. 


§ 631. 1. Asa Preliminary Part., the Aor. is especially 
common. It is offen best translated into Eng. by a finite verb 
with a connective, or by the Pres. Part.; as, ° 


Κῦρος ὑπολαξὼν rods φεύγοντας, συλλίξας στράτευμα, ἐπολιόρκει Μίλησον, 
Cyrus received the exiles, and raising an army besieged Miletus, i. 1. 1. Μάν- 
bav ἐλθών, Go and learn, Ar. Nub. 89. 


‘Norse. To the preliminary Part. may be referred the use of waédy and ra- 
δών wit +i or ὅ «τι, to form an intensive (and often severe or sarcastic) ‘ why" 

οὐ ‘because’; thus, Τῇ γὰρ μαθόντ᾽ ts τοὺς ϑεοὺς ὑθριζέσην ; For having learned 
“ω new sotsitom did you insult the gods? i.e. Why did you insult them? or, 
What possessed you to insult them? Ar. Νὰ. 1506. Ti #adotoo: .. εἴξασι γυ- 
vastiv ; Having experienced what change do they resemble women? i.e. How is it 
that they resemble? ΤῸ. 340. Δικαιότερον φὸν ὑμέτερον πατίρα σύπαοιμι, 3 τι 
μαθὼν σοφοὺς υἱεῖς οὕτως ἔφῦσεν, ‘ because he begat,’ Pl. Euthyd. 299 a. 


§ 632. 2. The Circumstantial Part. is very common in 
Greek, especially in the Pres. It may sometimes be translated 
by an adverb or a circumstantial] adjunct; as, 

Δύναμιν ἤδροιζεν ὦ ὡς μάλισσα, ἰδύνασοὶ ἐπικρυπτόμενος, ‘as secretly as possible,’ 
i. 1.6. “Asse καὶ ἀρχόμενος εἶπον, ‘in the beginning,’ Th. iv. 64. Τοὺς wer- 
λοὺς .. ἀπὸ Θρασυμάχιον ἀρξαμένους, the most [beginning ag and particular- 
ly Thrasymachus, Pl. Rep. 498 c. Tsasuray ἐχαλέπαινεν iv. 5.16(§ 457.0). 


cH, 8.] PARTICIPLE. 391 


᾿Ανύσας σρίχε Ar. Plut, 229 (ὃ 457. y). *Hxs Μένων ὁ Θετσαλὸς, ὁπλίτας 
ἔχων χιλίους, ‘with 1000 hoplites,’ i. 2.6. ΟΥὨ ληϊῥόμενοι ζῶσι, who live by 
plundering, Cyr. iii. 2. 25. 


Nore. The participle ἔχων, both with and without an Accusative, is joined 
with some verbs, chiefly of trifling and delay, to give the idea of continuance 
or persistency (cf. § 637. a); as, Ποῖα ὑποδήματα φλυᾶρεῖς ἔχων, [Holding 
on upon what shoes are you trifling?] What shoes are you trifling so pertina- 
ciously about? Pl. Gorg. 490 e. "“Exwy pavaesis, [you trifle, holling on upon 
it] you persist in trifling, Id. Euthyd. 295. Ληρεῖς ἔχων Id. Gorg. 497 a; - 
Ar. Ran. 512. Ti κυπτάζεις ἔχων περὶ τὴν Sigav; Ar. Nub. 509. Ti δῆτα 
ἔχων σερίφῃ , Pl. Phedr. 236 6. 


§ 633. 3. The Complementary Part. is particularly fre 
quent with verbs of sensation, of mental state and action, of 
showing and informing, of appearance and discovery, of con- 
cealment and chance, of conduct.and success, of permission and 
endurance, of commencement and continuance, of weariness and 
cessation, of anticipation and omission. Thus, 


Ἤκουσε Kigoy ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ὄντα, he heard [of Cyrus being in C.] that Cyrus 
was in Cilicia, i. 4. 5. Ἕώρα “πλείονος ἐνδίον, he saw that there was need of 
more, Vi. 1. 81. Ἴσϑ, μέντοι ἀνόητος ὦν, but know that you are senseless, ii. 1. 
13 (§ 614.2%. Cf. “And knew not eating death,” Par. Lost, ix. 792). 
Κασέμαθον ἀναστὰς μόλις V. 8.14. Eidtvas συνοῖσον, to know that it would be 
advantageous, Dem. 55. 2. [pds ἀνδρὸς ἤσϑετ᾽ ἠδικημένη Eur. Med. 26. Σύν- 
ode ἐμαυτῷ πάντα ἐψευσμένος i. 3. 10(° 615.1). Dodves Beds Soph. Ant. 
996. ᾿Ἐμέρνητο γὰρ εἰπών Cyr. iii. 1.31. Τιμώροενοι χαίρουσιν, they delight 
in being honored, Eur. Hipp. 8. ᾿Ασπολείπονσες αὐτὸν ax bovras. » .”Hdovras 
πράσσοντες Mem. ii. 1.33. Μετεμέλοντο ἀποδεδωκότες Th. v.35, Δεδρα- 
xviav γελᾷν Soph. Ant. 483. ᾿Εσπαισχιύνεσθε .« . κινοῦντες Id. (ἃ, T. 635, 
Δείξω πρῶτα μὲν σοφὸς γεγὼς, ἔπειτα σώφρων Eur. Med.-548. Κῦρόν σε ἐσι- 
σετρατεύοντα πρῶτος ἤγγειλα ii, 3.19. "Euptvousy οἷς ὡμολογήσαμεν δικαίοις 
οὖσιν ; Pl. Crito, 50a. Οὐ γὰρ φθονῶν τοῖς φανερῶς π“λουτοῦσιν ἐφαίνετο 1.9. 19. 
Εϑρισκον οὐδαμῶς ἄν ἄλλως τοῦτο διαπραξάμενος Isocr. 811 6. Of ἄν ἐξελεγ- 
χϑῶσι διαξάλλοντες ii. 5.27. Τρεφόμενον ἐλάνθανεν, [was secret being main- 
tained} wus secretly maintained, i.1.9. Λαθεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελθών, to conceal from 
him our departure, or, to depurt without his knowledge, i. 3.17. Ὅσως μὴ λά- 
θης σεαυτὸν ἀγνοῶν, that you may not be unconsciously ignorant, Mem. iii. 5. 23. 
"“Eor’ ἄν λάθωμεν (Sc. ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς} ὑδροπόται γενόμενοι, till insensibly we become 
water-drinkers, Cyr. vi. 2. 29. [Παρὼν ἐτύγχανεν happened [being] to be 
present, i. 1. 2. “Ὅστις ἐχθρὸς ὧν κυρεῖ Eur. Ale. 954. ᾿Αδικεῖσε... πολέμου 
ἄρχοντες, you do wrong in beginning war, Th. i. 53. ᾿Ελλείσεσθαι εὖ σοιῶν 
Mem. ii, 6.5. . Εὔπερ εὐτυχήσομεν . . ἑλόντες Eur. Or. 1212. Ἢ σόλις αὐτοῖς 
οὐκ ἐπιστρέψει παραβξαίνουσι σὸν vowov Isocr. 968 6. Νικωμένη γὰρ Παλλὰς οὐκ 
ἀνίξετα, Eur. Heracl. 352. Ὕσπήρξαρμεεν κακῶς ποιοῦντες V. 5.9. Διάγουσι 
μανθάνοντες δικαιοσύνην, they spend their time in learning justice, Cyr. i. 2. 6. 
Auareiboues μελετῶσα, Ib. 12. Διαγωνιζόμενοι .. διατελοῦσιν Ib. Μὴ κάμῃς 
φίλον ἄνδρα εὐεργετῶν Pl. Gorg. 470 ς. ᾿Εσπαύσαντο πολεμοῦντες vie 1. 28, 
“A οἶμαι, ἄν παῦσαι ἐνοχλοῦντα ii. ὅ. 13. “Orws μὴ φθάσωσι μήτε 6 Κῦρος μή- 
σε οἱ Κίλικες καταλαξόντες, that neither Cyrus nor the Cilicians might anticipate 
them in taking possession, or take possession before them, i. 3.14. Dédvovery ἐπὶ 
σῷ ἄκρῳ γενόμενοι σοὺς πολεμίους iii. 4.49. Οὐκ ἔφθησαν «πυθόμενοι «ὃν περὶ 
σὴν ᾿Αττικὴν πόλεμον, xa). . ἧκον, they no sooner heard of the war around At- 


992 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [BOOK 111. 


tica than they came, Isoctr.58b. uredwy παῖδας οὐκέτ᾽ dv φθάνοις, you cannos 
now be too soon in begetting children, Eur. Alc. 662. Οὐκ ἄν φθάνοις. . λέγων 
you cannot tel; me too soon, i.e. tell me at once, Mem. ii. 3. 11. “Aarau γε δὴ 
μυρία ἐπιλείπω λέγων Pl. Phil. 26 b. 


ᾧ G34. Νοτεβ. «. With these verbs, the Part. ἄν is sometimes 
omitted (cf. § 547); as, Σῶς ἴσθι [sc. dv], know that you are safe, Soph. Cid. 
C. 1210. Ei γέρων κυρῶ Ib. 726. Σὲ δηλώσω κακόν 86. ὄντα} Ib. 783 
Δηλοῖ τὸ γέννημ᾽ ὠμόν Id. Ant. 471. Nov δ᾽ ἀγροῖσι τυγχάνει Id. El. 313. 


β. Many of these verbs likewise take the Inf.; but often with this distinc- 
tion from the Part. ; viz. that the Inf. denotes something dependent upon the 
action of the verb, but the Part. something which exists independent of it. 
Thus, “Ay ἅπαξ μάθωμεν ἀργοὶ ζῆν, if we should once have learned to live in 
idleness, iii. 2.25. “Iva μάθη σοφιστὴς ὧν, that he may learn that he is a 
schemer, Zisch. Pr. 61. Τνῷ φπρέφειν σὴν γλῶσσαν iovywrigay, ‘learn to keep,’ 
Soph. Ant. 1089. ᾿Εσειδὰν γνῶσιν ἀπισσούμενοι, when they perceive that they 
are distrusted, Cyr. vii. 3.17. Μεμνήσθω ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς εἶναι, let him remember 
to be u brave man, iii. 2.39. Miéiwynwas.. ἀκούσας ποτέ, I remember to have 
once heard, Cyr. i. 6. 3. Τοῦτο μὲν οὖκ αἰσχύνομαι λέγων" «πὸ δὲ -. αἰσχυνοί- 
μὴν ἄν λέγειν, I am not ashamed to say this (which is said); but I should be 
ashamed to sav that (which from the shame is not said), Cyr. v. 1. 21. 


y- The complementary Part. sometimes occurs with an impersonal expres- 
sion, or with an adjective and verb supplying the place of a simple verb. 
When thus connected, the real subject of the sentence is sometimes implied in 
the Part. Thus, ᾿Εμοὶ πρέποι ἄν μάλιστα ἐπιμελομένῳ, it would become me 
most of all to attend, ic. 4. 1. Οἷς οὐδὲ ἅπαξ ἐλυσιτέλησε πειθομένοις Isocr. 
174. 14. ἘΠ πολεμοῦσιν ἄμεινον ἔσσαι, whether it would be better for them to go 
to war, Th. i. 118. Μεσσὸς ἦν Suwotusves, I was sated with passion, Soph. 
Cid, C. 768. Δῆλος ἦν ἀνιώμενος i. 2.11. Κασάδηλοι γίγνονται προσσοιού- 
μένοι μὲν εἰδέναι, εἰδότες δὲ οὐδέν Pl. Apol. 23d. See §§ 551, 614. ε. 


§ 635. 4. Prospective Part. This appears chiefly in 
the Fut. Part. denoting purpose, commonly translated by the 
Inf. (§§ 583. a, 618. 1). 


§ 636. 5. The Definitive Part. is equivalent to a relative 
pronoun and finite verb, and is most frequently translated by 
these. “dt is often used substantively, and may not unfrequently 
be translated by a noun. It occurs chiefly with the article, but 
sometimes without it, if the class only is defined. Thus, 


Adbis δὲ ὁ ἡγησόμενος οὐδεὶς ἔσται, and again there will be no one who wil 
guide us, ii. 4.5. OF αὐτομολήσαντες (cf. OF ὕσσερον ἐλήφθησαν) i. 7. 13. 
Τοὺς ἐχπεπσωκόσας, those who had been banished, or the ewiles, i. 1.7 (§ 556). 
Τοῖς γειναμένοις (cf. Τοῖς γονεῦσι) Apol. 20. Συναγαγὼν .. rods προσελθόντας 
αὐτῷ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων τὸν βουλόμενον, ‘and of the rest [him that wished] any 
one that wished,’ i. 3.9. Ἢ Διομήδεια λεγομένη ἀνάγκη, the so-called necessity 
of Diomed, Pl. Rep. 493 d. Ἵν᾽, ὥσσερ ἐκεῖνος ἔχει δύναμιν τὴν ἀδικήσουσαν 
καὶ καταδουλωσομίνην ἅπαντας τοὺς “ὔλληνας, οὕτω σὴν σώσουσαν ὑμεῖς καὶ 
βοηθήσουσαν ἅπασιν troiuny ἔχητε Dem. 101. 10. ἽἌπαντα yao σολμῶσι δεινὰ 
φαίνεται, for every thing appears fearful to those who are venturing, Eur. Ph. 
370. [Lserovivas.. εἰς βλάξην φίρον, to have suffered [what tends to harm] 


UR. 5.} PARTICIPLE- 393 


any injury, Soph. Ed. T. 516. Διαφέρει δὲ πάμπολυν μαθὼν μὴ μαθόντος, καὶ 
ὁ γυμνασώμενος; τοῦ μὴ γεγυμνασμένου Pl. Leg. 795 Ὁ. See §§ 447. a, 449, 
469, 476. 


§ 637. II. The Part. with such verbs as εἰμέ, γίγνομαι; 
ἔχω, ἔρχομαι, οἴχομαι. &c., often takes the place of a finite verb, 
either to supply some deficiency in inflection, or for the sake 
of more definite or emphatic expression. ‘Thus, 


Πεσοιηκὼς εἴη iv. 8.26. Τεταγμένοι ἦσαν ἱ. 7.11. "Heavy ἐκπεπτωκότε; 
ii. 8.10. "Hy δὲ οὐδὲν πεπονθώς vi. 1. 6. Εἴη ἔχων iv. 4. 18. Ταῦτα οὕπσως 
ἔχοντά ἔστιν ΕἸ. Leg. 860 6. Πῶς.. ἦτε πάσχοντες σάδε, Eur. Cycl. 381. 
Ein σσυγηθείς Id. Ale. 464. ᾿Αντιδοὺς toss Soph. Ant. 1067. Μ,σοῦντές os 
γίγνονται, Pl. Leg. 908 b. Μὴ προδοὺς ἡμᾶς γένῃ Soph. Aj. 588. ΠΕέλε, 
δικαιωθείς ABsch. Ag. 392. Πολλὰ χρήματα ἔχομεν ἀνηρπακότες, (having 
plundered many things we have them] we have plundered many things, i. 3. 14. 
“A νῦν καταστρεψάμενος ἔχεις Vii. 7. 27. Τὰ ἐπιτήδεια πάντα εἶχον ἀνάκεκο- 
μισμένοι iv. 7. 1. Τὰ ἐσιτήδεια ἐν τούτοις ἀνακεκομισμένοι ἦσαν Ὁ. 17. Τὸν 
λόγον δὲ σοῦ πάλαι: ϑαυμάσας ἔχω Pl. Phedr. 357 ¢c. Tov μὲν προτίσας, σὸν δ᾽ 
ἀτιμάσας ἔχει Soph. Ant. 32, Κηρύξαντ᾽ ἔχειν Ib. 82. ᾿Ατιμάσασ᾽ ἔχε Ib. 
77. Βεξουλευκὼς ἔχει Id. (Εα. T. 701. Οὐ rodeo λέξων ἔρχομαι, I am not 
going [or come] to say this, Ages. 2.7. "Ἔρχομαι ἀποθανούμενος νυνί Pl. Theag. 
129 a. “Qhysro ἀπιὼν νυκτός, he [departed going off ] went off in the night, 
ii. 8. ὅ. "Quyero ἀπελαύνων, rode off, ii. 4. 24. Olxeras ϑανών Soph. Ph. 
414. 


Notes. (a) The Perf. Part. with εἰμί is especially common, particularly 
in the passive, either to supply the deficiencies in the inflection of the complete 
tenses (§§ 168. a, 169. 6, 213. 2, 234), or to direct the attention more ex- 
pressly to the state consequent upon an action. χω occurs most frequently 
with the Aor. act. part. and in the dramatists, commonly conveying the ac- 
cessory idea of possession, continuance, or persistency (holding on upon an ac- 
tion. Cf. § 632. N.). "Eexouas with the Fut. Part. forms a more immediate 
Fut. The Part. of a verb of motion with ofyoua: is a stronger form of expres- 
sion for the simple verb. (ὁ) The substantive verb is sometimes omitted 
(8 547); as, Asdoyuér’ [se. ἐστὶν], ὡς ἔοικε, τήνδε κατθανεῖν Soph. Ant. 576. 


§ 638. Ill. A Part. with its subject, or an impersonal 
Part. (§ 617), often forms so distinct a clause, that it is said 
(though not in the strictest sense of the term, § 343. N.) to be 
put absolute. This occurs most frequently in the Gen., and, 
after this, in the Acc. The far less frequent instances in 
which the NVom. and Dat. are used in the same way, may be 
commonly referred at once to anacoluthon, or other construc- 
tions already mentioned (ὃν 344, 401, 410, 420). The Gen. 
and Acc. absolute may also be referred, though often less di- 
rectly, to the Gen. and Acc. of time (§§ 378, 439) ; and as, in 
this use, a Part. and substantive commonly denote an event, but 
an impersonal Part.'a continued state, the following general 
rule has arisen, which is not, however, without exception. 


Rute XXXII. A PARTICIPLE AND SUBSTAN- 


994 SYNTAX. — USE OF- MODES. [Book m1. 


TIVE are put absolute in the Genitive; an IMPER- 
SONAL PARTICIPLE, in the Accusative ; as, 


{Norm. Among the following examples of the rule have been inserted some 
exceptions, for the sake of comparison. ] 


Τοῦτο δὲ λέγοντος αὐτοῦ, “΄τάρνυταί ric, and [he saying this} upon his saying 
this, some one sneezes, iii. 2.9. “Oris, ἐξὸν μὲν εἰρήνην ἔχειν .., αἱρεῖται worse 
μεῖν, who, [it being permitted him to have] while he might have peace, prefers 
war, ii. 6.6. Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα, ἤδη ἡλίον δύνοντος ii. 2.3. ᾿Ανέξη tai τὰ don, 
οὐδενὸς κωλύοντος, ‘ without opposition,’ i. 2, 22, Οὐδὲ μὴν βοηθῆσαι, πολλῶν ὃν- 
wav πέραν; οὐδεὶς αὐτοῖς δυνήσεται, λελυμένης τῆς γεφύρας, nor, although there were 
many upon the other side, could any one come to their assistance, if the bridge were 
destroyed, ii, 4.20. ivou δὲ ἐπιλελοιπότος, οἴνου δὲ μηδ᾽ ὀσφραίνεσθαι παρὸν, ὑπὸ 
δὲ πόνων πολλῶν ἀπαγορευόντων. 8.3. Ἔν καλῷ παρατυχὸν σφίσι ξυμβαλεῖν, 
καὶ πανταχόθεν αὐτῶν ἀποκεκλεισμένων Th. ν. 60. Ed δὲ παρασχόν, but when 
a favorable opportunity offers, Id. i. 120, Οὐ προσῆκον, when it is no interest 
of ours, Id. iv. 95. ᾿Αμφοτέροις μὲν δοκοῦν ὠναχωρεῖν, - . κυρωθὲν δὲ οὐδὲν .. 
ὁπηνίκα χρὴ ὁρμᾶσθαι, vunros σε ἐπιγενομένης Ib. 125, Δεδογρεένον δὲ αὐτοῖς 
Id. i. 125. Δόξαν αὐτοῖς dad ξυνόδου, ὥστε διαναυμαχεῖν Id. viii. 79. Δόξαν- 
wos δὲ τούτου H. Gre i. 1. 36. Aokdvewy δὲ καὶ τούτων Ib. ν. 2.24. Δόξαντα 
δὲ καῦτα καὶ περανθέντα Ib. iii, 2.19. Δόξαν δὲ ταῦτα [sc. xasiv, or the sing. 
and plur. joined, see §§ 450. 451, 549], and this seeming best, iv. 1. 13. 
Δόξαν ἡμῖν ταῦτα, ἐπορευόμεθα Pl. Prot. 314 c. “Adnarov dv, ὁπότε σις. « ἐφαι- 
ρήσετα, Th. i. 2. Αἰσχρὸν ὃν vd ἀντιλέγειν Cyr. ii. 2.20. [ροσσαχιθὲν γὰρ 
airy... ἀναγράψαι Lys. 183.12. Anawbiveos, oes ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶ τῶν “Ελλήνων 
τὰ πράγματα ἐγένετο ΤῊ. i. 74. ᾿Εσαγγελθέντων, ὅτι Doimoous νῆες ἐπ’ αὐ- 
φοὺς πλέουσιν Ib. 116 (ἢ 451). Περὶ σωτηρίας [sc. βουλεύεσθαι.) προκειμένου 
Ar. Eccl. 401. 


§ 639. Remarks. 1. Absolute and connected constructions of the 
Part. are, in various ways, interchanged and mixed ; the former giving more 
prominence to the Part., and sometimes arising from a change of subject; the 
latter showing more clearly the relation of the Part. to the rest of the sen- 
tence. Thus, Διαξαινόντων [sc. αὐτῶν] μέντοι, ὁ Γλοῦς αὐτοῖς ἐπεφάνη [= δια- 
Calvovew αὐτοῖς, as they were crossing, however, Glus appeared to them, ii. 4. 
24. Τοῖς προτέροις μετὰ Kigov avalacs..+ καὶ ταῦτα, οὐκ tol μάχην ἰόντων 
[= ἰοῦσι), ἀλλὰ καλοῦνσος τοῦ πατρὸς Kigovi. 4, 12. As ἡμᾶς, ἐν τάξει τε 
ἰόντων καὶ μαχομένων ν. 8. 18. Οὐκέσι ὧν οὗτοι κλέπσουσιν ὀργίζεσθε, ἀλλ᾽ ὧν 
αὐτοὶ δ μξάνετε χάριν ἴστε, ὥσσερ ὑμεῖς τὰ σούτων μισθοφοροῦντες, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ τού- 
Tov τὰ ὑμέτερα κλεστόντων Lys. 178. 38. 


2. The substantive is sometimes omitted, and sometimes, though less fre- 
quently, the Part. of the substantive verb (cf. § 547); as, "Evrsidev προϊόντων 
[se. αὐτῶν], ἐφαίνετο ἤχνια, ‘as they were advancing,’ i. 6. 1. Οἱ δ᾽ εἶπον, 
ἐρωτήσαντος [8C. αὐτοῦ], ὅσ, Μάκρωνες iv. 8.5. Πόσις μὲν ἄν μοι, xardavovros 
[sc. πόσεως}, ἄλλος ἦν Soph. Ant. 909. Οὕτω δ᾽ ἐχόντων 80. ἑαυτὰ πραγμά- 
σων], and affairs (having themselves, § 555] standing thus, iii. 2.10. Οὕσω 
μὲν γιγνομένων, σαφῶς οἷδα Cyr. Vv. 8.18. “Axovros βασιλέως (8c. ὄντος] ii. 1, 19. 
"“EZeors φωνεῖν, ὡς ἐμοῦ μόνης πέλας Soph. Cid. C. 83. ‘Os ὑφηγητοῦ τινός 
Id. Gid. T. 1260, ic 


8. The use of the Acc. for the Gen. absolute chiefly occurs after ὡς (§ 640) 
or when the subject is a neuter adjective (cf. § 432. 2). 


cx. 5.] PARTICIPLE. 308 


§ 640. IV. A Part., whether absolute or dependent, is 
often preceded by ὡς (or a similar particle of special appli- 
cation), chiefly to mark it as subjective, i. e. as expressing the 
view, opinion, feeling, intention, or statement of some one, 
whether in accordance with or contrary to fact. The Part. 


thus construed often supplies the place of a finite verb or Inf. 
Thus, 


Tlaghyysias.., ὡς ἐσιξουλεύοντος Τισσαφέρνους, he gave command [as he 
would give command, T. plotting] as if Tissaphernes were plotting, or under 
pretence that T. was plotting, i. 1.6. "Quovro ἀπολωλέναι, ὡς ἑαλωκυίας τῆς 
πόλεως, they thought they were lost, inasmuch as the city was taken, vii. 1. 19. 
"Exéasucs . ., ὡς sis [Πεἰσίδας βουλόμενος orgurstscbas, ὡς πραγμάτων σαρεχόν- 
wav [Πεισιδῶν ἱ. 1.11. Ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος, .. οὕτω τὴν γνώμην txers, [88 if 
then I should go, so have your opinion] be assured, then, that I shall go, i. 3. 
6. "Ἔλεγε Sappeiv, ὡς καταστησομένων τούτων sis πὸ δίον Ib. 8. Τὰ racia 
αἰτεῖν κελεύοντος, ὥσπερ πάλιν σὸν στόλον Κύρου μὴ “ποιουμένου 10. 16. “Ὡς 
οὐκέσ᾽ ὄντων σῶν τέκνων, φρόντιζε δή Eur. Med. 1311. Σαρασιὰν πολλὴν ἄγων, 
ὡς βοηθήσων βασιλεῖ, bringing a large force to aid the king, ii. 4. 25 (8 588. a) 
Καφασκευάζεσθαι ws αὐτοῦ που οἰκήσοντας (cf. Μένειν παρασκευαζομένους) 111. 2. 
24. Κατςσακείμεθα, ὥσπερ ἐξὸν ἡσυχίαν ἄγειν, we lie down, as if it were permitted 
us to enjoy our case, iii. 1. 14. Διηγκυλωμένους ἰέναι, ὡς, ὁπόσαν σημήνῃ, 
ἀκοντίζειν δεῆσον, V. 2.12. Λέγουσιν ἡμᾶς ὡς ὀλωλότας Asch. Ag. 672. Δη- 
λοῖς δ᾽ ὥς σι σημανῶν Soph. Ant. 342, ‘Os πολέμου ὄντος παρ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀσαὰγ- 
γελῶς 11.1.21. “Ὡς μὲν στρατηγήσοντα ἐμὲ ταύτην τὴν στρατηγίαν, μηδεὶς 
ὑμῶν λεγέσω, let no one of you speak, as though I were to take this command, i. 
3. 15. "Avéxgaryov, ὡς οὐδὲν δέον Vi. 4.22. ᾿Απὸ σῶν πονηρῶν ἀνθρώπων εἴρ- 
γουσιν, ὡς τὴν μὲν τῶν χρηστῶν ὁμιλίαν ἄσκησιν τῆς ἀρετῆς, σὴν δὲ σῶν πονηρῶν», 
κατάλυσιν Mem. i. 2. 20. Eiyero δὲ πρὸς rods ϑεοὺς ἁπλῶς τἀγαθὰ διδόναι, 
ὡς τοὺς θεοὺς κάλλιστα εἰδότας Ib. iii. 2. Ἢ δὲ γνώμη ἦν, ὡς εἰς τὰς τάξεις 
τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐλῶντα [80. τὰ ἅρματα), and the plan was, that they should drive 
against the ranks of the Greeks, i. 8.10. See ὃ 662. 


8 641. V. AwnacotutHon. From the variety of the of- 
fices and relations of the Part., and its frequent separation from 
its subject, its syntax is peculiarly affected by anacoluthon; 
consisting either (a.) in the transition from one case’ to another, 
or (@.) in the transition from the Part. to another form of the 
verb, or the converse. Thus, 


a. Ἦν δὲ ἡ γνώμη rod ’Agioriws [== ἔδοξε σῷ Agiorei), od μὲν μεθ᾽ ἑαυκοῖ 
σερατόσεδον ἔχιονα, ἐν τῷ ἰσθμῷ ἐσπιπηρεῖν ΤῊ, i. 62. "Ἔδοξεν αὐσοῖς [= ἔψη- 
φίσαντο)..., ἐπικαλοῦνπες Id. iii. 36. Καὶ δημοσίᾳ κράτιστα διαθέντα 
«ὰ σοῦ πολέμου, ἰδίᾳ ἕκασεοι τοῖς ἐπιτηδεύμασιν αὐποῦ ἀχϑεσθέντες Id. vi. 15. 
Αἰδώς μ' ἔχει [= aidodwas) ἐν τῷδε πότμῳ τυγχάνουσα Eur. Hec. 970. Πέ- 
warra: δ᾽ αὖτέ μοι φίλον κέαρ [== πρόμος ἔχει με}, τόνδε κλύουσαν οἶκτον 
isch. Cho. 410. Ὕσεστί wos ϑράσος,.. κλύουσαν Soph. ΕἸ. 479. Ἡμῖν 
[= ἡμῶν, § 412] δ᾽ airs κατεκλάσθη φίλον ἦτορ, δεισάντων φθόγγον .. 256. 
For other examples see δ 344, 459, 627, 639. 

8. "Αλλῳ τε τρόπῳ πειράσαντες, καὶ μηχανὴν προσήγαγον Th.iv. 100. 
Οἱ στρατηγοὶ ἰστασίαζον, Ἰζλεάνωρ μὲν καὶ Φρυνίσκος πρὸς Σεύθην βουλόμενοι 
ἄγειν .. - Τικασίων δὲ προὐθυμεῖςο vii. 2,2. “ὥς σύχοι ναῦς "αὶ προσαε 


896᾽ VERBAL IN -τέος. ---- PARTICLE. [Book 11» 


σοῦσα, ἢ διὰ τὸ φεύγειν, ἢ ἄλλη πιπλέουσα Th. vii. 70. In the following 
example, there is a remarkable transition from the infinitive construction te 
the participial ; ᾿Διείργεται, τὸ μὴ ἤπειρος οὖσα [for εἶναι), is separated, so as 
not to be main land (see ᾧ 622), Th. vi. 1. 


(iu.) Verbal in -τέος. 


§ 642. From the verb is formed a passive adjective in 
-τέος, expressing obligation or necessity (§ 314.f). This verbal 
is often used impersonally, in the neut. sing. or plur., with ἐστὲ 
(§ 546. α). In this use, it is equivalent to the Inf. act. or mid. 
with δεῖ or χρή thus, Σκεπτέον μοι δοκεῖ εἶναι [= σκέπτεσϑαι 
δεῖν}. it seems to me that it is to be considered [= that we ought 
to consider], i. 8. 11. ᾿Εδόκει διωκτέον εἶναι, at seemed that they 
must pursue, iii. 3. 8. Hence it imitates in two ways, as fol- 
lows, the construction of this Inf., and is therefore treated of in 
this connection. 


4 643. Impersonal verbals in -réor, or -τέα, (α.) govern 
the same cases as the verbs from which they are derived ; and 
(8.) have sometimes their agent in the Acc. instead of the Dat. 
(§ 407. x). Thus, 


(α.) ‘Qs πεισφέον εἴη Kasdexy, that they must obey Clearchus, ii. 6. 8 
(§ 405. 1). Tlogsurtoy δ᾽ ἡμῖν rovs πρώτους σταθμούς ii. 2.12 (§ 431). 
Πάντα ποιητέον iii. 1. 18 (ef. the personal form, Ilévre ποιητέα Ib. 35). 
Οὗὕς οὐ παραδοτέα τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐστίν ΤῊ. 1. 86. Γυναικὸς οὐδαμῶς tio 
σητία Soph. Ant. 678 (ὃ 849). --- (β.) Karalartov οὖν ἐν μέρει txaorer, 
each one therefore must descend in turn, Pl. Rep. 520 ἃ. ‘Os οὖσε μισθοφορη- 
φίον εἴη ἄχλους ἢ τοὺς CreaTivomtvous, οὔτε μεθεκτέον τῶν πραγμάτων 
«“λείοσιν ἢ πεντακισχιλίοις Th. viii. 65. 


§ G44. Remark. Constructions are sometimes blended; thus, — 
(a.) The impersonal with the personal construction of the verbal; as, Tas 
ὑσοθέσεις τὰς πρώτας, καὶ εἰ πισταὶ ὑμῖν εἰσιν, ὅμως ἐπ, σκεσ τέαι σα- 
φίσσερον [for σὰς ὑποθέσεις ἐπισκεσ' τέον, OF αἱ ὑποθέσεις ἐπισκεστία.) Pl. Pheedo, 
107 b.-~(6.) The Dat. of the agent with the Ace. ; as, Ἢ μῖν νευστέον.. 
bamigoveas Pl. Rep. 453 d.— (e.) The verbal with the Inf.; as, Eaido- 
μίας φὴς οὐ xoAuCTioY,.. iwvra δὲ αὐτὰς .. ἱφοιμάζειν Pl. Gorg. 492 ἃ. 


CHAPTER VI. 
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. 


§ 645. The particle, in its full extent, m- 
cludes the aDverB, the PREPOSITION, the CoNJUNC- 


ca. 6.] ADVERB. — PREPOS-TION. 397° 


TION, and the inteRJEcTION. Of these, however, 
the interjection is independent of grammatical con- 
struction. The other particles are construed as 
follows. 


A. Tue ADVERB. 


§ 646. Rure XXXIII. Apverss modify sen-. 
tences, phrases, and words ; particularly verbs, ad- 
jectives, and other adverbs. ‘Thus, 


Πάλιν ἠρώτησεν ὁ Κῦρος, again Cyrus asked, i. 6.8. Ἡδέως ἐπείθοντο i. 2. 
2. ‘Ogtia ἰσχῦρῶς Ib. 21. "Hysanutvws μᾶλλον i. 7. 19, Τὴν ov σεριτείχι- 
σιν, the not blockading, Th. iii.95. Ἢ μὴ ᾿μαειρία Ar. Eccl. 115. Τῆς ἀπὸ 
cay Ἐπιπολῶν πάλιν xarabécews, ‘the descent back,’ Th. vii. 44. 


Remarks. 1. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase is usually parsed 
as modifying the verb or leading word of the sentence or phrase. Such parti- 
cles may also give a special emphasis, or bear a special relation to other words 
in the sentence or phrase; thus, Ἣ μεῖς ys νικῶμεν, we at least are victorious 
(here ys, in modifying the sentence isis νικῶμεν, exerts a special emphasis 
upon ἡμεῖς) ii, 1. 4, ἤκουσεν οὐδεὶς ἔν ys τῷ φανερῷ i. 3.21. ᾿Αριαῖος 

.. καὶ οὗτος «+ πειρᾶται, and Arieus, even he attempts, iii. 2.5. Καὶ 
μεταπεμπομένου αὐτοῦ, οὐκ ἐθέλω ἐλθεῖν, even though he sends for me, I 
am not willing to go, i. 3. 10. Προσεκύνησαν, καίπερ εἰδότες i. 6.10. Ei- 
Sirs voi μοι τάσδ᾽ ayysrias ὅδ᾽ ἐθώνξεν Asch. Pr. 1040. 


S$ G47. 2. Of the negative particles od and μή, the former is used in 
simple, absolute negation, and the latter in dependent or qualified negation, hence 
in supposition, prohibition, &c.; or, in the language of metaphysicians, οὐ is 
the objective, and μή the subjective negative (cf. ὃ 587.1). It follows that οὐ 
is most used with the Ind., and μή with the other modes; and that, with the 
same mode, οὐ is more decided and emphatic than μή. Thus, Οὐκ οἶδα, I do 
not know, i. 3.5. Οὔσοτε ἐρεῖ οὐδείς Ib. ᾿Εὰν δὲ μὴ διδῷ, and if he would not 
give, i. 8.14. Ὅσως μὴ φθάσωσι Ib. Μηκέτι με Κῦρον νομίζετε i. 4. 16. 
Οὐκ ἀκούειν ἔστι, καὶ μὴ δρᾷν ἃ μὴ χρήζεις ; Soph. Ed. Ο. 1175. Ἐμοὶ τῶν 
σῶν λόγων ἀρεσσὸν οὐδὲν, μηδ᾽ ὠρεσθείη ποτέ Id. Ant. 499. Τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς οὐκ 
ὄντα iv. 4. 15. 


Nore. Interrogation is sometimes expressed by negative assertion, and 
assertion by negative interrogation. Hence negative particles sometimes ap- 
pear to pass into interrogative or affirmative ones; as, Μή σοι δοκοῦμεν, [We 
do not seem to you, do we?] Do we seem to you? Aisch. Pers. 344. 7H μήτις 
««ἰλαύνει ; ἦ μήτις σ᾽ αὐτὸν καείνῃ ; 405. Οὐκοῦν. . σεπαύσομαι, [Shall I 
not then cease 7] J shall cease then, Soph. ἀπί. 91. Οὐκοῦν. . ἱκανῶς ixicw 
Pi. Phedr. 274 Ὁ. 


B. Tue PrReEposittion. 


§648. Rute XXXIV. Prepositions gov- 
34 


395 SYNTAX OF ΤῊΝ PARTICLE. [BOOK 11 


ern substantives in the oblique cases, and mark 
their relations; as, 


‘Oigutire ἀπὸ Σάρδεων, καὶ ἰξελαύνε, die «ἧς Δυδίας .. ἐπὶ σὸν Μαίανδρο 
ποταμόν, he set out from Sardis, and marches through Lydia to the river Me- 
ander, i. 2. 5. 


Or, more particularly, 


Art, ἀπό, ἐξ, and πρό govern the Genitive. 

‘Ey and σύν ᾳ Dative. 

"Ava and εἰς “« = Accusative. 

Aug, διά, κατά, μετά, and ὑ ὕπερ “ “ Gen. and Acc. 

‘Eni, παρά, περὶ, πρός, πὰ ὑπό * “  Gen., Dat., and Acc. 


Nores. a. The Dative sometimes follows énQi; ὠνά, and werd in the poets; 
and ὠμφί even in prose, chiefly Ionic. Thus, ᾿Αμφὶ σιλευραῖς Aisch. Pr. 71. 
᾿Ανά vt ναυσί Eur. Iph. A. 754. Μετὰ χερσίν Soph. Ph. 1110. 


β. The words above mentioned (with their euphonic, poetic, and dialectic 
forms, as ἐκ for ἐξ, § 68, ξύν for σύν, ἐς for εἰς, ivi for ἐν, reori and ποσί for weés, 
ὑσαί for ὑπό) are all which are commonly termed prepositions in Greek, though 
other words may have a prepositional force (§ 657. a). These prepositions have 
primary reference to the relations of place, and are used to express other rela- 
tions by reason of some analogy, either real or fancied (cf. καὶ 339). 


y- Ἔν and στό, by the addition of s (expressing motion or action, cf. § 84), 
become (tvs, ὃ 58) εἰς or is (cf. ὃ 57. 4), and πρός - thus, ἐν, in, εἰς, into. 


3. To the prepositions governing the Acc., must be added the Ep. suffix -3s, 
to (cf. §§ 150, 322); as, Οὐλυμαόνδε A. 425 (cf. Πρὸς "Ολυμσον 420). “Ara- 
δε A. 308 (cf. Eis ἅλα 314). "“Aidosds [= εἰς "Aides δόμον, ὃ 385. γ] H. 330.. 
It is sometimes used pleonastically ; as,“Ovde douovds β. 83. Eis ἅλαδε x. 
551, 


§ 649. Remarks. 1. The use of the different cases 
with prepositions may be commonly referred with ease to fa- 
miliar principles in the doctrine of the cases; thus, 


Genitive, —(a.) Of Departure or Morton From (ᾧ 347). ᾿Ασὸ τῆς 
ἀρχῆς, from the province, i. 1.2. "Ex Χεῤῥονήσου ὁρμώμενος Ib. 9. Taga δὲ 
βασιλέως πολλοὶ πρὸς Ἰζῦρον ἀπῆλθον i. 9. 29. “Αλλόμενο, κατὰ τῆς πέτρας, 
leaping pe Pi from the rock, iv. ii. 17. —(B.) Of Oriern and Marrrran (δ 355). 
Γεγονὼς ἀπὸ Δαμαράτου ii. i. 3. Olvov σε ἐκ τὴς βαλάνου πεποιημένον τῆς ἐπὸ 
τοῦ Poivtxos i. 5.10.—(y.) ΟΥ̓́ΤΜΕΜΕ (8 356). leg) ὑμῶν ἐνίων ἤκουον, I heard 
respecting some of you, vi. 6. 84, Tis δίκης... τῆς ἀμφὶ rou σ΄αφρός Cyr. iii. 
ly 8. — (3.) PARTITIVE (° 358). Oj αὐτομολήσαντες tx σῶν «πολεμίων i. 7. 
18. — (s.) Active (ὃ 380). For examples, see ὃ 562. 


Dative, — (2.) Of Nearness (ὃ 399). Σὺν τοῖς φυγάσι, with the exiles 
i. 1. 11. Τῶν wag’ ἑαυτῷ Ib. 5. — (n-) Of PLAcE ( 420). Βασίλεια ἐν 
Κελαιναῖς ἐρυμνὰ, ial ταῖς πηγαῖς τοῦ Μαρσύον ποταμοῦ, ὑπὸ τῇ ἀκροπόλει is 
2. 8. 

Accusative, —(3.) Of Mortow τὸ (§ 429). ᾿Αφικνεῖτο... πρὸς αὐτόν, 
came tohim,i.i.5 Κατέβξαινεν εἰς πεδίον i. 2.22. Πέμψας .. παρὰ rods 
στρατηγούς Ib. 17. ᾿Ανέξη ἐπὶ τὰ ὅρη Ib. 22. Κασὰ Σηλυξρίαν ἀφίκου vii. 


cn. 6.] PREPOSITION. . 399 


2.25 ‘Ya αὐτὰ τὰ τείχη dys Cyr. v. 4. 48. --- (4) Of SprciricaTion 
(§ 437). Λαμαρὰ καὶ xar’ ὄμμα καὶ φύσιν Soph. Tr. 379. Kara γνώμην 
ἴδρις Id. Gd. T. 1087. 


. §680. Nores. a. It is common to explain many of the uses of the 
cases mentioned in Ch. I. by supplying prepositions; when, in reality, the 
connection of the cases with the prepositions is rather to be explained, as abova 
by reference to these uses, and to the principles on which they are founded 
In many connections the preposition may be either employed or omitted, as 
pleasure ; as, “Ὥσσερ δέ ris ἀγάλλεται ἐπὶ ϑεοσεξείᾳ . .,) οὕτω Μένων ἠγάλλεσ. 
τῷ ἰἐξαπατᾷν δύνασθαι ii. 6.26. Καὶ χραυγῇ πολλῇ iviaowi. 7.4. Σὺν πολ 
λῇ κραυγῇ καὶ ἡδονῇ ἤεσαν iv. 4. 14. 


β. The poets sometimes omit the preposition with the first, and insert i 
with the second, of two nouns similarly related; as, ‘Odd; .. Δελφῶν xaar 
“Δαυλίας Soph. Gd. T. 734. ᾿Αγρούς ops σέμψαι xia) “ποιμνίων νομάς Ib. 
761. 


δ 651. y- In the connection of the preposition with its case, we are 
to consider not only“the foree of the preposition in itself, but also that of the 
case with which it is joined. Thus raga denotes the relation of+side or near- 
ness; and with the Gen., it signifies from the side of, or from; with the Dat., 
at the side of, or beside, near, with ; with the Acc., to the side of, or to. E. g. 
Ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες, ὅτι οὐ φαίη παρὰ βασιλέα πορεύεσθαι, ἐπήνεσαν " «΄“αρὰ δὲ 
Ξενίον καὶ Πασίωνος πλείους ἢ δισχίλιοι, λαξόντες τὰ ὅπλα καὶ τὰ σκευο- 
φόρα, ἐστραφσοπεδεύσαντο tage Κλεάρχῳ i. 3. 7. 

3. An elliptic use of the adjective after a preposition deserves notice ; thus, 
Ἵλαραὶ δὲ ἀντὶ σκυθρωπῶν 80. γυναικῶν, OF = ἀντὶ τοῦ αὐτὰς sivas σκυόρω- 
“τοὺς ἦσαν, καὶ ἀντὶ ὑφορωμένων ἑαυτὰς ἡδέως ἀλλήλας ἑώρων, they were cheerful 
instead of [being] downecast, §c., Mem. ii. 7.12. "EZ ὀλξίων ἄζηλον εὑροῦσα: 
βίον Soph. Tr. 284. 


ε- The omission of the preposition with the second of two substantives having 
a similur construction will be observed, not only after a conjunction, but also in 
the case of the relative, in the questions and answers of a dialogue, &e.; as, 
"Amt rt τῶν νεῶν καὶ τῆς γῆς H. Gr. i. 1.2. Ἔν σῷ χρόνῳ, ᾧ ὑμῶν ἀκούω 
Symp. 4. 1 (cf. Ag’ ἐκείνον γὰρ ποῦ χρόνου, ἀφ᾽ οὗ τούτου ἠράσθην Pl. Conv. 
213 ὁ). “Τοῦ τοιοῦδε rio.” “Tivos δή, “Tod ὑπολαμβάνειν Pl. Rep. 
456d. ‘Os παρὰ φίλους καὶ εὐεργέτας, [se. παρὰ] ᾿Αδηναίους ἀδεῶς ἀσιέναι 
Th. vi. 50. 


Z. The complement of a preposition is often omitted when a relative follows. 
See ὃ 526. a. So Eis [sc. τὸν Xervov | ὅτε 6.99. Ἔς od, until, Hat. i. 67. 


§ GS2.. 2. A preposition in composition («.) often retains 
its distinct foree and government as such. But (β.) it com- 
monly seems to be regarded as a mere adverb (cf. ὃ 657. 8), 
and the compound to be construed just as a simple word 
would be of the same signification. Hence (y.) the preposi- 
tion is often repeated, or a similar preposition introduced. 
The adverbial force of the preposition in composition is par- 
ticularly obvious (6.) in tmesis (§ 328. N.), and («.) when the 

reposition is used with an ellipsis of its verb (chiefly ἐστί). 

hus, 


400 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. | BOOK II! 


a. Συνέπερεψεν αὐτῇ στρατιώτας, he sent with her soldiers, i. 2. 20. 


"Be Προσέπερεψε δὲ αὐτῷ τὴν Guyarien Cyr. viii. 5. 18 (ef. Tiers: "Aloo 
ζέλμην . . πρὸς Ξενοφῶντα vii. 6.43). ᾿Εσιπσλεύσας αὐτῷ H Gr. i. 6. 23 
cf. Πλεῖν ἐπ’ αὐτούς Ib. 1. 11). 

Notes. (1.) Hence verbs compounded with ivi, παρά, and πρός are com: 
monly followed by the Dat. of approach (Ὁ 898). (2.) The preposition, as 
such, and the general sense of the compound, often require the same case, as, 
particularly, in compounds of dé, ἐξ, and σύν. See δὲ 347, 399. 


γ' “Exsigavee εἰσξάλλειν εἰς σὴν Κιλικίαν i. 2.21. Tage δὲ βασιλέως ἀπῆλ 
gov i, 9. 29, 


§ GDB. δ. Tmesis occurs chiefly in the earlier (especially the Ep.) 
Greek, when as yet the union of the preposition and verb had not become firm- 
ly cemented. In Att. prose it is very rare, and even in Att. poetry (where it 
occurs most frequently in the lyric portions), it seldom inserts any thing more 
than a mere particle between the preposition and the verb. Thus, ᾿Ασὸ λοιγὸν 
ἀμῦναι, (= λοιγὸν ἀπαμῦναι], to ward off destruction, A. 67. Llage δ᾽ ἔγχεα 
μακρὰ πέπηγεν T.135. .’ Amd μὲν σεωυτὸν ὥλεσας Hat. iii. 36. "Ex δὲ πηδή- 
cas, and leaping forth, Eur. Hec. 1172. Διά μ᾽ ἔφθειρας, κατὰ δ᾽ ἔκτεινας Id. 
Hipp. 1357. ᾿Αντ᾽ εὖ σείσεται Pl. Gorg. 520 6. 

Notes. (1.) The preposition sometimes follows the verb; and is some- 
times repeated without the verb ; as, [liu Qavros, ὦ γύναι, μετά Eur. Hee. 
504. ᾿Ασπολεῖ πόλιν, wad δὲ πατέρα Id. Herc. 1055. Κατὰ μὲν ἔκαυσαν Δρύ- 
pov πόλιν, κατὰ δὲ Χαράδρην Hat. viii. 33. So, "Ὥρνυσο .. ᾿Αγαρέμνων, ay 
[se. ὥρνυσο} δ᾽ ᾿Οδυσεύς Γ. 2607. “Easroy . ., κὰδ δέ E. 480. (2.) In the 
earlier Greek, what is called tmesis is rather to be regarded as the adverbial use 
of the preposition (δ 657. 8), than as the division of a word already com- 
pounded. 


:. Add’ ἄνα [for ἀνάστηθι] ἐξ ἑδράνων, but [rise] up from the seats, Soph. 
Aj. 194. Eicsatsiv πάρα [for rdégsor:| Eur. Ale. 1114. “Ev [for ἔνεσσι] δ᾽ 
iy σῷ ἱερῷ χώρῳ καὶ λειμὼν καὶ ἄλση VY. 3. 1]. 


pa C. Tue Consunction. 


§ 654. Rute XXXV. Consunctions con- 
nect sentences, and like parts of a sentence ; as, 


᾿Ησϑένεϊβ, Δαρεῖος καὶ ὑπώσσευε, Darius was sick and apprehended, i. 1. 1. 
Τισσαφέρνης διαβάλλει σὸν Κῦρον πρὸς σὸν ἀδελφὸν, ὡς ἐπιδουλεύοι αὐτῷ. Ὁ δὲ 
πείθεταί re καὶ συλλαμβάνει Κῦρον i 1.3. “Ὥσσε αὐτῷ μᾶλλον φίλους εἷ- 
ναι ἢ βασιλεῖ ἴθ. ὅ. Πλείους ἢ δισχίλιοι i. 8, 7. ᾿Ἐξόα καὶ βαρξαρικῶς κα 
Ἑλληνικῶς i. 8. 1. 


Remarks. 1. By like parts of a sentence are meant words and phrases of 
like construction, or performing like offices in the sentence, and which united 
by conjunctions form compound subjects, predicates, adjuncts, &c. Some con- 
nective adverbs also may sometimes be regarded as uniting like parts of a sen- 
vence. 


2. Like parts of a sentence are commonly, but not necessarily, of the same 
part of speech and of similar form. In many cases, it seems to be indifferent 
whether we regard a conjunction as connecting like parts of a sentence, or (sup- 
plying an ellipsis) as connecting whole sentences. 


oH. 6.] = CONJUNCTION. — CONCLUDING REMARKS. 401 


3. A conjunction often connects the sentence which it introduces, not so 
much to the preceding sentence as a whole, as to some particular word or 
phrase in it; thus, Προσξάλλουσι.. καταλιπόντες ἄφοδον τοῖς σολεμοίοις, εἰ βού 
Aowre φεύγειν iv. 2. 11. 


§ GBS. 4. A twofold construction is sometimes admissible, accord 
ing as a word is regarded as belonging to a compound part of a sentence, or to 
a new sentence; thus, Πλουσιωσέρῳ μὲν ἄν, si ἐσωφρόνεις, ἢ ἐμοὶ ἐδίδους Cyr. 
_ Vili. 8. 82, Ἔκ δεινοσέρων ἢ σοιῶνδε ἐσώθησαν Th.vii.77. Τοῖς δὲ νεωσχέροις 
καὶ μᾶλλον ἀκμάζουσιν, ἢ ἐγὼ (Sc. ἀκμάζω), παραινῶ Isocr, 188 a. Ἡμῶν 
δὲ ἄμεινον, ἢ ἐκεῖνοι, σὸ μέλλον προορωμένων Dem. 287. 27. Οὐδαρμοῦ γάρ 
στιν ᾿Αγόρατον ᾿Αθηναῖον εἶναι, ὥσπερ Θρασύξουλον Lys. 136.27. ἜἜξε- 
ori 3, ὥσπερ ἩἫ γέλοχιος, ἡμῖν λέγειν Ar. Ran. 303. 


5. In many connections, two forms of construction are equally admissible, 
the one with, and the other withont, a connective. The two forms are some- 
times blended. See δὲ 461. 3, 609, 619. N., 628. 


6. A conjunction is sometimes used in Greek, where none would be employed 
in English; e. g., when xoads is followed by another adjective; as, Πολλά τε 
καὶ ἐπιτήδεια διελέγοντο v. 5. 25. 


§ GOOG. 7. The Greeks, especially the earlier writers, often employ the 
more generic for the more specific connectives (ὃ 330. 1), or instead of other 
forms of expression; as, "Exudvéave> σχολὴ δὲ πλείων ἢ Haw πάρεστί μοι, 
‘[{and] for I have more leisure,’ isch. Pr. 817. Τυγχάνω rs κληθρ' ἀνασπα- 
στοῦ πύλης χαλῶσα, καί με φθόγγος οἰκείου κακοῦ βάλλει dV ὥπων, ‘just as I am 
drawing the bars, there strikes,’ Soph Ant. 1186. Καὶ ἤδη τ᾽ ἦν ἐν τῷ τρίτῳ 
σταθμῷ, καὶ Χειρίσοφος αὐτῷ ἐχαλεπάνθη iv. 6.2. Ody ὁμοίως πεποιήκασι, 
καὶ “Ὅμηρος (cf. ὃ 400), they have not composed in the same manner [and] as 
Homer, or with Homer, Pi. lon, 531 ἃ (cf., in Lat., similis atque, &c.). 

Nore. The student will not fail to remark, — (a) The frequent use, in the 
Epic, of δέ for γάρ, and in general of codrdination in the connection of sentences, 
for subordination. —(b) The frequent use of γάρ in specification, where we 
should use that, namely, now, &e.; as, Τῷδε δῆλον ἦν" σῇ μὲν γὰρ πρόσθεν ἡμέ- 
ey +. ἐκέλευε ii. 3. 1. 


D. Conctupinc REMARKS. . 


ὃ 637. I. In Greek, as in other languages, the different 
classes of particles often blend with each other in their use. 
Thus, («.) adverbs sometimes take a case, as prepositions ; 
(8.) prepositions are sometimes used without a case, as ad- 
verbs ; (y.) the same particle is used both as an adverb and as 
a conjunction, or as a connective and a non-connective ad- 
verb. ἘΠ. g. 

«. For examples, see §§ 347, 349, 372. y, 394, 399. — Hom. uses εἴσω and 
iow as protracted forms for εἰς - thus, "Αγγειλον . . Ἴλιον εἴσω 0. 145 (ef. Εἰς 
Ἴλιον 148). ᾿Αγάγησιν ἔσω κλισίην 0. 155. 

β. Ἦ μὴν κελεύσω, κἀπιθωύξω vs πρός 86. rodew], ‘in addition to this,’ 
* besides,’ Aisch. Pr. 73. Πρὸς δ᾽ ἔτι iii. 2.2. "Ey δὲ [se. rotros |, and mean- 
while, Soph. Cid. T. 27. 

94 * 


402 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. [ΒΟΟΚ In, 


ψ. Κῦρον δὲ (conjunction) μεταπέμπεται eet καὶ στρατηγὸν δὲ (adverb) αὖ 
“ὃν ἀπέδειξε 1.1.2. Ὡς δὲ νῦν ἔχει, χαλεπὸν, εἰ, οἰόμενοι ἐν τῇ Ἑλλάδι καὶ 
ἐπαίνου καὶ τιμῆς τεύξεσθαι, ἀ ἀντὶ δὲ τούτων οὐδ᾽ ὅμοιοι «οἷς ἄλλοις Ἰφόμεθα vi. 6. 
16. Σοφαίνετον δὲ φὸν Σαυμφάλιον, καὶ (conjunction ) Σωκράτην Tov ᾿Αχαιὸι, 
ξένους ὃ ὄντας καὶ (adverb) τούτους, ἐκέλευσεν i. 1. 11. Πρῶτον μὲν ἰδάκρῦε oe 
εἶτα δὲ ἔλεξε 1.3.2. "Αλλος δὲ λίθῳ, καὶ ἄλλος, εἶτα πολλοί i. 5. 12 
Ταῦτα ἐποίουν, μέ Ket σκότος ἐγένετο. iv. 2. 4 (cf. § 894). Πλὴν οἱ τὰ 
καπηλεῖα ἔχοντες i. 2. 24 (cf. ὃ 849). 


Nore. The adverb πρίν is construed in four ways; (1.) as ἃ connective 
with the appropriate mode; thus, Μὴ πρόσθεν καταλῦσαι. .,) πρὶν ὧν αὐτῷ συμι- 
ξουλεύσησαι, *‘ before he should consult,’ i. 1. 10 (πρίν is followed by the Subj. 
ar Opt., only when a negative or interrogative sentence precedes) ; (2.) as hav- 
ing a prépesitional force, with the Inf. ; thus, Πρὶν τέτταρα aii διελδεῖν, 
before [completing] they had completed ‘Gin stadia, iv. 5. 19; (3.) as a simple 
adverb, with 7 and the appropriate mode: thus, Πρὶν 4 . . ἐγένοντο, before that 
they had come, Cyr. i. 4. 23; (4.) with ἤ and the Inf. instead of another 
mode ( 629.2). This construction is less Attic. 


§ 688. II. Both adverbs, and prepositions with their 
cases, are often used substantively. An adverb and a preposi- 
tion governing it-are often written together as a compound 
word. Thus, 


Ὅναν δὲ rovrwy “rug ἔχητε; but when you have had ith of this, v. 7.12. 
Eis μὲν ἅπαξ καὶ βραχὺν χρόνον, for once and a short time, Dem. 21.1. Eis 
νῦν Pl. Tim. 20 ἢ. Μέχρι ἐνταῦθα v. 5.4. Πρόπαλαι, Ar. Eq. 1155. “Ex 
πρόσθεν iii. 4. 2. Ἰ]αραυτίκα Cyr. ii. 2.24. “Hv . . ὑπὲρ ἥμισυ τοῦ ὅλου 
στρατεύμασος ᾿Αρκάδες, above half of the whole army were Arcadians, vi. 2. 10. 
Αἰσεῖ αὐτὸν sis δισχιλίους ξένους i. 1.10. Ἔκ ray ἀμφὶ rods μυρίους Vv. 3. 8. 
ΞΞυνέδραμον ὡς εἰς ἑπτακοσίους H. Gr. ἵν. 1.18. Συνειλεγρεένων εἰς σὴν Φυλὴν 
«πρὶ ἱππακοσίους Ib. ii. 4. 5. 


§ 639. Ill. One preposition or adverb is often used for 
another (or a preposition is used with one ease for another), by 
reason of something associated or implied. This construction 
is termed, from its elliptic Sxprossizenems, constructio preg- 
nans. Thus; | 


a.) ἅ PREPOSITION Of motion for one of rest. Οἱ ἐκ σῆς ὠγορᾶς . - ἔφυγον 
[ἐκ for ἐν, by reason of ἔφυγον following], those in the. market fled | from it], i. 
2.18. Aidt πηγαὶ αὐτοῦ εἰσιν ἐκ τῶν βασιλείων Τὺ. 7. ᾿Αφικνοῦντα, τῶν ἐκ 
σοῦ χωρίου τρεῖς ἄνδρες ν. 7. 17. Τοῖς ἐκ Πύλου ληφϑεῖσι, those taken at Pylus 
and brought thence, Ar. Nub. 186. Οἱ dad σῶν καταστρωμάτων τοῖς ἐκοντί- 
. of». ἐχρῶντο Th. vii. 70. Els ἀνάγκην κείμεθα, we have come into necessity, 
and lie there, Eur. Iph. Ὁ, 620. Ἔν δὲ σῇ ὑπερβολῇ τῶν ὁρῶν τῶν sis rd πεδίον, 
i. 2. 25. : 


6). A preposition of rest for one of motion. "Ev Atuxadia ὠσπήεσαν [ἐν for 
sis, to imply that they were still there], had gone to Leucadia, or were absent in 
L., Th. iv. 42. Οἱ δ᾽ ἐν σῷ Ἡραίῳ κατασπεφευγότες (cf. Εἰς δὲ od Ἥραιον κα- 
«ίφυγον) Η. Gr. iv. 5. 5. "Ev σῷ ποταμῷ ἔπεσον Ag. 1. 32. 


y:) An ADVERB of motion for one of rest. Τῶν tvdebév [for ἔνδον] σις εἰσενεγ 
κάτω Ar. Plut. 228. Meroixnois τοῦ σόπου φοῦ ἐνθένδε εἰς ἄλλον φόσον PL 


cH, 6.] ELLIPSIS. 


Apol.40c. Ποῖ xaxav ἐρημίαν εὕρω 5 ‘ Whither can 
1157. 


3.) An ADVERB of rest for one of motion. “Osov [for dao] βέξηκεν, οὐδεὶς 
οἶδε, no one knows where [for whither] he has gone, Soph. Tr. 40. Πανταχοῦ 
weseCsicousy Ar. Lys. 1230. 


$660. IV. In the doctrine of ,particles, especially con- 
nectives, the figures of syntax hold an important place ; thus, 


A. ELtresis. 


Ellipsis here consists either («.) in the omission of the par- 
ticles themselves, or (β.). far more frequently, in that of words, 
and even whole sentences, connected or modified by them. 


a. Among the particles most frequently omitted are copu- 
lative and complementary conjunctions (ὃ 329. N.) ; as, 


Πόθου πατρίδων, γονέων, γυναικῶν, παίδων ili, 1. 8, "ἔχεις πόλιν, ἔχεις 
φριήρεις, ἔχεις χρήματα, ἔχεις ἄνδρας τοσούτους Vii. 1. 21. Οὖτε σλινθυφεῖς δό- 
μους «τροσείλους ἧσαν, οὐ [for οὔτε} ξυλουργίαν Asch. Pr. 450. ᾿Ομνύω ὑμῖν 
Θεοὺς πάντας καὶ πάσας, (sc. dc] % μὴν .. ἐθυόρεην vi. 1. 81. ᾿Αφειλόμοηην, 
ὁμολογῶ ν. θ. 17. ᾿Ασάγγειλον πόσει, ἥκειν ὅπως τάχιστ᾽ ἐράσμιον πόλει" 


ψυναῖκα πιστὴν δ᾽ ἐν δόμοις εὕροι Asch: Ag. 604, See § 611. 3. 


Nore. Hdt. sometimes uses οὔκων with the ellipsis of a conditional or other 
conjunction : as, Οὔκων romesrs ταῦτα, ἡμεῖς -. ἐκλείψομεν, if then you will 
not do this, we shall desert, iv. 118. Ἷ 


§ 661. β. Connected sentences especially abound in el- 
lipsis, from the ease with which the omission can be supplied 
from the connection. We notice, among the great variety of 
cases that might be mentioned, the frequent ellipses, : 


1.) In replies; as, “Ἔσσιν 0 σι σε ἠδίκησα." Ὁ δ᾽ ἐὠπσπεκρίνασο, brs οὔ 


{= οὖκ tori | i. 6. 7. Elsroveros δὲ σοῦ ‘Ogavrou, ori οὐδὲν ἀδικηθείς Ib. 8. 

Norse. (a.) In a dialogue or address, a speaker often commences with a 
connective (most frequently-an adversative or causal conjunction), from refer- 
ence to something which has been expressed or which is mutually understood ; 
as, ᾿Αλλ᾽ ὁρᾶτε, but you see, iii. 2.4, "Esl δ᾽ οὐ φαῦλον δοκεῖ εἶναι vi. 6. 12. 
Oru γάρ σοι μαχεῖσθαι, ὦ Kige, τὸν ἀδελφόν ; i. 7.9. (6.) In like manner the 
Voe. is often followed by a connective ; as, "02 γύναι, ἔφη, ὄνομα δέ σοι τί ἔστιν: 
Mem. ii. 1. 26. Ὦ Κίρκη, cis γὰρ . . ἡγεμονεύσει ; x. 501. 


2.) Between two connectives; as; ᾿Αλλὰ [86. παύομαι] γὰρ καὶ περαίνειν . 
ἤδη ὥρα iii. 2.32, Οὗ v. 7.11. ᾿Αλλὰ γὰρ δέδοικα iii, 2.25. Παρὰ σὴν 
ϑάλατσαν ἤει - καὶ [sc. ταύτῃ ἤει] γὰρ ἤδη ἠσθένει vi. 2. 18, Καὶ γὰρ καὶ 
καανὸς ἰφαίνεσο ii. 2. 15.— And yet, perhaps, in such examples as these, ὠλ- 
λὰ γάρ or καὶ γάρ may be regarded as forming but a single compound con- 
nective, or one of the particles may be regarded as a mere adverb (ὃ 657. y). 


§ GG, 53.) With ὡς, especially in expressing comparison, . design, 
pretence, possibility, &c.; as, Oarrov ἢ [se. ov rw ταχὺ ὥς τις ἄν wero, quicker 
than [so quick as] one would have thought, i. 5.8. Μείζονα ἡγησάμενος εἶναι ἃ 


404 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. [BOOK 111. 


ὡς ἰσὶ Tlecidas τὴν παρασκευήν, thinking that the preparation was greater than 

[so great as] it would be against the Pisidians, i. 2.4. Βραχύτερα ἠκόντιζον, 
ἤ ws ἰξικνεῖσθαι, hurled [a shorter distance than so as to reach} too short a dis- 
tance to reach, iii. 3. 7. ᾿Εφάνη κονιορτὸς, ὥσπερ νεφέλη λενκή i. 8.8. ‘Og 
εἰς μάχην παρεσκευασμένος, arrayed as {he would array] for battle, Ib. 1. 
᾿σέκαμαεν, ὡς εἰς κύκλωσιν Ib. 23. Φεύψουσιν ἀνὰ κράτος ws πρὸς τὴν ὠπὸ 
τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἔκβαιτιν ἵν. 3.21. ᾿Αδροίξει, ὡς ἐπὶ τούτους '. 2.1. “ὥσσερ ὀργῇ» 
ἐκέλευσε i. ὅ. 8. “Ὡς ἐκ τῶν πὰρόντων 80. ἐδύνανπτο!, ξυνταξόμενοι Th. vi. 70. 
Κερασούντιοι, ὡς dv καὶ ἑωρακότες τὸ παρ᾽ ἑαυτοῖς πρᾶγμα, δείσαντες, the Cera 
suntians alarmed, as they would naturally be having seen what had happened 
among themselves, v. 7. 22. “Ὡς tai σὸ πολύ, as things are for the most part, 
commonly, iii. 1.42. See §§ 410, 525. a, 640. 

_Nores. (a.) From the frequent use of ὡς with the accusative after verbs 
of motion to express the purposed end of the motion (ὃ 429), it came at last 
to be regarded as a mere preposition, supplying the place of σρός or εἰς, but 
chiefly before names of persons; as, [Logeveras ὡς βασιλέα, goes to the king, i. 
2.4. (6.) ‘Os is often used to render expressions of quantity less positive; 
as, Ἔχων (sc. οὕτω πολλοὺς} ὡς πεντακοσίους, having such a number as 500, i. 
e. about 500, i: 2. 3. 


§ 663. 4.) With adversative conjunctions, with which we must some- 
times supply the opposite of that which has preceded; as, Καὶ μὴ μ᾽ ἄτιμον 
eid’ ἐποστείλητε γῆς, ἀλλ᾽ ὠρχέπλουτον καὶ καταστάτην δόμων 80. δέξασθε} 
Soph. ΕἸ. 71. Ei μὲν βούλετα,, txpiews εἰ δ᾽ [80. μὴ Bovasras], ὅ vs βούλεται» 
σοῦτο ποιείτω Pl, Euthyd.-285 c. 


5.) With 4%, before which there is sometimes an ellipsis of μὥλλον as, Ζη- 
φοῦσι κερδαίνειν 86. μᾶλλον], ἢ ὑμᾶς πείθειν Lys. 171.8. Τὴν τῆς ὑμετέρας. 
πόλεως σύχην dy ἑλοίμην, .. ἢ σὴν ἐκείνου Dem. 24.16. See § 466. 


6.) With conditional conjunctions; as, Ei μὲν σύ σι ἔχεις, ὦ Μηδόσαδες, 
πρὸς ἡμᾶς λέγειν [80. λέγε δή] + εἰ δὲ μὴ [Sc. Exes], ἡμεῖς πρὸς σὲ ἔχομεν Vii. 
7.15. Elves ἄλλο τι ϑέλοι χρῆσθαι, εἴσ᾽ ia’ Αἴγυσσον σατραπεύειν, συγκατα- 
σερίψαιντ᾽ ἄν αὐτῷ ii. 1.14. Καὶ νῦν, ἄν μὲν ὁ Κῦρος βούληται [καλῶς ἔχει] " 
si Ἢ μὴ; ὑμεῖς γε τὴν ταχίστην πάρεστε Cyr. iv. ὅ. 10, "ἔκαιον καὶ χιλὸν καὶ 
εἴ σ, ἄλλο χρήσιμον ἦν (SC. ἔκαιον τοῦτο] i. 6. 1 (εἴ τις 50 used is equivalent to 
ὅσαις). Of δὲ ἄλλοι ἀπώλοναο ὑπό Ts τῶν πολεμίων καὶ χιόνος, καὶ εἴ τις νόσῳ 
νυ. 3.3. ᾿Ἐσείδοντο, πλὴν εἴ vis ci ἔκλεψεν iv. 1.14. Ἐνοι ἦσαν, «λὴν κα- 
θόσον εἰ τὴν Σικελίαν ῴοντο αὐτοὺς δουλώσεσθαι Th. vi. 88. “AAA μενέουσι . . “ 
εἰ δὲ καϊδαὐτοὶ [50. οὐ μενέουσι], φευγόντων 1.45. ἘΠ δ᾽ ἄγε [= εἰ δὲ βούλει, 
ἄγε, but if you will, come] A. 802, and often in Hom. 

Nore. When two similar clauses are connected, a pronoun, preposition, or 
ither word is sometimes (chiefly by the poets) omitted in the first clause, and, 
for the sake of emphasis or the metre, or by reason of other ellipses, inserted 

.in the second; as, Ζώγρει, Argos υἱέ, σὺ δ᾽ ἄξια dias ἄποινα Z. 46. "Ex 
Πύλου ἄξει, ἀμύντορας. ., ἢ ὅγε καὶ Σπάρτηθεν B. 326. See ᾧ 650. β. 


Β, PLEonasm. 
ξ 664. Under this head we remark, 
1.) The redundant use of negatives. ‘This appears chiefly 


a.) In connection with indefinites, which in a negative sentence are all 
regularly combined with a negative; as, Odqors ἑἱρεῖ οὐδείς i. 3.5. Οὐδενὶ 
οὐδαμῇ οὐδαμῶς οὐδεμίων κοινωνίαν ἔχει Pl. Parm. 166 a. 


cx. 6.] PLEONASM. 405 


_ B.) In divided construction ; as, Οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθε οὔσε Θεοὺς οὔτ᾽ ἀνθρώπους 
ii. 5.39. Μηδὲν φελείσω μήτε ἐμοὶ μήτε ἄλλῳ Vii. 1.6. Οὐ γὰρ ἔστιν doris 
ἀνθρώπων σωθήσεται, οὔτε ὑμῖν οὔτε ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ σπ“λήθει γνησίως ἐναντιούμενος Pl. 


Apol. 81 6. 


y-) In the emphatic use of οὐδέ and μηδέ as, Οὐ μὲν δὴ οὐδὲ τοῦτ᾽ ἄν τις 
εἴποι i. 9.13. Ma τοίνυν μηδέ vii. 6. 19. Οὔκουν βούλεται. ., οὐδὲ πολλο 
δεῖ, he does not therefore wish, no, far from it, Dem. 100. 9. 


§ G65. 3.) In the use of μή with the Infinitive, after words implying 
some negation ; as, Ναυκλήροις ἀπεῖπε μὴ διάγειν, he forbade the shipmasters to 
cross [saying that they should not cross], vii. 2.12. ᾿Ἐξέφυγε τὸ μὴ κατα- 
πετρωθῆναι i, 8. 3, Ἥξει τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι iii. 5. 11 (cf. Σχήσω.σε πηδᾷν Eur. 
- Or. 263). Κωλόοντες μηδαμῇ . . πορίζεσθαι Vii. 6. 29 (cf. Κωλύσειε τοῦ καίειν 
i. 6. 3). Κωλύματα μὴ αὐξηθῆναι Thi. 16. Ἐμσοδὼν τοῦ μὴ ἤδη εἶναι iv. 
8. 14. 


Nore. Οὐ is sometimes used in like manner, with a finite verb supplying 
(with ὅτε or ὡς) the place of an Inf.; as, "Apysicdas, .. ὅτι od παρῆν, to deny 
that he was present, Rep. Ath. 2.17. “Ὡς δ᾽ οὐκ ἐκεῖνος ἐγεώργει τὴν γῆν, οὐκ 
ἠδύνα ς᾽ ἀρνηθῆναι Dem. 871. 14. 


§ 666...) In the use of μὴ οὐ with the Infinitive and Participle, as 
Δ simple negative. This chiefly occurs (1.) after negative and interrogative sen- 
tences, and (2.) after some expressions of shame and fear. Here μὴ οὐ takes 
the place of simple μή, and (3.) may even be wholly redundant after words 
where ~% would be so (ὃ 665). Thus, (1.) Οὐδείς γέ μ᾽ ἄν πείσειεν ἀνθρώπων 
σὸ μὴ οὐκ ἐλθεῖν, none of men can persuade me not to go, Ar. Ran. 65. Οὐ γὰρ 
ἄν μακρὰν ixvevov αὐτὸς, μὴ οὐκ ἔχων τι σύμξολον Soph. Cid. T. 220. Tis 
μηχανὴ μὴ οὐχὶ πάντα καταναλωθῆναι, Pl. Phedo, 74d. (2.) “Ὥσσε πᾶσιν 
αἰσχύνην εἶναι, μὴ οὐ συσπουδάζειν fi. 3. 11. (8.) Οὐκ ἐναντιώσομαι rd wn οὐ 
γεγωνεῖν Asch. Pr. 787. Τί δῆτα μέλλεις μὴ οὐ γεγωνίσκειν; Ib. 0627. Τί 
ἐμποδὼν μὴ οὐχὶ - . ἀποθωνεῖν , iii. 1. 18. 


ζ.) In the occasional use of οὐ to strengthen the negative *idea implied in 
4, than; as, Ti οὖν δεῖ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον ἀναμένειν, . « μᾶλλον ἢ οὐχ ὡς τάχιστα 
«+ φὴν εἰρήνην ποιεῖσθαι, ‘rather than make peace,’ = ‘and not rather make 
peace,’ H. Gr. vi. 8.15. ἘΠ᾿ σοίνυν ris ὑμῶν... ἄλλως πὼς ἔχει τὴν ὀργὴν ἐπὶ 
Μειδίαν, ἢ ὡς οὐ δέον αὐτὸν τεθνάναι; Dem. 537. 3. Ἥκει; γὰρ ὁ Lligens οὐδὲν 
σι μᾶλλον ἐπ᾽ ἡμέας, ἢ οὐ καὶ ἐπὶ ὑμέας Hdt. iv. 118. (Compare, in French 
and Ital., Vous écrivez mieux que vous ne parlez, Egli era pit ricco che voi non 
siete.) 

Nores. (1.) Two negatives in the same sentence have commonly their 
distinct force, («.) when one applies to the whole sentence, and the other to a 
part only; and (@.) when two sentences have been condensed into one. Thus, 
(α.) Οὐ περὶ μὲν σοῦ λέγω. ., περὶ ἐμοῦ δὲ οὔ, I do not say it of you, and not 
of myself, Pl. Ale. 134 c. Οὐ νῦν ἐκεῖνοι παιόμενοι, .. οὐδὲ ἀποθανεῖν οἱ «λή- 
movts δύνανται; iii. 1. 29. (β.) See the examples in ὃ 528. 2; to which 
may be added, with an ellipsis of the relative, Οὐδεὶς οὐκ ἔπασχε Symp. i. 9. 
(2.) For οὐ μή, see 88 595. 1, 2, 597. 1. 


§ 667. 2.) The repetition of various particles for greater 
clearness or strength of expression, particularly after interven- 


406 SYNTAX: OF THE PARTICLE. [ΒΟΟΚ 11% 


ing clauses, in divided construction, and with important or en» 
phatic words ; as, 3 


Ἔλεγεν, ὅσι, εἰ μὴ καταξήσονται οἰκήσοντες καὶ πείσονται, Irs κατακαύδει 
vii. 4.5. Δέδοικα, μὴ, ἄν ἅπαξ μάθωμεν ἀργοὶ Civ. 4 μὴ, ὥσαερ οἱ λωτοφά 
yo, ἐπιλαθώμεθα iii. 2.25. Οὐκ ἂν ἱκανὸς εἶναι οἵριαι, οὔτ᾽ ἃν φίλον ὠφελῆσαι, 
οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἐχθρὸν ἀλέξασθαι i. 8. θ6, Kodx ἄν γυναικῶν ἥσσονες καλοίμεεθ᾽ ἄν 
Soph. Ant. 680. Τάχ᾽ ἂν κἄμ᾽ ἄν ςοιαύτῃ χειρὶ τιμωρεῖν ϑέλοι Id. Ed. Ὑ, 
189. *QL τέκνον ὦ γενναῖον Id. Phil. 799. Εἰ μὴ εἴ σις ὑπολάξοι Pl. Gorg. 
480 b. 


8.) The multiplication of particles of similar force, and the 
employment of needless connectives ; as, 


Μὴ πρόσθεν καταλῦσαι πρὸς τοὺς ἀντιστασιώτας, α'ρὶν ἄν αὐτῷ συμξουλεύ., 
onrasi. 1. 10 (cf. 1. 2.2). Οὐ πρόσθεν «ρὶν ἢ .. ἐγένοντο Ag. 2. 4. “Ὅσον 
ἀπὸ βοῆς͵ ἕνεκα Th. viii. 92. Tivos δὴ χαριεν ἕνεκα Pl. Leg. 701 ἃ, See 
§§ 461. 8, 609 a, 619. N., 628, 655, 5. 


C. ATTRACTION. 


§ 668. The influence of attraction sometimes passes 
even beyond a connective ; as, 


Οὐδέν γε ἄλλο ively, οὗ ἐρῶσιν of ἄνθρωσοι, ἢ rod ἀγαθοῦ [for rd ἀψαθόν 
through the attraction of οὗ] Pl. Conv. 3205 6. ᾿Ηξίουν, Λέσρεον μὲν μὴ ἀπὸ- 
δοῦνα, (rods Λακεδαιμονίους), ti μὴ βούλονται" ἀναξάντες [for ἀναθδάνφας, by 
attraction to the subject of βούλονται,] δὲ . ., ἀπ᾿ομόσαι Th. v. 50. ‘Eouoxed- 
φους καὶ εἴ του ἄλλου πειθόντων (see ἃ 663. 6) Th. vii. 21. See § 627. 2. 


D. ANACOLUTHON. 


§ 669. Anacoluthon is frequent in the connection of sen 
tences. ‘The clause completing the construction is often either 
omitted or changed in its form. Hence, also, the regular cor- 
respondence of particles is sometimes neglected. Thus, 


Ὡς γὰρ ἐγὼ .. ἤκουσά τινος, ὅτι Ἰλέανδρος ὁ ἐκ Βυζαντίου ἁρμοστὴς μέλλει 
ἥξειν [for ὡς ἤκουσα, Κλέανδρος μέλλει, Or ἤκουσα, ὅτι Katavdoos μέλλει} vi. 4. 
18. ‘Avng ὅδ᾽ ὡς ἔοικεν οὐ νεμεῖν [for ὡς ἔσικεν, οὐ νεμεῖ, ΟΥ̓ ἔοικεν οὐ νερεῖν] 
Soph. 1238. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴν, ---ἰρῶ γὰρ καὶ ταῦτα, ἐξ ὧν ἔχω ἐλπίδας, καὶ 
σὲ βουλήσεσθαι φίλον ἡμεῖν εἶναι" ---- οἷδα μὲν γάρ [for ἀλλὰ μὴν, tow γὰρ, οἶδα, 
ΟΥ ὠλλὰ μὴν ἐρῶ - οἷδα γάρ) ii. 5.12. Seeiii 2.11. Τῶν δὲ ᾿Αδηναίων ἔτυχε 
γὰρ πρισξεία πρότερον ἐν τῇ Λακεδαίμονι περὶ ἄλλων παροῦσα, καὶ . . ἔδοξεν 
αὐφοῖς Th. i. 72, Οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅ σι μᾶλλον, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, πρέπει οὕτως, ὡς 
σὸν ποιοῦσον ἄνδρα ἐν Πρυσανείῳ σισεῖσθα, [for ὅ rs μᾶλλον πρέπει, ἤ, OF ὅ σι 
σπρίπει οὕφως, ὡς] Pl, Apol, 36d. Εἰδόσες οὐκ ἄν ὁμοίως δυνηθέντες, καὶ εἰ ἐκ 
σῶν γεῶν robs παρεσκενασμένους ἐκξιθάζοιεν, ἢ [for καὶ si] κατὰ γῆν ἰόνσες 


yrwrbsincay Th. vi. 64, 


§ 670. Nore. After a connective, a distinct sentence often takes the 
place of a part of a sentence, and sometimes the reverse; as, "Eeyovras. . 
κήρυκες." of μὲν ἄλλοι βάρβαροι, ἦν δ᾽ αὐτῶν Φαλῖνος εἷς “EAAny [for sis δ᾽ ad- 
σῶν D.‘E.], there come heralds; the rest barbarians, but [there was} one of 
them Phalinus, a Greek, ii. 1.7. See i. 10.32. Παρημέλουν ὄντες ἄσοικοι" 


cH. 6.] ANACOLUTHON. — COMBINATIONS. 107 


εὖτε yao. . διδόντες [for οὔτε διδόντες, or οὔτε γὰρ ἐδίδοσαν. The construction 
might be made regular by repeating π:αρημέλουν] ΤῊ. i. 25. See § 641. B. 


§ 67. V. The Greek especially abounds in combina- 
tions of particles, and in elliptical phrases having the power of 
particles. The use of these sometimes extends farther than 
their origin and structure would strictly warrant. A few ex- 
amples of these combinations and phrases are given below, 
but the subject in its details belongs to the lexicographer rather 
than the grammarian. : 


1. ἀλλὰ γάρ, καὶ γάρ, 868 § 661. 2. 


2. ἀλλ᾽ a [from ἄλλο 4 or ἄλλα 5, other than, except; as, ᾿Αργύριον μὲν 
οὖκ ἔχω, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ μικρόν τὶ Vii. 7.53. Oddapod.., ἀλλ᾽ ἤ κατ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν ὁδόν 
iv. 6. 11. 


8. ἄλλως τε xai, both otherwise and in particular, especially ; as, Οὐδὲν vo- 


μίζω ἀνδρὶ, ἄλλως τε καὶ ἄρχοντι, κάλλιον sivas κτῆμα Vil. 7. 41. 


4. δῆλον ὅτι, it is evident that, evidently, εὖ οἵδ᾽ ὅτι, οἶδ᾽ ὅσι, σάφ᾽ ἴσθ᾽ ὅσι, 
and similar phrases, which are often inserted in sentences (quite like adverbs), 
or annexed to them; as, Τὰ μὲν δὴ Κύρου δῆλον des οὕσως ἔχει i. 3.9. Ode? 
ἂν ὑμεῖς, εὖ οἵδ᾽ ὅτι, ἐπαύσασθε Dem. 72. 24. Μονώτατος γὰρ εἶ cb. .γ εὖ ἴσθ᾽ 
ὅπ, Ar. Plut. 182. 


5. εἰ γάρ, 810’ ὥφελον, see §§ 599, 600. 2. 


6. εἰ δὲ μή, but if not, otherwise, used even after negative sentences ; as, 
Μὴ ποιήσῃς ταῦτα" εἰ δὲ μὴ, ἔφη, ἀἰφτίαν ἕξεις, do not do this; otherwise, said 
he, you will have blame, vii. 1. 8. Ode’ ἐν τῷ ὕδατι τὰ ὅπλα ἦν ἔχειν » εἰ δὲ 
μὴ, ἥρπαζεν ὁ ποταμός iv. 3. 6. 


. ἤ, ἵνα i, ὡς vi, and de: τί, see ὃ 539. a. 


. 8. μή vi γε, not to say aught surely, i. 6. much less, or much more; as, Οὐκ 
In δ᾽ αὐτὸν ἀργοῦντα οὐδὲ τοῖς φίλοις ἐπιτάττειν ὑπὲρ αὑτοῦ σι ποιεῖν, μή σί γε 


δὴ σοῖς ϑεοῖς Dem. 24. 21. 


9. Ὅτι μή after negatives, except [== ὅ σι μή ἔστι, what is not]; as, Οὐ γὰρ 
ἦν κρήνη, ὅτι μὴ μία Th. iv. 26. 


10. οὐ γὰρ ἀλλά, for it is not otherwise, but, i.e. for indeed; as, Οὐ γὰρ 
ὠλλ᾽ ἡ γῆ βίᾳ ἕλκει Ar. Nub. 232. 


11. οὐ μένσοι ἀλλά, οὐ μὴν ἀλλά, yet no, but, i. 6. nevertheless, or nay rath- 
ers as, Ὁ ἵσσος πίσσει εἰς γόνατα, καὶ μικροῦ κἀκεῖνον ἐξετραχήλισεν " οὐ μὴν 
ὠλλ᾽ ἐπέμεινεν 6 Κῦρος Cyr. i. 4. 8. 


12. οὐχ ὅσι, μὴ ὅτι, οὐχ ὅσον, οὐχ, ὅπως, μὴ ὅπως, οὐχ οἷον, I do not say that, 
not to say that, &c., i. 6. not only, or not only not (the three first phrases usu- 
ally mean not only, and the three last not only not); as, Οὐχ ὅτι μόνος 6 Kei- 
Tay ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ ἦν, ἀλλὰ καὶ οἱ φίλοι αὐτοῦ, not only was Crito himself unmolest- 
ed, but also his friends, Mem. ii. 9.8. Μὴ γὰρ ὅτι ἄρχοντα, ἀλλὰ καὶ ods 
Ob φοβοῦνται, . . αἰδοῦνται Cyr. viii. 1.28. "Αχρησσοι γὰρ καὶ γυναιξὶν. .) 

μὴ ὅτ, ἀνδράσι, ‘not to say men,’ Pl. Rep. 398 6. Οὐχ ὅσον οὐκ ἠμύναντο, 
ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἐσώθησαν Th. iv. 62. ‘Qs οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι οὐχ ὅπως τιμωρήσαιντος, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐπαινήσαιεν, that the Lacedemonians hid not only not punished, but 


408 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. [BOOK 111, 


had even commended, H. Gr. vy. 4. 34. Οὐχ ὅσως δῶρα δούς Vii. 7.8. Μὴ 
ὅπως ὀρχεῖσθαι ἐν ἐνθμῷ, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ὀρθοῦσθαι ἐδύνασθε Ογτ. 1. 8.10, Πεσαύμεδθ᾽ 
ἡμεῖς, οὐχ ὅπως σὲ παύσομεν Soph. El. 796. 

Nore. Οὐχ ὅσι is sometimes although [not because, denying an inference 
which might be drawn] ; ; as, ᾿γγυῶμαι μὴ ἐπιλήσεσθαι, οὐχ, ors ΩΝ καὶ 
φησιν ἐπιλήσμων εἶναι Pl. Prot. 336 d. 


13. ofvexa and ὁθοὔνεκα [== σούτου ἕνεκα, ὅτι, te 530, 40. δ, 372. y], 
poet., on account of this, that —, because, and, with certain verbs, that; as, 
Znrw σ᾽ ὁθούνεκ᾽ ἐκτὸς αἰτίας ME τὶ I envy you [because] that you are free 
Srom blame, Aisch. Pr. 880. "Io6s votre πρῶτον, οὕνεκα “Ἑλληνές ἔσμεν Soph. 
Ph. 232. Οὕνεκα is sometimes used by the Att. poets, like a simple adverb, 
with the Gen. ; as, Γυναικὸς οὕνεκα, [because of ] for the sake of a woman, 
isch. Ag. 823. 

14. When two prepositions are combined, which occurs most frequently in 
the Epic, either one or both the prepositions are used adverbially (§ 657. 6), 
or one of the prepositions with its substantive forms the complement of the 
other ; as, "Aw@i regi κρήνην, round about the fountain, B. 305. As ἐκ μεγά- 
goo x. 388. [Περὶ πρὸ γὰρ ἔγχει Soe A. 180. Διαπρό P. 393. Llagez 
vou . . ἀργυρίου Hdt. iii. 91. ‘Fa’ ix βελέων, from beneath the weapons, 
Δ. 465. 


§ 672. VI. Position or Particues. 1. Prepositions 
regularly . precede the words which they govern. For the ac- 
centuation when they follow (which is chiefly poet., and in Att. 
pelts ‘only with περὲ governing the Gen.), see δῷ 730, 
731. N. 


Nore. The great fondness of the Greeks for connecting kindred or con 
trasting words as closely as possible often produces hyperbaton in the construe- 
tion of the preposition with its case, as well asin other constructions ; thus, 
IIgs ἄλλοτ᾽ ἄλλον, for ἄλλοτε πρὸς ἄλλον, isch. Pr. 2706. Παρὰ φίλης φίλῳ 
φέρειν γυναικὸς δ Id. Cho. 89. See ὃ 511. ὅ6, For hyperbaton in earnest 

entreaty, see ὃ 426. 6 


§ 673. 2. Connective and interrogative particles, with 
the exceptions mentioned below (Nore «), commonly stand 
first in their clauses. 


Νοτῆβ, « The following particles cannot stand first in a clause; ἄν (not 
for ἐών, ὃ 588), ἄρα (paroxytone), ad (poet. αὖτε), αὖθις (lon. αὖτις), γάρ, 
γί; δαί, δέ, δή (except in Hom. and Pind. ), δῆθεν, δῆτα, ϑήν (poet. ), κέ (Ep. hi 
μέν, μέντοι, μήν, νύν (enclitic; Ep. also νύ, § 66. «), οὖν, πέρ, ri, rol, roivuy, 
and the indefinite adverbs beginning with x (wort, σού, &., 4 63). Thus, 
Ὃ δὲ wsiberai τε καὶ συλλαμβάνει, and he is both persuaded and apprehends, 
i. 1. 8, 


β. “Or: is sometimes placed after a subordinate clause; as, Κύρῳ εἶπεν, εἰ 
airy doin ἱπσίέας χιλίους, Ori. . κατακάνοι [for dri, εἰ + .» κατακάνοι] i. 6. 2. 
"Edn αὐτῷ ταῦτα συμσροθυμηθένσι, ὅτι οὐ μεταμελήσει Vil. 1. 5. 


y. A sentence introduced by a connective often follows the Vocative, instead 
of including it. By this arrangement, immediate attention is better secured. 
Thus, Ἥφαιστε, σοὶ δὲ χρὴ μελεῖν ἐπισσολάς [for σοὶ δὲ, Ἥφαιστε), and you, 
Vulcan, must heed the commands, Aisch. Pr. 3. 


cH. 6.] POSITION. 409 


§ G74. 3. The adverbs ἵνεκα and χάριν commonly follow, but some- 
times precede, the genitives which they govern (ὃ 372. y). Observe the ar- 
rangement, Τῆς πρόσθεν ἵνεχα wsel ἐμὲ ἀρετῆς i. 4.83 and, Οὗσερ αὐτὸς ἕνεκα 
i. 9. 21. 


4. A particle is sometimes placed in one clause which belongs more strictly 
to another (cf. ὃ 616); as, Οὐκ᾽ οἶδ᾽ ἄν εἰ πείσαιμι [for οἶδ᾽, εἰ πείσαιμ᾽ ἄν] 
Eur. Med. 941. 


5. In emphatic address, the sign ὦ is sometimes placed as follows ; “EgsCos 
ὦ φαεννότατον Soph. Aj. 395. Oavydol ὦ Κρίτων Pl. Euthyd. 2719. ‘Hyis 
wi ὦ weds Διὸς Μέλισε Id. Apol. 25 c 


BOOK IV. 
PROSODY. 


Γλώσσης μείλιγμα. 
ZEschylus, Eumen. 


§ 675. Prosody treats of Quantity, of VER- 
SIFICATION, and of AccENT. 


CHAPTER I. 


QUANTITY. 


ἢ 676. In Greek, all vowels and syllables are 
divided, in respect to QUANTITY (i. 6. the time of 
their utterance according to the ancient pronuncia- 
tion), into the long and the short; and the long 
are regarded as having double the time of the short. 


Nore. Hence the unit in measuring metrical quantity is the short sylla- 
ble, or the breve (brevis, short), and a long vowel or syllable is equal to two 
breves.% For the marks of quantity (— ~), see ὃ 16. 4. 


§ 677. Quantity is of two kinds, natural and local. 
Natural quantity has respect to the length of the vowel in its 
own nature; but local quantity, to the effect which is produced 
by the position of the vowel in connection with other letters 
or syllables. With reference to the first distinction, vowels 
and syllables are said to be long or short by nature ; with ref- 
erence to the second, by position. Thus, in ὄμφαξ, both sylla- 
bles are short by nature, i.e. in the natural quantity of the 
vowels ; but both become long by the position of these short 
vowels before two consonants (δῷ 51, 688). 


Nore. The quantity of a syllable is always the natural quantity of 
the vowel which it contains, unless some change is produced by position. 


cH. 1.] NATURAL QUANTITY. 411 


Hence it is usual, in prosody, to regard the vowel as the representative of the 
syllable; and language is often applied to the vowel which in strict propriety 
belongs only to the syllable. Thus, in ¢u¢a%, it is common to say that the 
vowels are long by position; while, in strict accuracy, the quantity of the 
vowels themselves is not changed, but the sy/lables become long from the time 
occupied in the utterance of the successive consonants. 


I. Narurat Quantity. 


ἢ 678. Rue 1. The vowels ἡ and a, all 
diphthongs, all vowels resulting from contraction or 
crasis, and all circumflexed vowels, are long; as 
the vowels in ἡμῶν, πλείους, γλώσσᾶς (ὃ 94), dus 
(δ 58), κἄν (§ 40), λᾶς, ἡμῖν, πῦρ. 


Remark. All vowels which result from the union of two vowels have, 
from their very nature, a double time. See δὲ 25, 29-31, 723. 


§ 679. Rue Il. The vowels ¢ and ὁ are 
short ; as in φέρομεν. 


ἃ 680.° Roxie Ill. The doubtful vowels 
(δ 24. 6) are commonly short ; as in yAcuid:. 


To this general rule for the doubtful vowels there are many 
exceptions ; which renders it necessary to observe the ACCENT, 
the SPECIAL LAWS OF INFLECTION AND DERIVATION, the ΡΙΑ- 
LECT, and the USAGE OF THE POETS. 


A. Accent. 


__ $681. From the general rules of accent (§ 726), we 
learn, that in natural quantity, 


a.) Every circumflered vowel is long (§ 678). 


β.) In paroxytones, if the vowel of the ultima is short, the vowel of the pe- 
nult is also short; and, on the other hand, if the vowel of the penult is long, 
the vowel of the rere ts is also long. Hence, in μαινάδος, καρκίνος, and χλα- 
pvd0s, the vowel of the penult is short; and, in Avda, φοίνιξ, and κώμους, the 
vowel of the ultima is long. 


y-) In proparorytones and properispomes, the vowel of the ultima is short ; 
as in ἄρουρα, δύναμις, πέλεκυς " βῶλαξ, πρᾶξις, διῶρυξ. 


Β. INFLECTION. 


§ G82. Inthe common affixes of declension and conju. 
gation, the doubtful vowels are short, except cases of contrace 
tion, -α in the Sing. of Dec. I., and -ἄσϊ for vot in the nude 
Present. 

\ 


412 NATURAL QUANTITY. [Book Iv. 


Thus, Dee. I., Pl. Acc. «ὡς (δ 34), Du. Nom. -ὦ (δ 86), Aor. Pt. -cas, -σῶσᾶ 
(§§ 58, 132), Pf. Pl. 8. -κἄσι (δ 181. 2); see JY 5, 29, 30.— For special 
rules in regard to the Sing. of Dec. I., see §§ 92, 93; for -ἐξ, -¢#s in Dec. 
Iil., see § 116. For the dialectic affixes, see 44 8, 10, 15, 32. For -dos, 
becoming -ews in Dec. II., see ὃ 98.8. For the doubtful vowels in the aug- 
ment, see § 188. . 


G83. .Srectan Routes or tHe Tuirp Deciension. 
1. The doubtful vowels are long in the last syllable of the 
root, 

a.) If the characteristic is νυ; as, wasy, παιῶνος « δελφίς, δελφῖνος - Φϑόρ- 
xug, Φόρκῦνος. Except in the adjectives μέλῶς, μέλἄνος, -ἄλᾶς, τάλᾶἄνος, and 
in the pronoun ¢/s5, φνος. 

B.) In most palatals, if a long syllable precede; as, ϑώραξ, ϑώρῶκος " μάσ- 
wk, μάσειγος " πέρδιξ, πέρδικος " κήρυξ, κήρῦκος. 

y-) In words in -ἰς, -:fos, and in some orytones in «ἐς, -id0g ; 88, deus, dove 
" fogs κνημίς, κνημῖδος * σφραγίς, σφραγῖδος. 

3.) In a few other words ; as, κέρας, κέρᾶσος" Ψάρ, Ψψᾶρός" youd, γρῦσός. 
— None of these words are pures, except γραῦς, yeass, and ναῦς, vais. None 
of them are /abials, except a few monosyllables, in which # is the characteris- 
tic; as, pip, plats+ γύψ, γῦσός. None of them are neuters in -a, -wros. 


2. Monosyllabic themes are long; as, xis, xidg* μῦς, μῦός " 
πῦρ, nvgés. Except the pronoun tis. 


Nore. In accordance with this analogy, the neuter ra» (4 19) is length- 
ened. 


3. Nouns in -αων, and in -ἰων, G. -ἰονος, have commonly 
the « and: long; as, ondwy, κίων (G. xiovoc); but Δευκαλίων 
(G. -fovoc). For comparatives in -/wy, see § 159. a. 


8 684. Srzcian Rutzs or Consucation. 1. Before 
the OPEN TERMINATIONS, 

a.) « is short, except in ἰἄομαι, to heal, κἄω, and κλάω (ὃ 267. 8). ---- In 
Epic ané lyric poets, the « is sometimes long for the sake of the metre. 

b.) s is commonly long; thus, xoviw, to cover with dust, xgiw (δ 282) But 
ἀΐω (1; § 189. 4), ἰσδΐω (§ 298); δέδια ( 58) ; π΄ ἵἕομαι, ἔα τον (ὃ 278). 


c.) νυ is variable; thus, ἀνόω (8 272. B), δακρύω, to weep, Fiw (ὃ 219), 
κωχ ὕω, to hinder ; ippiny (§ 264). 


2. Before the REGULAR CLOSE TERMINATIONS, 


a.) In lingual and liquid verbs, the doubtful vowels are short; thus, ὀνομοἄ 
vw, ovouiina, Irion, ἔβλιίσα (§ 275); κομίσω, xexdutna (YJ 40); κλύξω, to 
rinse, F. κλύσω, A. ἔκλύσα" τέτᾶκα, ἰτἄθην (§ 268); κέκρίκα, κέκρί μα, " 
(§ 217. a); πίσλύμα, (ὃ 270). Except βρίδω, to weigh down, F. βρΐσω, A. 
ἔβρῖσα. : » 

B.) In pure verbs, —(a) « is short, except when the theme ends in -ἄω pure, 
or “φάω , thus, crow, ἔσπἄκα (ὃ 2319); ἰσκέδᾶσα, γελάσομα, (2 219. a, 293); 


a. 1. BEER .VATION. — DIALECT. — AUTHORITY. 413 


but, εἴασα, ϑηράσω (δ 918). ---- (Ὁ) « is commonly long ; thus, κονΐίω (1. b), 
- FB. xoview, Pf. P. κεκόντμαι. But ἔφθίμαι, ἐφδίμην, and, i in the Att. poets, gé7- 
ow, ἔφθισα (δ 278).—(c) ν is variable; thus, F. ἀνόσω, δακρύσω (1. C)s 
See, also, ϑύω (§ 219) and χέω (ὃ 264). 


3. Before the TERMINATIONS OF VERBS IN -μι, the doubtful 
_ vowels are short, except in the Ind. sing. of the Pres. and 
Impf. act., and in the 2d Aor. act. See § 224. 


4. Before a CHARACTERISTIC CONSONANT, 


i.) In the theme, a is commonly short, but « and v long; thus, λαμβάνω, 
μανθἄνω ς͵ 390); κλίνω (8 269); 3 Cae ὀδύρομα, (§ 270). But ἱκάνω 
(§ 292), «΄ἵνω, φϑίνω Ep., φδίνω Att. (§ 278). 


ii.) In the liquid Fut., and in the 2d Aor. (§ 255. 3), the doubtful vowels 
are short, but in the quid Aor., and in the 2d Perf., they are long; thus, et 
νῷ, Trivw, ἔκρινα, ἔσλῦνα (§ 56). ἔλᾶξον, ἔθι γον; ἐσύθόμην (ὃ 290); ἐσἄγην, 
ἐμΐγην, ἐζ ὕγην (ὃ 394); λέλαάκα, κέκριγα, μέμσκα (ἢ 236. 2). -- Except 2 
A. ἐάγην (ὃ 294; Att. ὥ, Ep. commonly @). See, also, ὃ 286. E. 


C. DERIVATION. 


§ 685. Rute IV. Derivatives follow the 
quantity of their primitives. 


This rule applies to compounds, as well as to simple derivatives. In applying 
the rule, observe ὃ 307. R. Thus, SngZw, F. ϑηράσω, Pf. P. rebigduos- ϑηρᾶσι- 
μος, ϑήρᾶμα, ϑηράτής, ϑηρᾶτός " πρόθυμος (πρό, ϑῦμός), ἔνστμεος (ἐν, στμή). 

Nores. (a) For the quantity of the different terminations of derivation, 
see J 62, §§ 305-321. Forr paragogic, see δ᾽ 150. γι The final s in com- 
pound adverbs (§ 321. c) is likewise sometimes long. (6) For the lengthen- 
ing of an initial vowel in the second part of a compound, see ὃ 326. R. In 
some compounds, a is lengthened without passing into ἡ; as, λοχᾶγός (λόχος, 


"ἄγω). 
D. Diaect. 


§ G86. The Doric a for ἡ is long; and a, where the 
[onic uses 7, is commonly long ὧ 44. 1). See also ὃ 47. 


E. Avurnority. 


§ 687%. For doubtful vowels which are long, and which 
are not determined by the rules already given, observe the 
usage of the poets, and the marks of quantity in the lexicons. 


Among the most familiar examples are "ὥτη, destruction, ὀπᾶδός, follower, 
σφραγίς, seal, πρᾶχύς, rough, φλῦδρός, talkative, wixia, outrage, ᾿ἄνία (1), grief, 
ἀκριξής, exact, ἀξίνη, axe, δίνη, whirlpool, nde vOs, oven, κινέω, to move, κλίνη, 
bed, Arps, hunger, μῖκρός, small, xn, victory, outros, crowd, σιγή, silence, χα- 
λῖνός, bridle, ἄγκῦρα, anchor, γίφῦρα, bridge, εὐθύνη, account, ἰσχῦρός, strong, 
nivddves, danger, λύση, grief, wies;, wheat, σσλἄω, to plunder, ὕλη, forest, QUAN, 
tribe, χοῦσός, gold, ψψῦ;χή, soul. 

Bo * 


414 QUANTITY. ᾿ [Boox Iv. 


. Nore. Vowels, whose quantity is not determined by general or special rules, 
are said to be long or short by authority, i. 6. the authority of the poets. . 


II. Locat Quantity. 


ᾧ 655. Rute V. A vowel before two con- 
sonants or a double consonant is long (δὲ 51, 
677. N.) ; as in ὄμφαξ, ἐλπίζοντες μάψ. 


Nore. This rule of position holds, when either one or both of the conso- 
nants are in the same word with ‘the vowel; and commonly, also, when both 
consonants or the double consonant begin the next word. 


§ 689. Exception. When the two consonants are a 
mute followed by a liquid in the same simple word, the quan- 
tity of the vowel is often not affected, especially in Attic po- 


etry. 
Notes. 1. This exception results from the easy flowing together of the 
mute and liquid, so that they produce the effect of only a single consonant. 


2. In the Att., the quantity of the vowel is commonly not affected, if the 
mute is smooth or rough, or, if middle, is followed by g. A middle mute fol- 
lowed by any liquid except g commonly renders the vowel long. Thus, the 
penult is regularly short in πέσλος, τέκνον, worpos, δίδραχρμος, γενέθλη, Μελέα. 
yes, χαράδρα > and long in σσρεδλός, ἁγνός. 


8. According to Porson, the tragic poets sometimes leave a vowel short be- 
fore the two liquids ρον. 


§ 690. Remark.’ A short vowel is sometimes length- 
ened before a single consonant or another vowel, especially in 
Epic poetry. This occurs chiefly in the following cases: 


1.) When the consonant may be regarded as doubled in pronunciation. This 
applies especially to the liquids, and in the case of these (chiefly initial ἡ, 
cf. § 64. 1) sometimes extends even to Attic poetry ; as, Αἰόλου [as if -ολλ-} 
x. 36, δὲ νέφος A. 274, πολλά λισσομένη Ἐς 358, tus’ ῥέαον Soph. Ad. T. 
847, μέγα ῥάκος Asch. Pr. 1023. 


2.) When the digamma (ὃ 22. 3) has been dropped; as, ya'o tev (Fides, 
§§ 142. 4, 143. β] 1.419, xfv i κύνες Χ. 42, σπρῦὴς οἶκον [Faiver] I. 147.— 
Epic usage appears to have been variable in respect to the digamma. It some- 
times appears to have had the force of a consonant, and sometimes only that 
of a breathing. 


3.) Before a masculine casura (δ 699. 4), and sometimes, without a cesura, 
by the mere force of the arsis (ὃ 695); as, ὄνομιᾶ " Odew .. 366, dad ἕδεν Z. 
62, ἀπδέρσῃ D. 283, 'ahdsards ὥς J. 309, Siyarigd ἥν E. 371, ὅγ᾽ ὀλδῆσι A. 
342. ; 


Norse. In Hexameter verse, one of three successive short syllables, a short 
between two long syllables, and a short syllable at the beginning of a line, 
must of necessity be made long. The second case sometimes occurs in the 
thesis (§ 695). Thus, daroviscba: BR. 46; ᾿Ασκληστοῦ δύο B. 731 (cf. ᾿Ασκλη- 


et 


cx. 1.] POSITION. 415 . 


«ἰοῦ υἱόν A. 194), βλοσυρῶστο ἰστεφάνωτο A. 36, Ἕως ‘6 ταῦδ᾽ A. 193; "Eau. 
δή (F) X. 379, Φίλε κασίγνησε A. 145, Διὰ μέν Γ΄ 357 (cf. Καὶ δά 358), 
*Agts, "Agss Εν 31. See other examples above. 


§ 691. Rote VI. A long vowel or diphthong 
at the end of a word may be shortened, if the next 
word begins with a vowel. 


Remarks. 1. In the thesis of Hexameter and Pentameter verse (§§ 704, 
705), this shortening is the general rule; as, Ἡ μεσέρῷ ἐνὶ οἴκῷ ἐν “Agysi σηλόθε 
πάτρης. A. 30. Tiss, ὁ μὲν Kersérod, ὁ δ᾽ ἄρ᾽ Kigirod ᾿Ακτορίωνος. Β. 621. 


2. This rule does not apply to the Iambic and Trochaic metres of the drama, 
as there the hiatus is not allowed. 


3. A long vowel or diphthong is sometimes shortened before another vowel, 
in the middle of a word; as, ἔμ παζον v. 379, οἷος (or) N. 275, φποϊοῦτος Soph, 
Ph. 1049, δείλαζος Ar. Plut. 850. See also ὃ 150. y. 


4. Some explain this shortening by supposing the long vowel (7, w, = εξ, 00, 
§ 29. «) or diphthong to be half elided before the following vowel (οὔκο᾽ iv) 5 or 
the subjunctive of the diphthong to be used with a consonant power ({uaayov). 


8 692. Rute VII. The last syllable of every - 


verse is common. 


That is, the metrical pause at the end of the verse renders the quantity of 
the last syllable indifferent; and it may be regarded as either long or short 
according to the metre. : 


Nore. In some kinds of verse, the scansion is continuous; i. e. the verses 
are formed into systems (§ 700), at the end of which only a common final 
‘pyllable is allowec, the preceding syllables being all subject to the rules of 
prosody, as though in the middle of a verse, 


§ 693. Remarks. 1. In respect to quantity, both natural and lo- 
cal, the different dialects and kinds of poetry vary greatly. The greatest li- 
cense appears in Epic poetry, which arose before the laws and usage of the 
language became fixed ; and the least in the dialogue of comedy, which con- 
formed the most closely to the language of common life. Of elegiac, lyric, 
and tragic poetry, the two former approached more nearly to the Epic, and the 
latter to the comic. 


2. In giving the rules of quantity, never adduce position, unless some 
change has been made from the natural length of the vowel. For convenient 
distinction in metrical analysis, a vowel whose quantity is to be referred to 
Rules I. and Il. may be said to be long or short by nature; to Rule IIL, 
by the general rule for the doubtful vowels; to Rule IV., by derivation; to Rule 
V., by position before two consonants, or a double consonant; to Rule VI., by po- 
sition before a word beginning with a vowel; to Rule VII., by position at the end 
of the verse. When the quantity is not determined by general rules, cite spe- 
cial rules; or if these do not apply, adduce authority (ὃ 687), cesura, arsis, 
the necessity of the verse (§ 690), &e. 


416 3 VERSIFICATION. _ [Boor 1v 


CHAPTER II. 
VERSIFICATION. 


§ 694. Greek verse is founded upon RHYTHM, i. 6. the 
regular succession of long and short quantities. The simplest 
and most familiar rhythms are those in which a long syllable 
alternates with one, or with two short syllables (_ J .,. U_, 
MRS Ss i 

Nore. In versification, the elementary combinations of syllables are termed 
FEET; regular combinations of feet, VERSES (versus, a. turn); and regular 
combinations of verses, STANZAS, STROPHES (σφροφή, a turning round), or SYS- 
rms (δ 700). 

§ 6935. The long syllables are naturally pronounced with 
a greater stress of the voice than the short. This stress is 
termed arsIs (ἄρσις, elevation), while the alternate weaker tone 
is termed THESIS (ϑέσις, depression). These terms are also 
applied to the parts of the rhythm which are thus pronounced. 
In the exhibition of metres, the arsis (also termed metrical ictus) 
is marked thus (’). 

Norrs. a. As one long syllable is equal to two short, the partial substi- 
tution of 4 _ for + in the arsis, and of _ for _ _ in the thesis, may be 
made without affecting the rhythm. In this way, as the short syllables have 
more vivacity, ease, and lightness, and the long syllables, more gravity, dig- 
nity, and strength, the poet has the power of greatly varying the expression 
of the verse; while, at the same time, the facility of versification is very much 


6. In the common kinds of verse, the metrical ictus is determined by the 
prevailing foot. Hence in Trochaic and Dactylic verse, every foot receives 
the ictus upon the first syllable; while, in Iambic and Anapestic verse, every 
foot receiyes it upon the second, except the anapwst and proceleusmatic, which 
receive it upon the third. 


§ 696. In the series, + - + VK, the thesis is 
equal in time to the arsis (ὃ 676), and the rhythm is termed 
equal or quadruple (_ . . = 4 breves); but in the series 

~+se2zv,the thesis is half the arsis, and the rhythm is 


ἃ, 
termed triple ( - = 8 breves). 


Remarks. 1. Of these, the former is the more stately in its movement, 
and the more appropriate to those kinds of verse which are farthest removed 
from common discourse; while the latter has more nearly the movement of 
common conversation, and is hence better adapted to the more familiar kinds 
of verse, and to dialogue. 


2. Not only do the equal and triple rhythms differ from each other in ex 


cH. ".] RHYTHM. — FEET. 417 


pression; but the same rhythm has a different expression, according as it 
commences with the arsis or the thesis. In the former case (Dactylie 1 _ _ 
|». . | 42 , and Trochaie_1 . | ες | i _), the movement, passing 
from the heavier to the lighter, has more ease, grace, and vivacity; in the 
latter (Anapastic__41|_2_ || _ 4, and δα 1 |_ 1] _ +), 
the movement, passing from the lighter to the heavier, has more decision, em- 
phasis, and strength. 


3. Other rhythms arg formed by doubling the arsis, or by prolonging the 
thesis, or by variously compounding simple rhythms. Thus, by doubling the 
arsis, we obtain the rhythms, _ 1 1 tt ἐ 4 _, and rt 


ee -- »-Ξ.-ὄ΄ -.,5 YS 


“1... Of these, the first, according to its division into feet 


Δ bod Set 


(§ 697), is Cretic Τὺ ΤΙΣ. 4, Bacchic 18 1 [ou u| 


~ + 4, or Antibacchic 1 1 1 4 1 _ | 4 4 ; and the second, Chori- 
TR a te ht, SAepastie. ++. oh wl ais 
ει ε “ἘΣ Tonic 2) 1 tf ~~ Ὑ Ἐπ τ 4,.or Falling Ionic 


pel PAL BY ieee ah) ee Sa ‘Verses, in which the equal ‘ia triple rhythms 
are united, are termed ‘logacedic (λογαοιδικός, from λόγος, discourse, and ἀοιδή, 
song; see Rem. 1 above). The most irregular kinds of verse are termed poly- 


schematist (worvexnudrioros, multiform) and asynartete (ἀσυνάρτητος, disjointed). 


ᾧ 697. Feer of the same metrical length are termed 
isochronous (ἰσόχρονος, of equal time). In the table of feet 
below, the measure of Class I. is two breves; of Class II., 
three ; of Class III., four, &c. 


I. Πυῤῥίχιος, Pyrrhic, oe μένε. 

IL. Ἴαμξος, TIambus, Iamb, asda! μένω. 
Teoxaios, Xogsios, Trochee, Chore; _ J μῆκος. 
ὙΤρίξραχυς, Tribrach, Εν vs μένομεν. 

Π. Δάκευλος, Dactyl, Sa Ree δώσετε. 
᾿Ανάσπαιστος, Anapest, Pa A BD ἰδέλω. 
Σσπονδεῖος, Spondee, at SA σώζω. 
᾿Αμφίξρωαχυς, Amphibrach, Tae ἔδωκεν. 
Προκελευσμαςικός, Proceleusmatic, ἐφ εν λεγόμενος. 

IV. ᾿Αμφίμωκρος, ἹΚρητικός, Amphimacer, Cretic, ο.,. _ εἰ δώσομιαι- 
Βακχεῖος, Bacchius, Sig dam des λέγωνται. 
᾿Αντιξάκχειος Antibacchius, aes σώξωμεν 
Παίων α΄, Peon | ΡᾺ te cap tees δωσόμι: 05 
Tlaiwy β', Peon 11.) ἈΡΩΓῊΝ ἐγείρι μεεν. 
Παίων yy’, Peon IIL, ji eae ibianre. 
Tleiwy δ΄, Peon IV., Te eu re ‘yeorsCnge 

Ve Χυρίαμξος, Choriamb, pr SSE σωξομεένων. 
᾿Ανείσσαστος, Antispast, ~~ sty tigmpesy. 
AsiapSos, Diiamb, ye Ae! ᾿σοφωτέρων. 
Δισρόχιαιος, Ditrochee, 2 ynkh ata y αἰνέσαιτε. 
᾿Ιωνικὸς ἀπὸ μείζονος, Falling Ionic, de, Abie βουλεύεσε. 
᾿Ιωνικὸς ἀπ᾽ ἰλάσσονος, Rising Ionic, a he SO ἰδελήσει. 
Μολοσσός, Molossus, co le oe μνηστήρων. 


418 VERSIFICATION. | BOOK Iv. 


‘VI. ᾿Εσπίσριπος a’, Epitrite I., iste sites ἐγείρωνται. ὦ 
"Exirgiros β΄, Epitrite IL. » ὅτ οδεν ει ὰ εὐπροσώπων- 
᾿Ἔσίσρισος γ᾽» Epitrite IIL, ας ἡγουμένων. 
᾿Ἐσίσριτος δ᾽» Epitrite IV., ———V .ββουλεύσειε. 

VIL. Asypios, Dochmius, ~~ _ ἐδουλευόμοην. 
Δισαόνδειος, Dispondee, __ __ ss βουλεύσωνσαι. 


Norrs. a. The Pyrrhic appears to have been so named from its use in the 
war-dance (πυῤῥίχη) ; the Iamb, from its early use “in invective (iérrw, to 
assail); the Trochee from its rapid movement (rgizw, to run) ; the Dactyl, 
from its resemblance to the finger (δάκαυλος) in containing one long part and 
two short ones, or from the use of the finger in measuring, or in keeping time ; 
the Anapest, as the Dactyl reversed (avérairos, struck back); the Spondee, 
from its use in solemn rites (σπονδή, libation); the Bacchius and Pon, from 
their use in songs to Bacchus and in pans; the Tribrach as consisting of 
three short syllables ; the Amphibrach, of a short on each side of a long; the 
Amphimacer, of a long on each side of a short; the Antibacchius, of a Bac- 
chius reversed ; the Choriamb, of a Choree and Iamb; the Diiamb, Ditrochee, 
and Dispondee, of two Iambs, &c. I shall be pardoned, I trust, for adding a 
few lines from Coleridge’s Metrical Lesson to his Son. 

“ Trochée | trips frém | long t5 | shGrt. 
From long to long, in solemn sort, 
Slow Spon|dée stalks ; | stréng foot! | yet ill able 
Evér td | cOme ip with | Dactyl tri|syllablé. 
Tam|bics march | frdm short | t6 long. 
With & léap | and & bound | thé swift An|&peésts throng. 
One syllable long, with one short at each side, 
Amphibra|chys hastes with | & stately | stride.” 


β. Iambic, Trochuic, and Anapestic verses are commonly measured, not by 
single feet, but by dipudies or pairs of feet (διποδία, double foot, from δίς and 
πούς). When they are measured by single feet, a verse of one foot is termed 


a monopody ; of two, ἃ dipody; of three, a tripody; of four, a tetrapody, or 
quaternarius; of six, a hexapody, or senarius, &e. 


§ 698. Verses are named,—(l1.) From the prevailing 
foot ; as, Iambic, Trochaic, Dactylic, Anapestic. —(2.) From 
somé poet who invented or used them, or from the species of 
composition in which they were employed ; as, Alcaic, from Al 
ceus ; Sapphic, from Sappho; Heroic, from its use in cele 
brating “the deeds of heroes.—(8.) From the number of 
measures (i. 6. of feet, or dipodies, ὃ 697. 8) which they contain ; 
as, monometer (μονόμετρος, of one measure), dimeter (diuetgoc, 
of two measures), trimeter, letrameter. — (4.) From their degree 
of completeness ; thus a verse is termed acatalectic (ἀκατάλη- 
xtoc, not leaving off, sc. before its time, from «- priv. and κατα- 
λήγω). when its measure is complete ; catalectic (καταληκτικός), 
when its last foot is incomplete; brachycatalectic (βραχύς, 
short), when it wants a whole foot at the end; hypercatalectic 
(ὑπέρ, over), when it has one or two syllables over; and ace- 


CH. 2.] KiNDS OF VERSE. —CHSURA. 419 


phalous (ἀκέφαλος, headless) when it wants a syllable at the 
beginning. 

Remarks. a. A catalectic verse is said to be catalectic on one syllable (in 
syllabam), on two syllables (in dissyllabum), &c., according as the imperfect 
foot has one, two, or more syllables. Dactylic verses ending with a spondee 
or trochee (§ 692) are by some regarded as acatalectic, and by others as cat- 
alectic on two syllables ; 6. g. the common Hexameter (ὃ 704). 


β. A lyric verse sometimes begins with an introductory syllable, termed an 
anacrusis (ἀνάκρουσις, striking up); or with two such syllables, forming what 
is termed a base (βάσις, foundation). In these introductory syllables, the 
quantity is commonly indifferent. A base sometimes consists of more than 
two syllables, and the term is sometimes applied to a monometer in any spe- 
cies of verse. 


y+ In the dramatic poets, exclamations often occur extra metrum (i. e. not 
included in the metre); as, Bed! Eur. Alc. 536, 719, 1102. Ti φῶ, Soph. 
Ed. C. 315. Térawa ! Ib. 318. 


§ 699. Czsura. Composition in verse consists of two 
series; the metrical series, divided into feet and verses; and 
the significant series, divided into words and sentences. These 
two series must, of course, correspond in their great divisions ; 
but if this correspondence is carried too far, it gives to the 
composition an unconnected, mechanical, and spiritless char- 
acter. The life and beauty of poetry depend essentially upon 
the skilful and varied interweaving of the two series. The 
cutting of the metrical series by the divisions of the significant 
series is termed ca@sura (Lat. from ceedo, to cut). It is of two 
principal kinds; the cesura of the foot, and the cesura of the 
verse. The former is the cutting of a foot by the ending of a 
word ; the latter is the cutting of a verse by a pause permitted 
by the sense (termed the c@sural pause). 


Remarks. 1. (a) The cesura of the verse is more frequently, but not 
necessarily, a cesura of the foot. (ὁ) When a foot-cesura separates the arsis 
from the thesis, it is likewise termed a ce@sura of the rhythm. (6) A cesura is 

. sometimes allowed between the parts of a compound word; as, Kar μ᾽ of|c? 
vEATT||yadroors | πεῖθοῦς. Asch. Pr. 172. (d) A syllable immediately pre- 
ceding a cesura is termed a cesural syllable. Ἶ 


2. The coincidence of the divisions of the metrical series with those of the 
significant series is termed di@resis (διαίρεσις, division). The most important 
dizreses are those at the end of verses, systems, or stanzas. A foot-dizresis 
occurs whenever the division of words corresponds with the division of feet. 
Hence a verse-cesura may be a foot-diwresis; 6. g. the pastoral (Rem. 5). 


8. The verse-cesura (often called simply the cesura) not only contributes ~ 
to the proper interweaving of the metrical and significant series, but affords a 
grateful relief to both the voice and the ear. See Rem. 6. ἐν 


4. When the cexsura follows a syllable pronounced with the arsis, it is 
termed masculine; with the thesis, feminine. A cesura in the second foot is 


420 VERSIFICATION. [Book w 


named triemim (rginuieeon:, from resis, three, hys-, half, and μέρος, part, occur 
ring after three half-feet); in the third, penthemim (πέντε, five); in the fourth 
hephthemim (tard, seven); in the fifth, enneémim (ἐννέα, nine), &c. These 
names are also given to verses, or parts of verses, consisting of 14, 23, &c., 
feet. 


5. The exsura often occurring in Hexameter verse after the fourth foot 
(which is then commonly a dactyl) is termed the bucolic or pastoral cesura 
from its prevalence in pastoral poetry. 


6. The expression of the verse is affected by the place of the cesura. In 
general, the earlier cwsuras give to the verse more vivacity; the later, more 
gravity. The most frequent cesura is the penthemim. The effect of the 
cxsura in producing metrical variety will be seen by observing that the two 
most common metres, the Hexameter and Iambic Trimeter, are divided by the 
two most common cxsuras, the penthemim and hephthemim, into two parts, 
having the ratio of 5 and 7, of which (with the partial exception produced by 
the feminine cesura in the faeces the one always begins and ends with 
the arsis, and the other with the thesis. 


§'700. Metrical composition is either in MONosTICHS, 
SYSTEMS, or STANZAS. (a) Monosrticus (μογνόστιχος, of a single 
line) are formed by the repetition of the same metrical line, as 
in Hexameter verse (§ 704), Iambic Trimeter (ὃ 712), &c. 
(δ) Systems are formed by the repetition of similar rhythms, 
with continuous scansion (§ 692. N.) and an appropriate close. 
See §§ 708, '714,'718. (c) Sranzas (also called strophes) are 
formed by the union of different kinds of verse. A stanza 
consisting of two lines is called a distich (δίστιχος, of two lines) ; 
of three, a tristich; and of four, a tetrastich. | 


Nores. 1. The most common systems are easily arranged in dimeters, with 
here and there a monometer; and close with a dimeter catalectic. See 


2. The Greek choral odes were written in stanzas of very varied structure, 
but commonly arranged in duads or triads (sometimes in tetrads or pentads). 
A duad consists of two stanzas, corresponding in metre throughout. Of these 
the first is termed the strophe (σεροφή, turning round, stanza), and the second 
the antigtrophe (ἀντισσροφή, counter-turn, or -stanza). A triad consists of a 
atrophe afd antistrophe, preceded, divided, or followed by a third stanza of 
different metre, which according to its place is termed prodde (xpewdss, from 
πρό, before, and 427, ode), mesode (μέσος, middle), or epode (iwi, after). Of 
these, the epode is far the most common. The odes of Pindar are written 
each in a peculiar metre, but nearly all in strophes, antistrophes, and epodes. 
In the same ode, the strophes and antistrophes are all written in one metre, 
and the epodes all in a second, different from the first. In the drama, on the 
contrary, the metre of one duad or triad is not repeated in a second. 


ᾧ 4201. Remarks. 1. In scanntna, observe not only the division 
into dipodies and feet, but also the arsis or metrical ictus (§ 695), and the 
verse-cesura (§ 889). Unless these are,carefully marked, tbe metrical char- 
acter and expression of the verse are lost. 


2. Synizesis (§ 30). (a.) In Epic poetry synizesis is very frequent 


ca. 2.) DACTYLIC VERSE. 421 


Py am ~~ ας 


especially when the first vowel is +; thus, ta, 14%, τῶι ἢ £0, $01, tov} a, “ῳ, 
as, Πηληϊάδεω A. 13 3 χευσίῳ ἀϊνά 15; See § 121. 2, 423. We find more 
rarely aes ; Mlb) ἑαῖς "ἦν, iM 105 1} 005 vo; &e. Synizesis sometimes occurs 
between two words, when the first is ἤ, i, δή, μή, ἐπεί, or a word ending in 
the affix -ἢ or -»; as, i οὐχ E. 349, δὴ ὄγδοον ne 261, Πηλείδη er’ A. 277, 
ἀσξίστῳι οὐδ᾽ P. 87. 


(b.) In Attic poetry, synizesis occurs chiefly, — (a) In the endings -εως, 
-twy, -εα of Dec. III. (δ 116. a). — (6) In a few single words and forms ; as, 
Sits Eur. Or. 399.—(c) In the combinations 4 od and μὴ οὐ, which are 
always pronounced as one syllable. —(d) In some other combinations in 


which the first word is 4, 4, μή, ἐπεί, or ἐγώ" as, wh “idévee Bur. Hipp. 1335, 
ἐγώ « siz’ Soph. Ph. 585. 


8. Hiatus. Hiatus between words was admitted the most freely in Epic 
poetry, where however it may be often removed by the insertion of the di- 
gamma (ὃ 22.5). It was the most studiously avoided in Attic poetry, es- 
pecially in the Tragic Trimeter (§ 712), where it was scarce allowed, except 
after the interrogative +i, and some interjections, or words used in exclama- 
tion ; as, of yw! ἐγώ! Aisch. Ag. 1257. 


ᾧ ZO. 4. In the following exhibition of metres, the division of feet 
will be marked by a single bar (|); the division of dipodies by a double 
bar (||); and the verse-cesura by an obelisk ( 7), sometimes doubled ( 1). 
A base is denoted by B. In the examples which are given, the accents and 
breathings are mostly omitted, that they may not interfere with the marks ot 
quantity ; and these marks are employed alike to denote the metrical quan- 
tity, whether natural or local. Hence the common syllable at the end of a 
line (ᾧ 692) is marked according to the rhythm in which it occurs. Some 
examples are added of analogous metres in our own language. 


A. Dactytic VERSE. 


§ 703. The place of the fundamental dactyl is often sup- 
plied by a spondee (_ 


=e) at Se we, bee Fe 


§ 704. I. The common Hexamerer or Heroic Verse 
consists of six feet, of which the first four are either dactyls or 
spondees, the fifth commonly a dactyl, and the sixth always a 
spondee. 


Remarks. 1. When the fifth is a spondee, the verse is termed spondaic, 
and has commonly an expression of greater weight or dignity. This occurs 
most frequently when the verse ends with a word of four syllables: 


2. The favorite cesura of the verse is the penthemim, which is almost 
equally masculine and feminine (δ 699.4). After this, the most frequent cx- 
suras are the masculine hephthemim, and the pastoral (ὃ 699. 5). — Even 
when the penthemim is not the printipal verse-cesura, it is yet seldom wanting 
as a foot-cesura. It is stated, that in the first book of the Iliad, 290 lines 
have the masc. penthemim, 315 have the fem., and only 6 have neither. 

36 


422 VERSIFICATION. ᾿ [Βοῦκ Iv 


: 2. 3 
ἦΛὋΛμωμω.ω,....ὕ. tte Taos τ τὸ 
t 4 


Αλλᾶ nk! κῶς ᾿ΑΦΥ εἰ, ἵ κρᾶτξ 'ρῦν δ᾽ "Fat | μῦθόν "ἔ᾽ σελλὲν. A. 25. 
Σσεξμμᾶτ᾽ ᾿ἕ χῶν ἐν | χερσὶν ἵ ᾿ξ, κηφόλοῦ | ᾿Α πδλὶ χῶνδς. A. 14. 

ΑΙ xiv | πῶς ᾿ἀρ᾿ νῶν κνισισῆς  αἰ᾽ γῶν τέ τέ Asta. A. 66, 

Ἢ τοῦ ‘iy’ | ‘ws εἱπῶν κἄσ᾽ te | ᾿ξζὲ τὸ . 1, ποισὶ δ᾽ "a νέστῆ. A 68. 
| Ba δὲ κἄτ᾽ | Οὐλυμίποιῦ κἄ ρῆνῶν, 1] χωδμε ἱνὸς κῆρ. A. 44. 
Coleridge's “ Ηοηιογὶς Hexameter Described and Exemplified.” 


Strongly it | bedrs us a/léng ¢ in | swélling and | limitless | billows, 
Nothing be|fére and | nothing be, hind, ¢ but the | sky and the | dcean. 


ἢ 705. Il. The Exzciac Penramerer consists of twe 
dactylic penthemims (Ὁ 699. 4), the first containing two dac- 
tyls or spondees with a cesural syllable, and the second two 
dactyls with a final syllable. It commonly alternates with the 
Hexameter, forming what is termed, from its early use in plain- 
tive song, the Elegiac Metre. 


ScHEME AND EXAMPLEs. 


pete OS PR tole 
͵ 


sere 


"Aort ut | Saeopo'vn, ἵ Sivélete Avis, T! ἣν "Ayélud eva 
Exod’, “ὅτ᾿ | "és Τροῖ! ἣν T| "ἔστλἔξ | νηῦσὶ 95) ἧς, 

Ebest |vg wot | κλῦθι, t κα! κἂς δ᾽ ᾿ἄσδ | κηρᾶς "alacant. 
Lor μὲν | τοῦτό, Sia, T\ σμικρόν, ἔϊ μοῖ δὲ ui |ye. Theog. 1] 


Described and Exemplified by Coleridge. 


"In the Hex|dmeter | rises ¢ the | forintain’s | s{lvery | cdlumn ; 
‘In the Pen|tdmeter | dye {| falling in | mélody | back. 


§ 706, Ill. Other Dactylic Metres are, (a.) Pure, con- 
sisting of dactyls only ; (b.) Impure, consisting of dactyls and 
spondeés ; (c.) Holic, containing, in place of the first foot, a 
mere base (δ 698. 8); (d.) Logawdic (§ 696. 3), in which 
dactyls are united with trochees. Thus, 


1. DIMETER. 


(a.) Μυσεῦδδδ' κδς δόμός. Ar. Nub. 303. 
(b.) ADONIC Gros | rea ΠῚ σ τινὶ, | Sins». Sapph. er 
(b.) Hypercat., Dactylie Penthemim. ‘Aapalived πᾶ ρδν. JEsch. Sup. 844. 


2, TRIMETER. 
.) Πδλλᾶ γᾶρ | “ὥστ᾽ txt μᾶνττς. Soph. Tr. 112. 
" Puerecratic(B.| 102 | 1 _). "Hadi ar φιλᾶν | ᾽ἤτδρ. Pind. 0.1.6. 
GLYCONIC. Τό σὸν | rol πἄρχ] δεί γμ᾽ 'f χῶν, 
(Β.1... ....{.«---.) Τὸν ody | datudvi, | σῦν σῶν, ᾿ὥ 
Ἰλαμὸν | Οἵδὶ' σό! δά, Beira». Soph. id. T. 1198. 


cn, 2.] DACTYLIC AND ANAPESTIC VERSE. 423 


(d.) Marty ‘t|aa φῦ] γοῖμ᾽ "ἄν. AEsch. Pr. 907, 
fa.) Hypercat. [léaaz βρδ' τῶν δὶ  μεῖῦμεξ νά. AEsch. Sup. 543. 


3. TETRAMETER. 


(a.) ALCMANIAN. Mao’, *éyz, | Καλλγδισὰ ϑύγα!τέρ Ards. Alem. 

(b.) Spondaic. Ζεῦς σὄλῦ) ἀνδρὸς | aur yilvatxds. Ausch. Ag. 62. 

(c.) Γλῦκῦ atxgdy ᾿ἀ μα χᾶἄνδν |"dexirdy. Sapph. 20 (37). 

(@.) Lesser. ALCAIO) ζω os ener ere ἠδ ΚᾺ 
Χρῦσδκδιμᾷ Ζέἔφῦ ρῷ wt|\yetod. Alc. 5 (24). 

(a.) Hypercat. Τῶν pi γα) λῶν Δᾶνὰα ὧν 'ὑπδϊ κλῇζομεν ἄν. Soph. Aj. 225. 


4. PEenrAMETER. 
) "Arestldas μα χΥ μοῦς, t'Pd%|4 Λᾶγδιδαιτᾶς. AEsch. Ag. 123. 


c.) Orvis, | "a QIAE | waz, ἡ Aiyi vai, καὶ ’%\razéez. Theoc. 29. 1. 
d.) ᾽Ω wiars, | ᾿ῶ lv ἃ τἄ χαινᾶ, | νῦν of. Soph. El. 1314. 
Πυρφδρος | ‘os τότε | μαινόμε νᾷ ξῦν | ‘doug. Soph. Ant. 135, 
Garren , .Ἅ1.».ϑ. ΣΈ τ ως 
Καὶ γὰρ | αἱ φεῦ ysl, ree |as δὶ ᾿ὡξεῖ, 
Ar δὲ | δῶρα | μῆ δὲ κἔ τ’, | ᾿αλλᾶ | δῶσεϊ. Sapph. 1. 31. 
Puatacian (B.| 1 | 1 | + Ὁ} ΤΑΣ ῶνΣ 


Tov Ast δνεδμᾶ χᾶν, τῦν | ᾿δξῦ. xstex. Theoc. Ep. 20. 
5. HeEXAMETER. 


(a-) Πρὸς of yi'lvertdds, 1 ᾿ῶ φίλός, | "a B8x¥ μῶτἄτὅς | “Ἐλλᾶδί. Eur. Sup.277. 
(b.) ᾿Αλλ’ ’a | παντοι!ς Oras! cards ᾿ἀ] μειξδμξ᾽ ναι χἄρϊν. Soph. El. 134. 
(c.) Κέλδί ματι rlva | τὸν χἄρι)εντὰ Με) νῶνὰ κἄλέσσατ. Alc. 49. 

(4.) Ἢ“ «ἀλὰ μᾷ civt | τᾶν δύσα' λωτὸν ‘E\aa ets | ᾽᾿άρχᾶν. ABsch. Pr. 165. 


B. Awnapzstic VERSE. 


§ 707. The place of the fundamental anapest is often 
supplied by a spondee or dactyl, and sometimes, though very 
rarely, by a proceleusmatic(. ._  — ene OLE REE τ 


ΕΣ 


-,...νὉ-᾿}" 


§ 708. I. The Anapestic, from its strong, even move- 
ment, was a favorite metre for marching songs; and it was 
greatly employed in systems, by the dramatic poets, as inter- 
mediate between the lambic of the common dialogue, and the 
lyric metres of the choral odes. 


Remarks. 1. The general distinction (to omit modifications and excep- _ 
tions) was this. The Iambic portions of the drama were spoken while the 
performers were stationary ; the lyric, while they were dancing; and the Ana- 
pexstic, while they were coming in, or going out, or marching to and fro. 


2. These systems are scanned continuously (§ 692. N.), but are usually ar- 
ranged, so far as convenient, in dimeters (whence the common name of this 
species of verse, the ANAPzstic Drmerer). They uniformly close with the 
dimeter catalectic, called, from its use in proverbs (xagoipias), the paremiae 
verse (see § 700.1). The use of the parcemiac, however, is not confined to . 
the close of regular systems. 


424 VERSiFICATION. [Book Iv 


3. This verse requires a cesura after each dipody, except in the parcemiac, 
This cesura is sometimes deferred, so as to follow a short syllable at,the begins 
ning of the next dipody. 


4. In respect to the feet, the following should be observed. (a) An ana- 
pest must not follow a dactyl in the same dipody, and rarely follows it in suc- 
cessive dipodies. (ὁ) A dactyl rarely follows an anapest or spondee in the 
same dipody. (6) The third foot of the parcemiac is regularly an anapest ; so 
that the system may close with the cadence of the common Hexameter, A 
spondee, however, is occasionally admitted (cf. § 704.1). 


ScHEME AND EXAMPLES. 


Dimeter Acatalectic. Pareemiac. 
1. 2. 3. 4,0 1. 2. é 4 
ΞΡ εκ el ae tS is ah Se ae τὰ. 1. 
PES (Rie ac 5 ies Sey Bacto ee I 


"Aare o ὃ | Maids {|| πσδμσατ' ὃς tive 
Πελᾶσεῖ ὃ d6uors, {}} ‘av τ᾽ ᾿ἔ στ᾿ vorady 
Σαεῦδεῖς  κἄτὲ χὼν Tl πράξεϊἂς, ᾿ἔ πεῖ 
Γενναῖ ὅς ᾿ὥνῆρ, 
Ν Aiysi, | παρ᾿ ἔμοι || δέδδ κῆ' σατ. Eur. Med. 759. 


Δερχϑηῆθ᾽ | otats ἵ|} ατατίατσῖν. Alsch. Pr. 98. , 
“H-aig | δόρίλῆσ τὸς t Fo’ ’av  λοτπσῆ. Soph. Aj. 146. 
Though her éye | shone otit, ¢ || yet the lids | were εχ ἃ, 
And the glince | that it gave ὕ || was wild | and unmix’d 
With dught | of chinge, ὕ || as the éyes | may seém 
Of the rést|less who walk f || in a trovib|led dréam. 
Byron’s Siege of Corinth. 


8 799. Π. The combination of the regular dimeter with 
the parcemiac (cf. §3 713, 717) forms the Anapzstic Terra- 
METER CaTa.ecric of comedy, also called, from its use by the 
great master of comic verse, the Aristophanic. 


ScHEME AND EXAMPLES. 

i; @ 2. 3. Y ie 5. 6. Ψ, 8. 
ere Pe fee ΣΟ Say gt 
“a. a RS ας αὶ μῆνα ef τὰ ae an Be 
Ru ee eS τ 3S 


Καὶ μῆν | εὔδῦς γ᾽ t || aos Boaleidav t || eter ras  '᾽δρχῆς || Zarddeilka 

Τῆς ‘a\uerigas T || ‘ws οὔ δὲ μιῶς J || ‘array | 'Feriv ἢ βασιλεῖίας. 

Τὶ γᾶρ «τ δαϊμῶν t || καὶ μᾶκξιρίσσον ft || μαλλὸν | νῦν Pollet δίκᾶσὶ τοῦ, 

"H’ seit carted, {1} ᾿ἢ dsr νὄτερον tll Zaid», | καὶ ταῦ! τᾶ γέρον ros. 

Ar. Vesp. 548, 

At your wérd | off I gé, ¢ |] and at stdrt\ing will shéw, } || convinc\ing the 
stiff ||est opin ion, 

That regdjlia and thréne, f || sceptre, king|dom and créwn, {|| are but dirt ! 
to judf||\cia) domin ion. 


en. 2.] ANAPESTIC AND IAMBIC VERSE. 425 


First in pléas'ure and glée, t|| who abdéund | more than wé; } |] who with 
liix|ury néar|ler are wéd|ded ? 
Then for pénlic and frights, ¢ || the world throtigh | none excites, {|| what 
your di|cast does, en || tho’ gray-héad/ed. 
Mitchell’s Translation. 


§ ‘710. Ill. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of 
other kinds of Anapestic verse, both common and logaadic 
(ὃ 696. 3) ; 


Monom. Hypere. TeYedanu|etévi||xav. Pind. O. 13. 1. 

Dim. Hypere. Tord μὲν | wi gtca||udrieds | καὶ "ἄρισίϊ τὸς. Eur. Herc. 1018. 

Trim. Brachye.* Σὲ μεν οὖν  κἄταἄλευ σὸμεν, ᾿αἰμιάρη || κἔφαᾶλῆ. Ar. Ach- 
285. 

Locampic. 1An.,1 Iam. Νερέεᾷ | δὲ cers. Pind. N. 6. 34. 

1 An. 3am, Δέχομεσ θα καὶ | dav | γένδς. Ar. Thesm. 312. 

1 An., 4 Iam. Cat. Xéaerraiv | “ἔχα [τί τὸν δὲ καὶ μὸν. Pind. O. 4. 14. 

2 An. 1 Tam. Τὸ μὲν ᾿Αρὶ χλο χοῦ | μέλος. Pind. O. 9. 1. 

2 An., 2 Iam. Cat. "OAai'yd|Seaviay "axt\ixdy. Ausch. Pr. 547. 

2 An., 3 Iam. Lv κυρ! σ᾽ ᾿ἄδδκη) ὃς ἡ δόνξ, | πὖδθεν. Eur. Ion, 1447. 

8 An.,2 Iam. Aoriois | μὲν ᾽ἄεῖ | κἄτὰ πἄν) τᾶ δῆ | redxdv. Ar. Av. 451. 

4 LIam. ᾿ἴδσα εἰ γᾶμῶν, | “ire vay | 'δμδπα)ςρῖδν. Asch. Pr. 558. 


C. Iamsic VERSE. 


§ 711. The place of the fundamental iambus may be 
supplied by a tribrach (. _ — UW J), except at the end of a 
line. To add dignity and variety to the verse, the first foot of 
a dipody is very often lengthened to a spondee, and not unfre- 
quently to a dactyl or an anapest. 


Nore. The comic poets admit the anapest in every place except the last 
of a verse or system. The same license exists in tragedy in proper names 
containing two short between two long syllables. 


§ 722. 1. The ἴάμβιο Trimeter Acararectic (often 
called the Senarius, § 697. 8) is the principal metre of dra- 
matic dialogue (ᾧ 708. 1). 


_ Remarks. 1, This verse has for its cesura the penthemim or the heph- 
themim, the former much the most frequently. The latter is sometimes an- 
ticipated by the elision of the syllable after which it would properly fall, form- 
ing what has been termed by Porson the quasi-cesura. Lines occur, though 
rarely, which have neither of these cesuras. 


2. The Tragic Trimeter admits the tribrach in every place but the last ; 
the spondee in the Ist, 3d, and 5th places ; the dacty] in the Ist and 3d; and 
the anapest in the Ist. The feet which are admitted only in comedy or in 
ae names (ὃ 711. N.) are placed within parentheses, in the following 

eme, 


36 * 


426 VERSIFICATION. [ΒΟΟΚ Iv 


1. 2. s. 4. 5 6. 
eo ae Utes Adsl oo hs Bical ab te 
-ἐ. - “.ὕ. a BP ΚΕΝ oh, ΤΡ ΘΝ τυ 
ΠΝ Ἐν ἡ τ δινὰς “—" 
τῷ ὦ et gag (ἐπ 
Spy Ws Borrow y tomeleay 


Ἐγὼ | δ᾽ ᾿ἄτδλ! μος flux t συγ γένη | 9ὲδν. Aasch. Pr. 14, 

Lxibav | ᾿ς οἵ μόν, Talal τὸν εἴς || “Foaluiav. Ib. 2. 

Tlaveds | δ᾽ tvay||xa t τῶν! δὲ wor || τδλμᾶν | oye bet». Ib. 16. 

Τῆς ᾽δρΙθό 20} λοῦ Of usr δὸς ἡ at || ria τᾶ wai. Ib. 18. 

‘E’xdriy|xaerll vey ἱ πρὸς βιᾶν | χεῖροῦ | wévov. Ib. 353. 

Térae|rov “1π| πὸμέδοντ᾽ t | ᾽᾿ἄπὲ ᾿στεῖλεν | πἄτῆρ. Soph. Ed.C.1317 
Keveer|es® μῇ || φεγδέ σθ᾽ «ΤΊ ᾿ἐγῶ || "πεκδν | ΠΙἄρῖν. Eur. Hee. 387. 


Meveaals μῆ || γνῶμᾶς | ὕπο) στῆσᾶς | σοφῶς. Soph. Aj. 1091. 


Love watch|ing Mad||ness ¢ with | undl|terd!ble mien. 
Byron’s Childe Harold. 


ὁ 713. Il. The lamptc Terrameter Caratectic is pes 
culiar to comedy. It consists of two dimeters, the second cat+ 


alectic (cf. §§ 709, 717) ; and has commonly a cesura after 
the first dimeter. 


Nore. The same metre (following of course accent and not quantity) is a 


favorite verse of modern Greek poetry. In our own language, it is chiefly - 
used in comic songs and ballads. 


t 


pie a at Pe a 
τ τῷ tw poh  ΣΘ. 
n Ἔ 


NO eon | χἄρῖν || κ᾽ ὁ BFolmoris 1} ὅ σὸς | κἔ κλη! κὲ δεσ' ρ. 
Οὐκοῦν | πᾶλαϊ | δῆσοῦ λέγω, T I ot δ᾽ αὐτὸς οὔκ || ᾿ἄκοῦ εἴς. 
‘O” δεσί πὐτῆς || yao φῆϊσὶν 'σί μας ἡ] δέως || 'ἁπιν! τᾶς. Ar. Plut. 260. 
Aur6|ra ris||es 6’er | the hills, t || by gracelful Hovirs || atténd ed, 
And in | her train, || a mérjry trodp ὕ || of bright-ieyed Loves || are blénd|ed 
Percival’s Classic Melodies, 


§ 714. Ill. The Iambic verse sometimes occurs in sys 
tems of the common form (§ 700. 1); as, 


Tat’ αὐ τὸν ᾽ν δρκωϊ τἄτᾶ, καῖ 
Γάσαργ ζῆ καὶ || τοῖς ᾿ἔνι τἔροῖς 
Καὶ rors | κὄλοζς, 
Χραῶς | κολᾷ { τὸν ᾽ν δρᾶ, Ar. Eq. 458. 


cH. 2. *AMBIC AND TROCHAIC VERSE. 427 


§ 715. IV. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of 
other kinds of Iambic verse (for the iambus in logacedic verse, 
see § 710). | 
Monom. Hypere. ‘E*ror|ués ᾿σμ᾽ νῶν. Pind. P. 6. 7. 

Dim. Brachye. ‘Yate ci ot || ϑρᾶσδς. Soph. El. 479. 

Dim. Hypere. 38 vor | od vor || κἄφη  ξὶ σᾶς. Soph. Ph. 1095. 

Trim. Cat. ‘Ors ατιὲν ὕσερ! ὃ χὸν | σθένος || xedrar|dy. Alsch. Pr. 429. 

Tetram. Tay δεῖ! νᾶ 72a@|| cay, der νᾶ δ᾽ εὐ] ροῦσῶν | πρὸς αὐ] θαιμοῶν | σἀϑῆ. Soph. 

Cid. C. 1077. 

Scazon (σκάζων, limping) or CHOLIAMBUS (xwAlaulos, lame Iambus), ἃ 
form of the Trimeter, introduced by Hipponax, and having, for satiric or 
comic effect, a spondee in the last place. 

Ez δ᾽ ᾿ἐσὶσὶ xeallyids | σὲ t καὶ || rzge| χρῆστῶν. Theoc. Ep. 21. 


D. Trocuatc VERSE. 


ὁ 5 ὃ. The place of the fundamental trochee may be 
supplied in any part of the verse by a tribrach (_ _ — T T L). 
The last foot of a dipody is often lengthened to a spondee or 
anapest. The dactyl is admitted in proper names, except in 
the 4th and 7th places. 


71. I. The Trocnaic Terrameter CAaTALEcTIC oc- 
curs in both tragedy and comedy. It consists of two dimeters, 
the second catalectic (cf. §§ 709,'713) ; and has commonly a 
ceesura after the first dimeter. 


1 2 3 4, 5. 6 ἤ. 8 
«ἢ, ὦ bey ὑπ ἐξ ὁ ἐὰν ΕΞ wt Bet CANOE. ὦ» ὠὰ; 
tvevlivw Lvwr Eo Levee}; lrer ivr 

ae Vigoss Y apr 
pA Pe ἀρᾶς 
ΟΡ Ω Δδω-Πέωοω “΄ῳ«- ἴδ wm in prop. names.) 


Πολλᾶ! χοῦ σκὸ } ποῦντές | 'ἥμᾶς ἵ || ets zi πᾶνδθ᾽ εὐ] οἤσξ᾽ σὲ 
Τοῦς πρὸ ποῦς καὶ || viv BY array ἵ || catty | ing [[οἕ στὰ] ποῦς. 
ες Ἂν Vesp. 1101. 
Βη141] re|fléction || ἀπά in'spéction, f |] néeds it, | friénds of || mfne, to | sée, 
Yn the | w4sps and || tis your | chorus, + || w6ndrous | sfmilllari|ty. 
Mitchell's Translation. 


~§728. II. The Trochaic verse sometimes ‘occurs in 
SysTEMs of the common form (ὃ 700. 1) ; as, 


Ta φρὲ |art, || τῶν τ᾽ ᾿ξἸ λατῶν, 
‘Ory πό] δου μεν, || aver | φοῦτῶν 
Τηνδὲ | νῦνῖ 
Ta» 91 ὃν πρᾶὄσϊ εἴσᾶ τί. Ar. Pax, 578. 


428 VERSIFICATION. [ΒΟΟΚ IV 


8 719. Ill. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, ot 
other kinds of Trochaic verse (for the trochee in logacdic 
verse, see § 706). 


Trim. Adper|g φωνῶν Fv|aeud¥llar σξ δτλῷ. Pind. 0.3.9. 
Trim. Cat. Try γᾶρ [᾿ἕν πδν! τῷ xd |CZevav||rar So\ar. Ib. 12. 4. 
Tetram. ᾿Ε σεῦ | wot ϑέ!ῶν “καὶ || μῦρτ] «ἀντ xé|Acvdds. Pind. I. 4. 1 


E. Orner MetrREs. 


§ 720. The metres which remain are Lyric, and for the 
most part admit with great freedom isochronous feet, or the 
substitution of two short syllables for one long, or of one long 
for two short. Examples are given of some of the most im- 
portant. 


1. Cretic System. Φᾧρδναϊσον | καὶ γενοῦ 
(2 ot) Πανδικῶς | εὐσέξῆς | πρδξένδς, 
Tay φύὕγαδα | μῆ xeddas, 
Tay ‘txabey | ᾿ἐκξζὅλατϊς 
Δυσθέοις | ᾽δρμέναᾶν. Asch. Sup. 418. 


2. Bacchic Tetram. Tis ᾿αχῶ, | εἴς tina  πρᾶόσξα'τῷ | μ᾽ kT γγῆς- 
BORE Te Αι ZEsch. Pr. 115. 
3. Choriambic System, closing, as is usual, with a bacchius. 
C1 1) Nov δὲ τὸν ἔκ | ϑημὲ τἕροῦ 
" — Τρμνᾶσχοῦ | λέγειν ot der 
Katviy ‘tras | φᾶνῆσει. Ar. Vesp. 526. 


4. Rising Ionic System. Πεσέρακεν | μὲν ὅ xigot|acirts Hd4 
(v4 1) Βασϊλειδς | crpteds εἴς ᾿ἂν τ αδρδν yetirive χῶρᾶν, 
Λυνδόδεσμῶ  σχῖδιᾷ πδρθὶ μὸν ἄμετιψᾶς. Asch. Pers. 65. 
Ἐν wig woe » 


ὃ. Pwonic Tetram. Cat. "O° μκἄρυ᾽ | Αὐτόμξνξς, t | ‘as σὲ μᾶκα)ριζόμεν, 
CS Αι, Παιδὰς ἔφ! «εὐσᾶς ‘cer t | χειρῦτέ xt ἰκωτἄςοῦς. 
: Ar. Vesp. 1275. 


6. Dochmiac System. Miéerrat orpxris | στρᾶτοσὲ div λγαῶν, 

"Pal σδλῦς ‘OOF λέως | xeddeduds ‘Irxtras. 

Ardigra xovts | μὲ πεῖθεῖ φἄνεϊσ᾽, 

% "Avaddes, ck ns, | Ect uos ᾿άγγέξλδς. ZEsch. Sept. 79 


Se τ, 4“ 


§ 72 1. Nore. An antispast (avricwaeros, drawn in contrary direc- 
tions) is a combination of an iambic with a trochaic rhythm, and admits in 
the first part any foot. which is admitted into Iambic verse, with the appro- 
priate ictus; and in the second part, any foot which is admitted into Tro- 
chaic verse, with the appropriate ictus. The addition to this combination 
of a long syllable (which, in connection with other rhythms, may be resolved 
into two short) forms a dochmits (3674103, oblique, crooked), which has con- 
sequently a triple ictus, with great variety of structure. Thus (1.)_ 1 ᾿ς τ; 
(2) ὦν ίδος at oe 3) ον υβ δ) ὍΤΟΥ 

U “ἢ 


=e RARE Sager yes Hares τὰν ἃ 


cH. 3.) ACCENT. 42y 


CHAPTER III. 


‘ACCENT. 


4 722. Ir every Greek word, one of the three last syl- 
lables was distinguished by a special tone of the voice. 


Remarks. 1. This tone is commonly spoken of simply as the tone, or the 
accent. Its precise nature we cannot now determine. It seems to have re- 
sembled, in some degree, but with important differences, that which we call 
accent in English orthoépy. That it never fell upon any syllable before the 
antepenult, shows that the Greeks felt the same difficulty in the utterance of a 
long train of syllables after their accent which we feel after ours. See also 
§ 733. 2. 


2. The versification of the ancient Greeks was founded upon quantity with- 
out regard to accent; that of the modern Greeks is founded upon accent with- 
out regard to quantity. We cannot resist the conclusion from this, that in the 
ancient language the distinction of quantity was the more prominent to the 
ear ; while in the modern language the reverse is strikingly true (§ 19). At 
the same time, the distinction of accent was evidently the more intellectual in 
its character (§ 734); and, if less marked by the ear, was far more so by 
the understanding. 


3. To those who pronounce the Greek in the usual method, according to 
quantity, the study of the accent is still highly useful, as serving, — (a) To 
’ distinguish different words, or different senses of the same word; as sii (en- 
clitic, § 732), to be, εἶμι, to go; ὃ, the (§ 731), ὅ, which; wires ; when? wort 
(encl.), once; ἄλλα, other things, ἀλλά, but; rso€sros, throwing stones, λιθό- 
ξολος, thrown at with stones (ὃ 739. ὃ). — (6) To distinguish different forms 
of the same word; as the Opt. βουλεύσαι, the Inf. βουλεῦσαι, and the Imp. 
βούλευσωι, (YY 34, 35). — (6) To ascertain the quantity of the doubtful vow- 
els (§§ 681, 726). —(d) To show the original form of words. Thus the cir- 
eumflex over rive, φιλῶ, δηλῶ, marks them as contract forms of the pure 
verbs σιμάω, φιλέω, δηλόω. --- (6) To show how words are employed in the 
sentence ; as in cases of anastrophe, and where the accent is retained by pro- 
clitics and enclitics (δ 730-732). 


4. Upon some of the minute points of accentuation, authorities and critics 
differ. But this only furnishes another point of analogy between the Greek 
accent and our own. Indeed, there is no subject, either in grammar or in any | 
other science, upon all the minutiw of which there is a perfect oneness of 
opinion. 


§ 72. In accentuation, a long vowel or diphthong in the 
ultima, and often in the penult, is regarded as forming two 


syllables (δῷ 29. «, 676).— We may say, in such cases, that 
the vowel or syllable forms two accentual places. 


Remark. In accentuation, the inflection-endings o. and o 
are not treated as long vowels, except in the Optative (cf. 


§ 41) 


430 ACCENT, | Boox Vv. 


Nore. This treatment of final a: and δι as short vowels appears not to have 
prevailed in the earliest form of the language, nor in the Doric dialect, which 
- was characterized by its closer adherence to old usage (8 735. a). In the 
Opt., it seems not to have prevailed from the natural dwelling of the voice 
upon the termination (§ 177). Traces of the old usage appear in the accent 
uation of so many Inf. forms upon the penult (§ 746); although the cxrcum- 

flex accent is not here excluded (cf. 726. R.). 


el 

§ 724. ι΄. Accentual places are counted according to the following 
method. The ultima is counted as the lst place, if its vowel is short, but as 
the lst and 2d places, if its vowel is long. If the ultima forms two places, the 
penult forms, of course, the 3d place, and completes the number which is al- 
lowed. If, on the other hand, the ultima forms only a single place, then the 
penult forms the 2d place; and, besides this, if its vowel is long, it always 
forms in dissyllables, and sometimes forms in polysyllables, the 3d place also. If 
the ultima and the penult form but two places, then the antepenult is the 3d 
place. In the following words, the numbers denote the accentual places ; 

1 21 3h 4.2 3 21 82 1 82 8. Ql 
dec, mais, hoyov, hoyos, πλούτου, πλοῦτος, πλοῦτοι, προσωποίς, 

821 8. 21 32 1 82 I 3 21 321 32 1 
προσωπον; ἕκουσαις; ἑκουσᾶ, Exovout, πολέμους, πολεμος, πολεμοι. 


2. An ascending line (5) was adopted by the Greek grammarians as the 
mark of an accented place, and a descending line (ἡ) as the mark of an un- 
accented place. A syllable in which an accented was followed by an unac- 
cented place received, of course,.a double mark (’‘). The words above, in 
which the accentual places are numbered, are all accented as far from the end 
as possible. If, therefore, all their accentual places were distinctly marked, 
they would be written thus; 
ϑές, mais, λόγὸὺ, hoyos, mhovtod, πλόὺὐτὸς, mhovtot, προσώποὸϊς. 
πρόσωὠπὸν, ἑκούσὰϊς, Exdvad, ἑκόὺσαὶ, πολέμοὺς, πόλὲμὸς, πόλὲμοὶ. 

3. But it is evidently needless, except for grammatical illustration, to mark 
unaccented syllables, and when the two marks (’*‘) fall upon the same sylla- 
ble, it is more convenient in writing.to unite them into one (“, or, as rounded 
for greater ease in writing, ~ or~). Dropping, therefore, the marks over 
the unaccented syllables, and uniting the double marks, we write thus; 
ϑές, παῖς», λόγου, λόγος, πλούτου, πλοῦτος, πλοῦτοι, προσώποις, 
πρόσῳπον, ἑκούσαις, ἑκοῦσα, ἑκοῦσαι, πολέμους, πόλεμος, πόλεμοι. 

4. The following words are accented upon the first place; δός, Sve, Sei, 
χείρ, παιδός, γυναιξί, βασιλεύς. The following, upon the second; βοῦς, φῶς, 
πῦρ, σοφοῦ, riens, vios, νέοι, λόγε, φίλοι, ζώναι, τέμνε, ὀστέον, βασιλέες, τιθέντι. 
The following, upon the third ; λόγων, παῖδες, γυναῖκα, σῶμα, σώματος, σωμά- 
σων, λείσω, λείσομεν, λείπουσι, ἔλειπον, λέλοιπα, ἐλελοίσειν, λεῖσε. 


§ 725. A syllable is termed acute, if it simply forms an 
accented place ; circumflexed, if it forms an accented followed 
by an unaccented place; grave, if it receives no accent; as - 
the final syllables in Angi, βασιλεύς " σοφοῦ, τιμῆς " loys, σῶμα. 


Awordis ( OXYTONEs Acute. 
Ps PerispomE, p if its Ultima is | Cireumexed 
rmed an f 


BarYTONE, Grave. 


3H. 3.] GENERAL LAWS. 43] 


. ( PAROXYTONE sla ‘ Acute. 
A word κι Paorsniseuam, bit its Penult is Circumflexed. 
termed a 


ProparoxyTone, if its Antepenult is Acute. 


'Nores. (a) The terms above are formed from the words σόνος (Lat. ac- 
eentus), tone, ὀξύς (Lat. aciitus), sharp, περισπσώμενος (Lat. circumflexus), bent 
round, circumflexed, βαρύς (Lat. gravis), heavy, grave, raga, near, and % 00, 
before. (Ὁ) The paroxytones, properispomes, and proparoxytones are all in- 
cluded in the general class of barytones. 


§ 726. To the principles of Greek accentuation which 
have now been given, may be referred, almost throughout, the 
following general laws of accent and accentual changes. 


I. Generat Laws or ACCENT. 


1. One accent, and only one, belongs to each word. 


Hence σύν and ὁδός, compounded, become σύνοδος " σύν and φέρω, συριφέρω. ---- 
For apparent exceptions, see §§ 731, 732. 


2. The accent never falls upon any syllable before the ante- 
penult. = 


Hence ὄνομα, μέγεθος become, in the Gen., évouaros, μεγέθεος. 


3. The antepenult can receive only the acute accent, and can 
receive this only when the ultima is short. 

Hence ϑάλασσᾶ, ἄνθρωπος, xescwrer, become, in the Gen., ϑαλάσσης, ἀνθρώ- 
σου, προσώπου. ---- For ϑάλασσαι, ἄνθρωποι; see ν 723. R. 


ΝΌΤΕΒ. a. If the ultima is long merely by position, still the antepenult 
. receives no accent ; hence ἐριδῶλαξ (#), though ἐρίξωλος.- 


6. In accentuation, s before w in the terminations of the Gen. and of the 
Attic Dec. IL. is not regarded as forming a distinct syllable (§§ 35, 95. 3. a, 
98, 116. «, 3); hence, Argsidew, πόλεως, πόλεων" ἀνώψγεων. So, also, with an 
intervening liquid, in adjectives compounded of γέλως and κέρας (δ 136. 1); 
AS, φιλόγελως, ἄκερως + and, according to the same analogy, the compound ad- 
verbs ἔκπαλαι; πρόπαλαι. 


4. The circumflex never falls upon any syllable that is no’ 
long by nature. 


Hence βοῦς, μῦς, πᾶς, become, in the Nom. pl., βόες, μὖύες (0), wdvres (ἃ). 


5. The penult can receive the circumflex only when the ul- 
tima is short by nature. 


Hence μοῦσα, νῆσος, σῦκον, become, in the Gen., μούσης, νήσου, σύκου. --- For 
μοῦσαι, νῆσοι, See ᾧ 728. R. ς 


Remark. In the old language and in the Dor. (cf. ὃ 723. Ν.), a final 
syllable long merely by position appears to have forbidden both the acute upon 
the antepenult, and the circumflex upon the penult. From the common ac- 
centuation (which forbade ἐρίξωλαξ, but permitted ἐριδῶλαξ, see N. a above), 


482 ACCENT. [Book Iv 


the circumflex upon the penult appears not to have been deemed quite sc 
great a remove from the end of the word aéftthe acute upon the antepenult 
.(ef. 723. N.), Even after the dropping of + in the 3d Pers. pl. of verbs 
§ 181. 2), some forms of the Doric retained the old accentuation ; as, ved 


Pore ἐγράφον. 
6. If the ultima is short by nature, and the penult is long by 
nature and accented, it must be circumflexed. 


Hence Ive, αἰών, γνώμη, Aresions, become, in the Nom. pl., ϑῆρες, αἰῶνες, 
γνῶμωι (ὃ 728. R.), "Argsidas. — For sibs, ναΐχι, ὥσφε, &e., see ὃ 732, ἃ. 


Il. AccentuaL CHANGES. 


δ 727. The accent is subject to the following changes: 
—(a) The acute may be changed to the circumflex; as, ϑήρ, 
ϑῆρες. ---- (Ὁ) The circumflex may be changed to the acute ; as, 
μοῦσα, μούσης. ---- (6) The acute may be softened upon the ulti- 
ma (Ὁ '729).—(d) The accent may be thrown back, that is, . 
transferred to a preceding syllable; as, γράφω, ἔγραφον. ---- 
(e) The accent may be brought forward, that is, transferred 
to a succeeding syllable ; as, Iie, Ineds. — (gf) The accent 
may be thrown upon the preceding word ; as, σῶμά μου (§ 732). 
—(g) The accent may be omitted; as, tavte* παρ ἐμοί" 
ὃ νοῦς" φιλῶ σε (δῷ 728. Ὁ, c, 731, 732). 


§ 728. Changes in the accent arise, principally, from, 


[.) The appition or toss of syllables; as, ὄνομα, ὀνόματος 
(§ 726. 2); ῥίπτω, διπτέω (ὃ 288) ; κοῦφος, κουφότερος (§ 156) ; 
πατέρος, πατρός (ἢ 741). See Ill. ο. 


Il.) Change in the quantity of vowels. See ὃ 726. 3-6. 
III.) ConTRAcTION, CRASIS, or APOSTROPHE, as follows. 


a. Conrraction. An acute syllable, followed by a grave, 
is contracted with it intoa Adages: (§§ 724. 8, 125); other- 
wise ¢he accent is not affected by contraction, except as the 
general laws may require ; as, γόος νοῦς, τιμάω τιμῶ " τίμαξ 
τίμα, τιμαοΐμην τιμῴμην " ἑσταύτος ἑστῶτος (ὃ 726. 6). 


RemArRK. Some contract forms are accented as though made by inflection 
without contraction ; or fall into the analogy of other words. Thus, 

1.) In contracts of Dec. II., — (a) The accent remains throughout upon the 
same syllable as in the theme ; as, περίπλοος, περισλόου, contr. περίπλους, περί- 
“λον. Gen. ἀγήρω ( 17).—(b) The Nom. dual, if accented upon the ulti- 
ma, is always oxytone; as, νώ, ὀστώ (9). — (6) Except in the Nom. dual, 
all simple contracts in -ovg or -ovy are perispome; as, χρύσεος χρυσοῦς ( 18), 
κάνεον κανοῦν, basket. —(d) In oxytones of the Attic Dec., the Gen. sing. has 
the acute; which may be explained by supposing one 6 to have been dropped 
from the original form (cf. ὃ 243. 2); thus, wads (Ἵ 9), G. vaso (§ 86), vad, 
by contraction νώ, νεώ (δ 98. B). 


cH. 3.] ACCENTUAL CHANGES. 433 


2.) The contract Acc. of nouns in -# is oxytone; as, ἤχόα ἠχώ (ἦ 14). 
So Dat. (xewri) χρῷ perispome (§ 104). These cases follow the analogy of 
§ 144. 

8.) The contract Gen. pl. of τριήρης (Ἷ 14), αὐτάρκης, and compounds in 
wéns is paroxytone ; as, σριηρέων φριήρων. 

4.) The Subj. pass. of verbs in -zs, and of Perfects used in the sense of the 
Pres., is often accented as though uncontracted; thus, ribwpas, «ἰθῃ, ribnras- 
δίδωρμαι- κέκτωμιαι, μέμνωμαι (§ 234). And, on the other hand, the Opt. 
pass. of these verbs is accented by many as though contracted; thus, σιθεῖο, 
φιθεῖσο" διδοῖο" κεκτῇο, κεκετῆτο. 

Nore. In dieresis, or the resolution of a diphthong, ἃ circumflexed sylla- 
ble is resolved into an acute and a grave; as σαῖς wdis. 


b. Crasis. In crasis, the accent of the first word is omitted. 
The accent of the second remains without change, except as 
required by ὃ 726. 6; as, ταὐτό, for τὸ αὐτό " τάλλα; for τὰ ἄλλα 
(yet some write τἀλλα). 


6. ApostropHe. When an accented syllable is elided, the 
accent is thrown back upon the penult, as acute; thus, δείν᾽ 
ἔπη, for δεινὰ ἔπη " πόλλ᾽ ἔπαϑον (πολλὰ). ---- Except in preposi- 
tions, and the particles ἀλλά, μηδέ, οὐδέ, and the poetic ἠδέ and 
ἰδὲ as, παρ᾽ ἐμοΐ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ. 


§ 729. IV.) The connection oF worps in discourse, as 
follows. 


A. Grave Accent. Oxytones, followed by other words in 
closely connected discourse, soften their tone, and are then 
marked with the grave accent (§ 14) ; as, ἐπὶ τὰ καλὰ καὶ ἀγαϑά. 


Excertion. The interrogative τίς, and words followed by enclitics (δ 732), 
never take the grave; as, Tis si; Who art thou? 

Nores. a. In the application of this rule editors vary. The best usage, 
however, retains the acute accent only in the case of unconnected words or 
phrases, and before the period, colon, and such other pauses as require to be 
distinctly marked in reading. 

B. The syllable over which the grave accent is written is still regarded as 
acute, although its tone is softened, and the word to which it belongs is still 
termed an oxytone. Syllables strictly grave are never marked, except for 
grammatical illustration, as in § 724. 


§ 730. B. Awnastropne. In prepositions of two short 
syllables, the accent is usually thrown back upon the penult, 
when they follow the words which they would regularly pre- 
cede, or take the place of compound verbs, or are used adver- 
bially ; as, δόμων ὕπερ, for ὑπὲρ δόμων" ὀλέσας ἄπο ι. 584, for 
ἀπολέσας (§ 653); πάρα, for πάρεστι ." ἄνα, for ἀνάστηϑι 


(ᾧ 653. ε) ; πέρι, in the sense of exceedingly (§ 657. 8). This 
oe Bae ; 


44 - ACCENT. — PROCLITicS, ENCLITICS. [BOCK !v. 


change of the accent is termed anastrophe (ἀναστροφής turning 
back). 

Norrs. (a) Grammarians except διά and ἀνά (except for ἀνάστηθι), to 
distinguish them from the Acc. Aja, and the Voc. ἄνα ({ 11, 16). (ὁ) 
Both in anastrophe and in the common accentuation of prepositions (§ 750. 2), 
the attraction of the accent towards the word upon which the preposition ex- 
presses its force will be observed. 


§ 731. C. Proctitics. A few monosyllables, beginning 
with a vowel, are commonly connected in accentuation with the 
ollowing word, and lose, in consequence, their proper accent. 
They are hence called atonics (ἄτονα, toneless), or, with more 
precision, proclitics (προκλίνω, to lean forward). They are, 
(1.) the aspirated forms of the article, 6, 7, oi, ai* (2.) the 
adverb ov, not ; (3.) the prepositions εἰς, into, ἐν, in, ἐξ, out of ; 
(4.) the conjunctions εἰ, if, ὡς, as. 
Nore. The proclitics retain their accent when they close a sentence, or 


follow the word which they would regularly precede. Hence, οὐ δῆσα - but, 
σῶς γὰρ οὔ" ὡς ϑεός, but, ϑεὸς ὥς ix κακῶν, but, κακῶν ἔξ. 


8 7322. D. Enctitics. Some words are attached, it 
accentuation, to the preceding word, and are hence called en- 
clitics (ἐγκλιτικός, from éyxiivw, to lean upon). They are, — 
(1.) The following oblique cases of the personal pronouns ; 
Ist Pers. μοῦ, μοὶ, μέ" 2d P. σοῦ, coi, σέ" 3d P. ov, οἵ, ἕ " viv, 
σφίσι, ope. For other enclitic forms of the personal pronouns, 
see Ἵ 23. (11.) The indefinite pronoun τὶς, in all its cases, 
and the indefinite adverbs πώς, πώ, πή, nol, nov, ποϑὶ, ποϑέν, 
ποτέ (Ἷ 63). (111.) The Pres. ind. of εἰμί, to be, and φημί, 
to say, except the 2d Pers. sing. —(1v.) The particles γέ, νύν, 
még, τέ, tol* the poetic ϑήν, xé(v), νύ, δά " and the insepara- 
ble -d¢.— See § 152. 2. 


R ΚΒ. a. (a) An enclitic throws back its tone, in the form of the 
acute t, upon the ultima of the preceding word ; as, ἄνθρωπός ἔστι" δεῖξόν 
fers εἴ ris σινά φησί μοι παρεῖναι. (6) If the ultima of the preceding word 
has already an accent, the accent of the enclitic unites with it, and disappears ; 
as, ἀνήρ σις" Φιλῶ cs. (6) The accent of the enclitic, if a monosyllable, is 
also lost after a paroxytone ; as, φίλος μον. 


b. An enclitic retains its accent,— (1.) At the beginning of a clause; as, 
Σοῦ γὰρ xearos ἰσεὶ μέγιστον. ---- (2.) After the apostrophe; as, πολλοὶ δ᾽ εἰσίν 
—(3.) If it is emphatic; as, ob Κῦρον, ἀλλὰ ci, not Cyrus, but you.—(4.) Τῇ 
it is a personal pronoun, preceded by an orthotone preposition which governs it ; 
a8, παρὰ ool, περὶ σοῦ, πρὸς σέ. But σρός με, and sometimes περί μου and 
webs ot, occur. — (5.) If it is a dissyllable, preceded by a paroxrytone; as, ἦν 
λόγος work ἰνωντίος σφίσιν. 


c. When ἰσσί is prominent in a sentence, it becomes a paroxytone; 88 
τοῦτ᾽ ἴσειν, it is 80. 


cH 3.] LETERMINATION OF ACCENTED SYLLABLE. 435 


ἃ. («.) An enclitic is often joined in writing to the preceding word, as if 
forming with it but one compound word; thus, μήτις, οὐδέποτε, ders. (.) 
This is always the case with the preposition -δέ, to; as, "Ολυμσόνδε, to Olym- 
pus, Eacvcivéds. (γ.) In pronouns and adyerbs compounded with -δέ (ὃ 150, 
q 63. IX.), the syllable preceding -δέ always takes the accent, which is acute 
or circumflex according to the rule in ὃ 744. (2.) In ἐγώ, ἐμοί, and ἐμέ, 
the accent is thrown back when γέ is affixed (§ 328. Ὁ) ; thus, ἔγωγε, ἔμοιγε, 
ἔμεγε. (s.) Efés and vaixy are accented as if formed by the attachment of 
enclitics. 4 


§ 7 2333. Nores. 1. A word, which neither leans upon the followie 
ror upon the preceding word, but stands, as it were, erect, is called, in distire- 
tion from the proclitics and enclitics, an orthotone (ὀρθόπονος, erect in tone). 


2. Both proclitics and enclitics are more abundant in English than in Greek, 
and these classes of words furnish another strong analogy between the Greek 
and the English accent (§ 722. 1). The words in English which are used 
in translating the Greek proclitics and enclitics are themselves, for the most 
part, either proclitic or enclitic. Thus, in the sentence, Give me the book (pro- 
nounced Givme thebdok), the pronoun me is enclitic, and the article the, pro- 
clitic. In the sentence, If John’s in the house, don’t tell him a word of this, 
the words Jf, in, the, a, and of, are proclitics, and the words is, not, and hin, 
enclitics. 


Il]. Derermination or AccENTED SYLLABLE. 


§ 734. Generar Principte. In each word, the accent 
belongs to that syllable upon which the attention is most strong- 


ly fixed. 


Nore. If, from the general laws of accentuation, this 5011, cannot receive 
the accent, it draws it as near to itself as possible. 


Remarks. 1. In the origin of language, the attention is absorbed by the 
greater distinctions of thought; but, as these become familiar to the mind, it 
passes to the less, and then to those that are still subordinate. Hence, in the 
progress of a language, its accent is subject to change, as well as the forms or 
its words, its vocabulary, and its constructions. In the Greek, as in other 
languages, the accent was originally confined to the syllables containing the 
essential ideas of words, i. 6. to their radical syllables (see §§ 83, 171). But, 
in proportion as these became familiar, there was a tendency to throw the 
accent upon those syllables by which these ideas were modified, either through 
inflection, derivation, or composition. This tendency would of course vary 
greatly in different classes and forms of words. It would naturally be the 
strongest where the root was the most familiar; or where the formative part 
was the most significant or characteristic. On the other hand, any strength- 
ening of the radical, or weakening of the formative part, would have a ten- 
dency to produce a contrary effect. In illustration of these tendencies (which 
of course are subject to the general laws of accent), it will be observed, that, 
—(a) In neuter nouns, the affix, from its inferior importance, almost never 
attracts the accent (§§ 737. i, 738. d).—(b) In demonstrative pronouns, the 
deictic -3s always draws the accent to the preceding syllable (§ 732. y), and 
the still stronger - always takes it upon itself (§ 150. γ). ---- (6) In verbs, 
the accent is always attracted by the augment, while it can never pass beyond 
it (δ 748. 4),—(d) The old weak root of the 2d Aor. (δ 257.1) yields the ac- 


436 : ACCENT. [Βοοκ Iv. 


cent ts the affix in several cases where the strengthened root of the Pres re- 
tains it (§ 746-748). — (e) In derivative adjectives, those endings which ex 

press most strongly character or relation attract the accent (§§ 737-—739).-- 
(f) In composition, the accent is usually attracted by that word which defines 
the other, and thus gives its special character to the compound (§§ 323, 739). 
In the active compound verbals, the idea of the action is more prominent than 
in the pussive; and hence appears to have arisen the distinction in § 739. ὁ. 


*§ @ ed. 2. That the different dialects should have often varied in 
accent will occasion no surprise in those who have compared the pronunciation 
of our own language in different parts of its nativeisle. That these differences 
are often neglected in our copies of the classics has arisen from the late period 
at which the marks of accent were introduced (§ 22. «), and the tendency at 
that time to conform every thing to the Attic standard (§ 4). From the 
testimony of the old grammarians we learn, that, — (a) The Doric was char- 
acterized by its adherence to general rules and old usage (δὲ 723. N., 726. 
R.). — (Ὁ) The Lesbian Aolic was characterized by its tendency to throw 
the accent as far back as possible. In words of more than one syllable, it is 
said to have admitted the accent upon the ultima in prepositions and conjunc- 
tions only, —(e) The Attic (to which the Ionic appears to have more nearly 
approached) was characterized by an expressive variety of accent, and a 
greater inclination to mark the minuter shades of thought and species of re- 
lation. 


A. Accent ΙΝ DECLENSION. 


$'736. I. The accent of the THeme must be learned 
from special rules and from observation. 


a. RuLes ror SmumpLE Worps. 


Spectra Rues or Dec. I. All contracts are perispome; as, Ἑρμῆς, μνῶν 
Of other words, —(a) All in -ας are paroxytone; as, ταμίας. ---- (Ὁ) Most in 
-ms are paroxytone, except verbals in -rns from mute and pure roots of verbs in 
-w, Which are commonly oxytone; as, ’Argsidns, ναύτης, ψάλτης, προφήτης, 
προστάτης δικαστής, ποιητής. --- (6) Nouns in -« short (§ 92) throw the 
accent as far back as possible; as, γλῶσσᾶ, λξαινᾶ, ἀλήθειᾶ, wri. — (d) Most 
abstracts in -:@, those in -cvym, and those in -s@ from verbs in -sdw ($§ 305. 
Ὁ, 308. a, 6), are paroxytone; as, copia, σωφροσύνη, xaidsia. —(e) Most other 
verbal@ in -α long or -, especially those formed after the analogy of the 2d 
Perf. (δ᾽ 307. R.), are oxytone; as, φυγή, φθορά, 


§ 737. Spectan Rures or Dec. II. (a) Adjectives in -ος preceded 
by a mute are commonly oxytone, especially those in -κος, verbals in -ros, and 
ordinals in -ore¢; as, κακός, ἀρχικός, ὁρᾶτός, εἰκοστός, χαλεαός, σοφός, δολιχός, 
ἀγαϑός. ---- (2) On the contrary, primitive nouns with a mute root are more 
frequently accented as far back as possible ; as, λόγος, κρόκος, πλοῦτος, ψάμα- 
gos. —(c) Allordinals not ending in -σσος are accented as far back as possi- 
ble; as, δέκατος. -- (ΑἹ Adjectives in -λος, -gos, and -vos (except those in 
-ivos denoting material or country, § 315. 6, 6) are commonly oxytone; as, 
ἀσπατηλός, φειδωλός, Ψιλός, αἰσχρός, φοβερός, πονηρός, λιγυρός, χλωρός, σέμινός, 
σεδινός, Κυζικηνός, Σαρδιᾶνός " ξύλινος, Ταραντῖνος. ---- (6) Nouns in -wos with a 
long penult are commonly oxytone; while adjectives in -y0os are commonly 
accented as far back as possible; as, ὀδυρμός, βωμός - χρήσιμος. --- ( 7) Nouns 
in -os pure are more frequently oxytone; as, γαός, δεός. υἱός. νυό;. ---- (0) Ver 


cn. 8.1 ΙΝ DECLENSION. 437 


bals in. -“:ος (δ 314. f), multiples in -ws 0; (° 138. 4), and most adjectives in 
-aios from nouns of Dee. I., im -οιος, and in -q;, are accented upon the penult 5 
AS, σοιητέος, διπλόος, ἀγοραῖος, ὁποῖος, twos. —(h) Adjectives in -sss, in -s0¢ - 
preceded by a consonant, and in -s0s joined immediately to the root, are com- 
monly accented as far back as possible, as, ϑήρειος, οὐράνιος, χρύσεος. — (i) 
Very few neuters are oxytone; and most neuters are accented as far back as 
possible (8 734. a); as, μόριον, ποτήριον, κορίιδιον, ὄρνεον, ἔλαιον. 


§ 738. ϑρεοιαι, Russ or Dec. ΠῚ. (a) All nouns in -ay, -sus, τῶ, 
ω (G. -00g), -ας (-αδος), -ἴς (-730-), all masculines in -7g, uouns of more than 
vue syllable in -is, and alfost all nouns in which the characteristic is » preceded 
by a, 8) ἥν Or i, are oxytone; as, πσαιάν, ἱππεύς, ἠχώ, αἰδώς, λαμπά:, -ἄδος, 
σφραγῖς» -ἶδος, 6 πατήρ, λιμήν, -tvos, λειχήν, -ἦνος, δελφίς, -ἶνος. ---- (Ὁ) All nouns 
in -swy, names of months in -wy, and most feminines and. augmentatives in τῶν, 
are oxytone; other words in -wy are more frequently paroxytone ; as, xuxewy, 
᾿Ανδεστηριών, χελιδών, aursrwv: Κρονίων, τρίβων, xAvdwv.—(c) Monosyllabic 
nouns which have the Acc. in: -α are commonly oxytone; those which are 
neuter (see d below), and most which have the Acc. in -», are perispome ; as, 
αἴξ, πούς, ϑήρ, ϑώς - rd φῶς, τὸ ve (so likewise the neut. adjective πᾶν, J 19); 
βοῦς, vats. — (d) In neuter nouns (ὃ 734. a), in words in -ξ and -Ψ, in verbals 
in -rwe, and in nouns in -is or -vs with the Gen. in -sws, the accent is thrown as 
far back as possible ; as, κέρας, τεῖχος, βούλευμα - κόραξ, καλαῦροψ (δ 726. R.); 
δύναμις, πέλεκυς. ---- (6) Female appellatives in -ς (§§ 306. N., 309 - 311) 
have the accent upon the same syllable as the masculine, except when this is 
a proparoxytone or dissyllabie barytone (in which. case the feminine commonly 
becomes oxytone); 88, αὐλητής, αὐλητρίς - πολίτης, πολῖτις- Πριαμίδης,» 
Πριαμίς - αἰχμάλωτος, αἰχμαλωτίς - Πέρσης, Ileecis, —(f) Simple adjec- 
tives are commonly oxytone, if the characteristic is a vowel ; paroxytone, if it 
is a consonant ; as, σαφής, ἡδύς " μέλας, χαρίεις (YY 17, 19). 5 


b. ΒῦΠΕ5 ror Compounp Worps. 


§ 739. In composition, there is a general tendency to throw the 
accent as far back as possible. But, — (a) Compound adjectives in -ns are 
more frequently oxytone ; as, εὐπρεσής (those in -wdxs are always paroxytone; 
so compounds of ἦδος, ἀρκέω, and some other words). — (6) Compounds in 
which -0s is affixed to the root of a verb united with a noun are commonly 
oxytone, if the penult is long; but if the penult is short, they are commonly 
paroxytone when active in sense, and proparoxytone when pussive; as, ciro~ 
σοιός (\ 327); λιθοξόλος and λιδόθολος (ὃ 326. a). — (6) Compound adjec- 
tives of Dec. Π1., with a palatal or lingual characteristic, in which the latter 
part is a monosyllable derived from a verb, are commonly oxytone; 6. g. all 
in -σφαξ, -rank, -ewk, -rewk, «ὅλης, -θνης, -xuns ; aS, ἀποῤῥώξ. --- (α) Words 
derived from compound words are commonly net accented as though them- 
selves compounded ; but their compounds again follow the general rule; thus, © 
κατασκευάξω, xaracxsvacres (ὃ 737. a), ἀ-κατασκεύαστος. ---- 68 § 734. ἢ, 


§ 7499. Il. In declension, the accent commonly remains, 
so far as the general laws permit, upon the same syllable as in 
the theme. ; 


Remarks. 1. In Dec. I., the affix -ων of the Gen. pl., as contracted from 
wy § 95. 3), is always circumtiexed. —Grammarians except, chiefly for 
the sake of distinction from other words, ἡ ἀφύη, anchovy, οἱ ἐτησίαι, trade- 

ai * 


438 ACCENT. — IN DECLENSION. [BooK 1¥_ 


winds, 6 χιλούνης, wild-boar, and ὃ χρήστης, usurer; Gen. pl. ἀφύων, &e. Fo. 
an apparent exception in adjectives in -os, see 2 below. 


2. In adjectives in -os, the feminine is accented throughout, so far as the 
general laws permit, upon the same syllable as the masculine; thus, φίλιος 
(Ἷ 18), φιλία, Pl. φίλιοι, φίλια, M. and F. φιλίων (as if a common form for 
the two genders, cf. ὃ 133. a, y, 3; the Dor. Gen. pl. in -av, § 95. 6, where 
the feminine has a special form, follows the rule in 1 above, as φιλιῶν) ; while, 
from the noun ἡ φιλία, friendship, φιλίαι, φιλιῶν " 80 καρξάτιναι iv. 5. 14, as 
properly an adjective. — In other adjectives, the feminine retains the accent 
of the theme, but subject to the same changes asin nouns of Dec. I.; as, ué- 
λας, μέλαινα, μελαίνης, μελαινῶν (4 19). Except poetic feminines in -ss«, be- 
longing to adjectives in -#; (§ 134. y) ; as, ἠριγενής, ἠριγένεια. Observe the 
accentuation of μία, μιᾶς, &e. (4 21). 


ἢ 54:3. 3. In Dec. IIL, dissyllabie Genitives and Datives throw the 
accent upon the affix; as, yuris, αἰγί, rea», ποσί, κλειδοῖν (4 11); πατρός, 
ἀνδρῶν, κυσί, ἀρνί (4. 12). : 

Notes. (a) Except those which have become dissyllabic by contraction, 
participles, and the Gen. pl. and dual of these ten nouns, δες, duds, bas, κάρα, 
οὖς, παῖς, ons, Teas, φῴς, φῶς (light), and of the adjective σῷ: - thus, πόλεϊ 
πόλει ( 14), ἔαρος ἦρος (§ 108. N.)5 δόντος, dover, δύντων (Y 22); παίδων, 
φώτων, drov (Y 11).. ---- (Ὁ) The contraction is not regarded in accenting the 
Gen. and Dat. of οἷς (Ἶ 14, § 121. f), οὖς, στέαρ, φρέαρ (§ 104. N.; yet 
see ods above), and Θρᾷξ (6. -κόρ). ---- (6) Observe the accentuation of οὐδείς 
(4 21), vis, εὶς (Y 24), γυνή (δ 101. x), ϑυγάτηρ (§ 106. 2).— (d) The Attics 
are said to have made the Gen. pl. of numeral substantives in -ἄς perispome ; 
thus, μιυριαδῶν, as if contracted from the Ion. μυριαδέων (ὃ 120, 2). 


§ 742. 4. From the natural tone of frequent address, the accent of 
the Voc. in a few familiar words is thrown back as far as the general laws 
permit; viz. Dec. 1. δεσπότης, master; Dec. ΠῚ. γυνή (§ 101. γ), ᾿Απόλλων, 
Ποσειδῶν, σωτήρ (ὃ 105. R.), ἀνήρ, πατήρ, ϑυγάτηρ, Anunrne (ὃ 106), dare, 
brother-in-law ; thus, δέσποτα, θύγατερ, Δήμηκερ. 


Nore. In the Ὗοο. sing., sv and ὁ, final are always circumflexed; as, ig. 
«εῦ, ἠχοῖ, αἰδοῖ (FJ 14). 


ᾧ 743. 5. The tendency in compounds and comparatives to throw 
the acognt as far back as possible (§§ 739, 745) leads to the accentuation of 
the antepenult in the Voc. and Neut. sing. of some nouns and adjectives of 
Dec. III. whose theme is accented upon the penult. These are, — (a) Com- 
paratives in -w»; as, ἡδίων, ἥδτον. ---- (Ὁ) Most compound paroxytones in -wy 
and -ης, except those in -ῴρων, -vens, -ὥδης, -wAns, and -ὥρης ; a8, εὐδαίμεων, 
Neut. and Voe. εὔδαιμον αὐθάδης, N. and V. αὔθαδες - ᾿Αγαμέμνων, V. ᾿Αγέ- 
. ptr Ὗ. Σώκρατες, Ἡράκλεες (q 14). 


6. (a.) Observe the accentuation of μήσηρ, ϑυγάτηρ, Δημήτηρ (J 12, 
§ 106. 2), and of δέλεαρ (ὃ 104. N., 728. Byes (β.) The forms in -δε(ν), 
«Φι, -: (δξ 89-91, 320), follow the general rule, unless a short vowel pre- 
cede, in which case they are commonly paroxytone. —(y.) For the irregulari- 
ties and peculiarities in the accentuation of the numerals and pronouns, see 
4{ 21, 23, 24. 


§ 744. Ill. A long vowel in the ultima, belonging to an 


CH. 3.] IN COMPARISON. —1N CONJUGATION. 439 


affic of declension, can receive only the acute accent in the di- 
rect, and the circumfles i in the indirect cases ; as, τιμή, τῆς, “Ty 
ἤν, αἱ, -ὧν, -αἷς, -ἄς, τά, -aiv ({ 7) ; ὁδοῦ, -@, -οἱ, -ὧν, -οἷς, 
ove, -ὦ, -οἷν (Ἱ 9); γυπῶν, -οἷν (Ἷ 11). 
Ἑχοορὺ in the peculiar datives ἐμοί, μοί, σοί (Ἵ 28, ὃ 141). 


Β. Accent ΙΝ ΟὈΜΡΑΒΙΞΟΝ. 


§ 745. Comparatives and superlatives, whether adjectives 
or adverbs, are accented as far back as the general rules of 
accent permit; thus, ἡδύς, ἡδίων, ἥδιον (δ 743. 5), ἥδιστος. 


C. Accent ΙΝ ConsuGATION. 


§ 746. Verbs are accented as far back as the general 
laws permit, with the following exceptions (see §§ 723. N., 
734. ες d). 


1. These forms are accented upon the PENULT;—(a) All Infinitives in 
«αὶ aS, βεξουλευκέναι, βουλευθῆναι, ἱστάναι, ἱστάναι (Ἶ 48). Except dialectic 
forms in «μενα, (ὃ 250).— (Ὁ) The Inf. of the lst Aor. act. and 2d Aor. 
mid. ; as, βουλεῦσαι, λιπέσθα, (4 37).—(c) The Perf. pass. Inf. and Part.; 
as, βεξουλεῦσθαι, βεξουλευμένος. ---- Except a few preteritive participles ; as, 4us- 
vos (9 59). So xsivevos, from κεῖμαι (ὃ 232), which otherwise is accented as 
an uncontracted Perf.; thus, xardxsima:, κατακεῖσθαι. In ἃ few Epic forms, 
the retraction of the accent extends even to the Inf.; as, ἀκάχησθαι T. 335, 
ἀκαχήμενος E. 24 (§ 286).—(d) All dialectic infinitives in «μεν (ὃ 250). 


ᾧ 4 Δ". 5. These forms are OXYTONE ; — (a) Participles in -ς, G. -ros, 
except in the lst Aor. act.; as, βεξουλευκώς, βουλευθείς, lords, orés+ but, 
βουλεύσας. --- (δ) The 2d die act. part. ; i as, λιπών, ords.—(c) The 2a 
Aor. imperat. — εἰσέ, say, ἐλϑέ, come, siet, find, and, in strict Attic, ἰδέ, 
see, and λαβέ, take. Except in composition; thus, ἔξελθε, εἴσιδε. 


ᾧ 748. 3. These forms are PERISPOME ; — (a) The 2d Aor. inf. in 
εἰν ἢ as, λιπεῖν. --- (2) The 2d Pers. sing. of the 2d Aor. mid. imp.; as, λε- 
wov, δοῦ ( 51). Except in compounds of more than two syllables from verbs 
in -~s; a8, ἀπόδου- but προδοῦ. Some exceptions also occur in compound 
and even in simple verbs in -w. 


4. The accent of a verb in CoMPOSITION can never be thrown farther back 
than the augment (ὃ 734. ¢), or farther than the tone syllable of the word 
prefixed; thus, παρέχω (παρά, ἔχω, αὶ 300), παρεῖχον, παρέσχον, παράσχες. 


§ 749. Remaras. «. In those forms in which the accent of the 
Perf. and 2 Aor. differs from that of the Pres., a want of uniformity has some- 
times arisen from different views in regard to their etymology. Thus, 2 Aor, 
forms are sometimes accented as Pres.; as, Inf. ἀμυνάθειν, σχέϑειν, Pt. oxibwy 

(ὃ 299) 3 “ρίασο, rein, πρίασθα, (4 49). 


β. Monosyllables long by nature, except Participles, are generally circum- 
fered; thus, εἶ, ἦν, ἦ, ὧν (Y 55); σχῶ, σχεῖν, σχών (ὃ 300). 


y- For the accentuation of φημί ( 53) and εἰμί (J 55), see ᾧ 732. 


440 ACCENT. —IN PARTICLEs. ' [Book ty, 


3. The Tonics, in dropping one ε from -isai, -és0, do not change the accent , 
thus, polio (ὃ 243.2). So eras ( 55), as if syncopated from ἔσεται, re- 
mains paroxytone in composition ; thus, ragieras. 


s. Examples of irregular or various accentuation are φής, φάθ, or Gal, Imp. 
εἶπον or εἰπόν (ὃ 53) ; ἰών (§ 56); xiw, to go, poet., Pt. κιών" Lon. ἐών (4 55); 
χρή, ἰχοῖῆν, χεεών (δ 284. 4). 


D. Accent ΙΝ PARTICLEs. 


§ 7030. 1. Apverss. (a) Adverbs in -ως derived from adjectives 
are, with very few exceptions, accented like the Gen. pl. of their primitives 
(ᾧ 321. 8) ; as, σοφῶς, ταχέως. ---- (2) Derivative adverbs in -dev, -da, -1, -t 
and -£ (ὃ 321. Ὁ, ¢, d) are commonly oxytone ; those in on», -ακις (§ 821. 
b, 4), and -w, paroxytone ; ; 88, “λινθηδόν, ἀναφανδά, Μηδισεί, ἐμαχεί, Wapure 
λάξ" σποράδην, πολλάκις, ἔξω. 


2. ῬΕΕΡΟΒΙΤΙΟΝΒ. The primitive prepositions (§ 648. β) are all oxytone; 
as, ἀπό, κατά. For the removal or loss of the accent, see §§ 730, 731. 


8. For proclitic and enclitic particles, see §§ 731, 732. The accentuation 
of those particles which remain is best learned by observation. 


GREEK: INDEX. 


{In this and the following Index, figures immediately preceded by the mark T refer to 


_ paragraphs in the Tables; other 


figures refer to sections in the body of the Grammar, 


with their subdivisions. The references to the ‘Tables are usually followed by other 


references in illustration. 
’ nites and the following. 


otherwise, of the words or letters at the opening into those at the angle. The sign 
The abbreviation cj. stands for conjugation, contr. for 


notes opposition or distinction. ; 
contraction, const. for construction, cp. for comparison, dec. for 


The letter f immediately attached to a figure (thus, 32 f) sig- 
The signs > and < denote the change, by contraction or 


de- 


eclension, der. for 


derivation, encl. for enclitic, ins. for inserted, num. for numeral, pos. for position, r. for 


root, w. for with, &c.] 


a, 93: 245 α΄ ε, δ, ἡ» 
w, 28, 44, 203. β, 259, 
266f; zt > & and ἡ, 
29. a; «a <y, 503 con- 
tr. w. other vowels, 3» f, 
45; contr. of a for », 
34, 45.53 < 8, 593 
Dor. ἃ, 6, 44f, 95: ἃ 
in neut. pl., 80; in Dec. 
1.406 : 86, 92f ,; in ace, 
of Dec. m., 100; conn. 
vow. in ¢j., 4 31: 178f, 
203f5; changes in r., 
259, 266 f ; added tor., 
287: -a in der., 305.b; 
ἀ- privative, 325, 383 ; 
copulative, 3255 «ΕΣ» 
av, α, 22.3, 117, 267. 3. 

ἀγαθός, cp., 160. 

ὠγγέλλω, 4 41: 217, 

aysiow, Cj., 268. [277. a. 

ayneuos, J 17. 98. 

ἄγνῦρει, Cj., 294. 

ἄγχι, -0v, Cp, 161. 2, 
165, a5; w. gen., 394. 

ἄγω, G., 194. N., 236. 
6; ἄγε, 613. 3. 

ἄδακρυς, dec., 136. a 

-ἄδης in der., 310. a. 

“Aidns, dec., 124. a. 

ἄδικος, Ἵ 17: 130. 

gow < ἀείδω, Cj., 260. 

ἀείρω αἴρω, Cj., 268. 

-ἄζω in der., 318f. 

ἀηδών, dec., 123. a. 

anbicow, Cj. 275. ἡ. 

ἄημι, ἄεσα, ᾧ. 288. - 


aé added in 2. aor., 999. 

᾿Αϑήνησι, 320, 2, 421. B. 

as, elided, 41; <Caa, as, 
45. 5, 86, 1382.25 > 
in augm., 188, 2; conn. 
vow., 205; final in ac- 
cent., 723. R. 

αἴδομιαι, -ἕομιαι, Cj. 288. 

aides, J 14: 112f, 115.a. 

-aive in der., 311. 

-aivw in der., 318. Ὁ. 

αἴξ, 411: 10]. 

-αἴος, adj. in, 138, 3. 

αἰπύς, dec., 136. 3. 

αἱρέω, ᾧ., 301. 

αἴρω φῇ ἀείρω, 265: ἄρας, 
q 22. 5: 109, 132. 

αἰσϑάνομιαι, -Souu, C-, 
289 ; w. gen., 375. B; 
w. dependent verb, 614, 
633. [162. 

αἰσχρός, -ρῶς, ep., 159, 

αἰσιάομαι, αἴτιος, W. gen., 
974, 393. 

ἀΐω, 288; augm., 189. 4. 

ἀκαχίζω, Cj., 286. 

-ἄκις, ady. in, 139, 321. 

ἀκμήν, adv. acc., 320, 440. 

ἀκόλουθος, w. gen., 389. 
R.; w. dat., 399. 

-ακός, -αἰκός, in der., 315. 

ἀκούω, Cj., 269. 7; Ww. 
gen. and acc., 377, 380. 
a; as pass, 5565; w.- 
part., 633. 

ἄκρος» use, 456. 


ὠλγεινός, cp., 160. 


ἀλγύνω, Cj., 270, 
ὠλδαίνω, -δομαι, Cj., 291. 
ἀλείφω, Cj. 269. 
ἐλέξω, cj., 273. B. 
-wAéos in der., 315, fi 
aAsvw, Cj., 264. 
ὠλίνδω, -tw, Cj.. 288. 
ἁλίσκομαι, Cj, 850], 1, 
5565; w. gen., 374. y 
ὠλιταίνω, -«ραΐνω, cj., 291, 
ὠλκαθεῖν, 2 aor. 299. 
ἄλλ XK ἄλλα, 722. a3 
introd., 661. α; ἀλλὰ 
γάρ, 661. 2; ἀλλ᾽ 4, 
671. 9; Ὶ 
ἀλλάσσω, Cj.. 274. γ- 
ἀλλήλων, 4 25. 14. 
ὥλλομαι, Cj. 277. a 
ἄλλος, dec., 97. 2, 154; 
use, 540; w. gen., 549: 
as adv., 457. ε; X ὃ 
ἄλλος, 456, 488. 55 
ἄλλο ci ἢ, ἄλλο τι, 54]. 
b; ἄλλος ἄλλον, 542. 
ἄλλως τε καί, O71. 8. 
ἅλς, dec., 105. 
ἀλύσκω, Cj. 273. ae 
ὠλφάνω, C)., 289. 
ἀλώπηξ, dec., 101. B. 
ἅλως, dec., 124. y. 
ἅμα, W. dat. 399; We 
part., 616. a. 
ἁμαρτάνω, Cj., 289. 
ὠμβλίσκω, -ὅω, Cj. 280. 
ὠμείνων, compt., 160. 
᾿ἐμείρω, -ἔρδω, Cj. 282. 


ὠμνός, J 12: 106. 1. | 


442 


ὠμπέχω, Cj., 300. 

ὠμσπλακίσκω, Cj. 296. 

aurviw, Cj., 264. 

ὠμύνω, Cj., 299. 

ἀμφί, const, 6485 οἱ 
ὠμφί, 466. N.3; ἀμφὶ 
σὰ εἴκοσι, 480. 2. 

auditvyD ut, Cj. 293- 

ἄμφω, 4 21: 137. y. 

ay added to r., 289f. 

«ἄν Dor. for -ὧν, 95. B. 
dv conjunct., « ἐάν, 603; 
Χ ἄν contingent, 588. 
ἄν contingent, 587f; af- 
fixed, 328; expr. habit, 
5943; w. opt. for ind., 
595; not w. opt. of 
wish, 600. 3; in con- 
clusions, 603 f. 5 w. opt. 
expr. permission or com- 
mand, 604. Ὁ ; in rel. 
clauses, 606 ; w- inf. and 
part., 615. 25 pos., 673. 
a, 674. 4,616.6; omit- 
ted, 605. 4, 606. a; re- 

peated, 667. | 
νά, const., 648 ; sc. σσῆ- 
6, 653. t, 730 ; w. num., 
137. ε. 
ὠναξιώσκομαι, Cj., 250. y. 
ἐνα κῶς tx w,W. gen, $76.0. 
ἐναλίσκω, -bw, Cj., 280. 
ὠναμιμνήσκω, W. acc. and 
gen., w. 2 ace., 450. 
ἄναξ, J 11: 102. a. 
ἐναπνίω, ὠμπανύω, Cj, 264. 
ὥνδανω, Cj., 290. 
ὠνέχοραι, Cj., 301. 2. 
ἄνευ, W. gen., 347, 
ἀνήρ, G12: 1065 ἄνερ, 
742 ; in address, 443; 
ἀνήρ, ὡνήρ, 39. 
ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, because, 530. 
ἀνοίγω, «νῦμοι, Cj., 294, 
ἐντί, const., 648; deriva- 
tives, w. gen., 5394; w. 
dat., 405. ζ. 


ayia, -ύτω, ἄνω, οἷ.) 272. 
β, 246. a3; δνύσας as, 
adv., 457. γ, 682. | 

ἄνω, Cp, 161. 2, 163 ; 
ν΄. gen., 394, 


GREEK INDEX. 


ἀνώγεων, J 9: 98, 726. β. 

-«% in der., 313. 

ἄξιος, W. gen.,. 374.8 3 We 
dat., 404. ε. 

-Z0 > -tw, -2, -ov, 95, 8. 

ἀπάτωρ, neut. pl. 130. β. 

ἀπαυράω, Cj. 296. 

ἐπαφίσκω, Cj., 296. 

ἀπέδραν, J 51 : 227, 285. 

ὠσπέχθομιαι, -ἄνομιαι, Ch. 
289. 

Garros, -οὔς, Y 25. 4; 
cp., 156. b. [562. 

ao, const., 648; Ww. pass., 


ὠποδίδομαι, sell, 285, 558. 


᾿Ασπόλλων, dec. 105. R., 
107, N., 742. 

ἀπόχρη, 284. 5. 

ἅστω, οἷ., 272. 

ἄρα» ἄρ, 48, 2; pos., 
6713. α; ἦν as pres., 567. 

ὠραρίσκω, Cj, 285. [y. 

ἄρας, J 22: 109, 132, 

ὠρίσκω, Cj., 279. [268. 

Αρης, dec., 114. N., 116. 

ἀριστάω, pf. 238.0. [a. 

ἄρισαος, Superl., 160. 

ὡρμόξω, -“΄πω, Cj 275. η- 

ἀρνός, J 12: 106. 1. 

-αρός in der., 514. h. 

aeow, Cj., 219. 

ὡρπάζω, Cj. 276. 

ἅρπαξ, τὸ ἁρπακτικόν, 
130. a; cp., 158. 

ἄῤῥην, J 17: 105. 1. 

ὠρχήν, adv. acc., 440. 

ἄρχω, Cj., 222; w. gen., 
350 ; ὠρχόμενος as adv., 
632, 

-és in der., 139, 308, 314. 

ἄσσω < ἀΐσσω, 260. 

ἀστήρ, -τράσι, 59. 7. 


ἄσευ, J.14: 113. 2. 


««τάι, -ατσὸ < -νσαι, -ντο, 
60, 213. 2, 248. f. 
ἅσερος == ἕσερος, 39. N. 2. 
"Arras, dec., 109. 1. 
"Aresions, 47: 92f, 310. 
ἅττα, ἄττα τε: ἅτινα, τινά, 
4 24: 1598, 
av > ηὐ inaugm., 188, 2. 
αὖ, αὖθις, pOs., 673. x 


αὐτίκα, W. part., 616. a. 
αὐτός, 4 24. 149; com 
pounds, 144, 150; ep., 
261. 25 w. dat. of as- 
soc. obj. 418. R.; w 
compt. and superl., 464 
use, 508f ; as pers.pron. 
510. « ; ὁ αὐτός, thesame, 
508. π.- ; w. dat., 400; 
αὐτοί ἔσμεν, 510 ; δέκατος 
αὐτός, 511. 5. [144 
αὑτοῦ «ζ ἱαυτοῦ, 28 
ἄχθομαι, Cj., 222. a. 
ἄχοριαι, -νυμαι, Cj, 286. 
ἄχρι(ς), 67 ; w. gen., 394 
axes οὗ, 530. 
-éw in der., 318 ἢ, 
aw, breathe, ὠΐω, ὠΐσθω, Ce, 
288. 
ἄω, satiate, cj., 298. [3. 
-ἄων, > -iwy, -ἂν, -wv, 95. 
B, 4 3: 49.2; Bro >y, 
51; Br > wr, BI > Os, 
525 Bu > we, 53; Bx 
> 9,615 we, mA > μέρ, 
mea, Ba, 64. 2. 
βαίνω, οἷ., 2718 3 ἔξην, 4 57: 
227 ; Bafor βῆθι, 210. Ν᾿ 
βάλλω, Cj. 223, 277. a 
Béwrw, Cj., 272. : 
βασιλεύς (50. δ), 485. α; 
cp., 26]. 2. 
βάσκω = βαίνω, 278. 
βελτίων, &e., 160. 
βιδρώσκω, Cj. 2855 Bae 
Cows, 238. a. 
βιόω, -ὥσκομαι, Cj.. 280 
βλάξ, ep., 158. a. 
βλάσπτω, οἷ.» 272. 
βλαστάνω, -tw, Cj. 289. 
βληχάομαι, Cj. 287. a 
βλίσσω, cj., 275.0. 
᾿βλώσκω, c., 281. 3. 
βοῤῥᾶς, J 7: 94, 96. aw 
βόσκω, cj. 222. 1. 
Bovasiw, YJ 34 f; trans- 
| lated, 4 33; βουλεύων, 
| 4 22: 109, 182. 
βούλομαι, Cj., 222, 25 use, 
526. γ, 583, 611. 8. 
βοῦς, 14: 112f, 117. 
βραδύς, cp., 159. ε- 


ἄνωγα, GJ 191. 8, 238, B. αὔξω, -ἄνω, 4.43: 222,289. βρίτας, dec., 123. β. 


δοοχάομαι, cj., 287. 

βυνίω, βυέω, cj. 292. 

y, double office, J 3: 49. 
1; ye> & 513 γε» 
κα, yb > x6, 523 yx > 


γάρ, w. art, 490; in 
specification, 656. ὃ ; in- 
trod., 661. N. 3 pos, 
673. a 

γαστήρ, dec., 106. 2, B. 

yt, aflixed, 3285; pos. 
673. a; encl., 732. 

γεγωνέω, -icxw, Cj., 296. 

γελάω, Cj., 219. a 

γέλως, dee., 104. 

γέρας, J 14: 1148. 

ψεύω, W. acc. and gen., w. 
2 acc., 430. 

ψηράω, -cxw, Cj. 279. 

γίγας, J 13: 109. 

ψίγνομοαι, γίνομαι, Cj., 286, 
238. a; w. dat., 408; 
w. part., 637. 

ψιγνώσκω, γινώσκω, C., 
285 3 ἔγνων, 57: 224. 
2, 227; w. part. and inf,, 
633, 634. β. 

γλήχων, dec., 107. N. 

Γλοῦς, 4 16: 126. 2. 

γλῶσσα, § 7: 92.1. 

youu, Cj. 287. 

ψόνυ, dec., 123. γ. 

Γοργώ, -ὥν, dec., 123. a. 

γραῦς, J 14: 34. a, 114, 
117, 121. Καὶ 

yeagu, ἴ 36: 2173 use 
in mid., 558, 559. d. 

γυνή, dec, 101. y, 63, 
142. 

γύψ, 411: 85 101. 

Γωξρύας, 47:95. Ν., 96.0. 

δ, 4 5: ὃς.» στ, δ» 
σθ, 52 3 du > σμ58.ὃ 
uropped before σ, 55; 
bef. x, 61; inserted, 64. 
2s. 1 £5 273,232. 

G in declension, 117 f. 

«δα, adv. in, $21. Ὁ. 

dae, γος.) 732. 

δαήσομαι, fut., 285. 


GREEK INDEX. 


[δαΐμων, J 12: 105.1, 57.4. 

'δαίνῦμει, Cj. 295. 

Daciopeas, Cj. 267. Qe 

δαίω, Cj., 267. 8. 

'δάκνω, οἷἦ., 277.8. [87. 

δάκρυον, -ρυ, dec. 124. β, 

δαμάζω, -ἄω, -νάω, -νημρεῖ, 
cj-, 298. 

δάμαρ, J 18 : 109. γ- 

δαρθάνω, Cj., 289. 

δέ, conjunct. and adv., 
651. γ; ὁ 3% 4903 for 
yee, 656; introd., 661. 
N. 5 pos., 679. a. 

-ds, insep. particle, 150, 
322, 648. 3; accent., 
732. d. 

δείδω, Cj-y 2823 δέδοικα, 
δέδια, 4 582 257. 

δείκνυμι, Y 52: 225, 294. 

δεῖνα, J 23: 146. 

δεισινέω, pf., 238. a. 

δέλεαρ, dec., 104. N, 

δελφίς, -v, dec., 105. 3, a 

δέμας, dipt., 127; in pe- 
riphrasis, 385. 3. 

δένδρον, -εον, dec., 124, B. 

δέρκομαι, Cj. 259. 

δέρω, Cj., 259. 

δεσμός, dec., 125. a. 

δέσποτα, Voc., 742. 

δέχομαι, -νυμίαις Cj. 294. 

δέω, bind, cj., 219, 284. 

Siw, need, Cj., 222. 8, γὶ 
pt. w. num., 140. B ; δεῖ; 
impers., w. gen., 357; 
w. acc., 430. R. ; w. inf., 
583 5 μικροῦ [δεῖν], &e., 
623 3 δέομαι, w. gen., 
357. N. 

δή, δήποτε affixed, 328; 
δή, δῆθεν, δῆτα, Ρο5., 673. 
a, 

δῆλός εἶμι, 551, 684. γ; 
δῆλον ὅσι, 671. 4. 

δηλόω, J 47: 216, 918. 

Δημήσηρ, dec., 106, 742. 

δῆμος, 4.9 : 726. 5. 

-dny, adv. in, 321. Ὁ. 

διά, const., 648. 

διαιτάω, pref., 192. 4. 

διωσκεδάννῦσι, -νῦφαι, SUbj., 
226. 4. 


ΙΣ,δάσκω, Che, 985. 

δίδηροι —= δέω, 284, 
διδράσκω, Cj. 285 ; ἕδραν, 
4.57] χϑ 97, 

δίδωμι, J 51: 201. 8, 

| 224f., 284; δούς, 4 22 

'3/La,-npeat, Cj. 283, 224.3. 

δίκαιός εἶμι, W. inf., 551. 

Διονῦς, dec., 126. 2. 

διπλάσιος W. Fel 352. 

διπλόος, -οὖς, J 18: 33. B, 
138. 4 

δίπους, J 17: 130. y 

δι ψάω, contr., 33. a. 

Dia, -opens, Cj., 282. 

διώκω, Cj. 2983 Ww gen, 
374. y- 

δοκέω, Cj., 288 5 
ταῦτα, 638. 

«δον, adv. in, $21. b. 

δόρυ, Ἵ 16: 123. y 

δούς, 4 22, 4 51: 109%, 
132. 

δραμοῦμαι, fut., 301. 5. 

δράω, ins. of σ, 221. we 

δρέσω, Cj. 259. , 

dovrrw, Cj-, 272. 

δύναμαι, augm., 189. 1. 

δύνω, δύω, οἷ.» 2783 ἔδυν, 
4. 57: 227, δύ, J 22: 
109, 132. 

δύο, δύω, Y 21: 137. y% 

δύρομιαι, Cj. 270. 8. 

δυσ-, 325 ; augm., 193. 

% ψιλόν, J 3: 22. a, 245 
sX 2, 24358 >in, υ, 
ev, 28, 44.3, 111 5. 1185, 
259.b; s > a, 44. 4, 
203. a, 206. B, 242. Ὁ: 
es > mand ss, 29. a, 36f, 
44.43; «ζσ, 50: «σ, 
300; contr. w. other 
vowels, 32f; ins. after 
contr., 35, 98. B; by 
Ion., 48. 1, 120. 2, 242. 
a; sign of plur., 83, 172; 
charact., changed, 110f; 
conn. vow. in pron., 141; 
in cj., 175, 203f; in 
augm., 173, 1878: in 
redupl., 190f; ins. in 
opt., 184 ; in fut., 200. 3, 
245. 25 before close aff., 


δόξαν 


444 


222. αἰ changes in r., 
259, 268, 270, 10; >« 
in 2 pf., 236 : added to 
τ) 287: se in plup., 
179, 203. N.; sF > sv, 

_ & νυ, 22.3, 117, 121.3, 
220, 264. [si, 603. 

ἐάν, COMPOS., > ἤν, ἄν, X 

ἔαρ, dec., 108. N. 

ἑωυσοῦ > adrov, 4 23: 
144; use, 504f; for 
other pronouns, 506 f. 

idw, G., 189. 3, 218. 

ἔξην, see βαίνω. 

ἰγγύς, cp, 168. β; w. 
gen,, 394. 

ἐγείρω, Cj., 268, 238, β. 

ἔγνων, SCC γιγνώσκω. 

ἔγχελυς, dec., 119, 2. 

ἐγώ, 4 23: 141; use, 
502f; ἔγωγε, 132. ἃ. 

, See δύόνω. 

ἔδω, cj, 298, 246. β. 

ἕζομιαι, Ce, 275. ζ. 

ἐδέλω, Cj, 222. 25 w. 
inf., 583. | 

ἵδεν for of, 4 23: 142. 3. 

ἰδίζω, ¢j., 297. 

“ < 68, 29. w, 363 > πὶ, 
46; in 2 pers., 37. 4; in 
augm., 189. 33 in re- 
dupl., 191 ; connect. vow. 
of plup., 179, 203; > 
a, 2365; ssa in opt., 184. 
a, 205. 8, 

«ἐς, adv. in, $21. 

si, proclit., 731; si γάρ, 
sibs, si, 597, 599 625. 
B; εἰ X ἐάν, 603.5 w. 
subj., 603. ε ; εἴ τις, 668. 
6; εἰ μὴ εἰ, 667.25 εἰ 
δέ, εἰδὴ μή, 663.6, 671.6. 

-ta in der., 308. a, 311, 

εἴδορμεαι, εἶδον, Cj. 301. 4 ; 
εἰδώς, 4 22, 4 58: 112. 
xz, 132. 1, 301. 4; id, 
613. 8, 741. ο. 

εἴθε, 732. £3 see εἰ, 

sine == ἔοικα, 273. a 

εἰκάζω, 188. N., 278. α. 

εἴκοσι(ν), 4 25: 66. a. 

εἴκω, αἷ., 188. 3, 299, 

εἰκών, dec., 123. a. 


GREEK INDEX. 


εἶλον, 2 aor., 301. 1. 

εἴλω, Cj., 268. 

εἰμί, be, 4 55: 230 ; dial. 
252; encl., 732 3 X εἶμι, 
722.a; w. gen., 364f, 
384; w.dat., 408 ; omit- 
ted, 547, 634. «, 639. 2; 
auxil., 637; teri οἵ, 
ὅπως, &e., 523; ἔστι, ἦν, 
w. pl. nom., 549. ὁ; ἦν 
as aor., 576. δ ; εἶναι w. 
verbs of naming, &c., 
434. N.; as inf. of spe- 
cif., 623. N. 

εἶμι, go, 4 56 : 231 3 dial., 
252. 73; as fut. 231, 
301.3 5 si fori, 210. N. 

εἴξαᾶσι, 273. α. 

εἶπον, -α, | 53: 301.7; 
εἰσί, 613. 3, 747. ς. 

Hert εἴργω, Cj., 294, 

εἴρομεωι, -ωφτάω, Cj., 298. 

εἴρω, Cj. 301. 7. 

sis, 4 21: 105. 1, 137; 
W. gen., 362. γ᾽ w.dat., 
400; w. superl., 462. y. 
«ες, adj.in, 56.4, 5, 315.f. 

tis, és, der. and constr., 
648, 659. a; W. num., 
137. s3 proclit., 731 ; 
tis Ors, οὗ, 651. ζ 

ἐΐσκω, Cj., 273. a 

εἴσω, ἔσω, W. gen., 394; 
w. ace., G57. α. 

εἴωθα, cj. 236. c, 297. 

ix < ἐξ, 68. 1, β. 

ἑκάς, cp., 163. 

ἐκεῖνος, 97. 2, 1503; ἐκε;- 
voi, 150. γ᾽; use, 512. 

ἐκκλησιάξω, pref, 192. 4. 

ἑκὼν εἶναι, G23. a 

ἐλάσσων, -rrwy, Cp., 160; 
tAarroy, asindec., 4.50.3. 

ἐλαύνω, ἐλάω, cj. 278. 

ἐλαχύς, ep. 160, 161. I. 

ἐλεύσομαι, fut., 501. 3. 

ἐλήλεγμαι, J 44: 217. y. 

ἕλκω, -κέω, Cj., 298. 

ἕλρμεινς, dec., 58, β. 

ἰλαίζω,. -πόραι, Cj. 997. 

iuavrod, 4 23: 144; use, 
504, 


ἐμός, 4 24: 
503. 

ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ K μοῦ, 
μέ, 142. 1, 502. 

ἐμσοδών, 322, 

ἐν, in compos., 68. 8 ; pro- 
clit., 731 3 w. dat., 648; 
for sis, 659. Bs ἐν ois 
w. superl., 462. By ἐν 
@, 5303 ἐνί, G48. β; ἔα 
for tvecrs, 653. 8, 730, 
ἔνιοι, -οσε, 523. ae 

ἐναίρω, ἐναρίξω, Cj., 2716. 

ἔνδοθεν for ἔνδον, 659. y. 


1513 use 


04 


ἐνεγκεῖν, 2. aor., 501. 6. 


ἕνεκα, Μ΄. gen., 372. y ; 
pos., 674. 

ἐνέπσω, Cj, 273. a 

tvyd pes, Cj. 293. 

ἐνοχλέω, pref, 192. 8, 

i= > ix, 68. 1; proclit., 
730; ep, 161. 2; w. 
pass., 562; w. gen., 6485. 
for ἐν, 659. a; ἐξ ὅσου, 
530. 

ἐξαίφνης w. part., 616. a 

ἔξαρνος W. acc., 424, 1, 

ἐξόν absolute, 638. 

-sos in der., 315. 6. 

ἔοικα, Cj., 2723, a, 238.8; 
const., G15; ἔοιγμοεν, 
238. B. 

ἑορτάζω, augm., 189, 5. 

ἐπαυρίσκοραι, Cj, 996. 

ἔσεφνον, ο].. 274. ὃ. 

iwi, const.,G48; w. num., 
137.83 pos., 652. 1. 

ἐσίκλην, monopt., 127. 

ἐπιλήσμων, cp., 158. B. 

ἐσιμεέλορεαι; -touai, C).,288 
w. gen., 476. 3. 


liriorauas, pref., 192. 3. 


ἐπίχαρις, cp. 1.3.8. 
ἐσιχώριος W. gen., 391 a. 
ἐπριάμην, see πρίασθαι. 

ἑα' σέσης, -ris, 134. β. 
ἕσω, cj., 300. 

ἐργάζομαι, augm., 189. 3, 
ἔρδω, 6].,) 276. 

ἐρείκω, Cj., 269. 

ἐρείστω, Cj., 269. 

ἐρήσορμεα,, fut., 298. 


‘Eguias, -ἧς, 4 7: 94. 


form, augm., 189, 8, 

. ἔῤῥω, cj., 222. 1. 

ἐῤῥωμείνος, cp.y 156. ψ- 

ἐρυγγάνω, Cj. 290. 

“ ἐσύω, nude forms, 246, a. 

ἔρχομαι, Cj., 301, 3, 298, 
8; w. fut. .part., 637; 
tadé oxyt., 747. ¢. 

ἐρῶ, εἴρηκα, J 53° 301.7. 

ἔρως, dec., 104, 

ἐρωτάω, Cj., 298, 

ἐσθίω, ἔσθω, Cj. 298. 

ἐστιάω, augm., 189. 3. 

ἱστώς, J 22, 9 48: 131. 
B, 237. 

ἔσχατος, Cp, 161. 1, 2. 

ἑσαῖρος, cp., 161. 2. 

su «ζ co, sov, &e., 45. 3, 
121, a, 142. ο, 243, 

εὖ, augm., &., 193. 

εὔγεως, dec., 133. β. 

εὕδω, εἷ., 222. 3. 

εὐθύί(ς), 67. 23 w. gen, 
3735 w. part. 616. a, 

εὑρίσκω, Cj, 29635 εὑρέ, 
oxyt., 747. c. 

ids, atts, dec., 136. 3. 
evs in der., 306. 6.) 309. 

εὔχαρις, J 17: 102f. 

-svw in der., 318. 

i?’ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ σε, 530; ν΄. 
inf., 628. 

ἐχθρός, 60. 159. [298. 
χω, -αἰρω, -guiva, Cj-, 

ἔχω, α]., 300 ; augm., 189. 
5; weadv., 555. a; and 
gen., 363. B; auxil., 
E375 ἔχων φλυὰᾶρεῖς, 

ἔψω, cj., 292. [632. N. 

-tw, -éwy, Ion. gen., 95f. 

τ-έω in der., 318. 

ἕως, dec., 123. γι. 

F, 21f; in dec., 117; in 
cj., 220, 264, 267. 3; 
sign of pers., 143. 

g& 93:51. N.; > ἐν; 
70. 13 > od, 33, δ, 70. 
γος; intr, 273f, 282. 

Caw, Cj., 280. γ, 33. a 

ζεύγνυμι, Cj., 294. 

Ζεύς, Ζάν, Ἵ 16. 123. γ. 

ζυγός, ζυγόν, dec., 125. α. 

ζώννῦμει, Cj., 293. 


GREEK INDEX. 


ζώς, dec. 135. 

m 13:24; X 4, 24; 
Ton., 44.1; > ss, 29, 
37. 23; contr. 31f; in 
plup., 203. N. ; in subj., 
204 ; ins., 222. 

-m in der., 305. Ὁ. 

4, w. compt., 461, 463f : 
omitted, 461. a; pleo- 
nastic, 461, ¢ 3 4 κατά, 
ἢ πρός, ἢ ὡς, ἢ ὥστε, 463; 
ἢ οὐ, 666. ζ. 

ἢ δ᾽ ὅς, 491. R. [301]. Ν. 

ἤδειν, T 58: 203. N., 237, 

des, monopt., 127. — 

ἡδύς, T 19: 112f, 117. 
N., 132. 13 ep. 159. 

How, -ομαι, Cj., 290. 

ἥκισφσος») superl., 160. 

ἥκω, w. ady. and gen., 
363. B; as perf., 579.7. 

ἡλίκος, Ἷ 63; in condens., 
529. 

jue, 1 59: 275. ζ. 

Fuay, dec., 103. N. 

nui tor φημί, 228. 

nus-, use of compounds, 
140. γ- 

ay « ἐάν, 603. 

ἤνεγκα, ἤνεγκον, 301. 6. 

ἧπαρ, 11: 108. 

Ἡρακλέης, 14: 115. 
β, 121.4. 

ἠρέμα, cp. 161. 2. 

ἠριγενής, -veia, 184. ye 

ἥρως, 714: 114.2. 

ons <. -##s in nom., 37. 2. 

-ns in form,, 326. 

ἥσσων, -Trwv, compt., 160. 

ἥσυχος, Cp, 156. γ. 

ἠχώ, Ἢ 14: livf, 115. 
a, 1928. 2. 

ἠώς, ἄθο., 1938. γ. 

9,935 ὃν «0; 38> 
σϑ, 523; Su > om, 53; 
9. dropped before σ, 55; 
before x, 615 sign of 
gen., 84; of pers., 172; 
ins. in du. and pl., 174 ; 
changes of in cj., 181, 
210; 9 added to r., 282; 
Sa annexed, 182; Ss, 
Sac, tense-signs, 198 f ; 

38 


445 


S$ omitted, 199. π. 
Θαλῇς, dec., 124. a. 
ϑάλλω, pf. τέθηλα, 236.2 
Savérov, use, 374. N. 
Séarcw, ¢j., 272. 
ϑάσσων, -ττων, 

159. β. 
θάτερον, -ov, 39, N. 2. 
ϑαυμαστὸν ὅσον, ϑαυμα- 

THs ὡς, 538. a 
Siva, Cj-y 268, [583. 
ϑέλω, cj., 222.2; w. inf., 
Θέμις, dec., 123.4; ϑέμις 

tori, ib. 

«δεν, gen. in, 91, $20. 1. 

ϑεράπων, dev., 123, y. 

Stopes, dec., 125. a, 

Θέτις, dec., 119. 1. 

Siw, run, cj., 220. [732. 

Say, pos., 673. a; encl. 

Sie, T 12: 57. 8. 

ϑηράω, cj., 218. 

Siyydévw, Cj., 290. 

ϑνήσκω, cj. 281, 237, 
239. a; pass. of xrsivw, 
295, 556 ; use of tenses, 
578. γ- [γ- 

Seacow < ταράσσω, 274. 

ϑραύω, ins, of ¢, 221. a, 

Sei, 711: 101.8. 

Setrrw, Gj, 272. 

ϑοώσκω, Cj. 281. δ. 

Suyaene, dec., 106, 742. 

Sica, 1 7: 93. 

ϑύω, cj. 219. 

Sas, 7 14: 114.2. 

4 13: 24; subse., 25, 
33 in contr, 817; in 
crasis, 38 ; sign of dat., 
82. β, 83, 1763 affixed 
to demonstratives, | 50. 
y, 734.6; connect. vow., 
177, 205; % >7 and -; 
in r., 269; , in redupL, 

«, adv. in, 321. [288 

-ia in der., 308. a. 

᾿Ιαννῇῆ:, dec., 126. 2. 

««ἄω in der., 319. 1. 

ἰδεῖν, 2 aor., 301. 4. 

-idevs in der., 312. ἃ. 

-idns, -ἰδέος in der., 310. 

ἴδιος W. gens, 391]. a. 

ἵδρόω, contr., 944. a. 


compt., - 


446 


Dove, cj, 275. δ. 

ἱδρώς, dec., 104. 

ἱερός W. gen., 391. a 

sf added to r., 297. 

εἰζω in der., 318. 

iw, -ἄνω, Cj., 275. ζ. 

inuws, 4 54: 229, 284; 
ieuas W. gen. 373. 2. 

*Incods, dec., 126. 2. 

-ixa, adv. in, 551. 2. 

ἱκνέομαι, ἵκω, «ἄνω, Cj, 
292, 

«ἱκός in der., 314, 315. 

ixrivos, dec. 124. B. 

ἱλάσκοριαι, Cj., 279. 

-ijos in der., 314. ο. 

ἵνα, const., 601; ἵνα a; 
539. a. 

-ivm in der., 310. Ὁ. 

“νος in der., 315, 

«ον in der., 312. 

-sos in der., 315. 

ἱππεύς, 714,07 16:111f, 
121.3: 

ixrorgoptw, redupl., 193. 

ἵσσαμαι, Cj., 287. 

“ς in der., 309 ἢ, 

sox added to r., 296 

εἰσκος, -n, in der., 312. Ὁ. 

iornus, 1 48; 924} 284; 
ἕστηκα, 233f, 237; 
toras, T 22: 132. B; 
στῶ for σαῆθι, 210. N.; 
ἱστήξω, 239; ἔστησα X 
ἔστην, 257. B. 

ἴσχω, Cj-y X ἔχω, 300. 

ἰχθύς, 7 14: 83f, 117. 

ἰχώρ, dec., 107. N. 

«ἰων in der. 310. Ὁ; 
quant.{§683. 3. 

«ὥνη in der., 310. b. 

x, V3: x5 >%,515x3> 
ys, xb > xb, 523 xu 
> γα, 53; changes be- 
fore x, 61;-x (*) >x, 
65; x annexed, 66. 2; 
x <@, «, 69. UL; tense- 
sign, 198 ; omitted, 199. 

καθαίρω, Cj., 267.2. [π. 

καθίζομαι, Cj., 275. ζ. 

καθεύδω, pref., 192. 3. 

κάθημαι, N59: 275. ζ. 

καϑθίζω, Cj.. 275. . 


SREEK INDEX. 


καί, crasis, 40; w. num., 
140; w. οὗτος, 513. a; 
for other connectives, 
656 ; conj. and adv., 
657. y3 καὶ os, 4915 
πολὺς καί, 655. 63 καὶ 
γάρ, 661. 2. 
καίνυμαι, 6].γ 295. 
καίνω, Chey 267. 2. 
καίω, κάω, Cj., 267. 8. 
κακός, 6Ρ., 160. 
καλέω, Cj., 961. 
καλός, cp., 159. 
κάλως, dec., 128. y. 
κάμνω, Cj., 223, 277. β. 
κάμππσω, Cl. 272; κί- 
καμμαι, N44; 217. γ- 
κάρα, ἄθ0., 195. B; in 
periphrasis, 385. 3. 
κατά, const., 648; 
num., 137. ¢. ἊΣ 
xi(v), 66. @; = ἄν, 328, 
587, 593. γὶ pos., 673. 
a; encl, 732. 
κέαρ, dec., 108. N. 
κεδάω, -avyups, Cj-, 293. 
κείμαι, T 60 : 232. 
κείρω, Cj-y 268. 
κεκαδών, -ἥσω, οἷ., 279. ξ. 
κέκασμαι, pf., 295. 
κέκρᾶγα, Cj., 274. 3, 238. 
κελεύω, Cj., 221. [B. 
κέλομαι, aor., 194. 3. 
κεράννῦμοι, -«ἄω, Cj., 293. 
κέρας, J 11:104,121.e, 5. 
κέρδος, cp., 261. 2. 
xsvbw, Cj., 270. 9. 
κεφαλῇς, const., 369. B. 
κηρύσσει, 86. 6 κήρυξ, 546. 
κιγχάνω, Cj, 290. 
κίδνημι, οἷ.) 293. 
κινδυνεύω W. gen., 395. ὃ. 
κίρνημοι, -«ἄω, Cj, 293. 
xis, 7 14: 117, 
κιχάνω, -ἕω, Cj., 290. 
κίχρημι, Cj., 284, 
κίω, 2 a. in -abov, 299. 
κλάδος, dec., 124. β. 
κλάζω, Cj., 277. a. 
κλαίω, κλάω, Cj, 267. 3. 
κλείς, T 11: 104. 
κλείω, κλήω, Cj. 270. 10. 
xriwens, cp., 161. 2. 


Ww. 


πλίσσω, Cj., 272. 
κλίνω, Cje, 269. 
κλύω, 2 aor., 227. γ 
as pass., 556. 
κνέφας, dec., 123. B. 
κοινός, gram. term, 7; W 
gen., 391. a. 
κοινωνός, dec., 124. β. 
κομίζω, 1 40: 273. 2. 
κοναξίζω, Cj., 297. 
κόσφω, Cj, 2723 xbrre 
μαι, bewail, 561. a, 
κόραξ, © 11: 101. 
κορέννῦμει, -tw, Che. 293. 
κορύσσω, Cjy 278. η. 
-χός in der., 515. Ὁ. 
κράζω, Cj., 238. β, 274.3 
κρέας, dec., 115.1. 
κρείσσων, κράτιστος, 160, 
κρεμάννῦμει, ~cc perl, κρήμνα. 
μαι, -ἄομαι, Cj., 293. 
κρίνον, dec., 124.8. ἴα. 
κρίνω, 6).γ) 54. y, 56, 217. 
κρύπσω, Cj, 272. 
κρύφα Ww. gen., 292. 1. 
κτάομαι, pl. κέκτημαι, tx~ 
rnuat, 191. 3, 234. 
καείνω, -v0 us, καίννῦμει, 6.) 
καείς, dec., 105. ε. [295 
κτυσέω, Cj. 288. 
xuxewy, dec, 107. N. 
κυλίνδω, -tw, κυλίω, Ce 
xuviw, Cj. 292. [288 
κύρω, -tw, οἷ.) 288 ; w. gen., 
370. 
κύων, T 12: 
261. 2. 
κῶας, dec., 123. β. 
a, 52, <<», 54,277 
a; Ac, 56, 59. 
λᾷας, λᾶς, dec., 124. a. 
λαγχάνω, cj. 290; ν΄. 
gen., 370. 
λαγώς, dec., 123. y. 
λάζομαι, -υμαι, Cj., 290. 
λάθρα w. gen., 392. 1. 
λάλος, CP, 156. y- 
λαμβάνω, Cj., 290; rab’ 
oxyt., 747. ο. 
λάμσω, Cj. 222, 
λανθάνω, cj, 290; with 
part., 633 


106 ; cp, 


λάσκω, Cj., 273. a 


λίγω, pf, 191, 236. a. 
λείπω, T 37: 217, 236. 
1, 246. B, 290; Asigo- 
μαι, W. gen., 349. R. 
λέων, J 13: 109. 
λιλαίομαι, λάω, Cj., 286. 
λίμην, 112: 105.1,57.4. 
λιμπάνω = λείπω, 290. 
Aiwa, monopt., 127. 
λιπών, Y 22, 4 37: 109, 
132, 747. ὃ. 
λόγος, J 9: 86. 
-Aes in der., 315f. 
λούω, cj., 260. 
λύχνος, dec. 125. a. 
Avw, 2 aor., 227. y. 
λῴων, λῷστος, 160. 
uw, Ἷ 3; changes before, 
53; “a> Ba, 64. N.; 
sign of 1 pers., 143, 171; 
changes of in cj., 181, 
209. 
μά, X wh, We ace., 426.9; 
μὰ viv —, 484. 
-~a in der., 306. 2. 
μάγαδις, dec., 119. 2. 
μάκαρ, -καιρα, 184. δ. 
μακρός, cp., 159. ε- 
μάλα, cp, 163. @; wara- 
λον, μάλιστα in ep., 460; 
μᾶλλον Omitted, 653. 5. 
μάλης, Monopt., 127. 
μανθάνω, Cj., 290; ri wa- 
éav ; 631. N.; w. part. 
and inf., 634. £6. 
phoma, μεαίοριαι, Cj. 278. 
μάραπτω, Cj., 272, 
μάρτυς, dec., 123. y. 
Μασκᾷᾶς, dec., 126. 2. 
μάχομαι, Cj. 222. a. 
μέγας, 4.20: 135; ep., 
159 ; μείζων, 1:17: 107. 
usbicxw, -ὕω, Cj., 279, 
319. 2. 
μείρομαι, Cj., 268; 191.1. 
μείων, cp., 1605; μρεῖον 
as indecl., 450. 3. 
μέλας, T 19: 105. 2, 
132. 25 ep., 158. a. 
_ μέλε, monopt., 127, 
pias dec., 103. N. 
μέλλω, Cj, 222. 13 τ΄. 
inf., 583. 


GREEK INDEX. 


μέλω, cj.. 222. 2, 261; 
μέλει impers., w. gen., 
376. 3; w. dat., 407.4. 

μέμονα, μεμαώς, 238. a. 

μέν, w. art., 490; κέν, 
μέντοι, μήν, Pos., 673. a. 

μένω, εἷ., 222. 2, 286. 

μερμοηρίζω, Cj. 276. 
τες, Dor. for -μεεν, 70. 3. 

μέσος, cp. 156. c,d; use, 

μετά, const., 648. [456. 

μεταξύ, Ww. gen. 394; 
w. part., 616. a. 

μέτεστι W. gen., 364; w. 
dat., 408. 

μέχρι(ε), 673 Ww. gen, 
394; connective, 657. y; 
μέχοι od, 530. 

μή, Ww. subj. and imp., 
598; final, 601f; w. 
words of fear, 602. 2,3; 
Χ οὐ, 6475 redund., 
664 f; 4nd¢emphat., 664. 
γ᾽ μὴ οὐ, 666; μή oi 
γε, 671. 85 μὴ or, 
ὅπως, 671. 12. 

μηδείς, 137. β; μηδέν as 
indecl., 450. 3. 

μηκάομαι, Cj., 287. a. 

μηκέτι <. μὴ ἔτι, 68. a. 

Μηνᾶς, dec., 126. 2. 

μῆνις, Gec., 119. 1. 

μήπηρ, Ἵ 12: 106. 2, 

μήτρως, dec., 124. γ. 

-us, Verbs in, Ἵ 48. 208. 
2, 9945, 

μιᾶς χειρός, 379. δ. 

μίγνῦμι, μίσγω, α)., 294. 

μικρός, 6Ρ., 160; μεκροῦ 
(δεῖν), 623. 

μιμνήσκω, cj., 285; ..ἐ- 
μνημα,, 191. 3, 233f; 
w. gen., 376; w. part. 
and inf., 634. 6. 

μίμκνω, -ἄζω, Cj. 286. 


piv, ace, 723: 142. 5, 
143. γὶ use, 507 5 
encl., 732. 


Μίνως, déc., 124. y. 
μνάα, μνᾶ, Ἵ 7: 94, 
μνάομα:, Cj., 285. 
μολοῦμαι, fut., 281. 3. 


μόριον, T 9: 726. 3. - 


447 


«μος in der., 305. f. 

μόσυν, dec., 105. a. 

pov, mol, wt, enclit., 732, 
X ἐμοῦ, &e., 142. 1, 
502; μοί ins., 410. N. 

Muxtouat, Cj. 287. a, 
236. 2. 

μύκης, dec., 124. a. 

μύριοι Χ μυρίοι, 137. ζ. 

-ἕωὼν in der., 314. d. 

ν, 73; >a, 50; changes 
of, 54; changes of ye, 
56f, 105, 109; », final 
cons., 633 paragogic, 
66, 211. N.; in ἐν and 
σύν, 68. 3; sign of pl, 
83, 172, 177; of object, 
84, 87, 176; dropped 
and changed in r., 217; 
added to r., 271, 277f; 
ins. in r., 278. δ, 289f. 

val, X μά, W. acc., 426. 3. 

ναίω, Cj., 267. 

ναός, νεώς, 1 9: 98,728.1. 

ναῦς, 1 14, 7 16: 84. ἃ, 
114, 117, 121. 6. 

ναύτης, 1 7: 925, 

ve added to r., 292. 

γέατος, superl., 156. 3. 

viuw, Cj., 222. 2, 

γέω, Cj., 220, 282. 

vies, 19: 98, 728. 1. 

νή, X μά, W. acc., 426.3. 

νη- privative, 325. ἃ, 

νήθω, viw, Cj., 282, 

vila, vier, Cj. 275. 9. 

wixiw, W. 2 acc., 433, 435. 

viv, ace. T 23: 142. 5, 
143. y ; use, 507; encl., 
732. 

νομίζω, W. dat., 419. N. 

γόος, vous, 19: 98, 728.1. 

-vos in der., 314, 315. 

yor guy, -iw, W. gen., 347 

νυ, added tor., 295 

νύ(ν), 66. a3 pos. 673. 
a; encl., 732. 

γύξ, dec., 102. a. 

vai, vo, 1 23: 141f, 

νωμάω == νέμω, 287. 

varov, νῶτος, dec., 125. aw, 


ξ, 03; < xe, Y% χο, 


51; > x, 68. 1; Dor. 


448 


for σ, 245. 1. 
Ξενοφῶν, 113: 109. — 
ξύν = σύν, 648. β. 

ὃ μικρόν, 13: 22.y, 24; 
X w, 245 0 > av, οι, w, 
44. 4, L11f, 117, 156. 
1, 203. a; oo > w and 
ov, 29. a, 36, 44. 4, 244; 
contr. w. other vowels, 
32 ἢ, 45 ; conn. vows in 
Dec. π, 1 6: 86; in 
cj., Ὁ 31: 175, 203f; 
charact., changed, 110f; 
ins., 222, 83; in pf. 
236; changes in r., 259, 
269; oF > ov, ο, 22. ὃ, 
117. 

ὁ, 7 24: 97, 147f; cra- 
sis, 39; proclit., 731 ; 
X 3, 722. a; w. gen., 
362, a ; early use, 467f, 
use as art., 469f; use as 
pron. 490f; w. inf., 
622; ὁ μέν, δέ, γάρ, 
490 ἢ, 

3-, pron. and adv. begin- 
ning w., 7 63: 317. 

ὀδάξω, -opes, Cj., 273. β. 

os, 124: 150; X οὗσος, 
513f; = adv.,514.N.; 

== iva, 515 ; ὁδί, 150. y. 
600s, 1 9: 744, 
ὁδούς, 113: 109, a, 
ὀδύρομαι, Cj., 270. 
᾿Οδυσσεύς, 1:16: 121, 8. 
ὄζω, cj., 222. 1; w. gen., 

391. 3. 

-οϑεν, gen. in, 91, 320. 

-o6s, dat. in, 90, 320. 

ὁδοὔνεκα, 40. 3; const., 

530, 671. 13. 
οι < a8, on, 37.35 < on, 

os, 45.5, 865 >@ in 

augm., 188.2; « ὦ ἴῃ 
pf., 236, 15 final in ac- 

cent., 723. 

«οι, dat. in, 90. 4, 320. 

οἶδα, 158 237, 301.N.; 
οἶδ᾽ or, 671. 4. 

οἴδίω, -αἰνω, -ἄνω, Cj., 291. 

Οἰδίπους, Ἵ16: 123, 124, 
136. 2, 


GREEK INDEX. 


οἶκος omitted, 385. y. 


οἰμοώζω, Cj. 274. 3. 

-o1, gen. in, 99. [3, y. 

οἴομαι > orpetes, 6ἦ., 222. 

οἷος, 1 63 5213 in con- 
dens., 529 5; == ὅτι τοι- 


536. 6; w.inf., 628; 
οἷός ve, 629. 
ois, 7 14: 114. 2, 121. 
ff, 741. be 
οἶσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσον ; 612..1. 
οἰσπρέω, augm., 189, 4." 
οἴσω, fut., 301. 6.° 
οἴχομαι, Cj 222. ὃ; as 
pf., 579. 3 w. part., 
637. [295. 
ὀλέκω == ὄλλῦμι, 246. N., 
ὀλίγος, ΟΡ... 1603; ὀλέγοι 
MK ob ὀλίγοι, 488. 5; 
ὀλίγου (δεῖν), 623. 
ὁλισθάνω, -θαίνω, Cj. 291. 
δὄλλῦμει, Cj. 295. 
ὀλολύζω, Cj.. 274. d. 
‘Outen, in Homer, 421. a. 
διενῦμοι, Cj-, 295. 


dmards sigs, const., 615, 


ὀμόργνῦμι, Cj-, 295, 

ὄναρ, dipt., 127. 

ὄνειρον, -os, dec., 124, β, 

ὀνίνημε, Cj., 384. 

ὄνομα in periphr., 385. 3. 

ὀνομάζω, Cj., 275. ζ. 

ὄνομκαι, Cj., 298. 

ὅσ'-» pron, and adv. begin- 
ning w., 317, 519. 2. 

ὅπου, ὅποι" ποῦ, ποῖ" οὗ, 
οἷ, T 63; w. gen., 363; 
interchanged, 659. 

’Orots, T 13: 109, 2. 

ὅπως, const., 601 f. 

ὁράω, Cj., 301. 4. 

ὀρέγω, -γνῦμι, Cj. 295. 

ὄρνις, dec., 123. y 

bovis, οἦ., 295. 

ὀρύσσω, redupl., 191. 2. 

ὀρφώς, dec., 123, y. 

ὅς, rel., 7 24. 147 f, 468; 
use, as rel, 519f; as 
complem., . 535; w. 
modes, 606 ; καὶ ὅς, 491. 
Β.; ὧν μέν, δί, 493. R.; 


οἰχεῖος W. gen., 391. a. 


ὅς βούλει, 525. β. 


ovres, 591 ; in exclam.,| 


ὅς possess., Tf 24: 151. 
use, 503 ἢ, [326 

-os in der., 305, 306, 308 

ὅσος, 1 63: 521; incon 
dens., 529 ; w. adj. of 
admiration, 538. a 3 w. 
inf., 628 ; ὅσον as indecl., 
450.3; as adv., 529.6; 
ὅσον ov, 532. N. 

ὄσσε, dec., 127. [728. 1, 

ὀστέον, -ovv, Ἵ 9: 98, 

ὅστις) Ἱ 24: 153, 519.2; 
irreg. forms, ὅσου, dra, 
ἅττα, ὅτων, droosr, Ἵ 24 
153; imterchanged w. 
ὅς, 520 ; complem. use, 
535f; w. modes, 606, 
608f: ὅ σι μαθών, πὰ 
δών, 631. Ν. 

-orras, adj. in, 138. 2. 

ὀσφραίνομιαι, -ἄομιαι, Ce, 

ὅτε w. modes, 606. [291. 

ὅτι, not elided, 42. «a; 
w. superl., 525. N.; re- 
dund., 609; w. inf. and 
part., 619. N.; repeat- 
ed, 667; pos., 673. 6 ; 
ors τί, 539. α; ὅτι μή, 
671. 9. 

ov < co, 29. a3 «΄ εο, o8, 
00, 36; <oF, 22.3, 117. 

od, 7 23 141 encl., 
732; use, 506f. 

ot > οὐκ, οὐχ, 68. 2,8; X 
μή, 647 ; redund., 664 f; 
οὐ μή, We Subj. and fut. 
ind., 595. 3, N., 597.1; 
οὔ φημι; 616. ὃ; οὐδέ 
emphat., 664. γ; οὐ γὰρ 
ἀλλά, 671. 10 ; οὐ μέν- 
ros (μὴν) ἀλλά, 671.115 
οὐχ, ὅσι, ὅσον, ὅπως, οἷον, 
671. 12. 

οὖδας, dec., 123. β. 

οὐδείς, TN 21] 137. B; 
οὐδεὶς doris ov, 528. 2. 

οὔκων in Hadt., 660. N. 

οὖν «ἰόν, affixed, 328, 
pos., 673. a. 

οἵνεκα « οὗ ἕνεκα, 40. 3° 
const., .580, 671. 13. 


ods, ὠσός < οὗας, -αφος 


7 11:33. y, 104.N., 741. 


οὕξάξω, -ἄω, Cj., 282, 

οὗτος, Ὧ 24: 150: X 
ἐκεῖνος, 512; Χ ὅδε, 513f; 
in repetition and assent, 
513. N. 3 in address, 
343. 3, 515 5 οὗσοσί, 
150. ». 

οὕτω(ς), 67: X dds, 516. 

ὀφείλω, Cj., 268. 

ὄφελος, Monopt., 127. 

ὀφλισκάνω, cj-, 289. 

ὄφρα, constr., 601. 

ὄψομαι, fut., 301. 4. 

-ὅω in der., 318. 

w, 133; ¢¢ »ῬΨῬΈ Ψ, 51; 
xd > Bd, <6 > φό, 52; 
Te > μμ, 53; 4x > Φ, 
61; 7(')>¢, 65;¢ 
> x, 69. π΄; < ¢, 69. 
a; pron. and adv. be- 
ginning w. σα), 7 63: 

παίζω, cj., 276. [517. 

σαῖς, 7 11: 102, 741. a. 

waiw, Cj., 222. 3. 

παλαιός, Cp., 156. y. 

παρά, const., 648, 651. y, 
652. 15 w. pass., 562 ; 
σάρα for πάρεστι, 653. ε; 
780. 

σαροινέω, pref., 192. 4. 

«αρόν, absol., 638. 

was, 7 19: 109, 132, 
683. N., 738. ο; w. 2 
pers. imp., 613. 2 ; way- 
vss, W. rel., 520. a. 

πάσσω, Cj. 275. 9. 

σάσχω, Cj., 281. ε, 238. 
B; vi παθών; 631. N. 

σπαφάσσω, Cj., 274. y. 

σατέομαι, Cj. 288. 

σατήρ, 112 106, 742. 
Πάτροκλος, 116° 121.4. 

πάτρως, dec., 124. γ. 

wavw, ins. of ¢, 221. a. 

σείθω, N39: 217, 238. 
B, 269. 

σεινάω, contr., 33. a. 
IItigausds, 7 14: 116. β. 

rtigw, cj., 268. [281. «. 

πείσομαι, fut. 739 and 

wixtiw, πείκω, Cj., 298. 
πελάζω, -ἄθω, -ἄω, «λά- 
- bw, αἷ., 382. 


GREEK INDEX. 


σέλας and deriv., w. gen., 
394 ; w. dat., 399. 
σέμσω, Ρῇ., 236. a. 
πένης, 129.1; ep., 157. 
πενθικῶς ἔχειν, We gen., 
372. y. 
πέσερι, dec., 113, 119, 2, 
πέπρωμαι, pf., 297. 
σπέπων, Cp. 158. B. 
wie, affixed, 328; pos., 
673. @; encl., 732. 
πέρθω, Cj., 288, 246. β. 
xsel, const., 658; not 
elided, 42 ; as adv., 657, 
730; οἱ περί, 466. N. 
πέρνημει = σισράσκω, 285. 
σέρυσι(ν), 66. a. 
πέσσω, πέστω, Cj., 275.39. 
πετάννῦμοι, -ἄω, Cj, 293, 
wiromas -apas, Cj. 287. 
πεύθομαι, Cj., 290. 
πέφαμαι, Cj., 274, ὃ. 
σεφνεῖν, 2 aor., 274. δ. 
απήγνῦμει, Cj. 294 5 σήγνῦ- 
ro, opt., 226. 4. 
σῆχυς, 114: 111, 113f, 
117. N. 
σίμασλημι, οἷ.) 284. 
πίμσρήμει, cj., 284. 
σίνω, Cj., 278. 
πιπράσκω, Cj., 285. 
wizrw, wiriw, Cj. 286; 
as pass., 556; σεπσσώς, 
238. a. 
wiryns, -νω, Cj., 293. 
πίων, fem. πίειρα, 132. 3, 
134. 3; ep., 158. β. 
«“λάζω, εἷ).. 274. ε. 
πλακόεις, -ods, 109. 2. 
-“σλάσιος, -wy, DUM. in, 
138. 5. 
«λάσσω, Cj., 275. 2. 
πλείων, πλέων, πλεῖσφος, 
189 ; πλεῖν, 159. γ; 
σ΄λεῖον as indecl., 450. 3; 
πλεῖον, πλεῖστα in ep., 
πλέκω, cj., 259. [460. 
WAsovixens, cp., 157. R. 
«λέω, οἷ.. 220, 264. N. 
σλέως, dec., 135. 
πλήν, W. gen., 349; as 
connect., 657. y; rAny 


si, 663. 6. 
3d * 


449 


σπλήσιον, cp., 161], 2. 
πλήσσω, Cj. 374, y 
-α'λόος, num, in, 138, 4, 
“πλύνω, Cj, 270. 

Trww, Cj., 264. 

σνέω, 6]., 220, 264; w 
gen., 391. 3. 

σνύξ, dec., 123. γ. 

σ΄οιέω in periphr., 425. 5. 

πόλις, Ἱ 14, 7 16: 111, 
2, 113f, 118, 121. 

πολύδακρυς, dec., 136. 4. 

πολύπους, dec., 136. 2. 

woaus, Ni 20: 135; ep, 
159 5; w. καὶ, 655. 63 
πολλοί X οἱ πολλοί, 488. 

σπορθέω, Cj., 288. 

πορίζω, Cj., 297. 

πόῤῥω, πρόσω, We Lee 
347, 363. a. 

πορφύρεος, Cp. 156. Ὁ. 

Ποσειδῶν, dec., 105. R., 
107. N. 

πόσις, dec., 119, 2. 

ποτάομοαι, -ἐορεῶι, Cj, 287. 

wort, W. interrog., 328 ; 
work, σού, rus, &C., POS 
673. «3; encl., 732; X 
mors; ποῦ, &e., T 63 
535f. 

work, προτί, 48. 2, B. 

πόφνια, fem., 136. B. 

wots, T 11: 102, 112.0 

renee, 120: 135. 

πράσσω, I 38: 217, 274. 

«ρίσξυς, 136. a; fem, 
σπρίσξειρα, &e., 184, 35 
ep., 157. 3. 

“πρίασθα;, Ἵ 49: 301. 8; 
w. gen., dat., and ace., 
374. a, 399. a. 

πρίν, const. 657, N. ; 
πρὶν 4, 629. 2, 657. N. 

πρίω, πρίζω, Cj., 282. 

“πρό, cp., 161. 2; const., 
648 ; πρὸ σοῦ, 492. a. 

πρὸς «ζ προσ, 48. B; 
const., 648, 652, 1; w. 
pass., 562; as ady., 657. 

σροσβάλλω,ν. gen, 391.3. 

σπρότερος, cp., 161. 1, 2. 

xeoveyov, 322; cp., 161.2. 


πρόφρων, -ῴρασσα, 134. ὃ, 


450 


«ρόχοος, -ους, dec., 124. B. 

σρῶτος, cp., 161. 1, 2. 

σ΄τάρνυμαι, Cj. 295. 

«τερόν, 19° 744. 

“σ-τήσσω, Cj., 274. y- 

πευχή, -ζ, dec., 124. a. 

σπυνθάνομα;ι, Cj., 290. 

σῦρ, dec., 124. β. 

πῶς ἄν, in wish, 600. 2. 

6. 13; aspirated, doubled, 
13. 2, 690. 1: @, 
changes of, 56f, 70. 1 ; 
e, final cons., 63. 

ῥάδιος, cp-, 160. 

parrw, Cj., 272. 

pig, αὖ.» 276. 

ῥέω, Cj., 264. 

ῥήγνῦμοι, ῥήσσω, Cj., 294. 

ῥήτωρ, N12: 57. 3. 

ῥιγόω, contr., 244, a. 

ῥίπσω, -tw, -ἄξω, Cj., 288, 
319. 2. 

pis, 7 12: 105. 8. 

«ρος in der., 315. f. 

paovvips, Cj., 293. 

eX 5, 10. 13-¢, 10. 2, 
llL.a;o>+s, 50; >%, 
300; « > ¢, Dor., 70. 
2; changes of linguals 
and liquids w. σ, 55f, 
68.3: o¢ > rr, 70.1; 
σ dropped between two 
cons., 60; final cons., 
68 ; dropped and assum- 
ed, 67 ; sign of subject, 
84; of pl., 84; of pers., 
143, 172; dropped in 
cj., 182, 210. 3, 247. ¢; 
tense-gign, 178, 198; 
chan 200f; added 
to r., 271, 273f;3° -s, 
ady. in, 321. 

= in declension, 117. 

σαλσίξω, Cj. 274. 65 -ει, 
SC. ὁ σαλαιγκτής, 546. 

σαόω, Cj., 282. 

σαφής, 7 17: 112; «ἧς, 
-ῶς, 6ρ., 157, 162. 

oBivvips, Cj., 293. 

«σε, adv. in, 321. 3. 

σεαυτοῦ, σαυτοῦ, NT 23: 
144; use, 504. 

“σείω in der., 319. 1. 


GREEK INDEX. 


σεύομεαι, Cj., 264, 246. α. 
σημαίνει, nom. omit. 546. 
σήσπω, Cj., 266. 
σής, dec., 123. y. £182. 
-σθ, -σθα, sign of 2 pers., 
-cia, -cis, in der., 305. a. 
giros, dec., 125. a. 
ox, added to r., 279 f, 
319. 2. 
σκεδάννῦμι, Cj., 293. 
σκέλλομαι, toxaAny, 227. β. 
σκέππομαι, σκοπέω, Cj., 
σκιά, Ἵ 7: 88, 98. [288. 
σκίδνημοι, Cj., 293. 
-σκον, -σκόμην, iter. form, 
σκώρ, dec. 103. N. [249. 
σμῶδιξ, dec., 123. y. 
Toons, Cj., 264. 
σός, 7 24: 151; use, 503. 
copes, T 18: 13135 .ὅς, 
-ws, Cp-, 156, 162. 
craw, Cj., 219, 221, 
σαπείρω, Cj., 268. 
σπένδω, Cj., 222. 
oxtes, 7 16: 121. 4. 
-cow in der., 311. ἃ. 
σταθμός, dec., 125. a 
στέαρ, dec., 104. N. 
στέλλω, Cj., 277. α. 
στενάζω, -χω, Cj-, 274. ὃ. 
στερέω, -ρίσκω, -ρορίαι, Cj. 
oreiras, -70, 240. «. [296. 
στίχος, dec., 124. β. 
σαόρνῦμι, σαορέννῦμι, στρών- 
vous, 6)., 295. 
στρέφω, στρόφεω, στρωφάω, 
δ, 259. 
ov, 98: 141f3 use, 
502f; σοῦ, σοί, σέ, encl., 
7323; σύγε, 3283 coi, 
ins., 410. N. 
συγγιγνώσκω, const., 615. 
σῦκον, 19 87. 
σύν, ξύν, in compos., 68.3; 
const., 648; w. num., 
137. ¢. 
-«σύνη in der., 308. 
σύνοιδα, const., 615. 
σφάζω, -rrw, Cj., 274. ὃ. 
σφάλλω, Cj., 277. a. 
cht, σφίσι, σφίν, NT 23: 
141f; use, 506f; encl, 
732. 


σφέτερος, 7 24: use, 503 
6, 506f  - 

σφοδρός, cp., 156. B. 

Σχῆμα καθ᾽ ὅλον καὶ μέ 
ρος, 334. 9, 418, 438 
B; ᾿Αλκμανικόν, 544. β 

᾿ ΠΙνδαρικόν, 549, Β. 

σώξω, σώω, σόω, Cj., 282. 

| Σωκράτης, Toit: OPA 
113f, 743. 

'σῶμα, 7 11: 103. 

σῶς, dec., 135. 

cwree, voc., 105. R., 742. 

σώφρων, cp., 158. 

7,133; τα > σ΄, ch > 
of, 52; cu > op, 53; 
dropped before ¢, 55; 
bef. x, 61; er <l ae, 
70. 13; ¢ in neut. lin- 
guals, 103 ; signof pers., 
143, 147, 171; changes 
of in cj. 181, 2113 
added to r., 271f; pron. 
and adv. beginning w., 
763: 817. 

réras, cp. 158. 

«ἀμά == ἐγώ, 477. β. 

φσαμίας, I 7: 86, 93. 

σάν, monopt., 127. 

ταράσσω, Cj., 274. y. 

Téeragos, dec., 125. ἃ 

τάσσω, τάτεω, Cj, 274. 

ταὐτόν, ταὐτό, 97. N. 

φσαχύς, -ἑως, Cp., 159, 162 

φαῶς, -wv, dec., 124. y. 

τέ, affixed, 328; pos 
673. a; encl., 732. 

-rt, adv. in, 321. 2. 

φείνω, Cj., 268; 217. α. 

-rsiea in der., 306. N. 

φεῖχος, T 14: 113. 2, 
Φ ΙΕ, 

φσελευτσῶν, as adv., 457. α΄ 
632. 

σελέω, cj., 219, 221. 

φέλος, adv. ace., 440. 

φέμνω, τάμνω, Cj., 277. 6 

-rios, Verbal in, 3814 w. 
dat., 407. ;const., 6-42 ἢ, 

rieas, dec., 104. 

rigny, dec., 132, 2, 

riccagts, τίτταρες, T 21 


137; φέθριπαον, 65. N 


τεστραίνω, Cj., 286. 

ridxw, C}-, 270. 9. 

φτήκω, Cj., 266. 

φσηλικοῦτος, -ὅσδε, q 63: 
150, 516. [308, 309. 
ene, -rns, in der., 306, 

««ήριον in der., 307. 

-τήριος in der., 314. Ὁ. 

τίγρις, dec., 119. 2. 

τίθημι, J 50: 224f, 284. 

σίκτω, Cj., 272. B. 

«ἰμάω, ἡ 45: 216, 2183 
τιμάων, 22. 

rien, 4 7: 93, 744. 

riensis, σιμῆς, 109. 2. 

viva, Cj., 278. 

eis, indef., 24 :. 105. B, 
152f; encl., 732 ; irreg. 
forms, σοῦ, τῷ, ἄττα, 
152, 158. α; affixed, 
828 ; use, 517f; w. 2 

pers. imp., 613. 2; <i 
as indecl., 450. 3. 

vis, interrog., J 24 : 152. 
2; 729. E. 5 use, 535f; 
w. art., 480. a; in con- 
dens., 528.13 ei γάρ; 
vi δέ, &e., 539.13 gi 
λέξεις 3 5853 « οὖν οὐ ; 
τί οὗ ; as imp., 597. 3. 

-tis in der., 306. N., 309, 
$1 i. 

TiTewrnm, «ρώω, Cj. 285. 

«ιτύσκοραι, Cj, 285. 

cia, εἷ., 218, 918. 

«λήσομαι, τέτληκα, 301. 
2, 238. α. 

«ὁ γε, τὸ καὶ τὸ, 4923 «ὸ 
νῦν εἶναι, 623. β; τοί, 
σαί, 148, N. [a. 

roi, encl., 732; pos., 673. 

Torres, φοιόσδε, J 63: 
97, N., 150, 516. 

Togiw, -εύω, Cj., 285. 

-ros in der., 138, 305, 
314; verbal in, w. dat., 
407. x. 

φοσοῦσος, τοσόσδε, J 24, 
q 63 : 97.N., 150, 516. 

-ree in der., 307. b. 

wets, J 21: 137. 

τρέσω, Cj., 259. 

τρίφω, ςἦ.γ 268. 


GREEK INDEX. 


φρίχω, cj, 301. δ. [Ν. 
-reie, -reis in der., 506. 
τριακοντούτης, «τις. 134.β. 
φρίβω, Cj. 269. [728. 8. 
φριήρης, 414: 112, 115, 
φπρίπους, dec., 136. 2. 
τρίτον ἡμιτάλαντον, 1 40. γ. 
-reov in der., 307. Ὁ. 
πρόπις» dec., 119. 1. 
φτρύω, τρύχω, α).. 282. 
φρώγω, Cj. 267. 3. 
συγχάνω, Cj. 2903 w. 
gen., 370, 380. a; w. 
part., 633. 

ruvvoures, Ἶ 63: 150. a. 

«ύσ τω, Cj., 272. 

σύρσις, dec., 119. 2. 

φύφω, cj. 270. 

τυφώς, dec., 124. y. 

σῷ, therefore, 492. B. 

-rwe in der., 306. Ὁ. 

ὖ ψιλόν, 4 3: 22.0, 24, 
ὃ init., aspir., 13. 1; 
contr., 34, 36; ν « F, 
50; ὅ > 0 and εν inr., 
270. 

ὑξριστής, cp., 157. R. 

ὕδωρ, dec., 103. N. 

υἱός, J 16: 123. y, 124. 
A; omitted, 385. 

-vvw in der., 318. Ὁ. 

ὑπαί == ὑπό, 648. B. 

ὕπαρ, dipt., 127. [648. 

trie, cp., 161. 23 const., 

ὑπήκοος, W. gen., 377 3 Ww. 
dat., 405. n. [292. 

ὑπισχνέομια,, -χομαι, Ce, 

ὗσό, ορ., 161. 2; const., 
648 ; w. pass., 562. 

ὕσσερος, ep., 161. 2. 

ὑφαίνω, cj. 267. 

? 1 3; ¢¢ > ¥, 51; 
Or > xz, 93 > Bd, 52; 
Pu > μμ, 535 Ox > φ, 

φαγεῖν, 2. aor., 298. [6]. 

φαίνω, 4 42: 267, 236.23 
φανείς, 4 22: 109, 132; 
φανῶν, J 22: 56. 

φάλαγξ, J 11: 101. 

φανερός εἶμι, S51, 634. γ. 

φάσκω, J 53: 301. 7. 

φείδομαι, W. gen., 348, 

φέρτερος, -ἰστος, &e., 160. 


45] 


φέρω, cj. 3801. 6; φέρ, 
613.3. 

φεύγω, Cj. 270. 93 as 
pass., 556, 

φημί, J 53: 228, 284. 
R., 301. 7; encl., 732; 
ἔφη, 5525 ἔφην as aor 
576. 5. 

φθάνω, Cj., 278 5 we part., 

Potion, cj., 268. [632 

φθίνω, φθίω, Cj., 278 

(bois, dec., 123. y- 

-gi, dat. in, 89. 

φιλέω, 46: 216, 218 

φίλιος, | 18: 151, 740.2 

φιλόγελως, dec., 136. 1 

φίλος, cp., 156. γ᾽ a. 

φλέγω, φλεγέθω, cj.» 298. 

φλέψ, 4 11: 101. 

φορέω, φρέω, cj., 301. 6. 

φράζω, cj.. 275. ζ. 

φράσσω, φράγνῦμει; Cj, 294. 

φρέαρ, dec., 104. N. 

φρίκη, -ξ, dec., 124. a. 

φρίσσω, Cj., 274. y- 

Φροίμειον, 65. N. 

φροῦδος, 65. N. ; dec.,136 a. 

φροῦρος, 65. N. 

φυγγάνω = Pityw, 270.9. 

φυλάσσω, -αχϑε, 246. β. 

φύξιμοος, w. acc., 424. 1. 

φύω, Cj.,218; ἔφυν, 227. γ. 

φῶς, J 11 : 103, 74]. α. 

x» 7 33 χα > & 51; 
xT > κα, ~9 > γδ, 52; 
XE > Yio 535 xe > 
% 61; x, ins, 90.3: 
added to r., 282. 

χάζω, Cj., 275. ζ. 

χαίρω, Cj.. 267. 

χανδάνω, Cj., 290. 

χαρίεις, J 19: 57, 109, 
132; ep. 157. 

χάρις, F 11: 102: χά- 
ev, We gen, 372. γι; 
pos., 674. 

χάσκω, χαίνω, Cj., 281. & 

χείρ, J 12: 123. y. 

χείρων, xtigsoros, 160. 

χελιδών, dec., 123. ὦ 

χέω; Cj., 264. 

χοῦς, dec., 123. y. 

χόω, o inserted, 221. a. 


452 


χράω, χράομαι, Cj. 218, 
a, 284: contr., 33, ἃ; 
χροάομαι, W. ἀαΐ,, 419, 5. 

χρέος, dec., 123. y. 

χρή, impers., cj., 284. 4; 
w. ace, 430, R.; w. 
inf., 583. 

χρήζω, Gj. 284. 2,45 w. 
gen., 357. N. 

χοῆμα in periphr., 385. 
δ; ch χρῆμα, why? 
432. N. [1- 

χούσεος, J 18: 131, 728. 

χουσόκερως, dec., 136. l. 

ews, Mec. 123. y, 104, 

VY, 733 « σ΄; Bs, 0, 51. 

«ψευδής, Cp. 156. R. 


ὦ μέγα, J 3: 22. y, 24f; 


X ὁ, 24; in contr., 32f; 
in subj., 204 ; verbs in, 
q 34f: 170. B3; -w in 
der., 318. d. 

ὦ in address, 143; pos., 
674. 5. 

ὧδε X οὕσως, 516. 

-wons in der., 315f. 

abiw, Cj. 288, 189. 2 

-wy, -ωνία in der., 313. 

aviowat, Cj., 301,83 w. 
gen., dat., and acc., 374. 
a, 399. « 

wie. <6 ἀνήρ, 39. 

ws, proclit., 731; omitted 
before appos., 332. 3; 


GREEK INDEX. —— ENGLISH INDEX. 


w. dat., 410 ; w. super, . 
525. ἃ 3 == ὅφι οὕτως 
531. β ; w. adv. of ad- 
miration, 538. a: Ws 
part., 583. a, 6403 in 
wish, 600. 2 ; final, 601 ; 
omitted, 611, 3; w. inf,,. 
628; ellips. w., 662 
as prep., 662. a3 ws vi 
539. a 

-ws, adv. in, 321. 

aoxte, W. part., 640; el- 
lips. w., 662. 

aort, w. inf., 628. 

wu, Ion., 25, 45. 6. 

ὥφελον, in wish, 567. γι 


599. N. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Ablative in Latin, 340. β. 


Absolute, nom., 343; compt. and su- 


perl., 465 ; inf., 623; part., 638 f. 
Absorption of vowels, 31. 


Abstract noun, 305, 308; > concrete, 
[305. R. 


Acatalectic verse, 698. 

Accent, 722f; marks of, 14, 22. a ; 
principles, 722 ; uses, 722. 3; gen. 
laws, 726 3 changes, 727 f ; in apostr., 
contr.,@cras., 728; determination of, 
734f; hist.. 7941 in dial., 735 ; 
in declens., 736f; in Dec. 1, 736, 
740. 1; in Dec. m., 728. 1, 787 ; 
in Dec. ag 728. 2, 8, 741 f3; in fem. 
adj., 740. 2; in comp, pron., 732. 3; 
in interrogatives, 152. 2, 5353 in 
compar., 745 ; in conj., 728. 4, 746f; 
in compos., 739; in particles, 750 ; 
showing quant., 681. 

Accentual places, 723f; changes, 727 f. 

Accusative, 78, 84, 339; changes in, 
34, 63. R., 84, 96. 4, 97, 100, 102, 
y, 107, 110f, 114f; in appos. w. sent., 
834. 8; expr. dir. limit, 339, 


422f; 


of dir. obj. and eff., 423f; w. verbs 
and verbals, 424 ; w. verbs gov. gen. 
and dat., 424. 2; by attr., 425, 427. 
9; in periphr., 425. 5, 6; w. verb 
omitted, 426 ; with νή, vai, μά, 426. 
3; omitted, 427; of dir. obj., 428f% 
w. verbs of motion, 429; w. causa- 
tives, 430 5 w. δεῖ and χρή, 430. R.; 
of effect, 431 f; of kind. noun, 431 ; 
w. adj., 431. 1; of neut. adj., 432; 
of defin. noun, 433; double, 434f; 
w. verbs of making, &c., 4343; doing, 
&e., 435 ; asking, &c., 436 ; of spe- 
cif. or synecd., 437f, 5635 in ex- 
clam., 438. 3; of extent, 439 5 adbv., 
440 3 of rel, attr. 526; w. inf 
and part., 617, 696; abs., 638f; w 
verbal in φέον, 643f; w. prep., 648f 

Acephalous verse, 698. 

Achronie forms, 565. 

Active voice, 165, 174, 5557); as ἴῃ 
trans. or reflex., 5551 as pass., 556 
w. reflex. pron., 561. 1 5 interch. w 
mid., 561 3 verbals, 305f, $14, 392 - 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Astual sentence, $29; mode, 4 27: 
177, 587. 

Acute accent, 14, 722f ; > grave, 729 ; 
‘ syll. 725. 

Address, nom. in, $43. 33 voce. in, 
442f; sign of, 443. 

Adjective, 73; declens., 4 17: 128f; 
of one term., 1293; of two term., 4 17: 
130; of three term., J 188: 131f; 


irreg., 135f; num., 137f; compar., | 


155: deriv., 314f, 458.3 5 compos., 
324, 326, 458. 35; synt., agreement, 
444f; in comp. const., 446 ; used 
subst., 447f; use of neut., 449f; for 
abstr. noun, 449. «; in adv. phrases, 
449. 8; w. words of diff. gend. and 
aumb., 450; in pl. for sing., 451 ; 
w. impers., 546. «3; agreeing w. idea, 
453 5 agreeing w. gen. implied, 454; 
attracted, 455f; for adv., adjunct, 


Aleaic, 698; lesser, 706. 3. 
Alemanian verse, 706. 8. 

Alexandrine dialect, 8. 

Alphabet, 41 iOf, 21f; Hebrew, 21 
Anacoluthon, 329; in synt. of appos., 

333. 7; nom., 344; adj., 459 ; compt., 

_ 461 ; art., 444; verb, 609; inf. and 

| part, 619. N., G27f; part., 638f, 

| 6413 verbal in -rs0s, 644; particle, 
669. 

Anacrusis, 698. β. 

Analysis, forms of,  65f. 

Anapest, 697 ; -ic rhythm, 696 ; verse, 
697. B, ΤΟΤΕ; 

Anastrophe, 730. 

Anomalous nouns, 122f: adj., 1357: 
compar., 160f; changes in r. of verb, 
301. 

Antecedent, def. or indef., 519; in 
clause w. rel., or omitted, 522f, 5253 


&e., 457: in anacol., 459; use of in case of rel., 527; clause united w. 


degrees, 460 5 w. prep., 651. 3. 
Adjective clause, 329, 492. 1, 522. 2; 
pronouns, 1411} synt. 444f, 494f. 
Adjunct, 329 ; complem. X circumst., 

expon. X nude, 329. 

Adonie verse, 706. 1. 

Adverb, num., 4 25: 1593; compar., 
155, 162; deriv., 320f; synt., 646f, 
657f; w. art. = adj., 475 ; attr., 
526. 3, 527. R., 581. € ; as prep., 
as conn. and non-conn., 657 ; used 
subst., 658 ; in const. pregn., 659. 

Adverbial clause, 329; acc. 440f; 
phrases, 478 ; inf., 623. 

- Holic dialect, 1, 3, 6f; digamma, 
22.3; opt.. 184. a, 205. 35 verse, 
706. 

Affixes, open X close, 82. ¢; of de- 
clens.. | δ: 80f; analyzed, 7 6: 
83. 3; in dial, 95f, 99, 1208; of 
pers. pron., 141f; of verb, 4 28f: 
171f, 1958; classes, 195; orders, 
1963 elements, § 31 : 197f; union 
w.r., 216f; in verbs in -ws, 224f; 
in complete tenses, 233f; dial., 181 f, 
241f. 

Agent, deriv., 306. 3; w. pass. verbs 
and verbals, 380, 407. x, 417, 462, 
642 f, 

Agreement, $29; of subst., 331f; of 


rel. clause, 524 f, 528f; w. complem. 
clause, 538. |aecent., 726. 

Antepenult,.in pronunc., 18. 59; in 
Antibacchius, 697 ; -ic rhythm, 696. 3. 

| Antispast, 697 ; -ie verse, 696. 3, 721. 

Antistrophe, 700. 2. 

Aorist, 167f, 178; second, 178. 8, 
180, 199, 255 5 in pures, 7 57 : 227; 
sign changed in, 56, 201 ;. X pres. 
and impf., 569f. imp., 570. 2: used 
achronically, 5753 X perf. and plup., 
577; for perf. and plup., 580 ; for 
fut., 5843; X impf., as conting., 593 5 
X pres., w. μή, 598.1 ; accent, 734.4, 
746f. 

Apheresis, crasis referred to, 38. 

Apodosis, 329, 609 ἢ, 

Aposiopésis, 484. 

Apostrophe, 16, 30,41 f; accent, 728. 6. 

Appellatives, der. of fem., 311. 

Apposition, 331 ἔς for part. const., 360. 

Appositive, 329, 331 ἢ. 

Aptote, 126. N. 

Argive dialect, 15 ys in, 58. β. 

Aristophanic verse, 709. 

Arsis, 695; affecting quant., 690. 3. 

Article, 7 24: 1477} in crasis, 39, 
used to mark gend., &c., 74. 8 ; pre- 
pos. X postpos., 147; synt., 467f; 
Ep., Ion., and Dor. use, 467 5 as an 
art., 469f; how translated, 469. 1 ; 


adj., 444 f ; of prom., 494 f; of verb, 
543f. 


w. subst. in its full ext., abstr., inf, 


454 


prop. name, &c., 470; w. subst. def. 
from lim. word, 472 ; position, 472; 
w. pron., 473, 480, 483, 528. 1 ; pos. 
W. οὗτος, ὅδε, ἐκεῖνος, 474. B; w. ad- 
verb, 475, 478 ; used subst., 476f 5 
W. ani or περί, 476. N. 5 in periphr., 
477; in adv. phrases, 478 ; w. subst. 
def. from prev. ment., &c., 479f; 
== poss. pron., 482; without a subst., 
484 ; omitted, 485f; marking subj. 
of sent., 487. 43; doubled, 489. 9; 
asa pron., 467f, 490f; w. μέν, δέ, 
490 5 ws γάρ, καί, 491; in its ¢- 
forms, as demonst. or pers., 4925 as 
rel., 493 ; π΄. inf., 622f. 

Aspirate, 13 ; asp. or rough mutes, T 3. 

Associated consonants, ¢ 3. 

Asterisk, 16. 4. 

Asynartete verse, 695. 3. 

Asyndeton, 660. 

Atonics, 731, 

Attenuation of vowels, 28 f. 

Attic dialect, 1, 4f; old, middle, new, 
4; aAtticists, 8; declens., 98 ; gen., 
116. δ; redupl., 191. 2, 283 5 fut., 
200 ; opt., 205, #5; forms in imp., 
213.33 

Attraction, 3295 in synt. of appos., 
333f 3 acc., 425, 626; adj., 4457: 
pron., 5247, 588; verb, 550f; inf. 
and part., 614f, 626 ; particle, 659, 

Attribute, 444, «. [668. 

Augment, 17,187 ; syll. 187 ; temp., 
187f; in comp. verbs, 192f. 

Augmentatives, deriv., 313, 

Authority in prosody, 687. 

Auxiliary verbs, 180, 234, 583, 637. 

Bacchias, 697 5 -ic verse, 696. 3, 720. 

Barytohe, 725 ; verb, 216. a 

Base, in ¢j., 202. ἃ 5 in vers., 698. β. 

Beeotian dialect, 1. 

Brachycatalectic, 698. 

Brackets, 16. 4. 

Breathings, 4 3: 

Breve, 676. N. 

Bucolic cxesura, 699. 5. 

Byzantine dialect, 8. 

Cesura, of foot, verse, rhythm, masc., 
fem., &c., -al pause, syll., 699; af- 
fecting quant., 690. 3. 

Cardinal numbers, 4 21, 4 25: 137. 

Cases, dir. X indir., casus recti X ob- 
liqui, 78, 83f ; hist. of, 83f5 use of, 


13; marks of, 22. α. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


338f ; relations of, dir., indir., subj. 
obj., resid., 338f; in Lat., 340. B. 

Catalectic, 698 ; in syll., &e., 698. a. 

Causative verbs, 319 ; w. ace., 430. 

Characteristic (last letter, or letters, of 
root), 92f, 98, 100f, 170. B, 216f 

Chief tenses, 168. — [exponents, 329 

Choral odes, 700. 2. 

Choriamb, 697 3 -ic verse, 696. 3, 720. 

Chronic forms, 565. 

Circumflex accent, 14, 724 f. 

Circumflexed syll., 725; vow. long, 
678, 726. 4. 

Circumlocution, see Periphrasis. 

Circumstance, 329. 

Close vowels, 24f 5 affixes, 82. ς, 

Cognate vowels, 26. δ; consonants, 49 ; 
in dial., 69. 

Collective, w. plur., 453, 497, 548. 

Common dial., 4, 7f; gend., 74. 

Comparative, 155f, 316; w. gen., 
351, 461; w. dat., 4193 w. # and 
oth. particles, 461, 468 ; ellip. and 
mixed const., 461. 2,3 3 w. ἐλαίδος, 
δέοντος, ἢ κατά, ἢ wort, &e., 463; 
w. reflexive, 464 ; two, w. ἤ, 464.5; 
abs., 465. 

Comparison, 155f, 316 5 of adj., 155f, 
316. 2; of adv., 162f; of other 
words, 161; by use of adv., 460; 
double, 161, 460 ; accent in, 745. 

Compellative, 329, 442. 

Complement, -ary adjunct, conjunc- 
tion, pron., adv., 329. 

Complete tenses, T 26: 168 ; hist. of, 
179, 186; four formations in act., 
186 ; as indef., 233 ; inflection, 233 f; 
older and more used in pass. than act., 
240, 256, 5783 most used in part. 
578, B; X indef., 577f. 

Composition, 323f; form of Ist word, 
324f; 2d word, 326f ; close or prop. 
X loose or improp., 327; accent m, 
734. f, 739. 

Compound word, 303 ; form. of, 323 ὃ; 
verbs, prefixes of, 192.35 const., 
$29, 446, 496. ο, 544. 

Conclusion, forms of, 603 f. 

Concord, 329. 

Concrete < abstr., 305. R. 

Condensed construction, 528 f, 538. 

Condition, forms of, 603 f. 

Conditional sentences, modes in, 603f, 


ENGLISH 


Conjugation, 4 “6: 164: principles, 
164 : hist., 171; prefixes, 4 28: 
187f; affixes, 4 28f: 195f} root, 
170. α, 254f; quantity in, 682, 684; 
accent in, 746f- 

Conjunctions, 329; synt. of, 654f; 
generic for spec., 656 ; omitted, 660; 
introd., 661. N. 

Conjunctive mode, 169. y, 591. 

Connecting vowels of dec., 1 6: 82.3; 
of verb, 4 31: 175, 178f, 202f; in 
ind., 203 ; in subj., 204; in opt. 
205 ; in imp. and inf., 206; in part., 
207 ; wanting, 208, 224f, 237f; in 
dial., 246. 

Connective exponents, pron., adv., 329 ; 
position, 673. 

Consonants, 4 3: 49f; becoming vow- 
els in Gr. alphabet, 22; euph. chang- 
es of, 50f; final, 63; paragogic, 66 ; 
dial. var., 69f; in poets, 71; added| 
to r., 271f; two lengthen syll., 677, 
688 Ff. 

Contingent sentences, 329 ; modes, 1 27: 
169,177, 587f; particles, 587 f; con- 
tingency, pres. or past, 589f. 

Contract verbs, 1 45: 216; in dial., 
241f; forms of verbs in -ys, 225f, 
241f; pf. part., 237. 

Contraction, 80 ἔς; omitted, 37. R.; in 
dial., 45; in Dec. 1.90 94 ; in Dec. 1.) 
98; in Dec. mt, 104, 107f, 109. 2, 
115f; in augm., 188f; in verb, 216, 
226, 241f; in pf. part., 237; inr. 
of verb, 260; accent in, 728. a. 

Codrdinate consonants, 49; in dial., 
69; sentences for subord., 533 ἢ, 656. 

Copula omitted, 547. 

Coronis, 16. 

Correlatives, pronominal, J 63: 317. 

Correspondence of a, s, v, with », ¢, F, 
50, and page v. 

Crasis, 30, 58; accent mn, 728. Ὁ. 

Cretan dialect, 1; ys in, 58. β. 

Cretic, 697 ; verse, 696. 3, 720. 

Dactyl, 697 ; -ic verse, 696, 703f. 

Dative, 78,84, 339f; sing. not elided, 
42. αἰ; pl. in Dec. m., 51, 57f, 114. 
3; objective, 339, 397f; of approach, 
397f; of nearness, 398f; w. verbs 
of traffic, $99. « ; expr. succession, 
399. B ; of likeness, 400 ; of influence, 


401 f; w. words of address, 402; ad- 


INDEX. 4h 


vantage, &c., 4033 appearance, giv- 
ing, oblig., val., 404; oppos., yield- 
ing, &e., 405; w. words expr. mentas 
act or feeling, or power of exciting 
emotion, 406f; w. verbals, 407. x ; 
w. subst. verb, 408 ; w. other words, - 
409; expr. remote relations, w. ws, 
410 5 poi, coi, &c., 410. N. ; for gen, 
411, 503. 6: residual, 339f, 414f; 
instrum. and mod., 4157: of intru- 
ment, &c., 416; of agent, 417; of 
way, manner, respect, &c., 4183 we 
αὐτός, 418. R.; of meas. of ciff., 
4193 Ww. xedouas and νομίζω, 419.5; 
temporal and local, 420f ; of rel., attr., 
526. B; w. preps, 6:8f. 

Declension, 4 4f: 73f, three methods, 
79, 85f, 1853 gen. rules, 80f; af- 
fixes,  5f: 80f; Dec. 1., 9 7f: 86, 
88f, 92f; dial. 78: 94f; Deco, 
7 Of: 868 97f; dial, 4 10: 99; 
Dec. πι., T 11f: 85f, 100f; dial., 
115: 120f; special law of Greek, 
110; irreg. and dial., 7 16: 122f; 
defect., 126 f; of adj. and part., 1 17f: 
128f; of-num., 4 21: 137; of 
pron., Ἵ 29. 141f; quantity in, 
682f. accent in, 736 f. 

Defective nouns, 126 ἢ; verbs, 287. 2. 

Definite tenses, Ἧ 26: 168; X indef., 
569f; descriptive, 570f, 576; in 
verbs of asking, &c., 574. N.3; article, 
469 ; relatives, 519f. 

Definitive, old, 147 f, 467f; noun, 433. 

Degrees of compar., 155 ; use of, 4605; 
interch. and mixed, 466. 

Demonstratives, 7 24: 150, 512; 
omitted before rel., 523; in attr, 
526f; for rel., 534. 

Deponent, mid. X pass., 166; pass. 
of, 564. 

Derivation, 1 62: 303f; quantity in, 
685 ; accent in, 734. e, 736f. 

Desiderative verbs, 3195 sentences, 
modes in, 597 f. 

Determination of accented syll., 734. f, 

Dizresis, 16. 3, 26, 46 ; accent m, 728. 
N.; in vers., 699. 2. 

Dialects, 1 f; Ion., Ep., Hom., 2; Hol. 
3; Att., Comm. 4, 6f; Dor. 5¢ 
Maced., Alex., Hellen., Mod. Gr. or 
Romaic, 8; dialectic variations im 
orthog., 23 ; vow., 43f ; cons., 69f; 


456 


Dec. τ, 18: 95}: Dec. m, T 10: 
99; Dee. πὸ T 15fs 120f; adj., 
120: 132f; num, T 21: 137f; 
pron., 7 23f: 1498: prefixes of verb, 
1943 affixes, 181f, 241f; synt., 
330. 2; accent, 735. 

Diastole, 16. 2. 

Digamma, 13. 4, 21f, 89, 117, 142f, 
220, 222. y, 264, 267. 3, 690. ὦ. 

Dimeter, 698, 700. 1. 

Diminutives, gender, 75; der., 312. 

Diphthongs, 4 3: 24f; prop. X im- 
prop., 253; corresponding, 29; re- 
solved, 46; long, 678; shortened 
before a vowel, 691; forming 2 acc. 

Dipody, 697. β. [places, 723. 

Diptote, 127. β. 

Direct cases, 78, 83 f, 338 f ; obj., 422f; 

Distich, 700. [quot., 607 f. 

Distinct sentence, 329; modes, Ἵ 27 : 

᾿ 587f; in depend. clauses, 614; X 
incorp., 618. 

Divided construction, 544. a. 

Dochmius, 697 ; -iac verse, 720f. 

Doric dial., 1, δῇ: fut., 203. 3. 

Double consonants, 13: 51; lengthen 
syll., 588; verbs,¢ 43f° 170. β, 222. 

Doubtful vowel, 24. 6, 680f. 

Duad in vers., 700. 2. 

Dual, 77 ; old pl., 85, 172; w. pl., 337. 

Ecclesiastical dialect, 8. 

Elegiac poetry, 2; verse, 705. 

Elision, 30, 41 f, 192. R. 

Ellipsis, $29; in synt. of appos., 332 ; 
gen. part., 361. 8B; gen. possess., 
391.93 dats, 399. B, 410 ; ace., 496: 
adj., 447f; compt., 461. 23 art., 
475, 485f5 pron., 502f, 513. N., 
521% 525. N., 528f, 538, 539. 1, 
541; verb, 545f ; inf, 624f, 627f; 
part., 634. a, 639. 25; prep, 650f; 
particle, 660 f. 

Emphatic changes in r. of verb, 265f. 

Enallage, 329. 

Enclitics, 732. 

Ending, see Flexible. 

Enneémim, 699, 4. 

Epenthesis, see Insertion. 

Epie language, 2, 6. 

Epicene, 74. y. 

Episéma, 7 1 : 

Epithet, 444. a. 


11, 22. ὃ, 


Epode, 700. 2. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Equal rhythm, 696. 

Erasmian pronunciation, 20. 

Etymology, J 4f: 72f. 

Euphonic changes of vowels, 27f: of 
consonants, 50f ; in’Dec. 1, 92f; in 
Dee. u., 9€; in Dec. ur, 100f; in 
conj., 181, 216 Γῇ : ἴῃ r. of verb, 259f; 
inflection, 86, 175f. 

Exclamation, note of, 15 3 nom. in, 
343, 2; gen. in, 572 ; acc. in, 438.3; 
inf. in, 625. 

Exponents, connect. X charact., 329. 

Exponential adjunct, 329. 

Falling Ionic, 697 ; rhythm, 696. 3. 

Feet, 694, 697; exchange of, 695. a; 
ictus of, 695. 8 ; cxsura of, 699. 

Feminine, 74f; dec., 88 ; in adj., 131f; 
same form as masc., 129f, 133. N.; 
eesura, 699. 4. 

Figures of syntax, $29, 

Final consonants, », e, ¢, 63; conjunic- 
tions, 329; sentences, modes in, 601 f. 

First tenses, 178, 180, !86. 

Flexible endings of declens., 6: 82. . 
33 of verb, 7 31: 209f; in dial., 
247 f. 

Formation, § 62f: 72, 302 f; of sim- 
ple words, 304f; compound, 323 f. 

Fractional numbers, 140. y. 

Frequentative verbs, 319. 

Future, i167f, 178: wants subj. and 
imp., 169. 6; sign changed in, 56, 
200; second, 180, 199, 255; use, 
565f, 581f; part. expr. purpose, 
583. a, 635; for pres. or past tense, 
5855 opt., 587. Ὁ; ind. for imp., 
597 ; w. ὅπωξ, 601 f. 

Future Perfect, 168. a, 179, 239, 582. 

Gender, 74f; rules of, 75f. 

Genitive, 78, 84, 339; of departure, 
345f; of separ., 546 ; w. words of 
sparing, &c., 348 ; of distinction, 346, 
349f; we. λείποραι, 349, R.; w. 
words of authority, &e., 550; w. ἄρ- 
χω, 350. R.; w. compt., 351, 46! ; 
and #%, 461. ¢; w. multiples, &e., 
352; of cause, 353f; of origin and 
mat., 355f; for dat., 355. N.; of 
theme, 356: ot supply, w. words of 
plenty and want, 357; w. δέομαι and 
χοήζω, 357. N.; partitive, 558 5 
expr. quantity, &e., 359; w. subst., 
361; expr. country, 861. a ; w. 88]., 


art., superl., &c., 362, 4613; w. adv. 
of place, time, state, &c., 363 ; w 
verb, as subj., 364; as appos., 365 ; 
as complem., 566  ; w. words of shar- 
ing and touch, 367f; as part taken 
hold of, $69; w. words of obtain- 
ing, &c., 370; of motive, &c., 372f; 
w. words of direction, claim, dispute, 
373 ; of price, value, merit, crime, 374 ; 
of punishment, 374. N.; of sensible 
and mental object, 375f; w. words 
of obedience, 377 : of time and place, 
518; act. or effic., 380f; w. pass, 
verbs and verbals, 381 ; constituent, 
adjunct defining thing or property, 
382f; w. compounds of ἀ- priv., 383 ; 
ecenbat. verb, 384 ; w. subst. omitted, 
in periphr., 385 ; “of property, 387 ; 
of relation, 388f; social, w. adj. of 
connection, 389; possess. 390; w. 
ἱερός, ἴδιος, &c., and verbs of praise, 
blame, and wonder, 391 ; > case of 
thing possessed, 391. y; w. ὄξω, &e., 
391.3; objective, w. verbals, 392f; 
w. abstracts, αἴσιος, &c., 393; of loc. 
and temp. relation, 394 ; of reference, 
&e., 395; w. part. 617. 6; abs., 
638f; w. prep. 648 f. 

Glyconic verse, 706. 2. 

Government, 329. 

Grave accent, 14, 724, 729; syllable, 

Hebrew Alphabet, 21. 725. 

Hellenistic dialect, 8. 

Hephthemim, 699. 4; 

Heroic verse, 698, 704. 

Heteroclites, 122, 124. 

Heterogeneous nouns, 122, 125. 

Hexameter, 698. 3, 704. 

Hiatus, how -avoided, 30f: in early 
Greek, 89, 117; in poetry, 701. 3. 

Historical tenses, 168; present, 567. 
a, 576. 

History of orthog., 21f; declens., 83f, 
117f: pron., 143f; conj., 171f; 
root of cj., 254; formation, 302; 
accent, 722f, 734. 

Homeric dialect, 2. 

Hyperbaton, 329, 426, 511, 672. 

Hypercatalectic, 698. 

Hypodiastole, 16. 2. 

Iamb, 697; -ic rhythm, 696; verse, 
697. β, 711f. [cal, 695. 

Ictus, in pronunc., 18. 5, 19; metri- 

3y 


anticipated, 
[712. 1. 


PAT BR ae 
OF ΤῊ » > 457 


% 


Pa ς caus: , 560. ay 
82. N. 
97177, 612f; wanté 

698s 1.5. perf, 235 
577; in depetidrsent.,.612;°1; w. 
wa; and gis, 613. 23; expr. supposi- 
tion, 613. 4. 

Imperfect, 167f, 1785 generic use, 
566. a; for pres., 567. y3 X aor, 
569: X aor. and plup., as conting., 
593. 

Impersonal, 546, 564. 8, 617 ; part., 
in ace. abs., 638. 

Improper diphth., 25f; redupl., 283. 

Inceptive verbs, 319. 

;|Incorporated sentence, 3293; modes, 
Ἵ 27: 614f; w. adjuncts, 616. 45 
X distinct, 618 ; wide range of, 618 f; 
how translated, 618. 1 ; in oratio obl., 
619; w. drs and ws, 619. N. 

Indeclinable, 126. 1. 

Indefinite pron. and adv., 4 23f, J 63 . 
146, 152f, 317, ets art., 518. #3 
rel., 519; tenses, J 26: 168; X defy 
569f; X complete, 571. ® 

Independent, nom., 343, 

Indicative, 169, 177, 587f; X subj. 
and opt., 5874; expr. conting., 598 ; 
habit, w. ἄν, 594; wish, 597f; pur- 
pose, 601f; in eiedit, sent., 603f; 
expr. possibility, &c., w. ἄν, 604. a; 
without ἄν, 605; in quot., 609f. 

Indirect cases, 78, 83f, 338f; obj., 
397f; quot., 607f. 

Infinitive, 169, 176, 614 f; synt., 614 f; 
impers., 617 ; construed as neut. noun, 
445, 620f; act. == pass., 621. B; 
w. art., 622f; as ace., 622f; of spe- 
cif. and ady., 623; abs., 623; re- 
dundant and omitted, 624; in com- 
mand, exclam., &c., 6253; resem- 
blance to dat., 626. N ; w. acc., 626f; 
w. other cases, 627; Ww. ὥς, wort, οἷος» 
ὅσος, 628.f; w. πρίν; σεὶν i, &e., 629. 
2, 657. N. 

Inflection, 1 4f: 72f; three methods 
in nouns and verbs, 185. ὅ 

Inscription, nom. in, 543. 1. 

Inseparable particles, 150, $25. 

Insertion of « in contr., 35; of cons., 
64; to prevent hiatus, 89, 117f; of 
¢ in conj., 221; of ἡ, 4) δ, ὦ) 2223 
of ¢ and ν in root, 273, 277, 289; of 


458 ENGLISH 


vow. and ¢ in compos., 324. 

Intellective sentence, 329 ; 
7 27: 5871. 

Intensive verbs, 319. 

Interjection, w. gen., 372. ε; 

pendent, 645. 

Interrogative pron. and adv., 4 24, 
4.68: 152. 2, 317, 536, 539; po- 
sition, 673 ; sentences expr. wish, 597. 

Intransitive use of second tenses, 257. 
B; of act. voice, 555. 

Inverted attraction, 527. 

Ionic dial., 1f; old, middle, new, 2; 
letters, 23; forms in pf. and plup., 

Tota subscript, 25:'3, 31, Ni Π51.8: B. 

Zrregular nouns, 129; adj., 135f; 
compar., 160f. 

Isochronous feet, 697. 

Kindred vowels, 28 ; noun in acc., 431. 

‘Sopa, J 1: 11, 21f. 

Labiils, 7 3: changes of, 51f; in 
De. un, 111: 101; verbs, T Séf. 

Lace tic dialect, 1. 

Last syllable of verse common, 692. 

Lesb an dialect, 1, 3, 6f. 

Letters, T 1: 10f, 915 

Liga! ures, J 2: 10. 2. 

Ling tals, ἴ 33 changes of, 51; in 
Dec m1., § 11: 102f; verbs, 4 39f. 

Liqui is, 7 3; changes of, 54f; in 
Dec ut, 4 12: 105f; verbs, 417: 
56, 170. B, 223, 266. 

Liqui i-mutes, 4 13: 109, 

Local quantity, 688f. 

Loga edic verse, 696. 3, 706, 710. 

Long vowels, T 3 : 24f, 29, 676; form- 
ing 2 ace. places, 723 ; vowel short- 
ene( before another vowel, 691 ; syll., 
by wat. and pos., 678 f. 

MacedOnic dialect, 8. 

Masculine, 74f; form for fem., 133, 
495; pl., vised by a woman speaking 
of herself, 336. a3; ca@sura, 699. 4, 

Megarian dialect, 1. 

Mesode, 700. 2, 

Metaplasts, 122 f. 

Metathesis, 56f, 59, 64; in verbs, 223, 
227. B, 262, 281, * [[699. 

Metre, 694f; -ical ictus, 695; series, 

Middle mutes, 7 3: 49; > and < 
smooth and rough, 52; inserted, 64. 
25; woice, 165f, 180, 558; interch. 


modes, 


inde- 


Ww. pass., 554; w. dir. reflex: sense, 


IN DEX. 


557 ; indir. 558 5 recipr., caus., 559 
subjective, 460; w. reflex. pron. 
561.13 as act. or pass., interch. w 
act., 5615 root, 254. 

Modern Greek, 8 ; pronune., 19. 

Modes, § 27: 164, 169; hist., 176f, 
conn. vowels, 203f; use, 586f; in- 
tellective, 587f 3 in desid. sent., 597 
final, 601 ἔ; condit., 603f; rel., 606; 
complement., 6O07f; volitive, 612f, 
incorp., 614f, 

Monometer, 698. 

Monopody, 697. β. 

Monoptote, 127. β. 

Monostichs, 700. 

Motion, movable, 74. 3. 

Multiples, 7 25: 157 3; w. gen., 352 

Mutes, 4 33; changes of, 51f, 69f3 
m. and liquid as affecting quant., 689; 
in Dec. m1., J 11: 101 f; verbs, 4 36f: 

Names of letters, 21f. [170. B, 266. 

Nasals, ἴ 3: 49f, 53f, 64. 2. 

Nature, long or short by, 677 f. 

Negative pron. and adv., § 63: 137.8; 
subject. X obj., 647; as interrog. or 
affirm., 647. N. ; redund., 664f; we 
inf., 665f. 

Neuter, 74f; dec., 875; in adj., 130f; 
in syllepsis, 446; use of, in adj. and 
pron., 449f, 496 ; plur. w. sing. verb, 
549; impers., 546. a. 

New root, 254. 

Nominative, 78, 84, S39f; for voc., 
81, 343. 3; in appos. w. sent., 334; 
as subject, 339f, 342, 543; by attr, 
551, 614; independ., 343 ; in ana- 
col., 344; of rel., attr., 526. B. 

Noun, declens., 1 7f; 92f; anoma- 
lous, defective, &c., 129; deriv., 
S05f ; compos., 324, 326. 

Nude, 224 f, 237f; inflection, 84, 175, 
208 ; adjunct, 329. 

Number, 77, 83, 853 signs of, 83f, 
172; in verb, 164, 170f; use and 
interchange of, 335 f. 

Numerals, § 21, ἴ 25: 187f; how 
combined, 140 ; letters as, 7 1: 11, 

Obelisk, 16. 4. 

Object, 338 f; indir. in dat., 339, 397f; 
dir. in acc., 339, 422f. 

Objective affizes, J 30f: 195, 209f, 
voice, 174f; cases, 338f° gen., 392 
dat. 397. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Oblique cases, 78. 6; as adv., 520, 

_ Odes, choral, 700. 2. 

Old root, 254. 

Onomatopes, palatals in -ζω, 273, 1. 

Open vowels, 24f; affixes, 82, s. 

Optative, 169, 177, 587f; X ind., 
587, 5935 fut. 587. 23; XX subj. 
588f; follows sec. tenses, 592; w. 
ἄν, for pres. or fut. ind., 5953 expr. 
wish, 597 δ; purpose, 601 f 5 for subj., 
602; in condit. sent., 603f 5 expr. 
possibility, command, ὅσο... w. ἄν, 
604; in rel. sent., 606; in indir. 
quot., 608 f. 

Oratio recta X obliqua, 607 f. [5. 

Ordinals, 7 25: 1577; w. αὐτός, 511. 

Orthography and Orthoépy, 9 1f: 10f; 
hist. of, %1 f. 

Orthotone, 733. 

Oxytone, 725. 

Pron, 697; -ic verse, 720. 

Palatals, ἴ 35 changes of, 51f; in 
Dec. un, J 11: 101 3 verbs, 4 38. 

Paragogic consonants, 66; 4 150. N. 

Parisyllabic, 82. N. 

Parcemiac verse, 708. 2. 

Paroxytone, 725. 

Parsing, forms of, ἴ 65f. [487. 

Parts of sentences as joined with art., 

Participle, 169, 1763 declens., J 22: 
1288: synt., 614f, 680: as adj., 
444f; expr. purpose, 583. a, 635, 
640 ; impers., 615. 5; prelim., 631; 
circumst., 632 ; == adv. or adjunct, 
632; complem., w. verbs of sensation, 
chance, anticipation, &c., 633f; Χ 
inf., 634. 6; w. adj. and verb, &., 
634. γ; prospect., 635 ; defin., 636; 
W. εἰμί, ἔχω, ἔρχομαι, olxomas, &e., 
637; abs. 698; ν΄. ὡς, &c., 640 ; 


anacol., 641. 
Particle, in compos., 325, 328 3 synt.,! 
645f; as affected by ellips,, 660 ἔτ, 
pleonasm, 664f; attr., 668 ; anacol., 
669f ; combinations, 671; position, 
672f accent, 7.50. 
Partitive gen., 358f; adjectives, 362. 
Passive, 165f, 180, 553f; w. gen., 
$81; w. dat. 4173 interch. w. 
mid., 554; how construed, 562; pre- 
fers dir. to indir. obj., pers. to thing, 


563; copverse of mid., 564; impers., 
564. 3. 


439 


Pastoral cxsura, 699. 5. 

Patrials, derivation, 309, 315. a, 6. 

Patronymics, derivation, 310. 

Paulo-post-future, 582. 

Pentameter, 698. 3, 705. 

Penthemim, 699. 4, 704.2. [726 

Penult, in pronunc., 18. 5; in accent., 

Perfect, 167f, 179, 186, 233f; com- 
monly wants subj., opt., and imp., 
169.+8 ; as pres., 2333; pt. in dial., 
253; X aor. 577f; both past and 
present, 579 ; for fut., 584. 

Periphrasis, 329; in synt. of gen., 
385, 453. 3 acc., 425 ; arte, 4767; 
verb, 637. 

Perispome, 725; verbs, 216. a. 
Person, 143; signs of, 143, 1713 τῇ 
verbs, 164, 170f; change of, 500. 
Personal pronouns, 7 23: 1418; we 
γέ, 328; use, stronger and weaker 
forms, 502f3; implied in affixes of 

verb, 545. 

Phalecian verse, 706. 4. 

Pherecratic verse, 706. 2. 

Pindar, dialect of, 3; metre of, 700. 2 

Pleonasm, 329; in synt. of gen., 395, 
adj., 458; compt. and sup., 460f; 
art., 468. 6; pron., 4993; verb, 552; 
inf., 624; prep., 652 ; particle, 664 f. 

Pluperfect, 167f, 179, 186, 233f3 in 
sa > 7, 179, 203. N.; as aor., 233; 
X aor. 577f; X impf., as conting., 
593. 

Plural, 77, 83, 85, 172; for sing., 336; 
w. dual, 3375 w. sing., 450, 453, 
497, 548f. 

Polyschematist verse, 696. 3. 

Position of art., 472 ; of particles, 672 ἢ; 
in prosody, 677, 688f. 

Positive degree, 155 ; added to superl. 
and doubled, 462; for compt. and 
superl., 466. 

Possessive pron., § 24: 151, 502f; 
gen., 390. 

Postpositive article, 447. 

Precession of vowels, 28 f, and page v.; 
in dial., 44; in r. of verb, 259. 

Prefixes of verbs, § 28: 173, 179, 


| 187f; in dial., 194. 


Preposition, w. case, &c., as adv., 322: 
synt., 648 f, 657; omitted and ins., 
650, 651. 83 w. adj., 651. δ; in 
compos., 652f; as adv., 657; ν΄. 


460 


case, used subst., 658; in const. 
pregn., 659; position, 672; accent, 
730f, 750. 2. 

Prepositive vowel, 24f; article, 147. 

Present, 167 f, 178 ; as generic tense, 
566; historic, 567, 576; X aor., 
569f; for perf., 579. %; for fut., 
584; X aor. w. μή, 598. 1. 

Preteritive verbs, 7 58f; 233f. 

Primary ictus, 18.5; tenses, 168, 173 f; 
X sec. in expr. conting., 589f; fol- 
lowed by subj., 592 3 affixes, J 31: 

Primitive, 303. [196. 

Proclities, 731. 

Prohibition w. μή, 598. 

Pronominal correlatives, 1 63: 317. 

Pronoun, 7 23f: 141f 53 subst., 7 23: 
141 ; pers., 141 ; reflex., 144; 
recipr., 145 ; indef., 146; adj., J 24° 
147f; def., 148f; art., rel., 148; 
iter. 149 ; demonstr., 150; poss., 151; 
indef., 152f: compos., 144f, 149f, 
153, 328; art. as, 467f, 490f; 
synt., 494: masc. for fem., 495; 
w. subj. implied, 497; attr., 498; 
repeated, 499 5 change of numb. and 
pers., 495, 500; spec. observ. on, 501f; 
pers., poss., and reflezx., stronger and 
weaker forms, &c., 502f; use of ov, 
&e., 5095; αὐτός, 508; demonsir., 
512 3 as adv. of place, 514. N.; for 
pers. pron., 515; indef., 517f; for 
def, 518. y; relative, 519f; inter- 
changed, 520f; w. antec. in same 
clause, or omitted, 522f; w. ἔσει, 
523; attraction, 534; of words be- 
longing to the antec. clause, 525; of 
rel. by antec., 526; of antec. by rel., 
527 ; ww. ellipsis of subst. verb, 528 ; 
rel. omitted, 528. 1; == demonstr. 
and conn. particle, 580 ; w. another 
conn., &c., 533 ; repetition of, avoid- 
ed, 534 ; complem., 535f; in con- 
dens., 538 ; interrog., 536, 539; ἄλ- 
dos, 540f. 

Pronunciation, Eng. method, 17f; 
Mod. Gr., 19; Erasmian, 20; an- 
cient, of vowels, 24. y. 

Prodde, 700. 2. 

Proparoxytone, 725. 

Proper diphthong, 25; name, w. art., 
471.6; redupl., 283. 

Properispome, 725. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Proportionals, 137f; w. gen., 352. 
Prosody, 675f. 
Protasis, 329, 603 f. 

Punctuation, 15. 

Pure nouns in Dee. m1., 1 14: 110% 
verbs, | 45f: 170. β. 

Quadruple rhythm, 696. 

Quantity, 676f; marks of, 16. #, 
natural, 677f; local, 677, 688f; ip 
dec., 682f; in conj., 682, 684; i 
deriv., 685; in dial., 47, 686. 

Quasi-cesura, 712. 1. 

Quaternarius, 697. β. 

Quotation, direct X indirect, 607 f 

Radicals, 302. 

Reciprocal pron., 7 23: 1453 use of 
mid., 559. 

Redundant nouns, 122; verbs, 257. 3 

Reduplication, 179, 190f; Att., 191. 
2, 283; in comp. verbs, 192f; in 
root, 283f; proper, &c., 283. 

Reflexive pron., 7 23: 144, 502f; w. 
compt. and superl., 464 ; of 3d pers. 
for Ist and 2d, 506f; for recipr., 
‘507. 735 w. αὐφός, 464, 5115 sense 
of mid., 165f, 557f. 

Regimen, 329. 

Regular affixes of verb, 7 29f: 215, 

Relative pron. and adv., Ἵ 24, 7 63: 
148, 153, 317; synt., 519f; sen- 
tences, modes in, 606. See Pronoun. 

Residual cases, 338f; dat., 414f. 

Resolution of diphthongs, 46. 

Rhythm, 694f; kinds of, 696; cesura 
of, 699. 1. 

Rising Ionic, 697 ; verse, 696. 3, 720. 

Romaic language, 8. 

Roman letters corresp. w. Gr., 7 1: 12. 

Root of noun, how obtained, 79; of 
verb, 170. α ; union with affixes, 
216f; old, middle, new, 254; tenses 
arranged in respect to, 255f; changes 
of, in verb, Ἵ 61: 254: euphon., 
259f; emphat., 265f; anom., 301 ; 
primary, 302. 

Rough breathing, 13; w. init. g and », 

. 1, 25 mutes, T 3; > smooth, 

Sampi, 7 1: 11, 21f. [62, 69, 263. 

Sapphic verse, 698, 706. 4. 

Scanning, 701. 15; continuous, 692. 

Second tenses, 178, 180, 186, 236, 
255, 257 ; more inclined to intrans 


sense, 257. 6; X first, 199. 11. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Secondary ictus, 18. 5; tenses, Ἵ 26: 
168, 173f; X prim. in expr. con- 
ting., 589f; followed by opt., 592; 
expr. wish, 597f; affixes, Ἵ 31: 

Semivowels, J 3: 63. [196. 

Senarius, 697. 6, 712. 

Sentence, kinds of, 329; words in ap- 
pos. w., 334, 

Short vow. and syll., 73: 24f, 29, 
676, 679f; > long, in dec., 92, 
110f; in compar., 156 ; in verb, 183, 
218 f, 224, 266f; in compos., 326. R. 

Sign, see Tense-sign. {der. of, 304f. 

Simple vowels, 1 3: 24; word, 303f; 

Singular, 77 ; for plur., 335; w. plur., 
450, 453, 497, 548f. 

Smooth or soft breathing, 13; ol. 
and Ep. for rough, 13..4; mutes, J 3; 
> rough, 52, 65. 

Sounds, abrupt and protracted, 17. N. 

Special application, sign of, 332. 3, 640. 

Spondee, 697 ; -aic verse, 704. 1. 

Stanza, 694, 700. 

Strophe, 694, 700. 

Subject, o sign of, 84; of finite verb, 
342 ; of inf., 620. 

Subjective affires, T 29f: 195, 209f; 
voice, 174f; cases, 338f; sense of 
mid., 560. 

Subjunctive vowel, 25f; mode, 169, 
177, 587f; X ind., 587, 593; xX 
opt., 588 f; follows prim. tenses, 592 ; 
for ind., 595; for imp., 597f; expr. 
purpose, 601f; for opt., 602; in 
condit. sent., 603f; in rel. sent., 606; 
in complem. sent., 611. 8 ; in quot., 
608 f. 

Substantive, 73; synt., 331f; agree- 
ment, 331f; pron., 7 23: 141f; 
synt., 494f; verb, omitted, 547, 639. 
2; w. gen., 364f, 384 ; w. dat., 408; 
omitted in condens., 528 f, 538; num., 
7 25: 139, 308. e; clause, 329. 
4uperlative, 155f, 316; w. gen., 362f, 
461; ν΄. dat., 419 5 w. pos., doubled, 
W. ἐν σοῖς, W. εἷς, neg., 462; w. re- 
flex., 464; abs. 465; attr., 525, a. 

Syllabic augment, 187. 

Syllable, affixed to r., 287f; quant. of, 
677. N. 

Syllepsis, 329 ; in synt. of adj., 446; 
pron., 496. c; verb, 544. 

‘Syncope, in liquids of Dec. πι., 106 f; 


461 


in fut., 200. 2; in r. of verb, 261. 
Synecdoche, 438. a, 563. 
Synecphonésis, or Synizésis, 31, 701. 2. 
Synesis, 329; in synt. of appos., 332 

43 adj. 453f; pron., 497; verb 

548. 

Syntax, 1 64: 329f; variety in Greek, 
330; figures of, 329. N.; of subst., 
531; of adj., 444f of art., 467f; 
of pron., 494; of verb, 543f; of 
particle, 645f. 

System in vers., 694, 700. 

Temporal numbers, ¢ 25 . 137f; aug 
ment, 187 ἢ, 

Tenses, 7 26; 164, 167f; formation, 
Ἵ 28; hist of, 173f; signs of, 7 31 : 
178, 186, 198f, 245 : first X second, 
178, 180, 186, 199, 255f; how asso- 
ciated, 215. 3; arranged in respect 
to root, 255f; use, 565f; chronic X 
achron., 565; generic X spec., 566, 
576. 4, 580; interchange, 567, 576, 
584f; def. xX indef., 569f; indef. 
X complete, 577f; fut.,581f; prim. 
Χ sec. as conting., 589 ἢ, 

Tense-signs, 7 31: 178, 186, 198: 
changes of, 56, 199f 3 in dial., 245 

Tetrameter, 698. 

Tetraptote, 127. B. 

Tetrastich, 700. 

Theme, of noun, 79 ; of adj., 128; of 
verb, 170. a. (690. N. 

Thesis, 695; vowel lengthened in, 

Third future, see Future Perfect. 

Time of verb, 168; of vow. and syll., 

Tmesis, 328. N., 6625 [676f. 

Tone, special, 722f. 

Triad in vers., 700. 2. 

Triemim, 699. 4. 

Trimeter, 698 ; iambic, 712. 

Triple rhythm, 696. 

Tripody, 697. β. 

Triptote, 127. β. 

Tristich, 700. 

Trochee, 697; -aic rhythm, 696; 
verse, 697. 6, 716, 

Ultima, in accent., 723f, 726. 

Union of syllables, 30f, 45f. 

Vau, 71; 11, 21f. See Digamma. 

Verb, conj. of, 7 26f: 164f; depo- 
nent, 166; hist.. 171; prefixes, 
728: 187f; affixes, 7 28f: 195f; 
in -us X in -w, 208. 2; in «μι, T48f 


462 


224 f, 251; preteritive, 7 58f: 233 f; 
root, 254f; dial., 1 32: 194, 181f, 
241f; translated, 1 33; deriv., 318 f; 
compos., 323f, 327; synt., agreement, 
543f; w. subject omitted, 545f; 


ENGLISH INDEX.——LIST ‘OF AUTHORS, &c. 


used intrans. or reflex., 555 ; as pass, 
556; mid., having dir. reflex. sense, 
557; indir., 558 ; recipr. and caus., 
559 5 subjective, 560; 8.) 562f; 
impers., 564. 3. 


impers., 546; pl. w. sing. nom., 548 : Volitive sentence, 329; mode, 7 27: 
sing. w. pl. nom., 549; attracted,| 169, 177, 612f. 
550 ; taking nom. by attr., 551, 614 ;| Vowels, 13 : 24f; < old consonants, 
quantity in, 682, 684 ; accent in, 734,] 22; simple, compound, long, short, 
7568. doubtful, open, close, prepos., subjunct., 
Verbal nouns, 305f; adj., 314; adv.,) 24f; precession, 28 f, and page v. ; 
321 ; compound, 323f; w. gen., 381,| kindred, 28; union of, 30 f; con- 
392f; w. dat. 407. %; w. acc.,424;| traction, 31f; crasis, 38f; apostro- 
in -réos, impers., 642. phe, 41f; dial. var., 43f; connect. 
Verse, 694 ; kinds, 696, 698; cxsura,| of dec., 1 6: 82. 3, 86, 92f; changes 
699; systems, &c., 700; scanning,} in Dec. m1, 110; connect. of conj., 
701; dact., 703f; anap., 707f;| 731: 175, 178f, 202f; changes in 
iamb., 711f; troch., 716f; various,| perf., 236; in r. of verb, 259f; 
Vision, 567. [720f.| lengthened, 266f; added, 287f; 
Vocal elements, T 3. union, in compos, 324; quantity, 
Vocative, 78, 84, 339; same w. nom.,| 676f. 
80f; synt., 442f; accent, 742f. Writing, mode of, 23. 
Voices, hist. of, 174 f, 180; wse, 553f;|Zeugma, 329; in synt. of adj., 446; 
mid. and pass. interch., 554; act.,] pron., 496.c; verb, 544. 


LIST OF AUTHORS AND WORKS CITED, 
AND OF ABBREVIATIONS. 


(‘The @vorks of Xenophon are commonly cited without naming the author, and the 
Anabasis without even naming the work (by simply giving the book, chapter; and sec- 
tion; thus, iv. 3.17). The Iliad and Odyssey are commonly cited by giving simply the 
letter denoting the book, with the verse, using a capital letter if the citation is made 
from the Iliad, and a small letter if it is made from the Odyssey (thus, A. 232, for Il. i 
232 ; &. 305, for Od. ii. 305). In Homer, the references are made to the verses of Wolf; 
in Hesiod, to those of Gaisford ; in Pindar, to those of Heyne ; in the Dramatic Poets, to 
those of Dindorf; and in the Pastoral Poets, to those of Kiessling. In Herodotus, Thu- 
cydides, Xenophon, Diodorus Siculus, Dio Cassius, and Pausanias, they are made to 
books and chapters; and also, in Xenophon, to the sections of the usual more minute 
division as given by Schneider, Dindorf, &c. In Demosthenes, they are made to the pages 
and lines of Reiske; in the other Orators and in Plato (including Timeus Locrus) to the 
pages and lines or division-letters of Stephens; in Strabo to the pages, and in Athenwus 
to the ppees and division-letters, of Casaubon. The fragments of Alcwus, Sappho, Co- 
rinna, Epicharmus, and Sophron are numbered according to Ahrens, with the numbers 
of other well known editions (as those of Alcwus by Matthiw, and of Sappho by Neue) 
usually following in parentheses; those of Anacreon, according to Bergk ; those of Calli- 
machus, according to Blomfield; those of Hesiod, Simonides, and Tyrteus, according to 
Gaisford ; those of Hipponax, according to Welcker; those of Pindar, according to 


; those of the ic Poets, according to Dindorf; &c. Cases of abbreviation 


LIST UF AUTHORS AND ABBREVIATIONS. 


463 


not ere below, and those in which the same abbreviation or initial stands for different 
are either explained by the immediate connection, or (as indeed many of those 
below) can scarce fail of being obvious in themselves. ] 


Accusative (Acce., A.). 

Active (Act.). 

Adjective (Adj.). 

fElianus. 

folic (£ol., 2.). 

4ischines (Aéschin.). 

ZEschylus (/Esch.): Aga- 
memnon (Ag.), Choé- 
phori (Cho.), Eumenides 
(Eum.), Perse (Pers.), 
Prométheus (Prom., Pr.), 
Septem contra Thebas 
(Sept., Theb., Th.), Sup- 
plices (Suppl., Sup.). 

Alezus (Ale.). 

‘Aleman (Alem.). 

Alexandrine (Alex.). 

Anacreon (Anacr.). 

-Andocides ( Andoc.). 

Anthologia (Anth.). 

Antimachus (Antim.). 

Antipater Thessalonicensis 
(Antip. Th.). 

Antiphilus (Antiphil.). 

Aorist (Aor., A.). 

Apollonius Dyscolus de 
Pronomine. [Rh.). 

Apollonius Rhodius (Ap. 

Apud (ap.) = quoted in. 

Aratus (Arat.). 

Archilochus (Archil.). 

Aretzeus. 

Aristophanes (Ar.) : κῶν 
arnenses (Ach.), Aves 
( Av.), Ecclesiaziisee (Ec- 
el.), Equites (Eq.), Ly- 
sistrata (Lys.), Nubes 
(Nub.}, Pax, Plutus 
(Plut., Pl.), Ranze(Ran.), 
Thesmophoriaziise(The- 
sm.), Vespz (Vesp.). 

Aristoteles (Aristl.). 

‘Article (Art.). 

Athenzus (Ath.). 

Attic (Att., A.). 

Augment (Augm.). 

Bion. 

Beeotic (Beot., B.). 

Cesar (Cas.). 


Callimachus (Call.) : Epi- 


grammata (Ep.), Hym- 
ni in Delum (Del.), Dia- 
nam (Di.), Jovem (Jov.), 
Lavacrum Palladis( Lav. ). 

Cicero de Oratore (Cic. de 
Or.). 

Collateral (Collat.). 

Common (Comm.), com- 
monly (comm.). 

Comparative _ (Compt., 
Comp. ). 

Confer (Cf.) == compare, 
consult. 

Contracted, -ion (Contr.). 

Dative (Dat., D.). 

Declension (Declens., 

Demosthenes (Dem.). 

Derivative, -ion (Deriv., 
Der.). 

Dialects -(Dial.). 

Dinarchus (Dinarch.), 

Dindorf’s Edition (Dind.). 

Dio Cassius (Dio Cass.). 

Diodorus Siculus (Diod.). 

Diogenes Laértius (Diog. 
Laért.). 

Dorie (Dor., D.). 

Dual (Du., D.). 

Enclitie (Enclit., Encl.). 

English (Eng.).. 

Epic (Ep., E.). 

Epicharmus (Epicharm., 
Epich.). 

Euripides (Eur.) : Alces- 


tis (Ale.), Andromache| 


( Andr.), Bacchze (Bacch., 
Bac.), Cyclops (Cyel.), 
Electra (El.), Hecuba 
(Hee.), Helena (Hei.), 
Heraclide (Heracl.), 
Hercules Furens (Herc.), 
Hippolytus (Hipp.), Ion, 
Iphigenia in Aulide (Iph. 
A.), Iphigenia in Tauris 
(Iph. T.), Medéa (Med.), 
Orestes (Or.), Phoenissz 
(Pheen., Ph.), Rhesus 
(Rhes., Rh.), Supplices 


(Suppl. Sup.), Troades! tid.) 


(Tro.). — Fragmenta 
(Fr.), Archelai (Arch.), 
Peleos (Pel.), Polyidi 
(Pol.), Incerta (Inc.). 
Exempli gratia (E. g.) 
= for example. 
Feminine (Fem., F.). 
Fragment (Fr.). 
Future (Fut., ΕΝ). 
Gaisford’s Edition(Gaisf.). 
Genitive (Gen., G.). 
Gottling’s Edition(Géttl.). 
Hellenistic  (Hellenist., 
Hel.). 
Herodes Atticus (Herod. 
Att.). 
Herodotus (Hdt., Herod.). 
Hesiodus (Hes.): Opera 
et: Dies (Op.), Seutum 
Hereulis (Sc.), Theogo- 
nia (Theog., Th.). 
Hesychius (Hesych.). 
Hippocrates (Hipp.). 
Hipponax (Hippon.). 
Homérus (Hom.): Ba- 
trachomyomachia (Ba- 
tr.), Hymni (Hym., H.), 
in Apollinem (Ap.), Bac- 
chum (Bac.), Cererem 
(Cer.), Mercurium 
(Mere.), Venerem({ Ven. ), 
lias (Il.), Odysséa (Od.). 
Horatius. (Hor. ). 
Ibidem (Ib.) == in the 
same work or part of a 
work. 


Id est (i. e.) = that is. 

Idem (Id.) = the same 
author. 

Imperative  (Imperat., 


Imp. ). 
Imperfect (Impf.). 
Indicative (Ind.). © 
Infinitive (Infin., Inf.). 
Inscriptiones (Inscr., In- 
sc.), Baotica (Beeot,), 
Cretica. (Cret.), Cumza 


(Cum.), § Heracleénsis 
(Heracl.), Potidaica (Po- 


464 


Intransitive (Intrans. ). 

Tonic (Ion., I.). 

Isocrates (Isocr.). 

Iterative (Iter., It.). 

Καὶ τὰ λοιπά (x. «. A.) 
= δ. 

Laconic (Lacon., Lac.). 

Latin (Lat.). 

Livius (Liv.). 

Lobeck on Phrynichus 
(Lob. ad Phryn.). 

Lucianus (Luc.): de His- 
toria Scribenda (de Hist. 
Scrib.), Parasitus (Pa- 
ras. ). 

Lycophron (Lyc.). 

Lycurgus (Lycurg.). 

Lysias (Lys.). 

Masculine (Masce., M.). 

Megarian (Meg.). 

Middle (Mid., M.). 

Mimnermus (Mimn.), 

Neuter (Neut., N.). 

Nominative (Nom., N.). 

Optative (Opt.). 

Orpheus (Orph.) : Argo- 
nautica (Arg.), Hymni 
(Hym.), Lithica (Lith.). 

Participle (Partic., Part., 
Pt 


Passive (Pass., P.). 
Pausanias (Pausan.). 
Perfect (Perf., Pf.). 
Person (Pers., P.). 
Philétas (Philet.). 
Pindarus (Pind.): Isth- 
mia (I.), Nemea (Nem., 
N.), Olympia (0.), Py- 
thia @P.). 
Plato (Pl.): Alcibiades 
(Alc.), Amatores (A- 
mat.), Apologia ( Apol.), 
Axiochus (Ax.), Char- 
mides (Charm.) Con- 
vivium (Conv.), Craty- 
lus (Crat.), Critias (Cri- 


ti.), Crito, Definitiones| 


(Def.), Epinomis (E- 
pin.), Euthydémus (Eu- 


thyd.), Euthyphron (Eu- 
thyphr.),Gorgias(Gorg.), 
Hippias Major (Hipp. 
Maj.), Hipparchus (Hip- 
parch.), Ion, Laches 
(Lach.), Leges (Leg.), 
Lysis (Lys.), Menexenus 
(Menex.), Meno, Par- 
menides (Parm.), Phe- 
do, Phadrus (Phedr.), 
Philébus (Phil.), Politi- 
cus (Polit., Pol.), Pro- 
tagoras (Prot.), de Re- 
publica (Rep.), Sophista 
(Soph. ), Thezetétus (The- 
et.), Theages (Theag.), 
Timeus (Tim.). 

Plato Comicus: Meteeci. 
Plautus (Plaut.): Tri- 
nummus (Trinumm.). 

Pluperfect ( Plup.). 
Plural (Plur., Pl., P.). 
Plutarchus (Plut.). 
Poetic (Poet., P.). 
Pollux (Poll.). 
Positive (Pos.). 
Pratinas (Pratin.). 
Present (Pres., Pr.). 
Primitive (Prim.). 
Pronoun (Pron.). 


Quintus Smyrneus 
(Quint. ). 

Reduplication (Redupl.,| 
Redpl.). 

Root (r.). 


Sappho (Sapph.). 

Scholia (Schol.) 

Scilicet (se.) == under- 
stand, namely. 

Scripta Sacra (S. S.): 
Septuagint (LXX.), 
Deuteronomy (Deut.), 
Psalms (Ps.), Matthew 
(St. Matth., Mt.), Mark 
(Mk.), Luke (Lk.), John 
(St. Jn.), Acts, Romans 
(Rom.), Ephesians (Ep. 
Ephes.), 
(Rev.). 


Revelations} 


LIST OF AUTHORS AND ABBREVIATIONS. 


Simonides (Simon.), 
Singular (Sing., S.). 
Sophocles (Soph.) : Ajax 
(Aj.), Antigone (Ant.), 
Electra (El.), C£dipus 
Colonéus (Ed. C.), CE- 
dipus Tyrapnus (Cd, 
T.), Philoctaétes (Phil., 
Ph.), Trachinie (Tr.). 

Sophron (Sophr.). 

Strabo (Strab.). 

Subjunctive (Subj.). 

Superlative (Superl., 
Sup.). 

Syncope, -ated (Sync.). 

Yerentius (Ter.): An- 
dria (Andr.). 

Theocritus (Theoc.) : Bu- 
colica, Epigrammata 
(Ep.). 

Theognis (Theog.). 

Thucydides (Thuc., Th.). 

Tibullus (Tibull.). 

Timeus Locrus (Tim. 
Locr., Tim.). 

Transitive (Trans.). 

Tyrteus (Tyrt.). 

Varia lectio (v. 1.) == va- 
rious reading. 

Vocative (Voe., V.). 

Xenophanes (Xenophan.). 

Xenophon (Xen.): Age- 
silaus (Ages., Ag.), A- 
nabasis (Anab.), Cyro- 
pedia (Cyr.), de Re 
Equestri (Eq.), Hiero 
(Hier.), Historia Graca 
(H. Gr.), Lacedzemoni- 
orum Respublica (Lac.), 
Magister Equitum (Mag. 
Eq-), Memorabilia So- 
cratis (Mem.), C&cono- 
micus (Cic.), de Re- 
publica Atheniensium 
(Rep. Ath., Ath.), Sym- 
posium (Symp.), Vecti- 
galia (Vect.), Venatio 
(Ven.). 


INDEX 


oF 


CITATIONS FROM XENOPHON’S ANABASIS 
. IN “A 


GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, BY A. CROSBY, δα.» 


* Accomplished ΧΈΝΟΡΗΟΝ ! thy truth hath shown 
A brother’s glory sacred as thy own. 
O rich in all the blended gifts that grace 
Minerva’s darling sons of Attic race! 
The Sage’s olive, the Historian’s palm, 
The Victor’s laurel, all thy name embalm! 
Thy simple diction, free from glaring art, 
With sweet allurement steals upon the heart ; 
Pure as the rill, hat Nature’s hand refines, 
A cloudless mirror of thy soul it shines. 
Thine was the praise, bright models to afford 
To Czsar’s rival pen, and rival sword: 
Blest, had Ambition not destroyed his claim 
To the mild lustre of thy purer fame!” 


Ὡς, 


an . beatae 
τς αὐ να, 
γν "αν =x = 
ae Δ ἐς ἐξ 
ἐν i 


NAST ANSE Reg ok es | Bab 5 ute ee Ἧς 

pee, e = ae qt, ἄρ + “ey ᾿- rat Oy: ie o) 

eet Ὡρ " ἜΣ. x t 
Ἰρθάθιν leet te tgigie κὴς ss rete eas 

PA se ἡ Τὰ Θ᾽ lod te ἈΈΡΑ ἜΣ ΤῊΝ = Emit ig See i : 


| nt iw ΕἸ ἣν ie πῇ Peep εν ae τς πεν emir < ἐν 

Br Wek Wesley 50 ih Cad τὰς νὰ Ἴδα, τὰ | 
δὶ: rer ee wget ABTA La SR 

+ May tin ΓΟ Ft 


Be 2 ἐν 


* 


ara mes 


CITATIONS FROM THE ANABASIS 


{The following Index conforms to the Second (Stereotype) Edition of the Grammar 
The numbers inclosed in parentheses denote the sections of the Anabasis which are 
cited; those following them, the sections ΟἹ the Grammar in which the citations are 


made. ] 


BOOK I. 


Cuap.I. (1) 337, 355, 423, 444, 
482, 543, 545, 654; (2) 331, 361, 
389, 423, 434, 470.1, 471.6, 494, 
521, 534, 551, 558, 568, 570, 633, 
649. a, 657.7; (3) 342, 392. 2, 405. 
t, 423, 481, 482, 485. α, 490.1, 494, 
583. a, 608, 654, 673. a; (4) 331, 
403, 423, 461, 474, 486.1; (5) 362. 
6, 376. ὃ, 406, 447. α, 476, 497. 1, 
555. a, 571, 601. 7, 620, 649.¢, 649. 
+, 654; (6) 349, 390, 402, 423, 441, 
444, 485. a, 525. a, 525. n., 562. a, 
632, 640; (7) 862. α, 395. a, 423, 
447. a, 473. κ., 485. a, 490. R., 574. 
n_, 620, 631, 636; (8) 350, 375. 8, 
405. t, 473. 8, 494, 526, 562. a, 570, 
617. 6, 626; (9) 409, 440, 444, 457. 
γ5 473. 8, 486.1, 488. 5, 502, 554. 8, 
633, 649. a; (10) 395. a, 409, 421. 2, 
485. a, 561. 3, 606, 615. 2, 657. 1, 
658, 667.3; (11) 332. 1, 640, 649. ¢, 
657. y. 

Cuap. II. (1) 447. y, 459, 488. 6, 
522, 546. 6, 554.8, 662; (2) 406, 
606, 626. n., 646, 667.3; (3) 211. N., 
486. 1, 662. ὃ; (4) 399, 485. a, 662. 
3, 662. a; (5) 333. 6, 390, 416, 485. 
a, 522, 648; (6) 439. a, 439. 8, 471. 


6, 474, 632; (7) 331, 357, 408, 444, 
471. 6, 471. ὁ, 472.0, 549. a, 555, 
606, 659. α; (8) 331, 333. 6, 405. ¢, 
471. ὃ, 547, 549. a, 551, 649. η; (95 
425. 5, 444, 480. 2; (10) 331, 432; 
(11) 404. e, 433, 450. δ, 481, 551, 571, 
627. 8, 634.7; (12) 119. 2, 332. 1, 
404. ὃ, 447. 8, 474; (13) 390, 399, 
486. 2, 580; (14) 425. 5, 488. 6, 554. 
B; (15) 187. 2, 408, 447. a, 447. y, 
502; (17) 408, 449. 6, 472. a, 546, 
649. +; (18) 362. β, 554. 8, 659. a; 
(19) 403; (20) 440, 447. a, 471. 6, 
485. a, 510. 2, 522, 652. @; (21) 394, 
420.1, 485. a, 608, 614. a, β, 620, 
646, 652. y ; (22) 638, 649. 9; (23) 
333. 6, 336, 390, 437; 456, 549. a; 
(24) 580, 657. 7: (25) 456, 457. a, 
488.5, 659. a ; (26) 351, 392.1, 399, 
561. 1; (27) 561. 1. 

Cuap. Ill. (1) 373. 1, 476, 505. 
2, 564. 2, 573, 616. ὃ; (2) 237, 439. 
a, 441, 598. 1, 610, 657. y, 665; (3) 
406, 443, 447. y, 541, 598.1; (4) 
436, 471. 6, 486.1, 526. a, 603. 9; 
(5) 408, 606, 647, 664. a; (6) 357. 8, 
405. η, 409, 434. κ., 606, 614. ξ, 616. 
b, 640, 667.2; (7) 510. 1, 651. y, 


iv 


654; (8) 392. 1, 399, 640; (9) 362. 
2, 404. 3, 447. y, 477. α, 502, 636, 
671. 4; (10) 583, 602.2, 633, 646.1 ; 
(11) 376. 3, 504, 583, 642; (12) 347, 
547, 560.1; (13) 568; (14) 436, 
440, 447. 8, 479, 525. w., 525. 8, 558, 
561. 3, 568, 602.1, 633, 637, 647 ; 
(15) 431, 525. a, 526, 547, 601: a, 
619. 8, 640; (16) 411, 445, 479, 606, 
609, 640; (17) 194. κ., 392. 1, 418. 
R., 604. a, 604. 6, 606, 633; (18) 
419.5, 532; (19) 574; (20) 500,574, 
603; 8, 619.6, 7; (21) 140. y, 378, 
382, 402, 408, 449. 8, 470. κ., 526. α, 
568, 610, 646. 1. 

Cuap. IV. (1) 486. 2, 547; (2) 
140; (3) 561.2; (4) 394, 418. 2, 
472, 498, 549. a, 550; (5) 361, 372. 
y, 394, 601.7, 633; (6) 487. 4; (7) 
605. 2; (8) 426. 6, 485. a, 544, 579. 
t, 606, 628; 674.3; (9) 387, 434; 
(11) 418. 3; (12) 406, 639. 1; (13) 
347, 447. y, 488.5, 535, 568, 606; 
(14) 405. », 535, 603. 8; (15) 357. 
n., 404. e, 476, 543, 603. 8, 620 ; (16) 
407.2, 502, 574, 647; (17) 351; (18) 
405.9. ᾿ 

Cuap.V. (1) 362, 6,447.8; (2) 
351, 400, 486. 2, 546. 8, 605. 2, 606; 
(3) 546. 8, 571 ; (4) 387, 421. 8, 562. 
α; (5) 362. y, 457. 2, 472. a, 549.4; 
(6) 428, 446.8; (7) 364.1, 366, 
427. 8, 523; (8) 418. 2, 512. 6, 604. 
6, 662; (9) 275. ¢, 419.4, 449. β, 
488.7, 595. β; (10) 332.3, 355, 357. 
a, 368, 416, 447. γ, 561. 3, 649. B; 
(11) 406, 485. «; (12) 347, 416, 472. 
a, 485. «, 508, 579. t, 657. y ; (13) 
237, 406; (14) 357. 8, 551, 608; 
(15) 362. 2, 476; (16) 351, 442, 582. 

Cuapr. VI. .(1) 362. 3, 448, 639.2, 
663.6; (2) 347, 402, 549. a, 603. 9, 
620, 665, 673.6; (3) 403, 488. 6, 
525. a, 608; (4) 504; (5) 332. 3, 
363. γ; (6) 347, 473. a, 485. a, 510. 
1, 555, G28; (7) 407. +, 510. 1,525. . 


CITATIONS FROM 


8, 624. β, 661. 1 ; (8) 405. t, 478. 2, 
831. a, 627. a, 646, 661. 1; (9) 432 
473. 8, 558, 577, 601. a, 623. N.° 
(10) 369. «, 485. 8, 571, 646.1; (11) 
362. ὁ, 542. ὃ. 

Cuap. VIL. (1) 392. 1, 456; (2) 
399, 535 ;. (3) 191. 3, 357. 8, 374. 8, 
526, 602.3, 604. a; (4) 404. y, 407. 
x, 412, 477. a, 650. a; (5) 234. 8 
359. a; (6) 530; (7) 603. n.; (8) 
362. 8; (9) 394, 496. ὁ, 503, 543, 
661. a; (10) 137. «, 480. 2; (11) 
457. e, 509, 637; (12) 351 ; (13) 362. 
8, 636, 649. ὃ; (14) 333. 6, 420. 1; 
(15) 394, 472; (16) 544; (17) 549. 
a; (18) 378, 402, 473. 8, 603. 8; 
(19) 620, 646 ; (20) 425.5, 466. 

Cuapr. VIII. (1) 418. 2, 472. a, 
521, 546, 583, 654, 662; (3) 489. 
(4) 336, 447. y ; (6) 416, 418.2, 47%. 
a, 502, 529. 8; (7) 551; (8) 359. a, 
419. 4, 481, 662; (9) 368, 470. κ.; 
472. a, 544.a; (10) 640; (11) 418. 
2; (12) 402, 417, 509, 611.2; (13) 
380, 407.1, 441, 472.0; (14) 509, 


(15) 474.:., 628; (16) 375. a, 479, 


491. n., 535, 568; (17) 405. t, 543; 
(18) 263.6, 362. 8, 402, 418.2, 447.y; 
(20) 357. 8, 546, 549. a; (21) 425.4, 
568 ; (22) 391. 7; (23) 391. y, 405. 
t, 662; (23-27) 576; (24) 511. 3, 
557 5 (26) 479, 510. 1, 627. a; (27) 
344. 1, 362. y, 416, 509, ο; (29) 558, 
561. 1. : 

Cuap: IX. (1) 375. β, 62.α; (1 
31) 571; (2) 437; (3) 392.1; (5) 392. 
1,419. 5; (6) 403, 490. r., 5575; (7) 
153. y, 226. 3, 432, 517, 546. β, 558; 
(9) 560.1; (10) 226.3; (11) 435; 
(13) 363. y, 408, 447. a, 546. 8, 604, 
a, 664. 7; (14) 408, 416, 520, 526; 
(15) 389, 497.1; (16) 497.1, 605.2, 
(17) 405. » ; (18) 605. 2; (19) 406, 
522, 594, 605. 2, 633; (20) 537. 3, 
551, 562. a; (21) 153. y, 537. 3. 674, 
35 (22) 462.7; (23) 409, 505. 2, 


THE ANABASIS. ν 


604. a; (24) 418. 8; (25) 378; (26) 
406 ; (27) 504, 620; (28) 535, 562. 
a, 605.2; (29) 406, 504, 513, 649. a, 
652. y ; (30) 488. 6. 

Cuap. X. (1) 486. y, 544, 563; 
(2) 497, 544; (3) 510.2; (4) 347, 


490. r., 497; (5) 161. 2, 497, 608 

(6) 447. a, 555; (10) 472. α, 478. a, 
478. 8, 508, 521.8, 583.a; (11)479; 
(12) 357. w, 562. α, 670; (13) 357. 8, 
542.0; (13-16) 576; (14) 573. a, 
(15) 427.8; (16) 608; (17) 379 


BOOK Il. 


Cuap. I. (1) 475, 561, 3; (2) 
606, 614. ἡ ; (3) 385. y, 610, 649. 8; 
(4) 567. y, 579. ¢, 599. Nn., 603. ὁ, 


646.1; (5) 509; (6) 490.1; (7). 


375. 8, 477. a, 670; (9) 516; (10) 
403, 432, 546. y, 574. n.; (11) 373. 
1, 394; (12) 503, 543, 633; (13) 237, 
400, 432 ; (14) 404. 2, 663.6; (15) 
542. 6, 544. a; (16) 450. ὁ, 516; 
(17) 570. 2, 583.a; (19) 639. 2; 
(21) 640; \22, 450. y ; (23) 608. 

παρ. 1. (1) 376.¢, 619. a; (2) 
504 ; (3) 394,638; (4) 517; (5) 441, 
490. r.; (6) 140; (10) 536, 555; 
(11) 379. y, 408; (12) 357. 8, 431, 
606, 643; (13) 428, 485. «; (15) 
530, 549. a, 610, 661.2; (16) 485. a, 
509, 546; (17) 363. y, 457. a, 517, 
628 ; (18) 526. α; (21) 421. 6, 472. 
a. 
Cuap. III. (1) 656. s.; (2) 481; 
(4) 610; (5) 546; (6) 445, 546. 2, 
610; (7) 509; (9) 404.7; (10) 637; 
(11) 408, 594, 605. 2, 666. e; (12) 
439. a; (13) 629.1; (14) 355; (15) 
349, 437, 485.8; (17) 389; (18) 
329; (19) 514, 561. 3, 699; (20) 407. 
x, 568. κ΄; (21) 571.1, 574; (22) 
428, 621. 8; (23) 405. t, 428, 516, 
603. a; (25) 404. e; (26) 440, 546. 
B. 3 (27) 447. 8; (28) 472. 

Cuap. IV. (2) 407.25 (3) 412, 
606; (4) 485. a, 516, 602.1; (5) 


582, 636; (6) 237, 407. κ; (7) 499, 
(9) 367, 399 ; (10) 511. 3; (12) 387, 
416, 485. 8; (13) 408, 439, 8; (14) 
357. a, 394; (15) 513. a, 517; (16) 
403,510. 1, 609 ; (19) 547, 620; (20) 
638; (21) 517; (24) 459, 525.4, 
608, 637, 639.1; (25) 640; (26) 
542. y 3 (28) 394, 

Cuap. V. (2) 583, a, 614. 3; (3) 
428; (4) 424. 2, 614. ὃ ; (5) 554. β; 
(7) 405. n, 535, 604. y ; (9) 357. a, 
450. 7; (10) 357. 8, 541.a; (11) 
419.5; (12) 531, 669; (13) 403, 
407.1, 633; (14) 403; (15) 406, 
516, 537. 3, 603. a, 620; (17) 620; 
(18) 364.1, 523; (19) 405.¢; (21) 
531 ; (22) 416; (23) 437; (26) 404. 
γ; (27) 406, 633; (28) 405. ¢; (32) 
419. 4, 476; (35) 496.c¢; (36) 602. 
1; (37) 477. a; (88) 390, 436; (39) 
343. 3, 472. a, 520, 570.1, 664. 6; 
(41) 513; (42) 402, 544. β. 

Cuap. VI. (1) 375. β, 437, 563; 
(1-30) 571; (4) 404. ὃ, 416, 421. 8, 
535; (6) 347, 531, 628, 638; (8) 
643; (9) 418. 3, 523, 617.5, 620, 
627.a; (12) 606; (13) 416, 419. 5, 
562. a; (15) 480.2; (18) 449. ¢; 
(19) 405. 7, 407. ει; (20) 387; (22) 
400, 449. «, 620; (23) 153. y, 551, 
606; (24) 618.1; (26) 406, 620, 650. 
a; (28) 399; (29) 368, 437, 439. a, 
561.3; (30) 499. 


BOOK ΠΙ. 


Cuap. I. (2) 475, 604. 8; (3) 
362. y, 375. a, 480. γ, 544. a, 555. a, 


660; (4) 403; (6) 627. β; (6) 107 
w., 402, 431,527; (7) 402, 513, 521 " 


?, 


vi 


(8) 527; (9) 619. κ.; (10) 608; (11) 
359. a, 551. w.; (12) 602. 2; (13) 
666. 2; (14) 504, 539. 2, 640; (15) 
535 ; (17) 534, 615. 2; (18) 601. 8, 
643; (19) 356; (20) 408; (21) 505, 
2, 537. 3, 547; (22) 428; (23) 336, 
391. y, 485. a; (24) 485. α, 598; (25) 
603. @; (27) 432, 442, 465; (29) 
376. e, 666. «; (30) 400; (31. 437, 
472. a, 563; (32) 135, 606; (33) 
394; (34) 443; (35) 407. x, 554. 8, 
603. 9, 643; (36) 399; (37) 351, 
418. 3; (38) 554. β, 567. β, 628; 
(40) 378; (41) 505. 2; (42) 418. 3, 
662 ; (43) 409 ; (45) 532; (46) 598 ; 
(47) 616. a. 

Cuap. II. (1) 627. 8; (2) 448, 
476. n., 520, 657. 8; (4) 389, 400, 
443, 509, 520, 661. a; (5) 389, 534, 
646. 1; (6) 513, 600; (7) 350. κ., 
374. 8; (9) 477. a, 638; (10) 639. 
2; (11) 405. ἕξ, 430, 617. 6, 669; 
(13) 479 ; (14) 352, 504; (15) 617. 
6; (16) 375. β; (17) 350. R., 598. 
1; (18) 487. 4; (19) 418. 3, 424. 2, 
620; (20) 428; (21) 374. a; (22) 
407. x, 450. y; (24) 604. a, 640; 
(25) 634. β, 661. 2, 667. 2; (27) 
403, 525. n.; (28) 362. ξ, 525. w.; 
(29) 409; (31) 627. α ; (32) 661. 2; 
(35) 603. γ; (37) 361. y, 598, 623. 
¥.; (38) 375. 8, 573. a; (39) 376. 2, 
390, 634. β, 


CITATIONS FROM 


Cuap. ΠῚ. (2) 536, 603. γ; (3, 
518. 7,570.1; (4) 608 ; (5) 571, 637 - 
(7) 368, 463. 3, 662; (8) 642; (9) 
629. 1; (10) 439. 8; (11) 378, 472. 
a; (12) 500; (16) 357. β, 439. β, 
465 ; (17) 416; (19) 483; (20) 332. 
2, 404. ὁ. 

Cuap. IV. (1) 540, 602.1, 602 
ὦ; (2) 404. γ, 658° (4) 546; (5) 
407. ει, 412; (6) 362. ¢, 439. a; (7) 
478. 8; (10) 485. 8; (12) 556; (13) 
522. 1; (15) 605. 2; (16) 490. κ.; 
(17) 403, 447. 6; (19) 547; (20) 
407. x, (21) 137. #; (23) 418. 2, 
572; (24) 336; (25) 447. y, 628; 
(25-27) 576; (26) 350, 574. n.; 
(28) 508; (30) 418. 2; (31) 389; 
(34) 409, 602. 1 ; (35) 372. y, 403, 
412; (36) 402, 546; (37) 420. 1, 
447. 8, 457. a; (38) 576; (39) 546. 
B, 573. α; (40) 518. y; (41) 509, 
603. 8; (45) 453. α; (46) 447. β; 
(47) 449. B; (49) 633. 

Cuap. V. (1) 476. n.; (2) 476; 
(3) 476. w.; (5) 510.1; (8) 137.2, 
583 ; (9) 259. a, 457. β, 496. ¢ ; (10) 
470. n.; (11) 347, 665; (13) 610, 
615. 1; (14) 421. β, 425. 4; (15) 
409, 611. 2; (16) 364. 2, 377. 1; 
(17) 525; (18) 237, 363. α, 425. 4. 


4 BOOK IV. 


Cuar.I. (1) 526; (3) 605. 3; 
(5) 628; (6) 350; (8) 472. «; (9) 
377.1; (10) 517; (11) 488.5; (13) 
638 ; (14) 441, 490. κι, 605. 2, 663. 
6; (16) 232. a; (17) 393. y; (19) 
237, 500; (20) 552, 570. 2; (21) 
432. 3; (22) 496. b, 510. 1; (23) 
573. «; (24) 431; (26) 366; (27) 
500, 619. y ; (28) 374. β. 

Cuar. Il. (2) 437; (3) 399, 450. 
8; (4) 416, 657. γ; (7) 488.5; (9) 


362. t; (10) 447. β, 488. 5, 604. a, 
(11) 654.3; (12) 544. α; (13) 440; 
(15) 407. x; (16) 447. y; (17) 297 
447. a, 488. 5, 649. a; (18) 405. ξ, 
(19) 530, 628 ; (23) 449. 8; (26) 403. 
Cuap. III. (1) 472, 560. 2; (2) 
521; (3) 394; (6) 671. 6; (9) 449. 
B, 525. α; (10) 337. a; (11) 518.4, 
(12) 220; (13) 392. 2, 402, 405.4; - 
(21) 662; (26) 440; (28) 363. « 
394 ; (32) 546 ; (33). 483. 


THE ANABASIS. 


Cuap. IV. (2) 119. 2, 336, 409, 
522; (4) 475; (6) 627. a; (7) 336, 
472. a; (13) 447. Ὁ; (14) 457. 8, 
478. 6, 650. a; (15) 647; (17) 535, 
608 ; (18) 392. 1, 637; (20) 392.1; 
(22) 601. 7; (24) 461. 3. 

Cuap. V. (4) 405. η, 449. @; (5) 
424.2; (7) 608; (8) 606; (10) 529. 
β, 608; (11) 427.8; (12) 266, 563; 
(15) 266; (16) 457. ας 624. y, 632; 
(17) 526. a, 559. c, 560. 1; (19) 657. 
N. 3; (22) 366; (24) 439. a; (25) 409, 
549. a; (27) 407. «3 (29) 425. 4; 
(33) 404. y ; (34) 404. ὃ; (35) 466; 
(36) 421. β, 441. ; 

Cuap. Vl. (2) 411, 656; (9) 
475; (11) 460. a, 671. 2; (12) 403, 


vi! 


460. a; (14) 494; (15) 409; (24) 
488. 5; (26) 488. 5; (27) 357. a. 
Cuap. VII. (1) 549. a, 637; (2) 
408 ; (3) 579. ¢; (4) 476; (5) 541. 
b; (7) 595. α; (9) 237; (10-14) 


576; (11) 425. 4,510. 1; (12) 368, ~ 


373. 1, 505. 2; (16) 116. ὃ, 529; 
(17) 526, 637; (19) 389; (20) 393. 
a, 521. 8; (24) 343. 2,549. a; (25) 
538. 8. 

Cuap. VIII. (2) 529; (3) 402, 
(4) 361; (5) 213. κι, 570, 639. 2; 
(6) 473. @; (8) 399; (10) 490. κ.; 
(13) 595. ὃ; (14) 665; (18) 497; 
(19) 542. ὃ, 557; (20) 236. c, 366, 
546; (22) 332. 4; (25) 295, 521. B; 
(26) 517, 637 ; (27) 433, 450, ὃ. 


BOOK V. 


Cuap.I. (1) 447. 8; (2) 552; 
(8) 465 ; (9) 603. κ. ; (10) 220; (13) 
470. 3; (15) 556. 

Cuap. Il. (5) 457. 2; (8) 615. 
2; (12) 627. 6, 640; (14) 523; (15) 
542. 7; (20) 560. 2; (29) 471. a. 

Cuap. Π. (2) 332. 4, 457. a; 
(3) 561. 2, 658, 663. 6 ; (5) 559. d; 
(9) 405. 1; (11) 333. 6, 653. ε; (13) 
391. a, 625. 

Cuar. IV. (3) 476; (4) 570.1; 
(9) 616. 4, 629. 1; (10) 609; (11) 
483; (12) 447. 8; (15) 350; (16) 
530, 572, 576; (19) 598; (20) 447. 
y 3 (22) 449. 8; (24) 570; (27) 487. 
4; (29) 98. a, 486. 2; (32) 437; (34) 
532, 561. 1, 604. β. 

Cuap. V. (3) 332. 4; (4) 140, 
658 ; (5) 140; (8) 579. ἕξ; (9) 633; 
(11) 360. 2; (12) 525. β, 561. 3; 
(15) 368, 517; (19) 527; (21) 457. 
8; (2) 561. 3; (25) 655. 6, 


Cuap. VI. (1) 375. β, 616.5; (4) 
600; (9) 450. 8, 603. £; (12) 220, 
546, 555, 583, 603. 1; (17) 561. 1, 
660; (20) 549. a; (24) 441; (25) 
500; (26) 500; (29) 405. ¢; (30) 
603. ὃ; (32) 620; (34) 402; (36) 
409 ; (37) 350, 389, 609. 

Cuap. VII. (5) 485. a, 570. 2; 
(6) 485. a, 523 ; (7) 485. a, 513; (8) 
478. 8; (9) 394, 474; (10) 403, 
539. 1; (11) 403, 615. 2, 661. 2; 
(12) 357. a, 658; (17) 361. y, 447. 
¥, 659. a; (22) 662, (25) 504; (26) 
234. a; (28) 434. 

Cuap. VIII. (3) 157. κ., 375. a, 
526, 638 ; (4) 192.4; (5) 616. ὃ ; (6) 
426. ὃ; (7) 502; (8) 5382; (11) 517, 
539. 1; (12) 466, 497. 1; (13) 603. 
ὃ, 639. 1; (14) 633; (21) 403; (22) 
157. R. ; (23) 278; (24) 284, 439. a; 
(25) 376. y. 


BOOK VI. 


Cuap. I. (5) 542. γ; (5-13) | (14) 439. a, 447. β; (15) 431. 2 
576; (6) 433,637; (7) 431; (8) 437; | (18) 133. ὃ, 447. β; (20) 409, 441, 


vill 


615. 2; (21) 404. y; (22) 402, 640; 
(23) 457. 8; (25) 610; (26) 517; 
(28) 633; (29) 406, 605. 3; (30) 
546; (31) 444, 552, 615. 2, 633, 660. 

παρ. Il. (1) 119. 2; (6) 523; 
(10) 358, 658 ; (12) 412; (14) 406; 
(15) 472. w; (18) 661. 2. 

Cuap. ΠῚ. (1) 412, 477. @; (2) 
137. « ; (6) 431 ; (9) 546; (11) 610; 
(14) 5382; (15) 520; (17) 368; (19) 
520; (23) 380 ; (25) 380, 432. 3. 

Cuap. IV. (1) 410, 449. 6; (2) 
409 ; (3) 403; (4) 478. 7; (8) 428, 
580; (9) 409; (11) 194. 1, 477. a; 
(13) 194. 1, 486. 1, 559. d; (14) 


CITATIONS FROM 


THE ANABASIS. 


626. n. 5 (18) 669 ; (19) 486. y; (20) 
407. ει, 517; (23) 416, 555; *(24) 
450. ὁ. 

Cuar. V. (5) 520; (6) 440: (10) 
234. a, 377. 2; (24) 472. a. 

Cuap. VI. (1) 378, 525. «; (5) 
504; (7) 479; (12) 661. a; (13) 
475; (15) 603. 6; (16) 400, 657. γ᾽; 
(17) 428; (18) 598. 1, 600; (22) 
530, 628; (24) 614. ἕξ; (26) 514; 
(29) 337 ; (30) 337; (31) 337, 405. 
C; (82) 337, 380; (33) 380, 497. 1; 
(34) 337, 426. ὁ, 649. 15 (38) 447. 8 
457. a, 478. a. 


BOOK VII. 


Cuap.I. (5) 673. 8; (6) 664. 6; 
(8) 598, 671. 6 ; (14) 608; (19) 640; 
(21) 408, 627. a, 660; (23) 472. a; 
(24) 529; (25) 437; (28) 531; (29) 
454; (30) 370, 439. 6; (34) 610; 
(39) 394, 619. y ; (41) 357. β. 

Cuap. Hl. (2) 641. 8; (5) 399, 
532. n.; (6) 525. @; (8) 525. κ.; 
(9) 457. y ; (11) 472 ; (12) 402, 665; 
(13) 421. 8; (14) 561.3; (16) 378; 

47) 378; (18) 417; (20) 450. ὃ; 
(23) 559. d; (26) 402; (27) 516; 
- (28) 649. 9; (29) 362. 7; (32) 416, 
447. 7; (38) 367, 498. 

Cuap. Π|. (3) 508; (13) 611. 
2; (16) 389, 399, 497. 1, 510. 2; 
(2094194. 1, 393. a; (22) 628; (23) 
529. 8, 558, 620; (26) 409, 595. ὃ; 
(27) 409; (29) 399; (31) 496. c; 
(32) 119. 2; (33) 432; (35) 509; 
(36) 606; (39) 161. ὦ, 473. a; (43) 
546; (46) 301. 5; (48) 526. α. 

Cuap. IV. (5) 366, 667. 2; (7) 
583; (14) 378; (16) 476. n ; (19) 
237 


μάν. ν, (2) 404. ὃ; (3) 404. 
ὃ; (4) 404. ὃ; (5) 376. 8; (7) 617. 
6; (8) 876. γ; (9) 424. 2, 504. 


Cuap. VI. (1) 137.γ; (3) 610: 
(4) 403, 491. κ΄; (6) 405. ξ; (9) 
436; (11) 504; (15) 603. t; (16) 
404, ὃ, 603. a, 604. c; (17) 436, 
(18) 504; (19) 664. 7; (21) 605. 4; 
(22) 435; (23) 394, 601. ὃ; (24) 
153. y 5 (27) 538. 8; (29) 416, 665; 
(32) 417; (36) 521, 581; (37) 344. 
1; (38) 434, 568. κ΄; (39) 409; (40) 
409; (41) 368, 558; (43) 405. », 652. 
β; (44) 405. η. 

Cua. VII. (6) 237; (7) 485. ἃ 
(8) G71. 12; (10) 465 ; (11) 603. ὁ, 
(15) 663. 6; (17) 614. ὃ; (19) 472 
a, 568. R., 624. γ; (22) 434, 629. 13 
(23) 556 ; (25) 568; (27) 637; (28 
440; (29) 405. η, 503; (30) 477. « 
(31) 349, 418. 3, 568. n., 602. 2 
(33) 509; (34) 451; (86) 449. α 
(40) 605. 2; (41) 671. 3; (42) 357. 
α; (51) 403; (53) 671. 2; (54) 403, 
(55) 200. κ. ; (57) 124. β. n., 421. β. 

Cuar. VIII. (1) 399; (2) 535 
(4) 403, 530; (6) 374. a; (9) 485. 
α; (11) 449. β, 460; (12) 119. 2; 
(16) 487. 4, 522; (19) 529. 8; (20) 
470. 3; (26) 140. 


Wes 


ὅν ἢ 

Ψ 

μ᾿ ae 
oan 


δες. ‘= ae | a ἜΝ ὺ 
; - Br Pus ON “ : 

τ eee 5 Ser Mil ee Sea 
Ἐν; me 


pa Ee, 


ἂν : 

ye eee ᾿ a 
ἊΝ ὧν ὁ τ pag ΜᾺ ιν 55 es ae . 

ete αν» ἃ] δὰ τς τόκῳ, -ν ox. aa 

0 : & ns at Ἂ ‘ FY y . i ase \, i) vy, r ee 


THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
STAMPED BELOW 


AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 


WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 
WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH 


DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
OVERDUE. 


JUL 17 1942 


LD 21—100m-7,'40 (6936s) 


RKELEY LIBRARIES 


ui il | il 


CO46291394 


τῷΞ καὶ Ν Ν 7 ὰ 7 boat iy ᾿ Ἄ 
᾿ 5" wm (sy ar ete 


Pn τον > . eT ae * ha shed te 3S ae Vago ghd ᾿ 
τας, αὐ τῆς eg nd ea ns Ot PVE, ΣΝ aptly gO a) 
κε δες a sae tae! and ταὶ ἘΣ ΩΝ ak pi ee on ὃ 


ἦ ῳ- we 
cf et, ai ee tind see tk 


Pe Re τα 

Ryde iyetiyy, ἢ 

ae ¥ 
ΕΣ pes 


ΟΣ ΠΝ 


_ 
= 
ωἷ 


7s 
- 


BE BOBS ad Mes Qi nt 
ad 4) ead 
at ge onl “et 


᾿ er cee 
ΩΝ 
πὰ ak 3d ay sad + 
st in 


set ah ee 
By ad ah Ab ah 
eo ae et oD: αὖτ ak τὸ 
a} μ᾿ she Go wend ; 
“πεῖ ψετις τ Wes 45" es : . «ait ἐφ’ πὸ 
BE ge δ τάν τ ge * On ΦΙ δ΄ er 47“ ae οὐἶ" eb as a - “ops P μ ess ΕΝ - 
ee ws ὮΝ ᾿ ΣΝ aa ah? aS i ees ea τ an St “ew ats 3h oe ae ae ade “RY * ear” τὸ — οὐδ το x 
eer as, © hee 4° Ἧ ab La Loe ae τ αἵ; diem Wie - We ee Ps ee a 
+ oe a ν ἐφ as ἀφ αἱ τ we el ver φῇ. 


-᾿ 
Lah pd ait δέν, es ; 
Ce ies Pi ee he Ἅ“΄ ; en 
Baas te ry 
6) MB te ag 
: ao Oy 


ag 0h nak ad 


neh ge 
ἄν ἀφ΄ ὡς 


ND πὸ ἄν. οὐ' Se ee” eae eb ἀν᾽ αν ed ah τὰς 
ere ie ee ῥ τοὶ" αὐταὶ τ 
ΤῊ ΤΣ 
ς ες ΝΣ 


ἀκ er τὰ ee δι ei ‘ τ ᾿ τὰν i εἰ 4" ἀν δ») ? eres τ : x ᾿ Pi. : = Σ ἣ 
ΣΡ La ; aN ὐπὸ, αν. See : ἂν δ [χὰ Dee ὁ «δὰ ‘ 3 ᾿ ΟΝ “=” 
ν bs a} og eg τον τ ™ - i ar 
ofa, ᾿ δ. - - ΜΝ Rea. i κα S24 
EE A eS heme - ps 
4 
wpa R ed 
vi προ νος 


